Skip to main content

Full text of "Proceedings and transactions of the Royal Society of Canada. Délibérations et mémoires de la Société royale du Canada"

See other formats 


i 
1 
' 
Î 


ha ance at vins 


iy 


RS RARES 
DR Gs 


ee 
Roe CARRE : 


| 
4 
z 
€ 
: 
À 
+ 
7 
F 
7 


voor Et aix 


MEMOIRES 


ET 


COMPTES Rie is 


DE LA 


SOCIETE  R@VALE 


DU 


CANADA 


SECONDE SERIE-TOME XII 


SEANCE DE MAI 1906 


EN VENTE CHEZ. 
JAS. HOPE ET FILS, OTTAWA; LA CIE COPP-CLARK (LIMITE), TORONTO 
BERNARD QUARITCH, LONDRES, ANGLETERRE 


1906 


PROCEEDINGS 


TRANSACTIONS 
ROYAL SOCIETY. | 


CANADA 


SECOND SERIES—-VOLUME XII 


MEETING, OF MAY, 1906 


THE NEW YORK 
= —FERARY, PURLIC LIBRARY 
NES — SRE DUPLICATE 

5 SOLD 


FOR SALE BY 
JAMES HOPE & SON, OTTAWA; THE COPP-CLARK CO. (LimitEp), TORONTO 
BERNARD QUARITCH, LONDON, ENGLAND 


1906 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 


Tast'of Ojjieers of the Society for 1906-1907... <.sccs.nssieseencsenese L 
List of Fellows and Corresponding Members ss 2-4 
MBSA Of RES LUPIDES en e dose cena eaves save sss es sons da=ausstc es ne danses 5 
PROCEEDINGS. 
Wistiop tetlows present at May Meeting 20e terre av enas ane if 
WDE AT EIC CR perce eh -ndcsenenn nen ER ER At if 
INET PE LCOLED TELLOWS presented SR LUE se II 
ee RONE TON COUNCNLE saccanan sarnlsceaysdetn ences sa AA RTE EE PANNE 2 at 
Lee Pe RL ULI) Of | 2 ONSUCK LONG: sl Re Le issue II 
ZA ACEQUINES essences BOB A SE DT UM ATARI III 
D PU CHIEE) | MENLOERS EE, ee LENS NE PATES IV 
4. Deceased © Members— Raphael  Bellemare, Archbishop 
O’Brien, Dr. George Stewart and Charles OUR 
CARO ETS) PR EEE RE ose V 
NET RE OS Re esanns ec see IX 
Gop Like proposed Entertm Bulletin SR davcisce de seeceeesacces IX 
TERA HOMETONERENSOCIELY- ER NN RE Re IX 
DL PROUOSCA NV ISUL Of OUT HOUMA civonawacossiern 12 ce'sleoeva ses <as x 
DAML CTNGLIONAL Congress Of GCOLOGISIS.. .ccis cases cavcnsansievcseseee XII 
NODC TES ASSOCIATION: 5c cccsccensscsstoatnese casdcrucseccs labieses XIII 
RME ON UMELCOTOIOMLSTS eds se daene | sacunncsarce= Vire XVIII 
Pe Die Celebration’ Ot St: Malo, étapes seenes XIX 
13. Other Committees— 
Report of the Coast Hydrographic Survey... XXI 
REDON NG HIE! GC COMIC ISUTU CN. neceadu'en cain tivonlesimasar wi XXI 
ro DC STOLIONS ER steceteetce sche acest PR eus s ue te sseceseee XXII 
ERNE I SUP UM State nes sonde nuseos a sasmat tab sate XXII 
Grey UT EMLTONI 1 Or-A DELUCCIE et Un eee totem XXII 
17. International Congress of Americanists at Quebec... XXIII 
DSP N CA EU) SOCUCLICS) Le coc nn rend nesee sense drone sde eee XXIII 
GENERAL BUSINESS. 
POI SAONE == eur disscaesemn eee sececscuaavotsscainmess es csredes XXIV 
Committee for nomination of Officers appointed... XXIV 
Committee appointed to consider the adoption of the Metric 
ISU SEENE wasp sade ae 0er See late eu el ee Aur NA eerste XXIV 
PVOLICE Of motion TE INACTIVEMMEMDETS. NT idee XXIV 
Reports of Associated Societies...............-X&V, XXVI, XXVII, XXIX 
PEN iQ AMOI ESS: cree cans ne es lent testés de de XXV 
Motion expressing regret at the absence of the Founder XXV 
ation re recent death of Prof P. Curie. occssocwecescsdaanosesesese XXVI 
en te es 


II ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Committee named to memorialize the Government for grant for 


OTUGUNGL® RESE UNE 00 nbs ec edesbess eee eoe se ele te Lee XXVI 
TREMORT OF SECTION WL Tee ete ner eee eee XX VII 
New Members elected...….....… +++ PES APR AP LE LE REA EL XXVIII 
Popular Lecture by Mr. C.C. James... RE eee XXIX 
Votes tof DhANRS IR Rs NT tete sense XXIX 
Committee on Metric System reported. ..ccce.esrcecoscocrecsserscaenece XXIX 
SCHON ISECUION LED. ee. deresoen-ecoccec cedric ee Rene XXX 
REDON Of SCCLLON NL Visa caccecneences ses RE SO NN CE one XXXII 
RENAN TOF ISECLION Vers. ocdvassassvesucdasososvact sooner sesengee meaeteatens XXXIV 
Delegates appointed to Congress of Americanists.......+++ seseceee XXXVI 
LECTION OF (GENET AL OPICETS ....0n.cesececew cee voee roscsveus teeter ones XXXVI 


Visit to Dominion Observatory and Experimental Farm.... … XXXVII 


APPENDICES 
A.—PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 
Our Semi-Jubilee and Canada. By Prof. Alexander Johnson... XLI 


B.—Act or INCORPORATION. 
An Act to incorporate the Royal Society of Canada, 46 Victoria, 


Ca) HO Matane -isinses sve crosse entree de eee ee mates LXVII 
C.—BioLoGIcAL STATIONS. 

Marine Biological STATION... 202 recensement. LXXII 

Georgian Bay Biological Station) ....cs..20.cssecsesccenwnesiccecssaes LXXIV 


D.—Survey or TIDES AND CURRENTS. 
Survey of Tides and Currents in Canadian Waters... LXXVII 


E.—REPORTS oF ASSOCIATED SOCIETIES. 
I. The Women's Canadian Historical Society of Ottawa LXXXIII 


Il. The Ottawa Literary and Scientific Society... LXXXIV 
Ill. The Natural History Society of New Brunswick .... LXXXV 
IV. he Ottawa Field Naturalists Club. LXXXVIII 

V. The Nova Scotian Institute of Science, Halifax...... XCIV 
VI. The Natural History Society of Montreal... XCV 
VII. The Entomological Society of Ontario... UCI 

VIII. The Numismatic and Antiquarian’ Society of Montreal CII 
IX. The Literary and Historical Society of Quebec....... CIII 

X. Le Cercle Littéraire et Musical de Montréal.......... CVI 

XI. The Niagara Historical Society... Se CVIII 
XII. The Elgin Historical ani Scientific Institute... CIX 
XIII. The Women’s Historical Society of the County of 

HULU vecseccaasnncceceascncesteaescekesecetes necaneneeeeceteres CX 


TABLE OF CONTENTS Ill 


TRANSACTIONS. 
SECTION L 


LITTÉRATURE FRANÇAISE, HISTOIRE, ARCHEOLOGIE, ETC. 


I. L’'Habitation de Samos (illustré). Par P.-B. CasaRatn....... 3 
II. Nos trois cloches— Poème rustique. Par PAMPHILE LE May. 37 

III. Le Commerce de France avec le Canada avant 1760. Par 
Pe UME RP ASE ES AO INA USERS PRE CESR SE RES 45 


IV. Les successeurs de La Vérendrye—Sous la domination Fran- 
çaise. 1. Joseph Fleurimont de Noyelles ; 2. Jacques 
Repentigny Le Gardeur, Sieur de Saint-Pierre ; 
3. Saint Luc de La Corne, 1743-1755. Par le juge 


ECAC RUD HOMME tetas RIT ee PR 65 

V. Etude sur “ Les Anciers Canadiens.” Par L'ABBÉ CAMILLE 
1870 5 Ale PMPMRNNENT A MIE ECS ER ER ARE eed onsen edict SES SOS 83 

VI. La République d'Indian Stream. Par F. J. AUDET, présenté 
PAM DER Se Re AR eee drone nue een 119 


VII. Inventaire chronologique des livres, brochures, journaux et 
revues publics en langue Anglaise dans la province de 
Québec, depuis l'établissement de l'imprimerie au Can- 


ada jusqu'à nos jours 1764-1906. Par Dr N.-E. 
LD ON IT SA de DAS) DAC RUE E AS A SL ee RSR 3 


Cet inventaire, pour faciliter les références, a été publié en un volume distinct, avec 
sa propre pagination. 


APPENDICE. 


Règlements de la Société Royale du Canada 


nono ss 


SECTION II. 


ENGLISH HISTORY, LITERATURE, ARCH MOLOGY, ETO. 


I. Additions and Corrections to Monographs on the Place- 
nomenclature, Cartography, Historic Sites, Boundaries 
and Settlement-origins of the Province of New Bruns- 


wick (Maps). By Dr. W. F. GANONG .....csccsssesceooes 3 
Il. Richard Maurice Bucke—A Sketch. (Portrait). By JAMES 
H. Coyne. Communicated by W. W. CAMPBELL...... 159 


Ill. Fleury Mesplet, the First Printer at Montreal. By KR. W. 
McLacaLan. Communicated by Dr. S. E, Dawson. 197 
IV. The Downfall of the Huron Nation (Piates and Maps). By 
AND TRANS ARE AE Re 311 


IV 


VAI. 


XIII. 


III. 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


SECTION III. 


MATHEMATICAL, PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL SCIENCES. 


. Abacus of the Altitude and Azimuth of the Pole Star 


(Diagrams). By Dr. E. DEVILLE....................... 


. A Subjective Phenomenon of Vision (Diagrams). By W. 


Rupert TurNBuLL. Communicated by Dr. G. U. 


. On the Conservation of Nitrogen in Manure (Diagram). By 


MHoMAS IMACWARLANES occsc.icsebsvccnccucccer scoiisiciosce dune 


. On the Metallic Currency of the British Empire. By Tuos. 


MEA GRARL ANE iacaes cies cdeveceesviobe ee cvastertoeanestsmesmectes 


. On the Analysis of Wheaten Flour. By Tuomas Mac- 


FARLANE ....ececccccceccccccccscccsccccccees © cece ccccccccccsccees 


. Anchor-Ice formation from the standpoint of the Radiation 


Theory, together with some early Memoirs on Ground- 
Toe. By Dr. HT: BARNES 2 en. 


. The Foundations of Geometry—Presidential Address to On 


tion III (Diagrams). By Pror. ALFRED BaKER...... 
Temperature Records of Nocturnal Radiation (Diagrams). 
By Dp. HT. BARNES 6.0 PR eee 


. Further notes on the difference in T ane between 


McGill College Grounds and Mount Royal, Montreal 
(Diagrams). By Pror.C.H. McLeop and Dr. H. T. 
BARNES 2e oecnscnseencsec eme 0e Ne eee tt aernen 


. Effect of an Electric Current on the Modulus of Elasticity 


(Diagrams). By R. W. Boyze. Communicated by 
Dr. TD. BARNES: erscoce--c once Eee 


. The Effect of Tensile Stress on Electrical Resistance 


(Diagrams). By R. W. Bortz. Communicated by 
De MELT. BARNES. .cc0seoncsssceveeseoheccnaencea Eee 


. A Method of determining the Specific Heat of a Gas at Con- 


stant Pressure (Diagrams). By H.T. Dawes. Com- 


municated by Pror. J. C. McLENNAN..............ssceeee 

Deficient Humidity of the Atmosphere. By T. A. STARKEY 

and OR, EL. T. BARNES.....<.0sesmacessissed dancer ee amereee - 
SECTION IV. 


GEOLOGICAL AND BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES. 


. The Gypsum Deposits of New Brunswick (Maps and Plates). 


By DR: as) Wi BATUB¥ SUN cisccceeeces  C ANR ENRRS 


. The Sleeping Sickness. By Sir JAMES Grant, K.C.M.G.... 
An Early Anadidymus of the Chick (Plate). By Pror. 


RAMSAT WRIGHT eters cru eee Cr et oA ee 


141 


159 


171 


189 


203 


21 


rv. 


XII. 


XELT. 


On: 


xy. 


NL 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 


SECTION IV.—Continued. 


Bibliography of Canadian Zoology for 1905, exclusive of 


Entomology. By J. F. WHITEAVES.............. css. 
. Bibliography of Canadian Botany for 1905. By Dr. A. H. 
NEA GICAL 3 So bnod teasers dondesgsionissilsae robes Poterie: 
. South African Iron Formations. By A. P. CoLEMAN........ 


. Bibliography of Canadian Entomology for 1905. By Rev. 


DS RS BSUS OU OI Siena iat ae Se GUIS A ce a a 


. Features of the Continental Shelf off Nova Scotia (Map). 


iy es POLE SR UE die guns Andes 


. The Distribution of Lactic Acid Bacteria in Curd and 


Cheese of the Cheddar Type, with nine photomicro- 
graphs. By F. C. Harrison. Communicated by 
On AMES: UG MUCH. 2... 2... 2... 


. A Review of the Flora of the Little River Group (with 


plates). Py Dr. Go MATTHEW Ce 


. An Amyzon brevipinne, Cope, from the Amyzon beds of the 


Southern Interior of British Columbia (Plate). By 
GARE Gm MC TAN iy ss oye ee. cet 
The Nodule Organism of the Leguminose—Its Isolation, 
Cultivation, Identification and Commercial Applica- 
tion (Plates). By F. C. Harrison and B. Bartow... 
A Birch Rope; an Account of a remarkable Tumour growing 
upon the White Birch (Plates). By De. D. P. PEn- 
EVANS OA TG Se CO PRES MERE TS NE NRA UE APRER Ses RUE RES EEE ESS 
Some of the Unsolved Problems of Immunity. By Dr. A. G. 
NicHotis. Communicated by Pror. WEesLey MILLS 
Notes on the Mineral Fuel Supply of Canada. By Dr. R. W. 


A Short Chapter in Comparative Physiology and Psychology. 
By Brow TIWENLEX (MIS... 22.0. <6 ..07srcece vngsnseseveee 


XVII. Bibliography of Canadian Geology and Paleontology for 


1905. BY TM AME. sissceccnctsss+ +s ecesenancsannnnsesiivecs 


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 
PROCEEDINGS. 


Portraits of Deceased Fellows—Raphael Beilemare, Archbishop 


O’Brien, Dr. George Stewart and Charles Baillargé............ 
SECTION I. 


Five maps and plate to illustrate Mr. Casgrain’s ‘‘l'Habitation de 
SIMEON Mn miens tentes me ctUersenpraaeriscacestececn’ somecmarievan se 9 et seq. 


83 


99 


151 


157 


239 


257 


267 


291 


301 


VI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


SECTION II. 


Forty-three maps to accompany Dr. W. F. Ganong’s “Additions and 
Corrections to Monographs ”................................… 60 et seq. 
One portrait to accompany Mr. Coyne’s “Richard Maurice Bucke” 159 
Twelve maps and plates to illustrate Mr. James’s “ Downfall of the 
Huron Nation”... vossocses 313 et seq. 


SECTION III. 


Two litho plates and 7 diagrams to accompany Dr. Deville’s 
GNADACUG! ne ele as sactuscveesuee gnc coins wosesowantisesiosinsisresicrisasie ss 12 
Six diagrams to illustrate Mr. Turnbull’s ‘“ Phenomenon of 
Vision ” ........ Heise(selesieslowss bale eeeltswenanman sce cltresesecmslesee ne 13 et seq. 
One diagram for Mr. Macfarlane’s “Conservation of Nitrogen”...... 39 
Fifteen diagrams for Prof. Baker’s “ Presidential Address to Sec- 
| tion TIL”’......cccccccccsscccnrsceseersccsccsscccccscsscccsesees cnce . 114 et seq. 
Sixteen diagrams to accompany Dr. Barnes’ “Nocturnal Radia- 
MOT eee etonecs orne css se cocotbo seebevsetinresssmencessn essere 130 et seq. 
Twenty-eight diagrams to illustrate Prof. McLeod and Dr. Barnes’ 
paper “ Difference in Temperature ”........................ . 148 et seq. 
Five diagrams to accompany Mr. R. W. Boyle’s “ Modulus of 
I ASUICIOY | fea ncsercsccnacoseceecacmaersnserstecntct A6 eo rot 161 et seq. 
Ten diagrams for Mr. Boyle’s “ Electrical Resistance ”.......... 173 et seq. 
Seven diagrams to illustrate Mr. Dawes’s “Specific Heat of a Gas”. 198 


SECTION IV 


Five plates and two lithographed maps to illustrate Dr. Bailey’s 


“Gypsum. Deposits ’......s0..0.ecs-sccecsersseatdenseeceeeee teen 14 
One large plate to accompany Dr. Ramsay Wright’s ‘“Anadidymus 

Of CHE CHIC Vanna. en scene meer eee siete eee 26 
One map for Mr. Poole’s “ Continental Shelf ”.....-.......seccssssscesee 82 
Nine photo-micrographs to illustrate Mr. F. C. Harrison’s “Lactic 

Acid MBACKOBIA) sc. cees2e cisescaneonscistnemaseeeoadeecenenacerenenee 89 et. seq. 
Eight full page plates to accompany Dr. Matthew’s “ Flora of the 

Little River Group Jo-versinesesses cc 135 et seq. 
One heliotype plate to accompany Mr. Lambe’s ‘“ Amyzon brevi- 

DIRE Fee iavemcnavowe sc aseecesssnce se ecesec cc Le mec EE eee 156 
Forty-three photo-micrographs for Messrs. Harrison and Barlow’s 

NOIR OR PANNE cccccscssner ssnco*+0-nescuescsonsheseunens 187 et seq. 


Nine diagrams and plates to illustrate Dr. Penhallow’s “ A Birch 
RODO MR 0 ee-uerceeses comen mecs ademsnelelaldes oes oe aeemeheren 241 et seq. 


PAE ROVAL SOCIETY OF CANAD 


FOUNDER: HIS GRACE THE DUKE OF ARGYLL, K.T., &c., 


(WHEN GOVERNOR-GENERAL OF CANADA IN 1582.) 


OFFICERS FOR 1906-1907. 
HONORARY PRESIDENT: 


HIS EXCELLENCY THE RIGHT HON. EARL GREY, 
G.C.M.G., &c. 


PRESIDENT—DR. WM. SAUNDERS, C.M.G. 
Vice-PRESIDENT—DR. 8. E. DAWSON, C.M.G. 


HONORARY SECRETARY, .. .. .. .. DR. JAMES FLETCHER 
HONORARY TREASURER, .. .. .. .. L. M. LAMBE 


OFFICERS OF SECTIONS: 
SEC. I— French Literature, History, and Allied Subjects. 


PRÉSIDENT, 0.5) 0 I VABBH CAMILLE ROY 
VICE-PRESIDENT, ae au Ag HON. THOMAS CHAPAIS 
SECRETARY, .. be a + ERROL BOUCHETTE 


SEC. II.— English Literature, History, and Allied Subjects. 


PRESIDENT, Ae ae + REV. DR. BURWASH 
VICE-PRESIDENT, od oe at DR. A. G. DOUGHTY, C.M.G. 
SECRETARY, .. de af Au DR. W. WILFRED CAMPBELL 


SEC. III.—Mathematical, Physical, and Chemical Sciences. 


PRESIDENT, Bc ae SF ae PROF, RUTHERFORD 
VICE-PRESIDENT, a if ae PROF. W. LASH MILLER 
SECRETARY, .. ne ne br DR: E. DEVILLE 


SEC. IV.—Geological and Biological Sciences. 


PRESIDENT, Au Sa A. Ls, PROF. E. E. PRINCE 
VICE-PRESIDENT, ae oe ae DR. F. D. ADAMS 
SECRETARY, .. su oe Ne LAWRENCE LAMBE 
ADDITIONAL MEMBERS OF COUNCIL :1 
SIR S. FLEMING, K.C.M.G. T. C. KEEFER, C.M.G. 
PRESIDENT LOUDON SIR JAMES GRANT, K.C.M.G. 
DR. DECELLES LT.-COL. G. T. DENISON 
DR. ALEX. JOHNSON BENJAMIN SULTE 


1The Council for 1906-1907 comprises the President and Vice-President of the 
Society, the Presidents, Vice-Presidents and Secretaries of Sections, the Honorary 
Secretary and the Honorary Treasurer, besides ex-Presidents of the Society during 
three years from the date of their retirement, and not more than four members 
of the Society who have formerly served on the Council, elected by the Council. 


fie ROVAL SOGIETY OF \CAN AID 


LIST OF MEMBERS, 1906-1907. 


I.—LITTERATURE FRANCAISE, HISTOIRE, ARCHEOLOGIE, ETC. 


BEAUCHEMIN, NÉRÉE, M.D., Yamachiche, P.Q. 

BÉGIN, Mar L.-N., Archevéque de Québec, Québec. 

BOUCHETTE, ERROL, Oftawa. 

BrucHksi, Mer P.-N., Archevéque de Montréal, Montréal. 

CHAPAIS, L'HON. THOMAS, docteur és lettres, chevalier de la légion d’honneur 
de France, membre du conseil législatif, Québec. 

CHARLAND, PÈRE PAUL-V., docteur és lettres, Fall River, Mass., E.U. 

Davin, Hon. L.-0., Montréal. 

DECAZES, PAUL, docteur és lettres, Québec. 

DECELLES, A.-D., docteur èslettres, LL.D., Ottawa. 

DIoNKNE, N.-E., docteur és lettres, Québec. 

GAGNON, ERNEST, docteur ès lettres, Québec. 

GERIN, LEON, Ottawa. 

GOSSELIN, L'ABBÉ AUGUSTE, docteur és lettres, St-Charles de Bellechasse, P.Q. 

LEGENDRE, NAPOLEON, docteur és lettres, Québec. 

LEMAY, PAMPHILE, docteur ès lettres, Québec. 

LEMOIXE, Sir J.-M., Québec (ancien président). 

PAQUET, Monsianor L.-A., Québec. 

POIRIER, Hon. PASCAL, officier de la légion d'honneur de France, Shediac,N.B. 

Potsson, ADOLPHE, docteur ès lettres, Arthabaskaville, P.Q. 

PRUD'HOMME, JUGE L.-A., St. Boniface, Man. 

ROUTHIER, JUGE A.-B., docteur en droit et ès lettres, Québec. 

Roy, L'ABBÉ CAMILLE, docteur ès lettres, licencié ès lettres de l’université de 
Paris, Québec. 

Roy, JosEPH-EDMoND, docteur ès lettres, Lévis, P.Q. 

SULTE, BENJAMIN, Ottawa (ancien président). 


IT. —ENGLISH LITERATURE, HISTORY, ARCHÆOLOG Y, ETC. 


BRYCE, REV. GEORGE, M.A., LL.D., Winnipeg, Man. 

BurwASH, REV. NATHANIEL, S.T.D., LL.D., Chancellor of Victoria University» 
Toronto. 

CAMPBELL, W. WILFRED, LL.D., Privy Council Office, Ottawa. 

CLARK, REV. W., D.C.L., LL.D., Trinity University, Zoronto (ex-president). 

CRUIKSHANK, Lr.-Cou. E. A., Niagara, Ont. 

Coyne, J. H., M.A., St. Thomas, Ont. 

Dawson, S. E., C.M.G., Lit.D., Offawa. 

DENISON, Lt.-Co.. G. T., B.C.L., Toronto (ex-president). 

DouGxry, ARTHUR G., C.M.G., Lit.D., Dominion Archivist, Ottawa. 

DRUMMoOND, W. H., M.D., Montreal. 

GORDON, REV. CHARLES W., LL.D., Winnipeg. 

HANNAY, JAMES, LL.D., St. John, N.B. 

HowLrey, Most Rev. ARcHBISHOP M. F., D.D., St. John’s, Nfld. 

JAMES, C. C., Deputy Minister of Agriculture, Toronto. 

LESvEvR, W. D., LL.D., Ottawa. 

LIGHTHALL, WILLIAM Douw, M.A., B.C.L., Montreal. 

LONGLEY, Hon. Mr. Justice., LL.D., Halifax N.S. 

Morean, HENRY J., LL.D., Ottawa. 

MURRAY, GEORGE, B.A., Montreal. 


LIST OF MEMBERS 3 


MURRAY, Rev. J. CLARK, LL.D., Montreal. 

PARKIN, G. R., C.M.G., LL.D., Toronto. 

RAYMOND, REV. W. O., LL.D., St. John, N.B. 

READE, JOHN, F.R.S.L., LL.D., Montreal. 

Ross, Gro. W., LL.D., Toronto. 

Scott, D. CAMPBELL, Department of Indian Affairs, Ottawa. 
Scott, REV. FREDERICK GEORGE. Quebec. 

SHORTT, ADAM, M.A., Kingston, Ont. 

Watson, J., M.A., LL.D., Queen’s University, Kingston. 
WILLISON, JOHN S., Toronto. 

WITHROW, REV. W. H., D.D., Toronto. 

Woop, WILLIAM, Quebec. 


IlIl.—_MATHEMATICAL, PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL SCIENCES. 


BAKER, ALFRED, M.A., University of Toronto, Toronto. 

BARXNES, H. T., D.Se., McGill University, Montreal. 

Bovey, H. T., M.A. (Cantab.), LL.D., D.C.L., M. Inst. C.E., F.R.S., McGill 
University, Montreal. 

Cox, JOHN, M.A. (Cantab.), McGill University, Montreal. 

Dawson, W. BELL, D.Sc., Ma. E., Assoc. M. Inst. C.E., Ottawa. 

DEVILLE, E., LL.D., Surveyor-General, Ottawa. 

Doruis, N. F., M.A., F.R.S.E., Queen’s University, Kingston. 

Euis, W. H., M.D., Toronto University, Toronto. 

FLEMING, SIR SANDFORD, K.C.M.G., LL.D., C.E., Ottawa (ex-president). 

GIRDWOOD, G. P., M.D., McGill University, Montreal. 

GLASHAN, J. C., LL.D., Inspector of Public Schools for City of Ottawa, Ottawa. 

Goopwin, W. L., D.Sc., Queen’s University, Kingston. 

HAMEL, Monsienor, M.A., Laval University, Quebec (ex-president). 

HARRINGTON, B. J., B.A., Ph.D., McGill University, Montreal. 

HOFFMANN, G. C., F. Inst. Chem., LL.D., Geological Survey, Ottawa. 

JOHNSON, A., LL.D., Vice-Principal Emeritus of McGill University, Montreal 
(ex-president). 

KEEFER, T. C., C.M.G., LL.D., C.E., Ottawa (ex-president). = 

Loupox, J. T., M.A., LL.D., President of University of Toronto, Toronto (ex- 
president). 

MACFARLANE, T., M.E., Chief Analyst, Ottawa. 

MoGILL, A., Assistant Analyst, Ottawa. 

McLENNAN, J. C., Ph.D., Toronto University, Toronto. 

MILLER, W. LASH, Ph.D., University of Toronto, Toronto. 

McLeop, C. H., M.E., McGill University, Montreal. 

OwENs, R. B., M.Sc., McGill University, Montreal. 

RUTHERFORD, E., B.A. (Cantab), A.M., McGill University, Montreal. 

RuUTTAN, R. F., M.D., C.M., McGill University, Montreal. 

SHUTT, F. T., M.A., F.1.C., F.C.S., Chemist, Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa. 

STUPART, R. F., Superintendent, Meteorological Service, Toronto. 

WALKER, J. WALLACE, M.A., Ph.D., McGill University, Montreal. 


IV.—GEOLOGICAL AND BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES. 


ADAMI, J. G., M.A., M.D. (Cantab. and McGill), LL.D., F.R.S.E., McGill Uni- 
versity, Montreal. 

ADAMS, FRANK D., Ph.D., D.Sc., F.G.S., McGill University, Montreal. 

AMI, Henry M., M.A., D.Sc., F.G.S., Geological Survey, Ottawa. 

BAILEY, L. W., M.A., Ph.D., University of New Brunswick, Fredericton. 

Bartow, A. E., M.A., D.Sc., Geological Survey, Ottawa. 

BELL, ROBERT, B.Ap.Sc., M.D., LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S., Geological Survey, Ottawa. 

BETHUNE, REv. C. J. S., M.A., D.C.L., Guelph, Ont. 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Borgsss, T. J. W., M.D., Montreal. 

CoLEMAN, A. P., M.A., Ph.D., University of Toronto, Toronto. 

Ets, R. W., LL.D., F.G.S.A., Geological Survey, Ottawa. 

FLETCHER, JAMES, LL.D., F.L.S., Dominion Entomologist, Ottawa. 

Fow Ler, JAMES, M.A., Queen's University, Kingston. 

GILPIN, EDWIN, M.A., F.G.S., Inspector of Mines, Halifax. 

GRANT, SIR J. A., K.C.M.G., M.D., F.G.S., Ottawa (ex-president). 

Hay, G. U., M.A., Ph.D., St. John, N.B. 

HARRINGTON, W. HAGUE, P. O. Department, Ottawa. 

LAFLAMME, ABBEJ. C.K., D.D., M.A.,chevalier de la légion d'honneur de France, 
Laval University, Quebec (ex-president). 

LAMBE, LAWRENCE M., F.G.S., Geological Survey, Ottawa. 

MacaALLUM, A. B., Ph.D., University of Toronto, Toronto. 

MaAcoux, J., M.A., F.L.S., Geological Survey, Ottawa. 

MacKay, A. H., LL.D., B.Sc., Superintendent of Education for Nova Scotia, 
Halifax. 

MATTHEW, G. F., M.A., D.Sc., St. John, N.B, 

Mitts, T. WESLEY, M.A., M.D., McGill University, Montreal. 

PENHALLOW, D. P., B.Sc., M.Sc., D.Sc., McGill University, Montreal. 

Poo eg, H. S., M.A., C.E., F.G.S., Assoc. Roy. Soc. of Mines, Halifax, Nova Scotia 

PRINCE, E. E., B.A., F.L.S., Dominion Commissioner of Fisheries, Ottawa. 

SAUNDERS, W., C.M.G., LL.D., F.L.S., Director Dominion Experimental Farms, 
Ottawa. 

TAYLOR, Rev. G. W., Nanaimo, B.C. 

WHITEAVES, J. F., LL.D., F.G.S., Geological Survey, Ottawa. 

WRIGHT, R. Ramsay, M.A., B.Sc., University of Toronto, Toronto. 


CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. 


His GRACE THE DUKE OF ARGYLL, K.T., G.C.M.G., &c. 


BERTHELOT, MARCELIN, Sénateur, Secrétaire Perpétuel de l’Académie des 
Sciences, Professeur au Collége de France, Paris, France. 

Bonney, T. G., D.Se., LL.D., F.R.S., London, England. 

BRYCE, Rr. Hon. JAMES, M.P., D.C.L., London, England. 

CLARETIE, JULES, de l’Académie française, Paris, France. 

GANONG, Dr. W. F., Northampton, Mass. 

HECTOR, SIR JAMES, K.C.M.G., F.R.S., Wellington, New Zealand. 

H1GGINXSON, THOMAS WENTWORTH, LL.D. (Harvard), Cambridge, Mass. 

METZLER, W. H., Ph.D., F.R.S. Edin., Mathematical Professor, Syracuse 
University, Syracuse, N. ¥. 

OsBoRN, Dr. HENRY FAIRFIELD, New York, N.Y. 

PARKER, SIR GILBERT, Kt., M.P., D.C.L., London, England. 

SCUDDER, Dr. S. H., Cambridge, Mass., U.S.A. 


RETIRED MEMBERS. 


Bourassa, NAPOLEON, St. Hyacinthe, P.Q. 

CALLENDAR, Hueu L., M.A. (Cantab.), F.R.S., London, Eng. 

CHERRIMAN, J. B., M.A., Ryde, Isle of Wight. 

FABRE, HECTOR, C.M.G., officier de la légion d’honneur, Paris, France. 

FRECHETTE, Louis, C.M.G., docteur en droit, docteur és lettres, chevalier de 
la légion d’honneur de France, Montréal (ancien président). 

HAANEL, E., Ph.D., Superintendent of Mines, Ottawa. 

Kirpy, W., Niagara, Ont. 

MACGREGOR, J. G., M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S., F.R.S.E., Edinburgh, Scotland. 

Marr, CHARLES, Prince Albert, N. W.T. 

OSLER, W., M.D., Oxford, Eng. 

ROoBERTS, C. G. D., M.A., New York. 


LIST OF PRESIDENTS 3 


LIST OF PRESIDENTS. 


1882-83 . : 5 : ‘ A ‘ - . SIR J. W. Dawson, Kt. 

1883-84 = = : 5 = - : A L’HONORABLE P. J. O. CHAUVEAU. 

1884-85 . : - : = : A : . Dr. T. STERRY HUNT. 

1885-86 : : À : E SIR DANIEL WILSON, Kt. 

1886-87 . 5 4 : A ; = : . MONSIGNOR HAMEL. 

1887-88 = = : : 4 - 4 - Dr. G. LAWSON. 

1888-89 . : : 2 : x : : . SIR SANDFORD FLEMING, K.C.M.G. 

1889-90 - - = = = 4 ; 5 L’ABBE CASGRAIN. 

1890-91 . = - 4 A x : . VERY REV. PRINCIPAL GRANT. 

1891-92 . = > : ; 5 : - L’ABBE LAFLAMME. 

1892-93 . : : : 5 3 : : . Sm J. G. BOURINOT, K.C.M.G. 

1893-94 : à : : é i ‘ : Dr. G. M. Dawson, C.M.G. 

1894-95 . A A : = = 3 : . SIR J. MACPHERSON LEMOINE, Kt. 

1895-96 LUS SMS PINCE : Fe De. A. R. C. SELWYN, C.M.G. 

1896-97 . s - : ~ : : : . Most REV. ARCHBISHOP O’BRIEN 

1897-98 ‘ = A = 2 : : : L’HONORABLE F. G. MARCHAND. 

1898-99 . : : ù ; : 2 ‘ . T. C. Krerer, C.M.G. 

1899-1900 - = = = - - - - - REV. PRoFEssoR CLARK, D.C.L. 

1900-1901 - - - - - = - - L. FRECHETTE, C.M.G., LL.D. 

1901-1902 - - - - - - - - - PRESIDENT LOUDON, LL.D. 

1902-1903 . - - - - - - - SIR JAMES A. GRANT, K.C.M.G. 
M.D., F.G.S. 

1903-1904 - - - - - - - - - Lr.-Cor. G. T. DENISON, B.C.L. 

1904-1905 - - - - = - - - BENJAMIN SULTE. 

1905-1906 - - - - - - = - - DR. ALEx. JOHNSON. 


1906-1907 - - - - - - - - Dr. Wa. SAUNDERS, C.M.G. 


ry Sale 
retinal 


RAPHAEL BELLEMARE, Lit.D. 


JANET, 
le 


ARCHBISHOP O’BRIEN. 


. bah ny 


ae 


‘hea 


os À" 
ues 


Se ee 


à 


GEORGE STEWART, LL.D. 


Pa. 


; LU 
MES 


Va 
Va 


FRA 


= 
has 


C. BAILLARGE, C.E. 


MERCAY SE LIBRARY, 
NEV" YORK, 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 


TWENTY-FIFTH GENERAL MEETING 


SESSION I. (Tuesday, May 22.) 


The Royal Society of Canada held its twenty-fifth general meeting 
in the Normal School Building, Elgin Street, Ottawa. 

The President, Dr. Alex. Johnson, took the chair at 10 o’clock 
a.m., and called the meeting to order. The roll was then called by 
the Secretary. 

PRESENT: 


President, Dr. Alex. Johnson. 
Vice-President, Dr. Wm. Saunders. 
Honorary Secretary, Dr. 8. E. Dawson. 
Honorary Treasurer, Dr. Jas. Fletcher. 


The following members, in their sections, were present at the roll- 
call, or arrived later during the session :— 

SECTION J.—Most Rev. Archbishop Bruchési, Errol Bouchette, 
Hon. L. O. David, Dr. DeCelles, Léon Gérin, l'Abbé Gosselin, Hon. 
iP Poirier, Dr: J, Ey Roy, B. Sulte. 

SECTION IJ.— W. W. Campbell, Dr. S. E. Dawson, Lt.-Col. Deni- 
son, Dr. Doughty, C. C. James, W. D. Lighthall, Dr. Morgan, Geo. 
Murray, Dr. J. Clark Murray, John Reade, John Willison. 

SECTION III.—Prof. Baker, Prof. Barnes, Prof. Cox, Dr. W. Bell 
Dawson, Dr. Deville, Dr. Ellis, Sir Sandford Fleming, Dr. Girdwood, 
Dr. Glashan, Dr. Hoffmann, Dr. Johnson, Dr. Keefer, Thos. Macfarlane, 
Dr. Lash Miller, Prof. McLeod, Prof. Owens, Dr. Rutherford, Frank 
Shutt. 

SECTION IV.— Dr. Adams, Dr, Ami, Dr. Bailey, Dr. Barlow, Rev. 
Dr. Bethune, Dr. Burgess, Dr. Ells, Dr. Fletcher, Sir James Grant, 
Dr. Hay, W. H. Harrington, L. M. Lambe, Dr. Macallum, Prof. Macoun, 
Dr. G. Matthew,:Dr. Wesley Mills, Prof. Penhallow, Dr. Poole, Prof. 
Prince, Dr. Saunders, Rev. G. W. Taylor, Dr. Whiteaves, Prof. Ram- 
say Wright. 


Letters of excuse regretting unavoidable absence were received from, 
SECTION I.— Most Rev. Archbishop Bégin, Sir J. M. LeMoine, 
Mgr. Paquet, l'Abbé Roy. 


II ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


SECTION IJ.— Rev. Dr. Bryce, Rev. Dr. Burwash, Rev. Dr. Clark, 
Rev. C. W. Gordon, Hon. Judge Longley, Dr. LeSueur, Dr. Parkin, 
Hon. Dr, Ross, D. C. Scott. 

SECTION IJI.—Dr. Bovey, Prof. Dupuis, Dr. Goodwin, Dr. Har- 
rington, President Loudon, Dr. McLennan, R. F. Stupart. 

SECTION IV.—Dr. Bell, Prof. Fowler, E. Gilpin, Abbé Laflamme, 
Dr. A. H. MacKay, Prof. Coleman. 


The Most Rev. Archbishop Bruchési and Mr. Errol Bouchette being 
newly elected Fellows, were presented to the President and took their seats. 


The Honorary Secretary then read the following 


REPORT OF COUNCIL, 1906. 


The Council of the Royal Society of Canada have the honour to 
present their annual report, as follows :— 


1.—PRINTING OF TRANSACTIONS. 


The “ Proceedings and Transactions ” for 1905 have been published, 
and make a volume of 866 pages, containing 14 maps and illustrations. 
Thirty-one papers have been printed, and 5,050 copies of separates 
have been distributed to Fellows of the Society. The volume is smaller 
than usual, for several important papers were too late to be included. 
The volume for this year promises to be unusually large. An impor- 
tant paper by Dr, Ganong, to close up his series of monographs upon 
the history and geography of New Brunswick, intended for this volume, 
could not be got ready in time, and will appear in the next. The 
thoroughness with which Dr. Ganong has elucidated the history of his 
native province should instigate similar labours on behalf of the other 
provinces. 

The volume for this session will be the twelfth of the second or 
octavo series, and will mark an epoch in the history of the Society. 
Whether the second series be continued or a new and third series be 
commenced is a subject for consideration at next session. Our late 
president, Mr. Sulte, is preparing a fitting close in the shape of a 
complete index, by name and subject, of the whole twenty-four volumes 
from the first. It is a work of very great labour and, ht is scarcely 
necessary to add, of equally great utility. The extent and value of 
the information locked up in these two series cannot be properly appre- 
ciated until it is made readily accessible by such an index. The index 
will be more useful if published as a separate volume — the twenty- 
fifth of the whole series. Dr. Dionne will also crown his labours by 
a bibliography of works in the English language published in Canada 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 III 


from the Conquest to the present time. His bibliography of French 
works has been much inquired for, and librarians of the great libraries 
have recognized its merits and utility. 


2.—ACCOUNTS. 


The accounts have been audited by experts in the usual manner, 
and the vouchers have been transferred to the Treasurer. The follow- 
ing is a statement: 


To Balance brought forward as per page V of Proceedings 


DON AO SN AO Il ede av RE At hte re ES $1,574 49 
1905. Cr. 
June 1.—E. Helliard—services at last meeting....$ 8 00 
“  —Oliver Macdonald—services at last meeting 10 00 
“ 6.—John P. Dunne—use of stereopticon.... 10 00 
« — “Evening Journal ”—advertising ...... 10 50 
€ —M. G. Bristow—typewriting............ 3 50 
%  —Photographing illustrations ............ 6 00 
ON Free Press ”—advertising ..:.:.:...... 8 50 
=}; Crown Dathographing Co: 4e 0 75 
OR SGD CSS EN ER RE LA ga RER EC 0 30 
June 13. Gazette Printing Colit.s.. Lee 133 72 
June OE FOOTER ee, 2) Hale ake sla e's Ut 40 00 
“© —Clerical services—distribution .......... 20 00 
« — “<The Citizen”—advertising ........... 10 50 
ARR Je Taylor prinbine #08 26 50 
« — Mortimer & Co.—binding and despatching 629 79 
June 27.—Printing Transactions—on account..... 500 00 
OS —USUTANIGE) Sparen: «lattes cial os) s/s ae. Lo 17 50 
July 5.—Freight on American distribution....... 16 96 
July 13.—Gazette Printing Co. ................. 121 97 
$1,574 49 


Statement July 1, 1905, to May 22, 1906. 


1905. Dr. 


Sept. 11—To amount on account of Government Grant... . $3,000 00 
1906. 
May 11.—To amount on account of Government Grant.... 2,000 00 


$5,000 00 


IV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Brought forward........ $5,000 00 
1905. Or 
Sept. 26.—Grip Company—illustrations .......... $ 51 25 
“ —Heliotype Co.—illustrations ........... 112 00 
FN A TROEICANUEXDIESS EN UMR EAN elo uate 2 30 
yee lneressine oR. D Kane). cia Lee 3 T5 
—Typewriting (M. G. Bristow).......... 3 T5 
A, PE VON tes CAN 61 APE PERRET 34 25 
‘  —Expenses on European distribution. ..... 128 26 
Seem RURTOS BUN RAL S EE ao eee ET 34 85 
Oct }ye——Copying (Bristow). ..... 50.325 .20 eee 4 05 
Dec. 18.—Printing Transactions, on account...... 1,000 00 
1906. 
Jan. 8.—Crown Lithographing Co.............. 125 
“ —Freight and Insurance to London...... a ach 
fp express charges: 2... PEU nee eae 6 15 
Mch. 21.—Printing Transactions, on account...... 1,000 00 
**  —Proofreading — French................ 40 00 
“ —Mortimer & Co.—Binding............. 144 15 
CP SS EIXpress 020000 NET RER 9 88 
“« —Orme & Co.—use of piano............. 3 00 
“  —John Robertson—storage .............. 48 00 
«  —J. K. O’Connell—Copying diagrams.... 10 00 
Apri) }:5,—_ Insurance, LAON aerate ates 78 75 
May 9— Grip Engraving Co nee PR eee 104 85 
€ —M. G. Bristow—typewriting............ 2 80 
€ —Crown Lithographing Co. ........ none 6 25 
fr. —Telegraph ICONE ioe areata beer ciets 0 95 
May 10.—American Express Co. ..........:....-. 2% 92 


2,854 52 


Balance on hand... 82,145 48 


3.— INACTIVE MEMBERS. | 

The Council would call attention to the necessity of keeping the 
activity of its membership up to the standard set by its founders. 
The objects of the Society are plainly set forth in the statute of organ- 
ization (46 Vic., cap. 46), as well as in the first of its Regulations. 
it is a society for work in literature and science and its founders, 
by regular attendance and by contributions to the Transactions mani- 
fested a living interest in the promotion of science and letters in the 
Dominion of which they were citizens. The membership is limited, 
and no provision has been made in the statute of organization for 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 Vi 


merely honorary members. Sixteen corresponding members, four for 
each section are provided for. The Transactions, as set forth in the 
statute, are intended for original papers and memoirs of merit. They 
are a ‘medium for the publication of papers of permanent value such 
as find no place in popular periodical literature. The volumes are 
sent to every important library throughout the world, and from the 
letters received by the Secretary it is evident that they are highly 
esteemed. Applications are incessant for separates of special articles, 
and if a sheet happens to be missing in any volume, the Secretary 
hears of it at once, whether from Chicago or Sydney, Australia. One 
entire paper has been taken as a chapter for an historical work of impor- 
tance now being published in the United States. The name of the 
author is given and though the Society is not mentioned and permis- 
sion was not asked, this shows that the papers in the Transactions are 
not neglected, but referred to and used in foreign countries. To build 
up a memorial to science and letters in this country of our own is a 
patriotic duty which has been set for us to do, and only by unselfish 
labour can it be done. The fact that there is a statute of the Dom- 
inion to organize this Society is probably unknown to the later Fellows 
and the chapter is reprinted in this year’s Transactions. (Vide Appen- 
dix Bb) 
4.—DECEASED MEMBERS. 


The ranks of the Society were unbroken when the accustomed 
time for sending out nominations arrived, and it seemed as if the 
whole year would pass without a break, but within a very short period 
four of our members were called away, one in Section I., two in Sec- 
tion II., and one in Section ITI. 


Raphael Bellemare was born at Yamachiche, February 22nd, 1821. 
He was educated at Nicolet College, and was professor of belles- 
lettres in that institution from 1847 to 1855, during which period 
he also was a regular contributor to Za Minerve of Montreal. Soon 
after he was called to the bar, and later was appointed revenue inspec- 
tor, a position which he held until July, 1893, when he retired. He 
was one of the founders and one of the most devoted members of 
La Société Historique de Montréal and wrote a number of historical 
studies upon the early days of Canada, and especially a book contain- 
ing the annals of Yamachiche. He was for forty years president of 
the St. Vincent de Paul Society of Montreal. He was also a director 
of the Montreal City and District Savings Bank, of which he was for 
several years vice-president. He was also a director of the General 


VI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Colonization ard Repatriation Society of the province of Quebec. He 
was very methodical, sympathetic and hard working and his useful 
labours were continued until the last day of his life. 


.The death of Archbishop O’Brien (March 9th, 1906) deprived our 
Society of one of its most effective members. The position of pres- 
ident, which he filled in 1896-7, testifies to the respect in which he 
was held by the members and to the value which was placed on his 
services. 

He was born on May 4th, 1843, in Prince Edward Island, and his 
early education was obtained in the schools of the island. Later, he 
was trained for two years at St. Dunstan’s College at Charlottetown. 
Attracting the attention of Bishop McIntyre, he was sent to Rome to 
fill a vacant place in the College of the Propaganda, in 1864, at the 
age of twenty. Seven years were spent in the training afforded by 
that unique institution, where are to be found men of all the tongues 
of the world. In 1871 he graduated, and was ordained priest, having 
carried off the gold medal of the college for general proficiency. From 
1871 to 1873 he filled the post of professor and prefect of studies at 
St. Dunstan’s College. In 1873 he was appointed principal priest at 
the Cathedral of Charlottetown. His health here failed; and for the 
eight succeeding years he was parish priest at Indian River, bringing 
to the daily duties of a simple parish priest the scholarship and experi- 
ence received at Rome. In 1880 he was invited by the late Archbishop 
Hannan, of Halifax, to accompany him to Rome. The Archbishop 
was then in feeble health and probably had fixed on Dr. O’Brien as 
his probable successor. He died in 1882, and Dr. O’Brien was duly 
appointed to succeed him by a Bull dated December 2nd, 1882. 

The twenty-four years of his episcopate were full of practical activ- 
ities, in which he was generously supported by his people. Charitable 
institutions, religious orders and schools all felt his creative and prudent 
hand. His pastoral letters were remarkable for scholarly composition 
and wise exhortation. He was wide-minded in his benevolent activ- 
ities, and the principal public institutions in Halifax were constantly 
objects of his care. 

Towards public affairs he had a strong patriotic inclination. 
Disposed by birth and education to sympathize strongly but reasonably 
with the aspirations of the Irish people, he was even more strongly 
ar advocate of Imperial unity and British interests at home and abroad. 
In the political affairs of the Dominion he prudently took little part, 
save on occasions when educational questions imperatively called on 
him, as he believed, to take action. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 VII 


His talents for the task of administration, always troublesome and 
trying, never for a moment dulled his interest in literature. He was 
essentially a student, and in many directions. Theology, Geography, 
History, Philosophy and Belles-lettres, each+had charms for him and 
he was proficient in all. His publications are as follows: “ Phil- 
osophy of the Bible Vindicated,” 1876; ‘ Mater Admirabilis,” 1882; 
“ After Weary Years,” a tale, 1887; “Saint Agnes, Virgin and 
Martyr,” 1887; “ Aminta,” a poetic drama, 1890; “ Memoir of Bishop 
Burke,” 1894. His contributions to the Royal Society are: “The 
Supernatural in Nature,’ 1894; “ Presidential Address,’ 1897; 
“€ Cabots Landfall and Chart,’ 1899. 

A more unassuming man never filled so high a position; a more 
modest man has seldom possessed so many talents and so much learn- 
ing; and a man so welcome in every society had seldom lived a lite 
so retired. Yet such is the occasional reward of unobtrusiveness, that 
the Archbishop was more popular than most public men, and better 
known among men of letters than many whose lives are devoted to 
publicity. His brethren of the Royal Society hasten, on the occasion 
of its first meeting since his death, to record their sorrow for his 
taking away, while at the same time they give expression to their 
admiration for the man of letters with whom they were all proud to 
be associated. 


The death of Dr. George Stewart, at a comparatively early age, 
was deeply regretted, not only by the Society but by hundreds of 
friends outside of it. Dr. Stewart was a born littératewr, and the 
enthusiasm that inspired his youthful pen lasted till he ceased to 
write. One of his latest contributions to the periodical press was an 
article on Popular Songs of Old Canada, in The Monthly Review, of 
London, England. The earliest noteworthy writing with which his 
name is associated, was a tribute to the memory of the Hon. Thomas 
D’Arcy McGee in his own magazine, “ Stewart’s Quarterly.” During the 
long interval between the publication of these two studies, Dr. Stewart 
was indefatigably at work, the products of his industry appearing in 
Canadian, American and British periodicals. A work that made him 
widely known, his history of the Great Fire of St. John, N.B. (1877), 
was also the occasion of his moving from that city to Toronto, where 
he became editor of Belford’s Magazine. While taking charge of the 
Quebec Chronicle, of which for nearly twenty years he was editor-in- 
chief, he wrote his contributions to the “ Canadian Portrait Gallery,” 
to the “Encyclopedia Britannica,” to “ Appleton’s Cyclopedia,” to 
“Winsor’s Narrative and Critical History of America,” and to other 
well known works of reference. Before leaving Toronto he had written 


VIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


his excellent account of the administration of the Earl (afterwards 
Marquis) of Dufferin. During his travels in Europe, Dr. Stewart 
had the advantage of introductions from Lord Dufferin to some of 
his friends, including Tennyson, the late Lord Lytton and other cele- 
brities. He wrote in The Cosmopolitan, after the great poet’s death, 
a sympathetic tribute to his genius and character. His reminiscences 
of Lord Lytton, the first Earl and Governor-General of India, were 
published in the Canadian Magazine. Dr. Stewart’s purely literary 
papers — including his sketches of Carlyle, Longfellow, Holmes and 
Thoreau — were mostly delivered as lectures before the Literary and 
Historical Society of Quebec, of which he was for many years president. 
Others were published in the British reviews, Emerson the Thinker 
appearing in the Scottish Review in 1888. Altogether three volumes 
of essays were given to the public under his name—two of these 
(Essays from Reviews) coming out successively in 1892 and 1893. 
That Dr. Stewart should have been honoured by Canadian universities 
was not surprising, but that he should have received a doctorate from 
four of them (Laval, McGill, King’s, Windsor, N.S., and Bishop’s, 
Lennoxville, P.Q.) bears witness to his wide popularity. He was one 
of the charter members of this Society and for more than a dozen 
years bore the office of secretary to Section II. He contributed a paper 
on the Early Sources of Canadian History to the 3rd Volume of our 
Transactions. À 


The death of Mr. Charles Baillargé occurred unexpectedly on May 
10. His correspondence with the Secretary as late as April 5 manifest- 
ed an active interest in the approaching meeting of the Society. He 
was born at Quebec in 1827 of a family of engineers and artists and 
carly developed an unusual capacity for the mathematical sciences. 
From 1866 to about 1899 he was city engineer of Quebec, and for a 
time he was joint engineer in connection with the extensive harbour 
works carried out in the River St. Charles estuary by the Quebec Har- 
bour Commission. His first training was as a land surveyor and for 
a long time he was Chairman of the Board of Examiners of Land 
Surveyors. On matters relating to the Mathematical and Physical 
sciences his aid and counsel were continually invoked by public bodies 
and by the Provincial and Dominion Governments. His skill as an 
architect is manifest in his native city, notably in the buildings of 
Laval University, the churches and buildings of the Sisters of Charity 
and of the Good Shepherd, the Music Hall, the Jail, the Monument 
des Braves at Ste Foye and in the aqueduct bridge over the St. Charles 
and the Dufferin Terrace. From 1863 to 1865 he was joint architect 
for the Parliament and Departmental Buildings at Ottawa. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 IX 


During all his busy professional life he was an indefatigable writer 
and lecturer on his favourite subjects and he acquired a wide reputation 
beyond the limits of Canada. In 1874 he was summoned to France 
and presented with the gold medal of the Society of Popularization of 
instruction at the Conservatoire des Arts et Métiers and during his busy 
life he received fifteen medals and twenty diplomas from foreign count- 
ries. In 1880 he became a member of the Royal Academy of Arts and in 
1882 one of the original members of the Royal Society of Canada. 

Mr. Baillargé’s writings are too numerous to be recounted here. 
They are catalogued in the Bibliography appended to Vol. XII. of the 
ist Series of the Transactions of the Royal Society where they occupy 
five columns. 

In the course of his long life, busy as it was and occupied with so 
many interests, scientific, literary, professional and social, Mr. Baillargé 
made no enemies. All were friends to him and he was at all times will- 
ing to be useful to any one who might ask for counsel or assistance in 
the varied subjects in which he was interested. 


5.— NEW FELLOWS. 


Letters of acceptance and thanks were received from the Most 
Reverend the Archbishop of Montreal, Dr. Doughty, Major Wood and 
Messrs. Errol Bouchette and C. C. James, who were elected at the 
last meeting. 

6— THE PROPOSED INTERIM BULLETIN. 

The rules made last year with regard to the inauguration of a 
Bulletin to appear from time to time when papers of special importance 
called for immediate publication have not been brought into effect by 
the publication of any urgent paper. Efforts were made to get the 
separates of the scientific sections out eariy and fair success was 
achieved, but some of them were delayed in proofreading by the absence 
of their authors, and these delays blocked the progress of others. The 
practice of sending out several revises is fatal to despatch. After an 
author has seen a proof in galley and one revise no further proofs are 
really needed, and no alterations should be allowed. Some papers 
are, in fact, twice set. It would be quicker and far cheaper to type- 
write papers not properly prepared, and make printers’ copy of the 
corrected transcripts. 


“— A HOME For THE SOCIETY. 


At our last meeting a committee was appointed (p. xv.), consisting 
of Mr. Sulte, Sir James Grant, Capt. Déville, Lt.-Col. Denison, Dr. 
Fletcher, and Messrs. Lambe and Lighthall to wait upon the Govern- 


x ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ment with a view to securing accommodation in the Victoria Building 
now being erected. 
Mr. Sulte, with Sir James Grant and Mr. Lambe called upon 
the Honourable the Minister of Public Works and were accorded a 
most satisfactory hearing. The following letter was subsequently 
received : 
Office of the Minister of Public Works of Canada. 


Ottawa, April 19th, 1906. 
Sir:— 

I am in receipt of your letter of the 3rd inst., which was left 
with the Deputy Minister of Public Works. I shall be very pleased, 
indeed, to give most favourable consideration to the request of the 
Royal Society, when additional space is secured by the erection of new 
departmental buildings. 

Yours truly, 
C. S. Hyman. 
Benjamin Sulte, Esq., 
Ottawa, Ont. 


8.— THE PROPOSED VISIT OF OUR FOUNDER. 


The Fellows will remember how unanimous was the wish of all 
who attended the last meeting that the founder of the Society, the 
Duke of Argyll, would favour this anniversary meeting by his presence. 
The council was not unmindful of this desire. The steps taken and 
the result are summarized in the following letters: 


Ottawa, March 3rd, 1906. 
To His Grace the Duke of Argyll. 
KEE, 1G: CE Gs ete) ete, 
My Lord Duke: 

The Royal Society of Canada founded by Your Grace during 
your term of office as Governor-General of the Dominion will, at the 
next meeting, on May 21st, celebrate the twenty-fifth anniversary of 
its foundation, and, at the last meeting there was a universal desire 
that you would, if possible, favour the Society with your presence. 
The council advised Sir Sandford Fleming (who was then in England) 
of the wishes and hopes of the Fellows of the Society, and Sir Sand- 
ford communicated their wishes to you. The date you considered to 
be too distant to call for an immediate answer. 

Many of the original members who had the honour of seeing Your 
Grace in the early years of the Society have passed away and their 
places are filled by others who are endeavouring to carry out the work 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XI 


you planned. These are anxious to greet the founder of the Society 
and those who knew you in former years are eager to meet you once 
more. A visit from you, moreover, would be very helpful and stimu- 
lating to the future growth of the Society. 

We therefore, now that the time of meeting approaches, wish 
again to express the hope of every member of the Society that you 
may be able to assist by your presence at the celebration of the twenty- 
fifth anniversary. 

We have the honour to be, 

Your Grace’s most humble servants, 


ALEXANDER JOHNSON, 


President. 


S. E. Dawson, 


Honorary Secretary. 


Naples, March 23rd, 1906. 


Dear Sir :— 


It is with much regret I must relinquish any hope of meeting 
the members of the Royal Society on the 25th anniversary of the 
birth of the Society. 

Let me thank you for your most kind invitation, and express my 
obligations to the Society for the annual gift of a copy of the “ Trans- 
actions.” The field of observation in Canada is so vast that these 
volumes have an ever greater interest. They will in future days be 
treasured by Canadians as showing that their country has been, ever 
since it became a united Dominion, abreast of scientific discovery and 
research in other lands. These volumes will show also how practical 
has been the working of the Society in welcoming literary men, and 
men of science, from all the provinces of Canada to its membership, 
and so labouring to enlist geniusvin every shape to develop and make 
known the immense material resources of Canada. All that constitutes 
hardihood and manliness will thrive with you. All tending to laziness 
and apathy will die. Strenuous thought and the results of action are 
represented by your Society, and the Press will know how to spread 
the papers contributed so that all may measure the successes attained 
in national endeavour. 

Believe me, yours truly, 


ARGYLL. 


DIE ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
9.— INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS OF (GEOLOGISTS. 


It will be remembered that, in 1904, an invitation was sent (see 
Proceedings, 1904, p. vit.) to this body to hold its next meeting 
in 1906 at Ottawa. The invitation was sent in response to an intima- 
tion that it would be welcome. The Dominion Government promised 
the very liberal subsidy of $25,000 and sent Dr. Bell to Vienna to 
advocate it. A formal invitation signed by the president and secre- 
tary on behalf of the society was forwarded in duplicate by successive 
mails, and a triplicate was sent by Dr. Bell. As set forth in the 
report of 1905 the Congress decided to hold their meeting in Mexico. 

No communication from the Congress was ever received by the 
Royal Society with regard to this invitation. The decision arrived 
at was communicated verbally by Dr. Bell to the Honorary Secretary 
and embodied in the report of Council for 1905. It is superfluous 
to add that no intimation was received which might lead to the sup- 
position that the question of a meeting at Ottawa was held in abeyance. 
It was simply dropped so far as the Royal Society were informed. 

In November last the Secretary received the following letter :— 


CONGRÈS (GÉOLOGIQUE INTERNATIONAL. 


Mexico, le 30 octobre 1905. 
S. E. Dawson, Etcr., | 
Secrétaire Honoraire de la Société Royale du Canada, 
Ottawa. 


Monsieur et très honoré confrère: 


Je prends la liberté de vous envoyer ci-jointe une copie de la 
lettre datée 30 août 1905, que j’ai eu l’honneur de vous adresser pour 
vous prier de prendre en considération dans le sein de votre Académie 
et pres de votre gouvernement, le vœu exprimé au Congrès de Vienne, 
de recevoir au Canada la XIe réunion du Congrès Géologique Inter- 
national en 1909. 

Nous vous serions infiniment obligés si vous vauliez bien nous 
adresser votre bienveillante réponse, ce qui nous permettra, dans un 
cas favorable, d’annoncer la décision dans une des prochaines circu- 
laires du Congrès de Mexico. 

Veuillez agréer, cher confrère, l’assurance de nos sentiments les 
plus distingués. 

Le Président du Comité d'organisation. 

José G. AGUILERA. 


r 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XIII 
To which the Secretary replied as follows :— 


Ottawa, le 6 novembre 1905. 
M. José Aguilera, 
Secrétaire Honoraire du Comité d’Organisation 
du Congrès Géologique, 
Mexico. 


Cher Monsieur: 


J’ai Vhonneur d’accuser réception de votre lettre du 30 octobre 
demandant si la Société Royale du Canada serait en position d’inviter 
le Congrès Géologique International à venir se réunir dans la ville 
d'Ottawa en 1909. : 

Je regrette de ne pas étre en position de vous donner une réponse 
définitive. Lorsque le Congrès Géologique International décida de 
s’assembler au Mexique, en 1906, la Société Royale du Canada crut 
Vincident clos. Je ne puis dire, non plus, si la Société serait dis- 
posée à renouveler son invitation. La prochaine réunion de la Société 
Royale du Canada n’aura lieu que le 24 mai 1906. Je ferai rapport 
à cette assemblée et vous ferai savoir la décision de la Société. Je 
ne crois pas qu’il soit possible de décider cette question plus tôt. Si 
le Conseil de la Société s’assemble avant cette époque, je lui soumettrai 
vos lettres, mais il n’est pas probable que le Conseil en vienne à une 
décision sans l’assentiment complet de la Société Royale du Canada. 


J’ai l'honneur d’être 
Votre obéissant serviteur, 


S. E. Dawson, 
Secrélaire honoraire. 


The correspondence was read at a meeting of council on January 
10th, 1906, and the answer of the Secretary was approved. 

During the last few days announcements have been made in the 
newspapers that the Congress will meet in Brussels in 1909. 


10— THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION. 


When the subject of a meeting of the International Congress of 
Geologists was disposed of, as above set forth, the Royal Society, in 
its desire to further the best interests of the Dominion, took up the 
question of promoting a meeting of the British Association to be held 


XIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


at Winnipeg in the heart of newest Canada. The proposition is set 
forth on page xxi. of the Proceedings of 1905-6, as follows: 


At the meeting of the Royal Society of Canada, held on May 25th, 
1905, it was | 

Moved by Reverend Dr. Bryce, seconded by Dr. G. U. Hay, and 
carried :— 


“That the Royal Society of Canada, with a view to the spread of 
scientific knowledge, and also for the purpose of aiding in the develop- 
ment of newer Canada, suggests to the City of Winnipeg to invite the 
British Association for the Advancement of Science to hold its next 
meeting in 1907 in the City of Winnipeg; and also to invite a num- 
ber of leading scientists of the continent of Europe and the United 
States ; and appoints the following committee to wait upon the Dominion 
Government, the governments of Manitoba, Saskatchewan, Alberta, 
British Columbia, along with the City of Winnipeg and the other cities 
of the provinces named, with the object of obtaining grants and other 
assistance to assure the visit of the said association and enable it to 
carry out its important work.” 

Committee— The President of the society, the retiring President, 
Sir Sandford Fleming, Dr. Keefer, Sir James Grant, Lt.-Col. Denison, 
Archbishop O’Brien, W. D. Lighthall, Rev. Dr. Burwash, Professor 
Bovey, Dr. Saunders, the mover and seconder, with power to add to 
their number. 

The committee met the same day and appointed the Rev. Dr. 
Bryce as Chairman. 

Subsequently Professor A. B. Macallum was added to the committee. 

The Rev. Dr. Bryce with the committee forthwith waited on the 
Premier, who kindly promised that the subvention originally intended 
for the International Congress would be transferred to the proposed 
visit of the British Association. 

Dr. Bryce then obtained a certified copy of this resolution and 
with it he appeared before the Corporation of Winnipeg, with the result 
that the City Council unanimously resolved that: 


Resolution of the City of Winnipeg. 
“Whereas at the meeting of the Royal Society of Canada held on 
May 25th, 1905, the following motion was unanimously adopted : 


(Here followed as a preamble a recital of the above resolution of 
the Royal Society; after which the Council proceeded.) 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XV 


“Whereas the Committee waited on the Dominion Government and 
received the assurance that the Government will be disposed to enter- 
tain favourably the request that they should contribute to the reception 
of the British Association for the Advancement of Science should they 
visit Canada in 1907; and that they will be disposed to help to about 
the extent of the $25,000 asked for; and 

“ Whereas the City of Montreal in 1884, and the City of Toronto 
in 1897, impressed with the importance of the visit of some five to 
eight hundred members of this greatest scientific body in the world 
in creating interest in Canada, and in disseminating information as to 
its resources in the British Isles and the Continent of Europe, each 
gave a grant from civic funds of $5,000; 

“ Therefore, the City of Winnipeg, convinced of the importance 
of bringing so notable a body to the Canadian West, hereby cordially 
invites the British Association for the Advancement of Science to hold 
its annual meeting in 1907 in this city, and to accept the hospitality 
of its citizens, and the present council heartily recommends to their 
successors in that year to vote a sum for the carrying out of the pur- 
poses of the Society.” 

The Resolution was carried unanimously by the City Council, with 
understanding of a vote of $5,000. 

The present position of the matter is summarized in the following 
report by Dr. Bryce: 


Report of the British Association Commitiee of the Royal Soctety. 
Rev. Dr. Bryce, Chairman. 


The Chairman regrets very much that he will be in Britain during 
the month of May, and hence cannot be present at Ottawa. 
The committee appointed to invite the British Association begs to 
report :— 
1. In Appendix A.—A copy of the resolution and the appointment 
of the committee. (See ante.) 
2. In Appendix B.—Appeal made on behalf of the committee to 
the City Council of Winnipeg, asking them to 
invite the British Association. 


©) 


In Appendix C.—A copy of Sir Wilfrid Laurier’s letter. 
4. In Appendix D.—The resolution of the City inviting the Asso- 
ciation. (See ante.) 


Or 


In Appendix E.—The invitation given by the Manitoba Historical 
and Scientific Society. 


XVI 


10. 


Lil 


12. 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


All the documents have been forwarded through Professor Macal- 
lum to the Association in South Africa, the accompanying map 
showing buildings available was sent also. (The Chairman would 
like this map returned to him as he has no other copy). 
A letter was received from Professor Macallum stating that the 
Association could not come in 1907, but was prepared to accept 
the invitation for 1909. 
A letter was received by the Chairman from Sir Wilfrid Laurier 
stating that the grant of 1907 would stand good for 1909. 
The Chairman reports that he intends, when the date approaches 
a little nearer, to bring before the Governments of Manitoba, 
Saskatchewan, Alberta and British Columbia, as well as the cities 
of Regina, Calgary and Edmonton, Vancouver and Victoria, the 
desirability of the Association being taken through to the coast, 
and that this will somewhat depend on whether tthe amounts 
voted are sufficient to meet the expense. 
The Chairman met the authorities of the Canadian Pacific Rail- 
way and they are favourable to the project and will be prepared 
to manage, along with the other railways, matters of transporta- 
tion without much trouble to the Royal Society, 1.e., after the 
principles of action have been agreed on by the committee and 
the railway. 
In 1908 it is proposed to constitute a local committee in Winnipeg 
to carry out the details of management which may be necessary. 
The Chairman, while in England, expects to meet the officials 
of the British Association and have an understanding on the 
matter. 
All of which is respectfully submitted. 
GEORGE BRYCE, 
Chairman. 


Winnipeg, March 12th, 1906. 


Since then the Secretary received the following letter :— 


Winnipeg, April 24th, 1906. 


S. E. Dawson, Esq., 


Secretary Royal Society. 


My dear Sir:— 


Our University has taken action. Will you kindly amend my 


report adding the following: 


The University of Manitoba has resolved to cordially support the 


City in its invitation for 1909. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XVII 


I inclose also a copy of the resolution of the University, which 
will be signed by the Vice Chancellor and Registrar. The seal will 
be affixed and the document forwarded to England. 

As soon as I reach London, which will be about the middle of 
June, I will see the secretaries, etc., of the British Association. 

I trust you may have a pleasant meeting of the Society in May. 

I sail on May 12th according to present outlook. 

I am, yours truly, 
GEORGE BRYCE. 


Resolution of the University (Inclosed). 
“To the British Association for the Advancement of Science: 


“The Council of the University of Manitoba has been informed 
that the City of Winnipeg, at the suggestion of the Royal Society of 
Canada, which had obtained the promise of a large grant from the 
Dominion Government for the purpose of providing for the British 
Association, passed and forwarded to the meeting of the British Asso- 
ciation in South Africa the following resolution: 


“<The City of Winnipeg convinced of the importance of bringing 
so notable a body to the Canadian West, hereby cordially invites 
the British Association for the Advancement of Science to hold its 
Annual Meeting in 1907 in this City, and to accept the hospitality of 
its citizens, and the present Council heartily recommends to their 
successors in that year to vote a sum for the carrying out of the enter- 
tainment of the Society.’ 


“The information has reached the University through Professor 
Macallum, of Toronto (who presented the matter to the Association 
in South Africa), that there is a likelihood of the Association accept- 
ing the invitation in 1909, and further, the University is informed 
that the Dominion Government and the City of Winnipeg will hold 
to the promise of 1907 for the year 1909. 

“ Therefore, the University of Manitoba heartily endorses the invita- 
tion of the City of Winnipeg and earnestly requests the British Asso- 
ciation to visit Western Canada — the home to which large numbers of 
British people are turning their eyes as settlers at the present time. 

“The University appoints Rev. Dr. Bryce and Prof. Parker its 
representatives to bring this matter before the British Association.” 


The matter is in able and energetic hands and the Council 
recommends that the committee be continued. 
Proc., 1906. 2. 


XVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
11.— MEETING oF METEOROLOGISTS. 


In the early part of the present year the Secretary had some cor- 
respondence with Mr. R. F. Stupart of the Meteorological Service of 
Canada — one of the Fellows of the Society — in relation to a proposed 
meeting of meteorologists at Ottawa. The letters themselves will 
best set forth the subject. 


METEOROLOGICAL OFFICE. 


Toronto, December 6th, 1905. 
Dear Dr. Dawson :— 

At the meeting of the B. A. H. S. in Southport, 1904, Sir John 
Eliot, late Meteorological Reporter for India, advocated the organiz- 
ation of a central Meteorological Department for the British Empire 
and the matter was again brought up in the B. A. meeting in Cape 
Town this year. In September last at Innsbruck I discussed with 
Sir John Eliot and Dr. Shaw, the Chief of the British Meteorological 
Service, the feasibility of having a meeting of British and Colonial 
Meteorologists in Canada to consider the whole question. While no 
definite conclusion was arrived at, I am sure they are expecting some 
proposal from me. Due consideration has convinced me that there 
would be small chance of getting representatives from Australia and 
the Cape, etc., to come here for a meeting, and I have been wondering 
whether it would not be possible for the Council of the Royal Society 
of Canada at my request to invite certain British and Colonial Meteor- 
clogists to attend the next Royal Society meeting in Ottawa — there 
to discuss desirable co-operation between the Royal Society of Canada 
and other scientific societies within the Empire, as regards meteor- 
clogical problems. I think that Sir John Eliot, F.R.S., and Dr. W. 
N. Shaw, F.R.S., and prohably Sir Norman Lockyer would, on invita- 
tion, attend such meeting. I feel sure you will be able to tell me 
off-hand whether such a suggestion can be carried out, hence I venture 
to trouble you. 

Yours sincerely, 
RES STUPART. 
Dr. S. E. Dawson, 
Hon. Secretary Royal Society of Canada, 
Ottawa. 


METEOROLOGICAL OFFICE, 


Toronto, January 12th, 1906. 
Dear Dr. Dawson :— 
I desire to thank you for having brought the subject of my letter 
cf December 6th before the Council of the Royal Society. Whatever 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XIX 


may be done it must be made quite clear to all who are invited that 
they will have to pay their own expenses, or rather that their expenses 
should be borne by the Imperial and various Colonial \Governments 
which they represent. I enclose herewith a copy of a letter from Dr. 
Shaw, from which it is evident he will not be satisfied with a meeting 
of just a few from Great Britain and suggests that a circular be sent 
to all the Colonies asking whether they were willing to send representa- 
tives to discuss meteorological problems from an Imperial standpoint. 

If this be done a meeting in May next is quite out of the ques- 
tion—but might well be arranged for May, 1907. I do think 
that such a meeting is altogether desirable, and would like to have it 
in Canada, and the Royal Society being willing to further the scheme 
it will, I think, be quite possible to carry it out. 

If then you will leave the matter in abeyance for the present, I 
will write unofficially to my meteorological colleagues in the various 
parts of the Empire and ask whether if such a meeting were arranged 
for, they would be willing to attend. 

Yours very truly, 
R. F. STUPART, 
Director. 
Dr. S. E. Dawson, 
Secretary Royal Society of Canada. 
Ottawa. 


The Council recommends that the correspondence be referred to 
Section III. for consideration and report. 


12.— THE CELEBRATION AT ST. MALO. 


The celebration at St. Malo in commemoration of Jacques Cartier 
took place on July 23rd, 1905, as announced in the report of Council 
in May of that year. No one had been deputed to attend; but Sir 
Sandford Fleming, who was then in England, kindly wrote to offer 
his services. The formal letter was, however, too late to reach him 
in time, and it was addressed directly to the President of the Committee 
at St. Malo. It was as follows :— 

Ottawa, 20 juin 1905. 
Monsieur le Président, 

La Société Royale du Canada est heureuse de pouvoir se faire 
représenter auprès du comité Jacques Cartier, de Saint-Malo, à locca- 
sion de la pose d’une plaque commémorative de la découverte du Canada, 
le 23 juillet prochain. Afin que vous puissiez juger de l’intérêt que 
nous portons à cette fête, je dirai que la moitié de nos membres se 
hvrent aux études historiques concernant le Canada, et que par consé- 


XX ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


quent nous sommes en communauté d'idées avec vous sur tout ce qui 
rappelle les travaux du découvreur. Il va de soi que nous avons 
très hautement apprécié les efforts des citoyens de Saint-Malo pour 
honorer la mémoire d’un grand homme que les Canadiens de toutes 
les origines respectent et saluent toujours comme l’un de leurs, ainsi 
que l’attestent nos écrits, son portrait répandu partout, son nom donné 
à des divisions territoriales, à une de nos villes, à une banque, à des 
rivières, lacs, navires, rues et places publiques dans notre pays. 

En députant auprès de vous un ancien Président qui appartient à 
le section des sciences de notre institution, le dévoué Sir Sandford 
Fleming, l’un des hommes les plus distingués du Canada, nous expri- 
mons de la manière la plus honorable et la plus empressée notre parti- 
cipation au sentiment qui anime nos cousins de France pour la mémoire 
de Jacques Cartier, comme aussi au rapprochement qu’il opère entre 
nous tous, après plus de trois siècles, et malgré la distance qui nous 
sépare. 

N'oublions pas que si la moitié des équipages du fameux Malouin 
dorment dans la terre de France, l’autre moitié reposent chez nous 
dans le sol de la ville de Québec, près du monument que nous avons 
élevé pour faire comprendre au peuple la courageuse entreprise de ces 
marins. J’ajoute ici que l’on se tromperait grandement en France si 
Yon s’imaginait que cette vénération est particulière aux Canadiens- 
Français ; elle est universelle dans toutes nos provinces, comme le prou- 
vent nos livres d'école, nos billets de banque, etc., bien qu’elle soit plus 
intense, naturellement, au milieu du groupe de langue française, qui 
a aussi conservé jusqu'à présent les lois civiles de l’ancienne mère- 
patrie et tant de coutumes que vous seriez étonné de voir dans cette 
Nouvelle-France du XVII siècle. 

Nous travaillons donc pour la même cause. Ce qui, pour vous, 
constitue une gloire nationale l’est également pour les Canadiens. Nous 
sommes heureux, je le répète, de témoigner en cette circonstance com- 
bien nos populations apprécient votre œuvre et d’autre part nous 
sommes fiers de l’honneur que votre invitation confère à notre Société. 

Je demeure, Monsieur le Président, 
Votre tout dévoué serviteur, 
ALEXANDER JOHNSON. 
Monsieur Louis Tiercelin, 
Président du comité Jacques Cartier, 
Ker-Azur, Paramé (Ille et Vilaine), 
France. 


The letter was courteously acknowledged by the President of the 
Committee. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XOX 
13.—OTHER COMMITTEES. 


The Council has to report that the Committee on Ethnographic 
research which was appointed in connection with the British Association 
has abandoned its efforts and is sending no report. 

No report has been received as yet from the Committee on Geo- 
logical Nomenclature. 

The Committee on a Hydrographic Survey of our coasts sends the 
following : 


Final Report of the Committee on the Coast Hydrographic Survey. 


Consisting of Mr. Sulte, Sir Sandford Fleming, Dr. T. C. Keefer, 
Dr. Loudon, Dr. Bovey, Prof. McLeod and Dr. Johnson (Chairman) :— 

In the report of last year, 1905 (page x. of “ Proceedings”), it 
is said:— “The Committee has great reason to hope that”........ 
~ the efforts of the society which at the end of six years secured the 
* Tidal Survey, will now, after twenty-one years, be crowned with com- 
“ plete success,” 1.e., in the establishment of a Coast Hydrographic 
Survey. 

The committee has the great satisfaction of announcing that the 
society has now fully attained this object, and that a vote was passed 
by Parliament last year for the sum of $264,500, to be applied in 
providing one steamer for the Atlantic Coast (additional to that for 
the Tidal Survey), one for the Pacific, and for general expenses and 
maintenance. 

Of the value of this survey to Canada sufficient has been already 
said. 

The committee having thus fulfilled its duty, it hopes to the con- 
tentment of the society, asks to be discharged. 

(Signed on behalf of the Committee), 
ALEXANDER JOHNSON, 
April, 1906. Chairman. 


The Committee on a Geodetic Survey of Canada reports as 


follows :— 
Montreal, May 16th, 1906. 


Report by the Chairman of the Geodetic Surveys Committee. 


The Committee on Geodetic Surveys has not made any further 
representation to the Dominion Government. It notes, however, that 
this important matter has now been taken up by the Canadian Society 
of Civil Engineers, which, at its annual meeting in January last, 
adopted the following resolution: 


XXII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


“ Resolved, that the council be instructed to represent to the Dom- 
inion Government the importance of action in the direction of a more 
complete co-ordination of the various surveys conducted by its depart- 
ments and the adoption of such methods as will secure permanent 
records both in the field and in the office of all such work. In the 
opinion of this meeting, the complete working of a scheme will involve 
very careful study not only of the valuable work now being done, but 
also of the methods which have been adopted by the government of other 
countries, and should lead to the establishment of a general topograph- 
ical and geodetic survey scheme for the whole Dominion.” 

The Engineers’ Society has called the attention of the Government 
to the resolution quoted above, in an appropriate memorandum pre- 
sented by deputation to Sir Wilfrid Laurier, Premier, and it is hoped 
that through this co-operation, some progress will shortly be made 
toward placing the surveys of Canada on a rational basis. 

C. H. Mclæon, 
Charman of Geodetic Surveys Committee. 


14.—-BIOLOGICAL STATIONS. 


The station on the Georgian Bay is now under the management 
of the Department of Marine and Fisheries, and Professor Prince has 
made it the subject of a special report. He has also contributed a 
detailed report on the work of the Marine Biological Station which, 
during the past year was located at Gaspé. These reports will be 
printed as Appendix C to the Report of Council. 


15.—Tipaz SURVEY. 


Dr. W. Bell Dawson has favoured the Society with his usual annual 
report on the Survey of the Tides and Currents on the coasts of the 
Dominion. It will be printed at the end of the Report of Council 
(Appendix D). 

16.—- INVITATION TO ABERDEEN. 


The University of Aberdeen having been unable, for various rea- 
sons, to celebrate in 1894 the four hundredth anniversary of the 
foundation of King’s College, intends, with the aid of the citizens of 
Aberdeen, to commemorate on September 15th, 1906, not only the found- 
ation of King’s but also of Marischal College, and at the same time 
to inaugurate some recently erected academic buildings. The occasion 
has appealed strongly to the people of Aberdeen. Great preparations 
have been made for it, and His Majesty the King is expected to be 
present. An invitation in Latin and printed in the black letter text 
of the fifteenth century has been received by the Society requesting 
that a representative be sent to assist at the ceremonies. It is signed 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XXII 


by the Vice-Chancellor and President, and is specially addressed to the 
Royal Society of Canada. 


17.— INTERNATIONAL CONGRESS OF AMERICANISTS AT QUEBEC. 


The following letter has been received and the Council recommends 
that it be referred to Section I. for consideration and report: 


Ottawa, 28th April, 1906. 
Dr. 8S. E. Dawson, F.R.S.C., etc., 
Hon. Secy. Royal Society of Canada. 
: Ottawa. 
Sir, 

The Committee of Organization of the International Congress of 
Americanists, which is to hold its Fifteenth (15th) Meeting in the 
City of Quebec, from the 10th to the 15th of September of the present 
year, has the honour to invite the Royal Society of Canada to appoint 
a delegate or delegates to represent it at this meeting. 

Will you have the kindness to mention this in your annual report 
and to bring the matter officially before the Royal Society at its annual 
meeting in May? 

I have the honour to be, Sir, 
Your obedient servant, 


ROBERT BELL. 
President. 
18.—ASSOCIATED SOCIETIES. 


The following Associated Societies have sent in reports: 


SOCIETY. PLACE. DELEGATE. 
Women’s Canadian Historical Society of 

Toronto... SSH LORS COUT Joy eNO RENTREE MEN EEE ere 
Natural History Society of Montreal..... Montreal,......... Dr. A. Nicholls. 

Le Cercle Littéraire de Montréal......... Gow Vesa RASE Dr. H. M. Ami. 
Literary and Historical Society of Quebec) Quebec........... P. B. Casgrain. 
Nova Scotia Institute of Science......... HAUEAXEN + Dr. Henry S. Poole. 
Ottawa Field Naturalists Club........... OCtAwWA TEE W. J. Wilson. 

Nova Scotia Historical Society........... Halifax RENÉ M terne 
Botanical Club of Canada.....)........... TOME en Dr. A. H. MacKay. 
Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of 

Montreal scan tec) bie ee en Montreal" R. W. McLachlan. 
Natural History Society of New Bruns- 

WLC ANSE AR ER RE DES EE + SD JONN..--- 70. Hon. Senator Ellis. 
Canadianinstibubes PS ce. eles Toronto..... ele Ege ALLER telat ae 
Entomological Society of Ontario......... Mondone aan... ee a A. F. Winn. 

Literary and Scientific Society of Ottawa.| Ottawa. .......... A. H. Whitcher. 
Women’s Canadian Historical Society of 

OCÉANS TE MANIA. (5 fo) MA RAR ES Mrs. O'Connor. 
Historical and Scientific Society of Mani- 

ODA ER AU AN 2e Potins aiatelee Winnipeg nl Pleine her eee 
Niagara Historical Society............... lONiiaparanecuees aoe Miss Carnochan. 
SeniiiC AGSOCIAnION ES es be ee dee eekaIMLtON.. ace. Dr. Fletcher. 


XXIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Resolutions as follows were then passed :— 
Moved by Dr. J. E. Roy, seconded by Mr. B. Sulte, and carried :— 
That the report of Council, just read, be adopted. 


Moved by Dr. E. Deville, seconded by Dr. Saunders, and carried :— 
That the minutes of the last annual meeting as printed in the 
volume of Proceedings and Transactions be confirmed, 


Moved by Dr. E. Deville, seconded by Prof. Baker, and carried :— 

That the following be-a committee for the nomination of officers 
for the Society for the following year:— Dr. Johnson, Dr. J. E. Roy, 
Sir Sandford Fleming, Lt.-Col. Denison, Mr. L. M. Lambe. 


It was then moved by Sir Sandford Fleming, and seconded by 
Mr. B. Sulte: 

That a special committee be appointed to consider the question of 
the adoption of the metric system in Canada and in other non-metric 
countries and report thereon to the Society at its next general meeting. 
That the special committee consist of Dr. J. E. Roy, Mr. George Murray, 
Professor Baker, Dr. H. 8. Poole, along with the mover and four sup- 
porters of the motion. 

(The said supporters were Mr. B. Sulte, Lt.-Col. Denison, Dr. 
Keefer, Sir James Grant.) 

A debate having arisen, Dr. A. B. Macallum, seconded by W. W. 
Campbell, moved in amendment, 

That all the words after the word “that” be omitted to:substitute 
the words “a committee of seven, the majority of which is to be con- 
stituted of members of the two sections, Mathematical-Physical and 
Geological-Biological, be appointed to consider and report on the whole 
question of the metric system. 

On a division the amendment was carried. 

The following committee was nominated by the President :— Sir 
Sandford Fleming, Dr. Rutherford, Dr. Macallum, Dr. Ellis, Lt.-Col. 
Denison, Archbishop Bruchési and Mr. Sulte. 


Dr. E. Deville gave notice of his intention to move the following 
change in the Regulations :— 

It is proposed to repeal the last paragraph of clause 7, reading as 
follows : 

“Any member failing to attend three years in succession, without 
presenting a paper, or assigning reasons in writing satisfactory to 
the Society, shall be considered to have resigned. ” 

And to substitute the following paragraph :— 

“Any member who has failed to attend the three preceding annual 
meetings without presenting a paper, shall be placed on the retired 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XXV 


list and an election to fill the vacancy thus created shall be held in 
the manner prescribed by these regulations for filling vacancies; pro- 
vided that the Society may, upon the recommendation of the section 
to which such member belongs, suspend action under this rule until 
the next annual meeting. ” 


At noon the Society adjourned to enable the sections to organize 
in their respective rooms. 


AFTERNOON SESSION. (Tuesday, May 22). 


The Society reassembled in general session at 2.30 p.m. 

Delegates of associate societies were then called upon for their 
reports. These will be found in Appendix E printed in full. 

The report of the Women’s Canadian Historical Society of Ottawa 
was read by Mrs. O’Connor. 

The report of the Literary and Scientific Society of Ottawa was 
read by Mr. A. H. Whitcher. 

The report of the Natural History Society of New Brunswick was 
read by Hon. Senator Ellis. 

The report of the Ottawa Field Naturalists Club was read by 
Mr. W. J. Wilson. 

The report of the Nova Scotian Institute of Science was read by 
Dr. H. 8S. Poole. 

The Rev. G. W. Taylor, of Nanaimo, who attended the meeting 
of the Society for the first time, was presented to the President and 
took his seat. 

The Society adjourned at 3.30 p.m. 


EVENING SESSION. (Tuesday, May 22). 


At 8 p.m. the President delivered his Presidential Address in the 
large hall of the Normal School. Subject: “Our Semi-Jubilee and 
Canada. (Vide Appendix A). 


SESSION II. (Wednesday, May 23.) 


The Society reassembled in general session at 11.30 a.m. 
Moved by Lt.-Col. Denison, seconded by J. S. Willison, and car- 


ried: 

That the Society desires to record its sincere regret that His Grace 
the Duke of Argyll, the founder of the Society, has been unavoidably 
prevented from being present at this twenty-fifth anniversary of its 
foundation; being sure that His Grace would have been pleased with 


XXVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


the progress of the Society and with the great development of the 
country. 


The report of the Quebec Literary and Historical Society was read 
by its president, Mr. P. B. Casgrain. 


Moved by Dr. Alex. Johnson, seconded by B. Sulte, and carried :— 

That the Royal Society of Canada in annual meeting assembled 
desires to express its deep regret at the recent sudden death of Professor 
P. Curie, who had won so much glory for France and given so much 
pleasure to the world by his eminent discoveries in science:— that 
the Society offers its earnest sympathy to his widow, Madame Curie, 
the sharer of his labours and successes, partner of his heart and mind, 
adding her own scientific fame to the fame accorded both for their 
joint work :— and that the Society hopes that strength and health and 
length of days will be given her to continue for the benefit of the 
world, the work in which the partnership has been so suddenly severed, 
and to attain further success as a tribute to his memory and a solace 
for her sorrow. 

It was then moved by Dr. Johnson, seconded by Hon. Senator 
Poirier, and carried :— 

That a committee be appointed to communicate with His Excel- 
lency the Governor-General, as Honorary President of the Society, and 
request him to favour the Society by transmitting the above resolution 
in the most suitable manner to Madame Curie, preferably through the 
President of the French Republic. 

After the resolution was carried, Sir Sandford Fleming and Sir 
James Grant were named as the Committee. 


Moved by Prof. D. P. Penhallow, seconded by Sir James Grant: 

That the Royal Society of Canada memorialize the Government 
with a view to receiving a grant of $5,000 annually, to be expended 
in the promotion of original research in such ways and under such 
conditions as may be determined by the Royal Society acting through 
a special committee to be appointed for that purpose, and that the 
Society appoint a special committee to frame and present such memorial 
at the earliest opportunity. 

Moved in amendment by Mr. Thomas Macfarlane, seconded by 
Prof. Macoun :— 

That the resolution, before being deliberated on by the Society, 
be referred to the Council for consideration. 

The amendment was lost and the main motion was then put to 
the meeting and carried. Sir James Grant, Sir Sandford Fleming 
and Professor Prince were then named as a committee. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XXVII 


Moved by Lt.-Col. Denison, seconded by Professor Macoun, and 
carried :— 

That Mr. William Wilfred Campbell be appointed to represent 
the Society at the anniversary meeting of the University of Aberdeen 
in September next. 


The report of the Natural History Society of Montreal was then 
read by Dr. Nicholls. 

The report of the Entomological Society of Ontario was read by 
Mr, Albert F. Winn. 

The report of the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Mont- 
real was read by Mr. R. W. McLachlan. 

A report on behalf of the Hamilton Scientific Association was 
made verbally by Dr. James Fletcher. 


The Secretary of Section II. then presented the following: 


REPORT oF SECTION II. 


Section II. has the honour to report that some interesting meetings 
were held, the attendance being greater than the average for some 
years past. 

Several papers were read, a list of which is appended to this report. 

The following gentlemen were nominated members of the section 
to fill up the vacancies: 

Professor Shortt, J. H. Coyne, James Hannay, Rev. W. O. Ray- 
mond, Lt.-Col. Cruikshank. 

The officers of the section elected are: 

President—Chancellor Burwash. 

Vice-President—Dr. A. G. Doughty. 

Secretary—W. Wilfred Campbell. 

Printing Committee—The Vice-President, Secretary, and Mr. W. 
D. Lighthall. 

The section has arranged for a series of valuable papers to be 
read at its future meetings. 

W. W. CAMPBELL, 
Secretary. 
List of Papers Read. 


1.—“ Sketch of the Life of Joseph Fleury Mesplet, the early Cana- 
dian printer.” By R. W. McLachlan. Presented by Dr. S. E. Dawson. 


2.— Richard Maurice Bucke, Philosopher, Scientist and Littéra- 
teur.” By James H. Coyne, M.A. Presented by Wilfred Campbell. 


XXVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


3.—* Additions and Corrections to Monographs on the Place- 
Nomenclature, Cartography, Historic Sites, Boundaries and Settlement- 
Origins of the Province of New Brunswick. (Contributions to the 
History of New Brunswick, No, 7).” By William F. Ganong, M.A., 
Ph.D. Presented by Dr. 8. E. Dawson. 

4.—“ The Birds met with by Cartier on the North-Eastern Coast 
of America and especially of the Great Auk, now extinct.” By Dr. 
S. E. Dawson. 

5.— ‘The Ter-centenary of the Founding of Port Royal, by 
De Monts.” By Dr. J. W. Longley. 

6.—< The Celtic Revival, by the Rev. Father O’Boyle, O.M.I.” 
Presented by Wilfred Campbell. 


It was then moved by Dr. S. E. Dawson, and seconded by Dr. 
A. G. Doughty: 

That the nominations embodied in the report of Section II. be 
acceded to and that Rule 6, relating to the election of members, be 
suspended. 

As under Rule 19 this motion required a majority of two-thirds 
of all present, a standing vote was taken. The motion was carried 
with only one dissentient. 


Moved by Mr. W. W. Campbell, seconded by Mr. C. C. James, 
and carried :— 

That Mr. J. H. Coyne, M.A., be elected a Fellow of the Society 
in Section IT. 

Moved by Mr. C. C. James, seconded by Mr. W. W. Campbell, 
and carried :— 

That Lt.-Colonel E. Cruikshank be elected a Fellow of the Society 
in Section II. 

Moved by Dr. S. E. Dawson, seconded by Dr. A. G. Doughty, 
and carried: 

That the Rev. W. O. Raymond be elected a Fellow of the Society 
in Section II. 

Moved by W. W. Campbell, seconded by Mr. J. S. Willison, and 
carried :— 

That Professor Adam Shortt be elected a Fellow of the Society 
in Section II. 

Moved by Dr. A. G. Doughty, seconded by Mr. W. W. Campbell, 
and carried: 

That Dr. James Hannay be elected a Fellow in the Society in 
Section IT. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XXIX 


The report of Le Cercle littéraire de Montréal was presented by 
Dr. Ami. 
The Society then adjourned. 


EVENING SESSION. (Wednesday, May 23). 


At 8 p.m. in the large hall of the Normal School, Mr. C. C. James 
delivered the annual popular lecture, having chosen for his subject 
“The Downfall of the Huron Nation.” The lecture was illustrated 
by many stereopticon views of the localities in which the events he 
described occurred and by the reproduction of old maps throwing light 
on the geography of the early days of Canada. 


SESSION III. (Thursday, May 24.) 

The Society reassembled in general session at 2.30 p.m. 

Moved by Mr. L. M. Lambe, seconded by Dr. 8S. E. Dawson, 
and carried :— 

That the hearty thanks of the Society are tendered to Principal 
White for the kind and considerate manner in which he has opened 
the Normal School Building to the Society and has afforded every 
facility, not only for the general meetings, but for the meetings of 
Sections. 


Moved by Mr. B. Sulte, seconded by Lt.-Col. Denison, and car- 
ried :— 

That the Society desires to express its sincere thanks to Mr. C. C. 
James for his able and interesting lecture on “ The Downfall of the 
Huron Nation,” and its appreciation of the labour and time he has 
expended in the preparation, not only of the lecture, but also of the 
illustrative views. 


Moved by Sir Sandford Fleming, seconded by Mr. Thomas Mac- 
farlane, and carried :— 

That the Society hereby tenders to Dr. Saunders and to Dr. King 
its sincere thanks for the courtesy with which they have thrown open 
respectively the Experimental Farm and the Dominion Observatory to 
the Fellows and delegates attending the present meeting. 


The Special Committee on the Metric System then presented the 
following: — 

REPORT. 

The Special Committee appointed to consider the subject of the 
Metric System submitted to the general meeting on. May 22, begs 
leave to report: 

The Committee hesitates to express an opinion on the merits of 
the proposal submitted to the Society respecting the adoption of a 


XXX ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


forty inch metre. This is the first time this subject has been brought 
before the Royal Society, and while at this stage it is considered best 
for the Society to remain uncommitted to any particular opinion, as 
the new proposal invests the whole question of the metric system with 
increased interest, it seems highly proper for the Society to approve 
of means being taken to promote inquiry and investigation. The 
Council should therefore be authorized and requested to take such means 
in its discretion, and if it may seem advisable to bring the matter to 
the attention of the authorities and the public. 

Whereupon it was moved by Sir Sandford Fleming, seconded by 
Mr. Sulte, and carried :— 

That the report of the committee be adopted. 


Moved by Sir Sandford Fleming, seconded by Sir James Sarant 
and carried :— 

That the Honorable Senator David be added to the committee on 
memorializing the Government for a grant of $5,000 annually to be 
expended on original research. 


The Secretary of the Section, Dr. Deville, then presented the 


REPORT or SECTION III. 


The Third Section submits the following report for the session 
of 1906 :— 

The section has held four meetings at which seventeen members 
were present as follows :— 

Prof, Alfred Baker, President; | Dr. (2: Fs) Barnes, Dr: We) 5; 
Dawson, Dr. E. Deville, Dr. W. H. Ellis, Sir Sandford Fleming, Dr. 
G. P. Girdwood, Dr. J. C. Glashan, Dr. G. C. Hoffmann, Dr. A. John- 
son, Dr. T. C. Keefer, Prof. Lash Miller, Mr. T. Macfarlane, Prof. 
C. H. McLeod, Prof. R. B. Owens, Prof. E. Rutherford, Mr. F. T. 
Shutt. 


Letters were received from the following members expressing regret 
for their absence: 

Prof. H. T. Bovey, Prof. N. F. Dupuis, Dr. W. L. Goodwin, 
Dr. B. J. Harrington, President J. T. Loudon, Prof. J. C. McLennan, 
Mr. R. F. Stupart. 

Twenty-three papers were read either in full or by titles; a list 
cf the papers is appended. 

The officers elected for the ensuing year were: 

President—Prof. EK. Rutherford. 

Vice-President—Prof. W. Lash Miller. 

Secretary—Dr. E. Deville. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XXXI 


A publication committee consisting of the officers of the section, 
Prof. McLeod and Dr. Glashan was appointed. 

With regard to the proposal to invite the various officials of the 
Meteorological Departments of the Empire to meet in Ottawa in 1907, 
which proposal was referred to Section III., it is the opinion of the 
section that before making a recommendation, it is desirable that cor- 
respondence be entered upon with these officials with a view of settling 
the most suitable place and time for meeting and the questions to be 
discussed, and that in the meantime action should be deferred, and Mr. 
Stupart requested to conduct such correspondence. 

EK. DEVILLE, 
Secretary. 
Inst of Papers Read. 


1.—Presidential Address. “The Foundations of Geometry.” By 
Prof. Alfred Baker. 

2.—< Abacus of the Altitude and Azimuth of the Pole Star.” 
By Dr. E. Deville. 

3.— Notes sur la mécanique Céleste, les Mathématiques, le Calcul 
différentiel et l’Algèbre, par le Dr. Arthur Duval. Presentées par 
M. Benjamin Sulte. 

4— On the Metallic Currency of the British Empire.” By 
Thomas Macfarlane. 

5.—“< On the Analysis of Wheaten Flour.” By Thomas Macfarlane. 

6.—“ On the Conservation of Nitrogen in Manure.” By Thomas 
Macfarlane. 

7.—“ A new form of Frequency Indicator.” By Prof. R. B. Owens. 

8.—* Differential Temperature Records in Meteorological Work.” 
By Prof. C. H. McLeod and Dr. H. T. Barnes. 

9.— An Aluminium and Magnesium Cell.” By Mr. G. H. Cole 
and Dr. H. T. Barnes. 

10.—“ Nocturnal Radiation.” By Dr. H. T. Barnes. 

11.—* Radiation as the Cause of Anchor Ice Formation.” By Dr. 
H. T. Barnes. | 

12.—“ The Effect of Tensile Stress on Specific Resistance.” By 
Mr. R. W. Boyle. Presented by Dr. H. T. Barnes. 

13.—< Effect of an Electric Current on the Modulus of Elasticity.” 
By Mr. R. W. Boyle. Presented by Dr. H. T. Barnes. 

14.—“ On Deficient Humidity of the Atmosphere.” By Dr. T. A. 
Starkey and Dr. H. T. Barnes. 

15.—“ Mass of the aw Particles Expelled from Radium.” By 
Prof. E. Rutherford, F.R.S. 


XXXII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


16.—< Some Peculiar Effects resulting from the Distribution of 
the Intensity of the Radiation from Radioactive Sources.” By Prof. 
E. Rutherford, F.R.S. 

17.—“ A New Product of Actinium.” By O. Hahn, Ph.D. Pre- 
sented by Prof. Rutherford. 

18.—“ The Origin of the # rays from Radioactive Substances.” 
By W. Levin, Ph.D. Presented by Prof. Rutherford. 

19.—% Isomorphism as Illustrated by Certain Varieties of Mag- 
netite.” By Dr. B. J. Harrington. 

20.—* An Investigation on the Value of the Indentation Test for 
Steel Rails.” By H. K. Dutcher, M.Sc. Presented by Dean Henry 
T. Bovey. 

21.—* On the Effect of Dissolved Gases on Metal Surfaces.” By 
Dr EM: ory. Presented by Dr. i, Warnes: 

22.—< On Vectors considered as Numbers affected with Sign and 
Bearing.” By Dr. J. C. Glashan. 

23.—“ A Method of determining the Specific Heat of ‘Gases. By 
Dr. H. T. Dawes. Presented by Prof. J. C. McLennan. 


The Secretary of the Section, Mr. Lawrence M. Lambe, presented 
the 


REPORT oF SECTION IV. 


Section IV. begs to report that its sessions, four in number, have 
been unusually well attended, and the number of papers presented larger 
than for some years past. 

The average attendance of members of the section was eighteen, 
there being also a number of visitors from other sections and from 
the general public. 

Twenty-nine papers in all were read before the section, in full, 
in abstract or by title, four of these being presented by gentlemen not 
members of the Society. 

Some most interesting discussions took place on points suggested 
by many of the papers. 

The following officers were elected for the coming year :— 

President—Professor Edward E. Prince. 

Vice-President—Professor Frank D. Adams. 

Secretary—Mr. Lawrence Lambe. 


LAWRENCE LAMBE, 
Secretary. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XXXII 
List of Papers Read. 


1.—% On the Sleeping Sickness”; with Microscopic Illustrations. 
By Sir James Grant. 

2.— Illustrations of the Fossil Fishes of the Devonian Rocks of 
Canada.” .Part III. By Dr. J. F. Whiteaves. 

3.—* Bibliography of Canadian Zoology, exclusive of Entomology, 
for the year 1905.” By Dr. J. F. Whiteaves. 

4.—* Bibliography of Canadian Botany, for the year 1905.” By 
Dr: A. Hi. MacKay. 
5.—* Report of the Botanical Club of Canada, including Pheno- 
logical Observations for the year 1905.” By Dr. A. H. MacKay. 

6.—“ New Points in the Structure and Development of the 
Pharyngeal Teeth in Fishes.” By Professor Edward E. Prince. 

.7—* The Form and Structure of Lamp-organs in certain Fishes.” 
By Professor Edward E. Prince. 

8.—* On Amyzon Brevipinne, Cope, from the Amyzon beds of the 
Southern Interior of British Columbia.” By Lawrence M. Lambe. 

9.—“ Review of the Flora of the Little River Group, Part I., the 
Calamarie.” By Dr. G. F. Matthew. 

10.—* Notes on Tertiary and Cretaceous Plants.” By Professor 
D. P. Penhallow. 

11.—% A Remarkable Outgrowth from the Trunk of a White 
Birch.” By Professor D. P. Penhallow. 

12.—* Bibliography of Canadian Geology and Paleontology for 
the year 1905.” By Dr. H. M. Ami. 

13.—* Gypsum Deposits of New Brunswick, with special reference 
to their Origin.” By Professor L. W. Bailey. 

14.—“ Features of the Continental Shelf off Nova Scotia.” By 
Dr. H. $. Poole. 

15.—“ Note sur les Bassins Hydrographiques des Rivières Mont- 
morency et Ste-Anne.” By Abbe J. C. K. Laflamme. 

16.—* Critical Notes on the Geometridæ of British Columbia”; 
with descriptions of fourteen species. By Rev. G. W. Taylor. 

17.—* Notes on the Mineral Fuels of Canada.” By Dr. R. W. Ells. 

18.— Some Unsolved Problems in Immunity.” By Dr. A. G. 
Nicholls. Presented by Prof. Wesley Mills. 

19.—* Bibliography of Canadian Entomology for 1905.” By Rev. 
Dr. Ç. J. S. Bethune. 

20.— Some Experimental Investigations into the Flow of Rocks.” 
By Professor Frank D. Adams. 

Proc., 1906. 3. 


XXXIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


21.—“ South African Iron Formations.” By Professor A. P. 
Coleman. 

22.—“ Studies in Canadian Fungi.” 1.—“ The Imperfect Fungi.” 
By John Dearness. Communicated by Dr. G. U. Hay. 2.—“ The Hyd- 
nums and their Allies.” By Dr. G. U. Hay. 

23.—“ Observations on and Criticism of Microchemical Methods.” 
By Dr. A. B. Macallum. 

24.—“ A Chapter in Comparative Physiology and Psychology.” 
By Dr. T. Wesley Mills. 

25.—“ The Structure of the Mesoglea in the Meduse, Aurella 
Flavidula and Cyanea Arctica.” By Dr. A. B. Macallum. 

26.—% Distribution of Bacteria in Canadian Cheddar Cheese.” 
By Prof. F. C. Harrison. Presented by Dr. Fletcher. 

27.—“ Legume Bacteria.” By Prof. F. C. Harrison. Presented 
by Dr. Fletcher. 

28.—“ On the Structure of an Abnormal Chick Embryo.” By 
Professor R. Ramsay Wright. 

29.—* On some Fossils from Northern Canada, collected by Com; 
mander Low, during the Expedition of 1903-1904, together with notes 
on the Geological Horizons to which they belong.” By Dr. H. M. Ami. 


The Secretary of the Section, Mr. Léon ‘Gérin, then presented the 
following :— 
REPORT OF SECTION I. 


La section a l’honneur de soumettre le procès-verbal de ses 
délibérations :— 

Présents :— Le président, J. Edmond Roy; le secrétaire, Léon 
Gérin; Mgr. Bruchési, les honorables MM. Poirier et David, M. l’abbé 
Auguste Gosselin, MM. Sulte et Errol Bouchette. 

Des lettres d’excuse ont été reçues de la part de Mgr Bégin, Mgr 
Paquet, Sir James LeMoine, et de M. Pabbé Camille Roy. 

La section a siégé les 22, 23 et 24 mai 1906. 

Conformément 4 une décision prise par la société Royale, en 1899, 
à l'effet d'offrir une médaille d’or à un écrivain canadien qui se sera 
distingué par ses travaux littéraires, la section a résolu d'accorder cette 
médaille à Laura Conan (Mlle Angers), auteur de l’Oublié et autres 
romans de mœurs canadiennes. 

Des diplômes d’honneur sont décernés à M. Lagacé, critique d’art, 
de Montréal; M. l’abbé Perrier, conférencier, de Montréal; M. Adjutor 
Rivard, avocat, secrétaire de la société du parler Français, de Québec: 
et M. l’abbé S. A. Lortie, de la société d'Economie sociale, de Québec. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XXXV 


La section exprime le vœu que les statuts de la société Royale 
soient traduits en français et imprimés. 

Que Particle No 19 du règlement soit modifié de manière à ce 
que l’assemblée générale ne soit jamais appelée à suspendre ses régle- 
ments lorsqu'il s’agira de l’élection d’un membre. 

Que les membres de la section aient des réunions mensuelles locales 
à Québec et à Ottawa, dans le but d’étudier et suivre le mouvement 
littéraire de la région et de faire rapport à l’assemblée annuelle de 
la société. A ces réunions régionales, 11 est désirable que les membres 
de la section se mettent en rapport avec les sociétés locales. 

Que le président, M. le sénateur Poirier, Pabbé Camille Roy, 
Fhon. M. Chapais et M. Ernest Gagnon soient délégués pour repré- 
senter la société à la réunion des Américanistes à Quebec, en septembre 
prochain. 

Il a été lu une lettre de sir James LeMoine, dans lequelle il 
demande, vu son grand âge, d’être mis sur la liste des membres à la 
retraite. Mais la section est désireuse de garder ce collègue si dis- 
tingué sur la liste de ses membres actifs. 

La section décide que pour l’année académique 1906-7 il n’est 
pas à propos d’élire de membres additionnels. Il existe maintenant 
dans la section trois vacances. M Fréchette a été, à sa demande, 
mis sur la liste des membres retraités MM. Bellemare et Richard 
sont décédés. 

L’honorable M. L.-O. David a été prié de représenter la société 
Royale à l'inauguration de la statue de Crémazie à Montréal; et il a 
accepté. 

Les travaux suivants ont été lus et renvoyés au comité de revision 
de manuscrits : 

Discours présidentiel, par M. J.-Edmond Roy. 

Nos trois cloches, poésie par Pamphile LeMay. 

Les anciens Canadiens de P. A. Gaspé, par M. Vabbé Camille 
Roy. 

Les successeurs de La Verendrye, par Vhon. M. L. A. Prud’homme. 

L'habitant Canadien-français, par Léon Gérin. 

L’instruction primaire et le progrès social, par Errol Bouchette. 

Inventaire chronologique des livres, brochures, etc., publiés en 
langue anglaise dans la province de Québec, par N. E. Dionne. 

Voyage de l'abbé Holmes d’après sa correspondance, par Vabbé A. 
Gosselin. 

L'habitation de Samos, par M. P. B. Casgrain. 


XXXVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Un Viel Historien de la Nouvelle France, par Vhonorable M. 
Thomas Chapais. 

Le Commerce de France avec le Canada avant 1760, par M. 
B. Sulte. 

Essai sur Charlevoix, par M. J.-Edmond Roy. 

Lafontaine et Baldwin, par Vhon. M. L.-0. David. 

La République d'Indian Stream, par M. F. J. Audet. 

MM. B. Sulte, A. D. DeCeiles et l’hon. M. T. Chapais ont été 
chargés de faire la revision des manuscrits. 

Le bureau suivant a été élu pour l’année 1906-7: 

M. Vabbé Camille Roy, président, 

L’hon. M. T. Chapais, vice-président. 

M. Errol Bouchette, secrétaire. 

Lion GÉRIN. 
Secrétaire. 


It was then moved by Mr. B. Sulte, seconded by labbé Gosselin, 
and carried :— 

Que Mgr J. C. K. Laflamme, l’hon. Pascal Poirier, M. l’abbé Roy, 
VPhon. Thomas Chapais et M. Ernest Gagnon soient délégués pour 
représenter la société Royale à la réunion des Américanistes à Québec 
en septembre prochain. 


The committee on nominations reported as follows :— 
For President, Dr. Saunders. 

For Vice-President, Dr. 8. E. Dawson. 

For Honorary Secretary, Dr. James Fletcher. 

For Honorary Treasurer, Lawrence M. Lambe. 


Whereupon the following resolutions were passed unanimously: 

Moved by Dr. J. E. Roy, seconded by Mr. Léon ‘Gérin, and 
carried :— 

That Dr. William Saunders be elected President for the ensuing 


year. 
Moved by Sir Sandford Fleming, seconded by Sir James Grant, 


and carried :— 

That Dr. 8. E. Dawson be elected Vice-President for the ensu- 
ing year. 

Moved by Lt.-Col Denison, seconded by Dr. Girdwood, and 
carried :— 

That Dr. James Fletcher be elected Honorary Secretary for the 
ensuing year. 


PROCEEDINGS FOR 1906 XXXVII 


Moved by Dr. H. J. Morgan, seconded by Mr. Thos. Macfarlane, 


and carried :— 
That Mr. Lawrence Lambe be elected Honorary Treasurer for the 


ensuing year. 


No further business being brought forward the President then 
declared the twenty-fifth annual session closed. 


After the meeting closed the members attended the reception given 
at the Dominion Observatory and Experimental Farm by Mrs. Saunders 
and Mrs. King. The grounds and laboratories of the farm were thrown 
open for the inspection of visitors by permission of the Director. Dr. 
King, the Dominion Astronomer, conducted the Fellows over the new 
Observatory, and explained the complete and beautiful apparatus with 
which it has been provided by the Government. 


EVENING SESSION (Thursday, May 24.) 


At 8.15 p.m. the Fellows and delegates assembled at the Russell 
House at a dinner, at which the retiring president, Dr. Alex. Johnson, 
presided. 


anh aud iG) 
Pt ih Nia 


Nid : i fe i: Haan ie ‘hy ane 
nv. oe ; A fa si Hy th, ; ae PA 


ist if 


if DUC ve a nil i TE 
DA | DUT a ir 


APPENDIX A 


OUR SEMI JUBILEE AND CANADA 
By Pror. ALEXANDER JOHNSON, M.A., LL.D., D.C.L. 


President’s Address, May 22nd, 1906 


d 
TU 


à, trs fi 
7. A) 


1 
EU | : | 


+ = 


: fie ‘een a : nore) ET | | LaF | 
TARAS ACh, Oe TRS aCe: 


% 


ek he 


Hat à «1 wn. 7 ; 
ae eee. 
LL Um “4 
( LT : UN, 4 | 
J 7 an a 1 pa i 
ÿ: go se je vag ai a 
a 1 (AI: 0 LE 


Ve 
ba 
Py 

nh ; 


A ue 


1 
' » 
a 


a 
a 
we 


+ 
at Fi i 


ny En u en 


PRESIDENTS ADDRESS 


Our Semi-Jubilee has arrived, and it belongs to my office to speak of 
the Society, its origin, its objects, and its success. 

First, however, let me express with a warm heart, although with im- 
perfect words, the thanks which I feel that I owe to the society which 
has elected me to be its president at such an epoch in its history, the 
society which is itself representative of all that is highest and best, in 
the Literature and Science of the Dominion and is in sympathy with and 
supported by the lovers of knowledge and of intellectual culture, who 
have their more frequent gatherings for the same objects in the widely 
scattered local centres of this quarter of the empire. 

How did this Society originate? Not from any action of our own. 
Separation by long distances and other obstacles prevented mutual ac- 
quaintance and union in the past. I speak as one who was a University 
Professor long before the existence of the society. 


The Founder, the Duke of Argyll. 


But fortunately we had in 1881, as governor-general, a far-seeing 
statesman, then Marquis of Lorne, who could estimate rightly the future 
of this country and foresee its needs. Fortunately, too, when initiating 
the movement, he was able to call to his assistance in organizing the 
young society a man so wonderfully capable and energetic as the late Sir 
William Dawson. 

The idea was entirely that of the Marquis himself as Sir William 
tells us in his autobiography. Indeed Sir William says that his own pre- 
‘ference would have been for a purely scientific society like the Royal 
Society of London, but the Marquis had before him the thought of 
the French Institute also, in which literature has its place; and there 
is much to be said for his decision. 


Literature and Science. 


If I may speak as a member of our scientific division and on its be- 
half, we may acknowledge that, while we are all proud of the wonders 
science has done for mankind yet, if we compare its efforts for good or 
evil with the influence of literature, we find that while the amazing pro- 
ductions of science may bulk large before the eye at any one place or 
time yet a general view brings before us the transcendent powers of 
literature. The costly guns and equipment of a monster’ man-of-war 
dwarf the small and inexpensive flag that floats above it. But behind 


XLII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


the guns are only the fighting men of the ship while behind the flag are 
the sentiment and strength of an empire. This conviction, no doubt, 
prevailed with the founder of our society, although there were some 
practical considerations in favour of the limitation of the scheme to 
science, at least at the beginning. 


Sir William Dawson. 


Sir William accepted the views of the Marquis, and _ heartily 
co-operated in laying the foundations of a society with which, as he says 
himself, he hoped his name would ever be associated, as I associate it 
to-day. In testimony to the appreciation of his work, he was twice ap- 
pointed President, a unique honour in the society. 


Objects of the Society. 


It was intended to be the Parliament of Literature and 
Science for Canada, where the most eminent representatives from all the 
provinces could assemble for the promotion of both. It was to be a 
University for Universities where the teachers of teachers,and the investi- 
gators of truth, should themselves get new knowledge, while contributing 
the results of their researches and gaining fresh stimulus from the spirit 
of association. It was, in fine, to be the heart of knowledge and research, 
idriving the life-blood through the extremities and making it circulate 
through the whole of the Dominion. 

These were noble objects that the Duke of Argyll set before him. 
But more than this was evidently meant. 


The Two Languages. 


Such a society would bring together the leaders of thought and cul- 
ture jn both languages and by mutual acquaintance tend to promote 
mutual respect and regard. How successful it has been in this, I suppose 
we can all testify. I for one am greatly sensible how much both of 
benefit and pleasure I have derived from contact with the eminent men 
having French for their mother-tongue whom I have met here, some of 
whom have passed away, but whose names are not forgotten. 

It was sound statesmanship, even if we look for nothing higher to 
create two literary sections, one for each language, as a testimony to the 
belief in the permanent co-existence of both languages, and so diminish 
and help to remove à certain nervousness on the subject which is now 
fading away, if not wholly departed; but which I believe would not 


APPENDIX A XLII 


have arisen, if many could have had the same experience as I had some 
years ago; to my own great astonishment, I admit. 

It will be acknowledged that if the whole French-speaking popula- 
tion of Canada could be transferred to England and settled there within 
five or six hours of London, there would be much greater probability of 
the absorption of the French language than under present conditions. 
Well, you will find actually in that position, a people about the same in 
numbers, with a language and literature which are not English, and with 
an enthusiasm for their language and literature which is not exceeded 
anywhere; who have preserved both for more than six hundred years; a 
people who have great weight in the Imperial Parliament, and who are 
more than satisfied with their influence in it and in the Empire at large. 
Who are more loyal to the Empire than the Welsh? I might even say, . 
who more devoted, maintaining it with true Celtic fervour? It is their 
own. Nevertheless there is a large part of that people who cannot speak 
a word of English. Books will give you no conception of this fact. 
You must go and live in Wales for a short time to appreciate the reality. 

spent a month there, near the chief centre for English tourists, and 
yet I was sometimes obliged to use the language of signs alone to try to 
convey my requests; with varying results. The only part of a symbolical 
sentence that was an invariable success was the exhibition of the Queen’s 
profile on silver. 
Aid to the Government. 


There was a hope also that the Government would sometimes find the 
advice of the society useful within the society’s own field. That the re- 
presentatives of the people at large would take counsel with the repre- 
sentatives of that portion of the people who live on the hill nearer the 
sources of knowledge from which issue the descending streams that en- 
rich and beautify the practical life of the community. And this hope 
has been fulfilled. 


Courtesy and Official Action of the Government. 


It is an evidence of the success of our Canadian constitution that the 
Government elected by the people, has shown itself without distinction 
of party always ready to receive the representations of this society, wita 
ecurtesy, and while proceeding with deliberative caution, to act witn 
liberality when satisfied. 


Tidal and Hydrographic Surveys. 


This very day one of your committees has reported two instances 
under two separate governments, in which surveys have been established 
for the safety of Canadian navigation on the suggestions of this Society. 


XLIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Visit of the B.A.A.S. to Winnipeg. 


You have also a report before you showing with what quick apprecia- 
tion the present Prime Minister received a deputation from the Society 
jast year, and how promptly, after inquiry, he agreed to propose to Par- 
liament a handsome grant to enable us to have a visit from the British 
Association in Winnipeg. 


International Geological Congress. 


It will not be forgotten that in a previous year a similar request con- 
cerning a visit from the International Geological Congress, was received 
in a similar spirit and with equal, liberality. We can only regret that 
* the Congress could not come, and hope for better fortune on a future 
opportunity, after the visit of the B.A.A.S. to Winnipeg, which according 
to precedent, may be safely counted on in due course. 


Provision for Visits of Associations from other Countries. ¢ 


But how are we to make sure of a future opportunity? What 
everybody desires, everybody may expect his neighbour to get for him; 
and then every effort becomes a matter of chance; or again, two different 
desires may present themselves to two persons at the same time and then 
there may be a clash of efforts. That visits of associations like our own 
from other countries will be of great value to Canada and are thus very 
desirabley all feel; but how are we to get them if we have no system? 
Ought we not to put on some smali committee or on the Council, the 
responsibility of recommending to the society from time to time, at re 
gulated intervals, if possible, invitations for such visits ? 


Chance and not-chance. 


If not they will be left to chance. I speak with knowledge, for if 
I may be excused for mentioning the fact, it was due to chance that the 
movements for two meetings of the B.A.A.S. in Canada (out of three 
altogether), were initiated by the same individual, myself. One being 
for the meeting in Toronto in 1897, which was started by correspondence 
with leading men in Toronto immediately after my return from the 
Edinburgh meeting in 1892. The other for Winnipeg, as the Rev. Dr. 
Bryce very kindly indicated, when bringing forward the resolution last 
year in this society; I had been waiting for months previously to maka 
the suggestion to him at the meeting of the society, in connection with 
what is now the third city in population in Canada. How ably and 
successfully he has organized the movement we all know. I can there- 


APPENDIX A XLV 


fcre speak with conviction when I say chance, although the chances were 
perhaps increased by the fact that I was connected with both the R.S.C. 
and the B.A.A.S. as chairman of committees of both. 

What however is not a matter of chance but is due to the forethought 
of the Duke of Argyll, and to the corporate character of the society he 
founded, is, that a member who lived the retired life of a University 
Professor, sunk fathoms deep in lectures, as most professors were in ante- 
society days, and very many are now, should have had the opportunity 
to emerge occasionally, and through the gathering together of his col- 
leagues from all parts of Canada and the backing and encouragement 
which they gave him, should have been able twice to influence the 
Parliament to pass such large measures for the safety of our ships on 
both oceans, and of the lives of our sailors; and twice to initiate the 
movements for bringing across the Atlantic to Canada one of the 
greatest scientific associations of the world. 

Have we not here plain encouragement to members who from) their 
position see, and dislike to see, Canada lagging behind on any line of 
rational development, and are willing to undertake the laborious and 
often disheartening task of trying to quicken the action of the people and 
the government? 

Central Position of Canada. 


There is an additional and a strong reason Yor an amendment in our 
regulations or by-laws so as to make specific allotment of the responsi- 
bility I advocate. It is the central position of Canada in the Empire. 
I ‘have made an estimate of the time and expenses of travelling from 
London to Australia and New Zealand or vice versa and if any one els? 
will do the same, he will find that they are greater than to South Africa, 
and so great as to preclude, in géneral, visits of a body of University 
Professors to or from those countries. But professors from Australia 
and New Zealand could get to Winnipeg and back in the limited time at 
their disposal and, no doubt, they will be invited. Besides, and this is 
no small advantage, the American Association can, as on former occa- 
sions, so choose its place of meeting for the year, that visits may be in- 
terchanged to our mutual gain. We may hope therefore for more visits 
in the future than in the past and ought to make provision accordingly. 


Papers in the Transactions. 


So far I have spoken only of the corporate action of the society; of 
what it has been to do as a body. I should have liked, if it were 
possible, to give some sketch of an analytical classification of the mass 
of papers that have been published by the members during the 25 years. 


XLVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


But who could do this with such a variety of subjects? A list of the 
titles ; a full index, would be undoubtedly of great value, and would mark 
the epoch in a notable manner. ‘This, as you will see from the pro- 
gramme for the meeting, has been generously undertaken by the presi- 
cent of last year, M. B. Sulte, and for it we owe him our hearty thanks. 
But it must always be remembered, that the work of this society, 
meeting, as it does, only once a year, presents only a small part of the 
work done by its members. For a view of the whole we must look, not 
only in publishers’ lists, but in the magazines and journals of this and 
other countries, especially for papers whose prompt publication is neces- 
sary. We made a much needed amendment, last year, in our rules so 
as to secure more speedy publication, which will no doubt increase in 
suture, the number of papers in our Transactions; and to this I would 
call the attention of members who may not have noticed it. 

It would be practical proof of the value of a society of this character 
t> the members severally if we could conveniently collect their evidence, 
especially that of the senior members, who are able to contrast the past 
with the present; and submit even a summary. Perhaps it may be ob- 
tained in the future. Meanwhile I offer as a contribution my own ex- 
perience in this and other associations, as of one fully sensible of the con- 
trast between the ante-society days and the present time. 

# 
Principle of Verification. 


In preparing this matter, the great principle of verification, of which 
we all know the value for the establishment of truth, whether of hy- 
potheses, or theories, or quotations, or the meaning of words, in science 
or in literature, was strikingly brought before me, by instances of its 
neglect. Neglect too, in perhaps the least expected case, that of the 
iabours of Newton, “qui genus humanum ingenio superavit,” as the 
quotation from Lucretius, on his monument at Cambridge says, and the 
general verdict affirms. 

The first two instances that I shall submit, came in my way, quite 
casually, at the meeting of the American Association, in Montreal, in the 
same year as that of the foundation of this Society. 

The year after Newton’s death, a work entitled the “System of the 
World” and professing to be by him, was published, giving in English, 
a kind of popular account of his discoveries. Nearly 140 years after- 
wards, in 1867, doubts of its genuineness were expressed in Knight’s 
English Cyclopedia, but apparently no further inquiry was made. 
This book had been reprinted and bound up with an English transla- 
tion of the Principia, giving the impression that it was part of the Prin- 
cipia. A member of the American Association, having discovered in 


APPENDIX A XLVII 


the book a huge mathematical blunder in calculating the attraction of 
two spheres, very properly reported his discovery to the mathematical 
and physical section, and created a very lively discussion. 

By good fortune I had both books in my possession, the English 
“ System of the World,” dated 1731, and the Latin Principia in the 
standard edition of the present day. This proved that the former was 
no ipart of the | Principia, and the enormity of the blunder settled the 
question about genuineness raised in the Encyclopædia. Newton could 
not have made it. It was of the same character as that sometimes made 
by a school boy at an examinaition, when he calculates that the interest 
on $300 for 6 months at 6 per cent is about $72,000. 

I may add as exemplifying that science is independent of nationality, 
that the;jstandard edition spoken of, was a reprint of the edition pub- 
lished about twelve years after Newton’s death, with a commentary, also 
in Latin, by two Frenchmen, PP. Le Sueur and Jacquier, priests of the 
Gallican order of Minims, that it was edited by them at Rome, and 
dedicated to a French Cardinal, Rohan. 

The second instance occurred at the same meeting and was more in- 
teresting. or about thirty years previously English text-books on 
optics had been stating and even lamenting, especially after the inven- 
tion of the spectroscope, that Newton had never used the slit instead of 
the round hole for the admission of light on the prism in the formation 
of the spectrum. I happened to have a copy of Newton’s “Opticks” and 
knew tliat the statement was wrong. He mentions very particularly the 
edvantages of the slit. But I was afraid to write about the error. For, 
surely, I thought, there must be many eminent men of science in Eng- 
land who know of it, and if they think it unnecessary to make a correc- 
tion why should I interfere? It cannot be so common as it appears 
to be. 

The late Dr. Rowland, of Johns Hopkins’ University happened to be 
exhibiting his concave gratings with their beautiful effects in the resolu- 
tion of the spectrum, when a prominent scientific man, after prolonged 
inspection, expressed the usual regret about Newton. After that, 1 
-immediately wrote a short note to a weekly scientific magazine; but with 
no result apparently. I subsequently repeated Newton’s experiments 
in Newton’s manner exactly, and submitted a paper thereon to this 
Society showing that it was absolutely impossible to avoid seeing the dark 
lines, although Newton makes no mention of them. In books published 
since that time the statement has been given correctly. 

Why Newton didn’t see the lines may be explained either by the fact 
that he trusted to an assistant of whom he speaks or that the quality of 
his glass was bad, possibly obstructing somewhat the passage of the light, 


XLVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


and scattering it internally. It would appear also that for about 70 
years after Newton’s death nobody repeated his experiments or else the 
glass was bad, and the lines were not discovered until Wollaston’s time. 
His paper was published in the Philosophical Transactions in 1802. 

Although quotations from the “Opticks” are not very uncommon it 
would jappear from the next instance I shall produce that’ the book ts 
difficult of access. It would be a benefit to science if some wealthy 
American University were to reprint so famous a work, a model of clear- 
ness and accurate experiment. 


Newton and Herbert Spencer. 


This third instance occurred a few years earlier, when Herbert 
Spencer was led to put his opinions directly in opposition to those of 
Newton, in Natural Philosophy itself, through a mistake about the 
meaning of a word in the Principia, which would have been avoided 
had the “ Opticks ” been consulted. Newton calls the laws of motion 
“axioms”; Spencer, evidently having in his mind the ordinary use of 
the word axiom in the modern editions of Euclid, as meaning a self- 
evident proposition, insisted that Newton employed it in this sense. 

An inspiriting discussion in print followed which ended by Spencer’s 
acknowledging that Newton attached a different meaning to the word. 
The proof was obtained from Newton’s letters, and in the whole 
discussion no reference was made to the “ Opticks.” Yet a glance at the 
book would have ended the debate. Newton begins it with definitions 
and axioms. The “axioms” are the Laws of “Reflexion and Refraction,” 
and these, as some school boys know, are established by experiment solely. 
Spencer says that Newton “ gives the word axiom a sense widely unlike 
the sense in which it is usually accepted,” implying perhaps some 
censure on Newton. If “usually” means usually at the present day, 
Spencer is correct. But is it possible he can have forgotten that a word 
may change its meaning with the lapse of time? A very brief inquiry 
would have shown that Newton used the word accurately both in the 
“ Opticks ” and the “ Principia.” No deeper research is required than 
turning over the leaves of Liddell and Scott to find that it was employed 
by Aristotle to signify “that which is assumed as a basis of demonstra- 
tion ;” for “ assumption ” in short, or “ postulate;” the root idea being 
that of worthiness, something worthy of acceptance without disputation. 
Nor is Euclid responsible for the word, since he didn’t use it and is thus 
doubly free from the charge of calling his principle about parallel lines 
“ self-evident.” 

The question arose in a controversy between Herbert Spencer and 
Prof. Tait. The latter in his Thermodynamics asserts that Natural 


APPENDIX A XLIX 


Philosophy is an experimental and not an intuitive science. “No à priori 
reasoning can conduct us demonstratively to a single physical truth.” 

“T hold, on the contrary,” says Spencer “that as there are a priori 
“mathematical truths the consciousness of wnich results, not from our 
“ individual experiences, but from the organized and inherited effects of 
“ancestral experiences, received throughout an immeasurable past; so 
“there are à priori physical truths, our consciousness of which has a like 
“origin. I have endeavoured to show that Prof. Tait himself by say- 
“ing of physical axioms that the appropriately cultivated intelligence 
“sees at once their necessary truth, tacitly classes them with mathema- 
“tical axioms of which this self-evidence is also the recognized character. 
“ Further I have contended that the Laws of Motion are a priori truths 
“of this kind; are enunciated by Newton as such ”—Spencer then goes 
on to quote Tait’s reason for asserting that the Laws of Motion are not to 
be accepted as valid à priori. “The reason is that as the properties of 
“matter might have been such as to render a totally different set of laws 
‘axiomatic, these laws must be considered as resting on observation and 
“ experiment, and not on intuitive perception.” This is also the opinion 
of Newton as expressed in his letters. If Herbert Spencer had ever 
lectured to a class of students on the Second Law of Motion he might 
have been tempted to explain their want of intuitive perception of its a 
priori truth by a limitation of the “immeasurable past” in their 
“ ancestral experiences,” and put the origin of man as recent. 

The position of Spencer in the disputation was like that of an army 
which while fighting the enemy in front is unexpectedly assailed in the 
flank by a force called in as an auxiliary. But Spencer did not quail. 
He faced the new foe with undaunted courage, supported probably by 
the conviction that while his adversary seemed to be on his own territory 
of Physics, he was on the very verge, if he had not actually crossed the 
boundary line of Metaphysics, a department which borders on all the 
Physical and Natural sciences, and appears to have to some students in 
these departments the fascinating advantage for polemic purposes of a 
general absence of axioms (i.e., of propositions universally admitted). 
Hence combatants with differing opinions can each choose his own 
axioms i.e assumptions, to support his own views, and confound adver- 
saries. Much logomachy may thus leave general satisfaction. No one 


is confuted. Alchemy. 


Passing on from a consideration of the uses of the Society to recent 
progress in science, in which Canada like all the rest of the world, is in- 
terested; and more perhaps, than most of it, in one division of the do- 
main of Physics, we shall come casually on other rather surprising in- 

Proc., 1906. 4. 


L ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


stances of this neglect of verification. We meet also an exemplification 
of the epigram that it is the unexpected that happens. 

Who could have expected that this advance would have brought us 
again to the old and apparently dead question of alchemy? The name 
and (the subject had been both handed over long ago to the romancists, 
as a degitimate province in which they might work their magic, by in- 
troducing Hermes Trismegistus, and the Philosopher’s Stone, and the 
“ Adepts ”, as for example the “ Adept” depicted by Scott in “ Kenil- 
worth.” 

Sixteen centuries back, the Roman Emperor Diocletian commanded 
that all books on Alchemy should be burnt; but he did not thereby kill 
out man’s greed for gain, or spirit of inquiry. Unbroken ill-success for 
many ages, however, produced the natural effect of despair. The his- 
tcrian Gibbon commenting on the fact says, “ Philosophy with the aid 
‘< of experience, has at length banished the study.” In this he expressed 
the general opinion that prevailed for more than a century. 


A similar opinion ‘was otherwise indicated by a comparatively recent 
writer, when, referring to the famous Friar Bacon, who lived nearly 
seven centuries from the present time, he said “ Notwithstanding the 
“great learning and scientific acquirements of Bacon he was deeply im- 
“bued with the mystery of Alchemy: this is the more remarkable, 
“ because he exposes the absurdity of believing in magic, necromancy or 
“charms.” The writer classes alchemy among the “ absurdities.” The 
reputation of the celebrated friar will, however, be increased, to-day, in- 
stead of lessened by his differing opinion. 

The prevailing opinion was not universal. One of the problems of 
the Alchemists was the transmutation of the baser metals into gold, and 
we know that both Boyle and Newton believed that this was attainable. 


Boyle made experiments, one of which by its apparent approximation 
t» success so alarmed Newton that he advised concealment. This may 
have been because of a statute of Henry IV, which forbade “ the multi- 
plying of gold and silver.” Certain it is that not long before his death 
Boyle procured the repeal of the statute in order to remove an obstacie 
from the path of others. Newton himself continued his experiments to 
a late period of his life. When he was a young man, about 26 years or 
age, he wrote to a young friend of his own, who was going to the Con- 
tinent, and asked him particularly to make observations on mines and 
mining, and “the extracting of metals or minerals out of their ores,” 
to learn if there were any transmutation out of one species into another, 
such transmutations, he adds, being “the most luciferous and many 
“times lucriferous experiments, too, in philosophy.” 


APPENDIX A LT 


Dr. George Wilson, brother of the late Sir Daniel Wilson, of 
Toronto University, in his essay on Boyle, published about the middle ot 
the last century, remarks that there is no à priori objection to the possi- 
bility of transmutation as there is to the possibility of a self-sustaining 
perpetual motion. “It may be realized any day ” he says. 

It has been partially realized to-day, to the extent, that is, that na- 
ture has been discovered working transformations of some of the chemical 
elements, and science is now eagerly inquiring to how many elements the 
process extends. But no one has yet learned to imitate the powers ot 
nature in this respect. 


Greek Atomic Theory. 


As consequences of these discoveries, two erroneous opinions have got 
abroad; one, of a vague popular character, that a fatal defect has been 
found in the basis of chemistry; the other, more definite, that the old 
Atomic Theory has been disestablished, and the death-knell of the Atom 
rung. A slight sketch may show that these opinions have no sufficient 
foundation. 

| It may occur to any one who has noticed a stone ground to powder 
or a drop of water subdivided to the cover of a pin-point, to inquire how 
far the subdivision can be carried. The question is not limited to what 
can be seen by the naked eye, or detected by the most powerful micro- 
scope but extends beyond the region of sight to what can be inferred by 
sound reasoning from careful observations. 


It is, as Newton put it, and as Lord Kelvin re-states it, not a 
question whether we can imagine the subdivision to go on for ever, but 
a practical question, whether, using the forces of Nature at our com- 
mand, we come eventually to an end of subdivision, and have something 
indivisible, an atom. No one has ever seen an atom, and from the 
nature of light itself, there is no hope that we shall ever invent an 
instrument which will enable us to see it. Still we may safely infer 
the existence of atoms even though a procession of ciphers headed by 
unity, giving the number that would extend over the twenty-fifth part 
of an inch, should not help the imagination much to picture their 
smallness. 

Sir John Herschel asserts that the idea of the atom is an absolute 
necessity of the “ thinking mind, and is of all ages and nations.” 

Whewell in his “ History of Scientific Ideas ” says:—“ The doctrine 
“that matter consists of minute, simple, indivisible, indestructible 
“ particles as its ultimate elements has been current in ali ages and all 
“ countries wherever the tendency of man to wide and subtle speculation 
“has been active.” 


LII .ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The progress of modern science has tended to produce a strong 
conviction of the truth of the theory.—The phenomena of diffusion in 
liquids and gases, for example, tend to show that. they not only consist 
of particles, but that these particles are in constant motion. As an 
example in solids we have that remarkable experiment of Roberts-Aus- 
ten, in which a cylinder of lead was placed on top of a cylinder of 
gold, and left for a considerable time in a warm chamber; when taken 
and examined gold was found diffused throughout the lead, particles of 
this the heavier metal having risen upwards as if they had wings. 

It is certain that the theory, which long preceded the dawn of 
experimental science, came to modern Europe from Ancient Greece and 
it has been traced even to India. Strabo who lived in the reigns of 
the Roman emperors, Augustus and Tiberius, says that its author was 
Mochus or Moschus, of whom he speaks vaguely as more ancient than 
the Trojan war. This would make the Greek Theory not less than 
three thousand years old and will mark it off from Dalton’s Atomic 
Theory which came inte being only a century ago. 

We have more definite statements about Democritus as author of 
the Atomic Theory and before him of Leucippus, although the writings 
of neither survive. Lucretius, the contemporary of Cicero, expounded it 
in his great poem “De Rerum Natura”—Thus it was transmitted to 
modern times, and became familiar. Newton gives it a compact shape. 
Dalton had firm faith in it. 


Dalton’s Atomic Theory. 


From the emphasis with which Dr. George Wilson writes in his 
account of Dalton’s “ Life and Discoveries,” it would almost seem as if 
he had foreseen the mistakes made about Dalton’s Atomic Theory to-day. 
He says, and re-iterates, that Dalton was an Atomist before he was a 
Chemist—that he joined the Greek Atomic Theory, which he found in 
lexistence, with the Chemical Laws of combining proportions, but that 
the laws rested on a perfectly independent basis of experiment—that it 
was unnecessary to concede to Dalton’s atoms the attribute of indivisi- 
bility, and that Dalton’s contemporaries, Davy, Wollaston, Berzelius, 
declined to employ the word atom, because it assumed indivisibility, and 
that they substituted other words. In short, that the Greek Atomic 
Theory and the Chemical Laws are independent one of the other. That 
if the link forged by Dalton between the Greek Theory and the Experi- 
mental Laws be broken, the Experimental Laws are absolutely secure, 
while the Theory must stand or fall by its own merits. 

This expresses exactly the position to-day. The link has been 
broken. ‘The existence of bodies much smaller than those presented to 


APPENDIX A LIII 


us by Dalton as ultimate particles, as atoms, has been proved by Prof. 
J. J. Thomson of Cambridge; and the so-called atoms themselves are 
found to be complex systems masquerading as simple bodies; and 
are indeed gigantic impostors compared with their little successors. 


Newton and Wilson. 


But this does not detract from the genius and merit of Dalton, for 
which Wilson expresses great admiration, and is so far carried away that 
he does, unwittingly, a great injustice to Newton. 

In contrasting the earlier views of the Atomic Theory with those of 
Dalton he takes Newton as representative, and quotes from the fourth edi- 
tion of his “Opticks” as follows :—“All things considered” says Newton, 
“it seems probable that God in the beginning, formed matter in solid, 
“massy, hard, impenetrable, movable particles of such sizes, figures, 
“and with such other properties, and in such proportion to space, as 
* most conduced to the end for which he formed them; and that these 
“primitive particles, being solids, are incomparably harder than any 
“porous bodies compounded of them, even so very hard as never to wear 
“or break to pieces, no ordinary power being able to divide what God 
“made one in the first creation.” 

On this extract Wilson remarks :— 

“ Newton, it will be observed, says nothing concerning the weight of 
“his primitive particles.”—“<It is here that Dalton introducing the 
“ question of weight, leaves Newton behind, and takes not a step, but 
“a stride, in advance of all previous speculators on atomics.” 

Wilson has overlooked the word “ massy,” i.e. having mass, chosen 
carefully by Newton, and a very much better word in one respect than 
“weighty ” or any other referring to weight, for if these “ primitive 
particles” were removed to the Sun or any of the heavenly bodies or 
even to different parts of the Earth their weight would change, while 
their mass would be unchanged. Newton had proved by experiments 
that at a given place mass was proportional to weight (a fact ignored by 
many approved text-books on Mechanics in Wilson’s time). That the 
omission by Newton of weignt from the essential properties of particles 
was deliberate is seen by reference to the “ Regule Philosophandi” where 
he states, repeats, and re-iterates the five properties, extension, hardness, 
impenetrability, mobility, and “vis inertiæ ;” subsequently saying that he 
by no means affirms (“minime affirmo”) that gravity is essential to bodies, 
but “vis inertie ” or “vis insita”’ as it is elsewhere called, is immu- 
table. This “vis insita” he states in the Definitions is always propor- 
tional to the mass. It may also be noted that Newton does not use the 


LIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


word “atoms” but speaks of the smallest parts (“‘ partes minimas ”). 
He also employs the term undivided, not indivisible—“‘partes indivisae. ’ 

Wilson appears to have regarded the word “massy” in the “Opticks” 
as redundant, yet if it be omitted, we have only four essential properties 
instead of the five given in the “ Principia.” 

Dalton’s genius was as quickly recognized on the Continent as in 
England, perhaps even more quickly. His experience on a visit to France 
presents another instance of noble generosity among lovers of Science. 
He was so warmly welcomed by the members of the French Institute, 
and so much more honoured than among his own countryman that on 
his return home, although not given to express his feelings, he said, 
“Tf any Englishman has reason to be proud of his reception in France, 
I am that one.” 


Present View of the Atom. Transformation of Matter. 


The latest advance in the study of the constitution of matter 1s that 
the Daltonian atom is of a very complex nature, a kind of infinitesimal 
planetary system in itself, which in the case of some, at least, of the 
chemical elements, seventy or so in number, is breaking up by its own 
internal energy, projecting a number of particles, and, after a series 
of steps, exhibiting a veritable transformation of one element into 
another. In this manner uranium is the parent of radium, and radium 
is the parent, of helium. Further changes are the subject of eager 
investigation which is now in rapid and breathless progress. 

Many in Canada are engaged in the research, which had its origin 
a few years ago in the investigations that followed the discovery of the 
X rays, which are now so familiar to us all, and so startled us at first 
in exhibiting the skeleton of the hand of a living man. 

Ten years ago Henri Becquerel of Paris discovered that uranium 
could produce in the dark, what, for want of a better word may be 
called photographic effects similar to those of the X-rays; the explana- 
tion being that uranium is constantly sending off invisible radiations, 
i.e. streams of particles, whose acticn is thus made visible. 

M. and Mme. Curie, undertaking a patient examination of all the 
chemical elements in search for any with similar properties discovered 
radium in 1898. 

The extraordinary phenomena exhibited by this and certain other 
elements, were linked together by the theory already given which had_ 
its birth in Canada and has been accepted generally throughout the 
scientific world. Its authors were Dr. Rutherford and Mr. Soddy. 
Canada unfortunately has been unable to retain Mr. Soddy, but after 
going to England his work in the same direction bore good fruit; for 


APPENDIX A LV 


he and Sir William Ramsay co-operating were able to verify a prediction 
of Dr. Rutherford’s. They saw the spectrum of helium grow out of the 
spectrum of the emanation of radium, i.e., an actual transformation of 
matter took place before their eyes. Dr. Rutherford had based his 
prediction on the fact that helium is found on the earth only in con- 
nection with elements that emit the radiations which have been here 
spoken of. 

Other transformations have been since observed. More surprising, 
perhaps, because not anticipated, even in speculation, was the discovery, 
three years ago by M. Curie and M. Laborde, of the enormous amount 
of energy latent in the atom of radium and released by its disintegration ; 
an amount sufficient to reconcile the divergent views of Physics and 
Geology on questions connected with the Sun’s heat. 

The accidental deatn of M. Curie a month ago in Paris must be 
a cause of regret to lovers of Science, while the severance of the 
remarkable partnership in heart and mind of those who by their scientitic 
eminence, whether separately or in co-operation, have became familiar 
to all as “the two Curies” and have been known in ordinary life as 
M. and Mme. Curie must touch all hearts. 


Comparison of Recent Advances in Physical Science. 


In briefly noting the advance in one department of Physical Science 
since the foundation of the Society, I will take for a standard of com- 
parison, Prof. Tait’s work published in 1876 on the then “ Recent Ad- 
vances in Physical Science.” 

It had long been established, by means of the balance, that in spite 
of appearances, as in the case of a burning candle, it was impossible to 
destroy matter, just as it was impossible to create it. This principle of 
indestructibility is often called the “ Conservation of Matter.” 

If we define “energy” as the capacity of doing work—such work 
as engineers delight in—and measure it, the companion principle of the 
“ Conservation of Energy” asserts that it is impossible to increase or 
diminish the quantity of energy in the Universe. This principle was 
established about the middle of the last century. 

But while the quantity of energy cannot be increased or diminished, 
the form is readily changed as when a water-fall is used to drive street- 
cars, or to supply electric light or heat. The Transformation of Energy 
was fully accepted along with its Conservation. To this there was 
however at the time of Tait’s book no companion principle for matter, 
or as Tait puts it “ The laws of enerzy differ from those of matter in 
“one most important respect, so far at least as we yet know by experi- 


LVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


“ ment. Matter cannot so far as we know be transmuted from one 
“ kind to another, though in some cases it assumes what is called au 
“allotropic form. The great characteristic of energy, on the cther 
“hand, is that, in general, we can readily transform it, (in fact it is 
“of use solely because it can be transformed), but in all its transfor- 
“mations the quantity remains precisely the same.” 

It will be observed that Tait is very cautious in his wording, “So 
far as we yet know,” he says. His caution is justified. For here a 
distinct advance has been made in proving the transformation of some 
lands of matter, and a vast field of inquiry has been opened. 


Dissipation of Matter. 


The inquiry itself suggests another companion principle whose cor- 
relation may be indicated by the term Dissipation of Matter (a term I 
have not yet come across), corresponding to what Lord Kelvin called the 
“ Dissipation of Energy.” This latter prjnciple points out that “every 
“ time a transformation takes place, there is always a tendency to pass, at 
“least in part, from a higher or more easily transformable to a lower 
“ or less easily transformable form. 

“Thus the energy of the universe, is on the whole, constantly 
“passing from higher to lower forms.” The low form to which it 
seems to tend being “that of uniformly diffused heat.” 

A quotation farther on, will again offer us a comparison of “ then ” 
and “now.” “Thus,” he says, “so far as we can yet determine in 
“the far distant future of the universe, the quantities of matter and 
“energy will remain absolutely as they now are.” (“Then” and “Now” 
agree in this; they differ in the next clause, viz.)—“ the matter un- 
changed alike in quantity and quality ;— the energy also unchanged in 
quantity, but entirely transformed in quality to the low form of uni- 
formly diffused heat.” 

Now the recent discoveries show that the transformations of matter 
which are going on in nature, are so far as observed, from “higher to 
lower forms ” to use Tait’s terms. 

If then the principle, should, by a process of exhaustion, be proved 
to be general and the lowest form be ascertained, we shall have the 
companion principle and shall be able to say that in the far distant future 
of the universe noz only will all energy be reduced to uniformly diffused 
heat but all matter to its lowest form. 

This further permits the possibility of the supposition that some of 
the nebulae visible to us, instead of being the beginnings of new suns or 
planets, may, in fact, be the wreckage of worlds or world-systems like 
our own floating im the illimitable ocean of space. 


APPENDIX A LVII 


When observers, then, are watching the projection of streams of 
particles from the matter around us, they may be really watching the 
wasting away of our world. This reminds me of an account I have 
read of a sailor in an old and leaky troop-ship on a long voyage who 
used to go down to the hold, and watching the tiny jets of water spurt- 
ing ‘in through the minute holes in the thin worn sides, try to estimate 
how long the vessel would last. 

If this Trilogy of principles, Conservation, Transformation, Dissi- 
pation, should be finally established for Matter, as they have been 
established for Energy, the further question would arise whether, as the 
energy we speak of is always associated with matter, the expressions for 
them could not be united in one simple form. 

Tait referring to the Dissipation of Energy, proceeds further to 
say “as it alone is able to lead us—to the necessary future of the universe 
“i.e., if physical laws for ever remain unchanged, so it enables us dis- 
“tinctly to say, that the present order of things has not been evolved 
“through infinite past time by the agency of laws now at work, but 
“must have had a distinctive beginning, a state beyond which we are 
“utterly unable to penetrate, a state in fact that must have been pro- 
“ duced by other than the now visibly acting Causes.” 


Cicero, Herschel, Clerk-Mazwell, on Atoms. 

This leads us to an aspect of the theory of atoms which can hardly 
be passed, cver. 

Cicero in his “ De Natura Deorum,” Bk. I, represents Cotta, the 
Academic, speaking of the “absurdities in which Democritus, or before 
him Leucippus, used to indulge, saying that there are certain light cor- 
puscles, some smooth, some round, some square, some crooked and bent 
as bows, which by a fortuitous concourse made heaven and earth, without 
the influence of any natural power.” In the second book Balbus, the 
Stoic says, that he who could believe in the action of this fortuitous 
concourse, might believe as well that a number of metal letters could 
by being thrown to the ground, compose a history, e.g. the Annals of 
Ennius. 

Sir John Herschel, in his discourse on Natural Philosophy, with 
the resources of modern science at his command, puts this in another 
light, and his argument is not affected by recent discoveries. 

“The discoveries of modern chemistry,” he says, have gone far to 
“establish the truth of an opinion entertained by some of the ancients, 
“that the universe consists of distinct, separate, indivisible atoms or 
“individual things, so minute as to escape our senses, except when 
“united by millions, and by this aggregation making up bodies of even 


LVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


“the smallest visible bulk; and we have the strongest evidence that 
“although there exist great and essential differences in individuals 
“among these atoms they may yet be arranged in a very limited number 
“of groups and classes, all the individuals of each of which are, to all 
“intents and purposes, exactly alike in all their properties. 

“ Now when we see a great number of things precisely alike, we do 
“not believe this similarity to have originated except from a common 
“principle independent of them, and that we recognize this likeness 
“ chiefly by the identity of their deportment under similar circumstances 
“strengthens rather than weakens the conclusion. 

“A line of spinning jennies, or a regiment of soldiers dressed 
“exactly alike, and going through precisely the same evolutions, gives us 
“no idea of independent existence, we must see them act out of concert, 
“before we can believe them to have independent wills and properties 
“not impressed on them from without. And this conclusion which 
“would be strong even were only two individuals precisely alike in all 
“respects, and for ever, acquires irresistible force when their number 
“is multiplied beyond the power of imagination to conceive. If we 
“mistake not, then, the discoveries alluded to, destroy the idea of an 
‘eternal self-existent-matter, by giving to each of its atoms, the essential 
“ characters, at once, of a manufactured article, and a subordinate agent.” 

It will be another illustration of Herschel’s argument if we sup- 
pose that the minute-hand of every clock on a line of railway from the 
Atlantic to the Pacific always points to the same minute at the same 
moment, for then we know that there must be a controlling clock pro- 
ducing this effect by an electric currént, and behind this controlling 
clock a controlling mind. 

If instead of hundreds of clocks, we knew that there were count- 
less millions of millions of clocks throughout the universe beating to- 
gether, the argument would be the stronger. 

Now although we have not clocks, the vibrations of whose pendulums 
are kept in unison, we have vibrating bodies in numbers transcending 
our power of imagination, which vibrate in exactly the same time 
throughout the universe. It is Clerk-Maxwell’s illustration. We know 
by the spectroscope, that chemical elements which may be examined in 
this room, and which exist over all the earth, are to be found also in the 
Sun and in the most distant stars, stars so distant that news from them 
flying with the velocity of light, takes ages of ages to reach us, innumer- 
able stars, at immeasurable distances in all directions, above, below, 
around us; yet in all these heavenly bodies the countless molecules of 
the element hydrogen, make their quick vibrations in exactly the same 
period as those on earth, with a perfection of exactitude that no clock 
of man’s construction can approach. 


APPENDIX A LIX 
Haeckel. 


Contrast with this, the views put forth in a book entitled: “The 
Riddle of the Universe,’ by the eminent German biologist, Professor 
Haeckel, a translation of which has been recently published and has, at 
present, a wide circulation. In it he gravely offers us, the hypothesis 
that every atom has in itself the rudiments of life and mind. Is this 
- a relief to the strain of mystery? Sometimes, no doubt, obscurity is 
relieved by a flash of darkness, yet we are not grateful. As a comment 
I shall simply quote an extract from the Presidential Address of Sir 
George Stokes to the British Association. 


Sir George Stokes. 


“When from the phenomena of life we pass to those of mind, we 
“enter a region still more profoundly mystericus. Science can be ex- 
“pected to do but little to aid us here, since the instrument of research 
“is itself the object of investigation. It can but enlighten us as to the 
“depth of our ignorance and lead us to look to a higher aid for that 
‘which most concerns our well-being.” 


Haeckel versus Newton 


I should hardly have alluded to Haeckel had it not been that through 
unpardonable want of care, he is led to make a charge against Newton 
which is the very reverse of the truth. His object is to disparage 
Newton’s intellectual capacity, Newton’s opinions being diametrically 
opposed to his own. Mere railing at an advocate is not confutation of 
his arguments, and is sometimes a confession of defeat. We may have 
here a touchstone of Haeckel’s qualifications as a guide. He cannot 
justly complain if the same kind of test is applied to himself which he 
tries to apply to Newton. 

If aman gives dogmatic opinions on colours,who is proved by an easy 
test, to be colour blind, he will not be taken as pilot for a steamship. 
Ii a diviner or seer finds himself unexpectedly put in gaol for breach of 
the laws, a loss of reputation for his prophecies may be expected. If 
a man adopts without verification an hypothesis readily proved 
to be false, and on that as an axiom illogically builds other ‘hypotheses 
ito the damage of an opponent’s reputation, want of confidence in his 
capacity as a theory-builder is @ priori justifiable. 

It is in this way that Professor Haeckel has treated Newton, whose 
great fame he admits. On page 217 of the recently published New York 
edition, he writes :— 

“Newton had the immortal merit of establishing the law of gravita- 
“ tion and embodying it in an indisputable mathematical formula. 


LX ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


“ Action at a distance without a medium, which Newton deduced from 
“his law of gravitation, and which became one of the most serious and 
‘ most dangerous dogmas of later physics, does not afford the slightest 
“explanation of the causes of attraction; indeed it long obstructed 
“cur way to the real discovery of them. I cannot but suspect that his 
“ speculations on this mysterious action at a distance, contributed not a 
“little to the leading of the great English mathematician into the ob- 
“scure labyrinth of mystic dreams and theistic superstition in which he 
“passed the last thirty-four years of his life.” 

“Mystic dreams” and “ theistic superstition ” is Haeckel’s answer 
to Newton’s noble hymn to the Creator at the close of the immortal 
“ Principia.” 

Compare with this Newton’s expression of his views in a letter to 
Fentley, quoted with approval by Faraday, and again, by Sir George 
Stokes. ‘The fiery indignation which is felt in Newton s words, even 
after the lapse of two centuries would have burnt itself into the memory 
oi any man who had taken care enough to consult Newton himself for 
Newton’s own thoughts instead of taking, without verification, any ver- 
sion presented in a passing publication. 

These are his words :— 

“That gravity should be innate, inherent, and essential to matter 
“so that one body may act on another at a distance through a vacuum 
“ without the mediation of anything else, by and through which their 
“action and force may be conveyed from one to another, is to me so 
“ great an absurdity that I believe no man who has in philosophical mat- 
“ters a competent faculty of thinking, can ever fall into it.” 


Indian Atomic Theory. 


It has been asserted that the atomic theory really had its origin in 
Tndia, and Democritus, who inherited great wealth from his father is said 
t have travellad to India, so that his views on atoms may have been 
modified there. 

Of this Indian atomic theory Max Müller gives an account when 
writing of the Six Philosophical Systems of India. The distinguishing 
feature of one of these systems was the Atomic Theory—which maintains 
that there must be smallest particles admitting no further analysis— 
that these smallest and invisible particles are eternal in themselves, but 
non-eternal as aggregates—that as aggregates again, they may be or- 
ganized or inorganic. The atoms are supposed first to form an aggre- 
gate of two, then of three double atoms, then of four triple atoms, ete. 
While single atoms are indestructible, composite atoms are, by their 
very nature, liable to decomposition, and in that sense to destruction. 


2 


APPENDIX A LXI 


The theory even made an estimate of ‘the size of the atom, as being 
about one-sixth of that of the motes that dance in a sunbeam. 

This recalls by the error of the scale, an early Greek estimate of 
the size of the sun as being about that of the Peloponnesus. 

The Indian system of philosophy which advocates the atomic 
theory differs, toto cϾlo, from that of Democritus, expounded by Lucre- 
tius, in this respect, that it offers proofs of the existence of God, and of 
His omnipotence and omniscience, while the other 1s atheistic. 


Origin of the Name of Canada. 


Their direct opposition on this point has given rise in my mind to 
an interesting historical question, which I hope will prove interesting 
also ito the literary division of our Society, to whom I propose to hand 
it over for examination, viz., was this Indian atomic theory along with 
the name of its author known in Europe at the time when the first ad- 
venturers were exploring the American continent, the time of the revival 
of learning. If so,;we may have the solution of a problem which has 
been the cause of much dispute, namely the origin of the name given to 
a small district in America, concerning which almost the only point 
of agreement is, that it is Indian. The name has been extended since. 

There might be a similar question concerning Pocahontas County 
in Virginia, if every one did not know the love story of Pocahontas. 
Few would recognize the name of a philosopner, if similarly applieu. 

But among the scholars of those days the works of Lucretius would 
be well known for the beauty of his poetry, and, to use the term chosen 
by George Henry Lewes, the ‘ offensive” character of his opinions; and 
correspondingly great would be their satisfaction in finding an older 
authority on atoms who strongly maintained the doctrine of a Supreme 
Intelligent Ruler of the Universe. | 

Now, remembering that Columbus and the early explorers, for many 
years after him, believed that they had actually reached India, (a name 
that in those days covered a large part of China as well as what we now 
call India) : remembering also the fervid religious zeal by which many of 
these explorers were animated, is there anything impossible in the sup- 
position that, ,hearing of this Indian philosopher, and believing they 
had reached his country, they should give his name to some part of it? 
The name of the Indian philosopher was Canada. 

Canada spelt with a C or a K, as in many Indian words and names, 
e.g., Cabul, Candahar, or English words as Kathode, Katherine, Kalen- 
dar, or America itself, which in some European languages is spelt with 
a K. Canada exactly as we have it on our postcards, requiring mn 
twisting or hacking of the stem to get the familiar form. 


LXII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


In submitting this hypothesis for verification I may say that I have 
gone mo farther myself, than noting that the first Greek edition, the 
“editio princeps”’ of the classical work of Arrian, the Roman prefect 
oi Cappadocia, on India, was printed in the very year in which Jacques 
Cartier first ascended the St. Lawrence. This may be a mere coinci- 
dence, but it seems to encourage investigation. A Latin translation had 
been published not long before. Every source of information about 
India was of course, keenly scrutinized in those days, and as Arrian was 
also a celebrated writer on philosophy (the Stoic philosophy) the asso- 
ciation of ideas even if there were no other cause, would direct attention 
to Indian philosophy. 

The suggested inquiry may be limited at first to the question whether 
a knowledge of the name of the Indian philosopher and of his philosophy 
did exist or could have existed in Europe (more especially in France), 
at the beginning of the 16th century. 

It might be impossible ‘to trace the course by which it travelled 
from India; just as we are unable to recover the history of the great 
debt whichiscience owes to India in the invention of what are called the 
Arabic numerals, with their wonderful superiority to the Greek and 
Roman characters in their facilities for calculation. Yet we are sure 
that the knowledge percolated through from India, whether by mer- 
chants, or travellers, or writings. The shape of the figures themselves 
is a testimony, from the resemblance they bear to the initial letters of 
the corresponding Sanskrit names for the numbers. 


New light will be welcomed. Only two derivations, so far as 1 
know, have hitherto been in vogue; the first from an original signifying 
“nothing there ”—which is disrespectful to the country—the other 
from an Indian word meaning “ village,” which is disrespectful to the 
inventive faculties of the discoverers. Neither has been accepted with 
favour, and both are now, in effect, buried in polite oblivion. The field 
is, therefore, open for fresh attempts.1 

Whatever be the outcome of the inquiry, it is certain that when we 
look on a map of the world, we find written broad across the forehead of 
‘America, the name of an Indian philosopher, the reputed author, and 


1 The suggestion that the name “ Canada” might possibly, like the term 
“Indian” have been imported from India through Europe, has brought out 
an additional example of the value of the personal meetings in societies like 
the R. S. C. The impression on my mind concerning the various deriva- 
tions proposed, given above, was derived from such books as those of 
Archbishop Trench, Isaac Taylor, etc. At the meeting, after the address, 
my attention was directed to the new and attractive work of Dr. 8S. E. Daw- 
son, “The Saint Lawrence,” published only last year, in which the native 
origin of the name is advocated. 


“ 


APPENDIX A LXIII 


undoubted teacher of the Atomic Theory, a man who in far distant and 
dark ages, reasoned out the belief in an Omnipotent and Ominiscient 
God: and held the harmony of science and religion; a position main- 
tained to this day, by our greatest men of science, not only by Newton, 
but by such men as Lord Kelvin, Sir John Herschel and Sir George 
Stokes, Maxwell and Faraday,— the name of Canada. 


> 1 


APPENDIX B 


ACT OF INCORPORATION 


Proc., 1906. 5. 


ACT OF INCORPORATION. 
46 Vicroria, CHAP. 46. 


An Act to Incorporate the Royal Society of Canada. 
[Assented to 25th May, 1883. ] 


WHEREAS the persons hereinafter mentioned have, by their 
petition, represented that a Society called, with the sanction of Her 
Most Gracious Majesty the Queen, “ The Royal Society of Canada,” 
has been founded in Canada by His Excellency the Right Honourable 
the Marquis of Lorne, Governor-General of Canada; that the said 
Society has been maintained for some months by the petitioners and 
others, and that the objects of the said Society are:—first, to encourage 
studies and investigations in literature and science; secondly, to pub- 
lish transactions annually or semi-annually, containing the minutes of 
proceedings at meetings, records of the work performed, original papers 
and memoirs of merit, and such other documents as may be deemed 
worthy of publication; thirdly, to offer prizes or other inducements 
for valuable papers on subjects relating to Canada and to aid researches 
already begun and carried so far as to render their ultimate value 
probable; fourthly, to assist in the collection of specimens with a view 
to the formation of a Canadian Museum of archives, ethnology, arche- 
ology and natural history: and whereas the said petitioners have prayed 
that, for the better attainment of the said objects, the Society may be 
incorporated by Act of the Parliament of Canada, and it is expedient 
to grant the prayer of the said petition: Therefore Her Majesty, by 
and with the advice and consent of the Senate and House of Commons 
of Canada, enacts as follows :— 

1. J. W. Dawson, C.M.G., LL.D., F.R.S., President; the Honour- 
P. J. O. Chauveau, LL.D., Docteur ès Lettres, Vice-President; 

. M. LeMoine, Esquire, Daniel Wilson, LL.D., F.R.S.E., T. Sterry 
Je LD, FRS, AR. Co Selwyn, LL.D: TRS. Presidents of 
Sections ; Becher de St. Maurice, Esquire, Charles Carel M.A., 
George Lawson, Ph.D., LL.D., Vice-Presidents of Sections; J. G. 
Bourinot, F.S.S., Honorary Secretary; J. A. Grant, M.D., F.G.S., 
Honorary Treasurer; Goldwin Smith, D.C.L., the Reverend Abbé 
Bégin, D.D., the Reverend Abbé Bois, Napoleon Bourassa, Esquire, 
the Reverend Abbé Casgrain, Docteur és Lettres, Paul DeCazes, Esquire, 
Oscar Dunn, Esquire, the Honourable Hector Fabre, Louis H. Fréchette, 
LL.D., Napoleon LeGendre, Esquire, Pamphile Lemay, Esquire, the Hon- 
ourable F. G. Marchand, Joseph Marmette, Esquire, the Honourable 
Mr. Justice Routhier, Docteur és Lettres, Benjamin Sulte, Esquire, 
the Reverend Abbé Tanguay, Joseph Tassé, Esquire, the Reverend Abbé 


LX VIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Verreau, Docteur ès Lettres, R. Maurice Bucke, M.D., the Reverend 
/Eneas McDonell Dawson, Lieutenant-Colonel G. T. Denison, B.C.L., 
the Very Reverend G. M. Grant, D.D., William Kirby, Esquire, John 
L’Espérance, Esquire, Charles Lindsey, Esquire, the Reverend W. 
Lyall, LL.D., George Murray, B.A., the Reverend J. Clark Murray, 
LL.D., Evan McColl, Esquire, John Reade, Esquire, Charles Sangster, 
Esquire, George Stewart (the younger), Esquire, Alpheus Todd, C.M.G., 
LL.D., J. Watson, M.A., LL.D., G. Paxton Young, M.A., C. Bail- 
largé, C.E., Herbert A. Bayne, Esquire, E. J. Chapman, Ph.D., LL.D., 
J. B. Cherriman, M.A., E. Deville, C.E., N. F. Dupuis, M.A., F.R.S.E., 
Sandford Fleming, C.M.G., C.E., P. Fortin, M.D., G. P. Girdwood, 
M.D., F. N. Gisborne, M. Inst. C.E., E. Haanel, Ph.D., the Very 
Reverend T, E. Hamel, M.A., B. J. Harrington, B.A., Ph.D., G. C. 
Hoffmann, F.1.C., A. Johnson, LL.D., J. T. Loudon, M.A., T. Macfar- 
lane, M.E., J. G. McGregor, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.E., L. W. Bailey, M.A., 
Ph.D., Robert Bell, M.D., C.E., F.G.S., G. M. Dawson, D.S., A.R.S.M., 
F.G.S., Edwin Gilpin, M.A., F.G.S., J. Bernard Gilpin, M.D., M.R.C.S., 
the Reverend D. Honeyman, D.C.L., J. M. Jones, F.L.S., the Reverend 
Professor J. C. K. Laflamme, D.D., J. Macoun, M.A., F.L.S., G. F-. 
Matthew, M.A., Alexander Murray, C.M.G., F.G.S., W. Osler, M.D., 
W. Saunders, Esquire, D. N. St. Cyr, Esquire, J. F. Whiteaves, F.G.S., 
and R. Ramsay Wright, M.A., B.Sc., together with such other persons 
as now are or may hereafter become members of the Society to be 
hereby incorporated, under the provisions of this Act and the by-laws 
made under the authority thereof, and their successors, shall be and 
are hereby constituted a body politic and corporate, by the name of 
“The Royal Society of Canada,” hereinafter called the Society, and 
may, by any legal title, acquire, hold and enjoy, for the use of the 
Society, any property whatever, real or personal, and may alienate, 
sell and dispose of the same, or any part thereof, from time to time 
and as occasion may require, and other property, real or personal, may 
acquire instead thereof: Provided always, that the annual value of 
the real estate held at any one time for the actual use of the Society 
shall not exceed four thousand dollars. 

2. The Society shall not hold any property except as aforesaid 
and such as shall be derived from the following sources, that is to 
say: the life, annual and other subscriptions of members, donations, 
bequests or legacies made to the Society, and such other moneys or 
property as may be acquired by and from the ordinary transactions 
of the Society, or may now belong to the existing Society, and the 
moneys arising from fines and forfeitures lawfully imposed by their 
by-laws: Provided always, that the Society shall sell and convey any 


APPENDIX B LXIX 


real estate acquired by them under the provisions of this section within 
ten years after they shall have acquired the same, unless the same be 
required for the actual use of the Society, under the provisions of the 
next preceding section. 

3. The affairs and business of the Society shall be managed by 
such officers and committees, and under such restrictions, touching 
the powers and duties of such officers and committees, as by by-law 
in that behalf the Society may, from time to time ordain; and the 
Society may assign to any of such officers such remuneration as they 
deem requisite. 

4, The Society may make such by-laws, not contrary to law, as 
they shall deem expedient for the administration and government of 
the Society, and may repeal, amend or re-enact the same from time 
to time, observing always, however, such formalities as by such by-laws, 
or by the by-laws now in force, may be prescribed to that end, and 
generally shall have all the corporate powers necessary for the purposes 
of this Act. 

5. The present by-laws of the existing Society, not being contrary 
to law, shall be the by-laws of the Society hereby constituted, until they 
shall be repealed or altered as aforesaid, 

6. Until others shall be elected according to the by-laws of the 
Society, the present officers of the existing Society shall be those of 
the Society. 

7. All subscriptions and all penalties due to the Society under 
any by-law, may be recovered by suit in the name of the Society; but 
any member may withdraw therefrom at any time, on payment of all 
amounts by him due to the Society, inclusive of his subscription for 
the year then current, and shall, upon such withdrawal and payment 
of amounts due, cease to be a member of the Society. 

8. No person otherwise competent to be a witness in any suit 
or prosecution in which the Society may be engaged, shall be deemed 
incompetent to be such witness by reason of his being or having been 
a member or officer of the Society. 

9. The Society shall make annual reports to the Governor-General 
and to both Houses of Parliament, containing a general statement of 
the affairs of the Society, which said reports shall be presented within 
the first twenty days of every Session of Parliament. 


APPENDEEC 


BIOLOGICAL STATIONS 


MARINE BIOLOGICAL STATION. 


This important scientific station, maintained by the Dominion Gov- 
ernment under the direction of the Department of Marine and Fisheries, 
was located during the past year (1905) at Gaspé, in the Province of 
Quebec. The director of the station (Professor Prince) was detained 
by pressing duties as chairman of the British Columbia Fisheries Com- 
mission, and the Georgian Bay Fisheries Commission, and was prevented 
from spending any time at Gaspé, but it was anticipated that the duties 
of acting director would have been fulfilled by Professor E. W. 
MacBride, of McGill University, in the absence of Professor Ramsay 
Wright, Toronto University, who was in attendance at the Hellenic Con- 
gress in Athens. Dr. Joseph Stafford, lecturer on zoology, McGill 
University, took charge of the season’s work when Professor MacBride 
found that he could not visit Gaspé. The staff during the season in- 
ciuded Professor James Fowler, LL.D., etc., Queen’s University; Mr. 
J. C. Simpson, B.A., McGill University; Dr. Etherington, Queen’s Uni- 
versity, Kingston; A. Bruce Macallum, Toronto University, and Mr. J. 
McIntosh, B.A., Toronto University. Dr. Stafford at the close of the 
season was able to report that he had had “a very good year on the whole, 
and knew the ground well for next season’s work.” Professor Fowler 
made a very thorough study of the remarkable botanical features of the 
Gaspé peninsula, and his report will almost certainly include a number 
of species new to our Atlantic flora, if not new to science. Dr. Stafford 
continued his valuable faunistic survey, and will be able to add con- 
siderably to the list of marine invertebrates which is now in the press. 
He also continued his original researches on the breeding and life-his- 
ftory of edible molluscs, including à survey of the results of the oyster 
experiments carried on at Malpeque during the years 1903 and 1904, 
upon which Professor Ramsay Wright has an important report in pre- 
paration. The crustacea of the locality and a study of ‘the hydroid 
forms, which contribute so largely to the food of fishes in the sea, occu- 
pied various members of the staff. Mr. Simpson carried on most suc- 
cessful investigations upon the protozoa of the Gaspé waters, and has 
in progress a valuable account of these minute and lowly animals upon 
which larval fishes to a considerable extent subsist. On August 29th, 
the laboratory was honoured by a visit from the late Hon. Raymond 
Préfontaine, who was accompanied by the Deputy Minister and the In- 
spector of Fisheries for the Gulf division (Dr. Wakeham). Lack of 
a suitable dredging steamer and gear prevented the carrying out of 
deep-sea investigations, and the examinations of the great fishing banks 
in the Gulf, but it is anticipated that a vessel will be told off to assist 
in this work, which urgently calls for attention. Considerable addi- 


APPENDIX C LXXIII 


tions have been made to the library of the station; but many lacunue 
remain to be filled, especially works dealing with marine faunas. 

The opening of large whaling stations on the north shore of the St. 
Lawrence will, it is expected, enable the staff of the station to collect 
much interesting information respecting the structure and habits of 
whales, their food, breeding resorts, and seasonal migrations. These 
valuable creatures are difficult to study in their native habitats; but the 
whaling establishments licensed by the Government, and operating fer 
the first time during the past year (1905) afford rare opportunities for 
gaining information, and making studies on some of the more obscure 
points in the structure of different species of the whale order. 

Arrangements were made for testing the Sahlstrôm method of pre- 
serving fish in a fresh condition at the station. Mr. C. Sahlstrom 
explained to the director (Professor Prince) his vacuum process, though 
the details have not yet been made public. The late Minister of 
Marine and Fisheries evince] great interest in the project, which it is 
claimed will preserve freshly-caught fish in a sweet unchanged condition 
for many months. Circumstances made it necessary to erect the 
apparatus at Halifax, N.S.; but the samples of preserved haddock, etc., 
submitted to the director of the station were pronounced wonderfully 
well-preserved, the texture of the flesh being firm and unaltered, and the 
edible qualities excellent; but the external appearance of the fish was 
not inviting and could no doubt be improved. 

The activity in the prosecution of practical fishery work and ori- 
ginal scientific investigation by the station’s staff has continued un- 
abated, and the second part of the “Contributions to Canadian 
Biology ” with ten beautiful plates is in the King’s Printer’s hands in 
an advanced condition, and will be ready for issue at an early date. 
The nature of these reports, constituting the second part of these “Con- 
tributions,” has already been announced; but a delay which arose in 
completing the series permitted of some additional reports being in- 
cluded, and the publication will embrace:—‘ The Plankton of Eastern 
Nova Scotia waters ” by Prof. R. R. Wright, with seven beautiful plates: 
“The question of Sawdust and Fish-life,’ a further report and a final 
report by Professor Knight, also “ Effects of Dynamite Explosions on 
Fish-life,” by Professor Knight; “The Flora of Canso,” by Professor 
Fowler; “ Fauna of the Atlantic coast,’ by Dr. Stafford; and “ Trema- 
tode Parasites of Marine Fishes,” by the same; “ Diatoms of Canso 
Harbour.” by Dr. A. II. MacKay; “ Life-history of herring, ale-wife, 
shad, ete.” by Professor Prince, with three tinted plates; “The Polyzsa 
and Fishes of Canso,” by Mr. Cornish; “ Sea-weeds of Canso,” by Prir- 
cipal Robinson; and Professor Prince’s account of Dr. Macallum’s re- 
searches upon the composition of jelly fishes. 


LXXIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


THE GEORGIAN BAY , BIOLOGICAL STATION. 


The Georgian Bay Biological Station was open for biological study 
from June 5th and the following gentlemen were in attendance during 
the whole or part of the season: Dr. B. Arthur Bensley, curator of the 
sta.ion, Mr. A. G. Huntsman, B.A., University of Toronto; Mr. I. R. 
Bell and Mr. J. R. G. Murray, science students of Toronto University. 

A destructive windstorm early in July so seriously damaged the 
dwelling where the staff are accommodated, that it was found impossible 
to carry out the plan of affording facilities for scientific Work to masters 
in various schools, and the proposed invitation was withdrawn. 

In view of the importance of the black bass in the waters of western 
Ontario, and the general indications of its serious decline, a good deal 
of attention was devoted to that valuable species. Eggs were gathered 
and incubated in shallow vessels in the laboratory. The various stages 
were carefully studied, and accurate drawings were made by Mr. 
Murray, the young being retained for study until two centimetres in 
length. Special attention was given to the food of the larval bass, and 
plankton hauls in the vicinity of the station were made in order to as- 
certain the nature of the food available for the young during the firs. 
stages of active life. Preserved specimens of the young and of the 
minute floating food in the adjacent waters were added to the collection 
in the station, indeed, the nucleus of a valuable fisheries museum has 
been already secured, which will be available for Government purposes 
when required. Later in the season faunistic investigations were re- 
sumed, and Messrs. Bell and Murray devoted their attention to the 
analysis of the material obtained, while Mr. Huntsman made periodic 
visits in company with the fishermen to the fishing grounds. ‘The 
rebuilding of the dwelling for the staff, the erection of a verandah, and 
the construction of a small wharf, are recommended for this season, 
while a small gasolene launch and two small boats will be necessary in 
order to enable the staff to overtake the important fishery investigatiors 
urgently awaiting attention. 


Tha) DEN RENE MD TETE PART ALES + 
anne TE AE i WALA VA NA GS 
Roni A LG 
vd 
_ 
"4 


APPENDIX D 


SURVEY OF TIDES AND CURRENTS 


SURVEY OF TIDES AND CURRENTS. 


This survey, under the charge of Dr. W. B. Dawson, has made 
continuous progress. The periods of observation on which the tide 
tables are based are being continually augmented, to improve their 
accuracy. Much is also being done to enhance the accuracy of the tidal 
data for the St. Lawrence, by further observations and by working up 
tidal information secured incidentally by other surveys. In this way, 
special tide tables are prepared for the points in the river which are still 
the shallowest, until the dredging operations, now in progress, are 
completed. 

The chief advance this year, has been in British Columbia; and as 
several points of general interest present themselves, we may confine our 
review to that coast. 

Owing to the planning and directing of tidal work on the St. Law- 
rence and the Atlantic coast, and the investigations of currents, during 
the-earlier years of this survey, it has not been possible for Dr. Dawson 
t visit the Pacific coast until the summer of this year. Some headway 
has already been made, however, in the publication of tide tables for 
ports in British Columbia and the commencement of tidal observations. 

There is still a large part of the coast of British Columbia which 
is dependent upon the United States tide tables, which is far from 
satisfactory; as it is thus necessary to compute our tides and currents 
from some distant port in Alaska, or from a harbour where the tide 
is of a distinctly different type, such as Port Townsend. Hence our 
Canadian tide tables already meet with much appreciation. 

It is very evident that a large number of the industries on this coast 
will always be dependent upon water transport, as it would not be pos- 
sible for a railway to compete with water carriage where the choice 
exisis. ‘This coast has a greater advantage than almost any other in the 
world for coastal trade, with its series of sheltered inlets and channels 
storming gigantic natural canals which extend the whole length of the 
seaboard and cut deeply in toward the interior, for the admission of 
traffic and supplies, and return freight. 

To take advantage of all this, the tides and currents must be 
known. This is indeed of more importance to navigation than anything 
else, when once the coasts themselves are charted; as no other aids to 
navigation can make up to a captain for not knowing which way the cur- 
rent is setting his vessel. 

On a coast of such extent and with so many local complications in 
its tides, it is necessary to devise a comprehensive scheme which will 


LXXVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


form a general basis for the details required locally. With this view, 
the coast may be divided into three regions, (1) the Strait of Georgia, 
(2) the northern coast to Port Simpson, (3) the outer coast of Van- 
couver Island. In this scheme, the Strait of Fuca must be considered 
as an additional region, already commanded by Victoria for which tide 
tables are published. 

To command these various regions, there are three tide gauges 
which have been in operation in the past; and six new tidal stations 
have been erected last season which need not be described in detail. 

The strong tidal currents which are found in so many of the passes 
and inlets are evidently occasioned by the rise and fall of the tide; but 
it should not be over-looked that their strength is chiefly due to th: 
difference of the time cf high or low water in the two directions. It is 
thus clear that the tide is the basis of the current; and also that correc: 
time for the observations is an essential of the first importance. This 
is one of the chief difficulties on the coast; and it has been found 
necessary to use chronometers, or to erect special instruments by which 
the time can be obtained directly from the sun. 

To summarize the results aimed at, it may be said in brief that the 
time of the tide is the basis of all knowledge of currents and slack 
water; while the height of the tide is chiefly of importance in harbours 
for the construction of wharfs, dredging, the outfall of sewers and all 
such questions. 

The main object of this survey, as a branch of the Marine Depart- 
ment, is to deal with the time of the tide; since this is the matter of chief 
importance to navigation; and the question of levels, even though they 
are indispensable for the purposes above mentioned, must remain 
secondary. In the strong tidal currents of British Columbia, it is in- 
formation ias to the time of slack water that is most wanted by the 
mariner. But the value of reliable levels, which can only be obtained 
from tidal observations, makes it seem right to take the additional 
trouble necessary to secure them. The opportunity of this season, has 
enabled the results with regard to datum planes and bench-marks to be 
published in a complete form, up to the stage now reached. 

There is good hope now that a sound basis is laid for the tidal in- 
formation required in the province, for the tide itself, the currents, and 
the levels which result from a continuous tidal record. No doubt there 
will be need in future for much detail work where channels and passages 
are so numerous and that there are so many local variations, but on the 
general plan adopted the apparent complications should disappear whea 
the results are systematically worked out. 


APPENDIX D LXXIX 


Character of the Pacific tide—-In all parts of the world, the tides 
are found to accord with the varying movements and distances of the 
moon and the sun. In the North Atlantic, where they were first studied, 
it happens that they are chiefly influenced by the moon’s phases. It was 
thus supposed that the primary characteristic of all tides was a marked 
alternation in height from springs to neaps in the period of the synodic 
menth. 

The tide of the Pacific, however, can best be described as a declina- 
tion-tide. Its leading feature is a pronounced diurnal inequality im 
time and height, which accords with the declination of the moon; ard 
this is also subject to an annual variation with the change in the declina- 
tion of the sun. The period in which the diurnal inequality recurs is 
the tropical or declination-month, of 27.2 days; which is shorter than 
the synodic month and gradually falls back through its period in suc- 
cessive months. As the solar influence is unusually large in the Pacific 
relatively to the lunar; the annual variation is the more accentuated. 

On the opea coast of the Pacific, the tide curve is still fairly regu- 
lar, though showing the diurnal inequality strongly. But in the 
Strait of Fuca and the region of the Strait of Georgia, which makes up 
half the coast line in British Columbia and where all the more 1m- 
portant harbours are situated, the appearance of the tide curve is 
anom lous. ‘The high waters are nearly at the same level: and the 
range depends.on the amount of fall to low water, which may be almost 
inappreciable or very pronounced. During the greater part of the day, 
there may thus be a long stand or only a slight fluctuation near the 
high-water level; with a sharp and short drop to the lower low water 
which occurs once in the day. This type only changes to a fairly sym- 
metrical curve when the moon is on the equator near the time of the 
ecuinoxes. 

The spring and neap tides are thus reduced to a secondary feature 
which is usually obscured by the stronger characteristics of the tide. 
The Establishment, which is so well marked in the Atlantic, is here 
almost illusory; unless it is strictly reduced to equinoxial and equatorial 
£onditions, in a:co dance with the definition u:el in France. It may 
still be convenient to speak of spring and neap tides, if they are under- 
stood to mean the two maxima and the two minima in range or in level 
which always occur in the period of the lunar month. But the two 
highest and the two lowest points on the tide curve for the month, may 
be as much as five days before or after the full or new moon, as these 
extremes are so largely occasioned by the diurnal inequality. 


LXXX ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The extreme tides of the year necessarily occur at the nearest point 
to the solstices at which the moon reaches its maximum declination. 

A tide of this character is apt to be termed irregular by the 
mariner; as the tropical or declination-month which is its governing 
period is less familiar and less noticeable than the synodic month of the 
moon’s phases. It is evident, however, that this tide is perfectly as- 
tronomical; and its analysis and prediction are just as definite as for 
any other type of tide. 

Mean Sea Level.—With a tide of this type, there is a notable differ- 
ence between the half-tide level, and the true value of mean sea level. 
These may differ as much as a foot from each other, even in the case of 
a tide whose extreme range is only 13 feet. ‘The only accurate value 
therefore, is the mean ordinate found by the integration of the tide 
curve, referred to any invariable base line or datum. This mean or- 
dinate fixes the position of the horizontal line which bisects the area of 
the tide curve; and this also accords with the best definition of mean 
sea level for any type of tide. 

The advantage of a registering tide gauge is much emphasised, 
with tides of this character. If scale readings are taken by direct ob- 
servation, which the Admiralty surveyors usually prefer, they must 
be continuous, day and night, and afterwards plotted as a curve; or little 
use can be made of them except for the reduction of soundings. A 
registering tide gauge not only gives the hourly ordinates of the tide 
curve throughout the year as a basis for mean sea level, but the con- 
tinuity of the record enables the diurnal inequality to be followed. 
When this is known, the average and extreme levels of high and low 
water, and questions of range, can be determined without fear of in- 
accuracy. The continuous record is equally important with respect 
to the time of the tide, in which there is a similar inequality of interval. 

The question of mean sea level is of unusual interest on the Pacific 
coast, as there is reason to believe that its elevation is changing. Some 
indications point to a rise in the level of the coast, at as high a rate 
as one or two feet per century. It is only from tidal observations pro- 
perly reduced, that any trustworthy result can be arrived at; and if 
the change is as rapid as supposed, it will not require an interval of 
many years to obtain a fair approximation to its amount. 


SEC IND) xe VEC 


REPORTS OF ASSOCIATED SOCIETIES 


‘ 


Proc. 1906. 6 


7 ee i okies 


Ve 


en 


ae 


TS 


so 


1 HA ( ies 
un V1 
e 
ay ¥ | 
rig } 
(a € ; xe ay PA 
PAL Te RENAN OR se Dr en 
1 a \ ; 
A * 
# i 
i 
p - CS A CERN 
ie ~ ‘ ak bh " 
Ri we 4 À L ear es +R PA LE ÿ 
i vit ram EN ; ‘ : 
| TANT ay à | / = b 
A i A ah L ay oe | VON LE 1e MEL UD QUE alu 1 ms CON CRE 
ER ENET hs , : LS APN PRE PTS 
yey airs 1 eit) ul aes Hp 
Un Vi 
14 ks 
r ZA io 
As à f 
+ “ À 
À 
1 1 
| 
f > 
| ‘ 
| Cul ty Le 
LE 
1} . 
i 
- æ L 
er 
, ( 
. v 4 - 
Ÿ A ab | 
i ‘ i « 
J'EN nd : | x 
‘ : 
i ; 
7 Lu - L 
aa , 7 i 
EN ; 
ry 
\ i 
: on , 
r 
‘ 
\ 7 
3 
A - \ 
j uk 
} l Me 
“at ¥ 1 nl 


APPENDIX E LXXXIII 


L— From The Women’s Canadian Historical Society of Ottawa, 
through Mrs. O’Connor. 


In presenting our report before the Royal Society of Ottawa, we 
are glad to record an increased activity in the furtherance of the aims 
and objects of the Society, with an augmented membership and larger 
attendance at the regular monthly meeetings. During the year seven 
general and six executive meetings have been held at the home of the 
president, and our treasurer reports a balance of $26.93. The April 
meeting was devoted to the business of arranging for a Loan Exhibit, 
to be held in October, in the new Public Library, which was then 
expected to be opened in July. The delayed completion of the Library 
postponed the date of this exhibition from month to month, till after 
the March meeting it was finally decided to defer the undertaking till 
next autumn, when the Society resumes its work. The following 
papers were read :— 

“The Early Settlement of Hull,’ Mme LeLièvre. 

“ Canada’s Contribution to the International Exhibition of 1900,” 
Mrs. W. P. Davis. 

“ Champlain,” a sketch, Mrs. Grant Needham. 

“ A Canadian Heroine of 60 years ago,” Miss Carnochan, president 
Niagara Historical Society. | 

“Letter from Japan,” by a former member of the Society now resi- 
dent in Japan, Miss Sara MacLean. 

“Tmpressions of a visit to Prince Edward Island, with a brief 
historical sketch of the Island,’ Mrs. Ahearn. 

“ Biographical Sketch with readings from the poems of Isabella 
Vallency Crawford,” Mrs. J. L. McDougall, Jr.. 

“ Some Facts about Trinity Church, St. John,” Miss Carrie Hill. 

Good work was done by the Biographical and Scrap-book commit- 
tees under the conveners, Mrs. J. L. McDougall and Miss Mary Masson, 
the former having in preparation a paper on the life of the late Miss 
Harmon. The third scrap-book is in charge of Mrs. Patrick, during 
Miss Read’s absence abroad. 

Our society has given its hearty sympathy and support to the efforts 
cf the Ontario societies to preserve the old fort in Toronto from obliter- 
ation, and Mrs. Geo. E. Foster, one of our vice-presidents, represented 
the Ottawa society at a conference of historical and patriotic societies 
with the military and municipal officials at Toronto, having this pur- 
pose in view. In December Mrs. Ralph Jones’ resignation was reluc- 
tantly accepted and Mrs. Braddish Billings was elected to fill the office. 
At the beginning of the year, with the Loan Exhibition in view, it 
was decided to omit the children’s meeting, which has for some years 


LXXXIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


past formed part of the season’s work. Our president, Mrs. Ahearn, 
and Mrs. Chas. O’Connor, recording secretary, were appointed delegates 
to the annual meeting of the Royal Society. To our list of honorary 
members we have added the name of Mr. Martin Griffin, and with our 
list of active members considerably increased this year, we now look 
forward confidently to a year of increased usefulness and activity in 
the beautiful rooms of the Ottawa Public Library, in which we are 
privileged to meet by kind permission of the library committee. 


II. From The Ottawa Literary and Scientific Society, through 
Mr. A. H. WHITCHER. 


Having been appointed delegate from the Ottawa Literary and 
Scientific Society to this annual meeting of your Society, I have the 
honour to present a brief report relative to the status of our society 
during the year ending March 31, 1906. 

Increased activity, interest in the work, large average attendance 
at council meetings, of which fifteen were held during the year, are 
some of the features of a prosperous year; I think I may say, one of 
the most prosperous years in the history of the society. 

233 volumes have been added to the library, being a greater num- 
ber than for several previous years. The total number of books in the 
library is now 5,190. In the purchase of books particular attention 
has been paid to our own Canadian history. 

The society receives many valuable exchanges from many societies 
scattered over the world, and the published transactions of the society 
have been given in return. Several sets of the transactions have been 
printed and provision has been made for the issue of another volume. 

The number of exchanges received is 374. These exchanges pos- 
sess great value for students in all branches of science. 

The lecture course for the winter was much appreciated as was 
evidenced by the large attendance. All the lectures were free to the 
public. 

The following is the programme :— 

1905. 

Nov. 10.—* Tolstoy and his Message,” Mr. Ernest H. Crosby, of New 
York. 

Nov. 24.— Before Port Arthur,’ Mr. W. Richmond Smith, late war 
correspondent of London Standard. 

Dec. 1.— Jerusalem,” illustrated, Mr. J. S. Ewart, K.C. 

Dec. S—“%The Canadian Militia under the French Régime,” Mr. 
Benjamin Sulte, F.R.S.C. 


APPENDIX E LXXXV 


1906. 
Jan. 5.—“The Genius of English, Irish, Scottish and Welsh Song,” 
Prof. E. E. Prince, F.R.S.C., with musical illustrations. 
Jan. 19.—“ Place of Defence in Canadian National Life,” Mr. C. 
Frederick Hamilton, M.A. 
Feb. 2.—Conversazione, Addresses by the President, Dr. T. B. Flint, 
and Canon Kittson, musical programme. 
Feb. 23.—““ Scandinavia Revisited,’ Mr. Thos. Macfarlane, F.R.S.C. 
with musical Hlustrations. 
Mar. 2.—“The Southern Trail in British Columbia,’ Mr. J. M. 
Macoun. 
At the annual meeting of the society, on the 27th ultimo, the 
following officers and members of the council were elected for the ensu- 
ing year :— 
President—Dr. Otto Klotz. 
1st Vice-President—Dr. T. B. Flint. 
2nd Vice-President—Mr. A. H. Whitcher. 
Secretary—Mr. J. C. Martin. 
Treasurer—Mr. H. J. Bronskill. 
Librarian—Mr. W. H. Harrington. 
Curator—Mr. C. H. Scott. 
Members of Council without office—Dr. Charles Morse, Mr. Thos. 
Macfarlane, Mr. H. H. Bhigh. K.C. 


III.—From The Natural History Society of New Brunswick, through 
the Hon. Senator ELLis. 


On behalf of the council and members of the Natural History 
Society of New Brunswick I have the honour to present the following 
report :— 

Members of our society are still actively engaged along lies of 
original investigation and their labours have been very successful, they 
having been fortunate enough to discover some new plants in the 
Dadoxylon Sandstone, and which are fully described in the bulletin of 
the society for 1905. 

During the year the work of the society has progressed in every 
department; the lectures of the various courses having been well 
attended and they have evoked considerable interest. 

Several of the papers read before the society have been published 
in the annual bulletin, which is larger than usual, and which I have 
the honour to present to the Royal Society. 


LXXXVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Ten regular meetings, including the annual and one special meet- 
ing, were held during the year. 
The following are the dates of the meetings and the titles of the 
papers read :— 
Jan. 3.—(a) “ Birds that Hunt and are Hunted,” by Mr. A. Gordon 
Leavitt. 
(b) “ Additions to the List of New Brunswick Plants,” by 
G. U. Hay, D'Seé 
(c) “The Curious Phenomenon of a Forest Fire near 
Neguac, Northumberland Co.” by W. F. Ganong, 
Pir): 
Jan. 17.—Annual Meeting. Election of Officers. 
Feb. V%.—(a) “The Magdalen Islands; their People and History,” 
by Mr. W. F. Hatheway. 
(b) “ Physiography of Grand Lake and its Affluents,” by 
Mr. W. 8. Butler. 
(c) “ On the Limits of the Great Miramichi Fire in 1825,” 
by W. F. Ganong, Ph.D. 
(a) “Pain,” by G. G. Melvin, M.D. 
(b) “ Archeological Notes,” by Mr. S. W. Kain. 
(c) “On Contour Map of New Brunswick,” by W. F. 
Ganong, Ph.D. 
April 4.—(a)“ Notes on our Insect Collection,” by Mr. Wm. 
McIntosh. 
(b) “ Notes on a Grindstone Quarry at Stonehaven, Glou- 
cester Co.” by Geoffrey Stead, C.E. 
(c) “On the Fact Basis of the Fire or Phantom Ship of 
Bay Chaleur” W. F. Ganong, Ph.D. 
(d) “ Notes on our Fishes,” Mr. C. F. B. Rowe. 
May %—(a)“ The Natural History and Physiography of New Bruns- 
wick,” by W.F. Ganong, Ph.D. 
(b) “ Bird Notes,” by Mr. J. W. Banks. 
June 6.—(a) “The Hydrography of New Brunswick,” by Mr. J. W. 
Bailey. 
(b) “ Geology of Rockwood Park,” by G. F. Matthew, D.Sc. 
Oct. 3.— Vegetation of the Earth in Remote Times and its Relation 
to Climate,” by G. F. Matthew,. D.Sc. 
Nov. %—“ Gypsum Deposits of Albert Co.” by L. W. Bailey, Ph.D. 
Dec. %—“‘ The Physiographic Characteristics of the Tracadie River; 
On the Height and other Characteristics of Wilkin- 
son Mountain; On Walrus Bones from Miscou 
Island,” by W. F. Ganong, Ph.D. 


Marit: 


APPENDIX E LXXXVII 


A series of elementary lectures or talks was given in the rooms 
on Tuesday evenings, not occupied by the regular meetings of the 
Society during the months of January, February and March, for the 
benefit of the ordinary and associate members, and for pupils of the 
publie schools. These lectures proved very interesting and were fairly 
well attended. 


The following were the dates and the titles of the papers read :— 

Jan. 10 and 24.—“ The Elements of New Brunswick Geology,’ Dr. 
G. F. Matthew. 

Jan. 31.—<% A Preliminary Talk on Plant Life,’ by Mr. Thomas Stot- 
hart. 

Feb. 14 and 21:—“ The Trees of New Brunswick,” by Dr. (a. U. Hay. 

Feb. 28.—“ On Bird Classification,” by Mr, A. Gordon Leavitt. 

Mar. 14.—“ On Types of Insects,” by Mr. Wm. McIntosh. 

Mar. 21 and 28.—“‘ On Fishes, Reptiles, and Frogs,’ by Mr. Chas. 
F. B. Rowe. 


Throughout the year the Ladies’ Association heartily co-operated 
in the work of the society, giving their assistance on all occasions. 
The following course of lectures opened with a re-union on Thursday, 
January 5th. There was a large attendance of members. 


Jan. 12.—“ Emerson and Nature,” by Mrs. Emma S. Fiske. 
19.— Scenes in Rome and Naples,” by Mrs. George Murray. 
26.—< Glimpses of a Quaint Old German Town,” by Miss Homer. 
Feb. 2.—Children’s Day — Nuts, by Miss Ethel Jarvis. 
9.—“ Notes on China,” by Mrs. James R. Warner, and Miss 
Purves. 
16.—* Scenes from the Life of Huxley,” by Mrs. G. F. Matthew. 
23.—“ Some Relics of the French Occupation of Acadia,” by Miss 
Alice D. Jack. 
Mar. 2.—Children’s Day— Our Feathered Friends,” by Mr. A. Gor- 
| don Leavitt. 
9.—“ The Land of ‘ Kai-ora,’” by Miss Olive. 
16.—“ Voices from the Meadow,” by Mrs. George U. Hay. 
23.—Reunion of members. 


During the year the membership has been increased by the admis- 
sion of two ordinary and nineteen associate members, and one corres- 
ponding member, making a total of 200. 


LXXXVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Officers. 


President—Hon. J. V. Ellis. 

Vice-Presidents—G. F. Matthew, G. U. Hay. 

Treasprer—A. Gordon Leavitt. 

Secretary—W. L. McDiarmid. 

Librarian—W. L. Ellis, M.D. 

Curators—S. W. Kain, Wm. McIntosh, J. W. Banks. 

Additional Members of Council—-H. G. Addy, M.D., J. Roy 
Campbell, James A. Estey. 


Ladies’ Association Branch. 


President—Mrs. G. F. Matthew. 
Vice-Presidents—Mrs. G. U. Hay, Mrs. H. G. Addy. 
Secretary-Treasurer—Miss Edith McBeath. 


TV.—From The Oltawa Field-Naturalists’ Club, through 
Mr. W. J. WILSON. 


Having been selected to represent the Ottawa Field-Naturalists’ 
Club at this meeting of the Royal Society, I have much pleasure in pre- 
senting the following summary of the work done during the year ending 
March 20th, 1906. 

The Club’s year begins in March so that the new officers have an 
opportunity of arranging the field excursions which are the chief feature 
in our work. The sub-excursions were begun early in April and con- 
tinued every fine Saturday afternoon through May and into June, and 
were again resumed in October. The attendance at these excursions 
sometimes reached one hundred. Three general excursions were held as 
follows: May 27, to Chelsea; June 10, to Carp; September 23, to 
Chelsea. The excursion to Chelsea on May 27 was perhaps the most 
largely attended excursion in the nistory of the club, due to the fact that 
both the Royal Society and the Carleton County Teachers’ Association 
met in Ottawa during that week. Such distinguished visitors as Dr. 
C. F. Hodge, of Clark University, Dr. A. H. MacKay, Superintendent 
of Education for Nova Scotia, and Dr. G. U. Hay, editor of the Educa- 
tional Review, were present and delivered able addresses. 

The council favours the continuance of outdoor work throughout 
the year, and to that end had planned two snowshoe tramps, which, how- 
ever, were cancelled for lack of snow. 

A summer school for teachers was held in Ottawa last July. Several 
members of the club delivered lectures in the nature study course and 


ca 


APPENDIX E LXXXIX 


aided in the field work. Dr. White did practical field work with the 
class in physical geography. Mr. Putman delivered illustrated lectures 
and conducted experimental work in botany, Mr. Attwood delivered 
lectures on minerals and did a great deal of field work, Dr. Fletcher 
gave two lectures on birds and two on insects, Prof. Prince lectured on 
Fish Life, Dr. Ami on Ferns, Dr. Saunders on Evergreens, Mr. R. B. 
- Whyte on the Pleasures of gardening and other members on various other 
subjects. 

Reports showing the work done throughout the year by the various 
branches have been read before the club. The report of the geological 
branch has been printed in The Ollawa Naturalist, and the other reports 
will appear at an early date. Most of the branches are now holding fort- 
nightly or monthly meetings at the homes of the members for the pur- 
pose of discussing subjects of especial interest to the respective branches. 

The members of the Entomological Branch have made some notable 
additions to the local lists during the past summer. Mr. Arthur Gibson 
made, on July 6, the catch of the year, a perfect specimen of the very 
rare and local moth Hepialus thule, Strkr. Up to the present time 
this is the only specimen which is known with certainty to have been 
taken at any other place than Miontreal, from which locality the species 
was originally described and where a few specimens are taken yearly. 
Mr. C. H. Young has continued his studies of the micro-lepidoptera ani 
has added many new species to the Canadian fauna. All of these have 
been described by Mr. W. D. Kearfott, of Montclair, N.J., who is 
making a specialty of these beautiful insects. Mr. W. Metcalfe has 
continued his studies of the local hemiptera and has added many new 
records. Mr. J. W. Baldwin made a very remarkable capture of the 
Vest Indian moth, Melipotis fasciolaris, Hbn. It can only be sur: 
mised that the chrysalis of this handsome moth may have been intro- 
duced, as has been the case with many other insects, in a bunch of 
bananas. The Ottawa Fruit Exchange building is close to Mr. Bald- 
win’s house, where the insect was taken in the garden. Six specimens 
of the handsome elater, Pityobius anguinus, Jec., figured in the first 
transactions of the club under the name of Pilyobius billingsw, were 
taken by Messrs. Baldwin and Gibson at the electric light on the 28th 
June. A month later a fine female was taken by Dr. Fletcher, floating 
on the surface of the water, into which it had fallen. Many other in- 
sects of more or less interest were taken during the summer and the in- 
terest in this branch of work has been kept up steadily. Good work has 
been done by the leaders in working out life-histories of beneficial and 
injurious insects. 


XC ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Members of the Geological Branch have made special study of some 
interesting localities in the Ottawa district. The sands and gravels of 
McKay Lake have been examined and special study has been made of 
the geology of Strathcona Park, where the excavations in the Utica have 
afforded an excellent opportunity for studying the formation ; the Chazy 
at Rockcliffe has yielded an excellent series of slabs exhibiting tracks and 
trails of marine organisms. The most interesting local find, however, 
was the discovery of a large number of curved hornblende crystals in a 
vein of mica at Carp by Dr. Ami. ‘lhese curved crystals were new to 
the geologists and hitherto unrecorded in Canada. 

The Botanical Branch has held fortnightly meetings throughout 
the year except during the summer months. ‘The most important matter 
taken up was the publication of a complete list of the plants of the 
Ottawa district. Since Dr. Fletchers “Flora Ottawaensis” was 
published many new species have been added to the local flora, and the 
work of specialists has made a thorough study of the local flora necessary. 
This list is to be issued as a publication of the Geological Survey. The 
Botanical Branch invite co-operation of all local botanists in this 
work of revision, and would call special attention to the Rosaceæ; the 
study of this large order of plants will certainly result in the addition 
of several species to the local list. 

The Zoological Branch held two very profitable meetings during 
the winter. At the first meeting Prof. Prince read an interesting 
paper on the function of the swim bladder of fishes, an outline of which 
appears in the report of the branch. At the second meeting Prof. 
Macoun pointed out the great amount of work that can be done in pro- 
curing specimens of the numerous species of small mammals to be found 
near Ottawa, and also pointel out the ease with which this could be 
done. ; 

The report of the Zoological Branch contains a list prepared by 
Mr. Halkett of the fishes of the Ottawa district preserved in the Fisheries 
Museum with the localities where they were taken. It also records a 
number of interesting observations made by members of the branch dur- 
ing the year. 

The Ornithological Branch, although small, consists of a number of 
enthusiastic workers. Monthly meetings have been held since early last 
fall at which much systematic work has been planned. The vicinity of 
Ottawa is to be divided among the members of the branch for active 
field work, and the antiquated local list published by the club many 
years ago is to be thoroughly worked over. Some interesting additions 
have already been made to the local records, such as the appearance of the 
short-billed marsh wren, a breeding record of the screech owl, and the 


APPENDIX E XCI 


casual occurrence of the glaucous gull. The great grey owl, a rare visitor 
from the north, has been seen this winter. One specimen was secured in 
East Templeton and another near South March. One of these, a very 
fine specimen, is now in the collection of Rev. Mr. Hifrig. 

Mr. W. E. Saunders, of London, who is an active member of the 
club, has done valuable work in compiling a list of birds new to Ontario ~ 
which have been taken in the Western Peninsula since the issuance of 
Mellwraith’s revised work. This list appears in No. 11 of the volume 
of the Ottawa Naturalist just completed. 

Volume XIX of The Ottawa Naturalist, the official organ of the 
club, has been published under the editorship of Mr. J. M. Macoun. It 
consists of twelve numbers which contain in all 249 pages and four 
plates. The following are among the papers that appear in this volume: 

1. “A New Marine Sponge from the Pacific Coast of Canada,” 
Lawrence M. Lambe, F.G.S. 

2. “Notes on Fresh-water Rhizopods,” W. S. Odell. 

3. “Food Value of Certain Mushrooms,” Prof. Shutt, M.A., and 
H. W. Charlton, B.A. Sc. 

4. “ Popular Entomology,” Arthur Gibson. 

5. “Glaciation of Mount Orford,’ R. Chalmers, LL.D. 

6. “Nesting of Night-hawk in Ottawa,” Rev. G. Hifrig. 

7. “Notes on Fresh-water Shells from the Yukon Territory,” Dr. 
J. F. Whiteaves. 

8. ‘Natures Method of Re-seeding the Red and White Pine,” P. 
Cox. 

9. “A Naturalist in the Frozen North,’ A. Halkett. 

10. “ Eggs of the Scarlet Water-Mite,” Prof. E. E. Prince. 
11. “Sthenopis thule at Ottawa,” Arthur Gibson. 
12. “Bird Migration,” Jas. Bouteiller. 

13. “Ontario Ornithological Notes (Winter 1904-05)” A. B. 
Klugh. 

14. “Notes on the Fauna and Climate of the Liévre River,” E. E. 
Lemieux. 

15. “Why our Field and Roadside Weeds are introduced species,” 
W. T. Macoun. 

16. “The Hair-eel (Gordius aquaticus),’ Prof. E. E. Prince. 

17. “The Red-breasted Nuthatch,’ Wm. H. Moore. 

18. “On so-called Silene Menziesii,” Ed. L. Greene. 

19. “A New Northern Antennaria,” Ed. L. Greene. 

20. “A New Goldenrod from Gaspé Peninsula,” M. L. Fernald. 

21. “Extracts from Diary of the late Robt. Elliott,’ W. E. 
Saunders. 


Ca 


XCII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


22. “Descriptions of New Species of Testudo and Baena with re- 
marks on some Cretaceous forms,” L. M. Lambe. 

23. “Notes on Some British Columbia Mammals,” Wm. Spread- 
borough. 

24. “The Fly Agaric, and its effects on Cattle,” Norman Criddle. 

25. “Birds New to Ontario,’ W. Saunders. 

26. “Eggs of the Fresh-water Ling,” Prof. Prince and Andrew 
Halkett. 

27. “ Eupithecia Youngata,” George W. Taylor. 

28. “Cultivation of Native Orchids,’ J. H. C. Dempsey. 

In addition to these, there have been published several short notes, 
book reviews, accounts of branch meetings, ete. 

The series of articles on “Nature Study,” edited by Dr. Jas. 
Fletcher, has been continued. In this volume the following papers 
appear : 

1. “Nature Study,” Dr. Sinclair. 

2. “The Clouded Sulphur Butterfly,” Dr. Fletcher. 

3. “Short Introduction to some of our Common Birds,” Rev. G. 
Hifrig. 

4. “Field Work at the Ottawa Normal School Summer Course 
for Teachers,” A. E. Attwood. 

5. ‘Ottawa Summer School for Teachers,” J. H. Putman 

6. ‘* Woolly-Bear Caterpillars,’ Arthur Gibson. 

7. “Nature Observations at Home,” Prof. Lochhead. 

8. ‘ Mother nature and her boys. An Institute that brings them 
tegether,” G. J. Atkinson. 

9. “The School Garden and the Country School,” Geo. D. Fuller. 

In all, some 30 articles on nature study have appeared in Th? 
Oitawa Naturalist during the past three years. They are of a popular 
and decidedly practical nature and have added much valuable material 
to the current literature on this subject. ‘he papers published during 
the past year have all been contributed by scientists and educationists 
actively engaged in working out the best courses and methods in nature 
study. 5,500 of each of these papers have been printed in pamphlet 
form and distributed throughout Canada; 2,200 of these go to the 
teachers of Toronto, 500 to the Macdonald Institute of Guelph for use 
in the Nature Study Department of the Ontario Agricultural College, 
and 1,000 to Dr. Robertson, 500 of which are distributed among his 
nature study instructors in various centres. 

The following programme of winter soirées has been carried out 
with some slight omissions and changes in dates. The attendance at all 
the meetings has been most gratifying. y 


APPENDIX E XCIII 
1905. 
Dec. 12.—The President’s Address and Report. 
Address, Dr. J. F. White, Principal of the Normal School. 
* Illustrated Lecture: “ Apparent Consciousness in Plants ani 
Animals,” by the President, Dr. S. B. Sinclair. 
1906. 
Jan. 9.— Illustrated Lecture: “ The Geology of Strathcona Park and 
other Ottawa localities,’ Dr H. M. Ami. 
“Report of the Geological Branch,” W. J. Wilson, Ph.B. 
Jan. 23.—“ The Migration of Birds,” C. W. G. Hifrig. Llustrated by 
specimens. 
“Report of the Ornithological Branch,” Mr. A. G. Kingston. 
Feb. 6.—Illustrated Lecture: “'I'rees, Shrubs and Plants for the 
Adornment of Home,” Dr. W. Saunders, of the Centra! 
Experimental Farm. 
Feb. 27.—Conversational Evening: short addresses on various subjects. 
Prof. J. Macoun: “ Botany;” Dr. Otto Klotz: “ Gravity.” 
Mar. 13.—“‘ Fish Culture,” Prof. E. E. Prince, Commissioner of 
Fisheries for Canada.” Illustrated by specimens. 
Mar. 20.—Annual meeting. 
Address by Mr. A. Gibson: “ Method of Studying Insects fol- 
lowed at Central Experimental Farm.” 


Since the Normal School course has been lengthened to a year, the 
students have been able to engage in the field work of the club during 
the spring and fall months and also to attend the winter soirées. Th: 
result has been that the students, having become interested in the fiel.l 
work, have attended the soirées almost in a body. The club realizes that 
through the teachers it has a most valuable medium of disseminating its 
influence, and therefore it keenly appreciates the interest that has been 
displayed throughout the year. 

In accordance with a resolution passed at the annual meeting a 
large part of the books in our library have been transferred to the Public 
Library, where they remain the property of the Society and will be use! 
as reference books. 


Officers. 


President.—W. J. Wilson, Ph.B. 

Vice-Presidents—A. E. Attwood, M.A.; Frank T. Shutt, M.A., 
F.R.S.C. 

Librarian.—J. W. Baldwin. 

Secretary.—T. E. Clarke, 470 O’Connor Street. 


XCIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Treasurer.—Arthur Gibson, Central Experimental Farm. 

Committee—Mr. A. G. Kingston, Mr. J. M. Macoun, Mr. W. T. 
Macoun, Dr. H. M. Ami, Mr. A. Halkett, Miss M. Mck. Scott, Miss A. 
J. Matthews, Miss R. B. McQuesten. 


V.—From The Nova Scotian Institute of Science, Halifax, through 
Dr. HENRY S. Poors. 


The Nova Scotian Institute of Science, through its delegate, begs 
to present the following report of its proceedings during its forty- 
fourth annual session, 

Meetings were held throughout the session from October, 1905, to 
May, 1906, inclusive. 

Officers for the year 1905-06 were elected as follows :— 

President—F. W. W. Doane, C.E., ex officio F.R:M.S. 

1st Vice-President—Prof. Ebenezer MacKay, Ph.D. 

2nd Vice-President—Professor J. E. Woodman, D.Sc. 

Treasurer—William McKerron. 

Corresponding Secretary—A. H. MacKay, LL.D., F.R.S.C. 

Recording Secretary—Harry Piers. 

Librarian—Harry Piers. 

Other Members of Council—Maynard Bowman, B.A.; Watson L. 
Bishop; Edwin Gilpin, Jr., LL.D., F.R.S.C., 1.8.0.; Alexander McKay; 
J. B. McCarthy, M.A., B.Se.; Professor F. H. Sexton, and Henry S&S. 
Poole, D.Se., Assoc. R.S:M., F.G.85, F:R.S.C: 

The library of the society continued its very rapid growth, the 
number of accessions during the year 1905 being 1,911 books and 
pamphlets. The library forms part of the Provincial Science Library 
under the charge of the Provincial Government, and is free to any 
resident in the province of Nova Scotia. A steadily increasing use 
of the books has been reported each year since it was thrown open to 
the public. 

The finances of the society are satisfactory, owing to the generous 
aid received from the Provincial Government. 

The Proceedings and Transactions, Vol. X, part 2, for 1903-04, 
have just been published, and Vol. X, part 3, is now in press. Owing 
to the many official duties of the editor, the publication of the Trans- 
actions is somewhat in arrears, but an effort is being made to bring 
it once more up to date. 

During the session the following papers were read :— 

1.—< Presidential Address,” by H. 8. Poole, D.Sc., Assoc. R.S.M., 
BGS: (B-RS:C: | ! 


APPENDIX E XCV 


2.—“<On the Flora of McNab’s Island, Halifax,” by Captain J. H. 
Barbour, M.D., R.A.M.C. 

3.—“ Catalogue of the Birds of Prince Edward Island,” by John 
MacSwain. 

4.—“ Mining, Is It a Science?” by W. E. Lishman, M.A., M. Ins: 
M.E. 

5.—“ Fungi of Nova Scotia; First Supplementary List,’ by A. HE 
MacKay, LL.D., F.R.S.C. 

6.—“ Halifax Water Works,’ by H. W. Johnston, C.E. 

T.— The Oil-fields of Eastern Canada,” by R. W. Ells, LL.D. 
8.—* The Frost and Drought of 1905,” by F. W. W. Doane, C.E. 
9.—-* Eels in Water Pipes and their Migration,” by W. L. Bishop. 

10.—% Notes on Protective Colouring,” by Frank H. Reid. 

11.—“ The Grignard Synthesis; Action of Phenyl Magnesium Bromide 

| on Camphor,” by H. Jermain Creighton. 
12.—* Contribution to the Study of Hydroxylamin,” by G. M. John- 
stone MacKay, B.A. 

13.—* The Water Powers on the Mersey River, N.S.,” by W. G. Yors- 
ton, C.K. 

14.-—“ On the Damage done to Timber by Teredo navalis and Limnoria 
lignorum,” by Roderick MeColl, C.E. 

15.—“ Phenological Observations, Canada, 1905,’ by A. H. MacKay, 
i DE DAD Peep) a aol OF 

16.—‘ Water-rolled Weed-balls,” by A. H. MacKay, LL.D., F.R.S.C. 


VI. From The Natural History Sociely of Montreal, through 
Dr. NICHOLLS. 


The following report of the work of the Natural History Society 
for the session of 1905-1906 is respectfully submitted for the con- 
sideration of the Royal Society of Canada. 

The officers and members of the above society have pleasure in 
reporting a most successful year’s work. Keeping in mind the pur- 
pose for which the association was formed, namely, to encourage the 
study of nature among its members, to foster the love of natural 
objects among the general public, and, in a word, to disseminate and 
popularize these special branches of science, they have to a large extent 
followed the methods which have proved so successful in former years, 
but with the expectation in the comparatively near future of embracing 
an even larger scope. In general, the objects mentioned have been 
carried out by means of regular monthly meetings of a largely scien- 
tific nature; free evening lectures of a popular kind; weekly after- 


XCVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


noon talks, usually illustrated, for children and young people; oppor- 
tunities for study offered by the museum and library; the publication 
of its scientific organ, Zhe Canadian Record of Science; excursions to 
places of interest in the vicinity of Montreal; and an active interest 
in those scientific matters of importance to the well-being of the general 
body politic. 

To particularize the work done on the above lines the following 
account may be given: 

The regular monthly meetings have been held as usual, the papers 
of scientific character presented being as follows :— 


1905. 
Oct. 25.—“ An Account of a Blazing Beach on the Maine Coast,” 
Prof. D. P. Penhallow. 
“A Notice of some Fossil Plants from the Pleistocene of 
the Abitibi River,” Prof. Penhallow. 
“ Notes on the Geology of the Abitibi District,’ Dr. Wilson. 
Nov. 25.—“ Fungi collected at Cap-a-lAigle,” Rev. Dr. Campbell. 
‘“ Relations of Sun Spots and Sun Clouds,” Mr. Stewart. 
1906. 
Jan. 29.—* The Distribution of Forests in Tertiary Time and their 
Relations to the present Great Plains,’ Prof. Penhallow. 
“Some Recent Studies respecting the Nuclei of the Lower 
Forms of Plant Life” Miss Carrie M. Derick. 
Mar. 26.—“ Some Recent Developments on the Production of Plant 
Hybrids,’ Miss Carrie M. Derick. 
April 30.—* A Remarkable Tumonr of the White Birch,” Prof. Pen- 
hallow. 
“Distribution of Plants in the Cretaceous Period,’ Prof. 
Penhallow. 


The Annual Somerville Course of Lectures was given as follows :— 


Jan. 18.—“ Lime, Soda and Soap,” Prof. Nevil Norton Evans, M.Sc., 
MeGill University. 
Jan. 25.—“ The Labrador Eclipse Expedition,” Rev. I. W. Kavanagh, 
S.J., M.A., B.Se., Science Master, Loyola College. 
Feb. 1.—“‘ Food Adulteration in Canada,” Dr. J. T. Donald, Official 
Analyst to the Dominion Government. 
Feb. 8.—“ Jamaica, the Isle of Springs,” Theo. H. Wardleworth, 
F.L.S. 
“The Origin of New Forms of Plant Life,’ Carrie M. 
Derick, M.A., Assist. Lecturer in Botany, McGill Uni- 


versity. 


Heb? tb: 


APPENDIX E XCVII 


Feb. 22.—“ South and East Africa as seen during the Meeting of the 
British Association in 1905,” Dr. John B. Porter, Prof. 
of Mining and Metallurgy, McGill University. 


The Young People’s Half-Hour Series of Talks on Natural History 
for 1906 was as follows :— 
Jan. 20.—“ Buds,” Carrie M. Derick, M.A. 
Jan. 27.“ The Story of a Piece of Wood,” J. S. Buchan, K.C., B.C.L. 
Feb. 3.—“A Talk on Plants,” 8. 8. Bain, Esq. 
Feb. 10.—“ A Can of Salmon,” Harry Bragg, Esq. 
Feb. 17.—\*“ By-Paths in an Invisible Garden,” Prof. A. G. Nicholls, 
M.A., M.D. 
Feb. 24.—“ How Paper is Made,” Chas. 8. J. Phillips, Esq. 


The attendance of members and others on the above courses has 
been very gratifying and shows an increasing interest in matters 
scientific. 

A matter worthy of special note is the Conversazione which was 
held under the auspices of the society in the Natural History Building 
on February 22nd. This meeting, the first of the kind held for ten 
years, was graced by the presence of His Excellency Earl Grey, to 
whom a fitting address was presented by the society, together with a 
souvenir of historical interest. The conversazione was entirely satis- 
factory from every point of view. 

The donations to the museum have not been particularly numerous 
this year, but have been of considerable importance. 

Contributions to the library continue to be made, there being now 
about 5,500 volumes in the care of the society. 

The Canadian Record of Science keeps up its good record for 
scientific and general excellence, and, under the able editorship of 
Dr. Penhallow, it is hoped that it will appear at regular quarterly 
intervals, and make its way to the front as the standard scientific 
journal of the kind for the whole of Canada. To this end it is hoped 
that a grant from the Government, for which application has been 
made, will be re-established. 

The annual Field Day was held at Mt. Johnson and was very suc- 
cessful. The attendance was very large and the arrangements for the 
comfort of the excusionists were well carried ont. 

In the report of last year reference was made to the interest in 
the question of the depredations of the Tussock Moth on our shade 
trees. As a consequence of this crusade, measures, which unfortunately 
were only partially successful, were adopted in conjunction with the 
civic authorities to limit the ravages of this insect. As a result of 

Proc., 1906. 7. 


SS 


XCVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


our efforts the dangers accruing from this pest have been more forcibly 
brought home to those most directly concerned, and this spring we 
expect that more vigorous measures will be adopted towards the ex- 
termination of the pest. As another example of the wide-reaching 
interests of the society may be mentioned the fact that attention was 
called to the wanton destruction of sea-gulls in the lower St. Law- 
rence and steps were taken to memorialize the Federal Government 
to inquire into the matter and to take the necessary steps to put a 
stop to the evil. 


During the past year the work of the society has been hampered 
by the lack of sufficient and suitable accommodation for the prosecution 
of its distinctive work. More especially has this been noticed in con- 
nection with the museum and library, a great amount of the material 
teing inaccessible on account of the lack of space to display it. In 
this connection the society has taken an important and decisive step 
in the direction of better things. It has disposed of the old building, 
which has been so long its home and a scientific landmark in the 
city, and has acquired a most desirable and suitable site, consisting of 
about 10,000 square feet, on the best portion of Drummond Street, 
where its temporary quarters have been located. On this ground it 
has been decided to erect a modern building, which will meet the 
increased requirements of the society, and be a credit to the city of 
Montreal. To this end an influential and numerous building com- 
mittee has been struck and immediate steps are to be taken to carry 
the society’s desires into effect. As a consequence of these changes 
it has been found necessary to store the various specimens and books 
in suitable places, so that for the coming year they will not be avail- 
able for reference, and to this extent the society’s usefulness will he 
curtailed until the new home is an accomplished fact. Realizing this, 
and with the idea of in some measure compensating for it, the society 
has decided to extend its work on the line of free public lectures to 
be given in different centres of the city and with co-operation of vari- 
ous bodies, like the Tuberculosis League, the Local Council of Women, 
the Pure Milk League, the Hygiene Committee, the Westmount 
School Commissioners, the Alexandra Hospital, and St. Paul’s Hos- 
pital. The subjects that will be dealt with include matters of hygiene, 
public health, decoration, materials and forms of construction, and 
will be dealt with in popular ways by competent lecturers. Some of 
these lectures are designed to meet the special requirements of artisans, 
and where necessary will be delivered both in English and French. 

A notable increase has been noted in the matter of new members, 
there being some fifty-three enrolled during the past twelve months. 


APPENDIX E CIX 


It is confidently expected that this number will be still more increased 
in view of the greater attractions which will be afforded by the in- 
creased facilities which it is hoped will be offered by the society in 
the not very distant future. We have to regret the death of one of 
our members, that of the late Hon. R. Préfontaine. 

The society is greatly indebted to Mr. Alfred Griffin for his 
valuable and enthusiastic services cheerfully placed at its disposal. 


Officers. 


Hon. President—Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal. 

President—Dr. D. P. Penhallow. 

Vice-Presidents—Frank D. Adams, Ph.D., F.R.S.C.; J. S. Buchan, 
K.C., B.C.L.; Rev. Robert Campbell, D.D.; Albert Holden; J. H. 
Joseph; EH. W. McBride, M.A., D.Sec.; Prof. T. Wesley Mills, M.D., 
ihoe.; Hon, J. K., Ward, 

Hon. Recording Secretary—F. W. Richards, 5 

Hon. Corresponding Secretary—C. E. H. Phillips. 

Hon. Treasurer—Chas. 8. J. Phillips. 

Hon. Curator—A. E. Norris. 

Members of Council—J. A. U. Beaudry, C.E., Chairman; Prof. 
J. Bemrose, F.I.C., F.C.S.; J. H. Burland, Joseph Fortier, John Har- 
per, F. McLennan, K.C.; Dr. A. G. Nicholls, Alex. Robertson, B.A. 

Superintendent—Alfred (Griffin, 


VII—From The Entomological Society of Ontario, through — 
Mr. A. F. WINN. 


As delegate from the Entomological Society of Ontario, it is my 
pleasing duty to report another year of steady progress, and that our 
membership is increasing very rapidly. At your last meeting the 
establishment of a branch in British Columbia was mentioned, and 
since then another has been formed in Guelph, Ont., where there are 
a number of active and enthusiastic entomologists. 

The parent society in London, with its branches at Quebec, Mont- 
real, Toronto, Guelph and Vancouver, and active members in every 
province of the Dominion is able to accomplish much that would be 
impossible if the sphere of work were limited to a more restricted 
area. : 
The last volume, No. 38, of our monthly magazine, The Canadian 
Entomologist, contains 426 pages—a contrast with the first modest 
one of 110 pages — and is illustrated with twenty-nine figures in the 
text from original drawings, and seven full page plates, one of the 


Gi ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


latter being a three colour process plate of moths, showing the beauty 
as well as scientific accuracy of this style of illustration. Among the 
sixty-two contributors to its pages, some are from such distant places 
as Jamaica, W.I.; Honolulu, and the Philippine Islands. Eleven new 
genera of insects are described, and one hundred and forty-two new 
species. Articles on new species and varieties of Lepidoptera, by Dr. 
J. B. Smith, Dr. Wm. Barnes, Dr. H. G. Dyar, Prof. Fernald, Miss 
Murtfeldt, Messrs. H. H. Lyman, F. H. Woolley-Dod, A. Gibson, 
W. D. Kearfott. 

Coleoptera, by Prof. H. F. Wickham, Major T. L. Casey, Messrs. 
Frederick Knab and Wm. Knaus; Orthoptera, by Messrs. E. M. Walker, 
and W. T. Davis; Hemiptera, by Messrs. J. R. de la Torre Bueno, 
E. D. Ball, D. Lange, and G. W. Kirkaldy; Hymenoptera, by Dr. 
W. H. Ashmead and J. H. Lovell; Diptera, by Mr. D. W. Coquillett, 
Miss C. 8. Ludlow and Dr. Grabham. Life histories are given more 
or less completely of Empithoecia interrupto fasciata,— Apantesis virgo, 
parthenice and rectilinia, by Mr. A. Gibson; Apantesis proxima, by 
Dr. O. Siefert; Gortyna thalictri, Mr. H. H. Lyman; Delphastus pusil- 
lus by Mr. W. E. Britton. 

A series of articles on Practical and Popular Entomology consists 
of the following :— , 

“The Pear-tree Psylla and how to deal with it,” by Mr. Geo. E. 
Fisher; “ Entomology in Schools,’ by Mr. H. S. Saunders; “ How do 
Insects pass the Winter?” by Dr. James Fletcher; “ Notes on collect- 
ing Aquatic Hemiptera,” by Mr. J. R. de la Torre Bueno; “ Canadian 
Three-colour Process Illustration,” by Dr. James Fletcher; “The 
Struggle with the Codling Moth,” by Prof. W. Lochhead; “ Granary 
Insects,” by Mr. A. Gibson; “A Method for Measuring Insects,” by 
Mr. J. R. de la Torre Bueno; “The Buffalo Carpet Beetle,’ by Dr. 
James Fletcher. 

Articles on Classification include a catalogue of the Aphidae, by 
Mr. G. W. Kirkaldy; “The Bees of Oregon,” by H. L. Viereck and 
others; “The Three Ranatras of the Eastern United States,” by Mr. 
J. R. de la Torre Bueno; “ Mosquito Notes,” by Miss C. 8. Ludlow. 

Among the miscellaneous papers may be mentioned,— “ Observ- 
ations on Lampyridae,” by Mr. Frederick Knab; “ Notes on Types 
in the British Museum,” by Mr. H. H. Lyman; “ Remarkable Flight 
of Corisa (Waterboatmen),” by Mr. D. Lange; “Spiders of Rockport 
Cave, Mo.,” by Mr. C. R. Crosby; “Influence of the Apidae upon 
Geographical Distribution of certain Floral Types,” by Mr. J. A. Har- 
ris; “ Oviposition of Bibio femorata,” by Mr. A. H. Girault. 

Book notices have appeared promptly of new entomological works. 


APPENDIX E CI 


The forty-gecond annual meeting was held in October at the 
Ontario Agricultural College, Guelph, with an attendance at some of 
the meetings of over one hundred, and the society was favoured with 
the presence of Prof. John B. Smith, State Entomologist of New 
Jersey. Reports were presented on the injurious and other insects of 
the various districts in Ontario, from the different branches and sec- 
tions of the society, and addresses and papers were given on a variety 
of subjects. 

The thirty-sixth annual report of the society to the Ontario Gov- 
ernment has been published, comprising one hundred and forty-four 
pages, and, as usual, contains a full account of the work of the previous 
year, and the papers read at the annual meeting, as well as numerous 
articles of an economic nature, giving to fruit-growers and agricul- 
turalists an accurate account of injurious insects along with the best 
methods of attacking them. 

Among these may be mentioned,—“ A Review of the Mosquito 
Work in New Jersey,” by Dr. J. B. Smith; “ Experiments against 
the San José Scale,” by Prof. Lochhead; “ Entomological Conditions 
in North Carolina,” by Prof. F. Sherman; “ Reports on Insects of the 
Season 1905,” by Prof. Lochhead, Dr. Fletcher, Dr. Fyles, Dr. Bethune, 
and Mr. C. Stevenson; “The Tussock Moths,” by Dr. Fyles and Mr. 
H. H. Lyman; “The Phlox Mite; The Blue Spruce Fly; and, On 
Humble Bees that Fertilize the Red Clover,” by Mr. T. D. Jarvis; 
* Forest Insects,” by Rev. Dr. Fyles and Mr. E. J. Zavitz; “The 
Advantage and Disadvantage of the Canadian Entomologist,” by Rev. 
Dr. Fyles; “ Butterfly Collecting in Canada,” by Mrs. Nicholl; 
“ Orthoptera and Odonata from Algonquin Park,’ by Mr. E. M. 
Walker; “Insects as Nature Studies,” by Mr. S. B. McCready; “ In- 
jurious Insects of the Flower Garden,” by Mr. Arthur Gibson. 

The library now consists of over eighteen hundred volumes, and 
a card catalogue according to subjects has been begun. The collections 
at London are open to the public three days a week, and advantage is 
taken of this opportunity, the number of visitors being increasing. 

The branches are all in a satisfactory state, and our friends in 
British Columbia have decided to issue a quarterly “ Bulletin,” the first 
number of which has just appeared, and contains much information 
on the insects of British Columbia, particularly on the Coleoptera. It 
was felt that as the members in that province were so widely scattered, 
that a medium of communication would bind them together, and we 
should like to see the members in the Maritime Provinces and also in 
the Northwest follow a similar course, so that our society could have 
a chain of branches from the Atlantic to the Pacific. 


CII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


VIII. From The Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Montreal, 
through R. W. MCcLacxLan. 


The Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Montreal has the 
honour to report that the following papers have been read before it 
during the past year :-— 


1. “De Ramezay and the Chateau de Ramezay,” by R. W. McLachlan. 
“Benjamin Franklin and the Chateau de Ramezay,” by R. W. 
McLachlan. 
“British Military Gold Medals,” by James Reid. 
4. “Canadian Coins and Medals added to my collection in 1905,” by 
R. W. McLachlan. 


5. “Documents relating to the first Montreal Printer,” by R. W. 
McLachlan. 


iss) 


During the year the museum and national gallery have been re- 
arranged and a new catalogue prepared and published. Through the 
sale of the catalogue and the efforts of some friends much of the float- 
ing debt, which has hampered the society’s work, has been paid; and 
there are hopes that, by the end of this year, our books will come out 
with the balance on the right side. Still there is need for a much 
larger revenue to make the work in the Chateau de Ramezay as effi- 
cient as it should be. 

The additions to the museum were 40 coins and medals, and 50 
Canadian antiquities—total 90. 

To the national gallery, 19 portraits, of which three are in oil 


and three in water colours; 47 Canadian views and 9 plans and maps — 
total 75. 


To the library 748 Canadian books, 274 pamphlets, 93 other books 
and pamphlets, besides 300 books and publications received as ex- 
changes—total 1,415, making a grand total of 1,580 in all branches. 


The bi-centennial of the building of the Chateau de Ramezay was 
celebrated on the 21st of February last, at which a gold medal, struck 
to commemorate the occasion, was presented to His Excellency the 
Governor-General, who honoured the celebration with his presence. A 
silver medal was also presented to Lady Grey, and bronze ones to the 
500 guests present. The President presented an address to His Excel- 
lency, giving a short history of the building which the celebration 
commemorated. 


APPENDIX E CIIl 


The officers of the society for 1906 are:— 

Patron—His Exeellency the Governor-General. 

Vice-Presidents—Judge L. W. Sicotte, W. D. Lighthall, C. T. 
Hart, L. G. A. Cresse, Jas. Reid, J. B. Vallée. 

Hon. Treasurer—George Durnford. 

Hon. Curator—-R. W. Mclachlan. 

Hon. Ree. Secretary—C. A. Harwood. 

Hon. Cor. Secretary—Pemberton Smith. 

Hon. Librarian—J. A. U. Beaudry. 

Members of Council—S. M. Baylis, P. O. Tremblay, L. Gravel, 
Eugène Lafontaine, J. C. A. Heriot, C. B. Carter, K.C., J. N. Perrault, 
A. S. Hamelin, Prof. C. W. Colby. 


IX.— From The Literary and Historical Society of Quebec, through 
P. B. CAsGRAIN. 


The Literary and Historical Society of Quebec, through P. B. 
Casgrain, Esquire, K.C., its president and delegate, begs leave to pre- 
sent to the Royal Society of Canada the following report of their 
proceedings for the year 1905. 

Jt is and cannot be other than the report of the council for the 
same period to the general meeting of the members of the society 
read by the then retiring president, Major Wood, and duly adopted 
on the 10th January, 1906, as follows :— 

As the senior society in Canada, we now enter our 83rd year 
with the satisfaction of being engaged in work which we are striving 
to make at least equal to the best achievements in our past career. 
1775 — that fateful year for both French and English speaking Can- 
ada — is still the main object of our research. 

In 1903, under the presidency of Sir James LeMoine, a committee 
was formed to deal with the erection of historical tablets to commem- 
orate the heroic defenders of Quebec who repulsed the attacks of Mont- 
gomery and Arnold. Before the close of 1904, the two splendid bronze 
shields, for which the Dominion Government made a special grant of 
$1,250, were in position. We are glad to be able to report that these 
tablets have been strongly commended by our late and present patrons, 
the Earl of Minto and Earl Grey, the latter of whom personally in- 
spected them last summer. They have been welcomed with universal 
approval in Canada and in other parts of the Empire; and we rejoice 
to see that they have met with generous recognition by the intelligent 
public of the United States. In this connection we should add that 
when the old and well known wooden sign — Montgomery Fell — was 


CIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


taken down by the departmental workmen, our president, whose 
action was unanimously approved by the council, tried to have it 
repaired at the society’s expense and placed over the exact spot in 
front of where the barricade had stood. 


The Government, however, undertook this themselves, and replaced 
the sign in its old position. 

The principal results of our work on 1775, since the erection of 
the tablets, has been the publication, in the spring of 1905, of verbatim 
reprints, in a volume entitled “ The Blockade of Quebec in 1775-76 by 
the American Revolutionists ” (Les Bostonnais). 

The contents comprise: 1. The Journal of Thomas Ainslie; 
2. The Journal of an unknown Diarist; 3. The Orderly Book of the 
British Militia at Quebec, 1775-6; and 4. The Nominal Roll of the 
French Canadian Militia serving at Quebec during the siege. The 
preface gives a full account of the successful efforts for the erection 
of the tablets, and is illustrated by photographs specially taken to show 
the inscriptions both by themselves, on a large scale, as well as in 
position on the sites once occupied by the barricades at Prés-de-Ville 
and Sault-au-Matelot. , 

We have much pleasure in reporting that this volume has also 
been a great success wherever it has found its way, and that both the 
late and the present Governors-General have expressed their warm 
approval after a personal inspection. The experiment of sending out 
a few reviews, or presentation copies, has proved equally encouraging. 
Two such copies have already exerted considerable influence over two 
forthcoming histories of prime importance. One is the new American 
History of Canada which is being written by Mr. Frank Tracy, literary 
editor of the Boston T'ranscript. The other is what promises to be 
the greatest and most authoritative “ History of the United States 
and Its People,” a magnificent work in twelve volumes, which Dr. 
Avery has been preparing for eighteen years, and of which the Burrows 
Brothers are already beginning the actual publication. Several other 
copies are now doing their work equally well in many influential quar- 
ters, and altogether, they cannot fail to have a far reaching effect 
in making this momentous turning-point in Canadian and Imperial 
history both better known and better understood. 

We have fortunately been instrumental in helping to save the 
Martello Tower overlooking the St. Charles. The municipal author- 
ities intend to use it as a police station and keep it intact. We are 
glad to see a strong and growing body of well-founded opinion becoming 
more and more alive to the need and advisability of preserving the 
splendid landmarks of Quebec. We do not wish for a moment to 


sh à 


APPENDIX E CV 


eppose any real modern improvement in our midst; nor do we wish 
to have any object carefully preserved merely because it happens to 
be old, and irrespective of its use, beauty or historic interest, for we 
remember that nearly everything which is now an historic monument 
to us once served some useful purpose for a bygone generation of our 
fellow-citizens. But we shall always prevent, by every means in our 
power, any wanton disfigurement of Nature or destruction of these 
works of man which remind us of a worthy past. And to do so more 
effectually we would ask our own members, and all Quebecers, to 
remember the motto, “Je me souviens, ” and to assist the efforts of 
the Canadian Landmark Association as both a duty and a privilege. 
With such an association keeping watch and ward over all that the 
present only holds in trust for posterity, we should be doubly armed 
against every wanton attempt to level down the high and rare dis- 
tinction of our most favoured city “into the catalogue of common 
things.” 

The librarian’s and treasurer’s reports deal fully with their own 
departments — but we should like to mention specially that since we 
have now paid off the $475 for the new bookcases, according to our 
agreement with Morrin College, the whole of the college book grant 
of $250 will be available for its proper purposes during the present 
year. Dr. Douglas’ generous grant of $500 will be divided, as before, 
between the book fund and the publishing of original documents. 

With regard to our general financial position, we have to report 
that we still carry a residuary indebtedness which we shall pay off, 
as soon as possible, out of the realization of an investment which we 
are free to use at our discretion. We hope to obtain, as on former 
occasions, a special grant from the Provincial (Government in aid of 
the work of publishing the documents relating to 1775. Our depu- 
tation was kindly received by the Prime Minister, who acknowledged 
that our work was one of national importance. 

It affords us great pleasure to report that not a single member 
has died or resigned in 1905, that only three have left the city, and 
that thirty-three new members have been elected. This means an 
addition of thirty to our membership and of $120 to our annual sub- 
scriptions, 

We desire to publicly acknowledge the special kindness of our 
honorary president, Dr. James Douglas, in giving us a most interesting 
Jecture on “ Education in Quebec in the 17th Century” on the 26th 
cf January, to the great delight of one of the largest and most appre- 
ciative audiences. 


CVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


We would beg leave to remind our members that Quebec is to 
be honoured by an exceptionally brilliant gathering of savants from 
every part of the world, and by one whose specialty should appeal 
with peculiar force to our sympathetic interest, since it is the study of 
the native Indian races of America. 

We desire to express an earnest hope that many of our society 
will take the opportunity of becoming temporary members of this Inter- 
national Congress of Americanists, during its session here in next 
September. 

In conclusion, we would venture to remind our French speaking 
fellow-citizns that our society has always been, and still is, one in 
which they will find themselves most warmly welcomed; one in which 
many French Canadians have occupied the most distinguished position, 
from our foundation down to the present day; one in which they 
would already find several members of their own race and creed; and, 
finally, one in which the common intellectual interests of all Quebecers 
will always find a common home. 

The officers for the ensuing years were then elected as follows:— 

Honorary President—Dr. Jas. Douglas. 

President—P. B. Casgrain, K.C. 

Vice-Presidents—J. Hamilton, Dr. G. W. Parmelee, J. T. Ross, 
Col. Turnbull. 

Recording Secretary—A. Robertson. 

Corresponding Secretary—A. H. Cook. 

Council Secretary—Wm. Clint. 

Treasurer—Jas. Geggie. 

Librarian—F. C. Wurtele. 

Curator of Museum—Rev. G. P. O’Leary. 

Curator of Apparatus—G. Lampson. 

Additional Members of Council—Sir J. M. LeMoine, Major Wood, 
C. Tessier and 8. Lesage. 


X.—From Le Cercle Littéraire et Musical de Montréal, through 
Dr. Henri M. Amt. 


Le 5 novembre 1905, à notre 251éme séance, nous avons célébré 
le 20ème anniversaire de notre société, non sans un légitime orgueil 
d’avoir atteint un Age si respectable au sein d’une époque agitée et 
sujette aux changements. Une ombre de mélancolie planait cependant 
sur cette réunion, car vingt années dans une existence humaine repré- 
sentent tant de choses et involontairement ceux qui ont assisté aux 
débuts de la société songeaient aux chers disparus et regrettaient le 


APPENDIX E CVII 


passé. Mais pour le cercle même, ainsi qu’on l’exprima en termes 
éloquents dans plusieurs discours, c’était une date mémorable, un jour 
de joie et de triomphe de nature à nous encourager. Car on a parlé 
d'avenir et nous voulons croire à la prédiction d’un de nos orateurs 
lorsqu'il citait la strophe de la Marseillaise : 


“Nous entrerons dans la carrière, 
Quand nos enfants n’y seront plus,” etc., 


confiant ainsi aux jeunes membres de notre cercle la tradition inau- 
gurée il y vingt ans, sous les auspices de M. Coussirat. 

Il est à constater que malgré le nombre réduit à neuf des séances 
de l’hiver, il y a eu recrudescence de zèle et d’enthousiasme, les sujets 
choisis pour la discussion générale ayant excité beaucoup d'intérêt. 
Outre les travaux écrits dont suit la liste, nos soirées ont été embellies 
par dexcellente musique, plusieurs comédies de salon, saynètes, lectures 
de pièces intéressantes et déclamations. 


Travaux écrits. 


Les Lutins, M. Honoré Beaugrand. 

A L’Aquitanie, M. Coussirat. 

Impressions artistiques, M. Duclos. 

Le Phédon, M. Coussirat. 

Berlioz, Mme Laberge. 

César Franck, Mme Cornu. 

Etude sur Sedaine, M. Morin. 

Les Principes de la critique de E. Renan, M. Coussirat. 

Le Flirt, M. Sauvalle. 

La bonne et la mauvaise humeur, Mme King, M. Mage, M. Duclos. 

Deux Contes de Joe Violon, M. Fréchette. 

Le Golfe (poême), M. Desaulniers. 

A propos de critique littéraire, M. Lafleur. 

L'université en France, M. Coussirat. 

L’université en Allemagne, M. Walter. 

L'université en Angleterre, M. Caldwell. 

Les critiques modernes — Brunetière, M. Coussirat; Jules Le- 
maître, M. Walter. 

A propos du merveilleux, M. Lafleur. 

Les barbiers dans l’histoire, Mme Sauvalle. 

Voiture et Benserade, Melle Eglauch. 

Alfred de Musset, Mme Herdt. 

Les grandes fortunes sont-eiles utiles à l'Etat? M. Sauvalle, Melle 
Eglauch. 


CVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


XI.— From The Niagara Historical Society, through 
Miss JANET CARNOCIIAN. 


In presenting our report in this eleventh year of our existence, 
we feel that we are not without some work accomplished. It is true 
that we cannot record so many papers read as in some years, but this 
was because many of our meetings were occupied by business connected 
with our proposed Memorial Hall. There were seven regular meet- 
ings held from October to May, and besides these many committee 
meetings. The papers read were by the President, “'The Origin of 
the Maple Leaf as the Emblem of Canada,” “ The Life and Character 
of Sir Isaac Brock,” and “ Extracts from the Letters of Mrs. Wm. 
Dennimer Powell.” However, if fewer papers have been read, we 
have this year printed, besides our usual report, two pamphlets, namely, 
No. 13—A Canadian Heroine and St. Vincent de Paul’s Church and 
Origin of names of streets in Niagara; also No. 14—Letters of Mrs. 
W. D. Powell, 1806-1821, and Account of W. D. Miller and family, 
and we are pleased to say there has been a fair demand for both of 
those. 

As regards membership, we have again to record an addition of 
twenty, so that we now number 112; these are scattered from Quebec 
to Calgary, from New York and Massachusetts to Kansas City. A 
great impetus was given to our membership by the annual meeting 
of the Ontario Historical Society being held here and at Niagara Falls 
on the 7th and 8th June. On the first day Col. Cruikshank gave 
addresses which threw much light on the stirring events at Chippawa, 
Lundy’s Lane, and Queenston Heights, and at Niagara were visited 
the old Forts George and Mississagua, St. Mark’s and St. Andrew’s 
churches, and the Historical Room, and, we believe, thus increased life 
and vigour has been given to us. 

The usual visit was paid on 17th September to the graveyards to 
decorate with flowers. The usual grants for printing purposes have 
been received from the Ontario Government and County Council. The 
collection is increasing in number and value, there being now over 
three thousand articles of manuscripts, documents, books, military 
equipage, historical relics of many kinds; over five hundred visitors 
recorded their names. Pamphlets to the amount of $15 were sold 
and over 700 were distributed to members, societies and others inter- 
ested. A visit was paid to the room by the St. Catharines Literary 
and Historical Society and much interest shown. The collection was 
removed for the summer to the Town Hall in the same building, and 
in this large and commodious room the articles were displayed to much 
greater advantage. 


APPENDIX E CIX 


In view of the threatened sale of the Military Reserve here a depu- 
tation was sent to Ottawa, consisting of members from the Ontario 
Historical Society and the town, to appeal against the spoliation of 
the ground made sacred by the blood of so many brave men in the 
war of 1812. A letter from Mr. Wm. Kirby to the president of our 
society regarding this, and one from the president were printed and 
distributed, and it is hoped that better counsels will prevail. 

But it is in regard to our proposed Memorial Hall that we feel 
thankful progress has been made. The president visited Ottawa to 
ask for assistance, and in view of the fact that we are no longer local 
in our aims, but that our membership extends through the Dominion, 
a grant of $1,000 was given; we now have altogether about $3,000 
promised, and plans and specifications have been decided on, a tender 
for $4,000 accepted, and the foundation is now laid on a site given by 
the president, and we hope by September we shall be safely esconced in 
a very handsome building. 


Officers. 


Patron—Wm. Kirby, F.R.S.C. 

President—Miss Carnochan, 

Vice-President—Rey. J. G. Garrett. 

Secretary—Alfred Ball. 

Assistant Secretary-—John Eckersley. 

Treasurer—Mrs. S. D. Manning. 

Curator and Editor—Miss Carnochan. 

Committee—Mrs. T. F. Best, W. R. McClelland, C. A. F. ‘Ball, 
Wm. Miller, W. J. Wright, M.A. 


XII.— From The Elgin Historical and Scientific Institute, through 
FRANK Hunt. 


The past year has been marked by interest and continued effort 
on the part of the Women’s Auxiliary, whose report is appended. 

The institute arranged in October last, for a commemoration of 
the centennial anniversary of the Battle of Trafalgar, by requesting 
the mayor to notify all citizens to display flags, the ministers to make 
reference to the anniversary from the pulpits, and the newspapers to 
- publish special articles on Nelson’s great victory. The president, as 
principal of the public schools, arranged with the teachers to call atten- 
tion to the anniversary. The Women’s Auxiliary held a special meet- 


ing. 


CX ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The institute held three meetings during the last season. Publie 
lectures were delivered as follows :— 


Feb. 2, 1906.—“ On the French Canadian in History,” by Mr. Ben- 
jamin Sulte, F.R.S.C. 

Feb. 23, 1906—“ On English Literature,” by William Wilfrid Camp- 
bell, F.R.S.C. 


Your co-operation is requested in taking measures for the preserv- 
ation of the Southwold earthwork and other historical and archeological 
memorials. 

The officers for the year 1906-7 were elected as follows :— 

President—James H. Coyne. 

Vice-President—Mrs. J. H. Wilson. 

Secretary—Frank Hunt. 

Treasurer—W. H. Murch. 

Curator—Mrs. W. St. Thomas Smith. 

Editor—Judge Ermatinger. 

Council—Dr. S. Silcox, Judge Colter, J. W. Stewart, Charles 
Oakes, K. W. McKay; Mesdames J. S. Robertson, C. O. Ermatinger, 
T. W. Duncombe, W. R. Jackson. 


XIII.— From The Women’s Historical Society of the County of UE. 
through Mrs. R. H. McConne tt. 


During the past season there were six meetings held. The pro- 
gramme consisted of the following papers :— 

A talk on the old “ Fort” at Prescott, by Miss Ermatinger. 

An address on Tecumseh the “ Shawnee chief,” by Mr. Waterbury, 
interspersed with readings by Mrs. Kains from the drama by the same 
name. 

“ Sketches of the men of Bruce County,” by Mrs. Louisa King. 

Conclusion of address on “ Tecumseh,” by Mr. Waterbury. 

“Canadian Senate,” by Mrs. J. H. Wilson. 

Early Women of the Country,” by Mr. Edward Harris. 

“The Hudson Bay Company,” by Miss Grace McConnell. 

The ladies entertained their friends at an evening party held on 
November 27th, 1905. On January 11th, 1906, “The Women’s His- 
torical Society,” presented a flag to the 25th Regiment for their 
armoury. The presentation was made by the president, Mrs. Wilson, 
with an appropriate address, which was cordially responded to by the 
commanding officers, who, later on in the evening, entertained the 
society at a party in honour of the occasion. 


APPENDIX E CXI 


The 100th anniversary of the Battle of Trafalgar was celebrated 
by a special meeting at which an address suitable to the occasion was 
delivered by Mr. James H. Coyne, M.A. 

The membership is 100 — the society having passed a resolution 
limiting it to that number. 

The society is in a good financial condition, having about $80.00 
to its credit in the Southern Loan and Savings Company. 


Officers: 


President—Mrs. J. H. Wilson. 

1st Vice-President—Mrs. James H. Coyne. 
2nd Vice-President—-Mrs. J. S. Robertson. 
3rd Vice-President—Mrs. Truman. Duncombe. 
Secretary Treasurer-—Mrs. R. H. McConnell. 
Assistant Treasurer---Miss McLachlan. 
Assistant Secretary—Mrs. O. J. Stevenson. 
Cor’s Secretary—Miss Coyne. 

Rep’t Secretary—Miss Wegg. 

Curator—Mrs. F. M. Griffin. 


CXII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
XIV.— Report of the Botanical Club of Canada for 1905-6. 


By the General Secretary, A. H. MacKay, LL.D. 


Circulars and special letters were sent out to many addresses during 
the year, asking for co-operation in the various kinds of botanical work 
which the club desires to stimulate. ‘here has been very considerable 
response from many quarters showing that the exploration of the local 
floras is receiving more than ordinary attention. But no local lists of 
plants extending the known range of species have been sent to the secre- 
tary except in the case of the province of Nova Scotia where several 
workers are more or less co-operating. However, many are publish- 
ing papers on some department of the local floras in local scientific pub- 
lications, and these I have endeavoured to refer to as far as they could 
be kept in view, in my report of the Bibliography of Canadian botany 
for the year. 

I have been recommending those making additions to their local 
lists to send such reports annually to the honorary president of the club, 
who, as the official biologist of the geological survey of Canada, is in the 
best position for collating, correcting and publishing such additions of 
new plants and extensions of the range of old plants. 

I have been unremitting in sending out blanks for the report of 
lecal phenological observations; but have yet been unable to have a re- 
port from the Yukon or the Island of Newfoundland. As usual my cor-. 
respondents are most willing to make observations when asked; but 
within a year after they too often find that their absorption in other 
occupations prevented their systematic observations to be carried on at 
interesting seasons, and rather than report a short list they prefer to 
hope to make a more complete list the following year. 

Through the kindness of the director of the meteorological service of 
the Dominion, Mr. R. F. Stupart, I am able to give short reports of the 
first observance of many phenomena at as many as seventeen points over: 
the western provinces of Canada, which stations are distinguished in 
the list following by an asterisk. Mr. F. F. Payne ‘has made a list of 
fifty phenomena which are to a great extent common to all the provinces. 
But he finds that even this select list does not appear to be suitable for 
many localities. J join with him im asking the aid of the club in fram- 
ing a general list which will as far as possible enable us to compare the 
climate of the east, centre and west of Canada as definitely as possible. 
Such a list could be included in all more comprehensive lists in black 
letter, to distinguish the phenomena as the specially important to be ob- 
served, in case the observer cannot conveniently take time for the- 


a 


APPENDIX E CXIII 


observation of a larger range. Perhaps for east and west it may be 
desirable to list equivalent species in juxtaposition. It may here be 
stated, that some of the western species in the tables following, are the 
equivalent of the eastern species—generally one of the following supple- 
mentary western list usually published in accompaniment with the ori- 
ginal eastern list. 


Spring Anemone (A. patens, var. N.), Prairies, fi. 
Salmon berry (Rubus spectabilis), B. C., fl. 

cs ge vs fruiting. 
Ash-leaved Maple (Acer Negundo). Ont. and W., fl. 
Wild Plum (Prunus Americana). East fl. 

Blackberry (R. occidentalis and leuc.) fl. 
ee ie Ne anv ay 
Western Dogwood (Cornus Nuttallii). B. C., fl. 

Oaks (Black and White), fl. 
Song Sparrow (M. Montana) arrived. 
Robin (M. propinqua). B. C., arrived. 
Blue Bird (Sialia sialis). Central, arrived. 
. Junco (J. annectens and Oregonus). B. C. 
Red winged Blackbird (Ag. pheniceus). 
Meadow lark (Sturnella neglecta). Man. 
Humming-bird (7. rufus and Cal.). West. 
Night-hawk (Chordeiles Henryei). B. C. 
Dates and duration of drought. 


Pa BSS SMM | PSs anes 


The general short list of the Meteorological service referred to is 
the following : 


1. Blood Root (Sanguinaria Canadensis)............... Flowering 
maaeitepatica, (Hepabical s Grob) assis eue oars s 
go trains Arbutus: (Bipicgea repens), 4.4..." © oh à 
47 Dandelion, (Varaxacum ‘ottieimale) 9.2.0... 4042. a 
Droles Blue (Viola nca) ner"... 2s a 
Paneer Viole. White: (Violas bande) RE sn os ne ee - 
ea Ooumbine  (Agquilesia formosa ee a) ok oie is alt 0 Cs 
Sy mpleepenty re VACCI UNL WO ora sak Anety el ti ue Lu. 5 
Gen thedeloyer (Erifolium, prabenseys M. CELL he. ry 
HO MM Clover: (Trifoliamerepens) 0H. 100. oct ieie! . 
aie Wilde Raspherry. ((Rubus) 72 exec Werte aie ay sets # 
i sOCultvated Currant. (Ribes ubram) en émane a 
is ee Watdempose: (Hosa. rem) yoked dec ee a fi. sa ur i 


Proc., 1906. 8 


CXIV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


return to the Inspector. 


Trilium (Trillium) 
Anemone (Anemone patens) 


Strawberry, Wild (Fragaria Virginiana) 
Plum, Cultivated (Prunus domestica) 


Yellow Pond Lilly (Nuphar advena) 


BlierBirds et Res oe te ae ale 
Plicker or Golden Woedpeekers Lee 
Song ‘Sparrows. EAU TES es bas AE ES ett te 
Swallows": 20e eae ae eerie fc eee ae ne Bn 
JUNCOES: Li: LORS RES Oh eee ae 
Onioles) M SE RER ERP RS PE 
Bong) Bird se oe RETENIR ASE 
Éamiming Birdy ee CR ao eee aerate 
Frogs -Pipimg ER att oe Se RER EE see 
Earth Worm Casts (Frost out of ground)........ 
Lakes Open 5... hax ues etahwr cis cet ee eee 
Plouphine fr RASE oe ie ee 
SONDE. on buste lies IE RE ener ete 
Hay vCOutting. nee cre, teens SR PRE CRE A a 
Grain Cutting’ een PEN Pr a RE ERP NE 
Planting Potatoes ....... PA ON ARE AT Ge MEER 


Nova Scotian Phenochrons. 


MAD CA GET) AE TA mR An ae 


Ble gee, e 0) \e s tete 


Cherry, Wild “CP runs) wo tae NERO 
Cherry, Cultivated (Prunus Cerasus)............ 
Buitercup((Ranunculus acris) cance a sent: 
Pitcher Plant, (Sarracenia purpurea)#- see 
Saskatoon (Amelanchier Canadensis)............ 
Golden: Rod (Solidago) PSE neces eee 
GEESE oes in ans ce RE ANSE ER M EMESR EE TA eee 
De << Le. se At RATER 1e 
RODINS LE (SEEN ARR EP Re 


Migrating 
[14 


The first table contains the summary of about four hundred and 
fifty schedules of observations made in as many of the public schools 
of the province by the pupils attending school, from a radius of about 
two miles around each school, the observations being proven and recorded 
by the teacher, who transmits the schedule with the regular school 


The superintendent sends the schedules from 


specified regions of the province to the following staff of phenologists 
who are themselves also in the educational service. Their reports 


APPENDIX E CXV 


can be found in extenso in the April Journal of Education for Nova 
Scotia, 1906, from pages 58 to 69. They also compile schedules show- 
ing the average dates (phenochrons) of the various phenomena for the 
coast belt, the low inland belt and the high land belt of each special 
region of the province. These schedules were compiled in their turn 
into the ten regions of the province shown on the said first table, by 
Mr. W. Kent Power, B.A. The said Nova Scotian staff is as follows: 


Region I. (Yarmouth and Digby counties), A. W. Horner. 
Principal, Seminary School, Yarmouth. 

Region II. (Shelburne county), C. Stanley Bruce, Shelburne 
Academy. 

Region II. (Queens county), Minnie C. Hewitt, Science 
Teacher, Lunenburg Academy. 

Region IJ. (Lunenburg county), Burgess McKittrick, B.A., 
Principal, Lunenburg Academy. 

Region IIT. (Kings and Annapolis counties), Ernest Robinson, 
Acadia College, Wolfville. 

Region IV. (Hants county and South Colchester), W. J. Shields, 
Principal, Hantsport High School. 

Region V. (Halifax county), G. R. Marshall, B.A., Principal, 
Compton Avenue School, Halifax. 

Region V. (Guysboro county), J. B. McCarthy, B.A., B.Sc., 
Science Master, Halifax Academy. 

Region VI(A). (Cobequid Slope), J. E. Barteaux, Science 

| Master, Truro Academy. ~ 

Region VI(B) & VII. (Cumberland and North Colchester), E. 
J. Lay, Principal, Amherst Academy. 

Region VII. (Pictou county), C. L. Moore, B.A., Science Master, 
Pictou Academy. 

Region VII. (Antigonish county), F. G. Morehouse, King’s Col- 
lege, Windsor. 

Region VIII. (Richmond county), G. W. McKenzie, B.A., Prin- 
cipal, Sydney Mines High School. 

Regions VIII, IX, and X. (Cape Breton and Inverness counties), 
L. A. DeWolfe, M.Sc., Truro Academy. 


General Canadian Phenochrons. 


The second table gives the dates of the first observance only of 
each phenomenon, except in the case of Nova Scotia, where the average 
dates of the averages of each of the ten regions is given. The observ- 


CXVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ers and their stations for the other provinces are as follows, in the 

order of the table: 
Nova Scotia, the average of about 450 localities throughout the 

province. 

St. Stephen, New Brunswick: Mr. J. Vroom. 
St. John, New Brunswick: G. U. Hay, D.Sc. 
Charlottetown, Prince Edward Island: Mr. John MacSwain. 
Kensington, Prince Edward Island: Mr. J. M. Duncan. 
Windsor Mills, Richmond county, Quebec: Miss Annie M. Dresser. 
St. Thomas, Elgin county, Ontario: Mr. George L. Fisher. 
*Paris, Brant county, Ontario: Mr. John Kay. 
*Birman, Lambton county, Ontario: Mr. J. S. Mellor. 
*Arden, Addington county, Ontario: Mr. Thomas Andrew. 
*Ursa, Peterboro county, Ontario: Mr. Stephen. Kettle. 
*Lakefield, Peterboro county, Ontario: Mr. H. J. Le Fevre. 
Guelph, Wellington county, Ontario: Mr, A. B. Klugh. 
*Orillia, Simcoe county, Ontario: Mr. C. L. Stephens. 
Gravenhurst, Muskoka county, Ontario: J. H. Elliott, M.B. 
*Beatrice, Muskoka county, Ontario: Mr. John Hollingworth. 
*Bruce Mines, Bruce county, Ontario: Mr. John Nicholas. 
*Morden, Manitoba: Miss Laura E. Bradshaw. 
*Norquay, Manitoba: Mr. W. H. Holland. 
*Oakbank, Manitoba: Mr. Alfred ‘Goodridge. 
*Estavan, Saskatchewan: Mr. D. R. Davies. 
Mistawasis, Saskatchewan: Rev. C. W. Bryden, B.A. 
*Princeton, British Columbia: Mrs. H. Hunter. 
*Cowichan, British Columbia: Mr. T. M. English. 
Victoria, Vancouver Island, B.C.: A. J. Pineo, B.A. 
Vancouver, British Columbia: J. K. Henry, B.A. 
*Rivers Inlet, British Columbia: Mr. S. Grant. 
*Quesnel, British Columbia: Mr. D. H. Anderson. 
*Fort St. James, British Columbia: Mr. A. C. Murray. 


Members of the club are directed for the determination of species to 
Mr. J. M. Macoux, 

The Curator, Herbarium of the Geological Survey, 
OTTAWA, CANADA. 


By making duplicate sets of plants to be determined, special care 
to be taken in having them exact duplicates similarly numbered, one 


APPENDIX E CXVII 


set can be sent to the Curator who need return only the determinations 
by number. The specimens, if perfect, may be of value to the Herba- 
rium collections as representing forms from different localities. 


Object and Constitution of the Club. 


The Botanical Club of Canada was organized by a committee of 
section four of the Royal Society of Canada, at its meeting in Montreal, 
May 29th, 1891. 

The object is to promote by concerted local efforts and otherwise, 
the exploration of the flora of every portion of British America, to 
publish complete lists of the same in local papers as the work goes on, 
to have these lists collected and carefully examined in order to arrive 
at a correct knowledge of the precise character of our flora and its 
geographical distribution, and to carry on systematically seasonal obser- 
vations on botanical phenomena. 

The intention is to stimulate, with the least*possible paraphernalia 
of constitution or rules, increased activity among botanists in each 
locality, to create a corps of collecting botanists wherever there may be 
few or none at present, to encourage the formation of field clubs, to 
publish lists of local flora in the local press, to conduct from year to 
year exact phenological observations, etc.; for which purposes the secre- 
taries for the provinces may appoint secretaries for counties or districts, 
who will be expected, in like manner, to transmit the same impetus to 
as many as possible in their more local spheres of action. 

Members and secretaries, while carrying out plans of operation 
which they may find to be promising of success in their particular dis- 
tricts, will report as frequently as convenient to the officer under whom 
they may be immediately acting. 

Before the end of January, at the latest, reports of the work done 
within the various provinces during the year ended December the 31st 
previous, should be made by the secretaries for the provinces to the 
general secretary, from which the annual report to the Royal Society 
shall be principally compiled. By the first of January, therefore, the 
annual reports of county secretaries and members should be sent in to 
the secretaries of the province. 

To cover the expenses of official printing and postage, a nominal 
fee of twenty-five cents per annum is expected for membership (or one 
dollar for five years in advance, or five dollars for life membership). 
Secretaries for the provinces, when remitting the amount of fees from 
members to the general treasurer, are authorized to deduct the necessary 


CXVIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


expenses for provincial office work, transmitting vouchers for the same 
with the balance. 

The names of those reporting any kind of valuable botanical work 
during the year will be published in the list of active members, even 
should the payment of fees be forgotten. All payments are credited to 
the current year and the future. Lapsed active membership can, there- 
fore, be restored at any time without the payment of arrears. 


CXIX 


APPENDIX E 


C'IPI| ‘FHTIZ LPTIS SPIIE SPLIE SIG OFT) “GET 6 SSI16 LELIS TFT 
"SLITS 62117 TSI|L'9ZLTIG ZLTIL'8LT *GATI9' GLTIP'PATIS'IZTIZL'9LT 
“epllG'OPIIL'PPIIS GEIL SET IPI|L'LETIZ'GETIP GETIT PET|L'SET 
ce. |2 681 OFTIG PEIIT OSTIIT OFT|Z SET\S TET9 SELIG OFT|S JET , 

PA ee E7 7, DOooe COCO ESS ET 
“cerlo'6grle' gprl2' 2STI9 6818 SFIS LETIG EETIL'PEI| TETIP LET 
"OSIIT'SELIT SELIP GET] “FET|L ZETIP ISIIS OSTI£ OSTIS 9CTIE EET 
Ven ores bee) CHSCT CGT) ANT TINSLETS LS °°|G' G&I 
*“6erle'rerls Ogt/Z'O8TIT ZETIS'OPIIS SITIL'IETIP GETIP PAIIT GET i 
“ogrl “FZTIL Pal L'ISIIP Stil 'OSIIP ZLITIG PITS ETt\2 60L|F Ot 
“agro salle ISLS SSIS acll8 ESliG L2Z1/2 SSljo' FST! “LOTS Est 
gE a es ‘OITIS ‘90T| “9IT 

ai) ey eo les ee | c NAME 
tA mn a 
SR IE En IE ESS ot |g 
S| of Er) 26) lab] & | ES] à ® 
S| 2a Sb ese || oles || See eerie | iS Z| 8 =) 
28 ATEN REG he | se) 6 LEE ne | 8 

a <9 oe Q © EE De Eb ct 
Balen] Se/Beloc| Ë | gal & | Be] & | 1 
“ouNen| £6|88|.2| & | em| s | B = 8 
© 96 . D T BE Go 5 eZ) =| À 
6 | 2% à | >: AE: [ep) He e ee a ee 
© B © a Bo e =| ct zt € 
AE OU ee @gpl| os rl A | Reg Ü ® 
CHE eee AE) mere 5 Oo eases 

5 ® RENE 09 D 

à 8 | 3 8 S 

*SNOID THAT 


‘NONNOS) PNINOOTG NARA 


°ttt:::"* greuroyjo UNoexXeBIEy 


‘* odii }InIy 


nes 9ng ‘&dort1} woryedor{ 


°°" pBpeymono ‘eJewuped Bora 


ss... 


* BUBIUISITA Bledel y 


ETUI CTI OV 


SISU9PEUE() BLIBUINIUES 
sree sess esuaAI8 wnJosiMbE 
°°° ry ‘suodor vastday 
**** saplopnuwua1} snpndog 


* PILA ‘BUBOUT sNuIY 


LL PT 


vpue[q BIOIA 


mm NOH 1 © EE DOD © 


*Arenu® f ydeoxe 
youe 0} ouo ppe 1894 duorg 10,7 


c9g""""*-90€T 
peer cst AON 
POS 400 
erg tt 4deg 
cpa any 
zig; ct Am£ 


Ist’ se eee ‘oune 
TOI” ORO PATES TAT 


OST °°°" Tady 
06 YOR 
6G Tt qag 


Te ccc ues 


‘HJuOu youve jo Aep JSE] 944 
0} Zulpuodseii09 1894 oy} Jo AVC 


*VILOOG VAON 


GO6I ‘4710¢ GHGNa HVAHX 


‘PEL |S°SET|9 YETIS) GPIIG SELIT PET 
£ 891 |S’ PLATIS SATIS GLTIZ ZOTIT LOT 
9'SGI |S'GSIIT FETIO YET/S SST|8 9ST 
GOST | °° |Z PETS IPII6 62/2 OST 
opr cl... Orion 

‘TEL | ‘SSII SETIZ GETIT SETS GET 
£'OST | ‘IGI| “SET/8' 9ET9 LET/8 9ST 
Oy 8oh |) PEL ZED = |Se8can\oeaor 
T'8SGI | “SET/S°8ZT\S 9ST\6 OETIS OLT 
6'OII | ‘IGIIF SIIIP 2TIG PIIIF FIL 
G'SII | ‘OST ‘GIP TOLL SITE LIT 
F'SOI | ‘9SI| ‘OITI6 9ITIS 9OTIG LOI 

7 So! Si See 
io) 
D Hi ey) ee) Fab ae 
D Bb be | Wo ° 
9 | alee) Fl es] ob 
Ss a B&| gE} g ie 
~ [és s9) $2] e P| oe 
= ce Sn] 9 i} Sw 
° Di oA) pe 22 p © 
SE Q gs are: D: DE 
[el a oO 5 SA 
Q Le Q Q 
a AIT ÿ | mo | On 
Bb >| chy = 
ap = ES 
oO 


9'9STIS TET\6 LET 
€ TLAT8 FOIIT POT 
ZA LSLiGmeAokl «cor 
8 ££1/2 91/2 GGT 
CNECT2 EOS T= == 
T'PET| ‘OST 9ST 
S'SSIIP PSL\G Fol 
“SPLI9 £SI| °° 
9'SETIL GOLF 9ST 
£'III| ‘SOI 9 SOT 
F'GII| ‘GSIIG GIT 
601! SOT £ SOL 
on B| © 
jan jen) ee 
E oë | 5 
© æ | © 
p Pet || is) 
#4 St | © 
p op [en 
5 Bail |.5 À 
a (8 ta) oe 
AE 
& > 
oa 5 
© R 
3 a 


S'IETIS 9eT 
P'£9T| “TOT 
L’PST\E Sot 
P'18116 FOL 


T'SGI| ‘£SI 
T'EGIIS Sit 
L'6GIIT 611 
G'£OT|S 86 
9'SII| ‘FOI 


L'O01I8 66 


| 


susant) ‘ouIMAeuS °F 


‘3Inqueun'T pue 
‘Aq3i( pus y}noui8X ‘I 


*“SNOIDE 


a ae) 


“NGaG LSUIX NGA 


‘SHTONGHHOS NOILLVAHHSHO IOOHOS OITHNd 
ose WOU QHIIANONO ‘VILOOS VAON dO HONIAOUd FHL dO NOIOHY HOVA UOT SNOUHOONAHd YAHLO ANV ONTHH MOT 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


CXX 


"&gll ‘I91G'£9119 FSIS ISL GGTIS SPI|L'IGTIF ISTIS SPIj6 ESI} °°  BIOPOUY UOIPUSPOPOUX 98 | “SFL | ‘LPI| ‘OSTI6 SST| “6FI\6 9FI|6 SPI6 EFI] ‘OPIIP SPI|L'EPI 
“opr| “LST| ‘cerl6 grlT'OST|6 EST\F SFI\6 LPI|T ST 9 2PIIG IST} *wndiuoorqg{ie WII, GG |T'OPI | ‘EPI| “SSI! "SPIG PIC GPIIP GPIIS SFIIL SPhLIL OIF SFL 
tele "rzrl ‘ezrl ‘corlr'e97| ‘sgr/r 29119 1918 9918" 6P1/a 9x" """""""suodoi "yy FZ |L'SCI |‘ ‘| ‘E9T 2 E9T 2 Gers 6ST|Z°F9T|S SOLIS SGT|G'ECTI9 FFI 
*8SI|2" 291,6 £91/2' SSTIT 91/6 S9T|9 09119 GGTIS LCT| ‘FOIS 097) ©" "SM08 SNMMOUNUUY EG |ÿ GST | “TST! “6ST\6 O9TS LPII6 SSTIE 9STI6 SST\6° ZFTIS OST Z°SFI 
*"*"l -aoclg'oselg'zgclo OES] ‘gral ‘accl °° |S 66] ‘arclS SIe| “edts ginay ,, ” GG IF GOS | “G61\Z° L1G} “OGZ} “8ZG} ~ZOS) ‘91c| °° * "|S" SST] “62T 
“60116 SOT SOIT SSIS ISLS ESl|P GIL SFIS 9PI| “SFIS EST) °°“ UUeq puB‘uBH UMIUOUA IG |S OFT | ‘GATE SGTI9 ESTP 2PII6 EPIIL'OPI| ‘EPI|L'SPI|6 LET|6 6ET 
eeeee oe ‘SUT 07 | *e28 "posi: “OFZ De Rats p'O1gl: ‘odti ina 6 À 0& C°80Z rind loo om “SLI “82S DOC *OIG Anna la) ver Talo On 
*srIl' £919 OTIS OSI|F ISL\F OCI(6 GFIIS 9PIIG' IST] ICT] *EGT| °°" °°" BoruBayAsuueg snunig 61 |G'LYI | ‘SI| “OGT/E SSIS OFTI|S 9FI|L'OGTIE SPIE IFI|P OPIIP'OPI 
..... ‘T1Z STG ese oeeee FETZeete NteueealBeGOSin lb LOS * ‘edti JM} é , ; 81 £'P6I ay oneness *p0G O61 en (ofenel lis evarai@i|is terne .ef|leiteneie, & ceeee OST 
‘6FI| ‘SSIIG SSI/6 SFI|Z SPIP ISI] ‘SPIIS SPII8 9FLI9 OFT) GPL] °°” ‘SISU9PUUE) Jorqousjouly LT 9 EFT | SPIE LEL6 GPIG FIL EF) “OPTS SPITZ LETIL OFTIE GET 
“IFLIG SELIG SFIIF IST] ‘OPIIS SPIP FFI] ‘GpIIS PI °° |S CPI" ‘umogoon ByodaN OT |F' OFT | SET] “SFIS PHI O SFI] ‘ICIIP PPIIG GEI|Z OFI\E SET\L OFT 
*pall ‘9grl ‘ogrir'ogt| “STIs OFTIE ger| "| “IST] “LET/e°OST|- °° °° °°“ BUBIULToI’H BIUOIABIO GT |P° TEL | ‘SII| “IETS OPT) EST\p 2CI|S LELI8 2ST] ‘| “SST| "SET 
“ogr a orro optio oprle IPI|P OFTIE 1FI|L 2eT|L° LETS’ PEI 8g'apll  """"""""""""" ‘eroyra? s19d09 FT |S'LEI | ‘OPI| “SFIIG CHL O IFIIG OEIL FIL GETIC'OETIS ISIIT Sor 
reooclessesl -geqlg-gerla ser "lp pprl ole rerl °°" lo perl: unuvoneuy wnmorqaig gr g'6e1 [°° |) “PHILP eerls"9arle grrle"ogr|" * *" Peale 2 
| 

aaa PEAR ss re “Arenuepy Jd09x9 slam Se |e sles re sn 

© © go a Soh 261 elt) i) eae: a 4989 07 ouo pp 1894 dey 10,7 La © © co x Sen Lf Die 

mn g g 2) nD 

ERA RE gare eens liam? lag) cc Drarasemennr| À Bu eel ASS LS EN oe Pelite ale 

4 p À is at ù e& ion a8 is) 2,2 + a Pees "+ AON HEELS OOOO OAR AT A < wo fe > 6 4 ciel Et Et Qs 5 pe A 

a] § B | e&| oF a Oc p o}] Bp a DEEE so. nid se 2/5 Bi gus | eel ES 29 Ë ec | B 

5er | ea © Ee E SU |. D HE | © 3 FOE O  OGI Tady = 5 | eS] » g Ss ë = ss) É | © 

28 | %o| 7e Eo| Eo eu 3 [EE] 2 S| gygeeeesesqdog 06 ct MoreTY 5 Qe] LO| +8 a] 69 pe |. © vel & 

Ea al fa eclos| E Sal & | Bo = ry | Spa ny 60 Ct Gag bd fe | 9/2 /e2/ Bo) 8 FE gE: EB 5 

~~ Sn Se AB à a Sop p 5 p a AT aser ATL te SOOO D SE ET a 7 Giro On a8 "oO As Sa p 8 © D 

gl 52) Peer ef] Sc léelE ce) s € a | ASF) res) o | Pel E lp le 

ig || Seo St) Ste fled si fe PV t= ha LÉ ENS ee : 6 hoes eh 5 | Bes A MR el @ | eG] © 

o| &o ol ae Bl & = me = qiuou Yous J P 351 OT} 5 œ | E® AM a} & Sl nm | asl gy 

ee LI ES] on $ =o ER x | CEE 8 | 03 Surpuodsoroo sve eq} Jo ABQ | 3 el Bes Seo Grail a er fal IRIS 

© a eal Ee) SSNESM Eten 5 Wa © S| SFele2l & 5 & 

ae SEE 2 z cn ë < 

*SNOIDEY ‘VILOOG VAON *SNOIDGYY 
‘GO6I ‘ATO¢ AHANA HVAX 
‘NONNOD DNINOOHG NAH ‘NAS LSU NAHM 

ee ee ee SS 


*(penurzu09)—"VILOOS VAON AO HONIAOUd AHL OI SNOUHOONHHA UAHLO ANV ONIHHMOTAH 


CXXI 


APPENDIX E 


*ozrle 8219 LLT\6 6917 SLTIS'ZLTIL'IZTIP'OLT| "OZTIL'TLTIS ELT 
“ezrlr'osrlo szrit org gere 81e 92118" G2T|S"ezt|L'aLT|S OLT 
“TLUS ELF OL] ‘991! ‘ILTS'TZT| ‘19119 G91|6 S91|S'691T 691|" 
the “GLTIL GLB E9T\Z 0219" SLT|S 991| |S FOT|S°SLT/E OAT 
se. lcosre"8zr| oz‘: ‘|T'ozrle GLT/L ELT/e SZTI9TLT) GT 
“ogrlg sort P9TIS 0911 97) ‘SOT|L' FETS GCTIS 8SST|8  GCTI9  8ST|" 
ce) ecrit 'S2rIT SATIS TILT] ‘SLI SLT\9 691,6 OLTIG 69119 SLT 
“LOLS PLIIG SLI|6 691 T ILT9 SLI] 99TI8 SOTI6 ZT £9118 691|° 
c...-lo22rl8 LLL SOT GOTIE LOTIL 9STIS E9T] ‘E9T9 ZSTF POT 
DOO DS PTS TO TIOSSOT tty A] Se "6S1| “99T\E POT) “LOT 
SPI] “TOL/ST9T|8O9T |G O9T/Z°FOT/E SS19° LST|L 19T|S°SS1\Z 6ST 
“OOTIG'99TIS gorig'ogr2'egt| ‘191| ‘PST|G ECT|9 9ST) “SSTjL° LST)” 
| erg" "" "| “SPs OLZT| 8£c| 202)‘ |8° se] “FST|4 208 
“cerloeorls Forte: LETS LETS OOTIT' SST/T 9ST! ‘26116 6112" 8ST 
i eee = | Neer is | GIE P| 9 Be ES 
a) BE) FiSelor| à |Ss|e ll | 
ee | Pei Belegl| sol À | ee; 2 | EE) 8 | à 
reuse ee Ah), le) 
sl a) gels) ") 2) oe) el" 
5 ele # = 
poe I 2 AA alee EE I Eee ee ee ee 
*SNOIDAYY 


‘NOWNOD DNINOOTG NaH AA 


— … —— …—— 


oo 


°°" yquBoneT Wnwmoqques AI) 


* + adi FINI} 


” 


vet ** JOTOOISIAA SIT 
“++ 099 ‘BOu19909 sndwyeID 
** BYVUBIBAXO SnIBy CID 
BILOJIjSNsue IUT yy 
*** BONS CITY] 
sso ** S1[8910q BeUUly 
*UINTpOJIysnZue wNyouLsAstg 
rer ‘orne wnIpodridAN 
“-staqsnyed BI) 
resets SI[8910q eIuoJuI[) 


‘+++ BUBOLIOULY SI[EJUSNLT, 


‘sss es* SISU9PUUES) SNUIOS) 


OF 
68 
8€ 
LE 
9€ 
gg 
FE 
€& 
GE 
TE 
0€ 
68 
86 
LG 


*Arenuvsp 7d99X9 
youve 0} ouo ppe 1804 dvoT 107 


eget t+ * 90 
pee iets AON 


POS seer 490 
13" teres dos 
CFS" settee ‘3nv 


zig Ane 


ert "oung 
Tepe "Au 
OG ema 
O6 “qe 
ge “qe 
Te cup 


‘QJUOUI yous JO Avp SU] oT} 
0} Sutpuodsei109 169Â ay} JO AVC 


*VILOOG VAON 


‘CO6T ‘ATO AUANH HVAIX 


*(penu1U0))— VILOOS VAON JO HONIAOUX FHL UOXI SNOUHOONAHd UAHLO GNVY DONIVUMOTS 


2° L9T “SLUL SLUG GLE O9T|F 89119 IL1|F E9T\9 E9TIS E9T\P SOT 
9'ILI | ‘SLT, “9LTIS*92ZT\6 OZT ‘12411821 OZT|2'697|2' ZOTIT LOT 
Z FOL | ‘991 S'S9TIS TAT\S I97|S'ZOTIT 891 “SST|9 SST|P SOTIT 99T 
€°S9T | ‘0219 O02TIS'O91| “S9T/Z°S9TI6 6ST| °°” CG’ ScTis SLT 
T'&LT -821/S' 6210 02119 691/2'921/2 99TIZ OLT\h 69119 02119 8ST 
R'ESI | ‘SSII9 2619 66116 PSI|6 FS1/9 SSTIS OST “OST|Z TSTIT LPT 
CeO al cee L'PLUS' G9TIE SOTIL 99TIT SLT|8 FOLIO SOLIP POTIP LOT 
r'got | “SS1|9°69T/8°99T\9 FOT|S cor 6 29T|G SST|F 6ST|8O9T/S 6ST 
g'eer |''*' |G 2OTIL'S9T|6 SETISSST/8 ecr|g egrls'2G1| “9ST\9° SST 
e-oor |°°°"'| “cor! ‘egrka cor! ‘99T|" "| “PST| "26 907) | 
g'£GT ‘OFTIG ocrlz'zor|c ogrle FSTIE 6ST|F TGIIG'TGT|9 SSI\F OST 
z'ecr | “cerlo'eor| ‘6grla ogtlL'8PIIT FST|9 SPIIS'SPI|S 2PI|9 OFT 
ane eae ele Geert togl Penna teen 
“OST | “SSTIL 9ST "6STIL ISTI6 OSTIG este 0S1IZ OST O OSTIL OFT 
7 Blech | RE SC ES En | eee 
g SES a) (2 
ë | Pl BlyZ/ oP] mn) oH) Bl rl 
2 ss i) Ss el a Qs =] pe 4 
Cre Neel EN SET SE RSS | eben logy | erence 
5 ||) eal gol À | ee] à | Ea À 
mn | Se | S5 SE) Bel sel § | Sal. | Be] à 
4 Fh Gr | © (SI SES" a p 
| ASF) eel ges a | PZ] EEE 
nl) 20 Ae ulcer aed Meee Se aie shes 
: o| Bl 8/821 cers 5 8 | 8 
À 3 —© } ® o 
« Le) 5 w < 
Belated g - 
toch EN Te TS RS ES 
“*SNOIDAY 
_ ak ee 
“NGG LSUL NAH M 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


CXXII 


ee 


eee sie nya on ao Gs *6IG +102: ° "lg" goal: ‘(202 °° “(edt am) ‘ - pe 
“rgrl6 zero scrlo rerl6 ISIS SEL Ss 2rrl6 SPINE GFT) *##1|6"001|" *** “(peyeanmo)wunaiqna soqn Eg 
c--Ir'acrla gerls orrl8 SFI] ‘EST 6 SPIP OFIIS SPIL'GPIIT GPT] °°°" uoo13 rvodde soar], ZG 
CECNOECEO)] ECC ROC EC ‘CGI “GLI sine ste "OLI “SLI ‘FLI “61 ee ee C281 ee OTe DTA BTE TON 1g 
"GLI| ‘GLIIT OLTIZ'SLTIS'SZLI|P SLZT/9 SLI\P GTS PLTI9 OLT GS SLT)" °°" *‘epeuwunyne uopo}uosT O¢ 
soeers =" 16°SeTi6 SLI "S2TIS SSLi§ SSIs O8T|S GST] “6ZT|6 IST" °° "°° Bprlony O0 67 
eeecelenes -cgr! ‘zetl ‘Ost| “er “Sztl ‘SzZt/6*22T)° °°" * L'SLI POP COCOON TATE] UN Bjeunig BF 
OS VANES VSR ARSON | NC ZT| ES SO) Nh G'GLIG OZTIT' QT" ** Baindind viusovlIeEg Lp 
css...) seyzle-apelegez| “ogzleoFe| °°" "|2°982| “Seat 45e “ed yma, 1 OP 
‘ost| érloézrlr'eér| ezrle szrlr'o2rls" g21/6 91/9 gzrl6 92r|*****-******* ensoqta snqny Gr 
he! gra eut "À": ézre #zrle 6212 92718 621)": ** ++ mres-veuo snqiueurqu FF 
ST cel corel egegl el 20 | are" le"eoal: +" "le etal +: -odx grnay : _ 
*carl| “ILTI6" ILI|2 99116 SL116 LZ9T|P TL SLT] ‘ILTIT'OZT| ‘691 """"""snso3rs snqny SP 
*garl "| ‘zzilr ELIS azra eztl6 691 141 ‘OZTIPTLTIP SLT "++ eueape IeqdnN Th 
rene memes reel "Arenu®f Jdo9x9 
Si yi Ca Sil Gall & æ | oo nie | & Yous 0} auo ppB AveA dvoy 10) 
à oO 
HE 2 ie we we a i > leg Ps 8 og" 0aq JST'***""ounf 
4 p À Se a 5 i= =a où B ae 5 n pepe ae AON [USES SO OATH 
Seles PO ES Me |) Slice CE ER ARRET Ocha =. Tey 
Qo Ô “9 Fa Ba mA © ©, eg £ <4 €2Z "de 06 OSEO TE AI 
Ea SS ce Bie of & ay ne 50 = Wy epecccc BMW 66 TT eg 
Ms a) 2m Bs a8, mis a = TH 8 Bo B 3 GIS ee Ap Te Notre pe 
Ex |" ‘ © ; 
3 Bo a BS pee) Ge ME Ie ES a (=| ‘qjUOUI 4982 JO AEP JS] oT} 
El) tS ES | Qn| & Eu NCA IN) 8 | 0} Sutpuodsesi09 180Â og} Jo AC 
© onl § Ro C= fom 5 @ f=] . 
SCIE ET 8 ce 
° oO © 4 < 
LENDIONT *YILO9S VAON 


‘NOWWOD ONINOOAG NHHM 


‘GO6TI ‘ATOS AAANG HVHX 


6 P61 
€ SFT 
S'6ET 
L'69T 
GOAT 
6° SLT 
I eyat 
L°GLT 
9° 98% 
G'OLT 
£'GLT 
6 £0% 

"E9T 
GOO} 


d 10} 03810AF 


“2DUTAO1 


recferees] stg 
“SPIT GSTI8 OST 
Pe AAAS SA 
++] -ggrl “Ber 
"6978 GLATIS PLT 

ao en g'egr 

5 ‘£8I| ‘PSI 
TRE D “GLT9 “LLT 
RE TT 
“GLI “gate 121 
es SRS2T) S280 
EE ET 


*6F1|S' 8919" LOT 
‘041| *SZTI8 TA 


NO ET 
bd 
il oe 
3 © w ca 
4 5 B 
St |] fuse] tele 
Qo © a5 
IPS 
m s 2 Be 
yl) teas ts 
Le] [She] joe 
Le] LU Q 
æ D & 
© i Le] 
2 ® 


E"EPT|F'OFI 
p'OFI| ‘ET 
Dore an 
&'891| “291 
PLLI| “ELT 
BELT} ‘SLI 
9°ZLT/9"OLT 
"£82 

“TLTI€ 891 


*&2TIS' 697? OLTIS TILT 


CSe7 AON SY ee 


G'6ST 6 &91,S 991,9 S9TI9 F9T 


eul-"| -902! “261 *" 
8'GPIG'9PI| ‘OPIS'IPIIL'IPI 
"6EI| ‘EPIIO'IPII6 GETIP EET 
AA “TG " SLT 99T 
6°69T|F TLT/8°SL21/G° 291] “69T 
&'PLI| “ELTI9'SLT) “9LZT\6 SLT 
T°GLT] “9LTIS°SLT| “69T| “FLT 
9°SLT| “O8T|S OZT| “99T) °°” 
GSEs SEs] “OFZ PEs) | 
9°89T|6 OLT/L 991 TLT\6 897 
OÉCGZTI MEN Gene 
«role et vole: 
G'O91/S'G9T 
“GOT! “TOTIG’SOTIS O9OTIE GOTIZ SOLIF SOT 
oR CRC ER) 

mM 
melas] H| By 6 
CENT E Qp =] 
Ss5| ar 28 | 5 
Fol Bol & | Se] 2 
pO Bo p o (70 
AP RES 
pe | Bel © | 0) À 
BO we) & &| & 
Ro | Gul & 5 
= ‘Be © te] 

=? a wo 

® © x 


N ~~ 
wn 
oo ey 
EON aie 
ao; B 
re | © 
BS | & 
& Ca 
80|E 
© 
ES | À 
mp | © 
a R 
Ca 
‘SS 


“SNOIDEYY 


nd 


‘NEGAG LSUHIH NHHM 


ee eee eee 
*(PONM13U0D)— VILOOS VAON dO AONIAOUd BAHL HOX SNOUHOONAHd UAHLO GNV ONIYAMOTA 


CXXIII 


APPENDIX E 


#/ae1/e'aer|6-o8T/e" 11/6" 171 
G'GPII6 OFT/9 9E1'8 6ET/Z° SET 
ele" 6ne zenl2 Gen oct 
D EEE PT DE EE 
RES °°: "JZ'GGT|. ISTIIS'G2T 
°°°" IT 9LT/8° TLZ116 69118: S9I 
°°°" "IL PLL SLL P96 POI 
“OLT| “PLII8° £2LTI6 99T/S'OZT 
“POLIS 99119 OZT| ‘6SIIT EOI 
°°°°"12"G91I|8 SOTIE 9ST9' SOI 
hs hess sgzzl «gaz 
see"! “LOTI8°S9LI9 GGTIG'6ST 
reel) cord ze 
"OSTIF SSII “€9T)Z°SSTie SSL 
o| ©] œ| | © 
Bi ERA) SE 
a] e8 ser 
eo ct 
Qo Cileatselessa Re 
Be] S5| S68) pe] cg. 
(=) 5 
a| Sm Bp AB 2 
Seo uen Rae Te 
so] Reg Qa D: am 
o}] &o a Bo CA 
Set El kel eu 
i=} oO - Lalo) 
Si AS) 


“(UOBBIS JO 7817) Surjue[d-07804 


” 


SUuIMOG 


LL] 


* (uosuss Jo 481g) Jurysno[g 


‘‘wnso19qn} UNuE[OS 


oe 


esu9781d wuneTyd 
* esueyeid WINITOsII], 
***-suedel UINI[OJIIT, 
°°° su83[nA BAuUIIAG 
DETTE STI ACT 


°* B91S8W0P snunig 


89 
29 
99 
gg 
F9 
£9 
&9 
19 
09 
6g 


“serls'ar1o"oer(r'ecrlL'earlo per 
g'oer| set] ‘éctle zatle rerls Fel 
9921/6 8erlr'1a18" LITE STTls cer 

ARE ce] +102! “8zrr"c0c/: 
Peart er ann 
g-gzrleoo1le 1912 591) ‘2616 291| 
e"ezr|s 9919 "eotle"zorl6: rorls" 201 |: 
6° PLI9' SOT a cor|t'so1/z sorle"o21|" 
g'porig ser r'ectls"serl6 9cr|2 107!" 

“gorls'serls agro esti rerla ser|" 

"90z} ‘802! ‘g02| ‘col: ": L'TIe|" 
2091/9" perle 6FIIZ'FSTI9“OST|F 2ST) 

se eer | acon eae eee eee 
PeSIip SPIO LPLIe ser] ‘rerle ect 

a a co RER ETS 

à 

RS) SES) 2 | 2 

oe [Ne re eee ae 

© & g Es ge ost 

4 PSA olen oles 

4 a JE 

3 à oy 


“SNOIDEY 
a 
"NONNOT ONINOOTG NAHM 
=——ooooooowTwTeoa_—_sS—— 
*(penus;uo9)—"WILOOS VAON 4O HONIAOUd AHL YOA SNOUHOONAHd UAHLO ANV DNIHHMOTA 


vedi JIn1} 
‘°*****"sN88199 snunig 
*‘(edrx gay) 
‘(peyarmo) wmiBr0 “y 


89 
Lg 
9¢ 
ca 


” ” 


“Arenues ydeoxe 
989 0} auO ppB 1894 deeT 10 


cog" sees *90q 
Fe OOO OD AON 
02" fee tees 990 
(MACON Te ETS 
FZ" eee tee ‘any 
FAN OO ON Am£ 


race en 
one 
081: "°°" 1udy 
Eee ee 
Cie 


Ie ‘cc cues 


‘QJuOUI Yous Jo AEP J6EI 97] 
0} Surtpuodso1109 1894 eu} Jo Aeq 


“VILOOG VAON 


*GO6I ‘ATOS AUANE YVAX 


"oct | “SZI| “SZI| “PSTIL SETI pere LZT|L° TETE Fe SIT6OIT 
€°L4Z1 | SEI] ‘rer9'aerle pers LETS LZT|\8°SZI| “ZT ‘GIT9'EII 
P'OIT | “GITIG eSr|L'1Sr& 981) “GIT|S GILG EIT] “TIT| ‘OITS 001 
PISTE ya ee" Pre ‘002! ‘621! ‘PSII£ PSI ZLI 
DR is EE "IG" 28TISOLTIO'SLT|L" 291" p2t| ‘le 807) “TST 
DOTE g'eurtis cors'agr2 61e 2912 6S1a 191) ‘cerlo'2pr 
g'8SI .|L'991\a"9gra gerlo"cer a roi ogrir'#etlr'ecrla"ocr 

"OT | ‘LIT 6916 8911 T91S'FOTIT 1916 8/2 2SI 6 091 8 097 
9°PST | 8916 191|G S91|2'eST9 SSIS LET 9 OST|L’ShI| “ISTIL SPT 
g'agt |'"*" "|p 6ST|F'09T\9 OST|F'9GT\8° LSI] ‘ogrie 2p1e 8p1l9 "arr 
[60 oe ORS a ya *G6T| *102| ‘461/2°961|":* 
Leo ES T'I918 601F'OCI| ‘PSI 6 COTS GPS SFI O9 ZI] “SPT 
oH NY al SET FOUG|e: M0 002 202 a gels 
E' LPL | “OPTS SETS 2orIe LPIIP SPLIT QPL! ‘errS'ert6 91/6 art 

| 
Bee | Gal cer ct) | cy cca en sil tes ohooh 
g oP) un 
CE RSR A PAUSE A ESRI AE" TEL 
o 8 Bb ll ice ieee. =u 98 4 BS B 
h a B or | ar = La) 
© SR er =I H So © HE | © 
va Qo ()|| == a 2 re; à je} || fe 
Wy | Ba] Sy | oo BE ce) Bb | 8a] & | bs) & 
8 | "ml s@2/8e/e8) 18) & |Sml eB | § 
3-1 S| 88|FRl a? | Bel à | fe) 8 | ee! B 
a (> 2) Se oleae See | Bl | EIRE 
@ = Re ps m © On wn Sy AE CT 
5 Le] CN CES low ® 
a ® - 0 9 m lon 
: BOISE g < 
*SNOIDAY 


‘Nagg LSUIX NEHA 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


CXXIV 


——_——_—_——— 


ssl ssslss ssl. 


roses ssl. 


"sale eLelr 82e 'o8c| ‘02c|'‘"‘lo'oselc'zzel6 ral ‘zza oc 922 
"GeZ|G 2valc scels Sec] ‘Iral °° L'GEPaIT ISS|L' 9e ‘8GG| ‘Lyc 
<PIUGISEPUG|S Te SU 0c |A | ee L'F0G 08202 ees Or 
c'arliL'OpI| ‘Leris'gcr's ocre irl! ‘spr! ‘setle OPIlP SI 2'EPI 
o| ©] œ| x] o©| a BP] w So Sey 
: eo) 
mn 
EU Ble | GONE RE lee) S| € 
Das ge | SP | eel eg | eels | LÉ) à | à 
Do | Se sol 2 | Se led le. | à 
Em sy] 28 ee oS § Set a | Bo} & + 
cie CON SOA RCE alee | DS 5 a 
TRS eon ae Rel 2B | ce) & | à 
Le] be) en >: am Q Car = [er ae (ov, 5 
® | &o al! Bo On & S| x ne = a 
S/S] S/ FP) SR] à Elle adits lle 
5 ® = Se © i) lon 
3 ® 3 a ta 
“SNOIDGY 


‘NOWNOD PNINOOGG NAA 


ed 


= p1eq 


“MO ** 


‘1804 


°°° "Ale ul A 07 


qz£ 


” 


* 28OY—4SOIJ UUININE JSIT AB), 


q9z 


°° “y31q—SUW8917S UI 1978 MPO) 


agz 


” 


“** piëq—s01; BZutids yse peo, 


qPL 


” 


** punoid U9}IUAM 03 MOUS ySU TCP, 


‘* sexHe] Jo dutuedoge,, 


°°? ‘’SI9ALI JO Ssutuedore, 


BUISSIp-07840g ZL 


Sutyjno-ulwiy TL 
3ut}3n9-A8H OL 


(uosBeas JO JSIg) Sutlrways-deseyg 69 


*Arenuee ydevoxe 
yove 0} ouo pp 1894 dveT 10.7 


eget ttt 00g 
pes". AON 
B08 "°°" WO 
erg ttt adag 
epee SNy 
Zig AE 


ERP 
08L::""""1udy 
Ogee teaser 
Cte pe 
OP bonny: 


‘AJuOU 989 JO AEP 4ST 944 
0} Sutpuodseii0d 1894 oY} Jo AE 


*VILOOS VAON 


“GO6GI ‘AIN GHINA HVAX 


"B82 |" "|G F8Z/6"962| “FZ F°SLZ|h" zic seclc 8Lz/8°62z/8" S8z 
L°€G% | “098° 2G7'9°293.L" 97/2" OFZ] ‘Grele 6FZL'GFZ'S*OFZF 192 
Z'06z ‘FES ‘261 “661 RAID 0 | LOI) lees nese CD DE EST" 
&'vOr | EI] “28 | “66 (6‘0ore'9o1s'or1| ‘11168 |9°ZOT| ‘oo 
Z°Z9L |S F918 6919 "001€ For 9 roro’ zorls 2er e cerz 6crz ser 
g'ovr |" "gore" Lers'ocr(r scrla er] ‘egr| ‘sa r:8r1l2'9cT 
g'var | TEI] "612 2er 9 6crle 6c1|L OSI] “SS1\S° SSIS" PITT FTI 
SOIT | ‘ogr6'acré art r'ocile 1er LT1/6 gr1e FIIP SOIF FOI 
SOUL | FSI) STI 919 2o1|£ eor£ ocre SOT)" ‘6 :zo1(F F6 
L°16 | ‘001! ‘66 |2°96 |2°Z6 |9°06 |s'96 |6"Gs l'es \6°88 Less 
6'F9Z | ‘soc c'zozo' 12cs czclo scc| ‘rozl6 cozl1 rozS' zozis ge 
v'éga | ‘zcalg'arale 2ralL'Lecle gel ‘1cc| ‘erelo oezr Leclerc 
e"661 | ‘O1Z| ‘802 ‘star roels' soc) ‘ssrle £61| 8'Z61/e Est 
"eer | “98T! “SZr'g Ost'T IFIP’ 6sr's OFIIS 2arla serie 1etls ont 
S| 2] es ©) oe » | ce Sine 
œ eel = 2 ™ > n 
Ë à 8 5 wg | #2 5 où 8 | ee = 
® Boe yas Se En + eo | 8 
ap 5 Bros Ba oie | or, p 22 5 = © 
2 | @e | col se|folso| 2 | Fel 2 | eal es 
Mee) Sr | Seal kel oo] § | wal @ | be | & 
| rn| Sn] © CHEMIN à a p 5 
be See) ee ee NE PE 
2 SES ESS Rene Fl H || v 
® oe 8 me ow la ial eae oars 
© 5 Lo] _ 0 log el R 
2 ® oe ess © a) on 
=| Co] = wo < 
. à © . P 
*SNOIOT 


‘NAGQ LSUIT NAH 


*(penurjuog)—VWILOOS VAON AO AONIAOUd AHL UO SNOUHOONAHd UAHLO ANY DNIVAMOTA 


CXXV 


APPENDIX E 


weceeleesecieoeesel(econe ssl. 


CCC ICO ICE ICRCECECECS ICRCECECECS ICRCRCECECS CSC 


“NOWWO’) DNINOOG( NAH AA 


o| ©| œ| x] gi ge æ | co Re ne 
: a 
tn DM 4 
5 we 7 ys ae a = Bi pe is Si 
oleic oti] Sve \ ance, En Be Mist ASE, RS DONS 
oO an LEE ct ISA ES © a> 5 
He Mes SE | ee |e | ea | og ÉNRO RES 
D | ol lolo) * |se| à | Es) & | * 
a | dO] 48 | & nl ARS En Sf || 
Baler) se ee ioe! § | gal ® jee] | 7 
. mur) 
RE nective || aE | erg tl Ae 3 
SPAS ee MEN NO oF Bo a) ee a | € 
o| &o = Gr =] =: ts 
oe Pll SHON iS) S| A Teg|] E 8 
Si © | m 2 rs) un a Le a = 
5 se) fet ay Atay ll = hoe 5 Us} 
2 @ -. Ls © m lon 
. ® = fo < 
“*SNOIDAY 


pH uoADI|V 914199 88 
BUusBUI BTEUINIG 18 
Ff BIJOU $1190Y 98 
SIJ&UIIY oounr ¢g 


Snt10781S10 SNPIN], F8 


YON ‘UJBI9SU] UZIdSO[ON E8 


sfepelole 


“po ï qZ8 
EN 05993 ,, 88 
DE & i qIs 

frere N ‘Sutjui8ru SHONP PITMPIS 
con * 62 
resseseesseee gowey Jo BUISO[OEGZ 

*+/punoid uoyrqu co q82 


Jet: Ire ut Ap 09 MOUS 4SILTCS, 


*Arenuepe 3deoxo 
y982 07 ouo ppe 1894 deeT 107 


cog tt "00 IST‘ ‘‘‘*"‘oung 
Dee": AON IC‘ AR 
poe 9O OL" IUdV 
erg 4deg 06 "Ie 
eeg cc #nÿ eg Tt qag 
zie Aine JE cue 


‘Gjuowm 989 JO Aep SE] 941 
0} Surpuodsa1i0o 1894 eu} JO ABC 


*VILOOS VAON 


‘GO6I ‘A10¢ AHANA HVAX 


“OOUTAOIX IO} 93U19AY 


or 


MO 
0} ado[g SSaUISAUT 


c'oerle rerlcorlacerls" rer G'9819 SSI|8 Pal G'6GI 
0: letgrre cor! ‘om érrl ee 
C'PGIIG ZTE 9CI| ‘GGIIT' LS ZIP SST) “TET °° ** 
c'ss |6°98 |S°98 19'48 |3°88 (8 63 (0'I8 8 06 1S 88 
8°68 |£'98 |P'S8 16° G8 19°r8 | ‘Le (P'08 |[S'I8 |& 64 
‘06 |Z°248 |9'°T6 |€°248 1676 |L'98 |‘ ‘| 68 (8° ES 
°1G'662| ‘90818 686 68818 FPE] ‘SIE| | ‘TSE£| “OFS 
‘6. |3°S8 |2°F8 16° £8 |(G' 88 |S°L48 | “€8 (98 |r'98 
“$08| ‘£08/2°76c| ‘£2c|' ‘| “SPE! ‘8619 982) “9FE 
‘18 (G'88 | ‘88 |IT'88 |£'06 |9°S6 |£'°48 |P I6 [T'S8 
“PGs| ‘aggig'6gel" "| “GREP ShEl "°° |G SHEL IPE 
o' SPSS PSS LEE] “6ES!/S OES] “PPE! “PEEP SZE|L° FEE 
G'GOSIS'IISI8 60E|9 SOE|Z° OTE] “STE\Z° 20619 STE\8 OTE 
1° 6Z\S  68Z\T 28216 78219 66Z/F 808 9° G63| “FOEIT 00€ 
© 9 Su foo ER CT Le be LF bert 
FE > mn 
| Elwes) az] El EE els 
eb eee | ae lee ECO. ARS |B 
Bo 8 oF O7 © = T 5 
Qa! We js FO mn St © HE P=] 
20) EURO NES w op = ES = 
Pill PES pe PEN PEN RS, 
+ po © tn Bb © 
ES FE FES) © | "| 8 | eel È 
Be So Pret IE | Riles] © 
S| 8) 8s) Sul à B |e] & 
5 oO 5 moO © =) © 
4 3 | à aw « 
© © î à 


*SNOIDAYY 


“NAS LSHIX NAH AA 


“(panurju09)—"WILOOS VAON AO HONIAOUWd AHL UOT SNOUHOONAHd UAHLO ANV ONINAMOTA 


CXXVI 


‘"NONWNWOD DNINOOG NAH AL 


= DER lies nee ne less Se RE Be ES 3 
Se 
fy 
=) ….. eee Peceo| frerernd oy [Oro . oe . . oe . eee 
Sal 
= | Ee ae eee eee eee ore ee eS eS 
O o| 2] æœ| | o©| ow Bl & CES eg 
© à a 
= ive] pol al TA (us) es! > DR lac] ey 
a 5 a ol lackeyes | taal © & is] EE eS & 
4 € | Pa pil oda! cal] & role 5 Sets m 
2 2 =: SCF pee |g |e ee 
3 Ë = © 
Q © =} 5Q tal Ot © 5 
Pee eee oles eo ie. | eile |b |e | 
S Éf|sslislss Sels | ge] | as) el 
. S D D ae) 
Éd Es ec he) | eel 8 | ce) Big 
alesis eae NE pe ELLE ANSE TE NS =: 
œ | &o al Ba ee) € S| à Re e 
les Ses On ns Fig eae eval: ete 
© i bs) [ets tenn SSR SE ten 5 2 | æœ 
œ i Ls © m lon 
s oO = a < 
“SNOIO4Y 


*VILOOG VAON 


*GOGI ‘AIN GHANA HVAX 


| 
** soxuus ‘oouvivedde Js114 OOT/S FIT | “GIL S°SI1\9 SIT 9 6II|T ESIS SIT 6 OITE OITE' LOTS EOL 
“cress s8ouy jo Surdid jsaix 66 |S'OIT |S GIT SATE OLIS OTS 91T/F OLT 4°601 L101 8° £019 66 
Fee 5 SNUBIUIBITA SefeployD) 86 |G 6ZI ||" |G'EIIS' GEI] SET] “SELES FSI S STE SET G'SII 
On “ WnIOIP99 stjedury 16 Z StL ss... SECT L°9OFI OFI £'SFI “Sel eeeee | Cer iim Olona a cir) 
cress |, Blflorgns vBUYdoyag 96 |9° FET | ‘OPI| "6819 SFIS FSIS SES LATIS SELS 6SI9 IPI)" °* 
eter sysug stardg 96 |g 'OPT |"** "| “OFI|G'SFI| IFI(S OIL OETIS LETS EFL SIFT)" 
» STUOAIZAIO XAUOHOAIOG F6 |S'SEI | 681} |” 8"SETIT'OPT|8 OFT F'OFTS"LET 9° 681 as 
», SISUOUT[OIBH snuUBIAT, £6 |G'OPI | GRIS FPI| “EFI| “LEL|S IPIIS FEL 9° ShLS LES GET" 
Serie, SIIQN]OO sntyoor], ZG [L'PPI | ‘OPIIS'OSI| “SFIS SFI) ‘FPIL'OSTL'PPIS'GPIG TFL 6 OFT 
” eqye BIqOII}0U0Z 16 |F'6T1 |‘ “9ZI\S°SST|S "SITS TSL/9 OT 6IT|" °°" CHSCT 
EE BAtS® A 06 |£'LET ‘| perl SET|S LETIS'OFIIG'GET9 FIG SETS SEIIT SET 
"|" "+" "qyion ‘eyeuoioo vowrpusq 68 [6081 | ‘6S1| “2ZI] “FL F' SELL LIF IFT) °2SI) “gets EST" * 
| Feet |e et [| (Dede Se ee ee 
Aienu®f 4daoxe > = 
yove 0} apo pp¥ 1804 dvaT 10,4 ZA © © g a SD tral Wes] G2 al este 
a tn m 

cogs ooq IST‘ "ounf ë ib y 2 we as tm 1 27 a) 
US Cee AO Nivea CT Sr SU TN ene S| eb Beles oa | EN | Sete lasted 
VO Ceosess= OO OGL ae = dy | = TT een a ET PE pere cale 
TE CCSN mien | $ | © | Lol F2 | Fal FS eee |e 
EP ean, 60 ded efi | im Re Beal cron ob one | Meals Bem es 
GG SA Te Sewer | 8 | mee se ee 8 | a) eel es | Be E 
= Sl ge leek | me | Beale Ge MS Non 

‘QAuou 989 Jo Aep 188] 24] 5 Ebie eles aa | € | à & ® el 

0} Butpuodseis09 1804 eu3 Jo AëG | & 3 = iS Be Su a, Lg BE | Se] = 
< CR ETS a g 

| : ® © é x 

*SNOIDŒY 


‘NGGG ISHIX NAHM 


*(penurzu09)—" VILONS VAON AO HONIAOUd AHL UOX FENOUHOONAHd UAHLO ANY ONIHAMOTA 


ETYIITYTVTVYVOVOYO,”,,V,Y/,/V/”vVv/”vovovovuvuvu-œ>…>_…_p_p_p————————————————————————— 


APPENDIX E 


CXXVII 


THUNDERSTORMS— PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, NOVA SCOTIA, 1904. 


The indices indicate the number of stations from which the Thunderstorms 
were reported on the day of the year specified. 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


1. Yarmouth and 


stresse 


sus... 


CCC PE 


ss... 


ssl... 


ss... 


ss... 


ss... 


ss... 


Sleeve 


u ap L 
RUE 
52 = 
al ips 
ss | = 
= Qo. 
an | 38 
DT aq 
asc (as 
D à <4 
oi os 
SEES ES 2002 
2142 214 
DORE Er 
22710 2278 
2284 2285 
PA YE SERRE 
2316 2302 
231 231 
PSs Ee 2323 
REE RE 2332 
234 234 
Bas 7 ARTE 
CORTE 
PATATE AS 
ADs (ARE 
DR ES VIEN 
NME 
26415 |........ 
2 EX) NE 
rah a 


4. Hants and South 
Colchester. 


5. Halifax and 
Guysboro. 


pe 


(S. Cum. & Col 
. North Cum., Col., 


6. S. Cobequid Slo 


Pictou & Antig. 


8. Richmond and 
Cape Breton. 


7 


9, Bras d’Or Slope 
(Inv. & Victoria), 


10. Inverness Slope 
to Gulf. 


ee Oe i ek ee CO eC ed oe ec a) 


Se ee ee ee Oe eee err er ere ee ey 


Se ee ee ee ee i cr ary 


ee er ed es ee ee er er ey 


CRC os i es 


ee ee eee ee ee ee er ee ee ary 


Se ee eee ee ee ie re i es ee eee eed i ee ry 


ss.sssssolesessoselsssesssslsssssss.l.soss.s.l os... 


s…sssssol-scssssrslrsser esse. meee Ge ey 


ss.sossoslessosssslessosssslssossssslessssssslcese 


….. 


ss... 


soso... sesel-esrs sors 


AO OC TOO IQOOOIONI OP s\'s,'e 


ss. ssssleosssessl.ssssssslesosoolesoos loss. 


sms... 


CPC CCS CC ire er 


.... 


ssl. 


ss... 


ss... 


ek ee ie a 


ss... 


ss... 


ssl... 


sesleien léotels eo = 


OO ela ela «eee ICICOION DOI! EEE 


263 


iso. 


ssl... 


sus... 


….. 


Province of 
Nova Scotia. 


CXXVIII 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


THUNDERSTORMS- PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, NOVA SCOTIA, 1904. 


The indices indicate the number of stations from which the Thunderstorms 
were reported on the day of the year specified. 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


3. Annapolis and 
Kings. 


Province of 
Nova Scotia. 


FA 


2 
~ 5 © 
RE 
<= Ca 
= © 
Boers 
ee | 2A 
Ee | Se 
HA Ne 
= ai 
DORE rie 

MOR att 293 
ae NOSIS 
RANCE RU 
CL NT METRE 
Meroe) lee, ee 
BAR CRIE RE 
OAR Wiki sti 
9515 9534 
RS ACTE 964 
ee A 
RCE 115 
D a CEUX 
MAUR tl a a 
iy 122 
1237 1235 
124 1242 
126 1268 
1271 12725 
ne 128 
1294 129 
he MEET 
LABS EE eee 


= = los 28 | 2 
5 oS | OS |#:188|2 
Se ey Ae ro 5 128 we |" 
mH ee 4 D aa TC + AE an 
a 2 æ © 5 . PY a © ola De 
ER M © Se © © s a = 
o 2 ss =} Aloe) ES 
2a Er 2A a6 I 5) 
ee | SR | SO | $8 |aLR|urs | eS 
S 9 Se) NN DNS Se SAIS alee 
mo qo nH Zu |HO |aT | 
= is S = oS 3 a 
ciel C7 DT bes! Stel Or RE PNR ET RER 
one 208 0-210208 Ms UE 
renenlecheepeleescesnnlsebereealitese SOL APCE 
AT ARE SON ANA CAO AO PAS EE EEE 
EAN ere rt LA ke ee 317 Hess PMR 
Ma Lee RUE See CE PARENT] ESP ER SOS 
PAPE AE PA PURE LOVE RG ETES Dat A Es 335° |......113267 
SRE | RAR A AE 355 FSTOBE 
YRAR 1905. 
en Ne à RU ne 
AE NT A RUN An a dene! eal ON Er 
Mens shore ares OGM ES See 
Lids AA | Haase ede | ete susie 104 DAS De 
AR RE Hol Me AE DE 109 HA ERAS 3 SAIS HAS 
MONA SET usta cil NE MR IR RES 
A A Sn yell BASS 
APE SE AU eveh Groen a Donubpelle same | 121 
sise le esse 118 at cde alle ebce tes eter love ne 
PAS ONE ere 120 Bess Or epee eel ee 
1214 12112 1218 12150 PAM ASE 
eee 122 Mes mele aliegs 122 Meee ales eer 
1 25 DP PP EE ES cies OBE AN ts, Steve all sas che, oll ee 
De LS wel ERIM lek Cee te Alem eae 
10270 CAR ce 1275 1278 VOM fetes Soler 
ey ey ae iia een a rage | Des) 
eae Le aa ee ae 1e We PR METRE Sk 
neo tee mena 132 PARU 
see 133 PEER ERA D EiG ee Bt ene 
Re Een eos 134 another cie cle een 
SORE. TS A STE A Ci Sea 
[BRON Mile SU 13820 138? Sy ekos | elas 
JE CRE ERP PRE ane eee) TOSS He inh OIL 


APPENDIX E CXXIX 


THUNDERSTORMS—PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, NOVA SCOTIA, 1905. 


The indices indicate the number of stations from which the Thunderstorms 
were reported on the day of the year specified. ° 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


Proc., 1906. 9 


n a 2 see = | © 
= oO S Se S 0 CHR ; 
2 eee eh ee aS | CS [8,188 )2 | es 
e SiS hl ane Perle = fa peo Saupe. se 
a So 38 SIN ae = mé | OS | à a 
3 od = ae À oS ates Be ry Ses Te 
ES ES à à 2 Se 2 3 Q)/ox8|EF=| of 
85 am & En Ba BMT) 5 = © EF = | oS Ho 
eu osae) Ge iaeet On | se este lee) Re 
Poe ae aie ho | bo lie ben en Some lye 
E ai os <i is S CON ON SN [Span | 1806, 
. 81e eR: aa PRO 1) ER PAO? IS LPS TR RE 
D NU ote Meas: EL Arr APT ne 141 BAT Chae SIN eg ANNE 
A Rene Ar PR) Aa Peer | ON LORRAINE en IR 32 
ANAC Meera ee DRE PR PE RE TR || RE AN LCR Ts 
. SR EE ON Ao 1488 oN AR TAG se ltetp Rigen ig 1480 
sae $A Se Al ee PE Re 149 | 1492 | 149" | 149 |......|......| 149% 
2 1 ELEC 21080 cae bee PRE RE DAS FOR Re PA ET UE PAS RAR Lt) 
A de à LIU ee TR Sl ON AE PAR 8 
LORS 153 153 153 LÉCERIE Det e ES T-S AA ee eelat etalk aah el oes 
ES DTA ER PES RE TSS 0 DS te ONE AE ARR St QAR QAR LORS TUE 
: LENS ae 1 50 RE LE AUS els UE Ste er a 
esl. 156? 156 LEA SEL, UGS PROS tose ne: L'UENA 1565 
1575 | 15741 | 157 eo TT NIMES re M TT PRE AT 15774 
DES UE LA OP PAIE COR ARS ba By En LEA A AS AE 158 
i RTS SOON AE PSC a ESPN RP PER À PORT AA TT RER AUS 1592 
Le NO ME] RSR ANS NT Rae rg, 161 NE ha SED 
22 LRO OR | ee 1620 El 162 162 SU DORE ET 
ee ee, SD Ne. JOS (eed tee ee cae nN [el tes Je 155 
a ee ee [OTA ee ee A aot | Ur Tie NN En Freesat Sea cae 1644 
LS SEER 11S RSI Pen ty PAS [ERD PER) ET NN OS ORNE RSR FR TE 
LL Loue APE SAS Fe a VG JUS UE ON pine S| NCE Tag AS 197 
Beets... HET MARIE ale eR ISF LE TE LARU PERRET OR RO CORRUPT 
ees... TESS oI ERee PedGS TT 1ES49 |) LES. ES LOSS? 
1 ne) LE eS | ES Ee a Oe MER 1608 RD à Babine aes (od 
ee ee ie No Wes uel, TZOP Rien eee PR A REA OT kEO 
CN Reel LE NUE | Tel toes 7 EN IN ER a Ar 
eee nr ARTE ARE, 1172 LE CO VERSO OC NE 7 
ToT calla, doses 0 CRIS Pe ECS 2 Er À] ESRI ONE Fi PAR 174 
. HIS DANONE RON AM RSS Bev SR NN es RA oan Ma Uy) 
1769 | 1764 | 1765 | 176 OO EL ea Tre LE A Le AA 17622 
Hea a CS NE V1 ee). Ye MOT rrr CIO SATA HOT oy NEA 17758 
PH WIS! CN a. 5. WSC) |S. Bie: Tne el ATOM Le PU 17822 
cscs SES SE COPA a eS ce Es RE FAN REA SEE Ieee ar) 
DST TONI PME ERREUR RO EURO RES EE ee FAR SRE 1804 


CXXX ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 
‘© WHEN First SEEN.” 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


Day of the year 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month. 4 : ‘3 
I 5 Leal = 
ed Me deal ae lee ae alae 
March.. .... BAGDUS” api. ches eine 273) 25 ect a ears WN i ie 
Mes ete) No peel Bede gee ie alge ANSE 
E JUDO... MST Dec te ete 365 &£ & 4 3 2 2 É a q 
É For Leap Year gad one to each except = A É & 3 a a 5 5 
Z oy < a | a |S| | Fiala | & 
1 | Alnus incana, Willd..... CH00800 00 ce. 1084) #09 LOA SETS se TEST WW Bagdad sane socllabcot 
2 | Populus tremuloides............., Soc |) 118520. 122} 124 | 123 | 126 A “ba 
SIIFEpigænarepens,-:.:...2-..re0e so ro LO AT AIS TOI SN T2) Dalloece disco 
4 | Equisetum arvense........... eos sn Weare! rare lsvenell erate esta], ASA erect wate Meee! amare 
5 | Sanguinaria Canadensis.......,........| 128.6)...... 14218. l ces We llespons 110 
6 | Widlaiblanda. 3. ccc. sieinsisisr see ses] 126-311 120 UTS ecoonn 132 128 123 114 114 
7 | Viola palmata, cucullata..........,....1.| 181.446... 134 sel) 1320 9s) $1309) a4 120 
8 | Hepatica triloba, ‘etc... ....,....... soot es ooo!) IT Neacooc|Bobece OTe BOO eooaballsooacs 
9 | Acer rubrum............ bponddudnecodod | Leche qosad 126 | 134] 135] 125 |...... 95 
10 | Fragaria Virginiana..... Joe ccccesesre|lI2S 0-00 126 | 143 | 115 | 128 | ...….. . | 135 
11 Ge wy (fruitripe).. 12... 2085] eee ee lGA Mince ce. 151 155 on Te iegooon 
12 | Taraxacum Officinale..... denses naucecellidt.th 2, 10194118 142 361) TSI 91 116 
13 | Erythronium Americanum............. 199 te AIT Re lee. PASH) GLU) SERIES EST 
14 | Coptis trifolia......... led, felefereielelslojeteie’eta 137.5), .eselecee Bacal), eee SOW Baonos AB anclledouctc 
15 | Claytonia Caroliniana....... Seisteletsisis o0û LO EE lee baer RS sterallcierersisyal| bre sn LEE I) LOG rene 
16 | Nepeta Glechoma.......... ...........| 140.4)... en sulecsesnllose at A nel aeeetete 
17 | Amelanchier Canadensis............. SA be LEZ) MES) Oo adaco) TER Es 130/|R-e ler 3 
18 se 66 (fcuitripe)--- MOT lee lee ssoselesenes 1771 Sec lee 5 
19 | Prunus Pennsylvanica.......... ere tell TETE LAST lc 185.0 peice 130 
20 ee ge (fruitripe)--2.18208 57222 ns let Sdoëe Byers no0b5s000 
21 | Vaccinium Can. and Penn........ Goaancl veel sane 142 ssl cesse. cles trl esac 
22 E ss (fruitrips). 20072 tere areal eieieieroral cists 506|\sadeoc 5000 Atallsdooan 
23 | Ranunculus acris. ......seeeeeeseveses | 152.4)..,...]...2.-| 170 | 167 | 149 |......| 133 | 127 
24 | R. repens........... See TR eres ALS] eee teen NN ee soslessce ln Idt nent ce 
25 | Trillium erythrocarpum............+.+.| 146.1) 148 | 134 |......1 176 | 127 | 135 tell sieisiarats 
26 || Rhododendron Rhodora.....:.......-..1 148: | 148 Nl ...-l...... ll... Dont ob eo eee 
27 | Cornus Canadensis.... ....... here UPI Vladoaadpococs||aanocdl| LeSb|boooachisoacalocosac|’ oo 
28 se SE (fruitripe)..| 205.6) ... Jooc God leaodae | ocasn ts d000 0 booood lo 
29 | Trientalis Americana..... onoscdoase Aad) 102-2164... dkcomoelbetaré OVA oo Fobovsllodoes 
30 | Clintonia borealis..... Besse see ces 109 0e ee eeclescecl eee 
S19 Calla palustris... esse. 160.9 P 3000 sod) tet dGs6ec dcallaaoo ... 
32 | Cypripedium acaule.....sse..sooonvonsel 158.5... .[....eel.e envi | Senseo 1 COUR 
33 | Sisyrinchium angustifolium............ | ts à do | 5500 Xe nick 151 15 1| Jodtellod cos 
| 


APPENDIX E CXXXI 
PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 
“WHEN First SEEN.’ 
OBSERVATION STATIONS. 
Day of the year 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month. Le | 

Jan il JUIY een 212)lNe 4 KH 8 

Met esa ns DA A tO CO D anh (ao ISE RUES 

March HOI0 MA Sept. ER Un 273 | 2.8 Z FQ a a; 2 & 

a le eta Sel eon) sta) a) esl wane 
Ay ET 2 gis 0S gon ies 1 Ween | Sire ee Mt rt STA 
2 selle ME MeNNEUt Sallie LAURE 
5 For Leap Year add one to each except SA 2 LE É a a = 2 Ë 
a = <4 n x D M = n a A 
34 | Linnea borealis............ biehieteiala|s 167.2)......]... .. de 1h OS SSE sasdc 
Shr Palmas PLAUCR: ee sos echeseeensesse LORD 0... else [ale 1000 |SS OA and Goo |Socie sl. sees 
36 | Kalmia angustifolia........... Soocooo NUE 5 1000 167 aGallacoaoal| Ponval|saabuc 
37 | Cratægus Oxyacantha....,......... Bretersi PLO Ds |netersisie ak LAON ERA | 36 aval xeveteicie 
38 | Cratægus coccinea, etc.....,........,...| 164.2|.... LG Ti RE cles PEU lee 
SORTIR VETSICOLOL! eee eee cures? cbsad)) PY ALE So nee |Passa-leee.c.e CMS Loovon| Gado de 
40 | Chrysanthemum Leucanthemum.......| 167.7)... cells lle Jlacosos | daboon bolooad | eevee 
41 | Nuphar advena......... EAcnoncongoapad | SH rec cn lecee releases les sde (Hidoos 179 | 163 
42 | Rubus strigosus............ ON De AGS ul ae less a al Test aetna cee tee 
as © (fruit ripe)............. 203.9 PAPERS Te Ene Su PDA ES PMR 
44 | Rhinanthus Crista-galli......... ath eer eiave | ptldenia | cicverctel) telsrelet soleil test |. sosnoloress.) cence 
45 | Rubus villosus.............. socnosegac al) 1700 ; BER ee otd || Gado | aoulaada : 
46 “ <Cuma(Ernithrine)iapinecten ae 236.6 : : MA : 
47 | Sarracenia PUFPUTEA. . . se seseses ose 17257 ER les es S54 Monona | iddiooal doboon godecd 
SES LUNG a) VUITATIS eee ceieslenieeteste AL AO See... | Soc Pr oa beat also es looneelisese 
AN HOSA) Incida it eeessseccceos setsisral) ives 9| 2 Joe) Mood E cocouh eA Es 217 | 166 
50 | Leontodon autumnale.............,,,.. LE) OS ta Hobbs el AGO RE fate! Dabooël bbüao sis 
DINRHINATIRIVUISATIBE. sense ceseess se dite 169.1 : o “ton sievetorens 201 |......l...... 
52 | Trees appear green .........s.oseer.sse 139.1)... 142 | 147 |. 130 1 EEE 
53 | Ribes rubrum (cultivated)............. 125 | PRE OC . : ASG? MER TA AU SE 139 
54 “ 6¢ (fruit ripe)..3 22. 22 01e 60000 ji LLC) ESSAI ER RERE) FO Sucka ontadnol at e 219 |...... 
55 | R, nigrum (cultivated).,,...........,.. TEA MS eee leleiel ce 5 1567 Say Be. 
56 se (fruit ripe)..... Too CAE AT HER TAI FÉPEE 59 eters ee SES sens. d 
57 | Prunus Cerasus........... soso ose PILE Lee] apioo 156 | 157 | 135 |......1..... 126 
58 = fe (ruitripo) 22. less 0 EM Ie tere do 00e) es solos LBB) TERRE 
59 | Prunus domestica......... odooabe 152.5 no ne 118 NS 0068. oc00 125 
60 | Pyrus malus.......... ess sonner LO4:. 6|0ee se HE MGR HE (C7 D EE 1 SPACE ROSE 137 
61 | Syringa vulgaris.............. safe lt108. [Sess ac 165 | 165 | 165 | 151 |......| 141 | 134 
62 | MTIFOLIUMNTEDCNS. esse pente ac es sel100.DNe tea Ni. lasser. 136 one LOL 169 
63 | Mritoliumipratense 2121. cueswieside decane EGOS 1] Paces ln se slaeeretie 182 15611 RER. 167 
64 | Phleum pratense....., eccccece De Doro et EU EE opel be DE eee LGD: ee es eleeeerterce 
65 | Solanum tuberosum.................... 187.7 col. sees ssselsecoeesl cececlereees 
66 | Ploughing (first of season)... sus | 116.4... Aa Nessa ale eee 111 pee. .| 89| 87 


CXXXII 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 


“Wen First SEEN.” 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


90 


Day of the year 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month, 


JAN. ..c00 0005 31 
Heb) oc. 65 pono Bt) 
March....... 90 
April eee 120 
May... .....151 
June... 181 


For Leap Year add one to each except 


July... 212 
AUD Re. ee 


January. 


Sowing (first of season).............. 


Potato-planting 
Sheep-shearing 
Hay-cutting 
Grain-cutting 
Potato-digging 
Opening of rivers 


Opening of lakes 


Vast snow to whiten ground,...........| 116.8] ,.,..|... 
CG toy in air esse s-mserce 124.6|,...., 


Last spring frost—hard,.......... 


“e 6 HORTA sociales cists sre oir Oa ae hers ees | LOT) LoS al elo, 
Water in streams—high.......-...:... al PLCs aT acae Bil ...clhsceerl:eec 
«6 Oe MO Weare cierto ne eee Weert ll ae tepals Bll Sosy acotoreil lm etotciai | aterereieye 


First autumn frost—hoar,....... 


a4 ce 


irstisnow 40 fly im air... /....- 40.0, 
‘© ! whiten ground........ 
Closin giof Makes en s.-esesn----hesse 
CC RIVETS rer. 
Wild ducks migrating, N..............| 88-7) ..., 
shoo 


cc ce 
“& geese de 
ee “ 


Melospiza fasciata, North,... 


Turdus migratorius 


Junco hiemalis 
Actitis macularia 
Sturnella magna 


Ceryle Alcyon 


Dendreca coronata 


D. æstiva 


«6 


€ 


hard,... 


te 


€ 


vee eeeee ee 36D 


sus. 


RECENT ETET 


i 


fee e ee eresees 


COOP e reer eens 


sense. 


.242 


Average dates for 
Nova Scotia, 

St. Stephen, N.B. 

Charlottetown, P.E.I. 

Kensington, P.E.I. 


St, John, N.B. 


ss... ssl. 


DIT een Al Pen lim OF ne 
spndnes 110.2,.,,.,.......1......1..... 


130 
122 


sees SDR IDO 


282. |. slate 
294718 fee etal 


310.1), 


336.3 


AV oleteiull aim ale teleita 


346.9) 


306.2|., 


84.7) 85 85 78 
319.3 


88.4|.,,...|. 


CES 86h | Pasion 90 87 


87.5 ss. 96 


OR vos alesancol some 

NÉ] ie os albencon! bacosdl|fuoe 
popoboG | Ewell ds Ho allegoogollosadau lsoasoc 

LEIDEN soadalloga doulladoudellspdooollc 
Soppbog | case! HEL bacon si c\erelliare 


| Windsor Mills, Que. 


et 
tr wo 
Oo © 


145 


St. Thomas, Ont, 


ss... 


ss... 


| Birman, Ont. 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 


APPENDIX E 


WHEN First SEEN.” 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


CXXXIII 


| Number 


91 
92 
93 
94 
95 
96 
97 
98 
99 
100 


Day of the year 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month. 


Jan 500 31 
11) 000 ANS DO 
March 90 
April ...120 
May...... Aneel 
June... 181 


For Leap Year add one to each except 


January. 


Zonotrichia alba, North 


oe 


Trochilus colubris 

Tyrannus Carolinensis ‘‘ 
Dolychonyx oryzivorus ‘f 
Spinis tristis ve 
Setophaga ruticilla 
Ampelis cedrorum Gs 


ChordeilesVirginianus ‘‘ 


First piping of frogs...... 


nn 


er 


ry ee 


First appearance of snakes.,........ aia 


H 
S| 8 soled 
mn. à Fi Ay 
LE a fe 3 a 
SCIE NIMES A 
Lo = = 
top EI £ = 2 
by © + © rs ‘a 
SU ae EEE NE 
< a || fee Wate | AE 
119.4; 120 wee 5 
14417 oe lent Ilecceelasecse 
HADE DEC eerl ee lter SO DOTE 
138021 ecclestrse OP DOCS 
LADESN LEE ES de El LOS 
A D EE SR AC CE do 
LADA DIE aledoncd!lacnodd | dpooc 
DOS i SSI rer 162 |..... 
110-572. : 119 120 
1 Silchoopa dong dace Rocco 


5 
5 
g 5 
= a 
=i ee “ 

m : El 
RAS be 
Se ot Ri Se ie oa 
2 À 
So DE PEN IDE 
ES [eo = Le 
145 120 130 135 
Éododt ellrosebe 131 
133 Re ARS 
105 91 86 
119 . …... 


CXXXIV 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 


(WHEN First SEEN.’ 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


Numbher 


cr) oa ~ wo wb 


Day of the year 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month, 


« eceee 


1685000 0 ho 
May... 151 


June rente 


++» 365 


For Leap Year add one to each except 
January. 


Alnus incana, Wild.... 


Populus tremuloides........ 


ss... 


Epigæarepens......,,..... 


ss 


Equisetum arvense......... 


sr ess. 


Sanguinaria Canadensis...... 


Viola blanda 1...... 


Viola palmata, cucullata.............. 


Hepatica triloba, etc............. 
Acer rubrum......... 


Fragaria Virginiana...... ee... 


“ “ 


fruit ripe ....... 
Taraxacum OfMiCcinales.c. ccs cs... 
Erythronium Americanum,........... 


Coptis trifolia,....... 


Claytonia Caroliniana................. 
Nepeta Glechoma....... 


Amelanchier Canadensis............. 


. “6 


fruit ripe 


Prunus Pennsylvanica...... 


‘ 


fruitiripe.s. ce 


Vaccinium Can. and Penn............ 


“cc “ 


frUILIFIPO.-....-.... 


Ranunculus acris....... 


soso 


tee e ee ss... 


UAL EPEAT eee 


Trillium erythrocarpum,........ 


eee eee 


Rhododendron Rhodora.,...........,. 


Cornus Canadensis. . 


i a a iy 


“ee “ce 


FLUE TIPS saietocteteleiers 


Trientalis Americana.... 


ay 


Clintonia borealis....... 


Callapp alustrigs <7 see. seseccenesccl 
Cypripedium acaule...,........... 


Sisyrinchium angustifolium.......... 


108, 


4 

243 | © . | 

973 | oS | 

..304 58 

334 | So a 
mei) js. AS 
SRE a) 
4 oO a 
> H Ci 
4 < Dp 


| 


Lakefield, 0, 


Guelph, O. 


2b ho agon| Woodo o||sdo0o 5) At 5 
DER | cere elutes] ayoleterevsi| léodee 
nes BAG bbocddllocooe: | bhoogso 
128.6) 120 |..... MESSE 


126. 
131. 
140. 
130. 
128. 
168. 
134. 
139.5]... 
137. 


131. 


140. 


143. 


194. 


AY 


~ Po 


ss. 


110 


en 
oo 
=] 


osssslsssss.l. 


146 |., 
E | 126 |. 


er 


Orillia, O, 


ss... 


Gravenhurst, O. 


113 


lus. 


121 


…. 


Beatrice, O. 
Bruce Mines, O. 


os... 


145 


Morden, Man, 
Norquay, Man. 


135| 135 


sae eee 
. see 
CCC PC 
OS CR 


8 


Number 


APPENDIX E 
PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905, 


WHEN First SEEN.’ 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


Day of the year1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month. 


JAN ss etes dl 
MODE Eee cs GL) 
March.. ...... 90 
APTI eee cle 120 
MAY: 2-0 =. Lo 
June..........181 


JULY Eee. 212 
AU: 10048 
SePt.- esse. 279 
OGE SO 0e 
NOV ec eer--+902 
Dec..........365 


For Leap Year add one to each except 
January. 


an on a La Led Ld La R > on lied ~ La wo wo oo oo où oo 
io] _ [=] © @ = Li] ot ~ eo nw _ o oO œ Su a ot ~ 
i 


TeINMBADPOTCALIS ee: ses een 
RMI DLATC RES se ee ce céissen eee 
Kalmia angustifolia................... 
Cratægus oxyacantha................. 
Cratægus coccinea, etc................ 
TIR VOFSICOLOT. 2. . ee /slala ee e ss 0 0 0 0 01010 0 nn « 
Chrysanthemum Leucanthemum....... 


IN HAT BUV CNA tsic clsvele) cic)sie cis sisleisivicie.s ule 


Rubus StrigQosuss eee semer etats 


ce € 


Bel veto oo 0bon one 
Rhinanthus Crista-galli................ 


RUD UBLVINOBUS cernes see sms 


“ ce 


ATUUGTIPCss: |s.< ce © wisiets 2 ae 
SAFFACERIA DUEDUTER. ess se si vio ses se ss 
Brunella vial GaAriSsssieaicle cia’ cis lovelelctiecl core 
ROS Ap IT CLO AerelsioicicissieWaleieisielsivicieieraisinieieteleva 
Leontodon autumnale.................. 
VAN APIA VII ATISS ee eeleies ee 0 een ele cie'es 


PETES ADPPATISTEEN ses viele tesla siete 


Ribes rubrum (cultivated).............. | 


it 3 “ce 


(fruit ripe) cet siccrtctrcee 


R. nigrum (cultivated)................. 


“ (Graikiripe) pasa --esleenasss 


Prunus Cerasus .......... 


16 ‘6 


FTUIVITIPO es ecreresess 


Prunus domestica..... 


ry 


Pyrus malus.......... 


nn 


Syringa vulgaris...... 


Trifolium ret eee Mae, Pie. | 


Arif OLLI PEALCIECs. acicciAcisiwcids ae esssis 
Phleum'pratonse.,......cheesss ee 
Solanum tuberogsum............sse.... 


Ploughing (first of season)... 


Average dates for 
Nova Scotia. 


Arden, O. 


meee 
ace 


Lakefield, O. 
Guelph, O. 


CXXXV 


Orillia, O. 


Gravenhurst, O. 
Beatrice, O. 


ss... 100 |.....: aoe 

. .... . . . 

. Sida ateelllersiataielel|e …. 
ss... eee ARO Od FENTE 
Se sonores loue 
. . soso... 
sesssolsosesolses oe ous. 


vee 138 


soso. 


ssl. 


sees ACID) 
eee seer 
COO ONO) see 


aoe 
er AGOD 
ss... |... eee 
eee . 
SOO OOO} (oeec) ae 


PIERS con 


ss... 


or 
eoeee . 
oe ee 
[eves 
js sere . 
see 


See) lon Et 


Bruce Mines, O. 
Morden, Man. 
Norquay, Man. 


oa eee 
oe eee 
eee 
see 


ievelti|le) stets|l Lae 


...| 164 


ae . eae 
> one 
sl. ae 


CXXXVI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 
“WHEN FIRST SEEN.” 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


Day of the year 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month. 
JAN ere de 31 OLY; ee. see 2121 
MIS Ditiorn Mere . 59 Aug espece .243 | © . 2 A 
March 90 Sept...c....+- 273 | oS © Ce lee 
PASTAS Ses crie 120 Oct... 304 | 86 = i = 3 a a] s 
May. race THIN NOV eee RÉEL M NS é E/Ool2/s|4 
+, | June 181 Dec..........365 | Sa CM IR DE etd ME 4|¢ ssl 
2 RS a a: a aan 8 D elo) RO NE 
8 | For Leap Year add one to each except | 57 = Fe i = = > 812 ape 
2 Fo 4[/4[5/4/6/6/6 |al4a/ale 
67 | Sowing (first of season)....+....+ 1 1275104125 110)....| 96) 112 
ae Potato-planting ‘5 =... ......... 126, 130 130 
69 | Sheep-shearing ‘“  ...... HOdode BRIE hb Gocan oe a, 
70 | Hay-cutting = Aodddopascocood) Moe esi ale) 185) 198) 186] 205 
71 | Grain-cutting COMM TS code 239,4| 217 219] 234 
72 | Potato-digging ‘‘ cece secre eee) 264.9) ..... lesinlieeeeels sente pe ere Pr) ees | es 
73a| Opening of rivers.................. odos | Tera se) 91 
73b| Opening of lakes..........,,.,,,..,.+e.| 110.2} 109 115| 119]... 
74a| Last snow to whiten ground......,...| 116.8|......1......1......1... 10.0... its 
74b ce tO fly in air... sose--ese|ll24-0| 7.0 hie 
75a) Last spring frost—hard............ oe-| 145.5|...... aan ; 
Le “ “ HOST eee yetes 6168-21. ns aed ee us yall acca esate ele, dot RER Se 
76a| Water in streams—high.......,,....... AOL ID) a2 es clleuse (| Sateteievol oratessaval velmovesell ct eke efelere| eres | Nears 
76b ce GG down) ANNE ctadcal ly atackal serene eee | eee RE LES 
77a| First autumn frost—hoar...........+ Oo fb edl Woneee aa 
77b ss et hard. recense asevayeresell ave eveverall aecevotncll re tora|otsoiey octets we 
78a\ First snow toflyinair............... SOLS) ee AIP, RM sberelaaneseloetetltess lente) EEE + 
Spee “ whiten ground....... een 3101 ae 
79a| Closing of lakes. .... Bvotelsveleiaisletetetsintelaisials 336213 |e) ty. beara Scsretetere | svsteysiave tra see ne) trata eter ere xt 
79b TiVOTS ee: 0e ce ensrcecoel O0 2 eee 
81a) Wild ducks migrating, N......,...... 88.7) 95 1e 84 
81b € se Bee Dre |F 8082 EN Aa AN a 
82a] Wild geese migrating, N....... cc. OL IRON 95) 100 81 
82b «e “ RE CAS ME el cee aD oe dla ical ateee es CoA ER 
83 | Melospiza fasciata, North............. 88.4) 71 3 
84 | Turdus migratorius “4 .,.,........ 84.4) 79 84; 85) 85] 92 
85 | Junco hiemalis........... Salepeteicaiese mister) Ode ile 
86 | Actitis macularia.............e wlaelaiele||| okt «| a # 
87 | Sturnella magna,,,......... =. ceepou-|20-0| Inn 110 BOS ene ae) Perea, Cheer SE pay 
88 | Ceryle Alcyon.......ssseoessees ose bodeOy ee CR emerald PART OA SUR arts 5 4 
89 | DendrϾca coronata..... ............. | 10 PR REG Messe DNS 00e Cannes 
90 | D. wstiva..... SDS UPeE Co ono not Fe 18788 ARR EEE ARTS 1 125 : a 
91 | Zonotrichia alba...... Ales te efafeiere, os (ALLO 24 OP ERA mt 95 |. Ta TO IAA TAN 2 ms 


- 


100 


APPENDIX E 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 


“WHEN First SEEN.’ 
OBSERVATION STATIONS, 


CXXXVII 


| Norquay, Man. 


& = 
oa © 


Day of the‘ÿear 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month. 
JULY sere arate 312 
ARE Reps 243 | 5. : 6 
Spb eee 273 | DS 2 QI 
MOCHE RAT 304 | #8 S So ES AIE 
Nov... B86 | ciel. ae oy lee) a salad 
Dee. 260 | aa | © = Senne lob AN DEAN AUS 
EE NE leer RE NE EE 
A ee a & ED a 
For Leap pros to each except DA 9 2 4 3 5 & 3 3 
e < 4:01 Fa EE OA SIMS IS M fy | PY 
Trochilus colubris, North TL SM PO Gallet IB ley A ease Eole 
Tyrannus Carolinensis ue 14051364 R OF lh a OG conga Baoscal eclertes 137 
Dolychonyx oryzivorus ce ER D saoeelaausoclleadsec Dillon send) ace bcallée 
Spinis tristis Bs WANE oGesallbeqoon Res... A} hgddon] S008 loon ocod) eo 
Septophaga rutiéilla sé 1S 4G | ER delete ste oe dick OD) | Matera rete ER eee dodo 
Ampelis cedrorum ee ie el GocoK| Sono) |lsagouc JTE See | ereee sbsllasoo 
Chordeiles Virginianus se RES OO S EEE ate AAO EE 
insiypipin Of frogs: eue sec MOSS NOTA ER lee 96 |.,....| 100) 110) 108 
First appearance, snakes.............. 114,3 ss lesee atace}| crs/evelesel|nfoveretelel| ovete seieilsie e/elofe re | 


CXXXVIII 


oe so me 0 0 > | Number 


10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 
20 
21 
22 
23 
24 


25 
26 
27 
28 
29 
30 
31 
32 
33 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 


(WHEN First SEEN.” 
OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


Day of the year 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month. 


ens Eo pa |. dus is etal ee ay edie ele 
Marchis.-../00 Sept. ete le eet Ot] VS UMR a 
April. 2) rte. 180, OR Pan MMO Ry ere AE Ce I PAs Pluie = 
Ma PIN TL END ni 28840 |e on A I fea ra a a A lelalale 
PUNE Lae eeslel: | DEC EURE 365 Se É | El ë £ £ 2 2 Nie < ‘2 
For Leap Year add one to each except Ee ir} É a | E £ 8 | 5 & = 
January. 5 = = = Es 8 S = | a = & 
Aïlnus/incana WAP ES ERP Reeieeer el lets -eleeceele-senlsces 340 | 00e ral 
Populus tremuloides..... éPodopoaino dt awk odoclbodadcllbaccds lonacaalloanoon eos ae RUES 
ÉDIREATEPENR sc iatedsleisiew stele oajels viejets/atayetal PL Ow) ele sletelol| enn ev eie cel steno ecnleceste efeveiestel| diaeresis sen lemenlsteleres 
Equisetum arvense........... moc dod (es 61 Coreen ooops sllacaaed canada aq sopalboodoullacta losorilo codlh.sue 
Sanguinaria Canadensis. ..,.........| 128.6] .... ba ofeisteter=||(s) eleisielsi|iavsfetet |lsieta)slatei| ann Her tetera *berete 
Wale Ey [ECG ES RG rn ogeodooroonpaccodcul| eWode Gaanalanqngol) abl! 118 lo ael|fexoreleys S\igoolls spol Els IA Siac 
Viola Palmata, cucullata............. ALES É AN) LORS Ob lene els 150 |142 
Hepatica jtriloba, (ete. 2. cca se ee ee | A0 Le, ele tle sclelarneseclecetves Addo! boro ayetalfiaie once 
PXCOLET UD LUMI eee cet ssl 180 06 retell sonner enielbes GAS + TR AR TO ON ere 
Fragaria Virginiana..........<... .,.| 128.6; 128} 116 |... 112 75 |" 106 |....1119 1128 |.... 
ss 2 fruit ripe........| 168.3/,.....1......1.....1400 Mocheslsoseenleset lies dal aoû 
Taraxacum officinale, ...,......... vee] QUES" PSE SN LES ET) ASE 133 |... 04-140 ere 
Erythronium Americanum,....... sons LOO OR sels. ln. eee never : . : 
Coplisitrifolia ee cssrebes--c-cece 137. 5lececce|..000> Sense D000 sees OO) PP DOC 
Claytonia Caroliniana........,........| 131.4/,,,...1......1. eevee are Se 101 | 87 : 
Nepeta Glechoman., ice csin ssc ccssceceses|| 140.40 ceo cl ness vlnllti scree . acadac||a pone one Haloc 
Amelanchier Canadensis,..... abe doaba 143.6) 139 | 143 |... 124) T0) .e 110 1) |Iboac 
te ce fruit ripe.....'194.3)......|. 0 CM ROSE POunanlaodoenle no don iuodiosa 
Prunus Pennsylvanica.............e|l4/0) 10001370" See RL US il nel lUb EE 4 ON travers 
& . fruitiripes, 1120850). lsnecenleneee a svetersievelistete 6 sado 16 aa 
Vaccinium Can-and Penn............|1 14606-81661... .120...-l-crr-c LOG erie 04 159 3¢ 
se CB fruithripe...N205 4.6... lt tee 390906 ponds) ooo less 
Ranunculus acris...,..... echresceer|RlO2r ta. a 35 69 |......| 60]... 85 |... 
RFTODENS Eee seec ee eecceserpertiect n5EErbouote sus ER ALLER ee dos al EN a IS 
alliumierythrocarpume ss... ee Orl| Mente cts laser lee Bo 83 | 106 sdlrooc 
Rhododendron Rhodora.............. 148 ME. leche let : te late Laeie lier lille cie e 
Cornus Canadensis............. SH pacs EYE le anagal lado dca laiooaadloc Hata logceqolpovoudiacani bad Siete 
ts Co fruit ripe.......... DOB UB) ae learn l stories aefereietc||cisislesss relee Alice 
Trientalis Americana.,....,.,.........| 152.2). ,,:,.|...0e : So nulle 121020 
Clintonia borealis......,,,............| 153.3|......|......1... es. seecsleee serleceelenee 
Calla palustris: 2. ee ee ecaee ee ej) LOU +9! .t.\slctolailpia\sleietel|latelsletel| (elas 50 D Hobol so nou 
Cypripedium acaule....,....., sen 08. DRE leRenemle es Deere Ci : Binns) enna co 
Sisyrinchium augustifolium......... 165.1 PRIS PRIE ARE tia Foëuoallédobdol too Bano donc 


APPENDIX E 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905, 
“WHEN FIRST SEEN.” 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


CXXXIX 


Day of the year 1905 corresponding to | 
the last day of each month. 
Jane ee ce OL JULY. 21e : 4 = 
RÉ EN | PANE à. MS LE ic ‘ : : [2 fe 
March..... O0 Sent: :2 22 2.278 Les ba ers Wi out eS Shai ES 
AT EU 25120) MOCE SAN LUN 34 | 22 | S 2 = | = a red ceded Cea Rog TE 
May... TDi NON: ..334 | TH à (52) = a a BP fh Sie eat i 
A) |) CICA Ses 181 Dee) sar. 56-365) ors | es a 8 © 3 Se Py EI NES LE 
2 ss | EE |S|S|E8|S)elslé 
I For Leap Year add one to each except 52 a 8 2 a = = =) cape | = 
iS January. 4 5 3 = à & Suse es ely 
$4)) Tainneea, borealis... 25. 2cces. scree 000 IE SSI Sons | ioc : Gadet! lone Inigo’ Bob 0 dios 
Sina | Kealmiay Slaucal SE. Rec. stostene ll eRe] Ue ada coon Biafele\liatate/etolel (a fele’s/sts| elefersiciel shel oi 5 
SON BRAIN a E Ea Cinta) be Boon a asa SoCcaoenoe le lle al eoooe| bocodol Hooodol BRED Canosa) aecoas laced aioe lace eee 
37 | Cratægus oxyacantha......... Le aha alel? LODE Sins fa acoso) SREELE tRocodal Eacete 
88 | Crategus coccinea,. etc. .............:| 164,2)...... demnlssnenlintsanitens cul 36 ston | avers 
B9)|| Pris VETSICOLOL! |. 5 <0.010.5.0615 jor stdudndcac A ERA Hood) oder) RARE ECS Reo cic Jbobd oc [au eden 
40 | Chrysanthemum Leucanthemum,.....| 167.7)......! ano ciaa| cic BREA Fase RONA dei bo moto Gee 
41 | Nuphar advena,..............+. seleeis| A665 2] 5c sicele|eie sone BECCA KE BEEP 126. [Pee EEE ….bi7o + 
42 | Rubus strigosus.......... FO Cotes HALOS CREME) Se ES) homers 168 | 126 |... 63 |...1130 }.... 
43 se = Teuit FIPOLe neuve 208 0 RASE rase cn ee cect LAON A et ale 
M Ehinanthns Gristi-galll 2.417008): sven s[te vee) ssl MR PCR ER DRE 
46 | Rubus villosus.................... A En IE SA Ponte Sassalhass tete | 109 |106 |....|... 
4 <6 CE FRUITS EE ra ons ht 2 OO RO) Meter lames lea e adel ka ees aes J Weare 
a7 Sarracenia) Purpurea, :. 0... ee eee s+ 172,7 JOGOS ICCC OR] AAA Se ool Poe A Re 
AHhPBrunellavulparis trees. eee MT6 |. --e SEE PRE SR oot ARE AA LE LE ARR 
AG) PROBA LUCIA. cobs 54e te soosevee:| 175,9] 155 1 (55: 59) ATEN 154 144 rate. 139 154 ° 
50 | Leontodon autumnale,,..............| 170.5) ... COTE) FFDEE 133 4LEc0- alte. wralsie| east 
Diop Lanaria vulgaris (555.6 i<ie sane con IPS SRY YB OO 8] God) Lodel scone FACE At 
52 | Trees appear green ..,.... ..... SEobod | eta bel boar Bee lle ° |e see KS 
53 | Ribes rubrum, cultivated ........... | 145.3|.... ANG; | 352 119 84 er NUE : 
5A “ “ FLUIt PIPC AA: Jaa. wanes] O49 Roses BE CGC lance noose SU At OC 
56 | R. nigrum, cultivated...............,. 147.3|,... |... masters lee lo. OPA PMP DES DOCC 
56 Le fruit TPN sos tects retorts 907.6) teers Bitslecarsil|eelstce « tele POP ET Bal loidod Cac 
BZ | Pranus Cerasass.: (5. .0ienaewe+ +e etai eee Co tee PAPE ks, OBA hye a: 94 |. ge 
58 be “ fruit ripe.............| 199,1/...: 100, |. rollers APE rhe 
59 | Prunus domestica,,..............- ....| 152.5] 131 |... ----|N192 97 ths PF . 
60 | Pyrus malus...... sted aisiaie is jobseano08 154.6) 152 ve rete 132 113 | vodoa6 101 |113 [160 |.... 
61 | Syringa vulgaris. ..................... ED ONE MEN eel ay (eee dia eas ENS 
62 | Trifolium repens.,,..,...... siete stated leh 158-591 lee 1153) 1130 [us 100 AAA ON LES 
63 | Trifolium pratense........ ..... tee eLOOe hw OO} un ea PRDASE 164 | 122 |......1129 |..,.]150 |154 
cAlPhlenm pratense steel sas oies ik UE An A EE Chorsolbooceloctabe | NRA Salers 000) OO 
65 | Solanum tuberosum,,..,...............| 187.7|......]...... Beles ea LÉCÈCE : solos 
66 | Ploughing (first of season)......,.....| 116.4... A 06110 700 ee RURALE Lyi 72 ee 
| 


CXL 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 
{WHEN FIRST SEEN.’ 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


Number 


Day of the year 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month. 


DÉC on eRe rol JUL... 212 
IEE Sa nan opod 0 UNG CRRA eee 3 
March. ...... 90 Sept, <iic Le. 2278 
April bee 120 F Ochs. eh. 27.30€ 
May. .\sc5s.).Lo Nov. ee 334 
June....... ..181 Dec...-.-+-.- 20) 


For Leap Year add one to each except 
January. 


Average date for 
Nova Scotia, 
Oakbank, Man. 


Sowing (first of season)............... 
Potato-planting ‘“ ..... one due | 
Sheep-shearing ‘ dose see eeceee 
Hay-cutting ee desscreepe 008 
Grain-cutting, ‘! see secte see sel 
Potato-digging ‘ es oeeieese) 
ODEnINEIONTIVErS.. eee 
Opening joflakes res cel 
Last snow to whiten ground........ : J 
se LOY IN AIT Res recee ee 
Last spring frost—hard...... Jogoodoc 
Ui se OME oa scene 
Water in streams—high.............. | 
se 4 low. | 
First autumn frost, hoar............ = 


‘e $3 Ar URS aa eee 


First snow to fly in air................ 


L whiten ground ......... | 


Closing lof 1ak es... es reercbeceee 


cs FIVELB SE sos Mole ce cc 


Wild ducks migrating, N............| 

ce 3G SA EP E Se] 
Wild geese migrating, N........... | 

«6 MipTabligs es een eee | 
Melospiza fasciata, North........ areal 
Turdus migratorius ‘  ...., celeste 
Junco hiemalis £8 Sennen | 
Actitis macularia D oS cho 
Sturnella magna ce Add 08e 
Ceryle Alcyon cs 1BCÉSBDA OC 


| 
Dendræca coronata ce See te 
| 
| 


D. æstiva Baoan sleleieta 


Zonotrichia alba oh LEA so00d 


264.9). 00000]. 


145,5|...... 


220.21......1... 


8817 ee.) 


SIONS ciel 


| | 


08,45... 


Salers 
BT Bieemcias 


197 Mec) are 
120 Dee -0e 


| 104 Bis ee cat 


130.9 +00 | Je 


187 Blac} 
| | 


DLO ALES <i}sle 
] 


“4 n S (e) = SR ae ee 
2 |e) A. | a | Se) oe 
n a = = (a MEN ED € 
SA a a A ES (3) A Lr} 
rea SS 8 3 ny [ene Se) 5 
3 z © = “= 3m |2|4 
> 8 2 = oe | $8] & | oie 
à EN 2) EVENT AIRE 
A À | à is) PIP |e 1 oO] & 
| 
ssilesie| 197180 jarejssore| eielaesiesa] eletsie| siersiel| ele al eee 
| | | 
214 |... 195 |......|......1...0/..1M95/ 198 
219... el 1220 Jesse--lscereslec--lr---| 210) 
| | 
9206, JQ ses elles sl:es lines 08! 
92 84 70) lens TOI 
| 
| 


ss... 


soslresssslses selossuuel verso. 


ssssosslsmsssslssssss) 8 (te eerieuer 


69 {|i cen S| acecs af RER PRE RCE 2 
| 69 slt ts. a| eG 


Cs eC el Od ed 


esice.c|e0 cles|sienenelivcsiefeene| Oats 


60 BB) |/<ja ofe'o'| oisie!=} eres te Oe 


6B |......1,...,,1,...1....| 95 


APPENDIX E CXLI 


PHENOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS, CANADA, 1905. 


‘WHEN FIRST SEEN,” 


OBSERVATION STATIONS. 


Day of the year 1905 corresponding to 
the last day of each month. 

Acc cc OE JULY... 212) | x - À = 

Pepe 0 00 à Aug... ARRETE ICONE VEN NE Ce Fe 

March ......- 90 Sept........... CHEN || ed ANS | & (=) os) . [AIR a 

Piles. 190 Oct............804/ 83 | à 3 a eee Wis dee tae: le 

agrees, J6t  Nov.....0060:934 [Um | | © | 2 - Soi Ph ee Sera i 
pOUMe.. 6,002.18 Dec. cis sive 2.369 22 a Ë E & a EAN a AIRE 
© > a = 3 e | + 
2 3S Ss > 2 a © | 2 
= | For Leap Year add one to each except ES rt 8 $ be = CPE EAU 
7, January, F Sle epee ee eh ee meee he 
z 4 © & À _ =) Pr |F|/e1C]e 
92 | Trochilus colubris, North....... ones] 144.7)......]- 006 seras 112 OP RSG saclignod) | 071251 
93 | Tyrannus Carolinensis, ‘ .......... 140 .5)......].. ce ce|accnse ee 09 onu o eee eesloane 
94 | Dolychonyx oryzivorus ‘‘ ...... Sao WeadSccn|soocog|so06 où Pocono|do0000 bosobt|bo0b| toc ae 
95 | Spinis tristis ) MÉDIAS RS | Hews oscae 00500 S00COn sonne mane oc 00 - 
96 | Setophaga ruticilla Ce so000s00000)| Let SO een less l-cecee bouge So seelsabeletete . 50 
97 | Ampelis cedrorum ME EAM AGE Don Er) EN ES Boon oc ous pdoloocdlosce 
98 | Chordeiles Virginianus “* . ,,....... 12950 Pire ARR LAN IAE) RD ao Le 3 us 
99 | First piping of frogs ............,... 11025|0 83) 1S eee 11786 eer fade IR 86e 
100 | First appearance, snakes....... PRE à D UN Ne PRES A [th oe ale tee aR ls Pr lee 


POOInTH ROYALE DU. CANADA 


MHMOILRES 


SECHRION: i. 


LITTERATURE FRANCAISE, HISTOIRE, ARCHEOLOGIE, Erc 


ANNEE 1906 


Section I., 1906. [8] Mémoires S. R. C. 


I.—L'Habitation de Samos. 


Par M. P.-B. CASGRAIN. 
(Lu le 23 mai 1906.) 


L’évéque de Samos.—La villa de Samos.—Notes sur les personnages 
qui ont l’habitée.—Thomas Ainslie-—Le Juge Mabane.—L’évéque Moun- 
tain—L’Hon. Matthew Bell—L’Hon. Wm. Sheppard.—La batterie de 
Samos, sa vraie position.—La maison et le poste de Saint-Michel.— 
Prise de ce poste.—Attaque manquée pour le reprendre.—Le cimetière 
Saint-Patrice. Bougainville retardé dans sa marche vers Québec le 
matin du 13 septembre 1759. 


La petite localité qu’on appelait autrefois Samos n’est pas une 
des moins importantes, au point de vue historique, parmi celles qui 
environnent Québec. Quelques souvenirs rafraîchis et des détails plus 
précis et peu connus qui s’y rattachent et touchent aux personnages qui 
Pont habitée, Dont croyons-nous, intéresser la classe des lecteurs 
studieux. 

Il existait à Sillery, lors du siège de Québec par Wolfe, deux mai- 
sons distinctes situées à l’ouest et non loin de l’Anse-du-Foulon, d’où 
ce général monta pour s'emparer des Hauteurs d'Abraham. l’une 
était la maison dite de Samos, qui avait servi auparavant de résidence 
à monseigneur Dosquet, évêque titulaire de ce nom, laquelle il s’était 
bâtie en 1732 ;—l’autre, la maison appelée Saint-Michel, sur la ferme 
adjacente de Messieurs les ecclésiastiques du séminaire des Missions- 
Etrangères établi à Québec. Elle servait de maison de récréation à 
leurs élèves dès avant l’année 1701. Ces deux maisons sont celles men- 
tionnées par Franquet, ingénieur et géographe du roi, qu’il remarqua, 
en passant par eau devant elles, en partant de Québec, en 1752. 

“Vu en passant, dit-il, à cinq ou six cents toises de la ville lAnse- 
des-Mères, à un quart de lieue de celle du Foulon; à même distance 
plus loing une maison nommée Samod (sic) Samos appartenant aux 
prêtres du Séminaire, et tout joignant la ferme de St-Michel, et plus 
loin, l'endroit nommé Sillery, où est une maison de carers apparte- 
nant aux Jésuites de cette ville.” 

Le nom de Samos vulgairement donné dans le temps aux environs 
de la localité où la villa était construite est maintenant éteint comme 
lieu d'habitation et n’existe que pour désigner la partie du chemin vers 
le Cap-Rouge, qui passe à cet endroit. Tout en faisant l’historique de 


4 _SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Samos, nous allons localiser spécifiquement le site de chacune des deux 
maisons, au moyen de pièces probantes et authentiques qui vont nous 
donner une idée exacte de la situation, étendue et topographie complète 
des lieux, afin de les examiner ensuite à leur point de vue stratégique 
et fixer le site de la batterie dite de Samos; puis nous pourrons suivre 
les opérations militaires qui eurent lieu sur le terrain depuis le lever 
du jour, le 13 septembre 1759, jusqu'à le retraite de Bougainville qui 
termina cette mémorable journée. 


En référant au contrat de vente de la terre de Samos achetée de 
Nicolas de la Nouiller par Mgr Dosquet, on découvre que le vendeur 
avait pu établir l’enchaînement de tous les titres de propriété du fond, 
depuis l’acte de concession primordial jusqu'à celui de sa propre acqui- 
sition en 1724. 

En effet, on y constate que Jacques Pagé, orfévre, marchand-bourgeois 
de Québec, par contrat du 15 janvier 1724, devant Mtre Barbel, notaire, 
vend à Mtre de la Nouiller, conseiller du roi au conseil supérieur et 
trésorier de la marine en la ville de Quebeck, “ cinquante arpens en 
superficie de terres (prix 600 Ibs., payé d’avance) situées proche des 
terres de la maison de Saint-Michel, appartenant à Messieurs du Sémi- 
naire des Missions-Etrangères établi à Québec, sise au lieu appelé Cou- 
longe, joignant du côté du sud-ouest aux terres des dits Sieurs du 
Séminaire, un chemin de douze toises entre d’eux, d’un bout au fleuve 
St-Laurent et par l’autre bout au grand chemin comme l’on va de 
Quebeck au Cap-Rouge à main gauche, aussi douze toises de large ré- 
servées pour le dit grand chemin entre d’eux,” les dits 50 arpens tels 
et ainsi qu’ils ont été concédés à Jean Bonnart (sic) Bouvart, dit Lafor- 
tune,! par Monsieur de Montmagny, alors gouverneur en ce pays, suivant 
titre de concession du 15 novembre 1646 et brevet de confirmation de 
Messieurs de l’ancienne et première compagnie en ce pays, en date du 
29 mars 1649; appartenant au vendeur comme héritier de défunt le 
Sieur Guillaume Pagé Carey ? et Elizabeth LeTarte, ses père et mère; 
et au dit feu Sr Pagé Carey appartenant par acquisition qu’il en a faite 
de Geneviève Gaudin, épouse en premières noces de Antoine Boutin, et 
de Marguerite Gaudin, femme de Robert Pagé, par contrat passé devant 
Mtre Louis Chambalon, notaire royal, en cette la prévosté, le 27 mai 
1702; ensuite duquel contrat est une ratification et une quittance des 
dix et vingt-neuf juin 1702; et aux dits Gaudins appartenant comme 
héritiers de défunt Barthélemy Gaudin, leur père, qui les avait acquis 


1 Nommé Bonneau dit Lafortune,— Conseil Souverain, 1664, 8 février. 

7 Ce Guillaume Pagé est ancêtre maternel par sa fille, Suzanne Pagé, 
de Mathilde Perreault, mon épouse, dont elle est la trisaïeule, et je remonte 
au père de Guillaume Pagé, moi aussi, du côté maternel. 


” 


[CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS : 5 


du dit Bouvard, par contrat passé devant Mtre Laurent Bermen, notaire, 
en date du 21 mars 1649, confirmé le 29 du méme mois,— relevant de 
Messieurs du Séminaire comme seigneurs de la chatellenie de Coulonge.” 

Chacune des pièces citées plus haut a été soigneusement compulsée 
par nous et confirme l’exactitude des énoncés qu’elle comporte et qui en 
dérivent. 

On sait que l’évêque de Samos nommé coadjuteur de Quebec en 
1728, passa au Canada à la fin de l’été 1729, pour y prendre possession 
de l’évêché de Québec, en sa qualité de coadjuteur.! 

L’évêque en titre par succession était Mgr Duplessis-Mornay, de 
Paris, ci-devant coadjuteur et résignataire, auquel fut dévolu néan- 
moins l’évêché à son insu et dont il prit possession par procureur; car, 
vu son Age et ses infirmités, il se trouvait hors d’état de traverser les 


mers. Mgr Dosquet prit passage sur la flûte du roi “ L’Hléphant” 


qui fit naufrage dans la nuit du ler septembre 1729, sur les battures 
du Cap-Brûlé, côte nord du Saint-Laurent, à environ dix lieues en bas 
de Québec. 

Comme avant sa nomination Mgr Dosquet avait déja demeuré au 
pays pendant deux ou trois ans, en qualité de simple prétre chez les 
Sulpiciens de Montréal, étant suipicien iui-méme, ses relations et sa 
connaissance du pays faisaient croire qu’il allait s’y fixer et s’attacherait 
à son diocèse, surtout après le démission de Mgr de Mornay qui fut 
donnée le 12 septembre 1733. 

On le vit aussi, pour s’installer à son arrivée, commencer par faire 
réparer en partie le palais épiscopal, grand et solide édifice construit 
par Mer de Saint-Vallier et demeuré vacant depuis, car ce prélat 
demeurait à l’'Hôpital-Général. Le roi accorda alors une gratification 
de 3,000 livres à l’évêque de Samos, plus pour contribuer aux répara- 
tions qu'en vue de l’indemniser des pertes réclamées par lui à raison 
du naufrage de l'Eléphant; et même le roi lui permit la vente de cinq 
emplacements adjacents pour aider aux mêmes travaux. 

On voit cependant que s’il se trouvait mal logé, et s’en plaignait, 
c'est qu’il le voulait bien, parce que dans une lettre de Rome de 1738, 
éest-à-dire dix ans après, il dit que lors de son arrivée à Québec, il fit 
préparer au séminaire à ses frais un appartement destiné à l’évêque; 


211 y avait avant 1727, comme coadjuteur de l'évêque de Québec, Mer. 
l'évêque de Euménie qui, ayant donné sa démission, avait été remplacé par 
l'abbé Macheco de Préméaux frère de l'évêque de Cousérans et alors 
STand-vicaire de l'évêque de Soissons. Il est dit homme de condition, 
de bonnes moeurs et de bonne doctrine — Lettre du ministre à M. de Beau- 
harnois, 18 mai 1728. Ce dernier dut aussi se démettre, puisque Mgr 
Duplessis-Mornay apparait ensuite finalement comme coadjuteur consacré. 


6 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


puis il ajoute qu’il ne l’a pas occupé et s’est contenté d’une chambre 
habitable du palais épiscopal qu’il trouva fort délabré. On se demande 
alors pourquoi, dans ces circonstances, bâtir trois ans après, une troisième 
demeure à Samos, si elle ne devait pas ou ne pouvait pas, vu sa dimen- 
sion, loger la nombreuse suite de l’évêque, peut-être aussi une dizaine 
de séminaristes qu’il avait amenés avec lui pour les former à la pré- 
trise, et en sus sept domestiques, dont les noms nous sont conservés, 
composant un train de maison et un attirail de grand seigneur. 

Il recherchait ses aises et se trouvant mal logé en ville, il vou- 
lut s'installer à la campagne et choisit le site à Sillery appartenant 
à M. de la Nouiller. Celui-ci étant dûment fondé en titre, comme 
on vient de le voir, vendit par contrat devant Dubreuil, notaire, en 
date du 17 octobre 1731, à Monseigneur illustre et révérend Père en 
Dieu Pierre Dosquet, évêque de Samos, in partibus, et coadjuteur de 
Québec, les mêmes 50 arpens de terre ci-dessus avec les mêmes délimita- 
tions, —* ensemble tous les bâtiments construits sur iceux et meubles 
qui y sont, sans aucune retenue.” Le prix stipulé est de 2,800 livres, 
demeurées à rente au denier vingt dans les mains de l’acquéreur. Nous 
verrons ce qu’il advint par la suite, tant du principal que de la 
rente, comme aussi de la maison qu’il y fit construire l’année suivante. 

Il est vrai que Mgr de Saint-Vallier avait abandonné sa résidence 
du palais épiscopal qu’il avait fait bâtir à grands frais, pour se retirer 
à l’'Hôpital-Général, mais il n’avait pas eu l’idée bizarre de le démanteler 
pour le plaisir de détruire, comme l’évêque Dosquet lui en prête la 
pensée dans sa même lettre; et de prendre de là occasion de se plaindre, 
dix ans après, d’avoir été mal logé à Québec, tout comme s’il voulait 
faire parade de son abnégation en se privant d'occuper l’appartement 
évêque tout préparé à ses frais qui l’attendait au séminaire. Cepen- 
dant, malgré ses installations et constructions, Mgr Dosquet ne séjourna 
en tout que peu de temps en Canada; et, comme certains évêques en 
France, ne voulut pas s’astreindre à la résidence. Venu en 1729, il 
s’embarqua en 1733 pour la France; il revint l’année suivante sur le 
vaisseau du roi le Rubis, pour sen retourner définitivement le 17 
octobre 1735. 

Il nous parait clair qu’il ne dut occuper Samos que fort peu de 
temps. Bâtie en 1732, la maison en pierre ne pouvait guère être 
Icgeable dans Vhiver suivant, sinon, comme on dit, seulement pour 
essuyer les murs.  D’ailleurs, les dimensions du logis n’étaient pas pro- 
portionnées à sa suite épiscopale. 

Après son départ et jusqu'à 1744, en ne sait trop ce qu’il fit de 
cette établissement ni même qui en était le vrai propriétaire (en loi). 
N’en ayant pas payé le prix d’achat, il semble ne s'être pas plus occupé 


[CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS zi 


du paiement de la rente de 140 livres que du sort principal. Il 
aurait fait, assure-t-on, une donation verbale de la terre et maison au 
séminaire avant son départ, en octobre 1735; toutefois, il manifesta 
son intention de les retenir, suivant sa lettre de Paris du ler juin 1736. 
Cette donation ne présentant aucune date ou titre écrit, ne pouvait 
légalement transférer aucun droit de propriété, en sorte que celui-ci 
parut demeurer comme en suspens. 

Cependant les Messieurs du séminaire, se croyant bien fondés en 
fait, prirent le moyen d’en finir, et au bout de neuf ans ils payérent 
le prix le vente de 2,800 livres dû a La Nouiller, lequel reconnut l’avoir 
regu “du séminaire comme étant aux lieu et place et droits de Mon- 
“ seigneur Pierre Herman Dosquet, ancien évêque de Québec, à cause 
“de la donation qui leur a été faite d’une maison et terre situées à 
“la seigneurie de Coulonge, prés cette, ville, que mon dit Seigneur 
“ Evêque avait acquis du Sr Lenouiller, à constitution de 140 livres de 
“rente,” ainsi qu’on le voit par une quittance de la somme de 2,800 
livres et de tous les arrérages de la rente, passée devant Mtre Boucault, 
notaire, le 8 février 1744. 

Notons que durant ce laps de temps il était devenu dû au sémi- 
naire,! comme seigneur de la chastellenie de Coulonge, plusieurs années 
de cens et rente seigneuriale sur cette terre et en plus les lods-et-ventes 
sur le prix d’achat. Mais comme le fond se trouva par le fait réuni 
au domaine de la seigneurie, la créance privilégiée du seigneur a cet 
égard devint purgée par là même par rapport a la terre. En sorte 
que le titre et la prise.de possession du Séminaire demeuraient valides 
malgré les revendications exprimées par l’évêque, à moins par lui de 
faire le remploi du prix payé à son acquit, avec les arrérages de la 
rente et acquitter tous les droits dus. De plus durant ce même laps 
de temps, on perd de vue le paiement par lui de la rente stipulée de 
140 livres depuis 1732 jusqu’à 1744. 

Cette terre de Samos contenait, en réalité, tout près de 70 arpens 
en superficie, au lieu de 50, maïs la très-garde partie était en forêt 
primitive de beaux bois de chêne ét de pin et ne donnait pas encore 
de rendement, parce qu’on tenait à les conserver comme ornant le 
domaine et accroissant sa valeur. 

Quand les messieurs du Séminaire s’en départirent dix-huit ans 
plus tard, comme nous Vallons voir ci-après. cette réserve de bois fut 
stipulée expressément pour leur terre adjoignante de Saint-Michel. 


"Je dois exprimer mes remerciments à M, l'abbé A.-E. Gosselin, du 
séminaire de Québec, pour son aide et son obligeance à me communiquer 
les archives du séminaire. 


8 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Nous avons la photographie d’un dessin intitulé Le bois de 
Samos qui semble faire plus apprécier le bois que Vhabitation qui s’y 
trouve. Vu qu’il ne montre pas de date pour en fixer l’époque, il 
est difficile de dire si la maison qu’on y voit est bien celle de l’évêque 
de Samos, ou bien celle restaurée par les propriétaires subséquents, soit 
Thomas Ainslie ou le juge Mabane. 

Avant de passer outre et de nous séparer de l’évêque Dosquet, 
devenu évêque de Québec, comme il est le premier et le principal per- 
sonnage parmi ceux, tous remarquables, qui ont ensuite habité la villa 
de Samos, il n’est pas hors de propos de raconter brièvement ce que 
l'on connait de lui par les documents contemporains. 

Choisi comme coadjuteur par Mgr. Duplessis-Mornay, de l'agrément 
du roi, Mgr Dosquet avait été fait évêque de Samos in partibus depuis 
1725, mais il n’était pas Français d’origine. Il était Flamand; on 
Ya dit né à Lille, la ci-devant capitale de la Flandre française, main- 
tenant dans le département du Nord. L’abbé Auguste-H. Gosselin 
le dit né à Liège, sans toutefois ne le prouver que par inférence.! Dans 
Pun et l’autre cas, il était Flamand, ça suffit. Non dépourvu d’habileté 
ni d’ambition, il se réclamait de cette qualité d’étranger auprès de la 
cour de France, prétendant que dans la diplomatie il était ainsi plus 
à même de rendre secrètement des services au roi. II est possible, et 
même probable, qu'avec ses talents, il eût été plus habile et plus laborieux 
dans les missions diplomatiques a travers l'Europe, que dans le cours 
de ses missions apostoliques chez les sauvages du vaste territoire de 
la Nouvelle-France, lesquelles lui sont restées en perspective seulement, 
comme celles des Indes où il devait d’abord aller. Son administration 
diocésaine ne semble pas montrer chez lui beaucoup de zèle pour l’exer- 
cice des fonctions épiscopales, ni un grand succès durant ses dix 
années d’épiscopat pour toute la Nouvelle-France. Il est vrai qu’il 
faut tenir compte qu’à son arrivée Québec se trouvait dans une époque 
fâcheuse de troubles et de dissensions civiles et religieuses, lesquelles 
furent poussées, au chef-lieu même de son évêché, à des excès regrettables 
et à des rigueurs extrêmes, comme on le vit après la mort de Mgr 
de Saint-Vallier. Dans ces circonstances difficiles, il lui fallait une 
grande prudence, beaucoup d’esprit de conciliation, de discernement, de 
tact et d’adresse, pour amener des apaisements. Son tempérament, froid 
en apparence, se montrait parfois vif, brusque et hautain. Ce manque 
de douceur, ou plutôt son absolutisme, joint au défaut d’expérience 
locale pour conduire le petit peuple vain, susceptible et glorieux qu’il 
était appelé à diriger, lui attirèrent peu d'estime d’abord, puis un 
manque de confiance qui assombrit tout autour de lui. Ainsi que 


1 Mémoires de la Soc. Roy. du Canada, 1899, Vol. V, p. 28, 2ème Série. 


r 


[CASGRAIN] L'HABITATION DE SAMOS 9 


i ean 
Li ay hi aie 
| | ac” 


fa L a (4 


D 
- 


ni D 


Let ta 
= 


er 
© i 


Ne es 


[ CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 11 


l'avait prévu Mgr de Mornay, il se dégoûta bientôt du pays et alla 
séjourner en France, puis abandonnant la résidence il laissa son vaste 
diocése sous la conduite de grands-vicaires, dont le premier mis en 
office était inexpérimenté et trop jeune,— tant et si longtemps qu’enfin 
on lui força la main pour le faire renoncer à son évêché. Il ne man- 
auait pas cependant des vertus ordinaires d’un bon ecclésiastique et sa 
conduite privée fut toujours irréprochable. L'état de sa santé, dont 
il se plaignait fort, lui servait d’excuse pour se dispenser des fonctions 
actives de sa charge. (Cependant, cette santé ne pouvait guère être 
bien mauvaise puisqu'elle le porta jusqu’à l’âge de 86 ans. 

A part une couple de mandements rédigés dans son cabinet d'étude, 
Fun sur linstruction populaire, qui, vu son absence, ne produisit pas 
d'effet sensible, et l’autre bien dirigé et énergique contre la vente des 
boissons enivrantes aux sauvages, lequel eut un grand retentissement, 
on ne voit pas que Mgr Dosquet ait manifesté par ailleurs une grande 
ardeur pour diriger dans de gras pâturages le troupeau qui lui avait 
été confié. Cependant, on ne peut s'empêcher d’observer, pour le 
regretter, que, sur ce dernier mandement, pressé par le ministre au 
sujet du tort par là fait au commerce des fourrures, il ait cédé un 
peu de terrain et mis du tempérament, sous forme d'explication, pour 
atténuer la portée de son acte épiscopal. Sur ce point ses deux pré- 
décesseurs ainsi que les missionnaires avaient fait preuve d’une fermeté 
inébranlable. En fait, la traite de l’eau-de-vie n’en continua pas moins, 
comme par le passé, en s’échappant en partie par cette modification. 

Le coadjuteur, dès les premiers mois de son arrivée, commença à se 
décharger des soins du diocèse en nommant pour grand-vicaire M. 
de la Tour, jeune prêtre de 28 ans, qu’il avait amené avec lui et qui 
le suppléa tant en son absence qu’en sa présence et tant bien que mal. 

Ce jeune abbé était fils de M. de la Tour, Adal au parlement de 
Toulouse, qui, par son influence, .le fit nommer par le roi doyen du 
chapitre de Québec le 2 mai 1729, à la place de M. de Glandelet, 
décédé depuis 1725. De plus, il fut nommé, avec les émoluments d’of- 
fice de 300 livres, conseiller au Conseil Supérieur. Grace aux faveurs 
de la cour, il toucha de la sorte deux parts de chanoine, c’est-à-dire, 
1200 livres, qu’on voit avoir été décidé par le roi lui appartenir, sui- 
vant la lettre du 20 avril 1732, et il garda son doyenné jusqu’en 1733. 
Ce grand-vicaire était de bonne famille, et ainsi pourvu, tirait du 
grand, faisait tout haut la main. D’un esprit contentieux et tracassier, 
sans expérience en ce pays, il cassait les vitres, toujours soutenu par 
l’évêque qui ne faisait rien par lui-même. Celui-ci pontifiait dans 
Poccasion et c'était là à peu près toute la montre du décor. Heureuse- 
ment que le régime de l’abbé de traiter cavalièrement le peuple et un 


12 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


peu de méme le bas clergé, ne fut pas de longue durée, car le pays en 
fut débarrassé en 1731, où il retourna en France. 

L’abbé de la Tour a laissé, entre autres, un écrit au titre de 
Mémoires sur la vie de Mons. de Laval, Cologne, 1761, lesquels font 
voir Pauteur sous un aspect autrement caractérisé pour le mieux. Il 
mourut a Montauban, curé de St-Jacques-et doyen du chapitre de cette 
ville. Il avait refusé en 1733 la cure de Québec. 

Les annales religieuses de l’époque ne montrent pas sous un 
jour favorable les graves démêlés alors engagés parmi le clergé de 
Québec, ni la bonne entente de l’évêque avec son chapitre. Son ordon- 
nance pour obliger le chapitre de Québec à une procession d’un usage 
récent chez les Jésuites et le retrait après coup de cette ordonnance, 
avec injonction de n’en plus parler, indiquent chez lui un manque de 
discrétion et de suite. Ce faux pas ne servit qu'à augmenter les 
aigreurs mutuelles en les envenimant. Ce cérémonial d’étiquette exigé, 
qui n'était qu'un compliment aux Jésuites, fut une dévotion grima- 
cière et fielleuse plutôt que chrétienne. Il ne montrait aucune raison 
d'être comme office religieux obligatoire et tomba de lui-même en dé- 
suétude. A distance, on n’y voit qu’un entétement de part et d'autre 
sur des prétentions d’une puérilité inepte qui donne, entre autres, 
un exemple de plus de l’étroitesse d’esprit du français d’alors et du 
caractère normand dont il était imprégné, comme aussi des vanités 
rivales des personnages en scène.! | 

Les préséances, les exigences, les prétentions et les formalités 
d’étiquette étaient alors d'importance si majeure, qu’on semblait oublier 
le fond en cause en les faisant prédominer. Ces usages d’un autre 
siécle, vus à distance, nous paraissent aujourd'hui étranges et bien petits. 
Les principaux documents historiques du temps sont remplis de ces 
débats sur le cérémonial et de guerres de lutrin qui prennent place à 
l’égal des grands événements du jour. Heureusement que ces futilités 
n’ont pas pris racine sur notre terre d'Amérique. Ce qu’il y a de 
singulier, c’est qu'à côté de ces exigences ‘et de ces prétentions orgueil- 
leuses, soit personnelles, soit au nom sonore et bruyant de ce qu’on 
appelait les libertés de l'église gallicane, on voit un bizarre contraste 
avec la subjection, disons le mot, l’asservissement complet et général 
envers le roi auquel on appelait pour décider de tout, au spirituel comme 


1 Nous omettons de suivre l’interminable correspondance et les tracas- 
series que l’évêque s’est suscité et a fait subir aux gens de la ville, au sujet 
dune porte à l'évêché qui débouchait du chemin de ronde des remparts dans 
la Côte de la Montagne vis-à-vis l'escalier actuel. L’évéque voulait la tenir 
fermée et empêcher le public d'aller s’y ébaudir et le troubler de si près. 
A la fin, de par le roi, en dernier ressort, elle dut rester ouverte au public. 


[CASGRAIN] L'HABITATION DE SAMOS 13 


au temporel. Dans notre atmosphère de liberté et avec notre tempéra- 
ment devenu plus rassis et plus composé, on s’en moque maintenant, 
en voyant ce servilisme et ces appels constants au roi, en matières 
ecclésiastiques, tant par le clergé que par les laïques, comme s’il eut été 
un suffragant de Sa Sainteté à Paris, ou un pape d’Avignon, —souvent 
pour des riens, comme qui aura ou n’aura pas l’encens, l’eau jbénite et 
le pain bénit le premier, etc. 

Sur un autre sujet, quant à son temporel, le coadjuteur ne négli- 
geait pas d’étaler la faiblesse de ses ressources et de demander les grâces, 
les gratifications et les secours du roi. Lors de son départ pour le 
Canada, une gratification de 1,000 livres lui fut accordée, et l’année 
suivante, Mgr Duplessis-Mornay, dans la crainte que son suffragant ne 
se dégotitat du pays, se détermina à lui en procurer une autre. Ayant 
représenté au roi les pertes qu’il avait subies dans le naufrage de 
l'Eléphant et les dépenses à faire pour rendre le palais épiscopal habi- 
table, Mgr de Samos reçut une gratification extraordinaire de 3,000 
livres, en sus de la gratification ordinaire.! 

Le roi continua au coadjuteur, en 1732, l’ancienne gratification de 
500, livres accordée en 1688 par la Compagnie à l’évêque de Québec, à 
prendre sur son domaine. Par lettre patente du 24 décembre 1733, 
Sa Majesté le mit en possession des fruits et revenus de l’évêché de 
Québec, lesquels devaient comprendre ceux entr’autres de l’abbaye de 
Bénévent, dont la réunion à cet évêché avait été promise le 26 septembre 
1729 et ensuite consommée. 

A cette époque, il régnait dans les rangs du clergé à Québec, princi- 
palement parmi les membres du chapitre, dont plusieurs n’assistaient 
pas au choeur, une manie de faire des exploitations et des entreprises 
commerciales et industrielles, même des défrichements. Il est à croire 
que Mgr Dosquet se ressentit du même mal, au point de vouloir devenir 
agronome, car, dans ce but avoué, il obtint en 1731, une concession 
à titre de fief et seigneurie, sur la rivière Silhouette qui tombe dans 
la rivière Yamaska, de quatre lieues de terre de front sur autant de 


* Les détails des réclamations des particuliers à l’occasion des pertes 
résultant de ce naufrage, comme passagers, sont curieux à voir. Suivant 
le procès-verbal de la perte du vaisseau transmis officiellement, elles seraient 
nulles, car il y est déclaré que tout à été sauvé à l'exception des poudres, du 
biscuit, de quelques futailles à eau et de quelques pièces de canon. Cependant, 
le roi qui avait payé les frais du sauvetage, accorde la demande de M. Hoc- 
quart pour ses pertes au montant de 6,000 livres; Mgr Dosquet s’y présente 
et recoit 3,000 livres, tant pour ses pertes que pour ses dépenses de répara- 
tions à faire au palais épiscopal; d’autres passagers viennent pour des 
montants de 500 à 600 livres. Hocquart revient encore pour 2,000 livres 
qu’il ne réussit pas cette fois à obtenir — Cf. Lettre du Ministre de la Marine 
à M. de St-Maur, 29 Nov. 1729 — Arch. Can. 


14 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


profondeur et coupée en deux par la riviére Silhouette. Ce projet 
r’aboutit a rien autre chose qu’à des frais inutiles. 

En mai 1736, pendant son séjour en France, le roi lui fait une autre 
gratification de 3,000 livres, ayant égard a sa situation peu aisée, a 
prendre sur la recette des revenus de l’abbaye de la Victoire, dans le 
diocèse de Senlis, alors vacant. Un mois auparavant, il avait obtenu 
un congé du roi de six mois pour aller voyager en Flandre et il en 
profita. Le temps ainsi s’écoulait sans évêque diocésain résidant pour 
tout le Canada, et toujours sans la démission du titulaire que vaine- 
ment l’on attendait, et sans qu’il fut pourvu d’un coadjuteur. 

Malgré toutes ces faveurs à l’évêque, le ministre qui, dès 1737, 
lui avait écrit que ses demandes pour arranger ses affaires avaient paru 
excessives, lui représenta, en mai 1738, qu’il ne pouvait ignorer que 
son diocèse n’était pas dans une situation à se passer de la présence d’un 
évêque et qu’il espérait que son zèle pour les intérêts religieux le 
déterminerait à prendre un parti, soit de s’y rendre ou de donner sa 
démission; qu’il était temps qu’on sût à quoi s’en tenir; que s’il vou- 
lait mettre des conditions à sa démission, il le dit; qu'on attendait 
une réponse prompte et décisive. Mgr Dosquet semble ne s’être inqui- 
été en rien de ces représentations. A Ja fin de l’année 1738, le ministre 
se montre surpris des nouvelles exigences de l’évêque et lui déclare net 
qu'il s’agit pour le présent de savoir si l’arrangement proposé lui con- 
vient ou non. S'il ne lui convient pas, il devra s’arranger pour retour- 
ner le printemps prochain à Québec, sans quoi le roi prendra les mesures 
nécessaires pour y pourvoir. Alors, il n’aura plus à compter sur le 
bénéfice de l’abbaye de Breine ou autre chose. Le ministre termine en 
lui disant qu’il est chargé par le cardinal Fleury de lui déclarer ces 
choses une fois pour toutes.! 


1 Le cardinal Fleury avait été précepteur de Louis XV et devint son 
ministre en 1726, quoique’agé de 70 ans. Lors des troubles et des dissensions 
qui surgirent à Québec, après le décès, en décembre 1727, de Mgr de Saint- 
Vallier, au sujet de son successeur, la cour dut intervenir, et par arrêt du 
2 mars 1729, elle confirma la prise de possession de l'évêché par le succes- 
seur en titre, Mgr Duplessis-Mornay. Puis, l'évêque de Samos, son coadju- 
teur, devint lui-méme évéque de Québec, par la démission de Mgr de Mornay 
qu’il donna le 12 septembre 1733. Son âge et ses infirmités l’avaient empêché 
de se rendre dans son diocèse quoiqu’il en fût l'évêque en titre depuis 
AB T(PAT(E Son coadjuteur, qui n’y était venu qu’en 1729, abandonna 
la résidence et le pays en 1735. Dans ces diverses circonstances, le diocése 
avait beaucoup souffert, d’abord de l’absence involontaire pendant 13 ans 
de Mgr de Saint-Vallier, détenu prisonnier, puis de la non-résidence de 


ses deux successeurs. Il subissait alors une espèce d’interrégne. Le cardi- 
nal Fleury cherchait à y porter remède et avait depuis quelque temps jeté 
les yeux sur un digne prêtre du diocèse de Chartres, dont la piété et l’hu- 
milité étaient les seules recommandations qu’on pût lui voir. Il se nommait 


[CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 15 


Cependant l’évêque mettait des exigences toujours croissantes pour 
donner sa démission; pourtant, en sus de l'abbaye de Bénévent, valant 
3,000 livres, on lui offrait le bénéfice de l’abbaye de Breine, dans le diocèse 
de Soissons, dont le revenu était estimé à 6,000 livres. 

Néanmoins, ce ne fut qu’en mai suivant, en mai 1739, à la der- 
nière heure, au moment du départ aes vaissecux, qu’il se résigna enfin 
à donner (si c’est là un don et non un troc) la démission de son évêché ; 
encore, voulut-il conserver sa juridiction jusqu’à l’annéc suivante par 
son grand-vicaire, M. Miniac. 

Le reste de la carrière de l’évêque Dosquet ne présente pas d’in- 
térêt pour les Canadiens. Il est tombé dans loubli, et sauf le nom 
de Samos donné à une partie du chemin du Cap-Rouge, et la batterie 
historique dite de Samos, lors du siège du Québec, aucun souvenir popu- 
laire n’existe pour rappeler la mémoire de l’ancien évêque de Samos, 
devenu évêque de Québec. 

Après la guerre la maison de Samos fut trouvée détruite, sauf les 
murs restés debout. Au-delà de 1762, nous n’avons encore pu trouver 


Paul Cassegrain, né 4 Angersville, en 1693, curé de Bouglainval en 1732, et 
fondateur en 1734 et directeur de la communauté des Sceurs de St-Rémy 
d’Auneau, ensuite connu sous le nom de Bon-Secours de Chartres. Il était 
aussi chanoine de cette cathédrale. Le cardinal lui offrit l'évêché de Québec, 
mais ne s'en croyant pas digne, humble prêtre refusa respectueusement 
cette dignité. Le cardinal tenait en grande estime l'abbé Cassegrain et lui 
donnait toute sa confiance. Il le retint pour son chapelain et son confesseur. 
Ce vertueux prêtre ayant rempli sa vie de bonnes œuvres, mourut à Auneau, 
arrondissement de Chartres, en 1771, à lage de 78 ans. Sa vie a été écrite 
par son neveu, Paul Antoine Cassegrain, aussi chanoine de Chartres en 1765, 
mais n’a pas été imprimée. 

J’allais en Italie en 1867, et en traversant les Alpes, par Chamounix, 
je fis la rencontre dans la diligence d’un capucin, le pére Laurent, supérieur 
d'une maison de religieux à Paris, homme fort instruit, très spirituel et de 
bonne compagnie; de plus, bien renseigné, il connaissait tout à la ville et 
à la cour. En causant, il voulait relier ma famille à celle de l’abbé Casse- 
grain, dont je parle, et il avait raison, à cause de la commune origine locale 
et de l’atavisme que j'ai pu vérifier plus tard. Il disait que c'était un saint 
à canoniser, dont on se rappelait encore les vertus. 

A mon retour de Rome, un mois après, Mgr Pie, alors évêque de Poitiers, 
puis cardinal, avec lequel j'eus l'honneur de m'entretenir longuement, en 
route sur le vapeur d’Ostie à Marseille, me confirma pleinement le dire du 
père Laurent et l’existence du M. S. S. de la vie de l’abbé Cassegrain, que 
je n’ai pu retracer. 

J'ai trouvé ensuite ces renseignements confirmés dans l’ouvrage de l’abbé 
Joseph Beauhaire, Chronologie des Evêques, des Curés, des Vicaires, et des 
autres prêtres de ce diocèse, depuis les temps les plus reculés jusqu'à nos jours, 
Chartres, 1892. 

Il contient les détails ci-dessus relatés concernant l’abbé Paul Cassegrain. 


16 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


aucun indice de son genre de construction, si ce n’est le carré en pierre 
de l’édifice, donnant ses dimensions, ses portes et croisées, d’après le 
plan de larpenteur Plamondon dressé alors et que nous reproduisons. 
Quant à son aspect extérieur, nous avons un croquis ou dessin au crayon 
qu'on croit être une vue de la villa sous la désignation de Bois de Samos. 
Nous en donnons une copie photographiée que nous devons à l’obligeance 
de M. Doughty, l’archiviste si compétent du Dominion. Quant au 
dessin de Hervy Smyth, représentant la maison et la batterie qu’il 
nomme de Sillery, nous pensons que c’est un croquis de la maison 


Pour Qui ball cry Lo Ge left S Moa 5 Landi, (lace 
Terre Lee drawing by L1iy dr gli z 
Cércral ele 


, at de car lo 


Saint-Michel des MM. du Séminaire de Québec, croyant pouvoir le 
démontrer ci-après. 

Devenu propriétaire de la terre et habitation de Samos, ainsi qu’on 
Va vu, le Séminaire de Québec en disposa d’une partie comme suit; 
c'était à la veille de la cession attendue du pays:— Le 14 décembre 
1762, par acte devant Mtre J.-C. Panet, notaire, il vendit à M. Thomas 
Ainslie, receveur des douanes à Québec, “une quantité de terre sur 
“laquelle se trouve le quarré de la maison de campagne de MM. les 


[CASGRAIN] L'HABITATION DE SAMOS 17 


“ ecclésiastiques, dit la maison de Samos,’ située près de la ville de 
“Quebec,” (à être mesurée et bornée, y est-il dit, l'hiver prochain), 
“relevant du fief de Coulonge.” Elle s’est trouvée être de 42 arpens 
en superficie, bornée au nord-est par ie ruisseau Belleborne et au sud- 
ouest par une ligne droite distante des deux extrémités de quatre arpens 
du dit ruisseau, bornée au sud à la haute marée, à continuer jusqu’au 
grand chemin; la dite terre telle que figurée ensuite par le procès-verbal 
de mesurage et bornage dressé par l’arpenteur Plamondon en date du 
27 mai 1763, dont nous avons pris copie pour la produire au besoin. 

l’idée du retour du Canada à la France, même trois ans après 
la conquête, ne pouvait être arrachée du cœur des Canadiens, comme on 
va la voir. 

Par ce contrat il fut stipulé ce qui suit comme conditions par les 
Messieurs du Séminaire: 

“ Laquelle présente vente cependant n’aura lieu qu’au cas que 
cette colonie demeure à l’Angleterre et ne sera le dit Sieur Ainslie tenu 
de payer le prix de la vente qu’à la paix qui décidera du pays; et 
dans la supposition contraire que le pays retournât à la France, soit 
par le sort des armes, soit par le prochain traité de paix, la dite vente 
sera nulle de plein droit et Messieurs du Séminaire rentreront en pos- 
session de la susdite terre et maison avec les améliorations que mon 
dit Sieur Aïnslie s’oblige d’y faire dès le commencement du printemps 
prochain,— et spécialement d’y faire établir la dite maison de Samos 
en réparations de maconne, charpente, plancher, et couverture, etc., 
dans le cours du printemps prochain,— dont il jouira ainsi de la terre 
jusqu’à parfaite décision du pays et ville de Québec, desquelles améliora- 
tions il ne pourra requérir aucun dédommagement, ni ne détériorera 
en rien, dans le cas que le Séminaire rentrat en possession; et faute 


+ 


* C'est ici le lieu de remarquer, pour éviter la confusion qui peut naitre 
de cet énoncé, que ces endroits spécifiés et cette maison de Samos, n’étaient 
pas originairement la maison de campagne de ces Messieurs, et ne pouvait 
létre avant leur acquisition en 1744. A l’encontre, il est établi que la mai- 
son de récréation de leurs éléves était la maison appelée Saint-Michel, dans 
le fief Saint-Michel. Les archives du Séminaire sont 14 pour prouver que, 
lors de l'incendie du Séminaire, en 1701, les élèves étaient en congé à la 
maison de Saint-Michel. Celle-ci fut remplacée par la maison Maizerets 
qui fut construite à cette fin sur la terre à Beauport acquise par le Sémi- 
naire, le 14 janvier 1705. Cette destination ainsi énoncée en 1762 ne parait 
guère conciliable avec les époques établies par les dates ci-dessus, et ne 
‘peut guère s’accorder avec l’interrégne de 1735 à 1744. Au surplus, la terre 
de Samos était donnée à bail, au moins depuis 1750 à 1757, et tenue par 


Jacques Berthiaume, fermier, suivant les comptes du Séminaire, & Reg. 
Prév., 15 déc. 1755, p. 57, vo. 


18 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


dexécution des conditions ci-dessus mentionnées, le présent contrat de 
vente sera nul a la fin du mois de juillet prochain.” 

Il est important pour l'identification subséquente du site de la 
maison de Samos de ne pas oublier que l’arpenteur Plamondon a fait — 
le plan vertical du carré des murs qui en restaient et de remarquer aussi 
que la pierre angulaire des fondements, tel que posée par l’évêque de 
Samos, contenait une plaque de plomb sur laquelle étaient gravées une 
mitre d’évéque et une inscription latine que nous allons retrouver ci- 
après. Ce plan formait partie de Vacte notarié et est paraphé comme 
tel par le notaire instrumentant, Mtre Panet. 

Vu la cession du pays par le traité de paix de 1763, M. Ainslie 
demeura propriétaire absolu, tel que stipulé, de la maison de Samos 
et du terrain acquis ainsi délimité; mais il s’en départit peu après, 
non cependant sans y avoir fait les améliorations notables qui lui avaient 
été imposées, et diverses autres à sa convenance, comme de défricher le 
sol pour le mettre en partie en état de culture, tout en ménageant la 
forêt de beaux bois qui s’y trouvait et garnissant habitation de meubles, 
d’ustensiles de ferme et de bétail pour en faire une résidence de cam- 
pagne complète. Alors, il lui donna le nom de Woodfield, bien appro- 
prié à l’étendue des: bois de forêt primitive qui le couvrait,—nom qu’il 
a gardé jusqu’à tout récemment, qu’il a pris celui de Saint-Patrick’s 
C'emetery, suivant sa destination actuelle de cimetière pour les Irlandais 
catholiques. 

Thomas Ainslie est le même qui a tenu un journal de Pinvasion 
des Américains en Canada de 1775-6, qui a été publié par la Société 
Littéraire et Historique de Québec dans ses annales (Transactions) de 
J’année 1905. Il était capitaine dans la milice anglaise durant le 
blocus de la ville. 

Thomas Ainslie fut le premier percepteur des douanes nommé dans 
la colonie, dont le bureau central était à Québec. La plaque funéraire 
de marbre incrustée dans le pignon ouest du presbytère de la basilique 
de Québec rappelle son nom et celui de Mary, son épouse, inhumée là, 
le 14 mars 1767, dans l’ancien cimetière catholique de l’église, dont les : 
protestants se servaient alors faute d’autre. 

Pendant qu’il était ainsi amélioré par Ainslie, Woodfield fut occupé 
par Vhonorable Thomas-Adam Mabane, écuier, un des juges de la 
Cour des Plaids-Communs de Québec, lequel en avait été mis en 
possession depuis quelque temps, soit comme locataire, soit en prévision 
de lui en passer titre. En effet, M. Ainslie lui en consentit la vente 
lc 4 septembre 1769 par acte devant M. J.-C. Panet, notaire, le désignant 
comme terre vulgairement appelée “ Woodfield” et tel que délimité par 
le même procès-verbal; lui vendant aussi la maison de pierre dessus 


r 


[CASGRAIN | L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 19 


construite et autres petits bâtimens en dépendant; “ensemble, tous les 
“ meubles, utensiles de ménage, d'agriculture, bestiaux, qui étaient 
“dans la dite maison et sur la dite terre, sans aucune réserve, lesquels 
“le dit juge Mabane reconnut avoir en sa possession, s’en déclarant 
“satisfait et dispensant de tout inventaire — disant le tout être à sa 
“connaissance pour en être en possession depuis longtemps.” Le prix 
stipulé est dit de 12,000 schellings ($2,400). Il est présumable que 
cette entrée en possession par le juge avait suivi d’assez près sa nomina- 
tion comme tel en 1764. 

Lors de l’invasion des Américains, leurs troupes s’emparèrent de 
Phabitation et s’en servirent comme hôpital pour les blessés et les inva- 


ADAM MABANE. 


lides. Ils causérent, ce qui va de soi, des déprédations et des dégâts 
à la maison ainsi qu'aux dépendances. Le Gouvernement, sur repré- 
sentation, indemnisa le propriétaire des pertes et dommages soufferts, 
ce qui lui permit de réparer l'édifice en entier et de lui donner un 
meilleur aspect. 

Durant invasion et ces réparations, le juge Mabane qui était 
rentré en ville, habita la maison rue St-Louis, ci-devant appartenant 
à M. de Ramsay, lieutenant de Roi. et habitée par lui à Québec. Elle 
fut ensuite appelée Kent House, pour avoir été occupée par le duc 
de Kent, lorsqu'il était de garnison à Québec. Le juge en fit Pacquisi- 
tion de M. Strachan, par contrat devant Mire I.-A. Panet, notaire, 


sec, I., 1906. 2 


20 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Ann 


en date du 27 octobre 1777; elle tomba ensuite dans sa succession et fut 
vendue par décret forcé sous le nom de Kent House. 

Ayant alors repris sa résidence à la campagne, il en étendit les 
limites en prenant à bail, de l’agrément du Séminaire, la terre avoisi- 
nante de Saint-Michel et autres adjacentes, qui avait été louées à un 
nommé William Miller, le 17 janvier 1780, suivant bail à longues années, 
devant d’Artigny, notaire; et moyennant cinquante portugaises (£100) 
Miller lui fit cession de ses droits en forme authentique devant le même 
notaire d’Artigny, le 3 mai 1780. 

Le prix de ce loyer paraissait nominal, une guinée par année, mais 
était compensé par diverses charges, telles que l’entretien et la con- 
servation des bois de haute futaie, la plantation d’arbres forestiers, d’or- 
nement et fruitiers, de manière à former un beau bocage et un bon 
verger, aussi, d'entretenir de taillis le défaut de la côte vers le fleuve, 
et les clôtures, et®, ete. 

Ces conditions remplies en conséquence convenaient et plaisaient 
aux deux parties comme utiles au fond autant qu’agréables en jouissance. 
C’est sous le juge Mabane que Vhabitation de Woodfield, s’accrut, 
croyons-nous, de divers embellissements et prit les proportions d’un 
spacieux quadrilatére, avec cour intérieure.! L’ensemble, joint à la 
beauté du site dominant sur le fleuve, en fit une des plus belles rési- 
dences auprés de la ville. Elle était fréquentée par le meilleur monde 
du temps. Le général Powell en était voisin; le gouverneur Haldimand 
la visitait; le général Riedesel en était le commensal, et divers autres 
personnages et amis du juge s’y plaisaient a le rencontrer. 

L’air pur de la forét apportait le parfum des bois, et les ombrages 
des longues allées rafraichissaient des ardeurs du soleil d’été quand 
on désirait s'y promener pour se délasser dans les chaudes journées de 
la belle saison. Tout conspirait pour en faire un délicieux séjour et 
une tranquille retraite pour un homme d'étude, tel qu'était le juge 
Mabane. Il l’habita pendant vingt-cinq ans. 

Cependant tout ne fut pas constamment rose dans cette belle 
demeure. Malgré sa probité, sa droiture et son caractère irréproch- 
able, Mabane eneourut la disgrace du gouverneur Carleton à cause des 
idées de saine justice qu’il cherchait à faire prévaloir envers la Couronne, 
mais avec fermeté, tant en faveur du peuple conquis qu’envers ses com- 
patriotes anglais. On lui enleva, sans lui en assigner les motifs, sa 
place de juge et celle de conseiller exécutif. Ses derniers jours furent 


1 La description donnée en 1782, sur saisie par le shérif de Québec 
comme “une maison dessus construite en pierre, à deux étages et autres 
“batimens joignant la dite maison et dans les environs d'icelle,” nous semble 
désigner le quadrilatère déjà complété par le juge Mabane. 


[CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 21 


tristes. Il mourut le 3 janvier 1792, à l’âge de 58 ans; il n’était 
pas marié. On attribua sa mort au froid qu'il prit dans une tempête 
~de neige en voulant se rendre à pied de sa demeure à la ville. Il perdit 
son chemin dans la poudrerie; on le trouva égaré, épuisé, transi de 
froid. Ramené chez lui, il prit le lit pour n’en plus se relever. 

La carrière de cet homme de bien n’est pas assez connue: on ne 
Jui a pas fait, de son temps, le nom et la réputation qu’il méritait comme 
citoyen utile et loyal sujet. 

L’abbé Bois nous a laissé une étudie remarquable et très judicieuse 
sur le juge Mabane, lequel, dit-il en la commençant, “offre un sujet 
“ intéressant et digne de piquer la curiosité du lecteur canadien. Comme 
“ plusieurs hommes de la période où il a vécu, M. Mabane a été jugé 
“ sévèrement. On ne lui a pas donné une place assez belle dans l’his- 
“ toire de notre colonie. Ajoutons qu’on ne lui a pas laissé assez grande 
“Ja part qu’il avait prise dans l’administration de la justice et dans la 
“composition des tribunaux, comme aussi dans les arrangements et les 
“arrétés du pouvoir à l’époque où il vécut en cette province.” 

Mabane, doué d’une intelligence peu commune, était un homme fort 
instruit. Né en Ecosse, il y fut reçu médecin et passa au Canada. En 
abandonnant la profession médicale, pour remplir à Québec la charge 
de juge qu’il n’avait aucunement convoitée, il devint un magistrat utile 
et respecté par son intégrité et son impartialité. D’un esprit droit, 
d’un jugement sain et d’un grand sens d’équité, il ne tarde pas, avec 
Vassistance de collègues français, à suppléer par l’étude et la pratique 
à son manque de connaissances légales au début. On peut voir néan- 
moins en parcourant les registres de la Cour des Plaids-Communs qu’il 
se familiarisa bientôt et suffisamment avec la routine des affaires, de 
manière à donner satisfaction dans une charge qu’il avait d’abord 
déclinée et n’avait acceptée que pour se rendre utile. 


Le fait qu’il fut ensuite choisi par le même gouverneur comme un 
des quatre membres du Comité nommé pour s’enquérir de l’état des 
archives du pays, en 1787, est une preuve de sa capacité et de son carac- 
tère bien établi, suffisante pour atténuer à ce point les préventions de 
Fautocrate Lord Dorchester. On voit par la correspondance de son suc- 
cesseur, le gouverneur Haldimand, que celui-ci fut loin d’approuver les 
injustices faites au juge Mabane et qu’il en fit des représentations au 
ministre en Angleterre, exprimant aussi la mortification qu’il avait 
ressentie par la révocation, sur de fausses données, de la commission de 
M. Mabane du grade de chirurgien de l’hôpital de la garnison de Qué- 
bec. (Cf. Haldimand Papers, Arch. Can., 1781, oct. 23,— 1782, oct. 
23;— 1783, sept. 8 (Cependant ce fut pour des raisons plutôt 
politiques que substantielles qu’on lui enleva ses offices de juge et de 


22 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


conseiller exécutif. Dans des circonstances difficiles et avec des opinions 
bien arrêtées et opposées à celles du gouverneur, il ne put s'entendre 
avec lui, et il subit, par la raison du plus faible, le sort du pot de terre 
contre le pot de fer. Il avait vécu sans grande ambition et sans étalage. 
Son caractère désintéressé n’était pas fait pour lenrichir. La privation 
de ses émoluments qui étaient assez considérables. le mit à la gêne et 
finit par l’enuetter. 

Il laissa une succession embarrassée. Sa sœur Isabella, qui vivait 
avec lui, et qui était sa seule parente et unique héritière, ne put l’ac- 
cepter que sous bénéfice d'inventaire. 

C’est en cette qualité de bénéficiaire qu’elle fut assignée pour dettes 
devant la Cour du Banc du Roi du district de Québec, à la poursuite 
de Alexander Davidson & John Lees, lesquels firent vendre par décret 
de cette cour les immeubles de la succession, entr’autres la maison de 
ville, rue St-Louis, dite Kent House, et la propriété Woodfield. Cette . 
dernière fut adjugée à Isabella Mabane elle-même, le 13 décembre 1792, 
pour le prix d’enchere de £700, et le shérif Sheppard lui en conféra 
le titre de 21 décembre 1794. 

Singulière coincidence, le Lord Evêque et premier prélat anglican de 
Québec, le très révérend Jacob Mountain, vint habiter la villa 
Samos de Mgr Dosquet, préparée pour lui à son arrivée d'Angleterre, 
en l’automne de 1793. Il prit à loyer cette belle résidence et loccupa 
depuis lors jusqu’à 1802. Ce personnage remarquable a laissé un nom 
respecté de toutes les classes de la société, sans égard aux nationalités. 
Les évêques catholiques et l’évêque anglican de Québec fraternisaient 
d'estime et de commerce d’amitie réciproque. Même l’ancien et véné- 
rable évêque Briand, quoique valétudinaire et retiré, lui fit un accueil 
bien cordial; et quand le Lord Bishop vint se présenter il lui donna 
l’accolade à la française, en lui faisant remarquer qu’il arrivait fort à 
propos pour mettre à l’ordre ses nouvelles ouailles. | 

Le 5 septembre 1805, Melle Mabane vendit par contrat devant Mtre 
Tétu, notaire, la villa Woodfield à Honorable Matthew Bell, compre- 
nant les 42 arpens en superficie et la maison en pierre à deux étages, 
ci-dessus mentionnés. 

M. Bell fut en son temps un personnage des plus en vue dans le 
pays. Grand industriel, fortuné, large et libéral, il devint populaire 
et jouit d’une réputation enviable. Né en 1768, à Berwick-on-Tweed, 
sur les confins de l’Ecosse, il passa au Canada étant tout jeune homme. 
Il s'établit à Trois-Rivières, où il devint par la suite le seul exploitant 
des forges de Saint-Maurice. En 1800, il fut élu député du comté de 
Saint-Maurice et le mandat lui fut renouveié jusqu’en 1814. Il siégea 
ensuite au Conseil Législatif depuis 1822 à 1838. 


[CASGRAIN ] L'HABITATION DE SAMOS 23 


Le rendement des forges, sous son habile direction, devint trés 
considérable. Les produits ne pouvaient suffire à la demande. Aussi 
M. Bell profitait de son opulence pour mener la vie à grandes guides. 
Il recevait à la “ Grande maison”! le monde aristocratique; les gou- 
verneurs venaient s’asseoir à sa table et avaient à son château leur 
appartement dit la Chambre du Gouverneur, somptueusement meublée. 

M. Bell était grand amateur de sport, et lors d’un voyage en Angle- 
terre, ayant été présenté au Roi George III, il recut de Sa Majesté une 
coupe destinée aux courses de Trois-Rivières, alors devenues en vogue 
et dues à l’imitiative de M. Bell. Il entretenait également une meute 
de chiens-courants, la première que l’on ait vue au Canada; son équipage 
de chasse était monté de chevaux de sang importés. C’est l’origine de 
la chasse à courre de Montréal, où elle a été transférée et qui descend 
du Tally-ho Club de Trois-Rivières. Un beau trait de ce sportman 
lui fait honneur. Le lendemain de chaque chasse, il envoyait indem- 
niser les cultivateurs des dégâts qu’elle avait pu causer sur son parcours et 
tout le monde était content. 

Pendant sa carriére M. Bell prit part aux principales entreprises 
commerciales et charges publiques de la province. Ainsi, en 1805, il 
était un des maîtres de la Maison de la Trinité à Québec; en 1818, un 
des fondateurs de la Banque de Québec; de même, en 1828, de l’Assu- 
rance de Québec contre le feu; il fut un des armateurs en 1831 du 
Royal William, bâti à Québec, et qui, deux ans après, fut le premier 
vaisseau-à-vapeur qui traversa l’Atlantique. Le beau modèle en bois 
de ce vaisseau est conservé dans les salles de la Société Littéraire et 
Historique de Québec. 

L’Honorable Matthew Bell est décédé à Trois-Rivières, le 24 juin 
1849, âgé de 81 ans. Son nom est encore populaire dans la ville. Il 
laissa plusieurs enfants qui se sont alliés aux meilleurs familles anglaises 
de Québec. 

En 1816, cette habitation de Woodfield qui avait été encore embel- 
Jie et agrandie de 26 arpens adjoignants, formant partie de la terre 
de Saint-Michel et provenant du Séminaire, fut vendue par V Hon. 
Matthew Bell le 21 septembre en deux lots par acte devant le notaire 
Planté, à William J. Sheppard, savoir: 1o. Samos ou Woodfield pour 
le prix de £4,160, ou $18,440, plus la rente seigneuriale de 50 centins 


*La Grande maison était un bel et très vaste édifice en pierre remontant 
a l’ancien régime; elle dut être construite vers 1740, époque vers laquelle 
les Forges furent réunies au domaine du Roi pour être exploitées en son nom. 
MM. Cressé et Martel, préposés à cette exploitation, y vivaient largement, si 
Yon en croit Franquet qui vante leur ‘aospitalité. Il observe que la régie 
était fort onéreuse au Roi. 


24 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


par arpent représentant un capital au denier vingt de $420; et le reste, 
les 26 arpens convertis en lots à bâtir (villa lots), pour le prix de 
£1,550 % 9, ou $6,201.55. | 

20. I] vendit le lot de grève attenant à la terre de Woodfield, au 
même Sheppard et à John Saxton Campbell, marchands associés, mais 
au profit de Sheppard seul en propriété, pour le prix de £1,450. 

Il est là-dessus facile d'établir la valeur d’alors de l’ensemble du 
domaine de Woodfield, qui ainsi apprécié, se monte à $30,860. 

M. Sheppard, successeur de M. Bell, acquit ensuite par acte devant 
St-George, notaire, du 13 août 1832, le terrain attenant à Woodfield 
au sud-ouest, environ 28 arpens en superficie. Il appartenait à George 
Simpson qui le tenait de John Fraser, par contrat du 25 décembre 1831, 
devant Mtre Ant.-A. Parant, notaire, lequel l’avait eu par concession 
du Séminaire du 17 du même mois, devant le même notaire. Ce der- 
nier lot, joint à la terre de Samos telle que vendue comme ci-dessus par 
le Séminaire, forme aujourd’hui la totalité du cimetière irlandais, 
Saint-Patrice, et est entré au cadastre officiel de Saint-Colomban sous 
le No. 205. 

Devenu Conseiller Législatif, l'Honorable William Sheppard con- 
tinua à faire des améliorations à Woodfield et à l’embellir. I] Vhabita 
jusqu'en 1842. La demeure fut entièrement detruite l’hiver suivant 
par un incendie, avec tout son précieux contenu, bibliothèque, musée, 
collection d’histoire naturelle, serre, etc. M. Sheppard cultivait les 
lettres et fut élu à plusieurs reprises président de la Société Littéraire 
et Historique de Québec, et si sa résidence, à l’extérieur, montrait 
homme de goût, bien plus à l’intérieur y voyait-on l’homme d'étude et 
de science. 

Pour recueillir des détails et des renseignements précis sur ce 
qu'était Woodfield quand le feu fit disparaître la villa, nous avons eu 
recours à son fils, M. Maxfield Sheppard, qui a eu l’obligeance de nous 
adresser la lettre suivante qui répond très bien à notre demande et à 
notre but. 

“96 Bellevue Avenue, 
Toronto, 21 Feb., 1900. 


 P. B. Casgrain Esq., 
Quebec, 
Dear Sir, 


“Tt affords me pleasure to give you such information as I can, 
respecting Woodfield in its olden days. A house was built there as 
a residence for the Bishop of Samos, but the sketch which you send 
me (le dessin de Hervy Smith) does not represent the house. It may 


[CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 25 


possibly be a representation of a cottage on the ground before the house 
was built, but I think it more probable that it was nearer to Wolfe Cove 
Hill. The Bishop’s house was a more pretentious edifice. It con- 
sisted of two stories and an attic with basement, six windows in each 
story, on the front, facing the river; four square cottages adjacent, 
two of which were connected with the house by covered ways, the other 
two opposite to them. As you wish to know the site of the house, 
I send you a rough plan of the property made from memory. The 
proportions are not maintained, for the length of the property is much 
greater. My father made several additions to the building, one of 
which was a large conservatory for flowers, the first, I believe, ever con- 
structed in the country. 

I do not show them, as they would not be interesting to you. When 
digging for the foundations of these, a leaden plate was discovered con- 
taining an inscription in Latin engraved thereon, headed with the 
Bishop’s mitre, commemorative of the erection of the building. I 
recollect reading it, but, unfortunately, did not make any note of the 
‘date. My father afterwards (but at what time, I do not remember), 
gave it to the Literary and Historical Society, of which he was president 
for many years. His remarks accompanying it were, I think, recorded 
in the Transactions of the Society. If you could look this up, you 
would probably find whether or not the house was in existence in 1759. 
The Society occupied rooms in the old Parliament Building, near 
Prescott Gate, which was burnt down. It is most probable that the 
plate then perished. This is a misfortune, for it was a matter of some 
little historical importance. I have no recollection of hearing about 
a four gun battery on the place, nor have I seen any remains of such 
a fortification; but I remember seeing a redoubt or two, I think — about 
30 feet square each, constructed of earth, in the wood at the opposite 
side of the highway. Was the battery a part of the French defences? 
and is it known whether it was near the cliff or further outward? 

It is somewhat singular that the place should have been occupied 
by another bishop, Dr. Mountain, the first bishop of Quebec, who lived 
there from 1793 to 1802. Subsequently, the Hon. Matthew Bell owned 
it and my father, the Hon. William Sheppard, bought from him. I 
was born in the house in 1820 and lived there till it was burnt down, 
about 1842 or 1843. My father had got together a library of 4,500 
books, among which there were no novels; my mother had made and 
classified a collection of insects, another of minerals and shells, and 
another containing dried specimens of all the indigenous flowers, plants 
and ferns — all went up in flames. Writing this recalls the happy 
days of my youth which I spent there. It was a beautiful place. 


26 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


When leaving it, I had feelings like those expressed by Bishop Moun- 
tain’s son, as follows: 


“O, must I leave thee, Woodfield? sweet retreat 
From the world’s busy strife delightful seat 
Of rural beauty, where with bounteous hand, 
Nature hath lent her charms to grace thy land. 


How can I part? How leave thee, charming place? 
How leave the beauties which adorn and grace 
Thy boundaries? thy rich fields, abundant food 

To cattle lending, and thy verdant wood, 

Thy firs, thy venerable oaks, thy shades, 

Thy purling rivulets, thy deep cascades 

Forming a pleasant contrast to the eye? 

Thy views, in which no other spot can vie? 


And, now, by a cruel fate, severed from thee, 
Wherever *tis my destiny to flee, 

Still, Pll remember thee, O Woodfield dear! 
And still on thee will drop a tender tear.” 


“Yours very truly, 


M. SHEPPARD.” 

“T return the sketch.” 

Cette plaque de plomb ainsi trouvée fut en effet présentée a la 
Société Littéraire et Historique de Québec, mais disparut en 1854, avec 
une partie des archives de la Société, dans l’incendie de l’ancien édifice 
du parlement au haut de la côte de LaMontagne, où la Société occupait 
des salles. 

Par la découverte de cette plaque, on a pu et l’on peut identifier 
le site exact de la maison de Samos, sans toutes fois admettre tout 
l’ensemble de la description qu’en fait M. Maxfield Sheppard. 

Suivant le plan à main levée ou croquis que ce monsieur nous a 
fait des lieux pour en donner un aperçu, et d’après divers anciens 
témoins oculaires d’aujourd’hui, la maison se trouvait située à environ 
une centaine de pieds de la cime du cap, et avec son jardin attenant, 
joignait au nord-est le ruisseau Belleborne. L'édifice entier formait 
un quadrilatère spacieux, ayant cour intérieure. La façade étendue 
dcnnant sur le fleuve, avec une belle pelouse au-devant, présentait aspect 
d'un beau manoir seigneurial. Le pont Bonvoisin sur le ruisseau Belle- 
borne le traversait juste au nord du jardin et environ à trois cents pieds 
de la maison. C’est par ce pont, défendu par un canon, que l’escouade 


[CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 27 


qui devançait le colonel Howe commenea l’attaque dirigée vers la bat- 
terie dite de Samos, sur laquelle nous aurons à revenir en référant 
ci-après aux poste et batterie de Saint-Michel. 

Qu'il suffise de dire pour terminer l’historique de la maison de 
Samos ou de Woodfield qu'après l’incendie de 1842, M. Sheppard rebâtit 
une nouvelle maison et la placa au centre de la terre de Samos et 
Vhabita jusqu’en 1847. Alors, MM. Thomas et James Gibb, marchands- 
associés et dans le haut négoce a Québec, en firent l’acquisition le 29 
juin 1847, par contrat devant Mtre Fages, notaire; et la famille Gibb 
la vendit aux R.-R. P.-P. Rédemptoristes de Québec, pour en faire un 
cimetière à l’usage des Irlandais catholiques de l’église Saint-Patrice de 
Québec, suivant deux contrats de vente en date du 2? décembre 1877, 
passés devant Mtre Samuel J. Glackmeyer, notaire. Le prix total 
stipulé fut de $20,000. Notons que la seconde maison rebâtie avait 
aussi été détruite par le feu pendant que les Messieurs Gibb l’occupaient. 


* * * * * * * * 


Mais où trouver sur les lieux le site où la batterie dite de Samos était 
montée ? 

Nous apprenons de diverses sources, entre-autres de la Relation du 
Siege de Québec, que le 19 juillet 1759, Montcalm fit ériger une bat- 
terie à cet endroit qu’on appela la batlerie de Samos. Elle était montée 
de quatre pièces de 18 et d’un mortier ou obusier. Il placa aussi 
plusieurs postes sur la crête des hauteurs depuis l’Anse-des-Mères jus- 
qu'au Cap-Rouge, afin de les défendre et observer l’ennemi s’il tentait 
une descente de ce côté. Les postes à Samos et à Saint-Michel étaient 
distincts quoique peu éloignés l’un de l’autre. Suivant un état de 
Vaudreuil, par sa lettre à Bougainville du 5 septembre 1759, la garnison 
de chacun de ces postes aurait été comme suit en effectif: 


150 Hommes à l’Anse-des-Mères et celle du Foulon sous Vergor; 

30 à Samos, et 

50 à Saint-Michel, sous les ordres de Duglas, cap”. du 2ème ba- 
taillon du Languedoc ; 

50 à Sillery sous le chevalier de Remigny, cap”. de LaSarre, et 

200 au Cap-Rouge, sous de Beaubassin.—Doughty, Siege of Q., 
IV., p. 96, lettre reproduite. 


Il est présumable que les 30 hommes postés à Samos, de même 
que les 50 postés à Saint-Michel n’ont pas manqué d'occuper comme 
quartiers chacune des maisons ainsi nommées; au surplus, elles étaient 
toutes deux bâties en pierre, hautes de deux étages, en sorte qu’elles 


DU CANADA 


SOCIETE ROYALE 


28 


WYHVYUZY 30 SNIvVId 


ooat 


SOWVS 39 3410 J31H1L1V4 


re yuonges na asNy 


Wy, 
4 


LNOWHOUVN, 


at 
32Nn04 nv çaaid 009 3113493 


NC 
se 


009 


39Nvu9 


N 


N39N34S. 


Suan 
sisos 


|] (paper 


Re T 


La 


ALI 


| £ 


4tny s@gna 
AVMMOW 


NOT ID souws 2p Lili) 


te. dod sr LuLacws 
VaNIIWAS MOI 
os 


21Ww311vV9 


NOWUI3H 


BUIVNIWSS 
< ANOW 


TSHOIW aS 
aq ayuat 


no 4314 


auntie 


&: 


361719) 


3q Siunanoiss 


ABB IIIS 


[CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 29 


offraient d’elles-mémes non-seulement un abri tout fait, mais encore 
une défense retranchée, comme aussi des redoutes fortes et avantageuses. 
La maison de Saint-Michel en donna la preuve par le colonel Howe qui, 
avec son infanterie légère, l’ayant pu prendre sans encombre, y installa 
aussitôt une bonne garde, laquelle repoussa l'attaque d’un détachement 
du corps de 900 hommes de Bougainville que celui-ci envoya peu après 
pour la reprendre. 

Afin d'arriver à une solution historique revenons maintenant au 
poste et à la maison de Saint-Michel, dans le fief Saint-Michel. Ce 
fief fut originairement concédé à M. de Tilly par la Compagnie de la 
Nouvelle-France, le 6 avril 1660, représenté par son délégué Cheffault, 
qui en était un des membres les plus importants. Son étendue est 
de 160 arpens en superficie, ainsi que l’intendant Talon l’a déterminé 
par un arrêté du 2 juillet 1668. Le Séminaire en fit l’acquisition de 
M. Charles le Gardeur de Tilly et Dame Geneviève J'uchereau, son 
épouse, suivant contrat passé devant le notaire Becquet, le 26 avril 
1678. Ce fief, aussi appelé terre de Saint-Michel, est borné, suivant 
les tenants et aboutissants en 1759, au nord-ouest par la ligne droite 
qui le separe encore de la seigneurie de Sillery, et au nord-est par le 
trait-carré des terres qui sépare le coteau Sainte-Geneviève des terres 
de la Grande-Allée, au sud-est par les terres du Séminaire, au sud-ouest 
au fleuve Saint-Laurent. La largeur de la terre aurait été, en 1751, 
de huit arpens et un quart, suivant que M. Jacreau a pu alors l’établir, 
étant procureur du Séminaire. En descendant vers la cime du cap, elle 
forme en la suivant une pointe qui joint la ligne de Sillery. D’après 
une mesurage de M. Jacreau, sur cette pointe, à 5 arpens, 2 perc. 16 p, 
eu remontant de la cime du cap et delà en trait-carré courant est de 
cette ligne, 3 arp. 7 perc. 16 pds, on arrive là où se trouvait, près de la 
cime du cap, la maison de la terre dite de Saint-Michel, laquelle n’était pas 
ordinairement donnée à ferme. Du moins, de 1750 à 1757, le nommé 
Nicolas Magny avait été placé comme gardien de la maison et du verger 
et recevait pour ce service 100 livres par année. 

Cette maison est indiquée comme bâtie en cet endroit sur un plan 
à main levée par M. Jacreau, vers 1751, qu’on peut voir aux archives 
du Séminaire et elle montre son carré avec une aile y attenante. Elle 
existait encore en 1874 lors de la confection du plan cadastral de Saint- 
Colomban et y est marquée au même endroit. Mais elle a été peu de 
temps après complétement détruite par un incendie; il n’en reste plus 
pour l'indiquer que les vestiges du carré des murs et le creux de la cave. 

En la comparant au dessin de la batterie dite de Sillery que nous 
a laissé Hervy Smith, l’aide-de-camp du général Wolfe, d’après la grande 
gravure historique du débarquement de l’armée anglaise, due au burin 


30 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


PIL Of 2 92% 
Lora} ECS LE «spp <-:e sely> CET Re 


D |A 


CRAN 


ms 
- 
: Sec 1G jriecta 6 froceces 
iz Fa 2 4 
i à Ÿ 3 
; je 
| $ EE 
i iy haus 

Saat ets te SO PAB Oe ee Ÿ ? Ÿ 

‘ BS Tour cope Lee flan geet es 

= 5 a avec Ca pmonudle Lara Lifes 
de HOI Goneblee 


‘ L A sn le Sy ree 
À Fnac Veermondor, ar. 


i Ofer... > ç - Ofes.. acl ; enleur-- zcdinee el areager’ 
belle ce a6 jects Jar 0 Écograen, a 
Grelec, LD A906, 
e 


Cats Ce Ji e1egen al. 
Cane 
Gite ded preg de la ratio Le Tee 


[CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 31 


de l’artiste Canot, on constate que cette maison avec son aile concorde 
avec celle de Saint-Michel sur les lieux en 1759, telle que dessinée par 
Smyth, tandis que si on la compare avec celle de Samos d’aprés le plan 
de Plamondon, on ne peut trouver comment placer Vaile ni la batterie. 

A un point de vue statégique, on ne saurait non plus monter effi- 
cacement une batterie à la maison de Samos, car elle se trouverait 
masquée des deux côtés pour enfiler le fleuve et se bornerait à un feu 
de face plongeant et un peu trop loin de la cime du cap et du rivage. 
Comme telle, elle était incapable de battre l’Anse-du-Foulon et celle 
ces Mères, tandis qu’en la plaçant au bout de la pointe de la terre de 
Saint-Michel, 4 la maison indiquée par M. Jacreau, elle domine et 
commande de là le fleuve de tous côtés. 

De plus, on peut s’en rapporter à la relation de Lévis, qui, appelé 
au secours après la défaite et la mort de Montcalm, se fit rendre compte 
exact des causes de sa défaite. Quand il parle de l’attaque manquée 
de Bougainville pour reprendre dans la matinée le poste de la batterie 
dite de Samos et déloger le colonel Howe qui, avec son infanterie légère, 
s’en était emparé dès le point du jour, il indique avec certitude la maison 
Saint-Michel qu’il connaissait comme telle, et dans laquelle l’infanterie 
de Howe se tenait, dit il, retranchée. Le chevalier Johnstone et Hervy 
Smith s'accordent avec Lévis pour placer cette batterie près de Sillery 
et Smith la nomme ainsi. 

Pour en arriver au plus tôt à la prise de cette batterie et ce qui 
en fut la suite, nous ne nous arrêterons pas à mentionner la surprise 
du poste de Vergor qui la précéda; elle est trop connue. Il suffit de 
dire que quelques grenadiers et trois compagnies de l’infanterie légère 
commandés par le colonel Howe s’en était vitement emparés. Ceux-ci 
se divisèrent ensuite, partie dans les bois à gauche pour protéger ce 
flanc, et partie à droite pour balayer le cime du cap où se réfugiaient 
les fuyards, tout en faisant feu sur les troupes du débarquement au 
bas. Aussitôt après que le premier convoi des troupes de Wolfe fut 
monté, en profitant de la côte devenue libre, et qu’il se vit établi sur 
les Hauteurs, son premier soin, après s'être formé en ligne en face du 
grand chemin et le dos au fleuve, fut d'envoyer attaquer la batterie qui, 
depuis le point du jour molestait sa descente, tirant sur ses bateaux et 
son escadre, particulièrement sur le dernier convoi de débarquement. 
La batterie se trouvait à environ un mille et demi de parcours de là en pré- 
nant le grand chemin et à la moitié de cette distance ou 1500 verges 
à vol d'oiseau. 

Le brigadier-général Murray, avec le 58ème régiment et l’infanterie 
légère de Howe, et deux déserteurs pour guides, furent immédiatement 
dépêchés pour la cerner. Howe prit le devant et Murray le suivit jus- 


32 SOCIÉTÉ ROYALE DU CANADA 


qu’à la lisière du bois. Là il posta le 58ème en travers du chemin qui 
menait à la batterie. Dans ce même temps, Wolfe s'étant aperçu que 
les troupes françaises se formaient en nombre sur la rangée des buttes 
à Neveu entre lui et la ville, rappela Murray qui revint aussitôt. Mais 
le même officier d'ordonnance n’ayant pu rejoindre à temps le colonel 
Howe, pour lui remettre le même ordre, poussa en avant, escorté de 
auelques-une des grenadiers, et ayant pris un chemin de raccourci, ils 
arrivèrent au point Bonvoisin, sur le ruisseau Belleborne. Là ils essuyè- 
rent une décharge d’un canon qui y était monté et qui fut suivie de 
quelques fusillades des hommes du poste, lesquels sur riposte vigoureuse 
disparurent bientôt dans l’épaisseur des bois environnants. L’escouade 
passa outre et parvint avant Howe à la batterie qui se trouvait à la 
maison Saint-Michel. Celui-ci arriva juste à point pour la trouver 
abandonnée et les canons encloués. Alors il retourna rejoindre Wolfe, 
qui, sur son rapport, renvoya une garnison de 172 des mêmes hommes 
pour s’y retrancher et s’y maintenir. 

Où était Bougainville alors? Avait-il repassé à gauche de la 
rivière du Cap Rouge? Le 13 au matin, de six À sept heures, la marée 
était toute basse, le gué bon, et il y avait en outre à son embouchure un 
bac qui traversait au moyen d’un câble. Le nommé Galarneau tenait le 
passage. (Prévosté, 27-juin 1758, fol. 110.) 

On constate que le ? septembre, on s’adresse à Bougainville comme 
commandant à Sillery; le 8, au Cap-Rouge, puis à Saint-Michel; le 
9, il est à Saint-Augustin, n'ayant fait ce jour-là aucun mouvement à 
cause du mauvais temps; de même le 10, imitant en cela l’ennemi. 
Son camp est au Cap-Rouge, et il y est le 11, où Remigny lui écrit. 
A 5 heures du soir, Montcalm le eroit là par la lettre qu’il lui envoie. 
Le 12, dans la matinée, il surveille les vaisseaux avec l’aide. de le 
Rochebeaucourt et 130 hommes de sa cavalerie qui suivent la marée 
montante qui va à midi. Ce même jour, Cadet, qui y a le plus 
grand intérêt, s'adresse à lui comme étant au Cap-Rouge. Suivant 
l’auteur de l’Evénement de la Guerre, p. 65, Bougainville n’était 
éloigné que de deux lieues du Foulon quand il apprit, à ce qu'il dit, 
la dispersion du poste de Vergor et la montée de Wolfe avec son armée 
déjà rangée en bataille devant la ville. Au reste, comme dès le point 
du jour on a entendu, des côtes de Beauport, la batterie de Samos, 
il est à croire que Bougainville a dû Ventendre aussi, même sil se 
trouvait au delà du Cap-Rouge. 

Suivant le Journal abrégé d'un aide-de-camp, Bougainville ne fut 
averti que par les fuyards des postes culbutés. La fusillade de ces 
postes avait cependant déjà averti la ville et l’armée. Vaudreuil écrit 
du camp à Bougainville à six heures et trôis-quarts du matin pour 


[CASGRAIN ] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 33 


Pavertir. Lévis qui s’est trouvé en relation immédiate avec Bourgain- 
ville, dit que celui-ci fut informé tard le matin, ce qui est assez vague 
quant à l’heure. 

Prenons ce que Lévis en a écrit, Journal des Campagnes, p. 210. 

“M. de Bougainville n’ayant été averti que tard du débarquement 
“des ennemis, commença a se mettre en mouvement avec environ 900 
“hommes seulement, marcha vers la maison Saint-Michel, qu’il trouva 
“occupée. Il la fit attaquer par les volontaires de Duprat, mais sans 
“ succès, les ennemis y étant bien établis. Mais ayant appris à une 
“ certaine distance de l’armée ennemie que la nôtre avait été battue, 
“il se replia sur la vieille Lorette et envoya demander à M. le marquis 
“de Vaudreuil de nouveaux ordres.” 

“Nous perdimes dans cette attaque plusieurs volontaires. Le sieur 
“de Brignolet, lieutenant au régiment de la Sarre y fut tué, et le sieur 
“de Rouvray, aussi lieutenant au même régiment, y fut grièvement blessé 
“de deux coups de fusil. Cette attaque fut fort vive et nos troupes 
“y montrèrent beaucoup de valeur. M. de Bougainville n’ayant pu 
“se rendre maitre de ce poste, prit le parti de le faire masquer.” 

Suivant la version du chevalier Johnstone, aussi bon expert qu écri- 
vain militaire, Bougainville, chargé d’empécher le descente de Woife 
au-dessug de la ville, aurait suivi la flotte jusqu’à la Pointe-aux-Trembles, 
et au retour, aurait été averti sur les sept à huit heures du matin que 
celui-ci était monté sur les Hauteurs et ses troupes déjà rangées en 
bataille devant la ville. Il se mit en toute hâte à marcher sur lui 
avec ce qu'il avait de troupes en deca de la rivière du Cap-Rouge, 
environ 900 hommes, en suivant le chemin des hauteurs et pour aller 
rejoindre Montcalm. Il s'arrêta en route, ayant trouvé devant lui 
une maison (Saint-Michel) barricadée et défendue par une forte garni- 
son; il espérait la faire prisonniére. Le Noir, capitaine du régiment 
de la Sarre, alla l’attaquer de front avec la compagnie des volontaires 
de Duprat. En dépit de ses efforts et de sa charge impétueuse, il dut 
reculer, ayant perdu plus de la moitié de sa compagnie et reçu lui- 
méme deux blessures. Mais Bougainville étant résolu 4 reprendre ce 
retranchement pour ne pas le laisser derrière lui, attendit l’arrivée de 
deux petites piéces du Cap-Rouge pour le forcer; or, par inadvertance, 
les boulets, dit-on, auraient été oubliés là. Quand Bougainville revint 
ainsi à la charge, ce n’était pas les boulets qui manquaient, mais les 
gargousses qui ne faisaient pas: elles n'étaient pas du bon calibre. 
Force fut d'abandonner l’assaut.' 


*On aurait pu dire que tout conspirait contre Montcalm qui venait 
d'écrire à Bougainville l’avant-veille, 11 septembre: ‘“Jacau (celui-ci était 
Jacot Fiedmont, capitaine d'artillerie) croit s'être trompé en vous envoyant 


34 SOCIÉTÉ ROYALE DU CANADA 


Si Von en croit le Journal Abrégé d'un A. de C., les deux officiers, 
qui commandaient en cette occasion les cent volontaires, furent aban- 
données par la plus grande partie de leur détachement, et restés avec 
dix-huit soldats, furent écharpés et faits prisonniers. 

Après cet échec, Bougainville tenta de rejoindre le champ de bataille, 
mais il arriva trop tard, la journée était perdue. Townshend se retour- 
na contre lui avec deux pièces de canon et le força de se replier sur 
Lorette. La même mésaventure arriva à Townshend pour ses boulets. 
Ils étaient trop petits et il fallut pointer haut les canons. Que de 
légers incidents peuvent affecter le sort d’une bataille! 

Le temps que Napoléon perdit pour s'emparer d’une habitation 
fortifiée permit à Wellington de se reçonnaître et à Blucher d’arriver à 
son secours, l’après-midi de Waterloo. 

Pourtant les dispositions de Montcalm pour repousser toute descente 
de Wolfe au-dessus de Québec avaient été bien prises et étaient suffi- 
santes ; car ses postes étaient tous biens garnis et stratégiquement dis- 
posés aux bons endroits et aussi pour former une chaîne complète, 
comme on l’a vu ci-dessus. Depuis, le 6 septembre il écrit à Bourgain- 
ville, Voilà encore 400 grenadiers que je passe à la batterie de Sames 
“à votre disposition.” Malheureusement, Vaudreuil remplace ce même 
jour par Vergor le brave de St-Martin qui tenait la garde de l’Anse-des- 
Mères et celle du Foulon avec 100 hommes. En tout, il y avait alors 
de Québec au Cap-Rouge, 500 hommes, ‘et environ 1,500 autres surveil- 
lant au-dessus. En sus, Montcalm avait établi le même jour le 
Guienne pour stationner en réserve sur le grand chemin derrière Saint- 
Michel et Sillery, afin d’être à porté de secourir la droite et la gauche au 
besoin. 

Vaudreuil intervint encore pour faire rentrer le Guienne le lende- 
main “dans la crainte, dit-il, qu’étant un corps pesant, il écraserait en 
“ poursuivant les marches de Bougainville; et quant à le laisser à lAnse- 
“ des-Mères, cela ne se peut, continue-t-il, car il n’y a pas de bois ” (pour 
se cacher). Le 12, Vaudreuil donne le contre-ordre de laisser le 
Guienne aller se poster dès le matin sur les Hauteurs. “Nous y ver- 
rons demain,” dit-il. Ce demain assura le triomphe de Wolfe. 

Et Vergor qui, avec une douzaine d'hommes et des batons et des 
pierres auraient pu rejeter au bas du cap n’importe quels assaillants, 
(Johnstone, Hades, p. 10) dormait! 


“desu PATSOUSSES ME. craint que celles reçues ne soient pas de calibre.” 
Cf. Doughty, Siege of Q., Vol. IV, p. 125, lettre reproduite. On ne peut s’empé- 
cher de conjecturer ce qu’une forte diversion de ce côté, en queue de Wolfe, 
aurait pu amener de changement dans le résultat de la bataille qui, moins 
d'une heure après allait être livrée. 


[CASGRAIN] L’HABITATION DE SAMOS 35 


Alors que Wolfe, pressé par l’amiral décidé a partir, venait de pro- 
mettre au Conseil de guerre à bord du Sutherland que, du moment 
qu'on tirerait quelques coups de fusil sur ses soldats à l’assaut, il 
abandonnerait sa tentative! ! 

On voit qu'il ne s’en fallait que d'un cheveu en cette occasion, 
comme en plusieurs autres faciles à signaler, pour faire échouer toute 
la campagne de cette année contre le Canada. Pour nous, Cana- 
diens, descendants des glorieux vaincus, qui nous inclinons devant les 
décrets de la toute puissance du Dieu des armées qui tient en ses mains 
les destinées des nations, nous n’avons qu'à remercier sa divine Pro- 
vidence, qui, par des moyens inapercus aiors, nous a fait passer d’une 
position désespérée, et pour notre plus grand bien, sous la domination 
anglaise, et nous a finalement assuré une noble liberté. Elle nous a 
sauvés par là-même des désastres et des malheurs qui ont accablé et 
continuent d’accabler la France depuis au-delà d’un siècle. 


Sec. I., 1906. 3 


Secrion I., 1906. [ 37 ] Menorrges $. R, C. 


II.—Nos trois cloches—Poéeme rustique. 
Par M. PAMPHILE LE May. 


(Lu le 22 mai 1906.) 


Dans les brumes d’antan, les jours de mon enfance 
Ont sombré, mais parfois je m’arrête, et je pense 
Au calme bienfaisant qui les enveloppait. 
Je ne connaissais rien, et rien ne m’occupait, 
Hormis les chants d’un bois, les sables d’une grève, 
Les parfums d’une fleur. Si quelquefois un rêve 
Essayait d'ouvrir Vaile et de m’emporter loin, 
Emu, je regardais, dans les frissons du foin, 
Au ruisseau qui les baigne, au bois qui les abrite, 
Les boutons d’or, l’iris, le thym, la marguerite, 
Et je disais au rêve ailé: 

“ Je suis aussi 
Une humble fleur des champs, laisse-moi vivre ici.” 


En ces jours reculés, dans nos paroisses riches, 

Au milieu des sillons, du pacage et des friches, 
Au-dessus des foréts méme, déja montaient 

Bien des clochers bénis où nos espoirs tintaient. 
La cloche, en sa lanterne, était fort solitaire. 

Elle aimait à chanter. Rien ne la faisait taire, 
Ni les neiges de mars, ni les ardeurs de juin. 
Parfois ses longs sanglots nous disaient un chagrin, 
Elle sonnaït, parfois, des couplets de jeunesse. 
Nous aimions à l’entendre. Il faut que l’on connaisse, 
Quand monte vers le ciel un sonore tinton, 

Si la joie ou le deuil entrent dans le canton; 

Si quelque nouveau-né recoit l’eau du baptême, 

Ou si l’un d’entre nous a dit l’adieu suprême. 

Elle prenait aussi, dans les jours pluvieux, 

Le timbre nasillard d’une chanson de vieux ; 
C’était lorsqu’en hiver la pluie, après le givre, 
Gelait comme des pleurs sur ses lèvres de cuivre. 


38 


SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Depuis un an peut-étre une rumeur volait, 

Mourant et renaissant comme un cri de tolet 

Quand la rame déchire, en son rythme sévère, 

Le sein des flots. Chez nous, un bruit qui persévère 
Prend toujours la couleur de quelque vérité. 

Or, plusieurs affirmaient avec autorité 

Que le curé lui:même, une âme un peu lyrique, 
Verrait avec plaisir notre vieille fabrique 

Donner l’exemple, agir, piquer de l’aiguillon, 

Et monter au clocher le premier carillon. 


On parlait de cela tout bas, tout haut, ensemble... 

“Un carillon, c’est beau sans doute, mais il semble 

Que Dieu goûterait mieux l’accord de nos esprits, 

C’est moins coûteux, bien stir, et c’est d’un plus grand prix. 
Le plaisir agitait ’ame douce et mystique 

Qui voit dans chaque temple un céleste portique, 

Mais un amer dépit troublait le sermonneur 

Qui prétend qu’on perd tout quand ion donne au Seigneur. 


Le voile fut levé tout a fait. Un dimanche, 

Avec un geste altier qui déploya la manche 

De son large surplis éclatant de blancheur ; 

De la chaire où sa voix avertit le pécheur, 
Stigmatise le tiède et console le juste, 

Le curé déclara que Dieu, le Maitre Auguste, 
Pouvait être loué par les sons de l’airain, 

Comme il lest par la voix du peuple souverain; 
Qu'il fallait aujourd’hui, sans craindre les reproches, 
Mettre, dans le clocher vaillant, trois belles cloches 
Qui dfraient nos douleurs, nos plaisirs, notre amour, 
Et pleureraient sur nous à notre dernier jour. 


I] se fit tout à coup, sous la voûte, un murmure 

Pareil au bruit du vent dans l’épaisse ramure, 

Et l'auditoire entier s’agita dans les “banes. 

Plus de doute, les mots tombaient très clairs, très francs. 
Un nouveau marguillier, notre voisin Tancrède, 

Un dissident par goût, prit l’air dur, le ton raide 

Qu'il prenait au conseil dans nos fréquents débats ; 

Et saint Louis, dit-on, —je ne l’affirme pas— 

Le bon roi saint Louis, patron de la paroisse, 

Dans son cadre doré laissa voir de l’angoisse. 


[LE MAY] NOS TROIS CLOGHES.—POEME RUSTIQUE 


Le trouble ne dura qu’un moment. Par degré 
Descendit de nouveau le silence sacré. 
Peut-être que chacun se faisait la promesse 
De dire sa pensée, au sortir de la messe. 
Mais le curé, toujours charitable et plaisant, 
Ajouta quelques mots, et ce fut suffisant. 
Comme sur une source, au champ, l’on voit les bêtes 
Pencher leurs fronts, ainsi s’inclinèrent les têtes 
Un peu dures, parfois, de ses bons paroissiens. 
I] avait dit ceci: 

Jésus aima les siens, 
Et c’est sa charité qu’en vos âmes je sème. 


Le beau, comme le bien, mène au Dieu qui vous aime. 


Embellissez le temple et Dieu vous bénira ; 
Faites chanter le bronze... et le curé paiera. 


ET: 


Voici lautomne. Il est comme un vieillard agile 
Qui descend à grands pas de nos coteaux d’argile, 
Avec sur son épaule une gerbe de blé. 

I] est comme un ruisseau qui va, souvent troublé 
Par le rameau qui tombe ou l’agneau qui s’abreuve, 
Se jeter triomphant dans le sein du grand fleuve. 
C’est le temps des labours, c’est le temps des guérets, 
L’éteule a voilé d’or plus d’un clos, les forêts 

Ont dénoué déja leurs discrétes ceintures. 

Dans les champs moissonnés que nos longues clotures 
Enlacent, semble-t-il, comme un traître réseau, 

Le travailleur se hate. Au logis, le fuseau, 

Devant une fenétre ouverte, tourne et gronde. 


Tancrède labourait. Une lumière blonde 

Noyait l’herbe. On eut dit des reflets printaniers. 
La terre allait remplir de nouveau les greniers, 
Et la paix descendrait dans toutes les demeures. 
Tancrède aurait voulu que le jour eut plus d’heures. 
Il savait tenir ferme et droit un mancheron. 
Quelquefois cependant il lâchait un juron, 

Et Péclair de son âme allumait sa paupière; 
C’était lorsque le soc effleurait une pierre, 

Et faisait quelque peu dévier le sillon... 

Il était un artiste en labour, ce brouillon. 


39 


40 


SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Jeannette le suivait à sa besogne rude. 
L’école, pensait-il, en ferait une prude... 
Puis, elle avait dix ans, savait lire et compter. 
Et les enfants, au reste, il faut bien les dompter, 
Si Pon veut que plus tard, en face de l’ouvrage, 
En face de Pépreuve, ils aient quelque courage. 
Tancréde était compris. La pauvrette croyait 
Quwelle devait souffrir pendant que lon choyait 
Sa sœur plus belle. Aussi, jamais une réplique, 
Jamais! 

Elle “ touchait,” ce jour-là. Je m’explique. 
Mais vous savez encor, fiers enfants de nos bourgs, 
Ce que c’est que “ toucher ” dans le temps des labours. 
Tête au vent et pieds nus, elle tenait les guides 
Et fouettait de sa hart le dos des bœufs placides ; 
Elle allongeait le pas, trottinait de bon cceur, 
Pour suivre la charrue et le vieux laboureur. 
La poussière souillait ses petites mains blanches. 
Elle comptait toujours, rendue au bout des planches, 
Dans la vaste prairie un sillon noir de plus, 
Un rayon vert de moins. Mais, soucis superflus, 
La tâche d'aujourd'hui ne peut être achevée 
Que bien tard. Il faudra toute la relevée. 


Tancréde sentait bien que son front se mouillait. 
Tl se dressait souvent, et son regard fouillait 

Les grêles peupliers qui cachaient mal l’église, 

Et ses clochers plus hauts que leur ramure grise. 
Ce jour-là, bien des gens, endimanchés, ravis, 
Etaient venus s'asseoir dans l’ombre du parvis. 

Or, dès la matinée, à la lueur des cierges, 

Sous leurs manteaux fleuris, dans leurs robes de vierges, 
Les cloches, toutes trois, pareilles à trois sœurs, 
Avaient eu le baptême. A Dieu, dans les hauteurs, 
Elles pouvaient parler car leur voix était pure. 
Marraines et parrains, très fiers, avec mesure 
Avaient mis leurs écus dans le plateau d'argent. 


Tancrède, marguillier nouveau, se rengorgeant, 
Etait allé s'asseoir aussi, dans tout son lustre, 
Sur un siège du chœur, au milieu du balustre; 
Mais il avait ensuite enlevé le gilet, 

Endossé la bougrine et repris le boulet. 

Il disait maintenant à son enfant docile: 


[LE MAY] NOS TROIS CLOCHES.—POEME RUSTIQUE 


“ Les cloches sonnent tard... C’est donc bien difficile 
De les pendre là-haut à leur solide essieu... 

Tiens! j’entends quelque chose enfin! Ecoute un peu. 
Ecoute, ma Jeannette, oui, voila que ça sonne!... 

Tu ris, petite, et moi, c’est drôle, je frissonne. 


Jeannette souriait. I] ôta son chapeau, 
Et, s’essuyant le front, il murmura: 
“ C’est beau! 


IT: 


A mon tour, ce soir-la, par la sente des chaumes 
J’amenais le troupeau. Je crus que dans leurs dômes 
Les bois berçaient des chants nouveaux. C’étaient des sons 
Mieux cadencés encor que nos airs de chansons. 

Le dirai-je? Jamais, dans nos rustres domaines, 
N’avaient ainsi clamé l’Angélus. Quel émoi 

Fit alors tressaillir mon âme! Devant moi 

Les génisses, les bœufs, qui marchaient à la file, 
N’avaient plus maintenant leur allure tranquille, 
Mais semblaient délirer de plaisir. Leurs fronts roux 
S’élevaient tour à tour en des mouvements fous 

Que scandaient à la fois leurs orgueilleuses cornes. 


Une fermière, au loin, près des étables mornes, 
Appelait son troupeau. L’appel était pressant, 
Un peu rude tantôt et tantôt caressant, 
Mais bétail et berger ne voulaient pas entendre, 
Car c’était fête au champ. 

Alors je vis s'étendre 
Des vols capricieux sur les grands bois voisins. 
Les oiseaux me semblaient grisés par les raisins, 
Et le soleil couchant, qui s’échappa des brumes, 
Fit jaillir des rayons de leurs mouvantes plumes. 


Et le dirai-je aussi? Je vis, en même temps, 
Voltiger sur les prés, comme aux jours du printemps. 
Des papillons poudrés d’or et des libellules. 

Je vis des grillons roirs qui fuyaient leurs cellules, 
Et des criquets gaillards qui chantaient l’oraison, 
Comme ils font en été, pendant la fenaison. 


41 


42 


SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Et tout près, dans le champ que labourait Tancréde, 
Les bœufs ne marchaient plus. De leur narine tiède 
Ils soufflaient doucement une tiède vapeur. 

Le front bas sous le joug, les traits ballants, sans peur 
De la hart qui tombait sur leur croupe indolente, 
Alors qu’ils tiraient mal ou de façon trop lente, 

Ils paraissaient dormir ou rêver. Puis, debout 
Contre le clos de cèdre, et, regardant partout, 
Anxieux, agité, comme un homme qui cherche, 
Tancréde! Le soleil scintilla sur la perche 

Où s’appuyait son bras. Et je l’ai vu, le vieux, 
Sourire à la féerie en s’essuyant les yeux. 


Et pendant ce temps-là, dans le labour, tout proche, 
L'enfant s’était couchée, un peu lasse. Une roche 
Que la charrue avait effleurée en passant 

Lui servait d'oreiller. Un trèfle encor naissant 

Se cachait sous ses pieds frileux. Des chicorées 
Penchaient leurs fleurs d’azur sur ses boucles dorées. 
Sous sa tête mutine et presque belle alors, 

Elle avait replié ses bras. Et, sans remords, 

Un ange d’un baiser avait clos sa prunelle. 

C’était Poiseau qui dort la tête sous son aile, 
Fatigué de voler. Dans cet instant de paix 

Elle rêvait, l’enfant, à ses bœufs sous le faix, 

A ce sol éventré par de longues blessures, 

A ce vieux laboureur tenant, de ses mains sûres, 

Et tant qu’il fera jour, les mancherons de bois, 

Et tout lui semblait noir, lamentable, sans voix. 


Mais alors tout à coup, dans le deuil de la terre, 
Elle voit la prairie encore froide, austère, 
S’étendre, s’élargir jusques à Vhorizon, 

Et les sillons obscurs qui coupent le gazon 
Deviennent radieux. Ils montent vers les nues. 


Et trois anges, chantant des stances inconnues, 


Apportent la semence à ce labour divin. 
Leur geste est solennel. Tout effort serait vain 
Pour dire les accents qui tombent de leur bouche. 


[LE May] NOS TROIS CLOCHES.—POÈME RUSTIQUE 43 


Jeannette se réveille et, de sa rude couche, 
Elle crie au vieillard qui s’avance songeur: 
“ Quel beau rêve j’ai fait!” 
Puis, fixant la rougeur 
Du couchant où flottaient les feux du crépuscule: 


“ Je les vois, les entends, là sur le monticule!... 
Ils chantent en semant pour le ciel!... Ils sont trois! 


Nos trois cloches sonnaient pour la première fois. 


Sxcrion I., 1906. [ 45 ] Memorrss §S. KR. C. 


III.—Le Commerce de France avec le Canada avant 1760. 


Par M. BENJAMIN SULTE. 


(Lu le 23 mai 1906.) 


La nouvelle qui se répandit, au printemps de 1761, que l’Angleterre 
était prête'à faire la paix avec la France produisit un mouvement dans 
les chambres de commerce de ce dernier royaume pour savoir si l’on de- 
vait demander la restitution du Canada. Nous allons voir ce que disaient 
en cette circonstance Dunkerque, Lille, Rouen, le Havre, Granville, Saint- 
Malo, Nantes, Bordeaux, Lyon, Bayonne, Marseille, la Rochelle. 

Il n’est pas nécessaire de raconter ici comment se faisait le com- 
merce de la’ France avec le Canada durant le siècle qui suivit la fondation 
de Québec, puisque notre dessein est de concentrer l'attention du lecteur 
sur les dernières années de la période française; néanmoins, quelques 
notes concernant le trafic des pelleteries semblent à leur place au début 
de cette étude, afin de nous guider dans l’interprétation des écrits de 
1761 qui forment Ja majeure partie, et toute la nouveauté, de ces quel- 
ques pages. 

E 


Voici un tableau qui date de 1665. A cette époque les Sauvages 
échangent avec les Français un castor pour l’un des articles suivants: 
1 petit capot, 2 livres de poudre, 4 livres de plomb, 2 épées, 2 tranches, 
2 haches, 8° couteaux à manche de bois, 10 couteaux jambettes, 12 fers 
de flèches, 25 alènes. Deux castors pour un moyen capot, trois castors 
pour un grand capot ou 1 couverture à l’iroquoise, quatre castors pour 
une couverture de ratine, six castors pour 1 couverture blanche de Nor- 
mandie, ou 1 fusil. 

Dans la correspondance des gouverneurs et intendants, année 1689, 
on, trouve de curieux détails: Les Anglais n’ont pas de tabac noir du 
Brésil; ils traitent de celui de Virginie, à discrétion, avec les Sauvages. 
Les Français vendent aux Sauvages les menues marchandises, mais les 
Anglais les donnent à ceux-ci. Les Anglais ne font pas de distinction 
entre les castors; tout est pris à 50 pour 100 plus haut que chez les 
Français ; en! outre, leurs marchandises valent au dela du double de celles 
des Français. On donne aux Sauvages :— 


Montréal. Albany. 
1 pot d’eau-de-vie pour 1 castor - - - - 6 pots 
8 livres de poudre pour 4 castors - - - - - 1 castor. 


1 fusil pour 5 castors - - - - - - - - 2 castors. 


46 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Montréal. Albany. 
40 livres de plomb pour 3 castors - - - - - 1 castor. 
1 couverture rouge pour 2 castors - - - - - 1 castor. 
1 couverture blanche pour 2 castors - - - - - 1 castor. 
1 gros capot pour 2 castors - - - - - - - 1 castor. 
4 chemises pour 2 castors - - - - - - - - 1 castor. 
10 paires de bas pour 2 castors - - - - - - 1 castor. 


Prenons quelques extraits de la correspondance échangée entre le 
ministre des colonies et le gouvernement du Canada, de 1716 à 1718; 
on y trouvera un aperçu du système adopté par les Français à l’égard du 
commerce avec les Sauvages: “ Le marquis de Vaudreuil espère que Sa 
Majesté voudra bien envoyer cette année en Canada pour trente mille 
francs de présents aux Sauvages, et continuer tous les ans à y envoyer 
ceux qu’on a coutume de leur donner... Il serait à propos d’envoyer 
tous les ans en Canada trente milliers de poudre. Cette marchandise est 
la seule que les Sauvages estiment mieux que celle des Anglais. Les 
Sauvages en consomment vingt à vingt-cinq milliers tous les ans; le 
surplus servirait à faire un fond, crainte d’en manquer si nous venions à 
avoir une nouvelle guerre avec les Anglais- Il faudrait ordonner de la 
part de Sa Majesté qu’on ne vendît au magasin que trente sous la livre 
de poudre, comme on le faisait en 1712, et non pas quarante-cing comme 
à présent. Il faudrait aussi, tous les ans, soixante milliers de plomb et 
six cents fusils de chasse. Les Sauvages les connaissent et n’en veulent 
point d’autres que ceux de Tulle.t [1] est plus avantageux d’acheter ces 
articles en France qu’en Canada, où ils coûteraient une fois plus, pourvu 
que ceux qui en seront chargés ne fassent pas comme les années précé- 
dentes où l’on a remarqué qu’on les comptait plus au roi en France que 
les marchands du Canada ne les vendaient... M. de Vaudreuil serait 
très mal reçu des Sauvages s’il arrivait (les visiter) sans avoir de quoi 
leur donner les présents nécessaires, et courrait le risque de perdre la 
confiance qu’ils ont en lui, confiance dont il a besoin pour pouvoir ter- 
miner les différends que ces Sauvages ont entre eux. Les Anglais même, 
qui ne cherchent que le moyen d’éloigner les Sauvages de nous, ne man- 
queraient pas de saisir cette occasion et de leur faire entendre qu’on ne 
fait aucun cas d’eux en France. On sait trop combien l’alliance des 
Sauvages avec les Anglais serait préjudiciable au Canada et combien en 
souffrirait son commerce.” 

Son commerce de fourrures.... Il ne s’en faisait presque pas 
d’autres. La colonie agricole ne comptait pas, l’industrie non plus et 
c’est ce qui avait fait dire à La Hontan (1686) que le Canada n'existait 


? Ville du bas Limousin qui devait avoir la Rochelle pour port de mer. 


ISULTE] LE COMMERCE DE FRANCE 47 


que par le castor. Ceci donnerait à penser que l’on s’appliquait à vendre 
aux Sauvages des marchandises à plus bas prix que les Anglais, pourtant 
le contraire avait lieu et, pour combler la différence, on avait inventé les 
“ présents annuels,” expédient précaire, et humiliant en ce que le roi de 
France faisait tout bonnement acte de soumission aux tribus. En outre, 
certains effets, étant de meilleure qualité et coûtant moins cher à Londres 
qu'en France, on les achetait aux Anglais pour gagner davantage sur le 
trafic des pelleteries. 

“Il est impossible d'empêcher les Sauvages d’aller chercher des 
escarlatines chez les Anglais... Pour empêcher le commerce avec la 
Nouvelle-Angleterre, Sa Majesté prend soin de faire envoyer des escar- 
latines dans la colonie pour en fournir aux Sauvages que le désir d’avoir 
de pareils effets attirait chez les Anglais .. .. En sus, le Conseil 
vous envoye copie de la facture de deux cents pièces d’escarlatines qu’il 
a fait acheter à Londres.’ Le ministre écrivait à son tour: ‘“ Vous 
recevrez (à Québec) deux pièces d’escarlatines de la manufacture des 
sieurs Gely, de Montpellier ;! elles sont envoyées pour échantillon.” 


EE 


Entrons dans notre sujet. L’examen d’un mémoire rédigé vers le 
temps de la prise de Québec va nous donner des renseignements plus 
précis sur plusieurs points. Par exemple; une barrique de vin payée cin- 
quante francs en France et vendue trois cents francs en Canada ne rap- 
portait au marchand que vingt-trois francs de bénéfice et encore faut-il 
déduire sur cette dernière somme l'intérêt du retard dans le payement 
des lettres de change qui souvent l’absorbait toute entière. 

“$i lon objectait, dit ce mémoire, que les marchandises sèches 
payaient moins de fret, n'étant pas d’un aussi grand encombrement que 
les liquides, l’on répondra que le prix des assurances montera davantage, 
parce que une balle de marchandises de lencombrement d’une barrique 
vaut en espèces mille écus. L’on convient, cependant, que ceux qui n’ont 
point fait faire d’assurance et qui se sont exposés aux risques ont gagné 
considérablement lorsque leurs marchandises ont eu le bonheur de se 
rendre. Le risque qu’ils couraient de tout perdre rendait leur profit bien 
légitime, surtout daus un temps où de vingt navires qui partaient pour 
le Canada, il ne s’en rendait que six. 

“Tl ne faut pas, d’ailleurs, comparer le commerce des colonies à 
celui qui se fait en France. Si l’on manque, dans une ville du royaume, 
de quelque espèce de marchandise l’on est assuré de la trouver dans une 


? La Provence et le Languedoc produisaient abondamment la graine qui 
donne la teinture écarlate, mais il faut croire que les étoffes de cette couleur 
se fabriquaient plutôt en Angleterre qu’en France. 


48 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


ville voisine. Les colonies n’ont pas la même ressource; souvent l’on y 
est forcé de prendre des marchandises dont on n’a pas besoin, pour avoir 
celles dont on ne peut se passer. La raison (de ceci) est fondée sur 
l’usage où sont les marchands du Canada de ne vendre jamais une seule 
espèce de marchandise. Leurs magasins contenant un assortiment de 
toute espèce, il faut que ceux qui achètent prennent un peu de chaque 
chose, sans quoi le magasin se déserterait et le marchand se trouverait 
dans la nécessité de vendre le reste avec beaucoup de perte. 


“ Le commerce des colonies change de face à chaque instant, suivant 
la bonne ou la mauvaise fortune des armements. La prise d’un seul 
vaisseau pendant la guerre augmente souvent jusqu’à une valeur exces- 
sive le prix des marchandises. Le Canada, dans son commerce, a encore 
quelque chose de particulier et différent des autres colonies: la naviga- 
tion n’y. est point libre toute l’année, à cause du froid. Le temps pen- 
dant lequel les navires y séjournent est une espèce de foire où chacun 
fait ses ventes et ses achats. Dès que les navires sont ‘partis, à la fin 
d'octobre, les marchandises augmentent de prix, parce que ceux qui les 
ont achetées des marchands forains pour les revendre doivent naturelle- 
ment y gagner. Ce gain est plus ou moins fort suivant les circonstances 
de la guerre ou du plus ou moins de consommation et de la nature du 
payement. Les circonstances fâcheuses dans lesquelles s’est trouvé le 
Canada par les suites de la plus longue guerre, faisaient hausser chaque 
jour le prix des marchandises. L’eau-de-vie s’est vendue jusqu’à 200 
francs la velte, ce qui fait 25 francs la pinte. Le lard salé, qui valait 
originairement, c’est-à-dire avant 1755, quinze sous la livre, a valu dans 
la suite jusqu’à six francs. Un chapeau de laine, des plus communs, qui 
vaut quarante sous en France, s’est vendu quarante et cinquante francs, 
et les autres marchandises en proportion. Les pertes continuelles aug- 
mentaient le rareté chaque jour, et le décri des espèces à achevé la 
ruine.” 

Le ministre Berryer, à qui l’on demandait des troupes pour soutenir 
la lutte au Canada (1758) répondit en faisant allusion à la guerre mal- 
heureuse que la France avait engagée en Allemagne contre la Prusse et 
l'Angleterre: “ Lorsque le feu est à la maison on ne s’occupe pas des 
écuries,” à quoi Bougainville riposta: “ Personne ne dira que vous parlez 
comme un cheval.” Berryer se consolait de la perte de la colonie, car, 
disait-il, ce sera une charge de moins, le Canada ayant coûté cent mil- 
lions de francs depuis le début de la guerre.” M. Emile Garnault ajoute 
à ceci: “ D’après lord Chesterfield, les Anglais n’avaient pas hésité à 
sacrifier quatre-vingts millions sterling, soit deux milliards de francs, 
pour nous dépouiller d’une conquête dont ils devinaient l’avenir.” 


[suLTE] LE COMMERCE DE FRANCE 49 


TEE 


M. Emile Garnault,! secrétaire archiviste de la chambre de com- 
merce de la Rochelle, a publié, depuis quinze ans, divers ouvrages de 
haute valeur sur le commerce maritime de cette ville au cours des trois 
derniers siècles. Le Canada y figure souvent et l’on est tenté d’en citer 
tous les passages qui nous intéressent, mais bornons-nous à grouper ceux 
qui appartiennent à la séparation de notre pays d’avèc la France. Il 
est aisé de faire ressortir, grâce aux documents mis au jour par M. Emile 
Garnault, Vattitude prise par les armateurs et les manufacturiers du 
royaume, en 1761, lorsque la question de céder notre pays a l'Angleterre 
se présenta comme un moyen de rétablir la paix avec cette puissance, Cha- 
eun sait que la cour de Versailles parut consentir à ce sacrifice d’un cœur 
léger, mais au fond, c’était à regret; il le fallait bien, cependant, pour 
sortir d’une impasse où l’imprévoyance des dix ou douze dernières années 
avait acculé administration royale. A part les auteurs de cette situa- 
tion déplorable qui cherchaient à donner le change à l’opinion publique 
en disant que nos arpents de neige ne valaient pas la peine qu’on s’en 
occupât et ceux qui disaient : “ Une fois la paix faite, le roi dormira tran- 
quille,” il y avait, chez les ministres, une assez bonne perception de la 
faute commise. De tous temps il a existé, en France et en Angleterre, 
un parti hostile aux colonies. L'histoire en est longue. Nous avons vu, 
il y a quarante ans, M. Bright et autres entraîner le parlement vers 
la séparation, tout comme avait fait le groupe de politiciens dont Vol- 
taire se constituait l'interprète en France, non pas qu’il fut un chef, 
mais parce qu'il lui plaisait de parler et d’écrire dans le sens de ce parti. 
C’est à tort que nous lui avons prêté le rôle d’inspirateur dans cette 
cabale: il faisait comme tant d’autres qui avaient de fausses idées sur 
l'importance des possessions lointaines. Quand il disait: “Je voudrais 
voir le Canada au fond de la mer Glaciale,” il n’inventait pas l’expres- 
sion, il ne faisait que la répéter après l’avoir entendue. Son influence 
était à zéro, mais il n’était pas seul de son côté. Lorsque lord Dufferin 
fut nommé gouverneur du Canada, un membre du parlement lui dit: 
“ J’espére que vous allez nous débarrasser de ce Dominion,” à quoi l’autre 
répondit: “ Non, pas! je vais le rattacher à nous davantage” Ne nous 
étonnons point de ces divergences de sentiments ou de calculs qui ont 
toujours existé. 

Ce que nous ne connaissions pas jusqu’à présent, c’est la note du 
commerce qui avait dû se faire entendre dans le débat, puisque Jes in- 
térêts de ce dernier, fort compromis, devaient avoir soulevé des plaintes 


? La famille de F.-X. Garneau, notre historien national, était aussi de la 
Rochelle. 


BO SOCIÉTÉ ROYALE DU CANADA 


dont l’écho semblait perdu pour nous au milieu du fracas de ce grand 
désastre. M. Emile Garnault réveille aujourd’hui les voix qui avaient 
plaidé, dans quelques villes de l’intérieur du royaume et Je long de tout 
le littoral, contre la cession d’abord, et ensuite pour tâcher d’en amoin- 
drir les rigueurs. 

Après le retour en France des troupes et des bureaux du Canada, 
l'automne de 1760, des négociations avaient été entamées avec la cour 
de Londres pour rétablir la paix en Europe et, au mois de mars suivant, 
Pitt déclara que Von pourrait arriver à une entente sur la base du 
transfer de notre colonie. Cette condition fondamentale fut trouvée 
tellement onéreuse que Louis XV jugea à propos de faire imprimer et 
de répandre les pièces diplomatiques échangées en cette occasion entre 
les deux couronnes, afin de montrer qu’il se voyait dans l'impossibilité 
d'offrir un refus à de pareilles prétentions. Le cas était sans précédent, 
je crois, car l’habitude des rois de France n’était pas de donner au peuple 
des explications de cette nature. 

On se rend compte de la gêne qu’inspire une situation pénible chez 
un pouvoir qui commence à redouter les suites de ses égarements. Trente 
années avant la Révolution la crainte, sinon des masses, du moins de 
certaines classes de la nation, se faisait déjà sentir. Ceci ouvrait la 
porte aux représentations, aux discussions et la publication de ces pièces 
devenait quasi un appel à lopinion publique. 

En septembre 1761, toute espérance de paix s’était évanouie, mais 
Pitt sortait du ministère. Peut-être que ce changement ramènerait à 
bien l’état des affaires. Restait-il quelque espoir à la France? C'était 
le moment d’agir, même dans le doute. La chambre de commerce de la 
Rochelle qui, plus que toute autre, sentait retomber sur elle les consé- 
quences de l’abandon du Canada, écrivit, le 10 novembre, aux chambres 
de commerce des grands ports et de quelques villes du centre de la 
France, les invitant à pétitionner le ministre des colonies et remontrer 
contre une cession absolue de la Nouvelle-France. Voici des extraits 
des réponses reçues durant les cinq semaines qui suivirent cette demande: 


IV. 


\ 


Lyon :—“ Nous ne saurions, dans cette occasion, nous réunir à vous, 
notre position étant différente de la vôtre et le commerce de Lyon n’ayant 
qu’un intérêt bien médiocre dans la conservation du Canada.” Cette 
note, qui n’a rien de national, se retrouve ailleurs. 

Lille :—< Nous sentons parfaitement combien est grande la perte du 
Canada pour la France et combien elle peut augmenter l’opulence de nos 
ennemis, mais toutes réflexions que nous pouvons faire à ce sujet nous 
sont d'autant plus douloureuses qu’elles ne nous laissent que le triste 


[SULTE] LE COMMERCE DE FRANCE 51 


regret de ne pouvoir y apporter aucun reméde, puisque nous pensons que 
ce serait visiblement condamner ce que le roi et son conseil ont décidé.” 

Dunkerque :—“ Pour vous seconder, nous nous proposons de faire 
un mémoire exact sur les richesses immenses que produit la pêche de Ja 
morue au royaume.” 

Rouen :—“ Nous avons lu avec une sensibilité égale à la vôtre le 
recueil des négociations de notre cour avec celle d’Angleterre; nous 
sentons comme vous l’étendue et le prix des sacrifices que notre monarque 
a jugé à propos de faire; comme vous, nous sommes effectivement dans 
une province qui en sentira de fâcheux effets; mais, néanmoins, nous ne 
pouvons penser que le Conseil ignore l’importance d’une cession parce 
qu'il paraît se la dissimuler, ni que le roi, en rendant publiques ses 
négociations, ait prétendu consulter ses peuples et leur donner la liberté 
de lui faire des représentations. Nous croyons qu'il a seulement voulu 
les convaincre qu’il ne leur fait supporter le poids de la guerre qu’à 
regret et qu'il veut sincèrement la paix. Il ne pouvait pas en donner 
une preuve plus frappante.” 

Le Havre: —“ Quelque extrêmes que soient les besoins de ce 
royaume, nous comprenons que c’est acheter la paix du plus pur de son 
sang que de la payer par la cession du Canada.  Pénétrés des mêmes 
sentiments que vous sur l’importance de cette colonie, nous ne pouvons 
qu'applaudir au projet que vous avez formé de mettre sous les yeux de 
M. de Choiseul les inconvénients qui résulteraient de la perte d’un si 
beau pays, soit dans la décadence ,de l’agriculture, des manufactures, 
de la pêche et de la navigation, soit dans les avantages infinis que les 
ennemis retireraient de la possession d’une contrée si vaste et dont l’uti- 
lité et l’excellence paraissent être encore inconnues. Nous ne balance- 
rions pas die seconder vos représentations par les remontrances les plus 
fortes si, nous renfermant de tout temps dans les objets qui tiennent 
uniquement au commerce, nous ne nous fussions pas imposés silence 
pour toujours sur les affaires de politique.” 

Saint-Malo :—“%* Nous avons lu, comme vous, avec une vraie douleur, 
le recueil des négociations entre notre cour et celle d'Angleterre et le 
sacrifice que le ministre voulait faire de la précieuse colonie du Canada. 
Le plan que vous vous proposez de suivre dans le mémoire que vous 
comptez adresser aux ministres nous a paru embrasser tout ce qu’on peut 
dire contre la cession d’une possession aussi importante; aussi nous le 
suivrons... Nous craignons bien que ce ne soit un parti pris et que 
les représentations ne servent de rien. Quoiqu'il en soit, nous aurons 
au moins la faible consolation d’avoir fait notre devoir.” 


Sec. I., 1906. 4 


52 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Granville :—“ Nous avons été surpris et affligés de voir la perte du 
Canada et la privation de la pêche de la morue aux côtes de la grande 
baie de Gaspaye et de l’île Royale (cap Breton), de sorte qu’il ne reste- 
rait aux vaisseaux français que la faculté stipulée par le traité d’ Utrecht 
(1713) de faire la pêche et la sécherie des morues sur une partie des 
côtes de Terreneuve, sans y pouvoir former aucune habitation pour pro- 
fiter des pêches d’automne et du printemps. Vous concevez, sans doute, 
messieurs, que les Français étant ainsi réduits à ce que nous appelons 
la côte du petit Nord et à la partie ingrate de la côte de Terreneuve, 
située sur le golfe Saint-Laurent, la pêche de la morue doit tomber des 
trois-quarts, ce qui, outre le tort irréparable que nos villes respectives 
en souffriront, portera le coup fatal à la marine de France, étant prouvé 
que la pêche de la morue est une pépinière de matelots (tandis) que 
le commerce de l'Amérique et des Indes détruit plutôt qu’il n’augmente 
(Vinstruction des matelots)... Ne trouveriez-vous point convenable, 
messieurs, de faire de très humbles représentations à M. le duc de Choi- 
seul? Tout le monde connaît les bonnes intentions de ce seigneur pour 
le rétablissement de la marine et du commerce maritime. Il est possible 
que la cession du Canada et la renonciation à la plus grande partie de 
la pêche de la morue n’aient point été considérées dans leur vrai point 
de valeur, lorsqu’on les a proposées... Nous ne sommes pas fort au 
fait de ce qui concerne le Canada; nous ne pourrons toucher cet article 
que superficiellement. L’abandon des côtes de la grande baie de Gaspaye 
et de l’île Royale nous paraît de la dernière conséquence. Nous croyons 
que nos représentations devraient avoir pour objet de nous conserver les 
côtes poissonneuses où nous formons des habitations de pêcheurs qui 
profitent du printemps et de l’automne... Ne pourrait-on point faire 
valoir les intérêts de nos îles d'Amérique, qui consomment beaucoup de 
morues sèches qu’on serait forcé de tirer des colonies anglaises, les morues 
provenant des côtes que cette nation nous abandonne n’étant point d’une 
qualité propre pour l'Amérique.” 

Nantes :—‘‘ La cession d’une colonie telle que le Canada ne peut 
qu’étre, sans doute, trés préjudiciable au commerce de France. Nous 
Pavons senti comme vous, nous en avons gémi et nous avons déploré la 
cause d’un si grand sacrifice, mais telle est notre triste position qu’elle 
nous réduit à recevoir la loi. Sans marine, que peut la France? Pour 
arrêter les conquêtes d’un ennemi puissant, elle demande la paix: elle 
ne peut done la faire avantageuse. Le Canada fut le motif de la pré- 
sente guerre! Depuis longtemps l’Angleterre machinait les moyens de 


a 


réunir cette contrée 4 son domaine: elle la posséde a titre de conquéte 


1Pitt avait dit qu’il occuperait tellement la France dans la guerre d’Al- 
lemagne que les Anglais pourraient s’emparer de l’Amérique du Nord. 


[suLTE] LE COMMERCE DE FRANCE 88 


et ses forces maritimes lui en assurent la possession. Elle est, d’ailleurs, 
trop ambitieuse et trop éclairée sur ses intérêts pour ne pas tirer partie 
de la supériorité de ses forces. Il est probable que l'Angleterre, avant 
de commencer les négociations, en a établi pour base la cession entière 
de cette colonie par la France et que celle-ci a été forcée d’y souscrire. 
Nous sommes d'autant plus confirmés dans cette idée que nous savons 
très positivement que le. ministère, il y a plus d’un an, avait pris des 
informations * sur le Canada; qu’on lui avait fait sentir toute l’impor- 
tance de cette colonie et les suites funestes qui résulteraient de sa ces- 
sion... aussi le Canada fait-il la matière des premiers articles des mé- 
moires respectifs fournis par la France à l’Angleterre, et encore ne 
suffit-il pas à l'ambition de celle-ci. Ces considérations nous portent à 
croire qu'il serait superflu, et peut-être indiscret, de faire des représen- 
tations directes sur cette cession; quelques ménagées qu’elles fussent, 
elles pourraient déplaire et même blesser le ministère. Il paraît avoir 
été attentif aux intérêts du commerce: la restitution des prises, la traite 
des noirs et la pêche de la morue ont été discutées. Sans répandre un 
mémoire, nous pensons qu'une lettre à M. de Choiseul serait plus en 
place. Sa vigilance pour le bien du commerce exige nos remerciments. 
En relevant la grandeur du sacrifice, on peut s’étendre sur l’importance 
du Canada et lui remettre sous les yeux combien sa cession serait pré- 
judiciable au commerce.” 

Bordeaux :—‘ Notre chambre vous secondera dans l’objet des repré- 
sentations... cependant quelques-uns de nous objectent... àl pourrait 
ne pas paraître placé que les chambres de commerce représentassent dans 
des choses que les événements ont rendu affaires d'Etat... si le ministre, 
gagné par nos représentations, refusait la cession du Canada et que la 
paix ne put se conclure qu’au prix de cette cession, nous aurions à nous 
imputer la continuation des calamités de la guerre...” Dans le mé- 
moire de la chambre de Bordeaux adressé au duc de Choiseul le 22 dé- 
cembre 1761, il y a: “Cette colonie fournissait en temps de paix au 
commerce de France deux objets considérables: 60 vaisseaux sortaient 
chaque année de nos ports pour y porter les choses propres à ses con- 
sommations; 150 autres y allaient pêcher la morue. Le chargement de 
ces 60 vaisseaux était composé de vin, d’eau-de-vie, de draperies fines et 
communes, de soiries, de dorures et généralement de tous les objets de 
luxe; * on en peut évaluer le capital à 10 millions et à 2 le profit qui 


*L’un de ces rapports expose que le Canada une fois rendu à la France 
devrait servir de place d’armes d’où l’on sortirait pour conquérir la Nouvelle- 
Angleterre. La guerre, toujours la guerre. 

* Notre petite population ne prenait qu’une partie de ces marchandises: 
la masse passait à la traite des pelleteries sur une étendue immense de 
territoire. 


B4 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


en résultait. Le produit de ces chargements était employé partie en 
lettres sur les trésoriers de Sa Majesté, et les dépenses que comportait 
le service du roi * dans la colonie en étaient ainsi acquittées avec d’autant 
moins de frais, partie en pelleteries provenant de la chasse des Sauvages 
qui, devenant en France un objet de commerce, étaient dans le Canada 
une occasion de liaison avec ces mêmes Sauvages, que l’on a toujours 
utilement employés a la défense de la colonie ;? partie enfin était convertie 
en huile de loup marin et en morue provenant de la péche des habitants. 
Tandis qu’un certain nombre de ces vaisseaux transportaient ces objets 
en France, les autres chargeaient des bois de charpente qu’ils appor- 
taient aux îles. Ce n’est pas les seuls avantages que les îles en rece- 
vaient; ces mêmes vaisseaux, en augmentant le nombre de ceux qui s’y 
trouvaient déjà, faisaient diminuer le prix du fret, et la colonie remet- 
tait en France ses denrées à moins de frais. Les îles trouvaient aussi 
dans le Canada le débouché des tafias et des sirops,’ débouché utile qui, 
joint à la circonstance de la diminution du fret, lie l’intérêt des îles à 
la conservation du Canada. Tel était l’état du commerce avant la guerre, 
mais ce n’est pas tout ce que le Canada pourrait fournir. Nous ne 
croyons pas déplacé d’en parler ici puisque, raisonnant sur le mérite de 
la colonie, il est également utile de voir ce qu’elle était avant la guerre 
et ce qu’elle pourrait devenir lorsqu'une paix heureuse laura rendue à 
la France. Le tabac croît parfaitement dans le Canada. Si la planta- 
tion en était encouragée, la colonie accroîtrait en nombre d’habitants, en 
raison de ce que ses produits seraient multipliés en quantité et accrus en 
valeur. Cet encouragement dépend du fermier; * si les considérations 
qui le conduisent chez les Anglais pour y acheter le tabac” de la plan- 
tation ne sont pas telles que l’intérêt de la nation ne puissent bien les 
balancer, qu’il verse dans cette colonie, en achat de cette denrée, les 
sommes considérables qu’il porte chez l'Anglais: la colonie lui devra sa 
force essentielle, résultant de l’accroissement du nombre de ses habitants, 
et la nation les profits d’un nouveau commerce. Le Canada fournirait 
encore de la mature et du bois de construction; ce bois sec et attendu 
serait employé utilement dans nos chantiers; ainsi ménagé, il ne ferait 


1 Ceci veut dire la dépense publique de l'administration du Canada: gou- 
verneurs, tribunaux, fonctionnaires, troupes, etc. 

2 Les subventions aux guerriers sauvages étaient énormes. Nos guerres 
avaient pour cause le désir des Français et des Anglais de s'emparer de la 
traite des fourrures. 

5 En 1693 et par la suite, les documents officiels mentionnent des “ quarts 
de melasse pour faire de la bière.” 

*Celui à qui le roi accorde le monopole d’un certain commerce. 

L'expression “tabac du Brésil” se rencontre souvent dans les dépêches 
officielles. 


[suLTE] LE COMMERCE DE FRANCE 55 


pas dans nos mains un moindre usage que chez les Anglais. Mais c’est 
lorsque le bois manquera en France que l’on goûtera cette ressource, si 
jamais on l’employait. Si le tabac devenait en Canada un objet d’agri- 
culture, l'exportation de l’un et de l’autre rendrait nécessaire un plus 
grand nombre de vaisseaux et, de Vaccroissement de la marine mar- 
chande, résulterait la force de la marine royale, fondée dans le plus grand 
nombre de matelots. On y cultiverait aussi avec succès le chanvre. Il 
ne manque, pour rendre cette colonie une des plus utiles, par la nature 
des choses dont elle est susceptible, que les bras pour cultiver la terre et 
fouiller les mines. Nous avons dit que 150 vaisseaux sortaient chaque 
année des ports de France pour aller pêcher la morue dans les mers du 
Canada; 10 à 12 mille hommes, employés sur ces vaisseaux, cherchent 
au fond des mers le capital d’un commerce solide par ses rapports avec 
les besoins de la vie et d’autant plus à considérer pour nous que notre 
morue, mieux préparée que celle des Anglais, ou préparée avec de meil- 
leur sel, en nous acquérant la préférence dans la vente, assure les profits 
de notre pêche. Ces mêmes hommes, exercés dans une navigation dure 
et pénible, deviennent d’excellent matelots... La continuation de la 
guerre ne peut manquer de faire sentir aux Anglais le besoin de la paix 
et réprimer cet essor imposant qui menace toute l’Europe. Cette nation, 
élevée sur ses conquêtes, compte vainement? ses flottes nombreuses, ses 
officiers de mer braves et expérimentés; sa force repose sur son crédit, 
qui dépend lui-même de la continuité du succès. L/inaction est perte 
pour elle; un échec peut devenir une révolution. C’est ainsi, monsei- 
gneur, que le commerce se représente l’importance du Canada et croit 
voir dans la continuation de la guerre les moyens de le recouvrer...” 
Bayonne :—“ Persuadés que le mémoire que vous avez préparé expri- 
mera mieux que nous ne saurions le faire toutes les raisons qui s’op- 
posent à l’abandon du Canada, nous ne pouvons que recommander à 
notre député de se joindre au vôtre pour les faire valoir auprès des 
ministres, mais nous pensons que les personnes qui tiennent les rênes de 
Etat se relâchent sur le Canada, bien plutôt par l’impossibilité de le 
reprendre que par le mépris qu’ils peuvent faire de cette colonie qui a 
coûté, il est vrai, à ’ Etat, mais ne lui a coûté que parce qu’on l’a bien 
voulu ; et l’on sent bien que, lorsqu'on voudra changer de maxime à cet 
égard, cette colonie pourra se soutenir toute seule et nous donner une 
utilité dont on verra avec mal au cœur les Anglais s’enrichir.” 
Marseille :— En lisant le recueil des négociations qui a été rendu 
public, nous n’avons pas été moins sensibles et moins surpris que vous 
en voyant l’abandon que l’on faisait d’une colonie si utile. Ce serait, 


? Le sel de la Rochelle, longtemps renommé au-dessus des autres. 
? Avec vanité....mais non pas en vain. 


56 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


comme vous l’observez fort bien, une perte immense et irréparable pour 
PEtat et qui mérite la détermination que vous avez prise de présenter un 
mémoire à MM. le duc et comte de Choiseul, pour les informer de l’im- 
portance du Canada. Nous concourrons volontiers 4 seconder vos des- 
seins...” Le 21 décembre, la chambre de Marseille écrivait de nouveau: 
“ Quoique le Canada, presque toujours en guerre, n’ait pu augmenter ni 
améliorer son commerce, ni même permettre aux négociants de suivre et 
de découvrir de nouvelles branches, on sait que ce vaste pays consomme 
une grande quantité de nos vins et de nos eaux-de-vie, diverses denrées 
du crû de France, des draperies de toutes espèces, des toiles, et enfin des 
ouvrages de la plupart de nos fabriques.! Il nous fournissait, en retour, 
des peaux de castors, d’élans, de cerfs, de chevreuils, des pelleteries, des 
fourrures, la morue, l’huile de poisson, du saumon salé, du bois de cons- 
truction, de charpente, de menuiserie, ete... Le Canada fournit aussi 
des farines et des pois à Louisbourg. Il compensait avec ces denrées 
celles de nos îles, avec lesquelles il faisait un grand commerce et, en 
1750, nous avons vu ici un navire venant de Québec chargé de blé. Le 
débouché du Canada favorisait ici l’importation des laines du Levant et 
de Barbarie, qui s’accumulent aujourd’hui dans les magasins de la com- 
pagnie d'Afrique et dans ceux des particuliers... Ces laines, pour être 
mises en œuvre et manufacturées, occupent en Languedoc un peuple 
d'ouvriers auxquels la consommation du Canada donnait le travail et la 
subsistance: on en jugera par un seul article de cent mille? couvertures 
que le Languedoc fabriquait annuellement pour le Canada. Si nous en- 
trions dans tous les détails, on serait effrayé du , vide que la perte de 
cette colonie doit laisser dans la navigation et le commerce de la France; 
mais si on considère les avantages de la pêche dans la rivière, à Gaspée 
et dans les différents postes établis pour celle des loups marins et des 
marsouins, indépendamment de importante pêche de la morue qu’il sera 
difficile aux Français de continuer sur le grand banc de Terreneuve, 
peut-on ne pas regarder vivement tout ce que nous abandonnerions à nos 
ennemis! Si les grandes dépenses que le roi a faites depuis quelque 


1 Draps écarlate et bleu. Serge du Poitou. Toile de Melis. Bas de Frise, 
bas de ratine. ‘Couvertes de laine de Rouen, du Languedoc. La liste en est 
longue. Le mot “couverte” est employé dès 1665. 

2Les couvertures de laine d'Espagne, fabriquées à Montpellier, en Lan- 
guedoc, payaient 15 sous d'entrée au roi dans le port de Québec, ce qui, à 
raison de 3 pour 100 de la valeur de l’objet, met la couverture à 25 francs. 
Celles de Rouen payaient 13 sous, d’autres 9, 7 et 4, telles que fabrique de 
Coulonges (Poitou), de Bordeaux, et celles de ratine, de drap rouge, de poil 
de chien, à l’Iroquoise, ete. (Voir Hdits et Ordonnances, I. 597, aussi les quatre 
volumes de Documents de la Nouvelle-France.) La grande quantité de ces cou- 
vertures s'explique par la’traite avec les Sauvages, qui s’étendait au nord, 
au nord-ouest, ouest et sud, à 200, 400, 600 lieues de Québec. 


[SULTE] LE COMMERCE DE FRANCE 57 


temps au Canada peuvent effrayer pour l’avenir, on ne doit pas se dissi- 
muler aujourd’hui que cette colonie bien administrée coûtera beaucoup 
moins et, pour s’en convaincre, il suffit de jeter les yeux sur les états des 
dépenses annuelles qu’on y faisait il y a vingt ans * et même pendant la 
dernière guerre. Toutes les places de commerce et les lieux de fabrique 
du royaume sont surchargés de lettres de change du Canada; leur objet 
et.les malheurs du temps en on fait suspendre le paiement. Les arma- 
teurs qui ont reçu ce papier, pour le fret de leurs navires, les fabricants, 
en paiement de leurs marchandises, les négociants, en retour des effets 
qu’ils ont envoyés sur l’invitation du ministre, et les disposeurs, qui ont 
escompté les lettres de change, souffrent depuis longtemps... Nous vous 
prévenons que nous avons l’honneur d'envoyer cette réponse à M. le 
comte de Choiseul.” 

| Vy 

“On voit, par ces réponses,” observe M. Emile Garnault, “que peu de 
représentations commerciales furent disposées à soutenir les réclamations 
de la Chambre de Commerce de la Rochelle , ville qui centralisait alors 
-presque tout le commerce du Canada. On se préoccupait peu du sort de 
nos colonies en général, et l’on était porté à voir particulièrement le tort 
que pouvait faire à telle ou telle ville de France la cession de telle ou 
telle colonie.” C'est-à-dire que, s’il existait quelque part ce que nous ap- 
pelons l’esprit public, la forme du gouvernement létouffait. Alors. 
chacun pour soi. 

La résistance que la Rochelle opposa au projet de cession fut préci- 
sément inspirée par l'intérêt local: se voyant en danger de perdre plus 
qu'aucune autre ville elle déploya une ardeur proportionnée au péril. 

Celui qui tenait la plume au nom de la Rochelle et qui était, on 
peut le dire, l’âme de la chambre de commerce de cette ville, se nommait 
Jean-Baptiste Gastumeau, un lettré, membre titulaire de l’académie de 
la Rochelle depuis 1732 et son secrétaire perpétuel.  Louis-Etienne 
Arcère, historien de la ville, dit en parlant de Gastumeau: “Je querel- 
lerais presque le commerce d’avoir ravi en partie aux muses un homme 
qui n’était fait que pour elles, mais en se dévouant au commerce il a tra- 
vaillé avec tant d'utilité pour sa patrie et pour le bien général que c’eût 
été un malheur qu’il n’eût été qu’un homme de lettres.” 

En novembre 1761, ce zélé défenseur du commerce et de la navi- 
gation s’adressait au duc de Choiseul, ministre de la guerre et de la 
marine, exposant que la suspension des rapports qui venait de se produire 
entre Versailles et Londres remettait la France au même point où elle 
s'était trouvée avant les propositions du printemps dernier, ce qui sem- 


*Sous MM. de Beauharnois et Hocquart. 
*Celle qui s’était terminée en 1748. 


58 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


blait laisser encore quelque jour aux négociants du royaume pour s’ex- 
pliquer “sur l’étendue et l’importance des sacrifices que l’ennemi exi- 
geait de nous.” En même temps, il priait les diverses chambres de com- 
merce de France de vouloir bien présenter des mémoires au même 
ministre, comme on l’a vu. Voici une autre note de lui qui appartient à 
cette démarche: 

‘“ Le Canada a pour ennemi non seulement ceux qui ne l’ont jamais 
connu et qui ne jugent des choses que par précipitation et par l’intérêt 
du moment, mais encore ceux qui l’ont perdu et qui voudraient mettre 
sur le compte de la fatalité les fautes qui ont précipité la chute de cette 
colonie. (C’est de là que se sont élevés ces cris importuns qui, pour hater 
la paix par le sacrifice du Canada, essayent d’en faire regarder la pos- 
session comme onéreuse, inutile, et fatiguent nos négociations de cette 
répétition continuelle: il faut faire la paix.” A présent, voyons le mé- 
moire de la Rochelle dans ses parties les plus intéressantes : 

La Rochelle:—“* La cession pleine et entière du Canada a été la 
principale condition du traité: elle fut arrêtée dès la première entrevue, 
sans résistance et sans modification et, sur cet objet, jamais la négocia-: 
tion n’a varié. D’où peut naître, on Vose dire, cette espèce d’indifférence 
pour une colonie si vaste, si belle, si utile, la clef et la sauvegarde de 
l'Amérique; colonie pour laquelle l’ennemi s’est épuisé d’hommes et 
d'argent et qu’il met au rang de ses plus riches et de ses plus brillantes 
conquêtes. I] y a eu, dans tous les temps, des personnes prévenues contre 
nos possessions de la Nouvelle-France. Dès les conférences d’Utrecht 
(1713) on fut disposé à les sacrifier toutes, et nous ne dûmes qu'à 
adresse et à l’habileté de nos négociations les débris qui nous en res- 
tèrent. C’était, disait-on, une colonie a charge qui ne se soutient que par 
l'argent du royaume et, par malheur, ce qui s’est fait en dernier lieu 
(1750-1760) en Canada n’a que trop fortifié ces idées... Qu'il nous 
soit permis de remettre sous les yeux du ministre une partie des maux 
que va causer à la France la perte du Canada, et l’état de force où il 
met l’ennemi pour tenter de nouvelles conquêtes... Trois millions et 
demi, répartis pendant quelques années par des mains pures, peuvent 
élever la colonie au plus haut point de grandeur. Sous l’heureuse admi- 
nistration de M. Hocquart (1729-1748) les dépenses n’allaient qu’à six 
ou sept cent mille francs. On ne suppose ces trois millions et demi que 
pour donner à la colonie les plus rapides accroissements. 

“ [’étendue du Canada offre, au premier coup d’œil, des possessions 
sans bornes. Plus vaste que l’Europe, il renferme près de mille lieues de 
pays, de l’Est à l’Ouest et, du Sud au Nord, on en compte beaucoup plus. 
Nos établissements et nos postes, dans ces immenses contrées, occupent 
déjà près de trois cents lieues de terrain en tous sens. Des forêts, des 


[SULTE] LE COMMERCE DE FRANCE 59 


lacs, des riviéres sans nombre partagent ou arrosent un territoire fertile 
qui, participant de la température de presque tous les climats du monde, 
produit les fruits assortis à ces climats. La terre n’y compte pas les dons, 
elle les prodigue avec une sorte d’excès; le blé y vient presque partout 
et avec abondance; des pâturages excellents nourrissent des troupeaux 
nombreux; les lacs, les rivières fournissent à tous les genres de pêches 
des ressources inépuisables et toujours renaissantes. Les chasses des 
Sauvages accumulent de toutes parts ces peaux précieuses de bétes fauves 
dont toute l’Europe a fait l’objet de ses commodités et de son luxe. 
L’air y est sain, la nourriture salubre, la population assurée par la fé- 
condité des femmes et la longue vie des habitants; les hommes y sont 
bien faits, polis, sobres, braves, d’un tempéramment robuste, actifs et 
pleins de feu. La candeur, la bonne foi ont régné dans ces paisibles 
contrées ; on n'y connaissait pas l’usage des clefs et des serrures et toutes 
les maisons s’ouvraient sans défiance à l’hospitalité—jusqu’à ce moment 
fatal où des hommes? nés pour la honte et le malheur de la France ont 
porté dans ce séjour de l’innocence et de la vertu tous.les vices de l’an- 
cien monde, le poison funeste de la cupidité, l’art perfide des fraudes et 
de la souplesse, la violence qui étouffe les cris de l’opprimé, Virreligion 
qui fait taire les remords, l’adresse qui cache les rapines et dérobe le 
crime à la sévérité des lois. Sans doute que, pour voiler ces noirceurs, on 
ne manquera pas de rejeter la source des malheurs de la colonie sur la 
colonie même, dont la position et le fond se sont refusés* aux efforts 
qu'on a faits pour la garder. Mais est-ce la colonie qui a fait éclore le 
monopole avant la guerre et qu’on a depuis porté à l'excès? Cet agio- 
tage insensé qui a écrasé toutes les subsistances et a exposé mille fois les 
troupes du roi 4 la disette au milieu de l’abondance? Ce goût d’in- 
trigue et de fortune adroitement inspiré et soutenu pour attribuer à une 
espèce de fatalité le désastre affreux qui en devait être la suite? Cet 
esprit mercantile qui avait saisi jusqu’au simple soldat et enlevait au 
devoir * une milice entière qui avait l’ennemi aux portes ? 

“Le Canada avait été longtemps dans une espèce d’oubli; ce n’est 
que depuis environ trente-cinq ans * que la France ouvrit les yeux sur 


1 La clique de l'intendant Bigot qui a fait un Panama sur le Saint- 
Laurent. 

211 veut dire: Faible population; ressources du pays très peu dévelop- 
pées; mauvaise administration; le tout présentant un état précaire; la colonie 
incapable de tenter seule la résistance nécessaire pour se sauver. 

3 Le devoir envers la famille et le soin de la vie ordinaire. 

“Régime de M. de Beauharnois, gouverneur général, arrivé au mois 
d'août 1726, retourné en France le 14 octobre 1747; et Gilles Hocquart, inten- 
dant de 1729 A 1748. La Galissonnière succéda à Beauharnois. Bigot à 
Hocquart. Bigot resta intendant l’espace de douze ans sous divers gouver- 
neurs. 


60 SOCIÉTÉ ROYALE DU CANADA 


l’opulence naturelle de ces belles possessions et les avantages qu’elle en 
pouvait retirer. Dès ce moment on y découvrit des sources de richesses, 
qu'auparavant on n’avait pas même soupconnées : 1 des mines de fer et 
de cuivre, des bois de construction, des goudrons, des gommes précieuses, 
partout des terres fertiles qui n’attendaient que des bras, et dont les pre- 
miers essais donnaient déjà beaucoup au delà des besoins ; des communi- 
cations faciles, des rivières navigables, des torrents rapides où mille forces 
mouvantes * pouvaient sans frais plier toute la nature à nos besoins 
Le commerce de France s’y porta avec plus de force et allait toujours 
croissant, d’année en année, en proportion de sa plus grande consomma- 
tion. La population était déjà montée à plus de quatre-vingt mille ames? 
et chaque jour y apportait des augmentations sensibles. Encore vingt 
ans, et cette fertile et immense colonie eut pour jamais assuré à la France 
le plus grand, le plus riche commerce du monde. Quel genre d’amélio- 
ration et d'augmentation aurait-on pu désirer dont elle n’eut pas été 
susceptible? Les produits du territoire, les usines, les chasses, les pêches, 
tout cela n’était encore qu’au berceau; quand. on formait un établisse- 
ment on en voyait autour de soi cent autres à exploiter, plus inépuisa- 
bles et plus riches encore; il semble que la nature avait amoncelé dans 
ces heureux climats mille trésors qu’elle n’attendait que le moment de 
répandre. 

“Des possessions si grandes, si belles; d’une richesse si solide, si 
durable, si peu limitée, ont-elles été connues ? et si le préjugé avait voulu 
les connaître, aurait-il fatigué le gouvernement de ses cris pour les faire 
céder à l’ennemi? Que l’Anglais, toujours occupé de ses vues d’agran- 
dissement, en demeure possesseur tranquille, dès ce moment sa grandeur 
et sa puissance n’ont plus de bornes, nul Etat au monde ne l’égalera du 
côté des forces et de l’immensité des ressources; il vaincra qui il voudra 
vaincre ; l'Amérique entière sera sa première conquête, les forces de ’An- 
gleterre n’y seront pas nécessaires, les coups seront portés sur nos Îles 
avant que l’Europe en ait eu connaissance. L’Espagne elle-même vient 
de voir de bien près la foudre qui doit un jour dévaster ses ovulents 
domaines du Nouveau-Monde. 

“On l’a déjà dit, toutes les rivières, tous les lacs, toutes les baies, 
tous les golfes du Canada, abondent en poissons de toutes les espèces ; le 
plus avide pêcheur peut donner carrière à ses vastes désirs, il remplira ses 
vaisseaux des siècles entiers de toutes les pêches qu’il voudra choisir, et 


1 Depuis plus d’un siècle on les connaissait en Canada, seulement on ne 
s’en doutait pas dans le royaume, par la faute des marchands de fourrures 
qui avaient étouffé la colonie dès sa naissance. 

2 Cette observation est remarquable pour le temps. 

#Ce chiffre est exagéré puisque, en 1765, il n’y avait pas tout à fait 
soixante-dix mille âmes. 


[SULTE] LE COMMERCE DE FRANCE 61 


la nature les lui reproduira avec la même prodigalité. Morues, sardines, 
harengs, marsouins, loups marins, vaches marines, baleines,cachalots, etc., 
tout se présente au dard ou à l’hameçon et en si grande quantité que le 
pêcheur succombe sous des travaux si vifs et si rapides... Si l'Anglais 
nous interdit les pêches, s’il nous refuse un asile pour les exploiter ou, 
ce qui revient au même, s’il en offre un entièrement inutile, ce n’est pas 
précisément pour nous forcer d’acheter de lui ces mêmes denrées que nous 
procureraient nos travaux; c’est pour anéantir dans la source toute notre 
navigation, et porter en même temps la sienne à un point d’élévation qui 
puisse lui faire braver toutes les forces navales de l'Europe séparées ou 
réunies. C’est le golfe Saint-Laurent, c’est dans les mers qui l’avoisinent 
que se forment ses matelots et les nôtres; toutes les autres navigations 
les détruisent ; celle-ci en est la première et les conserve; après cette 
perte irréparable, nul espoir ne reste à la France de rétablir sa marine, 
et les deux mers qui la baignent et qui jadis virent les triomphes, inutiles 
désormais, à son commerce et à sa vengeance, ne serviront qu'à nous 
montrer de plus près l’énorme puissance que notre pusillanimité aura 
formée de ses propres mains, 

“Voila donc, entre les mains des Anglais, deux fondements indes- 
tructibles et à jamais inépuisables de la plus puissante marine: le Ca- 
nada et les pêches de ses golfes... Notre commerce avec le Canada et 
Vile Royale ne faisait que commencer et déjà, dans les quatre années qui 
ont précédé la guerre, nous y envoyions, des divers ports de France, 
cinquante-cinq à soixante navires (on ne,parle pas des bâtiments destinés 
pour la pêche, qui vont de trois à quatre cents) chaque année et appor- 
tait à ce commerce des accroissements sensibles... Le fond de notre 
commerce avec le Canada et l’île Royale avait cela d’avantageux qu’il 
n’était composé que de denrées et marchandises du cru et des fabriques 
du royaume: des vins, des eaux-de-vie, des sels,? des étoifes de laine, des 
toiles, des cotonnades, des soiries, des chapeaux, ete La plupart de 
ces effets consommaient nos laines de France, et une multitude innom- 
brable d'ouvriers des deux sexes vivaient de ce commerce... Les retours 
du Canada sont connus. Les pelleteries de toute espèce... des pêches... 
des huiles de poisson qui déjà avaient porté la mégisserie du royaume 
au plus haut point de splendeur ; le ginseng, cette plante précieuse, que 


? Durant les onze dernières années du régime francais, la Rochelle avait 
expédié au Canada des navires au nombre de cent cinquante-un: 1749, 10; 
D ERIC T2 UG Libs. Lis 154, Losi 5, 16% 756 tis Urn. 15: 
hiss MF 1759; 1. 

*Trois produits particuliers A la Rochelle. 

* Aussi le vermillon, les rassades, les fers de flèche pour les Sauvages, 
les couteaux dits bucheron, flatin, croche, siamois, à jambette, à manche de 
bois, tant pour les Français que pour les Sauvages. 


62 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


le Chinois achète au poids de Vor; le tabac qui y croît partout et dont 
la qualité égale celle des meilleurs du monde, et tout cela n’était encore 
que de faibles commencements, des essais, des ébauches dans les exploita- 
tions de tout genre; encore était-on arrété et contredit partout par une 
administration avide, envahissante, qui ramenait tout a elle et qui, du 
poids de son autorité, étouffait tous les germes d’émulation et de zéle...” 


VL 


Le mal était fait; la situation irrémédiable; tout ce qui resta à la | 
France furent les îles Saint-Pierre et Miquelon, avec la pêche sur une 
partie des côtes de Terreneuve. De ces concessions, il résulta que la ma- 
rine française put, conserver un champ de manœuvre où ses matelots se 
sont formés depuis cent quarante ans. Qui sait si les remontrances de 
la Rochelle et des autres yilles n’ont pas, dans le temps du traité de 1763, 
contribué pour beauçoup à inspirer le ministère français dans sa persis- 
tance à se faire accorder au moins ces réserves? C’est assez probable. 
Nous avons vu depuis, chaque fois que la question du French shore de 
Terreneuve s’est soulevée, que la France tenait à son privilège en raison 
de l'utilité que sa marine en retirait et, l’an dernier encore, lorsque 
l'affaire fut réglée moyennant compensation, cet argument se présenta 
le premier en évidence. Quant à Saint-Pierre et Miquelon, dès 1762, 
Roubaud, qui travaillait du côté anglais, sonnait l’alarme en disant que 
si ces deux îles restaient françaises elles deviendraient des nids de con- 
trebandiers, en quoi il ne se trompait pas. L’annexion de Terreneuve 
au Canada est possible maintenant par suite de Vabsence du privilège, 
mais les îles restent étrangères au drapeau britannique. 

Les lettres et mémoires cités plus haut font remonter à l’origine de 
la colonie l’état de chose qui devait aboutir à l’abandon de la Nouvelle- 
France, ce qui est d’accord avec l’histoire, car en 1759 il ne restait plus 
une seule, faute à commettre pour amener la séparation. Le voisinage 
des Anglais avait constamment doublé les embarras d’une situation déjà 
critique par elle-même, et l’on n’avait pas su imiter leur exemple en 
fortifiant notre population sous le rapport du nombre et des libertés qui 
facilitent le commerce et les industries. Le régime était faux, ses con- 
séquences devaient être désastreuses. 

Le roi, souverain maître du sol, des hommes et des animaux, par- 
tout où flottait son pavillon, se trouvait être le marchand général du 
Canada et il conduisait les affaires par l’entremise de quelques agents 
favorisés, tous gens qui avaient leur fortune à faire. Ce monopole allait 
à l’encontre du développement de la colonie; il était tout à l’avantage 
des ramasseurs de peaux de castor, mais en France, lorsque l’on parlait 
du Canada c’était à cause de ces derniers et non pas en pensant à la 


[suuTE] ' LE COMMERCE DE FRANCE 63 


colonie réelle. La culture des champs wattirait nullement l’attention ; 
‘aucune industrie ne pouvait naître parce que cela offusquait les manu- 
facturiers de France. Le Canada n’était qu’un enfant à peine sorti du 
berceau et se traînant en langeur, sans parvenir à pouvoir marcher. 
Les commerçants de fourrures lamusaient en le détournant de sa car- 
rière naturelle. Après de longues années, il sembla acquérir un peu 
de vigueur et se dressa debout; alors on Jui mit un mousquet entre les 
mains pour aller combattre les Anglais qui gênaient le trafic des gens 
du roi. Cette bele éducation lui valut après des guerres épuisantes, de 
devenir possession britannique et alors il se trouva libéré du régime 
débilitant de son enfance. 

Du côté des Anglais, nos voisins, les choses se passaient autrement. 
Le troi d'Angleterre laissait ses sujets s'arranger à leur guise, de sorte 
que une partie des colons s’adonnaient à la culture du sol, d’autres aux 
industries, ou à la navigation, le commerce et, parmi ces derniers, un 
certain nombre s’occupaient de tirer des pelleteries en s’approchant des 
tribus sauvages, parfois assez éloignées d’eux, mais sans y mettre autant 
dardeur que les Français. Non seulement ces colons exploitaient les 
ressources de leur pays, mais ils se gouvernaient eux-mêmes, tandis que 
chez nous la moindre affaire dépendait de la dictée de Versailles. Se 
rend-on compte, maintenant, (le la nature des choses dans des conditions 
si différentes? Ici la faiblesse; là-bas la force. On a dit que la ques- 
tion des frontières alluma le feu de la guerre, oui, pour complaire au 
commerce de fourrures qui n’avait jamais assez de territoire à parcourir. 
Les traiteurs, de part et d’autre, finissaient par se rencontrer. William 
Pitt comprit ce que l’Angleterre gagnerait à s'emparer du Canada. 


Secrion I., 1906. [65] Mémorress $. R. C, 


IV.—Les successeurs de La Vérendrye—sous la domination Française. 
1. Joseph Fleurimont de Noyelles; 2. Jacques Repentigny Le 
Gardeur, Sieur de Saint-Pierre; 3. Saint-Luc de La Corne. 


1743-1755. 


Par le juge L. A. PRUD’HOMME. 


(Lu 22 mai 1906.) 


Notes Préliminaires. 


C’est le triste privilège des hommes de bien, qui ont accompli de 
grandes choses par leur mérite personnel et leur courage persévérant, 
d’être en butte aux mauvaises passions et de soulever autour d’eux une 
meute d’envieux, jaloux de leur gloire. Les âmes mesquines et étroites, 
corrodées par le venin de la colère et du dépit, fruits secs et impuissants, 
s’acharnent avec ardeur à rabaisser la réputation de ceux qui les offus- 
quent, espérant se grandir sur les ruines des hommes illustres qu’elles 
désirent supplanter. Sentant leur incapacité à s’élever jusqu’à la hau- 
teur de ces géants, elles s’efforcent par mille roueries de réduire leur 
taille à leur propre mesure. Ce spectacle navrant de l’histoire de notre 
pauvre humanité déchue, offre quelque chose de pénible à constater et 
est bien propre à faire monter l’indignation aux cœurs justes, nobles 
et droits. 

C’est ainsi, par exemple, que Christophe Colomb, qui découvrit 
Amérique, recut des chaînes pour récompense. Oa lui déroba 
Phonneur, qui lui revenait en toute justice, de donner son 
nom au continent qu’il venait de révéler au monde. La Vérendrye ne 
fut guère mieux traité. A force de sacrifices et de constance dans les 
plus cruelles épreuves, après avoir versé le sang des siens, et épuisé toutes 
ses ressources personnelles, il réussit à se frayer un chemin depuis les 
rivages du lac Supérieur, jusqu'aux premiers pics des Montagnes Ro- 
cheuses. Il reconnut tout cet immense océan de prairies, les principales 
rivières qui l’arrosent et les nombreuses tribus sauvages qui habitaient 
cette région jusqu'alors inconnue des blancs. Il sillonna de forts ou de 
postes, la route des canots jusqu’à la fourche des deux branches de la 
Saskatchewan, et amena avec lui des généreux missionnaires qui com- 
mencèrent à évangéliser les aborigènes. Bref, il conquit à sa patrie, un 
territoire au moins quatre fois plus vaste que la France. Pour le ré- 
compenser de services si distingués, on le laissa gémir dans l’indigence, 
et on chercha à couvrir son nom d’opprobre, en prêtant à ses plus nobles 


66 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


actions, des motifs d’intérét sordide et d’ambition personnelle. Pauvre 
et méconnu, il mourut à la peine, laissant sa famille dans une extrême 
gène. Ses enfants qui avaient partagé ses travaux se virent chassés du 
Nord-Ouest et pendant plus d’un siècle leur nom demeura enseveli dans 
Poubl. Mais Vhistoire est fatale à l’ambition et à l’injustice et elle est 
venue enfin venger la mémoire des La Vérendrye. 

La Vérendrye eut trois successeurs: MM. de Noyelles, Le Gardeur 
de Saint-Pierre et Saint Luc de la Corne. Saint-Pierre eut pour lieu- 
tenant M. de Niverville, qui alla plus loin que son chef. M. de Noyelles 
était un homme de cœur, qui comprenait l’injustice commise envers le 
Découvreur. Il laissa aux fils le soin de continuer l’œuvre du père. 
Ils remontèrent la Saskatchewan jusqu’à la fourche, où ils établirent 
un fort. Saint-Pierre, Niverville, Saint-Luc de la Corne viendront dans 
la suite, et marcheront sur leurs brisées, sans s’aventurer au-delà, si l’on 
en excepte l’expédition sans chef qui éleva le fort La Jonquière. C’est 
ce que nous allons constater en offrant une réparation tardive, à ces 
nobles fils de la Nouvelle-France. 

L’an dernier j’ai eu l’honneur de présenter devant la Société Royale, 
une étude sur la vie de La Vérendrye. Je me propose aujourd’hui de 
poursuivre ce travail, et de consacrer quelques lignes aux successurs de 
ce grand homme. Elles complèteront le tableau des principaux événe- 
ments qui se sont accomplis dans cette partie du Canada, sous la Domi- 
nation Française.! 


Le Capitaine Charles Joseph Fleurimont de Noyelles et les fils de La 
Vérendrye. 


1743-1750. 


Le capitaine de Noyelles, qui succéda à La Vérendrye, était un 
homme de mérite, exercé aux grandes courses et habitué à la vie des 
pays d’en haut. En 1720, il avait eu le commandement du poste im- 
portant de Détroit, où il avait été remplacé par A. de Tonty. On le 
retrouve en charge du même poste en 1728 et de 1738 à 1741. Il fut 
promu au grade de capitaine en 1732. En 1735 on l’envoya faire une 
campagne contre les Renards, à la tête d’un corps de cadets. La même 
année que La Vérendrye démissionna (1743) le capitaine de Noyelles 


1 C’est dans la collection des pièces publiées par M. Pierre Margry que la 
plupart de mes renseignements sont puisés, mais comme tout est pêle-mêle 
dans cette collection, j'ai cru bien faire en groupant ici les passages qui con- 
cernent le Nord-Ouest, vu qu’il est impossible de les comprendre sans leur 
donner de l’ordre et de la suite. J’y ajoute le classement des forts qui peut 
servir de base à l'étude des expéditions sous le régime francais. 


[pruD’HomMME] LES SUCCESSEURS DE LA VERENDRYE 67 


fut chargé de poursuivre les découvertes de l’ouest. Il était autorisé à 
prendre possession des postes établis par le Découvreur, sans compen- 
sation pour ce dernier. 

L’état des esprits au Nord-Ouest exigeait à cette époque une maip 
sure et expérimentée. Les Sioux d’un côté et les Serpents de l’autre 
brûlaient du désir d’écraser leurs ennemis. 

Les sauvages ne s’aventuraient plus dans la prairie, qu’entourés de 
toutes les précautions possibles et par bandes. Le fort La Reine, qui se 
trouvait peu éloigné de la zône habitée par les Sioux, souffrait de ce 
règne de terreur, qui était répandu partout. La traite était devenue 
plus difficile et moins abondante. Bon nombre de Cris reprirent la route 
de la baie d'Hudson. M. de Noyelles, qui n’avait ni les connaissances, 
ni la supériorité de La Vérendrye, ne s’épargna pas cependant pour parer 
à cette situation. Il admirait son prédécesseur et semble avoir regretté 
sincèrement qu’il eut été ainsi dépouillé du fruit de ses conquêtes. Ces 
sentiments lui font honneur. Ne pouvant convenablement lui offrir de 
- s’associer à ses travaux, il appela ses fils à son aide en 1747. L’un d’eux, 
le chevalier Pierre Gaultier, se rendit au fort La Reine. On y constate 
sa présence en 1745; et la même année, il retourna à Montréal. 

Au printemps 1747, le chevalier La Vérendrye était en route pour 
Montréal avec une bande de Christinaux et quelques autres sauvages 
amis, lorsqu'il rencontra sur son chemin un parti de guerre qui s’en 
allait faire une incursion sur le territoire de la Nouvelle-Angleterre. Il 
ne pouvait manquer une si bonne aubaine. Il s’avança jusqu'aux en- 
virons d’Albany où il défit une troupe de Hollandais et d'Iroquois. Il 
se dirigea ensuite vers Montréal où il se trouvait le 29 mars 1747. 
J’ignore jusqu'où le chevalier La Vérendrye s’était rendu en 1746. Il 
peut se faire qu’il avait recruté ces Christinaux au fond du lac Supérieur 
ou même aux lacs La Pluie ou des Bois. 

De 1744 à 1747, M. de Noyelles prit des mesures pour parvenir à 
pacifier les sauvages. A cette fin, il visita le fort Kaministigoya et 
de ce poste il fit parvenir des messages aux Sioux et aux Cris, les 
suppliant d’enterrer la hache de guerre. I] chercha les moyens de con- 
voquer des députés de ces deux nations, dans une conférence de paix. 
Ses efforts n’aboutirent à rien. Le 20 juin 1747, il résolut de ne plus 
attendre et de marcher de l’avant. Il commença par s’assurer des ser- 
vices du chevalier La Vérendrye, et partit de Montréal avec lui, pour 
se rendre au fort La Reine. Parvenus a Michillimakinac, ils trouvèrent 
les Outaouais et les Sauteux en proie à une grande agitation. Certaines 
paroles menaçantes, échappées à des chefs influents, faisaient redouter 
un soulèvement. 


Sec, I., 1906. 5 


68 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Ils résolurent de rebrousser chemin pour en informer le gouverneur. 
Ils craignaient que le convoi de marchandises expédiées de Montréal a 
ce poste, ne tombat entre les mains de ces sauvages. Deux des fils de 
La Vérendrye acceptèrent d’accompagner les canots, pour les protéger 
contre toute attaque et le 14 octobre 1747, ils arrivaient heureusement 
à Michillimakinac. Ils constatèrent que la bonne entente, un moment 
troublée, avait été rétablie. M. de Noyelles n’alla done pas personnelle- 
ment prendre possession des forts de La Vérendrye, en 1747, et jusqu’à 
cette date des commis en charge y faisaient la traite, d’après ses ins- 
tructions. 

Au mois de janvier 1748, on constate que l’un des fils du Décou- 
vreur se mit à la tête d’un parti composé de Canadiens et d’Outaouais 
et alla guerroyer contre les Anglais et les Iroquois, 

M. de Noyelles, en juin 1748, voulut reprendre le voyage inter- 
rompu de l’année précédente. Il partit de nouveau de Montréal, avec 
le chevalier La) Vérendrye et atteignit cette fois le fort La Reine. Ils 
trouvèrent le fort Maurepas réduit en cendres par les sauvages. Le 
chevalier le rétablit ainsi que le fort La Reine qui tombait en ruine. 
M. de Noyelles se hata ensuite d’envoyer le chevalier ainsi que son frére 
Francois fonder des postes dans la direction des lacs Manitoba et Win- 
nipeg, aux endroits qu’ils jugeraient convenable. 


Fort Dauphin rétabli en 1748 et Fort Bourbon fondé la même année 
par les fils de La Vérendrye. 


Les fils de La Vérendrye se rendirent tout d’abord à la pointe nord- 
ouest du lac Dauphin où ils relevèrent le fort du même nom, précé- 
demment érigé au même endroit, à l’automne 1741. De là, se dirigeant 
toujours vers le nord et passant probablement par le lac du Cygne, ils 
arrivèrent à la rivière La Biche où ils construisirent un fort. » Le pre- 
mier fort Bourbon, se trouvait donc sur la rivière La Biche (Red Deer) 
qui se jette dans le lac Winnipegosis. (C’est à l’embouchure même de 
cette petite rivière que fut érigé ce fort. Plus tard, ils durent fonder 
le second fort Bourbon, à l’endroit où la Saskatchewan s’élargit pour 
former le lac Bourbon (Cedar). On a retrouvé les restes de ce dernier 
fort. Le premier fort Bourbon ne devait être qu’un poste d’occasion et 
il n’en est resté aucun vestige. 

Le lac Bourbon n’est séparé du lac Winnipegosis que par une langue 
de terre d’environ deux milles de largeur. Le terrain sur cette lisière 
est fort bas et marécageux. En été, on ne peut franchir cette étroite 
bande qu’à un endroit où s’élève comme un dos de chameau un sentier 
couvert de cailloux. Le reste du terrain ne constitue, à proprement 
parler, qu’une mousse tremblante à travers laquelle un voyageur, chargé 


2 


[PRUD’ HOMME] LES SUCCESSEURS DE LA VERENDRYE 69 


d’un fardeau un peu lourd, risquerait beaucoup de s’enfoncer. Un bon 
nombre d'anciens du pays ont cru, qu'au temps de La Vérendrye, les 
lacs Bourbon et Winnipegosis ne formaient qu’un seul et même bassin 
d’eau, sans division. 

Remontant ensuite la rivière Saskatchewan, appelée Poskoyac par 
les sauvages, le chevalier La Vérendrye explora cette rivière jusqu’à la 
fourche formée par la réunion des branches nord et sud. A tous les 
printemps, les Christineaux des montagnes, des prairies et des rivières, à 
l’ouest et au nord de ces deux embranchements, se réunissaient à la 
fourche pour tenir conseil et décider s’ils allaient se rendre avec leur 
fourrure aux postes français ou à la Baie chez les Anglais. 


Fort Poskoyac fondé par le chevalier La Vérendrye en 1748. 


La fourche était tout indiquée d’avance, pour les raisons qui 
viennent d’être données, pour l'établissement d’un fort. (C’est la que 
plus tard devait s’élever le fort La Corne. En attendant, le chevalier, 
qui avait déjà construit deux forts durant l’année, dit se contenter d’y 
ériger un poste peu important. La saison était trop avancée pour en 
faire davantage, Il lui donna le nom de Poskoyac, qui était celui de 
la rivière qui coulait à ses pieds. Il dut l’abandonner pendant Vhiver, 
remonta les eaux de la Saskatchewan. Il apprit des sauvages que cette 
rivière prenait sa source dans les Montagnes Rocheuses, qu'il avait 
visitées en 1743. 


M. de Noyelles remplacé par Le Gardeur de Saint-Pierre. Dernières 
années des fils de La Vérendrye. 


En 1750, M. de Noyelles, qui était allé rendre compte de son admi- 
nistration au gouverneur, fut remplacé par Le Gardeur de Saint-Pierre. 
Les fils de La Vérendrye présentèrent à l’intendant Bigot, une requête 
dans laquelle ils exposaient leurs droits à continuer l’œuvre de leur 
père. Cet homme néfaste refusa de les entendre. Sous son régime, la 
justice ne se rendait pas; elle se vendait. Or, les fils de La Vérendrye 
étaient pauvres et honnêtes. Dans ces conditions, ils ne pouvaient pas 
s'attendre à recevoir quoique ce fut de Bigot. Ils offrirent alors à M. 
de Saint-Pierre de servir sous ses ordres, comme ils venaient de le faire 
sous M. de Noyelles. Saint-Pierre, peut-être jaloux de leur mérite ou 
du moins incapable d'apprécier un tel acte de magnanimité, les repoussa 
On refusa même de leur rendre les livres de compte et les marchandises 
qu’ils avaient en propre dans les forts. Voyant linutilité de leurs efforts, 
les trois fils de La Vérendrye reprirent la carrière des armes. L’un 
d'eux, qui était enseigne, fut tué au siège de Québec. Le chevalier 


70 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


devint lieutenant et périt au mois d’octobre 1761 dans le naufrage de 
PAuguste; ce navire ramenait en France nombre dofficiers français, 
parmi lesquels plusieurs s’étaient avancés à l’ouest du lac Supérieur, tels: 
que La Durantaye, Boucher de Laperrière et Saint-Luc de la Corne. 


NoTE.—Il ne resta en Canada qu’un seul fils de La Vérendrye, qui a 
probablement fait souche. C’est le plus jeune nommé Louis Joseph. 
Il épousa en premières noces le 7 novembre 1755 Marie Amable Testard 
DeMontigny fille de Jacques DeMontigny. De ce mariage naquit une 
fille baptisée à la Longue Pointe. Sa première femme mourut en 1756. 
Le 31 janvier 1758 il épousait Louise Antoine Mezière de Lapervenche 
agée de 26 ans. Ce dernier acte de mariage est consigné dans les ré- 
gistres de Laprairie, P. Q. Il paraitrait que Louis Joseph Gauthier de 
La Vérendrye alla demeurer à Montréal où il vécut jusqu'en 1797.—II 
était officier. A-t-il laissé des descendants mâles qui auraient pris tout 
simplement le nom de “ Gauthier” ?— 


Le capitaine Jacques Repentigny Le Gardeur, sieur de Saint-Pierre, 
chevalier de l’ordre militaire de Saint-Lows, 1750-1753. 


Ce vaillant officier, second sieur de Saint-Pierre, était le plus jeune 
fils de Jean-Paul Le Gardeur et de Josette Leneuf de la Vallière. Il 
naquit en 1701, dans la seigneurie de Repentigny. Il était donc cana- 
dien, comme La Vérendrye. Dès l’âge de 15 ans, il commenga à servir 
son pays chez les sauvages. En 1732, il était enseigne dans l’armée 
coloniale et en 1735 il fut nommé commandant du fort Beauharnois, 
chez les Sioux. Il abandonna ce poste en 1737 et fut envoyé a la tête 
d’une expédition contre les Chickasaws. On le retrouve ensuite un peu 
partout, où il y avait un coup de feu à faire. En 1745, il conduisit un 
parti d’éclaireurs au fort Saint-Frédéric. De là, il prit la route de 
PAcadie. En 1747, on lui confia le commandement du poste le plus 
considérable sur les grands lacs, le fort de Michillimakinac. Enfin, en 
1750, il avait été promu au grade de capitaine, pour ses brillants états 
de service, et il reçut instruction de continuer les explorations de La 
Vérendrye, au Nord-Ouest. 

Cette fois, le gouvernement se chargeait de toutes les dépenses de 
cette expédition. On se proposait avant tout, d’amasser des fourrures. 
Les découvertes devaient venir au second plan. On devait traverser le 
continent à deux endroits à la fois. Pendant que Saint-Pierre parvien- 
drait aux rives du Pacifique par la vallée de la Saskatchewan, le capi- 
taine la Malgue de Marin devait atteindre le même but, en remontant 
le Missouri. Marin avait instruction de ne rien négliger pour pacifier 
les Sioux, tandis que Saint-Pierre s’employerait à obtenir le même ré- 


a 


sultat chez les Cris. Ils s’étaient donnés rendez-vous à une certaine 


[PRHD’ HOMME] LES SUCCESSEURS DE LA VERENDRYE 71 


latitude convenue, par dela les Montagnes Rocheuses. Cette expédition 
toutefois était subordonnée aux intéréts de la traite, qui devait primer 
tout. C’était le renversement de la politique de La Vérendrye. 


Le capitaine de la Malgue de Marin. 


Cet officier ne manquait pas de mérite, mais comme Saint-Pierre, 
il était âpre au gain. 

Saint-Pierre et Marin avaient associé a leur entreprise commune 
le gouverneur de la Jonquière, le fameux intendant Bigot, et le contrô- 
leur de la marine, M. de Bréard. Le premier but de cette expédition 
était une riche moisson de fourrure. Saint-Pierre et de Marin rem- 
porterent un plein succés sous ce rapport. Quant au projet de traverser 
le continent, il tomba à l’eau. Le capitaine Marin fut ensuite nommé 
commandant du district de la rivière Ohio (Belle-Rivière) et de ses 
dépendances. I] mourut au fort LeBoeuf à l’automne 1753. Son fils, 
qui était lieutenant, le remplaça chez les Sioux. Au mois d'août 1758, 
il était à la tête d’un parti de 250 hommes composés de canadiens et 
de sauvages. Il défit au fort Lidius le général Robert Rogers qui com- 
mandait un corps de 750 Anglais, apres lui avoir tué un grand nombre 
d'hommes. 


Saint-Pierre et de Niverville au fort La Reine en 1750. 


Saint-Pierre, qui avait le gouverneur et l’intendant pour associés, 
réalisa de gros profits, comme on le lui demandait, mais il se contenta 
de suivre les sentiers battus. Il partit de Montréal le 5 juin 1750. 
Après avoir fait 38 portages, sur la rivière Pigeon, dont le premier 
avait quatre lieues de longueur, et le moindre un quart de lieue, il se 
rendit au fort Saint-Pierre, où il eut une longue entrevue avec les 
sauvages. 

Il fit un stage aux forts Saint-Charles et Maurepas et ne cessa 
dexhorter les Cris à mettre fin à la guerre. Ses conseils ne produirent 
aucun effet et pendant lhiver, Cris et Sioux continuérent à se scalper 
et à couvrir les lacs et les prairies de sang et de désolation. Saint- 
Pierre était accompagné d’un jeune officier, parent de La Vérendrye, 
le chevalier Boucher de Niverville, enseigne des troupes du Canada. 
Les Français des divers postes se trouvaient dans une grande disette de 
vivres, par suite du départ des sauvages pour une campagne contre les 
Sioux. Dans ces circonstances, afin d’avoir moins de bouches à nourrir, 
il fit partir Niverville pour la rivière Poskoyac. Niverville et ses com- 
pagnons faillirent mourir de faim dans ce voyage. Ils cachèrent une 
partie de leurs provisions dans le bois, pour leur retour et amenèrent le 
reste sur des traines sauvages. Malgré le soulagement que lui apportait 


72 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


le départ de la brigade qui suivait Niverville, Saint-Pierre se trouvait 
dans une grande gêne, à un tel point qu’il dût détacher une autre bande 
de ses hommes, pour. les envoyer chasser, dans les bois avoisinants le 
fort La Reine. Saint-Pierre avoue que le jeûne rigide qu’il fut obligé 
d'observer, finit par ébranler sa santé et le mit hors d’état de ne rien 
entreprendre. Il profita toutefois de la présence de quelques prisonniers 
de guerre que les Cris et les Assiniboines lui amenèrent au fort La 
Reine pour obtenir une suspension des hostilités. Cédant à ses prières, 
ces sauvages lui remirent les prisonniers et il les renvoya sains et saufs 
à leur tribu, avec des paroles de paix. Cet expédient eut le succès voulu 
et fit cesser momentanément la guerre. 


Expédition du chevalier Boucher de Niverville. Fort La Jonquière 
fondé en 1751. Départ de Saint-Pierre pour ce. dernier poste. 
Il rebrousse chemin. Apprécialion des sauvages par Saint- 
Pierre. 


Saint-Pierre avait donné ordre à Niverville d'aller établir un fort 
à 300 lieues plus haut que celui de Poskoyac. Cette expédition ne 
devait quitter le fort La Reine qu’au printemps 1751, mais la famine 
força Saint-Pierre de devancer le temps. Niverville quitta le fort La 
Reine tard dans l’automne 1750. 

Les glaces le forcèrent bientôt @abandonner ses canots et de conti- 
nuer le voyage à pied. Le 29 mai 1751, il fit partir du fort Poskoyac 
deux canots, montés par dix hommes, qui devaient se rendre aux Mon- 
tagnes Rocheuses. Il devait lui-même, un mois après, se mettre à leur 
suite. Une maladie fort grave, dont il faillit mourir et qui le réduisit 
à une telle extrémité, qu’il ne pouvait plus écrire, le força de rester à 
ce poste. Ces dix Français remontèrent la Saskatchewan, jusqu’à l’en- 
droit occupé aujourd’hui par Calgarry. Ils y construisirent un fort con- 
sidérable, dans lequel ils amassèrent une grande quantité de provisions, 
en attendant l’arrivée de Niverville, leur chef. En 1875 le capitaine 
E. Brisebois, de la police à cheval, fut chargé de bâtir un fort au pied 
des Montagnes Rocheuses. Il l’érigea sur les bords de la rivière des 
Arcs, à l’endroit même qu’occupait jadis le fort La Jonquière, dont il 
retrouva les ruines et lui donna le nom de “ Fort Brisebois,” auquel a 
succédé depuis celui de Calgarry. 

Au printemps 1751, Niverville envoya quelques engagés au fort La 
Reine pour informer Saint-Pierre de ce qu’il avait fait et de la maladie 
qui menaçait de le terrasser. Saint--Pierre partit au cours de lPété 
(1751) pour se rendre au Grand-Portage, avec les fourrures recues 
vages qui comptaient de 40 a 50 cabanes, autour du nouveau fort, la 
se disposait à se rendre au fort La Jonquière. Il quitta le fort La 


[PRUD’ HOMME] LES SUCCESSEURS DE LA VERENDRYE 73 


Reine le 14 novembre. Quelques jours aprés son départ et avant d’avoir 
pu arriver jusqu’a Niverville, il rencontra deux Frangais et quatre 
sauvages, qui lui apprirent que Niverville ne se portait pas mieux. Ils 
lui dirent également que les Assiniboines avaient tué un parti de sau- 
vages qui comptaient de 40 a 50 cabanes, autour du nouveau fort, La 
Jonquière. Or, ces sauvages qui s’appelaient “ Yatché-Jillini” devaient 
être les guides de Saint-Pierre. Les Assiniboines, toujours fourbes, 
avaient commencé par festoyer avec eux, pendant cinq jours, leur pro- 
diguant tous les témoignages de la plus grande amitié. Le sixième 
jour se trouvant plus nombreux qu'eux, ils se jetèrent tout à coup sur 
leurs ennemis sans défense et les égorgèrent presque tous, sans pitié, 
moins quelques femmes et enfants qu’ils amenèrent prisonniers. On ne 
saurait dire au juste jusqu'où Saint-Pierre se rendit, mais il n’est pas 
probable qu’il atteignit la Saskatchewan. Cette nouvelle dérangeait 
tous ses plans et il décida sur le champ de retourner sur ses pas. Il 
était de retour au fort La Reine avant le 14 février 1752. 

Saint-Pierre s'était formé ,une bien triste opinion des tribus sau- 
vages du Nord-Ouest. Aussi il ne les ménage pas dans ses apprécia- 
tions: “ Voilà 36 ans, dit-il, que je suis parmi les sauvages, mais je 
n’en ai jamais vu qui égalent en perfidie ceux en question.” Il ren- 
contra des aborigènes qui lui montrérent des chevaux et des selles qu’ils 
avaient reçus en échange, des Serpents. Ces derniers, sans doute, se les 
étaient procurés des Espagnols. Si, à cette époque, les chemins de fer 
ne sillonnaient pas nos prairies sans fin, les moyens de communication 
ne manquaient pas absolument aux sauvages. En peu de temps, les 
articles obtenus des blancs, sur le littoral du Pacifique ou au golfe du 
Mexique, passaient de tribu en tribu, jusque dans l’intérieur du conti- 
nent. Saint-Pierre rapporte que, d’après le témoignage des sauvages, 
les Anglais de la Baie d'Hudson encourageaient les Cris qui visitaient 
leurs forts, 4 faire la guerre contre les nations qui n’allaient pas traiter 
à la baie. “ Ces sauvages, ajoute-t-il, au nombre de 59,000 hommes, en 
état de porter les armes, aiment d’inclination les Français, mais crai- 
gnent les Anglais. Les Anglais fâchés de n’avoir pas en quantité des 
pelleteries à la baie d'Hudson, envoient des colliers à ces sauvages, pour 
leur défendre, sous peine de périr, d’en porter ailleurs que chez eux, ce 
à quoi n’ayant point obéi et étant morts 800 personnes d’un rhume, ils 
furent tous saisis de peur, et se dirent que le Manitou les avait affligés, 
a la priére des Anglais.” 


Attaque du fort La Reine par les Assiniboines, le 22 février 1752. 


Saint-Pierre était bien éloigné de posséder l’esprit conciliant de 
La Vérendrye. Dans ses mémoires, on constate par les épithètes qu’il 


74 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


décoche à l’adresse des sauvages, qu’il ne les aimait guère. Ils ne tar- 
dèrent pas à se rendre compte de ces sentiments à leur égard. L’incident 
qui va suivre indique que les choses étaient bien changées depuis le 
départ de La Vérendrye. Ce dernier était invité par toutes les tribus 
de venir se fixer chez elles. Les sauvages pleuraient quand ils le re- 
voyaient après quelques mois d’absence. On se disputait la joie de le 
posséder et à la mort de son fils, tous les Cris étaient debout frémissant 
de rage, sollicitant en vain du Découvreur l’ordre d’aller le venger et 
adoptant son second fils comme chef. Cette bonne amitié ne cessa un 
instant de régner, pendant tout le temps que La Vérendrye ou ses fils 
explorèrent l’ouest. Deux ans après leur départ, les indigènes brûlaient 
les forts qu’ils avaient aidés à élever et se liguaient pour chasser les 
Français du pays. Ces faits éloquents se passent de commentaires. 

Je laisse la parole à Saint-Pierre lui-même, qui va nous raconter 
comment il faillit un jour être massacré, avec tous les Français du fort 
La Reine: “Le 22 février 1752, vers 9 heures a.m., je me trouvais 
dans ce fort avec 5 Français. J’avais envoyé le surplus de mes gens, 
consistant en 14 personnes, chercher des vivres dont je manquais depuis 
plusieurs jours. J’étais tranquille dans ma chambre, lorsqu'il entra 
dans mon fort 200 Assiniboëls tous armés. Ces sauvages se disper- 
sèrent en un instant dans toutes les maisons. Plusieurs entrèrent chez 
moi sans être armés, les autres restèrent dans le fort. Mes gens vinrent 
m’avertir de la contenance de ces sauvages. Je courrus à eux; je leur 
dis vertement qu'ils étaient bien hardis de venir en foule armés, chez 
mol, l’un d’eux me répondit en Christinaux qu’ils venaient pour fumer. 
Je leur dis que ce n’était pas de la façon dont ils devaient s’y prendre 
et qu'ils eussent à se retirer sur le champ. Je crus que la fermeté avec 
laquelle je leur avais parlé, les avait un peu intimidés, surtout ayant 
mis à la porte quatre de ces sauvages les plus résolus, sans qu’ils eussent 
dit un mot. Je fus tout de suite chez moi, mais dans le moment un 
soldat vint m’avertir que le corps de garde était plein de ces sauvages 
et qu’ils s'étaient rendus maîtres des armes. Je me hâtai de me rendre 
au corps de garde. Je fis demander à ces sauvages par un Christinaux, 
qui me servait d’interprète, quelles étaient leurs vues, et pendant ce 
temps-là, je me disposais au combat avec ma faible troupe. Mon inter- 
prète, qui me trahissait, me dit que ces sauvages n’avaient aucun mau- 
vais dessein et dans la minute un orateur Assiniboël, qui n’avait cessé 
de me faire de belles harangues, dit à mon interprète que, malgré lui, 
sa nation voulait me tuer et me piller. A peine eus-je pénétré dans 
leur résolution, que j’oubliai qu’il fallait prendre les armes. Je me 
saisis d’un tison de feu ardent. J’enfongai la porte de la poudriére; 
je défonçai un baril de poudre, sur lequel je promenai mon tison, en 


{PRUD’HOMME] LES SUCCESSEURS DE LA VERENDRYE 75 


faisant dire à ces sauvages d’un ton assuré, que je ne périrais point par 
leurs mains et qu’en mourant j’aurais la gloire de leur faire à tous subir 
mon même sort. Ces sauvages virent plutôt mon tison et mon baril de 
* poudre défoncé, qu’ils n’entendirent mon interprète; ils volérent tous à 
la porte du fort, qu’ils ébranlèrent considérablement, tant ils sortaient 
avec précipitation. J’abandonnai bien vite mon tison et n’eus rien de 
plus pressé que d’aller fermer la|porte de mon fort. Le péril dont je 
m'étais heureusement délivré en me mettant en danger de périr moi- 
même, me laissait une grande inquiétude pour les 14 hommes que j’avais 
envoyé chercher des vivres. Je fis bon quart sur mes bastions. Je ne 
vis plus d’ennemis et sur le soir, mes 14 hommes arrivèrent sans avoir 
eu aucune rencontre.” 


Saint-Pierre abandonne le fort La Reine au printemps 1752. Les 
Christinaux brilent ce fort. Il hiverne au fort Rouge, 1752-1753. 
Délégués Cris et Sioux à Michillimakinac pour traiter de la paix. 
Saint-Luc de la Corne le remplace, 1753. Caractère de Saint- 
Pierre. Ses exploits glorieux. Sa mort le 8 septembre 1755. 


Saint-Pierre passa tranquillement le reste de l’hiver dans son fort, ‘ 
sans autre incident important. Au printemps, craignant de laisser des 
Frangais au fort, pendant son voyage annuel au Grand-Portage, pour 
transporter les fourrures et ramener des marchandises, il prit tout son 
monde avec lui. Quatre jours après son départ du fort La Reine, les 
Assiniboines y mirent le feu, et ce fort si considérable, le quartier 
général des Français de l’ouest, fut réduit en cendre. Saint-Pierre 
n'apprit cet événement que le 29 septembre 1752, alors qu’il revenait du 
Grand-Portage et se trouvait au bas de la rivière Winnipeg. Il décida 
d’hiverner à la Riviére-Rouge, sans doute au fort Rouge, construit par 
M. D’Amour de Louvière, au mois d'octobre 1738. Au lieu de se porter 
de lavant, il se voyait dans la nécessité de reculer. 

Au printemps de 1753, Niverville, qui avait fini par se rétablir, 
quittait la Saskatchewan, après un séjour de deux ans et demi à la four- 
che de cette rivière. Les hommes qu’il avait envoyés fonder le 
fort La Jonquière, informés de la maladie de Niverville avaient aban- 
donné ce poste et étaient retournés au fort Poskoyac où Niverville les 
attendait. Ils trouvèrent en passant, les ruines du fort La Reine et 
rencontrèrent en route Saint-Pierre et ses engagés, avec lesquels ils se 
rendirent au Grand-Portage. On eut dit que les Francais se retiraient 
de l’ouest. Cette retraite était une mauvaise note pour Saint-Pierre. 
Même au point de vue commercial, sa mission n’avait pas eu tous les 
résultats qu’on en attendait. Il avoue lui-même que les Anglaïs de la 
baie d'Hudson lui enlevaient plus de fourrures que tous les postes de la 
colonie n’en pouvaient rentrer. Après leur retour au Grand-Portage, 


76 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


en juillet 1753, ni Saint-Pierre, ni Niverville ne retourna au Nord- 
Ouest. Saint-Pierre fut remplacé par Saint-Luc de la Corne, cousin 
germain de La Vérendrye. 

J’ai déjà dit un mot du dessein de Saint-Pierre d’amener les sau- 
vages à faire la paix. Le heutenant/de Marin, qui avait succédé à son 
père en 1752, devait travailler, de concert avec lui, à faire cesser les 
hostilités entre les Sioux et les Cris; il obtint des Sioux des lacs et des 
bois la promesse d'envoyer des députés à Michillimakinac pour cimenter 
cette union désirée. Les Cris, à la demande de Saint-Pierre, en firent 
autant. Le 29 février 1753, Marin écrivit à Saint-Pierre, du pays des 
Sioux où il commandait, l’informant que les Sioux des lacs et des bois 
étaient prêts à se séparer complètement des Sioux des prairies et même 
à se liguer contre eux avec les Christinaux, s’ils ne voulaient pas con- 
sentir à signer un traité de paix. Marin avertissait Saint-Pierre, qu'à 
cet effet, il amènerait avec lui plusieurs chefs Sioux à Michillimakinae, 
durant l’été suivant, et l’invitait à ne pas manquer d'arriver avec les 
délégués Christinaux, au lieu du rendez-vous. 


Au mois d’août 1753, Saint-Pierre se rendit, en effet, à l’endroit 
convenu. I] arriva malheureusement trop tard. Marin, après Vavoir 
attendu quelque temps, avec plusieurs Sioux, ne pouvant rester à 
Michillimakinac plus longtemps, était retourné à la baie des Puants. 
Saint-Pierre, pressé de se rendre à Montréal, laissa à Saint-Luc de la 
Corne le soin de mener cette entreprise à bonne fin. Saint-Pierre arriva 
à Montréal en septembre 1753. 


On l’envoya immédiatement au secours de la Malgue de Marin, sur 
la rivière Ohio. Sommé de quitter le pays par le major Washington, 
comme commandant en chef des troupes Frangaises, il répondit par une 
lettre remplie de sentiments de dignité et de noble fierté, qui montraient 
son esprit chevaleresque. Cet homme était assurément un officier admi- 
rable de courage et de ressources, à la guerre. Par contre, il manquait 
de souplesse et des ménagements qu’exigeait! la prise de possession des 
territoires du Nord-Ouest, où fomentaient depuis des siècles, des haines 
héréditaires entre les diverses tribus. Prompt à l’action, trop pressé 
d'agir quand il aurait fallu obtempérer et s’ingénier à trouver des 
moyens de conciliation, il ne se trouvait pas, au milieu de nos prairies, 
dans le milieu qui lui convenait, Son tempérament fougueux ne s’ac- 
commodait guère d’une mission si délicate. Avec les meilleures inten- 
tions de bien servir son pays, il ne réussit qu’à rendre plus difficiles les 
rapports des Français avec les sauvages. Il est vraiment regrettable 
d’avoir à constater ici, que cet officier refusa obstinément de prendre à 
son service les fils de La Vérendrye, malgré les sollicitations pressantes 
de ces derniers. Cette action ne lui fait pas honneur et montre une 


[PRUD’ HOMME] LES SUCCESSEURS DE LA VERENDRYE TE 


x 


étroitesse de sentiment qu’on ne s’attendait pas à rencontrer chez un 
militaire si brillant. 

Il fut remplacé, à la rivière Ohio, par M. de Contrecceur peu de 
temps avant la capture de Washington et de son armée au fort Nécessité. 
L’année suivante, il fut placé à la tête des sauvages alliés, dans l’expé- 
dition du baron Dieskau, et fut tué dans le premier engagement, à la 
bataille du lac Saint-Sacrement (George) le 8 septembre 1755. Après 
cette bataille, les Nipissings et les Algonquins continuèrent à lever des 
chevelures aux Anglais et aux Iroquois, pour venger la mort de leur 
vaillant commandant. 


Le P. Jean-Baptiste de La Morinie, S.J., 1726-1764. Au fort La Reine 
de l'été 1750 à juin 1751. IT repasse en France en 1764. 


En écrivant les notes qui précèdent sur M. de Saint-Pierre, j'ai, à 
dessein, écarté le nom du P. La Morinie, qui l’avait accompagné, afin 
de ne pas interrompre le récit des événements historiques qui se dérou- 
laient alors dans le Nord-Ouest, me réservant de consacrer ensuite quel- 
ques lignes à cet excellent missionnaire, 

Le P. de La Morinie naquit le 24 décembre 1704. Il entra dans la 
compagnie de Jésus le 6 octobre 1725. Il était de la province d’Aqui- 
taine et arriva à Québec en 1726. Quatre ans plus tard, on le trouve à 
la mission de la rivière St-Joseph, sur la rive sud-est du lac Michigani 
Il fit publiquement la profession de ses quatre vœux dans Péglise de la 
mission de St-Ignace, à Michillimakinac,-le 2 février 1741, entre les 
mains du P. du Jaunay, et après avoir passé Vhiver à cet endroit, il 
retourna à St-Joseph. Lorsque Saint-Pierre fut chargé de continuer les 
découvertes de La Vérendrye, le P. de La Morinie fut désigné pour 
Paccompagner au fort La Reine, pendant l’été 1750. Comme il arrivait 
à ce poste, les sauvages avaient déterré la hache de guerre. Les Fran- 
çais, abandonnés des indigènes, gémissaient, faute de vivres, dans leurs 
forts déserts, Les Assiniboines qui habitaient le voisinage du fort La 
Reine se montraient mal disposés envers Saint-Pierre, qui les traitait 
avec arrogance. Dans ces circonstances, on ne saurait s'étonner que ce 
missionnaire ne pit exercer son ministère avec succès. Réduits à un 
jeûne démoralisant, les Français avaient besoin des consolations de ce 
religieux pendant le triste hiver de 1750-1751, pour ne pas tomber dans 
le découragement. Se mourant presque de faim, menacés à chaque 
instant d’être scalpés par les sauvages, dont la guerre attisait les cruautés 
natives, on comprend quelle heureuse influence ce missionnaire pouvait 
exercer parmi eux, afin de les soutenir dans leurs épreuves. 

Nous savons que le P. La Morinie enseigna à prier aux Assiniboines 
et aux Cris; qu’il leur apprit les principaux mystères du christianisme 


78 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


et qu’il alla catéchiser sur la rivière Souris et le lac Dauphin. Ces 
rudes voyages en plein hiver, sont une preuve de son dévouement apos- 
tolique, pour répandre la foi. Plus de cinquante ans après son départ, 
les sauvages instruits par lui, se rappelaient ses enseignements et conti- 
nuaient à réciter les prières qu’il leur avait apprises. Sa santé toutefois 
ne put résister à de si grandes privations. Affaibli par la misère, il 
tomba malade. Le 22 juin 1751, il quitta le fort La Reine et retourna 
à Michillimakinac, d’où il était parti au mois de juillet ou août précé- 
dent. 11 continua ensuite à desservir la mission de St-Joseph jusqu’en 
1761, époque à laquelle il passa à la mission des Illinois. En 1762, 
il se trouvait à Ste-Geneviève, qui faisait partie de la mission de la 
Louisiane. I] avait pour compagnon le P. de Salleneuve, S.J. Ils de- 
meurèrent ensemble à cet endroit jusqu’en 1763. Le 23 septembre de 
cette année-là, l'arrêt d’expulsion des PP. Jésuites de la Louisiane, leur 
fut communiqué. Ils se dirigèrent immédiatement en canot vers la 
Nouvelle-Orléans et au printemps 1764, le P. de La Morinie repassa en 
France. 


Le capitaine Saint-Luc de la Corne, chevalier, succède à Saint-Pierre. 
Le fort “ La Corne,” appelé Nipawi par les sauvages, remplace le 
fort Poskoyac. Premiers essais de culture à Pasquia, sur la 
rivière Carotte en 1754. 


En 1753, M. Saint-Luc de la Corne fut nommé successeur à Le 
Gardeur de Saint-Pierre. Il était parent de La Vérendrye. Son admi- 
nistration dura peu de temps. La guerre de Sept Ans venait d’éclater 
entre la France et l'Angleterre et le Nord-Ouest fut abandonné. 

Avant de pénétrer dans l’ouest, M. de la Corne recueillit de Saint, 
Pierra les renseignements qu’il possédait sur le pays et décida de se 
rendre immédiatement à la rivière Saskatchewan et d’échelonner des 
forts jusqu'aux Montagnes Rocheuses. En 1753, il atteignit le fort 
Poskoyac, construit par le chevalier La Vérendrye et dans lequel M. de 
Niverville avait hiverné. M. de la Corne aurait désiré d’abord de sé- 
journer au fort La Reine, mais comme il avait été détruit, il résolut de 
passer outre et de donner plus d'importance au fort Poskoyac. Il y fit 
de nombreuses améliorations et y érigea des constructions nouvelles. Ce 
fort ainsi restauré et devenu le plus considérable de cette époque, reçut 
le nom de “ Fort la Corne.” Les sauvages le désignaient sous le nom 
de Nipawi, qui signifie “ Debout.” Il se trouvait à quelques mille de 
Vest de la jonction des branches sud et nord de la Saskatchewan. M. de 
la Corne, explora également la vallée de la rivière Carotte. Quelques 


PRUD’ HOMME] LES SUCCESSEURS DE LA VERENDRYE 79 


Français, sous ses ordres, ayant trouvé un endroit favorable à la culture, 
ensemencèrent quelques arpents. Ces premiers travaux agricols au Nord- 
Ouest, eurent lieu durant l’été 1754. L’établissement portait le nom de 
Pasquia. Sir Alexander Mackenzie y retrouva, plus tard, les restes 
d'instruments d'agriculture, en traversant cette région. 

Il est probable aussi que ce fut sous M. de la Corne, qu’un fort fut 
construit sur la Saskatchewan, à peu de distance du lac Cumberland 
Lorsque Joseph Frobisher, en 1772, établit le fort Cumberland, il re- 
trouva les vestiges de ce fort. 

Apres que M. de la Corne eut substitué son propre nom à celui de 
Poskoyac, au fort prés de la fourche, le fort construit pres du lac Cum- 
berland hérita du non de Poskoyac. Certains écrivains ont prétendu 
que le fort Poskoyac, que bâtit le chevalier La Vérendrye, se trouvait 
tout près du site occupé aujourd’hui par Cumberland House, que ce fut 
à cet endroit que M. de Niverville tomba malade, et qu’enfin le premier 
fort construit près de la fourche, fut le fort La Corne. Cette opinion 
me semble erronée, car il n’est pas probable que La Vérendrye et Niver- 
ville aient pu négliger un point stratégique comme celui de la Fourche. 
La Fourche, en effet, était le lieu des pourparlers et des rendez-vous des 
sauvages et s’indiquait tout naturellement comme l’endroit le plus dési- 
rable pour un fort. M. de la Corne n’eut point le loisir de pousser de 
Vavant et de se rendre au fort La Jonquière. La Nouvelle-France, 
abandonnée à ses seules ressources, contre des armées sans cesse grossis- 
santes, allait tenter un dernier effort pour conserver la colonie à sa 
mère-patrie. 

Ne recevant plus de secours de France, les gouverneurs firent appel 
aux tribus amies, pour défendre le pays contre les légions que la Nou- 
velle-Angleterre allait lancer contre cette poignée de braves. Les décou- 
vertes furent abandonnées et des profondeurs de l’ouest accoururent les 
officiers français en retraite, à la tête de leurs bandes guerrières, pour 
livrer les derniers combats et couvrir la défaite d’un dernier rayon de 
gloire. M. de la Corne, qui était officier, rentra donc dans les rangs de 
la brillante armée que commandait Montcalm. Il est probable qu’il 
quitta l’ouest en 1755. Au mois d'août 1758, il était à la tête d’un corps 
composé de 400 canadiens et 200 sauvages et rencontra entre le fort 
Lidius et le fort Georges, un convoi de 50 chariots de vivres et de mar- 
chandises avec 200 bœufs. Ce convoi était escorté par un parti de 2C) 
Anglais. M. de la Corne les attaqua, leur tua 110 hommes, fit 60 pri- 
sonniers, détruisit les chariots, s’empara des marchandises et tua les 
bœufs. Il ne perdit dans cette escarmouche qu’un sauvage qui fut tué 
et deux blessés, On constate qu’au mois de juillet 1759, une bande de 
130 sauvages des pays d’en haut, composée de Cris, Sauteux et Folle- 


80 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Avoine, vint combattre sous Montcalm, à Québec. Il est fort) probable 
que les Cris des lacs des Bois et La Pluie, entrainés par M. de la Corne, 
étaient compris dans ce groupe et que l’ouest fut représenté à cette heure 
solennelle, qui décida du sort de la Nouvelle-France. 

M. de la Corne était à bord de l’Auguste, qui, au mois d’octobre 
1761, alla se briser sur les côtes du Cap-Breton. Dans cette même catas- 
trophe périrent M. de la Corne et le chevalier de La Vérendrye, qui 
l’avait précédé sur les bords de la Saskatchewan. C’est ainsi que le fils 
du premier blanc qui visita nos prairies et celui qui ferme la liste de ses 
successeurs, furent ensevelis dans un même tombeau. Je donne ci-après 
comme appendice à l’histoire de La Vérendrye et de ses successeurs, un 
tableau des établissements français au lac Népigon et à l’ouest du lac 
Supérieur, avec quelques notes indiquant la date et l’endroit de leur 
fondation. En jetant un coup d’œil sur ce tableau, le lecteur pourra 
suivre, en quelque sorte, la marche des découvreurs français, dans cette 
région. 

Forts et postes fondés par les Frangais au Nord-Ouest. 


1. Fort Caministigoyan, fondé par Greysolon Du Lhut de la Tou- 
rette, à l’entrée du lac Népigon, durant l’été 1678. 

2. Fort La Tourette, fondé par le même, à l’embouchure de la 
rivière Ombabiha (lac Népigon), en 1684. 

3. Fort des Français, fondé par le même aux fourches de la rivière 
Kénogami et Albany, en 1685. 

4. Fort Camanitigoya, fondé par Zacharie Robutel de la Noue, à 
embouchure de la rivière Kaministiquia, en 1717. 

5. Poste du Grand Portage, fondé par le même, à l’entrée de la 
rivière Pigeon, entre 1718 et 1720. 

6. Fort Saint-Pierre, fondé par Christophe Dufrost de la Jemme- 
raye, à l’entrée de la rivière La Pluie, à l’automne 1731. 

7. Fort Saint-Charles, fondé durant l’été 1732 par Pierre Gaultier 
Varennes de La Vérendrye, le Découvreur du Nord-Ouest, à l’entrée 
de la petite rivière de l’Angle, sur la rive nord, à quelques arpents de 
Vile Buckété (Famine). Cette rivière tombe près des ruines de ce fort, 
dans le lac des Bois et conduit à l’angle nord-ouest, où venait déboucher 
à travers la forêt, l’ancien chemin Dawson. C’est dans ce fort que se 
trouvent les restes entiers du P. Aulneau et du fils aîné de La Véren- 
drye et les têtes seulement de leurs 19 compagnons. 

8. Fort Maurepas, fondé par le fils aîné de La Vérendrye, à l’em- 
bouchure de la rivière Winnipeg, un peu plus bas que le fort Alexandre 
et sur le côté nord de cette rivière, à l’automne 1734. 

9. Fort de la Fourche aux Roseaux, fondé par le Découvreur à 6 
milles plus bas que la ville de Selkirk, probablement sur la rive ouest, 


[PRUD’ HOMME] LES SUCCESSEURS DE LA VERENDRYE 81 


durant l’été 1733. (C’est à ce petit poste d’occasion que mourut et fut 
enterré La Jemmeraye. 

10. Fort Rouge, fondé par M. D’Amour de Louvière, à l’embou- 
chure de la rivière Assiniboine, sur la rive sud, au mois d’octobre 1738, 

11. Fort La Reine, fondé au mois d’octobre 1738 par le Décow 
vreur, au Portage la Prairie, sur la rive nord de l’Assiniboine, près d’une 
coulée, dont les eaux au printemps se rendent en forme de rivière, jus- 
qu’au lac Manitoba. L’ancien fort de la Baie d’ Hudson avait été cons- 
truit sur le site méme du fort La Reine. 

12. Fort Dauphin, fondé par le chevalier de La Vérendrye, sur la 
pointe nord-ouest du lac Dauphin, à V’automne 1741. 

13. Fort Bourbon, le premier, fondé par le même, à l’embouchure 
de la rivière La Biche (Red Deer), sur le lac Winnipegosis, en 1748. 

14. Fort Bourbon, le second, fondé à l’endroit où la rivière Sas- 
katchewan s’élargit pour former le lac Bourbon (Cedar), entre les 
années 1748 et 1755. Il est probable qu’il fut construit par les fils de 
La Vérendrye, en 1748. 

15. Fort Poskoyac, fondé par le chevalier de La Vérendrye, près 
de la fourche de la Saskatchewan, en 1748. 

16. Fort La Corne, appelé Nipawi par les sauvages, fondé par le 
chevalier Saint-Luc de la Corne, à quelques milles à l’est de la jonction 
des branches sud et nord de la Saskatchewan, en 1753. 

17. Fort La Jonquière, fondé en 1751 par quelques Français en- 
voyés par M. de Niverville, qui était retenu par. la maladie au fort 
Poskoyac. Ce fort se trouvait à l’endroit qu’occupait la caserne de la 
police à cheval, sur la rivière des Arcs, à Calgarry. 

18. Fort Poskoyac, le second, appelé aussi fort Français, fondé à 
Yentrée du lac Cumberland par M. de la Corne, entre 1753 et 1755. 

19. Poste Pasquia, établi sur la rivière Carotte par M. de la Corne, 
à l’été 1754 


Sxcrion I., 1906 [83 | Memorres S. R. C. 


V.—Etude sur “ Les Anciens Canadiens.” 


Par l’abbé CAMILLE Roy, 


Licencié és-lettres, docteur en philosophie, professeur à l’Université Laval. 
(Lue le 22 mai 1906.) 


Il s’agit du livre de Philippe-Aubert de Gaspé, de l’œuvre la plus 
populaire peut-être qu’il y ait dans notre littérature canadienne. Nulle 
part nos anciens n’ont été mieux racontés, decrits, photographiés et res- 
suscités : et s’il n’est pas nécessaire que la critique rappelle ce livre à 
Pattention et à la sympathie du public, peut-être n’est-il pas inopportun 
qu’elle essaie d’en préciser la valeur, et de définir, à l’aide des documents 
qu’il nous fournit, l’esprit qui l’a conçu. Ni le livre qui s’imprime tou- 
jours, ni l’auteur que l’on appelle encore très poliment Monsieur de 
Gaspé, ne veulent mourir, et c’est done un sujet d’étude qui offre quelque 
intérêt que de rechercher et d’expliquer le pourquoi de cette si active 


survivance, 
* * * 


On se souvient du sujet traité, et du theme sur lequel broda le 
romancier. 

Jules d’Haberville et Archibald Cameron of Lochiel—Arché, 
comme on l’appelle familiérement—sont des amis de collège que la ca- 
maraderie a rendus fréres. Arché est un orphelin des montagnes de 
Ecosse: fils d’une mère française qu’il perdit dès l’âge de quatre ans, 
et d’un chef de clan qui périt dans cette désastreuse bataille de Culloden 
où s’abîma pour jamais l'indépendance de l’Ecosse, il fut recueilli 
par un oncle maternal, un jésuite, qui l’envoya à Québec, au 
Collège des Pères de la Compagnie. Jules estime Arché pour ses mal- 
heurs, il l’aime pour son âme franche et loyale. Quand arrivent, chaque 
année, les grandes vacances, il l’amène avec lui au manoir paternel de 
Saint-Jean-Port-Joli, où l’enfant est accuelli comme l’enfant du foyer. 

Au printemps de 1757, Jules, qui a du sang de soldat dans les 
veines, s’en va commencer en France sa carrière militaire. Arché re- 
tourne en Angleterre, où il prend du service. Mais la guerre est dé- 
clarée entre les deux grandes nations, et elle ramène au Canada, sous 
des drapeaux ennemis, les deux frères. Arché, qui ne peut trahir son roi, 
exécute les ordres les plus cruels, et il est en proie aux déchirements de 
sa conscience. C’est lui qui incendie le manoir des d’Haberville. Il de- 
vient odieux à ses anciens bienfaiteurs. 


Sec. 1., 1906. 6 


84 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Jules, qui sait les devoirs austères de la vie militaire, se réconcilie 
le premier avec Arché. Mais ce ne fut que plusieurs années après la 
cession, que le malheureux lieutenant de Montgomery put rentrer en 
grâce au manoir reconstruit des d’Haberville. 

Pour sceiler d’un serment sclennel et sacré ce nouveau pacte d’al- 
liance, Arché demande à Blanche sa main. Tous deux sont épris l’un 
de l’autre, mais Blanche sacrifie encore une fois sa passion à sa dignité, 
et elle refuse d’épouser celui qui fut l’incendiaire de sa maison. 


Jules prend pour femme une jeune Anglaise qu’il a connue sur le 
vaisseau qui le ramena au Canada. Il continue, au manoir des d’Haber- 
ville, entre ses parents devenus vieux, l’oncie Raoul et Blanche, les tradi- 
tions hospitalières de sa famille. Et plus tard, quand bien des années 
eurent passé sur les amours de Blanche et d’Arché, et les eurent trans- 
formés en une pure amitié fraterneile, Arché vint lui aussi reprendre sa 


lace au fover des bienfaiteurs de sa jeunesse. 
J 
* * + 


Tel est le plan, ou le dessin très simple, peu compliqué de la trame 
du livre de M. de Gaspé. Et c’est à propos d’un pareil livre qu’on a pu 
se demander s’il était vraiment un roman, s’il m'était pas plutôt une 
série de tableaux historiques, ou bien encore s’il ne constituait pas pour 
nous, Canadiens, une première ébauche, l’esquisse d’une épopée nationale. 
Pourquoi les Anciens Canadiens ne seraient-ils pas tout cela, et tout à 
la fois? Le roman ne peut-il pas être une véritable épopée, et Pépopée 
n'est-elle pas à son tour de l’histoire? 

Aussi bien, d’ailleurs, y a-t-il dans l’œuvre de Gaspé tous les 
éléments, sauf les vers, tous les ingrédients qui entrent dans la confec- 
tion d’une épopée. C’est une chanson de geste en prose qu’a écrite lau- 
teur des Anciens Canadiens; et il y a enfermé et mêlé l’histoire et la 
légende; il y a raconté des actions héroïques et les drames non moins 
poignants de la conscience; il y a introduit le merveilleux sans lequel il 
paraît que ne peuvent subsister les œuvres épiques ; il y a fait apparaître 
un amour trop discret peut-être pour que le roman s’en puisse contenter, 
mais qui ne laisse pas de rappeler ces sourires mêlés de larmes qui tra- 
versent l’Iliade, ou cette passion vive et contenue, qui n’éclate que pour 
mourir à la fin de Ja Chanson de Roland. Et si vous ajoutez à tout cela 
la couleur solide et fraîche des paysages, le style tout émaillé et garni 
des expressions de nos bonnes gens, très simple, familier, sans apprêt, 
que l’auteur a jeté comme une draperie canadienne sur les pages de son 
livre, ne trouverez-vous pas qu’il y a là vraiment tout ce qu’il faut pour 
faire de M. de Gaspé, non pas, sans doute, l'Homère des Canadiens, ni 
leur Turoldus, mais peut-être bien le conteur naïf et le plus charmant 


r 


{roy] ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 85 


des choses de leur passé, l’évocateur le plus puissant des mœurs et d’une 
civilisation à peu près déjà disparus, et pour cela même le chantre vrai- 
ment épique d’une phase merveilleuse de leur histoire? 


* CS CS 


Nous le tenons de M. de Gaspé lui-même, c’est d’abord pour faire 
de l’histoire qu’1l écrivit son livre, et se fit auteur à l’âge de ?5 ans. Et 
c’est le mouvement littéraire de 1860 qui orienta de cette façon l'esprit 
du vieillard. Les Soirée Canadiennes, que fondèrent en 1861, Joseph 
Charles Taché, le docteur Hubert Larue et Vabbé Casgrain, 
avaient pour épigraphe cette parole de Charles Nodier: “ Hâtons- 
nous de raconter les délicieuses histoires du peuple avant qu’il 
: les ait’ oubliées.” L’année précédente Vabbé Casgrain avait lui- 
même publié les Légendes, qni furent son entrée très bruyante 
et très applaudie dans les lettres canadiennes. M. de Gaspé 
les lut sans doute avec avidité, ces légendes qui avaient couru 
les campagnes de la Rivière-Ouelle, et elles firent s’éveiller au fond 
de son esprit tout un monde de vieux et chers souvenirs. Mais il en- 
tendit surtout comme un appel fait à lui-même le mot de Charles Nodier 
que répétaient chaque mois à leurs lecteurs les Soirées Canadiennes, et 
il entreprit done de raconter à son tour, avant de descendre dans la 
tombe, les histoires et les légendes qui avaient enchanté sa vie et sa 
mémoire, 

Il était né en 1786, vingt-six ans seulement après les guerres de la 
conquête ; il avait done recueilli sur les lèvres mêmes des derniers défen- 
seurs de la Nouvelle-France le récit de leurs actions. Par son père et 
par sa mère, il se trouvait être presque le contemporain, et il fut lui- 
même le témoin de ces mœurs anciennes qui caractérisaient la vie de 
nos pères, avant 1760, et pendant les dernières années du dix-huitième 


siècle. C’était done à lui de parler avec toute l’autorité de ses 
soixante-quinze ans; c’était à lui de ‘raconter les délicieuses 
histoires du peuple canadien avant qu’il les oubliât.” Les 


autres, les jeunes, ne pouvaient guère recevoir que de la bouche des 
vieillards ce secret du passé. Et puis, encore, n’y aurait-il pas un 
intérêt puissant à voir cet homme qu’entrainait déjà dans son flot le 
courant irrésistible des habitudes nouvelles, essayer de se reprendre aux 
vieilles traditions et de montrer et découvrir à l’œil des contemporains 
qui étaient ses fils, les mœurs et la vie d’une autre époque et d’un autre 
siècle ? 

Au surplus, les anciens souvenirs de M. de Gaspé étaient situés dans 
un recul assez lointain pour qu’ils fussent déjà tout pénétrés de poésie, 
et enveloppés de merveilleuses légendes. Et ce serait donc tout ensemble 


86 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


de la réalité et de la fantaisie, de la vérité et de la fiction, qui alterne- 
raient dans ces pages offertes aux petits enfants des. soldats de 1760, et 
qui les feraient bien vite ressembler, ces pages ingénues, a ces naifs 
récits d’Hérodote qui enchantaient Vimagination des fils des vainqueurs 
de Salamine. (C’est donc dans le véritable mirage où se bercent les sou- 
venirs des vieillards, c’est presque déjà dans une lumière d’épopée que 
M. de Gaspé, tout comme l’auteur des Histowres, pouvait placer et laisser 
repaser les personnages, les événements qui remplissent son livre, toutes 
lcs choses qui furent la grandeur et la force des anciens Canadiens. 

Dans ce lointain fantastique, M. de Gaspé aperçoit la petite et la 
grande histoire; et s’il s’inquiète de mous révéler l’une et l’autre, il est 
bien visible qu’il incline plus volontiers vers la petite, ou, si l’on aime 
mieux, vers celle qui se fait chaque jour et se compose des habitudes et 
des mœurs, et des vertus et des actions obscures d’un chacun. Au lieu 
que dans l’épopée classique, ce sont les rois et les princes, les chefs d’ar- 
mées ou les preux chevaliers qui remplissent tout le poème de la majesté 
de leurs noms, du bruit de leurs querelles et du cliquetis de leurs armes, 
ici c’est l’homme du peuple, c’est l’habitant canadien, et le seigneur de 
village ou le jeune lieutenant qui agitent à chaque page leur modeste 
mais vive et originale silhouette. (C’est l’épopée des humbles que veut 
écrire l’auteur des Anciens Canadiens, je ne sais quel souffle démocra- 
tique et populaire passe et circule à travers les pages de cette œuvre. 
M. de Gaspé nous invite lui-même à bien voir dans son livre une image 
réelle et authentique de la société de nos gens d’autrefois. Il affirme 
que tout ce qu’il rapporte des mœurs anciennes est véridique, et 1l com- 
mente par des notes abondantes et toutes personnelles qu’il ajoute à son 
roman, tels détails ou telles assertions qui pourraient paraître fantai- 
sistes. Et ce n’est pas l’un des moindres plaisirs du lecteur que celui de 
se sentir tout d’abord en pleine vie réelle, et de pouvoir se reposer tou- 
jours avec sérénité sur la bonne foi et la véracité de l’auteur. 


* * * 


C’est, au premier plan, le tableau de la vie du seigneur et de l’habi- 
tant canadien que dessine et peint M. de Gaspé. Or, la vie seigneu- 
riale qu’il reconstitue n’est pas autre que celle que lon faisait au manoir 
de son père à Saint-Jean-Port-Joli. Le manoir des d’Haberville, c’est, 
en effet, celui des de Gaspé, et c’est donc dans la maison même où fut 
élevé et où a grandi l’auteur, c’est au foyer où on linitia aux vertus 
patriarcales de sa famille qu'il nous introduit. Autour du manoir, M. 
de Gaspé groupe les braves censitaires; et c’est la cordialité des relations 
mutuelles, l’affabilité du seigneur, le respect et le dévouement des bonnes 


[roy] ETUDE SUR ‘ LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 87 


gens, c’est par-dessus tout l’esprit chrétien qui anime, vivifie, élève toutes 
ces humbles existences, que M. de Gaspé se plaît à préciser et à célébrer. 

Il faudrait ici pouvoir assister aux réunions de fanille dans le 
salon du manoir, aux excursions dans les champs ou sur les grèves de 
Saint-Jean-Port-Joli; il faudrait relire le chapitre qui est consacré à la 
fête du mai que l’on a planté dans le pare de M. d’Haberville, et signaler 
les joyeuses agapes où seigneurs et censitaires, groupés autour des mêmes 
tables, fraternisent dans la plus franche gaieté, et font chanter sur leurs 
lèvres les populaires refrains de la Nouvelle-France. Il serait aussi 
plaisant d'entendre raconter les bonnes histoires qui sont les délicieux 
et variés entremets de ces repas familiers, et par exemple celles que 
raconte le capitaine Marcheterre, pendant le souper que l’on prend à 
Saint-Thomas, chez le seigneur, M. de Beaumont, et toutes ces escapades 
dont fut coutumiére et bien chargée l’enfance aimable et très active de 
monsieur Jules. 

L’abondance copieuse et grasse, la gaieté vive et enjouée, la poli- 
tesse toute cordiale et simple, voilà ce qui faisait le charme des 
festins du bon vieux temps, et de ces pantagruéliques repas, que Jules 
décrit à Arché,’ et que se donnaient les uns aux autres, pendant les longs 
mois d’hiver, les habitants de nos campagnes. 

M. de Gaspé regrette que tout cela soit déja en train de disparaitre 
dans le faux éclat du luxe qui nous envahit, et c’est après avoir raconté 
les fétes de famille auxquelles donna lieu le retour de Jules au foyer 
paternel, et fait assister le lecteur aux jeux et divertissements bruyants 
mais honnêtes qui suivaient le repas, qu’il écrit avec un accent de patrio- 
tique tristesse : 

“ Heureux temps où l'accueil gracieux des maîtres suppléait au luxe 
des meubles de ménage, aux ornements dispendieux des tables, chez 
les Canadiens ruinés par la conquête! Les maisons semblaient s’élargir 
pour les devoirs de Vhospitalité; comme le cœur de ceux qui les habi- 
taient !” ? 

En dehors de la table, et des réunions joyeuses de l’amitié, Vhabi- 
tant canadien est appliqué à son devoir, et sous le costume rustique et 
pittoresque que décrit plus d’une fois M. de Gaspé, il remplit avec eou- 
rage et avec entrain sa tâche quotidienne; il fait modestement et très 
consciencieusement cette petite histoire, qui est bien l’histoire vraie et 
toute belle de son pays. 

Cette petite histoire s’agrandit, d’ailleurs, d’elle-méme; et selon les 
mouvements généreux et héroiques des âmes populaires, elle s’élève par- 


*Page 131 de la première édition, 1863. Nous renverrons toujours le lec- 
teur a cette édition. 
*Page 330. 


88 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


fois jusqu’à la hauteur des grands drames, et de la plus héroïque épopée. 
Souvenez-vous de cette scène inoubliable et si angoissante de la débâcle, 
à Saint-Thomas de Montmagny. C’est au moment où Jules et Arché, 
qui retournent du collège au manoir, arrivent au village de Saint- 
Thomas. ‘La cloche de l’église sonne à toute volée, eb appelle au bord 
de la rivière, du côté de la chûte, toute la population inquiète et affolée. 
Là, un homme, qui avait voulu traverse: la rivière ea voiture, le mal- 
heureux Dumais, est aux prises avec la glace qui se brise, qui s’effomdre. 
Déjà de hardis sauveteurs se risquent au secours du naufragé. Le péril 
est d'autant plus grave, que la débâcle de la rivière peut s’effectuer d’un 
moment à l’autre, et pousser avec une force irrésistible vers la cataracte 
et vers la mer sauveteurs et victime. Et, en effet, pendant que l’on cher- 
che à opérer le sauvetage, un mugissement souterrain, comme le bruit 
sourd qui précède une forte secousse de tremblement de terre, semble 
parcourir toute l’étendue de la Rivière-du-Sud, depuis son embouchure 
jusqu’à la cataracte d’où elle se précipite dans le fleuve Saint-Laurent. 
À ce mugissement souterrain succéda aussitôt une explosion semblable à 
un Coup de tonnerre dans le lointain... Ce fut une clameur immense. 
La débâcle! la débâcle! Sauvez-vous ! sauvez-vous ! s’écrièrent les spec- 
tateurs sur le rivage. 

“En effet, les glaces éclataient de toutes parts, sous la pression de 
Peau qui, se précipitant par torrents, envahissait déjà les deux rives. Il 
s’en suivit un désordre affreux, un bouleversement de glaces qui s’amon- 
celaient les unes sur les autres avec un fracas épouvantable, et qui, aprés 
s’étre élevées à une grande hauteur, surnageaient ou disparaissaient sous 
les flots. Les planches, les madriers sautaient, dansaient, comme s’ils 
eussent été les jouets de l’océan soulevé par la tempête. Les amarres et 
les câbles menaçaient de se rompre à chaque instant.” * 

Ce fut pendant ces scènes indescriptibles de confusion, où la plus 
vive anxiété, l’espérance et l’angoisse secouaient tour à tour les specta- 
teurs, que Jules et Arché arrivèrent au rivage; et l’on sait comment 
Arché, n’écoutant que son vaillant cœur, s’élança, les reins ceinturés 
d’une forte amarre, dans la rivière, et comment, se laissant emporter 
par les flots déchaînés, i] s’en alla recueillir, au vieux tronc de cèdre où 
il s'était cramponné, mais que les glaces menaçaient à chaque instant 
darracher, l’infortuné Dumais. 

Ce sauvetage héroïque constitue l’un des chapitres les mieux écrits, 
et les plus fortement concus de toute l’œuvre de Gaspé. Le mouve- 
ment des foules, des glaces et des eaux y est décrit avec une telle am- 
pleur et variété, qu’une vie intense déborde de ces pages, et que nulle 
part ailleurs, dans ce livre, on ne voit l’histoire des humbles s’élargir avec 


* Page 65. 


[ROY } ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 89 


plus de puissance, et devenir plus naturellement de la véritable et trés 
vaillante épopée. 


* *  % 


De Gaspé, qui a su raconter et peindre si vivement un tel épi- 
sode, pouvait ensuite entreprendre de tracer d’une main sûre les scènes 
sanglantes et désastreuses de la guerre. Ces scènes sont, en vérité, de la 
plus grande histoire, mais la grande histoire est aussi familière à notre 
auteur que la petite; et s’il éprouve quelque tristesse à raconter nos der- 
nières résistances patriotiques, il y a dans les regrets du vieillard je ne 
sais quelle joie discrète et forte qui se manifeste et éclate, quand il rap- 
pelle tant d’actions valeureuses, tant de sacrifices si courageusement 
offerts, tant d’immolations sublimes, qui couronnent comme d’une au- 
réole de martyr la suprême agonie de la puissance française en Amée 
rique. 

Et il met à raconter cette gloire des défenseurs du drapeau blane, 
un empressement d'autant plus grand que trop longtemps ici on a ignoré 
la conduite de ces soldats malheureux, et que trop volontiers l’on a prêté 
l'oreille aux calomnies des historiens anglais. 

“Vous avez été longtemps méconnus, mes anciens frères du Canada! 
Vous avez été indignement calomniés. Honneur à ceux qui ont réhabi- 
lité votre mémoire! Honneur, cent fois honneur à notre compatriote, 
M. Garneau, qui a déchiré le voile qui couvrait vos exploits! Honte à 
nous qui, au lieu de fouiller les anciennes chroniques si glorieuses pour 
notre race, nous contentions de baisser la tête sous le reproche humiliant 
de peuple conquis qu’on nous jetait à la face à tout propos! Honte a 
nous qui étions presque humiliés d’être Canadiens! Confus d'ignorer 
l’histoire des Assyriens, des Mèdes et des Perses, celle de notre pays était 
jadis lettre close pour nous.” 1 

C’est pour contribuer lui-même à cette œuvre de réhabilitation qu’il 
raconte quelques-unes des dernières scènes du drame qui se dénoue aux 
portes de Québec, sur les plaines d'Abraham. 

Et d’abord, l'incendie de nos campagnes, dont avec une habileté 
d'artiste et de romancier, il fait coupable Arché luismême. Quand on lit 
ces pages où flamboie “ l’incendie de la côte sud,” on ne sait si la déso- 
laticn des habitants, et les ruines fumantes de tant de maisons réduites 
en cendre sont un spectacle plus triste et plus lamentable que le drame 
tout psychologique qui occupe et torture la conscience du lieutenant de 
Montgomery. Ce fut vraiment le triomphe de l’écrivain de faire, mal- 
gré tout, si sympathique aux lecteurs canadiens le destructeur même de- 
leurs propres foyers. 


Page 201. 


90 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Puis, comme pour opposer à ce tableau où s’étalent d’inutiles et 
sombres vengeances, qu’éclairent les plus sinistres reflets, la hardiesse 
loyale et franche de nos soldats, la lumière pure des grands dévouements, 
M. de Gaspé nous fait assister aux dernières escarmouches qui termi- 
nèrent notre consolante et dernière victoire de 1760. Il met en présence 
les deux jeunes guerriers qui doivent retenir Vattention du lecteur. I: 
procède un peu à la façon d’Homère, qui ne s’attachait nullement à 
décrire les mouvements d'ensemble des batailles où Troyens et Grecs 
luttaient corps à corps, et se précipitaient les uns contre les autres, mais 
aimait mieux décrire ces combats singuliers où deux guerriers, Agamem- 
non et Oïlée, Achille et Hector, mesurent leur valeur.  [/auteur des 
Anciens Canadiens n’entreprend pas le récit de cette grande mêlée 
héroïque où les Canadiens, conduits par Lévis, et victorieux pendant la 
journée du 28 avril, prouvèrent une fois encore qu’ils étaient plus grands 
que leurs malheurs. Il concentre plutôt l’attention du lecteur sur les 
deux héros de son drame, et s’il met en bonne lumière, autour du moulin 
de Dumont, la prudence réfléchie d’Arché, il exalte avec une visible pré- 
dilection le courage bouillant et irrésistible de Jules. Le petit grenadier, 
comme on l’appelle au camp, se jette tête baissée au milieu des ennemis 
plus nombreux, et 4 travers les balles anglaises il’s’élance trois fois à 
assaut du moulin qu’on se dispute comme une imdispensable forteresse ; 
après le combat et la victoire finale, c’est au milieu d’un monceau de 
morts et de blessés qu’il faudra aller chercher le jeune et brave d’Haber- 
ville. 

Ce seul fait @arme, raconté d’une plume alerte et précise, résume 
dans sa vaillante et brève simplicité toute la bravoure du soldat cana- 
dien-français. Et il est exposé là, sous le regard du lecteur, comme 
le type de tant d’actions généreuses que le patriotisme multiplia ce jour- 
là sous les murs conquis de la ville de Québec. Il suffit done à M. de 
Gaspé pour venger la mémoire de nos pères, et pour étayer, dans l’ima- 
gination des contemporains, la thése historique que Garneau avait pé- 
remptoirement démontrée à leurs esprits. 

Ainsi se trouvaient réalisés l’une des plus nobles ambitions de Pau- 
teur des Anciens Canadiens, et peut-être le plus puissant motif qui le fit 
écrire son livre. 


* * * 


L’histoire, obscure ou glorieuse, grande ou petite, ne suffit pas au 
roman, pas plus que delle seule pourrait s’accommoder l’épopée. Et, 
d’ailleurs, M. de Gaspé reporte ses lecteurs vers des temps déjà trop re- 
culés, vers une époque trop lointaine pour que les événements s’y des- 
sinent dans une pure lumière de vérité. On sait comme la légende 


[Roy] ETUDE SUR ‘ LES ANCIENS CANADIENS”’ 91 


pousse vite dans le champ de l’histoire, et comme elle y fleurit et mêle 
ses multiples couleurs aux séches et arides réalités. Et le charme de la 
légende devient quelque chose de mystérieux et de sacré, quand elle-méme 
se laisse envahir et pénétrer par le merveilleux. 

Or, la légende et le merveilleux sont partout dans l’histoire de notre 
bon vieux temps; et ils laissent flotter sur les récits des anciens, et sur 
leurs actions le voile transparent, ondoyant et gracieux de leurs capri- 
cieuses fictions. M. de Gaspé n’avait qu’à entendre sa mère lui raconter 
les classiques histoires de revenants, il n’avait qu’à se souvenir des lon- 
gues veillées du manoir où, par exemple, l’on évoquait l’ombre fugitive 
de la sorcière du domaine.! N'est-ce pas elle qui avait prédit les hor- 
reurs de la guerre, et tous les maux qui devaient désoler la maison des 
@Haberville? Un jour, Arché, Jules et Blanche étaient allés la visiter 
dans la pauvre cabane où elle s’entretenait avec les esprits, et comme 
une pythonisse qui s’agite sur son trépied, elle avait fait retentir à leurs 
oreilles des paroles mystérieuses, et trois fois la malédiction était tombée 
de ses lèvres sur le groupe de jeunes gens qui la voulaient apaiser et 
consoler. “Malheur! malheur! malheur à la belle jeune fille qui ne 
sera jamais épouse et mère! et qui n’aura bientôt, comme moi, qu’une 
cabane pour abri!  : 

“ Malheur! malheur! malheur à Jules d’Haberville, le brave entre 
les braves, ‘dont je vois le corps sanglant trouvé sur les plaines d’Abra- 
ham ! 

“ Malheur ! malheur ! malheur 4 Archibald de Lochiel. Garde ta- 
pitié pour toi et tes amis! garde-la pour toi-même, lorsque, contraint 
d’exécuter un ordre barbare, tu déchireras avec tes ongles cette poitrine 
qui recouvre pourtant un cœur noble et généreux! Garde ta pitié pour 
tes amis, Archibald de Lochiel! lorsque tu promeneras la torche incen- 
diaire sur leurs paisibles habitations; lorsque les vieillards, les infirmes, 
les femmes et les enfants fuiront devant toi comme les brebis à l’ap- 
proche d’un loup furieux! Garde ta pitié; tu en auras besoin, lorsque 
tu porteras dans tes bras le corps sanglant de celui que tu appelles ton 
frère! Je n’éprouve, à présent, qu’une grande douleur, 6 Archibald de 
Lochiel! c’est celle de ne pouvoir te maudire! Malheur! malheur! 
malheur!” 

Et la folle du domaine disparut dans la forêt; et plus tard quand 
Arché, en proie à tous les tourments de la prophétie réalisée contem. 
plait, du haut d’un rocher qu’enveloppait la nuit, les derniers feux de 
Pincendie du manoir, il vit encore passer dans les ténèbres la folle du 
domaine qui étendit ses longs bras vers les ruines, et cria d’une voix 
lamentable sa triple malédiction. Il la vit errer à travers les débris 


*Cf. page 155 et suivantes. 


92 SUCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


fumants, et pousser dans la nuit les trois mots liturgiques: désolation! 
désolation ! désolation ! * + 

Et le lecteur s’imagine entendre comme un écho de la voix des an- 
tiques prophéties ; il croit apercevoir à travers le temps, et dans les plus 
lointaines profondeurs de la légende, la fille de Priam, Cassandre, articu- 
lant ses monosyllables fatidiques, et annonçant au chœur des vieillards 
les malheurs qui menacent et qui désolent déjà le palais des Atrides. 

Le merveilleux se mêle done à l’action des personnages des Anciens 
Canadiens; ces personnages se heurtent eux-mêmes aux êtres mystérieux 
qui traversent leur vie, ils en subissent ou redoutent l’influence, et c’est 
la l’une des façons, et certes la meilleure, d'introduire le merveilleux 
dans la légende et dans l’épopée. 

Mais, ce n’est pas là pourtant la voie familière par laquelle de Gaspé 
le fait entrer dans son livre. Il y fait apparaître le merveilleux comme 
un épisode qu'il juxtapose à l’intrigue du roman, et qui, tout en nous 
faisant pénétrer plus à fond la vie des anciens Canadiens, ne laisse pas 
de former dans son poème comme un chant que lon pourrait isoler du 
récit principal. C’est surtout sous la forme des contes étranges de José 
que se présente le merveilleux des Anciens Canadiens. Or, José, c’est le 
domestique, le vieux et fidèle serviteur des d’Haberville; mais c’est aussi 
le type du bonhomme crédule, qui joint ensemble, par je ne sais quelle 
alliance bizarre et pourtant vraisemblable, beaucoup de bon sens et beau- 
coup de naïveté. José est) une des créations les plus originales et les 
plus vivantes de Gaspé, et c’est lui qui va remplir deux longs chapitres 
du livre avec les véridiques histoires qu’il tient de “son défunt père qui 
est mort,” Francois Dubé. 

Presque toutes les superstitions de José tiennent dans la croyance 
aux sorciers et aux poursuites nocturnes et macabres de la Corriveau. 
Mais il adhère à ces dogmes populaires de toute la force des traditions 
familiales, et il les expose avec toute la sincérité d’un professeur de 
spiritisme. D/ailleurs, Jules et Arché, ces deux jeunes philosophes sans 
expérience, n’essaient-ils pas au sortir même du collège d’où il les ramène, 
et sur la longue route de Saint-Michel, où l’on aperçoit sans cesse à 
gauche, au milieu du large fleuve, l’île d’Orleans, séjour classique des 
sorciers, n’essaient-ils pas de discuter sur la nature de ces esprits, et ne 
cherchent-ils, pas comme d’impies rationalistes, à expliquer par des causes 
naturelles ces feux-follets que nos habitants de la rive sud voient le soir 
courir et s’agiter sur les grèves de l’île enchantée? Lumières des 
pêcheurs, qui, pendant les nuits sombres, s’en vont avec des flambeaux 
faire la visite des filets, avait dit Jules; ou bien gaz enflammés qui 
s’échappent parfois des terres basses et marécageuses ! 


1 Page 213 et suivantes. 


[Roy] ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 93 


Véritables êtres surnaturels, reprend José, qui s’appuie sur les récits 
de son père, François Dubé, lorsque, pendant les longues veillées, il aontait 
à ses enfants et à ses amis ses tribulations, et qu’il les faisait frissonner 
comme des fiévreux, tant ses histoires étaient vraies et terrifiantes ! I] les 
avait bien vus, lui, les sorciers, un soir qu’il revenait de la ville et qu’il 
avait quelque peu pintoché avec des connaissances en passant à la Pointe- 
Lévis. Sur les hauteurs mêmes de Saint-Michel, au moment où vaincu 
par l’endormitoire il se préparait à passer le nuit sous son cabrouette, il 
avait vu l’île d'Orléans s’enflammer tout à coup, puis des lumières er- 
rantes danser le long de la grève. A force de les bien regarder pendant 
cette nuit infernale, il avait nettement aperçu les formes fantastiques de 
ces êtres merveilleux. Aussi bien, n’étaient-ce pas de purs esprits. 
“ C'était comme des manières d'hommes: une curieuse engeance tout de 
même! ça avait une tête grosse comme un demi-minot, affublé d’un 
bonnet pointu d’une aulne de long; puis des bras, des jambes, des pieds 
et des mains armés de griffes, mais point de corps pour la peine d’en 
parler. Ils avaient, sous votre respect, mes messieurs, le califourchon 
fendu jusqu’aux oreilles ; ça n’avait presque pas de chair: c’était quasi- 
ment tout en os, comme des esquelettes. Tous ces jolis gas avaient la 
lèvre supérieure fendue en bec de lièvre, d’où sortait une dent de rhino- 
céros d’un bon pied de long.... Le nez ne vaut guère la peine qu’on en 
parle: c'était, ni plus ni moins, qu'un long groin de cochon, sous votre 
respect, qu’ils faisaient jouer à demande, tantôt à droite, tantôt à gauche 
de leur grande dent: c’était, je suppose, pour laïiler. J’allais oublier 
une grande queue, deux fois longue comme celle d’une vache, qui leur 
pendait dans le dos et qui leur servait, je pense, à chasser les mous- 
tiques.” 

Parmi ces sorciers, les uns n'avaient qu’un seul œil, comme les 
cyclopes, mais les autres avaient tous leurs yeux, et de ces yeux sortaient 
des flammes vives et ardentes qui éclairaient comme en plein jour Vile 
d’Orléans, 

Dirigée par un chorége qui n’était qu’un sorcier plus long que les 
autres, puisque le père de José estima qu’il était bien aussi haut que le 
clocher de Saint-Michel, cette bande de lutins exécutait des danses 
rapides, et des nondes si enlevantes, qu’ils ne mettaient pas une minute 
à faire le tour de Vile d'Orléans. 

C’est au moment où François Dubé, fasciné et effrayé par tant de 
visions inexplicables, regardait sans bouger la fête diabolique, qu’il sentit 
la Corriveau se grappigner amont lui, et lui étendre sur les épaules ses 
grandes mains sèches comme des griffes d’ours. 


Page 40. 


94 SOCIÉTÉ ROYALE DU CANADA 


Or, la Corriveau est un personnage historique qui hanta autant que 
les sorciers l’imagination de nos anciens. Accusée et convaincue d’avoir 
tué deux maris qu’elle avait successivement épousés à Saint-Vallier, elle 
fut pendue en 1763 sur les buttes à Neveu, près des Plaines d'Abraham ; 
et son cadavre, emprisonné dans une cage de fer, fut exposé pour le plus 
grand bien de la morale publique, à la fourche des quatre chemins qui 
se croisent dans la Pointe-Levis. Une nuit, la Corriveau disparut avec 
sa cage: des jeunes gens en avaient débarrassé la Pointe-Lévis où elle 
affolait les imaginations, et l’avaient enfouie à quelques pas du cimetière. 
Mais le spectre de la Corriveau continua de poursuivre, la nuit, les 
esprits inquiets et craintifs; on la vit, dit-on, plus d’une fois se pro- 
mener avec sa cage le long des routes où elle terrifiait les passants. 

Or, ce soir-là, où le père de José fut témoin de la sérénade des mys- 
térieux insulaires, 1l prit envie à la Corriveau d’aller danser avec les 
sorciers ; et comme elle ne pouvait traverser le Saint-Laurent, qui est un 
fleuve béni, sans le secours d’un chrétien, elle supplia François Dubé de 
la transporter. Et l’on sait que sur le refus très catégorique de Fran- 
çois, elle lui fit perdre tout sentiment, monta sur son âme et se rendit 
au sabbat. Ce n’est que le lendemain matin, au chant d’un petit oiseau, 
et lorsque déjà le soleil lui reluisait sur le visage, que le défunt père de 
José reprit ses sens et sa route. 

De Gaspé, qui s’amuse sans doute autant que le lecteur, à en- 
tendre raconter ces mirifiques histoires, se plaît à y mêler les folles exa- 
gérations que se peut permettre une imagination qui a franchi ses bornes. 
Il grossit à plaisir les incidents du récit, il multiplie les prouesses des 
farfadets qui habitent l’île enchantée, persuadé que toute cette fantas- 
magorie délirante ne fait qu’ajouter plus de vraisemblance à l’élément 
épique de son livre. Rien ne peut étonner le lecteur qui s’est laissé ainsi 
transporter dans le monde du rêve et de la fantaisie héroïque. Il accepte 
tout ce qu’on lui dit être le naturel effet et le jeu magique des facultés 
merveilleuses des personnages. Et puisque nous sommes ici en compa- 
gnie des lutins, il ne paraît pas étrange que leurs sabbats soient si féé- 
riques, que leur agilité dépasse toute humaine conception, et qu’au milieu 
de leurs sérénades ils avertissent Francois Dubé qu’ils n’ont plus que 
quatorze mille quatre cent rondes à faire autour de l’île. On n’est pas 
davantage étonné d'entendre se prolonger en répercussions formidables 
les trois cris sataniques que poussent ensemble tous les sorciers... “ L’ile 
en fut ébranlée, nous assure José, jusque dans ses fondements. Les loups, 
les ours, toutes les bêtes féroces, les sorciers des montagnes du nord se 
saisirent de ces cris, et les échos les répétèrent jusqu’à ce qu’ils s’étei- 
gnirent dans les forêts qui bordent la rivière Saguenay.” 


[roy] ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 95 


Ainsi dé Gaspé, par toutes ces légendes et réminiscences, agrandit, 
élargit les lignes historiques qui entourent et encadrent le sujet de son 
roman ; ou plutôt, il fait à ce cadre de nombreuses ruptures et brèches par 
où entrent et pénètrent la superstition des bonnes gens et le merveilleux 
canadien. Les deux chapitres: Une nuit avec les sorciers et La Corri- 
veau ne sont pas, à la vérité, indispensables au dessin de son livre, et à 
la suite des événements qui en constituent le fond essentiel. On pour- 
rait concevoir l’intrigue de ce roman, sans que s’y rencontrent les sorciers 
et la Corriveau. Et, ainsi entendus, ces deux chapitres pourraient ne 
pas appartenir au premier plan que l’auteur avait organisé dans son 
esprit; ils jseraient alors dans les Anciens Canadiens, dans l'épopée de 
Vaéde de Saint-Jean-Port-Joli, ce que sont dans les anciennes épopées 
ces chants de développement que la critique moderne a cru nettement 
apercevoir, et que des poètes ont successivement brodés sur le thème pri- 
mitif que leur avait légué la tradition. 

Il est plus probable, cependant, et il est plutôt certain, que M. de 
Gaspé, qui donnait à son livre un titre si large et si vague: Les Anciens 
Canadiens, et qui se proposait donc de peindre des scènes de vie nationale 
plus encore que de raconter des souvenirs de famille, songeait déjà, quand 
il entreprit son œuvre, à toutes ces légendes et à tous ces lutins qui 
avaient tour à tour ravi ou terrifié son enfance, et dont la vive image 
amusait encore sa vieillesse. Il voulut, en ces pages qui raconteraient le 
passé, verser tous ses souvenirs, et nul lecteur ne lui reprochera d’avoir, 
par un art d’ailleurs si simple et si naturel, rattaché à l’histoire vraie la 
légende fantaisiste. Il ne pouvait être le narrateur complet des mœurs 
et habitudes anciennes, s’il ne mêlait à tous ses récits les merveilleuses, 
choses dont s'enrichit et se fortifie la crédulité populaire. C’est donc 
encore de l’histoire véritable que fait M. de Gaspé quand il s’attarde à 
décrire le bal des sorciers, ou quand il rappelle les promenades nocturnes 
du squelette macabre de la Corriveau. 


* *# * 


Décrire les scènes variées et pittoresques de la vie canadienne. 
esquisser en quelques-unes de ses lignes les plus générales le tableau des 
grands événements politiques et militaires de la conquête, pénétrer avec 
le lecteur dans les croyances les plus familières du peuple, voilà bien à 
quoi s’est particulièrement employé l’auteur des Anciens Canadiens, et 
de quoi il a surtout rempli son œuvre. Mais il ne pouvait peindre tant 
de choses, et brosser une toile si large et si profonde, sans que, au divers 
plans du dessin, apparussent et saillissent des personnages qui expri- 
ment toute cette variété d’objets, qui représentent, résument, incarnent 
la vie de l’histoire, la joie et les souffrances de la nation. Et l’art de 


96 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Vécrivain consiste, alors, à distribuer avec ordre et proportion les rôles, 
à situer en lumière convenable les acteurs et à les faire se grouper et se 
disperser, ressortir et s’effacer selon les lois multiples du relief et de la 
perspective. 

Nous ne dirons pas que de Gaspé a ici réalisé la perfection de son 
art, qu'il est un metteur en scène très ingénieux, et que Scribe ne fut 
pas plus dextre, ni plus fertile en ressources. Les scènes elles-mêmes, où 
tour à tour nous transporte avec ses personnages l’auteur des Anciens 
Canadiens, sont aussi larges, aussi élevées, tantôt aussi familières, et 
tantôt aussi dramatiques que possible, mais le décor en est simple ou très 
peu compliqué, et les gestes et les paroles par où se découvrent l’ôme, le 
caractère, la vie des acteurs sont, d’ordinaire, le mouvement sobre, le 
discours bref, pittoresque ou mollement verbeux, parfois indigent et 
terne, des gens qui ne s’étudient point. 

De Gaspé n’ignore pas, lui qui a tant lu ses classiques au manoir de 
Saint-Jean-Port-Joli, qu’il existe un art de composer un personnage, de 
constituer en sa vivante complexité un caractère, d’analyser des âmes et 
den étaler les divers états sous le regard avide du lecteur; mais il ne 
semble pas se soucier de faire pareilles constructions ou semblables Wis- 
sections ; il affecte plutôt de n’apparaitre pas comme un psychologue in- 
quiet qui observe ses personnages et surprend les moindres agitations de 
leurs consciences; il les fait tout simplement agir, et il les laisse se 
mouvoir et s'exprimer le plus naturellement du monde, bien assuré que 
le lecteur saura bientôt saisir et retenir tout ce qui en eux les peut per- 
sonnifier et singulariser. Et l’on voit, en effet, au fur et à mesure que 
se développe l’action, et assez distinctement, se profiler, se dessiner et se 
préciser la silhouette, et le personnage des principaux héros. 

De Gaspé n’insistera pas non plus sur la composition du portrait 
physique de ces personnages. Il lui suffit de nous avertir que Jules est 
de petite taille, qu'à dix-huit ans il est frêle, brun, qu'il a de grands 
yeux noirs, vifs et perçants, et que ses mouvements sont brusques et 
saccadés, tandis que son ami Arché est plutôt grand, robuste, avec des 
yeux bleus et des cheveux blonds; Arché a aussi le teint blanc et un peu 
coloré avec quelques taches rousses au visage et aux mains, et son menton 
s’accuse of se prononce fortement. Le premier est français, Pautre est 
ÉCOSSAIS. 

S'il s’agit ensuite de définir et de fixer l’âme et le caractère de ces 
deux jeunes gens, il n’y a plus guère qu’à les mettre en présence, eux, 
fils de deux races si différentes, et qu’à les faire se rencontrer et se heur- 
ter, se rapprocher et s’opposer. 

Au collége, Jules est espiégle, railleur, taquin, tenace et indiscipliné. 
Il saute comme un singe sur les épaules de ses camarades, leur tire Jes 


r 


[Roy, ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS ” 97 


cheveux, descend, court à un autre, et promène ainsi par toute la cour 
ses folles étourderies. Mais il est spirituel en même temps que très gai, 
et il captive donc et retient la sympathie de tous. Au surplus, il est bon 
eb généreux. Il paye volontiers les dettes des, jeunes amis qui sont en 
danger d’être fouettés, et il sollicite un jour, comme un bien inestimable, 
cette amitié de l’orphelin qui va désormais remplir sa vie. Et il veut que 
cette amitié soit forte et solide, et pleine de confiance. Il éprouve le 
besoin de se reposer sur une âme qui soit plus calme et plus sérieuse que 
la sienne. Il y a donc beaucoup de gravité sous cette légèreté apparente 
qui emporte et égaye sa jeunesse: par quoi, certes, Jules ne laisse pas de 
représenter encore et très exactement l’âme française. / 

Arché, qui a rapporté des montagnes de l’Ecosse, toute la mélancolie 
des gens du Nord, et aussi tous les deuils qui ont assombri ses années 
d'enfance, oppose à la mobilité toujours active de Jules la tranquillité 
sereine et presque froide d’une âme qui toujours s’observe et se réserve. 
I] s'étonne, au collège, des taquinneries dont Jules le poursuit, et il ne 
songe pas à s’en venger, parce qu'il est le plus fort. Au reste, il est 
philosophe; il s'applique à raisonner des choses, et sa méditation se 
change parfois en un rêve bleu de vague et langoureuse poésie. Jules se 
moque de la lune, quand il la voit balancer au ciel sa lampe mobile, et 
projeter sur la route de Saint-Thomas sa blanche lumière; il se souvient 
alors qu’au dortoir du collège un rayon de lune sur les couchettes des 
pensionnaires n’avait pas d’autre effet que celui de lui faire regretter sa 
liberté perdue. Arché, au contraire, fait monter vers Vastre “a la triple 
essence” l’hymne de sa dévote tendresse, et il admire cette Diane qui 
parcourt en reine paisible, dans le silence d’une belle nuit, les régions 
éthérées du ciel. 

Au reste, Arché, comme tous les écoliers graves et un peu pédants, 
aime beaucoup étaler ses souvenirs classiques, et il cite avec abondance 
ses meilleurs auteurs; les sentences latines n’ont rien qui l’effraient, et 
souvent elles échappent à ses doctes lèvres, au risque de provoquer chez 
Jules quelque légère indignation. Et quand les deux jeunes gens ne 
peuvent s’entendre, et que la frivolité de Jules exaspére la gravité d’Ar- 
ché, celui-ci se contente de dire avec toute l’autorité de son imperturbable 
sang-froid: “Oh! Français! légers Francais! aveugles de Français! il 
n’est pas surprenant que les Anglais se jouent de vous, par dessous la 
jambe, en politique!” ? 

L'amitié d’Arché n’en est pas pour cela ni moins délicate, ni moins 
profonde. Son âme s’est attachée à l’âme de Jules, comme celle de David 
à Jonathas, et jamais deux jeunes gens ne se sont aimés d’une affection 


? Cf. pages 60-61, 
*Cf. page 51. 
®C£ page 14. 


98 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


plus pure et plus dévouée. L’amitié d’Arché, pénétrée, comme elle est 
d’une sensible reconnaissance, prend les formes les plus aimables et les 
plus touchantes: elle se compose d’un respect et dune tendresse qui en 
font le plus exquis et le plus louable sentiment. 

Mais ce sont les vertus mémes de ces deux amis qui les feront plus 
tard lutter l’un contre l’autre sur les champs de bataille. Jules est pa- 
triote autant qu’Arché lui-méme est fidéle 4 son drapeau. Jules aime la 
terre natale, tous les braves censitaires qui la travaillent et la cultivent, 
tous ces récits et légendes que lui raconte sa mère, et qui ont poussé 
comme des fleurs sur le sol du pays. Quand il a quitté le collège, le bon 
supérieur lui a dit, comme a Arché: “Que votre cri de guerre soit: 
Mon Dieu, mon roi, ma patrie!”* Et voici que cette devise elle-même va 
les faire tous deux se précipiter l’un contre l’autre. Jules défend, avec 
toute l’énergie du désespoir malheureux, la terre française qu’on veut Jui 
arracher de dessous les pieds; pendant qu’Arché, victime du devoir et 
de la discipline impitoyable qui n’épargne ni les souvenirs, ni les amitiés, 
exécute des ordres barbares, souffre en silence les tourments du désespoir, 
et souhaiterait parfois pouvoir retourner contre lui-même cette claymore 
de son père qui n’a jamais trahi. Arché qui ordonne qu’on mette le feu 
au manoir des d’Haberville; Jules qui, sous les remparts de Québec, 
essaie ses dernières forces pour percer la poitrine d’Arché, et retombe 
inanimé dans les bras de son adversaire : voila des situations cornéliennes, 
où la volonté se mesure avec le devoir, triomphe de toutes les hésitations, 
et où donc se révèle toute la grandeur tragique de ces âmes romaines. 

Et certes, quand un romancier a su imaginer de telles rencontres, 
et concevoir des luttes aussi vives où s’engagent et se torturent les cons- 
ciences, il n’a guère, vraiment, qu'à raconter les événements pour en 
exprimer toute l’amertume, et pour en faire voir et apprécier la 


grandeur. 
* * * 


Il est un sentiment, plus intime, plus subtil et plus profond que 
celui du patriotisme et de la générosité héroïque, plus difficile à com- 
prendre, à analyser et à reconstituer, surtout quand il s’efforce d’être 
discret, et s’acharne à s’ignorer soi-même, c’est le sentiment où la pas- 
sion de l’amour. De ce sentiment il était inévitable que lâme d’Ardhé, 
le hénos sympathique du roman, se remplit et débordât quelque jour. 

De Gaspé n’a pas insisté sur cet épisode, l’un des plus délicats et des 
plus touchants qu’il y ait dans son livre, parce qu’il ne voulait pas, au 
moyen de faciles intrigues et de trop sensibles émotions, détourner lat- 
tention du sujet principal, et l’on peut dire unique, de son roman; il n’a 
touché que bien légèrement une corde sur laquelle tant de romanciers 


: Page 14. 


[Roy] ETUDE SUR “ LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 99 


exécutent leur troublantes variations, parce qu’il ne voulait pas, par des 
cris de la passion aiguillonnée et désespérée, briser ’harmonie de son 
chant tout patriotique. 

Cependant, avec quelle grace légére et quelle irréprochable candeur, 
et vif émoi il a raconté l’idylle dont fut témoin, un soir d’été, “la grève 
aux anses sablonneuses qui s’étend du manoir jusqu’à la petite rivière 
Port-Joli—” 1 Arché s’était enfin réconcilié avee M. d’Haberville; il se 
disposait à vivre auprès de ses amis, et il rêvait d’unir sa destinée à celle 
de Blanche, à la petite sœur dont il savait l’âme si douce et si bonne, Il 
s’en ouvrit à elle au cours d’une de ces promenades favorites qu’il aimait 
faire sur le rivage, quand la marée était haute, et que le soleil couchant 
faisait ruisseler sa lumière d’or sur les flots. Que de souvenirs éveillait en 
la mémoire des jeunes gens le spectacle familier qui se déroulait à leurs 
regards! Et combien de fois leur innocente jeunesse avait porté sur ces 
mêmes rivages leurs âmes pures, enjouées et sereines! Et ce fut par 
toutes ces évocations du passé, par tous ces rappels de temps heureux à 
jamais disparus, qu’Archibald de Lochiel éprouva le besoin de saisir et de 
captiver l’imagination et le cœur de la jeune fille. Toutes ces choses, 
les moindres accidents du rivages, les rochers où l’on allait s’asseoir, 
le sable que l’on avait si souvent foulé, et ce petit ruisseau qu'ils 
franchirent encore une fois, redisaient aux deux promeneurs 
Vamitié fraternelle qui les avait depuis longtemps unis, et elles les 
invitaient encore à l’amour qui devrait les attacher desormais et 
lier l’un à l’autre. Arché aimait Blanche, avec cette passion respec- 
tueuse et discrète qui remplissait aussi l’âme de la jeune fille. Tous deux 
s’aimaient, non pas de la façon timide mais un peu précieuse des jeunes 
gens de Marivaux, mais d’un amour qui mesure ses mouvements à la 
convenance même des relations familiales, qui s’ignore aussi longtemps 
awil ne lui est pas permis de s’exprimer, et qui ne p’exprime que pour 
se manifester dans toute l’ingénuité et avec la franchise un peu brusque 
de son ardeur. 

Aussi, il fallut à Arché bien des détours, et de patientes digressions, 
avant de se déterminer à risquer l’inévitable déclaration. Elle vint enfin, 
brûlant les lèvres d’Arché, et résonnant comme une étourdissante et in- 
concevable audace aux oreilles de Blanche. Jamais la jeune fille des 
d’'Haberville n’avait pensé qu’il lui fût possible, malgré ses personnelles 
inclinations, d’épouser le soldat qui avait ravagé le domaine de son père. 
Elle bondit sous la flèche dont l’avait frappée Archée: 

“Vous m’offensez, capitaine Archibald Cameron de Lochiel! Vous 
n’avez done pas réfléchi à ce qu’il y a de blessant, de cruel dans l’offre 


1Cf. page 297 et suivantes. 


Sec. [., 1906. 7 


100 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


que vous me faites! Est-ce lorsque la torche incendiaire, que vous et les 
vôtres avez promenée sur ma malheureuse patrie, est à peine éteinte, que 
vous me faites une telle proposition.” Et elle ajouta, avec une pointe 
de préciosité qui est bien un peu du marivaudage: “ Ce serait une ironie 
bien cruelle que d'allumer le flambeau de l’hyménée aux cendres fumantes 
de ma malheureuse patrie ! ” 

Où l’on voit donc que chez Blanche, comme chez tous ces anciens 
Canadiens que nous a dépeints M. de Gaspé, l’amour du sol natal, le 
sentiment patriotique priment tous les autres sentiments et tous les 
autres amours. Ces gens-là s'inquiètent, avant tout, d’accorder et 
d'ajuster toute la vie avec l’orgueil national, et ses exigences parfois 
douloureuses. 

Devant une opposition si vive, et peut-être depuis longtemps prévue 
et calculée, Arché ne put guère insister que juste comme il fallait pour 
montrer la vérité profonde de son dessein. Comme une autre Chimène, 
Blanche s’obstina dans son refus ; les sanglots parfois étouffaient sa voix, 
mais elle fut plus forte que sa passion. Jamais, sans doute, elle n’aura 
d'autre amour que celui d’Arché, mais jamais non plus, victime pieuse 
et volontaire de son patriotisme, elle ne donnera sa main au lieutenant 
de Montgomery. Et quand, à la tombée du jour, les deux jeunes gens 
revinrent au manoir, ils ne remarquérent pas que l’approche de la nuit 
donnait à la mer, au rivage et à toute la nature une grâce nouvelle et 
tranquille, et un charme plus doux: leurs âmes, en proie à de trop vio- 
lentes émotions, étaient insensibles maintenant à la beauté et à la poésie 
des longs soirs d’été. 

Malgré que cet épisode, cette idylle soit si propre à émouvoir le lec- 
teur, elle ne constitue pas une étude attentive des jeux et des combats de 
la passion humaine. L’auteur ne paraît pas avoir cure de psychologie; 
ou plutôt, il est psychologue d’une façon qui convient à ses goût et à 
son tempérament, et en ce sens qu’il tâche d’imprimer seulement à l’ac- 
tion des personnages le mouvement principal qui correspond à leur pas- 
sion, ou à leurs divers états d’âme. La passion ainsi racontée et mise en 
œuvre ne fournit, nécessairement, que des portraits qui sont courts, et 
dont les divers traits, peu nombreux, qui les composent, laissent à 
Vimagination du lecteur le soin et le loisir de compléter le dessin de 
Vartiste. 

* * % 

Ce même procédé, qui consiste à laisser les personnages se dresser 
eux-mêmes en pieds sous le regard du lecteur, fait que souvent il arrive 
qu’il faille rechercher ici et là, à travers toutes les pages du livre, les 
éléments qui peuvent servir à leur reconstitution. C’est ainsi qu’il sera 
nécessaire de recueillir un peu partout, dans ce roman, et au hasard des 


r 


[Roy[ ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 101 


circonstances, la pensée, les paroles, les gestes de M. d’Haberville, le père 
de Jules, si l’on veut prendre de lui une image précise. Héritier de 
longues traditions familiales, type parfait du seigneur canadien, esprit 
autoritaire et franc, conscience vigoureuse où se mêlent les vertus les 
plus bourgeoises, les vanités les plus chevaleresques, les instincts mili- 
taires les plus violents, et les découragements les plus profonds, M. 
d’Haberville est surtout soldat. Il en a toute l’ardeur et toute la crâne 
générosité. À son fils qui lui demande d’accueillir au manoir l’orphelin 
dont il s’est fait un ami, il répond: “Son père repose sur un champ 
de bataille glorieusement disputé: honneur à la tombe du vaillant soldat. 
Tous les guerriers sont frères, les enfants doivent l’être aussi.” ? Mais 
c’est parce qu’il est soldat, qu’il éprouvera si longtemps en son âme 
blessée l’effet de ce coup terrible que porta dans tous les cœurs canadiens 
notre suprême défaite. Son manoir incendié, son foyer ruiné, et sa 
patrie conquise, tant de malheurs abattus sur lui aigrirent son caractère, 
le firent triste et chagrin; et il ne faudra rien moins que l’autorité im- 
périeuse d’une destinée irrévocable pour ployer cet homme, et lui faire 
accepter sa vie nouvelle. 

Assez semblable à son frère M. d’Haberville, est l’oncle Raoul: 
Poncle traditionnel, vieux garçon, utile, mais un peu sec et capricieux, 
comme le sont les oncles célibataires, qui vivent chez les autres, qui 
exagèrent parfois leur importance pour ne pas ressembler trop à des êtres 
parasites, qui dorlottent les petits neveux, et que l’on aime pourtant pour 
ce qu’ils conservent toujours en eux de jeunesse, de bravoure et de cette 
tendresse qu’ils ont si parcimonieusement dépensée. L’oncle Raoul a. 
Pallure militaire, impérative ; il est vif, et excessif en ses paroles et juge- 
ments; il jure avec fermeté, et quand il dialogue, il coupe l’air en tous 
sens avec sa canne, au risque d’attraper tous ses voisins. Au demeurant, 
il est bon garçon, et on l’écoute et on la respecte pour ses conseils sour 
vent distribués, sa franchise correcte et son attachement au foyer. 

Dans ce livre des Anciens Canadiens, où l’homme tient la première 
place et les principaux rôles, la femme n’apparaît que tout à fait à l’ar- 
rière plan, dans la lumière discrète de sa maison, occupée aux soins du 
ménage, ou présidant les réunions de famille. 

Les images très douces de Madame d’Haberville et de Blanche n’oe- 
cupent pas plus de place dans cette épopée que celles des femmes troy- 
ennes dans le roman historique Homère. (C’est la vie intérieure qu: 
symbolisent les héroines de M. de Gaspé, avec ses affections domestiques, 
ses longues conversations au foyer, et cette surveillance diligente et 


aimable qui assure 4 la femme canadienne son prestige, et sa suave auto- 
rité.\ 


1Cf. page 27. 


102 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


De Gaspé insistera plutôt sur la description et sur la peinture des gens 
du peuple, des censitaires et des domestiques, puisque, après tout, ce sont 
eux qui représentent le plus exactement les mœurs des anciens Cana- 
diens. Et telles scènes de son livre rappellent ces tableaux flamands où 
s’étalent la bonne humeur, la vie robuste, bruyante, et grasse des bonnes 
gens. Ces scènes, quoique situées à Varriére plan du roman y sont cons- 
truites avec tant de relief qu’elles attirent le regard, et l’y retiennent 
longtemps fixé. Le seul costume de ces personnages familiers ‘suffit à 
intéresser l’œil, et à donner au tableau quelques-unes de ses véritables 
couleurs: capot d’étoffe noire tissée dans le pays, bonnet de laine grise, 
mitasses et jarretières de la même teinte, ceinture aux couleurs variées 
et gros souliers de peau de bœuf du pays, plissés à l’iroquoise: c’est la 
tenue habituelle des traversiers de Lévis, et c’est aussi, pendant l’hiver, 
celle des anciens Canadiens. Il n’y faut ajouter que le bougon de pipe 
inévitable, que mâchonne et déguste délicieusement le fumeur de nos 
campagnes. 

Parmi ces personnages rustiques qui passent et repassent au fond 
de la scène en des attitudes si pittoresques, M. de Gaspé s’est plu surtout 
à mettre en bonne lumière celui du père José. 

Nous ne pouvons dire, cependant, si: José est exactement le type de 
Phabitant canadien. Sa naïve simplicité ne va-t-elle pas parfois au-delà 
de Vordinaire mesure qui convient à nos gens? Et, encore qu’il 
ne faille pas juger les habitants d'autrefois par ceux-là, très bourgeois, 
qui peuplent aujourd’hui nos vieilles paroisses, il semble bien que José, 
qui représente pourtant un type vécu et vu, exagère un peu en ses formes 
et manières l’habituelle bonhomie des anciens Canadiens. Il a gardé 
quelque chose de cet extravagant de François Dubé dont il est le fils, qui 
jurait avoir vu de ses yeux danser les sorciers, et qui avait senti la 
Corriveau lui grimper sur les épaules. 

En tout cas, José est bien d’exemplaire fidèle du vieux domestique 
qui wa vécu que pour son maitre, qui a pris soin des enfants, qui s’est 
identifié avec tous les intérêts du seigneur, qui a sa place au foyer, qui 
fait partie de la famille, et qui se dévouerait jusqu’à la mort pour les 
gens de la maison. Il a pour son jeune maître Jules tous les égards res- 
_pectueux et les sollicitudes les plus touchantes. L’incendie du manoir 
Pattristera presque autant que M. d’Haberville lui-même. Avec cela 
qu'il est patriote comme tous ceux qui ont assisté et pris part aux guerres 
de 1760. N’a-t-il pas perdu—ou oublié, comme il dit—sa main droite sur 
les Plaines d’Abraham ? + 

Un jour—c’était plusieurs années après la cession du pays aux An- 
glais—il conduisait Arché à Québec. “ Voici la ville,” dit-il à son com- 


lPage 293. 


[roy] ETUDE SUR “ LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” ‘03 


pagnon de route, des qu’il Veut aperçue là-bas devant lui; “mais pas 
plus de pavillon blanc que sur ma main, ajouta-il en soupirant. Et pour 
se donner une contenance, il chercha sa pipe dans toutes ses poches en 
grommelant et répétant son refrain ordinaire: “ Nos bonnes gens re- 
viendront.” ? 

L’affection qu'avait José pour ses maîtres, ils la lui rendaient bien ; 
et il n’y a guère de pages plus touchantes dans tout le roman de M. de 
Gaspé que le récit de la mort de José s’éteignant doucement au manoir 
dans Jes bras de Jules, sous le regard attendri des petits enfants que l’on 
avait fait venir exprès du collège, pour que le vieillard les put revoir 
avant de s’en aller pour toujours. On sent que l’auteur a mis dans cette 
page de son livre toute l’âme bonne et attendrie que lui ont faite les pa- 
triarcales traditions du manoir : et l’on est heureux, tout comme de Gaspé 
lui-même, de voir une mort si calme et si honorable finir et couronner 
une vie si dévouée et si fidèle. 


+ % * 


Parmi tous ces personnages du roman que l’on aime à se rappeler, 
et qui se profilent dans nos imaginations avec leurs allures singulières, il 
en est un autre qu’il est impossible de ne pas apercevoir presque à cha- 
que page, et que l’on ne peut donc oublier: et c’est celui de l’auteur lui- 
même. 

L'auteur compte toujours parmi les personnages d’un roman, si 
impersonnelle que soit l’œuvre, et si discret que soit l’ouvrier. S’il me 
se mêle directement à l’action, et s’il ne s’agite pas lui-même sur la 
scène, on sent bien qu’il est 1a, dans la coulisse, qui fait mouvoir les 
acteurs, et leur dicte leurs rôles. C’est sa pensée, c’est son sentiment 
personnel qui souvent s’expriment; il s’incarne avec l’une ou l’autre de 
ses créatures, et il s’identifie avec elle. C’est, d’ailleurs, son cerveau qui 
produit toute la pièce, et la marque d’une empreinte plus ou moins ori- 
ginale et puissante. Et comme de notre personnalité la substance la 
meilleure et la plus précieuse, c’est la pensée intime, la conviction pro- 
fonde, les affections et les jugements, il suit de là que nul personnage 
ne s’étale, en un roman, avec plus d’ampleur et, parfois, avec plus de 
complaisance, que l’auteur lui-même. Et l’on peut done, avec les œuvres 
écrites, reconstruire assez exactement la mentalité, et l’âme de celui qui 
les a conçues. 

Dès lors, il serait possible de dessiner ici le portrait moral de M. de 
Gaspé; il n’y aurait qu'à surprendre et saisir sa pensée partout où elle 
se découvre et s’annonce, Aussi bien, parfois, et malgré la discrétion e° 
la retenue habituelle dont il faut le louer, et qui donnent à son œuvre 


? Page 313. 


104 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


vne suffisante mesure d’impersonnalité, il arrive que l’auteur des Anciens 
Canadiens fait lui-même, et brusquement, irruption dans son livre, se 
mêle aux personnages, parle pour son compte, rappelle ses souvenirs,’ et 
prononce d'autorité ses propres jugements. Si bien que non seulement 
la vie des anciens Canadiens, mais la vie même de M: de Gaspé afflue 
dans son œuvre, et s’y concentre, s’y répand et en déborde. Ce roman 
est, en vérité, une première série des Mémoires. Ce sont les premières 

confidences de l’auteur au public. L’un des principaux héros du livre, M. 
d’Haberville, n'étant pas autre, en réalité, que le grand-père 
de M. de Gaspé cet Ignace-Philippe-Aubert qui fit rudement 
son devoir de soldat dans les guerres de la conquéte, et dont 
le manoir fut incendié- par les Anglais,? le petit-fils ne pouvait s’empé- 
cher de raconter ses souvenirs, de consulter sa propre vie, de dire ses im- 
pressions, et de nous révéler l’âme que lui avait façonnée la religion du 

foyer. Il voulut même aller jusqu'à des confessions douloureuses, et 
livrer aux lecteurs ce qu’il aurait pu facilement leur cacher: sous le 
masque de M. d’Egmont, il raconte les extravagances, les poignantes an 

goisses, les tristesses fatales de son existence propre. 

Aussi, quand on ramasse et recueille, ici et là, les réminiscences, les 
enthousiasmes, les ironies et les haines, les aveux et les regrets de l’au- 
teur, et que l’on prend garde à la façon dont tout cela est dévoilé, ex- 
primé et raconté, on voit peu à peu se reformer sous le regard de l’ima- 
gination la physionomie de l’écrivain, ses états d’âme, et se dessiner et 
s’accuser les lignes principales de son portrait. 

Et ce portrait psychologique ressemble assez, croyons-nous, au por- 
trait physique que l’on a gardé de ce septuagénaire. Il n’y a pas, certes, 
que de la bonhomie dans ce visage de vieillard où la vie avait imprimé 
de si multiples et diverses sensations. Il y a aussi traces de pensées 
élevées, de passions ferventes, de tristesses mélancoliques. Cette physio- 
nomie est même plutôt chagrine: les lèvres qui sont épaisses, couvertes 
d’une forte moustache, et qui se ferment lourdement sous un nez trop gros, 
ne paraissent pas s'ouvrir facilement pour les rires fins et légers; la 
gaieté soudaine, gauloise et burlesque des conteurs populaires devait être 
plutôt la sienne. Il y a, d’ailleurs, quelque chose d’un ‘peu nonchalant, 
de trop abondant et d’excessif dans ces traits inférieurs du visage, qui 
sont si fortement marqués, où le menton frais rasé et large s’en va fuyant 
sous la barbe blanche qui enveloppe la gorge et recouvre les joues. En 
revanche, le front haut, bien dégagé, repose très noblement sur l’arca- 
ture saillante des sourcils, et semble bien fait pour les silencieuses médi- 


? Voir, par exemple, à la page 148, le souvenir de sa prière pour les morts 
que lui faisait, chaque jour, réciter sa mère. i 

# Cf. Biographie de M. de Gaspé, par l'abbé Casgrain, dans Œuvres Completes 
It, 250. 


[roy] ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 105 


tations. Le regard lui-même ne porte pas tout entier sur les choses 
extérieures ; abrité sous le pli large et retombant des paupières, à la fois 
ferme et bon, il semble se tourner plutôt vers le monde intérieur des 
pensées et des souvenirs. Les paupières inférieures, que l’on dirait avoir 
été gonflées par les larmes, et qui s’affaissent mollement jusqu’au ride 
profond qui les découpe en demi-cercle et les relève, ajoute encore à la 
mélancolie de cet œil un peu mystérieux et voilé. 

C’est avec cette physionomie complexe que M. de Gaspé apparaît 
dans son livre. Tour à tour joyeux et triste, naïf et philosophe, pas- 
sionné et bon enfant, aristocrate et homme du peuple, il exprime avec 
une grande variété d’attitudes les sentiments qui emplissent son âme 
canadienne. Mais, puisque c’est une page d'histoire qu’il a surtout voulu 
écrire, il n’est pas étonnant que ce soit son patriotisme, très sensible, 
souvent meurtri, confiant ou irrité, qui s’y traduise le plus volontiers et 
le plus souvent. 

M. de Gaspé intervient donc dans les récits et l’action du roman 
pour nous dire, sur la vie politique de son pays, sa pensée personnelle, 
pour apprécier les faits, et soulager sa conscience qu’il avait tenue s1 
longtemps fermée. Non pas qu’il ait sur les événements qu’il raconte, 
ou auxquels il fait allusion, des réflexions bien neuves ou profondes. 
M. de Gaspé est plutôt l’écho et l’interprète des pensées communes qui 
agitent et mènent la foule; il les exprime seulement avec plus d’éloH 
quence que ne fait le peuple; il leur donne la tournure oratoire qui lui 
est familière. Sa rhétorique a bien parfois je ne sais quoi de convenw 
et de banal qui est trop souvent le propre de l’éloquence politique, mais 
elle prend aussi sur les lèvres ou sous la plume de ce vieillard une solen- 
nité, une sorte de majesté qui impose le respect. 

Rien n’est plus caractéristique, à ce point de vue, que l’hommage 
enthousiaste que de Gaspé rend à la mémoire des guerriers, morts ou 
vivants, vainqueurs ou vaincus, qui combattirent sur les Plaines d’Abra- 
ham. Le romancier interrompt brusquement son récit pour y intercaler 
trois développements, trois strophes où chante sur le mode lyrique le 
patriotisme le plus large et le plus humain.’ 

Il y a, au contraire, de l’amertume, de l’ironie et du sarcasme, dans 
les premieres pages du chapitre où l’on raconte cet épisode des Plaines 
d'Abraham. Et les lèvres pesantes du vieillard ont dû se plisser dans 
un sourire bien dédaigneux, quand il a écrit contre les stratégistes de 
cabinet qui peuvent reprocher à Montcalm sa défaite, le commentaire 
ardent du Vae victus!? 

Au surplus, M. de Gaspé—et il ne fait encore ici que rendre la 
pencée de tous les Canadiens—ne s’afflige pas plus qu’il ne faut du fait 


*Pages 248-249. 
7Pages 239-241. 


108 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


de la cession du Canada à l’Angleterre. “ Nous vivons plus tranquilles 
sous le gouvernement britannique que sous la domination frangaise,”! dit 
un jour Jules à Arché, et M. de Gaspé lui-même se félicite de ce que la 


révolution de 1793, avec toutes ses horreurs, n’a pas pesé sur cette heu- : 


reuse colonie que protégeait le drapeau d’Albion. Nous avons d’ailleurs 
cueilli de nouveaux lauriers en combattant sous les glorieuses enseignes 
de l'Angleterre! et deux fois la colonie a été sauvée par la vaillance de 
ses nouveaux sujets.” ? 

Sans doute, nous avons eu à nous défendre contre les Anglais eux- 
mêmes qui s’attaquérent à notre existence nationale; mais ces luttes, 
elles aussi, furent glorieuses. “A la tribune, au barreau, sur les champs 
de bataille, partout, sur son petit théâtre, le Canadien a su prouver qu’il 
n'était inférieur à aucune race.” M. de Gaspé exhorte aux combats per- 
sévérants ses compatriotes: “ Vous avez lutté pendant un siècle, 6 mes 
compatriotes! pour maintenir votre nationalité, et grâce à votre persé- 
vérance, elle est encore intacte: mais l’avenir vous réserve peut-être un 
autre siècle de luttes et de combats pour la conserver ! Courage et union, 
mes compatriotes !” 5 

Ces paroles sont bonnes et réconfortantes : et le lecteur les recueille 
avec respect quand il parcourt aujourd’hui ces pages qui furent écrites 
au milieu du siècle dernier. Et en les feuillettant, il songe aux luttes 
inévitables du temps présent. Il y reconnaît comme des accents prophé- 
tiques qui voudraient prévenir les désordres de l'avenir, et grouper au- 
tour de l’idée nationale les Canadiens français du vingtième siècle. Noon 
pas qu'il soit désirable que des jalousies et des haînes occupent nos âmes 


canadiennes. Nous devons plutôt nous unir aux Anglais 
puisque nous sommes ici les fils d’une même patrie et que 
nous sommes frères au même foyer. Mais nous, Canadiens 


français, nous ne pouvors pas ne pas céder à l'instinct de con- 
servation qui féconde les races et les fortifie, et nous ne pouvons 
done oublier que dans les commerces nécessaires de notre vie nationale, 
il faut, par une sorte d’ironie des mots et de la fortune, tout à la fois 
nous unir à nos Voisins et nous opposer à eux: nous unir avec eux pour 
faire ensemble prospérer.et grandir la patrie commune, mais nous op- 
poser les uns aux autres, dans une attitude calme et respectueuse, pour 
garder vivantes et libres, avec toute la richesse de leur sang et la variété 
belle et légitime de leurs langues, les deux races qui possèdent le sol 
canadien. 

C’est cette alliance, et c’est cette pacifique opposition des races que 
M. de Gaspé a paru d’abord comprendre et prêcher. Il ne semble pas, 


Page 333. 
? Page 202. 
s Page 202. 


[roy] ETUDE SUR “ LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 107 


cependant, qu'il ait toujours eu sur ce sujet une pensée suffisamment 
nette, et invariable. L’on peut croire que l’anglomanie, qui a sévi au 
siècle dernier dans quelques-unes de nos familles bourgeoises et aristo- 
cratiques, a quelque peu fait fléchir son patriotisme. Sans jamais con- 
seiller ouvertement la fusion, dans ce pays, des deux races anglaises et 
françaises, il accepte volontiers que des mariages mixtes fassent se ren- 
contrer et se mêler les deux sangs. Blanche a bien un mot très fier 
quand Jules lui propose d’épouser Arché, qui représente à ses yeux la 
race des conquérants: “ Est-ce une d’Haberville qui sera la première à 
donner l’exemple d’un double joug aux nobles filles du Canada?” 
Mais elle consent à ce que Jules prenne lui-même pour femme une An- 
glaise, et elle va jusqu’à dire ceci qui est le mot malheureux: “Il est 
naturel, il est même à souhaiter que les races française et anglo- 
saxonne, ayant maintenant une même patrie, vivant sous les mêmes lois, 
après des haînes, après des luttes séculaires, se rapprochent par des al- 
lances intimes; mais il serait indigne de moi d’en donner l’exemple 
après tant de désastres.” ? 

M. de Gaspé a mieux aimé que ce fût Jules qui donnat l’exemple 
de ces alliances hybrides où trop de nos familles canadiennes-françaises 
ont depuis et peu à peu sacrifié les traditions et la langue des ancêtres. 
L'auteur des Anciens Canadiens, que, d’ailleurs, des relations étroites 
avaient, dès son enfance, mis en contact avec l’aristocratie anglaise de 
Québec,’ ne pouvait plus mal choisir, parmi les personnages de son 
ro:nan, celui qui serait chargé de donner aux lecteurs, en manière d’épi- 
lugue, cette leçon d’anglomanie. (C’est le chevalier des Plaines d’Abra- 
ham qui désarme tout à fait, et accroche au mur d’un foyer où va régner 
Panglaise la panoplie de son trophée! C’est le Roland des légendes 
allemandes qui oublie, semble-t-il, aux pieds d’une femme le motif et 
l’héroïsme de sa vie. 

Il est done possible, et nous croyons qu’il est certain, que M. de 
Gaspé a poussé trop loin ce sentiment de résignation nationale auquel 
il a fallu obéir après la conquête, mais auquel M. d’Haberville a lui- 
même et d’abord si longtemps résisté. Et si l'historien avait le droit 
de traduire dans son livre cette sorte de satisfaction que nous éprouvons 
d’avoir, par le fait de la conquête, échappé à tant de mesquines persé- 
cutions qui ont affligé et qui affligent encore la France, le romancier n’avait 
pas, lui, le droit de pousser jusqu’à cette extrême limite le dévouement 


1 Page 337. 

? Page 337. 

# On sait que la mère de M. de Gaspé, Catherine Tarieu de Lanaudière, 
était amie intime de Lady Dorchester. Les deux filles de Lady Dorchester 
passaient souvent une partie de l’été au manoir de Saint-Jean-Port-Joli. 
On peut consulter, à ce sujet, la Biographie de M. de Gaspé, écrite par l’abbé 
Casgrain, dans Œuvres Complètes, de l'abbé Casgrain, II, 273. 


108 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


de toute notre vie à la cause britannique, et il avait plutôt le devoir 
d’enseigner à ses compatriotes comment les races conquises ne meurent 
pas, et de tracer à la fin de son œuvre, et d'indiquer sommairement aux 
romanciers futurs le canevas ou le théme des Oberlés canadiens. 

Le patriotisme de M. de Gaspé, que montrent et définissent les 
Anciens Canadiens, est donc assez complexe: il est surtout fait de senti- 
ments très fervents pour l’honneur et les traditions de sa race, d’ironie 
mordante pour ceux qui osent toucher à nos gloires les plus pures, d’es- 
pérances en l’avenir, et d’abandon parfois trop confiant aux destinées 
que nous pouvait préparer ici l'influence aborbante des vainqueurs 
de 1760. Cette âme si canadienne et qui s’émeut, s’enflamme, s’exalte 
au souvenir du vieux passé, qui a des ardeurs de combat pour raconter 
nos résistances et nos luttes, se détend, à la fin, et s’apaise et se résigne; 
et elle montre ainsi, dans ses discours et dans tout ce qui manifeste sa 
conception de la vie nationale, les mêmes variations et contrastes que 
l’on peut aussi apercevoir dans la philosophie qu’elle nous a donnée de la 


vie humaine. 
* % * 

L’on pourrait croire, que ce viellard qui sourit 4 travers 
tant de pages de son livre, qui s’abandonne à une gaieté large et franche 
quand il raconte les histoires de José, et qui fait si attachante la destinée 
de ses héros, a aimé la vie et l’a vécue avec enivrement. Et il suffirait 
de lire encore dans les Mémoires le récit de ses aventures avec Coq 
Bezeau pour se persuader qu’un enfant qui entra si joyeusement dans la 
vie active, devait s’y attacher pour toujours. Et, pourtant, les Anciens 
Canadiens nous révèlent en M. de Gaspé, dans son âme de vieillard phi- 
losophe, toutes ces oppositions de joie et de tristesse, de consolations 
et d’amertumes, de sérénité et de dégoûts qui apparaissent sur son visage. 
Pour que cette mélancolie n’étendit pas sur tout le roman son voile 
sombre, M. de Gaspé a voulu ramasser en un seul chapitre ses plus 
graves impressions, et y exprimer tout ce qu’il pensait des hommes et de 
la société. 

Dans ce chapitre intitulé Le bon gentilhomme, M. de Gaspé s’est 
mis en scène lui-même, et sous le pseudonyme de M. d’Egmont, le soli- 
taire de la rivière des Trois-Saumons, il a fait l’aveu pénible de sa vie, 
et livré au lecteur sa conscience jamais apaisée. 

Deux sentiments surtout résument toute cette morale, et toute cette 
conférence que fait à Jules le bon gentilhomme: celui d’une misan- 
thropie assez profonde, et celui, plus chrétien, et qui sert à l’autre de 
correctif, d’une pitié grande pour ce barbare civilisé qu'est Phomme 
lui-même. 


[roy] ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS ” 109 


De Gaspé avait d’abord aimé la vie; il Vavait embrassée avec 
passion et volupté dans sa jeunesse, alors qu’à lui, seigneur et maitre 
d’une assez belle fortune, elle ouvrait des perspectives de lumière sans 
ombre, et des chemins tout semés de fleurs. Avocat au barreau de Qué- 
bec, puis bientôt shérif, il s’installa avec confiance dans cette situation 
qui lui permit de continuer les plaisirs insouciants qui avaient réjoui ses 
vingt ans. Il obligea sans compter les amis qui se groupent toujours 
nombreux et avides autour de celui qui a de l’argent; il distribua au 
hasard ses largesses et son bien; il s’étourdit dans les fêtes dont s’eni- 
vrait son existence; il mêla et confondit ses ressources personnelles et 
celles de l’Etat, et quand, un jour, M. de Gaspé s’éveilla de ce rêve où 
s'était abimée sa fortune, il était trop tard. Ses amis le quittèrent, 
firent le vide autour de lui, et l’abandonnèrent aux créanciers qui, le 
trouvant insolvable, le firent enfermer pour quatre ans dans une prison. 

Il faut lire, dans le texte lui-même, le récit que fait M. d'Egmont 
des extravagances, des joies, des cruelles déceptions de sa vie. Et il faut 
recueillir de ses lèvres, pendant l’entretien de ce philosophe avec Jules, 
au bord d’un ruisseau où se mirent les branches touffues d’un noyer, 
les leçons qu’il dégage des accidents de cette vie. C’est un dialogue dont 
la mise en scène fait penser à ceux de Platon; on dirait le jeune Phèdre, 
assis aux côtés de Socrate, sur les bords de lIlissus. Mais cette fois 
Socrate désespère de corriger les Athéniens, de les rendre meilleurs, et 
il étale avec quelque complaisance le plus sombre pessimisme. 

“Tout homme qui, à quarante ans, n’est pas misanthrope, n’a jamais 
aimé les hommes,” disait Chamfort, et cette parole sert d’épigraphe à 
la leçon du bon gentilhomme. C’est parce qu’il a beaucoup aimé les 
hommes et la vie, lui, qu’il est devenu à son tour misanthrope. Il a 
éprouvé de la vie tout ce qu’elle contient de déceptions, et des hommes 
tout ce qu’ils peuvent en fait d’ingratitude. Et voici bien, en effet, ce 
qui afflige M. d’Egmont ou M. de Gaspé. L’homme mériterait qu’on le 
définisse un animal ingrat. Il exprime de ses semblables, de ses voisins, 
de ses amis tout ce qu’il en peut tirer, et si quelque malheur vient à 
frapper*ceux qui lui ont été le plus utiles, il s’en détourne il les lâche, 
il s’enferme dans son égoisme. De là pour les malheureuses victimes 
abandonnées par l’amitié les souffrances morales les plus aigues. Et 
parce que, de toutes les tortures qui peuvent affliger l’homme, celles-là, 
intimes et profondes, qui tourmentent l'esprit et tenaillent le cœur, sont 
les plus cruelles, il en résulte que M. d’Egmont avait épuisé la coupe 
d’amertume, et que de l’avoir épuisée le faisait désespérer de pouvoir 
jamais plus estimer les hommes. I] ramène toutes ses observations sur 
la vie à ce dogme de la perversité et cruauté humaines. Et si un jour, 
‘en sarclant ses laitues, il voit les fourmis ge précipiter sur un inseatg 
blessé et le dévorer, il ne peut se retenir de faire tout haut cette réflexion 


110 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


que La Bruyère eût approuvée: ces petites bêtes sont done aussi cruelles 
que les hommes! 

La jeunesse seule, selon M. d’Egmont, a gardé sa grâce et sa vertu. 
La jeunesse sait encore apprécier le bienfait, remercier ses bienfaiteurs. 
Les jeunes gens sont naturellement bons, ils sont reconnaissants... et 
les sauvages aussi. Et cela prouve que c’est l’intérét et la civilisation 
qui tuent la gratitude. Tous deux ont banni de cette terre la fleur ex- 
quise des amitiés constantes; tous deux brisent des chaînes qui devraient 
être plus fortes que le malheur. Aussi longtemps que l’homme n’est pas 
aux prises avec les multiples et égoistes intérêts que met en jeu la vie so- 
ciale, aussi longtemps que les lois elles-mêmes n’ont pas perverti chez 
lui la notion du juste et de l’injuste, il reste bon, et capable de com- 
prendre l’équité. Que si vous doutez de la vérité de cette doctrine, in- 
terrogez ce brave homme d’Iroquois à qui un magistrat faisait un jour 
visiter, à New-York, le grand wigwam où l’on détient les repris de justice. 
“ C’est la qu’on enferme les Peaux-rouges qui refusent de livrer les peaux 
de castor qu’ils doivent au marchand,” disait le visage pâle à l’enfant 
de la forêt. Et celui-ci de visiter avec soin tout l’édifice, de descendre 
dans les cachots, de sonder les puits, de prêter l’oreille aux moindres 
bruits, et de conclure par un immense éclat de rire: “ Mais sauvage pas 
capable de prendre castor ici?” dit-il; et dans ce mot, et dans ce rire, 
il y avait tout le mépris et tout le dédain que la barbarie doit à la civili- 
sation. Cet indien avait compris, là, tout ce que notre justice boîteuse 
contient d’illogisme, et comme il est inutile, cruel et contradictoire d’en- 
fermer, et donc de paralyser et d'empêcher d'acquérir celui dont le crime 
est de n’avoir pas de quoi payer ses dettes. 

Si misérable que soit l’homme, et si faux que soient ses jugements, 
et si endurcie que soit sa conscience raffinée et civilisée, il le faut pour- 
tant plaindre, et l’on doit en avoir pitié. Et le pessimisme de M. d’Eg+ 
mont est donc ici traversé d’un rayon de lumière et de charité qu’on ne 
“attendait pas tout d’abord d’y apercevoir. Cet Alceste paraît bien 
avoir 

ces haînes vigoureuses 
Que doit donner le vice aux âmes vertueuses, 


mais il a aussi pour son semblable des complaisances de Philinte; et sil 
vst enfoncé en son désert, s’il a 


cherché, sur la terre, un endroit écarté, 
Où d’être homme dhonneur on ait la liberté, 


il sait aussi sortir de sa retraite pour aller à ceux qui souffrent et qui 
ont besoin de son secours. Il est lui-même la vivante et persuasive con- 


“ 


[Roy] ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 111 


tradiction de sa doctrine. Il n’a pu éteindre en son âme les affections 
généreuses de sa jeunesse, et il se console de ses tristesses en faisant 
beaucoup de bien à ceux qui souffrent. Il va porter aux malades et aux 
pauvres les fruits de son jardin, et les racines bienfaisantes et les simples 
dont ses études lui ont révélé la vertu médicinale. Bref! on appelle ce 
misanthrope le bon gentilhomme, et M. de Gaspé ne pouvait en un plus 
violent contraste de mots et de faits résumer sa philosophie de la vie, 
et définir sa complexe mentalité. 

I] faut retenir que c’est un nom très doux, un vocable très généreux 
qui sert à marquer et à distinguer entre tous les hommes M. d’Egmont. 
11 est le bon gentilhomme. C’est la bonté qui excelle dans sa vie, et c’est 
elle aussi sans doute qui console l’existence de M. de Gaspé. Nature 
faite tout entière de vertus ardentes et de passions capables de devenir 
excessives, l’auteur des Anciens Canadiens devait traduire sa vie par des 
oppositions vives et des rencontres originales; il devait la pénétrer des 
grâces et du charme séduisant de la bonté. Léger, joyeux, confiant dans 
sa jeunesse, triste bientôt de tous les mécomptes de ses trente ans, retiré 
dans son manoir après les années de captivité, estimant que sa vie était 
désormais sans profit pour lui et pour les autres,’ mais résigné pourtant, 
et calme, et essayant de retrouver dans la paix du foyer la joie ancienne 
et bonne; refoulant sans cesse au fond de sa mémoire le souvenir des 
jours mauvais, et gardant volontiers 4 ses lévres de doux vieillard le 
sourire des affections paternelles; facilement triste et chagrin quand 
surgit tout à coup à ses yeux le passé ineffaçable, capable aussi de trou- 
ver dans les lectures en famille, et dans les méditations de son esprit 
toujours alerte, la consolation et l’oubli: tel fut M. de Gaspé. Ce sont, 
en vérité, toutes ces alternatives de joie et de regrets, et ces jeux d’ombre 
et de lumière que l’on aperçoit dans son portrait, et c’est cela aussi qui 
apparait à travers les pages si variées qu’il a écrites: tour a tour pleines 
de gaieté abondante et copieuse, parfumées de christianisme bienfaisant, 
frémissantes d'enthousiasme et de passions, et parfois aussi humides et 


baignées de larmes. 
* + % 


Faut-il ajouter que les qualités littéraires et les défauts de l’artiste 
qui a conçu l’œuvre et l’a exécutée, pourraient encore révéler à leur tour 
son esprit et son tempérament, 

Sans doute, il est assez difficile d’apprécier et de cataloguer un 
écrivain qui déclare en manière de préface qu’il n’a pas l’intention de 
composer un ouvrage secundum artem, qu'il n’écrit que pour s’amuser, 
qu’il entend bien avoir ses coudées franches, ne s’assujétir à aucune des 
règles qu’il connaît, et qui conseille simplement au lecteur de laisser 14 


2 Cf. page 180. 


112 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


son livre s’il l’ennuie.! (Cependant, il est possible de reconnaître, sous 
ce désordre apparent, le talent de l’écrivain. Et, par exemple, il ne sera 
pas malaisé de remarquer qu’il y a à la fois de la bonhomie et de l’étude 
dans ce livre, et que la simplicité y cotoie la rhétorique. 

Que M. de Gaspé ait librement laissé trotter sa plume sur la rame 
de papier-bonnet qu’il acheta un bon matin chez son libraire, cela est 
incontestable, et se peut déduire de la façon même dont 
l’œuvre est conduite. Il y a dans ces pages une sorte de 
facilité, abondance et verbosité qui suppose chez l'écrivain l’abandon con- 
fiant et sincère de sa pensée à la bienveillance du lecteur. Et cette géné- 
rosité et prodigalité de paroles, qui risquerait, en d’autres livres, de nous 
lasser et ahurir, est ici précisément ce qui retient, captive et entraîne en 
son flot l’attention et la curiosité. On se laisse emporter d’un bout à 
l’autre du livre, et l’on ne songe pas qu’il faut s’arréter et se reposer. 

Et ceci vient encore, sans doute, de ce que M. de Gaspé, pour cela 
qu’il s’abandonne à sa passion de raconter et de muser un peu, donne à 
celui qui le lit impression très agréable qui se dégage toujours d’une 
œuvre où s'exprime sans effort la bonne nature. La plupart des scènes 
qu’il décrit ressemblent beaucoup à ces tableaux rustiques de Corot que 
l’on voit au Louvre, et qui sont signés du “peintre le plus naturel de 
la nature.” La vérité s’y moutre et plait sans détour, elle sy étale et 
brille de tout l’éclat de sa belle sincérité. Et jamais l’on ne résiste à 
de tels séductions et entraînements. Le lecteur est toujours si heureux 
de rencontrer un homme là où il s'attendait et redoutait de trouver un 
auteur ! 

L’art de M. de Gaspé n’est done pas celui des stylistes de profession ; 
il ne se rattache en aucune façon à la manière de Flaubert ou à celle des 
Goncourt; il a plutat quelque chose de l’art des primitifs; il fait penser 
parfois,et toutes proportions gardées, à la tenue aimable et négligée 
d’un Montaigne, à la bonne grâce et naiveté d’un Joinville ou d’un 
Hérodate. 

Il ne faut pas se dissimuler pourtant que M. de Gaspé pousse par- 
fois jusqu’à l’excès le souci qu’il a de composer sans recherche et sans 
cérémonie. L'on voit, par exemple, qu’il se laisse trop facilement attarder 
par des digressions qui coupent le récit et nous en distraient. Et l’on peut 
constater encore que les chapitres du livre ne sont pas toujours nette- 
ment délimités, ni la matière suffisamment bien distribuée. Le titre 
même du chapitre ne correspond pas toujours exactement au sujet qu’il 
paraît indiquer, et on le peut vérifier facilement avec les chapitres 
sixième et septième. 


1Cf, pages 5-8, passim. 


[Roy] ETUDE SUR “LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 113 


Il n’est pas inutile de rappeler, ici, que l’abbé Casgrain a quelque 
peu remanié, du consentement de l’auteur qui lui avait confié son manus 
crit et avec qui il corrigea les épreuves, le commencement et la fin du 
roman. Le premier chapitre et le dernier avaient des longueurs inter- 
minables ; le vieillard causait, causait sans tarir. L’abbé Casgrain coupa 
dans le vif de ces trop longs développements, et ce sont là, d’ailleurs, les 
seules retouches appréciables qu’il fit à cette œuvre. Nous tenons de 
Pabbé lui-même, avec qui nous en parlions un jour, qu’il a respecté tout 
le reste du texte. Il ne faudrait donc pas accepter trop facilement lopi- 
nion de ceux qui ont pensé et affirmé que les Anciens Canadiens avaient 
été trop soigneusement et trop largement revus et corrigés par Casgrain.1 


1 Voir encore, à ce sujet, les Mémovres ou Souvenances Canadiennes inédites 
de l'abbé Casgrain, III, 24, 20-21. Nous croyons intéressant de mentionner 
ici le fait très peu connu que M. de Gaspé, désireux de reconnaître les ser- 
vices- que lui avait rendus l’abbé Casgrain, voulut lui dédier son livre, et 
écrivit donc à l’abbé une lettre-dédicace que celui-ci, ‘“ moins par modestie que 
par la répugnance invincible qu’il éprouvait à paraître se mettre en évidence,” 
crut devoir refuser. L'abbé Casgrain reproduit cette lettre dans ces Souve- 
nances, III, 24, 22-23. Voici cette page que M. de Gaspé avait voulu mettre 
en tête de son roman: 


wi, l'abbé, 

Le sentier que j'avais à parcourir, lorsque je commencçai à écrire les 
Anciens Canadiens me paraissait jonché de fleurs, mais je dus m’apercevoir 
bien vite qu'il était, au contraire, couvert de ronces et d’épines. Je continuai, 
néanmoins, espérant franchir tous les obstacles de cette route pénible. Le 
bandeau ne me tomba des yeux qu'à la lecture de l’ouvrage, quand il fut 
achevé. Bah! pensai-je, je n’aurai toujours pas perdu mon temps: je lais- 
serai mon manuscrit comme un souvenir affectueux à ma nombreuse famille: 
et à cette fin, je l’enfermai bien précieusement dans mon tiroir, d'où vous 
l'avez retiré pour le livrer à l'impression, malgré ma répugnance. 

Si j'étais capable d’autres sentiments envers vous, M. l’abbé, que de ceux 
de lamitié la plus sincère, je vous conserverais de la rancune pour un acte 
aussi téméraire! N'importe; je me permettrai toujours de vous faire une 
petite espièglerie en vous dédiant, à vous, littérateur distingué, malgré votre 
jeunesse, à vous, protecteur dévoué de la bonne littérature canadienne, cette 
œuvre éphémère, 

Vous avouerez, M. l'abbé, que c’est assez mal reconnaître les excellents 
conseils que vous m'avez donnés, les soins que vous donnez à l'impression 
de mon ouvrage, que de chercher à vous rendre solidaire de ses défauts; 
mais la vieillesse est rancunière. 

Ce qui n'empêche pas, M. l'abbé, de me souscrire avec une considération 
très distinguée, votre serviteur dévoué et ami, 


L'AUTEUR. 


On trouvera l'original de cette lettre dans le premier volume de la col- 
lection des Lettres diverses manuscrites de l'abbé Casgrain, conservées aux 
Archives du Séminaire de Québec. 


Au reste, le style méme de M. de Gaspé différe assez de celui de Vhisto- 
rien de la Mère Marie de l’Incarnation, pour qu’il soit facile de recon- 
naître, dans les Anciens Canadiens, la marque de l’auteur. Il y a ici une 


simplicité et un naturel auxquels ne nous a guère habitués l’abbé Cas- 
grain de 1860. 


114 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


M. de Gaspé excelle à imiter et à reproduire dans son style le lan- 
gage familier, tout court, plein de saveur des Canadiens, ses contempo- 
rains. I] se plaît à exprimer sa pensée comme il faisait sans doute dans 
son salon de famille, quand il y causait avec les siens sous le regard des 
ancétres dont les portraits étaient suspendus au.mur; ou bien encore 
il prend volontiers le ton des longues conversations qu’il avait souvent 
avec les braves habitants de Saint-Jean-Port-Joli. C’est en style cana- 
dien que devait être écrit le roman historique ou l’épopée populaire des 
Anciens Canadiens. M. de Gaspé le voulait ainsi; d’autant qu’il lui eût 
été difficile d'adopter une autre manière et d’autres procédés. “Cet 
ouvrage sera tout canadien par le style: il est malaisé à un septuagénaire 
d’en changer comme il ferait de sa vieille redingote pour un paletot à la 
mode du jour.” * 

C’est donc en vieille redingote que se présente la phrase de M. de 
Gaspé, et c’est encore aujourd'hui ce qui donne au livre sa valeur et lui 
conserve tout son prix. On se plaît toujours à y entendre le parler des 
bonnes gens, et à voir se peindre en leur language les mœurs d’une 
époque dont nous nous éloignons chaque jour si rapidement.” 

L’aisance et la simplicité du vocabulaire des Anciens Canadiens se 
retrouvent parfois et plus particulièrement dans les dialogues que l’auteur 
établit entre les personnages du roman. Le dialogue doit rendre plus 
parfaite pour le lecteur l'illusion de la réalité, et c’est bien en plein 
réalité que nous transportent des causeries comme celles du souper que 
Von prend chez un seigneur canadien, M. de Beaumont, ou bien encore 
les propos si vifs et si spontanés du père José. 

Il convient, pourtant, d’observer ici que les dialogues de M. de 
Gaspé ne sont pas toujours aussi alertes, aussi coupés et primesautiers 
qu’ils pourraient l’être quelquefois. Il arrive que le dialogue tourne au 
discours et que les conversations se transforment en trop longs mono- 
logues. Au reste, il semble que le talent de M. de Gaspé, qui est bien 
celui d’un conteur, est aussi très oratoire. Et cette tendance le fait 
souvent exprimer sous forme de harangues éloquentes même les pensées 
solitaires de ses personnages. C’est ainsi qu’Arché, qui a été condamné à 
mettre le feu au manoir des d’Haberville, et qui souffre donc malgré lui 
toutes les tortures du remord, monte tantôt sur une colline, et tantôt 
sur un cap pour exhaler en de violentes philippiques dirigées contre 
Montgomery, ou contre la civilisation, ou contre lui-même, sa douleur 
et sa colère. ‘“ Alors, il s’écria. . . Voila done, s’écria-t-il. . .” Et, en 


2 


vérité, il est peu naturel qu’un soldat fût-il lieutenant, qui est seul à 


MCE pages 7-8. 

2M. l'abbé F.-X. Burque a relevé dans le Bulletin du Parler français au 
Canada, IV, 61, 101, 142, 182, quelques-unes des expressions canadiennes, 
typiques, employées par M. de Gaspé dans les Anciens Canadiens. 


SIGE ‘chap: ANT, 


[Roy] ETUDE SUR “ LES ANCIENS CANADIENS” 115 


dévorer son chagrin, et qui n’a pour auditeurs que les oiseaux des bois 
ou les étoiles de la nuit, se livre longtemps à cette factice déclamation 
I] suffisait, d’aiileurs, de donner à ces mêmes idées et à ces mêmes senti- 
ments qui bouleversent inévitablement l’âme d’Arché, la forme de médi- 
tations ou de réflexions que l’auteur aurait pu traduire encore en une 
langue chaude et ardente. 

Au surplus, M. de Gaspé a plus d’une fois imaginé des occasions 
très opportunes de s’abandonner au courant de sa passion oratoire. Il 
faut le louer de certaines pages éloquentes où son patriotisme s’est sur- 
tout éloquemment exprimé. Sil y a là quelques tirades où la rhétorique 
se complait outre mesure, et quelques périodes, quelques phrases 
qui déroulent trop longuement leur traîne et s’y embarrassent, ces pas- 
sages, tout pénétrés d’une émotion intense, ajoutent à la variété des 
récits, et remuent très agréablement l’âme du lecteur. 

Chose étrange, d’ailleurs, cet auteur qui se moque si joliment des 
critiques, et qui entend bien n’écrire que pour exposer sans recherche 
une pensée sincère, ne dédaigne pas de montrer souvent qu’il a l’expé- 
rence des choses de Part littéraire, qu’il a lu beaucoup et beaucoup ap- 
pris, et qu’il trouve plaisir à faire l’étalage de seg souvenirs classiques, 
Non pas, certes, qu’il y ait chez lui du pédantisme—a moins qu’on puisse 
reprocher à l’auteur le défaut de l’un de ses personnages—mais il y a 
parfcis, dans ce livre, une sorte de coquetterie qui sait être suffisamment 
discrète, qui surprend chez un écrivain aux allures si populaires, et qui 
apparaît ça et là, à travers les pages du roman, comme le sourire de, 
Varistocrate. : 

Aussi bien, comment M. de Gaspé aurait-il pu ne pas déverser en 
son livre le trop plein de ses souvenirs littéraires. La vie tranquille, 
isolée, quelque peu solitaire du manoir, après la catastrophe qui brisa 
sa carrière, lui fit des loisirs qu’il occupait à revoir ses auteurs, 
et à relire les livres de sa bibliothèque. Souvent le soir, 
au salon, quand la conversation menaçait de languir, il ouvrait Racine 
ou Molière, ou Shakespeare, ou reprenait un roman de Walter Scott, et 
il faisait lui-même la lecture à sa famille rassemblée. Parfois l’on mon- 
tait des pièces, et l’on jouait Berquin ou les contes de Mille et une nuits, 
que venaient applaudir voisins, amis et censitaires. Il n’est donc pas 
étonnant que les réminiscences de l’étudiant se retrouvent si souvent 
sous la plume du vieillard, et qu’apparaissent dans les descriptions ou 
les discours de son livre la fable d’Hypolite traîné par ses chevaux, les 
nymphes, les naïades, la coupe du Léthé, et cette mythologie dont on 
fut si friand dans les collèges du dix-huitième siècle. 


1Voir, à ce sujet, la Biographie de M. de Gaspé, par l'abbé Casgrain. 


Sec. I., 1906. 8 


116 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


Ce sont encore sans doute ces mémes circonstances d’une vie menée 
en pleine campagne, et en pleine nature, qui nous peuvent expliquer pour- 
quoi l’auteur des Anciens Canadiens a parfois, et d’une façon si gra- 
cieuse, mêlée à ses récits et dialogues, la poésie des paysages. M. de 
Gaspé n’est pas précisément un descriptif; il n’est pas, à coup sûr, un 
ancêtre de Pierre Loti, ni non plus un imitateur assidu de Chateaubriand. 
Cependant, certaines pages qu’il a écrites et où il a mêlé son âme aux 
spectacles de la nature, font penser, quand on les lit, à l’auteur du Génie 
du Christianisme et des Mémoires d’outre tombe. Il y a dans telle des- 
cription de l’incendie de la côte sud, et par exemple dans le tableau où 
Pon voit Arché contemplant, du haut d’un rocher, les ruines du manoir; 
il y a dans telles scènes qui se passent sur la grève ou dans les champs 
de Saint-Jean-Port-Joli, ou encore au bord de la rivière des Trois- 
Saumons, une grâce à la fois simple et ondoyante qui nous révêle chez 
l’écrivain une âme toute sensible à la poésie des choses. C’est parfois une 
toile assez large que peint M. de Gaspé, comme, par exemple, le décor 
de bois et de caps qui encadre le manoir seigneurial, ou les spectacles 
de notre grand fleuve quand il étale et fait miroiter sa splendeur aux 
feux du soleil couchant; parfois aussi, c’est un simple coup de pinceau, 
jeté en passant sur le fond mouvant du récit et de l’action, mais qui 
suffit à le colorer, à l’illuminer et à le transformer. Voyez, par exemple, 
comme il installe sous les sapins, les cèdres et les epinettes, pour le repas 
du midi, les habitants de Saint-Jean qui sont venus au village et à 
l’église passer la journée du vingt-quatre juin ;! ou encore, assistez le 
soir, au pied d’un noyer et sous le rayon de lune qui se joue dans l’onde, 
à l’entretien si grave de Jules avec M. d’Egmont.? 

C’est aussi ce sentiment délicat de la nature, et cette fraîcheur 
d'impression qu’elle lui donne, qui ont permis à M. de Gaspé de ra- 
conter le façon si piquante, si originale et si vraie les scènes de vie 
sauvage où se trouve un moment engagé le malheureux Arché. I] a 
surtout prêté aux acteurs de ce petit drame, et en particulier au chef 
indien, la Grand’-Loutre, le langage si imagé, si concret et si pittoresque 
qui convient. C’est la nature qui parle par ces voix de la forêt, et M. 
de Gaspé, habitué à l’entendre se révéler et chanter autour de lui, en a 
facilement rendu l’harmonieuse expression. 

* * *# 


Il y a done dans ce livre, qui n’a pas la prétention d’être une œuvre 
d'art, un art véritable qui s’ignore souvent, et qui s’affiche aussi parfois. 
Mais inconscient ou voulu, il intéresse, séduit, attache le lec- 
teur. On feuillette et parcourt avec grande curiosité et avidité le livre 
des Anciens Canadiens; et, à se laisser prendre par cet enchantement 


Page 165. 
2Page 146. 


{roy] ETUDE SUR ‘ LES ANCIENS CANADIENS ?’ 117 


du vieux conteur, on constate une fois de plus comme il est possible que 
Part véritable se moque parfois de l’art lui-même, tout comme lélo- 
quence vraie, selon le mot de Pascal, se moque de léloquence. 

Le public de 1863 apprécia comme il devait l’œuvre qu’on lui pré- 
sentait. Les deux mille exemplaires de la première édition furent rapi- 
dement enlevés, et dès 1864, on publiait une nouvelle édition de cinq 
mille exemplaires. Le livre a eu depuis trois autres éditions, et il est 
resté le roman le plus sympathique qu’il y ait dans notre littérature. 

De Gaspé, qui avait si longtemps vécu dans la retraite et l’obs- 
curité de son manoir, devint tout à coup l’un des plus illustres parmi 
nos écrivains. Son nom passa sur toutes les lèvres. Les étudiants, qui 
croyaient apercevoir dans le livre nouveau l’épopée populaire et natio- 
nale qui hante l’imagination de tout lecteur d’Homère et de Virgile, 
se disputaient le roman historique et merveilleux qui venait de paraître. 
Les élèves du Collège de l’Assomption préparèrent un triomphe à lau- 
teur des Anciens Canadiens. Au mois de juillet 1865, ils mirent à la 
scène un drame tiré de l’œuvre de M. de Gaspé. M. de Gaspé fut invité 
à cette fête littéraire, et y assista entouré de Maximilien Bibaud, du 
docteur Meilleur, et de représentants des familles de Salaberry, de Beau- 
jeu, et de Martigny. Le supérieur du Collège, M. Barret, présenta à la 
jeunesse étudiante “ cet homme qui l’avait devancée de trois quarts de 
siècle sur la route de la vie,” et il le lui montra comme “ Pexpression 
vivante de l’antique noblesse de nos premières familles canadiennes.” 

M. de Gaspé, tout ému des honneurs qui couronnaient sa vieillesse— 
il avait alors soixante et dix-neuf ans—s’excusa de ne pouvoir que lire 
une courte réponse à tous ces hommages. “J’ai peu d'espoir, dit-il à 
ses jeunes admirateurs, de conserver longtemps le souvenir de votre 
gracieuseté: le septuagénaire ne vit que pour la tombe la plus pro- 
chaine, Mais quelque soit la durée de ma vie, elle aura l’effet de dis- 
siper souvent les sombres nuages qui attristent, de temps à autre, lexis- 
tence d’un vieillard. Les jeunes messieurs qui ont si bien joué le drame 
dont le fond est tiré de mon ouvrage Les Anciens Canadiens, mont 
transporté aux beaux jours de ma jeunesse, et m’ont fait vivre pendant 
trois heures avec les amis que mon imagination avait créés.” * 

Ces personnages qu'avait créés Pimagination de M. de Gaspé, avec 
lesquels il lui plaisait tant de s’entretenir, sont encore bien vivants, et 
ils réjouissent aujourd’hui et instruisent, comme il y a quarante ans, 
les jeunes gens et tous les lecteurs qui les veulent connaître. M. de 
Gaspé les a comparés, dans l’adieu qui termine son livre, à ces figures 


2On peut consulter sur ce voyage de M. de Gaspé au Collège de l’As- 
somption, une petite brochure publiée à l'imprimerie de la Minerve, Montréal, 
1865, et intitulée: Biographie et oraison funèbre du Révd M. F. Labelle, et autres 
uocuments relatifs à sa mémoire ainsi qu'à la visite de Philippe Aubert de Gaspé, 
Ecr., au Collège de l'Assomption etc. 


118 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


fantastiques que le jeune fils de Jules, Arché d’Haberville, assis un soir 
au coin de la cheminée, voit se former, marcher, danser, monter, des- 
cendre, et puis disparaitre dans la flamme mourante du brasier qui 
s'éteint. Il craint que tous ces personnages fictifs qu’il a fait s’agiter 
sous les yeux de ses contemporains ne disparaissent aussi, et bientôt, 
avec celui qui les faisait mouvoir. Cette crainte, qui est l’effet d’une 
extrême modestie, ne devait pas troubler lartiste, ni la paix de ses 
soixante-quinze ans. Le roman de M. de Gaspé a survécu à son auteur; 
ou plutôt, il a fait que M. de Gaspé lui-même n’est pas mort tout 
entier. Avec les Mémories qui en sont une suite et un complé- 
ment, il porte et il portera longtemps encore à tous ceux qui parmi nous 
s'intéressent à la langue, à la littérature, à l’histoire et aux mœurs cana- 
diennes le nom désormais impérissable de celui qui nous l’a donné 
comme le fruit savoureux de son aimable vieillesse. 


Section I., 1906. [119] Memorrss §, R. C. 


VI.—La République d'Indian Stream. 


Par MY 0F-J'AUTDET: 


(Présenté par B. Sulte, et lu le 24 mai 1906.) 


Tout le monde connait le Val d’Andorre, cette minuscule république 
située sur le versant méridional des Pyrénées, entre la France dont elle 
reconnait la suzeraineté, et l’Espagne dont elle relève au spirituel ; 
se gouvernant elle-même au moyen d’un conseil élu annuelle- 
ment. On pourrait faire plus d’un rapprochement entre ce 
petit état et celui qui fait le sujet du présent travail. Situés tous deux 
dans les montagnes, ils ont la même forme primitive de gouvernement 
et à peu près la même superficie; mais ils diffèrent essentiellement 
par leur origine. Tandis que le premier doit son indépendance à la 
générosité de Charlemagne, vainqueur des Maures d’Espagne, qui voulut 
ainsi reconnaître les services précieux que lui avait rendus un petit 
peuple de braves, l’autre naquit au sein des troubles causés par l’igno- 
rance des diplomates anglais et la subtilité des hommes d’Etat améri- 
cains qui rédigèrent le célèbre traité de paix de 1783. Mais, plus 
heureuse que sa sœur cadette d'Amérique, la république d’Andorre a 
pu passer à travers les obstacles accumulés sur sa route par le temps, 
les guerres et les révolutions européennes et conserver intacte son auto- 
nomie jusqu’à nos jours. 

Les quelques notes que nous avons recueillies et rassemblées sur 
la république d’Indian Stream— qui n’a guère fait de bruit dans le 
monde, mais dont la courte histoire a été néanmoins assez mouve- 
mentée—suffiront, cnoyons-nous, quoique incomplète, pour donner une 
idée exacte de ce que furent son origine, son développement et sa fin. 
Elles nous montreront, une fois de plus, la coupable faiblesse dont a 
invariablement fait preuve le gouvernement britannique, chaque fois 
que les intérêts de notre pays se sont trouvés à traverser les desseins 
ambitieux de nos puissants voisins. En effet, le territoire et les intérêts 
du Canada commerciaux et autres, ont toujours été sacrifiés: témoin, 
le récent arrangement survenu entre la Grande-Bretagne et les Etats- 
Unis, au sujet des frontières de l’Alaska. Il faut espérer que le jour 
nest pas trop éloigné où un homme d’Etat canadien réussira à obtenir 
de l'Angleterre le droit pour le Canada de faire ses propres traités. 

D’où vient ce nom d’Indian Stream (Ruisseau des Sauvages) donné 
à cette partie du pays? L'histoire ne nous renseigne pas sur ce point; 
mais ce nom évoque tout un monde de suppositions. Cette contrée 
fut-elle jadis le théatre des exploits sanglants de quelque farouche tribu, 


120 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


ou, tout simplement un endroit de chasse et de pêche; un lieu de pré- 
dilection de pacifiques nemrods aborigènes, ou encore, un marché pour 
Jes fourrures précieuses? C’est ce que nous ne saurions dire. 

La république d’Indian Stream, bornée au sud-est par la rivière 
Connecticut et le ruisseau dont elle portait le nom, et à l’ouest par 
le ruisseau de Hall, était située dans le comté actuel de Coos, état du 
New Hampshire, au nord de la ligne quarante-cinquième. Elle était 
entourée de nombreux petits ruisseaux, tributaires de la rivière Con- 
necticut. 

Durant plus d’un demi-siècle, ce petit établissement a joué un rôle 
assez important dans les négociations qui eurent lieu entre la Grande- 
Bretagne et les Etats-Unis au sujet des frontières entre le Canada et 
la république voisine. Il parait cependant être resté inconnu à nos 
historiens. 

Cette petite république doit-elle être regardée comme un état 
indépendant ou comme une simple municipalité? Cette question nous 
a été posée. Nous croyons pouvoir répondre que cette république était 
bel et bien un état indépendant exerçant les fonctions souveraines. Les 
actes des habitants de ce territoire ainsi que l'opinion du juge Fletcher 
nous semblent confirmer pleinement cet avancé. 

Les habitants d’Indian Stream se considéraient en effet comme une 
nation neutre et se gouvernaient eux-mêmes. Leur gouvernement se 
composait d’une conseil de cinq membres élus annuellement. 

Le traité de Versailles, du 3 septembre 1783, par lequel la Grande- 
Bretagne reconnut l'indépendance de ses anciennes colonies d’Amérique, 
devait délimiter les frontières entre la nouvelle république et ce qui 
restait des possessions britanniques sur ce continent. C’est ce qui fut 
fait. Mais le manque de connaissances exactes des lieux, ainsi que le 
peu de valeur que le gouvernement anglais d'alors semblait attacher aux 
colonies; tandis que les hommes d’Htat américains paraissaient au 
contraire, connaître les moindres détails de la géographie de 
ces lieux, et étaient possédés d’un apre désir d’agrandir leur pays, furent 
la cause de beaucoup d’embarras; et Angleterre finit par faire perdre 
au Canada, une vaste portion de territoire qui alla augmenter la super- 
ficie déjà immense des Etats-Unis. 

Dès 1763, le gouvernement impérial avait impolitiquement détaché 
de la province de Québec, pour les annexer à la province voisine de New 
York, de grandes étendues de terre qu’il se trouva à perdre lors de la 
reconnaissance de l’indépendance des Etats-Unis. Cette ligne de con- 
duite avait sans doute été inspirée à l’Angleterre par le fait qu'elle ne 
se sentait guère sûre de conserver sa nouvelle acquisition, tandis qu’elle 
se trouvait bien chez elle à New York, et ne croyait pas en être délogée 


[AUDET] LA REPUBLIQUE D’INDIAN STREAM 121 


si tôt. Mais nous savons que ses prévisions ne se réalisèrent pas. Au 
contraire, Angleterre perdit ses anciennes colonies et conserva le 
Canada, grâce à la loyauté et à la bravoure dont firent preuve ses 
nouveaux sujets, les Canadiens. 

Voici en quels termes une partie de la frontière entre la province de 
Québec et les états du Maine, du New Hampshire, du Vermont et de 
New York fut décrite dans le traité de 1783 : “En suivant la hauteur des 
terres qui divisent les rivières qui se jettent dans le Saint-Laurent de 
celles qui tombent dans l’océan Atlantique, jusqu'aux sources les plus 
nord-ouest de la rivière Connecticut, puis en prenant par le milieu de 
cette rivière jusqu’à la ligne quarante-cinquiéme et suivant cette ligne 
vers l’ouest, etc.” Cette description pouvait paraître assez explicite 
à quiconque ne connaissait pas le pays, mais en réalité, elle était on ne 
peut plus vague. Lequel des nombreux ruisseaux qui sillonnent cette 
partie du pays était réellement la rivière Connecticut? Et, de toutes 
ces sources, ces lacs, ces marais, desquels viennent ces ruisseaux, lequel 
était véritablement la source la plus nord-ouest de cette rivière? C’était 
là, on en conviendra volontiers, un problème difficile à résoudre pour les 
diplomates anglais qui ne connaissait absolument rien de ce pays. Et, 
d’ailleurs, il s’agissait bien de cela; le gouvernement britannique, qui 
venait de laisser glisser entre ses doigts la moitié d’un continent, devait- 
il daigner jeter un seul regard sur une si infime parcelle de ces “ quelques 
arpents de neige ” que lui avait si bénévolement cédés quelques années 
auparavan: son cousin le roi de France? Ne lui en resterait-il pas 
suffisamment? Cela valait-il la peine d'occuper son attention, ne fût-ce 
qu'un moment? Non, assurément. Cependant, ces questions d’un si 
mince intérêt pour l’Angleterre agitaient certains esprits au Canada, 
entre autres celui du juge John Fletcher de Sherbrooke, qui les posait, 
dans une lettre en date du mois d'avril 1835, à Lord Aylmer, alors 
gouverneur du Bas-Canada, et qu’il avouait ne pouvoir résoudre malgré 
sa profonde connaissance de cette région. 

“Vous n’ignorez pas, écrivait-il, qu’il existe depuis plusieurs années, 
sur notre frontière sud-est, une espèce d'établissement extra-national, 
généralement connu sous le nom d’Indian Stream Settlement, lequel, 
comme beaucoup d’autres anomalies du même genre, est sorti des travaux 
des diplomates qui ont préparé le célèbre traité de paix avec les Etats- 
Unis en 1783. Je me rappelle avoir entendu parler de cette république, 
il y a bien des années, et depuis longtemps, je me proposais d’aller rendre 
visite à ses habitants, afin de me mettre au courant des choses et pouvoir 
ainsi mieux faire mon devoir quant à ce qui regarde cette partie du pays; 
mais mes nombreuses occupations ici, m'ont empêché de mettre ce projet 
à exécution. 


122 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


“Tl paraitrait maintenant, continuait-il, que la prospérité croissante 
et la richesse de cette partie du pays ont depuis longtemps attiré d’atten- 
tion du gouvernement de l’état voisin du New Hampshire. En consé- 
quence, ils envoyèrent, il y a quelques années, un arpenteur afin de 
déterminer quel était le point le plus nord-ouest d’où coulait un ruisseau 
quelconque qui fut tributaire de la rivière Connecticut. Il ne pouvait, 
naturellement, pensait-il, avoir aucune difficulté à prouver à notre 
gouvernement que ce point devait être la source la plus nord-ouest de la 
rivière Connecticut; et qu’un ruisseau prenant sa source à ce point, 
quelque petit qu’il fut, ou quelque nom qu’il portât, fut réellement la 
rivière Connecticut elle-même, qui devait, d’après les termes mêmes du 
traité, constituer la frontière. Il paraîtrait que ce monsieur fut très 
heureux dans ses recherches; ayant trouvé qu’en admettant qu’une des 
sources d’un petit ruisseau qui se déverse dans la rivière Connecticut, 
fut réellement la source de cette dernière, ils pourraient aïnsi agrandir 
considérablement l’état du New Hampshire aux dépens du Bas-Canada ; 
et les autorités constituées ont institué des poursuites pour sédition et 
haute trahison contre certains habitants de la petite république pour 
avoir osé mettre en doute leur suprématie sur une grande portion de 
territoire qui avait, jusqu’à présent, été regardé par erreur et ignorance, 
comme faisant partie du Bas-Canada. 

“Un homme que je n’avais jamais vu ni connu, ajoutait M. 
Fletcher, mais qui me parait avoir de bonnes manières et posséder une 
bonne dose d'intelligence, est venu me voir samedi dernier, en sa qualité 
de commissaire de l’Indian Stream Settlement, dont il est un des princi- 
paux fonctionnaires. L/’objet de sa mission m’a paru être de demander 
ma protection et, par mon entremise, celle des gouvernements canadien et 
impérial, à propos de certaine invasion de leur territoire par le shérif 
du comté voisin de Coos, laquelle a eu lieu, parait-il sous le prétexte 
d'exécuter certaines poursuites criminelles contre des délinquants qui 
refusaient de reconnaître la suprématie universelle des Etats-Unis; et 
cette invasion menace, si elle est renouvelée, d’être la cause d’une effu- 
sion de sang. La conséquence de cette mesure arbitraire a été que la 
grande majorité de ces républicains sont devenus de trés dévoués et 
loyaux sujets de Sa Majesté britannique; et qu’ils sont maintenant tout 
a fait persuadés que la vraie riviére Connecticut est réellement celle dont 
il est fait mention dans le traité de Paris, et qu’ils devraient être dé- 
signés comme demeurant au nord de la frontière et du piquet de cèdre. 
Je lui ai répondu que je soumettrais le cas à votre Excellence. .... 

Je juge Fletcher transmettait en même temps, une pétition des 
habitants de ce territoire, dans laquelle ils exposaient leurs griefs, 
demandaient aide et protection, et reconnaissaient la juridiction du Bas- 
Canada. 


[AUDET] LA REPUBLIQUE D’INDIAN STREAM 123 


Depuis longtemps le gouvernement de l’état du New Hampshire 
réclamait ce territoire comme sien, et M. G. Sullivan, procureur du 
comté de Coos, maintenait qu’il était sous la juridiction des cours de son 
comté et soutenait que les officiers de ces cours étaient justifiables d’y 
vouloir exercer leurs fonctions; d’un autre côté, le gouvernement du Bas- 
Canada le réclamait également et l’avait fait arpenter en 1792, sous la 
direction de Samuel Holland, arpenteur général de la province, qui 
Pavait inclus dans le canton de Drayton. 

Dans un rapport en date du 9 mars 1793, Holland faisait observer 
au lieutenant-gouverneur, Alured Clarke, que l’idée de considérer le 
ruisseau de Hall comme frontière au lieu de la rivière Connecticut, lui 
paraissait être toute nouvelle ; et que le New Hampshire n’y avait pensé 
que depuis peu, et il ajoutait : La frontière entre le Bas-Canada et cette 
partie de l’ancienne province de New York appelée aujourd’huy 
Vermont, telle que tracée par les autorités des deux provinces durant les 
années 1772-73-74, traverse justement le ruisseau nommé Hall’s brook 
et procède de là vers l’est jusqu’au bord du ruisseau qui a toujours porté 
et porte encore le nom de rivière Connecticut. Cette rivière, d’après 
ce que j’ai toujours entendu dire et compris, disait-il, a toujours été 
considérée comme la frontière du New Hampshire.” 

Cependant, et c’était là une grande faute de la part du gouverne- 
ment du Bas-Canada; faute que les Américains ne manquèrent pas de 
faire tourner à leur profit plus tard, en réclamant possession actuelle de ce 
territoire; cependant, disons-nous, pour éviter les désagréments qui 
auraient pu résulter du fait de l’établissement de colons dans cette 
région, le gouvernement du Bas-Canada n’avait pas cru devoir y concéder 
de terrains. Il arriva done ce qu’on aurait dû prévoir, c’est la popu- 
lation de ce territoire fut composée de squatters, c’est-à-dire de gens sans 
aveu, qui s'étaient établis la sans permission. Quelques-uns obtinrent, 
quelques années plus tard, des titres des autorités du New Hampshire. 

La date exacte à laquelle les premiers colons vinrent se fixer dans 
cette région ne nous est pas connue, mais nous sommes porté à croire 
que ce dut être vers l’année 1792, c’est-à-dire, à l’époque où le gouverne- 
ment du Bas-Canada fit arpenter cette partie du pays. Depuis quelques 
années déjà, les loyalistes américains, chassés de leurs foyers par la 
révolution, affluaient dans les Cantons de l'Est, et les premiers habitants 
de cette région furent probablement de ces réfugiés politiques. 

Ce petit coin de pays était bien arrosé et conséquemment très propre 
à la culture. De plus, n’étant soumis à aucune loi, il devint bientôt le 
lieu de refuge d’un groupe hétérogène qui s’y établit sans façons. Mais, 
la population augmentant, on s’aperçut bientôt que, quoique la liberté 
absolue soit une belle chose en théorie, il n’en fallait pas moins sor- 
ganiser et se donner une forme quelconque de gouvernement. On 


124 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


nomma done, comme nous l’avons vu, un conseil d’administration er. 
l’on donna au nouvel état le nom pompeux d’Indian Stream Republic. 

Les nouveaux citoyens se partagèrent la terre et se livrèrent à la 
culture. Ils devinrent bientôt assez nombreux. Au commencement de 
l’année 1835, l’établissement d’Indian Stream contenait soixante et neuf 
familles, composées de quatre cent quatorze habitants; et, il était très 
prospere. Chaque chef de famille possédait cent acres de terre et il y 
avait plus de quinze cents acres en culture. 

Le pays se peuplait done peu a peu, la forét séculaire s’abattait sous 
la hache du défricheur; de riches moissons s’épanouissaient sous l’effort 
répété du colon, répandant partout le confort et le bien-être chez ces 
hardis pionniers de la civilisation, qui s’étaient aventurés dans cette ré- 
gion éloignée et privée de toute espèce de communications. Tout allait 
bien: c’était l’âge d’or. Mais, avant d’en arriver là, quel courage il leur 
avait fallu déployer ! Quelle somme énorme de durs travaux n’avaient-ils 
pas dû exécuter! Ils avaient dû pénétrer à travers la forêt vierge; 
s’exposer au froid, à la faim, aux privations de toutes sortes, avec, pour 
toute richesse, une hache et quelques sacs de provisions qu’il leur avait 
fallu transporter à dos de longues distances. Quel rôle sublime, quoique 
effacé, que celui du colon, et pourtant combien peu apprécié ! 

La prospérité croissante du nouvel état excitait, depuis longtemps 
déjà, la convoitise des Américains, qui se décidèrent enfin à s’emparer 
de ce territoire. Or, qui veut la fin veut les moyens, dit-on, et les pré- 
textes ne manquaient point. 

Le 20 janvier 1835, William Smith, shérif adjoint du comté de 
Coos, non seulement y saisissait des effets appartenant à des habitants 
de l’endroit, mais il arrêtait même et emprisonnait à Lancaster, chef- 
lieu de son comté, un des résidents, Æneas Rowell, sur la plainte d’un 
nommé Luther Parker. Les habitants indignés de ce procédé arbitraire 
protestèrent hautement contre cet acte qu’ils regardaient avec raison, 
comme attentatoire à leur liberté et au privilège dont ils avaient joui 
jusque là de se gouverner eux-mêmes. Mais, se sentant impuissants en 
face de ce redoutable adversaire, ils se jetèrent dans les bras du gouverne- 
ment canadien—entre deux maux,, ils choississaient le moindre—et 
envoyèrent un de leur conseillers au juge Fletcher pour lui annoncer ce 
qui venait d'arriver et lui demander aide et protection contre les envahis- 
seurs, comme il le dit dans sa lettre. 

Parker étant venu peu de temps après en Canada, il fut arrêté le 
2 juillet et emprisonné à Sherbrooke, chef-lieu du district de Saint- 
François. 

Les élections annuelles de la petite république avaient eu lieu 
comme à Vordinaire, le 9 mars 1835. Voici les noms des conseillers 


[avper] LA REPUBLIQUE D’INDIAN STREAM 128 


élus pour cette année: Richard J. Blanchard, Jeremiah Tabor, Burley 
Blood, Abner Hyland et William White. 

La nouvelle administration s’adressa au juge Fletcher et lui 
demanda d’activer les négociations qui ne lui paraissaient avancer guère. 
Le temps parait toujours long à qui attend dans l’anxiété. 

Le 8 juin suivant, William Badger, gouverneur du New Hampshire, 
réclamait dans son message à la législature, le droit de cet état d’exercer 
juridiction sur toute l’étendue du territoire en dispute: “ Premièrement 
parce que, disait-il, ce territoire est en deca de la frontière fixée par le 
traité de 1783,” et il citait à l’appui de ses prétentions, les mots mêmes 
du traité et référait à certaines lettres patentes concédant des terres à 
différentes personnes; ainsi qu'à la proclamation du souverain anglais 
décrivant les frontières du Canada, après la cession, en 1763; “ laquelle, 
ajoutait-il, nous donnerait même droit à plus que ce que nous 
demandons.” “Deuxièmement, nous réclamons possession actuelle du 
territoire en question depuis 1783.” Il essaie ensuite de démontrer 
quelle est la source la plus nord-ouest de la rivière Connecticut, en 
référant à un rapport d’une commission de la législature du New Hamp- 
shire, en date du 6 janvier 1790, laquelle avait été nommée pour 
délimiter la frontière entre cet état et le Bas-Canada. Il citait encore 
le fait qu'une résolution avait été passée par son gouvernement en 1820, 
autorisant le procureur général à instituer des poursuites contre toute 
personne qui s’établirait illégalement sur les terres de cet état, et qu’en 
conséquence de cette mesure, un résident du territoire en litige avait été 
ainsi poursuivi. Il mentionnait encore un autre rapport d’une commis- 
sion de la législature, du mois de décembre 1824, se rapportant à ce 
sujet. 

On voit que les autorités américaines s’étaient préparées de longue 
main au conflit qui devait inévitablement surgir un jour ou l’autre, entre 
les deux pays, au sujet de ce territoire; tandis que les gouvernements 
canadien et impérial semblaient plongés dans un profond sommeil, 
s’inquiétant peu ou point du lendemain. 

Cependant, les évènements se précipitaient et le gouvernement cana- 
dien dut bientôt sortir de sa léthargie. Le réveil fut brusque, le rève fit 
place à la sombre réalité. 

Le 12 octobre de cette année (1835), un nommé John H. Tyler, 
résident du canton Hereford, voisin de celui de Drayton, étant allé dans 
ce, dernier canton, fut arrêté pour dette set on essaya de Pemmener prison- 
mer dans le New Hampshire, mais il s’échappa. Le juge de paix Alex- 
ander Rea, à qui Tyler avait porté plainte, émana un mandat d’arrêt 
contre ses assaillants: William Smith et John Milton Harvey, de 
Colebrook, N.H., et Richard J. Blanchard de Drayton. Zaccheus 
Clough, Pofficier chargé d’exécuter ce mandat ayant, avec l’aide d’un 


126 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


assistant, arrêté Blanchard le 22 du même mois, à Hereford, s’en reve- 
nait avec son prisonnier a la résidence de M. Rea, lorsque soudain, arrivé 
a quelques pas de son but, il fut attaqué par une dizaine d’individus 
armés, qui se jetèrent sur lui et sur son assistant, leur enlevèrent le 
prisonnier et se préparaient à l’emmener avec eux, lorsque M. Rea, attiré 
par le bruit et les cris, vint s’enquérir de la cause de ce tapage. Voyant 
ce qui se passait, il ordonna aux amis de Blanchard de lui remettre le 
prisonnier, puis de se disperser et de s’en retourner paisiblement chez 
eux. A ces mots, les bandits ne se possédant plus de rage, se ruérent 
sur le magistrat, le terrassérent, puis le jetant dans une voiture, ils 
l'emmenèrent à Canaan’s Corner, dans l’état du Vermont, et ne le 
relachérent qu’au bout de quelques jours, après lui avoir fait subir toutes 
sortes de mauvais traitements. Durant la bagarre, un coup de feu à 
adresse de M. Rea, blessa un nommé Bernard Young à la cuisse. Ce 
dernier reçut aussi un coup de sabre en voulant défendre le magistrat. 

L’offense était grave. On ne s’attaquait plus simplement aux 
habitants d’un territoire en litige; un magistrat dans l'exercice de ses 
fonctions avait été brutalement assailli et roué de coups, puis trainé en 
captivité dans un pays étranger. On avait même attenté à ses jours en 
déchargeant sur lui une arme à feu. 

Le gouverneur, averti de la chose par MM. Moore et Gugy, députés 
du comté de Sherbrooke à l’Assemblée législative, s’émut et nomma 
immédiatement une commission d’enquête. Les commissaires se mirent 
tout de suite à la besogne et firent rapport en janvier 1836; ils consta- 
tèrent que les plaintes qui avaient été portées par les deux membres ci- 
haut nommés étaient bien fondées. 

De nombreux échanges de correspondances et de documents eurent 
lieu entre les gouvernements du Bas-Canada et du New Hampshire, mais 
cela n’ayant abouti à rien, la question fut enfin soumise par Lord Aylmer 
ambassadeur, des réclamations au gouvernement central à Washington. 
aux autorités impériales qui adressèrent, par l'entremise de leur 
ambassadeur, des réclamations au gouvernement central à Washington. 

Cependant, ces pourparlers traînaient en longueur et rien ne se 
décidait. Les habitants d’Indian Stream, toujours menacés par les 
autorités du New Hampshire, et en butte aux incessantes tracasseries des 
fonctionnaires du comté de Coos, ne se voyant pas secourus par le 
gouvernement anglais, finirent par perdre courage. Les uns quittèrent 
cette région devenue si inhospitalière, les autres décidèrent, pour éviter 
une plus grande effusion de sang, de reporter leur dévouement et leur 
loyauté à la république américaine, et le 5 août, ils annoncaient au juge 
Fletcher qu’ils reconnaissaient désormais la juridiction du New 
Hampshire. 


[AUDET ] LE REPUBLIQUE D’INDIAN STREAM 127 


Le gouvernement britannique abandonna définitivement ses droits à 
ce territoire par le traité Ashburton, signé à Washington, le 9 août 1842. 

“Par ce traité, dit M. Louis P. Turcotte, dans son Histoire du 
Canada sous l'Union, l'Angleterre cédait des millions d’acres de terre qui 
appartenaient incontestablement au Canada et au Nouveau-Brunswick. 
Elle abandonnait dans la vallée de la Madawaska, plus de deux mille 
Canadiens-français et Acadiens, qui auraient préféré continuer vivre sous 
la constitution anglaise.” 


REGLEMENTS 


DE LA 


SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


1. But de la Société. 


Le but de la société est expliqué comme suit dans son acte d’incor- 
porations: “lo encourager les études et recherches littéraires et scien- 
tifiques ; 20 publier des bulletins annuels, ou semi-annuels, contenant les 
extraits des procès-verbaux de ses réunions, les relations des travaux 
accomplis, ainsi que les études et mémoires de mérite, et autres docu- 
ments qui pourront être jugés dignes de publication; 30 offrir des ré- 
compenses ou prix pour des études ou écrits sur des sujets se rattachant 
au Canada, et aider les recherches déjà commencées et poursuivies au 
point qu’elles auront plus tard une valeur probable; 40 aider à la col- 
lection de spécimens dans le but de former un musée canadien d’archives, 
@ethnologie, d'archéologie et d’histoire naturelle.” 


2. Le nom. 


Avec la gracieuse permission de Sa Majesté la reine Victoria, la 
société porte le nom de “ Société Royale du Canada” et ses membres 
sont désignés comme “ Membres de la Société Royale du Canada.” 


3. Président honoraire et patron. 


Son Excellence le gouverneur général est président honoraire et 
patron de la Sociéte. 


4. Divisions par sections (telles que définies en 1905). 


La Société se compose de quatre sections :— 

1. Littérature francaise, Histoire, Archéologie et sujets conjoints. 

2. Littérature anglaise, Histoire, Archéologie et sujets conjoints. 

3. Science des Mathématiques, de la Chimie et de la Physique. 

4. Sciences Géologiques et Biologiques. 

Les sections peuvent s’assembler séparément pour l’examen et la 
discussion des études soumises, de même que pour les affaires, à tels 
temps et lieu fixés par elles, sous le contrôle du conseil. 

Dans l'intervalle des réunions, les papiers qui doivent paraître sans 
retard, peuvent être soumis à l’une ou l’autre section et discutés par 
correspondance entre les membres de la section intéressée, de la manière 
et sous les conditions ci-après indiquées. 


2 SOCIÉTÉ ROYALE DU CANADA 
5. Officiers. 


Les officiers de la Société sont un président, un vice-president, un 
secrétaire honoraire et un trésorier, élus par la société réunie. Chaque 
section élit son président, vice-président et secrétaire. Les élections : 
sont annuelles. 

Le Conseil de la Société se compose des officiers ainsi élus et des 
ex-présidents, durant trois années, à partir de la date de leur sortie de 
la présidence; en outre, tels anciens membres du Conseil, ne dépassant 
pas le nombre de quatre, choisis par le Conseil même. Les anciens 
membres ainsi nommés, restent en fonctions durant trois années et ensuite 
jusqu’à ce qu’on les remplace. 


6. Les Membres (article modifié en 1899 et 1900). 


Les membres doivent résider en Canada ou à Terreneuve; il faut 
qu'ils aient publié des ouvrages originaux ou des mémoires de valeur 
ou qu’ils aient rendu des services éminents à la littérature ou aux 
sciences, 

Le nombre des membres de chaque section est, en général, limité 
à vingt-cinq mais peut aller jusqu’à trente, selon le désir de la section 
et d’après la manière indiquée ci-après. Les candidatures pour remplir 
les sièges vides sont reçues en tout temps par écrit signé de trois mem- 
bres de la section et ces papiers sont à la garde du secrétaire honoraire 
qui en tient record. Lorsqu'il se déclare une vacance, le secrétaire 
honoraire en donne avis aux membres de la section et transmet à chacun 
d’eux une liste imprimée des candidats qui sont sur les rangs, et ce le 
quinze du mois de mars précédant la réunion annuelle ou assemblée 
générale de la Société. Chaque membre place une croix vis-à-vis le nom’ 
du candidat de son choix et renvoye le papier au secrétaire honoraire, 
qui en fait rapport au Conseil avant la réunion générale annuelle de la 
Société. Le Conseil soumet à la Société le nom du candidat qui a obtenu 
la majorité de la section. il n’y a pas de majorité, le Conseil peut 
choisir parmi les candidats celui ou ceux qui ont le plus de votes en 
leur faveur et en donner avis aux membres de la section, au moins un 
mois avant la réunion annuelle où les élections peuvent avoir lieu en 
prenant le vote des membres présents, sinon, le sujet est référé de nou- 
veau à la section intéressée pour choisir parmi les candidats en nomina- 
tion, afin de recommander ceux-ei à la Société, qui fait l'élection. La 
section doit soumettre ce choix le premier jour de l’assemblée annuelle, 
à 2 hrs 30 p.m., s’il n’est pas ordonné autrement par la Société. S’il y 
a plus d’une vacance chacune doit être traitée séparément. 

Chaque section a le pouvoir d’augmenter le nombre de ses membres 
par un ou deux annuellement. La nomination de ces candidats se fait 


STATUTS ET REGLEMENTS 3 


de la maniére ordinaire, mais chaque membre de la section a la faculté 
de voter absolument contre l’élection d’un membre additionnel; et si 
la majorité des voix se trouve opposée à l’élection additionnelle, telle 
élection n’aura pas lieu cette année. Le présent article cessera d’avoir 
son effet dès que le nombre des membres d’aucune section sera de trente. 


7. Devoirs des Membres. 


Les membres doivent signer les règlements de la Société, doivent 
être présentés par le président à la Société en séance générale; doivent 
assister aux réunions générales ou faire connaître le motif de leur ab- 
sence au secrétaire honoraire; doivent payer une contribution annuelle 
de $2, ou la somme de $20 en un seul paiement pour toute la vie. Ces 
contributions donnent droit 4 un exemplaire du bulletin annuel de la 
Société. 

Tout membre peut se retirer de la Société. Sur la recommandation 
du Conseil, et par une résolution de la Société en session générale, un 
membre qui se retire peut étre placé sur la liste des retraités conservant 
leur titre de membre. 

Tout membre qui sera trois ans consécutifs absent des assemblées 
et sans présenter de travail, ni donner par écrit des raisons satisfai- 
santes a la Société, sera considéré comme démissionnaire. 


8. Membres correspondants. 


La Société peut élire au scrutin, sur la proposition de trois mem- 
bres, ou sur la recommandation du Conseil, des membres correspondants 
qui ne résident point en Canada. Ces personnes doivent avoir acquis 
une éminence en littérature ou en science et ceci doit être démontré à 
la Société au moment de la recommandation. Le nombre des membres 
correspondants est limité a seize. 

Sous cette régle 8, il a été décidé, en mai 1884, que chaque section 
aura quatre membres correspondants, et que leurs noms, les noms de 
ceux qui les proposent, et les raisons données par écrit, seront portés à 
la connaissance de la Société par l’entremise du secrétaire honoraire, au 
moins une journée avant le scrutin pour l’élection de chaque membre 
correspondant. 


9. Assemblées. 


La Société tient une assemblée annuelle dans une ville du Canada 
choisie de temps à autre pour cet objet. A l’une de ces assemblées on 
peut décider de tenir d’autres réunions dans le cours de l’année. Tas- 
semblée annuelle a lieu selon la date fixée par l’assemblée précédente et, 
à son défaut, le Conseil détermine cette date. Les bureaux de la Société 


4 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 


seront à Ottawa, et ses assemblées auront lieu dans cette ville, à moins 
de décision contraire. 


10. Ouvrages présentés (article modifié en 1905). 


I.—Le titre de tout manuscrit, mémoire ou travail quelconque qu’un 
membre se propose de lire à une réunion de la Société, doit être soumis, 
avec un résumé de son contenu, au Conseil, par le moyen du secrétaire 
honoraire, avant l’assemblée en question. Ceci étant fait et approuvé, 
la communication dont il s’agit est référée à la section dont elle ressort, 
où elle est lue et discutée, soumise à un comité de la même section et, 
sur rapport de ce comité, elle peut être recommandée au Conseil pour 
publication, soit dans son entier ou par extraits, dans les bulletins de 
la Société. 

IT.—Le titre de tout manuscrit, mémoire ou travail quelconque 
qu’un, membre se propose de discuter par voie de correspondance, avec 
un résumé de son contenu, peut, sous l’article 4, être renvoyé au secré- 
taire de la section à laquelle il appartient, en aucun temps entre deux 
assemblées. Si le secrétaire de la section (se faisant assister s’il le dé4 
sire) décide que la publication immédiate est chose importante, et si la 
section a assez de fonds disponibles pour cet objet, le manuscrit au com- 
plet, dès qu’il est reçu, doit être composé par les typographes de la 
Société, avec la date de sa réception très visiblement indiquée; et un 
exemplaire ainsi imprimé est envoyé à chaque membre de la section. 

Un certain nombre d’exemplaires sont donnés à l’auteur. Tous ces 
papiers sont publiés sous la forme et le titre déterminés par le Conseil, 
avec un en-tête expliquant qu’ils sont soumis à la discussion des membres 
de la section, sujet à revision, et que la Société n’est pas responsable de 
leur contenu. 

La somme d’argent accordée à une section pour cet objet est fixée, 
de temps à autre, par le Conseil. 

Les papiers ainsi référés à une section pour être discutés par cor- 
respondance seront, lors de la prochaine assemblée annuelle, soumis de 
nouveau à la section pour plus ample discussion, si on le désire, et ils 
sont traités d’après la procédure (article I.) nécessaire avant que d’être 
insérés dans le bulletin. 

III.—Les écrits des personnes qui ne sont pas membres de la So- 
ciété peuvent être soumis par les membres sous les mêmes conditions 
que pour leurs propres ouvrages. 


11. Sociétés associées. 


Toute société littéraire ou scientifique du Canada choisie par un 
vote de la Société, est invitée au moyen d’une circulaire du secrétaire 


r 


STATUTS ET REGLEMENTS 8 


honoraire 4 désigner annuellement, un de ses membres comme délégué 
à la réunion de la Société et ce délégué, durant son terme comme tel, 
a le privilége de prendre part aux séances générales ou celles des sections, 
pour lire et discuter des travaux; et il doit pouvoir fournir un court 
aperçu des ouvrages accomplis et des études publiées durant l’année 
par sa société; aussi faire rapport sur toute matière où la Société Royale 
peut être utile par ses publications ou autrement. 


12. Circulation du Bulletin. 


Des exemplaires du bulletin de la Société sont distribués comme 
suit :— 

A tout membre qui a payé sa contribution. 

A toute société associée. 

Telles sociétés étrangères choisies par le Conseil. 

Les lieutenants-gouverneurs des provinces du Canada et celui de 
Terreneuve. 

Les membres du Conseil Privé du Canada. 

Le juge en chef et les juges du la Cour Supréme du Canada. 

Les présidents du Sénat et de la Chambre des Communes. 

Le juge en chef de chaque province. 

Le premier ministre de chaque province. 

Le président de la législature de chaque province. 

Le ministre ou le surintendant de l’instruction publique de chaque 
province. 

Les universités, la bibliothèque du parlement et les bibliothèques 
des législatures provinciales. 


= 


13. Devoirs du Conseil. 


Le Conseil administre toutes les affaires de la Société dans l’in- 
tervalle des assemblées et fait les arrangements nécessaires pour ces as- 
semblées. Il s’assemble sur convocation du président. Trois membres 
forment quorum. 

Le Conseil soumet un rapport de ses actes à chaque réunion de la 
Société pour son approbation. 

Le Conseil a la garde et l’administration de tout argent, contri- 
butions et autres propriétés de la Société, sujet à la sanction de ses actes, 
comme il est dit ci-dessus. 

En l’absence du président et du vice-président, le Conseil peut 
_ nommer un président temporaire et, dans le cas où la charge de secré- 
taire honoraire ou celle du trésorier deviendrait vacante, il peut nommer 
un secrétaire ou un trésorier en attendant la prochaine réunion de la 
Société. 


6 SOCIETE ROYALE DU CANADA 
14. Devoirs du Secrétaire honoraire. 


Le secrétaire honoraire tient les registres de la Société et du Con- 
seil et conduit leur correspondance; il reçoit et enregistre les nominations 
de membres et officiers des sections; est gardien des listes et minutes de 
la Société, et, avec l’avis du président, doit s’occuper de toute affaire 
qui survient dans l’intervalle des sessions. Il peut, avec le consentement 
du Conseil, déléguer aucune partie de ses devoirs à un assistant payé et 
nommé par le Conseil. 


15. Devoirs du trésorier. \ 


Le trésorier a la garde de l’argent de la Société, en tient compte et 
soumet le tout au Conseil lors de ses réunions; il reçoit les souscriptions, 
les dons et cadeaux et fait les déboursés autorisés par le Conseil. 


16. Adresses et rapports spéciaux. 


IL est du devoir du président et, s’il en est empêché, du vice-prési- 
dent, de préparer une adresse pour chaque assemblée annuelle. 

Il est du devoir du président de chaque section et, s’il en est em- 
pêché, du vice-président, de préparer une adresse traitant de ce qui 
concerne spécialement sa section pour chaque assemblée annuelle. 

La Société en session générale, ou toute section, du consentement de 
la Société, peut nommer des comités pour préparer des rapports sur 
‘aucun sujet spécial de littérature ou de science, ou sur les progrès de 
la littérature et des sciences, ou sur des ouvrages publiés en Canada, et 
proposer les mentions d’honneur qui paraissent désirables dans le cas 
d’ouvrages de mérite ou de recherches dignes d’attention. 


17. Lecture des travaux. 


I.—Les représentants de chaque section dans le Conseil sont juges 
des travaux qui doivent être acceptés ou refusés, Aucun travail n’est lu 
dans les sections, à l’assemblée générale, à moins qu’il n’ait été présenté, 
soit dans son entier, soit par extraits, avant les dernières trois semaines 
et régulièrement accepté par le Conseil, selon Particle 10 de ce règle- 
ment, autrement il faut la permission spéciale du Conseil. La publica- 
tion d’aucun papier non reçu de cette manière après lecture ou présenta- 
tion à la Société, peut être refusée par celle-ci. 

II.—Aucun papier déjà publié n’est accepté par la Société, sauf 
dans les cas où il aurait été entièrement refondu. 

III.—Un programme renfermant les titres des papiers qui seront 
lus est imprimé et envoyé à tous les membres de la Société au moins 
une semaine avant la session. 


STATUTS ET REGLEMENTS 7 


IV.—I] est du devoir du secrétaire de chaque section de préparer 
avant chaque jour de la session une liste des papiers qui seront présentés 
à la section, avec les noms des auteurs et le temps requis pour leur lec- 
ture. Ces listes sont imprimées et rendues publiques chaque matin avant 
Vheure fixée pour la réunion. 


18. Publication des travaux. 


I.—L’auteur doit revoir son manuscrit après la lecture, pour l’en- 
voyer à l’imprimeur. : 

II.—La première épreuve en galée est envoyée à l’auteur, aussi une 
revise en galée. 

III.—La matière est alors mise en page et une épreuve envoyée au 
secrétaire de la section à laquelle l’ouvrage appartient, et il signe cette 
épreuve après l’avoir corrigée. Si l’auteur le demande, il peut voir 
l’épreuve mise en page. 

IV.—Le président du comité d'impression, ou son remplaçant, signe 
le bon à tirer. Il voit à l’uniformité des en-tétes et du caractère em- 
ployé. 

V.—Si les auteurs doivent s’absenter pour aller dans des lieux tels 
qu’il résultera des délais de leur éloignement, il doivent désigner la per- 
sonne qui lira leurs épreuves, sans quoi le secrétaire de la section sera 
responsable de cette lecture et des corrections. 

‘VI.—Si, par suite de l’absence de l’auteur, l’épreuve n’est pas lue 
par lui, et s’il n’a nommé personne comme substitut, et si le secrétaire 
refuse de la lire, le comité d'impression ne retardera pas la publication 
du volume jusqu’au retour de l’auteur, mais laissera le papier de côté. 

VII.—Toute pièce en langue française sera lue, pour les fins pure- 
ment littéraires, par un correcteur d’épreuve expérimenté et familier 
avec l’usage actuel de la langue en France. 


19. Amendements à la constitution et aux règlements (adoptés en 
1893). 


Les membres qui ont des motions à proposer pour changement à la 
constitution ou aux réglements de la Société, doivent en donner avis un 
mois avant l’assemblée générale, et le secrétaire prépare une liste im- 
primée de tels avis pour la soumettre aux membres le premier jour de 
la session. 

Aucune régle ni réglement de la Société ne doit étre suspendu sans 
le consentement des deux tiers des membres présents à l’assemblée. 


meoy Al SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ENS AO Liens 


SE CLION It: 


ENGLISH HISTORY, LITERATURE, ARCH HZOLOGY, Erc. 


PAPERS FOR) 1906 


Sgcrion II., 1906. [3 | Trans. R. S. C. 


[.—A dditions and Corrections to Monographs on the Place-nomenclature, 
Cartography, Historic Sites, Boundaries and Settlement- 


origins of the Province of New Brunswick. 
(Contributions to the History of New Brunswick, No. 7.) 


By W. F..Ganone, MA. Pu.D. 


(Communicated by Dr. S. E. Dawson.) 


I—Additions and Corrections to the Plan for a General History of New 
Brunswick. 


Il.— Additions and Corrections to the Monograph on Place-nomenclature. 
III—Additions and Corrections to the Monograph on Cartography. 

IV.— Additions and Corrections to the Monograph on Historic Sites. 
V.—Additions and Corrections to the Monoetapl on Evolution of Boundaries. 


VI—Additions and Corrections to the Monograph on Settlement-Origins. 


Title-page and Contents to the series. 


The five monographs of this series were designed to cover the 
historical geography of New Brunswick, and in plan at least they 
de so. The organization given the respective subjects by their publica- 
tion has had the result not only of directing my own studies further, 
but also of bringing much additional information from correspondents. 
Thus a large amount of new material and some corrections have come 
into my hands, and it is the object of this work to present them, and 
in such a way that all items may be referred to their proper places 
in the respective monographs. A title-page, preface and table of 
contents to the entire series is added at the end of this paper. 


2 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


1. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS TO THE PLAN FOR A 
GENERAL HISTORY OF NEW BRUNSWICK. 


To this first paper of the series I have little here to add. I would 
call the third period of our history The Acadian (rather than the 
French) Period. I have been unjust in my comments (on page 98) 
upon existent works dealing with New Brunswick Indians, which I 
meant to describe as inadequate. And I hope now to carry out in full 
the plan outlined in this paper. 


IJ. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS TO THE MONOGRAPH 
ON PLACE-NOMENCLATURE. 


The figures prefixed refer in all cases to the pages of the originai 
monograph. 

181. The discussion of the methods 0. origin of place-names, on 
this page, is incomplete. A fuller list of methods is given by Johnson 
in his article on place names in Canada, in “ Canada, an Encyclopedia,” 
1897, Vol. I. <A thorough study of the origin of place-names is a 
study in psychological philology, a subject which will receive more 
study in the future than it does at present. 

In general it may be said that place-names originate in one or the 
other of four somewhat distinct ways. First, they are repetitive of 
earlier or aboriginal names, adopted for convenience usually without 
question of their significance. Second, they are descriptive, either of a 
physical peculiarity, of resemblance to a familiar object, of geographical 
location, of an associated person or event, or of ownership. To this 
class belong the great majority of place-names, including practically all 
those of aboriginal or unlettered peoples, as will be found illustrated 
later, under page 211. They are never given deliberately, but arise 
as descriptive phrases, which by repetition become transformed into 
proper names. Third, they are commemorative and deliberately chosen 
to honour some person (saint, king, patron, official), or to recall 
some place. Such names never arise naturally, but are given by persons 
in authority, explorers, rulers or legislators, and are more frequently 
applied to artificial than to natural geographical features or divisions. 
Fourth, they are associative, or suggestive of some fanciful or senti- 
mental feeling, legend, or idea, or of good omen. Found to a slight 
extent among the names given by simple peoples, they reach their 
highest development where there is a deliberate striving for effect in 
rames, as at pleasure resorts. 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 5 
Place-nomenclature. 


A striking fact about most commemorative names is their failure 
to commemorate. Innumerable names are given, especially in new 
countries like New Brunswick, to honour some individual. The great 
majority of our parish names have thus originated. But almost in- 
variably no record is made of the reason for the name, its origin is 
speedily forgotten, it is used by millions of people with no thought of 
its significance, and it is only finally by the laborious search of some 
antiquarian that its significance becomes known to him and his little 
circle of fellow students. 

184. Of changes in place-names caused by mis-prints on maps we 
have several in New Brunswick. Thus, the name Mascabin Point (in 
Charlotte) is, I have no doubt, simply a misprint for Mascarin (a form 
for Mascareen) Point; the new form is not known locally except that, be- 
ing on the charts, it is known to some captains in that vicinity. Again, a 
branch of the Little South-West Miramichi is called on some maps Mainor 
Lake Brook; but I find by comparison with the originals in the Crown 
Land Office that this should read Main or Lake, Brook being named 
for a lumberman, one Main. But a very striking case occurs in the 
the name Upsalquitch. This form, though universal on maps and 
in such literature of the region as exists, is not used locally, for 
the river is called by guides, lumberman and others who use it 
Absetquetch or some similar form of this word. I find, as I have shown 
in the Bulletin of the Natural History Society of N. B., V. 180, that 
the word was written Upsatquitch on Van Veldens’s original survey 
map of the river, but was copied with a misprint of / for ¢, giving us 
the present form Upsalquitch upon Purdy’s printed map of 1814 
which has been followed by all others down to the present day, thus 
establishing a literary as distinct from a local form. Again the map- 
name Belas Basin, at Lepreau, has no doubt been formed, as later noted, 
by an accidental map-combination of two separate words. 

The persistence of these forms by the way, shows the great effect 
of publication in giving stability to place names, and another illus- 
tration of the same principle is seen in the survival of St. John and 
St. Croix, much-printed names in early times, which are among the few 
European names which have been able to displace the native names 
on our rivers. All humanity has a reverence for that which is in print 
and attributes to a printed statement an authority it only rarely merits. 

185. Another danger to be guarded against in seeking the origin 
of place-names, is the acceptance of a folk-etymology, based upon the 
accidental resemblance of the name to some striking word or phrase. 
Such explanations are of all degrees from plausible to absurd, and a 


8 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


great many of them are current in New Brunswick. Thus, to take 
those of most dignity, Shepody is locally believed to be derived from 
Chapeau Dieu, God’s hat, in allusion to Shepody mountain. T'etagouche 
is supposed to be corruption of Téte-a-gauche, explained by a story to 
the effect that its first explorers found it heading unexpectedly “ te 
the left” as they ascended it. Yet we know that both of these words 
are of Indian origin. Again T'ormentine is said locally to be named for 
the torments suffered through mosquitoes, etc., by its first settlers, and 
Midgic similarly for torments of midgets. Again, Pointe de Bute is 
locally said to be altered from Point of Boat, name of a ferry once 
there. Yet we know the origins of these words were very different. 
Again, it is sometimes thought, (especially by those who have come to 
know that place-names undergo much change) that some names of very 
obvious origin have arisen in some more complex manner. Thus Devil’s 
Head on the St. Croix (in Maine) is locally explained by some as 
tightly Duval’s Head, from a former resident, and by others as 
Dorville’s Head (for a companion of Champlain). Yet there is every 
evidence that it really originated in its present form. Of a somewha: 
different nature are the origins attributed to Indian and other strange 
names. ‘Thus, I have seen Quaco explained in a newspaper as from 
a phrase uttered in irritation by an Indian maiden disturbed by the 
noise of wild ducks, “hush, don’t quack so”; two or three corre- 
spondents write me that Portobello is locally explained as the result 
of the loud halloing of a man named Porter when lost in the woods, as 
reported by an Indian who said “ Porter Bellow”; another corre- 
spondent tells me Nauwigewauk is locally explained as the expression 
of an Indian whose wearied squaw had been allowed to rest there for 
a time,—‘ now would ye walk”; Kennebecasis is often explained, even 
in print, as result of the expression of two travellers lost on the river 
in a snowstorm, who saw a tavern on the bank, which they thought they 
knew, and one asked the other, “Can it be Cases?” Again Tryon 
Settlement, in Charlotte, is stated to have been named when it was new 
by a traveller who approached it at night and asked for lodging, and 
was told to “try on,” and received the same reply at each. And there 
are, no doubt, many others. Yet in most, if not all, these cases, 
we know the true origin, which is very different. Originally, no doubt, 


1In the same spirit, though in different form is the “legend” of the 
origin of the name Tobique, locally explained as extended from Tobique Rocks 
(below the mouth of that river), which name, in turn, arose thus: an 
Indian and the Devil were throwing these rocks to see which could throw 
the farthest, and the Indian in his ardour having stepped over the proper 
mark, the Devil exclaimed, “ toe-back.” 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 7 
Place-nomenclature. 


these explanations were given in jest, and are so repeated by the more 
intelligent residents, but by others they are half, and by many wholly, 
believed. Man has some. little desire for explanations of odd things, 
but only to such an extent that any plausible explanation is sufficient 
tis but rarely that the desire is strong enough to seek not only an 
explanation but proof of its correctness, a psychological peculiarity 
by no means confined to matters of place-nomenclature. 

A very interesting case of the origination of a place-name, all stages 
of which have fallen within my own knowledge is De Monts, on the St. 
Croix, as recorded in these Transactions, VIII, 1902, 11, 145. 

186. In the investigation of the origin of place-names one must 
be constantly on guard against deceptive coincidences, the more 
especially as it is through coincidences only that many origins are 
elucidated. Several misleading coincidences occur in New Brunswick, 
and the student, did he not know from other evidence the true origin, 
wculd naturally be led to a wrong conclusion. Thus on the Tobique 
is an important mountain called Blue Mountain, and just below it 
lives a family named Blue: did we not know that the former name was 
given long before the settlement of the river (it is on a map of 1830), 
we would infer that the mountain took its name from this family of 
near-by residents. Again, there is in Queens County (the south-western 
corner) a Queen’s Brook, which we would infer was named from the 
country; but we know that it is named from one Queen or Quinn 
through whose land it runs. Again, Hampstead is known to have 
been named by Loyalists for Hempstead, Long Isiand, N.Y.; opposite 
is a Long Island which has been supposed to have been so named for 
Long Island, N. Y.; yet the records show that this island bore that 
name twenty years before the Revolution closed. Again, one Burt 
had a grant in the parish of Burton in 1785, and we might infer that 
the parish was named for him, did we not know that it was named 
much earlier for another man. Again, the leading family which 
settled Cocagne was named Gueguen, a name having many varients 
such as Gogain, etc.; the latter form comes close to Cocain, one of the 
variants of Cocagne, and did we not know that Cocagne was given by 
Denys in 1672, we would naturally infer that it was derived from 
this leading family of earliest settlers. Again, in Prince William 
Parish, settled by the King’s American Dragoons, is a Lake George; 
it is a natural inference that this name was given in honour of King 
George III, yet we have perfect evidence that it was named for an early 
resident. Bonny River, would naturally be taken as a name descriptive 
of an attractive stream, but we know it is named for a resident. 


8 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


187. To the list of Indian names in actual use should be added, 
in Maliseet Terriority, Pekonk Hull, Nalleguagus Rapid, Slugundy 
Rapids, while Tanty-Wanty and Poodiac are imported. In Passama- 
quoddy territory, Ailmaquac, Ponwauk, Slugundy and Wauklehegan. 
In Micmac Territory Allabanket, Guagus, Cowassiget, Pisiguit, Malpec, 
Onlockywicket, Bittabock, Kewadu, probably Monash and Paunchy and 
possibly Sheephouse and the hybrid, Long Lookum, while Antinouri, 
Sabbies and Waugh are to be removed from the list. Pascobac and 
Medisco persist as the names of school districts. 

189. To the list of rivers named for Indian chiefs or hunters 
should be added probably Calamingo, Pemwit, Nicholas, Grand John, 
La Coote and Jacques, or Jacquo, an old name of the Aroostook. 

197. Add to the list of names of the French period, Enaud Point, 
HaHa River, Terreo Lake, Ruisseau la Chaloupe, Ruisseau des Mal- 
contents, Savage Island, Roshea, probably St. Tooley, and no doubt 
many other French names, though no record is extant of such early 
use. 

200. Add to the list of names of the New England Period, Marsh 
Creek, Middle Island, Burpees Brook, Mosquito Cove, Darlings Island, 
Kalmarnock Head, Crockers Isiand, Crooked Creek, Black Brook. 

207. The account of the romenclature here given is entirely 
superseded by the reference given later under Mahood Lakes and 
Inglewood. 

209. The list of topographical terms here given is superseded by 
a later and better published in the Hducational Review XIII, 146. 
Following are the more important additions to the latter list, excluding 
Acadian terms which I hope to treat separately ; 

Arm.—Used on Grand Lake for its branches “ Northwest arm,” 
ete. 

Beach.—Used along the North Shore not in the usual sense, but 
for the long sandy islands and peninsulas of sand so prevalent in that 
region. 

Bluff.—Used in Kings County for a bare rocky cliff. 

Foot.—For the lower end of a lake. 

Hollow.—Name in Kings and Albert for a deep narrow winding 
ravine or gorge, having at spring and fall a rapid stream. 

Jam.—Where natural jams of logs occur and become permanent it 
becomes a topographical term. 

Middle Ground.— A part of a bar usually higher than either end. 

Mistake-—A cul de sac with a wide and inviting opening. 


\ 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 9 


Place-nomenclature. 


Lead.—Occurs in Queens County for a narrow winding stream 
between lakes. 

Midland.—The high land between two valleys; has become the name 
of more than one settlement. 

Lagoon.—This name on the north shore is purely a map name, 
never used by the residents, who use the name bay. 

Pot-holes.—Applied often to the glacial sink-holes; and also to the 
wells in rocks under falls. 

Rapids.—Used in Gloucester County to distinguish the swift fresh- 
water part of a river from the T'ideway. 

Slide.—An inclined place or slope of loose rock occurring in a gap 
in a cliff. 

Sluice.—Used on the Nepisiguit for narrow rapids. 

Queue, (French, a tail) —Name for a little bay at the end of a 
lake; used twice on Miscou Island. 

Tideway.—Used now in Gloucester County for the tidal part of a 
river, in contradistinction to Rapids; also in Cooney, 176. 

Turns.—Used in several places for abrupt bends in rivers. 

Works.—A place in the woods where lumbering has been done; 
also used for beaver workings; in old reports for the arrangements for 
catching eels,—“ eel-works.” 

209. Another series of Indian, with some French, names, has 
recently (1903) come into use, viz:—the names of the following stations 
between St. John and Welsford, on the Canadian Pacific,—Acamac, 
Ketepec, Martinon, Ononette, Pamdenec, Woolastook, Sagwa. This use 
Was suggested originally by Dr. G. U. Hay and the names were devised 
in part by myself and in part by Dr. W. O. Raymond and others. Their 
genesis is fully explained in the Educational Review, XVI, 189, and 
individually in the Dictionary following. 

209. A comparatively new, but somewhat important, element has 
recently been introduced into New Brunswick Place-nomenclature. 
The last ten years have seen an immense development in this province 
of big game hunting by American sportsmen, in connection with which 
many guides have opened up new hunting-grounds among the remote 
ponds and lakes. It has become customary among them to name these 
places for the first sporstman who shoots a moose there, or who in 
some other way becomes associated with the place. Thus a large number 
oi little lakes are being named for American sportsmen whose connection 
with those places is of the most transient sort, though the name will 
unquestionably persist. I have collected many of these names in my 


10 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomenclature. 


various articles in the Bulletin of the Natural History Society of New 
Brunswick (see especially V., 227). 

211. A phase of New Brunswick Place-nomenclature of very 
great interest is the entirely unwritten nomenclature used by the lum- 
bermen for the various minor features along our rivers. Surprised by 
the extent and character of these names, I have tried to collect them 
for all of our principal rivers, obtaining them, when possible, directly 
from the lumbermen in person, and in other cases from reliable persons 
as intermediaries. I gave a list of those of the Magaguadavic and 
of the St. Croix in the Place-nomenclature monograph, but I have since 
gathered a more complete list for the St. Croix, and new lists for the 
Oromocto, Lepreau, Nepisiguit, Salmon River, (Queens), the Tobique, 
upper part of the Main Southwest Miramichi, Little Southwest 
Miramichi, Northwest Miramichi and Renous and in part for the 
Upsalquitch and Restigouche. I regret that the limitations of space do 
not permit me to give them in these pages. ‘These names have evidently 
grown up naturally in, the course of the use of the river, and apply to 
each object seriously affecting the interests of the lumbermen,—the 
rocks and bars which obstruct their logs, the rips, rapids or falls which 
give the river-drivers much trouble, the brows, landings, pools, brooks, 
etc., each with their effect upon the daily life of the users, requiring 
them to be mentioned in talk and hence to have names. Since they 
are entirely unwritten and occur upon no map, it is plain that they 
have not arisen in any literary way, or through any abstract con- 
siderations; but they are the spontaneous expression of the naming 
instinct. They are, therefore, of interest and value as illustrating 
the principles by which place-names arise and as reflections of the 
psychology of primitive name-givers. Incidentally, they have also 
other values, in exhibiting the topographical terms in local use, and in 
afording some method of testing the permanency of unwritten names. 
That many of these names have been long in use is shown by their 
occurrence in various earlier documents, and it will be easy for the 
future student by noting whether they are still in use to determine 
their future persistence. 

Viewing the lists of these names, comprehensively, it is plain that 
the probable origin of the great majority is evident at.a glance, while 
a few are not thus self explanatory. The majority of the latter are 
without doubt of Indian origin, namely, Naleguagus, Guagus, Slugundy, 
Bittaback, Allabanket, Onlockywicket, Ponwauk, and the half Indian 
Long Lookum, all considered in the following Dictionary; and these 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS it 


Place-nomenclature. 


censtitute a most welcome addition to our surviving Indian names. 
Other names of familiar aspect, such as Baltic, probably are slight 
corruptions of familiar words. But all of the remainder, and hence 
the great majority, are of the simplest possible type, and all obviously 
descriptive. The descriptive names are of two general kinds,—the 
many recalling some familiar object, and those possessives including 
some person’s name. The reasons for the former are usually obvious 
enough, even though some imagination must be used to perceive the 
ecnnection, while as to the latter, at least a possible explanation is 
equally obvious. Indeed, if one asks a lumberman the reason for a 
given one of these names, he usually responds by relating some incident 
connecting the person with the place, as when a person was the first 
to lumber there, or was drowned there, or had some adventure or mis- 
adventure. These explanations, may or may not be true, but certainly 
they are true in principle, if not in detail. While not affected by any 
form of literary influence, this nomenclature is affected by suggestion 
and recollection of other localities, for only thus can we explain the 
repetition of certain favourite names on several rivers. Thus, Oxbow, 
Redbank, Spilt Rock, Narrows, occur upon several rivers, as do 
Governors Table, Helis Gates, Devils Elbow, Long Lookum, Big Hole, 
Chain of Rocks, etc., while the expressive and familiar phrase for a bad 
rapid Push, (or pull), and be damned, occurs upon nearly all of them. 

Summarising then this type of primitive nomenclature, it is plain 
that it is in part repetitive, thus retaining some Indian names, in part 
associative as shown by the more fanciful names, hardly, if at all 
commemorative, but overwhelmingly descriptive. It represents well, I 
believe, the typical mode of origin of names when they arise naturally. 

212. <A curiosity of place-nomenclature of New Brunswick is a 
rare post office directory of 1857. It gives, apparently, corrupted 
phonetic or vernacular names of a great number of New Brunswick 
Settlements. Of these names some are recognizable, such as Jewaniel 
(Juvenile), Bonna Gonnea (Bonhomme Gould), Cannabec (Canobie}, 
Grimmack (Greenock), and others, while many, such as Charwest 
Point (Kings), Saltash (Gloucester), Whiiiway (Northumberland), 
and many others are now quite unrecognizable. The elucidation of 
these names forms a, pretty puzzle! 

212. We have in New Brunswick some descriptive names which 
are strikingly appropriate and pleasing as well,—notably Green River, 
Red Rapids, Blacklands, Crooked Deadwater, Clearwater, and (perhaps 
only accidentally appropriate) The Wolves. 


12 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


Another peculiarity of our nomenclature is the common shortening 
of some names to a single syllable with a distinguishing prefix the; 
thus Welshpool is locally often called “ The Pool,’ the North Pole 
Branch is “ The Pole,” the Otnabog is “ The Bog.” 

213. From the list of words of unknown origin on this page, 
Sunbury, and Wickham are to be removed, and Bay du Vin, Yoho, St. 
Martins are to be added thereto. 

Other classes of names worthy of careful study are:—(6) Street 
names of the cities and towns, (7) names of school districts which con- 
tain a large number of very interesting forms, (8) names of post offices, 
many of which will become important names of the future. A remark- 
able, though very trivial series of local names, largely embodying a 
humorous element, is that of the Weirs in Charlotte County. 

214. <A very large number of pleasing place-names, taken from our 
historical past, are available as new names are needed. I have given a 
full list of these in the Educational Review, XV, 204. 

214. The confusion in the spellings of many place-names, here 
referred to, is now being remedied by the Geographic Board of Canada, 
organized for the express purpose of standardizing the spellings of place- 
names in Canada. This Board has published four Reports in which 
are found many New Brunswick names. Most of the decisions of the 
Board are admirable, but others, owing to a deficiency of local know- 
ledge, and perhaps to somewhat too great haste in forwarding this 
important work, are unfortunately so far out of sympathy with local 
usage as to make them unacceptable to those most interested in the 
subject. I have expressed my opinions upon these decisions in an 
article in the St. John Daily Sun, Dec. 3, 1902, to which a reply was 
published by the Board in the same paper for Feb. 28, 1903; an answer 
to the Board, to which no reply has as yet appeared, was printed in the 
game paper for March 16, 1903. The subject is also discussed, with a list 
of the preferable forms, in the Educational Review, X VI, 189. Feb. 1963. 
At the present writing, I understand the Board is again to consider 
these special names in the light of new information about them. In 
the meantime I have given, in the Dictionary of place-names following, 
all the forms not already adopted in the Monograph, which seem so 
good that they ought to stand, omitting mention of the cases still in 
doubt. 


[GANONG | ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 18 
Place-nomenclature. 


215. A Dictionary of the Place-names of New Brunswick. 

Since the publication of this work, a great amount of new informa- 
tion has come to light, and the more important of this I aim to give 
in the following pages. I have taken especial pains to give the best form 
in all cases where more than one spelling of a name is prevalent. For 
the sake of brevity I have omitted all settlement names whose origin is 
clearly implied or stated in the Settlements Monograph, and have used 
the following abbreviations ;—P, means parish and the date is that of 
its erection, Bull. N. H. S. refers to the Bulletins of the Natural His- 
tory Society of New Brunswick, the Land Memorials are the docu- 
ments fully described in the Settlements Monograph, 181. The phrase 
“first occurs” signifies that this is the earliest use of the names I have 
been able to find. 


Aberdeen.—No doubt so named because the settlers of Glassville (to include 
which the new parish was, of course, formed) came mostly from 
Aberdeen, Scotland, in 1861. But also, possibly, it may have been 
in honour of the then Governor of the Province, Hon. Arthur Gordon, 
whose family name was Aberdeen. Perhaps the name was chosen 
with both facts in mind. 


Aboushagan.—First as Aboushagin, in 1803, in Land Memorials. 


Abshaboo, not Ashaboo (Cooney, 169).—It is possible this point was named 
for Etienne Abchabo, an Indian chief of Pokemouche, mentioned by 
Cooney, 37. 


Acadia.—This name is more fully discussed in the New Brunswick Maga- 
zine, III, 153; in the Educational Review, XVI, 12; and in the Mono- 
graph on Boundaries, 161. The current explanation is given by 
Dawson, in his Acadian Geology, and also in the Canadian Antiquarian 
for, Oct.) 1876. 


Acamac (formerly Stevens on the C. P. R.).—Recent simplication of the 
Indian name of South Bay. (See a few pages earlier). 


Adder Lake.—Given by Garden, the surveyor, in 1838, no doubt because it 
is in fact the Little Serpentine,—a little serpent—an adder. The 
local names of the waters above this lake are fully discussed in Bull. 
INES OV 06 7: 


Addington.—Without doubt for Henry Unwin Addington, later Viscount 
Sidmouth, who in 1826 was made one of the English plenipoten- 
tiaries to treat with the Americans over the northeastern boundary. 
The other was William Huskisson (see Huskisson), and the fact that 
these two parishes were named in the year they were appointed makes 
this certain. (Moore, International Arbitrations, 87; also Boundaries 
Monograph, 331). 


14 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


Alamec.—Called by the Acadians of Shippegan ‘and vicinity Lamec (com- 
monly spelled L’Amec, or Lameque, etc.), while the English residents 
in the vicinity usually call it Alamec. It is no doubt from the first 
two syllables of the Micmac El-mig-wa-da-sik,—* the head is turned 
to one side” (Rand, Micmac Reader). First occurs as Petit and 
Great Nanibeque on a plan of 1784. 


Aldouane.—I am told by the Indian teacher at Big Cove, Richibucto, that 
the Micmacs pronounce this name Wald-won, but are doubtful if the 
word is Micmac. They have also another name for it, Sgapagnetj. It 
is possible that this name has some connection with a French vessel, 
with cannon on board, traditionally said to have been sunk at the 
mouth of that river (see later under the Acadian Period), in which 
case the name would be homologous in origin with St. Simon and, 
perhaps, Bay du Vin. 


Allabanket.—A place on the lower Main Southwest Miramichi; the name is 
still in use, and, no doubt, of Micmac origin. 


Allandale.—Said locally to be so named for a resident ‘at the end of the 
road” (Lieut. Adam Allan?) with the addition of dale. 


Allans Creek (near Meringuin).—Said locally, and probably correctly, to be 
so named because the American partizan, John Allan, landed there 
when he escaped from Cumberland in a boat after the Eddy Rebellion 
in 1776. 


Alma.—P. 1855. Hon. A. R. McClelan tells me the name was suggested by 
the heights behind it recalling the place of the great victory the 
year before. On this occasion the New Brunswick Legislature sent 
an address to Her Majesty congratulating her upon the success of 
her arms at that time. 


Almeston.—No doubt a mis-spelling of Osmaston, the ancestral home in Der- 
byshire of Sir Robert Wilmot. who had an early grant within this 
Township, and who was uncle of the then Governor of Nova Scotia, 
Hon. Montague Wilmot. (Fully discussed in Educational Review, XVI, 
12.) 


Alston Point.—First used on plan of 1828. Alston is a New Brunswick family 
name, and hence may have been given for a resident. Could it be 
a corruption of Allen’s, name of the first grantee of the point? 


Alva, Loch.—As pointed out in Acadiensis, III, 16, the origin of this name 
still eludes me. I am now inclined to think, however, that there is 
some connection between a Loch Lomond a few miles east of St. 
John and a Loch Alva of about the same size about the same dis- 
tance west of the city. Loch Lomond was named about 1810 by 
Lachlan Donaldson, a Scotchman, and early mayor of St. John, who 
had a grant of land near it; I am inclined to think that Loch Alva 
was named by Hon. Hugh Johnston, who received a grant of land 
on the Musquash River, in 1808. The proprietors of Alva House 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS aS 
Place-nomenclature. 


at Alva, in Scotland, are Johnstons. It seems to me possible that 
Hon. Hugh Johnston was connected in some way with them, and 
that where he or Donaldson, both Scotchmen and prominent residents 
of St. John, named a Loch near his property for his native land, the 
other followed suit. In this case Perley did not give the name, but 
simply adopted it. 


Andover.—P. 1833. Said locally to have been so named by Mr. Sisson, an 
early resident, who came from that place in England. 


Antinouri Lake.—This curious name is used locally, but its origin is un- 
known to residents in the vicinity. It seems to make its first appear- 
ance on the Geological Survey map of 1881, but Dr. R. W. Ells, author 
of that map, tells us he does not know its origin, though he obtained 
it from his guides in 1880. Recently, however, Mr. D. McMillan, who 
has long known that region well as Surveyor, has given me an origin 
which I believe to be correct, namely, that in former days the lake 
was called by the old residents Anthony Ree’s, or Antony Ree’s lake, 
after an old hunter of that name. He adds that one Anthony Ree 
was not long since a resident of Bathurst. This, pronounced by Dr. 
Ells’ French guides, and taken down phonetically, would very natur- 
ally give Antinouri. Locally, it is said to be pronounced an-tin-oo-re, 
with accent on the third syllable. 


Aroostook.—On D. Campbell’s map of 1785 as Restook, followed by others. 
I think it very probable that Woolastook, Aroostook, Restigouche, and the 
Micmac name Lustagoocheech of the Miramichi are all fundamentally 
the same word, all signifying something akin to our phrase “ The 
Main River.” Campbell also calls it Jacquo’s River. In a return of 
Indians living at Tobique in 1841 the names Jacques and Jacquo both 
occur. I have no doubt that the name was given it by the French 
for some chief whose especial hunting ground it was, a method of 


origin characteristic of many of our river names (compare Place- 
nomenclature, 189). 


Arthuret.—Historically and in every other way a better form than the recent 
Arthurette. 


Atherton.—Supposed by Raymond (Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc. I, 331) to have 
been applied at one time to Fredericton, but he writes me this is 
entirely a mistake, due to a misreading of an early letter. 


Aucpac.—A collection of the remarkably-diverse spellings of this word has 
been made by Raymond in his “St John River” (page 142). Earlier 
uses are found in the census of 1733, having Hcoupay, in a document 
of 1735 in the Nova Scotia Archives (II, 98), naming Oepagne (mis- 
print no doubt for Ocpaque), and in a treaty of 1721 given in Baxter’s 
“Pioneers of France in New England” (page 118) as Kouupahag. 


Aulac.—Occurs first in a document of 1746-1747, mentioned by Parkman. 
Called ‘‘Number 1” in early times by the English because including 


No 1 “body” of marsh (viz., a mass of marsh enclosed by a single 
dike). 


16 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomencliture. 
Baie Verte.—A much better form, historically and otherwise, than Bay Verte. 


Baker Brook.—In the Land Memorials of 1820 it is said, ‘“ N. Baker asked 
land at the mouth of the Marinequanticook or Turtle River.” 


Bald, Cape.—In French, called Cap Pelée, a name coming into general use. 
The latter appears to be corrupted to Cape a Lee in Land Memorials 
of 1807. 


Bald Mountain.—This name occurs several times in New Brunswick. In 
some cases alternative names have been proposed as follows:— 


LOCATION. ALTERNATIVE NAME. 


South of Nictor Lake. Sagamook (Gordon, 1863, ‘“ Wilder- 
ness Journeys,” 54). 
Head of South Branch Nepisiguit, Kagoot. (1903, Bull. N.H.S. V, 215). 


“Big Bald.” 
Above Indian Falls on Nepisiguit. Denys Mountain (1899, Bull. N.H.S. 
TV,. 255). 
Southwest of latter, ‘‘ Little Baldy ” Cartier Mountain (1899, Bull. N.H.S 
of guides. IN 255) 
‘Southwest of latter, “ Little Baldy ” Champlain Mountain (Bull. N.H.S. 
Liong Reach. IV, 321, and the St. John Star and 


Globe, of June 23, and Sun and 
Telegraph, of June 24, 1904). 

Near Harvey, York County. Wedawamketch (1901, Bull N. H.S. IV, 
321). It is called, apparently, 
Goodawamscoop Mountain on the 
Sproule Map of 1787, and it is 
called Lambton’s Mountain (for 
Lieutenant Lambton, who was 
there in 1784) in the Field Book 
of the Magaguadavic Survey of 
1797. 


Bald Head, near Riley Brook is so appropriate and distinctive that 
no alternative therefor is desirable. 


Balmains Point, Grand Lake.—Said in a newspaper article to have been 
called by the Indians Woccasoon. 


Baltic.—Name of a cliff and eddy in the upper Oromocto, origin not known. 


Baltimore.—Settlement in Albert. No doubt connected, though I do not 
know in exactly what way, with the fact that some of the original 
proprietors of Hillsborough were from Baltimore in the United States. 
Very likely some of the early tenants were from that place, and their 
descendants founded this settlement. (Albert County Maple Leaf, 
Sept. 2 and 9, 1886). 


Bantelorum.—A brook on the upper part of Cains River. Of Indian origin? 
It is on Fairweather’s plan of 1836 and in general local use. 


r 


[Ganon] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 17 


Place-nomenclature. 


Barreau, Point.—Origin locally not known. A map of 1804 calls the island 
(or grove) there Pt. de Bar [Bass Point] which may have become 
altered to Barreau. Barreau in Acadian means a partition, ete. and 
the point may be so named for the way it separated Tracadie and 
Tabusintac. A local tradition also derives it from the name of an 
Indian who formerly camped there. 


Bartholomews River.—In this form in 1809 in Land Memorials. 


Bay du Vin.—It is very likely the origin of this name is to be found in some 
connection with the French frigate said to be sunk at the mouth of 
the Bay du Vin River (see later under the Acadian Period). It is 
to be remembered that Marston said in 1786 that the place was so 
named from the French captain who first anchored here, and it may 
be that either the captain or his vessel bore a name which has been 
corrupted to our present form. In this case the name would be strictly 
homologous in origin with that of St. Simon, later considered, and, 
perhaps, also with Aldouane. The earliest use of the name is in the 
form Baie des Ouines in a document of March 3, 1760. 

Of other possible origins there are several, of which one thinks 
first of some connection with the Vinland of the Northmen, suggested 
by Bishop Howley in these Transactions IV, ii, 97. Another is sug- 
gested by Murdoch’s Nova Scotia, II, 217, where he refers to a Pére 
Badouin, at one time in Acadia. In this connection we recall that 
DesBarres in his charts of 1780 used the form Bedouin. There is 
also a stream called Ouine in Poitou, France, and one might imagine 
that the name has been brought here by early priest or settlers. 

The local names in the vicinity are mostly self explanatory. John 
O’Bears Point, at lower Bay du Vin, is known locally to be a cor- 
ruption of John Hebert. The eastern end of Vin Island is known as 
John O’Groats, though it is not known by whom that name was 
applied. 


Belas Basin.—On a plan of 1836 the name Belos (Bellows?) is applied to 
a rock off the entrance to Lepreau Basin, and the word Basin is in 
such a position that the two might naturally be thought to form one 
name. It is probably thus that this name, which is locally unknown, 
came upon our maps. 


Belleisle Bay—Named, as M. Gaudet, Dr. Hannay and Dr. Raymond have 
all pointed out to me independently, from the French family of that 
name living on the St. John in late Acadian times. Murdoch (Nova 
Scotia, II, 255) shows that M. de Belleisle was settled on the St. John 
in 1754. M. Gaudet has documents which show that in 1737 Pierre 
Robichaux married Frangoise de Belleisle, and in 1739 Francois Robi- 
chaux married Marie le Borgne de Belleisle, daughters of Alexander 
Le Borgne de Belleisle, then living on the St. John. Now, the Monck- 
ton map of 1758 shows ‘“ Robicheau,’ a group of several houses, at 
the mouth of the Belleisle. Hence it seems reasonable to infer that 
the Robicheaus settled near their father-in-law, who was settled at 
the mouth of the Belleisle, which accordingly took its name from him. 


See: 11”, 1906. 2 


18 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomenclature. 


Belvisor Bar.—On the St. John, above Meductic Falls. Used locally, but 
origin not known. Belviso occurs in a return of Survey of 1785. 


Benton.—Said locally to have been named for a prominent American soldier 
(T. R. Benton?), though this seems unlikely. 


Bittabock.—Name, locally known and undoubtedly Micmac, of a rocky island 
on the lower Nepisiguit. Being a well-known fishing place, it is men- 
tioned in sporting books by Lanman, Norris, Campbell and Roosevelt. 


Said locally to be a corruption of Blake's 


Black Brook (near Loggieville). 
Brook (confirmed by the presence of Blake’s Flats near by) for an early 
resident, traditionally said to be the Captain Blake who commanded 
the vessel which destroyed Burnt Church (narrated in Cooney, 35). 


Bonum Gauld.—Name of a _ settlement in Westmorland, so called for a 
prominent Acadian resident, apparently Bonhomme Gould. 


Brideau, Rivière a.—Said locally to be so named for a former resident. It 
is a Canadian-French name. 


Britt Brook; also Portage Lake Stream.—A New Brunswick family name; 
no doubt for some early lumberman. 


Burgoins Ferry.—On the St. John, established in 1817. No doubt for the 
Acadian family Burgoin, formerly, and still, residents of Upper French 
Village near by. 


Burnt Church.—The teacher of the Indian school at Church Point, Charles 
Bernard, himself a Micmac from Cape Breton, has kindly given me 
the aboriginal Micmac names of a number of places in the vicinity 
of Church Point. I give them here precisely as he writes them to 
me. Some of them I have no doubt are correct, but as to others, 
especially in the meanings, I am doubtful. The Indian village here 
he gives as Æsginoo o putich, fully confirming the name from other 
sources. Burnt Church River has no Indian name, he says, other 
than the village name with Seeboo added. Portage Island, Mogulawce- 
chooacadie, meaning, “A place where the Brant Geese are plenty and 
they are generally shot, as it were”; River de Cache, Peskej, meaning 
“little branch’; Grand Dune River, Abeeamkej, meaning “lined bot- 
tom” (?); Stymest’s Millstream, Akbaseck, meaning “it curves”; 
Neguac, Annikeooek, meaning ‘Annie is wandering alone,’ explained as 
the expression of an Indian whose wife, named Annie, became lost (!!); 
Hay Island, Ooenjooi, Menigoo, meaning ‘French Island”; Portage 
Brook, Gasbalaooacadie, meaning “ Gaspereaux are abundant,” by some 
Indians called Maliojek, said to mean place where lived an Indian 
woman, Malioj; French Cove, Skassikuakenek, meaning “place of 


torching.” 


Cabin du Clos—Name of the point separating the upper from the lower 
part of Tracadie Bay. It is now simply a piece of low wooded 
upland (forming a very charming camping place), and is said locally 
to have been named from the camp or cabin of an Indian named 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 19 
Place-nomenclature. 


de Clos, formerly living there. It is of interest to note that this name 
de Clos occurs as that of an Acadian family, early residents of Point 
Brulé, Shippegan, who afterwards removed to Shippegan Island. 


Calamingo Brook.—Called Comingoes Brook in the original grant of 1823, 
Conomingo or Conomingoes Brook on other early plans. I am told by 
Mr. W. A. Colpitts, of Mapleton, that traditionally Conomingo is said 
to have been a half-breed who hunted there, and this explanation is 
very probably correct. Dove’s Hollow, nearby, is said to have been 
named for another hunter. 


California—Name of two or more settlements in New Brunswick, probably 
given at the time the “emigration fever” to that place was at its 
height, in half-humourous allusion to these settlements as substitutes. 
Thus, Johnston (Travels in N. A. Il, 39), who was in New Brunswick 
‘in 1849, speaks of the fever for emigration which swept over the 
country at intervals, and says, “the California paroxysm is at its 
height.” Compare Ohio later. 


Campbellton (Restigouche).—The Indian name for this locality, as I am told 
by Mr. D. Ferguson, of Chatham, formerly of Athol Farm, who knows 
the place and the Indians well, is Wis-i-am-ca or Was-si-am-kik, mean- 
ing “to be muddy,” referring to the stirring up of the sediment of the 
river by the current in the narrowing of the Restigouche here. 

Mr. Ferguson also tells me that the lower part of the present 
Campbellton was laid off in 1833 and named in honour of the then 
Governor of New Brunswick, Sir Archibald Campbell, though it was 
long before the name replaced the earlier Martin’s Point, so named 
for a captain who had built a vessel there. 


Campobello—On the names of the island consult the Journal of Captain 
William Owen, in Collections of the N. B. Historical Society, Vols. 
I and II. 

The first known name for this was Passamaquoddy Outer Island. 
In view of the fact that the name Passamaquoddy originally applied 
to the waters between Deer Island, Campobello and Moose Island (see 
Passamaquoddy), and not to the inner bay as at present, this name 
was a natural one for Campobello. Mr. J. Vroom has made the inter- 
esting suggestion, however, (in a letter) that the name may be a 
survival from the French, originally some such form as L'isle outre 
Passamaquoddy, and he further suggests that the outre from which Har- 
bour de Lute is supposed to have been derived, is this same word 
and not the French for Otter. Though without any support other 


than the resemblance of name, Mr. Vroom’s suggestion may yet prove 
to represent fact. 


Canoose.—This is explained by Gatschet (Eastport Sentinel, Sept. 15, 1897) 
as from Kanusyik, pickerels. I suspect the accuracy of this, since the 
pickerel is believed to be a modern introduction into these waters. 
This spelling represents very closely the pronunciation, and is prefer- 
able to other forms proposed or in use. 


20 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


Canterbury.—P. 1855. No doubt named in honour of Hon. Manners-Sutton, 
in that year Governor of the Provinee, who himself became Lord 
Canterbury in 1869. The fact that this parish and Manners-Sutton 
were named in the same year is very strongly confirmatory of this 
explanation. 

Poin.e au.—Without doubt a corruption of Pointe au Quart, that is, 
point of the square or right angle, which is precisely descriptive. All 
stages in the development of the word may be followed through the 
references under Quart-Point in the Place-nomenclature. 


Car, 


Caraquet.—Locally pronounced with very strong accent on the first syllable. 
The plan of Caraquet River, made by Davidson in 1836, has the fol- 
lowing names for the brooks forming its branches, reading from 
above downwards:—IJnnishannon, Youngs, Adams, Serby, Tauris, Esk, Ewes, 
Waughope, Bertrands. Some of these are evidently local, but others 


\ appear to be fanciful, and their origin is not plain. 


Carleton Lake, in York County.—Called in a grant to Francis Allen in 1827 
Carlton Lake, and said to have been named for Governor Carleton. 


Carleton, Mount.—The highest mountain in New Brunswick (about 2,700 
feet). It was unnamed until 1899, when it was called in honour of 
the first Governor of New Brunswick (Bull N.H.S. IV, 251). 


Carleton, St. John.—On this name and proposed alternatives see Raymond, 
Canadian History Readings, 51. Also on the Carletons, and places 
named for them in Canada, see Johnson, in Canadian Magazine, XII, 


289. 

Carleton, Fort.—A temporary name of the military post at Presquile. 

Caron Point.—On plan of 1828 as Carron Point. Caron is a French family 
name, and it is likely it was given for some such person. There is 


a Caron Brook in Madawaska. There is, however, a Loch Caron in 
Scotland, and it may possibly be a repetition of that. 


Cassies Point.—For the Acadian family Cassie, originally the Irish Casey, 
early grantees there. 

Cavanaghlisht.—(Of Place-Nomenclature, 224) is a misprint of Cavanagh's 
Point, which is in the Land Memorials for 1798. 


Caverhill—So named for Dr. Caverhill, a leader among the first settlers. 


Chaloupe, Ruisseau La.—See under St. Simon, later. 


Chamcook.—In the St. Andrews Standard, for Oct. 7, 1837, is advertised for 
sale “at Beau-Sejour, on the premises, the eastern half of Ministers lot 


(so called) . . . . at a short distance from the Chamcook Mills 
bounded by the waters of Passamaquoddy Bay, Craig’s Land 
and the property of the Church . . . . on the lot are two dwell- 


ing houses, one at Beau-Sejour, the other at Weepemaw PURES 
private road leads through the lot to Tasse d'argent Cove on the bay, 
which forms a good harbour for small vessels.” I have no further 
information as to these interesting names. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 21 


Place-nomenclature. 


Champlain, Mount.—Proposed in 1901 (Bull. N.H.S.N.B. IV, 321) as an 
alternative for Bald Mountain on the Kings-Queens Boundary—and 
again in connection with the Champlain Tercentenary at St. John, 
June 24, 1904 (St. John newspapers of June 23, 24). It first appears 
upon White’s map of 1906. 


Champlain, Village—Name applied in July, 1905, at the suggestion of the 
present author, to a hamlet of summer houses below St. Stephen, nearly 
opposite DeMonts, in Calais. 


Charlo.—Little Charleau in 1799 in Land Memorials. Charleau is said to be 
a not uncommon Acadian form of Charles. 


Chatham.—According to tradition, as I learned from Mr. William Innes, of 
Bartibog, through Rey. Father Morrissey, Chatham village received 
its name in honour of the younger Pitt, Earl of Chatham. The name 
was suggested by Mr. Francis Peabody, a prominent resident, and 
replaced the earlier name, J'he Spruce Tree, so-called for a great spruce 
that stood on the present site of Ritchie’s store on Water Street. 


Chenire, Lake.—See under Miscou. 


Chiputneticook.—On Sproule’s map of 1786 as Cheputnatecook. In Harris’ 
Field-book of 1797 survey of the river as “River Chiputnaticook (called 
by the natives Chibnitcook),’ seeming to show that he took the former 
from some other source (such as his instructions), and the latter 
directly from the Indians. The,Indian names of these lakes are dis- 
cussed in Boundaries Monograph, 265. 


Clair.—P. 1900. So named from its principal village, which was named for 
Peter Clair, a former prominent resident, whose descendants are nu- 
merous in the vicinity. 


Clearwater.—One of the best of our descriptive place-names, occurring 
several times. No doubt the name is suggested not so much by the 
colour of the water in the stream itself, as by the striking contrast 
of the clear water entering a more turbid stream, a feature I have 
noticed on the Sevogle. In the same way, I think, the names Green 
River, and Grog Brook (Upsalquitch) were suggested by the colour 
contrast their waters present to those of the streams they enter. 


Cleuristic.—Clusostick on Sproule’s map of 1786; and the same on D. Camp- 
bell’s of 1799. This form is nearer the original Indian (Kulloosisik) 
than the modern form. 


Coldbrook.—Originally Colebrooke, a settlement established before 1843, and 
named, no doubt, for the then Governor, Sir William Colebrooke. 


Colebrooke.—_Former name of Grand Falls. An old newspaper item says 
Colebrooke and Edmundston were named about the same time (1848), 
one for the outgoing and the other for the incoming Governor. 


Cootes Hill, or Headline.—A Protestant Irish settlement, very likely named 
for the Irish baronet of that name. 


22) ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomenclature. 


Corneille, Ruisseau.—A name applied in 1686 apparently to French Fort 
Cove, Miramichi. (Compare later under “Settlement of Richard Denys 
de Fronsac.’’) 


Coude, Le.—M. Gaudet tells me this settlement was at the Bend (Moncton) 
not above it. 


Courtenay Bay.—Historically the better form, and that used locally on maps, 
though in pronunciation shortened to ‘ Courtney.” 


Cowassaget Brook.—On Tabusintac, at northernmost bend of tidal part of 
river. As Cowassagets Brook in Land Memorials of 1808. Used locally 
and pronounced C6-wass’-a-get (g hard). Undoubtedly Micmac, but 
meaning unknown to me. 


Crocks Point (above Keswick).—No doubt for an early Acadian resident, 
surnamed Croc (see Raymond, Canadian History Readings, 336). Con- 
firmatory of this is the occurrence of the name Crock in the Mada- 
waska census of 1820, and of a Crocks Island below the mouth of the 
St. Francis. 


Crooked Creek (Shepody).—Descriptive, and used in the Calhoun diary of 
ileal 


Dalhousie.—The hill back of the town was formerly called Charleforts hill. 
The Crown Land Records show that one Pascal Charlefort hada grant 
here in 1832. 


Damascus.—In a Post Office Directory of 1857 in this form. Said locally 
to have been given on the spur of the moment to an inquiring ‘ map- 
maker” by a resident as a kind of joke; but, placed on the map, it 
became adopted in earnest. 


Deep Creek (near Newburg).—Called Monomocook, doubtless its Indian name, 
on Johnson’s map of 1817. 


Demoiselle, Cape.—As Cap de Moselle in the Calhoun Diary of 1771. At this 
point is the place locally called ‘‘the Rocks,’ where the soft sand- 
stones are wonderfully carved into pillars, arches, etc. It is very 
probable that some one of these took the form of a woman, this giv- 
ing origin to the name. 


Digdeguash Lukes.—The nomenclature of these lakes is given in the Bull. 
N.H.S.N.B. V, 47. Locally the name is shortened to Digity or Dikety 
Lakes. 


Dipper Harbour.—Thus on a plan of 1784. Said by Reynolds (N. B. Maga- 
zine III, 53, and confirmed in Fisher’s Sketches, 51) to have been called 
Dippoo in early times. 


Dochet Island.—Its various names are fully discussed in the Monograph on 
this island in these Transactions, VIII, ii, 142. 


[aAnoNG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 28 


Place-nomenclature. 


Douglas Mountain, and Valley and River (for west branch of Nerepis). These 
all make their appearance in 1826, the year the surveys for the 
Fredericton-St. John Road were made under the direction of Governor 
Sir Howard Douglas. They were no doubt named for him. The 
popularity of Sir Howard is evinced by the many places named for 
him in New Brunswick—comprising Douglas Parish, Douglas Moun- 
tain, Douglastown, Douglas Harbour, with Howard Settlement and 
Howardville which have disappeared. 


Douglastown.—Named a few months before the great Miramichi fire for 
Governor Douglas, who visited the Miramichi at that time (Cooney, 64). 


Drury Cove.—Also Portage Cove on earlier maps, and earlier Hunter's Cove 
(N. B. Mag. II, 324). 


Dumbarton.—P. 1856. Within this parish a grant was made to the St. 
Andrews Highland Society, and I believe there is some connection 
between this fact and the origin of the name. 


Dundas.—v. 1826. Without doubt this parish was so named in honour of 
Ann Dundas, the wife of Sir Howard Douglas, then the popular Gov- 
ernor of New Brunswick. The parish of Douglas had been named 
for Sir Howard two years before. (Discussed in the Educational Re- 
view, XV, -160). 


Dungarvon.—It seems there is no river of that name in Ireland—only a 
parish and harbour; my explanation of the name is very likely incor- 
rect. 


Dunsinane.—Said to have been named by Robert Shives, Emigration Agent 
at St. John, whose father was a Scotchman. 


Enaud, Point.—In Bathurst Harbour. A persistence, no doubt, of the name 
of the early French settler, Enaud (Henault, etc.). See Historic Sites, 
298, 300. 


Ennishone.—Said locally to be named for a township in Ireland, though such 
does not appear on maps of Ireland. Probably the same as Innishowen. 
The earliest settlers were largely Irish. 


Enragé, Cap.—A French name; called by English residents Cape Enrage, 
but also corrupted to Roshea, and applied to the bay to the west- 
ward (see Roshea). This is made clear by a passage in the Calhoun 
Diary of 1771 which reads:—“ Cape Roshea, called by the English 


Cape Enrage from a ledge of rock to the S.S.W. which, in high winds, 
makes a very rough sea.” 


Fairville—So named for the founder, Robert Fair, from Ireland, of whom 
obituaries appeared in the St. John papers of Sept. 2, 1901. 


mt 


Filomaro.—See Philmonro. 


Foxbury.—A place mentioned in Land Memorials of 1800, as location of lots 
owned by Judge Saunders; possibly the Forerbica of Leland. 


D4 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomenclature. 


Francfort—This Pre-Loyalist township was very probably named for the 
place of that name near Philadelphia (shown on a map of 1777), rather 
than, as supposed by Johnson, from being at or near the French 
Fort [at Nashwaak]. 

» 

Frenchmans Creek (Musquash). This is very probably connected with the 
fact mentioned in the Quebec Documents, II, 152, under date 1694, 
which says that in the Harbour of Nigarscorf [misprint and corrup- 
tion of Mes-gos-guelk, the Indian name of Musquash Harbour], three 
leagues from the River St. John, Captain Baptiste with his corvette 
La Bonne spent the winter of 1694-95. Compare Gesner’s note. I find 
it as Frenchman’s Brook in a plan of 1820. 


French River, Bay du Vin.—Settled by Acadian families, as described in the 
Settlements Monograph. 


Gallows Hill. (Kingston, opposite Gondola Point).—So named for the two 
executions which took place there while the King’s County Court 
House stood in the vicinity (St John J'elegraph, Aug. 23, 1995.) 


Geary.—I have at length been able to determine ‘the origin of this name 
The earliest use of the word I have found is in the Land Memorials 
of 1811, where it is called New Gary, though under 1807 it appears 
to be mentioned as a “new settlement back of French Lake.” Mr. 
Thos. E. Smith, of Geary, tells me the name was suggested by his 
grandmother, his .grandfather, Samuel Smith, being the first settler 
there. They came to New Brunswick from the United States as Loyal- 
ists, and remained for a time at Niagara, then locally pronounced 
“Niagary.’ Later they came to New Brunswick, and in settling here 
gave the name New Niagary to the new settlement, which name be- 
came changed to New Gary, and finally the New was dropped, and it 
became Gary or Geary. The same explanation has been given me 
by Mr. Leslie Carr, of French Lake. This tradition is finely con- 
firmed by a mention of the settlement I have found in the Royal 
Gazette for Apr. 14, 1818, which calls it New Niagara, and I have no 
question the explanation is correct. It appears as Geary in 1818 in 
a MS. Journal of C. Campbell. 


Geologists Range (in Restigouche-Victoria).—So named in 1899, as described 
Thay BUT NME Sh, IW Ble NP STE 


Geordie Lake, on Rocky Brook.—Named for an old hunter, as fully explained 
in Forest and Stream, May 17, 1902, 386. 


George, Lake.—Raymond (St. John River, 7) says, this name is explained 
locally as given for John McGeorge, who settled there in 1816; he 
was killed by Indians in 1822. The same explanation is also given 
locally. 

It is also stated in the New Brunswick Courier for Feb. 2, 1822, 
that it took its name from him, which seems conclusive. 

Earlier its name appears to have been Nine-mile Lake, as shown 
by a notice of the settlement there in Royal Gazette, Feb. 29, 1820. 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 25 


Place-nomenclature. 


Germantown Lake.—The name Germantown (located on Map No, 25 later) 
was used for the settlement of Shepody in 1768 (Canadian Archives, 
1886, 488, 492). No doubt it was so named for Germantown, Pennsyl- 
vania, from which some of the first settlers came. A fine plan of 1801 
has “German, or Sheppotee Lake.” 


Gilmour Brook, Nepisiguit.—Of course for the William Gilmore, the angling 
schoolmaster, an interesting character described by Lanman in his 
“Adventures,” II, 31-33. 


Glenelg.—P. 1814. So named for the native place in Scotland of Major 
McDonald of the 78th Highlanders, a prominent resident, who settled 
here about 1790, as I am told by a well-informed local authority, Mr. 
D. Lewis, of Hscuminac. 


Gloucester, County.—Named in all probability for Mary, fourth daughter of 
King George II, who married the Duke of Gloucester in 1816 and was 
devoted to good works. 


Golden Mountain, Albert.—A common corruption of Gowland Mountain, so 
named for the leading family there. 


Gondola Point.—In this form in the Land Memorials of 1786. 


Gooldsborough, at mouth of the Oromocto.—Explained by Raymond in Coll. 
INGE ELISE. SOC. T5 0! 


Gordon Falls—Named for Governor Gordon, who visited them while in New 
Brunswick (local statements and St. John Sun, Aug. 29, 1888). 


Grande Anse, Bay, Dune, Falls, Lake, Point, River, Ruisseau.—The Grand is, 
of course, a persistence of French nomenclature. As applied to all 
features, except river and brook, its meaning of big is perfectly appro- 
priate, since those features are pre-eminently conspicuous in their 
localities. We have, however, also Grand River in Madawaska County, 
and a Grand Ruisseau in Shippegan (north end), while Eel River at 
Bay du Vin is also locally so called. These are all compara- 
tively insignificant streams and the reason for the application to 
them of the term grand is not obvious. I believe, however, that the 
word is here used precisely as in the common French phrase grand 
chemin, which means a “ highway.’ The two great rivers above men- 
tioned were parts of important early portage-routes, and very likely 
Grand Ruisseau was part of a route to the interior lakes of Shippegan, 
though also it may have meant simply the largest brook of the vicinity 


Grande Dune.—Preferable to Grand Dune, because correct French. 


Grandigue.—Presumably so called for the great dike or bar which makes 
out to the southward from the point. 


Grand John Brook.—Said to be named for an Indian of that name who used 
to hunt there. 


26 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomenclature. 


Grand Lake, Q.—An old newspaper article in the St. John Sun says that 
a Mr. Garrison, prior to the coming of the Loyalists, surveyed this lake 
and gave names to Cumberland Bay, Salmon River, Newcastle, ete. 


Grand Manan.—The (Great Mary island of McDonald’s Reports originated with 
David Owen, and represents one of his attempts to give a French origin 
to the Indian names of Passamaquoddy. (See at end of Dictionary). 
The Indian names for several places on or near the island are given 
by Gatschet in the Eastport Sentinel, Sept. 15, 1897. ; 


Grand River.—Occurs first in Sproule’s map of 1787 (see Map No. 39 later) 
as “ Quidasquack, by the French Grande Rivière.” 


Grays Island, Albert. 


So named for its first grantee, a Major Gray. In the 
Calhoun Diary of 1771 it is ca'led Delatong’s Island, no doubt an Aca- 
dian name. 


Green Hill.—The name in 1783 of the hill on which the Burton Court House 
now stands. (Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc. Il, 296). 


Green River.—On Sproule’s map of 1787 (Map No. 39) called “ Quamquerti- 
cook or Green River.” 


‘ 
Greenwich.—P. 1795. Possibly for Greenwich, a village now incorporated 


into New York City, in the Revolution the residence of many Loyalists. 
There is also a Greenwich Street in Hempstead, L.I., after which place 
our Hampstead was named. There seems to be no local tradition to 
exp!ain the name. 


Guagus.—_Name of a lake emptying into the Lower North Branch of the 
Little Southwest Miramichi. It is also applied to a part of the out- 
let of Miramichi Lake and also to a place on the Renous River. It 
is without doubt Micmac, though I do not know its meaning. It 
seems to apply to a rocky place difficult of canoe navigation. Perhaps 
involves the same root as Naleguagus on Salmon River and Nara- 
guagus in Maine. 


Ha Ha River.—Still used. It occurs in the Calhoun Diary of 1771. 


Hamomashoe.—Some place, not known to me, in Madawaska (Winslow Pa- 
pers, 572). 


Hanwell.—Used in the St. Andrews-Fredericton road survey of 1826-27, and 
said locally to have been named fer an early family of residents of 
that name. 


Harcourt.—P. 1826. Confirmation of the derivation here given is in Fullom’s 
Life of Sir Howard Douglas, 266. He was a friend of Sir Howard. 


Hardwicke.—P. 1851. So named, as I am told by Mr. D. Lewis, of Escu- 
minac, for Mr. Benjamin Hardwick, of London, who became interested 
in Rev. James Hudson’s Church of England missions here, and con- 
tributed to them; accordingly the parish was named for him at Mr. 
Hudson’s suggestion, the final e being an error of the lawmakers. 


ra 


[canonc ] - ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 27 


Place-nomenclature. 


Hardwood Island.—Called White Wood Island in 1785 in the Land Memorials. 


Hastings.—Named by Hon. A. R. McClelan in honour of Hastings Doyle, 
then Governor of the Province. 


Hecklars Cove.—West of Jacquet River; mentioned by Cooney, 203; location 
and origin not known to me. 


Hospital Island.—Fully explained in St. John Sun of Aug. 27, or 28, 1903 
In 1848 the “Star” immigrant ship arrived with many immigrants 
to work on the new railway, and among these were many fever pa- 
tients who died, and to the number of 48 were buried on this island. 


Howard Settlement.—Former name of the present Canterbury Station; named 
no doubt in honour of Sir Howard Douglas. 


Howardville.—Town laid out at mouth of Cains River in 1826, by order of 
Sir Howard Douglas, and, of course, named in honour of him. 


Huskisson.—P. 1826. In honour of William Huskisson, in that year one of 
the plenipotentiaries (Addington being the other) to settle the dis- 
puted boundary question. No doubt it was hoped and expected they 
would secure a decision favourable to New Brunswick. 


Indian Island.—Called Fish Island on the Morris map of 1765. Its early 
name Perkins Island was, no doubt, from that of the agent of the 
proprietors in whose grant it was included in 1765, Beamsley Perkins 
Glasier. (See Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc. II, 357). 


Inglewood.—The origins of the many interesting names in this Manor are 
discussed fully in Acadiensis, III, 7. 


Irish River.—This river is wrongly located on Loggie’s and the Geological 
Survey maps, but is correct on Wilkinson, 1859. It is said locally, 
and no doubt correctly, to be so named for a former Irish immigrant 
settlement on its upper part. 


Iroquois River.—First appears on the Sproule map of 1787 (see later Map 
No. 39) as Oroquois, which is probably a corruption of Wolumkuas (or 
Aoulasqua, as M. P. L. Mercure gives it to me) a Maliseet name, 
applied to it by Moses Greenleaf in 1823 and on maps of the time 
The form Jroquoiz occurs in a document in 1836 in the Boundary blue- 
book of 1851, 13. It is locally pronounced not only Irockway, but 
also Rockway, and it appears thus in Loggie’s map of 1898, and also 
in the newspapers. 


Jacquet River.—Appears as Jacket in 1803 (Winslow Papers, 501), and the 
same in Land Memorials of 1806. I find the q first on Baillie’s map 
of 1832 (Jaquet), while Wilkinson, 1859, appears to have introduced the 
present form. 


Joes Point—In the Boundary MS. the American agent in 1797, or about 
that year, speaks of the mouth of the Scoodic being at ‘“ the southwest 
point of Saint Andrews, or Joze’s Patent.” This suggests that it 
was for a grantee, and as Joseph Goreham was the first grantee of 


28 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


the land in this vicinity in 1767 it may be from his name. Or, it 
may be derived from Francis Joseph, a Passamaquoddy chief, prom- 
inent at the time of the Boundary discussion. Some confirmation for 
this is found in the fact that the point at St. Andrews nearest Navy 
Island was named Louis point, without much doubt for Louis Nep- 
tune, another prominent chief. (Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc. II, 184). 


Jolicoeur.—As Jollycoeur in the Land Memorials of 1788, and as Jolicoeur in 
1811. The Richart of Montresor is not this, but Prée des Richards 


(see later, . under Historic Sites addenda). Jolicure is in Fisher's 


Sketches of 1825, 61. Jolicoeur seems to persist as the correct, ox 
literary, form, while the local pronunciation is “ Jolicure.” 


Jourimain.—A possible, though not very probable origin for this puzzling 
name is the following. A memoir written in 1749, by Father Germain, 
a priest in Acadia (for a copy of which I am indebted to Mr. P. P. 
Gaudet), suggests as the proper boundary of Acadia a line extending 
along the north shore of the Bay of Fundy, thence to Tantremar, and 
thence to Baie Verte, or possibly Cape Tormentine. It is barely 
possible that such a line was discussed in Acadia and known as the 
Germain line, in which case it is conceivable that his name became 
associated with the termination at the present Cape Jourimain, which 
is near Cape Tormentine. The chief confirmation for such a possi- 
bility is the fact that the name is locally pronounced Germain. But 
I must confess to little faith in this explanation. Germain seems to 
occur also as an Acadian name (Acadiensis, II, 103), and it may be 
that the islands at the cape may have been so named for an early 
resident, the present form representing a surveyor’s attempt to give 
the word a French form. It occurs first as Jeauriman Islands in the 
Land Memorials of 1809. 


\ 


Kagoot Mountain.—So named, a restoration of an Indian name, in 1903, as 
a substitute for Bald, or Big Bald, Mountain, as described in Bull. 
NAS, AVS lbs 


Kedgwick River.—This nameyappears in the documents connected with the 
Boundary Surveys of 1818. Thus, C. Campbell in his Diary of that 
year has invariably Madam Kiswice or Grand Fourche, which strongly 
suggests that the name is fundamentally the same as that of the 
Keswick (which see); Tiarks has Memkeswee, while the Tiarks and 
Burnham map has Katawamkiswy. 

The Belle Kedgwick is, no doubt, properly Bell Kedgwick; the Final 
Report of the Graham Commission of 1842 shows that a Captain Bell 
surveyed the Green River in 1842, and crossed to this branch, and 
on Graham’s map of 1843 showing these surveys it is called, appar- 
ently for the first time, Bell Kedgwick. 


Kellys Creek.—A branch is apparently called Chichawagaan (see University 
Monthly, XIX, 4). 


Kembles Manor.—Still locally called “The Manor.” Origin and history fully 
given by Howe, in N.B. Magazine, I, 146. 


Se Oe 


a 


SS Sr 


a 
ie 
; 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 29 


Place-nomenclature. 


Kent.—P. 1827. Compare also Fisher’s Sketches, 41. The “Kent” regi- 
ment is said locally to have been settled here in 1817,— compare Mil- 
x itary Settlements in Settlements Monograph. 


Kent, County.—Established 1826, and, of course, named in honour of H.R.H. 
the Duke of Kent, father of Queen Victoria. 


Keswick.—As Madame Keswick on Sproule’s map of 1787 (later, Map No. 38). 
Compare Kedgwick. 


Ketepec (formerly Sutton on the C.P.R.).—Recent simplification of the Indian 
name of Grand Bay (see earlier in these addenda). 


Kewadu Lake.—Appeared first on the geological survey map of 1887, placed 
there by Dr. Ells, who tells me he obtained it from a guide who had 
hunted much with the Indians. It is said locally to mean Indian 
Devil Lake; Dr. Ells’ recollection is that he was told it meant Beaver 
Lake. No doubt it is Micmac, though I cannot trace it farther. 


Kilfoil—So named by the Post Office Department for a prominent resident. 


Kilmaquac.—This name of the former Indian village of St. Croix, opposite 
Vanceboro, appears to survive in the Will-me-quick Rips, at that place. 
(19th Rep. U. S. Geol. Survey, Vol. 4, page 49). 


Kilmarnock, Cove, C.—Used in Acts of Assembly for 1830. Though not 
on maps, it is still in use. No doubt it originated with James Boyd, 
a well-known pre-Loyalist settler, who was connected with the Boyds 
of Kilmarnock, Scotland. (See Courier Series, XLI). 


Kingsclear.—A local tradition asserts, as Dr. Raymond tells me, that this 
name originated from “ King’s clearings,’* applied in pre-Loyalist days 
to the open space left by the cutting of the King’s pine-trees (which 
there were abundant) for the Royal Navy. 


Kingston, Kent.—Changed in 1901 to Rexton, which see. Kingston was at 
one time known simply as “ The Yard” (shipyard), but when Messrs. 
Holderness and Chilton, of Kingston, England, established a business 
there, the place was so named in compliment to them. 


Kouchibouguac, Kent.—Several other early uses of this name that I have 
found begin with Pi: thus Pichibouguack, 1803 Land Memorials; Pissa- 
beguake, 1803 (Winslow Papers, 499); Passibiguac, 1812, Land Memorials; 
Pichibouquack, plan of 1815. In one of his lectures on New Brunswicl. 
rivers, published in early newspapers, M. H. Perley derives this name 
from Koohawaak, meaning Cariboo plain. 


Labouchere Lake.—It appears on the Land Company’s plan of 1834. Labou- 
chere was, in 1839, Under Secretary for War and the Colonies, and 
President of the Board of Trade, and very probably held some position 
in 1834 entitling him to this honour. 


La Coote, Lake and Stream, York.—No doubt named for the Indian La Coote, 
who lived just above Vanceboro (see Historic Sites, 223, and Aca- 
diensis, I, 195). On an old plan just at the outlet of this lake is 
placed Ticket Madeoukai, evidently an Indian word. 


30 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomenclature. 


La Coup Creek.—Locally called La Cook, but the French form is explained 
as meaning ‘a blow,” because of the sharp turn it makes in entering 
the Aulac. 


Lamec.—The preferable form of this name. See Alamec. 


Lancaster.—P. 1786. Named for his former home in Lancaster, Massachu- 
setts, by a prominent resident, Abijah Willard, as made plain by 
Gilbert Bent in Acadiensis, V, 162. 


La Nef.—Compare the name applied by Champlain to Monhegan,—‘ We 
named the island La Nef, for at a distance it had the form of a ship” 
A(Slafter Eh 91) It is possible that some confusion between thesa 
two La Nef localities led to some of the duplication noticeable on the 
Visscher and other maps of the time. 


Le Nim, Point.—Locally pronounced La Nim or Le Nim. On a plan of 
1816 as Point au Nim. I am told by Mr. D. Ferguson, of Chatham, 
that the Indians call it An-an-imk, or An-an-im-kik, though Cooney’s 
meaning of a look-out place does not seem to him appropriate. 


Lepreau River.—Called in the David Owen map and MS. Minushadi (possibly 
Misuishadi), no doubt an Indian name. 


Lerwick.—Named for the native place of a group of Shetlanders, especially 
of a prominent one, Mr. Abernethy, who were brought out to work 
on the N. B. Railway, and settled here after its completion. 


Letite—Very possibly an Indian corruption Petit, i.e., Petit Passage; having 
labials they cannot pronounce the p, and the 1 would be a natural 
substitute. Still the evidence seems to favour a corruption of La 
Téte, applying to the great head on McMasters Island. 


Lillooet.—Said locally to be so named by Senator King for a lumber centre 
on the Pacific Coast, visited by him or his brothers. 


LincolIn.—P. 1786. The name is probably derived from the former home 
in Lincoln, Mass., of the Glasier family, among its first prominent 
settlers. Benjamin Glasier was a Lieutenant in a regiment in Lin- 
coln, Mass. 


Liverpool—Named ‘in humble imitation of the Queen of the Mersey.” 
Cooney, 150. 


Loch Lomond.—In this form in Land Memorials of 1812. Earlier called 
9-Mile Lake. 


Loders Creek.—Simonds Creek on Sproule of 1786. (See also N.B. Maga- 
zine, IT, 87): 


Long Lake, Victoria.—Called by de Meulles, 1786, PSchpem KachkSechpa, pro- 
bably the same as the modern Indian Quasquispac. Gordon’s Pechayzo 
is very likely an error, really applying to Trowsers Lake (i.e., Belchesog, 
the Indianized Trowsers, or Breeches, Lake. See Bull. N.H.S., IV, 


327. 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS Si 
Place-nomenclature. 


Long Lookum.—Name of long straight stretches of river on the St. Croix, 
Nepisiguit and Upsalquitch, no doubt a hybrid Indian-English expres- 
sion. 


Louison.—I have found several references to the use of this name for In- 
dians. Thus the Journal of the Survey of the North line in 1813 
shows an Indian helper named Louison. 


Ludlow.—P. 1814. Named no doubt in memory of the brothers, Gabriel G. 
Ludlow, Administrator of the Province in 1803, and George D., Chief 
Justice of the Province, both of whom died in 1808. 


Lumsden, in Albert.—Named, as I am told by Hon. A. R. McClelan, in honour 
of a man with whom negotiations were carried on to bring out set- 
tlers to the Province. 


Lynnfield.—Said locally to be so named from the hymn-tune of that name, 
a great favourite of one of the earliest settlers. 


Maces Bay.—On Sproule, 1786, as Maes's Bay. The origin of this name 
still eludes me, though I am inclined to believe it is from the Indian 
Mechescor. It is barely possible it was given by DesBarres. He 
named many places for contemporary British officers, and there was 
a Benj. Mace, a surgeon in the 22nd Regiment, serving about that 
time in America. 


Mactaquac.—Mactaguack on Sproule’s map of 1786, and as Mactuquac in the 
Land Memorials of 1786. 


Magaguadavic.—This is the standard spelling of this word, though its pro- 
nunciation is invariably ‘“Macadavy.” The retention of the longer 
spelling is no doubt connected with the constant official use of the 
longer form through the many documents and maps of the Boundary 
disputes, as shown in the Monograph on Boundaries, 277. 


Magundy.—I think, without doubt, of Maliseet Indian origin. Apparently 
an early Indian portage to the Magaguadavic Lakes passed by way 
of this stream (see later in these Addenda under “ portages’’). Very 
likely it is the same word as appears in Magundicook and possibly 
Mooselemeguntic in Maine, and. perhaps, related to Slugundy, which 
see. This origin is confirmed by the form Magundic Ridge, 1823, in 
the Land Memorials, and by the local tradition, which also makes it 
of Indian origin. 


Mainor Lake.—On Loggie’s and Geological Survey maps for a branch of 
the Little Southwest Miramichi. An interesting example of the errors 
that can arise simply mechanically through misprints, etc., for locally 
the stream is called. Mains, or the Lake, Branch. 


Mahood Lakes.—A name introduced in 1898 for a group of lakes in Charlotte 
County, in honour of William Mahood, a prominent early surveyor of 
the County, and first surveyor of that group. The name, with those 
of other lakes of the group are explained in the Bull. N.H.S., IV, 57. 


32 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place nomenclature. 


Mal Baie.—See Miscou. 


Malcontentes, Ruisseau des.—A small stream emptying into Cocagne Har- 
bour south of Dixon Point, so named, as I am informed by M. Gaudet, 
because a group of expelled Acadians settled there for a time after 
the expulsion. 


Malpec.—Name of a small brook east of Neguac. Said by Chas. Bernard, 
s 

Indian teacher at Church Point, to be in Micmac Malbek, meaning 
Pronounced locally Mawl-pec. 


“water is low.” 

Maltampec.—This name, though thus pronounced in local use, is misprinted 
on all printed maps, as Mattampec, though it is correctly written on 
plans in the Crown Land Office. It is undoubtedly Micmac, though 
I do not know its meaning. On the Ferguson map of 1811 it is 
written Ranamagauch, apparently another Micmac name. 


Mahalawodiac River.—Very little known locally (called Little River, or Little 
Buctouche), except to local antiquarians; it seems to be known to 
them (Gaudet and Father Michaud) as Madagouiac. 


Mamozekel.—First on Garden's plan of 1835 as Mammyzekel. I am told by Mr. 
M. Hardy, of Brewer, Me., that he was on the Tobique in 1858, and that 
the Indians give him the name as Ebemeenarzekel; ebemenar, meaning 
red berries like mountain cranberries, thus would agree to some extent 
with my Indian informant who gave it as “bushy stream.” The 
name is also applied to Britt Brook, a branch of Serpentine, the latter, 
indeed, seeming to be the main He-be-se-Kel, and the Mamozekel 
being He-be-se-kel-sis, the little Hebezekel, though a much larger 
stream than the former. 


Manne, Riviére de.—River flowing into Miramichi in the Acadian Period 
mentioned by St. Valier in 1688; probably Burnt Church River. 


Maquapit.—The Indians agree that it is from the word Maqua = red. Rev. 
R. W. Colston has written me the explanation which is, no doubt, cor- 
rect. He says there is much red gravel along its shores, and that 
after heavy rains much red mud is carried into the lake. I find it 
in 1785 as Maquapec in the Land Memorials. But it is not the R. de 
Maquo of 1672, as later shown under Seigniories in Historic Sites 
addenda. 


Marcelle, Pointe.—Said locally, and no doubt correctly, to be so named for a 
former resident, Marcelle Le Clair. 


Mark Island (also called Pope’s Folly, which see).—So named, no doubt, 
because serving as a mark in the navigation of the West Passage. 


Maringouin Cape.—Locally commonly called Merry Magwin. There iS a 
local tradition that it was so called because a prisoner was once ex- 
posed there to be bitten to death by mosquitoes. This is probably 
only a legend, which has arisen to explain the name, 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 33 
Place-numenclature. 


Marischal Keith—Name of a barony established in 1625 by Sir William 
Alexander, granted to Lord Keith and Altrie, on the east side of the 
entrance to River St. Croix, hence covering the site of St. Andrews. 
(Slafter’s Sir William Alexander, 51). 


Marsh Creek, St. John.—On this and its Indian name, see N.B. Magazine, 
ier sand) ohh ae 


Martin Head.—It occurs as Martins Head in the Land Memorials of 1785, 
and again in 1786, and hence this, and not St. Martin’s Head, appears 
to be the earlier form. I have, however, found no clue to its origin, 
unless there may be some connection with one James Martin, who had 
a grant in the Orange Ranger tract at Quaco in 17838. Some adven- 
ture of this man at that place might readily give his name to it. 
Locally it is called Martin Head, rather than Martin’s Head, which form 
accordingly I have adopted. 


Martinon (formerly French’s on the C.P.R.).—A recent simplification of the 
old French name of a §eigniory at St. John. (See earlier in these 
Addenda). 


Marys Point, Shepody.—I am in error in stating it is locally said to be 
properly St. Mary’s Point. It is said locally that it was for a squaw 
of that name (Mary), and one old and well informed resident told me 
that it was early called La Pointe de Marie Bidoque. I have no doubt 
this explanation is in essence correct. 


Mascabin.—Some confirmation of my surmise that it is simply a chart 
error for Mascarin (Mascareen) is found in Hind’s use of the word 
in his Report on N. B. Geology, 136. 


Maugerville-—The real genesis of the name is given in Fisher’s Sketches, 
of 1825, 103, and is traced by Raymond in his St. John River, 155, 
and Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc., II, 294, 323, who shows that it was tem- 
porarily called Peabody from a prominent resident. Had it not been 
for Joshua Mauger it is very probable the settlers would have obtained 
no grant of their lands, and hence the naming of the important town- 
ship for him was natural and appropriate. 


Maxwell.—Former name of a settlement made on Eel River in 1842 (see 
Settlements Monograph). It was probably named for Lieut.-Col, A. 
M. Maxwell of the 36th Regiment, the commander of the N. B. sol- 
diers in the “Aroostook War.’ He returned to England in 1840 with 
the esteem of the people of New Brunswick. 


McAdam.—The present site of the Junction was about 1850 called City Camp, 
because of the large number of lumber camps then in the immediate 
vicinity, as I am told by Mr. A. M. Hill. When railway construction 
(ie, the eastern extension between Vanceboro and St. John) began 
in 1869, the place bore this name for a time. But a watering station 
established two miles up the line on McAdam Brook (so named be- 


Sec. II., 1905. 3 


34 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-romenclature. 


cause lumbered by John McAdam) became known as McAdam, and 
the name gradually was transferred to the Junction, the watering place 
being later named Maudsley (for a British capitalist interested in the 
road). Thus the name gradually became applied to the junction and 
was afterwards extended to the parish. This is probably strictly 
correct, and it is wholly in conformity with the method by which place- 
names arise. 


Medisco.—A point at Petit Rocher, according to Perley, Fisheries of N. B. 
45; one of Gaudet’s articles speaks of “ Petit Rocher, autrement dite 
Madisco.” 


Meductic.—This name is now applied to the modern village just south of 
the mouth of Hel River. 


Meductic Falls——On the Peachey type of maps there occurs here a Gath of 
Medoctu, long a puzzle tO me. On a recently obtained copy of that 
map, drawn by Sproule (mentioned later in Cartography addenda), 
I find it written Gall of Medoctu, which, I have no question, is a 
eopyist’s error for Fall—showing that Gath is ,an error for Fall or 
Falls. 


Memel, in Albert.—Named by a German settler from that place in Germany, 
as I am told by Hon. A: R. MeClelan. 


Messinet Stream.—Named, no doubt, from some one of the family of a 
French physician of that name who settled in St. George, and whose 
descendants are still there, as I am told by Mr. J. Vroom. At one 
time I thought this word a corruption of an Indian name given in 
the Land Memorials of 1797, which speaks of a stream in Pennfield 
parish called Waswaswiniwick, the identity of which is not known to me. 


Middle Island.—The original grant of 1765 speaks of Middle Island lying 
off Windmill Point. (Compare Numeheal, later). 


Middle River.—This appears to have been called by Plessis in 1811 La 
Riviere du Mitan (Journal, 114), though Mitan is, perhaps, a misprint 
for Milieu. 


Midgic, Westmorland.—Appears first, so far as I have found, in the Land 
Memorials of 1812 as Point Medjeck, though it must have been used 
much earlier. 


Milnagek Lake, or Island Lake.—The name and the local nomenclature of 
the vicinity is fully discussed in Bull. N.H.S., IV, 469. 


Milpagos.—Compare Rand’s Milpaachk, “having many coves” (Reader, 100). 
and Milpagech, variegated (101). 


Minaqua.—See Northwest Miramichi. 


Miramichi.—The origin of this name still eludes me. Its first use in a 
modern form is as Mesamichi in deMonts’ Commission of 1603. To 
the various fanciful explanations of it may be added that of M’Gre- 


2 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 35 
Place-nomenclature. 


gor (British America, Il, 260), who makes it, “a probable corruption 
of Miracheet, a tribe of Micmacs once inhabiting its banks,’ but he 
evidently here has in mind the Maliseets, sometimes called Mariseets. 
The meaning ‘Happy Retreat,’ first given by Cooney and widely 
accepted, is of no value whatever, since the same meaning is given 
in an old document as applying to the Nepisiguit (Coll. N.B. Hist. 
Soc., II, 128). On the map in the Micmac Almanac for 1902, pub- 
lished by Rev. Father Pacifique, the word appears in the form 
Malimeoisitg, and he writes me that this is the name applied to the 
peninsula where Chatham stands, and it can mean “Place where one 
collects diverse kinds of berries.” But, he adds, that he does not 
know whether this is an aboriginal word, or simply a Micmac pro- 
nunciation of a word derived from the whites. 


Miscou.—The suggestion in Place-Nomenclature (page 253) that this name 
may be derived from an Algonquin word meaning red, “describing the 
low red cliffs about it,’ proves groundless, since, as I have found by 
personal observation, no such cliffs exist. I find the local tradition 
among the best-informed local residents makes the word Indian, mean- 
ing “low land” or, as one told me, “boggy land.” This interpreta- 
tion I find confirmed by Joe Prisk, the intelligent old Miemac of 
Bathurst, who told me he thinks the word is Micmac, and means 
“muddy land,” having in it the root susqu, meaning “ mud,’ in which 
case the aboriginal form (which the Micmacs appear to have quite 
lost) would have been something like M’susqu, easily shortened to 
Miscou. I take it that the word means not only mud in our sense, 
but also muck, marsh, wet bog. In this case it forms an admirable 
descriptive name, for the most striking fact about the physical geo- 
graphy of Miscou is the prevalence there of open bogs or barrens 
(copiously covered with boggy lakes), which, indeed, form over one- 
half of the surface of the island (compare the map and description in 
Bulletin of the Nat. Hist. Soc. of N.B., V, 449). The name Miscou seems 
to cecur for the first time in Champlain’s Narratives, under the year 
1623. 

The local and historical nomenclature is of much interest. No 
Indian names, except Âiscou itself, have survived, but many French 
names are in use. The name Isle de Sainct Louis is applied to it in 
the Jesuit Relations, and Cap de l'Espérance was given to its northern 
point by Cartier in 1534 because in rounding it he hoped he had found 
in Bay Chaleur the western passage. J. à Monsieur is applied upon 
old maps to a small island in this vicinity which I think can be only 
Money Island, the only one hereabouts which is striking enough to 
be named on the old maps. The name Money Island (called by the 
French Jsle au Trésor) is, of course, descriptive of the supposed treasure 
there (see later, under Historie Sites). Pointe au Vable and Boullin des 
Boeufs occur upon [West’s original map of the island in 1820, and 
both names are still known to the older residents, though not now in 
actual use; Vable, I presume, is connected in some way with Sable, 
sand, while Boullin des Boeufs (spelled Bouillin des Boufs on West’s 
map) was explained to me, and I have no question, correctly, by 


36 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


Mr. Andrew Wilson, as applying formerly to the fine birch woods 
where the lighthouse now stands, in which the cattle of the settlers 
formerly wandered; the word is an Acadian mélmige, meaning “the 
birch (grove) of the cattle.’ Mal Baie, in common use, probably is 
a corruption of “ Morue Bay,” or “Cod Bay,” a name occurring else- 
where in Acadia, and alludes to the cod which have appeared there 
frequently and have been left stranded at low tide. On the different 
maps the names big and little are applied to them, but with no con- 
stancy, and sometimes transposed, but they are not used locally. The 
term Queue, meaning of course “a tail,” is in constant local use for 
the two narrow-necked bays as shown on the map, but the word does 
not occur elsewhere in the Province so far as I know. Lake Chenire 
is said locally to mean ‘‘Oak Lake” (obviously including the root 
chéne), though the word Chenire is not used now in Acadian; the 
name is known by the older residents to have been given when oak 
staves were made in the woods on its southern shore. Grande Plaine 
is descriptive of the great beach-plain here built up by the sea (as 
described in the paper above cited in Bulletin of the N.B. Nat. Hist. 
Soc.). Lac Frye is so named, without doubt, for the Canadian who 
had a fishing establishment here in 1775 (Canadian Archives, 1894, 
881). Munroe Lake, on old maps applied to Lac Frye, but now used 
for the little lake near the lighthouse, is said to be for another early 
fisherman. Landry River is for the early settler of that name, after- 
wards one of the founders of Upper Caraquet. All of the other names 
on the map are obviously descriptive, either of physical peculiarities, 
ownership, ete. Black Point (Pointe Noire by the French) still in use 
by older people, applies not so much to the outer point at Wilson’s 
as to the settlement, and probably was originally applied inside the 
harbour. 

One series of the descriptive names, those applied to the smaller 
lakes, have been mostly given by Dr. J. Orne Green, of Boston, (a 
sportsman who has camped on the island in autumn for some twenty- 
eight years past) and for various reasons descriptive of physical pecu- 
liarities or commemorative of some of his friends or guides who have 
been with him there. The maps and charts commonly apply the name 
Miscou Point, or Point Miscow to the extreme northern point of the 
island, but this is not the local usage, which calls the northern end 
Northwest Point, and applies Point Miscou, or, more commonly, Miscou 
Point to the vicinity of the lighthouse, a usage which is, at least, as 
old as 1832 (Cooney, 177). The settlement near the lighthouse is 
called Miscou Point Settlement, with a strong tendency to shorten it 
simply to Miscou Settlement, or even simply to Miscou. On the charts 
occur the names Mya Point, South Mya Point, Pecten Point and 
Pandora Point (the former being the scientific names of the clam and 
the scallop respectively), given, no doubt, by the officers of the Ad- 
miralty Survey in 1838, but they have never come into use and are 
entirely unknown locally. All of the Miscou local names may be 
found upon an Historical Map, accompanying my paper, ‘‘ The History 
of Miscou,” in Acadiensis, Vol. VI. 


[aanoxG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 37 


Place-nomenclature. 
Missaguash.—The best form of this diversely-spelled word. 


Mistake Creek.—Was earlier called Coy’s (not McCoy’s) Mistake (Raymond, 
St. John River, 327). Early grants appear to refer to a Mistake Creek 
on the Kennebecasis. 


Mistouche (or Tracy’s) Brook.—On the curious nomenclatorial history of 
this name, see Monograph on Boundaries, 407. 


Monash Cove.—-Presumably Micmac, but origin not known to me. 
Moncton, (now Gibson).—See a note on this name in N.B. Magazine, I, 71. 


Money Cove, Grand Manan.—For the supposed presence of buried treasure, 
as explained fully in Perley, Report on Fisheries, 103. 


Monument Brook.—In Maliseet 'itiakmigc, meaning low-ground throughout. 
(Gatschet, Eastport Sentinel, Sept. 15, 1897). 


Moorefields.—Important early settlement on the North shore of the Mirami- 
chi, since the great fire of 1825 included in Douglastown. 


Moreau, Pointe à.—Said locally to be so named for a former resident. 
Mosquito Cove, near St. John.—Used in the Morris Report of 1765. 


Musquash Harbour.—Compare Frenchman’s Creck earlier. The legend men- 
tioned here is given in full in Leland and Prince, Kuloscap the 
Master, 26. 


Nabouiane.—A place near Shediac, mentioned by Bellin in his Description 
of 1755, page 31; identity unknown to me. 


Nackawic.—A branch of this river appears to bear the name, doubtless 
Indian, Naraguisis (see Select Committee Report of 1861, 17, 70). Pos- 
sibly connected with Naraguagus (Naleguagus, which see). 


Naleguagus.—Name, still used, of a rapid on Salmon River, Queens County 
(above Castaway Brook); it is, no doubt, Indian and by the same ori- 
gin as Narraguagus, in Maine, and connected with Guagus, which see. 


Nantucket.—Perhaps connected with the Captain Folger, of Nantucket, Mass., 
who was at Passamaquoddy after whales in the eighteenth century 
(Kilby, Eastport and Passamaquoddy, 105). 


Negoot.—Name proposed in 1901 for the group of lakes on the right hand 
branch of Tobique, a restoration of the Maliseet name of the river 
(see Tobique). It, together with all the local names of the vicinity 
are fully discussed in the Bull. N.H.S., IV, 326, 337; V, 67. 


Nepisiguit.—The origin of the nomenclature of the hills at the head of 
the river is discussed in Bull N.H.S., IV, 251, and of its south branch 
in the same Bulletin, V, 226. 


38 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


New 


New 


New 


New 


Brunswick.—The earliest use I have found of this name is of date 
May 29, 1784, a document in Archives Report for 1894, 419. On other 
proposed names see Raymond in N.B. Magazine, III, 44; Canadian 
History Readings, II, 52; Canadian Archives, 1894, 418; Winslow Pa- 
pers, 174. In earlier records and maps it appears very frequently as 
New-Brunswick. A frequent local pronunciation is Noo-Brumsick. 


Horton.—Settled by people from Horton, in Nova Scotia, whence the 
name, as I am informed by Hon. A. R. McClelan. This is confirmed 
by a statement in Johnston’s North America, II, 112. 


Mills——The former narne, Malagash, occurs in the Land Memorials of 
1789; and in 1814 in Winslow Papers, 689. 


River.—On Sproule’s map of 1786. 


Nictor Lake.—The origin of this name, and of the other local names, includ- 


ing mountains, of the vicinity is discussed in Bull. N.H.S.,, IV, 240. 


Nigadoo.—In this form in 1807 in the Land Memorials. 


Northumberland Strait.—The name Red Sea applied to its southern end on 


some maps was given, according to MS. Owen Journal of 1767 (which 
I have seen), “called by the French La Mer Rouge or Red Sea, probably 


because of the colour given by the soil of St. John’s Island to the 
water.” 


North Pole Branch.—Its nomenclature is fully described in Bull. N.H.S, 


V, 468. 


Northwest Miramichi.—Locally always pronounced Norwest. The Indian 


name of this river is Elmunakun, (Atlee-ma-nagan, M’Gregor, British 
America, II, 260, and Menail-menaagun, E. Jack in MS.). Rand gives 
the form Hlmunakuncheech, meaning a ‘‘beaver’s hole,’ for the Little 
Sevogle, though I think it likely he was misled by the diminutive 
cheech, and that really it applies to the Big Sevogle (see Sevogle). 
In his dictionary (133) he gives Elmunakun as a beaver’s or musk- 
rat’s hole. As to why such a name is applied to the Northwest I 
think it very probable that it was descriptive of the occurrence at 
the place now called Big Hole of a remarkable cave (suggesting a 
beaver’s or muskrat’s hole), mentioned by Professor Bailey in Bulletin 
of the Natural History Society of New Brunswick, V, 158. The very 
name, Big Hole, is some confirmation of this supposition. Rev Father 
Pacifique, however, derives it from a word meaning silent, which is 
not appropriate. 

For this river the French maps used the contraction Minaqua; 
and I have proposed recently (Bulletin of the Natural History Society 
of New Brunswick, Vol. V, page 431) to restore this name as a con- 
venient designation for scientific purposes for the north and south 
part of the valley of the Northwest. The Indian name occurs first 
in a document of 1686 (mentioned later under “ Settlement of Richard 
Denys”), as Mumunagan. 

The local nomenclature of the headwaters of this river is discussed 
in) Bulle Ne ELS.) Waele 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS : 39 
Place-nomenclature 


Norton.—P. 1795. As to this name the late Leonard Allison wrote me as 
follows:—‘‘I have for a good'while supposed, though I have no direct 
evidence of the fact, that the Parish of Norton, in Kings County, was 
named by the Honorable George Leonard, as the habitat of his branch 
of the Leonard family seemed to be Norton, Mass., as appears from 
W. R. Deane’s Memoir of the Taunton Leonards (Boston, 1851), page 8, 
from which it appeared that his grandfather, Major George Leonard, 
removed in 1690 to Norton, then a part of Taunton . . . . The 
Honorable George Leonard’s father, the Reverend Nathaniel Leonard, 
was born at Norton.” This explanation is entirely in harmony with 
the mode of naming of many other parishes in the Province, and is 
probably correct. It may be that the Norton Brook, in Sussex, east 
of the parish may have some connection with the name, or it may 
be a coincidence. 


Nova Scotia.—The very interesting. genesis of this name with the curious 
reason for its persistence in the Latin form, is fully discussed in the 
Educational Review, XVI, 11, and in the Boundaries monograph, 213. 


Numeheal Creek.—According to Raymond (N.B. Magazine, II, 217) this was 
the Pre-Loyalist name of a creek ‘ opposite Middle Island in Mauger- 
ville.’ I believe, however, that this is simply a bad misprint for 
Windmill Creek (now called Street’s Creek?), for there was apparently 
a Windmill Point just beside it (see Middle Island). 


Oanwells Island (of the Peachey maps).—Granted as Fall Island in 1785 to 
Capt. Atwood (Land Memorials). Just below it is Belvisor Bar (which 
see), and it is called Belviso Fall Island in a document of 1810, and 
also Cronkite Island, according to Raymond (letter). Now called 
Brown’s Island. 


Ohio Settlement.—Origin locally unknown. Johnston (Travels in North 
America, II, 62) speaks of it in 1849 as a new French settlement. I 
think it very likely that this settlement, as well as the several Cali- 
fornia Settlements in the Province, were named when emigration to 
those places was attracting much attention, in a half-humourous allu-. 
sion to them as possible substitutes. Johnston, in his Travels in North 
America, II, 39, comments upon the “emigration fevers” which swept 
over the country at intervals, and adds: ‘These accessions of fever 
come on at irregular intervals. The Indiana, the Illinois, the Michigan, 
and the Wisconsin fevers have all had their turn, and now the Cali- 
fornia paroxysm is at its height.” 


Old Mission Point.—The Micmac name of this point, as I am told by Mr. 
D. Ferguson, of Chatham, who knows the place and Indians well, was 
Chee-gook. 


Onlockywicket.—Name of a place on the Upper Nepisiguit, in local use by 
guides and lumbermen, doubtless Micmac. 


Ononette.—(Formerly Riverbank, on the C.P.R.). Recent simplification of the 
Acadian name of Brandy Point (see earlier in these addenda). 


40 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomenclature. 


Ormond Lake—In 1837, the year this name was given, the Marquess of 
Ormonde had his seat at Kilkenny Castle, Ireland, and very likely, 
as Chief Butler of Ireland, he had some part in the coronation of 
Queen Victoria in that year, thus leading Mahood to connect his name 
with that of Victoria and Adelaide. The late J. Allan Jack was of 
opinion, however, as expressed in letters to me, that it was named 
for Col. Ormond, of whom there is a full account in Acadiensis, II, 19. 


Oromocto Lake.—For a discussion of this name, and of the various local 
names around the Northwest Lake, see Bull. N.H.S., V, 193. 


Osnaburg.—A temporary name for Fredericton, used as early as Oct. 20, 
1784 (as shown by a petition of that date still extant), and used occa- 
sionally even after the name Fredericton was given in 1785. The 
name was for the same prince for whom Fredericton -was named, 
Frederick, Duke of York, Bishop of Osnaburg. 


Pabineau.—The origin of this name, from the Acadian name of the high- 
bush cranberry, is fully discussed in Acadiensis, I, 88. 


Palfrey Lake.—Playford’s plan of Survey around Howard Settlement, 1833, 
has Palphry Brook, and possibly the name was given by him, and the 
St. Andrews and Quebec Railway Survey, 1836, has the Palfrey Moun- 
tains. I am told, however, by Mr. John Stewart, who knew this 
country well, that it was so called for an old trapper of that name, 
while Mr. W. H. Venning tells me he remembers hearing, many years 
ago, that it was so named for the first man to cut a saw log on it. 
Inquiries at Vanceboro, made of old residents for me by Dr. Young, 
have failed to yield further information about such a person, though 
it is very likely the lake and stream were named for some early 
hunter or lumberman, or, very likely, for an Indian resident or hunter. 


Palmerston.—Has vanished entirely, both the parish and settlement being 
now called St. Louis de Kent. 


Pamdenec.—(Formerly Hillside, on the C.P.R.). Recent Maliseet name, 
meaning a little hill (see earlier in these addenda). 


Pamomkeag.—(Formerly Nases, on the C.P.R.). Recent Maliseet name, 
meaning river beach (see earlier in these addenda). 


Passamaquoddy Bay.—This word is fully analyzed by Prince, in Proc. Am. 
Phil. Soc, XXXVIII, 181; also in Leland and Prince, Kuloscap the 
Master, 23. In the Jesuit Relation of 1675-77 (Relations, LX, 262) 
it occurs as pessemouquote or pertemagouate, which latter form is both 
the earliest known and also very near to the aboriginal form. The 
earliest use of the modern form appears in the account of Prince’s 
voyage in 1734 (N.E. Hist. Gen. Reg., V, 376) as Pessamequoddy. 

The Boundary MS. contain abundant testimony as to the exact 
location of the name, from which it is plain that orginally it did not 
apply to the spacious bay now having that name, but to the region 
between Deer Island, Campobello, and the American shore, from Head 
Harbor to the Cobscook (see Monograph on Boundaries, 277). This 


ca 


[GanonG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 41 


Place-nomenclature. 


is the region still called Quoddy by the fishermen and other local nav- 
igators, who call the Bay of Passamaquoddy of our maps St. Andrews 
Bay. In the Boundary MS. it is said that pollock are not taken in 
the inner bay though abundant in- the outer, which (if correct) is 
strong confirmation of this use of the word, since Passamaquoddy un- 
questionably means the place of pollock. 


Paticake Brook.—As Patticake Creek, in Sproule’s Map of 1786. 


Paunchy Lake.—A small lake near Midgic, Westmorland, probably of Mic- 
mac Indian origin. Pronounced locally like Pawn-che. (It is shown 
on a map of the region in the Botanical Gazette, XXXVI, 164). 


Pays Bas.—A name used by the Acadians of Madawaska for the lower part 
of the St. John, French Village and downwards, as I am informed by 
M. P. L. Mercure. 


Pekonk Hill.—Just on the New Brunswick-Maine boundary west of Rapide 
de Femme. It is often mentioned in documents connected with the 
boundary surveys, and is on some of the boundary maps. 


Pelerin.—A settlement in Kent, named for a family of Acadians of that 
name, as I find by local inquiry. The name has been wonderfully 
corrupted on different maps into Pulrang (Loggie, 1884), Pellering 
(on Postal Map), etc. 


Peltoma.—A chief named Piere Toma is mentioned in Kidder’s Revolution- 
ary Operations, 105. 


Pemwit Branch (of Green River).—Said locally to be so named for an Indian 
who hunted there. 


Perth.—P. 1833. Named, in all probability, in honour of Sir Archibald 
Campbell, then Governor of New Brunswick, whose birthplace and 
home seat were in Perthshire, Scotland, though locally said to have 
been named by patriotic Scotch residents for the place in Scotland. 


Petitcodiac.—Occurs first on de Meulles map of 1686 as Petcoucoyek. 
Petit Rocher, not Petite Roche.—It occurs thus in Plessis in 1811 (116). 


Philmonro.—So named for a resident of that name (it is said locally), 
printed on some maps as Filomaro. 


Pikwaket.—The best spelling for this variously-spelled name. 


Pirate Brook Lake, York.—On an old plan the lake is called Scooneygomskiktic, 
no doubt its Passamaquoddy name. 


Pisiguit—Nothing to do with Cowassaget, which see. 


Piskahegan.—On Sproule’s map of 1786, where it is called also Grand Fork, 
perhaps a translation of its Indian name. 


42 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


Point de Bute.—Occurs as Point Debute in Fisher’s Sketches of 1825, 61; 
and apparently in a document of 1788 mentioned by Trueman; also 
in its present form in the Willard Diary of 1755 in possession of the 
Lancaster (Mass.) Public Library. 


Pokesuedie Island.—As Pocsuedier I on a plan of 1816. It is Little Pokesue- 
die Island, locally L’Ilet, which is I à Zacharie on old Indian plans. 
Pronounced locally Poke-su-die (the u as in duke, and accent on the 
second syllable). 


Pokemouche.—In the Crown lLan1 Office is a large-scale plan entitled, 
“Sketch of the Upper Parts of the River Pocmouch,’ by William 
Ferguson, 1811, which gives a number of Indian names as follows:— 

Pidpudmoe Brook, the present Caribou Creek; Waganchitch Brook, 
the present Peter’s Brook; Chicichichoc Rivulet, the present Pelletier 
Brook (on the south side above Peter’s Brook); Ranamagauch Brook, 
the present Maltempec. This map will be reproduced in my article 
upon “The History of Pokemouche,” in Acadiensis, Vol. VI. 

This map also applies the Pte. de la Croir to two points, the 
northern one at Upper Pokemouche (opposite Rivers Point), and that 
between Maltempec and the main Pokemouche. Presumably these 
mark the sites of Indian burial grounds. 

The Micmac name of Trout Brook on the Upper Pokemouche (8 or 
9 miles above head of tide on N. side) has been given me by the intel- 
ligent old Micmac, Joe Prisk, of Bathurst, as Mat-wes-ka-be-jeechk, 
meaning ‘“‘ porcupine was hanging.” 


Pokomoonshine Brook.—This name occurs also in Piscatquis County, Maine, 
and also in the Adirondacks (see Forest and Stream, May 18, 1901, 
384, and the same, June 22, 1901). It is, no doubt, of Indian origin, 
but the aboriginal form and meaning seem unknown. 


Pollet River.—Occurs as Paulets River in Land Memorials of 1791. 


Ponwauk.—The deadwater on the St. Croix, from below King Brook to 
Kendrick’s Rips, above Chepedneck Falls. Said by the Indians to 
mean ‘“ place of quiet water,’ as I am told by Mr. Irving Todd, who 
kncows the place well. Perhaps the word has some relation with 
Penniac. | 


Poodiac.—A Post-office in Kings County; name of imported Indian origin. 
Its origin has been explained to me, and I have no doubt, correctly, 
by a resident, Mr. S. H. F. Sherwood, who wrote me that it was 
suggested by Poodic, a suburb of Portland, Maine. Asked for more 
detailed information, he wrote me as follows: “The office was 
established over 30 years ago. At that time we sent several names 
that we considered decent, but each was rejected at Ottawa as being 
already the name of an office in the Dominion, and we became dis- 
couraged. About that time there was a young lady visiting here who 
had been in Portland. She said the people there had a habit when 
anything annoyed them of wishing it ‘’tother side of Poodic.’ She 
had also acquired the phrase. She suggested that we call the office 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 43 
Place-nomenclature. 


‘Poodic, and, half in jest, this name was forwarded. In due time 
the office material arrived and on the stamp was Poodiac Why the 
Post Office authorities inserted the a I never knew.” This explan- 
ation is sustained by the fact that Poodic, from the Indian Purpooduck, 
is a suburb south of Portland, Maine, on the north shore of Cape 
Elizabeth. This name is of especial interest as illustrating well the 
extremely trivial origin of many place-names. 


Popelogan, C.—As Pokee Login Bay and Poughelagen Bay in Land Memorials 
of 1785 and 1786; Pocologin Stream on Sproule’s map of 1786; Popologan, 
1815, in Land Memorials. The name is, no doubt, connected with 
logan and bogan used for quiet coves beside a river in Maine and New 
Brunswick. The word is discussed by Tooker in the American An- 
thropologist, 160: 


Popes Folly.—Two islands at Passamaquoddy have borne this name. One 
(now commonly called Mark Island, which see, close to Campobello) 
was named, no doubt, because of some connection with Zeba Pope, 
who lived there in 1808 (see Monograph on Boundaries, 359). The 
other, between Indian Island and Casco’ Bay Island, was, perhaps, 
named for the same man. Lorimer says that on this island (Passa- 
maquoddy Islands, 95) “ poor Pope, in 1812, established a trading post 
and lost all.’ This name Jolly is not uncommonly applied to unsuc- 
cessful business ventures by neighbours, who are always wiser after 
than before an event, and it appears elsewhere in Clinch’s Folly (on 
the charts for an island near Letang) and Folly Point, in Westmorland. 


Portobello.—One of our still unexplained names. Portobello, in South Am- 
erica, was captured by Admiral Vernon in 1739, and I have been told 
that there were formerly residents of Maugerville of this name; pro- 
bably this is only a coincidence, but there may be a cause and effect 
connection. It is locally explained, as given earlier, in these addenda. 

Dr. Raymond has suggested that the name may have been given 
for some connection with Capt. William Spry, who had large grants 
in this vicinity in pre-Loyalist times, and who may have been at the 
taking of Porto-Bello in South America. 


Quaco.—An old plan in the Crown Land Office has this inscription, north 
of the present Quaco Head,—‘ Oreequaco, so called, a point of rock 
resembling a human head and neck,’ while another reads, “ High 
Point of Rock resembling the profile of a human head and neck, called 


by the Indians ‘“ Oreequacco.” The origin of the name is discussed 
in Bull N.H.S., IV, 72. Locally explained as noted earlier, in these 
addenda. 


Quisibis.—On the Sproule map of 1787 (Map No. 39, later) as Squisibis. 


Renforth—Named by summer residents in Oct., 1903, in honour of the 
English oarsman of that name, who died in a race on the Kennebecasis 
many years ago; earlier called The Chalet. 


Renous River.—Its nomenclature is discussed in Bull. N.H.S., V, 311. It 
appears first as River Renou in the Land Memorials of 1808. 


44 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


Restigouche River.—The original plan of the river, of 1836, explains the 
origin of some of the names of its branches. Thus, the present Boston 
Brook is called Beaver Brook, and just at its mouth is a lumber camp 
with the name New Boston, no doubt a facetious name for the place; 
evidently Boston became extended to the stream and is now its 
name. On Jardine’s Brook, William Jardine had a timber license in 
1837. The reason for the name Ffive-finger Brook is given on MacDon- 
ald’s map of his line of exploration from the Upsalquitch to the St. 
John, for that line crossed four branches of the stream radiating from 
near one another near its head, a feature shown on none of our ex- 
istent maps. 

The Indian name of this river is, I believe, the same fundamentally 
as that of the Aroostook, which see. 

Rev. Father Pacifique, of Mission Point, writes me that he thinks 
it altogether probable the word Restigouche is derived from Ælistegei, 
meaning to resist, to revolt, to struggle, which suggests one of the 
meanings commonly given, namely, “river of the long war.” 


Rexton, Kent Co.—Formerly called Kingston. The genesis of the new name 
is given in a letter from Dr. J..W. Doherty of that place, dated May 
9, 1901. After relating the inconvenience of the former name, owing 
to the many duplications in Canada, he says:—‘‘In consequence, I 
started a petition among the residents of this place for signature with 
a brief list of names appended to be voted upon, being careful that 
no name so voted on should be a duplicate of any other name in 
the Dominion. My choice of Rexton appeared to take the fancy of 
those signing and, in consequence, no general meeting of the inhabit- 
ants was thought necessary for the purpose of ratifying the change 
of name, or the name so voted on. The petition was then sent to our 
representative (O. J. LeBlanc), who presented it, with a strong recom- 
mendation, to the Government (Postmaster General) and, in conse- 
quence, the name of Kingston, Kent, was changed to Rexton, Kent.” 
The change went into effect May 1, 1901. Of course the flex is the 
Latin equivalent of Kings, making the name a Latin-English hybrid, 
but, perhaps, none the worse for that. 

It is of interest to note that Kent County has been the scene of 
more changing of names, and by official procedure, than any other 
County of the Province, for, in addition to the above mentioned 
change, Palmerston has been changed to St. Louis, Liverpool to Richi- 
bucto, and the railroad station at first called Weldford was later 
changed to Harcourt. 


Richibucto.—From the teacher of the Indian School at Big Cove, Miss Mary 
Isaacs, herself a Micmac, from Restigouche, I have received the 
following as the Indian names of places on Richibucto and vicinity:— 
Richibucto, Llseebooktook; Molus River, Seegudeeascook; St. Nicholas 
River, Helknowkon; Bass River, Boksnok; Big Cove, Melisicknadee; In- 
dian Island, Linoo Mayneegoo, which, however, seems to be merely the 
translation of the English name into Indian. 

Of other local names on Richibucto, most are self explanatory, 
being descriptive or for residents or owners. Platts Point, just below 


[GANONG | ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 45 
Place-nomenclature. 


the marine hospital, probably is named from an early Acadian, Jos. 
Richard, dit des Plattes, though his connection with the place is not 
known. In the Land Memorials of 1822 I find mention of Marin Island 
and River Ro (near the Forks), both of which seem now unknown. 


Richmond.—Another possible explanation of this name is given by Raymond, 
in his History of Carleton County, 75th article, when he states that 
some of the early settlers were from Richmond, N.Y. 


Rivière du Cache.—The preferable form of this name. An additional note 
of importance on the origin of this name is in the Historic Sites 
Monograph, 293. 


Rocher, or Rosher.—A form of Roshea, which see. 
Rockwell Stream.—For a grantee, not the stream of that name in Ireland. 


Rollingdam.—It is mentioned in an Act of 1832 (Acts, page 563). The 
description given in the Place-nomenclature is not exact; it is a dam 
built on a sandy bottom, and having a slope down as well as up 
stream in order to prevent it being undermined by the fall. 


Rooskey Lake.—No doubt named by Mahood for one of the five lakes of 
that name in Ireland. The name is not locally in use; it is called 
Hurd Lake, for a grantee. 


Roshea.—(Pronounced Ro-zhee). A bay (called on the maps, Salisbury Bay) 
and a settlement in Albert County. The name is, without doubt, an 
English corruption of Enragé, the French name of the Cape prominent 
here, though the name of the cape itself has been from early times 
Cape Enrage (see Enragé Cape). It occurs as Roshea in the Calhoun 
Diary of 1771, and in the Land Memorials of 1785 as Capé Rosier and 
Rosear apparently. In a N.B. Statute of 1875 it is called Roshea Bay. 
The Post-office name Little Rocher, is, of course a form of this name. 


Rothesay.—In an article in the St. John Globe, of Dec. 14, 1901, it is said:— 
“On the 4th August, 1860, a deputation of summer residents [at 
Rothesay] waited on the Prince of Wales on his arrival there to take 
the steamer for Fredericton, and requested permission to name the 
young settlement Rothesay, after one of his titles, “ Duke of Rothesay.” 


Rumbling Mountain.—On the Odell, near Tobique, so called from noises said 
to be heard there (Bull. N.H.S., V, 237). 


Rusagonis.—The preferable form of this name. 


Sabbies River.—Savoy’s River, in Land Memorials of 1818; said locally, and 
no doubt correctly, to be for a mill owner of that name. 


Sagwa.—Recently named R.R. Station; name from Rand’s Micmac Dictionary, 
meaning waist deep water (see earlier in these addenda). 


Saint Andrews.—Our knowledge of the origin of this name is fully sum- 
marized in Acadiensis, II, 184. 


46 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


Saint Croix River (Charlotte).—The name St. Croix was at first given to 
the island, but was soon extended to the river by Champlain, who 
was rather careless in his use of it, applying it sometimes to the 
entire river and sometimes to its lower tidal part. Thus, some con- 
fusion later arose among those using his narratives, such as Denys, 
who understood him as making the River St. Croix and the River of 
the Etchemins two distinct rivers, when they are the same. 

The local pronunciation is invariably St. Croy. There is some 
evidence that the early settlers pronounced the word Croix in English 
= fashion. Thus, in the Courier Series, CII, there is a deed of 1785 
which spells the name Saint Croyick’s. B. Glasier in 1764 spells it 

St. ‘Croys’ (Coll IN] B. Hist. SOC, IT 313): 


Ste. Croix River.—An early name for the Miramichi. In an important docu- 
ment of 1686, mentioned later (under “Settlement of Richard Denys 
de Fronsac’’) the name is restricted to the river below Beaubear’s 
Island, but the maps extend it much higher. 


Saint David.—The Patron Saint of Wales, and hence naturally associated 
with St. George, St. Andrews and St. Patrick. 


Saint John City.—On this and the alternative names it bore or which were 
proposed for it, see Raymond in Canadian History Readings, 50; 
Coll, IN. B. Hist. Soe, iL 65! There is a discussion of the origin of 
its Indian name Menaguasche, meaning ‘place where dead seals are 
gathered,” in St. John Telegraph, June 3, 1901. 


St. Martins.—Despite much search, I have not been able to find a reason 
for the application of this name. Possibly it was suggested by the 
presence within its bounds of Martin’s Head. I have sought to find 
some connection with a former Loyalist centre in the Colonies. I find 
that the region now called St. Martin’s, in Maryland, was a Loyalist 
centre in the Revolution (Van Tyne, Loyalists, 166; Scharf, Hist. Mary- 
land, II, 296); and, curiously enough, just north of it in Delaware 
is a Susser (as there was in New Brunswick when these names were 
first given), which is probably only a coincidence, but which may have 
suggested the name. 


Saint Simon.—The origin of this name is probably not as given by Cooney 
from that of a French vessel sunk here in 1760, but for the name 
of her captain (compare later, under Historic Sites Addenda, Acadian 
Period, St. Simon). Locally the name is invariably pronounced St. 
Simo (or, at least, the final syllable a nasal hardly sounding the n), 
and the word Inlet of our maps and charts is never used. 

Its Micmac name, as I am told by Joe Prisk, of Bathurst, a very 
reliable Micmac, is NSee-bes’-kaa-daan, meaning, as he says, something 
like a “carrying-over place.’ The earliest use that I have found of 
the name is in the Land Memorials of 1805, where it is called River 
Saint Simon, and Saint Simon’s River, and it is called St. Simond’s Inlet 
in the same Memorials of 1816, and Saint Simon’s Inlets on Ferguson’s 
plan of 1820, copied later in Map No. 33. 


. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 47 


. Place-nomenclature. 


Saint Stephen, Town.—A part of the town once bore the name Dover, which 
seems to have originated the name Calais. Thus, the late G. A. 
Boardman, in an article in the St. Croix Courier in 1895 or 1896, wrote 
as follows:—‘“In 1806, now ninety years since, the people of Township 
No. 5, by act of the legislature and in accordance with the wishes of 
the people, received the name of Calais. A part of St. Stephen was 
then called Dover Hill, and it was thought appropriate to call No. 5 
Calais. It was hoped the people of St. Stephen would take the name 
of Dover, as that was the name of a coast city in England.” This 
is curiously confirmed by a statement in Wedderburn’s Statistical 
and Practical Observations of 1836, where (page 16) he says:—‘ Saint 
Stephen, from its locality, is the Dover of the Province, and opposite 
the thriving American Calais.” Again, Johnston, who was here in 
1849, tells in his work on North America (II, 157). “Tt was nearly 
dark when we arrived at St. Stephens; and found comfortable quarters 
in Dover Street—the names of the town on the one side of ‘the 
stream, and of a principal street on the other, carrying the mind far 
away, to Scenes very different on the whole, but where frontier towns 
and rival populations were also vis-d-vis with each other.” There is 
now no Dover Street in St. Stephen, but the name Dover Hill is still 
in use. 

The Indian name of St. Stephen was, according to Gatschet (East- 
port Sentinel, Sept. 15, 1897), Kichi Medabiauht, meaning great landing, 
because an important camping place. 


St. Tooley.—One of the headlands of Quaco Bay (name used locally, but not 
on any map). In all probability a persistence and corruption of St. 
Louis, a name applied by Champlain in 1604 to one of the rivers here. 
(Discussed in Bull. N.H.S. N.,B., IV, 72). 


Salkelds Islands.—It is, perhaps to these that Champlain applies the name 
Jumelles, “the twins” (or sisters) in this vicinity. The origin of 
“Fothergills’’ is not known to me. 


Savage Island.—Called upon the early maps Indian Island. The persistence 
of the form Savage unquestionably is an inheritance from the French 
to whom, of course, it was Isle Sauvage. There is a Savage Island, 
having, no doubt, a similar origin on the St. John about 10 miles 
below the Si. Francis. 


Serpentine.—This name occurs also as name of a branch of Shogomoc, as 
the outlet of French Lake Oromocto, and as an inlet of Ludgate Lake, 
St. John, all of them, no doubt, named for their crookedness. 


Sevogle.—This name is, no doubt, of Indian origin, but the meaning is very 
doubtful. The late Michael Flinne, Indian teacher, told me it meant 
“sour,” referring to some early incident in which the fish were sup- 
posed to have been driven away by a poisonous substance which 
spoiled or soured the water. On the other hand, Rev. Father Pacifique 
tells me the Indians derive it from a word meaning “ cliffs,’ a mean- 
ing which would be fairly appropriate, though not more to this 
river than to others of this region. Considering that the Square 


48 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. ° 
Forks, in which two branches of the river meet in a great T-shaped 
gorge, is the most remarkable feature of the river, one might expect 
the name to apply in some way to them. I think it very possible, 
however, that the name originally applied to the Little Sevogle only, 
and was extended to both rivers by the whites, and for this reason, 
Rand gives (Reader, 91) for Little Sevogle, Elmunakuncheech, meaning 
“a beaver’s hole.’ Now, Elmunakun is the universally used (by the 
Indians) name for the Northwest Miramichi, and the application of 
the name Elmunakuncheech, or “ Little Northwest,” to the Big Sevogle 
itself would be entirely natural (since in physical features, arrange- 
ment of branches, ete., the Northwest and Sevogle are strikingly alike) 
and in accordance with the Indian custom, while it seems wholly 
improbable that so insignificant a stream as the Little Sevogle would 
be called the ‘Little Northwest.” Hence, I think, it likely that 
Sevogle was applied originally to the Little Sevogle, and extended to 
Big Sevogle by the whites as an easier word to pronounce than the 
Indian name. 

The word first appears in the Land Memorials of 1805 as Little 
Sougle, though in 1809 as Little Sewogle; early maps and records also 
have Sevogle. The local nomenclature of the river will be given 
in an article on the Sevogle, to be published in Bulletin No. 25 of 
the Natural History Society of New Brunswick. 


Shediac River.—An old plan in the Crown Land Office names the south 
branch of this river Kibougouck, no doubt its Micmac name. 


Sheephouse Brook.—A large branch of the South Branch Sevogle; called 
also Big Brook. Locally the name is explained as originating in the 
building of a little house for a sheep which a hermit kept there one 
winter as a companion. This explanation seems to me very artificial, 
even though names and dates are supplied with it, and I think it 
very likely it is a corruption of the Micmac See-boo-sis, meaning “a 
brook.” The fact that its English equivalent is Big Brook is rather 
confirmatory of this. (Its location is given approximately on a map 
in Bull. N.H.S., V, 228). 


Shemogue.—As at present in Land Memorials of 1803. Rand (Reader, 84) 
gives for Chimegwe, no doubt this stream, Oosumoogwik, meaning horned 
river. I have been given by a Micmac Sim-oo-a-quick. 


Shiktahawk.—The preferable spelling of this name. 


Shin Creek.—In this form in 1811 in the Land Memorials. Perhaps, for 
Shin River, in Scotland. 


Shippegan.—Locally this name is pronounced in two ways; first, by the 
English it is very strongly accented upon the first syllable, the final 
syllable being very short; and second, by some French settlers speak- 
English it is sounded Shippegang, the final syllable strongly sounded, 
a form which is old, as shown by Winslow Papers, 501. Its earliest 
known appearance is in 1656 in the form Cibaguen. (Letter of Father 
Ignatius, Archives, 1904, 335): 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 49 


Place-nomenclature. 


Shogomoc.—The D. Campbell map of 1785 has Sehogomuck, or Snow Shoe River. 
It is called Little Hel River by Sproule, map of 1787. 


Siegas.—As Shiegask or Troublesome River on Sproule’s map of 1787 (see Map 
No. 39, later). < 


Skiff Lake—Named, as I was told by Mr. John Stewart, by Hon. John 
McAdam because when he first cruised it for lumber, long prior to 
any settlement in the vicinity, he found there a skiff. This may 
have been a relic of the Titcomb survey of the lake in 1794. 


Slugundy.—A name, apparently Indian, which is in local use (though not 
on any maps) on the St. Croix between Grand and Chepedneck Lakes, 
on the Lepreau and on Tobique. It appears to apply to rapids or 
small falls. The same word appears on the Mattawamkeg, according 
to Springer, Forest Life and Forest Trees, 167, and, perhaps, occurs 
elsewhere on Penobscot waters. Possibly has some relation with 
Magundy, which see. 


Smith’s Creek, Kennebecasis.—Said locally, as I am told by Mr. W. H. 
Venning, to have been named for an old trapper who hunted on the 
stream before the advent of the Loyalists, and whose camp stood at 
its junction with the river. 


Spednic.—Name of falls and also a lake on the east branch of the St. Croix; 
of course, a lumberman’s corruption and abbreviation of the Indian 
Chiputneticook. 


States Brook.—No doubt given by the surveyors in 1818, because it fell just 
west of the due north line from the source of the St. Croix, hence 
falling into “the States” according to the American boundary claim. 


Sunbury.—After long study I have been able to determine the origin of this 
name, which so long puzzled all our local historians. It was given, 
no doubt, in honour of the Earl of Halifax (for whom Halifax was 
named), who was also Viscount Sunbury, as fully discussed in the 
Educational Review, XV, 159. i 


Surreau Blanc.—Name of a stream and inlet at Tracadie, between Big and 
Little Tracadie, said locally to have no meaning in modern Acadian, 
but very probably an early corruption of Ruisseau blanc, that is, 
“white brook.” I have found the name on an old plan in the Crown 
Land Office in the form Seirreau Blanche. 


Sussex.—P. 1786. This parish was very likely so named in memory of 
Sussex, in New Jersey, a supposition to some extent confirmed by a 
recent newspaper statement, seemingly reflecting tradition, to that 
effect. Though I have not been able to trace a positive connection, 
the fact that Sussex, N.J., was a Loyalist stronghold in the revolution 
(Lee’s New Jersey, II, 311 and elsewhere), and that many men from 
a New Jersey regiment settled in the parish seems to confirm this 
supposition, especially as so many of the parishes were thus named 


Sec. II., 1906. 4 


80 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


for the former homes of the settlers. It is, perhaps, only a coincidence 
that the names of the four parishes established in Kings County in 
1786, namely, Sussex, Springfield, Westfield, and Kingston, all occur 
in New Jersey, and further, that Hampton and Norton, established in 
1795, also occur in that State. 


Tabusintac.—This name is pronounced locally, especially by elderly unlet- 


tered people, Tabasimtac, a form almost exactly like the Indian pro- 
nunciation, thus affording another example (with Madawaska, Jemseg, 
etc.) of how much closer the local pronunciation keeps to the original 
form than does the map or literary form. The accent is strongly 
on the last syllable. 

The three principal branches of this river bear Indian names 
which appear (apparently for the first time) upon Davidson’s plan of 
the river of 1830, with the spellings Maliaget, Eskedelock, Pisiguit, which 
are exactly the local pronunciations used by lumbermen and others. I 
am told by Joe Prisk, the intelligent old Indian of Bathurst, that 
Mal-e-a’-git (g hard) means married, referring to two of something 
near together, while Os-ka-dil’-lik (as he pronounces it) means (though 
doubtfully) “a good shot.” Also the branch Cowassaget Brook (which 
see) is still so called locally. (On Batkwedagunuchk, on Tabusintac 
Beach, see Rand, Legends of the Micmacs, 212). 


Tantramar.—Occurs on a map of D. Campbell of 1799 as Tantaramar, per- 


haps the earliest appearance of the first r. 


Tanty-wanty.—This old name is locally said to be of Indian origin. I think 


it highly probable it is an imported Indian name, like Poodiac. The 
settlement Geary, as shown under that name, is a shortened corrup- 
tion of Niagara, and was so named by settlers from that place. Now, 
a few miles from Niagara is a place called Tonawanda, but formerly 
called by variants of that name such as Tonawanta. Now, Tanty- 
wanty in New Brunswick is about as far from Geary as Tonawanda 
from Niagara, and hence I think it very probable the name was given 
to this stream by the early settlers of Geary. It occurs first on the 
map of the Queens-Sunbury County line in 18389, in its present form, 
Ward in 1841 (St. John River, 30) speaks of it (Tante Wante) as a 
place not a stream. 


Taxes.—Both the older and better form is Taxes, not Taxis, since it was 


named, no doubt, for the Indian Tax. 


Tedish.—In this form in 1803 in Land Memorials. 


Telegraph Hill—A more correct account of these places is in Historic Sites, 


348, and also later in the present work. 


Terreo Lake, mings.—Undoubtedly for Therriault one of the Acadians for- 


merly living at French Village. See later, in Historic Sites Addenda, 
and Map No. 22. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 51 


Place-nomenclature. 


Tetagouche.—Is the better form. A partially French form appears on 


Arrowsmith’s map of 1838, in the form Tete-a-gouche. Gesner (New 
Brunswick, 197) says, ‘‘ Tootoogoose corrupted by the French to Tete- 
a-gouche.” A story has grown up to explain the French form of 
the name,—that the first explorers found it heading to the left, etc. 
Rey. Father Pacifique writes me he believes this name is simply the 
Micmac Odoodooguech, meaning a squirrel. Curiously enough, the older 
plans of the river show a narrow place near Grand Falls on this river 
called “the squirrel’s jump.” 


Tiarks Lake.—On Tiarks own map of 1820 this lake is called Rimousky 


Lake;it first appears in its present form on Graham’s map of 1843. 
It is not true that Tiarks was afterwards an arbiter in the New 
Brunswick-Quebec boundary controversy—that was Travers Twiss. 


Tobique.—There is, I think, no question that this river was named for an 


Toby 


Indian chief of that name who lived formerly on the river. The 
tradition of the Indians themselves to this effect is confirmed by the 
D. Campbell map of 1784 which has (corrected copy) Tobique’s River, 
the possessive confirming this origin very strongly. That there was 
such a chief as Tobique is shown by various documents which Mr. 
Raymond has mentioned, and also by an entry in the register of the 
Indian church at Kingsclear, which reads:—‘ Le vingt deuse aout 1767 
a été inhumé a Medoactec Noel toubic chef decedé pendant l’hyver 
agé de plus de soixante ans. Le corps d’Agnes toubie sour du défund 
mort le printems fut aussi inhumé en meme temps. Charles Bailly, 
pretre.” 

The Indian name of the river is Negoot. I am inclined to think 
this name is connected with Nictau = Forks, alluding to the frequent 
forking of the river in its upper part, especially the right hand branch. 

The nomenclature of the many lakes on the right-hand branch 
is mentioned under Negoot, which see, and that of the vicinity of 
Nictor Lake is given in Bull. N.H.S., IV, 250. 


Guzzle—Name of a small deadwater, and very crooked branch of the 
Digdeguash near McAdam, and also formerly a station or siding of 
the railroad here. A Guzzle is an English term for drain or ditch. 
The word is also used in the Field-book of the Surveyors of the 
Magaguadavic in 1797 for tiny streams emptying into a lake. 


Tracadie.—The local nomenclature is mostly simple and self-explanatory, 


being obviously descriptive. I have not been able to identify the 
Anscout branch of the river mentioned by Cooney. The odd Acadian 
name Surreau Blanc, and Barreau Point are discussed separately. John 
Boys River, a former name for Portage River, is said, as Dr. Smith 
tells me, to have been named for one John Nile, dit, John Boy, who 
lived beside the bridge crossing Portage River. Bonami Nose Brook 
was named, as I learn from different sources, for one Bonamy or. 
Barnaby Noel, an Indian, who formerly lived there, and, I presume, 
the name is a corruption of Bonami Noel's Brook, though locally a 
rock of a nose-shape, etc., is adduced to explain the name. Lord and 
Foy Brook is so named for early lumbermen. 


52 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomenclature. 


Traceys Brook.—See Mistouche. 


Truittes, Rivière des.—A river flowing into Miramichi, a boundary of the 
Seigniory of Richard Denys de Fronsac; identity unknown. 


Trues.—See under Settlement Origins. 


Tryon Settlement.—So named, in all probability, in honour of Major Tryon, 
private secretary to Sir John Harvey at the time it was laid out in 
1838. He married a daughter of Sir John Harvey. I have found no 
direct evidence of this, but have found no other person of sufficient 
prominence at that time to entitle them to the honour. It is locally 
explained by a legend mentioned a few pages earlier. It is commonly 
said it was named for the surveyor who laid it out, but this is not 
so, for it was surveyed by A. Blair in 1838. 


Tuadook.—Name proposed in 1901, a restoration of the Micmac Indian name, 
for the southwest branch of the Little Southwest Miramichi River. 
The name, with the local names in the vicinity and along the entire 
branch, are discussed in Bull. N.H.S. N.B., IV, 463, and V, 321, 324. 


Two Rivers, Albert.—Used first in the Calhoun Diary of 1771 in its present 
form. 


Udenack.—On Sproule’s map of 1786 as Udeneck. 


Upsalquitch.— The history of this word, seeming to show that our present 
form is derived simply from a misprint of the locally-used form, 
Absetquetch, is given in Bull. N.H.S., V, 180. ‘The mountains around 
Upsalquitch Lake were named in 1902, as fully described in Bull. 
NS ES INE sts 1%, 0) 

The usual meaning attributed to the Indian form absetquetch, namely 
a branch or smaller river, is not accepted by Mr. D. Ferguson, of 
Chatham, who knows the place and Indians well. He says he has 
understood it meant Aptsh, meaning more or again, al-cootch or at-cooch, 
“blanket or covering,’ thus signifying more-blanket river, alluding 
to the coldness of travel upon it in winter. I think this fanciful; 
‘and I believe the explanation that it means the little river, in contra- 
distinction to the main Restigouche, is correct. 


Utopia Lake.—In an article on this lake in the St. John Telegraph, July 5, 
1892 (copied from Forest and Stream), the late Edward Jack says 
that the lines on the Magaguadavie were only started by Buffington, 
the surveyor, and when Capt. Clinch ran them out and found them 
running into the lake, putting most of the land under its waters, he 
named it Eutopia. It occurs on Sproule’s map of 1786 as Utopia. 
Its Indian name is further discussed in the Bull. N. H.S. III, 47. 


Vin, Bay.—See Bay du Vin. 


Wakefield.—P. 1803. I have not yet been able to settle the origin of this 
name, which, I surmise, must have been given for the early home of 
some of the settlers. It was, however, a district or settlement name 
before it was applied to the parish, for it occurs in 1801 in the Land 
Memorials. 


[GANONG ] ; ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 53 


Place-nomenclature. 


Walkemik.—Name proposed in 1904, a restoration of a Micmac Indian name, 
for the upper north branch of the Little Southwest Miramichi. It, 
with the many local names in the vicinity is discussed in Bull. N. H.S., 
N.B., V, 332. 


Wapskehegan.—Occurs in 1819 as Wapskehagan. In a MS. left by Edward 
Jack it is said to mean “arrowhead river,’ because on it was found 
jaspar good for the purpose. 


Wards Creek.—The connection with Lieut. Ward, given by Lawrence, is 
questioned by L. Allison (letter), who finds no evidence for it. 


Washademoac.—Called Lac Dagidemouack in a document of 1755 in the Park- 
man MS (New France, I, 243, in Library of Mass. Hist. Soc.). 


Waterford.—P. 1874. Said locally to have been named by Mr. A. McAfee, 
from Ireland, presumably for that place in his native home. 


Waubigut.—Appears first in the Geological Survey Map of 1881, and placed 
there by Dr. Ells (or his assistant, Dr. Adams), who obtained it from 
a guide who had hunted much with the Indians. 


Waugh River.—(Locally pronounced Wa-oo, and supposed to be Indian). 
For a former resident. 


Wauklehegan.—Name of a lake, no doubt Indian, near McAdam Junction; 
see Bull. N.H.S., V, 47. 


Weldford.—Name compounded from the names of the two members of the 
local legislature from Kent in that year (1835), John W. Weldon and 
John P. Ford, as shown in the Educational Review, XV, 160. 


Welsford._Named by Dr. Robert Bayard, a resident there when the railroad 
was built, in honour of Major Welsford, a friend of his son, who was 
killed while leading an attack on the Redan (Information from the 
late I. Allen Jack, and also so stated in a notice of Major Harvest, in 
the St. John Sun, Jan. 18, 1902). 


West Passage, Campobello.—Called by Champlain Petit passage de la riviére 
Saincte Croix (Voyages, Ch. XV). This name (Petit Passage) was 
applied to it also in 1756, or later, as shown by testimony in the 
Boundary MS. 


Whatley, Mount.—The statement here given is confirmed by Mr. A. D. 
Richard, Registrar of Deeds for Westmorland, who tells me his records 
show that Robert Whatley lived there in 1794. 

Mr. Trueman tells me it was earlier called Camp Hill, because 
of the camp established there by Jonathan Eddy in the Eddy Rebel- 
lion (amply confirmed in Archives, 1894, 362). 


White Horse.—A MS. letter of 1796, by David Owen, gives this as “ pinguin- 
hors or outer penguin, now corrupted into White Horse.’ I do not 
understand this reference, but presume it is one of Owen’s fanciful 
etymologies, mentioned at the close of this Dictionary. 


54 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Place-nomenclature. + 


Wickham.—P. 1786. No doubt for Wickham, in Hants, England, with which 
Captain William Spry, who had extensive pre-Loyalist grants in this 
vicinity, was in some way associated, as fully discussed in the Educa- 
tional Review, XV, 160. 


Wilkinson Mountain.—In honour of John Wilkinson, New Brunswick geo- 
grapher (Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. N.B., V, 333 and 445). 


Winiguit.—Has the same history as Waubigut. 


Wolves.—The name is very likely a translation and abbreviation of the 
French name for seals—namely, loups marins or sea-wolves. 


Woodmans Point.—Mentioned in Allan’s Journal of 1777 (Kidder’s Revolu- 
tionary Operations, 92). It is not of course, that now so called at the 
mouth of the Nerepis, but was probably at the place where Randolph 
and Baker’s mills now are, opposite Indiantown (Coll. N. B. Hist. Soc. 
I, 115), as Dr. Raymond writes me. 


Woodstock.—P, 1786. Named, without doubt, for the 3rd Duke of Portland 
(the same for whom Portland, St. John, was named), who was Viscount 
Woodstock. Discussed fully in the Educational Review, XVI, 13. 


Woolastook.—Discussed also by Chamberlain in N.B. Magazine, II, 107. 
Mr. A. S. Gatschet writes me that as a result of his study of the 
name:—‘About Woolastuk there is a mystery; navigable (good) river 
would be Woolatuk—now, what does the s mean?” He is inclined to 
agree with a suggestion of the Indian, Louis Mitchell, that it is wool, 
meaning good—ahs, meaning salmon-spearing, and tuk, meaning river. 
Compare Aroostook, earlier. 

Recently applied to a railway station near Nerepis (see earlier, 
in these addenda), formerly called Ballentines. 

The name was proposed in 1901 tor the Glacial Lake which form- 
erly occupied the basin of the lower St. John (Glacial Lake Woolastook), 
in Bull. N.H.S.N.B., IV, 322. Two years later the name Glacial 
Lake Acadia was proposed for it by Dr. R. Chalmers, who was appar- 
ently unaware of the earlier name (Geological Report). 


Yoho.—Occurs first as Yahoo in a grant and on a map of 1810, very likely 
given by the surveyors for some incident of their survey. As Yoho 
Stream in Land Memorials of 1818. (Yahoo occurs, of course, in Gulli- 
vers Travels, by Swift). Its origin appears to be locally entirely 
unknown, though supposed to be Indian. The only other place in 
the world where it occurs is in the Yoho Valley lately opened up in 
British Columbia. I have found that in the latter place it is reported 
to be Cree Indian, an exclamation of wonder and astonishment. 


York, County.—Certainly in honour of the Duke of York, for whom Fred- 
ericton was named (Coll. N. B. Hist. Soc. II, 60). 


Youghal.—Named, no doubt, for one of the places of this name in Ireland, 
from which country some of the early settlers came. 


2 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 55 


Place-nomenclature. 


283. The sketch of the development of our knowledge of the 
origin of place-nomenclature of New Brunswick, given on this page of 
the monograph, I find to be incomplete, and it is more accurately as 
follows. The earliest list of origins of place-names in New Brunswick, 
known to me, is a considerable list by David Owen, preserved in MS. 
among the Owen papers in possession of the Campobello Company. Lt 
gives origins to a large number of Indian names about Passamaquoddy, 
but, the author being dominated by the idea that all Indian names had 
been adopted by the Indians from the French, the list is quite walueless. 
Thus he derives Passamaquoddy from Passe en Acadie, “a way to 
Acadie,” Grand Manan from French words meaning Great Mary, and so 
on, in sundry imaginings without any fact basis. The next list known 
to me is a very brief one, dated 1823, of Indian names on the upper St. 
John given along with a list of those of Maine by Moses Greenleaf, the 
Maine Geographer, and recently reprinted in his biography (Bangor, 
1502). Then follows the important one of 1832 given by Cooney and 
cited on this page of the Monograph. Of later date is a short list (of 
some nine names) by Gesner in the New Brunswick Courier in Nov. 
(after the 18th), 1837, which seems to be the first appearance of several 
origins,—Oromocto, Nashwack, Pokiok, ete., which later became widely 
current. Considerably later, about 1855, a number of Indian names 
were collected by Dr. Robb in connection with his proposed History of 
New Brunswick, and the list is in his MS. now in possession of Rev. Dr. 
Raymond. It is, however, merely a general collection representing no 
critical study. Later came the various writings mentioned on this page 
of the Monograph. Since the publication of the Monograph I have 
continued my studies on the subject with results contained in synopsis 
in the preceding dictionary. Some of the matters of the most import- 
ance I have treated somewhat fully in articles in the Educational Re- 
view (XV, 159; XV, 204; XVI, 11 and XVI, 189) while in the first and 
fourth of these articles I have given Bibliographies bringing the subject 
dewn to the latter date. Since then I have published additional notes 
in various Bulletins of the Natural History Society of N. B. (Vol V, 47, 
67, 80, 87, 180, 193, 204, 215, 226, 311, 321, 324, 332, 426, 434, 466) 
in collections of the N. B. Historical Society, II (scattered through 
Historical Geographical Documents) and in later Monographs of this 
series, especially in that of Origins of Settlements. A special phase of 
seme interest is the naming of places for scientific purposes, as noted 
in the Bulletins, IV, 322, V, 204, 426. Dr. Raymond has also published 
seme notes on New Brunswick names, in Hay’s Canadian History Read- 
ings, 49, and Mr. George Johnson has discussed some New Brunswick 


56 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Place-nomenclature. 


names in articles on Canadian place-names in a pamphlet printed at 
Ottawa in 1898, in the Canadian Magazine XII, 289, in “ Canadian 
History Readings, 87. Mr. A. 8. Gatschet has also published a second 
article on Passamaquoddy Place-names in the tiastport Sentinel for 
Sept. 15, 1897. New Brunswick names occur in the Reports of the 
jeographie Board of Canada, and these, together with a newspaper 
discussion centering around them, have already been considered on an 
earlier page. The local names in and around St. John were 
discussed fully in the St. John Globe of June 20, and July 4, 1893 
(with criticisms in intermediate and following numbers), and the street 
names of that city were ail discussed in the St. John Sun, Feb. 22, 
1405. Mr. James Vroom has published, as a separate leaflet, under 
date Sept. 22, 1904, a list of the names of school districts in Charlotte 
County with comments. These publications appear to bring the subject 
dcwn to this date (March 1906). 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 57 


Cartography. 


IJ. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS TO THE MONOGRAPH 
ON CARTOGRAPHY. 


325. Two further examples of survival of ancient types of maps 
into modern times may be here cited. The map of Acadia in the latest 
edition of Parkman’s “ Montcalm and Wolfe” (1897) shows a part 
of the southern coast of New Brunswick practically following DesBarres 
map of 1780, over a century earlier. The cause of the survival is easy 
to show. This map follows that in earlier editions of Parkman’s work, 
which in turn was taken largely from Haliburton’s “ Nova Scotia,” 
which was taken from Purdy’s Cabotia of 1814 (and later), which draw 
the interior topography of southern New Brunswick from DesBarres, 
1780, (on page 392 of the cartography), the best map of the interior 
then available. 

But a much more remarkable case is found in the map of the Mari- 
time Provinces in the volume on Canada in Stanford’s Compendium 
of Geography and Travel, a work prepared with great care. This map 
marks “ Kilmaquac” in York, “ Trues ” in Charlotte, “ Howardville” 
in Northumberland, old and long abandoned names along the Resti- 
gouche, and other features belonging at least fifty years earlier. It is 
not difficult to trace the origin of these names, for they occur upon 
maps by Wyld of date prior to 1840. 

327. The pre-differentiation types. Since the publication of this 
Cartography there has been great activity in the study of early Ameri- 
can cartography, and not only have several valuable works appeared 
upon the subject (for example Harrisse Découverte...... Terre 
Neuve, and Nordenskjéld’s ‘‘ Periplus”) but several collections 
of photographic fac-similes of early American maps, notably 
Stevenson’s fine series of “Maps illustrating early discovery and 
exploration in America, 1502-1530,’ and Hantsch and Schmidt, 
“ Kartographische Denkmaler,” have been issued, making accessible 
both some new maps and also better copies of some of the older 
ones. So far as my observation has extended, nothing of vital 
importance, nothing tending to supply any great amount of new 
knowledge, or to cause any great change in our present ideas, has 
developed. Nevertheless in the light of these new materials, the entire 
cartography of Acadia needs a critical re-examination, which I hope 
later to give. 

331. On the identity of the places named on the Maggiolo map, 
Weise’s “ Discovery of America” is very important. 


58 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Cartography. 


333. There is a very remarkable resemblance between a part of 
the Gastaldi 1556 map (from Angoulesme to C. Breton), and a part of 
LaCosa, including the interior canals, which are the same in both. 
This Gastaldi map appears to be a compound of a part of the La Cosa 
with a part of Mercator, and an addition of some names from Cartier. 

332. The Santa Cruz map given by Nordenskjüld in his “ Peri- 
plus” L, is important, and appears to have influenced later maps. 

338. The map Fig. 8 is by a curious error attributed to Harley, 
who was simply its modern owner; its author was in all probability 
Desceliers. On him and his work there is an important paper by 
Harrisse “ Dieppe World Maps,” in “ Gôttingsche gelehte Anzeigen,” 
1899. 

348. Miscou was not mentioned by Champlain in the work cited. 
Compare under Miscou in the dictionary preceding. 

349. Although the earliest published map of Acadia by Cham- 
plein himself bears the date 1612, the influence of his work appears in 
several of earlier date, including those of Lescarbot, and the James I 
map of 1610 in Brown’s “Genesis of the United States.” Of course 
he made maps of earlier date, as he himself tells us in his narrative of 
1608, where he says he gave to DeMonts the map and plan of the most 
remarkable coasts and harbours there. A MS. map of his, apparently 
of 1607, is in possession of Harrisse in Paris. 

352. The 1632 map is closely followed by that of Boisseau, 1643, 
in Vol. XXIII of the Jesuit Relations. 

Another map belonging to this period is that of DuPont, given by 
Dawson in these transactions, III, ii, 179. 

360. Possibly the map on this page may be connected with the 
Simon François Daumont, Sieur de Lusson, who, about Sept. 1671, 
was ordered to make explorations in Acadia, and who returned to 
France in November of that year. (Jesuit Relations, LV, 320). 

A map of 1701 of Acadia by De Chavagnac is mentioned in 
Canadian Archives, 1899, Supplementary Vol., 350. 

The map by Aubrey, with documents, is still in existence in the 
Paris Archives, (Jesuit Relations, LX VI, 344). 

I have had the Jumeau map on this page compared with 
the original in Paris. As a result the Ottawa copy is shown to have the 
following mistakes; as the words are readily recognizable I give only 
the correct form—memchigan, pakmouch, tracadi, Phichemagan, chi- 
bouctouch, haran. 

364. On the Indian traditions about the River St. Croix, see the 
full account in St. Valier’s “ Estat present de l’Eglise ” of 1688, 14. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 59 
Cartography. 


I have had the Franquelin-de Meulles map opposite page 364 
compared with original in Paris, with the result that I find the Ottawa 
copy has been very carelessly made, a large number of the names being 
omitted altogether, and a great many others mispelled. These errors 
are as follows; since the incorrectly-spelled words can readily be 
recognized, I give here simply the correct spellings, while words omitted 
are in brackets. 

(Bistigouche), (I. Techniguet—Heron Id). pogomkik Pogomk, 
(Pointe Pepchidiachich—Belledune Point), Karaquet, Kednatteguec, 
Tabogunquec, Mtotou, ouetchitoucnkik, tcaganech, Pichiamnach, Tata- 
goumisak, (R. Ste—before Croix), Minowsak, (R. Kepchkigoe—the 
lakes at the head of R. Ouelamoukt), (2. Namamgamkikak—upper stream 
on the south of same river), (R. Kepchkigoe—next stream below latter), 
(Nogentes=on the north side of lake at head of Chicodi), (Nempugo 
—on the south of the latter lake), (R. Richbouctou), (R. Mijouemigail, 
=the stream just east of chimenpy), (R. Mijowemiguilchich—the upper 
part of the main river chimenpy), Meulles, (Havre neuf—the harbour 
just above the letter B in R. au Bar) dosquec, (Nachouac, with a con- 
ventional building, just above Le Ramouctou.) 

Unfortunately the copyist’s errom I have found when I have had 
Ottawa copies of important documents compared with the originals in 
Paris and London are not confined to these two maps, but extend to 
documents as well, at least one of which was as full of inexcusable 
errors as the Franquelin De Meulles map. This experience gives me 
a great hesitation in accepting the testimony of copies at crucial points; 
and it also conveys the lesson that a more careful supervision should be 
exercised over the copyists engaged to copy documents from the archives 
in Europe. 

365. The de Rozier map is of such great interest that it is repro- 
duced herewith (Map No 1). It ia among the Parkman papers in the 
Library of the Massachusetts Historical Society, and I am indebted to 
Dr. S. A. Green, the Librarian of the Society, for the copy and for 
permission ‘to publish it. It does not include the whole map, but the 
parts of interest to New Brunswick. While containing some curious 
‘errors, it is at the same time wonderfully accurate in the St. Croix- 
Magaguadavic-Oromocto region, far more accurate indeed than any 
other map for nearly a century thereafter. The map produced no effect 
upon any other later maps that I have been able to trace, and it seems 
itself to have been made quite independently of any others. Apparently 
it was made entirely from the personal observation of its author. Pre 
sumably the circles indicate Indian camping grounds. 


60 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Cartography. 


Lac 3 
des, Na” 
Pystolles 


Portag 


ys 


Arassa 


y CARTE 
re de la vi viere StJean 


Ct des TMussions parmy 


les A BENAQUIS 


1699. “ae 
5 Pay Guillavme de 


Map No. 1. By DE ROZIER, 1699; x 4. 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 61 
! Cartography. 


365. Several references to explorations in Acadia which may have 
a bearing upon the cartography of the country are given in the Cana- 
dian Archives, Supplementary Vol., 1899. ‘Thus in 1688 a St. Pasquine, 
an engineer went to Acadia (page 283), and in 1698 one Sr, 
L’Hermite explored Acadia (330). There are other references on 
pages 285, 300, 302, 352. It is very probable that the map dated 
1708 by Franquelin was really made about 1690, for in 1689 a royal 
order was given the authorities in Canada to give every possible facility 
to Franquelin in making a survey of the northern parts of America. 
(285; also Quebec Docs. II, 451). 

367. On the identity of the places shown on the map of Southack 
consult the Monograph on Boundaries, 268. 

373. In Prowses Newfoundland, 279, is a map dated 1720 
giving some of the names which I supposed were used for the first time 
by Bellin in 1744. Either I am mistaken in this, or the date of the 
Prowse map is an error. 

374. An interesting, but fallacious attempt to explain the carry- 
ing of the Nepisiguit and Restigouche so far north was made in a 
report by the Renwick Boundary Commission. (Richardson’s Messages 
of the Presidents, IV, 149). 

377. The north shore opposite Prince Edward Island remained 
unexplored and unsurveyed longer than any other part of the New 
Brunswick coast. Thus Little, in his work of 1748, says“ the Bay 
of Vert, in which, and all the Eastern side of the Province, as far as 
the mouth of Canada River, lie a great variety of fine rivers and har- 
bours, very little known to us, as no person has ever been employed by 
the Government to attempt a particular discovery of them.” 

378. The Mitchell map of 1755 here given is the first edition, not 
the one used by the Commissioners of 1783. On this map consult the 
Monograph on Boundaries, 302, and see the photographic copy later in | 
the present paper under Boundaries. 

381. ‘The Sayer and Bennet map was made by Holland, Surveyor 
General of Quebec. 

382. In addition to the map of the Chignecto region here men- 
tioned, several others exist as noted in the List of Maps following. 

386. John Mitchell’s Field book, with a copy of his map (in part), 
have been published by the N.B. Historical Society in their Collections, 
(2 Bi By 

390. I have been able to determine the authorship of this im- 
portant map. In the Library of Congress there are two copies of 
it,—one almost identical with the copy here printed, entitled, “Sketch 


62 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Cartography. 


of St. Joh[ns] Harbour and a part of the River,” and another, very 
similar, but not identical (giving depths along the river and some slight 
difference in names), entitled, “A sketch of St. John’s Harbour and 
Part of the River, surveyed by Mr. Holland, drawn by Cha. Morris, 
Chf. Surveyr. 1761.” I presume the Mr. Holland, who made the 
survey for this map was Samuel Holland, afterwards Surveyor (reneral 
of Lower Canada. No doubt he was with Monckton’s expedition in 
1758 whose course and operation it refldcts exactly, as shown in the 
fully reprinted Report in the Collections of the N. B. Hist. Soc. II, 163. 

393. I have been able to clear up the mystery attached to the 
Peachy Map and its relation to the cartography of the time, and also 
to trace out with fair completeness the dawn of the modern cartography 
of the St. John River, hitherto somewhat puzzling. 

The Peachy; map proves to be a copy of the map made by Captain 
(Joseph?) Peach in 1761, the resemblance in the names of the two men 
being purely a coincidence. This is made plain by a map in the Public 
Record Office, entitled, “ A sketch of the communication between the 
Bay of Fundy and the River St. Lawrence by the River St. John, from 
Capt. Peach’s observations and route in the year 1761, and of others 
since that time....... Copied and corrected by Geo Sprouleé” This 
map with the others mentioned in this paper are more fully described 
in the list of maps a few pages beyond. My copy of this map (includ- 
ing the part above St. Anns, with notes on the part below) shows that 
from St. Anns upwards it is the Peachy type exactly, though below it is 
oï the Morris type, following his survey of 1765. Although this map 
lacks the curious names of Peachey below St. Anns, I have no question 
that they are upon Peach’s unknown map of 1761, and they were not 
used by Sproule because ithe later, more exact and detailed map by 
Morris was available for that part of the river, though no other was 
available for the part above St. Anns. This map was no doubt drawn 
by Sproule in or about 1782 (or 1783), and certainly before the Morris 
map of 1783 and the Campbell map of 1784-85. In 1783, therefore, 
this combined Peach-Morris map was the best of the St. John accessible, 
and for this reason it was used by Munro when he ascended thle river 
and made his well-known Report in 1783. Report and map are in 
such close agreement that there is no doubt of this connection between 
them. Peachey’s map was made in 1787, no doubt, because there is in 
the British Museum a plan of the Falls of Madawaska by him bearing 
that date. I take it that Peachey was with the Deputy Postmaster of 
Quebec when he descended the St. John in 1787 and made the Report 
preserved in the British Museum, (Crown CXIX, 59, 2. b.), and having 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 63 
Cartography. 


with him only the original Peach map, and not the later Peach-Morris 
map, he used the former and made the copy to accompany a report of 
his journey. Several other maps following the Peach type, but differ- 
ing more or less among themselves, showing that they were copied not 
frem one another so much as from some accessible original are men- 
tioned in page 394. I am inclined to think the Peach map was 
published, and, if not, it was probably accessible in several copies, and 
we may therefore hope that it will yet be found. 

We will now trace the other early maps of the St. John, and the 
evolution of its Cartography to the present. The earliest survey map of 
the River was that accompanying the Monckton Report (Cartography, 
250), which was made, as earlier shown, by Samuel (?) Holland. Its 
tcpography appears upon a later map by Morris, namely, the Chart 
of the Peninsula of Nova Scotia of 1761” (see List of maps later). 
Next came the Peach Survey of the river of 1761, of which I know 
nothing more than is contained in the preceding paragraph. Next to 
this, and completely independent of it, comes an anonymous undated 
map of great interest preserved in the Library of Congress and re- 
produced herewith (Map No. 2) entitled,—* Survey of the River St. 
Johns from fort Fredrick in the Bay of Fundy to the River Medauesqua 
with the Lake Temesacuata and the grand Portage from thence to the 
River St. Lawrence.” Unfortunately it is but a fragment, including the 
river from the Bay of Fundy to the head of the Long Reach, but it is 
‘of very great, interest because of its extremely detailed and accurate 
character. The topography is more accurate than that of any later map 
down to Owen’s survey of 1846, though the nomenclature is curiously 
erroneous at the Belleisle, which is confused both with the Kennebecasis 
and the Washademoac, There is no clue to author or date, but the 
inscription —“ the French use this way when they go to fetch cattle, 
etc.—seems to show that the French were in numbers on the river 
when it was made, and certainly it must antedate the Morris map of 
1765. As Morris shows no trace of its influence, I surmise that it was 
made about the same time as his own (1765) but independently. Hap- 
pily a clue to its authorship is given us in the valuable documents 
recently published in the Collections of the N. B. Historical Society. 
Under date Dec. 14, 1764, (308) Captain Glasier describes a recent 
trip.to the St. John river (in November) in the course of which he 
says—‘“ I had the best Information from the Indians and Inhabitants 
settled 40 miles up the river, and the Ingineer of the Fort who had just 
been up to take a plan of the River.” There ig nothing to show who 


64 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Cartography. 


we 


a VEE Lia 
Pip Uh ere aed. $d 


Mar No. 2. MADE ABOUT 1764, SURVEYOR UNKNOWN; x 4. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 65 
| Cartography. 


this Engineer was, but I take it he was the author of this map. How- 
ever that may be, the map appears not to have become known to his 
contemporaries, for no trace of its features appears, so far as I have 
been able to find, in any other map. Very probably the engineer 
carried it back with him to New England or New York and no copy 
was ever sent to England. 

The next map of the St. John was a very important one, that made 
by Chas’ Morris, Surveyor General of Nova Scotia, in 1765, which in- 
cluded the St. John to above St. Anns, the coast to Passamaquoddy and 
that region. The original is in the Public Record Office, together 
with a still unpublished Report accompanying it. Some very interest- 
ing references to this survey occur in the Glasier Papers above men- 
tioned, especially on page 322. This detailed and accurate map was 
extendively copied (several of the copies being given in the list of maps 
later) and naturally, being official, became the original for all maps of 
the lower river for the next twenty, years, or until the survey of D. 
Campbell in 1785. Morris’ map ended a short distance above St. Anns, 
and so far as I can find, no new survey, replacing Peach’s of 1761, was 
made until after 1781, in which year, according to a note in the 
Archives Report for 1894 (398) the river had apparently been sunveyed 
only about 95 miles, approximately the distance of the Morris map. 
Since Munro used the Peach Map of the upper river in 1783 apparently 
no other had then been made, but upon a valuable MS. map in the Crown 
Land Office, containing grants and other information to 1784 but none 
thereafter, there is an excellent map of the river from survey all the 
way to Grand Falls, on a scale of 4 miles to an inch, with no trace of 
the Peach nomenclature, but using names substantially as at present, 
and clearly the foundation of the modern nomenclature. The original 
of this map is, I believe, in the Public Record Office (see List of Maps 
following under 1783?) and I surmise that it was made in 1783 or early 
1784 by Charles Morris the younger, and it is very likely the “Sketch 
of the River St. John ” mentioned Dec. 1783 in the Archives Report for 
1894, 411. It was followed closely by Sproule in his fine map of the 
southwestern part of the Province of 1786, (reproduced in the Mono- 
graph on Boundaries opposite page 412), but in no published map 
known to me. The best maps of the St. John in 1784, therefore, were 
the Morris of 1765 up to above St. Anns, and the supposed Morris ot 
1783 thence to Grand Falls. In the winter of 1784, however, an im- 
portant map of the St. John based upon a survey of considerable 
accuracy from St. Anns to Grand Falls was made by Dougald Campbell, 


Sec. II., 1906. 5 


66 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Cartography. 


and his map, in the Public Record Office, has been reproduced in the 
New Brunswick Magazine, II, 233! Campbell evidently used ths 
Morris 1783 map, for he adopts most of its names, adding many new 
ones of Indian origin (giving in many cases their translation). The 
next \winter, 1785, he surveyed the lower river to the Bay of Fundy. 
The dates of these surveys are fixed by a correlation of the statement 
on the map itself, “from an actuai survey in the winters of 1784 and 
1785,” and a letter of Governor Carleton (in his letter book at Frederic- 
ton), of date July 16, 1785, which speaks of D. Campbell’s survey of 
the St. John River from Grand Falls to Maugerville made winter before 
last, and from Maugerville to Bay of Fundy, since his (Carleton’s) 
arrival, (in Nov. 1784). Campbell’s map, with additions from land 
surveys, etc., became the basis of Sproule’s fine map of 1786 for the 
part below St. Anns, but, curiously enough, not for the part to Grand 
Falls, for which he follows the Morris map of 1783, apparently without 
reference to either Campbell’s names or topography. This great map of 
Sproule’s ? (already mentioned as reproduced in the Boundaries Mono- 
graph, 421), became at once the original of the lower river for all maps 
down to the detailed survey of Owen in 1846, which latter survey is the 
original of all our maps down to the present day. ‘Though Sproule 
used the Morris 1783 survey for the river from St. Anns to Grand Falls, 
that map did not become the original for this region, for the very next 
year, 1787, Sproule himself made a survey of the entire river from 
Fredericton not only to Grand Falls but to the Madawaska, Temis- 
ecuata and the St. Lawrence. ‘This fine map is in the Public Record 
Office, and parts of it are reproduced in this paper (Maps 14, 15, 38, 39.) 


1 Where also there is a biography of Campbell by Jonas Howe. 
I have had this copy of his map compared with the original in London, 
and it has the following mistakes:— I give the correct forms only, with 
omissions in brackets. Weechenegunigunikeck or Great Falls, (Restook or Jacquo’s 
River), Tobique’s River, Tall River, Tranquady, (R. Sehogomuck or Snow Shoe 
River), Pekuyauk, (Oromocto I.), (Swan Creek), (Latitude of Partridge Island 
45° 20’ North), (Manawagonish), (Magnetic North. Variation 14° 40’ West). 


2 It seems well-nigh impossible to have accurate copies made of maps 
in European Archives even by professional copyists. Having my experience 
with the Jumeau and the Franquelin-DeMeulles maps, earlier mentioned, 
in mind, I have impressed upon those making copies for me the necessity 
for absolute accuracy. This was the case with my copy of the Sproule 
1786 map; yet when my copy was reproduced exactly in the Boundaries 
Monograph. and later sent back to England for comparison with the original, 
the following mistakes were found, the correct spellings only being here 
given, and the omissions being marked by brackets. (River Monquart), 
Poqueouk, Mactuguack, ‘'horoughfare, = between Grand and Maquapit Lakes), 
(Patticake Creek), (Kennebeckacis River), (Glebe = at the northwest corner of 
Saint Stephens parish), (Boannus River), (Ripples = above Sixth Falls), 
(Indian Reserve), = at Second Falls). 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 67 
Cartography. 


For the section from Fredericton to farand Falls, he uses the Morris 
names, adding some others, and his map became at once the original for 
that part of the river, and so remained until the year 1826 when it was 
superseded by the map of the detailed survey by Foulis mentioned on 
page 401 of the Cartography.! The Foulis map: was superseded for the 
part from Nackawic to Nashwaak by the Playford map of 1835, which 
remains the type map for that region, as Foulis map does of the river 
thence to Grand Falls, to the present day. For the river from Grand 
Falls to Madawaska, the Sproule map of 1787 contains the first survey, 
and it remained the original of all maps of this part of the river down 
to the commencement of the International boundary surveys, which 
produced various improvements, and added the river above to the St. 
Francis and beyond. The best of these sunveys were those made by the 
International commissions after 1842, on which further information 
may be found in the Monograph on Boundaries, 345-347. Such is, I 
believe the complete history of the evolution of the cartography of the 
River St. John, so far as its New Brunswick part is concerned. 

395. The Laurie & Whittle map of 1794 is identical with one of 
1788 (see list following) published by Robert Sayer in 1788. This map 
represents a sub-type for the St. John, using as it does the Peach type, 
but it remains the same for the North Shore as the 1776 Sayer & 
Bennett map of page 381 of the Cartography. 

396. Some attempt to prepare a map of the Province appears to 
have been made in 1801-1802, for in these years (Feb. 18, 1801, Feb. 20, 
1802) the House of Assembly petitioned the Governor to have a maj) 
of the Province completed, but no resultant map is known to me. 
Another, MS. map, seems to have been prepared in 1814 (House of 
Assembly Journals, March 2). 

397. The various important maps resulting from the Boundary 
surveys, the importance of which id wholly underestimated in the 
“ Cartography,” are described in the Monograph on Boundaries and are 
listed in the list following. I have in the list given only those of marked 
importance, especially those containing original information, omitting 
compilations to show positions of the boundaries, etc. 

Another map of some interest made about this time was one of the 
Magaguadavic in 1785. Under date Sept. 21, 1785, the New Brunswick 
Council Records show that there was authorized a warrant “to issue to 
the surveyor general to survey the Maguaguadavick to its source.” 
Evidently this survey was made, though the original map is unknown to 


? There is a biography of Foulis in the New Brunswick Magazine, I, 247. 


68 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Cartography. 


me, for a survey extending to opposite Oromocto Lake (but not to its 
source) is shown on the Sproule Map jf 1786. This survey ‘continued 
the original down to 1798 when the very detailed surveys of the river, 
the originals of all of our present maps, were made under the authority 
of the Boundary Commission. 

As to the 1785 map of the Scoodic (St Croix), it appears there 
were two of them made. Thug a letter written by Governor Carleton 
(in his letter-book at Fredericton), reads (July 15, 1785), “ Having 
employed two persons of skill and experience to make separate surveys 
of the River Scoodie, the first of which was performed in winter upon 
the ice and the second after the opening of the river.” (Compare also 
the Report on Archives, 1895, N. B., 4). The latter map is without 
doubt the one in the Public Record Office, mentioned at the foot of 
page 417 of the Cartognaphy. It was that followed by Sproule in his 
map of 1786, and very likely it was made by Sproule himself. The 
former is unknown to me, but as a note in the boundary MS. speaks of 
a survey of the Scoodic made by John Jones for the British Govern- 
ment, I assume this is the map and surveyor referred to. 

398. The map by Wright is given in my Dochet (St. Croix) 
Island Monograph. 

402. In 1845-1846 the Rivers Madawaska and St. John werk sur- 
veyed by Quebec, and also by New Brunswick, (Blue-Book on the 
Quebec-New Brunswick boundary, 21, 62). There were thus four sets 
of surveys, and all of much accuracy, made of the upper St. John within 
a few years of each other. They were, (1) those of the Graham Com- 
mission, (2) those of the Quebec Government, (3) those of the New 
Brunswick Government, and (4) those of the International Commis- 
sion, on all of which there is further information in the Monograph on 
Boundaries,’ and the maps resulting from which are mostly in the list 
following. The present New Brunswick maps of the upper St. John 
appear to rest upon the New Brunswick surveys, which were made ini 
great detail by Andrew Inches, and of which there is a good set in the 
Crown Land Office. These are the maps erroneously stated in my 
Monograph on Boundaries, 347, to be a set of the maps of the Inter- 
national commission. 

408. Classified List of Maps. Since the publication of the Mono- 
graph I have gathered a great number of additions to this list, of all 
grades of importance, but I shall here note only those of marked 
historical value. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 69 


1500. 


1541. 
1542. 
1558. 


1592. 


1625. 
1643. 
1684. 


1744. 


1755. 


1755. 


1755. 


Cartography. 
I—THE PRE-DIFFERENTIATION TYPE, 1500-1534. 


LaCosa. This Map has been reproduced in these lransactions, III, 
ii, 268. 

Several of the important maps of this section are reproduced in 
Nordenskj6éld’s very valuable ‘work, “ Periplus,” in which he also 
gives a list of 174 MS. maps of America before 1560, and others of 
them are in Harrisse’s “ Terre Neuve,’ and others in Stevenson’s 
recent Reproductions, and Hantsch &*Schmidt’s “ Denkmäler.” 


Il. THE CARTIER TYPE, 1534-1604. 
Desliens, N. Reproduced exactly in Hantsch & Schmidt. 
Santa Cruz, Alonzo de. Map in Nordenskjéld’s “ Periplus,” L. 
Homem, D. Reproduced exactly in Hantsch & Schmidt. 


The Molineaux Globe is produced exactly by Miller-Christy in his 
“Silver Map of the World,’ Plate X. 


Ill THE CHAMPLAIN TYPE, 1604-1703. 
Du Pont. In these Trans., III, ii, 179. 
Boisseau. In Jesuit Relations, XXIII. 


The Franquelin Map is in Jesuit Relations, LXIII. 


IV. THE DELISLE TYPE, 1703-1744. 


Southack, Cyprian. A map of the Coast of New England, from Staten 
Island to the Island of Breton; as it was actually survey’d by Capt. 
Cyprian Southack. In the English Pilot, 1744, 24 x 3114 inches. 


V. THE BELLIN TYPE, 1744 to 1770. 


A great number of maps of this type exist in the many American 
or world maps published in this period, but only the following are 
important for New Brunswick: 


L’isthme de l’Acadie, Baye de Beaubassin en Anglais Shegnekto 
Environs du Fort Beausejour. A Paris, Chez le Rouge...... levé en 
juin 1755. In the Lenox Library. This is, no doubt, the original 
of the practically identical English plan of the same year.—‘‘A large 
and particular plan,” etc. 


A Plan of Chignecto (called also, by the French, Beau-Bassin) at the 
Head of the Bay of Fundi upon the Istmus of Accadia; showing 
that Harbour with its Rivers, the Situation of the English Fort, 
and Fort Possessed by the French; June, 1755. 11 x 15 inches:— 
MS. in the Library of Congress: 


Tonge, W. A Draught of the Isthmus which joyns Nova Scotia to 
the continent with the Situation of the English and French Forts 


70 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Cartography. 


1756. 


1758. 


1761. 


1761. 


1764? 


1764. 


1765. 


1765. 


1765. 


& the Adjacent Bays and Rivers, by W. Tonge, Chignecto Fort 
Lawrence, 1755. 

A MS. in British Museum. It is very like, though not identical 
with the “Map of the Bason of Chignectou,” of the Cartography, 
page 414. 


A Map of the Surveyed parts of Nova Scotia. 
A MS. map of the Chignecto region with fine plans of Fort 
Cumberland and Gaspereau; in the British Museum. 


VI. THE MODERN TYPE, 1770 to 1820. 


Holland, Samuel (?) Sketch of St. John’s Harbour and a Part of the 
River. Reprinted in Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc. II, 166. 

There are two copies of this map ‘with the same title in Library 

of Congress, one of them giving the name of its author, Mr. Holland 


Morris, Chas. A Chart of the Peninsula of Nova Scotia. 31 x 23 in.; 
10° m.;= 1 inch (about). 
MS. in the Public Record Office, Vol. 9, No. 6. 


Morris, Chas. A plan of the District of Chignecto. Published in the 
Archives Report of 1904. 


Anon. Survey of the River St. Johns from Fort Frederick in the 
Bay of Fundy to the river Medauesqua with the lake Temesacuata 
and the grand Portage from thence to the river St. Lawrence. 
PES OUT 

MS. in the Library of Congress. Reproduced in Fig. 1 preceding. 


Mitchel-Bernard. A Plan of Passimaquoddy Bay or the Bay of St. 
Croix. 26 x 33 inches; scale about 1 mile to an inch. 

MS. in Public Record Office, B. T. 10, 59. Reproduced in the 
Monograph on Boundaries, 229, and in altered form in (Coll. N.B. 
Hist. Soc., II, 177. Topography and names in part by John Mitchel, 
with additions by Governor Bernard. 


Morris, Chas. A Plan of the River St. Johns and Passamaquoddy Bay 
Done by order of His Excellency Montagu Wilmot, Esqr., Governour 
and Commander in Chief of the Province of Nova Scotia, &c., &c. 
6144: = 1% feet; I mile == 1 inch. 

MS. in the Library of Congress. Reproduced in Map No. 2 pre- 
ceding. 


Morris-Mitchel. A map of Passamaquoddy showing the land grants. 
34 x 30 inches; 1 mile = ¥V inch: 

MS. in Crown Land Office, made by Morris, using Mitchel’s map 

of 1764 in part. The grants seem to have been added by Holland. 


Johnson, Guy. Map of the River St. John in the Province of Nova 
Scotia, Exhibiting the Grants to Officers, &c., in 1765, with other 
Patents. From the survey of Mr. Chas. Morris and other surveys. 
26 x 17 inches. 

MS. in Library of Congress. Very similar to the map in the 
Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc., I, 305. 


[aanonc] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 71 
Cartography. 


1767? Wright, Thos.? A Plan of the Northern Coast of the Bay of Fundy 
and the River St. Johns in the Province of Nova Scotia. Endorsed 
Part of Nova Scotia by Mr. Wright; Towns on St. Johns River, 
Nova Scotia, by Morris. 37 x 24 in.; 1 league = % inch. 
M.S. in Public Record Office (Box 43, No. 23). Reproduced in the 
Archives Report for 1904. 


1774. Morris, Charles. A Plan of the River St. John, ete. I find the map 
in the Public Record Office bears the inscription, “ Copy from the 
original Survey made some years ago. Geo. Sproule, London, July, 
1784.” 

It is very probable that another map in the same office is another 
copy of this; it is entitled, A Plan of the River St. John in the 
County of Sunbury, Prov. of N. Scotia, from St. Anns opposite the 
mouth of the Nash'waak River to Partridge Island in the Bay of 
Fundy. 6 feet x 212 feet; 1 mile = 1 in. 


1782? Sproule, George. A Sketch of the Communication between the Bay 
of Fundy and the River St. Lawrence by the River St. John, from 
Captain Peach’s Observations and route in the year 1761, and of 
others since that time...... Copied and Corrected by George Sproule, 
late Captain in His Majesty’s 16th Regt. of Foot. 54 x 19 inches; 
5 miles = 1 inch. 

MS. in the Public Record Office (Case 43, No. 22). 


1783? Morris, Chas.? Map of St Johns River from its mouth to the Great 
Falls. 4 miles = 1 inch. 
MS. in Public Record Office (Case 43, No. 21): Probably that 
mentioned in Canadian Archives, 1894, 411. 


1786. Sproule, George. Plan of the South West Part of New Brunswick 
including the River Saint John as high up as the Great Falls: 
shewing the Lines of the Counties and Parishes, and of the different 
grants and allotments hitherto made in that District. Compiled 
from Actual Surveys by order of His Excellency Governor Carleton. 
By George Sproule, Esqr. Surveyor General, assisted by Mather Byles 
Deputy Surveyor Saint John. June 1786. 6 feet by 7 feet 10 inches; 
2 miles = 1 inch. 

MS. in Public Record Office, Case 41, No. 7; reproduced (reduced) 
in the Monograph on Boundaries, 412. 


1787. Sproule, George. Plan of the Communication by the River Saint Jchn, 
from Fredericton in New-Brunswick, to the River Saint Lawrence; 
with the Settlements in that extent. From an actual Survey taken 
by order of His Excellency Lieutenant Governor Charleton, in July 
and August 1787, by George Sproule, Esqr. Surveyor General of New 
Brunswick. 5 x 9 feet; 2 miles to an inch. 

MS. in Public Record Office (Case 43, No. 26). 


1787? Peachey, Jas. This map is described as “ A colored map of the Post 
Route between the River St Lawrence & the Bay of Fundy, drawn 
by J. Peachey, Ensn. 60 Regt.” Scale 5% miles to an inch 
At x 1 ft. 9 in British Museum. 


72 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Cartography. 


Also “A colored map of the Post Route between the River St 
Lawrence thro the Lake Madawaska to the St John’s River.” 3 ft. 
10 in x 1 ft 8 in. scale 2 inches to a league. Also in British Museum. 


1787? Map of the Coasts and Rivers of part of Maine and New Brunswick. 
4 miles to an inch. 
MS. in Public Record Office Case 40, No. 54. It is largely a 
reduced copy of the Sproule map of 1786, but with some slight 
additions. 


1788. Sayer, Robert. A new and a correct map of the British Colonies in 
North America, comprehending Eastern Canada with the Province of 
Quebec. New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, and the Government of 
Newfoundland....... London, 26% x 19 inches; scale 60 miles = 1 inch. 


1791. Hall, W. Quebec. Map of part of the province comprehending also 
Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Cape Breton, & New England, showing 
at one view the 5 great American Lakes. 

MS. in Public Record Office. (Case 42, No. 53). Closely follows 
Sproule of 1786 and 1787. 


1798. Sotzmann, D. F. Maine, Entworfen von D. F. Sotzmann. Hamburg 
bey Carl Ernst Bohr. In Ebelings Erdbeschreibung von Amerika. 
The map is partly in English and partly in German, and is notable 
for its accuracy, at least in region bordering upon New Brunswick. 


1798. Sproule, George. A Plan of the Rivers Scoodic and Magaguadavic. 


With their principal Branches........By George Sproule Esar. 
Surveyor General of New Brunswick, from the actual Surveys of 
those Rivers...... 1796-7-8. 


Reproduced in Moore’s International Arkitrations, 30, and from 
that reduced in Monograph on Boundaries, 254. 


1799. Campbell, D. Sketch of the Route from Fort Cumberland to Fred- 
ericton. From a Journey performed between the 13th and 23rd 
December 1799 by H. R. H. the Duke of Kent, Commander in Chief 
in British N. America &c &c &c. 

MS. in British Museum 34 x 58 inches. An excellent map without 
much detail. 


1808. Richardson, James. Map of Passamaquoddy Bay from actual survey. 
Published as the act directs by James Richardson, January 18, 1808 
Caverhill. 

Probably the same as that in Atcheson’s American Encroach- 
ments, and the one used so often in the Boundary Documents. 


1817. Johnson, John. A map of the boundary line explored in 1817, by John 
Johnson, U. S. Surveyor. 
i.e. the line from the monument to the Wagan. 9 x 44 inches; 
scale 224 inches to a mile (nearly). 
Well drawn map, with the St John merely sketched but having 
several Indian names on its tributaries not elsewhere recorded. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 73 


1817. 


1818. 


1818. 


1818. 


1818. 


1820. 


1825. 


1825. 


1826. 


Cartography. 


Bouchette, Joseph. Plan of the exploring survey from the source of 
the St Croix River to the Great Waggansis or the waters of the 
Restigouche, between the 27th. July and 9th. Oct. 1817. 

MS. in the Library of the Department of State, Washington, 
22 x 107 inches; scale 80 chains to one inch. 

Well drawn map on a very large scale showing in great detail 
the topographical features along the due north line, important to 
N. B. History because it is the most detailed original map of the 
line which forms the present boundary. 


Odell, Wm. F. Plan of the exploring survey in 1818. (Viz the north 
line from the Wagan to the watershed near the St Lawrence). 
MS. in the Library of the Department of State, Washington. 
16 x 48 inches; 


Johnson, John. A mapof the country explored in the year 1817 & 1818. 
MS. in the Library of Department of State, Washington. 37 x 64 
inches; scale about 3 miles to an inch. 
Prior to the Survey of Green River, which is only sketched in. 


Tiarks, S. L. and Burnham, H. [Map of Green River and the sources 
of the neighbouring Kedgewick waters]. 15 x 28% inches; scale, 
2 miles to 1 inch. 

MS. in the Library of the Department of State, Washington. 
This is the original for this country of the Map A, and all published 
maps down to the map of Graham of 1843. The Report of the explor- 
ation of the river is referred to in Monograph on Boundaries, 321. 


Tiarks, S. L. and Burnham, H. Map of a Survey of Tuladie and Green 
Rivers. 31% x 45 inches. Larger scale than preceding and contains 
some information not on the latter. Neither is an original (Indeed 
none of those referred to as in Library of the Department of State 
is original but all are copies). 

MS. in the Library of the Department of State, Washington. 


Burnham, Hiram. Map of the Country explored in the years 1817, 
1818, 1819, & 1820 by order of the commissioners under the 5th 
article of the Treaty of Ghent. Scale about 8 miles to an inch. 

This is important as the original of the Map A of the Case laid 
before the King of the Netherlands. 
MS. in the Library of the Department of State, Washington. 


Wyld, James. Map of the Province of New Brunswick and Nova 
Scotia. In general style of his later maps but on a smaller scale. 
First map to mark the counties, which however it does very 
erroneously. 

Hall, Francis. Plan of a proposed Canal from Bay Verte to Cumber- 
land Basin. A copy of this plan (the original being lost) with the 


accompanying Report is in Haliburton’s History of Nova Scotia. 
Vol II, 73. 


A map of the Great Road between Fredericton and Saint John. From 
an actual survey made in October 1826. By Mark Scully, D.L.S. 
50 ch. = 1 inch. A very detailed, beautifully drawn and important 
map. 


74 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Cartography. 


1830. 


1830. 


1835. 


1838. 


1839. 


1839. 


1839. 


Dashiell, S. L. Map of the Northern Part of the State of Maine and 
of the adjacent British Provinces showing the portion of that State 
to which Great Britain lays claim. Reduced from the official Map 
A...... 16x 17 in. —-24-miles— 1 inch. In “Statement of the United 
States laid before the King of the Netherlands. ” 

The original “Map A” was in MS. and seems never to have been 
reproduced. I possess a tracing of a part of it on a scale of 8 miles 
to 1 inch. See “1820, Burnham” preceding. 


Wilkinson, John. A Map of Campobello and other Island in the Pro- 
vince of New Brunswick, the property of Will Owen Esq. Sole 
surviving grantee, etc. drawn by John Wilkinson Agt. to Wm. Owen 
Esqr. Campobello, 30th. September, 1830. Mentioned by Mendenhall 
in Am. Antiquarian Soc. Report, 1896, 21. 


Playford. A survey of the St. John from Nashwaak to Nacawicac. 
MS. in Crown Land Office. 


Arrowsmith, J. Lower Canada, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, Prince 
Edward’s Island, Newfoundland and a large portion of the United 
States. London. 38% x 24 in.; 35 miles = 1 inch. Beautifully 
engraved. 


Deane-Anson. A Plan of the Disputed Territory and adjacent Country 
to accompany the Report ef 7. G. Deane, M. P. Norton and J. Irish, 
Commissioners appointed by Governor Kent in 1838 “to run and 
locate the N. E. Boundary of the State”. Drawn by W. Anson under 
the inspection of John G. Deane, Portland Me. March 1839. 

MS. copied from the original in 1841, in the Crown Land Office. 


Featherstonhaugh and Mudge. Map of that Portion of Her Majesty’s 
Colonies of New Brunswick and Lower Canada the title to which 
is disputed by the Government of the U. States, with parts of the 
adjacent country......-.-. 146 x 28 ins ib miles) == 1inch in} British 
Boundary Blue book, 1840. 


Wyld, Jas. Wyld’s Sketch of the North Eastern Boundary in Dispute 
between Great Britain and the United States. 3 ft. x 2 ft. 10 in.; 
30° miles ==31 inch: 


1840-1841. Graham, J. D. Maps of the Meridian line from the source of the 


St. Croix to beyond the St. John, and of the St. John River to the 
Madawaska. These maps were made in the survey of the North- 
eastern boundary of the United States, which was brought to an 
abrupt conclusion by the signing of the Webster-Ashburton treaty. 
I have not been able to discover their location; they appear not 
to be in the State Department at Washington where other maps 
of the same survey are preserved. They are all reproduced much 
reduced in Graham’s published map of 1843 (Compare Richardson’s 
Messages of the ~-esidents, IV, 112). 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 75 
Cartography. 


1842. Bell-Renwick. Map of the Green River [of St. John] with the 
sources of Rimouski Mistigougueshe and the Grand Fourch of 
Ristagouch [Katawamkedgwick] Surveyed in the years 1841 and 
1842 under the direction of James Renwick, LL.D. 24 x 441% inches 
to a miles. 

MS. in the Library of the Department of State, Washington. 
A very detailed and beautifully drawn map. First published on 
Graham’s map of 1843. 


1843. Map to illustrate the Boundary line established by the Treaty of Wash- 
ington of the 9th of August, 1842, between Her Majesty’s Colonies of 
New Brunswick and Canada and the United States of America. 
16 x 14 in.; 30 miles = 1 inch (about) 
In British Blue book of 1843, and the same, differently coloured, 
in Blue Book of 1845. 


1843. Graham, J. D. Map of the Boundary Lines between the United States 

and the Adjacent British Provinces from the mouth of the River 
St. Croix to the intersection of the parallel of 45 degrees of North 
Latitude..…...... 

Published originally in Congressional Documents, 27th Congress, 
III Session, Document 31. and also in Moore’s International Arbitra- 
Lions, 149) 2h x 22 ine; 16 miles = 1 inch: 

A map of the utmost importance which became the type map 
of its region, only improved subsequently by the addition of materials 
from new surveys by the International Commission, and others. 


1843-1844. Estcourt-Smith. [Maps of the International Boundary from the 
Monument at the source of the St Croix to Glazier Lake on the St 
Francois. ] Made under the direction of the Commissioners J. B. B. 
Estcourt and A. Smith, Commissioners for surveying the Interna- 
tional Boundary. 

MS. maps beautifully executed, in many sheets; preserved in the 
proper government department in England. Scale 4 inches to the 
mile, with some portions (as described in Richardson’s Messages 
of the Presidents, Vol. IV, page 175) on a larger scale. 

A complete set of these maps, of the entire boundary, was litho- 
graphed by the United States Government under direction of Major 
J. D. Graham. A set is in the Library of the Department of State at 
Washington, and there is a set in the possession of each State touch- 
ing upon the boundary. (On this compare “ The First International 
Railway” by L. E. Poor, New York, Putnams 1892, pp. 20-24). They 
are of the greatest local interest, not only geographically, because 
of their great accuracy, but also historically because they give the 
locations of all settlers, ete., along the river. 


1845. Crawley, H. O. Plan of the Ground between Cumberland Basin and Bay 
Verte, with three other plans. In his “ Report on a Survey of a Line 
for a canal to unite the Bay of Fundy with the Gulf.of St Lawrence, 
in 1842.” In “ Papers on subjects connected with the duties of the 
Corps of Royal Engineers,” Vol VIII, 1845, 186-193. 


76 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Cartography. 


1846. 


1846. 


1848. 


1851. 


1852. 


1862. 


1864. 


1876. 


1894. 


422. 


Also Plan of the Ground between Shediac Harbor in the Gulf 
of St Lawrence and Dorchester in the Bay of Fundy. In the above. 

Also Plan of the Ground between Shediac Harbour and the 
Petitcodiac River. In the above. 


Map of a Part of the Provinces of Canada and New Brunewick........ 
40 x 24 inches. 4 miles = 1 inch. In Wells Report on the Quebec— 
New Brunswick Boundary. 

Map of the Western Boundary of New Brunswick from the mouth 
of the River St Croix to the southern boundary of Canada.......... 
40 x 12 inches; 4 miles = 1 inch. In Wells Report. 

Plan of all the Lands granted under the authority of New 
Brunswick on the Northern side of the River St John and westward 
of the Commissioners Line. 32 x 12% inches; 100 chains = 1 inch. 
In ‘Wells Report. 


Bouchette, Joseph. Map of the Province of Quebec New Brunswick 
Nova Scotia etc. 7 ft. 2 in. x 3 ft. 10% in. 


Robinson, Henderson and Johnston. Map to accompany and illustrate 
the Report of her Majesty’s Commissioners for the Settlement of the 
Boundary line in dispute between Canada and New Brunswick. 29 x 
20 in.; 22 miles = 1 inch. In British Blue book of 1851. 


Lushington and Twiss. Map to illustrate a scheme for settling the 
Boundaries of Canada and New Brunswick........ 20 x 17 in.; 15 
miles = 1 inch. In British Blue book of 1851. 


Wilkinson, J. Map of the Exploratory Survey made in the year 1847 
between the upper part of the Ristigouche River and the valley of 
River St Lawrence for the purpose of the Halifax and Quebec 
Railway. 

A large book in the Crown Land Office containing 13 beautifully 
drawn maps, on a great scale, largely the original of our represent- 
ation of that region. 


Walling, H. F. Topographical Map of Westmoreland and Albert Coun- 
ties. From Actual Surveys by D. J. Lake and H. S. Peck, Drawn 
and Engraved under the Direction of H. 19 Walling. Published by 
W. E. & A. A. Baker, 36 Dey St. New York. 1862. 11 miles to 1 inch; 
b Et; 3) in} x Afin 


Fleming, Sandford. General Map to accompany Report on the Inter- 
colonial Railway; Exploratory Survey, of 1864. Made under instruc- 
tions from the Canadian Goverment. 5 ft: 8 in. «/2) £t./8"inisS; miles 
inch: 


Roe and Colby. Map of Carleton County New Brunswick. Compiled 
and Drawn and Published from Actual Surveys by Roe & Colby. 
St John N. B. 500 Rods to an inch. 4 ft. 10 in. x 4 ft. 2 in. 


Bailey, J. W., Canoeman’s Map of the Upper St. John. In his St. 
John River, Cambridge, 1894. 


The U. S. Hydrographic Office has reproduced most of the Admiralty 
Charts of N. B. waters. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 77 
Historic Sites. 


IV. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS TO THE MONOGRAPH 
ON HISTORIC SITES. 


215. While the sites of most of the important historic localities in 
New Brunswick are identified, and to some extent described and mapped 
in the “ Historic Sites” Monograph and in the following supplement 
thereto, I have not by any means exhausted this interesting subject. 
For the future student there is yet ample opportunity for service in this 
field. The localities having been identified, the next steps! should be 
(1) to photograph them and their surroundings as they now are, and 
before they are further changed, the photographs being, of course, pre- 
served by publication,(2)to excavate all places promising remains or re- 
lies, beneath the surface, giving accurate descriptions of the finds and 
their mode of occurrence, the relics themselves being deposited in some 
central museum in the Province and (3) to mark the places by solid but 
plain stone monuments bearing appropriate inscriptions. I cannot at 
this moment recall a solitary historic spot within the bounds of all New 
Brunswick marked by any memorial, a brass plate on the first Parlia- 
ment building at Fredericton alone excepted. Here is enough for the 
local antiquarian for a long time to come! 

219. Places named from the former presence of Indians) (espe- 
cially “ Indian Point”) are much more numerous than the present list 
implies; for many such names are used locally, but are not on any map. 


222 C,—St. Croix. This Indian village is also mentioned in the Harris Field- 
book of the Boundary Survey of the St Croix in 1797 (now in posses- 
sion of W. O. Raymond). Harris mentions the Indian village, Houses 
and Eel-Works. 


222. There is an Indian Island in the St. Croix below Spragues Falls. 
223. There is an Indian Pond near Baillie in Charlotte. 


223. There are traditions of an Indian structure, an altar or temple formerly 
existing near the Canal at Lake Utopia, given in Scribner’s Monthly, 
Vol. 15, 449; but there is no real evidence of its existence. 


224. At the Falls, St George, was a favourite camping place of the Indians, 
according to a MS. note left by the late Edward Jack. 


224. There is an Indian camp site, known locally, at the Narrows of Letang 
River. 


224. The location of the Indian village at Madawaska, with other inform- 
ation about it, is givén on the Sproule map of 1787 reproduced later 
(Map No. 39) in this Addenda. Also an interesting reference to an 


78 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


Indian fort at Madawaska given by Cadillac in 1693 is in Raymond’s 
St) John’ River? 110: 

There is near Edmundston an Isle des Sauvages, according to M. 
Mercure, and there are two others called Savage Islands just below 
the St Francis, marked on the best maps, showing some former resi- 
dence there or other connection with the Indians. 


225. Becaguimec. It is said locally there was an Indian camp site of some 


227. L. 


227. L. 


228. N. 


importance at the mouth of this river, on the site of Hartland, where 
there was a good salmon fishery. 


Ekpahak is used earlier than 1733; see Aucpac in Place-Nomenclature 
of this Addenda. 


Oromocto. The Indian Burial-ground here is also mentioned by Gesner 
in his Fourth Geological Report, (page 26) and is well-known locally. 

On the shore of French lake, (around which many Indian relics 
are said to have been found) in a position shown on a later map 
(Map No. 18) is a stone cut by curious marks, locally reputed to be 
Indian carvings. This has been fully described and pictured in the 
Bulletin of the Natural History Society of New Brunswick, No. XXII, 
175, where also the reputed Indian carving from higher up the river 
(mentioned on page 228) is shown to be unauthentic. There is an 
Indian Point in Oromocto Lake (North West Branch), explained in 
Bulletin of Nat. Hist. Soc. N. B. Vol V, 193. 


Indian Point. The principal sites in this vicinity are approximately 
located on the sketch map (Map No. 19) given later under the 
Acadian Period. 


228. Maquapit, French and Indian Lakes. These Lakes were, because of 


their abundant game supply (waterfowl, muskrats, fish,) favourite 
resorts of the Indians, and their camping grounds have been studied, 
and numerous relics collected therefrom, by Mr. Duncan London, of 
Lakeville Corner, Sunbury County, who has been so kind as to send 
me a sketch map of the region, (given later, Map No.19) and some 
information as to the sites. He tells me there were two Indian Camp- 
ing grounds at the upper end of French Lake one on French Island, 
and the other on the present Sand (on an old plan called Indian) 
Point, and a very extensive one at the lower end, with another on 
Apple Island, at the places marked on the map. There are also others 
known to him on Maquapit lake (marked by burnt stones, flint chips, 
lete., and other relics he has collected), including Londonsand Simons 
Points; others occurred on Rings Island; and on the point near the 
latter, Mr. London found the aboriginal pot described by Matthew 
and Kain in Bulletin of the Natural History Society of N. B., XXII, 
345. There were also two of importance at the outlet of the lake. 
The upper part of the lake called on the maps French Lake is locally 
called Indian Lake, of course indicating the former presence of Indians 
there. 


[&ANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 79 


Historic Sites. 


228. Swan Creek. Various Indian relics have been found here, as I am 


informed by Mr. Duncan London,. at the localities indicated on the 
sketch map which he has sent me and which is given later in this 
paper (Map No. 20). Wampum was found in 1858 by his father, 
Mr. E. M. London, then a resident of Swan Creek, at the place indi- 
cated as were other Indian relics. The wampum locality has since 
been much dug over by treasure-seekers. 


228. Mr. London also tells me he has found fragments of flint implements 


228.M. 


and Indian pottery just below Cameron’s wharf at the mouth of the 
Otnabog. 


This Indian settlement was probably that -said locally to have 
existed at the mouth of Red Bank Creek, though the distance is some- 
what too great. 

The name Indian Point is given to the point between Salmon Bay 
and North East Arm at the mouth of Salmon River in the N. B. 
Acts, for 1786-1836, 738. 


228. Another Indian location on the Washademoak is described in these 


Transactions VI, 1900, ii, 61. 

An Indian settlement, or camp-ground, of considerable impor- 
tanee, as shown by tradition and by many relics dug there, stood, 
as I am informed by Dr. B. S. Thorne of Havelock, on the big inter- 
vale at the end of the portage from Petitcodiac (described later in 
these Addenda), about a quarter of a mile below the present Petit- 
codiac Road. Captain Pote was here for two days in 1745 (Journal, 
54). 

Favorite camping-places of the Indians were at mouth of Jemseg 
and at Indian Point directly across the St John, according to MS. notes 
left by the late Edward Jack. 

A small Indian village at Nauwigewauk is mentioned by Ray- 
mond, “St John River,” 331. 

An Indian village, according to a newspaper article (St John 
Telegraph, Aug. 23, 1905) formerly stood in Kingston opposite Gondola 
Point. It is described thus;— “The red man’s burial ground was 
just at the foot of what was afterwards called Gallows Hill, and many 
a relic of the chase buried with the dead warriors have been handled 
by the ploughman, and thus the ancients’ equipment for the happy 
hunting grounds became the property and the curios of the white man, 

The Indian encampment, was situated just in front of where the 
residence of Captain Pitt now stands........” 


229. An old plan has an Indian Creek, just above the Bend [Moncton] on the 


south side. 

Mr. H. A. O’Leary writes me that some 20 years ago and more, 
the Indians used to camp at Moncton beside the McSweeney spring, 
about 200 yards south of Halls Creek, and that the place was reputed 
to be an ancient Indian camp-ground. This receives a certain 
confirmation from the fact that this spring is the only one of any 
importance for a long distance around. 


80 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


An Indian camping place on the Petitcodiac aboutat the head of 
tide is mentioned in 1771 in the Calhoun diary, published in 1876 in 
the Sackville Post. Apparently it was on the north side of the river. 
It must have been near the present Salisbury, but inquiries I have 
made on the ground have failed to discover its site. 


230. The Indian camp-sites, said to be three in number, at Dorchester, are 
described in newspaper article (St John Sun, Aug. 3, 1904) thus— 
one at Brownell Brook or New France, a second back of Palmer's 
pond, or back of the John Chapman farm, and a third below what 
is now called the Johnson mills.” 


230E. I have been told by residents in the vicinity that Indians camped on 
this Island to within a few years. It is of upland surrounded by 
marsh, and it would appear to formavery favourable stopping-place 
for those travelling in canoes along the coast, although my personal 
search failed to reveal any spring on it. It is now being washed 
away by the sea. Mr. R. P. Steeves tells me he believes there was 
formerly an Indian camping-ground below St Mary's Point in Harvey 
on the place formerly known as the ‘“ Two-Island Farm.” 

Just east of the Owl’s Head near Alma is a place called Indian 
Beach, no doubt an old camping place. 

At Germantown Lake, on the north side near the middle of its 
length, is a knoll with a spring and a good beach, known to have been 
an old Indian camping ground of some importance, and used by the 
Indians within the memory of persons now living. This lake is very 
rich in fish, and the neighbourhood formerly abounded in game, 
including beaver. 

The point at the mouth of the Shediac River, south side, is 
called locally Pointe des Sauvages and is said to have been the site 
of an important Indian settlement. The Chart of Shediac also marks 
near by an “Indian Cemetery.” 


A. The Indian settlement at Buctouche is now at Noel Creek, two miles west 
of the village of Buctouche; but Mr. H. A. O’Leary, who knows the 
region well tells me that formerly (up to about 1840) the main Indian 
settlement was on the bluff at the northern end of the present high- 
way bridge, where now is the oldest part of the village. Indians 
lived at Indian Point until about 18 years ago when they moved to 
Noel Creek. An old Indian burial ground is also known above the old 
bridge on the north side of Black River. 


230. Richibucto. For additional information about the Indian settlements 
at Richibucto I am indebted to Dr. J. W. Doherty of Rexton, and 
others. The principal Indian settlement of Richibucto in early times 
is said by both Indians and whites to have been on Indian Island, 
on elevated ground toward the eastern end, and it is no doubt here 
that the fortified village stood of which Denys speaks. Another 
old Indian settlement site was at Platts, or Shipyard, Point just 
below the present Marine hospital, while between the point and the 
hospital is the rock still visible, mentioned by Cooney, on which a 
traitor of the tribe was once stoned to death. Another village was 


[Ganona ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 81 
Historic Sites. 


on the Law farm just above Rexton on the north side of the river 
at a place still called “Indian Fields.’’ Another possible Indian 
ocality was just within the mouth of the Aldouane on the north side 
where an old burial ground is known, though probably this was 
French. (see later under Acadian Period). 


231. The Renous Indian Reserve is not on the Renous River, but on the Mir- 
amichi a short distance above its mouth, See Map 1 of Settlement 
Origins. 


231. There is an Jndian Brook just above the North Pole Branch of the Little 
Southwest Miramichi, marked on the best maps; and there is also 
an Indian Lake at the extreme head of the Tuadook, or Southwest, 
Branch of the same river (Bulletin of the N. B. Nat. Hist. Soc. 
XXIII, 324). It is said locally that an old camp site is known at 
Porters Cove, in Ludlow, on the north side of the Main Southwest 
Miramichi and another on the South side at the foot of Stewart Hill, 
near McNamee. 


232. Tomogonops Pipestone Quarry. An important Indian locality of the Mir- 
amichi was the important old pipestone quarry on the Tomogonopes, 
a branch of the Northwest Miramichi. As described to me by a 
resident who knows it personally, the quarry is in a ledge across 
the stream about six miles from its mouth. The pipestone is soft 
where kept wet by the stream, but is much harder where dry above 
its surface. The rock is taken away and used as whetstones etc, 
by residents of the Northwest, one of whom has given me a piece 
said to come from this quarry. Professor J. E. Wolff of Harvard 
University to whom I submitted the specimen tells me it is a very 
fine-grained variety of sericite schist, and seems to fulfil the 
requirements (soft enough to cut easily, does not crack or disinteg- 
rate with a moderate degree of heat and has a certain capacity for 
absorption of oily matter) of a pipestone. 


232. It is said locally there was an important camp-site some 300 yards 
below the church at the mouth of the Bartibog. 


232. I have also been told there was a camp-site of some importance on 
Murdoch’s land at the mouth of the Napan, between that river and 
Miramichi. The place is known locally because of the small-pox 
epidemic which attacked the Indians here some years ago. 


232. It is said locally there was a camp-site of some consequence on the 
north shore of Beaubears Island, about 200 yards from its eastern 
end, in a charming situation, with a spring. 


232. It is said locally there was an Indian camp-site on the Canadian Marsh 
opposite French Fort Cove. 


232. An old plan in the Crown Land Office shows an Indian village and 
improvements on a point just below the head of tide, north side, 
of the Little Southwest Miramichi, about a mile from its mouth. 
This is wery likely the place mentioned as old Indian Town in 
Collections N.B. Hist Soc. II, 95. 

Sec. II., 1906. 6. 


82 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


232F. Burnt Church, or Church Point. Further reasons for the importance 
of this place are given in a note in Collections of the N. B. Historical 
Society, II, 379. 


232G. Indian Point. This place is said locally to have been the favourite 
camp-ground of the Indians of this region, and much the most 
important on Tabusintac. On some maps it is called Ferry Point, 
and a resident told me it was known in early days as Bartibog 
Point, for a chief who was much there. 


232. Cains Point. Another very important camp or village site, apparently 
the second in importance on Tabusintac, was that at Cains 
Point, the prominent point below Stymests Millstream on the north 
side, just above Big Marsh Brook. It was occupied to within the 
memory of men now living. Presumably the name was for an Indian 
of that name (a corruption of the French Etienne, as in Cains River). 


232. Tracadie. Although now totally abandoned by the Indians, many camp 
sites are known along this pleasing and game-rich river, to such 
an extent indeed, that, as Dr. A. C. Smith, who knows the region 
thoroughly, tells me, it may almost be said that Tracadie was one 
huge camping-ground. It is of interest to note that Tracadie means 
camping-ground in Micmac. One of the most important localities 
is the burial ground, between Tracadie and Leech Rivers containing 
aboriginal circular graves, which have been studied by Dr. Smith 
as noted in Bulletin of the N. B. Natural History Society, XIX, 306, 
though there erroneously attributed, as Dr. Smith tells me, to Wilson’s 
Point, Shippegan. An important camp site was that on which the 
mills now stand at Tracadie Mills (Foster’s or Sheila), and there 
was another at Point à Bouleau, which is, specially at its eastern end, 
of low but attractive upland. Other camp-grounds are known, as 
Dr. Smith tells me, on both sides of the entrance to Nicholas River, 
where there are two very charming points now cleared and settled, 
ideal sites for Indian encampments, as I have myself seen. The 
vicinity of Nicholas River is said locally to afford especially good 
eel-fishing. Smethurst, in his narrative of 1761 (Collections N. B. 
Historical Society, II, 375) mentions a camping place six miles from 
Grand Lake, which may have been one of those at Nicholas River, 
though more probably it was somewhere up Portage River. It is 
very probable that an important camping-ground was at the head 
of tide, which was and is a great fishing place, especially for sea- 
trout. Here, on the south side, just below a little brook, is an. ele- 
vated upland bank still used as a camping ground and having the 
appearance of long use for this purpose. Many of these localities 
may be found marked on an historical map of Tracadie which is 
expected to appear in the Magazine “ Acadiensis,’ St. John, in 
July, 1906. 


232. Pokemouche. Like Tracadie, this river has long “been abandoned 
by the Indians, though formerly an important resort of theirs. It 
is of very pleasing scenery, and rich in fish and game. I have noted 


r 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 83 
Historic Sites. 


the more important of their camping grounds in my discussion of 
Smethurst’s route in 1761 (Collections N. B. Historical Society, II, 
871), but have since gathered some additional information from a 
visit to the river. The most important of their village sites by far 
seems to have been that called Red Bank at Inkerman between the 
two bridges on the lot now occupied by the Church. This beautiful 
and commanding site was occupied by Indians within memory of 
men living, and the lot was originally granted the Indians for their 
use; but it came later by purchase into possession of the Church 
whose right to it was actively disputed by the Indians. It is said 
their burial-ground was where the buildings of A. & R. Loggie now 
are. There was another Camp-ground, as I am informed by Rev. 
Father Fitzgerald, in the cove across the river, while another, of 
considerable importance stood upon the elevated Rivers Point at 
the junction of the South and West Branches of Pokemouche, on or 
near the charming site of the present church. On early maps this point 
is called La pointe à Denys which means af course Denys De Boss, 
said locally to have been an Indian. Since he was of sufficient 
importance to obtain an early grant it is altogether probable 
he was a chief, and his village or camp-ground was on Rivers Point. 
The early grant of the Indians on the opposite side of the river of 
course soon passed into the hands of the white settlers. Father 
Fitzgerald also tells me there was another camp-site on O’Donnells 
Point, while relics have been found, on the easterly end of Walsh’s 
Island, (a pleasant low upland cleared island), as well as on the 
upland along the northern shore opposite this island. He also tells 
me a camping-ground is known upon the Sutherland Farm, one of 
the most pleasing sites upon Pokemouche, where also there is report 
of an Indian burial-ground. On the south side of the river, within 
the limits shown on the map, is an Indian reserve, no doubt estab- 
lished here to give the Indians the benefit of the eel fishery in the 
open basin near Maltempec, which is marked upon a plan of 1811 
as an “ Eeling place of the Indians.” Various families of Indians 
are said locally to have camped on the reserve within the memory 
of residents, but I was unable to learn of any important camping 
ground within the limits of the Reserve, which indeed seemed to me 
to offer sites decidedly inferior to other places on the river. It is 
very likely that another camp-site of importance existed at the great 
fishing-place at the head of tide. Here, just beside a superb pool, 
there is on the north side a raised bank or terrace, now cleared and 
occupied by a sporting camp, and bounded by two cold spring brooks. 
The whole forms a very pleasant place and an ideal camping-site, 
and I have no doubt that it was much used as an Indian camp-ground. 
Upon the map of 1811 by Wm. Ferguson in the Crown Land Office, 
there are two points on the north side of Pokemouche named Point 
de la Croix; one was opposite Rivers Point where there is a low swell 
of upland bordered by marsh, and the other was onthe east side of the 
mouth of Maltempec, a piece of elevated upland, now cleared and 
forming one of the most charming places on all of the very pleasant 
Pokemouche. Both of these places in all probability represented 


84 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


Indian burial grounds, the Crosses being planted on their consecrated 
grounds. All of the localities here mentioned will be found located 
upon an historical map accompanying an article on the History of 
Pokemouche which is expected to appear in the Magazine “ Acadien- 
sis.’ St. John, in October 1906. 


232. Money Island (or Isle au Trésor). This very striking island, at one 
time the site of a French settlement (see later under the French 
period), has been within the memory of men now living a great resort 
of the Indians, who called it as I have been told by anold resident 
of Miscou, Cache, or ‘“hiding-place ” island, a name recalling that given 
by the Passamaquoddies to St Croix, or Dochet, Island (These Trans. 
VIII, ii, 1902, 147) I have been told by Mr. Andrew Wilson of Miscou 
that he has seen over one hundred families of Indians encamped 
here (obtaining their water from the barrens near by) while engaged 
in hunting seals, which formerly resorted in great numbers to the 
gully near by. 

Indian Point, Miscou. This is said locally to have been a camp- 
ing-ground of some importance. It is said there was also another 
camping-ground in the cove on the east side of Muddy Brook near 
the houses at Wilsons. 


232F. Caraquet. A very important Indian camping ground, the most import- 
ant in this vicinity, formerly existed on the fine point (Brideau Point) 
now occupied by the establishment of the Robin Colles Co., as I have 
been informed independently by two of the best-informed old residents 
of Gloucester County. The site is an admirable one, the best in this 
region, and its value is increased by the never-failing little brook, 
(Chenards Brook), which here empties into the salt water. 


233. The Indian village of Restigouche is no doubt that shown on the map 
of 1663 in Winsor’s America, IV, 148. 

I have been told by Mr. D. Ferguson of Chatham formerly of 
Athol House, Restigouche, who knows the Indians well, that there 
was formerly a camping-ground at the mouth of Upsalquitch, one 
on the point at Campbellton, one at Point Le Nim, one at Dal- 
housie and one at New Mills. 

Old plans show an Indian Lake on the head of the Popelogan 
branch of Upsalquitch; a brook at the head of the Northwest 
Branch of Upsalquitch is called by the lumbermen Indian Brook, 
and there is a small Indian Brook just above Bolands Brook. 


233. A very important work on the ancient Portage Routes ot 
America, tracing their influence upon the course of local history, is A.. 
B. Hulbert’s “ Historic Highways of America,” Vol. % (Cleveland 
1903). 

234. It is very probable that most of the Indian portages follow 
ancient game-trails. I have myself been privileged to see, among the 
remote waters of New Brunswick still unvisited by sportsmen and 
lumbermen, the fine game trails, forming deeply-worn paths, which the 


- 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 85 
Historic Sites. 


great game animals, especially the moose and deer, have made jn |tra- 
velling from lake to lake as they seek new feeding-grounds. Such 
trails are no doubt the result of long trial and selection by those 
animals, and represent as a rule the easiest, and usually the most direct, 
route between the waters. The first Indians to come into the country 
would have but to follow them. ‘These trails tend naturally to follow 
the lowest ground, especially where, as is very commonly the case in 
New Brunswick (as I have elsewhere shown Bull. N.H.S. IV, 313) 
ancient valleys connect the waters. The portage routes show therefore 
an interesting evolution. first an ancient valley, deprived by geological 
changes of its original stream, connects two lakes, each a source of an 
important navigable stream. Second at a great time past the large 
game animals wandering from water to water formed marked trails along 
the valley. Third the first wandering Indian followed these trails in 
his first explorations, thus finding the most direct and easy route 
between waters. fourth he marked out the trails and made them 
known to his fellows thus establishing definite portage routes. Fifth, 
the white man came and adopted the Indian’s route in his search for 
lumber, places for settlement, ete. Sixth, the lumberman came and cut 
out the portage paths to allow his lumbering teams to pass, making a 
tolerable road. Seventh, the advance of settlement necessitates high- 
ways which follow the same general route, deviating in places to «ean 
upon the best-drained ground.  Æighth, railways follow and take the 
same general route parallel with the highways across the watersheds. 

236. There is another cause, in addition to the removal of woods, 
tending ito make many streams to-day less navigable for canoes than 
they were in pre-historic times, namely, the broadening and consequent 
shallowing of river beds through lumbering operations. I have been 
assured by at least two lumbermen of wide experience in driving and 
dam-building, that many streams (especially the Tracadie and the 
Lower Sevogle) have been extensively broadened and shoaled within 
their own recollection. This is caused by the tearing away of the soft 
banks by the rush of logs in spring, and is greatly aided by erosion from 
the “ splash-dams,” dams in which water is stored and released with a 
rush to carry lumber over rocky or shoal places. And the effect has 
become naturally more marked in recent years since it became customary 
t» carry on lumbering upon a very extensive scale. Thus it is no doubt 
true that many streams, which are now too shallow for canoe travel 
during much of the summer, were in pre-historic times narrower and 
deeper, as well as provided with a heavier body of water. 


86 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


237. I have found a few cases in New Brunswick of Indian trails 
which seem not to have been regular portage-paths. Thus on the 
Miramichi a trail is locally known, called “ Sock Renow’s Trail,” leading 
from Blackville (mouth of Batholcmews) to the Renous, and another 
“ Big Louis Trial,” from Indiantown (Renous) to Rocky Ledge (Little 
Southwest?) Of this character also was, very likely, the trail from 
Derchester to Sackville, and that from near Neguac, later mentioned, to 
Portage Brook, near the important Indian village of Cains Point on 
Tabusintac. No doubt there were many such trails, as distinct from 
pertage paths, between the Indian villages on parallel rivers. — 

A reason for the early abandonment of the Indian portage paths 
was the early building of roads parallel with them, whereupon the 
Indians naturally abandoned their inferior paths for the better roads. 
This seems to have been the case with the Tabusintac-Tracadie, the 
Tracadie-Pokemouche (South Branch), and the Pokemouche-St. Simon 
paths. No doubt in general in the early-settled parts of the province 
this soon occurred, and hence there the Indian trails were very early 
atandoned, and their locations are now locally unknown. I have seen 
myself a modern instance of this in the Trowser Lake—Long Lake 
portage on Tobique. The old Indian trail is still used on the Trowser 
Lake half, but beyond that it has been abandoned for lumber roads lead- 
ing in the same direction. 

237. Another reference to Indian canoes built of material other 
than birch bark is in Pote’s Journal, where (page 54) he speaks of 
canoes of elm and ash bark. Mr. E. Jack, (Acadiensis, V, 142) speaks 
of spruce bark canoes, and Dr. Philip Cox tells me his Indian guides 
have constructed them. 

239. The importance of the portage routes in the early days of New 
Brunswick is well illustrated by inscriptions upon the Sproule map of 
1787. One of them, mentioning the Micmacs on the Restigouche, reads, 
— They communicate by this river with the St. John tribe, and it also 
forms a convenient intercourse with Fredericton for the new settlers on 
Chaleurs Bay.” Again under bearings and distances from Fredericton 
it reads :—‘‘ The distance to Miramichi, by an inland water communi- 
cation through the Grand Lake, a branch of the St. John [of course via 
Gaspereau—Cains River] 140 miles—6 miles land carriage.” And 
again,—“ To Fort Cumberland, by the Kennebecasis, a branch of the St. 
Jchn and Petcoudiac, which discharges into the Bay of Fundy, 190 miles 
—3 miles land carriage.” In general, all the early maps and narratives 
make much of the portage routes. 


{GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 87 


Historic Sites. 


240. To the local portages along the St John the following should be added 
(1) The Baker Brook Cabineau portage, described later in this section. 
(2) Bouchette’s map of 1831 shows a portage from the head of Little 
River (Grand Falls) into Grand River, but I have no other evidence 
of the existence of such a portage, and itis probably an error, as is the 
portage from Salmon River to the Tobique on Arrowsmith’s map of 
1837. (3) On Maclachlan’s large map of Tobique, of 1830, two portages 
are shown around the Narrows of that river, both on the south bank, 
a longer leading around the entire Narrows and a shorter around 
its upper pitch only. (4) On Sproule’s Map of 1787 a Meduxnakeag- 
Aroostook portage is mentioned (see later under Meduxnakeag-Pen- 
obscot). (5) A branch of Kelly’s Creek is said to be called Chicha- 
wagan, (University Monthly, XIX. 4) which would mean “little 
portage,” suggesting a possible old route from this Creek to the 
Rusiagonis. (6) In Munro’s report on the St John River of 1787 
and in the very similar document by Edward Winslow of somewhat 
later date (Collections N. B. Hist. Soc. II, 160), there are confused 
references to a portage between the Keswick and Nashwaak. I found 
no other evidence of such a portage, and if it existed it perhaps led 
from Howard Brook through to Lower Nashwaak Lake. (7) An old 
plan appears to indicate an early portage from Salmon Bay across 
to Newcastle Creek. (8) A plan of 1832 calls Coac Brook on Salmon 
River, Indian Portage Brook, for an old portage around a rapid on Sal- 
mon River at this place. (9) It is likely, also, there was a portage 
from Back Creek, Oromocto, through to the Nerepis, though the 
route would be a hard one, if not impossible in summer, because 
of the low water then prevailing on the upper courses of those 
streams. The presence of an Indian fort at the mouth of the Nere- 
pis would suggest such a route, and imply that it was of some 
importance. (10) A plan of 1786 shows an Indian Carrying Place from 
the extreme S. W. corner of Ludgate Lake to a tiny lake apparently 
emptying into Musquash Harbor. (11) Whitney’s plan of 1836 of 
the Inglewood Manor shows an Indian Portage between the present 
Loch Alva and Brittain Lake of that chain. A reference to the 
Kingston Creek—Kennebecasis portage appears to occur in the 
later part of Gyles “ Narrative.” 

The old Indian portage around the falls at St. John is best shown 
upon Bruces fine map of St John Harbour of 1761, and is reproduced 
in part herewith (Map No. 3). It also is shown, though less accur- 
ately, upon the Holland Map of 1758. There is no difficulty in recog- 
nizing the undoubted position of this portage, in part at least, by 
a comparison of the Bruce map with the locality, when it will be seen 
that the portage path must have crossed the highway in the depres- 
sion just east of the Soldiers monument at Riverside Park, and its 
general course to Marble Cove can be identified. Tracing it towards 
the harbour, its course cannot be determined with such certainty, 
since there is more than one depression in the rocky ridges through 
which it may have passed, though a very careful inspection of the 
ground entirely to the water might show its entire course. 


88 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


An Indian portage route, (no doubt only a hunting route not 
a line of through “travel), extended up the Forks Branch of Canaan 
River, across by a portage, one and a half miles in length, to the 
Lake Branch, and down that stream to Salmon River, as I am 
informed by Mr. I. T. Hetherington, on the authority of an aged 
resident of Queens County. The MS. plans in the Crown Land 
Office show these waters approaching thus near to one another, 
although no printed map thus represents them. 


241C. The Oromocto-Magaguadavic Portage is fully described and mapped 


in the Bulletin of the N. B. Natural Hist. Soc. No. XXII, 192, and 
map opposite 194. On Purdy’s Cabotia (map) of 1814 the portage 
from the Piskahegan to the Magaguadavic is evidently an engraver’s 
error, made by joining the Magaguadavic-Oromocto and Oromocto- 
Piskahegan portages into one. The latter portage is mentioned in 
the field-book of the survey of the Magaguadavic in 1796-1797, in 


Map No.3. FROM BRUCE, Map No. 4. FROM A PLAN 
1764; x 2. OF 1827; x &. 

these words;— “From the head of this river [Piskahegan] there is 
a short portage (% a mile) to a branch of the Oromocto.” It was 
no doubt from Little to Peltoma Lakes. 

The important Magaguadavic-Scoodic portage route has been 
fully worked out, and it is mapped in detail and described in the 
Bulletin of the N. B. Nat. Hist. Soe. XXI, 45. 


242D. There is an error in this description, for I find the plan here mentioned 


(Map No. 4) applies the name Little Magaguadavic Lake to Cran- 
berry Lake of the present maps; hence the length of the portage to 
Lake George is nearly correct. This portage is better shown in a 
map in the Field-book of the 1796-1797 Survey, (Map No. 5.) which 
marks it “ Portage supposed to go to a branch of the R. Pekuyauk. ” 
This map also shows the old portage between the two Cranberry 


- 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 89 
Historic Sites. 


Lakes, and as well the series from Magaguadavie Lakes towards 
the St. John. It is possible the Magundy Stream formed a part of 
this route. 

Gesner, (New Brunswick, 170 and elsewhere) speaks of a com- 
munication between Magaguadavic Lake and Shogomoc, but I know 
nothing further of such a portage. 

An old plan of the Lower Digdeguash in the Crown Land Office 
has this information,—‘ From Indian accounts........ from its source 
there is a carrying place to Scoodick River.”’ I know nothing further 


€ HE Æ \ 
av fF Tel, dians | 
( this brand 
KA hae fo go ON 
( Tie. R. St John Case i”) 
Pekuyauk 


osed 
Scale - | mile A portage ne 


t Wee Lo 4; l'US 


(ie 


LD 


( 
Larc à Eu re berry pe 
ont Loge 
Lor | 
( 


Map No. 5. FROM THE SURVEY OF 1796-97: x +. 


of this portage, which could have been but little used because of the 
difficulties of navigating the Digdeguash in low water. It very likely 
extended from the Upper N. W. Branch to a branch of the St Croix. 


244A. The Grand Lake-Baskahegan portage is clearly shown on an import- 
ant early map—that of the Survey of 1796-97, reproduced in the 
Monograph on Boundaries, 254. 


245. The Field-book of the Survey of 1796-97 shows portages in two places 
from the West Branch of Scoodic to below Grand Falls in places 
where bends of the rivers come close together. 


245. Meduxnakeag-Penobscot. Sproule’s map of 1787, a most careful and 
accurate one, has the inscription, —“* By the Meductsinekek the Indians 


90 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


246. 


communicate with branches of the Restook and Penobscot.” The 
route must have been into the Matawamkeag branch of Penobscot, 
and, owing to the smallness of the streams, must have been a difficult, 
and probably only high-water, route. I have found no other mention 


of such route. That to Restook was probably from North Branch 
into Mesardis. 


Kennebecasis-Anagance. From the references to this portage in the N. 


B. Acts, 1786-1836, 561, from an old plan (reproduced in Map No. 6) 
and from its length, which is several times recorded as only two miles, 
it appears that its course is laid down on the map in the Monograph 
much too far to the eastward; it really left the Anagance about where 
the highway and railroad touch one another, and ran nearly true S. 
to the Kennebecasis somewhat east of the present highway road from 
one river to the other. 


Map No. 6. FROM AN OLD PLAN; x 2. 


247C. The course of the Washademoak-Petitcodiac Portage as here given, 


is, I am now convinced, erroneous. Its exact course has been 
given me by Dr. B. S. Thorne, of Havelock, who has heard of it 
from his father and uncle both of whom knew it when still a path. 
It followed almost precisely the present course of the high- 
way road, leaving the Petitcodiac about two miles below the Ana- 
gance, crossing the North River near Bennetts Brook, and following 
the highway through Butternut Ridge; A mile or two from the Wash- 
ademoac the Portage path diverged to the westward of the present 
road. At this place a great many relics of both French and Indian 
occupation have been found, and it appears to have been an important 
early camp site as mentioned earlier in these Addenda. Mr. Thorne’s 


ca 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 91 
Historic Sites. 


description of this route is fully confirmed by early plans I have 
since found in the Crown Land Office. One of these, given herewith, 
Map No. 7, a survey of 1809, shows in detail a survey of a blazed 
path from John Keith’s lot on ;Washademoac through J. Humphrey’s 
lot on the present Prices Brook, and thence to Petitcodiac “ near old 
Blakeney.” It is easy to show, by comparison of this with a modern 
plan, that this blazed path, without doubt the portage path, closely 


follows the modern road. An account of the old French route from 
Quebec to Beausejour via this portage is cited by Raymond, St John 
River, 112. 


@ nti nues Puch nl this 
. Insee a about 
| rep Ba 
Jol TRE PA \ JE ty Havdlack Fiver 
1 Gh 


a Lath atvat “Survey 
et known 


Survey November [£09 


Map No, 7. From A PLAN oF 1809; x }. 


A reputed old French Road from the mouth of Anagance via 
Riders Brook to Cumberland Bay on Grand Lake is discussed later 
under the English period. 


248. The Memramcook-Westcock portage is cited from a French document of 
1753 by Raymond (St John River, 112). Its course is thus described in 
a newspaper article (St. John Sun, Aug. 3, 1904) “the trail of the 
Dorchester Indians was up the Palmer Brook, down Bulmer Brook, 
out to Wood Point at Sackville.” 

The portage from Salisbury or Rougie Bay to Shepody waters is 
mentioned in the Calhoun Diary of 1771,as running from the river 
just west of Cape Enrage into Shepody River. This, however, must 
have been in addition to a portage from Waterside directly to the 
Lake. 


248. \ There are references to the Salmon River-Richibucto portage in Baillie’s 
New Brunswick, 39, and in Cockburns’s Report of 1827, 91, where 
the length is given as 220 chains. Perley, in the “New Brunswick 
Courier” for Nov. 1s 1837 tells of passing over this portage, which 
he gives as three miles long. He also describes the long portage, 
nine miles long, apparently used when the water was low, and its 
course is shown on a plan in the Crown Land Office. Another plan 
given herewith (Map No. 8) showing the short portage in some detail 
places it a little west of the course shown on the map in the Mono- 
graph, leading from close to the mouth of Cordie Brook directly into 
the angle of the Richibucto. 


92 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


248B. Washademock (Canaan)-Buctouche. The precise location of this port- 
age, well-known by tradition to residents on the Canaan, is happily 
made certain by a plan in the Crown Land Office, (which I had pre- 
viously overlooked) and shows it as on the accompanying map (Map 
No. 9). This plan and the modern published maps by no means 
agree in details, but as nearly as they can be correlated, the 
portage must have followed very clearly the present highway road 
from its crossing of the North Branch Buctouche to the southerly 
branch east of Canaan Station. The portage is said to have been 
three miles in length, but this map makes it much shorter. 


Map No. 8. FROM A PLAN BY LAYTON; x 3%. 


249. The important Misseguash-Baie Verte portage apparently did not start 
at the present Portage Bridge, but from the first cove to the east- 
ward of it. This is made clear by the fact that the official declaration 
of the boundary between New Brunswick and Nova Scotia makes 
it start from the portage, and Munro’s map (reproduced in the 
Boundary Monograph, 370) shows the boundary starting not from the 
bridge but from the head of the cove next east of it. 


250. There is an old plan in the Crown Land Office showing a road direct 
from Fort Moncton through to ‘“ Musquash or Portash Lake,” which 
may possibly, though this is unlikely, indicate an Indian trail. In 
any case the use of the name Portash lake for this lake on the Tan- 
tramar is of interest as showing some early portage by this route, 
even though it may have been an early road of the whites. 

The existence of a Tantramar-Aboushagan portage or trail is 
rendered likely by the name Aboushagan itself, the termination of 
which strongly suggests owokun, a portage. 

A reference to the use of the Memramcook-Scadouc portage is in 
Murdoch, Nova Scotia, II, 495. The probable route of this portage 
is shown by the very detailed map of 1846 by Crawley showing the 
route surveyed for a possible Memramcook-Shediac canal a part 
of which is given herewith (Map No. 10). 


[@ANnonG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 98 
Historic Sites. 


251. The Gaspereau-Cains River portage is also mentioned in Cockburn's 
Report, 92, and in Baillies New Brunswick, 38. It is said locally 
that the route led up six-mile brook making the carry only two miles 
(Notes in “ Chatham Advance” after March 1, 1897), but this must 
have been a high-water route only, since Marston speaks of it as 
seven miles long in his MS. Diary (Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc. II, 103). 
Though of so much importance in the early settlement of the Province, 
it appears to be shown accurately upon no early map, and the only 
map that I have-been able to find which marks it at all is a sketch 
by Harley in his 1826 map of Cains River. A portion of this map 
is given herewith (Map No. 11) with the corresponding survey from 


Mar No. 9. FRoM AN OLD PLAN; x }. 


Fairweather’s plan of 1836, upon the same scale. If Harley’s dis- 
tances are accurate, (as his location of a timber-berth on the map 
would seem to imply) it would show that the portage left Cains River 
about as I have indicated on the Fairweather map, in which case it 


is put somewhat too far to the eastward on my map in Historic 
Sites, 251. 


251. The suggestion of a portage from Black Brook to Barnabys River is 
confirmed by a corrected copy of the Franquelin deMeulles map of 
1686 which I have received from Paris (Map No. 26 of preceding 
Cartography). It shows the continuous line, used in that map 
for a portage, from the head of Black Brook to the head of Barnaby 


94 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


River. I find also that the latest plans in the Crown Land Office 
show these waters approaching very near one another. 

I have been told by a resident that there was formerly a trail, 
“Sock Renou’s Trail,’ from Indiantown apparently to the Little 
Southwest. 

The Nashwaak-Miramichi portages from Cross Creek to near 
Boiestown, are very clearly shown in detail on one of the road maps 
in the Crown Land Office. 


252. Long Lake to Little Southwest Miramichi Lake. This portage path, 
traversed by Hind in 1864 has now completely vanished. I have 
myself crossed from Long Lake via Milnagek to Little Southwest 
Lake with a companion on a trail in part made by hunters and in 
large part made by following an old pine-road.(Compare in Bull. 
N. H. S. IV, 461, 468) 

I have also, aided by one companion, portaged canoe and outfit 
from Tobique to Little Southwest Miramichi waters, making our 


oT 


they ‘ 
À DAT EU 
eg ts 
Qi att, ang! 


| 
RON NE wns 


21025 


apie J = 42%? / 


Map No. 10. ForM CRAWLEY’S SURVEY OF 1846; x 3. 


own trail, going from Portage Lake along the streams and ponds 
emptying into Adder Lake and thence across Upper Graham plain 
to Gover Lake, as noted in Bull. N. H. S., V, 329. Furthermore I have 
been told by Mr J. W. Hoyt of Andover N. B., who has run timber- 
lines in this region that the Indians have told him they had an 
ancient hunting trail from the Serpentine waters over Cow or Thun- 
der Mountain to the Dunn Lake waters and vicinity. 

It is also very probable that an ancient hunting-route of impor- 
tance extended along the Portage Brook, a branch of the North Pole 
Branch, heading over near Mitchell Lake of the Walkemik Basin 
(compare Bulletins of the Natural History Society of N. B., V, 338 
and 466). The North Pole is a remarkably easy and beautiful 
canoe stream, while the Little Southwest Miramichi above the North 
Pole is extremely rough and difficult. The North Pole and Portage 
Brook therefore offer a far easier route to the lakes of the Walkemik 
Basin than does the Little Southwest and the Walkemik itself. The 
name Portage Brook, however, was given by Mr. Henry Braithwaite, 
as he tells me, because of his own use of it as a portage stream 
on one occasion. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 95 
Historic Sites. 


253. Somewhat over a mile east of Kouchibouguac Village, there empties 
into the Kouchibouguac River on the south side a small brook, at 
which apparently, is marked on an old plan in the Crown Land 
Office the words ‘Indian Portage,” while the brook itself is called 
“the brook at the Indian Portage” ina grant of 1809. Since this place 
is within tide waters, it cannot indicate a portage along the river; 
but it may mark the beginning of an old portage to the Kouchibou- 
guacsis. Possibly this was part of the route from the Aldouane to 
the Miramichi mentioned by Denys. ; 


255. The Miramichi-Nepisiguit route along the remarkable lagoons of this 
coast is mapped and described in some detail in my edition of 
Smethurst’s Narrative of 1761 in the Collections of the N. B. His- 

torical Society, II, 370, 373. But since 

that work was published I have gathered 

} much additional information upon the 

Harleys Sitch subject, and have been able again to visit 

EE this interesting region, (travelling, as was 
appropriate, by canoe), and to inspect in 
person the route of nearly all of the port- 
ages. 

From Miramichi Bay to Tabusintac 
the route along shore inside the ‘‘beaches” 
is entirely unobstructed, so that no port- 
age is there needed. But I believe that a 
portage, or at least a trail, existed from 
the vicinity of the important Indian settle- 
ment of Church Point through to Stymest’s 
Millstream, which is near to another im- 
portant village site at Cains Point. Thus 
I have been told by an Indian at Burnt 
Church that such a route started up Re- 
serve Brook and ran from Neguac to 
Farweathers Survey | the little brook now called Portage 
Brook on some plans, (Stymests Mill- 
stream being the next stream to 
the westward). I find, however, that 


the earliest map of this river, that 
wae ee (Of 1804, applies the name Portage 
+ ’ 32° 


River, to Stymests Millstream, leaviag 
the present Portage Brook unnamed, while the Stymest grant of 1814 


speaks of the Millstream as “commonly called Portage River”. 
Hence it seems altogether likely that the Indian was correct and 
the white man in error, and that the portage really ran to Stymests 
Millstream, though it is of course possible that it had a branch to 
Portage Brook. The name Portage was probably transferred to the 
brook after the Millstream acquired its present name. The topo- 
graphy of the region would, however, seem to favour Negauac Brook 
rather than Reserve Brook as the starting point of the route, in 
which case the portage would have followed the general route of 
the present highway road. 

From Tabusintac to Tracadie there were at least two routes, 
(a) that through the ponds inside the beach, including Grand Lake, 


96 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


taken by Smethurst and fully described and mapped in the public- 
ation above cited, and shewn on the accompanying Map No. 12; and 
(b), that from Portage Creek at the head of Tabusintac Bay through 
to the cove on Portage River, a route taken by Plessis in 1812. This 
route has been described to me by an intelligent old Indian (Joe Prisk, 
or Presque, of Bathurst) who had been over it in his youth, and the 
white residents also know it by tradition. The original Indian path 
has vanished, having been early replaced by the road now running 


Pierre 
Basque R 


WF G.det 


Map No. 12 COMPILED BY THE AUTHOR. 


in nearly a straight line over gently rising ground between those 
waters, and early constructed to permit winter travel from one of 
the bays to another. From an examination of the ground I have no 
doubt the original path left Tabusintac waters exactly where the 
road now does, (for here Portage Creek swings close in to a bit of 
elevated upland forming an admirable landing and camping place 
with a cold fresh water brook just above, a better place than exists 
anywhere for a considerable distance above or below it), and ran 


2 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 97 
Historic Sites. 


towards the cove at Portage River somewhat to the southwest of the 
present road, reaching the cove at the elevated ground still used as 
a canoe landing there. Its general route it shown on the accompany- 
ing Map No. 12, which shows also its starting point from Portage 
Creek, which is copied from an old plan in the Crown Land Office. 

I have also been told by an old Indian at Church Point that a 
portage existed from a small brook, apparently Cowassiget, to the 
Portage River; but his knowledge of the subject seemed to me too 
uncertain to be trustworthy. 

The portage from Tracadie to Pokemouche, which I find is known 
by tradition to residents in the vicinity as well as to the Indian Joe 
Prisk, ran from near the extreme head of Tracadie Bay across a low 
country, less than two miles, to the Southeastern extremity of the 
South River of Pokemouche as shown in the map in my edition 
of Smethursts narrative. Very near the head of Tracadie Bay is 
a little brook, up which a canoe can be pushed through a marsh, 
and where probably the path started. The South River ends in an 
extensive bog, just before reaching which as one ascends it is a tiny 
cove coming close against the upland on the south, and here I think 
in all probability was the other end of the portage. The old path, 
which is said to have been about two miles long, has vanished 
here also, being replaced by the road from Green Point settlement, 

q near by, to the Pokemouche waters. This route, no doubt taken 
by Smethurst in 1761, would be that followed by travel- 
lers going up the Pokemouche waters; if simply proceeding along the 
coast they would of course go along the shore outside if weather 
permitted, and if it did not, they could carry along the beach from Tra- 
cadie Bay, past Green Point settlement, and I have been told both by 
an old resident of Green Point and by an Indian that Indians travelled 
that way in former times. But it is possible that yet another early 
portage existed between Tracadie and Pokemouche waters, for 
early plans name the brook now called Peters Brook, Waganchitch, 
which means “the little portage,” though others mark it as Indian 
Cove. Possibly however the name refers simply to the early portage 
road cut from Caraquet to Tracadie, which crossed the Pokemouche 
here and continued up this cove. 

From Pokemouche to St. Simon there appear to have been at 
least two portages. The westernmost was that which I have worked 
out (and mapped) theoretically as extending from a branch of 
Waugh River to River Brideau, probably that taken by Smethurst 
in 1761. Its course is marked upon the map in my edition of Sme- 
thurst’s narrative. 

I have since been able to examine this route at both ends and 
I find that an old portage road, said locally to have been 
made by a lumberman named Welmer, and still partly in use, 
starts from the Western extremity of the branch of the Waugh 
and extends across over open barren and through woods two miles 
or more to the River Brideau, which it reaches as shown on Map 
No. 23 This seems to be the road locally called “ Pokemouche Port- 

Sec. 11., 1906. 7 


98 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


age” I think it wholly probable that this road follows the general 
route of an early Indian portage though I have not been able to 
confirm this either from residents or from the Indians at Bathurst. 
The other led from the lower Pokemouche to the South Branch of 
St. Simon. I was told by more than one old resident that it crossed the 
open barren from the part of Pokemouche Bay called on the maps 
Musquash Cove to St. Simon; but Joe Prisk told me that he has 
used it in early days, and that it ran from a cove near the Ferry (viz. 
the present highway bridge), followed the present highway to opposite 
St. Simon waters, and then turned directly down to the latter. We 
probably have here another case of the early abandonment of the 
original Indian paths when the first roads in their vicihity were 
built, as earlier discussed, and it is altogether likely the original 
path was by the shorter route from Musquash Cove. It is possible 
that there was also a portage into Little Pokemouche, for use in 
travelling along the coast, and perhaps one extended from Little 
Pokemouche into St. Simon. 

From St Simon to the Caraquet region travel was no doubt 
chiefly along the coast by the sheltered route of the Little Pass. 
(Map No. 33). But for reaching the upper part of St Simon from 
Caraquet, the Indians appear to have had another route via the 
Portage Brook at the northern bend of St Simon shown on Fergusons 
map of 1820 (Map No. 33). Upon another old plan in the Crown 
Land Office, one of 1832, a path, or road runs from Caraquet directly 
south to this brook, and beyond it tothe L. Mailliou lot, and very likely 
represents in part the original portage path. The path seems now 
abandoned, but apparently ran somewhat east of the present railway. 
The route, however, could not have been much used, or it would no 
doubt have been taken by Smethurst’s Indians in 1761. 

The “portage” from Caraquet to Pokemouche, making those 
places three or four leagues apart, mentioned by Plessis in his journal 
of 1811 (page 107) was of course not an Indian route, but a road 
or path through the woods made by the white residents, and it was 
probably along the route of the present highway between those 
places. Another early road of this kind, seemingly now abandoned, 
existed from Caraquet to Pokemouche River which it crossed at 
Peters Brook, and continued on to Tracadie. It was verhaps the 
presence of this road, and not an Indian portage, which gave Peters 
Brook its Indian name of Waganchitch or “ Little Portage.” 

From Caraquet to Bathurst the natural route of Indian travel 
would be, apparently, along the coast. But this isa very dangerous 
journey for a canoe because of the great cliffs, extending along this 
exposed coast, and excluding any possibility of landing for miles toget- 
her. It is not impossible therefore, that some route by way of the Cara- 
quet River and its branch Innishannon Brook, with perhaps Teagues 
Brook, may have been utilized to avoid this dangerous coast. But 
I have found no trace of such a route. 

But in addition to the route along-shore and through the lagoons 
from Miramichi to Nepisiguit, it is altogether probable there was 


[GANonc] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS? 99 


another route by way of the Tracadie River into Bass River or Tea- 
gues Brook. Such a route would be indicated by topographical proba- 
bilities as at least used in travel from Tracadie to Nepisiguit, though 
I have not been able to find any direct tradition or other such evi- 
dence for it aside from the unsupported statement in Slafter’s Cham- 
plain that such a route existed. As I have found by a trip of my own 
on the Tracadie, and as described, with a map, in Bulletin (Vol V, 
433) of the Natural History Society of N.B., this trout-famous river 
is readily navigable for canoes, with only a few short shallow reaches, 
completely to the extreme head, even the uppermost waters of the 
main stream being formed of meadowy deadwaters very easy for 
canoe travel; and it was no doubt more easy of navigation before 
the days of lumbering, as earlier noted. These deadwaters swing 
much nearer to Bass River (within two or 
three miles at most) than our printed maps 
show, and hence an easy route is afforded to 
Bass River, which however is said to be diffi- 
cult for canoe navigation at low water. But I 
have also found in my own visit, that the 
waters of the Little North Branch have this 
same meadowy character, and to a point 
which, as I have been informed by a lumber 
man who knows the region intimately, reaches 
within about a mile and a half of Taegues 
Lake, whence it isonly some six miles to the 
salt water. The little North Branch with 
Teagues Brook would thus form a shorter 
route than that by Bass River, and as well, 
avoiding a two-mile shallow reach above 
Little North Branch, it would form a much 
easier route. Very likely, it was thus used, 
though such a route now seems locally un- 
known. 

255B. Portage River-Gordon Brook. Important as 
this route was, it nevertheless appears not to 
be shown upon any existent map. Its general 
Jocation, however, would seem to be indicated Map No. 13. From A 
by the topography of the accompanying map MODERN PLAN; x 5. 
(Map No. 13) a copy from the Timber line 
map in the Crown Land Office. All the lower part of Portage River, 
as I have seen, is a very meadowy quiet stream mostly very easy 
of canoe navigation, and I have been told that Gordon Brook has 
much of the same character. The only direct mention of the route 
I find on any map is on the plan of the Gordon Grant, (shown on 
the map) of 1822, on which the brook flowing through this grant 
(which embraces extensive meadows) is named “Indian Portage 
Brook to N. W. Branch Miramichi,” while on the brook above this 
grant is marked “Brook to N. W. Miramichi,” showing that the 
portage started above the grant. Probably it crossed from the 
southerly bend of Gordon Brook to the angle of the N. W. Branch 
of Portage River. 

The course of the trail from Nepisiguit to the Northwest Miramichi 

by Emerys Gulch, said by guides to have been used by the Indians, 


100 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


256. A 


is shown on a map in the Bulletin of the N. B. Nat. Hist. Soc. XXII, 
216. Also I have found a note given me by the late Michael Flinne, 
showing apparently that the Indians knew of this portage, and had 
a name for it, which he gives as Hs-kut-da-gum-mooch-wa-ga-dik. 

The portage mentioned by Hardy in his Forest Life in Acadie, 
240, is probably that by Portage River. x 

It is also very probable there was another portage between these 
waters, for, as shown by the map just cited, there is a very 
short distance between the source of the Northwest Miramichi and 
the upper part of the South Branch of Nepisiguit. I have myself 
portaged through this way. (Bulletin of the N. B. Nat. Hist. Soc. 
XXII, 216). 
MS. plan of the disputed territory, by W. Anson, 1839 (1841) in the 
Crown Land Office marks a portage from Grand River to Restigouche 
several miles east of the ‘Wagan portage; but it is likely a mistake. 

The mention of a route from the Madawaska River to Bay 
Chaleur in Fisher’s “Sketches of New Brunswick,” 27, must be an 
error; such a route is only possible by a very roundabout course. 


256. The Green River-Kedgewick portage has been several times surveyed, 


and has been mapped with the greatest minuteness in connection 
with boundary surveys made between 1820 and 1842. Thus it is 
described fully by Tiarks in 1820 in his report embodied in the “ Case 
of the U. S. laid before the King of the Netherlands,” and it is 
shown in the utmost detail in the fine map of Green River made by 
the American Surveyors in 1842 (mow in the Department of State 
at Washington). 

There are references to the long portage between the Little 
Tobique and the West Branch of Upsalquitch in the Bulletin N. B. 
Nat. Hist. Soc. No. XXII, 180. There is an obscure reference to it 
in Baillie’s New Brunswick, 93. Mr. W. H. Venning has told me that 
it was formerly known to the Indians and that it reached the Little 
Tobique at the angle of that stream. 

I have also been told by a reliable Tobique guide, who knows 
the country well, that there was formerly ‘a place where they used 
to lug across,” starting ten miles up Big Cedar Brook and running 
across to a branch of Restigouche, he thinks Five-finger Brook, a 
distance of about twelve miles. 

The Indian name of Stillwater Brook on the Restigouche is Med- 
au-an-e-gan-uk, meaning carrying-place (containing the root, on-eg- 
un — a portage). This perhaps indicates a portage to a branch of 
the Southwest Branch Upsalquitch. 

The principal Nepisiguit-Upsalquitch portage, by way of Upsal- 
quitch Lake, is fully described and mapped in the Bulletin of the 
N. B. Nat. Hist. Soc. XXI, 77. 


257. The Patapedia-Metis portage and the rivers are fully described by 


Richardson in the Report of the Geological Survey for 1858, 119. 

The Touladi-Trois Pistoles route is mapped completely from 
Indian Reports on the valuable Sproule map of 1787 reproduced 
herewith (Map No. 14). 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 101 
Historic Sites. 


There was also a portage route from Lac des Aigles into the 
Touradif branch of the Rimouski, as shown by Greenleaf’s map of 
Maine of 1844, and by Tiarks account of his visit in 1820, in his Report 
in the “Case of the U. S. laid before the King of the Netherlands.” 

The Ashberish-Trois Pistoles route is fully mapped on the 
Sproule 1787 map, (Map No. 14). This map, in conjunction with 
Pote’s journal shows that Pote was taken to Quebec by this route, 
not by the Touladi route as the editor of the Journal supposed. The 
proof of this is found in the fact that they made a portage directly 


gt. ab 
fh op 
of ° i 
if ge 
Abe A 
dae? 
ge 
CR 
ie ni ni ù ct 
\ i 4 a 
at 
{ls oe £ ni) 
à Ho Rae 
; 12 a 
À 
nl rd AY e SY 
‘ ) 
a os 74 


River/S! Lawrence yt 
co, 


age < Ge) 


' 
Fold 


Map No. 14. PART OF THE SPROULE MAP oF 1787; x }. 


“om Lake Temiscouata, which is necessary by the Ashberish route, 
but not by the Touladi route; for the latter stream is, except for a 
small fall near its mouth, easily navigable at all seasons far up its 
course, as I know personally from having been along it. 

The portage on Greenleaf’s map of 1844 from the head of the 
west branch of Green River into Rimouski is a mistake. Tiarks 
went through that way in 1820 but his report makes it clear there 
was no regular portage. 


102 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


Baker Brook-Cabineau. The Sproule map of 1787 shows an 
“Indian sketch of a communication between the River Saint John 
and the Lake Tamasquatat,” via Baker Brook and Cabineau (called 
by him, Namjamscutcook). (Map No. 15). Two portages lead from 
Baker Brook into Long Lake, probably following the course of the 
portage road of the geological map, one apparently from Baker 
Lake and the other from Meruimticook Lake, by a route not known 
to me. Probably it was not used as a trunk, but only as a hunting, 
route, since it was as long as, and must have been much harder 
than, the very easy route by the Madawaska. 


Map No. 15. PART OF THE SPROULE MAP OF 1787; x À. 


259. Several of the portage routes between the upper St John and the St 
Lawrence were explored by the surveyors in 1816-1828 in connection 
with the boundary disputes, as shown in the abstracts of their reports 
contained in the ‘‘Case of the United States laid before the King of 
the Netherlands.” 

The Black River-Ouelle Portage is shown perfectly on a map in 
the State Department at Washington, running from near the head 
of the middle of the three branches of Black River (Raglan of Wil- 
kinson), through to a lake on a branch of the Ouelle. The same 
portage is shown less perfectly on Greenleaf’s map of 1844. 

“etarmejette. This portage is often mentioned in documents 
relating to the boundary disputes. Its location is approximately 
shown on Wilkinson’s map. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 103 
Historic Sites, 


262. St. Croix Island. This very important locality has been fully treated 
in the Monograph entitled ‘“ Dochet (St Croix) Island,—A Monograph ” 
in these Transactions, VIII, 1902, ii, 127. Some addenda et cor- 
rigenda should here be recorded. The page references following relate 
to the special Monograph. 

(128) This map, owing to misinterpreted local information, places 
Johnsons Cove too far north; it really belongs to the cove next 
south of it, while the one here called by that name seems to have 
no local name (129). I find on a subsequent visit that my map is 
not exact in outline of the reefs, though there is only one material 
error; I have made them broad just south of Wrights Nubble, 
whereas they are there somewhat constricted, expanding again east 
of the constriction, to form the part on which the Cannon Nubble of 
Champlain’s time stood. 

(142). At the Ter-centenary Celebration at the Island on June 
24, 1904, a resolution was proposed and adopted to call the Island 
henceforth by its original and historic name, St Croix Island. Cer- 
tainly this is most desirable, and I for one, will do what I can to 
aid it. But whether local usage can be changed is, I think, some- 
what doubtful; those who celebrate the four hundredth anniversary 
will be able to tell! 

(152) To the less important literature here cited may be added 
the account of the settlement in the “Stories of New France,” by 
Miss A. M. Machar, though the author apparently supposed that Navy 
Island near St Andrews was St Croix Island. Also I have seen 
another poem, inspired by the story of the island, published some 
years ago in a newspaper (identity and date not known to me) and 
signed C, H. A. which is really excellent. Literature of another kind 
was called into existence by the celebration of the Ter-Centenary of 
the island’s Discovery on June 25, 1904. A full account of the Cele- 
bration is given in the St. Croix Courier for June 30, and an Official 
account, with the various addresses and appropriate illustrations, was 
published in July 1905 by the Maine Historical Society, (Ter-Centenary 
of De Monts’ Settlement at St. Croix Island, June 25,1904. Portland, 
Maine Historical Society, 1905, 78 pp). Thereisalso valuable matter 
in Acadiensis for July 1904 (special Champlain number) for Oct. 1904, 
and inalittle Souvenir Programme issued at the time, at St. Stephen. 

(154) As pointed out in a review of this work in the “ Review of 
Historical Publications relating to Canada” for 1904, page 19, the 
boat in which the party explored the Bay of Fundy and discovered 
the Island should be called in English a “long-boat” and not a 
barque. It is shown, without doubt, in the picture on the map on 
page 157. 

(168) On the site of these gardens, especially on the Canadian 
shore, see under page 266 later. 

(169) The negro mentioned in the footnote is said locally to have 
been a smallpox victim, hence his burial here. 

(173) The “seventeenth” of March should read the seventh. 

(174) Lescarbot was in Acadia only one year,—1606-1607, not two. 


104 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


(182) In Haliburton’s History of Nova Scotia (I, 18, followed 
by Gesner’s New Brunswick 15) it is said that the chapel was “ built 
in the shape of a bower, the sides and roof of which were supported 
by living trees.” I do not know the basis of this statement and 
think it must be an error. 

(184 and 177) As pointed out by the reviewer of this Monograph 
in the “Review of Historical Publications relating to Canada” for 
1904 (page 20), I have mistranslated the word pardeca, thus making 
the “ Master William” pamphlets belong to St. Croix Island whereas 
they really were prepared in France. The Reviewer’s translation of 
this passage is as fq@llows:— “and they had not done badly to lodge 
themselves and clear the island before winter set in, while on this 
side the ocean [i.e., in France] news-letters were distributed over 
the signature of Master William, a farcis of all kinds of reports, 
wherein this prophet among other things reported that the Sieur de 
Monts was busy clearing his path in Canada.” In making my trans- 
lation I was puzzled by this passage, and turned for aid to Erondelle’s 
translation which reads “ whilst that in these parts pamphlets were 
set out under the name of Maistre Guillaume,’ etc. I assumed that 
these parts referred to St Croix Island, overlooking the fact that par- 
deça could not have that meaning. Hence it is clear that it was not 
at the St Croix island the ‘“ pamphlets” were circulated. I have em- 
phasized this error, unfortunately, in my address delivered at Calais, 
June 25, 1904, and published in the St Croix Courier of June 30, and 
in the Maine Historical Society’s Account of the Celebration. 

(184) The review above cited thinks the passage beginning “ For 
the malediction and rage” ete. probably means no more than a refer- 
ence to the cruel treatment which the European nations then meted 
out to each other when they met outside of Europe. 

(188) Under “amusing pamphlets,’ see the note under 184 and 
177 above. 

(191) It seems very likely it was Father Aubri (who had been 
lost for a time at St Mary’s Bay Nova Scotia) and a Protestant min- 
ister who were buried in the same grave at St. Croix Island. This 
seems substantiated by Lescarbot who says they had quarrelled 
about religion’ (Otis-Slafter, translation of Champlain, II, 20); note 
also Parkman, Pioneers of France, opening of Chapter 3 of Champlain 
part. 

(194) As pointed out by the reviewer above cited, the translation 
(taken from the Jesuit Relations) of qwil y estoit resté luy cinquiesme, 
is not correct, and it really means that Captain Platrier was spend- 
ing the winter there with four other men. 

(212) The tradition that Haliker was a resident of the Island 
receives full confirmation from the following entry in the Land Mem- 
orial Records of the New Brunswick Legislative Council, preserved 
at Fredericton. Under date Nov. 18, 1820 is the following entry;— 
“John Hiliker asks a letter of occupation of an Island called St. 
Croix, between the U. States of America and this Province, until 
wanted by Government.” It is endorsed ‘ Recommended.” it is 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 105 
Historic Sites. 


of interest to note that this was the same year in which the Island 
was granted by Massachusetts to John Brewer. Locally a legend of 
the Enoch Arden type is told of Haliker and his wife. 

(220) The wish here expressed was almost a prophecy, as evinced 
by the very appropriate and successful celebration held at the Island 
on June 15,1904. A very full account of the proceedings is contained 
in the Ter-Centenary volume published by the Maine Historical Society, 
as noted on an earlier page. It may be added that the inscription on 
the bronze tablet dedicated that day was composed, with some sugges- 
tions from the Committee in charge of the celebration and others, 
by Mr. James Vroom of St. Stephen, N. B. 

(221) As to the outline of the ledges near Wrights Nubble, see 
the earlier note under page 128. 


266. De Monts’ Gardens below Sandy Point. Beside a little rivulet south 
of Sandy Point a piece of land was cleared by De Monts in 1604 and 


Da CR Ÿ EV 7 De 
Champlain 2/04 


ne 


cette" 


Skelch — 130 


Map. No. 16. To SHOW THE LOCATION OF CHAMPLAIN’S GARDENS. 


THE UPPER IS FROM CHAMPLAIN’S MAP oF 1613 (x 8); THE LOWER Is A SKETCH BY 
THE AUTHOR, 1904. 


planted as a garden. The chief evidence as to its location consists 
of Champlain’s map, (reproduced in part in the accompanying Map 
No. 16), but unfortunately the map is not sufficiently accurate to enable 
the location to be fixed at once with certainty. Below Sandy Point 
there are actually two small valleys, (aside from a deep gully on the 
point itself), both dry in summer though having small streams in 
wet times, either of which might correspond with the stream shown 
on Champlain. After very carefully examining the ground, however, 
I have concluded the gardens were beside the uppermost of the two 
streams, and for these reasons. First, the ground beside the upper 
valley, which is larger than the lower, is a low gently-sloping up- 
land of excellent soil, now a good hayfield, while the corresponding 
ground beside the lower valley is a much higher, rougher, clayey and 


106 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


stoney pasture, much less fitted for a garden. The two cellars at the 
latter locality no doubt are relics of the first modern settlement of 
this coast, and have no connection with the little cabin shown on 
Champlain’s map. Second, it is readily possible to identify the point 
and two little rivulets shown by Champlain on the left of his map, 
(compare Champlain with my sketch in Map No. 16); if this iden- 
tification be correct, the relative distances mark the upper rather 
than the lower valley as corresponding to that shown on Champlain. 
In this case the lower valley is omitted from Champlain, where it 
should occur about in the cove just east of the cabin and letter N. 
In comparing however the outline of the coast it must be remembered 
that this shore has sunk several feet, probably five or six, since the 
time of Champlain, allowing the lower parts of the upland to be 
washed away and greatly altering the configuration of the shores. 
If now we suppose that a considerable section of the low upland just 
beside the upper valley has thus been removed, it would make the 
configuration agree much more closely with the map of Champlain. 
This would bring the Gardens in part upon the present beach as 
shown on the map, and I believe such was their true position. 


266. St. Aubin. The exact site of St. Aubin’s residence, (and consequently 


266. A 


the limits of his seigniory) is not known. The fact however, that his 
residence was at Passamaquoddy and that the name Passamaquoddy 
(see Place-nomenclature, earlier) applied originally only to the waters 
between Campobello, Deer Island and Moose Island (or Sewards Neck) 
would shew that it was in that vicinity, and not at St. Andrews or 
elsewhere on the Inner Bay. Hence it was likely at Campobello 
or Indian Island. 


statement made by James Boyd in 1763 (Kilby’s “ Eastport and Pas- 
samaquoddy,’”’ 106) seems to imply that French works existed on 
Digdeguash Island. But I have found no other reference to them. 

In the same work, page 138, there are references to possible 
early French settlement at Shackford’s cove near Eastport probably 
at the place so marked on the D. Owen map. 

The remains of French settlement on Indian Island are mentioned 
by Lorimer in his “ History of the Islands and Islets of the Bay of 
Fundy,” 74. 

The supposition that Gourdan and St Aubin were the same person 
is no doubt incorrect, since there was a Gourdan at this time in 
Acadia or Canada. 


268. The traditional breastwork at Sandy Point is fully described in the 


Courier series, XXX, note. 

An article in Scribners Monthly, XV, 449, (also in “Sport with 
Gun and Rod,’ published by the same company, Century Co., 172), 
mentions and figures a supposed old blockhouse somewhere in the 
woods of Charlotte Country, without doubt simply an old lumber- 
camp. 


[GANONG] 


ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 107 
Historic Sites. 


In the St. John Telegraph in July 1895 it was stated that the 
lighthouse keeper at Letite (Mascabin Point) found relics of French 
and Indians about his house; that in a valley near by there is an 
ancient burial place which has never been disturbed. 


269. The statement about the location of the settlement of de Marson is an 


error; he is here confounded with Martignon; the facts are given 
correctly on pages 277 and 309. 

A French post provided with provisions for travellers, appears 
to have existed at Grand Falls in 1756 (Rameau, Colonie féodale, IT, 
374). 

On the French Village at Kingsclear, compare Sproule’s map given 
later (Map No. 38) and also the mention of these villages in the 
Settlement-Origins, 132. 


270. The site of the Church of Ste Anne and of the French burial ground 


271. 


271. 


at Aucpac, Springhill, are still known locally, as I am informed by 
M. Mercure. Compare Raymond, St. John River, 145, 147. 

The Acadian Settlement at St. Anne’s Point seems to have been 
known to the English as Mercures Plantation or Settlement. (Coll. 
N. B. Hist. Soc. II, 160). 

Cleoncore, a name used on early plan for Eccles Island (see Map 
No. 38 of Historie Sites), and in the N. B. Council Records for 1788, 
was no doubt the residence of Sieur de Clignancourt about 1696. 
(Compare page 312 of Historic Sites). Rameau gives him as living 
near Aucpac (Colonie féodale, I, 322), and in a document among the 
Villebon papers in the Boston Public Library he is said to reside 
at a league from the fort at Nashwaak. 


French settlement appears to have existed at or near the Burton 
Court-house, as shown by a statement in M. H. Perley’s Lecture on 
New Brunswick (Educational Review, IV, 173). 


French Lake (Oromocto). As a result of a visit to this place in July, 


1903, I was able to gather much information about the French settle- 
ments from the residents. The lake is very attractive, surrounded 
by gently sloping upland all around except on the west, where inter- 
vale separates it from the Oromocto. The reputed site of the princi- 
pal French settlement is as noted in the accompanying map (Map 
No. 17). The residents here point out not only the general site, but 
an exact spot traditionally called the site of the church (where 
faint outlines of a possible foundation may be traced), and another 
(now occupied by a great heap of stones) called the old French burial 
ground. Many relics have been found here and in the vicinity, such 
as dishes, blacksmith tools, bullets, coins, ete. These places, located 
by a simple survey in relation to existent buildings and to the great 
mill chimney (the mill burnt a few years ago) are shown by the 
accompanying map (Map No. 18). All probabilities seem to me to 
favour the correctness in general of the local tradition. A curious 
double line of stones running from near the church site towards 
the shore is of origin not known locally, but is probably modern. 


108 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


The “ marked stone ” shown on the plan is a supposed Indian carving 
mentioned earlier in this paper. Further. about a mile from the lake 
is another reputed French settlement called locally French Ridge, (see 
Map No. 17) where various relics, French and Indian, have been found, 
Further, according to a resident (Mr. T. E. Smith), “ about twelve 
miles from the mouth of the Oromocto there seems to have been an 
attempt [by the French] to bridge that river with stones, which are 
visible to the present time, and what is the most curious thing there 
are no stones within five miles from the place where the attempt was 
made.” The site of the “French bridge” was marked for me by a 


aa on 5 
French Bridge (*) 


Map No. 17. COMPILED BY THE AUTHOR. 


resident (Mr. Leslie Carr), as shown on the accompanying map (Map 
No. 17), but as Mr. Carr wrongly applies the names “Bass Creek” 
and “ Three-tree creek” to the streams just above, and as Mr. Smith 
places it at twelve miles from the mouth of the river, it is more likely 
its correct position is as shown on the separate cut on the Map No. 
17. There is also a local tradition that the French fought the English 
on the Oromocto below French Lake, and Mr. Carr has marked the 
reputed place on the map. This tradition fits in perfectly with a 
newly-discovered reference to an encounter between French and 
English described in Sergeant John Burrell’s Diary of 1759, recently 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 109 
Historic Sites. 


reprinted in Acadiensis (V, 291). Burrell was stationed at Fort Fred- 
erick, and his diary reads thus. 

Wednesday 5th [Sept. 1759]— 
our Cornel with two Captens and three Lewts and two Ensn. about 
85 men went bye ye River this night. Tuesday 11th ye Cornel 
Returned with ye party of ye Scots up the River brought but a little 
Plunder for they were beat by ye enemy firing upon ye party as they 
were in a smali creek and kield Ensn. Tirrell and Corporall Shelden, 
John Ells, Eleser Paks, and Elishu Randell, total 5, and wounded at 
ye same time Lewt Foster, Leonard, Commins, Isaac Palmer, Vine 
Turner, Ebenezer Kers, Solomon Maker and Isaac Torrey Total 7—all 
of Capt. Parker’s company and one man of Capt. Garrashs. 

It is not, of course, certain that this encounter occurred at this 
place on the Oromocto, but considering the local importance of the 


Scale 
00 yas = {inch 


Hilliard ; 
Hovse f French 
Lake 


… £rench JM, 
LE Raich td 


Chimney 


tle 


Carr age © 
Hovse French 
:_ Borial Ground 
7 Sile 


Carr 
House 


Map No. 18. FROM SURVEY BY THE AUTHOR. 


event and that this is the only place to which such a tradition now 
attaches it seems highly probable, in which case it was probably the 
residents of French Lake who thus attacked the English in defence 
of their homes. 

The Oromocto is navigable for large boats to above the Forks on 
both branches. Hence it is very likely the French settled in the 
retired position near the Forks, but I have no evidence of it. 


271. French Lake, (next Maquapit). The sites of the French settlements here 
have been studied by Mr. Duncan London, of Lakeville Corner, and 
he has had the kindness to send me sketch-maps, from which the 
accompanying map (Map No. 19) has been compiled, showing their 
approximate locations, and some information about them. He says 
there were two French settlements on this lake. One was half a 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


110 


Historic Sites. 


‘6L “ON AVN 


UODPUOT uvzuNG 
Ag dou yojays D way 


SJUIMY PIG YIUIL I LIULO J va 
52715 CUL7 UDIPUT ++ 


leads 
T'UDIPUT. :: 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 111 


Historic Sites. 


mile from Lakeville Corner and consisted of eight or ten dwellings. 
The outlines of those sites were plainly visible a few years ago. The 
other was in the middle of French Island and was of abort the same 
number of dwellings, which were disposed in a semi-circle around a 


well. “This well I have examined carefully and it seems to ‘have 
been filled within a few feet of its top by its owners before they 
fled.” He also says that cannon balls have been picked up on the 


shores of French Lake, and that he possesses a twelve-pound shot 
found there many years ago. No record exists to explain the pre- 
sence here of these shot, but Mr. London says there is an Indian 
tradition that *‘ Yinghe ” (Col. Church?) 
fired them at the inhabitants here, 
while sailing up the river. But the 
distance from the St. John is beyond 
_the range of the cannon of that day. 
Mr. London adds that he knows of no 
other French sites in that vicinity, but 
in the Crown Land Office there is an 
early plan which shows some distance 
up Little River, emptying into Indian 
Lake) this inscription.—‘“‘old chimneys 
and a high rock,” which may indicate 
French houses. 


272. Swan Creek. Concerning French relics 
at this place, Mr. London sends me the 
following information, illustrated by a 
sketch map herewith reproduced, (Map 
No. 20). He lived here in his boyhood 
and knows the locality well. He says 
that his father knew a place up the 
creek, (not known certainly to Mr. 
London), where the French had a black- 
smith shop, as shown by coal cinders, 
old files, pieces of steel, scissors, tongs, 
etc. Also he found in 1858 the remains 
of a sunken vessel reputed French, at 
the place marked onthe map. Further, ees 
a few years ago Mr. Amasa Coy, of Map No. 20. 

Upper :Gagetown, found half a ton of 
iron and steel instruments near the place marked “French Relics” 
on the plan. 


272. Coys Lake. Mr. London writes me there was also a French site at the 
head of Coys Lake said to be well defined at the.present time; I have 
not been able to obtain further information about it. 


272. The Mistake. I have been told by my grandfather that re has himself 
seen an old wreck near the head of the Mistake, reputed French, 
from which many relics have been taken. 


112 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


271. Emenenic, the winter village of the French on the St. John in 1611-1612 
mentioned in the Jesuit Relations and elsewhere. (For an account 
of events there see Raymond’s “St. John River,” 20, 128; Jesuit Rela- 
tion, Thwaites’ ed., II, 27). We know that it was on an island, and 
the fact that the Indians to-day call the three islands at the head of 
the Long Reach Ammenhennik identifies it as on one of them. But 
hitherto its site has been unknown. In July 1903, in company with 


2/029 


À 
= 
x 
à 
> 
5 
a 
" 
mS 
$ 
È 
D 


Map No. 21. FROM OWEN’s MAP OF THE LOWER ST. JOHN, 1846, x 3; 


WITH ADDITIONS. 


Dr. G. U. Hay, I examined the three islands carefully to see if their 
configuration and local conditions would throw any light upon the 
question of the site of the village. Fosters (also called Jones Island 
or Isles of Pines) and Rocky Island connected with it by a bar, seemed 
to offer very indifferent situations; for a good site for houses, a good 
landing beach, a spring (here important since the river water is 
brackish), and a sheltered cove for anchorage, occur nowhere together. 
But on Catons island, at the western point, there is a fair situation 


[canon] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 113 


Historic Sites. 


with a fine view both up and down river, at the place marked on the 
accompanying map No. 21. Here occurs a combination of advantages 
so great that in so far as such circumstantial evidence can fix a his- 
toric site, they fix the site of Emenenic here. At this place a long 
bar (more prominent than the map appears to show) runs off to the 
westward towards the mainland; but it ends abruptly, forming on 
both sides of it coves with deep water constituting an admirable 
sheltered anchorage. Further there is here a superb sand beach, 
springs issuing from the bank, and an admirable raised situation for 
buildings (on which now stands a house, the only one on the island). 
Further, the situation is one well-protected from the north winds 
by the lofty hills of the shore, here close to the island, and it slopes 
towards the southwest, a desirable situation for winter. The situation 
commands also a view down the entire length of the Reach. It is 
in all ways a charming, convenient and advantageous situation and far 
in advance of any other situation on the islands for a winter settle- 
ment, and I do not doubt it was the site of the village of Emenenic. 


271. Butternut Ridge and Canaan. Reputed French settlements occur here, 


271. 


272, 


It 


described thus by Dr. B. S. Thorne of Havelock:— “about one mile 
and a half North-East of the old Portage at Butternut Ridge (see Map 
No. 7), on the farm of Mr. Howard Hicks there has been a French 
clearing and garden: they have plowed up various implements, 
among them a cannon ball. At the end of the Portage at Canaan there 
are four or five hundred acres of intervale where they had gardens 
planted, with plum, gooseberry and currant bushes.” 


is locally believed that Longs Creek, Washademoac, was first settled 
by the French. I have been told by Mr. A. N. Vincent, a former resi- 
dent who knows the region well, that the first settlers found there 
at a place about half way up the present settlement, the remains 
of an old French house, clearing and stable. 


French Village, Hammond River. The history of this Acadian settle- 


ment is given in the settlements Monograph. Through a kind cor- 
respondent, (Mrs. Noble Beatty, of French Village) I have endeavoured 
to find what traces of this settlement still remain. She tells me that 
the site of their old burial ground is known, upon the Ford place 
about two miles from Nauwigewauk Station, in the situation shown 
on the accompanying map (Map No. 22). This burial ground, 
according to a statement in Acadiensis, (VI, page 98 of Supplement) 
is now on the Provincial Stock-farm. The sites of their houses are 
known in a number of places along Hammond River, and particularly 
at the places marked on the map. The name of the lake, Jerreo 
(viz. Therrieau) Lake, is of course another remnant of their presence. 
An old plan in the Crown Land Office shows the lots occupied for 
a time by them before they sold out to their new English neigh- 
bours and moved away to Madawaska. (See under this name in 
the Settlement-Origins). The village is shown, but in exaggerated 
and conventional manner, on the R. Campbell map of 1788. 
Sec, II., 1906. 8 


114 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites 


272. Many relics, reputed French, have been unearthed from time to time 
in Carleton. An early newspaper article I have seen, containing 
the reminiscences of an old resident, James Lane, “ dictated to I. Allan 
Jack, Apr. 27, 1867,” relates—‘“I saw at one time on the 
present site of Mr. Adams mill forty boxes washed up, evidently 
coffins. Old Mr. Belyea, in the neighbourhood, dug up in his 
garden two or three bodies, some pipes, a stone hatchet and 
Fay | Feabbalae? This mill was situated somewhat north of Union 
Street opposite Guilford Street. More specific is an article in 


French Village 
and VICINI 

froma Map of /F62 

0 / 2a 


Scale o miles 
-. pighways 


Map No. 22. 


the St. John Globe for Oct. 5, 1889, which mentions relics found 
at the Old Fort “last fall,” and adds, “ King Street, directly above 
Middle, a short time since was graded, and during the operation the 
workmen came upon an old graveyard, presumably one of the French 
where a large number of bones were exhumed. Not long after that 
a heap of French army swords were come upon near the same spot.” 
This discovery, of the bones is confirmed by one of my relatives in 
Carleton who himself saw them. Happily we have more definite 
information as to the site of this burial ground. In the City Chamber- 


[ GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 115 
Historic Sites. 


lain’s Office at St. John are two plans which show its site, and both 
are reproduced, reduced, in Figure 23. Plan A is from George Sproule’s 
plan of 1785 of Carleton, and shows the site of the “French Old 
Burying ground, “ before the locality was disturbed by modern changes 
The position and form of the burying ground, which probably stood 
upon a knoll, show that it was then being washed away by the sea, 
a fate which has overtaken many low-lying places on our steadily 
sinking coast; and it was no doubt much higher and larger in the 


Map No. 23. EXPLAINED IN THE TEXT. 


Acadian Period. The plan B is roughly sketched from another plan 
in the same office. The form given here to the Burying ground shows 
that it really swung towards Middle Street and under Union Street 
as well. Comparing this with C which is from the Admiralty Map of 
1844, and this in turn with the modern map D, and taking account of 
the remains found on King Street above Middle as mentioned above, 
it would seem plain that the Old French Burial-ground occurred 
about where King, Union and Middle Streets meet, and extended 


116 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


thence northward and eastward much as indicated by the dotted 
area on D. Thus it appears that it must originally have been of 
considerable size, and it no doubt occupied a low~-knoll well above 
the tide in the Acadian period. Moreover it is the only French burial 
ground anywhere around the harbour, witha possible exception men- 
tioned below, of which any record or tradition whatever remains 
to us, another fact emphasizing its importance. Hence it was in 
all probability here that the prominent French officials who died at 
St John, including both La Tour and Governor Villebon, and perhaps 
earlier Madam La Tour also, were buried. 

It is however barely possible that a French Burial-ground existed 
also at Portland Point, though the evidence is very scanty. A note 
in one of Moses Perley’s lectures, along with his mention of the 
French Fort at Portland Point, speaks of skeletons there — (These 
Trans. 1891, ii, 68) 

Again in the St. John Globe of Sept. 18, 1887, there is an account 
of the finding of nine swords and two axes in excavations made on 
the north side of Water Street in Carleton, just below Mr. Uriah 
Drake’s house, and the suggestion is offered that this may be the 
site of “a part at least of Charles La Tour’s fort.” This location 
however was apparently occupied by a blockhouse in 1763, as shown 
by the important Map No. 36 later in this paper, thus affording an 
explanation for the presence of those relics. 

The former presence of the French at Musquash is confirmed by 
a statement by Chas. Morris in 1762, who says (Archives, 1904, 297),— 
“Musquash Cove and a River—here lived about a dozen French fam- 
ilies who existed chiefly by a Trade with the Indians.” 


276. The traditional old fort at Harding’s Point mentioned on this page 


is likely the same as an ancient work, which has recently been discov- 
ered by Dr. Silas Alward of St. John at Gregorys (Hardings) Point, 
a commanding bluff opposite the mouth of the Nerepis. Dr. Alward 
has been kind enough to send me a description of the work, which 
he is later to study more thoroughly. After speaking of the stra- 
tegic position of this conspicuous bluff, which commands the Reach 
above and the River below, he says;—On the side of the hill a short 
distance from the shore “ we came upon a finely constructed ram- 
part of large rocks or boulders, in which was not to be found a single 
breach. It was in places four feet in height and about the same 
width on top. It evidently had been constructed with great care...... 
it is four hundred and fifty feet in length....it was moss covered...... 
it had apparently been scientifically constructed. How the large 
boulders had been carried up the steep side of the hill excited our 
surprise. Its site is now marked by a dense growth of trees........ 
I made enquiry of residents of Woodman’s Point and they had never 
heard of it.” It is possible that this represents some military work 
of the Acadian Period, perhaps an accessory to help Fort Bois- 
hébert to hold the river, or perhaps it was the battery erected in 1755 
by Boishébert at the Narrows, as mentioned by Raymond in “The 


ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS aly 74 
Historic Sites. 


[GANONG] 


St. John River, ” 118, though as Mr. Raymond points out, this battery, 
was more likely at Nid d’Aigle above the Belleisle (Historic Sites, 275). 
a French post was established on the St. John 
in 1749 at a location suggested in an article in the “ Gentleman'’s 
Magazine,” July 1750, 295. After mentioning the well-known exped- 
ition of Capt. Rous to the St. John in the Albany sloop of war (des- 
cribed in Murdoch’s Nova Scotia, II, 153) it adds,— “on his return 
we found that the French had attempted nothing near the mouth of 
the river; but that they were about to secure themselves at some 
considerable distance from it,ata place the French Governor claimed 
as the southern boundary of Canada or New France. This being 
in a country inhabited by Indians, and the navigation of the rivers 
being unknown to most of the English, nothing further could then be 
The southern boundary of New France here mentioned is 


It is possible that 


done. ” 


no doubt that explained in the Boundaries Monograph page 216; 


it was the line drawn through about 46° on the D’Anville map of 
Hence the 


1746 which would cross the St. John near Fredericton. 


| 
g 


) 


vis 
4) SINS) r 
Dp 
|: 


"nent 


~ < 2, 
È Cp = os 
ë Sp Eu Le. é : 
: FROGS Sn ani N 
3 —F ‘ =F as 
È & LS A aN À nud { 
Ra) =, 
8 à ie ey = N 
SN me EO K 
Re : ue Ê MAP OF PART OF 
gs a PETITCODIAC RIVER 
Ue 7 fo illustrate nie 
ie . Eee ‘storical Localities 
“te LT signifies marsh miles Histone cal 
UTE tl 


Map No. 24. CoMPILED BY THE AUTHOR. 


post to be established would probably have been St. Anns, though 
it may have been much lower, perhaps at the Nid d’Aigle or Etablisse- 
ment Frangois at the Narrows above the Belleisle. (Compare page 275 
of Historic Sites Monograph). It could not, however, have originated 
this post, since it is marked on Bellin’s Map of 1744. 


276C. Fort Nerepis...A reference in Casgrain’s edition of the Journal de 
Marquis de Montcalm (337) seems to show that this fort was called 


Sainte-Anne. He speaks of it as a poor little fort burnt by Bois- 


hébert rather than to allow it to fall into the hands of the English, 


282. By an old resident of Salisbury I have been told that the stream just 
above Salisbury is called French’s Creek, (Map No. 24) and that it 
was settled around its mouth by the French. I have examined the 
site; it seems a very likely situation for such a settlement, but I could 


find no evidence for it. 


118 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


282. 


» 


There was also a small French settlement in 1771 or earlier.a 
short distance up Coverdale Creek, as shown by the Calhoun diary 
published in the Chignecto Post, Dec. 7, 1876. He described a visit 
to an Indian settlement apparently at the head of tide, (which is at 
or near Salisbury), and then clearly describes going to Coverdale 
Creek “on the south side near the line of Hillsboro Township........ 
We travelled up this creek for a mile and a half ...... after going to 
the east side of the creek we saw some of the French Pirate houses. 
I was informed the French took a large schooner once into this bay 
and ran her so far up this creek in the time of spring tides that she 
never was got out again.” A sloop and schooner which the French 
had taken to “two different creeks near the head of the river,’ are 
mentioned by Moncton in his Report of 1758 (in the Collections N. 
B. Historical Soc., Il, 172, 173) though these were brought out. 

Another French settlement in 1771 mentioned by Calhoun as 
somewhere lower down the River, was very probably at Village Point, 
above Salt Creek. 

A MS. history of Hillsborough, sent me by Mr. G. D. Steeves 
of that place, contains this statement about the French settlements 
there;—‘‘ Major Frye of the Garrison at Fort Cumberland was sent 
with a vessel and several hundred men to take the Acadians dwelling 
along the Petitcodiac River. The expedition came to anchor at Gray’s 
Island. The French fled to the woods, and unable to capture them, 
Frye was forced to content himself with burning their houses and 
razing everything to the ground, including the chapel that stood very 
near the site of the present new Temperance Hall.” This agrees 
fairly with the account in Murdoch’s Nova Scotia, II, 295. 

In the Calhoun Diary of 1771 Gray’s Island is called Delatongs 
Island,—apparently its French name. 


Shepody. Since the “ Historic Sites” was published I have been able 
to visit and examine with some care the remains of French occupation 
at Shepody, in which work I have had the advantage of the aid of 
Hon. A. R. McClelan who knows that region so thoroughly. The 
various localities, as identified on the spot, are shown upon the accom- 
panying Historical Map of Shepody (Map No. 25). The site of the 
French Church is pointed out by residents with great positiveness, 
and I have no doubt with perfect correctness; the local name of the 
brook beside it, Church Brook, is the best evidence, the more espec- 
ially as no church has existed in this vicinity since the first permanent 
settlement. The church is said to have stood just to the east of 
Church Brook (which runs in a deep ravine or “ vault’), and south 
of the road, on a site now occupied by a house belonging to Mr. John 
Moore, and the old cornerstone of the church is said to be built into 
the cellar wall. Just behind or to the south of it is the reputed site 
of the old French burial ground, and certain hollows are pointed out 
as the sunken graves, and other graves are said to have been found 
under the present highway. Farther, south, a little east, on the margin 
of the upland near the marsh is a fine spring, locally called the “ Holy 
Spring.” The situation is a charming and commanding one, on the 


[aaxoxG] 


ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 


> 
yea 
Se 


Creek) 


Map No, 25, 


Trans. R. S. C., Sec. IT., 1906 
Historic Sites. 


= 
gril mound) 
ely = 


Historical MAP oF 


SHEPODY 


THE ORIGINAL SURVEY MAP OF /788 


=== DINED MARSH 
A DIKES 
<a. CLEARD UPLAND, 


Scale of Miles 


WITH ADDITIONS (SHOWN BY BRACKETS) 
== WILD MARSH 
IN 1788 


{p. 118] 


A tra, 


oué AD A 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 119 
Historic Sites. 


margin of the largest marsh in the region, near the natural landing 
place, and in the most likely situation for a first settlement. All 
the evidence is so completely in agreement that I have no question 
that the church stood here and this was the centre of the French 
settlement of Shepody. 

I have been told there was a French burial-place on Blueberry 
Island, the larger (and innermost) of the two small marsh islands 
between Riverside and Albert (the smaller is called Cranberry Island). 

Perhaps next in interest among the relics of the Acadian period 
was the burial.mound in which were buried the remains of the British 
soldiers killed in 1755 by Boishébert. The local tradition is that 
the English landing to destroy the church, were ambushed by Bois- 
hébert with Acadians and Indians, who, concealed behind the dikes, 
killed 30 of the enemy and compelled them to retreat. The French 
afterwards buried the fallen soldiers on the marsh in a grave so large 
as to form a considerable mound. I think there is no doubt of the 
substantial correctness of the tradition, though it may not be exact in 
details. Thus there exists an account of this affair in a letter written 
by Boishébert himself to M. Drucourt, Governor of Cape Breton, under 
date Oct. 10, 1755 (see Report on Canadian Archives, 1887, page 
CCCUXXVIII), which reads in abstract;—‘‘In spite of his efforts 
he was unable to prevent the enemy burning the houses at Chipody; 
but he pursued them on the following day and compelled them to 
take to their ships, with a loss of 45 men, left on the field, many 
drowned and 60 who reached the ship dangerously wounded.” The 
approximate site of this mound is well known locally, and as shown 
on Map No. 25; but it no longer exists, since a few years past it was 

/ washed away by the sea which is gradually eating into this marsh 
Some years ago, it is said, the mound was dug into by a Mr. 
Tupper (afterwards removed to the United States), and various art- 
icles such as buttons etc. were found, all in agreement with the reputed 
use of the mound. The situation is precisely adopted to the tradition, 
for the Five-fathom hole, off the north end of Grindstone Island, is 
the natural anchorage for vessels, so that the natural landing-place 
for an expedition against the church would be in the vicinity of the 
mound. Some further mention of this expedition, with the names 
of all the men killed, is given in the Willard Diary of 1755, of 
which a copy is preserved in the Town Library at Lancaster, Mass. 

The sites of French mills are pointed out at several places. The 
most interesting is at Tingley Brook (next east of Church Brook), 
on which, some one-fourth to one-third of a mile north of the high- 
way, there is a fine little fall of some 7 or 8 feet in a deep ravine. 
Some 20 yards below it there still lie in the brook-bed the two mills- 
stones, one of freestone (3 feet 2 inches in diameter and 5 inches 
thick, with the marks of the iron attachments) and the other, of 
which only one-half remains, of coarse granite. Traces of an ancient 
wooden trough which carried water from above the fall to the stones 
can still be seen. The arrangement was apparently a simple overshot 
wheel, and probably the tradition is correct that it was French, though 
of course it could possibly have belonged later. It is said that other 


120 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


ancient millstones exist on a branch of German Creek, and possibly 
still others on Beaver Creek at the head of the present millpond. 
Another French mill is said to have stood on the Horn Brook in Har- 
vey, and the big ditch called ‘‘ Cut Creek” is believed to have allowed 
boats to reach it, though the dam on this stream just above the pre- 
sent road is known to be of later origin. Dams on the tidal streams, 
said to have been made by the French for tide mills are reported 
in at least two places on the marsh creeks. Of course many 
French cellars are known in various localities and some early dikes 
are shown as French. It is also said that the bog beside the 
Shepody river above the present good marsh shows signs of former 
cultivation supposed to be French. Another interesting relic is that 
called the “French Fence,’ a structure built across a piece of 
open boggy swamp in the approximate positions shown on the map. 
The stumps of the slabs (pieces curved on one side and flat on 
the other) set edge to edge forming a very close fence, can still be 


Baptist 
Burtal grovnd 


The French 
Burial grovnd 


now a grain field 


CI Hovse 
Ola French 
Cellars Known in 


Tie Vic ni ly 


Map No. 26. FROM A SKETCH BY THE AUTHOR. 


seen in several places. It is difficult to surmise its use, for the labour 
expended upon it seems much too great to be thus explained. While 
all these remains are reputed French, it must be remembered that 
a good deal of diking and other cultivation was accomplished by 
the temporary Germantown colony between 1765 and 1770, and some of 
these works may have originated with them. 

Some mention of the occupation of the marshes near Cape Enrage 
by the French occurs in the Calhoun diary of 1771 (published in 
the Chignecto Post, Dec. 7, 1876 and later). He speaks of a marsh 
some two miles west of Cape Enrage, which had been improved by 
the French. This must have been the marsh on the first river east 
of Cape Enrage. Still nearer to the Cape was “a thick strip of woods 
which made a good defence to a fine piece of marsh, through which 
a small river runs about N. E. Here some of the French buildings 
stand, and judging by their barns they raise great crops of grain.” 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 121 
Historic Sites. 


This marsh was of course the remarkable strip running inside the 
Cape Enrage ridge. Later, in speaking of Haha, he says;—‘‘ The 
Haha River runs from S. W. to N. E. through a fine piece of marsh 
which has been improved by the French, and dykes could now be very 
easily repaired. There 
are two of the French 
houses standing yet, 
and some apple trees.” 


280. Prée des Richards no 
doubt was the village 
at Morice’s Brook at 
Upper Sackville, and 
was the Richart of 
Montressors map. I 
find also that the site 
of the village of Tinta- 
marre at Four Corners 
is wery well known 
locally, and about as 
shown on the accom- 
panying sketch map 
(Map No. 26). Itis be- 
lieved locally, and in 
all probability correctly, 
that the French church 
of Tintamarre, which 
was one of some im- 
portance, stood on the 
site now occupied by 
the Beulah _ Baptist 
church. 


284 and 290. Ihave made at- 
tempts to identify upon 
the ground the exact 
site of Pont a Buot, 
with results shown on 
the accompanying 
sketch map (Map No. 
27). There is only one 
stream, apparently, 
which can be the Ruis- 
seau a l’Ours of Fran- 
quet’s maps (Maps Nos. 
26 and 27 of Historic 
Sites), and its identity is 
made the more certain 
by the fact that here as 
on Franquet’s map, the Map No. 27. 
Misseguash (St. Mar- 
guerite) comes the nearest to the upland on the north. An inspection 
of the ground shows very clearly why the French chose this place 
for their bridge across the Misseguash. It combines the advantages 
of being the bend which comes nearest to the upland on the French 


MW dine 


DFE 


So 
om 
CSA 
x 
x 
foxy 
CG 


NU) AA a tan 


FROM A SKETCH BY THE AUTHOR. 


122 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


side of the river, hence making the bridge the more easily defensible 
by a post on the upland, and at the same time it is above the wide 
tidal part of the river, where it was narrow enough to be easily bridged. 
It was, however, no doubt much wider than it is at present, since the 
size of the present stream, which is little more than a ditch a few 
feet across, has been greatly affected by the digging of the “ tide- 
feeder” ditch many years ago, as well as by the larger canal; 
furthermore, from natural causes the tidal part of the river is moving 
all the time towards its mouth. Comparing Franquet’s map with 
modern conditions it seems very plain that the modern stream is 
much further from the bank there than in Franquet’s time, due no 
doubt to the cutting across of the ox-bow at this place. But never- 
theless the old courses of the streams can be traced, and about as 
shown on the map. This would bring the Pont à Buot about as 
marked though there is not the slightest trace of it in existence. 
Neither can the site of the post on the upland near by be identified,’ 
though the nature of the ground shows its approximate gosition. 


290. Memramcook. A memoir of 1750 by Léry mentions “A l’embouchure 
de la riviere de Memeramkouk,” certain buildings,—a bakery (bou- 
langerie) 10 feet square, a hospital (hôpital) of 18 and a house of 12 
(feet square), all of round stakes and covered with bark. It is pos- 
sible that this was the post at Fort Folly, (page 290 of Historic Sites), 
though it may have been on the site of Dorchester. 

The existence of a post at Meringuin in 1749 is shown by a 
Memoir of Father Germain of that year. He speaks of a great cape 
opposite Shepody where “ l’on faisait le garde dans le temps du dé- 
tachement à Beaubassin. ” 


291. The Indian Fort is mentioned by Gesner (New Brunswick, 141) who 
states that it is the remains of a fortification thrown up by the 
French immediately after the capture of Quebec. The local tradition, 
as told me by Judge Hanington, is that the works were “thrown up 
by the crew of a French frigate which wintered there in 1760. This 
vessel was bound to Quebec, but on learning of its surrender to the 
British in the fall of 1759, the Captain ran into Shediac and remained 
until the spring of the next year.” 

Some important information about Shediac in 1749 is contained 
in a Memoir of that year by M. Léry, for a copy of which I am indebted 
to M. Gaudet. After describing the port, in which vessels could not 
go farther than the Little island [Indian Island], he says that in 
1749 there was built at the port of Shediac a store-house of 20 by 
36 feet, a house of 20 by 24, two other houses of 20 by 30, and another 
building of 10 feet square. Unfortunately he gives no idea of the 
location of these buildings, though he adds, that at the head of tide 
two leagues up the river, where a road to Petitcodiac started, there 
was a house of 9 feet square, a storehouse of 30 feet by 24 of round 
stakes and covered with bark. He makes no mention of the fort 
established in that year by La Corne, and it is very likely the fort was 
nothing more than the former buildings palisaded. Early maps 


[Ganonc] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 123 
Historic Sites. 


mark the fort on the North side of the Shediac River near its mouth, 
but nothing is known locally of such a site. 

From the head of the tide on the Shediac River through to Petit- 
codiac there was a “chemin,” or road, five leagues long, which he 
describes as extremely bad. This was no doubt cut by the French 
for a horse and waggon road, in order to keep open a communication 
between Quebec and the posts on the Petitcodiac. A Memoir of 1749 
by Father Germain, however, speaks of this road as very good. 

The site of the first modern French settlement at Shediac is 
shown, as near the present Shediac Cape, on Des Barres map of 1781 
(Map No. 28a, B), and this site is confirmed by tradition. 


Map No. 28. From AN OLD Ms. MAP; x 3. 


291. Cocagne. The site of Belair, still locally known, was, as I have been 
told by a resident, about a mile above the present bridge on the north 
side. It was no doubt at the place marked upon the accompanying 
map (Map No. 28 from one in the Crown Land Office, apparently a 
tracing from DesBarres Chart of 1781) “ Cleared Land and Orchards; ” 
while the sites of several houses are also shown. 

On this same map two other settlements are marked. One, (on 
the portion in the upper left hand corner, of the map) was just 
north of the present Dixon Point. The other was in the present 
Robin Creek, and marked with the name, Mons. d'Yberville, of which 
I know nothing further. 


124 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


Another interesting Cocagne locality was the Rwisseau des Mal- 
contentes, where, according to Gaudet (letter), there was a temporary 
Acadian settlement after the expulsion. This is shown on old maps; 
it is the stream some two miles south of Dixons Point. 

A memoir of Father Germain, in 1749 has this mention of Co- 
cagne:—“ Cocagne....où havraient les bâtiments, goelettes envoyés 
a l’Acadie du temps des détachments.” 

The site of the first modern French settlement at Cocagne is 
very plainly shown upon Des Barres map of 1781 (Map No. 28a, C). 


Map No. 28a. From DES BARRES CHARTS OF 1780-81, x 4. A, NEGUAC; 
B, SHEDIAC; C, CocaGnE; D, RICHIBUCTO ; E, BUCTOUCHE. 


291. Buctouche. On the point between Black River and Buctouche River, 
as I have been told by the late Rev. Father Michaud, who knew the 
local history of Buctouche well, the ancestors of the modern settlers 
on their arrival in 1785 found traces of older settlement. These were 
remains of camps or houses supposed to have been made by earlier 
settlers “taken and exiled by the English,” the houses being said, 
traditionally, to have been burned. No doubt these were the homes 
of the Acadians who are known to have been settled at Buctouche 
in 1760. That this was indeed the site of the earliest settlement, as 
tradition asserts, is confirmed by DesBarres chart of Richibucto- 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 125 


Historic Sites. 


Buctouche of 1781 (Map No. 28a, E), which places here three houses, 
with none elsewhere about the harbour. Mr. O’Leary tells me, from 
his knowledge of the locality—‘* They seem to have occupied a small 
tract of level ground towards which the land falls sharply just south 
of the present road from the village. They were undoubtedly between 
the graveyard which occupies a fairly high bluff and the Chapel Point 
shoals at the land end of which is a small tract of swamp.” Father 
Michaud also described the old burial ground on Black River (see 
earlier, under Indian Period) as French, though Mr. O’Leary thinks 
it Indian. 


291. Richibucto. Additional information as to localities of the Acadian period 


292. 


In 


upon Richibucto is as follows. I am told by Mr. H. A. Powell of 
Sackville that a French vessel with cannon on board is said by tradi- 
tion to be sunk somewhere about the mouth of the Aldouane, from 
which it is possible that river takes its name. Again, just within 
the mouth of the Aldouane on the north side is an old burial ground, 
locally said to be either Indian or French. It is no doubt this which 
is mentioned by Cooney, 134, and as an Acadian village was said to 
have stood near, the burial-ground also would seem to have been 
French. Further, in documents of the year 1760, loaned me by 
M. Gaudet, I find it stated that in that year 11 Acadian families, 
68 individuals, formerly resident at Bay du Vin removed to Richi- 
bucto. It is altogether likely their settlement was on the present 
site of Richibucto, for Cooney, 134, states, “It is said, however, 
that before these events occurred, there was a French village, 
containing upwards of forty houses, situated a short distance above 
or in the immediate vicinity of the present Court House of Liver- 
pool” [Richibucto]. An early French settlement is also reported 
on Indian Island (earlier also called French Island), but this pro- 
bably refers to the ancestors of the settlers of the present Richibucto 
Village, who came here in 1790, 


The sites of the two principal Acadian settlements are shown 
upon DesBarres Map of 1781 (Map No. 28a, D). 


the Settlements Monograph, 37, 127, I have mentioned, on the author- 
ity of a resident, a supposed Acadian settlement above Doaktown. 
On further inquiry I find that the cellars etc. mentioned by him are 
identical with the hollows at the mouth of Clearwater, described in 
Historic Sites, 231. Others like them are said to occur also at the 
mouth of Rocky Brook. I think the tradition that these are French 
is probably in error and that they are of Indian origin. 


292A. Settlement of Richard Denys de Fronsac. The importance of this 


settlement, by far the most extensive on the Miramichi in early times, 
has led me to give much effort towards the determination of its site. 
And although I have not been able to settle the matter definitely, I 
have obtained some new data as follows. Most important of all is 
a document entitled ‘“ Vente de L’habitation du Sr. de fronsac Riuiere 
Ste Croix à Mrs. du Seminaire de Quebec,” preserved among the 


126 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


papers of Francois Grenaple in the Judicial Archives at Quebec, and 
for a copy of which I am greatly indebted to the Keeper of the Arch- 
ives M. Philéas Gagnon. This important document, which I intend 
later to publish in full with translation (probably in my series of 
Historical-geographical Documents in the Collections of the N. B. 
Historical Society), recites that the Sieur de Fronsac having offered 
the authorities of the Seminary of Quebec three leagues of land at 
the River St Croix (Miramichi) for a mission, that he (de Fronsac) 


Map No. 29. EXPLAINED IN THE TEXT. 


wishing to leave his establishment at River St. Croix for another 
place more convenient for his business, and that the said place being 
found very convenient for the purposes of the mission, as shown by 
the report of the missionary Thury, he [Fronsac] hereby sells to the 
authorities of the Seminary all his improvements (including buildings, 
clearings etc.) at the said place and also grants them there the three 
leagues of land of which the boundaries are described. Happily these 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 127 
Historic Sites. 


boundaries, in general features at least, are beyond dispute (compare 
the accompanying map, Map No. 29, and the original wording later 
under Seigniories). Beginning at Ruisseau corneille (in English Crow 
Brook), which the context seems to show can be only the present 
French Fort Cove, where a north and south line is established 
(apparently magnetic and not true north, as shown on the map), 
to run three leagues up the river called muminagan [the Micmac 
name of the Northwest Miramichi] which empties into the river 
St. Croix [viz. the Miramichi below the Forks], and equally along 
the south shore of the river, to a distance back of a league and a 
half on both coasts, limited by east and west lines, to include the 
tongue of land between the muminagan and the ristigouche [a variant 
of Micmac name of the Main Southwest Miramichi]. 

Thus the establishment of Denys de Fronsac prior to 1686 must 
have been in the near vicinity of the Forks of the Miramichi at 
Beaubears Island, and it must have been here, and not at Burnt 
Church that Father LeClercq found the fort in 1677 (Hay’s Canadian 
History Readings, 271). But exactly where was it? Now the Jumeau 
map of 1685 (given reduced in Map No. 29) places a flag on the point 
just on the north side of the entrance to the Northwest. On the 
other hand the Franquelin-de Meulles map of the next year (Map No. 
29) marks the small streamonthe south side of the river in Nelson 
as R. de Mission. If the mission was established on the very site of 
Denys’ settlement as would be likely because of the buildings and 
considerable amount of cleared land mentioned in the Document, then 
his settlement was beside this brook on the present site of Nelson. 
But it is at the same time possible that it stood on the north side, 
where Jumeau places the flag, the presence of which is otherwise 
difficult to explain. At all events in one place or the other stood this 
long-sought establishment of Richard Denys de Fronsac. 

But the matter does not end here. In the above-cited document, 
Richard Denys states that he is to remove elsewhere for the conven- 

* ience of his business. That he did not remove from the Miramichi 
is shown by two facts. First, he received a large seigniory on the 
north side of the river and bay in 1687, and second a Memorial dated 
1689 is extant in which he states that he is building a fort of four 
bastions, that he had built for himself a house of freestone, that he 
has 24 men employed at Miramichi, and that he has settled near his 
habitation there an Indian village of 80 cabins and 500 souls. Where 
now was this second establishment? In his work of 1688 St. Valier 
speaks of it as being at a very pleasing place called Miramichi, on 
the river of Manne at a league from that of St. Croix, and that near 
it is a place called in the native language Skinoubondiche. Now Skin- 
oubondiche can hardly be other than the Æskinowobuditch, the Indian 
name for Burnt Church. Hence it is very likely the River of Manne 
was Burnt Church river, which is not much over a league from the 
mouth of the St. Croix in Miramichi Bay. The presence of the Indian 
village mentioned by Fronsac would also confirm this since Burnt 
Church has been from very early times an important Indian settle- 
ment. Against this view I know only one fact. St. Valier (p. 32 of 


128 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


Quebec Ed. of 1856) in describing the place says;—‘“ Miramichy est 
an lieu fort agreable sur la riviere de Manne, a une lieue de celle de 
Sainte Croix; il y a un petit fort de quatre bastions formez de pieux, 
et dans ce fort une maison où Mr. de Fronsac fait sa demeure. Prés 
de la est un lieu qu’on appelle en language du pais Skinoubondiche, 
et nous avons pris aux environs les trois lieues que Mr. Denis nous 
a données pur notre Mission.” It would appear from this passage 
that Skinoubondiche and the Mission grant, and hence Fronsac’s 
establishment were all near together. Yet the locations of the two 
former seem perfectly plain, and the expression “ aux environs” was 
natural enough when the places were so near together in comparison 
with the vast stretches of wilderness which separate them from all 
other inhabitated places. Burnt Church has been from early times 
a very important Indian settlement. The probabilities therefore 
seem to me to point strongly to the vicinity of Burnt Church. To 
try to determine its exact position by tradition or remains, or in de- 
fault of that to examine the ground for hints of a physiographic sort, 
I visited the region in September, 1904. Extended inquiries of English, 
French and Indians in the region yielded no tradition of such estab- 
lishment, nor could I find any traces or knowledge of the existence 
of any stone building (Denys’ house of freestone) in the vicinity, 
excepting that the church burnt by the British in 1758 is said to have 
been of stone. The nature of the country, however, did make one 
fact plain, that for a long distance up and down this coast, there is 
no site to compare with the region about the mouth of Burnt Church 
River as a site for a combined trading, fishing and farming center, 
natural advantages proven by the fact that to this day the principal 
settlement and fishing center, as well as the greatest Indian 
settlement of all this region are situated here. The ground is more 
elevated and of better quality than for a long distance up and down 
the coast. The Burnt Church River is very rich in fish and game, 
making it a favorite center of the Indians, while the Salmon and other 
fisheries of Miramichi Bay and Portage Island (including the tradi- 
tional sea cow fisheries of Portage Island) are more accessible from 
here than from any other point. Further it was the site from early 
times of the most considerable Indian settlement in this region, and 
also was situated at one of the great junctions of Indian travel,—where 
the route along the coast and that up the Miramichi came together,— 
making it the natural trading center of this section. Every consid- 
eration derived from natural features would therefore locate it in this 
vicinity, and this locality is perfectly consistent also with every piece 
of historical evidence we possess. If in this vicinity, then where 
exactly? St. Valier tells us it was on the River Manne (presumably 
Burnt Church River), and near Skinoboudiche. Since Skinoboudiche 
was Burnt Church Point where the Indian village now is, this would 
seem to locate Deny’s settlement on the north side of that river. 
Hence I examined this locality with special interest (Map No. 30). 
It is now an open common belonging to the Indian reserve; it is as 
elevated, and as pleasing and extensive in its view, as Burnt Church 
point itself; it appears to have excellent soil, and is provided with 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 129 
Historic Sites. 


good landings on fine beaches, both from the bay and from the river. 
Various traces of former buildings show on the ground, though of 
course they may be much more modern than those we are seeking. 
Altogether the situation appears ideal for such a settlement as that 
of Denys, and I believe the probabilities based upon all available 
evidence all point to this site. 

It is of interest to note that another document of 1691 speaks of 
de Fronsac as being then a resident of his seigniory of Miramichi. 

It was here that Smethurst found French settlers in 1761 (Nar- 
rative, 13; Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc. II, 377), and others at Neguac (pp. 
16 and 375). Various French relics have also been found and French 
cellars formerly occurred on the Logie farm at the English Village 
of Church Point east of the wharf, as I am informed by Miss Kate 


Logie of that place. 


294. Bay du Vin. All local tradition, substantiated by still visible cellars, 
a burial-ground and sundry relics, goes to show that a French village 
of considerable importance stood in the Acadian Period around the 


Elevated land 

Possible site of 
the fat # 
Richard Denys 
de Fronsac 


5 
NS 
~ 
& 
» 
Pe 
È 
SG 
aS) 
& 
LS 
S 
© 


Map No. 30. SKETCH BY THE AUTHOR. 


present Gardiners Point south of the island This is no doubt the 
French Village mentioned by Cooney (31, 32, 33), though he undoubt- 
edly errs in ascribing to it so early a date as he does. The Baie des 
Ouines Village is mentioned in documents as the principal Acadian 
settlement at Miramichi in 1760. I have not myself been able to visit 
this site as yet, but Rev. W. J. Wilkinson of Bay du Vin has been so 
kind as to send me the following information about it. The settle- 
ment was about a mile in length: the old cellars can still be seen, 
including the foundation of an ancient blacksmith shop, and numerous 
relics have been found there. The site of the old church or chapel, 
supposed to have been the oldest on the Miramichi, is locally well- 
known; it is vacant and marked by a hollow and a heap of stones. 
Not far from it is the ancient French burial-ground, showing the 
graves. The French settlements at Lower Bay du Vin are well- 
known to be of later origin as shown in the “ Origin of Settlements ” 


Sec. II., 1906. 9 


130 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


Monograph. But there was also an old French Settlement, marked 
now by many cellars, etc., just west of John O Bears, or French River 
Point, probably cotemporaneous with if not simply an extension of 
that at Gardiners Point. Mr. Wilkinson tells me that a French settle- 
ment also existed on Bay du Vin Island, various traces of it having 
been found. On this island also is another locality of some interest, 
the old well examined by Bishop Howley on his visit in search of 
evidence as to the location of Vinland (These Transactions, IV, 1898, 
II, 97). A French relic of yet another sort occurs in the remains of 
the reputed French man of war sunk at the mouth of Bay du Vin 
River just below the present bridge. Mr. Wilkinson writes me the 
local tradition is that she was sunk there by the French themselves 
in order that she might not fall into the hands of the English. “ Div- 
ers have been down to her more than once in the hope of finding 
treasure. The last time was about twenty years ago.” This may be 
the vessel L’Indienne of Morlaix mentioned by Cooney (34) ‘“ whose 
remains are still lying a short distance from the mouth of Baie des 
Vents river.” But it is also possible that the local tradition is in 
substance correct, and that she or her captain, gave name to Bay 
du Vin. (Compare under this name in Place-nomenclature, earlier). 


295. Miramichi. In 1760, according to a careful enumeration by Sieur de 
Bezagier, (in documents mentioned under St. Simon below), there 
were 46 families (262 souls) at Miramichi, in three postes, of which 
one was at Baie des Ouines. Another no doubt included the families in 
the vicinity of Burnt Church, some of which were mentioned by Sme- 
thurst the next year, while the third which included a few French 
soldiers, was probably at French Cove or at Beaubears Island. But 
later in the same year he makes 35 families of 194 persons at Mir- 
amichi and 11 families of 68 persons at Richibouctou. 

The positions of the settlements of the founders of Neguac and 
Riviére du Cache are indicated upon DesBarres Chart of 1781 (Map 
No. 28a, A). 


296. There was possibly a small French settlement, antedating all the modern 
settlements, on Big Tracadie River just above the mouth of Nicholas 
River. Dr. A. C. Smith of Tracadie has written me that “ Fireplace 
cranes and a few other household articles were found years ago imme- 
diately above Nicholas Creek, on South side Big Tracadie River 
where Nicholas Richard now resides,” while at Fourniers Point a 
box containing writings was said to have been dug up about forty 
years ago. At the latter locality also was found a very ancient gun, 
now in the Crown Land Office at Fredericton. 


296A. Money Island (or Isle au Trésor). This little Island, in the eastern 
part of Miscou Harbor has a great local reputation as a place of 
mystery and buried treasure. This distinction it owes in part to its 
striking appearance, for it is of glacial upland elevated some six or 
more feet above high tide in a region otherwise very low, and partly 
to the fact that many relics have been found there, including gun- 
flints and crockery, silver coins, (which I have seen), an old pistol 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 131 
Historic Sites. 


handle, (now in my possession), and the striking religious medal, now 
in possession of Rev. Father Doucet of Lamec, described by S. W. 
Kain in Acadiensis, III, 96. Its surface is mostly wooded, but is 
bare at the southeast end where are some excavations seemingly 
old cellars, but largely if not wholly the work of money diggers who 
have left scarcely any part of the island’s surface undisturbed. The 
relics may possibly be entirely result of Indian occupation (see earlier, 
Indian Period), but their character seems to show that some European 
settlement formerly existed there, and I think it altogether probable 
that it was the site of the wintering establishment of La Ralde in 
1626-27. Thus Biggar, in his “ Early Trading Companies of New 
France,” page 128, in speaking of La Ralde’s operations at Miscou 
says; —" Several men were left for the winter at Miscou to barter 
some goods which he had not been able to exchange during the sum- 
mer. Although attacked by the scurvy, these managed to survive 
and doubtless presented La Ralde with a good supply of furs on his 
return in the spring of 1627.” Again (page 139) speaking of the des- 
truction of the fishing huts and other buildings by Kirke in 1628, 
Biggar cites a MS. in the Bibliothéque nationale to the effect that 
one of these buildings constructed by La Ralde was “un batiment 
contenant plusieurs demeures de planches doubles, dehors et dedans, 
fortifié de palissades tout autour.” We have no direct evidence 
whatever as to the site of this winter settlement, but considering that 
the only other early known sites about Miscou Harbour are otherwise 
amply accounted for (viz., the Mission of St. Charles and the fortified 
habitation of Denys, considered below), and remembering the par- 
tiality of the early French for forming their winter-settlements upon 
islands (witness that on St. Croix Island and Emenenic on the St. 
John) as places more readily defensible, and perhaps also as more 
compact and home-like than the boundless wilderness of the main- 
land, it seems at least probable that La Ralde’s winter settlement 
was on this island. 


296B. Mission of St. Charles de Miscou. My account of this site in the His- 
toric Sites was given before I had visited this region, and it is erro- 
neous. As a result of two recent visits, however, I have obtained 
very satisfactory data upon the subject. I found that near the south- 
ern extremity of the island, at the entrance to Miscou Harbour, (Map 
No. 31) there is locally known the site of a considerable early French 
settlement with an early reputed church site, and an old French 
burial ground. The various features of importance are shown upon 
the accompanying map (Map No. 31). The general situation is a very 
fine and advantageous one, close beside the principal settlement of 
Miscou Island. The ground here is elevated and commands a fine 
view not only of the Harbour but out over Bay Chaleur as well, at 
the same time making a church here very conspicuous from a great 
distance. It is close beside the anchorage for fishing vessels which 
run into the harbour and take shelter behind the long sandy point 
extending into the harbour, while a cove inside the point, with its 
fine gravelly beach, forms an ideal landing-place at or near high 


1382 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


water for boats or canoes. No place in all this region could on general 
principles be better situated for a Mission intended for the use of 
both Indians and French fishermen. There is at present a little Pro- 
testant (Presbyterian) church in the midst of the site, and beside 
it a modern burial ground, (see the map). Behind the church is the 
reputed old French burial ground, which, while cleared of the larger 
trees, has never been ploughed. The owner of this and the neigh- 
bouring property, Mr. John Marks, tells me it was known to his 
father as a burial ground and hence it was left unploughed when the 
land was first cleared. It is said however that fragments of old coffins 
have been found within the limits of the present burial ground, and 
a stone inscribed with a cross is said to have been dug up here in 
recent years. Some distance to the eastward of it on the open field 


: Uncultialeé Scale 


Present 4 G 
ree ac Waa So yards = Tinch 
/ eek Burial + / n 
if HUE) Ground Fees 
A 4 Yi 
4 pas 
ey | Reputed™; 
y ; ra : Present Large Cellar 
AS NO Da Protestant [C2] Reputea Site 
S tculévated): Church ¢ Mession Church 


3 
Hay Field È 
ce 
a 
Sa ndy Cove OS 
MAP to show > 
the location and the surroundings ~~ 2, 
s 
of the <a 
MISSION OF ST CHARLES DE MISCOU (cela 


wreayr Fim suTVey by WFGanong Sept 1904 


Map No. 31. 


is a large cellar, very much larger than that of any French house I 
have seen, larger than the foundation of the present church near by 
and this is the reputed site of the church. This I think is probably 
correct, for the situation, on the highest ground in this vicinity is 
the very kind chosen for a church; the cellar is much larger than is 
ever found with the old French houses, and the station is very much 
too far from the water for that of a business establishment. Further, 
its east and west position is wholly in harmony with the usual orien- 
tation of Roman Catholic churches. 

Scattered about in the vicinity of this site, and over towards the 
present settlement, are various French cellars, of which Mr. Marks 
tells me he knows at least fourteen, from some of which typical 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 133 
Historic Sites. 


French relics have been dug, and all of which were here when Mr. 
Marks’ father first cleared this land. 

Taking all the evidence together, the positive facts, the traditions, 
the probabilities, the lack of a competing site, I think it is probable 
almost to certainty that here stood the Mission of St. Charles de 
Miscou. 


298C. Denys’ Settlement on Miscou Harbour. The account of this site given 
in my Historic Sites, based entirely upon hearsay, is imperfect and 
in some degree erroneous, though its approximate location is correctly 
given. In September, 1904, I was able to 
visit the locality and study it in person, Miscov Harbor 
with the following satisfactory results. 
The site is well-known locally and is not 
yet entirely, though it is nearly, washed 
away. It is situated on the south side of 
Miscou Harbour as shown on the accom- 
panying map (Map No. 32). The line of 
upland is sharply marked from the beach, 
by a sloping bank some two or three feet 
high. A large cellar (about 12 feet across) 
is about half on the beach and half in the Property 
bank, and around it is a low embankment, 
a foot or two above the general level but of 
an outline too indefinite to map exactly. 
This is all that can be seen at present. A 
large number of relics have been found on 
the site within the memory of residents, 
including not only the pitcher or flagon 
mentioned on page 299, but lead pipe, 
copper kettles and other objects. It is 
locally called the ruins of a “‘ fort,” and it is 
not known to whom it belonged, though it 
is believed to be the remains of an estab- 
lishment of considerable importance. It is 
said also to be merely a fragment of 
its former extent; and, so rapidly is 
this coast sinking and being washed 


Map 32. SURVEY BY THE 
AUTHOR. 


away by the sea, it will be only a few years before every trace of it 
will have disappeared entirely. That these remains are a part of 
Denys’ establishment I believe there is no question. We know from 
Denys’ own narrative that his establishment was on the south side of 
the harbour, and this is by far the best situation on all the coast,— 
in fact almost the only really eligible situation on the south side. 
The ground here is more elevated than it is for a long distance east 
or west, and the soil is also better, a point of some consequence, for 
Denys speaks especially of his gardens. The outlook is wide and fine. 
Further, it has the best landing beach and is the nearest to the deeper 
water of the harbour of any locality on this shore, as evinced by the 
fact that the landing of the Miscou ferry is just in front of it. No 


134 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


situation east of it on this shore would be practicable for an early 
settlement because of the immense shoals which render landing 
extremely difficult, nor is there any equally good situation to the 
westward. All considerations appear to unite to locate Denys estab- 
lishment here. The ruin may represent the corner of a fortified 
“habitation,” while his gardens and the other parts of his establish- 
ment no doubt occupied the open fields behind and near it. 


299. St. Simon. The attractive Inlet of St. Simon is the seat of an event 
about which cluster confused local traditions, the historical basis of 
which has been hitherto obscure. Happily I have been able to clear 
up the subject in great part, if not entirely. The local tradition in 
brief is this. St. Simon was named for a French war-ship run in 
here and sunk to escape the pursuing English at the time of the naval 
events in Bay Chaleur (viz. in 1760); her crew wintered on the shores 
of St. Simon, and afterwards settled at Lower Caraquet and became 
the ancestors of the principal settlers of that place. This is in part 
confirmed by Cooney (180) who says the place (which he spells St. 
Simoi), ‘is said to have derived its name from that of a French 
Corvette, sunk there after the conquest of Canada,” and again (287), 
he speaks of Byron’s fleet taking in 1760 a French ship in Gaspé Bay 
and another in Saint Simon, the latter statement, however, being 
erroneous, as will be shown below. Locally it is agreed that the vessel 
was sunk some 300 yards off Birch Point in about the position shown 
upon the historical map (Map No. 33), and it is also said that some 
of her timbers can still be seen projecting from the mud at very low 
tides. The place where her sailors wintered is also well-known locally, 
and I have visited and examined the place and have seen some of 
the relics found there. Just west of Birch Point is a cove into the 
head of which slopes an open swale, once no doubt the valley of a 
little brook. On the west bank of the swale, a little distance from 
the shore, (Map No. 34), in a line between two newly built houses, 
is the camp site. It is a flat place now in a field, and here have 
been dug up from time to time for many years past various relics 
of a military sort, bayonets, bullets, knives, cooking utensils, etc. 
The ground was cleared for the first time about 1902, when additional 
relics, now preserved by the residents near by, were found. There ca: 
be no question that this place was once occupied by Europeans, ana, 
since there are no cellars, such as would mark an ordinary Acadian 
settlement, it is extremely probable the local explanation is correct. 
Further, there is a certain documentary confirmation of the tradition. 
On Ferguson’s map of St. Simon of 1820 (the basis of Map No. 33) 
occurs this inscription:—“ Anno 1760 here Capt. St. Simon a french 
Officer wintered with a small party from this event these two inlets 
are named after that gentleman.” This plan, it is true, applies the 
inscription on the point just east of Riviére Brideau, and as a conse- 
quence that point is called on some early plans Captain St. Simon's 
Point. But in view of the universal local tradition and of many relics 
found on the site above described, I think there is no question the local 
tradition is correct as to the precise site. There is, however, another 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 135 
Historic Sites. 


(South Branch) 


of earlics€ 


D 
= 
> 
. 
K 
S 
S 
S 
& 


of 


with later additions tn brackets 


Names written are these 
Seltlers 


Scale, about one mile & an tnth 


Se 
Ss 
Se 
È à 
~ 
WoL 
SA 
> 38 
ee LE 
Sx 
ae 
NS 
È 
"SE 
Ss 
> 
rx 


RLV Ok VS 93 
22024 2} 2) 


Based on a pla nO 


Map No. 33. FERGUSON’S PLAN OF ST. SIMON OF 1820 (* +), WITH ADDITIONS, 
(IN BRACKETS). 


186 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


locality at St. Simon locally believed to be connected in some way 
with the sunken vessel, and that is the Âuisseau la Chaloupe opposite 
L’Islet (Map No. 33) which is so named, the residents say, because 
the sailors of the vessel went up the stream in their long boat (whence 
the name) and wintered there, atasite pointed out near the road, 
though no relics have been found there. There is much confusion local- 
ly, and especially among residents at Tracadie, Shippegan and Cara- 
quet, as to the relations of Ruisseaula Chaloupe and the winter-camp, 
some believing that the wintering site was beside this brook, and 
others saying that the little swale west of Birch Point is called Ruis- 
seau la Chaloupe. It was only after visiting both places and interview - 
ing the residents that I was able to clear up this confusion. Itis how- 
ever unlikely that the crew of the vessel wintered in two different 
places and I think it probable the tradition as to Ruisseau la Chaloupe 


St Simon 


Map No. 34. SKETCH BY THE AUTHOR. 


has arisen to explain the name, which originated in some other cir- 
cumstance. 

We turn now to the historical evidence, of which one item has 
been given in the Ferguson inscription above stated. Another of 
much more importance I owe to M. Gaudet, our leading Acadian 
historian, who has kindly loaned me his copies of the several letters 
concerning events at Bay Chaleur in 1760 described in the Canadian 
Archives, 1887, CCXXII-CCXXIII. In a letter dated Ristigouche, 17 
Sept. 1760 written by M. Bazagier, acting Commissary to the French 
Minister, we learn that privateers were sent out against the vessels 
of the English, and among them one was described: —‘ Des parti- 
culiers de cette riviére [Restigouche], ont bien armé et fait sortir 
pour la course, mais depuis le 23 août, qu’ils ont mis à la voile, ils 
n’ont pas reparu. Ils ont une goélette de 35 tonneaux, armée de 47. 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 137 
Historic Sites. 


hommes, 10 pierres et 3 canons.” ‘This passage by itself would 
have little meaning were it not explained by another, in a statement 
of events at Restigouche, written Dec. 4, 1760 by Bezagier, which, 
reads;— “Les Acadiens armérent aussi une go‘lette, 47 hommes! 
formaient son équipage. Au commencement d’octobre ils firent à! 
la vue de Gaspé une bonne prise. Ils furent poursuivis par une fré- 
gate qui leur fit échouer leur bâtiment. Ils se battirent vigoureuse- 
ment à terre, et menèrent le tout à Chipagan où ils étaient encore 
à la capitulation’ [of Montreal on Sept. 8, 1760]. These passages 
seem to settle beyond question the identity of the vessel sunk at St. 
Simon,— she was not a French war vessel, but a privateer schooner 
manned by Acadians from Restigouche (where over 1000 Acadians 
were then in refuge), and it shows that she was run ashore in October, 
by her own crew to escape a pursuing English frigate. Hence she 
was not one of the vessels pursued by Byron’s fleet in July of that 
year, as Cooney thought. The fact that she was manned by Acadians 
explains another fact which has puzzled me much, namely that al- 
though there seems to be an agreement that her sailors later settled 
at Lower Caraquet, practically no names other than those of typical 
Canadian and Acadian families occur at that settlement. 

But one point remains to be noticed, whether the name St. Simon 
applied to the vessel, as Cooney and the general local tradition says, 
or to her captain, as Ferguson’s note of 1820 affirms. Unfortunately 
M. Bazagier mentions neither her name nor that of her captain, al- 
though he gives both for the other privateers he mentions. In another 
paper of the same series, however, (a letter by Sieur Bourdon to the 
Minister, dated Ristigouche Oct. 11, 1760) it is said that Bourdon was 
to be commandant at Restigouche, along with the sieurs Niverville 
and Saint Simon. He then states that Niverville has a special post 
(which another paper shows to have been at Miramichi), but no men- 
tion is made of the duties of Saint Simon. Another note seems to 
show that he was at Restigouche Aug. 17, 1760 but he is not mentioned 
in a list of officers at Restigouche on Oct. ist of that year. It seems 
therefore altogether probable that he was placed in command of the 
privateer manned by Acadians, and that he was the Captain St. Simon 
who wintered with the men of that privateer at St. Simon, and for 
whom the place was named. I have been told by Mr. Andrew Wilson 
of Miscou, an aged resident well versed in all the traditions of this 
part of New Brunswick, that he had heard from the older residents 
that this captain in the spring (1761) made his way with a few men 
by land to Halifax while most of the crew settled at Lower Caraquet. 
It was no doubt some of these, with their descendants who afterwards 
expanded from Caraquet to St. Simon, and whose descendants now 
form the population of that place. 

299. Shippegan. In 1760, as shown by a statement of Bazagier mentioned 
above, there were five French families of 26 persons at Chipagan, and 
Smethurst in his narrative of 1761 states that Captain McKenzie has 
removed some inhabitants there leaving about six families, in one of 
whose huts he lodged. There is nothing positive to show just where 
this settlement was, but the context of Smethurst’s narrative would 


138 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


seem to place it at the mouth of Ruisseau la Chaloupe (Map No. 33) 
on the north side of the mouth of which old French cellars are known 
(Compare Coll. N. B. Hist. Soc. II, 370). But it may possibly have 
been near Pointe Brulé, where it is said a very early Acadian 
settlement was, the residents of which later moved to Shippegan 
Island and became the founders of its 
permanent settlement. Mr. J. E. Lan- 
taigne of Caraquet. well versed in local 
history, tells me he thinks this Settle- 
ment was near Birch Point, where old 
cellars are known. Just west of Point 
Marcelle is said to be a place where the 
ground has been marked over into 
squares, of unknown age and meaning. 


299. Caraquet. A document by Sieur 
Bazagier, in the series mentioned above 
under St. Simon, states that in 1760 
there were at Caraquet 36 families (150 
persons), in 3 villages. This would im- 
ply small villages at Upper Caraquet (at 
Little River) at Middle Caraquet (Chen- 
ards Brook) and at Lower Caraquet. It 
is, however, curious that Smethurst 
in his narative of 1761 does not mention 
any Acadian villages at Caraquet, aside 
from his implication that ‘old St. Jean” 
and his son lived there. Since Bazagier 
mentions no French at Nepisiguit in his 
careful enumeration of the French set- 
tlements here, and since Smethurst 
shows that the next year there were 
many French at Nepisiguit, it is possible 
that the French removed from Caraquet 
to Nepisiguit in large numbers late in 
1760 or early in 1761, very likely in order 
to be in a more retired position. 

2£9. Missions at Nepisiguit. An interest- 
ing new reierence occurs in Archives, 
1904, 338. 

300. Nepisiguit. Thecareful enumeration 
of the French settlements of this region 
in 1760 by Bazagier (see under St. Simon), 


ë gives no residents at Nepisiguit. Yet 
MAP No. 35. WESTERN SIDE OF NEPISI-  Smethurst found a large number in 


En GER 1761 (see Coll. N. B. Hist. Soc. II, 365). 
f Hence it would seem that late in 1760 
or early in 1761 Nepisiguit received a large accession of Acadian 
residents, either from Caraquet (see the preceding) or perhaps from 
Restigouche after the French had abandoned that. post late in 1760. 
The earliest settlers appear to have settled on the western side of 
the harbour, where they still occur in the greatest numbers. In this 
connection an early plan in the Crown Land Office, showing the dis- 
tribution of their settlement, is of interest (Map No. 35). 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 139 


Historic Sites 


300F. Nicolas Denys’ Habitation at Nepisiguit. This establishment was in 


existence in 1679 and apparently also in 1689 f®r in a Memorial of 
the later date by Richard Denys de Fronsac it is stated,— “ Teni 
years ago there was no other house than the one at Nepisiguit, with 
17 or 18 hired men and as many French settlers of every age and 
both sexes, with munitions of war and arms in proportion.” And 
later he speaks of eight Frenchmen then (1689) in his employ at his 
Habitation in Bay Chaleur, meaning, of course, Nepisiguit. 


300G. Enault’s Settlement. Additional evidence on this subject is given later 


301. 


302. 


307. 


307. 


309. 


312. 


314. 


under page 319 of these addenda. The document there mentioned 
speaks of Enault as a resident of Nepisiguit in 1691. 


Very full information about Restigouche in 1760 is contained in the 
Documents mentioned earlier under St. Simon. 


A very interesting subject still unworked is the assignment of the Bar- 
onies of Nova Scotia in the present New Brunswick. On these com- 
pare page 173 of Monograph on Boundaries, 


References to the French Seigniories occur in the Report on Canadian 
Archives, 1899, Supplementary Volume, especially at pages 285, 321, 
289, 326, 345, 368, 385, 389. 


Sieur St. Aubin of Passamaqoddy was not the Gourdan of Church’s 
attack, as shown by documents in the Archives, 1899, Suppl. 408, 421. 


As to the location of the territory of which Sieur de Martignon was 
governor, Dr. Hannay has shown me that it was not de Martignon, 
but his father-in-law, ie, La Tour, who was governor of the 50 lea- 
gues of country, and that hence the reference is to the grant of 1656; 
hence Mines was no doubt Minas, while Maquo would be some place 
on the Maine Coast, probably near St. Georges. 


The Seigniory at Soulanges in Quebec was not granted to the Sieur 
de Soulanges of Jemseg, but to his son. The former was dead before 
the year 1702, for in 1691 his widow received a seigniory at Jemseg 
(page 314). 

The Seigniory of Clignancourt, did extend from the Grand Falls to 
Meductic, as shown by a reference in a memoir by Cadillac, (among 
the documents in the Legislative Library at Fredericton) who, in_1695, 
speaks of this seigniory as extending ‘“ depuis la Sault de Medoctet 
jusqu’au grand Saut de la rivière St. Jean, les deux côtes de la riv- 
ière quarante lieues au moins de chacque côté avec trois lieus de 
profondeur. ” 


The statement by Rameau that Vaudreuil possessed the seigniory of 
Aucpac is confirmed by a note sent me by Rev. Dr. Raymond viz.,-— 
Jean Pierre Danielou observes in a census made by him in 1739, 
“Monsieur Cavagnal de Vaudreuil gouverneur des Trois Riviéres, 
est seigneur de la paroisse d’Ekoupag.” (also his St. John River, 250). 
This no doubt was the Seigniory of Vilrenard, granted 1697, which 
presumably was acquired by Vaudreuil through purchase. 


140 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


« . The location of the grant made by Richard Denys de Frons».” to the 
authorities of the Seminary of Quebec for a mission is happily made 
certain by the document mentioned on an earlier page and it 
was as shown on the Map No. 29. In the original document the 
limits are given thus:—‘‘lesquelles trois lieues de terres Seront 
prises par moitié d’un Costé et d’autre de la dite Riviere Ste Croix: 
Et limiteés ainsy quil Ensuit: C’est a Scauoir que du costé du Nord; 
delad. Riviere, les trois lieues de front Commenceront au Ruisseau] 
Corneille en montant En haut dlcelles en la riviere appellée müûmi- 
nagan qui se decharge en la dite Riviere Ste Croix, sur une 
lieve et demy de profondeur de ce Costé, par une ligne Establie 
nord et Sud qui se prendra au bord du dit Ruisseau a Son Entrée; 
Et de l’autre Costé delad. Riviere les trois lieues de terre de front 
commenceront a la meme ligne nord et sud mesurée diametrale- 
ment a Celle du dit Ruisseau Corneille Sur meme profondeur (au 
Sud) de lieue et demy sur la dite ligne; laquelle Profendeur Sera 
limitée au bout de la dite lieue et demy (de chacun costé de la dite 
Riviere) par une autre ligne courant est et ouést, dans lenceinte et 
limites desquels rhunds de vents entrent et sont compris la langue 
de terre qui fourche lesd. Riuiere muminagan et ristigouche Et Se 
dechargent dans la dite Riviere Ste Croix, ensemble les Islets qui 
sont dans les d trois lieués d’Estendué de long de la dite Riviere 
des Costés.” 

As in most early grants, its limits cannot be laid down exactly 
on the ground. An east and west course of the river seems to have 
been assumed, but this ignores the great curve in the Miramichi at 
this point. Hence the limits on the map are only conventional. 


319. Additional information about Enault’s lands at Miramichi, confirming 
Dionnes statement that he held the fief of Nepisiguit, is contained 
in an important document “Transactions des Srs de fronsac et 
Enaust” preserved in the Judicial Archives at Quebec, and for a copy 
of which I am indebted to the Keeper of the Archives, M. Philéas 
Gagnon. By this document it appears that Richard Denys had 
granted to Esnault “une lieue et demy de terre de front sur lad. 
Riviere de Nepisiguit....sur autant de profondeur qu'il voudroii 
Selon letendue des de. terres” on certain easy conditions which were 
fulfilled until 1686, in which year Enault went to France. Later in 
connection with a reversion of ungranted lands to the Crown, Enault 
obtained a grant (Aug. 3, 1689) in Seigniory from the government 
“de deux lieues de terre de front sur pareille profondeur” at the 
same locality, and apparently this had been excepted from the Seig- 
niory granted to Gobin in 1690. A complicated legal situation thus 
arose, which was settled by a compromise detailed in the document 
leaving Esnault in possession of the land. This fully confirms the 
tradition given by Cooney (page 300 of Historic Sites) that he resided 
at the mouth of the Nepisiguit. 


326C. Burton. Should read, “including most of the present Lincoln. ” 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 141 
Historic Sites. 


326. A valued correspondent, Mr. I. T. Hetherington of Jenkins, Queens Coun- 
ty, writes me an account of a reputed “Old French” road between Ana- 
gance and Cumberland Bay via Riders Brook. His account of it is 
as follows; “ Tradition and signs or marks establish the fact that the 
French had a well-defined road from the mouth of Anagance to the 
bend in Foleys [Riders] Brook and thence down the brook to its 
mouth. I remember well hearing the late John Rider when he was 
about 70 and I was 17, which would be about 51 years ago, say that 
when he was a young man it was no trouble to follow it the whole 
distance and that it had to all appearance been considerably travelled, 
as the remains of a lodging house was plain near the mouth of the 
brook about 8 or 10 miles from its mouth...... About 15 years ago 
I was coming down Foley Brook........ I found a stone chimney où 
large dimensions so large at that time a pine log was growing right up 
out of the chimney...... I have also heard that the French had a 
continuation of said road up Flat Rock Brook [a small stream below 
Riders Brook on North Side not marked on any map], to the head 
of Wasson Brook which empties into Cumberland Bay about one mile 
from the head of the bay. And it used to be supposed that that route 
from Anagance to Cumberland Bay formed the shortest route from 
Petitcodiac River to Fredericton, or possibly the fort at Jemseg.” 

No part of such a road ‘appears to be now in use, but I have no 
doubt that it existed as described by Mr. Hetherington. But the ut- 
ter lack of any reference to it in any document of the French period, 
and the inherent improbability that so long a road would have been 
cut at that time, when the Washademoac-Petitcodiac portage was 
in use, makes it seem likely it had another origin. And that origin 
I think is probably to be found in some connection with the attempts 
of the New Englanders against Fort Cumberland in 1776. As is well- 
known, and fully set forth in Kidder’s “ Military Operations,” and in 
the “ Memoir of Col. Johathan Eddy,” a force of men from Machias 
joined by a few New Englanders and Indians from the St. John, 
under command of Colonel Eddy, went to capture Fort Cumberland 
in October, 1776. They went from the St. John to the vicinity of the 
fort in whale boats, but met with defeat which compelled them to 
return. Their route back to the St. John is not known, but as the Bay 
of Fundy was in possession of the enemy they probably came back 
by land. Having Indians with them it is possible they came by th2 
route of this road, but of course would not then have cut out 
a road for so small a force. That winter, however, Colonel Eddy 
spent on the St. John planning another and stronger expedition 
against Fort Cumberland in the spring, an expedition which must 
necessarily have gone by land, the Bay of Fundy being in possession 
of the British. I think it extremely probable that the road was 
cut out during the winter as part of the plan to move a force against 
the fort in the spring, a design never executed. 

Another early road, to the origin of which I have no clue is thus 
described by another correspondent, Mr. S. H. T. Sherwood of Poo- 
diac, Kings County;— “A short distance to the north [of Poodiacj 
a high ridge running N. E. and S. W. is traversed by an old military 


142 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Historic Sites. 


road called “ Cumberland Road” and leading from Fort Cumberland 
in Westmorland County to St. John, cut out by the returning forces 
after the fall of the said fort.” There is evidently some confusion 
in the history here, since this fort never fell after 1755 and certainly 
the troops did not then traverse the woods to St. John. It seems to 
be the road between Campbell settlement and Wards Creek Settle- 
ment, but it is not a part of any old road that I can discover. 


326A. Fort Frederick. A very interesting plan of the Fort and its surround- 


ings, unknown to me when the original monograph was written, is 
contained in ‘“ A set of plans and forts in America reduced from 
actual survey, 1763. By J. Rocque” a copy of which is in the Library 
of Congress, and is reproduced herewith (Map No. 36). Compare also 
the Sproule plan of Map No. 23. The various projected works were 
of course never carried out. Of the two blockhouses (C) marked as 
“already made,’ the northernmost occupied the high land on water 
street where various military relics have been found, as noted earlier. 
The second blockhouse ‘already made,” which must have stood 
about on the site of the Carleton Methodist Church, seemingly iden- 
tical with the one at D, is, I believe, locally unknown, 

In a St. John newspaper of Oct. 5, 1889, (apparently the Globe), 
there is an account of considerable value of the early appearance of 
Fort Frederick as remembered by an old resident. Another early 
newspaper scrap (undated) I have seen, gives a traditional account 
of the occupation of this fort in 1758. by the English. A very inter- 
esting diary of Sergeant John Burrell, stationed at this fort in 1759 
is reprinted from the New England Historical and Genealogical Reg- 
ister for Oct. 1905, in Acadiensis, V, 291. 


328. Mr. H. A. O’Leary informs me that about 1889 the Moncton Transcript 


reprinted from a Philadelphia newspaper an article descriptive of 
somewhat elaborate plans for the settlement by Pennsylvanians, in 
1765, of the Petitcodiac, including a design for a city at the Bend (now 
the site of Moncton), the original map for which is still in existence. 
I have not been able by correspondence to gain further information 
on the subject. 


330. The valuable map, showing the settlement of the Miramichi valley at the 


beginning of the Loyalist period, and before the arrival of any Loyal- 
ists, is reproduced herewith (Map No. 37). Though my copy is dated 
1765, this is, of course, an error for 1785. 


330. Much new and authoritative information about the settlement of Nepisig- 


uit by Commodore Walker in this period is contained in the Docu- 
ments noted in the Canadian Archives for 1894, pp. 300 et seq. for the 
use of copies of which I am greatly indebted to our Acadian historian, 
M. P. P. Gaudet. In synopsis the points important to our present 
purpose are these. A Memorial to the Lords of Trade by Walker 
himself seems to show that he had visited Bay Chaleur as early as 
1763 to promote there, on his own account, a fishery trade. A docu- 
ment by John Shoolbred of 1775 shows that Walker had settled at 


143 


Historic Sites. 


ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 


[GanonG ] 


UNOGUVH © 


SL] 772 B 
yay fiano pooy 


see tse te 


Boy OL0U SLIGUD Y 29 218401 SAY J 
ve nsis rive sers Trt Y2/42PILT 


LT Seat Des ~~" 2pPTH 


7574 GY MZUO ZL OF LOZ D 
DSSS, Gye <n Sens yaaa RAT DR à 
* uotjeue]dx J 


0€ 09 buog £¥'10T 
"LIAL S UYOL S$ fo IOUPLUT 
277 LV Pyeng” 
HOIUA GA LYOA 
0 
NV Id V 


Map No. 36. From RocQuE's ‘‘ A SET OF PLANS,” 1763; SLIGHTLY REDUCED. 


144 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


Nepisiguit in 1768 and established there (evidently on the well-known 
situation on and near Alston Point) a fishing and trading establish- 
ment. While absent in England in 1770 trying to obtain a grant oi 
these lands, a Captain Allan, who had been in Bay Chaleur for two 
preceding years on a man-of-war, obtained from the Nova Scotia 
Government the 2000 acres well known as the Allan grant (shown 
on the map in Collections N.B. Hist. Soc. II, 126), and Walker had 
no alternative but to buy out his rights, which, by the aid of one 
Hugh Baillie of London, he did for the sum of £600. Walker and 
Baillie then proceeded, the latter supplying apparently the capital 
and the former acting as manager, to promote the settlement with 
great vigour, sending out between 1770 and 1773 no less than £10,000 


fears 
os oo ou Ron 
as EU Se 
- ju 


Tan 


Sheldrake 
Istana 


2Y0)Z MODY © 


Re 2 a 
Scale of Miles 

Surveyed by Dan "Micheau 

April, 1165 


Map No. 37. FROM A PLAN OF 1785; x $. 


worth of goods for trade. In 1773 all of Baillie’s rights were bought 
out by John Shoolbred of London, and the settlement continued to 
grow, so that in 1775 Walker was resident there in charge of a well- 
equipped establishment, employing twenty British subjects, engaged 
in fishing, trading, ship-building, lumbering and, to some extent, farm- 
ing. Nepisiguit at this time had a population of 70 souls, apparently 
inclusive of Acadians but not Indians. No further information occurs 
in this document, but as is well known, (related by Cooney, 172) 
the establishment was plundered and ruined in 1776 or 1777 by priva- 
teers from American colonies. Noattempt was ever made, apparently, 
to restablish the settlement. The Allen grant was not escheated until 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 145 
Historic Sites. 


1823, after which it was regranted thus originating the present 
Youghall settlement. 


331. Belledune. There was here an early fishing establishment, for, as shown 
by a document in the Canadian Archives (1894, 301), in 1770 George 
Walker (prominent at this time in the settlement of Nepisiguit), 
applied for a grant of 1000 acres of land “ at Belldown with the beach 
and pond where the said Walker has carried on his fishery and made 
great Improvements. ” 


331. As noted earlier under Nepisiguit, Walker and Shoolbred were after 1773 
in a kind of partnership, Shoolbred supplying the capital and Walker 
acting as resident manager. Hence there were not two, but a single 
establishment, at the mouth of the Restigouche, and even that is 
doubtful, for Schoolbred’s Memorial of 1775 says there was then no 
settlement on either side of the Restigouche. Walker, as shown by 
the documents just cited under Nepisiguit, had established trading 
posts at Belledune and Nepisiguit between 1768 and 1770 and the 
presence of his name in Walker’s Brook would suggest that he had also 
established a post at this place. The afore-mentioned documents 
show that it was on the ground of the success of the settlement Ant 
Nepisiguit that Shoolbred applied for the grant of the 500 acres “on 
the Nova Scotia side of the River Restigouche and adjoining to the 
old Indian Church,” as Shoolbred’s Memorial puts it. The beginning 
of the modern settlement of this region is related in the Settlements- 
origin Monograph, at pages 44 and 121. 

€ 


332. Grant 1. On these grantees, see Archives, 1885, 177. 


333. A Township, named Harrington, was laid out on the St. John River in 
1732 (Nova Scotia Archives, II, 175), but apparently was never granted 
or settled. Its location is not known to me. 

Grant 16. The Ferguson grant was alongside, not identical with 
the Indian grant. 


333. Add, Oct. 18, 1765, Nathan Frink and others 1975 ac. in Kings County. 


334. Grant 43. On an old plan above Major Lochman’s grant is 1000 ac. to 
Peter De Couts, 1769. 


335. Grant 68. There is much on O’Neal and this grant in Nova Scotia Arch- 
ives, II. 


336. Grant 98a. It is said locally this grant was never escheated, and the 
lands were taken up by squatters and are held to-day by possession, 

Grant 100 should read 500 ac. 
338. The extent and locations of the Loyalist Settlements formed 
along the St. John soon after 1784 are well shown on Sproule’s fine map 


of the river, made from actual survey and observation in 1787. The 
part relating to these settlements is reproduced herewith (Map No. 38). 


Sec. IL., 1906. 10 


146 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


Map No. 38. From SPROULE’S MAP OF 1787; X 5. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 147 
Historic Sites. 


An important phase of settlement of this period is concerned with 
the formation of the Acadian settlements at Madawaska, which have been 
fully discussed in the Settlements Monograph. Happily the early extent 
and location of that settlement is well shown upon Sproule’s Map of the 
St. John, of 1787, and the Madawaska portion is reproduced herewith 
(Map No. 39). 


342. No 63 should read Kings Orange Rangers. 

No. 76. Dr. Raymond tells me that DeLancey’s ist and 2nd Bat- 
talions were merged together as the Ist and settled at Woodstock, 
while the 2nd settled in Queens County, though lands were assigned 
them in York. £ 


Map No. 39. FRoM SPROULE’S MAP oF 1787; x &. 


346. Much additional information upon the telegraph system from 
Halifax to Fredericton is found in letters in the Winslow papers, 
(consult Index), where it is shown that the line was to run by way of 
Sussex, that nine stations were selected between St. John and Frederic- 
ton, that others were to be established at Musquash, Lepreau and the 
South Wolf, and that the whole pian was abandoned at an early stage 
because of the expense and the lack of sufficient troops to work the 
system. 


148 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


347. The Edmundston Block-House is located exactly on the 
Graham and other detailed maps connected with the International 
Boundary Surveys. It is mentioned by Alexander in his “ L’Acadie,” 
If, 65, and a very full description of it when in use is contained in 
Lanman’s “ Adventures in the Wilds of the United States and Britisn 
Provinces,” 1856, I, 306. 

Bouchette’s map of 1831 marks Blockhouse at the present village of 
Petitcodiac, but I think this must be an error. 


Bols Head 


A PPighotsd Patty fr dy 2 lewnded 


a Offecus and Alors Taurachs 
bo Hepat 

6 [revise Sere. 

B Goverment Vicsyrve: 


Map No. 40. FROM AN OLD PLAX; x 3. 


347. About the year 1817 it was intended by the British Govern- 
ment to fortify Grand Manan, a large appropriation being made for that 
purpose. Several references to the plan occur in contemporary docu- 
ments. It was carried at least so far that sites were selected and drawn 
upon maps, and the accompanying map No. 40, reproduced from one in 
the Crown Land Office, exhibits the proposed locations and plan. 


{Ganone] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 149 
Historic Sites. 


349. The location of the Indian College at Sussex as here given 
is erroneous. Its true location is described in Allison’s “ Oliver 
Arnold,” 19. Also I have found in the Crown Land Office an old 
map on which it is located, as shown upon the accompanying repro- 
duction of a portion of it (Map No. 41). 

349. Of very much importance in the early history of this period 
were the roads built between the principal centres of population. Much 
information about their general history is given in the Settlements 
Monograph. Their exact courses have largely been obscured by later 
alterations, but the following are the courses of those first built. 


Map No. 41. FROM AN OLD PLAN; ORIGINAL SIZE. 


When the “ present road ” is mentioned in these descriptions, it means 
the present road though its general route, and through most, but not 
all, its actual course; many alterations in detail were later made to 
secure better grades etc. 

(1) The Westmorland Road. It started at St. John, followed the 
present road along Marsh Creek, Coldbrook, Golden Grove, and Smith- 
town to Hampton, where it crossed at Hampton Ferry, kept the north 
side of the Kennebecasis to within three miles of Sussex, where it 
crossed to the south bank, and followed the present road through 
Sussex to Petitcodiac; it ran along the south side of that river part 
way, and later entirely, to Pollet River (this part now abandoned), 
then crossed to the north bank and followed the present main road 
through Moncton Memramcook Village, Dorchester, and Four Cor- 
ners to Fort Cumberland. 

It is shown ona fine large map (scale 2 miles to an inch) in the 
British Museum (Catalogue of Additions,— 128, 238), “Sketch of the 
Road from Fort Cumberland to Fredericton, from a Journey Per- 
formed between the 13th and 23rd December 1799 by H. R. H. the 
Duke of Kent, Commr. in Chief in British N. America.” The Duke 


150 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Historic Sites. 


of Kent passed over this road from Fort Cumberland to the “ Finger 
Board” and thence to Fredericton in 1799. Parts of it must then 
have been a mere trail through the woods: thus the part from Ana- 
gance to Kennebecasis was not constructed until 1802. 

(2) The Fredericton road (east). This left the Westmorland road 
two and a half miles beyond Hampton ferry, (with later a branch, 
facilitating travel from Fredericton to Westmorland, from five miles 
beyond at the “ Finger Board,” joining near Belleisle Corner), through 
Belleisle Corner, Scotch settlement, California settlement later with 
a branch to mouth of Washademoac, across the Washdemoak north 
of Lewis Cove, to Jemseg ferry, thence across the Jemseg and through 
Maugerville to St. Marys. 

(3) The St. Andrews road. This followed the present highway to 
Lepreau, beyond which it appears to have run between the present 
back and coast roads, the present back road having been laid out by 
Campbell in 1803. From St. George to St. Andrews it followed the 
present route. 

(4) The Fredericton and St. Andrews road. It ran through New 
Maryland to Tracy thence to Piskahegan, Pleasant Ridge, Rolling 
Dam, Waweig and by the river road to St. Andrews. (In 1806 the 
road had been constructed from St. Stephen to Oak Point, whence 
a ferry crossed to connect with the St. Andrews road). 

(5) The Quaco road appears to have followed the roads nearest. 
the present St. Martins and Upham railway. 

(6) The Western road to Fredericton, followed approximately the pre- 
sent river road. 

(7) The Canada road left Fredericton, followed the west bank to 
Burgoins ferry, crossed to the east bank which it followed to Bull’s 
Creek, when it recrossed to the west bank, which it followed all the 
way to Madawaska, where it crossed the St. John and ascended the 
Madawaska along the western bank of that river by the present road. 


ALLO 


Sm 


a Dis arlene 


| Bis 


hunky, 


Wonavivak 
? 


‘Aavnas inl 


ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 


Room bep 
Fa 


Curhnge) lo 
L Pe 


No, 42.—MircHeLL's Map, 


1 
samacadie 4 


è 


Cullsvroysé 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 151 


Boundaries. 


V. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS TO THE MONOGRAPH 
ON EVOLUTION OF THE BOUNDARIES. 


228. <A later discussion of John Mitchel’s relations with the St. 
Croix of the Nova Scotia-Massachusetts Boundary is contained in “ John 
Mitchel’s Diary and Field Book of his Survey of Passamaquoddy in 
1764” in the Collections of the N.B. Historical Society, IT, 175. 

£39. An examintion of the Bernard Papers preserved in the Har- 
vard College Library throws some iight upon the relation of Governor 
Bernard to the grant on the River St. Croix and his idea of the location 
of that river. They show that he did not apply for the grant for him- 
self but for some of his friends and that his name was included in the 
giant by the Nova Scotia authorities, and that, further, he deferred to 
the opinion of the Nova Scotia authorities as to the identity of the River 
St. Croix, accepting with them the Cobscook. 

338. Another view of the spirit shown by Maine in the boundary 
controversy is given by Burrage in Coll. Maine Hist. Soc., 3rd Ser., 
1904, 353. 

356. As here noted there is preserved in the British Museum a 
copy of Mitchell’s map which is without doubt that used by the British 
Commissioners in their negotiations in 1783. On it there is marked 
a boundary line along which is written, in the handwriting of King 
George III, himself (Windsor, Narrative and Critical History of 
America,! VII, 181) “ Boundary as described by Mr. Oswald.” Further, 
it is known that this map embodies changes made after Mr. Strachey the 
other commisioner reached Paris and hence it represents the line agreed 
to by the British Commissioners (Fitzmaurice, Life of Lord Shelburne, 
IIT, 295, 324). Naturally therefore this map must represent the Inter- 
national boundary as understood both by the Commissioners and by King 
George III. I have the good fortune to be able to present a photograph 
of this map herewith (map No. 42), which has been taken for me 
with the kind aid, and under the expert direction of Mr. Basil Soulsby 
Keeper of maps in the British Museum. It will be seen that the 
boundary as marked concedes essentially the American claim. 

359. A valuable contribution to the still unsettled question as to 
the nationality of Mark Island near Campobello, hence having an im- 
portant bearing upon the settlement of the final water-line, occurs in the 
Ms. Minutes of Council respecting allottments of land, (preserved 


1 Compare also Benton’s “ Thirty Years’ View,” Vol. II, 422, which seems 
to make this point plain. 


152 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Boundaries. 


at Fredericton), Vol 10, page 39, where under date Feb. 18, 1803, this 
island though without a name, is plainly designated and ordered granted 
the Owens. The grant itself (among the documents of the Crown Land 
Oifice), is dated June 12, 1806 and distinctly grants Mark Island, and 
by name, to the Owens. ‘This grant antedates the earliest record of 
possession cited by the American Commissioner. There is also much 
material relative to the ownership of the island in the David Owen Ms. 
Letter books preserved in Boston by the Campobello Company. 

369. Apparently the word “on Tidnish River” should read “ and 
Tidnish River,” for in 1862 a supplementary act was passed by the New 
Brunswick Legislature explaining the Act of 1859, and interpreting the 
words as “and Tidnish River.” 

421. An earlier printed map, attempting to show the County lines, 
is a Wyld map of 1825 in the Library of the Department of State at 
Washington. But it has them very erroneously both as to position and 
direction. 

423: I have found among documents in the office of the Provincial 
Secretary at Fredericton the dates (in 1785) of erection of the remaining 
counties (except Queens) as follows: — Westmorland, May 19; 
Northumberland, June 10; Kings, July 4; York, July 25. 

426. The Kent-Northumberland line does not extend to Escum- 
inac, but, by act of 1888, ends where it reaches the sea shore south of 
the cape. The change was made of course in order that the small strip 
at the cape south of the former line might not be isolated. 

440. Add to the Parishes of Gloucester, Bathurst. Erected 1826. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 153 


Settlement-origins. 


VI. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS TO THE MONOGRAPH 
ON ORIGINS OF SETTLEMENTS. 


37. The statement that an Acadian settlement occurred above 
Doaktown proves to be an error; see earlier under Historic Sites 
in these addenda. 

46. An important epoch in the settlement of the Acadians in New 
Brunswick after 1763 was marked by an order passed July 11, 1764, by 
the King in Council, approving the recommendation of the Lords of 
Trade that should the Acadians take the oath of allegiance they should 
be allowed to settle in Nova Scotia, but that they should be dispersed 
in small numbers in various localities (Coll. N.B. Hist. Soc. I, 313). 
From this order dates the legal repatriation of the Acadians. 

76. A full account of the formation of the “ Fredericton Emigrant 
Society,” an organization of considerable importance in this period of 
New Brunswick colonization is given in the Royal: Gazette, August to 
December, 1819 (especially Aug 10 and 17 and Noy. 30 and Dec. 7.) 
Also a “St. Andrews Agricultural and ‘Emigrants Society ” was formed 
about the same time, and an account of its founding is in the same 
paper for Jan. 18, 1820. 

83. Among disbanded regiments settled in New Brunswick appear 
to have been many Waterloo veterans, at Irish Settlement and elsewher2 
in Kings and Queens County. I have no further information as to the 
time or manner of their arrival, and it is possible they came and were 
granted land as individuals, and not in a body. A number of British 
man-of-warsmen settled at Miscou, Caraquet and Pokemouche. 

To the literature relating to the New Brunswick and Nova Scotia 
Land Company should be added, the reference in Munro’s “ New Bruns- 
wick,” 167, and a well-engraved map, dated 1836, scale 6 miles to the 
inch, entitled—** New Brunswick and Nova Scotia Land Company. A 
Map of the Company’s Tract of Land in the Province of New Bruns- 
wick.” This map gives a good deal of information about the Com- 
pany’s property,— of very roseate hue. It is the map which first places 
a great abundance of lakes on the upper branches of the Miramichi, a 
feature which persisted unto later maps. 


87. The settlement of the Province by Associations, a plan to some 
extent still in vogue, was originated by Governor Colebrooke (1841- 
1848) and was sometimes known by his name, as noted in various docu- 
ments of the time. 


154 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
Settlement-origins. 


114. Bass River Settlement,—G. An expansion chiefly from Miramichi of 
English and Irish settlers after the fire, who settled along this then 
new road. (Loc. inf.). 


115. Bay du Vin,—N. First settled by Loyalists, but joined later by various 
immigrants and native expansion from Miramichi. A history of the 
settlement with an historical map, is expected to appear in the Mag- 
azine ‘ Acadiensis, ” St. John, Vol. VII. 


115. Beaubears Island,—N. Its modern settlement dates apparently from 
considerably before 1800 when James Fraser from Scotland established 
here a shipbuilding and mercantile business, and in 1805 built the 
stone house still standing (of stone imported from Aberdeen). Later 
it was sold to John and Alexander Fraser who continued the business, 
and later it passed through the hands of various owners, Harley, 
Russell and others, and long continued the site of shipbuilding and 
trading. Originally, when all travel was by water, it was a very 
valuable situation for trade, but improvement in land communication 
caused its abandonment. The stone tomb on the island is that of 
Joseph Russell L. D. S. [Latter Day Saint]. (Loc. inf.) 


118. Bonum Gould should read Bon homme Gould. 


119. Buctouche,Kt. A history of the settlement, with an historical map is 
expected to appear in the Magazine ‘“ Acadiensis,”’ St. John, Vol. VII. 


119. Burnt Church,—N. A History of the settlement, with an historical map, 
is expected to appear in the Magazine ‘“ Acadiensis,’”’ St. John, Vol. 
VII. 


121. Campbelltown. This settlement of the N. B. and N. S. Land Co. seems 
to have been on the East, not the West, side of the Miramichi. 


121. Campbell Settlement,—K. This settlement is not native expansion, as 
here stated, but was formed homologous with the Scotch and Irish 
settlements on the Kings-Queens Boundary, by immigrants from the 
Highlands of Perthshire, Scotland, with some north of Ireland Irish, 
as I am informed by Rev. Chalmers Jack. * 


122. Caraquet,—G. As noted earlier in this paper, under Historic Sites, 
the sailors of the St. Simon, founders of Lower Caraquet, were 
not from France but were Acadians from Restigouche. A his- 
tory of the settlement, with an historical map, is expected to appear 
in the Magazine “ Acadiensis, ” St. John, Vol. VI or VII. 


124. Cocagne. A history of the settlement, with an historical map, is expected 
to appear in the Magazine ‘“ Acadiensis, ” St. John, Vol. VII or VIII. 


127. Doaktown,—N, On an error as to the French settlement see earlier, 
under Acadian Settlements. 


Dorchester,—W. To the references add. ‘‘ Dorchester Records” in 
Chignecto Post, July 17, 1884. 


[GANONG ] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 158 


130. 


130. 


131. 


131. 
136. 


141. 


147. 


148. 


150. 


150. 


Settlement-origins. 


English Settlement, on the Northwest Miramichi. Settled by English 
immigrants, who came 70 years ago and settled around the Methodist 
Church still in existence near Chapel Island. 


English Settlement,—K. This settlement was not principally of York- 
shiremen, though it included one or two such settlers, as I am 
informed by Professor W. C. Murray, a descendant of some of the 
founders of the Settlement. They were chiefly from the North of 
England, with some lowland Scotch. The detailed information sup- 
plied me by Professor Murray about this settlement I expect to pub- 
lish later elsewhere. - 


Escuminac,—N. The English-speaking settlers are in part Scotch and 
Irish immigrants and in part native expansion. A history of the 
Settlement with an historical map, is expected to appear in “ Acadien- 
sis,” St. John, Vol. VII. 


Ferriebank,—C. Rev Mr. Ferrie was a Presbyterian clergyman. 


Gretna Green,—N. A name used before the Great Fire for Douglas- 
town, which was thus named shortly prior to the Fire on the occa- 
sion of the visit of Sir Howard Douglas. 


Irish Settlement,—Q. Some of its Irish settlers were veterans of Water- 
loo, as I am told by Rev. Chalmers Jack. 


Martins Head,—J. On this settlement I find the following note in an 
early Report in the Crown Land Office; — ‘“ No improvements appear 
in Cox’s late grant except those made by LeBaron and Edwin Hazen, 
or at their expense. It is my duty to add that these gentlemen began 
a difficult and expensive settlement on this desolate part of the Bay, 
in October 1806—and that they have since presevered in their Buildings 
and improvements with Industry and spirit which I have not seen 
surpassed in any new settlement in the Province.” 


To the references here given on the history of Maugerville should be 
added the matter in “Sketches of New Brunswick,” 102-103 and 
Raymond, in the Coll. N.B. Historical Soc. II, 287. 


Miramichi,—N. In this brief discussion I have underestimated the im- 
portance of the Irish immigration to Miramichi, which I find on fur- 
ther study was greater than the Scotch. Further the spread of sett- 
lers from this valley to other localities on the North Shore was great- 
ly hastened by the Great Fire, after which many settlers sought new 
homes, especially in parts of Gloucester. On the riots of 1822 see 
Acadiensis, VI, supplement, 109. At the advent of the Loyalists there 
were at Miramichi according to the Micheau Map earlier given (Map 
No. 37), some 30 families, while Marston in the same year estimated 
them at less than 100 (Coll. N. B. Hist. Soc. II, 98). 


Miscou,—G. An outline of the history of this Island, with especial refer- 
ence to the founding of its modern settlement, illustrated by an his- 
torical map, appeared in the Magazine “Acadiensis,’ Vol. VI, 79. 


156 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Settlement-origins. 


151. 


152: 


153. 


153. 


160. 


161. 


161. 


162. 


163. 


164. 


165. 


168. 


170. 


Moorfields,—N. A settlement before the Great Fire, now included in 
Douglastown. It is mentioned several times by Cooney. 


Napan,—N. Dates from about 1818, for the Royal Gazette of 1819 speaks 
of the “new settlement near the head of tide on the Napan.” 


Neguac,—N. A history of the Settlement, with an historical map, is 
expected to appear in the Magazine “ Acadiensis, ” St. John, Vol VII. 


Nelson, —N. There was a Roman Catholic chapel at Nelson as early 
as 1811 (Plessis, 173), and it was this chapel without doubt which 
attracted here so many Irish settlers. Important matter on a pos- 
sible early mission here will be found earlier in this paper under 
Acadian settlements and seigniories, 


Pokemouche,—G. A history of the settlement, with an historical map, 
is expected later to appear in “ Acadiensis, ” St. John, Vol. VI or VII. 


Pokesuedie,—G. An expansion from Caraquet, as the names of grantees 
show very clearly. 


Presquile,—Cn. Some description of this Post occurs in verse in 
“Lays of the Wilderness,” St. John, 1833. 


Renous,—N. Of later settlement than.here given, for Cooney gives no 
settlement along the river in 1832. 


Richibucto,—K. Interesting matter on the trade of this place is given 
in Journals of the House of Assembly, 1885, Appendix CCXCVI. An 
account of the Founding of Richibucto appeared in the Moncton 
Transcript in May last and was reprinted in the Richibucto Review. 
A history of the Settlements, with an historical map, is expected to 
appear in the Magazine “Acadiensis,’” St. John, Vol. VI or VII. 


Richibucto Village,—K. An important document on this settlement 
appears in the Journals of the House of Assembly, 1855, Appendix, 
CCIEXXSaMVe 


Rothesay,—K. From local information I hear that the settlers of the 
upper part of this parish, and extending into Hampton were from New 
York and New Jersey, and included a good many of German names. 
It is said these settlers referred to the Kingston settlement, formed 
by Loyalists from Connecticut, as “ The Yankee Shore.” 


St. Josephs,—G. A thriving new Acadian settlement on the Caraquet 
Railway between Burnsville and Grande Anse; apparently formed by 
expansion from neighbouring settlements. 


Salt Springs,—K. Settled by immigrants from the highlands of Perth- 
shire and North of Ireland, homologously with the Scotch and Irish 
settlement on the Kings-Queens Boundary, as I am told by Rev. 
Chalmers Jack. 


[GANONG] ADDITIONS TO MONOGRAPHS 157 


Settlement- origins. 


171. 


172. 


176. 


176. 


175. 


185. 


Shediac,—W. There is a note on the English residents in 1805 in Aca- 
diensis, V, supplement 85. A history of the settlement here, with an 
historical map, is expected to appear in the same magazine, Vol. VI 
or IVI. 


Shippeganÿ—G. A history of the settlement of the island, with an his- 
torical map, is expected to appear in the magazine ‘“ Acadiensis, ” St. 
John, Vol. VI or VII. 


Tobique River,—V. There is interesting matter on the settlements here 
in Journals of the House of Assembly, 1855, Appendix CCCXXXVIII. 


Tracadie,—G. A history of the settlement, with an historical map, is 
expected to appear in the magazine “ Acadiensis,” St. John, Vol. VI 
or VII. 


Tabusintac,—N. A history of the settlement, with an historical map, is 
expected to appear in the magazine “ Acadiensis,” St. John, Vol. VI 
or VII. 


Date of the Winslow Papers should read 1776-1826. 


MONOGRAPHS 


OF THE 


Place-nomenclature, Cartography, Historic Sites, 
Boundaries and Settlement-origins of the 
Province of New Brunswick 


WITH 


A Supplement Thereto, and a Plan for a General History 


of the Province 


(Contributions to the History of New Brunswick, Nos. 1-7) 


BY 


WILLIAM F. GANONG, M.A., Ph.D. 


TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


1895-1906 


PREFACE 


It is with much satisfaction that I am able to complete this series 
of Monographs which were designed to cover the various phases of the 
historical geography of New Brunswick. The study has been necessarily 
almost entirely archelogical, dealing with matters often of small moment 
in themselves, but possessed of a dignity as an integral part of a worthy 
subject. I feel with Churchyard, who said over four centuries ago,— 
“I study to bring forth some acceptable work: not striving to shew any 
rare invention that passeth a man’s capacity, but to utter and receive 
matter of some moment known and talked of long ago, yet over long 
hath been buried, and, as it seemed, lain dead, for any fruit it hath 
shewed in the memory of man.” I thoroughly believe that in local 
history it is the archeological phases which are of greatest interest to the 
most people, and that these form the best links to connect the intangible 
past with the visible present. Our local historians would be wise did 
they but make more use of them. ‘These studies may serve to aid the 
New Brunswick historian of the future even should I not be able, as I 
hope I may, to make further use of them myself. 

My mode of treatment of the subject, in separate and widely spaced 
papers, though excused by necessity, has had decided drawbacks. Thus 
ir has involved some repetition, and the present cumbersome supplement. 
And besides, my classification of the materials is, I see now, needlessly 
ecmplex, especially in the Historic Sites and Settlements Monographs. 
The student therefore may have difficulty in finding special items he 
may seek, and I advise him not to yield to discouragement if a desired 
subject is not found where he looks first. Futhermore, I am now trying 
to render him a certain, even if somewhat belated aid in this respect. 
First, the Additions and Corrections forming the final paper match 
page for page with the original monographs, and give a good many cross 
references. ‘lhe reader in using the papers, should always consult the 
original monograph and the supplement together page for page. 
Second, I have added a full table of contents which in a general way 
may to some extent replace an index of subjects. All of those whe 
pessess separate copies of the Monographs, and who may think them 
worth binding together will find it best to place the accompanying Title- 
page, this preface and the following Table of Contents at the beginning 


Sec. II., 1906. 11 


IV ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


of the somewhat portly volume, the “ Additions and Corrections” being 
of course placed after the other monographs. Although additional data 
will undoubtedly come to knowledge in the future (and needless to say 
all such will be very welcome to the author), I shall present them else- 
where, probably in local publications; at all events, I do not design to 
add another to the present series, which is thus definitively closed. 

I desire to take advantage of this opportunity to express my sense 
of deep personal obligation to the two Honorary Secretaries of the Royal 
Society, the late Sir John Bourinot and Dr. 8. E. Dawson. From both 
of them I have received, during the publication of these papers, the 
ready sympathy of fellow students as well as the helpful consideration 
of skilled editors. For any value the completed work may have, the 
student must thank them and the Royal Society as well as the author. 


March 17, 1906. 


CONTENTS 


Seven papers reprinted from the new series, section II, of the Transactions 
of the Royal Society of Canada. 


1. A PLAN FOR A GENERAL HISTORY OF THE PROVINCE OF NEW 
BRUNSWICK. Vol. I, 1895, pages 91-102. 


2 A MONOGRAPH OF THE PLACE-NOMENCLATURE OF THE PRO- 
VINCE OF NEW BRUNSWICK. Vol. II, 1896, pages 175-289. 


PME OCUGLION 2 cis se sates gcse eos He SERA 175 
PART L—An Essay Towards an a de ‘he principles ee 
PIACe=nOMeEnNCIAEUREN Uae, Hse ciel SINS Poe hee Annee ae Er AT 
1. On the Qualities of Place-names.. .. .. .. . me ae Vue meer 177 
2. How place-names originate, PCR peice or Reco 
CXTINCE RMS ee eve MO TOMATE OS One OUR 181 
3. On the Investigation = eon =TIEUINNCS a ac werehs 6 5 185 
PART Il—The Historical Development of the Place- tie 
INRP DURS WIC RAP ER AU sisi IR ANR PR ER en 186 
eee ETO MUTE cays STO ARRET EE EN EN RRENATE RTE rare 187 
2. The period of Exploration;. the Norsemen to Champlain. 
CUO O.O = NGC O04) iereres taran HR prove sre? oie JON LME TM 196 
cee oe EH reNCh YP CTO GS cre jab Mes cio) isa islel vores iSis) cial sie) elev el ere nels LENT 
Fee DUC ONG Wehbe langd PB erIOd seus cess. ciel ea seal Nice e Us 200 
Dem MCC OVALS ty ETIOUT MU AE sey tele cist sn Ute! fe AA ENENR 203 
6. The Post-Loyalist nl vhs ells Len BS ooh oc. Fi 204 
7. Present and Future of the Place- a net ett ee 
SPUN S wks saline s ich ice Met Retail ane eue ue Me Late 211 
PART II —A Dictionary of the Place names of New Bruns wickyuacucme 215 
APPENDIX,—Sources of Information.... .. .. ep TTR tt te te ne ee ee ee as 281 
DS OLaVVIOL KS GUCEOs MS M NE AN oa) ia dale, as | Sia vols ace aor oie hie seers 284 
A StROLeM ADS SCIELO RE RSR ENS LL SA PR NE PORN eee Seine 286 
Erraiarandaddenda nr PME ES ES OPEN, 289 


3. A MONOGRAPH OF THE CARTOGRAPHY OF THE PROVINCE OF 
NEW BRUNSWICK. Vol. III, 1897, pages 313-427. 


introduction: -::..:-.. SAONE LCA DE 313 

PART Te eae upon aire eae ee CAN Sn SACS LR ET EE cic 315 
1. On the Scarcity of Old Maps... PS ARE Ne hentai es 316 
. On the History of Map- Mie aid hata teen aerate out Neth Jee. cea kare SLT 
3. On the Proper Spirit of Study on ola MAGS hauts A 318 
4. On the Sources of Error in the Interpretation of Old are 319 
5. On the Nature of the Evolution of the Cartography of a 


SDECARDISETIC CI corse ce ee lol Des testhe nella et tete to 323 


VI ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


PART IJ,—Systematic Cartography of New Brunswick... .... .. Ais Bake 325 
Type No. 1. The Pre-Differentiation Type. 1500 to 1534. UE 327 
Type iNo, 2. DThecCartier Type: db34 tod604. 2 RUAN Be 335 
Type No. 3. The Champlain Type. 1612 (1609) to 1708. Era he AR E 348 
TyperNow4. The Delisley Ry pen wliOsutonUia4. fei siecle nen RES 361 
Type No, 5. “The Bellin Type "1744 to)about 17170... m0 371 
Type No. 6 The Modern Type. About 1770 to 1820 .. .. .. 385 
Type No. 7. The Complete Type. 1820 to the Present.. .. .. 399 
Type INO: 8: | The ExacE ype aces 406 

PART III.—A Classified List of the Principal Man none New Bruns- 
WiCkor Portions OL SMS LENS we) di, RE rer 408 
APPENDIX. SOULCES OMINIORMALION RE DR. cis UN Te 423 
Bibliographic. NES URI SEE APE RNA AAA EE SUR AT A RTE PSE 426 


4 A MONOGRAPH OF HISTORIC SITES IN THE PROVINCE OF NEW 
BRUNSWICK. Vol. V, 1899, pages 213-357. 


AN EVOGUCTION SH a Sid! os bs. oa ons ee NT A NET ae. Bi) en etsy olen ie Me Ae 213 
1: The Prehistoric, Gndian) Periods men cence RE NE Ce PALE 
i vibe Distribution of the indian rie ER Ce ee 217 

27 indian WVallasestand Camping | Groundssse- semicon ciehiee 218 

3. Indian Routes of Travel in New Brunswick... .. .. .. .. .. 233 

I The Period! of (Exploration. a.) sole OCR EEE eels el ble ee detente 259 
if Routeslor Cartieriandiot Champlain: euce ier cece seers 259 
TMU—-ThesA: cadian*Period. i: ws goer cis lente ae tt cio Sales! ions Men iec mts mene 262 
i ‘Settlementsiiand Ports. sa ae Mey eat islet oe) eet seh tine, so ele mere 262 

Af PS CLSTIOLIOS Mish, oss een eee ais heres min oe sees eee EN Se ae EU AE ES 302 

DV. —Thethinelish: Periods cer anja woe SN A ce ee ite an one TER ee later nS 320 
A. Settlements and monte. NS BOT PA OO srs) stevie comers tees 323 

2 Mb, Ion palsiautoyreuael (Ohnlavere (CimenattSian qo Go oa Go boos 66 56 60 JC 331 

Ma Die (loyalist Period RE ce. ont eee ie esl Ces ETAT 336 
i ithe Mmoyaliste Grantseand settlements. ee ER EN NT ES 336 

2 The LL OYANSTIB oundariecra MAMAN MEME SR EPP 344 
MI = The Post Eoyalist Period Cr ME NE. AIRE RENE EN RRUr 345 
APPENDIX IS OUTCeES Ohe Ih abilohanazynKOnaw VER oa ob an Ho So Boa Bo oo on ae 351 
Bibliography andeCartoenaphiyasemecmecmecn RC PEROU 354 

AA GON Gast. MSN ME TE RE OR SE EE ne ee LUE 357 


5. A MONOGRAPH OF THE EVOLUTION OF THE BOUNDARIES OF THE 
PROVINCE OF NEW BRUNSWICK. Vol. VII, 1901, pages 139-449. 


iitponuetions Boa wooo PP Dose See SouPon eetee elite 141 
A. The Personal aioe in nea Studies.. BO) Oe SOD GG 141 
B. The Relation Existing between Boundaries and History... .. 143 
C. Sources of Information in the Study of Boundary Evolution 143 
D. The Kinds of Boundaries, and their purposes... .. .. .. .... 144 
E. The Physiographic Basis for Natural Boundaries in New 
IBPUNS WICK.) aie cov rte devreeh cs ele ae, Gels es etal Brel eee 149 
F. Upon Boundary Disputes: SAPO LEE ADM HOR OOMOMT relie Mes l'es ee Mise 151 
The Indian Period. 2-70 Sinica terol Reese 153 


The Period of ou and RL SE Deen: to | 1606. SAME NERO LES 155; 
The Acadian Period....24410 os, CURE ER Ra EE NE ER eee eee 164 


CONTENTS Vil 


A. From the Virginia Patent, to the Treaty of St. Germain. 164 

B. From the Treaty of St. Germain, 1632, to the Treaty of 
Breda 66m. ees one 174 

C. From the at of Breda, 1667, to LE Treaty of Utrecht, 
RÉ RE RARE 185 

D. From Le Treaty Le Utrecht, 1713, to ae eat of : Paris, 
111 (5e AISNE 191 

E. The History of the French- en Pree, ae as to Wiehe 
° ISXOVbRAC HOS, Cle ACAMA TU EAN TEEN EC 196 
The English Period. 1763-1783 .. .. .. . Fast vers 220 
The efforts to locate the River St. neues 1763- 1783.. Bh Cee 228 
hetpovalist and the subsequent Periods... wo ah) ele Sees lee Gah cle sch ote 240 
CG) Fahne Internationale BOUnGaryi jc Yen sek ps vied, Semel EMEA 241 
(a) Lhe Determination VoL them River IST (Groves) selene TNT 244 
(b). The Assignment of the Passamaquoddy Islands .. .. .. .. 278 
(ch ‘The North-west Angele ofiNova Scotid. a. Gece as sie) cs. ler 295 
(A) See Ee eH in aU AIN ee Me ee eme eee (ste 358 
@) = eherinternprovancial MSOUNGARICS ci) cel men sacl lear UN RCI 362 
(a). The New Brunswick Nova Scotia Beanies Seip a) at Se ds Ms 362 
(b). The New Brunswick Quebec Boundary. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 372 
Ga che Interprovincial (Internal) Boundaries! 2. si). sc) os et ce 413 
Gl) Sa The: CountyeS OunGdaries sys wy. cates eich cent betas vs einem ere tay 413 
@) ee LH eSearishes OUMGAarICS ata ARR PE RENNES 429 
GO) FeO CHETAE OUNGATICS Hoy ere eee oleh erst teh Lalas (tek ai ni al elle tels ee 443 
NE (SOURCES, OF Information, 2) o. ca )ee. sis) (ie) are fais) as. ny se sie ote se 445 


EIipliorcraphysandiCartorraphivenc: cel ceceimes aeccie. «ae ANNEE 447 


6. A MONOGRAPH OF THE ORIGINS OF SETTLEMENTS IN THE PRO- 
VINCE OF NEW BRUNSWICK. Vol. X, 1904, pages 3-185. 


Introduction... .. .. à : : 6 
PART I. The wists ie aie Ones AG FN of Sete 

y MIONESANENEWABQUNSWICK -2 eee eee se else elec ÿ 
PART II. The Operation of the Factors in the Production of New 

Brunswick Settlements.. .. .... af Voie cha EN EE AU ore ils) 

1. The Pre-Historic (Indian) Period (to 1604). sis Lately, AN NAS 19 

2. The Period of Discovery and Exploration (1492-1604)... .... 28 

3. The Acadian Period (1604-1760). Chatters TRS LUE ina et D ARIANE 30 

a bhe Hnelish Period (760-1783)... 26 as 5. Malials 42 

5. The Loyalist and Native ee ion Period (1783- 1812). 52 

6. The Period of Active Immigration (1812-1850).. .. .. .. .. .. 73 

in bne Mviodern Period! Gisb0=tosthe Present) ce sew se) elles here 94 

8. The Prospects for the Future... .. .. 108 


PART III. A synopsis of the Origins of fie Individual Sere of 
New Brunswick alphabetically arranged, with Refer- 
ence tonthe sources: Of their UIStORYs. a) ce ce cote ee 109 
PPP RNC SOMCCES Of INÉOPMATLIONN /. cio. le eee vols! sic) ele slo sis! wie | ole) setae: ‘ale 181 
ASOLO LISS) CLEC cis) (els) isis, scies (ele) a'a)iisielsievel (sio)ieis Te\e) efelioreille ete et oie 183 


VIII ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
7. ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS TO THE MONOGRAPHS ON THE 
PLACE-NOMENCLATURE, CARTOGRAPHY, HISTORIC SITES, 


BOUNDARIES AND SETTLEMENT-ORIGINS OF THE PROVINCE 
OF NEW BRUNSWICK. Vol. XII. pages 3-157. 


Introduction .. och Rolo os Sei Me A EE MO nel eke Rte 3 
I. Additions and Corrections to Plan for aGeneral History. 4 

II. Additions and Corrections to Place-nomenclature. 4 

III. Additions and Corrections to Cartography. 3 57 

IV. Additions and Corrections to Historic Sites. Selita’ Woe 77 

V. Additions and Corrections to Evolution of Boundaries. .. 151 

VI. Additions and Corrections to Settlement-Origins. .. .. .. 153 


Title-page and Contents to the series. 


[coyxE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 


RIcHARD MAURICE BUCKE. 


snncire den 2 Se 


Fe 
3 


x 


oe vais 


SECTION II., 1906. [159] Trans. R. S. C. 


II.—Richard Maurice Bucke — A Sketch. 
By James H. Coyne, M.A. 
(Presented by W. W. Campbell, and read May 23, 1906.) 
als 


In the preparation of the following sketch, the writer had access 
to documentary material in the possession of the family of the late 
Dr. Bucke. Much of this material was autobiographical, and in using 
this the plan has been adopted, as far as possible, of letting the subject 
of the memoir tell the story in his own way, with such omissions, chrono- 
logical rearrangement and explanatory connecting links as the nature 
of the case seemed to require, regard being had to the necessary 
limits of this paper. Quotation marks are not always used, especially 
where, as in the case of the fight with the Shoshones and the adventure 
in the Sierra Nevadas, the narrative is simply condensed from Dr. 
Bucke’s detailed description. Where quotation marks are used, the 
passage is autobiographical, unless otherwise stated. 


2. 


Richard Maurice Bucke was a man of marked personality. 

His ‘individuality impressed itself on all who came into contact 
with him. Of striking presence, great native ability, wide and varied 
experience of the world and of human nature, he distinguished himself 
in more than one line of thought and action. For many years medical 
superintendent of one of the largest asylums for the insane in Ontario, 
he was ranked among the foremost alienists in America. An original 
investigator in the fields of medical science, philosophy and literature, 
he worked out his problems with a single eye to the truth, and, having 
solved them to his satisfaction, presented the processes and his con- 
clusions frankly and fearlessly, leaving the results with the future for 
acceptance or rejection. His intellectual product is intimately related 
to his close association for a quarter of a century with Walt Whitman, 
whose influence was profound and lasting. The names of Whitman 
and Bucke are inseparably linked together for all time. The story 
of their friendship is of permanent interest and value. 

As a littérateur, scientist and administrator, and as the biographer 
and close friend of Whitman, Dr. Bucke was a familiar figure in many 
circles, both in Canada and in the States. 

But to the public at least it was not generally known that he 
bad had a youth of extraordinary adventure, characterized by thrilling 


160 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


incident, intense suffering, prolonged and arduous struggle. These 
experiences were important factors in the development of a type of 
manhood worthy of being studied. 

Some stages and phases of that development it will be the work 
of the following pages to attempt to portray. 


3. 


At the Church of St. Olave, Old Jewry, London, on the 4th of 
May, 1801, Thomas George Bucke, of Milden Hall, Norfolk, married 
Georgina Walpole. 

Three children were born of this marriage. All received a good 
education. Horatio Walpole, eldest child and only son, was educated 
at Trinity College, Cambridge, took holy orders, and was appointed 
curate of the neighbouring village of Methwold. He married Clarissa 
Andrews, whose brother, Biggs Andrews, K.C., was a barrister of some 
eminence. 

To the Reverend Horatio Walpole Bucke and Clarissa, his wife, 
were born six sons and four daughters. 

It was at Methwold that their seventh child and fifth son first 
opened his eyes to the light on the 28th day of March, 1837. Of this 
son, Richard Maurice Bucke, it is proposed to speak in the following 
memoir. , 

Through his mother, Horatio Walpole Bucke was a great grandson 
of the famous Prime Minister of England, Sir Robert Walpole, and a 
grand nephew of Horace Walpole, whose Letters have given him a 
niche in the pantheon of English literature. On the side of the Buckes 
also literature had its representative. Charles Bucke, a brother of 
Thomas George, was the author of “ Beauties of Nature,’ and “ Ruins 
of Ancient Cities,” books which continued to be published until nearly 
the end of the last century. The tendency to literature of the subject 
of this sketch was therefore part of his inheritance. 


4, 


In the spring of 1838 the curate, with his wife and seven children, 
emigrated to Upper Canada. For a score of years general attention 
had been directed to the Talbot settlement. Perhaps the familiar 
nomenclature, reproducing the names of counties, cities, towns and 
streams belonging to the eastern part of England added to the attraction. 
On the river Thames, in Upper Canada as in England, were the coun- 
ties of Oxford, Middlesex, Kent, and Essex. In the township of Lon- 


[coyNnE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 161 


don Richard Talbot! had taken up land twenty years before, and settle- 
ment had proceeded apace. His son, E. A. Talbot, was one of a 
number of writers by whom the praises of the Talbot Settlement were 
sounded in books which were extensively circulated in the British 
Islands. 

To the township of London Mr. Bucke proceeded with his family 
to spy out the land, if it was good. 

At the forks of the Thames the town of London had already more 
than twelve hundred inhabitants, ministered to by five churches, seven 
taverns and three or four schools. Two or three miles east, on Dundas 
Street, was a farm which caught our immigrant’s fancy. He purchased 
it and settled down to the life of a pioneer farmer. A scholar and lin- 
guist, he had brought with him a library of several thousand volumes, 
in which no less than seven languages were represented. Here in the 
midst of the primeval forest he installed his family and his books; 
here three children were born to him; and here, in the gradually widen- 
ing clearing he passed the remaining years of his life. The property, 
known afterwards as the Creek Farm, is now the site of the village of 
Pottersburg, a suburb of the city of London. 


5. 


The Reverend Mr. Bucke was master of seven languages: Latin, 
Greek, Hebrew, French, Italian, Spanish and English. The edu- 
cation of his six sons was, however, left largely to chance. That is 
to say, he taught each of them to read in one or more languages, 
and then, turning them loose in his library, left them to shift for 
themselves. But, to use Maurice’s own words, “ they were born with 
the desire to know, and with the instinct to find out.” Each was 
thenccforward his own schoolmaster. Of the six sons, three became 
physicians and one a lawyer. The eldest brother, George Walpole, ? 
died comparatively young. 

Maurice learned Latin from his father. Browsing among the 
thousands of books, breathing their atmosphere, he became saturated 
with literature of wide range and varied character. A better foundation 
could hardly have been laid for his professional and literary life-work, 
which was to demand a comprehensive knowledge of the mental and 
moral nature of man. 


1 Not to be confounded with Colonel the Honourable Thomas Talbot, 
founder of the Talbot Settlement, which included twenty-eight townships 
in whole or in part. 

The following entry in the family Bible is of historical interest: 

“ George Walpole, born Milden Hall, County Norfolk, 14 June, 1828; inocu- 
lated 28 February, 1829; recovered from the small-pox, 21 March, 1829.” 


162 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


He never went to school, in the ordinary sense of the word; but 
his education was, notwithstanding, productive in results that could not 
easily have been surpassed, had he attended in boyhood the regular 
institutions of learning. 

His early life is described by Dr. Bucke as follows: 

“He was born of good middle-class English stock and grew up 
aimost without education on what was thea a backwoods Canadian 
farm. As a child he assisted in such labour as was within his power. 
Tended cattle, horses, sheep, pigs; brought in firewood, worked in the 
hay field, drove oxen and horses, ran errands. His pleasures were as 
simple as his labours. An occasional visit to a small town, a game 
of ball, bathing in the creek that ran through his father’s farm, the 
making and sailing of mimic ships, the search for bird’s eggs and 
flowers in the spring, and for wild fruits in the summer and fall, 
afforded him, with his skates and handsled in the winter, his homely, 
much-loved recreations. While still a young boy he read with keen 
appreciation Marryat’s novels, Scott’s poems and novels, and other 
similar books dealing with outdoor nature and human life.” 

The great problems of religion presented themselves to him even 
as a child:—God, Jesus Christ, immortality, eternal suffering. 

“The boy (even the child) dwelt on these and similar topics far 
more than anyone would suppose; but probably not more than many 
other introspective small fellow mortals. He was subject at times 
to a sort of ecstasy of curiosity and hope; as, on one special occasion, 
when about ten years old, he earnestly longed to die, that the secrets 
of the beyond, if there was any beyond, might be revealed to him; 
also to agonies of anxiety and terror, as, for instance, at about the 
same age, he read Reynolds’ Faust, and being near its end one sunny 
afternoon he laid it down utterly unable to continue its perusal, and. 
went out into the sunshine to recover from the horror (after more 
than fifty years he distinctly recalls it) which had seized him.” 

At the age of fifteen he read the “ Vestiges of Creation,” a well- 
known precursor of Darwinism. His inclination to philosophy and 
science was thus manifested at an early period of his life. 


6. 


Maurice’s mother having died, his father married a second time, 
and in 1853 he too died. Maurice, then 16 years of age, decided to 
see the world for himself, and seek his fortunes wherever circumstances 
seemed propitious. | 

The next five years were years of varied and remarkable adventure. 
Crossing Lake Erie, one June day, he lived for three years in the Ohio 
and Mississippi valleys, working at any employment that offered. 


- “ 


[COYNE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 163 


At Columbus he was a gardener; near Cincinnati he worked first 
on a railroad, and then as a farm hand. In the winter of 1854-5 we 
find him making staves in the cypress swamps of Louisiana. Then 
for another twelve-month he served as fireman or deck-hand on steam- 
boats plying on the Mississippi and Ohio rivers. But his longing to 
know the world and men was by no means satisfied. He was now 
just entering on his twentieth year, in the full vigour of early manhood, 
ready as ever for anything that promised novelty or adventure. For- 
tune took him at his word. 

Ascending the Missouri river to Fort Leavenworth, he determined 
to cross the plains and mountains to the Pacific. To carry out his 
purpose he hired with the conductor or manager of a train of twenty- 
six loaded freight waggons, consigned to a mercantile house in Salt 
Lake City. Each waggon was drawn by six yoke of oxen, and carried 
from three to four tons. It was a wearisome, difficult and perilous 
trail: for in 1,200 miles there were no white inhabitants, except at 
Fort Carney and Fort Laramie, the roads were bad, the loads heavy, 
and oxen at best are rather sure than swift as draught animals. The 
journey occupied five months; nowadays it would require less than 
two days. The party found Indian camps near the forts; the Pawnee 
nation at Fort Carney, and a large party of Sioux at Fort Laramie. 
They passed through immense herds of buffalo on the Platte, as Park- 
man had done a few years before. They crossed the Rockies by the 
South Pass:and Green river; the Wahsatch Range by Echo Cañon. 

From the summit of the Wahsatch he saw spread before him the 
rich, spacious and beautiful country of the Mormons, with the Great 
Salt Lake in the blue distance beyond. The splendid picture never 
faded from his memory. 

The wondrous scenery of the Rockies was a revelation, which the 
impressionable youth absorbed into his soul. In his later years he 
recorded with enthusiasm the effect produced upon him by its grandeur 
and its beauty. 


7 


At Salt Lake the party received their five months’ pay; but none 
thought of turning back. Westward still their gaze was fixed, and 
with eagerness they pressed toward the setting sun. 

Four hundred and fifty miles farther on was Sam Black’s trading 
post, a solitary house, with its sheds and outbuildings on the sink of 
the Humboldt, and there was no white settler between. On the other 
hand, the Indians were hostile and in a position to choose their own 
fighting ground. 


164 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


bb) 


“We formed ourselves,” says Bucke, “into parties of from five 
to ten men in each. Each party bought a light waggon and* two 
horses to draw it. Into this were loaded the necessary provisions, 
cooking utensils and personal effects of the party. One of us, turn 
about, sat in the waggon and drove, the rest walked.” 

Unwisely, as it turned out, the parties travelled in detachments. 
The party of which Bucke was a member numbered ten. They chose 
a man named Samuel Jamieson as captain. Crossing the Humboldt 
mountains, and then following the river of the same name to the west- 
ward, they were attacked by the Shoshones. Columns of smoke here 
and there along the river uplands gave the signal to the swarthy foe. 
“'Then I heard, for the first time in my life, from a hundred savage 
throats, that most unpleasant of sounds, the Indian war-whoop.” The 
ranks of Bucke’s party had been swelled and their scanty supply of 
provisions depleted by the addition of a party of six, who had been 
robbed of everything by the Indians, and fallen back for help and 
food. For a full half-day a running fight ensued with a hundred 
naked savages, “yelling the war-whoop at the top of their voices.” 
The Indians had few guns, and depended mainly on their bows and 
arrows; the whites had five rifles, a shot gun and two ‘revolvers. The 
Jatter reserved their fire until it was likely to prove effective. One 
of them was wounded with an arrow, another with a rifle-ball in the 
groin. The whites were the better strategists, economized their fire, 
were cooler, and shot straighter. Bucke believed he had hit one or 
more of the enemy. Rushing toward the bushes to capture the gun of 
one of these, he was peremptorily recalled by the captain. “ At the 
time the Indians abandoned the fight we had our last bullets in our 
guns and they were not all loaded.” 

But their troubles were by no means over. They had forgotten 
tc fill their water cask in the morning. The trail had left the river. 
Thirsty and exhausted they toiled wearisomely in the hot sun, on the 
hot sand, with nothing in sight but sand, sage brush and here and 
there rocky hills.” It was 9 at night before the trail again struck 
the river. Their suffering had been intense, and Bucke describes it 
in a most graphic manner. The craving for water was such that 
enormous quantities of it were swallowed before their thirst was satis- 
fied. Then followed six more days of hunger and privation, during 
which they marched about 150 miles, witn nothing to eat but a little 
flour stirred in boiling water. They arrived at Sam Black’s almost 
exhausted with want of food. “ Naturally, the first thing we did was 
to arrange for supper. Inside of two hours after our arrival we sat 
down to a table loaded with meat, game, vegetables and hot biscuits, 


[coryNnE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 165 


and, it is needless to say that we did full justice to these and the hot 
coffee served with them.” 

Two days later members of the third and fourth parties came in. 
They had been less provident in their supplies, and less fortunate in 
fighting than Bucke’s party. The Indians had robbed them of every- 
thing; five of their number were killed or missing; the rest had tra- 
velled 175 miles, practically without food, except some seed-pods and 
a duck they had killed. 

8. 


His next occupation was that of a gold miner. 

After a few days’ rest, he writes, We crossed the great American 
desert from the sink of the Humboldt to the Carson river and marched 
up the Carson to Gold Cafion.” They sold their horses and waggon; 
some of them, including Bucke, took up claims, bought mining tools, 
“and settled down to work gold mining.” 

Gold Canyon he describes as “a broad and shallow ravine, dry 
jn summer, but, in winter, spring and fall, sending a diminutive tribute 
of muddy water to the Carson river.” Here he remained about a year, 
“a member of a small community who, by the aid of rockers, toms, 
and sluices, extracted a precarious livelihood from the placer diggings.” 
The miners numbered three or four dozens in all; the whole settle- 
ment, including ranchers, about one hundred, “ scattered over a country 
thirty or forty miles across in each direction. To the east, our nearest 
neighbours lived seven hundred miles distant, on the shore of the Great 
Salt Lake; across the mountains to the west, we reached by a walk 
of a little over a hundred miles the westernmost mining camps of 
California; north and south as far as our knowledge extended the 
barren slopes of the foot-hills were still in the undisturbed possession 
of Washoe and Piute Indians; along the highlands towards the head 
of the cafion, where now stand Virginia City, Silver City and Gold 
Hill, the mountain sheep suckled her young, unmolested except by the 
gray wolf.” 

“The social state of this small community,” says Bucke, 
genuinely Arcadian in its simplicity. No civil, military or ecclesias- 
tical organization existed among us. Utah Territory, in which we 
lived, had at that time no laws or courts, and Gold Canon possessed 
no church of any denomination. In spite of the absence of these 
signs of civilization, I have never known a community the members of 
which were better disposed or conducted. There was no theft, no 
violence, and hardly ever even an instance of drunkenness or a quarrel. 
Each worked steadily all the week, and, after a general wash-up on 
Sunday morning, it was the rule to adjourn to our general headquarters 


€ was 


166 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


at Johntown, and spend the afternoon and evening over a social game 
cf cards.” | 

The camp was on the eastern slope of the Sierra Nevadas, in what 
was then Utah, and is now Nevada. 

It was the best type of the life that is depicted in its manifold 
phases and manifestations in the pages of Bret Harte, Mark Twain 
and Joaquin Miller. It was a wonderful experience and a valuable 
education for the youth of nineteen. But, adventures strange and 
perilous were still before him. 


9. 


Among the original forty-niners were two brothers, Allen and 
Hosea Grosh, of Pennsylvania. From California they had made their 
way over the Sierra to Gold Cañon in the early fifties. As early as 
1854 they had discovered native silver in the cañon, which they revis- 
ited again and again, but they kept their knowledge to themselves. 
They were the first discoverers of silver west of the ÆRockies.! 
In the spring of 1857, after spending the winter in California, they 
were back again in the Cañon, and here young Bucke made their 
acquaintance, an acquaintance that ultimately involved him in the most 
terrible vicissitudes, and left him a legacy of life-long indescribable 
euffering. On the other hand, had the enterprise succeeded, he would 
in all probability have been reckoned among the McKays and Carnegies 
and Rockefellers; for the Groshes held the key to treasures beyond 
the dreams of Sindbad or Aladdin. 

The ostensible object of the Groshes in 1857 was gold mining. 
Their real purpose was to explore for silver and ascertain the value 
of their previous discoveries. With a third partner, one George Brown, 
they made their own assays and “satisfied themselves that they had 
found and owned enormously rich silver lodes.” 

They located the best sites, took up as much land as the mining 
laws permitted, and were about ready to form a company to develop 
their extraordinary discoveries. 

“The strange part of the story is that within three months from 
that time all three of these young and strong men met with violent 
‘deaths, and by an extraordinary combination of circumstances the 
vapers relative to their discoveries, and which were naturally left in 
the hands of the last survivor, were absolutely lost.” 

Brown was murdered by a party of immigrants at his own door. 
Hoseo Grosh cut his foot with an axe, and died of blood-poisoning. 


1 There is a monument in their honour at Virginia City, to commemorate 


their achievement. “ 


[cornE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 167 


“ Allen, overcome with grief, was left alone in the possession of their 
common secret.” 

The Grosh boys had been in the habit of spending each winter 
in California. Hosea’s death delayed Allen’s departure until winter 
was already closing in on the mountains. 

It was now that Bucke came upon the scene. He had helped to 
rurse and bury the brother; and this led to a close friendship with 
Allen, who arranged that Bucke should take Hosea’s place as his com- 
panion in the long journey over the mountains. 


10. 


It was the middle of November before they left the cañon. The 
donkey which carried their baggage strayed away, and it was the 20th 
before they left Washoe Valley. They had now but three days’ provi- 
sions with them. In the valley the weather had been warm. Ascend- 
ing the mountains they cut through six inches of ice the first night 
to get water. Next day, they crossed the eastern summit of the Sierra, 
about 9,000 feet high. Down 2,000 feet lower, to Lake Tahoe, and then 
on the following day, around the lake to its outlet through Trucksee river, 
they trudged on. The trail crossed the river and then Squaw Valiey. 
Undeterred by twenty-four hours of rain, they attempted the western 
summit. The rain turned to snow, the trail was covered, was lost; 
the adventurers turned back to the valley, and, drying themselves as 
best they could in the still falling rain, lay down by their fire till 
morning. 

Next day it was colder and snowing in the valley. They were 
obliged to encamp here for a week, the almost continuous snow hiding 
the trails and even the mountain summits. The donkey was killed for 
food. A tent was improvised of blankets. Its site served as a fire- 
place during the day and as their bed at night. The young men 
made themselves snowshoes, but these proved a failure and were thrown 
away. 

On the 28th, the sky being bright and clear, they climbed all day 
te a high summit. “ During a great part of the ascent the ground 
was too steep for walking. In such places our mode of procedure 
was to clear away the snow, catch hold of the bushes, and with hands 
and feet together climb up.” Then they found a ravine, at least 
a thousand feet deep, with perpendicular walls, between them and the 
main ridge to be crossed. Again they went back to camp, reaching it 
about ten o’clock at night, tired out. 

Finally, on the 29th, “after a terribly hard up-hill walk of some 
ten or twelve miles, through deep snow and over rough ground, we 


168 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


gained the western summit about two o’clock in the afternoon.” In 
the teeth of the intense cold and a bitter west wind, they crossed the 
three-mile plateau to the western edge. That night they camped 
down the slope in a forsaken cabin. Their matches had spoiled in 
Squaw Valley. They lighted their fire with a gun. 

Two days of hard snowing followed. Again they made snowshoes, 
and again their efforts were doomed to failure, and the shoes were 
abandoned. Their meat failed. Four days of absolute starvation 
were before them. The trail now was a blazed one, and easily missed ; 
the snow was three to four feet deep, and even more in places, along 
the side of a high ridge. Then the ridge spread into a broad plateau. 
Soon the trees failed them, there was no trail, and the cold was intense. 
Near sundown they came on fresh tracks, and hope sprang up in their 
hearts. Then they discerned the truth; they had wandered in a 
circle, and the tracks were their own. They were off the trail. It 
was snowing hard, obscuring objects a hundred yards distant. They 
tried to make a fire, but their’ gun failed them. It had got damp 
and refused to go off. Then they found that they were frost-bitten. 


LA. 


The first necessity now was immediate shelter from the cold. Hope 
died in their hearts. The wealth of Golconda had no further charms 
or even interest. ‘Skin for skin; yea, all that a man hath, will he 
give for his life” The gun was thrown away. Allen’s papers, con- 
taining the records of his discoveries and titles to claims, were aban- 
doned. Others might reap where he had sown. Nothing was kept 
but the blankets, a tin cup and its contents, and a butcher’s knife, 
In the tin cup was a miserable remnant of their meat. 

They struck for the nearest edge of the ridge and down the steep 
slope, full speed through deep snow, to an evergreen valley. Here 
they placed their blankets on the ground, covered them a foot deep 
with snow, crept under the blankets feet first, and lay until morning. 
The warmth of their bodies thawed the snow, and they did not get 
dry again for several days. 

On the 3rd December they followed down a ravine, hoping to find 
a river. A muddy current would indicate a mining camp up stream. 
The walking was through snow two and a half feet deep over very 
uneven ground. Sometimes they walked into low bushes they could 
not see. For two days longer they kept on their toilsome way down 
the ravine to the Middle Forks of the American river and still further 
down until it ran through a deep rocky canon, where they were forced 


[coYNE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 169 


to leave it, and walk over a ridge to and across another large stream. 
The travellers were famished and their strength was almost gone. The 
snow now did not average a foot deep. Brush was so weak, that Bucke 
walked in front to make the tracks for his feet. “ Exhausted and 
despairing, I sat down, and, weeping, proposed to give up and lie 
down and die where we were.” But Allen was determined to push 
through, and encouraged the despairing boy, reminding him of their 
friends in the East. When they camped at night, they were too weak 
to talk much. The younger hardly expected to live till morning, and 
thought that even if he survived the night, he would be unable to 
walk. “Let us make up our bed for the last time,” he said to Allen, 
“for we shall never leave this place.” But Allen still cheered him ag 
best he could with the hope of reaching shelter somewhere yet. They 
slept but little. 

Next morning, after “ horrible and extravagant dreams . . 
we were barely able to crawl along, and went almost as much on our 
hands and knees as on our feet.” The snow was now only a few 
inches deep. Once Allen said he heard a dog bark; Maurice refused 
tc believe it. Then they came to a ditch with running water, and 
knew they were near a mining camp. In a few minutes Allan said, 
“There is smoke.” They had walked or crawled just three-quarters 
of a mile that day. 

The miners showed their proverbial generosity; but the exhausted 
youths could not eat. Next day they were unable to walk. In a 
few days they became delirious. On the twelfth day Allen Grosh died. 

“No knowledge survived of the work of the Grosh brothers in 
Gold Canon and its neighbourhood, except the bare fact that they 
had found silver. Two years afterwards in 1859, this knowledge, by 
making the miners watch for indications of silver, led to the finding 
of the Comstock lode, and that discovery to others, until the faint and 
soon almost extinguished spark of knowledge, struck from the rocks of 
Utah by the intelligence and perseverance of these two young men, 
resulted in the enormous silver-mining industry of western Nevada.” 1 

Maurice’s powerful physique stood him in good stead under the 
trying ordeal he was called to pass through. He was obliged to lie 
in bed all winter. The miners sent down the mountains for a 


1 A letter, signed Duncan Gordon, published in the New York Sun, 
November 29, 1897, and entitled, “The Tragedy of the Comstock,’ was 
contradicted or varied in many of its statements by Dr. Bucke in an inter- 
view published in the London (Ont.) Advertiser of December 16, 1897. Gor- 
don connected the Groshes and Dr Bucke more closely with the discovery 
of the Comstock than the facts, according to the latter, appeared to justify. 


Sec. II., 1906. 12 


170 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


surgeon, “who found it necessary to amputate one of my feet, and a 
portion of the other.” “For months,” says one who knew him well, 
Dr. T. J. W. Burgess, superintendent of the Protestant Asylum for 
the Insane, Montreal, “the stricken man lay in that mountain cabin, 
tended only by rough, yet gentle, hands, and there it was that he first 
had time to think. ‘I was born again, he once said, in speaking of 
this period of his life, ‘it cost me my feet — yet it was worth the 
price. ”1 The stumps did not thoroughly heal for more than forty 
years. The sufferings he endured can be better imagined than described. 
But never was suffering more heroically borne, and uncomplaining, he 
suffered in silence. 


12. 


The youth of 16 returned to his Canadian home a man of 21, 
maimed and broken in health, but with a knowledge of nature and of 
men, a store of experience, such as few men of 21 have ever had. 
A sum of money left him by his mother enabled him to carry out a 
plan he had formed of going to college. 

At once he entered upon a medical course at McGill University. 
He graduated in 1862, winning the prize for the best thesis of his 
year. The tremendous force of will, the dominance of the mental and 
moral powers over the physical system, which such a university career 
evinces, showed him to be no common man. 

The prize thesis, entitled “ The Correlation of the Vital and Physi- 
cal Forces,” defended before the Medical Faculty of McGill, May 2, 
1862, was printed in the British American Journal, and in pamphlet 
form. 

Among his fellow students at McGill may be mentioned Doctor 
Joseph M. Drake, afterwards professor of physiology at the university ; 
Doctors Wright, of Ottawa, and Phillips, of Brantford. 

His reading was not limited by the curriculum nor the books 
relating to medical science. 

“Outside of his collegiate course he read with avidity many 
speculative books, such as the “ Origin of Species,” Tyndall’s “ Heat,” 
and “ Essays,” Buckle’s “ History,’ “ Essays and Reviews,” and much 
poetry, especially such as seemed to him free and fearless. In this 
species of literature he soon preferred Shelley, and of his poems, 
“ Adonais ” and “ Prometheus ” were his favourites. His life for some 
years was one passionate note of interrogation, an unappeasable hunger 


1 From a paper read at the Annual Meeting of the American Medico- 
Psychological Association, held at Montreal, June 1902, and reprinted in 
pamphlet form from the published proceedings. 


[corynE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 171 


for enlightenment on the basic problems. Leaving college, he con- 
tinued his search with the same ardour. Taught himself French, that 
he might read Auguste Comte, Hugo and Renan, and German, that he 
might read Goethe, especially “ Faust.” 


13. 


From McGill he proceeded to Europe for post-graduate work. 
The season of 1862-3 was spent in London. Dr. W. C. Vanbuskirk 
of St. Thomas was his fellow student with him in Paris, and from 
him some particulars relating to Bucke’s student life, both there and 
in London, have been gleaned. He attended lectures in the operative 
theatre of University College, London. Fox, Jenner, Ringer, Erichsen, 
Quain, Harley, Hillier and Hare were among the lecturers. Most of 
the residue of 1863 was spent in Paris at the Hotel Dieu and the 
Hospital of the Collége des Médecins, where they attended clinics 
given by such men as Trousseau, Nelaton and Bouvier. 

In Paris he was laid up for a time with a mild type of typhoid 
fever. He was able to continue his reading notwithstanding the illness, 
and Dr. Vanbuskirk remembers seeing him engaged in earnest perusal 
of Comte’s works, whilst incapacitated by fever from attending the 
hospitals. 

In London, a warm friendship sprang up between Dr. (afterwards 
Sir) Benjamin Ward Richardson and Bucke, growing out of mutual 
admiration and kept alive by intermittent correspondence. Bucke 
regarded Richardson as “the ablest man in the profession in England, 
and that is as much as to say, in the world” The results of their 
association would seem to be reflected in some of their publications, 
especially in those dealing with the therapeutic uses of alcohol. 

* On the return voyage by the St. Lawrence route he had an experi- 

ence, which might have been attended with disastrous consequences. 
He occupied the post of ship surgeon, and in performance of his official 
duties was obliged to report at Grosse Isle some cases of contagious 
disease. This necessitated the quarantining of the steerage passengers, 
some of whom became infuriated at the doctor as the cause of their 
inconvenience and delay. An organized gang attempted to throw him 
into the river. With some difficulty Dr. Bucke was hurriedly lowered 
into one of the ship’s boats and carried to a place of safety. He 
used to speak of this as one of the most exciting episodes in a life 
that was by no means devoid of thrilling incidents.} 


1This incident was communicated by Dr Hugh A McCallum of London. 


172 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
14. 


Returning to Canada early in 1864, where his elder brother, Dr. 
Edward Horatio Bucke had died but a few months before, he settled 
down to the practice of his profession in Sarnia. But almost simultan- 
eously, he was urgently requested to go to California in the interest of 
the Gould & Curry Silver Mining Company. It would appear that there 
was litigation with reference to mining claims in or near Gold Cafion, 
and it may be surmised that Maurice’s knowledge of Grosh’s discoveries 
was an important factor in the case. The year he spent on the Pacific 
slope was equivalent to a second post-graduate course in business and 
knowledge of men. He was amply remunerated for his time and 
services, and returned to Sarnia in 1865, not only enriched in experi- 
ence, but with a substantial sum of money. Here he married, on the 
7th September, Miss Jessie Maria Gurd. There were born to them 
eight children, of whom six survive, together with their mother. Set- 
tling down to the practice of his chosen profession, he met with success 
from the start, and had more than a local reputation. The Honorable 
Alexander Mackenzie was his first patient and frequently sounded his 
praises.1 Sarnia was the home of the late Hon. Timothy Blair Pardee, 
M.P.P. for the county of Lambton from Confederation, and a distin- 
guished Minister of the Crown for the Province of Ontario from the 
year 1872 until his decease in 1889. Mr. Pardee and Dr. Bucke recog- 
nized in each other congenial spirits, and became intimate friends. 
Their friendship had doubtless somewhat to do with the appointment 
of Dr. Bucke, in January, 1876, to the Superintendency of the Asylum 
for the Insane at Hamilton, on its first establishment. In the follow- 
ing February, on the death of Dr. Landor of the London Asylum, 
Dr. Bucke was promoted to the headship of the larger institution, a 
position he was to fill until his death. Had he lived a few days 
longer, he would have occupied this important post for a full quarter 
of a century. Only a few rods distant from the asylum lay the home 
of his childhood, the old Creek Farm, the scene of his earliest recol- 
lections. 

It is not too much to say of him that as Superintendent of the 
London Asylum he did not fall behind the expectations which his 
university career and his professional reputation had led his friends 
to form respecting him. 

To the literature of alienism he devoted his attention, with the 
same persistent determination that had carried him through the perils 
and labours of the earlier years. With the natural scientific bent 


‘This fact was mentioned by Dr. Bucke to Dr. Hugh A. McCallum. 


c 


[coyxE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 173 


of his mind, the practice and opportunities for observation and research 
afforded by his official position, and his continuous and close reading 
of reports and statistics, it was not long before ne was recognized as 
an authority among alienists. His opinion was sought from far and 
wide. Medical and psychological societies were glad to give a con- 
spicuous place to his name on their programmes and to his addresses 
and papers in their publications. His right to a place in the foremost 
rank of his profession in America was beyond question. In an appen- 
dix will be found a list of his printed pamphlets, lectures and addresses, 
of which particulars are accessible. 

His annual reports to the provincial government are, with one 
exception, not specified in the list. The reports are all valuable. 
That for 1897 contains “The Story of the Care for the Insane in 
Ontario,” an interesting and instructive historical resumé of the suc- 
cessive stages of progress in the treatment of this unfortunate class of 
citizens. 


15. 


In his chosen field he was not content to follow subserviently in 
the footsteps of his predecessors. 

Cautious, but courageous, sure of his ground before taking the 
forward step, he signalized his administration of the London Asylum 
(the largest in the province) by three remarkable innovations, unheed- 
ing the opposition or the outeries of those whose conservatism did 
not approve of the modern spirit and changed methods. 

(1) He was the first alienist in America to adopt the system of 
absolute non-restraint in the treatment of the insane. : 

(2) He discarded entirely the use of beer, wine or alcohol in any 
form at the asylum. 

(3) He was the first, systematically, to employ gynecological sur- 
gery in the treatment of insane women. 

The first of these reforms could not be effected all at once. Public 
opinion had to be considered, and the experiment might involve dan- 
gerous consequences, not merely to the patient, but to the staff and 
attendants as well. For some years the degree of restraint was 
gradually diminished. “In the middle of 1883,” writes Bucke in 1897, 
“we totally discontinued the use of restraint and seclusion in every 
form and have not used them since.” 

Dealing with this question, Dr. O’Reilly, Inspector of Asylums and 
Prisons, in his annual report for 1887, writes as follows: “To Dr. 
R. M. Bucke, Medical Superintendent of the London Asylum, belongs 
the honour of being the first to take up the subject practically in the 


174 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Canadian asylums. He approached it at first very properly with great 
hesitation and caution, but it only required a few weeks’ practical study 
of the subject to convince him that all that had been said by the 
advocates of the system was well founded, and restraint in the London 
Asylum became a thing of the past. Dr. Bucke did not burn his 
restraint apparatus with religious ceremonies, nor make any flourish 
of trumpets about it. When the proper time came, he simply an- 
nounced that after eighteen months’ trial of absolute non-restraint in 
an asylum having a population of nine hundred patients he had found 
the system to be all that had been claimed for it, and that he was 
new unable to conceive of a case where mechanical restraint, except 
for surgical reasons, would be necessary; would not be, in fact, posi- 
tively harmful to the patient. Dr. Bucke’s example was slowly fol- 
lowed by others, until now in this province restraint appliances are 
unknown, and one after another the doctors give in their testimony 
te the great value of this reform, which was commenced by Connolly 
and Pinel half a century ago.” 

With the abolition of restraint may be said to have disappeared 
the last trace of the ancient method of treatment of the insane. The 
Bedlam of history is a thing of the past. Except for the protection 
of patients against themselves, the straight-waistcoat is no longer in 
use. Patients are treated as human beings. The law of love has 
been found effective with them as with the rest of humanity. 

It is gratifying to be assured that the increased proportion of 
cures effected bears its due relation to the improvement in methods of 
treatment. | 


16. 


It was a work of time to persuade the medical profession 
at large, that alcohol as a medicine was, as a rule, unnecessary and 
even positively injurious. The practice of eminent physicians such 
as Sir Benjamin Richardson and Sir William Gull in discountenancing 
its use in many cases was, no doubt, a strong factor in inducing Dr. 
Bucke to abandon it altogether. In his first or second year at London, 
he experimented by reducing the number of patients to whom beer, 
wine or whiskey was regularly served, and watching carefully the 
effect. In 1879 he closed the spirit rations entirely. The result 
warranted his action. “The health of the asylum was never better. 
T doubt if it was ever as good.” The death rate was smaller; the 
percentage of recoveries higher. 

So impressed was he with the importance of the results effected, 
that he brought the matter before the Dominion Medical Association 


COYNE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 175 


in a paper read at London, on the 10th September, 1879. The essay 
was printed in the London Advertiser, and reprinted twice in England. 
In the following year he enlarged and completed it for publication in 
pamphlet form, under the title “ Alcohol in Health and Disease.” He 
did not halt half way in his conclusions. He placed alcohol and blood- 
letting in the same category as obsolete in medical practice. “A time 
will come,” he believes, “and that perhaps before many generations 
have passed away, when it will be as rare for a physician or surgeon 
tc prescribe alcohol, as it is now for either of them to prescribe blood- 
letting, and when a healthy man will no more think of taking alcohol 
with a view of preserving his health, . or to make him feel better, than 
he thinks now of going to a surgeon to be bled with a view to the same 
end.” 
We: 


Among the reforms Dr. Bucke initiated at the London Asylum 
should be mentioned his adoption, experimentally, in 1888 of the 
“ Intermittent Downward Filtration ” system of sewage disposal. Col. 
Warring, of New York, was the engineer selected to inaugurate the 
new method. It proved efficient, economical, and in every way satis- 
factory. Dr. Bucke published the results far and wide through reports, 
addresses and printed papers, with a view to its general adoption by 
cities, towns and villages. 

The sewage field, of about six acres, fertilized by the trenches into 
which the sewage was scattered day by day by a centrifugal pump, 
produced abundant crops, the average annual value of which was esti- 
mated by him in 1897 at $250 an acre. 

No wonder that his reputation not only as an alienist, but also as 
an administrator, grew with the years. The theorist and the practical 
man of affairs, the scientist and the business manager, were in him com- 
bined in a remarkable degree. 

He was fortunate in having the hearty co-operation of a staff of 
able and loyal assistants. But the impression of his initiative, his 
energy, his mastery of detail, his enthusiastic interest in the institution, 
was felt in every part of its administration. 


18. 


Walt Whitman, who visited Bucke in 1880, described his manage- 
ment of the insane in the following terms: 

“His method is peaceful, uncoercive, quiet, though always firm— 
rather persuasive than anything else. Bucke is without brag or bluster. 
It is beautiful to watch him at his work — to see how he can handle 


176 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


difficult people with such an easy manner.  Bucke is a man who enjoys 
being busy — likes to do things —is swift of execution — lucid, sure, 
decisive. Doctors are not in the main comfortable creatures to have 
around, but Bucke is helpful, confident, optimistic—has a way of 
buoying you up.” 

On the establishment of a Medical Faculty in the Western Uni- 
versity, in 1882, Dr. Buèke was appointed Professor of Mental and 
Nervous Diseases. His teaching we are assured was invariably satis- 
factory to both faculty and students. 

In 1891 the Medical Faculty of McGill University paid him the 
high compliment of inviting him to deliver the opening lecture for the 
year. Its ability and forcefulness were the subject of wide comment 
and commendation, 

Six years later, he was chosen President of the Psychological 
Section of the British Medical Association on the occasion of its meet- 
ing at Montreal. This was, perhaps, the most distinguished honour 
that could be bestowed upon a specialist in the branch of science to 
which he had devoted the best part of his life. It was followed in 
1898 by his election to the Presidency of the American Medico-Psycho- 
logical Association. 

19, 


The life of a physician in good practice in a small town is exacting 
in its demands, and leaves little time for literary culture. The more 
successful he is as a practitioner, the rarer necessarily are his oppor- 
tunities for keeping up an adequate acquaintance with the great masters 
of the world of letters or with the current thought of the time. To 
do so presupposes the literary instinct and training. It calls for an 
intellectual equipment beyond the ordinary, careful economy of time, 
and great mental energy and resolution. Dr. Bucke was fortunate 
in possessing the instinct, the character and the training. 

Reference has already been made to books read by him in his 
childhood and youth. As already stated, his bent for scientific and 
philosophical study manifested itself at an early age. 

Buckle, Darwin and Tyndall he read while a medical student. 
Jr Paris he had become acquainted with Auguste Comte’s “ Cours de 
Philosophie Positive.” Littré’s books upon Comte and the writings 
of other positivists deepened the impression produced by the books 
mentioned. Herbert Spencer’s works were perused with avidity. On 
the scientific and philosophical side, these, and especially Comte’s works, 


1 “With Walt Whitman in Camden,” by Horace Traubel. Boston, 1906, 
page 448. 


[coYNE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 177 


were the formative influences in his earlier mental development. At 
a later period he became profoundly interested in Francis Bacon, whom 
he pronounced “ incontestably the greatest intellect that the race has 
produced,” adding, “ His prose is the best in our language.” 

But matter-of-fact scientist as Bucke was by inclination and train- 
ing, he had also the imaginative faculty developed in a high degree. 
Not only in the light, which prism could analyze, whose wave lengths 
and velocities could be computed, was he interested, but also in that 
ether light that never was on sea or land,” which defies analysis 
and calculation. 

Shelley, “the poet’s poet,’ was an early favourite. The charm 
of the Adonais, the Prometheus and the Epipsychidion, held him to the 
last. Tennyson and Browning were read with pieasure. Shake- 
speare’s dramas he regarded as “probably the noblest expression of 
genius in any language— while his sonnets, to my mind, reach a 
spiritual level as high as has ever been attained by man—-as high as 
that attained by St. John or by the author of the “ Divine Lay,’?— 
the ‘ Bagavad-Gita.”” The passage quoted shows that he had added 
to his stores of reading an acquaintance with the sacred books of the 
East, and been profoundly impressed with their poetic and spiritual 
content. 

He possessed a memory for poetry which was the admiration and 
envy of his friends. He would repeat with profound appreciation 
and appropriate expression the whole of the Adonais or Saul, Tenny- 
son’s “ Revenge,” or sonnet after sonnet of Shakespeare, without book 
and without a mistake that the hearer could detect. “ Leaves of Grass,” 
from beginning to end, he seemed to know by heart. 

Dr. Bucke learned German to read Faust in the original, “ and 
found the poem worth the labour.” This was followed by others of 
Goethe’s works. Goethe was among “the writers who distinctly, 
though not markedly,” influenced his mental evolution. 

Dr. Bucke was not only an idealist, but a mystic, and the com- 
bination of these characteristics with literary culture and the scientific 
temperament and training forms an interesting psychological study. 
His literary product is the resultant of these forces, working upon an 
ardent and energetic nature. 


20. 


We now come to an event which Dr. Bucke regarded as pivotal 
in connection with what he deemed his most important life-work. 

In 1867, Dr. Sterry Hunt, visiting Dr. Bucke at Sarnia, mentioned 
the name and quoted some verses of Walt Whitman. The effect on 


178 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


the hearer was instantaneous and lasting. Henceforth his life was 
largely influenced by Whitman’s personality and “ Leaves of Grass.” 
To this influence may be attributed practically the whole of his literary 
product. 

In 1868 he procured a copy of W. M. Rossetti’s Selections. In 
1870, visiting Dr. Hunt in Montreal, he borrowed the latter’s copy 
of the 1855 edition of the Leaves. In 1872 he obtained a copy of the 
new edition of 1871. All these volumes as well as Whitman’s later 
publications in prose and verse he studied with eagerness. ¢ 

It was during the early spring of 1872, while in England, that 
he passed through an experience known in the nomenclature of 
mysticism as illumination. “He and two friends had spent the 
evening reading Wordsworth, Shelley, Keats, Browning, and especially 
Whitman. They parted at midnight, and he had a long drive in a 
hensom (it was an English city). His mind deeply under the influ- 
ence of the ideas, images and emotions called up by the reading and 
talk of the evening, was calm and peaceful. He was in a state of 
quiet, almost passive enjoyment. All at once, without warning of any 
kind, he found himself wrapped around as it were by a flame-coloured 
eloud. For an instant he thought of fire, some sudden conflagration 
in the great city, the next he knew that the light was within himself. 
Directly afterwards came upon him a sense of exultation, of immense 
joyousness, accompanied or immediately followed by an intellectual 
illumination quite impossible to describe. Into his brain streamed 
one momentary lightning-flash of the Brahmic-Splendour which has 
ever since lightened his life; upon his heart fell one drop of Brahmic 
Bliss, leaving thenceforward for always an after taste of heaven.” 

The effects were similar in some respects to those of “ conversion.” 
“ Among other things he did not come to believe, he saw and knew 
that the Cosmos is not dead matter, but a living Presence, that the 
soul of man is immortal, that the universe is so built and ordered 
that without any peradventure all things work together for the good 
of each and all, that the foundation principle -of the world is what 
we call love, and that the happiness of every one is in the long run 
absolutely certain. He claims that he learned more within the few 
seconds during which the illumination lasted than in previous months 
or even years of study, and that he learned much that no study could 
ever have taught.” 


Pile 


To this psychical experience may be traced, on Dr. Bucke’s own 
authority, the theory elaborated by him in his book, “ Man’s Moral 


[coyNnE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 179 


Nature” (1879) as to the relation of the great sympathetic nerve to 
the moral nature. In it, he says, “he sought to embody the teaching 
of the illumination.” 

The subject appears to have been first broached by him in a 
paper on “ The Functions of the Great Sympathetic Nervous System,” 
tead by him at St. Louis in May, 1877, and again in a paper on 
“'The Moral Nature and the Great Sympathetic,” read at Washington 
in May, 1878, before the Association of Medical Superintendents of 
American Institutions for the Insane. 

In July, 1877, for the first time, he met and conversed with Walt 
Whitman. He called upon the poet at Camden. Of this meeting 
he gives a graphic account in the Introduction to “ Calamus,” a collec- 
tion of Whitman letters to Peter Doyle, edited by Dr. Bucke, and 
published in 1897. 

It is too long to transcribe here. But the effect is given in these 
words : 

“Briefly, it would be nothing more than the simple truth to 
state that I was, by it, lifted to and set upon a higher plane of exist- 
ence, upon which I have more or less continuously lived ever since— 
that is, for a period of eighteen years. And my feeling toward the 
man, Walt Whitman, from that day to the present has been, and is, 
that of the deepest affection and reverence. All this, no doubt, was 
supplemented and reinforced by other meetings, by correspondence 
and by readings, but equally certainly it derived its initial and essential 
vitality from that first, almost casual contact.” 

In a paper published in 1894, referring to the interview, he had 
written as follows: “A sort of spiritual intoxication set in which did 
not reach its culmination for some weeks, and which, after continuing 
some months, very gradually, in the course of the next few years faded 
out . . . . it is certain that the hours spent that day with the 
poet was the turning point of my life. The upshot of it was the 
placing of my spiritual existence on a higher plane.” 

Readers of Lucian will remember his description of a somewhat 
similar effect produced upon him by the philosopher Nigrinus. Other 
instances in sacred and profane literature are by no means infrequent 
in cases of men and women of exceptional moral and spiritual elevation. 


22. 


“Man’s Moral Nature” (1879) is dedicated “ To the man who 
inspired it—to the man who of all men, past and present, that I have 
known has the most exalted moral nature—to Walt Whitman.” 


180 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


In this book he divides the moral nature into two classes of func- 
tions: positive, 4.e., love and faith; and negative, i.e., hate and fear. 
He finds its physical basis in the great sympathetic nervous system. 
The moral nature is not a fixed quantity, but has developed from an 
initial stage, with hate and fear predominant, to that in which love 
and faith are more and more in evidence. The means by which the 
change has been effected have been (1) Natural Selection; (11) Sexual 
Selection; (III) Social Life; (IV) Art; (V) Religion. Infinite pro- 
gress is the law. “ Hate and fear are dying out. The argument is 
that their total extinction is justified. Faith and love are increasing. 
Infinite faith and love are justified. . . . . the highest moral 
nature is nearest in accord with the truth of things. This is why 
we call those men inspired who have the most exalted moral natures, 
and those men wise who have exceptionaliy exalted moral natures as 
well as superior intellectual natures . . . . religion, morality and 
happiness are three names for the same thing — moral elevation. 

“This then is the end, the conclusion of the whole matter: Love 
all things — not because it is your duty to do so, but because all things 
are worthy of your love. Hate nothing. Fear nothing. Have abso- 
lute faith. Whoso will do this is wise; he is more than wise — he 
is happy.” 

It is hardly too much to say that this theory and these conclusions 
were the foundation and regulating principles of Dr. Bucke’s conduct. 

The facts and reasoning upon which his theory was based are for 
the scientist and the philosopher. The author’s presentation is clear, 
full and interesting. His theory is put forward as a tentative one, 
as the one that seems most in conformity with the facts. The argu- 
ment will appear more or less cogent according to the training and 
tendencies of him to whom it is submitted. The conclusion, however, 
according as it does with the highest and best in man, should meet with 
general acceptance. He was an optimist by instinct, by observation, 
by reflection, by a varied experience. Appropriately, he prefixes to 
the final chapter these lines from Whitman: 


“The Lord advances and yet advances; 
Always the shadow in front; always the reached hand, bringing 
up the laggards.” 


23. 
After the first interview in 1877, Dr. Bucke made periodical visits 


tc the Good Gray Poet. He took the field as his champion and ex- 
pounder. Controversy as to the quality and tendency of “ Leaves of 


[corne] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 181 


Grass ” raged with more or less heat. Bucke rarely assumed the defen- 
sive. He was best in attack. His skill as a writer shows itself in 
exposition of his theme, in marshalling and massing his facts. Oppos- 
ing facts are often left to take care of themselves. The result, as 
far as Whitman is concerned, seems to justify the strategy, if such 
it can be called. The last word has by no means been said, but, 
notwithstanding passages regarded by many as offensive to taste or to 
the critical ear, Whitman’s place in the Pantheon is by this time 
assured. Criticism accepts “ Leaves of Grass” as a whole, with reserv- 
ation of judgment as to details. 

In September, 1879, Bucke lectured on Whitman before an Ottawa 
audience. In May he wrote the Philadelphia Press a letter entitled, 
“The Good Gray Poet.” This was an appellation first used by William 
D. O’Connor, in his brilliant defense of Whitman many vears before. 

The summer of 1880 was memorable for Whitman’s visit to London 
as the guest of Dr. and Mrs. Bucke. He remained four months. 
During the summer, the two men made a voyage down the St. Lawrence 
as far as the Saguenay and up the latter stream to Chicoutimi and 
Ha Ha Bay. Whitman was greatly impressed with the Asylum, its 
“ample and charming gardens and lawns,” the religious services, the 
demeanour of “the motley, yet perfectly well-behaved and orderly con- 
gregation,” the “ Refractory Building,” then under special charge of 
Dr. Beemer. Referring to the whole institution, he wrote in his 
diarv: “As far as I could see, this is among the most advanced, 
perfected, and kindly and rationally carried on, of all its kind in 
America. It is a town in itself, with many buildings, and a thou- 
sand inhabitants.” 

The four months thus spent with Whitman were important in 
results. Bucke was resolved to write a biography of the poet. The 
latter demurred, objected, was at length overruled, gave consent, and, 
indeed, actively co-operated. Bucke put himself in communication 
with all whom he thought possessed of information required by him, 
including leading writers in Europe and America. The results were a 
collection of correspondence unique and valuable, and friendly visits 
received and returned. 

With Whitman he went to Long Island in 1881 to familiarize him- 
self with the former’s early home and its environment. In working 
the book into shape valuable aid was rendered by William D. O’Connor, 
Mrs. Ann Gilchrist and others, who contributed facts, illustrative 
material and incidents. 

Although the book was ready in 1881, publication was delayed 
owing to difficulty in securing a satisfactory publisher. After various 


182 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


suggestions had been made, Osgood of Boston, would appear to have 
been his original choice. But Osgood was not in the humour. He 
had just then been forced by threats of prosecution by the Attorney- 
General of Massachusetts to withdraw from sale his edition of “ Leaves 
of Grass.” Early in May, 1882, Bucke wrote O’Connor that Osgood 
had declined “ Walt Whitman, a Study.” O’Connor wrote another 
scathing letter to the press, defending the “ Leaves.” On the 3rd June, 
he wrote Whitman that Bucke had written him “ quite jubilant over 
my letter, and telling me the fix I have got his book into, which is 
comic as a scene from Molière. You will see the fun, when you know 
that he had sent his MS. to Osgood! !” 

Whitman, as has been stated, took an active interest in the “ Life.” 
His extended and varied experience, as compositor, editor, proof-reader, 
business manager, was at Bucke’s disposal, and was invaluable. It 
was Whitman who arranged with Gutekunst for proofs of portraits of 
his father and mother, the number of copies to be printed and the 
price. The first twenty-four pages were written by him. 

He suggested names of publishers, and finally, when Osgood 
declined the book, it was Whitman who, on 19th February, 1883, with 
his own hand drew up the agreement between Dr. Bucke and David 
McKay of Philadelphia, for the publication of “Walt Whitman, a 
Contemporaneous Study.” The agreement shows Whitman’s business 
ability and carefulness in looking after details, and is witnessed by him. 


24. 


It was under the title, “ Walt Whitman the Man,” that the volume 
at last appeared from the press of David McKay. 

In the following year, the Glasgow edition appeared with an addi- 
tion entitled, “ English Critics on Walt Whitman,” edited by Edward 
Dowden, LL.D., Professor of English Literature in the University of 
Dublin. 

“The book is valuable,” says Ernest Rhys in his introduction to 
the volume of Selections from Walt Whitman in the Canterbury Poets, 
“not only as an authoritative biography — the standard biography — 
but for its collection of contemporary notices and criticisms, European 
and American, favourable and the reverse, of ‘Leaves of Grass”? “In 
the English list the names of Ruskin, Tennyson, Swinburne, Buchanan, 
Symonds, and other leading poets and writers bear unique testimony 
to Whitman’s influence.” 

In the Introduction, Dr. Bucke asserts that the basic meaning 
and value to us of the man, Walt Whitman, and the book Leaves of 


[coyNE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 183 


Grass, is moral elevation. ‘The true introduction, therefore, to this 
volume is the author’s previous work, “ Man’s Moral Nature.” In 
that book he has discussed the moral nature in the abstract, pointed out 
its physical basis, and shown its historical development; while the 
sole object of the present work is to depict an individual moral nature, 
perhaps the highest that has yet appeared.” 


RD. 


“Man’s Moral Nature,” had given Dr. Bucke a status not only 
as an original investigator and independent thinker, but as a writer 
of talent. It was with general acquiescence therefore that, on the 
establishment of the Royal Society of Canada in April, 1882, he was 
honoured with selection as one of the original Fellows. 

“Walt Whitman the Man” brought him into closer touch with 
men of eminence on both sides of the Atlantic. As Whitman’s intimate 
friend, authoritative biographer, and redoubtable champion, he was 
now become a personage in the literary world. 

Among notable literary men and women whose acquaintance he 
made and with most of whom he corresponded more or less, may be 
here mentioned the following: in France, Gabriel Sarrazin; in Den- 
mark, Rudolph Schmidt; in the British Islands, Professors Edward 
Dowden of Dublin, and York Powell of Oxford, John Addington 
Symonds, William Sharpe, Ann Gilchrist, Herbert H. Gilchrist, H. 
Buxton Forman, Edward Carpenter; in the United States, John Bur- 
roughs, William D. O’Connor, Oliver Wendell Holmes. Horace I. 
Traubel, Robert G. Ingersoll, E. ©. Stedman, Thomas B. Harned, 
Minot J. Savage, Sidney Morse the sculptor, Thomas Eakins the 
painter, William Sloan Kennedy, Isaac Hull Platt, Oscar Triggs, 
Daniel G. Brinton, Henry Howard Furness, Talcott Williams, Francis 
Howard Williams, Hamlin Garland, Charles G. Garrison, Laurens 
Maynard, Mary A. Livermore, Professor William James. Browning 
and Tennyson he met in England. 

Lord Tennyson and Walt Whitman carried on a friendly and 
even affectionate correspondence for twenty years, until it was termin- 
ated by death. A letter of introduction from the American poet was 
# sufficient passport to the hospitality of Farringford, where Bucke 
spent a delightful afternoon and evening with the Tennysons in the 
summer of 1891. 

Visitors of note found their way to London, from time to time, 
to enjoy the friendly hospitality of Dr. and Mrs. Bucke. Among 
these may be specially mentioned Edward Carpenter, who spent some 
weeks with them in the summer of 1884. 


+ 


184 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


26. 


Dr. Bucke paid many visits to Whitman at Camden. During 
cne of these visits, in June, 1888, Whitman was seized with a serious 
illness which threatened a fatal termination. Dr. Bucke became his 
general medical adviser, and at once placed Dr. William Osler in charge. 
Early in 1892, when the old poet’s time for departure was at hand, 
Bucke was again at his bedside, although unable to remain until the end. 
At the funeral, which was a memorable expression of popular apprecia- 
tion and sympathy, the doctor was an honorary pall-bearer. He was 
one of the speakers at the grave. By the poet’s will, Richard Maurice 
Bucke, Thomas B. Harned and Horace L. Traubel were appointed his 
literary executors. 

The volume entitled “In Re. Walt Whitman,” published by the 
executors in 1893, contains among its many papers articles from Dr. 
Bucke’s pen. 

A large part of Whitman’s correspondence, MSS. and other papers, 
came into his hands, and he devoted himself assiduously to their assort- 
ment and to editing portions from time to time, as his other duties 
permitted. 

The books issued by Bucke under the titles, “ Calamus” (1897), 
and “‘ The Wound-dresser ” (1898), are composed of Whitman’s letters 
to Peter Doyle and the poet’s mother respectively. “Notes and Frag- 
ments,” of which 225 copies were issued for private circulation in 
1899, is made up of Whitman’s notes and memoranda, showing the 
evolution of “ Leaves of Grass,” almost from the germ. 

The Introductions by Dr. Bucke to these three volumes are full 
of interest, and of autobiographical as well as biographical value. 

Dr. Bucke’s collection of portraits of Whitman is the most com- 
plete in existence. His collection of books, pamphlets, MSS., and 
bibliographical data relating to the sage of Camden is also probably 
unsurpassed. 

In Horace Traubel’s book, “ With Walt Whitman in Camden,” 
are many references to Dr. Bucke, jotted down by Traubel, from Whit- 
man’s table-talk in 1888. They are interesting as indicating Whitman’s 
estimate of Bucke’s qualities and friendship. 

Referring to Sloane Kennedy, as one of his most ardent admirers, 
Whitman added, “ Indeed, he out-Buckes Bucke.” 

On another occasion, Bucke’s name being mentioned, he exclaimed: 
“ Bucke? O, yes, Bucke! Some one was here the other day and 
complained that the Doctor was extreme. I suppose he is extreme — 
the sun’s extreme, too; and as for me, ain’t I extreme?” 


[coynr } RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 185 


Ernest Rhys having “seen Dr. Bucke and Niagara,” Whitman 
expressed pleasure, saying, smilingly, “I am proud of both.” 

Speaking of his serious illness in June, 1888, Whitman said Bucke 
saved his life, “his skill, decision, brotherliness, pulled me ashore.” 
And again, “ Osler, too, has his points, big points. But after all the 
real man is Dr. Bucke. He is the top of the heap. He has such 
a clear head, such a fund of common sense — such steady eyes — such 
a steady hand. As you say, Bucke is a scientist, not a doctor; he 
has had severe personal experiences — is an expert in questions involv- 
ing the mind — is in every sort of way a large man — liberal, devoted, 
far-seeing. I especially owe him so much,— Oh, so much.” 

A short note from Bucke, he described as “a whiff of fresh air 
from the north.” In sending a return message, he added: “ Doctor 
is the kingpin.” One day there was no letter from Bucke: “TI get 
to look for Bucke as I look for my breakfast,” he said. 


27. 

In May, 1894, Dr. Bucke read before the American Medico- 
Psychological Association in Philadelphia, a paper entitled, “‘ Cosmic 
Consciousness.” The thought had been long in his mind. The germ- 
inal idea is traceable in his two earlier books, “ Man’s Moral Nature,” 
and “ Walt Whitman the Man.” 

In August, 1897, as president of the Psychological Section of the 
British Medical Association at Montreal, he further developed the 
thought in his presidential address on “ Mental Evolution in Man.” 

Four years later the result of his researches on the subject was 
put before the world in a book entitled “ Cosmic Consciousness ; a Study 
in the Evolution of the Human Mind,” of which a limited edition of 
500 copies was printed from the type by Innes & Co., of Philadelphia, 
in 1901. As a specimen of the book-maker’s art it is worthy of note. 
Its dignified format, quarto, on a specially good quality of paper, with 
wide margins and large clear-cut type, is an evidence of conscientious 
purpose and execution, which is somewhat rare in the age we live in. 

The term “ cosmic consciousness ” is derived from the east, signi- 
fying an elevated plane of consciousness associated with various psychic 
phenomena, including that known as “illumination.” The author 
finds it exemplified in fourteen conspicuous instances, including the 
founders of the three great religions, and in eleven other persons, 
viz.: Plotinus, Dante, Las Casas, John Yepes, Francis Bacon, Jacob 
Behmen, William Blake, Honoré de Balzac, Walt Whitman and Edward 


Sec. II., 1906. 13 


186 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Carpenter. He adds thirty-five cases, “ some of them lesser, imperfect 
and doubtful instances.” These include Moses, Gideon, Isaiah, Socra- 
tes, Pascal, Spinoza, Swedenborg, Wordsworth, Finney, Pushkin, Emer- 
son, Tennyson, Thoreau, Bucke himself and many more. Collecting and 
ccmparing their recorded experiences, he finds snfficient data for a 
general induction. There are, he thinks, perceptible in the history 
of human consciousness, three distinct stages of evolution, simple con- 
sciousness, self consciousness and cosmic consciousness. “The prime 
characteristic of cosmic consciousness is, as its name implies, a con- 
sciousness of the cosmos, that is, of the life and order of the universe.” 
With it occur, among other phenomena, an intellectual enlightenment 
or illumination, moral exaltation and a quickening of the moral sense, 
and withal “a sense of immortality, a consciousness of eternal life, 
not a conviction that he shall have this, but the consciousness that 
he has it already.” This position he supports by quoting in each case 
the words of the original records. 

The theory is that this higher form of consciousness is at present 
making its appearance in the human race, that the comparatively few 
cases cited are forerunners of a time, when by regular and orderly 
evolution the whole human race will reach the higher plane, along 
which it will proceed on its path of further infinite development. 

This conclusion is based upon the fact, which he considers estab- 
lished by the records, that there is a progressive increase throughout 
human history since the earliest recorded instances in the number of 
persons who have attained to cosmic consciousness. 

Another physician, who was also a philosopher, Dr. Oliver Wendell 
Holmes, hints at such a conclusion, in a remarkable passage in the 
< Professor at the Breakfast Table.” 

“T think of it,’ he says, referring to a similar intuition in his 
own experience and that of others, “as a disclosure of certain relations 
of our personal being to time and space, to other intelligences, to the 
procession of events, and to their First Great Cause . . . . Jam 
disposed to consider our beliefs about such a possible disclosure rather 
as a kind of premonition of an enlargement of our faculties in some 
future state than as an expectation to be fulfilled for most of us in 
this life. Persons, however, have fallen into trances — as did the 
Reverend William Tennant, among many others — and learned some 
things which they could not tell in our human words.” 

Conversion, the ‘ 
dentalism, are psychological facts pertaining to religion in its higher 
manifestations. In “ Cosmic Consciousness” they are subjected by a 


‘inner light,” illumination, mysticism, transcen- 


{coyNE ] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 187 


scientist, who was at the same time a philosopher and a mystic, to 
scientific collation and comparison, and to the inductive process of 
reasoning. 

As a compilation of recorded cases, aside altogether from the 
theory based upon them, the book possesses a distinct value and is of 
remarkable interest. 

The theory itself is attractive. Whether it is borne out by the 
facts cited, the reader must decide for himself. It is at any rate 
suggestive. As a contribution to the literature of the subject, it occu- 
pies a unique place. The ultimate conclusions, if a consensus should 
be arrived at, will be of inestimable moment to the human race. 
Among other results will be, perhaps, a final reconcilement of the long 
struggle between science and religion. © 


28. 


In the mountains of Montana, more than a year before the book 
went to press, the author's eldest son, Maurice, had been thrown from 
his vehicle in a runaway accident, dashed against a rock, and instantly 
killed. He was thirty-one years of age, but had already reached 
eminence in his profession, that of a mining engineer. A British 
Columbia paper described him as “a man of exceptional attainments, 
genial, courteous, pure and thoroughly incorruptible.” To the dead 
son, the volume is dedicated. There are few more pathetic words in 
all literature. "ew sons ever had so noble an epitaph. But the 
bitter pain is not the last word. The confident assurance of speedy 
reunion sustains and consoles. Then the great mystery of death, 
sorrow and suffering, will be solved. ‘ We shall clearly see that all 
were parts of an infinite plan, which was wholly wise and good.” Those 
who would know the intensity of the religious sentiment which domin- 
ated the soul of Richard Maurice Bucke will read the tender and beau- 
tiful words of the dedication with admiration as well as sympathy. 

According to Bucke, cosmic consciousness is a nascent faculty, 
showing itself principally in exalted human personalities, with excep- 
tional development of all the ordinary human faculties, with exceptional 
physique, beauty of build and carriage, exceptionally handsome features, 
exceptional health, exceptional sweetness of temper, exceptional mag- 
netism, and exceptional moral nature. 

An interesting feature of the book is the manner in which the 
author’s expert knowledge of alienism is brought in to illustrate the 
development and devolution of function. Devolution being most active 
in the latest forms, insanity and genius develop side by side in increas- 


188 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ing ratio, as the natural concomitant of the rapid evolution of mind, 
which distinguishes the Aryan race. It is the price we pay for progress. 
The possessors of the newer consciousness are not insane. This is 
shown by an examination of the distinguishing characteristics of in- 
sanity. His treatment of the subject is always frank, sincere and 
reverent. 

The entire edition of “Cosmic Consciousness ” was sold within 
a short time. One of the most eminent authorities, Professor William 
James, wrote Dr. Bucke an appreciative letter from which the following 
extracts will be of interest: 

“T believe that you have brought this kind of consciousness 
‘home’ to the attention of students of human nature in a way so definite 
end unescapable that it will be impossible henceforward to overlook it, 
or ignore it, or pooh-pooh it entirely away. For psychology and 
religion, that seems to me a very high service indeed . . . . But 
my total re-action on your book, my dear Sir, is that it is an addition 
to psychology of first rate importance, and that you are a benefactor 
of us all.” 

29. 


Dr. Bucke, like his friend William D. O'Connor, was a strong 
Baconian in the never-ending Shakespeare controversy, and wrote let- 
ters and articles on the subject to newspapers and magazines, in 1896 
and subsequently. In the fall of 1897 this involved him in a brief 
controversy with Mr. Goldwin Smith, begun in the Canadian Magazine 
and concluded by Dr. Bucke in the columns of the Toronto Globe. At 
the time of his death he had a volume ready for the press dealing 
with a new cypher he claimed to have discovered. 


30. 


Death came suddenly to Dr. Bucke on the 19th February, 1902. 
He and Mrs. Bucke had dined and spent the evening with friends in 
the city. After dinner, the gentlemen of the party, four in number, 
all of them university men, discussed the question of the cyphers and 
the Baconian authorship, with special reference to the Doctor’s discovery 
of a new cypher. His book was ready for publication, and was to 
appear in June, when the particulars would be disclosed. The general 
question was debated with friendly freedom. The Doctor, in his cus- 
tomary buoyant spirits, was at his best. Argument, illustration, apt 
quotation, treasures new and old from the wonderful stores of his 
memory, were presented to listeners, who admired whether they agreed 
with his conclusions or not. 


[coyne] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 189 


The party rejoined the ladies for a brief moment before the cutter 
called to take him and Mrs. Bucke to their home east of the city. 
Addressing one from a neighbouring city, he asked particularly about 
her six children, naming each in turn. He had last seen them at 
their home five years before. Surprise was expressed at the minute- 
ness of his recollection, as he desired to be remembered to the young 
people. But it was characteristic of the man to be specially interested 
in children, and he did not easily forget them. In a few courteous 
words he took leave of host and hostess, and of the other guests. 

The night was intensely cold, the sky clear, the moon nearly at 
its full, the stars shining with the steely glitter of a Canadian night 
in February, the snow crisp under foot. Going out into the night, 
he stopped to exclaim in admiration of the beauty of the sky. Driving 
home, he spoke of the pleasure the evening had given him, and warmly 
of the friends he had met. In a few minutes he was at home, but 
could not resist the desire to go out once more to look at the night 
and the stars. On the verandah, he dropped lifeless to the floor. And 
so, in the prime of vigour, while the eye was not dimmed, nor his 
natural force abated, he “ fell on death,” and was reunited to the son, 
who had gone before. 


31. 
{ 
His decease calied forth many expressions of appreciation and of 
sorrow. 
The London Free Press, in referring to his death, gave an inter- 
esting description of his appearance, which is worth reproducing: 
“The Asylum Superintendent was a familiar figure down town. 
He was known, at least by sight, to nearly everyone. His personage 
was so markedly picturesque as to attract attention. The kindly face, 
full of strong character, the flowing beard, streaked with gray and 
white, the very build of the well-proportioned, well-preserved man of 
sixty odd years, was certain to bring notice. Those who knew Dr. 
Bucke were proud of the fact. To know was to admire and esteem.” 
Dr. T. J. W. Burgess, in the paper already cited, adds: “In 
appearance Dr. Bucke was one of the most picturesque personalities in 
the ranks of the American Medico-Psychological Association. His 
commanding presence, his massive head, his keen, searching eyes and 
prominent nose, his face, every line of which carried the stamp of 
intellectual force, his flowing beard covering the négligée woollen shirt, 
his silvery locks showing below the broad-brimmed, gray, slouch hat, 
and his gray tweeds, made him a strikingly conspicuous and original 
figure. His manner was plain but dignified, his language clear, and 


190 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


in speaking he attracted the attention of his hearers no less by the 
matter of his remarks than by his personal appearance. 

“ During his asylum career, Dr. Bucke evinced wonderful ability in 

the management of the insane, his constant endeavour being to care for 
the interests confided by the Province to his charge intelligently, faith- 
fully and economically. As an administrator he had few superiors, and 
those who knew him will ever bear witness to his singularly clear 
judgment in all relating to hospital affairs. He had long been regarded 
as one of the leading authorities on the subject of mental disease, and 
his services as an expert were sought in most important cases where 
sanity was in question. In these his wide knowledge of medicine and 
of human nature always showed to advantage, his Spins always com- 
manding the attention and respect alike of judge and jury.” 
“Sadly shall we miss the sight of his picturesque, Whitmanic sae 
and face full of strong character, the sound of his bluff, cheery voice, 
and the hearty grasp of his hand — and not one of us but will fervently 
echo the wish— ‘O, for the touch of a vanished hand, and the sound 
of a voice that is still.’ ” 

“By his demise Canada has lost one of her foremost minds, this 
Association one of its most valued members, and, saddest of all, his 
family a devoted husband and father. Peace to his ashes.” “ He rests 
from his labours, and his works do follow him.” 

In a paper published in the American Journal of Insanity, Dr. 
Burgess adds: “It is impossible to judge him by ordinary standards, 
so great a part did individuality play in his make-up : 
Whatever this remarkable man did, he did with his whole soul, Ae no 
ene ever dreamed of attacking his sincerity of purpose, no matter how 
violently they differed from his conclusions . . . . In daily life 
he was simple, direct and honest, and loved nature as such a man is 
likely to do. The happiest days of each year were those spent at his 
summer retreat at Gloucester Pool in Muskoka.” 


32. 


Traubel mentions a conversation with Whitman, in which the latter 
described Bucke’s optimism in the following words: 

“ Bucke has an immense faith in the people at large — immense — 
in civilization, in modern mechanical devices — miracles of power.” 
“Do you say,” asked Traubel, “that Bucke‘has more faith in the 
people than you have?” “T think he has,” was the reply, “ Bucke 
is an optimist — thoroughly so, without qualification or compromise — 
so are you—- but I could hardly call myself that in the strictest sense 
of the word.” 


[coyNE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 191 


An optimist he was in the fullest sense of the word. He radiated 
peace and happiness. He made many friends and kept them. Whether 
at home in the beautiful grounds surrounding the great institution, 
which he administered with such signal success, or at “ Liberty Hall,” 
his summer island-residence in Gloucester Pool, his domestic life was 
ideal in its simplicity, its sincerity, its atmosphere of affection, ease 
and joyous freedom. 


“He was a man, take him for all in all 
“We shall not look upon his like again.” 


192 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


Including Books, Pamphlets, Lectures, Addresses, and Letters, (as far as at 


present ascertainable). 


1862. 


The Correlation of the Vital and Physical Forces. A Prize Thesis for the 
Degree of Doctor of Medicine and Master of Chirurgery, defended 
before the Medical Faculty of McGill University, Montreal, May 2, 

1862. By R. Maurice Bucke. 
(Printed in pamphlet form from the British American Journal.) 


1877. 


The Functions of the Great Sympathetic Nervous System. By R. M. Bucke, 
M.D., Medical Superintendent of the Asylum for the Insane, London, 
Ontario. 

Read before the Association of Medical Superintendents of Ameri- 
can Institutions for the Insane, held at St. Louis, Mo., May 1877. 


1878. 


The Moral Nature and the Great Sympathetic. Read before the Association 
of Medical Superintendents of American Asylums for the Insane at 
Washington D. C., May, 1878. 


1879. 


Man’s Moral Nature. An Essay. By Richard Maurice Bucke, M.D., Med- 
ical Superintendent of the Asylum for the Insane, London, Ontario, 
pp. XIII. 200. 
‘New York, G. P. Putnam’s Sons. Toronto, Ont. Willing & 
Williamson. 
Lecture on Walt Whitman. Delivered at Ottawa, Ont., Sept. 12, 1879, re- 
ported in Ottawa Free Press, Sept. 13. 


1880. 


“The Good Gray Poet.” Letter to the Philadelphia Press, May 7, 1880. 

Alcohol in Health and Disease. London, Wm. Bryce, 1880. (Read in an in- 
complete state before the Dominion Medical Association at London 
10 Sept., 1879, published next morning in the Daily Advertiser, and 
reprinted twice in England). 

“Reply.” Letter to the New York Times Nov. Ist. (A reply to E. C. Sted- 
man’s article on “ Walt Whitman,” in Scribner’s for November). 


1882. 


“Walt Whitman,” published in the “Family Circle,’ May. 
“Leaves of Grass Suppressed.” Letter to the Springfield Republican, May 
23rd. 


[cornE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 193 
1883. 


Twenty-Five Years Ago. By R. M. Bucke. Overland Monthly, June, pp. 
553-560. 
(An account of his experiences in crossing the Sierra Nevada 
in November and December 1857). 
Walt Whitman. By Richard Maurice Bucke, M.D. Author of ‘‘Man’s 
Moral Nature.” pp. 236. 
Published by David McKay, 23 South Ninth Street, Philadelphia. 
Republished with addition entitled: ‘English Critics on Walt Whitman,” 
Edited by Edward Dowden, LL.D., Professor of English Literature 
in the University of Dublin, pp. 255. 
Wilson & McCormick, Glasgow, 1884. 


1888. 


On the Humboldt. Written for the Advertiser by R. M. Bucke M. D. [Note. 
Though told in the form of fiction, the experience detailed in Dr. 
Bucke’s story is literally true, being an incident in the earlier life 
of the author.—Editor, Advertiser]. London Advertiser, Jan. 28, 1888. 


1889. 
Walt Whitman, “ Magazine of Poetry.” Buffalo. January. 
1890. 


Leaves of Grass and Modern Science. ‘‘The Conservator,” Philadelphia, May. 
Sanity. By R. M. Bucke M.D. Read at the 44th annual meeting of the As- 
sociation of Medical Superintendents of American Institutions for 
the Insane held at Niagara Falls, June 10-13, 1890. 
(From American Journal of Insanity, July, 1890. Utica, INDE), 
Walt Whitman and Colonel Ingersoll. “The Conservator.” Philadelphia, 
October. 
1891. 


The Value of the Study of Medicine. Introductory lecture before the Medical 
Faculty of McGill College, Montreal. 
(London Advertiser, Oct. 1, 1891. The Globe, Toronto, Oct. 2, 
1891). 
1892. 


The Origin of Insanity. Address before the Association of Medical Super- 
intendents of Insane Asylums of North America at Washington D. C. 
May 7, 1892. (Toronto Globe, May 9, 1892). 


1893. 


In Re. Walt Whitman: Edited by his Literary Executors, Horace L. Traubel, 
Richard Maurice Bucke, Thomas B. Harned. Published by the 
Editors through David McKay 23 South Ninth Street Philadelphia 
1893, pp. X. 452. 

(Limited and numbered edition of 1000 copies). 
This volume contains among many articles the three following 
by Richard Maurice Bucke: 


194 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
THE MAN WALT WHITMAN. pp. 57-71. 
LEAVES OF GRASS AND MODERN SCIENCE. pp. 249-251. 


WALT WHITMAN AND THE COSMIC SENSE. pp. 329-347. 
Also translations of foreign critiques as follows: 


WALT WHITMAN, Karl Knorte: Translated from the German by Alfred Forman 
and Richard Maurice Bucke, pp. 215-230. 


WALT WHITMAN, THE POET OF AMERICAN DEMOCRACY, Rudolph Schmidt: 
Translated from the Danish by R. M. Bain and Richard Maurice Bucke, 
pp. 231-248. 


WALT WHITMAN, T. W. Rolleston: Translated from the German by Alfred For- 
man and Richard Maurice Bucke, pp. 285-295. 


1894. 


Cosmic Consciousness. “The Conservator.” Philadelphia, May, June, 1894. 


Cosmic Consciousness. A paper read before the American Medico Psycholog- 
ical Association Philadelphia 18 May 1891 by Dr. R. M. Bucke. 
“Light rare, untellable, lighting the very light.” Philadelphia, “ The 
Conservator.” 1894, (pamphlet), pp. 18. 


Memories of Walt Whitman. 
Walt Whitman Fellowship Papers, 6, pp. 35-45, Sept., 1894. 
(Read at the Organization Meeting of the Fellowship at Reisser’s, 
Philadelphia, May 31st, 1894.) 


1895. 


Was Whitman Mad? ‘The Conservator.” Philadelphia, June: 
“Jcurnal of Hygiene,’ Sept. 
WAS WALT WHITMAN MAD? [Read for Dr. Bucke, who was not present, by 
Thomas B. Harned. Afternoon Session, Annual Meeting, May 31st.] 
Walt Whitman Fellowship Papers, Second Year: 9 pp. 22-30 | 
The pro. of Walt Whitman. ‘“ The Conservator,’ Philadelphie, Octcber 1895. 


1896. 


Mr. Fawcett’s Objections. “The Conservator,’ Philadelphia. Jan. 1896. 
Notes on the Text, &c. “The Conservator,’ Philadelphia, May, June, Aug. 
1896. 
Letter to the London, Ont., Daily News, Sept. 23, 1896, on the Bacon-Shake- 
speare Question. 
1897. 
Memories of Walt Whitman (2). 
Walt Whitman Fellowship Papers, May 1897. Third Year: 10, pp. 
35-42. 
[Read at the annual meeting of the Walt Whitman Fellowship, 
Boston, May 31, 1896.] 
Shakespeare or Bacon. The proof (partly from a just discovered anagram) 
that the real author of the so-called ‘ Shakespeare” drama was 
Francis Bacon. Canadian Magazine, Sept. 1897. 


[coyNE] RICHARD MAURICE BUCKE—A SKETCH 195 


Mental Evolution in Man. An address delivered at the opening of the Section 
of Psychology at the 65th annual meeting of the British Medical As- 
sociation at Montreal, Aug. 31st to Sept. 4th, 1897. By R. M. Bucke, 
M.D. | 

(Abstract from advance sheets of the British Medical Journal 
printed in the Journal of the American Medical Association, Chi- 
cago, Oct. 23, 1897). ; 

Letter to the Globe, Dec. 25, 1897, in rejoinder to Mr. Goldwin Smith, who had 
replied in the Canadian Magazine for Dec. 1897, under the caption 
“Not Dead Yet,’ to Dr. Bucke’s paper in the September number, on 
the Shakespeare-Bacon controversy. 

Calamus. A Series of Letters written during the years 1867-1880 by Walt 
Whitman to a young friend (Peter Doyle). { 

‘ Edited with an Introduction by Richard Maurice Bucke, M.D. 
one of Whitman’s Literary Executors, pp. VIII. 173. 

. Published by Laurens Maynard at 287 Congress Street in Boston 

| MDCCCXCVII. 

The Story of the Care of the Insane in Ontario (forming part of Report of 

the Superintendent of the London Asylum for 1897). 

Discovery of the Comstock. The True Particulars as Told by Dr. Bucke. 
A Remarkable Adventure in which he figured. A mistaken version 
in the New York Sun, corrected. The sad fate of Dr. Bucke’s com- 
panions in his Mining Days. 

Interview in the London Advertiser of 16 Dec. 1897. 


1898. 
Walt Whitman Man and Poet. 


“National Magazine,’ Boston, April 1898. ‘‘Cosmopolis,” June 
1898. 
A Short History of Sewage Disposal at the Asylum for the Insane, London, 
Ontario. A paper read before the Ontario Association of Executive 
Health Officers at the Ottawa Convention. 
“The Canadian Engineer,” Oct. 1898, pp. 155-156. 
The Wound Dresser. A Series of Letters written from the Hospitals in 
Washington during the War of the Rebellion. By Walt Whitman. 
Edited by Richard Maurice Bucke, M.D. One of Whitman’s Liter- 
ary Executors, pp. x. 201. Boston: Small, Maynard & Company, 1898. 
Surgery among the Insane in Canada. By R. M. Bucke, M.D., President of the 
Medico-Psychological Association, 
Presidential Address before the American Medico-Psychological 
Association at St. Louis, May 10, 1898. 
(Reprint from American Journal of Insanity, Vol. IV. No. I, 1898). 


1899. 


. 


Portraits of Walt Whitman. By R. M. Bucke, (illustrated by 24 portraits). 
New England Magazine, March 1899. 
Notes and Fragments: Left by Walt Whitman and now edited by Dr. Richard 
Maurice Bucke, one of his Literary Executors, pp. 211. 
Printed for Private Distribution Only. (225 copies), 1899. 
Letter to the Globe, Toronto, Nov. 7, 1899, on Ignatius Donnelly’s alleged dis- 
covery of a cypher in the inscription on Shakespeare’s grave. 


196 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
1900. 


The Evolution of the Human Intellect. Address in the First M. E. Church. 
Terre Haute, Indiana, 29 May, 1900. 
(Terre Haute Gazette, May 30, 1900). 
Two Hundred Operative Cases. Insane Women. By Richard M. Bucke, M.D. 
Reprinted from Proceedings of the American Medico-Psychologi- 
eal Association. Richmond, Va. 1900. 


1901. 


- 


How shall we dispose of our sewage? ‘The Dietetic and Hygienic Gazette, a 
Monthly Journal of Physiological Medicine, New York, Apr., 1901. 
pp. 193-4. 


Cosmic Consciousness: A Study in the Evolution of the Human Mind, Edited 
by Dr. Richard Maurice Bucke, pp. XVIII. 318. 
(Limited edition of 500 copies printed from the type). 
Innes & Sons, Philadelphia, 1901. (A new edition was issued 
in 1906). 


SECTION II., 1906. [197] Trans. R. S. C. 


III —Fleury ie The First Printer at Montreal. 
By R. W. McLacrLÂÀN. 
Honorary Curator of the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of Montreal. 
(Communicated by Dr. S. E. Dawson, and read May 23, 1906.) 


PREFACE. 


When I commenced this memoir of Montreal’s first printer it was 
simply to give such a short sketch as I had deducted from a few 
documents that, I may state, almost accidentally came into my hands. 
But, after having started, fresh documents were unearthed; each of 
which shed some new light, not only on the subject in hand, but on 
the history of Canada. I have, therefore, thought well to reproduce 
the whole herewith as well as the titles in full of all books and other 
publications printed by Mesplet, as far as they can be authenticated by 
existing examples in inventories, in advertisements or elsewhere. 

I would express my indebtedness and thanks to those who so kindly 
replied to my inquiries and otherwise helped in this memoir. To 
Judge L. W. Sicotte I am more especially indebted for access to his 
almost unique library of rare Canadiana and for transcriptions of the 
imprints in the library of the late Mr. Justice Baby. To Messrs. E. Z. 
Massicotte, and Charles Adélard Gareau of Montreal for timely help 
in securing manuscripts otherwise unknown to me. To Abbé Camille 
Roy of Université Laval, Quebec, for the titles of some twelve Mesplet 
imprints in the University library as well as most helpful comments 
in respect to these publications. To Mr. Cyrille Tessier a bibliophilist 
of some importance for the titles of two unique factums. To Messrs. 
L. P. Sylvain of the Library of Parliament, and Benjamin Sulte of 
Ottawa, for kindly advice and pointers regarding books. To Dr. A. 
G. Doughty, Canadian Archivist, for transcriptions of documents, and 
to Messrs. Herbert Putnam, Librarian of Congress; Ruben G. Thwaits, 
Secretary of the Historical Society of Wisconsin, and more especially 
te J. W. Jordan, Librarian of the Historical Society of Pennsylvania, 
for transcriptions and photographs of Mesplet’s imprints not to be 
found elsewhere. 

I trust that this work may prove helpful to collectors of Canadian 
books and students of Canadian history. 


198 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


FLEURY MESPLET, THE FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL. 


Printing, it may be claimed, was introduced into Canada in three 
well defined instalments; all truly original, catering, as they did, for 
widely divergent classes as well as sections of the country. Each in 
its own way is a record making epoch, as it marked the beginning of— 
aye, rather introduced the means of awakening — literary instincts 
amongst those of different thoughts and aspirations. 

The first of these dates back to 1751, when Bartholomew Green, 
son of the man who printed the first American newspaper, came from 
Boston and set up a press in Halifax, the newly founded capital of 
Nova Scotia. He died a few months after his arrival, but his place 
was taken by John Burshell who, in March, 1752, commenced the 
Halifax Gazette, the first Canadian newspaper. : 

The second of these epochs was introduced by the firm of Brown 
& Gilmore, which came from Philadelphia in 1764, and opened up 
an establishment in Quebec, to print the Quebec Gazette, and other 
official matter for the government organized under British auspices. 
As this publication set out more especially to supply the English ele- 
ment and British interests, although printed in both languages, the 
French being mainly translations, the whole tone was English in idiom 
and thought. 

The third introduction, notwithstanding having come twenty-five 
years later than the first, was even more important for ever since, nay, 
even some years before they came under British rule, the “new sub- 
jects,” as they were then called, had been altogether isolated from 
La Mère patrie. In the meantime, having been accorded a greater 
measure of liberty than they had hitherto enjoyed, they began to 
develop in a different direction. Thus the two French-speaking peo- 
ples grew wider and wider apart so that, after sixteen years of this 
separation, the Canadian section was found without an indigenous liter- 
ature —it never had a press of its own—voicing its own thoughts 
and aspirations, or the means of developing and recording such ten- 
dencies. Thus it was, that, when Mesplet came to Montreal and set 
up his press, although under the auspices of the high priest of their 
erstwhile enemies — the hated Bastonnais — he, as one speaking their 
own language and one who could reproduce in print their own senti- 
ments, was welcomed by the people with open arms. 

Although very little has been recorded of Mesplet’s early history, 
yet, having come across a number of documents bearing on his sojourn 
in Canada and the difficulties with which he had to contend as a pioneer 
printer out of sympathy with the government, I reproduce them here 


[M‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 199 


with such conclusions and chronological sequences as I have been able 
to deduce therefrom. ; 

Fleury Mesplet was born in the Parish of St. Nizier, diocese of 
Lyon, in France, about the year 1735. His father’s name was Jean 
Baptiste Mesplet, and his mother’s Marie Antoinette Capeau. There 
are four parishes of St. Nizier in the diocese of Lyon, one in the 
city and three in the country. The latter are known by sub-names, | 
as St. Nizier d’Azergues, St. Nizier de Formas, and St. Nizier sous 
Charlier. As none of these sub-titles are mentioned, we may conclude 
that Mesplet’s birthplace was in the City of Lyon, where he received 
a good (common school) education sufficient to fit him for his chosen 
trade; that afterwards he was apprenticed to that trade, and that in 
due course he became a capable printer. 

As Mesplet did not marry until he began to be about thirty years 
of age, we may conclude that, it was during his bachelor days, while 
meeting in secret with others of his own craft, he became saturated 
with the republican ideas that then prevailed in France; which ideas 
were believed to be a cure-all for the distress caused by misgovernment. 
As the church was intimately connected with, or rather formed part 
of the government, it became involved in the same condemnation; there- 
fore Mesplet, following the lead of his companions, became not only. 
a republican, but an open free thinker; which belief, or rather unbelief 
clung to him for many years afterwards. 

It was, at least, as late as 1765, that he married Marie Mirabeau, 
then a girl of eighteen, who, although twelve years his junior, proved 
a good and faithful wife during his wanderings and under his many 
vicissitudes of fortune. From this union there does not appear to 
have sprung any children, as none are referred to in his later history. 

Some eight years after his marriage his dissatisfaction with the 
political and commercial outlook in France led him to seek success else- 
where; whether before this he had launched out as a master printer 
it is so far not known. In any case the incapacity of the government 
of Louis XVI was such, and the taxation imposed had become so oppres- 
sive and repressive as to bring France to the verge of bankruptcy and 
make it almost impossible for an honest workman to earn a living. 
Mesplet determined therefore to migrate. Avoiding the French colonies, 
in which he feared that similar oppression and repression prevailed, 
he struck out for London and landed there not later than early in 
1773, where he set up his press at an address near Covent Garden. 
From this press was issued “La Louisiane ensanglantée,’ a book of 
about 200 pages, written by! Chevalier de Champigny. This is the 


1 See appendix A, No. 1. 


200 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


first of his known imprints and the only one extant emanating from 
London. 

As a stranger speaking a foreign tongue he did not secure a 
remunerative patronage in London, so, together with others of his self- 
exiled compatriots, attracted by Franklin’s championship of the cause 
of the American Colonies, and his republican and free-thought senti- 
ments, he sought an interview with the American statesman, to inquire 
regarding the prospects of success and the enjoyment of liberty in 
America, and was advised to try Philadelphia. Franklin, the real leader 
of the revolt of the thirteen colonies, at once became convinced of the 
advantage of securing the services of a French printer, in sympathy 
with the revolutionary movement, ready, when occasion required, to 
send into the Province of Quebec to influence its people by press 
and precept, although alien in race and language, to cast in their 
lot with this movement, and thus, by extinguishing British rule in 
America, make the new order a continental congress indeed. 

Fortified with a letter from Franklin to Congress, Mesplet, towards 
the close of 1773, or the beginning of 1774, set sail for Philadelphia 
with his wife and his printing outfit. There he settled down to business 
and rented a house belonging to Anthony Benezet 1 at $112 per annum. 
He formed a partnership with someone who evidently furnished the 
necessary capital, but whose name is not recorded, and set up as a 
master printer. It is not clear whether he hired space for his type 
and press and used the same printing office as Miller,? or had his press- 
work done there, for Berger writes that his type was at this printer’s, 
and that he had paid him $176 (due either for space or press-work) 2 

Through the letter of introduction from Franklin he was commis- 
sioned by the Continental Congress in 1774, to print a sixteen page 
pamphlet, addressed “Aux Habitants de la province de Québec.” 4 
Whatever other orders he may have received from Congress or from 
the citizens of Philadelphia during that year they did not appear to 


1He was a son of Etienne Benezet who came from France early in the 
18th century and carried on a successful business in Philadelphia. Anthony 
was a strong abolitionist and published a. number of works against negro 
slavery. He befriended printers, especially those from his native country. 

*The Miller here referred to (Heinrich Mueller) held towards the (Ger- 
man population of Philadelphia of which there was a considerable number, 
a somewhat similar position as did Mesplet to the French. Their interests 
were therefore not likely to clash even though they occupied the same build- 
ing. One of Miller’s imprints is shown on a book described in the “ Biblio- 
graphy of the Algonquin Languages,” J. C. Pilling, Washington, 1891, page 
544. When Philadelphia was captured in 1777, Miller hid his presses but 
they were discovered and carried to New York and were used for printing 
British Proclamations. 

* See appendix C No. 1. 

* See appendix A No. 2. 


[M‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 201 


be sufficient for his encouragement. No doubt the old English, as well 
as colonial, antipathy for the French remained and so stood in his 
way that he was unable to secure a remunerative run of customers. 
Therefore, early in 1775, perhaps in January, but in any case not later 
than February, he started hurriedly on a prospecting journey to Quebec, 
leaving his wife behind and his affairs in Philadelphia in a most un- 
satisfactory state. Through exposure to the cold during the tedious 
winter’s journey he fell sick which, together with his embarrassed finan- 
cial condition and the suspicion with which he, as a Frenchman, was 
looked upon by the British authorities, caused him much pain and 
uneasiness. 

On the 29th of March Charles Berger wrote from Philadelphia a 
most friendly letter! expressing the greatest interest in his welfare, 
while at the same time upbraiding him for not at least saying good-by 
before leaving, and also for not having settled with his former partner. 
He had found it necessary to secure the type at Miller’s by paying the 
amount due him, and to secrete it, together with his other effects; so 
that they should be safe from threatened seizure by the partner. Berger 
also paid a quarter’s rent due by Mesplet which, with the amount paid 
to Miller and other debts, came to a total of $350. In this letter he 
expressed a hope that Mesplet might be able to make arrangements with 
some one at Quebec to supply sufficient capital to set up a successful 
printing office there, promising in a most friendly spirit, to forward 
his printing plant as well as his wife to Quebec, or to honour his draft 
for funds necessary for his return trip. Further, he asked Mesplet 
to learn all he could regarding the sentiments of the Canadians towards 
the separation movement from Great Britain, for which, as the letter 
claims, his superior intelligence rendered him well fitted. It will thus 
be seen that Mesplet had deeper ends in view than setting up a press 
in Quebec. 

It seems he was not successful in his efforts to find a capitalist 
ready to set him up, and no doubt found the people either ignorant of 
or indifferent to the benefits set forth in the republican propaganda to 
the south. In any case he did not remain long in Quebec, for he had 
again started printing in Philadelphia before the close of 1775,? as it 
would have been difficult for him to get through the lines after the 
breaking out of hostilities, we may conclude that he had reached 
Philadelphia not later than June or July. 


*See appendix C No. 1. 
7 See appendix A Nos. 3-6. 


Sec. I1., 1906. i4 


202 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Now, did Mesplet print a book when at Quebec in 1775, as is’ 


claimed by Gagnon.t This seems altogether impossible, for the very 
good reason that Mesplet’s stay in Quebec was not sufficiently prolonged 
to undertake any extensive work, and then he had no type or press 
with him. The incorrect attribution by Gagnon of the book, “ Cantiques 
de Marseille,’ dated 1776 at Quebec ? to the year 1775—of which more 
later on — will account for the error. 

As Mesplet had to pass through Montreal on his way to and from 
Quebec he had an opportunity of seeing and learning something of the 
place that was to be the arena of his future labours as a printer. There 
most likely he secured an order from the Seminary of Montreal for 
the first edition of “ Règlement de la Confrérie de l’adoration perpétu- 
elle,” * which order he executed on his return to Philadelphia; but, 
fearing complications, suppressed his imprint. The “ Nouvelle édition, 
revue, corrigée et augmentée,” * has long been classed as the first book 
printed in Montreal, although some collectors are inclined to pass back 
the honour to the first edition; but it seems hardly possible that two 
editions of a book of this kind could have been printed within the 
short space of six months. Then they seem to have been set up from 
different fonts of type, for the first edition contains a number of var- 
ieties of ornamental dividing lines, all differing from the single variety 
that occurs in the second edition. The only other alternative is that this 
first edition was printed at Quebec, or France as is claimed by Dionne.® 
But neither of these alternatives seems probable; the first because there 
would be no reason for suppressing the imprint, and in the second, 
because the importation of books from France was prohibited. 

Shortly after he had resumed operations in Philadelphia he entered 
into partnership with his friend, C. Berger. One publication bears 
his own imprint alone,* two are without imprints;7 one of these having 
been printed by an “ Imprimeur Ambulant,” while the Règlement Mili- 
taire,” for which, by resolution of Congress, dated 23rd of February, 
1776, he was paid $44,° was in his first work in partnership with Berger. 
This partnership continued until September, 1778, when the name C. 
Berger disappears from the imprints. 


1Hssai de Bibliographie Canadienne, P. Gagnon, Quebec, 1895, page 102. 

See appendix A 10. 

#Ibid No. 6. 

*See appendix A No. 8, also Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada. 
Second Series Vol. X. part 2, page 18. : 

5 Ibid. 

“See appendix A No. 4. 

T See appendix A Nos. 3 and 5. 

“See appendix A No. 6. 

See appendix D No. 19. 


-{w‘LacHLAN]) FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 208 


In the instructions of Congress, issued February, 1776, appointing 
commissioners to Canada, it was especially stipulated that a printer 
should be sent with them to establish a free press in the country. 
Samuel Chase, one of the commissioners, was detailed to confer with 
Fleury Mesplet about undertaking this work; and he, without much 
hesitation, accepted the engagement, as he states in his answers to 
questions by Congress, “with as much the more pleasure as it was 
promised me that I would receive every satisfaction and regard that 
my services would deserve.” To this acceptance the only conditions 
he attached were, that one hundred dollars should be advanced to enable 
him to cancel his lease, and that his expenses should be paid to Montreal. 
After this a committee of Congress was appointed, consisting of John 
Hancock, the president; Mr. Thompson, the secretary, and Benjamin 
Franklin, to examine as to Mesplet’s fitness for such a duty. The ex- 
amination having proved satisfactory $200 was voted by Congress on 
the 26th of February “to defray the expence of transporting him, 
his family and his printing utensils to Canada”? This arrangement 
having been accepted, Mesplet had to hurry up his preparations. He 
engaged a fellow-countryman, named Alexandre Pochard, whom he 
styles “ Homme de lettres,” as editor of the proposed newspaper, two 
journeymen printers named John Gray and Mr. Hearse, and a servant- 
man. As Congress provided no money for carrying on the operations 
of Mesplet’s press he, if he were expected to do things right when in : 
Montreal, required a good working capital. So he, being unable to 
find accommodation, elsewhere, again had recourse to his friend Berger, 
who had saved him from financial embarrassment the previous year. 
Berger evidently seems to have been a man of means, for, notwithstand- 
ing his past advances, he put up £1,000 Pennsylvania currency, equal 
to $2,666—a ‘goodly capital for a printing oitice of those days—besides 
purchasing a supply of new type, 180 reams of paper, and other requi- 
sites to the value of $786; over and above these amounts was $560 for 
money advanced to pay Mesplet’s debts, making a total of $4,000 of 
Berger’s capital in the concern. The only condition called for by 
Berger in his partnership agreement was that it should be on a limited 
basis with the proviso that he receive ten per cent interest on this 
amount whether the business proved profitable or not.® 

All this goes to show Berger’s continued and deep personal friend- 
ship for Mesplet as well as belief in his ability to carry on successfully 
a printing and publishing business in Canada; and further, confidence, 


+See Appendix D No. 35. 
* Ibid. Nos. 29 and 35. 
# See appendix F No. 53. ad 


204 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


on the part of both, in the good faith and in the power of Congress and 
its commissioners to win over the Canadians and to retain possession 
of Canada. But this turned out as Franklin’s one notable diplomatic 
failure. That diplomacy which had secured the adhesion of all the 
thirteen colonies and at a later date the active sympathy of France 
proved powerless to move the passive indifference of the Canadians. 

Such was Mesplet’s confidence in the ultimate success of the revolt 
of the thirteen colonies that, after accepting their commission as Can- 
adian printer, he invested not only the whole of his free capital, but 
the money realized from the sale of part of the stock of books he had 
on hand, in continental currency; believing, as he claims, these bills 
to have been “as good as the banks of England or Vienna.”? But 
this was a true case of misplaced confidence, for they turned out to 
be a total loss, as the greater part of them are entered in his post- 
mortem inventory as of no value. 

By the 18th of March, 1776, Mesplet started from Philadelphia 
with the whole of his belongings loaded on five waggons. He and his 
party, which consisted of six persons, arrived at Lake George on the 
8th of April, where they had to wait eight days until his goods arrived, 
and been loaded on the five bateaux, he had secured at his own expense, 
for crossing Lake George and pursuing his course down Lake Cham- 
plain and the Richelieu river. He claims that on account of the 
portages his expenses were very great, far exceeding the paltry hundred 
dollars voted by Congress. As this was the time of spring high water 
his “pilotes ” as he calls them, decided to run the rapids to Chambly 
and thus save him the longer land haul from St. Johns. But, through 
the fault of these pilots, his bateaux shipped much water in the 
rapids and were so nearly swamped, that most of his fine paper and 
books, together with his wife’s wearing apparel and some of his own, 
were irretrievably ruined.? Although he reached Chambly on the 22nd 
of April he did not get to Montreal until the 6th of May. On his 
arrival, he, with wife, staff and servant, put up at a tavern, where they 
remained eleven days, at an expense of $1.07 each per day, or $70 in 
all, while premises were being leased, furnished and fitted up as a 
printing office. It was therefore not until the 18th of May, just two 
months after setting out from Philadelphia, that he was ready for 
business. 

Where did this house, fitted up as Montreal’s first printing establish- 
ment, stand? An imprint gives the address as “ près le marché,” and 
a document more fully expresses it as “ demeurant en cette ville rue 


2) 


1See appendix D. No. 34. 
3 ]bid. D. No. 34. ” 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 208 


Capital.” * This street, wide enough at the time it was opened up, 
but now considered a narrow lane, parallel with and between St. Paul 
Street and the river front, extends from St. Sulpice (St. Joseph) to 
St. Francois Xavier Streets; crossing in its course the Market Place, 
now Place Royale. We may therefore conclude that this house stood 
on or near the site now occupied by the Sailors Institute. The place 
was fitted up, part as a book store, part as a dwelling, with the garret 
as the printing room. Here Mesplet remained, from all we can make 
out, until May, 1788, when he transferred the scene of his labours to 
44 Notre Dame Street, near the Recollet monastery, which stood between 
St. Helen and St. Peter Streets. 

But before he was ready for work his patron, Franklin, had 
departed, convinced of the failure of his mission. The other commis- 
sioners remained until the 29th of May to close up affairs; and by 
the 10th of June the Continental army had evacuated Montreal, leaving 
many unpaid debts behind, besides the worthless continental currency 
with which the country had been flooded. Mesplet having all his 
capital locked up in his type and presses and this same continental 
currency, found it impossible to get away, and probably feeling more 
ut home and more hopeful of succeeding among a people speaking his 
own language, decided to remain and with his staff continue the business. 
But no sooner had the “loyalists” returned to Montreal than they 
began so to regard Mesplet with such suspicion that, on the 18th of 
June, he and the whole of his party were arrested, as sympathizers 
with the rebels, and detained in prison for twenty-six days. During 
this imprisonment he was subjected to all sorts of indignities.’ 

On the 14th of July, having been released, he was again ready 
for business, but the issue of a newspaper had to be postponed, for Mr. 
Pochard became so disgusted with the unceremonious treatment and 
imprisonment to which he had been subjected, determined to leave the 
country. He demanded compensation for his time since he had been 
engaged in Philadelphia and the cost of his passage to France, which 
items Mesplet had to meet to the extent of $160.2 This proved an 
unfortunate occurrence for, while delaying the issue of the proposed 
paper for two whole years, it brought Mesplet under the questionable 
influence of the new editor, an influence that did not conduce to his 
political or moral advancement in the new atmosphere in which he 
found himself. 


1 See appendix E 56. 
?2See appendix D No. 33. 
5Ibid Nos. 33 and 42. 


206 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Although Mesplet complains that most of his paper was destroyed 
by water, when he ran the rapids between St. Johns and Chambly, 
and that he had to wait in idleness, for paper ordered from London, 
until the spring of 1777, we have the titles of three books, one of them 
a bulky volume of 600 pages, printed during the latter half of 1776. 
Besides these a number of others are mentioned in the first inventory, 
some of which were, no doubt, printed during this period.’ 

It was early during the latter half of 1776 that the second edition 
of “ Règlement de la Confrérie,” the first book printed in Montreal, 
was issued for and on account of the Seminary of St. Sulpice? <A 
number of copies were found some years ago among the archives of 
the Notre Dame Street house of that institution, where they had lain 
ever since they had been printed. Although perfect, they were only 
bound in wall paper, which goes to confirm Mesplet’s claim that his 
fine paper was destroyed on his way to Montreal. “ Jonatas et David 
: Tragédie,” is the title of another work, printed for the 
Seminary of Montreal. As it was to be played by the students of the 
seminary, we may conclude it was written by one of the members of 
the order, and as such is the first Canadian dramatic work printed in 
Canada. It is also claimed to have been the first work printed in 
Montreal, but this is unlikely, for, as the play would not be given until 
the long winter evenings, it would not be wanted until late in the year. 
Therefore the “ Règlement ” still holds priority. 

Now, regarding the third of the books printed by Mesplet during 
his first year in Canada—‘ Cantiques de Marseille,’* a reprint of a 
French Hymn Book— which claims on its title page to have been 
printed at Quebec, and which, as is shown above, Gagnon claimed to 
have been printed during the visit of 1775. Was it printed at Quebec? 
We have no other evidence that Mesplet did printing at Quebec. 
Is it likely that he packed up his presses and type and moved down 
to Quebec, printed a book of over 600 pages there, and then moved 
back to Montreal in little more than five months? Does it not seem 
more probable that the Quebec imprint was used with the view of 
securing the printing of the Quebec religious institutions? Mesplet 
believed they would prefer a printer who, by his language, was better 
qualified to do their work. This view is confirmed by an advertisement 
on the reverse of one of the preliminary pages by which Mesplet and 
Berger announced that they were prepared to print religious books for 


1See appendix B Nos. 8-15. 
? Appendix A No. 8. 

2 Tbid No. 9. 

*Thid No. 10. 


[M‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 207 


the Quebec trade with neatness and despatch, and asked for the patron- 
age of those interested in the dissemination of such literature. 

In 1777 Mesplet printed his first A/manach, the first Latin pub- 
lication appearing in Canada,” the first book in the Iroquois language,* 
and two religious books,* besides a number of others, no examples of 
which are known to exist. 

In 1778 he issued his second almanac, but with the name changed 
from “ Almanach Encyclopédique,” to ‘“ Almanach curieux et interes- 
sant.” Two more religious books—“‘ Neuvaine de St. Francois Xa- 
vier,’ ® and “ La semaine sainte ” ‘— and a reprint of a French book : 
entitled “ Abrégé des règles de la versification française.” $ This latter 
publication shows that at that time there was sufficient aspiration after 
poetical composition in Canada to make it worth while to reprint a 
work giving poetical rules. The first work of a historical character, 
“ Journal du Voyage de St-Luc” also bears date 1778.° 

But the most interesting of Mesplet’s publications in 1778 was 
“La Gazette du Commerce et Littéraire.” 12 An editor had been 
secured in the person of Valantin Jautard, an advocate, who came 
criginally from France about the year 1768. He was a sympathizer 
with the Continental Army, for, in the Canadian archives,!! mention 
is made that he was appointed a notary in January, 1776, by General 
Worcester. He does not appear to have practised the notarial profes- 
sion after this army had evacuated Canada, as no repertoire of his 
papers are to be found in the Court House at Montreal. Before pub- 
lishing his paper Mesplet issued a prospectus,’* setting forth that it was 
to be a four paged quarto at $2.50 a year. Merchants and professional 
men were asked for their support as it would be a medium for. adver- 
tising! besides providing commercial news and good literature. At the 
same time, he engaged not to publish anything likely to prove offensive 
to the church or the state. He also wrote to the Governor-General 
asking for permission to publish the paper, with the same promise to 
refrain from discussing interdicted subjects.'* e 


4 Appendix A No. 11. 

* Appendix A No. 14. 

# Appendix A No. 12. 

* Appendix A 13 and 15. 

° Appendix A-No. 16. 

* Appendix A No. 13. 

‘ Appendix A No. 12. 

> Appendix A No. 20. 

* Appendix A No. 19. 

v Appendix A No. 21. 
"Canadian Archives 1888, Haldimand papers, paze 917. 
*““ See appendix C No. 4. 

'S See appendix C No. 3. 


208 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The choice of Jautard as editor was most unfortunate, for, soon 
forgetting, or ignoring the publisher’s promise to steer clear of things 
religious and political, he started a tirade against both, which he kept 
up with short intermissions to the end; for, while the first number of 
the Gazette appeared on the 3rd_of June, a month had not elapsed ere 
Mesplet and his editor, Jautard, were ordered by Guy Carleton to leave 
the province before the 15th of September. Mesplet continued the 
issue of the paper regularly until the 19th of August, when it appeared 
as a single page consisting of a letter from the “printer” “to the 
public,” which complained that: “Since a few days I have had a fresh 
grievance which constrains me to cease publishing my Gazette. This 
new one has almost decided me; I have too many enemies. The slight- 
est move on my part, however innocent, increases the number; and I 
owe it to myself to be saved from further persecution. 

“ Nevertheless, I will continue, if authorized by the government and 
encouraged by an increase in the number of subscribers. I prefer to 
sacrifice my own interests to exposing myself to further disgrace; and, 
if I may presume to say so, I flatter myself that those who lauded 
my enterprise in establishing a periodical will be pained at its being 
discontinued.” The appeal had the desired effect. It stirred up his 
friends to action; for a numerously signed petition? was presented to 
the governor, setting forth the benefits the paper had been to the com- 
munity, the need of a printer in the city, and’ Mesplet’s good character 
and asking that the order for him to leave the province be not enforced. 
In comphance with this petition General Haldimand, who had just 
replaced Carleton as governor, issued, on the 24th of August, a notice 
signed by his secretary, Edward Foy? suspending, for the time being, 
the order for the banishment of Mesplet and his associate, on condition 
that they take the oath of allegiance within two days and submit all 
their articles to an inspector, to be appointed by the governor before 
publication. 

The first censor appointed for this duty was a Mr. Gordon, but, 
as he left for England shortly afterwards, the office was allowed to fall 
into abeyance, and the paper being left to itself returned to its old 
course and again came under the displeasure of the authorities; for, 
on the 28th of September, in a letter to Cramahé, Haldimand writes: 
“ T have observed several improper things published in our Gazette.” ? 
and later Cramahé replies: ‘ Our printer has a penchant to the popular 


1See appendix C No. 7. 
21bid No. 8. 
8 Thid No. 10. 


{M‘LAcHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 209 


cause,” * implying thereby that he was in open sympathy with the cause 
of the thirteen colonies with which the country was then at war. 

It was at this time that the title of the paper was changed to 
La Gazetta Littéraire, and the name of Berger dropped, from the 
imprint.? Hereafter that of Fleury Mesplet appears alone. It would 
also appear that there was some attempt on his part to propitiate the 
religious authorities, for in October he advertises a number of religious 
works which, no doubt, the Seminary authorities had obtained leave to 
import from France, and which were placed in his hands for sale, as 
the only bookseller in Montreal. The purpose of the Seminary in thus 
putting them before the people was to combat the materialistic tendencies 
of the paper as the titles of the works would seem to indicate. They 


Pare 


1. “Dictionnaire Anti-Philosophique,” 2 vols., Paris, 1775, 
2. “Dialogue tiré du Dictionnaire Anti-Philosophique.” 

3. “ Lettres de quelques Juifs.” 

4, “T?Autorité des livres du Nouveau Testament.” 

5. “ Réponse critique a plusieurs difficultés.” 


6. “ Dictionnaire de la Religion.” 


Possibly one or two of these may have been printed by Mesplet, as a 
number of copies of “ Dialogues” are mentioned in the inventory. 

What caused the religious authorities most concern at that time 
was a discussion, carried on in the Gazette, on the merits and demerits 
of Voltaire, whose death had just been chronicled. This led to a 
strong protest on the part of M. Montgolfier, superior of the Seminary 
of St. Sulpice, who, on the 2nd of January, 1779, wrote to Haldimand 
to the effect that the reflections of the Gazelte against religious things 
should be interdicted. In his capacity as superior he acted as supervisor 
of the religious affairs of the district. 

Haldimand, in his reply,* states that he had already warned Mesplet 
to moderate the tone of his “sheet,” and that should he continue to 
pursue the same course, steps would be taken to stop its further issue. 
He further suggested to the superior to keep a look-out on its pages 
and advise as to any further indiscretions. 

The issue from Mesplet’s press in 1779, apart from the numbers 
of the Gazette, was his third almanac,* with several new features. Be- 


1See appendix C No. 11. 

2Tt had never filled the role of catering for the commercial interests of 
the community or become a medium for merchants to advertise their goods. 
It was purely literary written mainly by the editor Jautard. 

® See appendix C No. 13. 

*See appendix A No. 22. 


210 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


sides this there was advertised in the Gazette of the 14th of August 
“Mémoire de P. Méziére comme avocat des Dames Religieuses des 
Trois Rivières & La réponse de François nu Duême, ces ouvrages 
serviront à faire distinguer le bon du mauvais” No copies of these 
are known. 

Jautard, who also practised as a lawyer, often discussed his cases 
in the Gazette under different noms de plume, and his criticisms were 
sometimes unscathing. He was a ready writer and usually filled the 
paper with his own effusions, to the exclusion of all news, even the 
town gossip. He even went so far as to criticize adverse judgments of 
the court. One of these he handled so severely that the judges passed 
an order interdicting him from appearing before it. They, at the same 
time wrote to Haldimand complaining of the attitude of the paper. 
The next day Jautard appeared as usual when, before the opening of 
the court, Judge Southouse informed him that he was no longer 
entitled to occupy a seat among those reserved for attorneys. Jautard 
objected to this decision on the ground, among others, that his accuser’s 
name had not been given, and that he had had no opportunity to 
appear in his own defence. He also affirmed that he had not criti- 
cized the court under his own name. To this the judge replied that 
it was not necessary to give the name of the accuser, that Jautard 
was under suspicion of the government and that the style of his writ- 
ings showed him to be the author of the criticism in question, although 
it did not bear his name. 

The next number of the Gazette contained four different articles 
criticizing this act of the judges. One over Jautard’s own name, 
giving his version of the affair, a second over the nom de plume of 
“Le Spectateur tranquille” (which was really Jautard’s own writing), 
complimented him on his dignified attitude under such trying circum- 
stances. The third was addressed to Jautard by Ducalvet, also com- 
plimenting him on his stand in court, and the fourth was addressed to 
Judges Rouville and Southouse, by Ducalvet, charging their acts and 
judgments with partizanship. 

On the appearance of this number, which is dated the 26th May, 
1779, Judge Hertel de Rouville wrote to Haldimand enclosing a copy 
of the paper? and asked that the court and judges be protected from 


*This memoir refers to a suit taken out by the Ursulines of Three Rivers 
against Francois Le Maitre Duéme or Duhaime for some sort of trespass 
on their Seigniory. Judgment had been given against them in favour of 
Duéme. This judgment was afterwards confirmed in an appeal to the Privy 
Council. Jautard no doubt had something to do with tne case. See “Les 
Ursulines des Trois Rivieres,” 1888, Vol I., page 415. 

*See appendix C No. 14. 


[M‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 211 


such attacks. This capped the climax, for Haldimand, who had up to 
this time considered himself long suffering, took vigorous action and 
issued a warrant' to Major Nairn, in command at Mbntreal, to arrest 
hoth Jautard and Mesplet. He also gave orders to the commander 
of the armed schooner Mercury to proceed to Montreal,? so that the 
prisoners could have a safe conveyance to Quebec. They were arrested 
on the 4th of June and, without being allowed to communicate with 
each other or with any of their friends, were at once sent down to 
Quebec. The last number of the Gazette appeared on the 2nd of June, 
just one year after its commencement. Thus was the first French 
literary periodical in America snuffed out. 

On their arrival at Quebec they were conducted to the military 
prison and confined in a large room already occupied by another state 
prisoner named Laterrière, who afterwards wrote a memoir describing 
“Ses traverses.” In this memoir he states that Jautard and Mesplet 
were imprisoned, the one as editor and the other as printer of a libel- 
lous periodical known as Tant pis, tant mieux, which “ attacked the wise 
politics of the English government and contended against the adminis- 
tration of the Swiss Haldimand.* 

May we not pause for a moment to find out something about the 
publication that Laterriére thus describes. Was it a true satirical paper 
as is claimed by Sulte.* Had it a real existence as is ascribed to it by 
Miss Jane N. Mecllwraith in her story of “Sir Frederick Haldimand,” 
which states that: “Mr. Mesplet and his editor, M. Jotard did not 
succeed in adhering to these admirable resolutions, but sent forth a 
scurrilous sheet called Tant pis, tant mieux —the first French journal 
published in America — defaming all the King’s officers and trying 
to throw the colony into confusion?” Or are we to conclude with 
Abbé Camille Roy, that it was simply a broadside struck off and dis- 
tributed freely?” $ Now the facts of the matter are: Laterrière is the 
only contemporary that mentions such a periodical; no copy of it is 
to be found anywhere, and it is altogether unlikely that two periodicals 
of a like nature would be issued by the same publisher at the same 
time, especially as there was barely enough subscribers to sustain one. 


1See appendix C No. 16. 

2 Ibid No.19. 

Pierre de Salle Laterriére et ses traverses, Quebec, 1873, page 217. See 
also appendix G No. 80. 

*Histoire des Canadiens Francais, Vol. VIII., page 136. 

>The Makers of Canada, Sir Frederick Haldimand, Toronto, 1904, page 
271. 

5 Etude sur l’histoire de la littérature Canadienne, by Abbé Camille Roy, 
in Bulletin du parler Français au Canada, Québec, 1905, Vol. III, page 239, 
note 2. 


212 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


In seeking for a solution of this matter I found in the last number 
of the Gazette a valedictory article, no doubt by Jautard, entitled 
Tant pis, tant mieuz—rather cleverly written—in-which he rings the 
changes on this phrase. He begins with, “ The newspaper is about 
to be suspended — tant pis, which may be translated, “so much the 
worse.” “On the other hand many claim that being generally lauded 
it will be continued — tant mieux —so much the better.” This goes 
on through twelve short paragraphs, in which he brings in the different 
noms de plume, which subscribe to the different articles in the Gazette, 
in each finishing the first part with {ant pis and the last with tant 
mieux. His concluding paragraph may be here translated: “ Thus. 
when all is well considered, there will be found the worse and the 
better; so much the worse for some, so much the better for others.” 

This article, according to my conclusion, is the origin of the Tant 
pis, tant mieux of Laterriére who, having spent nearly a year in prison 
had no knowledge of La Gazette Littéraire, and who, therefore, when 
he heard Jautard speaking of his article, Tant pis, tant mieux, jumped 
to the conclusion that this was the title of the paper, especially as the 
phrase fitted in with what he had learned of its character. Jautard, 
if at the time he saw Laterriére’s mistake, did not take the trouble 
to correct it and so it was given out, taken up and passed on by some 
of our best writers. Tant pis, tant mieux then is not the title of a 
paper, but only that of an article. 

Laterriére gives Jautard a most unenviable character, representing 
him as satirical, as sophistical, as a lawyer so brazen faced that nothing 
could astound him, as a drunkard, as false, as a liar like the devil 
and as a great gourmand. He hated all things English, was Jesuit- 
ical, full of prejudices, and above all things, most undesirable as a 
friend. He appeared to be well educated, but without culture. His 
influence over Mesplet, which seemed almost supreme, was very bad, 
for the latter hardly ever spoke without taking the cue from his editor. 
Mesplet’s education was much inferior, as he was simply a working 
printer; nevertheless, he appeared not to be devoid of ability and of 
a general knowledge of things. He is described as a cheat, almost 
as big a liar as Jautard, and of such an evil genius, which, had it 
not been ameliorated by his wife, who was a superior woman, would 
have led him to do many things unworthy of an honest man.1 

Such is the portrait of Mesplet and his editor drawn by Laterrière, 
who seems to have conceived an antipathy towards them, as well as 
they towards him; while he was at the same time attracted by a fourth 


1See appendix No. 80. 


[M‘LAcHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 213 


prisoner, a Scotsman named Hay. On account of this choice he, as 
he claims, became the object of their jealousy. They appeared to be 
most quarrelsome, especially in the afternoons after they had been 
drinking — though he does not inform us as to how they got their 
liquor while in jail. Mesplet was to Jautard like Soutar Jonny, 
described by Burns, was to Tam O’Shanter. 


“His ancient trusty, drouthy cronie.” 


Laterrière states that nearly every afternoon, after indulging 
together, they attacked him, but never singly. Happily, being young 
and strong, he was able to master them both; and thus suffered no 
injury. 

After some time Mesplet’s wife was permitted to visit him and 
even to spend nights in prison with him. And to make it more 
convenient each of the prisoners partitioned off a sleeping apartment 
for himself. She, as well as her husband, petitioned on several occa- 
sions, and on one occasion Mesplet and Jautard together, asking to be 
liberated or brought to a speedy trial; claiming that they were alto- 
gother innocent of any wrong-doing,' Madam Mesplet further offered 
to furnish two securities to vouch for her husband’s good behaviour 
should he be released. In another petition,? in which he is joined by 
Laterriére, Mesplet asks to be permitted to take exercise in the jail-yard, 
as his health suffered from close confinement. As no heed was given 
te these petitions for liberty they continued in durance till the close 
of the war when strict surveillance was relaxed. So, on the Ist of 
September, 1782, Mesplet escaped,*? apparently with the connivance of 
the authorities, who were thus satisfied to have been relieved of responsi- 
bility, as the arrest of these people and their detention for three years 
and three months, without trial, was a violation of all the principles 
of British justice. 

What was done with Mesplet’s press and plant during all this time? 
According to Major Nairn it was seized and a kind of inventory taken.+ 
It evidently remained in Mesplet’s house on Capital Street, for he re- 
turned there and at once began work after his release. Did it stand idle? 
Most probably, as we have no imprints save one dated during these 
years. This one deserves a word. It is explained in a letter by 
Colonel D. Clause to Haldimand,® in which he states that the Mohawk 
prayer book having proved so successful he had tried his hand in his 


* See appendix C No. 26. 
3 See appendix C No. 24. 
5See appendix D No. 33. 
“Tbid CNo:, (20: 

“roid CG No: 2b: 


214 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


leisure hours on a Mohawk Primer. He had found great difficulty 
in correcting the proof of the Prayer Book, which was printed at Que- 
bee, and at the same time attend to his duties at Montreal! We may 
therefore conclude that finding Mesplet’s press standing idle under 
seizure by the government, he availed himself of this opportunity and, 
securing the services of a journeyman printer, had the Primer set up 
under his own supervision at Montreal; especially as Mohawk is most 
difficult composition for type-setters. 

As soon as Mesplet was released he secured an order for a Psautier* 
for the use of the schools in which a wood cut appears, which is claimed, 
in the Hart Catalogue, to have been the first wood engraving done in 
Canada, and to have been the first school book issued in Montreal. 
Both are simply assertions without any other authority. 

In 1783 a copy of the treaty of peace between Great Britain, 
France and the United States, signed in January of that year, was 
printed by Mesplet, also a petition he presented ‘to Congress. Dionne 
mentions an almanac for 1783,° but I have not been able to verify 
this statement by an existing copy, so do not include it in the list. 

This year he claimed from Congress compensation for the losses 
he had sustained in accepting their engagement as printer at Montreal 
and on account of his sympathy with their cause, but this petition met 
with no response. 

There were only two publications printed in 1784, the almanac,® 
of which only one incomplete copy is known; and this is the last year 
of issue so far as extant evidence goes. After this he issued large 
single paged “ Calendriers.” The second was “ L’écu de Six Francs,” 
a short story.” 

In September of this year Berger, whose partnership continued 
from about September, 1775, to September, 1778, came to Can- 
ada to arrange a settlement. He is described as a merchant of 
France. As there arose some dispute about the details of the account 
it was agreed to settle the matter amicably by each party appointing 
two arbitrators. As the account was somewhat complicated the arbi- 
trators referred the disputed points to Mr. Benjamin Frobisher, one of 


1 See Bibliography of the Iroquois language, Pilling, Washington, 1888, 
page 46. 


?See appendix A No. 24 Also Catalogue of the Hart Collection, Boston, 
April 15-19th, 1890. 

>See appendix A 25. 

# Ibid No. 26. 

5Page 14. 

5 Seë appendix A No. 27. 

T Ibid No. 28. 

8 See appendix F No. 51. 


{m‘LacHLan] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 215 


the principal merchants of Montreal and, on his advice, fixed the amount 
due Berger at $4,800.1 This award shows that not a single cent, 
principal or interest, of the debt, contracted away back in 1775 and 
1776, had been paid. Berger accepted in settlement of this claim a 
notarial bond for $1,200, payable in four equal annual instalments, and 
a note signed jointly by Mesplet and an individual named Marassé for 
$460. Berger, in the goodness of his heart and in consideration for 
Mesplet’s misfortune, wiped out the balance, $3,140.2 But from the 
post-mortem inventory we learn that Berger never received any pay- 
ment on the bond. The joint note with Marassé for $460, which 
appears on the inventory as a debt due that person, was the only money 
Berger had received on account of his advances to Mesplet. 

Berger made out a power of attorney ? in favour of Louis Hardy and 
J. C. Herse to collect this debt, and in February, 1785, left for France. 
This was the only occasion on which he came to Canada, although he is 
represented on imprints jointly with Mesplet from June, 1775, to the 
first of September, 1778. 

On the 26th of June, 1784, Mesplet again memorialized Congress 
regarding his claim for compensation for losses,* but this petition, after 
having been looked into was tabled. He was thereupon advised by 
some friend in charge of his claim at Philadelphia that nothing more 
could be accomplished without an appeal in person. This Mesplet 
complained he could not do on account of lack of funds to pay 
the expenses of a journey to and a sojourn at that place. But at 
length, by the kindness of a friend who advanced the necessary funds 
Mesplet appeared before Congress with another petition. This was in 
March, 1785. A committee was ‘appointed which, after asking for a 
hill of grievances and a statement, took the matter up. The bill and 
the statement ° give us many details of Mesplet’s journey from Philadel- 
phia to Montreal, which are most interesting. According to the latter 
the expenses of Mesplet’s journey and his losses through imprisonment 
totalled up to $9,450. This claim was backed up with a number of 
affidavits which’ attested to his sufferings and losses through devotion 
to the cause of the United States. In April he went to New York 
armed with a letter of introduction from Thomas Mefilin to the Hon. 
Mr. Hardy, a representative from Virginia, asking his assistance in 
pushing the claim.® After all this effort, the committee reported on 


= 


1See appendix F No. 53. 
2See appendix F No. 54. 
3 See appendix F No. 55. 
*See appendix D No. 34. 
5See appendix D No. 42. 
- See appendix D No. 41. 


216 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


the 27th of May, favouring the granting of “ $426,45-90 to Mr. Fleury 
Mesplet on account of expenses attending the transporting of himself, 
family and printing utensils from Philadelphia to Montreal This 
appears to have been for the bare expenses of the journey to Montreal, 
without taking into account the loss by imprisonment or otherwise; 
and it was far from satisfying him, for in June he presented another 
memorial ? setting forth the utter inadequacy of the sum voted to cover 
his losses. He claimed that it was insufficient to cover his outlay in 
securing it, which included expenditure for the services of an attorney, 
the cost of his trip to, and three months’ sojourn in Philadelphia. 
This was his last appeal to the United States. He had wasted time 
and money without any practical result, and from henceforth became 
a good and loyal Canadian. 

The same year Joseph Marie Desauiels finding it impossible to 
collect his claim against Mesplet — he had secured it by notarial bond 
the previous year *—took out an action against him in the Court of 
Common Pleas, and on the 22nd of July was granted a judgment for 
$1,481. This case was taken out against both Mesplet and Berger 
but the latter through his attorney, P. Méziére, proved that he was 
not liable for the debt, while Mesplet acknowledged the debt by confess- 
ing judgment. Jt may be worth while to note that the claimant was 
represented by Thomas Walker, celebrated in connection for his sym- 
pathy with the continental army, and for having entertained Franklin 
when he visited Montreal. Mesplet who, at that time, owed over 
$5,000,° tried to arrange a compromise. He only asked for an extension 
of time, offering his presses and other plant as security. But Desau- 
tels, noting that he was hopelessly insolvent, took out an execution 
and Mesplet’s effects were disposed of by a bailiffs sale in October.’ 
The whole sale realized a little over $600, not half the indebtedness 
to Desautels alone, who bought in the two presses and type for $290, 
besides books and sundry other articles aggregating altogether to $443, 
more than two-thirds of the whole. It would appear by the final 
inventory that Desautels bought the presses for Edward William Gray. 
From this time out Mesplet never owned his presses, although after- 
wards he, from time to time, bought fresh supplies of type. Gray, 
although, no doubt, he bought the plant at a bargain, could not find 


2See appendix D No. 31. 
2 See appendix D No. 43. 
See appendix F No. 56. 
* Ibid G No. 78. 
S Jbid F No. 60. 
S Ibid F No. 58. 
T7 See appendix F No. 61. 


[M‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 217 


another printer to take it off his hands or undertake the work, 
was obliged to fall back on a lease of the plant to Mesplet at the risk 
of never being paid or having to let the whole lie idle. From the 
details of this sale, which are most interesting, we learn that Mesplet, 
who is often represented on imprints as bookseller as well as printer, 
seld mainly his own publications, and such stationery as was then 
used; although from an earlier announcement he offered a few works 
by other printers he appeared to have none on hand at the time of 
this sale. His stock of publications, of which the major part was in 
sheets unbound, was very large, even when compared with the demand 
for such literature to-day. He had as many as 500, 750 and 1,000 
copies of some lines.1_ Only six of the fifteen books mentioned in this 
sale are otherwise known to bibliophilists. 

Among the purchasers at the sale was Jautard, who evidently had : 
some means, as he stands third highest on the list. This is the last 
eceasion we hear of him in connection with Mesplet. The latter seems 
to have broken away from his former editor after his release from 
prison. Jautard afterwards got in tow with a widow named “ Madam 
Deganne,” who appears to have had some means. He borrowed money 
from her, and then married her to cancel the debt. At that time he 
is represented as living at Côte St. Paul. 

His only publication in 1785 was the Montreal Gazette,? the first 
number of which appeared on the 28th of August. It was a four- 
paged folio, printed in French and English. All controversial matters 
were carefully avoided as it dealt mainly with general and local 
news. It was much less original than La Gazette Littéraire, so 
escaped falling under the ban of those in high places. It proved 
so successful that it still lives, while all its contemporaries — if 
we except the Nova Scotia Gazelte which, being a government 
organ, is outside the strict classification of true newspapers, have 
ceased to appear. It has therefore outlived all of its contem- 
poraries and many later Canadian publications. Although the price, 
$3.00 per annum, appears high for a small four page weekly when 
compared with one of our sixteen page dailies which cost no more, it 
had a good subscription list extending all the way down the banks of 
the St. Lawrence to Quebec; while there was hardly a prominent citizen 
cf Montreal, French as well as English, whose name was not among 


1See appendix B Nos. 3-15. 

2See appendix A No. 29. 

?The Halifax Gazette was first issued on the 23rd March, 1753. After- 
wards the title was changed to the Nova Scotia Royal Gazette under 
which title it is still issued as the official organ of that province. 


Sec. IL., 15. 1906 


218 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


the list of subscribers. On the 24th of September the Gazette consisted 
of a single page containing simply a letter in French from Fleury 
Mesplet addressed, “A Messieurs les Souscripteurs,” which shows that 
the paper came near ceasing to be published. It states that, “ You 
will be surprised at not receiving your Gazette this week, but I hope 
vou will bear me no ill will, because it is not the result of my negligence. 
I owe it to myself as well as the public to be on time, and I believe 
that up till the present not one of you gentlemen can reproach me. 
A derangement in my affairs (the cause of which, I believe, you all 
know) has stopped my work and rendered it impossible to supply 
to-day what I have engaged to do. I flatter myself that next week 
1 will be in a position to give such full satisfaction as lies within 
my power and to continue with the same zeal to give you proofs of 
my assiduity.” This derangement, no doubt, arose out of the seizure 
of Mesplet’s effects by Desautels. 

In 1786 no extant publication appeared; but in 1787 there are 
three: A funeral sermon preached by the Rev. D. C. Delisle on the 
death of Joseph Frobisher,’ who had acted two years before in settling 
the award between Berger and Mesplet. There was a medical work 
on how to combat a plague that had broken out at Baie St. Paul? 
and his first English book—‘‘ The Manual Exercise,’ * which was 
printed on the order or approval of the military authorities. This 
shows that Mesplet had now secured the good will of the government. 

1788 is again another year in which there are no extant imprints; 
but a lease was signed with J. B. Tabeau for a house on Notre Dame 
Street. The location of this house is given in one document as 
No. 44, and on the “Juge a Paix,” as near as the Recollet fathers fix 
it about the corner of St. Helen Street. As there is no evidence that 
he moved before this time we conclude that the printing office of Mes- 
plet continued at the first location in Capital Street from May 18th, 
1776, until May 1st, 1788, a space of twelve years. 

The only publication dated 1789 was “Le Juge à Paix,” a thick 
book, issued in parts, the first of which appeared in March. This 
book, which is comparatively common, is a translation of an English 
work by Richard Burn, and the parts were known as “ Traduction de 
Burn’s Justice.” In the Gazette of that year there are advertised “ Le 
Calendrier de Montréal pour l’année 1789,” and “Tableau des rues 
et faubourgs de Montréal.” 


+See appendix A No. 30. 
*See appendix A No. 31. 
3 See appendix A No. 32. 
*See appendix F No. 62. 
° See appendix A No. 33. 


[M‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 219 


On the 1st of September Marie Mirabeau, Mesplet’s faithful wife, 
died at the age of 43;! mo doubt worn out through privations and 
worry during her husband’s long imprisonment, accelerated also by his 
financial embarrassment. 

Mesplet did not continue long a widower, for on the 23rd of April, 
1790, after an interval of little more than seven months, he married 
Marie Anne Tison, daughter of Jean Baptiste Tison,? a girl of 23 
years, while he was himself over 55. She had been left a small 
competence by her deceased mother which attracted Mesplet, while she 
was glad to escape from the supervision of a stepmother, even by marry- 
ing a man who was an insolvent and more than twice her age. In 
any case, this inheritance soon served to tide the husband over a finan- 
cial difficulty, for before the close of the year his wife had to become 
a party with him to a bond in favour of Charles Lusignan for $174.° 

This year he published, on his own account, a pamphlet of 32 
pages, entitled “ La Bastille Septentrionale, ou trois sujets britanniques 
opprimés,” which describes a difficulty or quarrel arising out of the 
annual drill of the militia at Three Rivers‘ Although the subject 
seems most trivial it was evidently considered of sufficient importance 
at that time to command a ready sale, as from the title page we note 
that it was offered for sale throughout the province. Another pamphlet 
dated this year was “ Memoire . . . de Jean Baptiste Lebrun,” 
which describes a lawsuit. This year Mesplet appeared as godfather 
and his wife as godmother to his brother-in-law, Fleury Tison. As 
he was named after Mesplet, we may conclude that the two families 
were on good terms; two days afterwards he again stood as godfather 
to the daughter of a friend. 

In 1791 his only publication was “ Memoire en cassation du testa- 
ment de Simon Sanguinet,”* a pamphlet of 19 pages, evidently a will 
case. There is nothing dated 1792, which shows that Mesplet’s business 
was dwindling away. Only three pamphlets, totalling 67 pages, appear 
among the works now extant as printed during the years 1790-2. 

In May, 1793, Mesplet moved for the third time to a house, No. 
46 Notre Dame Street, two doors east of the former stand, which was 
owned by the widow of Ignace Chenier, and was for a term of five 
years, although he did not live long to occupy it. The only book 


1See appendix E No. 45. 

2See appendix E No. 46 and F No. 64. 
3 Jbid. F No. 65. 

*Tbid. A No. 34. 

5 Tbid. No. 35. 

S Ibid. F No. 49. 

7Ibid. A No. 36. 

8 Tbid. F No. 59. 


220 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


printed in these premises was one for the military authorities, as it 
bears the superscription “ By His Majesty’s Special Command.” It 
is entitled, “ Rules and Regulations for Field Exercise,’* and this is 
Mesplet’s last book. 

Evidently about this time the type and other appliances necessary 
for his press room began to be pretty well used up, as the owner of 
the presses declined to make any renewals. Mesplet had to order a 
fresh supply from Europe through a Montreal merchant named Jean 
Baptiste Durocher. In settlement for the cost of this type which 
amounted to $632, he, along with his wife, gave a bond in which the 
latter hypothecated to Durocher all her goods and furniture, besides her 
interest in the estate of her late mother? This amount was not paid 
at maturity, but in 1795 Madam Mesplet declared that the total amount 
coming to her from her mother’s estate did not exceed $326.50, which 
amount was to be paid by her father at the end of two years with 
interest at six per cent. This settlement, which was guaranteed by 
her father, J. B. Tison, was accepted by Durocher and afterwards 
transferred to P. Huguet-Latour,t who acknowledges to have received 
the amount with interest from Tison on the 22nd of November, 1797. 

The signing of this bond appears to have been the last transaction 
of any importance which Mesplet did, for six months afterwards — on 
the 24th of January, 1794—he died, according to the parish register 
aged about 60 years.° When he was married for the second time his 
age is given at 55, which would make him a year younger. 

After the death of Mesplet his wife found his affairs so embar- 
rassed financially that she appointed Charles Lusignan and Louis 
Hardy trustees, to take over the estate and settle it on behalf of the 
creditors.’ The inventory which they took valued his furniture and 
stock at $783, and book debts at $1,015, or a total of $1,798, to cover 
liabilities ascertained amounting to $3,546, besides a number of debts 
the amounts of which could not be determined. This inventory is a 
most precious document for, besides revealing Mesplet’s financial con- 
dition, it gives us a view of the furnishings of his house and of his 
wearing apparel, both of which by the way were as sumptuous as that 
of a gentleman of means. From it we also get an idea of the utensils 
employed about a Canadian house one hundred years ago. It also 


1See appendix A No. 37. 
2 Ibid. F No. 69. 
8 Ibid. F No. 70. 
+ Toid. EX INo: 7a: 
5 Toid. EF No. 72. 
SJbid. F No. 49. 
T Ibid. F No. 73. 


[M‘LACHLAN}] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 22 


describes very fully Mesplet’s stock in trade as a bookseller. Apart 
from some books placed on sale, and one or two dictionaries, he had 
no stock of books, save those of his own printing. But his stock of 
stationery, on, the other hand, was much more complete. 

After the inventory was taken, Madam Mesplet finding that the 
estate was hopelessly insolvent, renounced any claim she might have 
had in the community of property,’ and ordered the whole of the effects 
to be sold by auction on behalf of the creditors.” 

The second Madam Mesplet like the first had no children, thus, 
although left destitute by her husband, she had only herself to provide 
for. According to the marriage contract she had inherited from her 
mother $503.70, from which she paid $194 due on Lusignan’s bond 
and the $326.50 above mentioned to Durocher; the two together more 
than swallowed this sum. By her father’s will she was left a further 
sum of $25,* but this was so small as to be hardly worth mentioning. 
She never married again, although left a widow at the age of twenty- 
six. She died in 1840, aged 74.4 Her nephew, Mr. Jean Baptiste 
Tison, remembers ma tante Mesplet as a very old woman, but cannot 
relate anything she may have said about her husband. 

Now, regarding the books and other publications printed by Mes- 
plet; in list A are given all that are known to exist with their titles 
in full, the number and size of the pages and where copies are to, be 
seen. These number 39, but there are some 36 others mentioned in 
advertisements and in the two inventories, bringing up the total to 75; 
all of which arranged according to subjects are given in Appendix B. 
Of these nearly one-third are religious and three official, for military 
purposes, showing that Mesplet must have repented and been received 
as a true son of the church and as a good citizen. He did honest 
work on fairly good paper, much better than in many longer established 
printing offices on this continent. His description of the stock, 
brought from Philadelphia, which included gold leaf and gilt, mar- 
bled, coloured and India paper, besides 80 reams of fine white paper, 
gives an idea of the quality of work he intended to do. His binding 
was also of good material and well executed, which shows that he was 
a thorough master of his trade in all its branches. The proof reading 
feems to have been well done, and, as he printed in four languages, 
we might almost say five, as the English style of spelling Iroquois was 
altogether different from the French, we can form some idea of his 


* See apperdix E No. 74. 
? See appendix E No. 75. 
*See appendix G No. 77. 
* See append’x E No. 50. 


222 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


capacity for undertaking difficult pieces of work. In one of these 
his name is even given in the Iroquois form. 

What is there to be said as to Mesplet’s character and dis- 
position? Shall we accept Laterriére’s estimate as conclusive and draw 
no other deductions? This estimate seems hardly fair. We must 
remember that it was formed under most unfavourable circumstances. 
Mesplet was in close confinement under which, being used to work, he 
chafed. Then there was Jautard’s evil influence which, with enforced 
idleness and drink, would in many cases debase the sweetest disposition. 
That he did reform after his liberation is proved by the fact that he 
broke away from Jautard’s influence and was received into the bosom 
of the church. That he was untruthful and ungrateful, or, to put it 
mildly, made promises he was unable to fulfil, is amply proved by his 
action in regard to his promise to abstain from all controversial subjects 
in his Gazette Littéraire, in his neglect to meet his bonds when due, 
‘and in his treatment of his friend Berger. The debt due the latter was 
altogether ignored, notwithstanding his many acts of kindness. In this 
Mesplet was most ungrateful. Another indication of his untruthful- 
ness is the immoderate language used in his appeal to Congress, and this 
too, after settling down as a British subject, in which he claims that 
the ill-treatment at the hands of the Loyalists, whom he alls 
“ Canaille,” because of his sympathy with the cause of the united 
“did him honour.” But Laterriére’s assertion is not true; that he was 
actuated by “an evil genius, which, but for the softening influence of 
his wife, would have led him to commit many wrong things unworthy 
of an honest man.” 

From Cramahé’s letter to Haldimand,’ which states “when our 
printer has a cup too much, which is not seldom,” coupled with Later- 
riére’s account of the drinking bout every afternoon, we are forced to 
the conclusion that Mesplet’s besetting sin was drunkenness and to 
this should be attributed his utter financial failure; nevertheless, he 
must have had some good qualities to secure the patronage he did and 
some attractiveness of manner to obtain loans and other financial help 
through all his business career. 

While he had a fair education and was a most intelligent workman 
we may conclude with Laterriére that he lacked refinement and culture. 
The whole tone of his memorial to Congress, one of the few examples 
of his own composition we possess, bears this out.? The use of the 
expression “ces animeaux ”— these beasts — stamps him as of a rather 
low nature — grossière —as the French would express it. 


*See appendix C No. 10. 
*See appendix D No. 33. 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 223 


In disposition he was most sanguine, for he seems never to have 
faltered under a heavy load of debt and the chronic state of insolvency 
in which he always lived. And bearing up under this burden he was able 
to ward off his creditors by one means or another, while at the same 
time securing advances or fresh credit from new men. In only one 
instance was he sued and pushed to the wall. That was when sold 
out by Desautels. Each creditor in every financial transaction, save 
two, who were paid in full after his death by Madam Mesplet, lost 
part or whole of his debt, and these two, Charles Lusignan and 
Desautels, were paid out of Madam Mesplets patrimony. Thus 
while able to ward off his many creditors, in ordinary ability and power 
to cope with and meet his financial engagements, he was altogether 
wanting, and yet through all he was a painstaking, honest and per- 
severing workman. 

Such then are the facts that have been gathered respecting our 
first Montreal printer. And, although this closer inspection has dis- 
pelled much of the glamour that has hitherto surrounded him, and 
shown him to have been ever very human and erring, yet, as a man 
labouring under great disabilities — desertion by his patrons, accused 
by the church, suspected by the people, imprisoned by the government, 
and borne down with debt — he rose above all and, persevering to the 
end, founded a free press, one that has uncovered the source of French 
literature in the new world, which, flowing in an ever widening, deepen- 
ing stream, is clear and hmpid when compared with the turbid flood 
inundating the old land. 


224 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


APPENDICES. 
A 
List of Books, pamphlets, &c., printed by Mesplet, copies of which exist. 


1773. 


1. La | Louisiane | Ensanglantée, | Avec toutes les Particularités de 
cette horrible | Catastrophe, | Redigées | Sur le Serment de Témoins dignes 
de foi. | Par le Colonel Chevalier de Champigny. | Quidquid delirant Reges 
plechuclue Achivi | Virg. | A Londres, | Aux dépens de l'Editeur: | Chez 
Fleury Mesplet, No 24. Crown | Court, Little Russell Street, Covent Garden. | 
M.DCC.LXXIII. 

Size 5 x 8, pp. XII. + La Louisiane. 123 + Notes XXX. + Memorial 
92 — 197. 

Copies known, F. Gagnon, Quebec; Library of Congress, Washington. 

Described by Gagnon, Essai de Bibliographie Canadienne, Quebec, 1895, 
page 102, No. 765. A second edition was issued in 1776 and a third in 1781 
under the title “ Etat présent de la Louisiane.” This book as is claimed by 
the preface was edited from the manuscript of a deceased English officer 
who had lived in Louisiana. 

1774. 


2. Lettre | Adressée | Aux Habitants | de la Province | de Québec | ci- 
devant le Canada | De la part du Congrès | Général de l’Amé- | rique Sep- 
tentrionale tenu a Philadelphie | Imprimé & publié par ordre du Congrés | 
A Philadelphie, | De l'Imprimerie de Fleury Mesplet. | M.DCC.LXXIV. 

Size 4% x 7, pp. 18. Copies: Judge L. W. Sicotte, Montreal; Historical 
Society of Pennsylvania. 

Mentioned in “Issues of the Press in Pennsylvania, 1685-1784, Hildeburn. 
Philadelphia, 1885-6, Vol. 2, page 192. 


1775. 


3. L’Inoculation | du | Bon sens | Par moi, & pour l’homme en général, | 
Tout lui plait & déplait, tout le choque & Voblige; | Sans raison il est gai, 
sans raison il s’afflige; | Son esprit au hazard aime, évite, poursuit, Défait, 
refait, augmente, Ote, élève, détruit. | Boileau | A Philadelphie | chez l’im- 
primeur ambulant. | Avec l'approbation de la Société des Inoculés | 
M.DCC.LXXV. 

Size 4% x 7%, pp. 47. Copy, Late Mr. Justice Baby, Montreal. 

Although this publication does not bear Mesplet’s imprint it is claimed 
by Judge Baby, in a note attached, to have been printed by him as there 
was at that time no other French printer in Philadelphia to which the quali- 
fication Ambulant (itinerant) would apply. Corroborative of this claim is the 
fact that six copies of “ L’Inoculation du bon sens” were found in Mesplet’s 
stock after his death. 


4. Lettre | Adressée | Aux Habitants | Opprimés | de la Province | de | 
Québec. | De la part du Congrès Général de l'Amérique Sep- | tentrionale, 
tenu a Philadelphie. | Philadelphie, Fleury Mesplet, 1775. 

8-vo, pp. 7. Copy: Historical Society of Pennsylvania. 

Mentioned by Hildeburn, Vol. 2, page 225. 


{m‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 225 


5. Règlement | de la Confrérie | de l’adoration perpétuelle | du S. 
Sacrement | et | de la bonne mort, | Erigée | dans l'Eglise paroissiale de 
Vil- | le-Marie, en l’Isle de Montréal, en Canada. 

Size 34% x 5, pp. 40. Copies: Judge L. W. Sicotte; Late Mr. Justice 
Baby. 

Although bearing no imprint, there appears little doubt but that this 
little booklet was printed by Mesplet. He secured the order on his way 
back from Quebec in May or June, 1775. These were among some of the 
books that escaped while the bulk of the edition was lost through the ship- 
ping of water by the bateaux at Chambly in 1776, hence the need of a 
second edition. (Mentioned by Gagnon, page 412, No. 2691, and by Dionne, in 
Inventaire chronologique des livres..., publié dans la province de Québec, 
page 13, where he claims that it was most likely printed in France. But 
this seems altogether unlikely as all communication with Canada and that 
country had been prohibited. 


6. Réglement | Militaire, | Concernant | La Police | et | La Discipline, | 
Que doivent observer les Troupes qui sont ou seront | dans la suite levées & 
payées par les Treize | Colonies unies de l'Amérique Septentrionale. | Tra- 
duit de l’Anglais par-F. Daymon. | A Philadelphie; Chez Fleury Mesplet & 
Ch. Berger, | Imprimeurs & Libraires. | M.DCC.LXXV. 

Size 8-vo, pp. 39. Copy: Historical Society of Pennsylvania. 

Mentioned by Hildeburn, Vol. 2, page 265. 


1776. 


7. Aux | Habitants | de la Province du Canada. | A Philadelphia. | 
Chez Fleury Mesplet & Charles Berger, [dated] “ A Philadelphie, le 24 janvier 
1776” and signed by “John Hancock, President.” 

Size 8 x 12, p. 1. Copies: Historical Society of Pennsylvania; Judge L. 
W. Sicotte. The letter without imprint. 

Mentioned by Hildeburn, Vol. 2, page 242. 


8. Règlement | de la Confrérie | de l'Adoration perpétuelle | du | S. 
Sacrement; | et | de la Bonne Mort. | Hrigée dans l'Eglise paroissiale de 
Ville-Mar- | ie, en l'Isle de Montréal, en Canada | Nouvelle Edition revue, 
corrigée et augmentée | A Montréal; | chez F. Mesplet & C. Berger, Impri- | 
meurs et Libraires; près le Marché, 1776. 

Size 3 x 4%, pp. 40. Copies: Judge L. W. Sicotte and about twenty others. 

Described by Gagnon, page 412, No. 2691, and by Dionne, page 13, No. 8. 


9. Jonatas | et | David | ou | le triomphe | de l’Amitié. |*¢Tragédie | En 
Trois Actes. | Représentée par les Ecoliers de Montréal | design | A Montréal; | 
chez Fleury Mesplet & Ch. Berger, | Imprimeurs & Libraires, 1776. 

Size 4% x 7%, pp. 40. Copies: The late Mr. Justice Baby; P. Gagnon, 
Quebec. 


10. Cantiques | de l'âme dévote | divisé en XII livres | l’on représente 
d’une maniére nette & facile | les principaux mystéres de la Foi, & les prin-, - 
cipales vertues de la Religion Chrétienne | accomodés a des airs vulgaires | 
avec une augmentation notable: | le tout mis dans un ordre particulier. | 
Nouvelle édition imprimée sur celle | de Marseille avec son ancienne appro- | 


226 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


bation. Première partie, | par M. Laurens Durand, Prétre | du diocése de 
Toulon. | Implemini Spiritu Sancto loquentes vobismet ipsis in Psalmis & 
Hymnis & Cantecis spiritualibus | Cantantes, & Psaultentes in Cordibus 
Nestris Domino. | Eph., ch. 6, v. 18 & 19. | à Québec, chez Fleury Mesplet 
& Charles Berger, Imprimeurs & Libraires, 1776. 

Size 3% x 6%, pp. 610. Copies: Judge L. W. Sicotte; Mr. Justice Baby, 
and three or four others. 

Mentioned by Gagnon, page 102, but the date is incorrectly given as 


1775. 
WT 


11. Almanach | Encyclopédique; | ou Chronologie | des faits les plus 
remarquables de | l’histoire universelle, depuis Jé- | sus-Christ; | avec les 
anecdotes curieuses, utiles | & intéressantes. | Mil-sept cent soixante dix- 
sept | A Montréal | chez Fleury Mesplet & Char- | les Berger, Imprim. Lib. | 
itis 

Size 3 x 4%, pp. 60. Copy: The late Mr. Justice Baby. 

This is believed to be first almanac printed in French in America. 


12. Iontri8-aiestakSa | Ionskaneks | N’aieienterihag Gaiatonsera te 
Gari8toraragon. ê Ong8e on8e Ga8ennotakon | ornamental square | Teiotiagi; | 
8esklet, Tsi Thonons8te, Ok- | niore Tsi IontkerontakS8a. | 1/77. 

Size 4 x 7, pp. 16. Copy: Historical Society of Wisconsin, Madison. 

The first Iroquois book printed in Canada. Described as a ‘ Mohawk 
Primer” by J. C. Pilling in The Bibliography of the Iroquoian Languages, 
Washington, 1888, page 90. It is probably the same publication as that 
mentioned in the post-mortem inventory under the title ‘ Brochures de 


Priéres Sauvages” of which there were sixteen copies. 


13. Exercise | trés-dévot | envers S. Antoine | de Padoue | le Thauma- 
turge, | de l’ordre Séraphique | de S. Francois. | Avec un petit recueil de 
quelques princi- | paux miracles. | A Montréal. | Chez F. Mesplet et C. Berger, 
Imprimeurs & Libraires, 1777. 

Size 2% x 5, pp. 88. Copies: Judge L. W. Sicotte; Cyrille ‘“l'essier, 
Cuebec. 


14. Officium | in honorem | Domini Nostri J. C. | Summi Sacerdotis | 
et | Omnium Sanctorum | Sacerdotum | ac Levitarum. | Monti-Regali; Apud 
Fleurium Mesplet | Typographorum & Bibliop. | M.DCC.LXXVII. 

Size 4144 v 6%, pp. 12. Copies: Judge L. W. Sicotte; Université Laval, 
Quebec, and four or five others. 

The first Latin book printed in Canada. Described by Gagnon, page 355, 
No. 2581. Also by Dionne, page 13, No. 10, where by mistake he claims 
it was printed in Quebec. A manuscript copy exists in the library of the 
Archbishop of Quebec. 


15. Catéchisme | a l'usage | du Diocèse | de Québec. | Imprimé par 
Yordre de Monseigneur Jean | Olivier Briand; Evéque de Québec. | Pre- 
miére partie, | Contenant | le petit Catéchisme ou abrégé de la doctrine 
chrétienne. | A Montréal | chez Fleury Mesplet & Charles Berger, | Impri- 
meurs & Libraires, 1777. 

Size 12 mo., pp. 205. Copy: Library of Parliament, Ottawa. 


[M‘LAcHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 227 


1778. 


à 


16. Almanach | Curieux | et intéressant; | Contenant la liste des 
prêtres & | Religieux Desservants les Eglises de Canada; la connaissance 
des | monnaies courantes, des Poids & | Mesures, & Anecdotes, Fables, | 
Curiosités Naturelles, & mille sept cent soixante dix-huit | A Montréal;| chez 
Fleury Mesplet et Char- | les Berger, Imprim. Lib. | 1778. 

Size 3 x 4%, pp. 60. Copies: Université Laval, Quebec, P. Gagnon, 
Quebec. 


17. L'Office | de la | Semaine Sainte, | Selon le Missel | & Breviaire 
romain; | Avec l’explication des sacrés Mystéres représentés | par les céré- 
monies de cet office. L'ordinaire de | la messe, les sept psaumes de la 
Pénitence, les | litanies des Saints, et les Priéres pour la Con- | fession 
& communion, tirées de l’Ecriture Sainte. | Imprimé sur la meilleure édition 
de Paris. | A Montréal, chez Fleury Mesplet & Charles | Berger, Imprimeurs 
& Libraires, M.DCC.LXXVIII. 

Size 312 x 6%, pp. 410. Copy: The late Judge Baby. 

This is the last book printed under the partnership of Mesplet & Berger, 
which continued from about September 1775 to September 1778. 


18. Neuvaine | a l'honneur | de St. François | Xavier, | de la Com- 
pagnie | de Jésus, | Apôtre des Indes & du Japon | A Montréal | chez Fleury 
Mesplet, Imprimeur & | Libraire, prés le Marché, 1778. 

Size 3% x 5, pp. 147. Copies: Judge L. W. Sicotte; The late Mr. Justice 
Baby. 


19. Journal | du | Voyage | de M. Saint-Luc | de la Corne, Ecuyer. 
| Dans le navire l'Auguste, en l'an 1761 | A Montréal; chez Fleury Mesplet; 
Imprimeur et Libraire, M.DCC.LXX VIII. 

Size 4% x 612, pp. 38 x 2—40. Copies: Université Laval, Quebec; 192: 
Gagnon, Quebec. 

Described by Dionne, page 13, No. 12. e 


20. Abrégé | des règles | de la | Versification | française. | Par Mr. 
Restant, Avocat au Parlement & ap- | prouvé de l’Académie des Sciences à 
Paris. | A Montréal; chez Fleury Mesplet, Imprimeur & | Libraire, 
M.DCC.LXX VIII. 

Size 4% x 6%, pp. 80. Copies: Late Mr. Justice Baby; Université Laval, 
Quebec. 

As this book was advertised in La Gazette Littéraire of 2nd September, 
1788, as for sale ‘“ chez l'Imprimeur,’ we have the exact date of its appear- 
ance and may conclude that its publication was Mesplet’s own venture. 


1778-1779. 


21. Gazette du Commerce | et Littéraire, | Pour la Ville & District de 
Montréal | Montréal, chez F. Mesplet & C. Berger, Imprimeurs & Libraires. 

Afterwards changed to 

Gazette Littéraire | pour la Ville & District de Montréal | Montréal, 
chez Fleury Mesplet, Imprimeur & Libraire. 

Size 74% x 9, pp. about 220. Copies: McGill University, Montreal, Uni- 
versité Laval, Quebec. 


228 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The first number appeared on the 8rd of June, 1778; the change in the 
title and imprint was made on the 2nd September, 1778, and the last issue on 
the 2nd of June, 1779. 


1779. 


22. Almanach | curieux | et intéressant; contenant l'Idée des Etats, 
Royau- | mes & Républiques de l’Europe | avec les Naissances des Princes 
& | Princesse; la liste des Prétres & Religieux Desservants les Egli- | ses 
de Canada; la connaissance des | monnaies courantes, & la distance | mar- 
quée d'une Poste à une autre, | depuis Québec jusqu'à Montreal | mille sept 
cent soixante dix-neuf. | A Montréal; | chez Fleury Mesplet, Impri- | meur 
et Libraire. | M.DCC.LXXIX. 

Size 3 x 412, pp. 62. Copy: Université Laval, Quebec. 


1781. 


23. A | primer | For the | use of the Mohawk children | To acquire 
the spelling and Reading | of their own: As well as to get ac- | acquainted 
with the English Tongue, | which for that purpose is put on the | opposite 
page. | 

Waerighwaghsame Iksa | ongoenwa Tsiwaondad-derigh- | honny Kaghya- 


dogsera; Nayondewe- | yestashk ayeneanashnô don ayeghya- | dow Kani- 
yenkehaga Kaweanondagh- | kouh; Dyorheas-taga oni tisinihadwea- | 
notea. | Montreal, Printed at Fleury Mesplet’s, 1781. 

Size) 24 amo; “pps 79. Copies: British Museum, London; Wilberforce 


Eames, New York, and a private library in Brooklyn. 

This is described by Pilling, pages 137-9, where he gives a fac-simile 
of the title page. A second edition was printed in London in 1786. Printed 
at Mesplet’s press while he was a state prisoner at Quebec, under the 
supervision of the author, Coi. Claus. 


é 1782. 


24. Pseautier de David, avec les cantiques à l'usage des Ecoles, a 
Montréal, chez Fleury Mesplet, 1782. 


Size 24 mo., pp. 304. Copy: The Hart Sale, Boston, April 15-19, 1890. 
No. 1674. 


The Catalogue has a note which states “Contains the first wood cuts 
made in Montreal (p. 299), and is the first school book issued in Canada.” 
Both statements are doubtful. 


1783. 


25. Copies | Authentiques | des articles préliminaires | de la paix, | 
entre | S. M. Britannique, | S. M. Trés-Chrétienne | et | les Etats-Unis de 
l'Amérique. | Signés à Versailles, le 10 janvier 1783. | A Montréal, | chez 
Fleury Mesplet, M.DCC.LXXXIII. 


Size 44%, x 6%, pp. 25. Copy: Late Justice Baby. 


26. To the Honorable the president and members of Congress of the 
United States | The memorial of Fleury Mesplet, of Montreal, in the 
Province of Quebec. | Montréal, août 1783. 

Size 94% x 134%, pp. 1. Copy: Library of Congress, Washington. 


[m‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 229 
1784. 


27. Almanach | curieux | et intéressant | pour l’année | mil sept cent 
quatre-vingt-quatre. | A Montréal; | chez Fleury Mesplet, Impri- | meur 
& Libraire | M.DCC.LXXXIV. 

Size 3 x 5, pp. 58, but not complete. Copy: Université Laval, Quebec. 

Dionne, page 14, simply mentions an almanac of 1783, but without 
details, the existence of which I have not been able to verify. This is the 
last year of issue of Mesplet’s almanacs, he afterwards issued the large 
single sheet calendars. 

28. L’Ecu | de | Six Francs | A Paris | & réimprimé à Montréal, | chez 
Fleury Mesplet, Imprimeur | & Libraire | 1784. 

Size 16 mo., pp. 35. Copies: Lucien Huot, Beloeil; P. Gagnon, Quebec. 

Described with fac-simile of title page by Gagnon, pages 277-8, No. 
2004. Mentioned also by Dionne, page 14, No. 16. On the title page is a 
small wood cut design with a liberty cap for the centre. Where was it 
engraved? 

1785-1794. 


29. The Montreal Gazette 
Gazette. de Montréal. 
From 25th August, 1785, to Mesplet’s death, 29th January, 1794. 
Size 10 x 15. Copies: One volume, McGill University; several volumes, 


Université Laval, Quebec. 
1787. 


30. Sermon | funèbre | prononcé à l'occasion de la mort de | Mr. Ben- 
jamin Frobisher. | On the last page is the imprint. A Montréal | chez F. 
Mesplet, Imprimeur, 1787. 

Size 5 x 8, pp. 15. Copies: Judge L. W. Sicotte; the late Mr. Justice 
Baby. 

This sermon was preached by the Rev. D. C. Delisle, a Swiss minister, 
who was brought out by the government and set over the Anglican Con- 
gregation at Montreal, of which Frobisher was a member. Mentioned by 
Dionne, page 14, No. 22. 


31. Remarques | sur | la maladie contagieuse | de | la Baie Saint Paul, | 
avec la description de ses symptômes & la méthode | d’en faire la cure; | 
A l'usage du clergé, & autres messieurs résidents | à la campagne, | par | 
Robert Jones, chirurgien. | Non ignara mali miseris succurrere disco | verg. 
LIV-I | Mes malheurs m'ont rendu l'ami des malheureux. | A Montréal | 
chez Fleury Mesplet, Imprimeur-Libraire, 1787. 

Size 5 x 7%, pp. 22 list. Copies: The late Mr. Justice Baby, Montreal; 
Legislative Library, Quebec. 

Mentioned by Dionne, page 14, No. 20, but copy lacks title page and 
‘the date is given through error as 1786. 


32. The | Manual Exercise, | with | Explanations, as ordered by | His 
Majesty. | The second edition. | Montreal, Printed by Fleury Mesplet. 
M.DCC.LXXXVII. 

Size 414% x 6%. Copy: The late Mr. Justice Baby. 


230 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
1789. 


32. Le | Juge a Paix | et | Officier de Paroisse | pour la Province de 
Québec. | Extrait de Richard Burn, Chancellier | du Diocése de Carlisle, 
un des Juges à Paix | de Sa Majesté, pour les Comtés de Westmorland | & 
Cumberland. | Traduit par Jos. F. Perrault | A Montréal; | chez Fleury 
Mesplet, Imprimeur, rue Notre-Dame, | près les R.R. P.P. Récollets. | 
M.DCC.LXXXIX. 

Size 5 x 8, pp. 561 x 15—576. Copies: Judge L. W. Sicotte and eight 
or nine others. 

This book was issued in monthly parts of 32 pages each under the title 
of “Traduction de Burn’s Justice.” It was advertised in the Montreal 
Gazette of February, 1789, the first number as was announced appearing 
in Mareh and the second on the 8th of April. The subscription was one 
shilling per part, which would bring the cost of the whole volume up to $4.50. 
That is if it was divided in eighteen parts of 32 pages each. A list of 
subscribers is given in the Gazette which numbered over 237, of which 167 
were from Montreal, 60 from Quebec, and ten from Three Rivers. In the 
library of the late Judge Baby are several unbound parts. Described by 
Gagnon, page 367, No. 2678, and by Dionne, page 14, No. 23. 


1790. 


34. Mémoire | abrégé | ou exposition justificative du cas de Jean- 
Baptiste | Lebrun, de la paroisse de St. Sulpice, dans district de Montréal | 
On the last page is the imprint. A Montréal; | chez Fleury Mesplet, Imprimeur, 
1790. 

Described by Dionne, page 15, No. 30. The copy in the library of Laval 
University is dated in manuscript, 1791. 


1791. 


35. La Bastille | Septentrionale, | ou | Les trois Sujets | Britanniques 
opprimés | Quod nequeo monstrare et Sentro tantum | Prix 40 sous | Se 
vend | A Montréal, | chez Fleury Mesplet, Imprimeur, | A Québec, | chez 
Mr. Bouthillier, au | Bureau de la Poste, | aux Trois Riviéres, chez Mr. 
Mellish; à Varennes, chez Mr. Alexis Lahaye; a Berthier, chez Mr. L 
Labadie; & à l’'Assomption, chez Mr. Faubant, Notaire. 

Size 5 x 8%, pp. 32. Copies: Université Laval, Quebec; Legislative 
Library, Quebec, and one or two others. 


36. Mémoire | en cassation | du testament | de M. Simon Sanguinet, 
Ecuyer, Seigneur de | la Salle &c., Précédé du testament. | Montréal, 10 
janvier 1791, | chez Fleury Mesplet | Imprimeur et Libraire, rue Notre- 
Dame 44. 

Sizes x M) pps 19: Copies: Cyrille Tessier, Quebec; Legislative 
Library, Quebec. 

Described by Dionne, page 15, No. 3. A Factum prepared by J. F. 


Perrault. 
1793. 


37. By His Majesty’s command | Auditor General’s Office | June Ist, 
1792. | Rules and reguiations | for the | formations, field-Exercise | and 


{m‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 231 


movements | of His Majesty’s forces | Montreal | Printed by Fleury Mesplet 
Notre Dame | street, No. 46, 1793. 
Size 44% x 7%, pp. XX x 100 x 54—174 Copy: The late Mr. Justice Baby. 


NO DATE. 


38. Mémoire | en réponse à l'écrit publié | Mr. Panet fondé de 
procuration de Watson | & Rasleigh de Londres, Demandeurs, | contre Pierre 
Ducalvet, de Montréal, Ecuyer, Défendeur | Stupete Gentes | A Montréal, 
chez Fleury Mesplet, Imprimeur & Libraire. 

Size 6 x 9, pp. 16. Copy: Cyrille Tessier, Quebec. 


39. Engagement forms “pour le pays d’Ennaut. 
Quarto, pp. 2. Court House, Montreal. 


232 


B 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


. _ List of Books, pamphlets, ete., printed by Mesplet including those mentioned 
in the inventories arranged according to subjects. 


No. of Copies 
in Existence 


Religious. 
1 Règlement de la Confrérie Ist edition............ | 
2 à Fe a AAO by)! Cn eae eg ei | 
Sa Camtiques deyMarselllest.ciscigierteie stats nce ie | 
Aa St Antomnesdes ad OU ess nite eee rents ieee revo 
5. (Catéchisme pournbnfant ses e cece desc: ae ene 
6 Neuvaine de St. Francois Xavier.................. 
7 Oficede la Semaine Sante PP PEL oie | 
Sa Jeunesse Chrétienne te oe ee eae salar 
9 Psautiers (mentioned in Bulletin de R.H.vol. IT, p. 108. 
{OM eHormulaimesid el OriGKessa eerie ele ener re ce 
HT Am des tentants wrens eek Selo errno 
12 a Devotliontde! lanstess tamil eres e eerie 
Da Dévotion ala saints ANLES EP see oc sere 
M anre Gardiens er a= erat uel. ce) eet 
te UR egleside Paraisse Fe setae ate cee ey ae 
lé Petites Heures . ie nado re couche mec Ce 
1NCathéchisme dela Valinieres: a5 5. ee EEE CEE CPE 
18 Histoire Chantante de la Valinière................ 
19 MCatéchisme de la Confirmation. Pr eee EEE 
D0MMessedelste Hannlles re CCC EC ECC EEE 
oi Sermon! Hunébre BP HrODISHER er. «oes ere 
In Iroquois. 
22 Iroquois Primer (prières sauvages 1777............ 
23 A Primer for the Mohawk Children 1781........... 
In Latin. | 
AMOMCUMININONOrEN REP EEE EEE CCE CCE CCE 
95 “Alphabet Latin RECENT cle ee Le 
26 Nouvelle Méthode pour lating 0... 
Drbettres de Ciceron en PAIN EEE ER EC 
DS MWh eat PERRET RE CL 
School Books. 
99) “Alphabet francais. 2... CCC rec. 
30 A.B.C. RP ae eto Gris cd ree EE TE RE | 
31 English Spelling books.......................:... | 
397 Waynes! d'école Ane ais 1 PRE RER EE. 
Literary. | 
33 moeulationtdu bonisens losin ener ieie tell 
34 Les Gants Anecdotes 1775—Hildeburn vol. IT, p. 221. 
S5Jonatas et David MAO pou d spon bos coboossesdes 
36 Dialogues Curieux et interessants.................. 
37 Anecdotes Anglaises et francaises................. 
38 Abrégé de la Versification française... ............. 
SOMME de SR ARTANCS EE PEU EREEESE EEE CTRT 
AD HSentences se Ie UN CRE EEE SRE Omen AIRE 
AT SB TOCHUTES 22e ee ere res ER A ES ARE MEN EE ICE 


ket CD ri et Qt © ND 


No. of Copies 
in First In- 
ventory. 


No. of Copies 
in Second In- 
ventory. 


1 paquet 


8 
1 paquet 
65 
2paquets 
31 

217 

72 


4 paquets 
25 


16 
18 
3 paquets 


16 


1 paquet 
8 


31 
10 


165 


2 rames 


13 paquets 


1 lot 


6 


12. 
[21 


170 
135 


1 paquet 


2 lots 


[m‘Lacazan] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 233 


Legal and Political. 

42 Lettre aux Habitants..de Quebec 1774............ 
43 : ie te, Gpprimé rs Didia'sh ciate, Seavedetayet’: © 
44 à Rd Oanadan” LAON Ne Le 
45 Memorial to Members of Congress, 1783............ 
2 RON ET EN CNE RNA 


nd du cours 


48 Mémoire de Mézière. ... Dames Religeuses de Trois 

Rivières. Advertised in Gazette of 1779..... 
49 Réponse à par F. L. Duéme........ don Balas eee: 
50 Mémoire sur le testament Sanguinet............... 


52 & ew ee ee OTUs nn ler pires 
a Constitution Droit de lhomme:........ <0. 66... 
Military. 


D Prlement Mihtaire1770....:....1,...,.,...4... 
SMI RoI MENENCISE RON IR RENAN ART ET 
Ne La Paille Septentrionale....................... 
57 Rules and Regulations for Field Exercise.......... 
nine Mihlaire. 4.0.2... ie ba wees 


Medical. 
59 Maladie Contagieuses de la Baie St. Paul.......... 
Newspapers. 


Historical. 


62 La Louisiane Ensanglantée....................... 
63 Journal du Voyage de Lacorne St. Luc 


Almanacs and Calendars. 


64 Almanach Encyclopédique 1777.................. 
65 À Curieux et interessant 1778............ 
66 ci fé PR yt eres ste Sal 
67 + ne 1783—Mentioned 

by Dionne 
68 eo se RAS LIEN pce ea RES 
69 Calendriers 1789—Advertised in Gazette.......... 
70 = A PPE ee tend aed, Feros Aol olla We Se 
71 . ECU EUTTEEL SS 7" USUAL ae ae 
Miscellaneous. 


72 Règles pour change de Monnaie................... 
73 Easy rules for exchange of currency 
74 Guide de la Banque Anglaise..................... 
75 Tableau des Rues et Faubourgs de Montréal 
GOR LE AE ae 
77 Engagement pour Voyage d’enhaut............... | 


i 
a 6 0 nt 


Sec. II., 1906. 16 


Sale tele eo Xs/'spe\e ellehe iene 


No. of Copies 
in Existence. 


mee hore bo 


© 


[num 


| SO bi pi 


elle 


large 
number | 


No. of Copies 
in First In- 
ventory. 


| Bee ae ale 


| | 


| 


No. of Copies 
in Second In- 
ventory. 


‘1 paquet 


il paquet 


234 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


C No. 1. 
FROM THE HALDIMAND COLLECTION. 


Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. I, p. 66. 


Mr Mesplet Maitre Imprimerie a Quebec. 


Philadelphia 29 Mars 1775 
Monsieur : 


J'ai appris yer de madame votre epouse quel avez Recu de vos 
nouvelles, et bien faché que vous aier été malade dans votre route et que 
vous avée eut beaucoup de peine et d'inquiettude; Je vous Repons que 
vous en avez laissé a M votre Epouse, ainsi qu'a moi, d’e n’avoire point 
disous votre société avec votre assotiée avant votre depart ou d’arranger 
autrement vos affairs attendû qu'il a voulu faire saisir toutes vos effets 
que vous avez chez vous, J'ai été obligé de les faire enlévé et de les cachées 
en different endroits, ainsi que vos caracteres qui etoit chez monsieur Miller 
par le consentement de madame votre epouse. Le tout est en votre dispo- 
sition ainsi qu'a la Sienne. De plus madame Votre epouse m'a dit que vous 
lui marqués de voir M" Miller ainsi que moi et de nous priés d’avoir quelque 
consideration pour vous Je suis surpris de cela de votre part a mon egard, 
Je ne crois point ne vous avoir des obligée en aucune chose ou vous n'avez 
pas fait reflexion sur ce que vous aié dit a votre depart de Philadelphia 
Vous n'avez aucune precaution a prendre au Sujet de ce que vous devée a 
Mr Miller attendu que j'ai payée et retirée tous vos characteres de chez 
lui et vous n’avez appressent a faire qu’A moi sur pleusieurs articles; 
premierement 52 pounds et 4 Shillings plus le Lendemain de votre depart 
£3 0 0 comme Je l'avait promise. Le 11 Mars payée pour une quartier de 
votre maison a Mr Benezst £10 10 0 monsieur Miller £66 0 0 payée le 23 
du méme mois Total £131 14 0 

Le tout ne depent que de vous d’arrangée vos affaires le plus aven- 
tageuse qu’il vous sera possible. Le tems le plus cour sera le millieur pour 
vous et marqués moi comme vous aurez fait et au cas que vous ne pouviez 
pas trouvez personne pour vous avensée et que l’on voudra vous mettre 
dans le cas de travailler pour eux Engagé vous pour venir a Philadelphia 
Je feré honneur a vos engagements ou faite moi le savoire pour vous envoier 
votre imprimerie qu’el ne tiens a rien ainsi que Madame. Je vous envoie 
le reconnaissance des effets que j'ai en main savoir 9 caisse ou ballots 
marqués F. M. Renfermente votre imprimerie et j'ai laissé le No: 13 et 17. 
dans la chambre de Me Retirée de chez M' Miller imprimeur item 2 paniers 
un grand et un petit contenant des caracteres marqués F. M. No: 1. et 17. 
4 caisses a ditto marqués de même No: 3. 4. 6. 8 cela vous sert a recon- 
naissance Je viens de recevoir une lettre de mon correspondant de St. 
Dominque et me marque que des bonnes nouvelles et que toutes mes envoies 
sont Rendu au mole de St. Micholas en tres bons port et il me prie de lui 
faire Savoire la reponse des Messieurs du Canada au Sujet de la lettre du 
Congrés (que vous avez imprimé) touchant les affaires de la Nouvelle 
Angleterre; comme Je Sais que vous etes dans le cas de voir tout ce qui 
est de mieux en Canada et que vous verez ce qu'il vous diront a ce Sujet 
Vous avée l’esprist monsieur assez pénétrant pour conservoir ce qu'ils veulent 


|M‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 285 


dire ou ce qu'il pence Je vous saurée obligée Monsieur de me donnes une 
copy sur une feuille vollante sans signé Seulement que le date et le plutot 
qu'il vous sera possible. Je n’ai aucune bonne nouvelle a vous apprendre 
Sinon que madame votre epouse est en bonne santé ainsi que celui qui a 
le plaisire de vous Soieter toutes bonnes reiisite dans tout ce que vous 
pouvez entreprendre et Soier persuadée que je sauré toujour monsieur Votre 
tres humble et tres obeissant Serviteur 
BERGE 


Mon addresse est chez Peter Parir, Race Street in the corner of second 
St. Philadelphia ~ 


Endorsed, Letter to Mesplet from Philadelphia of 29t* March 1775. which 
clearly Shows his first errand into the province. 


Monsieur 


Monsieur Mesplet imprimeur Present a Quebec En Canada 


No. 2. 
à Montreal, le 24 fevrier 1778. 
Monsieur, 

Comme vous n’ignorée pas les viersitudes de la vie puisque vous les 
avée eprouvées en differents tems par les coups que vos ennemis ont 
voulus vous porter vous vous en etes preservés Jusqu’a ce jour et Je Souhaite 
que vous les pariés de nouveau car les ennimis cherchent tant par eux 
meme que par leur influence auprés des grands de vous faire tout le tort 
possible, ils exercent les faux temoignages l’irrelégion et l’imhumanité. L'on 
vous previent de vous tenir sur des sages gardes dans un tems d'orage ou 
la jalousie et la calomnie de vos adversaires est inexprimable. J’ay été a 
méme d’entendre le fiel et le venin qu'ils ont contre vous ils vous dechirent 
et voudrait vous aneantir s’ils le pourait. Sur les soupcons que l’on dit que 
vous etes de l’opinion de colonies unies; Voila le crime dont vous etes 
accusé; fondes sur la tranquilité que vous avée gardées dans ces tristes 
affaires, L’on a fait tout ce que l’on a pu aupres de General Charlton pour 
vous faire de la peine, mais son esprit tranquile et humain a fait qu'il n’a 
rien fait. Cependant comme le tems n'est point encore calme et que 
l'oragan du Sud peut se faire sentir L’on vous previent afin que le moindre 

qu'il parait que vous soyez pret a recevoir la garde que l’on 
se propose de vous donner non de jour main de nuit pour aller plus de 
Sureté a quebec. Cici pour avis vous n’étes pas le Seul mais il y ena 
bien d’autres des quels on se propose de jouir en tems et sans vous con- 
naitre Ceux qui vous donnent cet avis ainsi que le nom des Commissaires 
Marchands et autres qui sont les plus a charnis contre vous dans ces affaires; 
Je suis bien Sincerement 


Monsieur 
Votre tres humble etc 


pacis Amicus tranquillit—atisque neque vexationis et insectationis. 


236 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
No. 3. 


A Son Excellence, Guy Carleton Chevalier du trés honorable Ordre du Bain 
Capitaine General et Gouverneur en Chef de la Province de Quebec 
etc. etc. etc. 


Monsieur 

Encouragé par la plus saine partie des citoyens de cette ville dans le 
projet d’establissement d’un papier public Je prends la liberté de demander 
a Votre Excellence son approbation persuadé qu'elle voudra bien ne pas 
refuser a ce qui peut etre à l'avantage public et particulier. Restraint aux 
differents avis que les negocians et autres voudront y inserer aux affaires 
du commerce et a la littérature, J’aurai soin d’ecarter tout ce qui pourrait 
porter le moindre ombrage au gouvernement et a la religion. Il n'y sera 
meme fait aucune mention des affaires presente. 

Votre Excellence m’accordant ce Previlige honorera le public dun 
nouveau bienfait et ajoutera s’il est possible a la sincere gratitude et au 
profond respect avec lequel Je suis Monseigneur de Votre Excellence Votre 


Trés humble et obeissant Serviteur 
FLEURY MESPLET 


Imprimeur 


Endorsed From Fleury the imprimeur at Montreal requesting permission 
to publish a paper weekly. 

Memorial of Mesplet the Printer requesting permission to publish a 
news paper 


No. 4. 
AUX CITOYENS DE LA VILLE ET DISTRICT DE MONTREAL pa 


Messieurs, 

L’etablissement d’un papier Périodique m’a paru, ainsi qu’A plusieurs, un 
projet qui, mérite votre attention 4 tous égards. Par ce moyen, on facilitera 
le commerce, on multiplira les correspondances, on excitera ou on entre- 
tiendra une emulation toujours avantageuse. Le Citoyen communiquera 
plus promptement et plus eclairement ses idées; De là le progrés des Arts 
en général et un acheminement à l'union entre les individus. Il résulte 
plusieurs autres avantages pour la société lesquels vous sentez mieux que 
Je ne les pourrais exprimer, et dont l’énumeration seroit hors de place. Les 
avantages ne sont pas moindres eu égard aux intérêts particuliers; La 
facilité d’avertir en tout temps le public des ventes de Marchandises, Meubles 
ou bien-fonds, de retrouver des effets qu'on croit perdus, et ratraper les 
negres fuyards; d'annoncer le besoin qu’on peut avoir d’un commis ou d’un 
domestique et plusieurs autres que la commodité qu'offre ce projet deve- 
loppera. Je me propose de remplir la feuille des avertissements publics 
des affaires qui pourront interesser le commerce a quoi on ajoutera quelques 
morceaux variés de Littérature. J’ose me flatter que, si comme J'espere 
vous encouragerez ce foible commencement Vous Verrez messieurs, avec 
plaisir, et dans peu non seulement une Collection d’Avis et annonces, mais 
encore un recueil amusant et instructif. Je ferai mon possible pour pro- 
curer des pieces nouvelles, et Je ne doute pas que ce ne reveille le génie 


[m‘zacaLan] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 237 


de plusieurs, qui, ou sont restés oisifs ou n’ont pas communiqué leurs pro- 
ductions n’ayant pu le faire sans le secours de la presse 

J’insererai dans le susdit Papier ou Gazette tout ce qu'il plaira à un 
ou plusieurs me communiquer pourvu qu'il ne soit fait mention de la 
Religion du Gouverment ou de nouvelles touchant les affaires presentes; 
à moins que Je ne fus autorisé du Gouvernement mon intention etant de me 
restraindre dans ce qui regarde les Avertissements, affaires de commerce, 
et de Litterature. Supposé que le titre de Bureau d’Avis ou Gazette de 
commerce et litteraire que Je me propose de donner a ce papier Periodique 
soit trouvé par quelqu’un ne pas convenir je recevrai le conseil que l’on 
me donnera a cé sujet. De meme s’il y avait quelque objection a faire sur 
les conditions suivantes on pourra les proposer. 


CONDITIONS. 


La Souscription sera de deux piastres et demie, d’Espagne, par 
L'année. Les souscriptions ne payeront qu'une piastre d'Espagne par 
chaque advertissement pour trois semaines de suites. 

Ceux qui n'auront pas souscrit payeront une demie piastre de plus par 
chaque avertissement. Il sera libre a chaqu’un qui n’aura pas souscrit de 
se procurer ledit papier en payment dix copres au detail Ledit Papier sera 
imprimé sur le format in quarto et paraitra tous les Mercredis a com- 
mencer le : 

Les personnes qui voudront souscrire sont priées d'envoyer leur nom 
et leur addresse; J’ai l'honneur d'etre avec un desir sincere de contribuer 
autant qu'il est en mon pouvoir a l'avantage et a la satisfaction Publique, 
Monsieur, 


Votre tres humble et tres obeissant serviteur 


FLEURY MESPLET 


Imprimeur 


Vol. 80, page 2. 


: Quebec 25th June 1778. 
Sir, 

I herewith enclose the orders of the 24 Inst. His Excellency is 
desirous to know whether the Printer concerning whom. you was wrote to 
some posts ago, has received the order you was directed to communicate to 
him for his quitting for the province His name I did not then mention the 
General not recollecting it. His name is Mesplot. 


General Haldimand was at Bic in the Montreal frigate on Sunday last, 
and is hourly expected. 


I have the honor &ca 


BRIX GENL POWELL 


238 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


No. 6. 
Vol. 80, page 2. 


Quebec, 29% June 1778. 


Sir, 

Your Letter of 252 Instant. addressed to Sir, Guy Carleton, was by his 
directions placed'beforesme: 22 ste, veiw et wie", wince iste: Lays) sich pee) EC IEEE IR 
Say hss, = ee ae thas man 4 eauploved by, Mr Moesplat: is no doubt con- 


cerned or ant with the tenor of his masters conduct, the same order 
is to extend to him, and it is expected they both leave the province on or 
before the fifteenth day of September Text... - <.. 2) sa-- jsceet cess re 


ece., 22 ps vues ‘ee ae) sue sente Jee ex n'eisin ie le ie, ) esse ns Ava ln pet nue 


I am Sir &ca 
S. FRED® HALDIMAND 
B. G. POWELL 


No. 7. 


A Son Excellence Guy Carleton Chevalier de tres honorable ordre du Bain 
Capitaine General et Gouverneur en chef de la Province de Quebec 
General et Commandant en chef des forces de Sa Majesté dans laditte 
Province et Frontieres d’icelle etc. 


Nous Soussignés, Citoyens de Montreal representons humblement a 
Votre Excellence la mortification que nous cause le depart de sieur Fleury 
Mesplet Imprimeur de Cette Ville l’ordre a lui donné verbalement par le 
General P * * * de Vuider la Province Sous trois mois nous a Surpris; la 
conduite qu’il a tenu depuis son arrivé en ce pays la regularité de ses 
mœurs parassait nous assurer de le conserver plus long temps et devoir 
le mettre a l'abri d'une telle disgrace. S'il est des raisons d'Etat qui ne 
soient parvenues a notre connaissance nous ne disons riens; mais il est 
notre Concitoyen, Continuellement sous nos yeux nous sommes temoins de 
toutes ses demarches et nous ne scaurions lui faire aucun reproche son zele 
pour procurer de l'instruction et de l’amusement en donnant un papicr 
periodique nous marque un bon patriote La loi qu’il s’est imposé de ne 
traiter de matieres qui ne regardent ni l'Etat ni la religion nous 
prouve sa delicatesse nous n’y voyons que des Instructions pour le jeunes 
gens et du plaisir pour tous. Nous supplions Votre Excellence d’avoir egard 
a notre tres humble representation et d'etre persuadé que si Fleury Mesplet 
eut a notre connaissance donné lieu a cette traitement nous regretterions à 
la verité un homme aussi utile mais n’envisageant pas l'utilité et agrement 
que peut nous procurer la presse nous nous trairions. Que n’aurions-nous 
pas a reprocher, Si un de nos Citoyens souffrait une exportation onérouse 
faute par nous de ne par rendre hommage a la Verité—Longueuil, P. Vallé, 
Dumaz, Lacroix Neveu Sevestre, St. Ours, D. Carignan, Meziere, St George 


Dupré, I. G. Pillet, foucher, Perinault, Jn. Delisle, Lambert St Omer 
Lemoine, Jn. Berret, Londireaux, Jn. Vienne Fs. Le Guay Bomer Lafon- 


taine C. Latour Bonnefois, Larthigue. 


Endorsed The memorial of Sundry French gentlemen of Montreal in 
favour of F. Mesplet the printer. 
Aug* 177 


bai": 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 289 


No. 8. 
Montreal the 24*» August 1778. 


WHEREAS an order has been given to F Mesplet Printer, lately settled 
in Montreal, and all such persons as were with him concerned forbidding 
him and them to Exercise the trade of Printing, and directing that he and 


they should, before the 15% day of September next Ensuing Quit the 
Province, But several respectable persons of the said place having since 


appeared to the character of the said F. Mesplet and he become responsible 
for his good conduct in future, His Excellency the Commander in Chief is 
therefore induced to suspend for the present, the above said order, and 
hereby permits the said F. Mesplet to carry on his business of Printing, 
or any other lawfull occupation, on condition that he & his associates take 
the oaths of Allegiance before His Majesty’s Honorable Judge of the Court 
of Common Pleas of this place within two days from the date hereof, a 
Certificate whereof He must produce to the Commanding Officer of the 
Troops in the District. And that he submit without fail or reserve whatever 
he shall print or cause to be printed during the present Rebellion of the 
Neighbouring Colonies, to the inspection of such person as by His Excellency 
shall be appointed for that purpose, and that he on no account pretend to 
print any thing which shall not first be so inspected, nor anything which 
such inspection shall signify his disapprobation of upon pain of having the 
aforesaid order for him the said F. Musplet Printer, to quit the Province 
put immediately in force, which order is to be by him considered as not 
revoked, only suspended, but nevertheless as long as he shall demean him- 
self Soberly and as a good Subject of His Majesty to be of no effect what- 
soever, This order to remain in the hands of Brigr Powell, or officer Com- 
manding for the time being in Montreal. 
By His Excellency’s Command 
(Signed) E. F. 


No. 9. 


Sorei the 282 September 1778. 
Mr. Cramahé 


Sir, 
Your letters of-the 215* and 24% are received .... .... .... cece cece 


I have observed several improper things published in our Gazette, 
particularly in the last, an account of Associations in Ireland, which I think 
at these times ought not to be published. I must beg therefore that some 
step be taken to prevent it in future, as Mr Gordon is gone to England 
somebody should be appointed in his room to inspect the Pance..-. 


eee "eee eee eee "eee eee “eee "ee. “s*e eee “see eee “eee. “eee 


I am Sir, &c., &c. 


(Signed) Le: i 


240 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
No. 10. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 95, p. 53. 


CRAMAHE TO HALDIMAND. 


1st Octr 1778. 
I received your Letter 28th Septr 


Our Printer has some Penchant to the popular cause, and when he gets 
a cup too much, which is not seldom, his zeal increases. I have cautioned 
him two or three times since your Departure, and shall, until you can find 
a proper Person to inspect his Press, desire him to lay before me whatever 
he intends to publish. 

It was too late to insert any extracts of the Rebel newspaper & written 
accounts lately transmitted, in this Day’s Gazette, they will do for next week, 
besides the contents of the paper, there are strong Reports of the Disagree- 
ment between the new Allies about this Town & particulars related, tho’ 
there is no tracing whence they originate. 


No. 11. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. I, p. 79. 


Montreal, 4 Jan’ 1779. 

Monsieur, 

Je me vois obligé de vous importuner des persecutions que j’essuie de 
differentes personnes au sujet de mon papiers periodique, telles persecutions 
que jai pris pour me mettre a l’abri je n’ai pas réussi. 

Le pere Well, Jesuite, sous le nom de l’anonyme, a donné pleusieurs 
productions que j'ai mis par complaissance dans la feuille, j'ai recu tant de 
reproche que j'ai été obligé de refuser de nouvelles je vous envoie copie 
d'une, dont j'ai crû à propos de ne pas exposer au public «a tous égards. 
M" Montgotfier parait prendre partie pour le pére Well et en conséquence 
m'a fait des reproches tres vifs et m'a menacé d’ecrire a son excellence pour 
m'en défendre la continuation; qu'il est disgracieux pour moi d’avoir tant 
dennemis sans sujet. Mon papier est Sous vos yeux je n'ai rien touche 
qui regarde le gouvernement et je peux dire avec verité que ces messieurs 
seuls cherchent a me nuire; J’espere monsieur qu'il vous plaira prevenir 
son excellence et que vous voudrez bien opposer à leur petit tyrannie les 
sentiments nobles et equitables qu’il vous a plu me temoigner. j'ai l'honneur 
d'etre avec respect Monsieur, Votre tres humble et tres obeissant Serviteur 


FLEURY MESPLET 


No. 12. 


Copie d’une production du Pere Well, Jésuite, signée l’anonyme qui m’a 
été presentée pour la premiere fois en presence de Mt de St. Luc La Corne. 


[m‘Lacazan] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 241 


En parlant du jeu des echecs 
CHANSON. 


al 
Sur le jeu que j'ai dans les mains, 
Le sort n’étend pas ses caprices; 
Ce sort qui, parmi, les humains, 
Couronne si souvent les vices. 
Combien d'hommes aux premiers rangs 
Que le seul hasard a fait grands. 


2 
Les Rois ont des fous pour Soldats, 
qui les servent dans chaque armée; 
Messieurs ne vous en plaignez pas, 
Puisque dans plus d’une assemblée, 
Les hommes seraient bien heureux. 
de n'en pouvoir compter que deux. 


3 
Les fous sont placés prés du Roi, 
un tel roi peut-il étre Sage? 
Des courtisants quand je les voi, 
je reconnais ici l’image. 
jamais s’il s’agit d’un bon choix, 
De deux Sots n’ecoutez pas la voix. 


4 
Le chevalier change Souvent 
De couleur et de contenence: 
Dans son bizarre changement, 
reconnaissons notre inconstance: 
A tous moments, sans le scavoir, 
Nous passons tous du blane au noir. 


5 
Le Roi fait un pas chaque fois, 
jamais il n’en fait d'avantage. 
pour notre bonheure tous les Rois 
devraient suivre un pareil usage. 
quand on gouverne les Etats, 


= 


on doit s’avancer pas à pas. 


6 
Vous avez pris un de mes pions, 
Et moi je vais prendre un des vôtres. 
Tous ce qu'aux autres nous faisons, 

a Nous devons l’attendre des autres: 

Quand piece à quelqu'un l’on fera, 
Piéce pour piéce il nous jouera. 

7 
Je ne scais pour quelle raison 
Le Roi n’est pas avec la Reine, 
Tandis qu'il garde ia maison 
Madame court la pretentaine.... 
Echec et mat!2.... il doit souffrir: 
Pourquoi laisser Sexe courrir? 


242 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Endorsed M* Mesplet the Printer Jan 4 1779. 
No. 13. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 66, Pt. 1, p. 102. 


Copie 


Monsieur, Quebec 15e fevrier 1779. 

J'ai recu dans son temps l'honneur de vôtre Lettre du 2e Janvier, & 
je vous dois Monsieur bien des excuses pour avoir tardé aussi longtemps 
a y Repondre, mais outre des occupations pressentes, l’affaire en question 
méritoit d’etre bien réflechis. 

Dans le principe je m’etois proposer d’arreter tout à fait immédiatement 
la Prise du Sieur Miplet dont l’abord dans cette Province, méritoit plutôt 
chatiment qu’un accueil favorable, mais vous savez Monsr les sollicitations 
qu’on me fit à Montreal pour m’engager à lui permettre d’y rester. 

Pour l’empecher de tomber davantage dans un travers ou il paroit fort 
incliner, & jusques à ce que je puisse prendre d’autre Mesures; je lui ay 
fait défendre trés expressément d’attaquer la Religion ou le Clergé; de ne 
rien inserer dans sa feuille qui put choquer les bonnes moeurs, ou fomenter 
la discorde parmis les Peuples qui par toutes sortes de raisons devroient 
soutenir les Interets d’un Gouvernement qui les a Protegé & sous les 
auspices duquel la Province s’est ameliorée beaucoup audela de ce quelle 
avoit jamais fait auparavant. 

Comme je connois votre Zéle & l'attachement que vous avez pour ce 
méme Gouvernement; & que j’ai une parfaite confience en votre Prudence 
& Discretion. Je vous prie Monsr de veiller de prés aux publications de cet 
Imprimeur et de mavertir au plutot s’il lui arrive encore de s’ecarter de la 
Conduitte qui lui a été prescritte de ma part. 

Monseigneur l'Evêque je suis persuadé vous aura fait part des demarches 
que: j'ai faittes à l'Egard du Père Wells, & les avis que j'ai donné aux 
Révérends Peres Jesuittes. J'espere que ces Messieurs ne donneront plus 
prise sur Eux & que j'aurai à L'avenir tout lieu d’etre content de Leur 
Conduitte. 


J'ai l'honneur d’etre avec la plus parfaite Hstime 


Monsieur, Votre &c. 
(Signé) 1s NS 
A Mons: de Mont Golfier 


Endorsed Copy Letter from His Excellency Genl Haldimand ‘to M. de 
Mont Golfier Superior of the Seminary of St. Sulpice at Montreal dated 
Quebec the 152 February 1779. 


No. 14. 
Monsieur : — 

Par la lettre que j'ai recue de M. Cramahé de la part de Ve Excellence 
et que dans son temps j'ai communiqué à M. Southouse, mon Collègue, 
nous avons non seulement été patient comme nous en estions requis de 
la part de Ve Excellence, mais nous avons été sourds à bien des dits cours 
de la part de L’imprimeur de Jottard qui tendoient à nous insulter. 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 243 


Nous croyons Monsieur que cet Imprimeur et Jottard et le Sieur du 
Calvet mettent le comble à la mesure et se croient en droit de nous insulter 
et de braver le Gouvernement, sous la Protection duquel nous avons l’honeur 
d’exerter, et d’exerter de notre mieux. 

Comme officiers de ce Gouvernement nous croions faire ce qui est en 
notre pouvoir pour rendre la justice au sujets du Roy, et qu'il appartient 
au Gouvernement seul de s’enquerir de notre Conduite et juge si les reproches 
et réflexions proposés contre nous sont justes ou calomnieuses. Votre Excel- 
lence jugera par la Gatte ci-incluse la conduite des autheurs qui y sont 
souscrits est tollerable ou si elle merite d'etre reprimée. 

Ve Excellence le croiroit à peine que Jottard et Mesplet ont eu l'audace 
de se presenter aujourd'hui à la chambre d'audience dans la vüe sans doute 
de prouver à la populace qu'ils n’avoient rien à craindre, et que l’on pouvoit 
sans danger insulter les magistrats; ou à dessein de nous provoquer à leur 
dire quelque chose qui peut marquer de la passion afin de s’en prevaloir. 

Notre facon de penser tout à fait opposer à aucune mesure violente 
nous a fait ne prendre aucune attention à leur presence, nous esperons que 
Ve Excellence se determinera à prendre un parti à l’Egard des desportements 
de ces homes insolents. 


Je signe cette lettre pour M. Southouse et moy, &c &c 
H. ROUVILLE 


Endorsed From Judge Rouville, of 27th May 1779. 


No. 15. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185-1, p. 90. 


Quebec 1st June 1779. 
Monsieur 


J'ai recu votre lettre du 27 mai avec la Gazette dont vous faites men- 
tion J'avais eu des Raisons pour temporiser et ne pas aller trop vite avec 
Besogne avec des Gens dont les dispositions sont trop long tems connues 
pour douter un seul moment qu'ils n’ayent le dessein ferme de diffamer 
tous le officiers du Roi et de jetter toute la colonie dans une confusion 
toujours a souhaiter pour des gens qui ne scavent ou donner la tête. 

Je vous prie d’étre assuré vous méme et d’assurer Monsieur Southouse 
qu’en toutes les occasions je me ferai un veritable devoir et plaisir de soutenir 
les officiers du Roi surtout quand ils agissent avec la moderation que vous 
avez montrée en cette occasion et qui est de toutes maniéres louable En 
recevant ma lettre vous apprendré la maniere dont je m’y suis pris pour 
arretter le cours des insolences des sieurs Jautard et Mesplet Je souhaite de 
tout mon coeur que cet example ait l'effet sur les esprits qui, on en doit 
desirer qu'il confirme aux ceux qui sont bien disposés, ramene les chancelans 
et donne une juste terreur aux Mal Intentionés, Envers un gouvernement 
dont le plus grand defaut a peut etre été d’avoir trop de douceur. 


244 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Quoique que cette lettre vous soit addressée en particulier mon inten- 


tion est qu'elle sert aussi à votre collegue M* Sanhouse a qui vous aurés 
la bonté de la communiquer 


J’ai l'honneur. 


Endorsed To Mr Rouville 1st June 1779. 


No. 16. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. 1, p. 87. 


By His Excellency Frederick 


Whereas I have received sundry information of the traiterous practices 
of Valentine Jautard formerly attorney and of Francis Mesplet, Printer 
at Montreal, This is to authorize and impower you to seize and secure the 
said Jautard and Mesplet for the said traiterous practices to confine them 
seperately, you are not to suffer them during their confinement on shore or 
on board to converse together or with any other Persons and will send 
them down here by first favorable opportunity to the custody of the 
Military provost at this place. You are likewise directed to seize and secure 
at the same time all papers in the possession of the said Jautard and 
Mesplet, and in the presence of any two commissioners of Peace not being 
any of those they are at variance with, or any two honest Members of 
Society you can conveniently assemble for that purpose, you are to seal 
up their papers seperately, commit them to the care of some trusty person, 
and cause them to be conveyed down here by the first favorable opportunity 
under the custody likewise of some one you can trust. You will cause 
the printing Presse, Types, and every article thereunto belonging to be 
valued by honest and impartial people an inventory to be made thereon, and 
deposited in a safe place until disposed of as may hereafter be directed 
You will let Jautard and Mesplet have their Clothes, apparel and money 
and commit the care of their furniture to such Persons as they may chose 
to Appoint. 

And for the execution of all that is herein directed this will be to you 
and all concerned a sufficient warrant and authority 

Given under my hand and seal at Quebec, this 1st June 1779. 


To Major John Nairn Commanding at Montreal 
Endorsed Warrant for arresting Valentine Jautard and Fleury Mesplet 
1st June 1779. 


No. 17. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. 1, p. 92. 
Quebec, June 15t 1779. 
Sir 
You will herewith receive a warrrant under my hand and seal for 
apprehending and securing Jautard and Mesplet whose behaviour has long 


been obnoxious to Gouvernement and who of late seem to bid defiance 


to all law and Justice, it is a disagreable piece of business but at this time 
indispensably necessary. 


—_—_ = 


[M‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 245 


After the receipt of my letter and warrant You will keep the matter 
secret till you have taken the proper measures for executing the same 
with precision; you are to take care they do not escape you, and endeavour 
to make sure of all their papers, at the same time you will see, that they 
are treated with humanity be furnished with good provisions and have 
such conyeniences as can be procured them. While in confinement on shore, 
or on board you will direct that the prisoners are not permitted to com- 
municate together or with persons from without and that they be not 
allowed the use of pen Ink or paper. If any of the Treasury Brigs are 
still at Montreal you will order one of them to carry down the prisoners 
or send them by the first vessels that sail from there taking care they are 
kept seperately and to be guarded by such as you can entirely confide in. 

When the Prisoners have been secured you will deliver the enclosed to 
Mr Rouville; I need not recommend to you, whose good sense and atten- 
tion to the King’s service I have the most perfect confidence in, to observe 
the effects this measure has upon the King’s subjects of every denomination 
and their movements in general in times so critical and dangerous as the 
present are 

I am &c. 


Endorsed To Major Nairn ist June 1779. 


No. 18. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. 1, p. 89. 


Quebec, ist June 1779. 
To Major Nairn; 
Sir, 

In case you not yet sent away the two Dilinquents you will receive 
orders by an express dispatched this day to arrest them; you are to put 
them on board the Provincial armed schooner Mercury that sails this day 
for the purpose the commanding officer thereof has Directions to obey you 
should they come away before she reaches Montreal you will detain her 
as short a time as possible and order the officer to return to this port. 
Endorsed To Major Nairn ist June 1779. 


No. 19. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. 1, p. 94. 


You are hereby ordered and directed to proceed without loss of time 
with the Provincial schooner Mercury under your command, to Montreal; 
should you find when you arrive at the Foot of the Rapids of St Mary’s near 
Montreal that the Wind is contrary you are to cast Anchor there and proceed 
by land to Montreal to deliver my despatches to the officer commanding 
there, whose orders you are to obey without delay; you will keep an 
exact journal of all occurrences in your passage up as well as down. 

Given under my hand at Quebec ist June 1779. 


Endorsed To Wm Halcro Esqre Commd His Majesty’s Prov! Armed Schooner 
Mercury 1779. 


To the Master of the provincial Armed schooner Mercury June 1st 1779. 


246 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


No. 20. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 161, p. 18. 
NAIRNE TO HALDIMAND. 


Sir:— Montreal, 6th June, 1779. 


I had the honour of receiving Your Excellency’s letter and orders in 
regard to Jautard and Mesplet, which I put in execution on friday morning. 
They made no resistance but submitted quietly and this morning I sent them 
on board a Vessel for Sorrell, in charge of Lieut Mackinnon and a Guard of 
a Corporal and four men. There is no Vessel here that goes directly to 
Quebec, but I hope there may be one at Sorell, and have given Mr Mackenzie 
instructions conform to those I had from Your Excellency. 

I have ordered the printing Types to be put up and so soon as that 
can be done properly shall make an Inventory and deposit them in a safe 
place till Your Excellency’s further pleasure is known, for I have not yet 
been able to find any person who can value them except Mesplet himself, 
and it is very difficult to assort them properly. 

I don’t find that the Prisoners have many Friends here, nor that the 
steps taken in regard to them have given any great Alarm. I shall however 
be attentive to what passes and will not fail to report to Your Excellency 
everything I think worthy of your notice. 

All the papers belonging to the prisoners are put up in two separate 
bundles and sent in charge of Lieut. Mackinnon. 

I have the honour to .be Your Excellency’s most obedient and most 
humble servant. 


(is Excellency General Haldimand. 
JOHN NAIRNE 


Major 


Endorsed—A. 1779 From Major Nairn at Montreal of 6th June Recd 9th. 


No. 21. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, No. 54, p. 85. 


Extract letter of Haldimand to Germain, 
. Quebec, 7th June 1779. 

The Turbulent & seditious Behaviour of a Cabal at Montreal, has also 
laid me under the necessity of confining Two Frenchmen there, who names 
Mesplet & Jaubard, the former a Printer sent here by Congress in 1774, to 
Publish and Disperse their letters, the latter has been an attorney & is 
an unprincipled Adventurer. So soon as their Papers have been examined 
Your Lordship shall have a circumstantial Account of their affairs, & if 
this does not in some measure check the Licentious Spirit that was begin- 
ning to rise, I shall not hesitate to make more examples, I heartily lament 
that those who misbehaved in 1775 and 1776 were not. severely punished, it 
was easy then, but now difficult, nevertheless my Endeavours shall not be 
wanting to promote the King’s interests, serve the Public and secure the 
Province. Objects which engross all my attention and which always have 
been and ever shall be the sole aim of all my actions. 


[M‘LAGHLAN ] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 247 
No. 22. 


Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. 1, p. 95. 


A Son Excellence, le tres honnorable Gouvr Général de Quebec et Depen- 
dances etc etc etc. 


Monsieur, 


Supplie, tres humblement, Marie Mirabeau epouse de Fleury Mesplet, 
Imprimeur de Montreal, Detenu en Prisons de cette ville. S'il est disgra- 
tieux pour moy d’étré obligée d’importuner Son Excellence Il est encore 
bien plus douloureux d’avoir un juste motif de le faire Le triste état ou 
me reduit la detention de mon mari ne me permet de me taire plus long 
tems, la perspective est trop effrayante pour ne pas m'epouvanter sans 
secours ni fortune pour ainsi dire étrangére dans ce pays je n’avais de res- 
source que dans son Industrie Devient inutile par sa detention. Je connois 
la quantité et la qualité de ses ennimis mais Je serai assez discrette pour 
les taire; leur efforts reitérés ont produit le funeste effet qu'ils en atten- 
daient Il a succombé sous le poids de l’envie et de la jalousie 

S'il etoit coupable j'irais aux pieds de Votre Excellence implorer sa 
bonté et demander des graces, mais certaine de son Innocence Je demande 
un act de justice; que ces papiers soient inspectés, qu'il soit même fait 
une regulière de sa conduitte et de ses moeurs. Je ne doute pas que sous 
peu de jours le jugement qui inteviendra luy sera favorable et que je 
possederay un segond moy même qui m'est encore plus char parce qu’il 
est mon epoux et que mon bien etre depend de lui. Je me flatte que Son 
Excellence fera droit a ma humble Representation et que son equité s’op- 
posera a ce que sous ses yeux on immole (pour ainsi dire) la fortune de 
quelques particuliers a la jalousie et l’ambition de quelqu’autres: Je con- 
tinueray (car je ne peux rien ajouter) aux voux sinceres que je fais pour la 
prosperité de Son Excellence, 

Petition of Madame Mesplet, 15th July 1779. Her Husband being a State 
prisoner, praying for examination 


No. 23. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. 1, p. 97. 


A Son Excellence, Frederick Haldimand, Gouverneur en chef de la Pro- 
vince de Quebec etc. ete. etc. 

Fleury Mesplet, prisonnier a l'honneur de representer a Votre Excellence, 
qu'il a été arrété par ses ordres le 4 juin 1779, et que depuis ce tems il a 
été reservé si strictement pendant les premiers mois de sa detention qu’il 
ne luy fut pas possible de faire parvenir ses plaintes a Votre Excellence; 
L'hiver s’ecoula dans une triste position mais il luy restait encore la con- 
solation de croire que l’arrivée des batiments mettrait fin a sa peine. On 
lui repaissait l'imagination de cet espoir qui calmait un peu son chagrin 
encore lui restait-il alors quelque petit moyen de subsister. 

Toutes ses esperances sont évanouiés, les batiments sont arrivés, ses 
Moyens épuisés, sa santé alterée son epouse seule dans un pays qui lui 
est inconnu sans parens sans amis sans bien et sur le point d’etre reduite 
dans l’etat le plus critique; ces tristes considerations on affaiblé la resolu- 
tion que son innocence lui inspirait il a recours a l’autorité et a lequité 


248 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


de Votre Excellence Quoi! se refusait-elle a rendre a un innocent per- 
secuté la liberté qui lui a ete ravie par la malice de ses ennemis, 4 un 
citoyen la faculté de subsister par son travail et de preserver une epouse 
cherie tant par devoir que par inclination de la misere a laquelle elle est 
exposée? Non! je ne l’ai jamais cru; je supplie Votre Excellence avec 
toute la confiance possible de lui accorder sa liberté sous telles conditions 
qu’il lui plaira il l’espere de votre autorité et de votre equitable il ne cessera 
de faire ses voeux pour la prosperité de Votre Excellence 


FLEURY MESPLET 
Des prison de la prevôté 26 Septembre 1780. 


Requette de Mesplet l’imprimeur pour les rebelles, 26 Tbre 1780. 


No. 24. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. 1, p. 105. 


A Son Excellence frederic haldimand Capt General des Armées de Sa 
Majesté en Amérique Vice Admiral dicelle & Gouverneur en Chef de la 
Province de Quebec et des Territoires en dépendans ete. ete. 

Monsieur, 

Nous soussignés detenus dans les Prisons militaires de cette Ville par 
l’ordre de Votre Excellence avons l'honneur de représenter que notre confine- 
ment a été strictement clos depuis deux ans & plus à la reserve de trois 
mois environ pendant lequel tems la liberté de la cour nous fut accordée 
Yeté dernier. 

Qu’une aussi dure detention contribue beaucoup à l’alteration de notre 
santé, que la liberté de la cour pourroit reparer en partie. Pourquoi nous 
esperons de l’humanité de Votre Excellence qu'il lui plaira nous accorder 
cette Liberté dans une saison aussi favorable. 

Nous avons l'honneur d’etre avec un tres profond respect De Votre 
Excellence Les tres humbles & tres obeissans Serviteurs 


LA TERRIERE 


FLEURY MESPLET 
Prevost de Quebec le 30 Avril 1781. 


Endorsed—Requete du Sieur fleury Mesplet, Imprimeur, Prisonnier d’Etat 
du 30 Avril 1781. : 
No. 25. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 114, Pt. p. 200. 


Sir, Montreal, 27th September 1781. 


eevee eeee 


[m‘zacHLAn] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 249 


Since the Delivery of the new Mohawk prayer Book the Indians in 
general have, on Acct of its being corrected given themselves much pain to 
study it and I in order to encourage their zeal have nominated a Clerk to 
read prayers on Sundays and a Schoolmaster to teach the children to read 
and write, and to facilitate the latters Teaching have composed in my 
Leisure hours a primer in Mohawk & English (the first they ever had) 
which may make those of some genius acquainted with the reading of 
English & be a help to become good Interpreters, They are very fond 
of the little Book both old & young & I have already from the Mohawks 
at Niagara recd Messages to send some there; I shall send Your Excellency 
a Specimen of it by the first opportunity; I had not long ago a Letter from 
Calvé the Interpreter to the Renards from Michillimakina, he has no 
Intelligence to give, but requests me to remind Your Excellency of what 
I heard Your Excellency tell him when last at Quebec, of recommending his 
son to the Professor of the French Accademy of this place and pay for his 
Schooling as he intended him to serve as an Interpreter. 


eee 


eee 


I have the honor to be with the greatest Respect Sir Your Excellency’s 


Most obedient & most oblidged humble servant 
DAN CLAUS 


No. 26. 


Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. 1, p. 106. 


‘A Son Excellence frederic haldimand, Ecuyer Gouverneur, Capitaine 
General & Commandant en chef en cette province, etc. etc. etc. 

Suplient humblement 

Valentin Jautard et fleuri Mesplet & ont Vhonneur de representer à 
Votre Excellence qu'ils auraient été arretés par ses ordres Le 4 Juin 1779. 

Que depuis un si long intervalle ils auraient seulement presenté à Votre 
Excellence Leur très humble petition en datte du 26 7bre 1780 dans laquelle 
apres avoir détaillé le triste etat ou leur fortune et leur santé etait reduite 
par une si longue detention Les supliants concluaient à ce qu’il plut à Votre 
Excellence accorder leur Elargissement (cette petition fut sans succès). 

Qu'il s’est ecoulé près de deux ans sans que les supliants aient fait 
aucune démarche certaine de leur innocence, ils ont attendu patiemment 
un temps où ils pourraient se justiffier. 

Que si leur situation etait triste en 7bre 1780 combien deplorable ne doit 
elle pas etre aujourd’huy. Leur fortune, pour ainsi dire, anéantie, leur 
temperament ruiné. au point de perdre tout espoir de le rétablir ne leur 


Sec. I1., 1906. 17 


250 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


restant de consolation que la certitude de leur innocence, par consequent 
d’etre sans remords. 

Les supliants esperent qu'il plaira à Votre Excellence prendre ce que 
dessus en sa consideration et en consequence ordonner que leur procés soit 
instruit. Et dans le cas ou Votre Excellence ne jugerait pas apropos d’or- 
donner l’instruction de Leur procès qu'il luy plaise accorder aux dts suplians 
soussignés Leur elargissement. 

Les suplians ne cesseront de faire des Voeux pour la prospérité de 


Votre Excellence. 
V. JAUTARD 


F. L. MESPLET 
Prison du prevost Le 7 aout 1782 


Endorsed—Memorial 1782 Mess. Jautard & Mesplette, Recd 7th Augt. 


No. 27. 
Canadian Archives, Series B, Vol. 185, Pt. 1, p. 119. 


A Son Excellence Le Trés Honorable Gouverneur Général De Quebec & 
Depandances, etc. etc. 


Monseigneur. 

Marie Mirabeau, épouse de Fleury Mesplet, se confiant en votre bonté & 
humanité envers les affligés prend la liberté d'importuner Votre Excellence 
pour lui représenter sa triste situation. Etrangere dans ce pays & après 
avoir consommé tout son peu de bien pour son propre besoin & celui de Son 
Marit, se trouve maintenant, sans ressource, & hors d'état de satisfaire aux 
emprunts qu’elle a été obligé de faire Pour se soutenir. C’est pourquoi mon 
General, elle se flatte que Son Excellence voudra bien donner l’elargissement 
à son marit qui vous en aura Monseigneur une eternelle obligation, & pour 
seureté de sa Conduite avenir elle se flatte de trouver & fournir deux cau- 
tions agreables au gouvernement, qui répondront de sa Conduite. 

J'ai l'honneur d'etre très Respectueusement, Monseigneur, Votre très 


humble obeissante Servante. 5 
MIRABEAU MESPLET, femme Mesplet. 


Endorsed—Memorial of the Wife of Mesplet, the Printer. 
D. 28. 


From the manuscript division of the Library of Congress. Extracts from 
Journals of Continental Congress, 23 Feb., 1776. 


To Monsieur Mesplet, for printing the military rules, and French 
letters to Quebec | the inhabitants of Canada | the sum of £16 10— 44 


dollars. 
No. 29. 


26th February, 1776. 


Resolved, 

Monsieur Mesplet, printer, be engaged to go to Canada, and there set 
up his press and carry on the printing business, and the Congress engage 
to defray the expense of transporting him, his family and printing utensils 
to Canada, and will moreover pay him the sum of 200 dollars. 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 251 
No. 30. 


Note—“In the Warrant book is a record of a payment of 200 dollars 
to the printer Mesplet for removing to Canada.” 

[The phrase between parallels does not occur in the original manuscript 
journal.] 

27 May, 1785. 

On a report from the board of treasury to whom was referred a 
memorial of Fleury Mesplet, printer. 

Resolved that the sum of four hundred and twenty-six dollars and 
forty-five ninetieths of a dollar be paid to Mr. Fleury de Mesplet on 
account of expenses attending the transporting himself, family and printing 
utensils from Philadelphia to Montreal. 


No. 32. 


Papers of Continental Congress No. 41, Vol. 6, p. 305. 
To the Honorable the President and Members of the Congress of the 
United States. / 

The Memorial of Fleury Mesplet of Montreal, in the Province of Quebec. 
Sheweta, 

That your Memorialist was a citizen of Philadelphia; and in the year 
1776, was happily established in his business of a printer in that city: That 
upon the conquest of a part of the Province of Quebec by the Arms of the 
United States, it was thought expedient to establish a Press in the town 
of Montreal; that your Memorialist on account of ‘ais language and known 
attachment to the interests of the United States, was selected by Congress 
to direct such a Press, and did at the request of Congress, and in hopes 
of the support and recompense of that body relinquish a comfortable situa- 
tion and remove his Press at a very great expense, from Philadelphia to 
Montreal, where he unceasingly laboured to promote the interest of the 
States; until the evacuation of the province by taeir army, when on 
account of the impossibility of conveying his Press, he was constrained to 
remain in the exercise of his business, until he was apprehended and con- 
fined in the Military Prisons of Quebec as a State Prisoner, during the 
space of three years and six months, in which time he constantly wanted 
the conveniences frequently the necessaries of life: T’aat the cessation of 
arms has restored him to personal liberty, but deprived of the means of 
enjoyment, which can only be restored to him by the Justice and Bounty 
of Congress, in taking into consideration the circumstances of his case, 
and ordering such relief as it may seem to merit." 

Montreal, 1st Août 1783. FLEURY MESPLET. 
Endorsed—Read 30 September, 1783. 

Referred to Mr. Holton, Mr. Lee, Mr. Clarke. Discharged Nov. 1783. 


No. 31. 


No. 33. 
Papers of Continental Congress, No. 41, Vol. 6, p. 303. 
Evénements pendant le voyage du Sieur Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur, 
parti de Philadelphie, sous les ordres exprés du respectable congrés pour 
aller, en qualité d’imprimeur, en Canada. 
J’ai parti de Philadelphia, le 16 Mars 1776. mon épouse, Mr. Pochard, 
homme de lettre, deux ouvriers et un domestique. 


* This is a printed document signed. 


252 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Le 8 davril j'ai arrivé au fort George, où j'ai attendu plusieurs jours, 
l'imprimerie qui était partie (par les ordres du Congrès) dans les voitures 
de Philadelphia; pour transporter la dite imprimerie du fort George à 
Montréal, j'ai été obligé de prendre cinq bateaux, qui ont été conduits à 
mes frais jusqu'à Montréal; il faut observer les grandes difficultés qu'il 
y a à faire le chemin, à cause des portages, changements de voiture avec 
un si grand train; mais c’était aux ordres du respectable Congrés. 

Le 22 d’avril jarrivai à Chambly, où il y a un Sault à passer: soit par 
la grande difficulté, ou la faute du pilote, les cinq bateaux remplirent si 
grande quantité d’eau qu’ils manquérent périr, et en arrivant à Montréal, 
je trouvai une quantité de marchandise gatées, comme de Vor en feuille, 
du papier doré, du papier indienné, papier blanc, et une quantité de livres, 
toutes les 'aardes de mon épouse, et une partie des miennes. 

Une fois à Montréal il fallut former mon établissement, je louai une 
maison que j’occupe encore aujourd'hui, et je me flattais par les apparences 
à y faire mes affaires; mais malheureusement les troupes du Continent furent 
obligées de replier; aussitôt qu’elles furent hors de la province, je devins 
criminel aux yeux de tous ces animaux que l’on nomme royalistes, et ne 
tardérent pas à je faire connaître, car huit jours après leur invasion, je fus 
conduit avec mes ouvriers et Mr. Pochard, en prison, où nous avons resté 
un mois, et Mrs. les Royalistes venaient de temps en temps nous présenter 
des cordes, en nous traitant comme si nous eussions été des sujets les plus 
nécessaires au Congrès, et par conséquent les plus à craindre à leurs yeux; 
cela nous a fait honneur. 

Sorti de prison, Mr. Pochard prit le parti de s’embarquer pour l’'Eu- 
rope, Mr. Gray et Mr. Herse, mes deux ouvriers restèrent avec moi, mais 
je ne pouvais les occuper faute de papier; néanmoins je me flattais encore, 
qu’une fois que j'aurais reçu le papier de Londres, que j'avais demandé, je 
réparevois cette perte. n 

L'année ensuite je recu mon papier, et avec l’aide de mes ouvriers et 
de mon intrigue, je me fis un fond honnête. 

1778—Le 4 de juin j’établis un papier public, qui paraissait aux yeux des 
honnêtes gens, très-utile à la ville de Montréal, mais la canaille qui s'y 
trouvait trop souvent d’épeinte dans chaque état, tramérent une ligue contre 
moi, et firent agir toute la puissance du Clergé auprés de Mr. Carleton, 
pour me faire chasser de la province; ils l’obtinrent et je recus les ordres 
de Mr. Carleton, le 5 de juillet de la même année, qui m’ordonnait de 
quitter la province de ce jour au 25 septembre suivant, comme étant 
soupconné dangereux au Gouvernement. 

Mr. Haldimand, sur la fin de juillet, vint relever Mr. Carleton, et en 
conséquence d’une requête que je lui présenta il me laissa tranquillement 
jouir de mon état. 

Cette même canaille! et même protecteurs’ continuérent de me per- 
sécuter, et sollicitérent si fort auprès de Mr. Haldimand qu'ils parvinrent 
à me faire arrêter, le 4 de juin 1779, et je fus conduit dans les prisons 
militaires de Québec, où j'ai resté jusqu’au ler septembre 1782, encore suis- 
je sorti fugitivement, sans quoi j’y serais peut-étre encore. 


FLEURY MESPLET. 
Montréal, le ler d'août 1783. 


1 “Royaliste” 
2 “Le Clergé” 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 25 


É No. 34. 
Papers of the Continental Congress, p. 336-337. 


A l’Honorable Président, et respectables membres du Congrès des Etats- 
Unis de l’Amérique.! 

Représentation du Sr. Fleury Mesplet, actuellement à Montréal, dans la 
province de Québec, en Canada. 

Le représentant prend la liberté de rappeler dans la mémoire de vos 
Seigneuries, qu'ayant été établi à Philadelphie en l’année 1776, lors de la 
conquête d’une partie de la province de Québec, par les armes des Etats- 
Unis, on jugea convenable d'établir un imprimeur dans la ville de Montréal, 
et qu’en faveur de sa langue et de son attachement reconnu aux intérêts 
des Etats-Unis, il fut choisi par le respectable Congrès pour s’y transporter 
avec son imprimerie; et que l’ayant conduite à la réquisition du Congrès, 
tant dans l'espérance d’un encouragement que d’une récompense de la part 
de ce respectable corps; en considération de ces espérances, il a laissé un 
établissement assez favorable, et s’est transporté avec toute son imprimerie, 
à grans frais, de Philadelphie à Montréal, où il s’occupa uniquement à 
favoriser la cause des Etats-Unis, jusqu'à l'évacuation de la province par 
leur armée, auquel temps, vu l'impossibilité de transporter son imprimerie, 


il s’est trouvé obligé de rester dans la continuation de sa profession, jusqu’à 
ce qu’il fut arrêté et renfermé dans la prison militaire de Québec, comme 


prisonnier d’Etat durant l’espace de trois années et demie; pendant lequel 
temps il s’est vu privé, non seulement de toute commodité, mais méme 
souvent des nécessités de la vie; la cessation d’armes lui a fait recouvrer la 
liberté de sa personne, mais lui a 6té les moyens d’en jouir, qui ne peuvent 
lui être rendus que par la Justice, ’Equité et la Générosité du respectable 
Congrés, en prenant en considération sa fatale et triste situation, et en 
lui accordant telle indemnisation et secours que leur générosité leur inspirera. 

Quand je suis parti de Philadelphie pour Montréal, je possédais, en mon 
âme et conscience, tant en livres qu’en papiers du Congrès, la valeur de 
sept cent dollars. Pour accréditer le dit papier et encourager le Canadien 
à le prendre, j'ai vendu la plus grande partie de mes livres, et même donné 
de l’argent, dollar pour dollar, pour du papier, (dont je peux fournir certi- 
ficat) me flattant toujours que le papier du Congrès, ferait aussi bon que 
celui des Banques de Venise et Londres. Aujourd’hui je ne possède, pour 
tout bien, que cinq mille dollars en papiers du Congrès, et je dois aux 
environs de deux mille dollars, que je ne peux payer avec ce même papier, de 
sorte que je me trouve dans l'impossibilité à pouvoir y fair honneur. 


FLEURY MESPLET. 
Montréal, 27 mars 1784. 


Endorsed—Referred to the Committee of the State. Read in Committee, 
‘ July 26th, 1784, and ordered to lie. 


No. 35. 
Papers of Continental Congress, p. 341. 


Observations of Mr. Fleury Mesplet, printer to the Honorable Congress 
at Montreal. 

In answer to the demands made to him by the Honorable Members of 
Congress Holten, Spraight, and Platt Esqrs., charged of the Committee 
to examine his petitions. 


* Document signed. 


254 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


By order from Congress and through tae channel of the Honorable 
Mr. Chase at my domicile in Philadelphia where Speaking to me in person 
it was proposed to me to set off for Montreal, in Canada, in quality of 
printer for Congress, with all my utensils necessary for my press at the 
expense of Congress. 

I accepted of the offer with as much the more pleasure as it was 
promised to me that I would receive every satisfaction and regard that 
my services would deserve. I only observed that I wanted instantly an 
indemnification for the quarter’s rent of my house for which I ‘nad allowed 
to me one hundred dollars. 

The expedition then took place immediately after the verification of 
my abilities by the respectable Congress in presence of the Honorable the 
President Hankok, Esq.; the Honorable Doctor Francklin and Mr. Tompson, 
secretary. 

In this assurance I regulated all my affairs and got ready with all my 
effects to set out for Montreal. In consequence of which I had instantly 
sent to me five waggons to carry me until Lake George of which tne 
expenses of waggonnage only was paid by Congress. 

I then had with me of necessity a lettered man, two laborers, my wife 
and one servant for whicn I paid besides their courent wages all the travel- 
ling expenses until Montreal. 

From Lake George to Montreal I had all my effects carried by boats 
at my own expense. At my arrival at Montreal I was obliged to put up at 
a tavern with all my equipage until I got a house suitable to fulfill the 
intentions of the respectable Congress (the whole of this at my own 
expense). 

It was in the month of May 1776, that I established my press at Montreal 
for the service of Congress, only in the cours of the [month] of June the 
American troops being obliged to evacuate that place I was left at the 
mercy of the British Government. 

I was taken up myself and all my workmen and with them confined 
in goal for the space of twenty-six days. My house, my papers and all 
my effects whatsoever where were all seized—and it was only after many 
supplications and by means of some friends of my nation that I at length 
obtained my liberty and tat of my people. 

At the moment of my releace my lettered man the most essential person 
in my business not being willing to support all the vicissitudes of the time 
demanded of me his dismission and his payment. I could not then resist 
his claim and was obliged moreover to allow him an indemnification. All 
my hopes then where [were] that I flattered myself that those who had 
engaged me at their service would furnish me wit'‘a means or give necessary 
orders for my relief from the tiranny which continually was exercised 
against me. I nevertheless always conserved the courage which an honest 
man is to have to fulfill his engagements especially such as those I have 
with the respectable Congress. 

I always flattered myself that the American arms would be victorious 
in that province and that I would in fin enjoy the satisfaction which was 
promised to me by that respectable body. 

Inboldened by the honor I had to be engaged by such an august body 
I dared everything I thought could be to their interest and consequently 
created to myself a number of enemies in every State until the unfortunate 


[m‘LAcHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 2585 


epoch of the 3rd of June 1779, when I was again taken and confined in 
prison at Quebec on the supposition that I had printed and rendered public 
the Manifesto of the Count d'Estaing and notwithstanding my innocence my 
friends and my rigat, I suffered a detention of three and half years con- 
secutively during which I suffered such miseries as humanity forbide to cite. 


I supported my pain with firmness and flattering myself with the hopes 
of seeing at last that province united to the thirteen States, when at the 
return of the peace General Haldimand, my oppressor, gave me my liberty 
which was then in some degree insupportable to me by the ruin of my 
establishment, but wat grieved me most was to see the province of Canada 
remain to the power of Great Britain. In that moment overloaded with 
debts, necessitated by the wants of my wife without help, and moreover 
obliged to render accounts to a partner (with whom I have settled and am 
indebted to him according to agreement sixteen hundred and sixty-seven 
dollars) I decided to write to the Honorable Mr. Enkok, the 4th August, 1783, 
and likewise to Mr. Tompson to request of these gentlemen to take my situa- 
tion into consideration, I sent them a petition like the one I had te honour 
to present since my arrival here. I should have certainly prefered to come 
myself in person before the respectable Congrss had my faculties permitted 
me to do it. 


I waited with great impatience for an answer but in vain; the 4th of 
April, 1784, I take the liberty to write a second letter to the Honorable Mr. 
Henkok who undoubtedly could not give me any answer. 2 


In fin I wrote another letter to the Honorable Mr. Meflenne then 
President of Congress, the 31st of March, 1784, and am still deprived of any 
answer from eitiner of the gentlemen. 


In the month of November last I charged a friend to see the Honorable 
President of Congress to recall to his Memory the request I made to him 
(being still deprived myself of means of transporting me there in person) he 
was kind enough to tell him that he knew perfectly well all my affair that 
he had received my petition and that he would wita pleasure interest him- 
self to see me righted. But that it was absolutely requisite that I should 
come in person; my friend observed him the impossibility of me making 
such expenses being entirely destituted of means—he desired my friend to 
engage me to make a last effort and come and told him that he had not 
the least doubt of the satisfaction I was to expect from the equity of the 
respectable Congress. In consequence that same friend has been good 
enough to furnish me with a sufficiency to enable me to make this voyage, 
and I am now gentlemen expecting of your honours the Justice due to a 
zealous servant of Your Respectable Body. 


Your Honours have demanded of me an account of my expenses and 
a near computation of the damages I sustained. 


In obedience to your command Gentlemen I have hereunto annexed an 
exact account of my expense only and with regard to the hopes I shall 
never permit myself to taxe your Honours, I have never doubted of our 
justice and shall confide to it. The triumph of America over the tiranny 
of Great Britain is all my satisfaction I desire. I shall esteem myself too 
happy if my services can still be agreable to Your Honours and shall be 
eternally devoted to your commands. 


286 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


With these sentiments I shall remain for ever with the highest 
reverence and profound respect, Gentlemen of Your Honours, the most 


obedient and very humble servant, 
FLEURY MESPLET. 


No. 36. 
Papers of the Continental Congress, p. 351. 


I, tne underwritten, do hereby certify that sometime in the month of 
May 1776, Mr. Fleury Mesplet came to Montreal, in order to set up a Print- 
ing Office. That some time in the month of June then next following (the 
time when the American troops evacuated that place), persons were 
employed by the British Government in order to watch very closely the 
said Fleury Mesplet, which they did for the space of eight days, afterwards 
he was taken witn all his workmen and confined for twenty-six days. 
That at the expiration of that period, the said Fleury on the earnest solicita- 
tion of his friends, was released, but still very closely watched and deprived 
of all the means to make his escape out of the province. That on the 
third of June 1779, he, the said Fleury was again apprehended on suspicion, 
and sent to the jail of Quebec, winere he was kept confined for the space of 
three years and a half, consecutive, and was not released until the happy 
event of the peace took place. 


March, 31st, 1785. 
JH. PERINAULT. 


Philadelphia, ss 

Personally appeared Joseph Perinault, at present of the City of 
Philadelphia Gent. and made oath according to law that the foregoing 
certificate contains tae whole truth respecting the matter therein contained 
and expressed, sworn at Philadelphia, the 1st March, 1785. 


Coram. JOHN MILLER. 


No. 37. 
Papers of the Continental Congress, p. 351. 


During my stay last winter and spring in Canada I frequently heard 
Mr. Mesplet’s name mentioned as one of the sufferers in the American 
cause during the late war, and that he had been confined at Quebec upwards 
of three years and not liberated until peace. I also understood from several 
well disposed to the American Revolution (as well at Quebec as Montreal) 
tat Mr. Mesplet was considered as an American and had given proofs of 
his attachment to the Independance of the United States. 


Phil., March 31st, 1785. 
ISAAC MELCHOR. 


No. 38. 
Papers of the Continental Congress, p. 352. 


We, the subscribers, certify to all whom it may concern, that Mr. 
Fleury Mesplet, printer in the city of Philadelphia, has set off from tne said 
city for Montreal in Canada, in the month of March, 1776, in the capacity 


{m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 257 


of a printer for the United States, and that he has taken with him his 
family, furnitures, press and every other things belonging to his printing 
office; and we do further certify that he has engaged to go with him, the 
following persons, viz.: 

Mr. Alexander Pochard, a gentleman of learning, 

Messrs. John Grey and ....... . Hers, both as journeymen, printers, 
and one servant. 


Philadelphia, March 31st, 1785. P. G. BRETON. 
JAMES VALLIANT. 
Philadelphia. 


Personally appeared P. G. Breton and James Valliant, both of the city 
of Philadelphia, and made oath according to law that the above certificate 
contains the whole truth respecting the matter therein mentioned and 
expressed. 


Sworn at Philadelphia, the 31st March, 1785. 
Coram JOHN MILLER, I. P. 


No. 39. 
Papers of the Continental Congress, p. 367. 


I, the Underwritten, do certify that Mr. Fleury Mesplet, a printer from 
Philadelphia, was sent in the same capacity by Congress to Canada, with 
orders to settle at Montreal. That he had along with him a compositor, 
two pressmen and a servant. That His Excellency John Hancock, late 
President of Congress did in my presence (as I was attending as interpreter 
to the said Mesplet) promise him in the name of Congress, to defray every 
reasonable expense to which he might be subjected in his then present 
situation, and that Congress would besides give him an adequate compensa- 
tion for his pains, and the disadvantages attending his removal. 

JOHN GERMON. 

Philadelphia, March 31st, 1785. 


Philadelphia, ss 


Personally appeared John Germon and made oath according to law, 
that the above certificate contains the whole truth respecting the matter 
therein mentioned and expressed. 


Sworn, the 31st March, 1785. 
Coram JOHN MILLER, I. P. 


No. 40. 
Papers of the Continental Congress, p. 371. 


I, the Underwritten do certify that all persons to whom I have spoken 
about Mr. Fleury Mesplet, have assured me taat ever since he arrived into 
Canada, he was continually labouring under various vexations, and that 


258 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


among others, Messieurs Loubet, Marrassé, Meyrant, Deshautelle, and Legay, 
merchants at Montreal, have all assured me that Mr. Mesplet was con- 
tinually surrounded by spies and enemies from whom it was altogether 
impossible for him to escape, that besides, it is well known to the whole 
town, that Mr. Mesplet has sold goods in the way of his trade, for Con- 
tinental Currency, and that he even gave gold and silver in exchange for 
paper money. 


Philadelphia, March 31st, 1785. 


ETIENNE FOURNIER. 
Philadelphia, ss 


Personally appeared Etienne Fournier and made oath according to 
law, that the above certificate contains the whole truth concerning the 
matter therein mentioned and expressed. 


Sworn, the 31st March, 1785. 


Coram JOHN MILLER, I. P. 


No. 41. 
Papers of Continental Congress, p. 357. 


Philadelphia, April 1st, 1785. 
Dear Sir:— 


The bearer, Mr. Fleury Mesplet, is one of those unfortunate strangers 
who depending upon the hasty promises of zealous whigs in 1776, went 
to Canada as a printer (or agent) for the United States, was in con- 
sequence of his exertions imprisoned three years and a half and finally 
ruined. 

He has presented a memorial to Congress with an estimate of his 
losses and wishes to have your friendly aid in support of his claim. The 
ostensible situation I was in last year has exposed me to the attacks of 
strangers who have claims on the Justice or generosity of Congress and 
it is but seldom that I am so fortunate as to avoid a disagreable inter- 
ference. The present case is one of those I cannot parry. You will, there- 
fore forgive me for introducing Mr. Mesplet to you with my request that 
you will assist him in his application to Congress so far as it may appear 
just and reasonable. 


I am with much friendship, Dr. Sir, 
Yours, 


THO. MIFFLIN. 


The Honorable Mr. Hardy, of Virginia, in Congress, New York. 


Favored by Mr. Mesplet. 


[m‘LAcHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 259 
No. 42. 4 
Papers of the Continental Congress, p. 364. 


Memorandum of expenses made by Fleury Mesplet, printer to Congress at 
Montreal, viz.: 


From Philadelphia to Albany and from there to Lake George, 6 


persons, 32 days at 8/ . Antes ate ORAN ANNEE £ 76.16 
From Lake George to Montreal, five boats A ae At Congress 
conducted by 6 men, each for supplement to their nourishment 
and drink at the rate of 4/— 22 days, 30 men ...., .... .... 132.00 
For myself and my people, 22 days, 6 persons at 8/ tae 52.16 
The boats (aux Saults de Chambly) leaked and occasioned me a 
damage estimated by a clerk sent by Mr. Francklin.... .... 200.00 
For unloading cartage and porterage for one day at Montreal.... 8.00 
For board of 6 persons at the Tavern, 11 days at 8/.. MODO 26. 8 
For expenses for the press as pr. acct. of laborers. de 72.00 
From the 6 May 1776 to the 10 June, day of my EE Re 
my people, 34 jours, 6 persons 8/.. EE LT CRE re les te ME 81.12 
26 days confinement, 6 persons at 8/.. ESS PRESENT SE. 38 62. 8 
At my enlargement my lettered man yes Sea by Mr. Francklin 
left me—his wages and passage to Europe.. serieuse ns 60.00 
ATELIER OVER EL UNE IE EC A MMA EN re Sievers ste se eh aie els L ep se e 772.00 


At that epoch I had two workmen with which I had agreement for 

one year which I was obliged to board and pay without em- 

ploying having no paper they cost me by near computation.. 200.00 
From 6 May 1777, I remained alone with my wife and one servant 

until the 8rd June 1779, without work having no other re- 

source than to sell books at loss—which I nearly estimate as 

least.. Hoge 4 ‘ 600.00 
At the 3rd spins 1779, I was Poe a ea credit to Sait to onebee 

where I stayed 3% years during which I was obliged to con- 

tract debts for my subsistence with my family—which can be 

attested by all the honest citizens of that province of which 

I can give proves, viz.: 


Pe ICS MEANS NP MEME LENS Lo EL bees | 600.00 
PENIS LOO OMETICI. Eee NL MSA AUS level leet eve 200.00 
Willy, TERE AGTO Sa FS one autel aa a 263.12 
wos ie dt oi’ deck ME ST 96.00 
iP OMICI Trier sel salle doiliiela es le wa ee ee 40.00 
White IGN EE ENTORSES EEE 40.00 
Lo Tapes avel Ys he Sick (SIGs LCiSin CBICIOR NERC IO eee tels les tee à à 22. 8 
RUN DIET QUE ER A OR PAS OR CASE RER 26.16 
MITA CIE M set ale) feet cls ol ere! eis tes es ee es 10.00 
Wirt) DELSIC wes AT Ne 11. AEM GIA MGS ee) velo ee Ue.s 16.00 
By HSE to my = PEAR MrmBerrer. ere =. «/ 666.16 

S497112 

£ 3543.12 


Errors excepted. FLEURY MESPLET. 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


No. 43. 
Papers of the Continental Congress, p. 409, 


To the Rig’at Honourable the United States in Congress assembled. 
The humble petition of Fleury Mesplet, late printer of Congress at 
Montreal. 


Gentlemen:— 


Your petitioner takes the most respectful liberty to represent to you 
that he has been for this three months past imploring the clemency of Your 
Honours. Flattering himself that in consequence of the proofs he has 
given of the justness of his pretentions by the several certificats which 
he has furnished to the gentlemen appointed by Your Honours to 
examine his affair, that you would be pleased gentlemen to take it im- 
‘mediately into consideration and yender him the justice due to his 
services—he has remained hitherto in a most profound silence not daring 
to importune Your Honours, but his detention here reducing him to the 
greatest extremity, he is forced to make this address to Your Honours. 

Beseeching you, gentlemen, to cast a favorable eye upon a man who 
through his zeal and attachment for your interest has sacrifised all his 
worth and totally ruined himself and family. And if his distressful situa- 
tion can any ways touch your hearts and inspire Your Honours with any 
pity for him, he intreat Your Honours to enable him to fulfill the engage- 
ments which he was obliged to contract during his imprisonment at 
Quebec, and free him from the embarassment in which he is involved in 
order that he might return to Montreal, where his unfortunate wife over- 
whelmed with grief only supports herself in the hopes of seeing him return 
entirely satisfied from Your Honours. 

In the deplorable situation in which he is plunged he has no other 
hopes of relief then the compassion and generosity of Your Honours. To 
Montreal he dare not return to avoid the pursuits of his creditors and should 
unfortunately, Your Honours Shew him the least indifference in granting 
his request he would be reduced to despair; as he would have no resource— 
whatsoever—left him but flight—and his miserable wife also reduced to 
the greatest necessity and the mercy of the public as the few effects which 
his ennemies have left him would immediately be attacked and sold by his 
enraged creditors. 

If your petitioner had had the least reproche to make to himself in his 
conduct towards Your Honours he would not have persisted so long in his 
demands but he dares to repeat to you, gentlemen, that he has sacrified 
himself, his wife and fortune to adhere to your cause, being fully persuaded 
that nothing could equal the Justice of Your Honours. 

Therefore he beseeches you, gentlemen, to consider his distressful posi- 
tion and not abandon him to despair the resolution which Your Honours 
have been pleased to pass to allow him 426 dollars is hardly sufficient to 
balance the expenses which he has been obliged to make for himself and 
a friend who accompanies him to assist him in his affair and who has 
advanced to him his journey expenses from Montreal in the middle of 
winter—from here Philadelphia and return and since for both their sub- 
sistence in this city. Therefore your petitioner is in the impossibility to 
leave this place with this small sum as he dare not appear at Montreal 
unless he could present to his creditors a definitif resolution from Your 


[mM‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 261 


Honours as he would run the hazard to be again confined to goal until he 
could discharge their demands. 

May it therefore please Your Honours to grant him your benevolence 
and deign to render him his life and happiness by rendering him your 
Justice—and he dares to hope that of what nature the resolution of Your 
Honours will be that he will never have to repent to have been your 
attached servant, etc., able for ever to retain the same sentiments of 
esteem and veneration with which he has always been penetrated for 
Your Honours.—And your petitioner will not cease to address his most 
fervent prayers to heavens for the long life and preservation of Honours 
and for the future happiness and prosperity of this and the other States of 
America. 


FLEURY MESPLET. 
Endorsed—Read June 2nd, 1785. 


Committee of week, June 13, to be filed. 


E. 


From the register of Notre Dame, Parish church, Montreal. 
No. 44. 

B. de Marie Josepte Tison. 

Le cinq février, mil sept cent soixante-six a été baptisée par moi sous- 
signé Marie Josepte, née de cette nuit, environ minuit, fille légitime de Jean 
Baptiste Tison et de Marie Anne Picard, a été parrain Dominique Perrin, 
marraine Marie Josepte Arrivée qui ont signé, 


MARIE JOSEPTE ARRIVEE, TISON. 
à D. PERRIN. 
ROBERT, prêtre. 
No. 45. 


S. de Marie Mirabeau, épouse Fleury Mesplet. 

Le deux septembre mil sept cent quatre-vingt-neuf, par moi prêtre 
soussigné, a été inhumé, dans le cimetière proche l’église, le corps de 
Marie Mirabeau, décédée d'hier, âgée d'environ quarante-trois ans, épouse 
de Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur dans cette ville; ont été présents Messirs. 
Marchand et Poulin de Courval, prêtres soussignés; Poulin de Courval, prêtre 


JOS. BORNEUF, prêtre. 


No. 46. 
M. de Fleury Mesplet et de Marie-Anne Tison. 

Le treize avril mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dix, aprés la publication d’un 
ban de marriage sans empéchement ni opposition, vu la dispense des deux 
autres bans accordé par messire Jean Brassier, grand vicaire de Monsei- 
gneur l’Evéque de Québec, prêtre du Séminaire de Montréal, soussigné fai- 
sant les fonctions curiales en cette paroisse ayant pris le mutuel consente- 
ment par paroles de présent Mr. Fleury Mesplet, demeurant dans cette 
paroisse, Âgé de cinquante-cinq ans, veuf de dame Marie Mirabeau, fils de 
feu Mr. Jean Baptiste Mesplet et de défunte dame Marie Antoinette Capeau, 
ses pére et mére, de la paroisse de St-Nizier, diocése de Lion, en France; 
dune part et d’aussi présente Marie-Anne Tison, âgée de vingt-trofs ans, 
fille de Jean Baptiste Tison et défunte Marie-Anne Picard, ses pére et 
mére, de cette paroisse d’autre part; les ai marié selon les régles et cou- 


262 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


tumes observées en la Ste. église en présence de Joseph Desautels et du 
Sr Francois Leguay, amis de l’époux; de Jean Baptiste Tison, père de Jean 
Baptiste Tison frére; de Marie Deslauriers et de Marie Cathrine Baron, 
belles-soeurs de l’épouse, et de quelques parents et amis dont les uns ont 
signé ainsi que les autres ont déclaré ne savoir signé, 


FLEURY MESPLET, MARIE ANNE TISON, 
LEGUAY, JOSEPH DESAUTELLS, TISON, 
JEAN BAPTISTE TISON, fils. 
FR. DEZERY, prêtre. 
No. 47. 

B. de Fleury Tison. 

Le vingt-neuf octobre mil sept-cent quatre-vingt-onze, par moi, prêtre 
soussigné, a été baptisé né d'hier de légitime mariage de Jean Baptiste 
Tison et de Magdelaine Leguay, son épouse; le parrain a été Fleury Mesplet 
et la marraine Marie Anne Tison qui ont signé avec nous, 


TISON, FLEURY MESPLET, 
MARIE ANNE TISON MESPLET. 
ALEXIS DUROCHER, prétre. 


No. 48. 


Le 30 octobre 1791, Mesplet a été parrain a Marie Thérése Stringer. 


No. 49. 

S. de Fleuri Mesplet. 

Le vingt-six janvier mil sept cent quatre-vingt-quatorze, par nous 
prêtre soussigné, a été inhumé dans le cimetière proche l’église le corps 
de Fleury Mesplet, décédé d’avant-hier, âgé de soixante ans, ont été présents 
sieur Duranceau et Baron, caauleurs soussignés, » 


ANDRE BIRON, J. C. DURANCEAU. 


RAIZENNE, prêtre. 
No. 50. 

S. de Marie Anne Tison. 

Le sept septembre mil huit cent-quarante, je, prêtre soussigné, ai 
inhumé Marie Anne Tison, décédée le quatre du courant, âgée de soixante- 
quatorze ans, veuve de Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur de cette paroisse. 
Témoins, Marcel Boucheret, Antoine Léveillé qui n’ont su signer. 

P. O'CONNELL, prêtre. 
F. 


From the Archives of the Court House, Montreal. 


No. 51. 
Pre. Mezières, notary. 


Compromis entre le Sieur Fleury Mesplet et le sieur Charles Berger. 

Par devant les No’res Roiaux de la province de Québec, résidents à 
Montréal soussignés. 

Furent présents le Sieur Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur et libraire, demeu- 
rant en cette ville, d’une part; et le sieur Charles Berger, marchand établi 
en France de présent en cette dite ville d’autre part. 

Lesquelles parties désirant compter, régler et terminer entre elles a 
l'amiable leurs droits et prétentions respectifs pour fait de la société en 
commandite passée entre elles le premier mars mil sept-cent-soixante-seize, 
dans la ville de Philadelphie, en la province de Pensilvanie sous leurs seings 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 263 


et en présence de témoins, et pour le fait et causes y exprimées, aussi 
bien que pour toutes autres prétentions, soit d'un côté ou de l’autre, qui 
seront établies ou fondées par billets, reconnaissances, comptes, correspon- 
dances, ou autrement et généralement toutes affaires entre elles du passé 
jusqu'à ce jour de quelques natures qu’elles puissent avoir été et être, sans 
aucunes réserves ni restrictions quelconques et ce pour vivre en paix et 
prévenir tous procés, ont nommé pour leurs arbitrateurs et amiables com- 
positeurs, se voir: le dit sieur Mesplet, Mrs. Jean Dumas St-Martin, 
écuyer; le sieur Joseph Borel, négociant et le sieur Berger, Mrs. Joseph 
Périnault et Joseph Perrault aussi négociants auxquels les dits sieurs 
Mesplet et Berger donnent respectivement pouvoir et autorité de juger, 
régler et terminer tous leurs différents et contestation sur et au regard des 
objets ci-devant mentionnés, et ce sur les piéces, preuves et productions 
qui leur seront remises et fournies incessamment, afin que les dits sieurs 
arbitrateurs puissent rendre leur jugement arbitral, dans quinze jours au 
plus tard; et dans le cas où les dits sieurs arbitrateurs ne se trouveraient 
de même sentiment ils pourront nommer tel sur-arbitrateur qu’ils aviseront 
pour cinquième, afin de rendre conjointement leur jugement arbitral, auquel 
les parties promettent respectivement acquiescer, à peine de payer par le 
contrevenant à l’acquiescant,—la somme de cinq-cents livres, monnaie du 
cours actuel de cette province, avant d'être reçu à rien proposer contre le 
dit jugement arbitral, et laquelle peine ne pourra être réputée comminatoire. 
Et pour l'exécution des présentes et prononciation de la sentence arbitrale 
qui interviendra les parties ont élu leurs domiciles, savoir: le dit sieur 
Mesplet en sa maison près du marché en cette ville, et le dit sieur Berger 
en celle du sieur Mesplet, rue Notre-Dame, auxquels lieux, etc., nonobstant, 
etc. promt., etc., obligt., etc., rent., etc. 

Fait et passé à Montréal en l'étude l’an mil sept-cent-quatre-vingt- 
quatre, le troisième novembre avant-midi, et ont les parties signé avec 
nous lecture faite. 


(Signé) CH. MESPLET, 
C. BERGER, 
FOUCHER, Not. Royal, 
PRE. MEZIERE, Not. Royal. 


No. 52. 


Extension of time for rendering award. 

Je consens qu'il soit donné telle extension qu’on jugera à propros au 
compromis qui a été passé entre le sieur Charles Berger et moi pour ce qui 
concerne le temps qui sera nécessaire aux arbitres, pour terminer nos affaires 
respectives entre le dit sieur Charles Berger et moi, à Montréal, le 16 
Novembre 1784. 


F. MESPLET. 
No. 53. 


Award of Arbitrators. 


Nous soussignés arbitres nommés par Messieurs Fleury Mesplet et 
Charles Berger, pour terminer définitivement leurs comptes respectifs con- 
cernant leur société et autres comptes particuliers ainsi qu’ils s’y sont 
soumis par un compromis passé entre eux le trois du courant sous la 
pénalité de cinq cents livres cours actuel, lequel n’étant que pour quinze 


264 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


jours, a été continué du consentement des parties jusqu’a ce jour; et comme 
jl était nécessaire avant d’en venir à assurer leur susdit comptes de réfléchir 
mtirement sur leur acte de société, d’en peser et déterminer les conventions, 
et éclaircissement nous ayant laissé quelques doutes nous avons jugé a 
propos de faire choix de la personne du sieur Benjamin Frobisher, Ecuyer, 
pour éclaircir nos doutes et balancer nos opinions; et d’aprés ces justes 
précautions nous avons alloué au sieur Charles Berger le capital qu’il a mis 
dans la société de mille Pounds courant de Philadelphie, faisant ancien 
cours de cette province, porté en l’autre part mille Pounds de Phila- 


delphie Frame BR ARS NRA URI EE Re ECG 0 0 000 
Plus pour te que Mesplet lui a fait bon a tout événement 

de cent pounds de Philadelphie pendant trois ans.. .. . oy 4,800.00 
Plus pour trente-deux portugaises que MSIE peceanalt 

devoir parisa lettre dur 4 sMlarsmiu Gren ierenielel ele! ke tie CCC CE 1,536.00 
Pour effet que le dit Mesplet a ann Rae ON au ait 

Berger conformément au compte du dit Mesplet.. .. .. .. .. 803. 5 

£ 24,068. 9 


Et pour objets que le dit Berger doit prouver 
avoir acheté pour le compte de la société et justifier 
quwils ont été pris par les ennemis. Savoir: 

Payé par Mr. Berger à Mr. Germentown de Phi- 


ladelphie pour caractères 20e 0 bere) ee) EE 0 070 
Payé par le même au graveur.. .. .. .. «+ «2 «+ «- 36.00 
Item pour avoir fait parer des peaux.. .. .. Sue 18.00 
Item 180 rames de papier achetées à | Philadelphie à 
DE DR SN TAL dt ET RE PAU eo to ri IA EL IO nt LA LE GNU Gi 4320.00 
4,774.00 
£28,842. 9 


Ce qui forme la somme totale de vingt-huit mille huit cent-quarante- 
deux livres neuf sols anciens shellings de cette province que le dit Mesplet 
se trouve redevable au dit Berger sauf la restriction ci-dessus de quatre 
mille sept cent-soixante et quatorze livres 4 Montréal, le 27 novembre 1784. 


(Signé) DUMAS, 
P. MARTIN, 
JH. PERINAULT, 
J. F. PERRAULT, 
JH. BORREL. 


No. 54. 


Obligation or Bond from F. Mesplet to Charles Berger, 29th Dec., 1784. 


Par devant les notaires royaux de la province de Québec, résidents à 
Montréal, soussignés, 

Fut présent le sieur Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur et libraire, demeurant 
en cette ville, \ 

Lequel a reconnu confessé devoir loyalement et légitimement au sieur 
Charles Berger, marchand, actuellement en cette ville, à ce présent et accep- 
tant la somme de sept mille deux cents chelins, ancienne monnaie de cette 


[M‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 268 


province, laquelle avec celle de deux mille huit cents chelins susdits que le 
dit sieur Mesplet s’est obligé par son billet de ce jour conjointement avec 
le sieur Marassé de payer au sieur Berger en juin prochain feront celle de 
dix mille chelins susdits, à laquelle somme le dit S. Berger a modéré celle 
de vingt-huit mille huit cent-quarante-deux livres neufs sois, à laquelle 
le dit Mesplet a été reconnu redevable envers lui suivant le procés verbal 
rendu, en vertu de compromis passé entre eux, le trois novembre dernier, 
par Messrs. Dumas St. Martin, Ecuyer; Joseph Francois Perrault, Joseph 
Perinault, et Joseph Borel, négociants; en date du vingt-sept du mois de 
novembre dernier demeuré annexé à ces présentes; le dit S. Berger ayant 
déclaré que la remise qu’il faisait au dit Mesplet était en considération des 
pertes et des malheurs, qu'il avait éprouvés dans ses affaires à quoi il est 
trés sensible en sorte qu’il dit et déclare qu’il s’est contenté de la dite 
somme de dix mille chelins anciens susdits, laquelle une fois payée par le 
dit Mesplet, il sera entiérement quitte et déchargé envers le dit S. Berger, 
de toutes dettes et affaires quelconques avec lui du passé jusqu’a ce jour, 
soit pour raison de leur société ou autrement. Et laquelle somme de sept 
mille deux cents chelins restante 4 payer, le dit sieur Mesplet promet et 
s’oblige en effectuer le payement au dit sieur Berger à son ordre ou au 
porteur dans l’espace de deux années à compter de ce jour, et en quatre 
payements égaux qu'il fera de six mois en six mois, avec l'intérêt à raison 
de six pour cent par an, aussi à compter de cette date jusqu’au réel et par- 
fait payement de la dite somme, et pour opérer la sûreté du payement, le 
dit sieur Mesplet a soumis obligé, affecté et hypothéqué tous ses biens 
présents et à venir et spécialement son imprimerie, tout ce qui la com- 
posent et y est accessoire sans qu'une obligation déroge à l’autre; et pour 
l'exécution des présentes le dit sieur Mesplet a élu son domicile en sa 
maison où il est actuellement résident appartenant à Monsieur de Longueuil, 
scise en cette ville rue Capital, auxquels lieux, etc., obligt., etc., renoncant, 
eLc:, 

Fait et passé à Montréal, en la maison du dit sieur Mesplet, l’an mil 
sept cents quatre-vingt-quatre le vingt-neuviéme jour du mois de décembre, 
aprés-midi, et ont les parties signé avec nous lecture faite. Il est convenu 
que les termes ci-dessus auxquels le dit sieur Mesplet a accédé pour effec- 
tuer le payement de la somme de sept mille deux cents chelins anciens, 
n'a été que dans la confiance-qu’il serait payé des prétentions qu'il a par 
le Congrès Américain, mais comme il pourrait arriver que ces rembourse- 
ments me seraient point effectués avant les dits termes, mon dit sieur 
Berger confesse que le dit sieur Mesplet ait pour payer la dite somme les 
dits termes suivants, savoir un tiers de la dite somme dans dix-huit mois 
de cette date et les deux autres tiers de la dite somme de six mois en six 
mois, après l'échéance du dit premier terme par proportion, avec les intérêts 
comme ils sont stipulés. 


(Signé) FLEURY MESPLET, 
C. BERGER, 
A. FOUCHER, Not. Royal, 
PRE. MEZIERE, Not. Royal. 


Sec. II., 18. 1906 


266 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


No. 55. 


Power of Attorney from Charles Berger. 


Procuration par le sieur Charles Berger aux sieurs Louis l’Hardi et 
Clément Herse. 

Par devant les notaires royaux de la province de Québec, résidant à 
Montréal soussignés, fut présent le sieur Charles Berger, marchand actuel- 
lement en cette ville, ; 

Lequel étant sur son départ pour l'Europe a fait et constitué pour 
ses procureurs généraux et spéciaux Mrs. Louis Hardy et Jacques Clément 
Herse, marchands de cette ville, auxquels il donne conjointement ou sépa- 
rément pouvoir de pour lui et en son nom, toucher et recevoir du sieur 


Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur et libraire, demeurant en cette ville de ses 
droits et ayant cause, la somme de sept mille deux cents chelins ancienne 


monnaie de cette province à lui due par le dit sieur Mesplet et payable 
en différents termes suivant l'obligation passée devant Mr. Méziére et son 
confrére Nore, le vingt-neuviéme décembre, mil sept cent quatre-vingt- 
quatre, de l'expédition de laquelle les dits sieurs, procureurs constitués, 
seront porteurs, en cas de payment ou satisfaction des dits termes donner 
toutes quittances et décharges valables, et a défaut de payment ou satis- 
faction former et intenter toutes demandes et actions en justice, tant contre 
le dit sieur Mesplet principal obligé que contre tous autres qu'il appar- 
tiendra par toutes voies que de droit, et sur le tout plaider, appuyer, élire, 
domicile, constituer procureur ou avocat en cause, frayer les déboursés, com- 
protre, transiger et généralement faire tout ce qui sera nécessaire jusqu’a 
jugement ou arrêt définitif et iceux mette à exécution. 

Promet., etc. obligeant, etc., faire, etc. : 

Passé à Montréal, en l’etude l’an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-cinq, le 
seiziéme février avant-midi, au dit Sr. Constituant, signé avec nous, lecture 


faite. 
B. BERGER, 


J. DESLISLE, N. P. 
PRE. MEZIERE, Nore R. 


No. 56. 


Mesplet’s receipt for money borrowed from Desautels. 


Je reconnois avoir recu de Mr Desautelle, tailleur à Montréal, la somme 
de huit mille livres chellins de la province qu'il m'a preté en argent, promois 
lui payer l'intérêt, pour chaque six mois, à cinq pour cent, jusqu’au rem- 
bourcement du capital, ou à la demande fait à Montréal le 29 Juillet 1778. 


FRANCOIS LEGUAY, père, notary. FLEURY MESPLET. 


Obligation or bond from Mesplet to J. M. Desautels for 8000 livres $1333. 
30 Aug., 1784. 


Par devant les notaires de la province de Québec, résident 4 Montréal, 
soussigné pour présent Mr. Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur et libraire, demeurant 
en cette ville, rue Capital, lequel reconnaît et confesse devoir bien légi- 
timement à M. Joseph Marie Desautel, tailleur d'habit, demeurant en cette 
dite ville, rue St. Paul, la somme de huit mille livres ou chelins anciens 
cours de cette province, pour prêt et avance d'argent que le dit sieur 
Desautels lui à fait ci-devant pour employer en ses affaires ainsi qu'il 


{m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 267 


appert au billet du dit débiteur en date du vingt-neuf juillet mil sept cent 
soixante dix-huit, signé et écrit de sa main s’obligeant icelui débiteur à 
payer l'intérêt à cinq pour cent sur icelle, somme reconnaissant le dit billet 
ce jourd’hui juste et droit, dont icelui débiteur à payer l'intérêt suivant 
icelui, demeure à ces présents, cependant payable la dite somme de huit 
mille livres chelins, à premiere demande du dit sieur créancier qui voulant 
et désirant assurer sa créance nous a requis acte à lui octroyé ‘à peine et 
ce pour quoi le dit débiteur élit son domicile en sa demeure susdite, auquel 
lieu, &c., et nobostant, &c., et promettant, &c., et obligeant, &c, et renon- 
eant, &c., fait, &c., et passé à Montréal. Maison mon dit sieur crediteur 
l'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-quatre, le trente août, avant-midi, et à mon 
dit sieur débiteur signé en présence avec le sieur créancier et nous notaires 
avec paraphe lecture faite suivant l’ordonnance. 


JOSEPH /DESAUTELS, FLEURY MESPLET, 
J. H. PAPINEAU, FR. LE GUAY. 


No. 57. 


Cejourd’hui vingt-deux février l’an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-quatorze 
est comparu au gref les s us nommé Joseph Marie Desautels qui en pré- 
sence des témoins sous signés a déclaré avoir reçu l’entier payment de l’obli- 
gation ci-dessus dont quittance les jours et. au sus dits témoins. 

Témoins, TISON père, JOSEPH DESAUTELS, 


JS. REID. 
No. 58. 


Draft of a deed of compromise by Mesplet 


L'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-cinq, le neuf juillet, sont comparus 
devant le soussigné notaire de la province de Québec, résidant a Montréal, 
les soussignés créanciers de sieur Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur et libraire, 
demeurant a,Montréal sur la place du marché, lesquels créanciers sur les 
représentations d’impossibilité ot se trouve le dit Mesplet de s’acquitter de 
ses obligations envers eux, montant à environ à un capital (de mille livres 
cours d’Halifax) qu'il doit, voulant et désirant les dits sieurs créanciers 
favoriser, le dit sieur Mesplet leur débiteur et lui procurer le moyen 
de gagner sa vie dans son état lors du crédit et par là s’assurer de leurs 
créances chacun d'eux des dits sieurs créanciers sousignés ont consenti et 
consentent à lui accorder quatre années de délai de payment à compter du 
mois d'octobre prochain, en octobre que l’on comptera mil sept cent quatre- 
vingt-six, lequel payement sera de cent vingt cinq livres courant. Deux 
cent cinquante livres en octobre mil sept cent quatre-vingt-sept. Pareille 
somme en octobre mil sept cent quatre vingt-huit et enfin trois cent 
soixante-quinze livres courant Halifax au même terme d'octobre, que l’on 
compte mil sept cent quatre-vingt-neuf pour tous délais et sans intérêts 
et que Mesplet hypothèquera son imprimerie aux dits créanciers sans 
qu’aucuns des dits sieurs créanciers soussignés puissent inquiéter ni troubler 
le dit débiteur ni se prévaloir de sa créance et quand des dits payments 
faits et aux termes sus-dits être partagés au prorata des sommes qui auront 
été avancées au dit débiteur. 

Les comptes sont ci-après au bas des présentes. 

M. Desautels n’a qu'à faire une opposition entre les mains de Fleury 
Mesplets pour les 7200 livres qu'il doit par accord à son associé Berger en 
vertu d’une sentence obtenue contre Berger et Mesplet. 


268 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


No. 60. 
Fleury Mesplet doit à divers, savoir: 
Messieurs Fortier.. 
Desotelle.. 
Dellard.. 
MuUSisnAan re sind eked gore 
Delisle frs.. AO CL MOIS c 
Hardy pour lui et Mr. Berger.. 
Edmon à Québec... 
Lemoine à Québec... 
Mme. M’Cleman.. UOTE 
Gray, marchand négociant.. 


Edward, libr. et directeur de la presse.. 


Fizette, menuisier.. 

Du Calvet.. Pe RO is 
King et McCord (aux environs de).. 
Porliar Lamarre.. 


* Sauf erreurs et omissions. 


2616.00 
8738.00 
900.00 
540.00 
164.16 
7400.00* 
336.00 
552.00 
151.18 
1201.10 
300.00 
150.00 
616.00* 
168.00 
600.00 


These items are erased in the manuscript but they represent amounts 


due by Mesplet which were not pressing. 


No. 61. 


Bailiff’s sale of Mesplet’s stock and furniture. 


+ 
L'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-cing, le vingt et un novembre, à dix 
heures du matin, après avertissement au son de cloche pour la ville et 
faubourg de Montréal, nous, notaire de la province de Québec, à la requête 


du sieur Joseph Marie Desautels, bourgeois de cette ville, 


rue St. Paul, nous 


sommes transporté en la maison du sieur Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur, pour 
et en vertu d’une exécution émanée de la Cour des Plaidoyers Communs, 
en date du 22 juillet dernier, à nous exhiber et y jouisse les effet saisis par 
l'huissier Garnot, aussi en date du 25 juillet suivant, nous en notre dite 
qualité après un nombre des personnes assemblées en la maison du dit sieur 
Mesplet avoir procédé à la vente des effets saisis pour iceux être vendues 
en public au plus offrant et dernier enchérisseur ainsi que de droit et à 
signé le dit requérant ces présentes avec nous le jour et l’an suscrit, 


L. GARNOT, 


JOSEPH MARY DESAUTELS, 


FR. LE GUAY. 


Amounts of purchees by différents individuals at sale: 
Desautels.. 
EDUeCE.. 
Jautard.. 
Dubord.. 
Berichon.. 
Le Guay.. 
Fleury. . 
Dupré.. 


2661.15 
599.10 
191.10 
115.00 

18.00 
54.12 
16.15 
11.14 


[m‘zacazax] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 269 


Une imprimerie complète avec deux presses garnies qui après avoir 


été criées à divers reprises s’est trouvé monter à la somme de 
Desautels, cinquante livres cantiques de Marseille, adjugés à 


trois livres pièce.. TO NET EL MARNE TRUE 
Desautels, cent cinquante Journée du Chrétien, reliés.. 
Desautels, cent vingt-quatre psautiers, reliés en feuilles.. 
Huet, trois cent brochures intitulées, Ami des Enfants... 
Dubord, cinq cent alphabets francais.. 


Desautels, cent brochures de dévotion aux saints anges.. .. 


Huet, deux rames papier marbré.. DATENT ES, CEA 
Desautels, cent brochures de dévotion au saints anges.. 
Huet, cent catéchismes pour enfants.. 


Huet, deux cent brochures pour règles de change, monnaie... 


Desautels, cinquante semaines saintes, reliés.. 
Huet, quarante brochures neuvaines de St-Antoine.. 
aauet, cent brochures, Ecu de Six Francs.. 

Huet, six grands écritoires d’étain.. 

Jautard, deux grands écritoires ronds.. : 
Huet, vingt-quatre écritoires de plomb et étain.. 
Huet, dix-huit livetes de Sandras.. 

Huet, quatre trébuchets pour peser.. 

Huet, trois livres de cire à cacheter.. 

Huet, quatre trebuchets pour peser.. 

Berichon, quinze ardoises (mémoire)... 

Desautels, un trictrac.. 

Desautels, un trictrac.. 

Le Guay, un trictrac.. 

Desautels, un trictrac.. 

Jautard, un trictrac.. Pattes 

Huet, quatorze estampes encadrées... 

Huet, quatre écritoires de pierre.. STE 
Huet, deux couteaux d’hivoire pour papier... 
Desautels, trois sabliers de bois.. 

Jautard, un étui de mathématique.. 

Jautard, un étui de mathématique... 

Le Guay, un étui de mathématique... 

Huet, dix-neuf livres petits, reliés... 

Desautels, quarante-six petits livrets... 

Le Guay, quatre petits cartlers.. 

Pine teed MOE SWELLS ce eis rien os) ele ce, ce ais 


Huet, soixante-sept petits cornets blancs, couverts en bleu.. 


Desautels, dix tablettes couvertes de maroquin.. 
Desautels, trois porte-feuilles garnis.. 

Jautard, trois grands porte-feuilles. . 

Le Guay, cinquante estampes.. he SP Ey OMI ante 
Desautels, huit cent Journée du Chrétien, en feuilles 
Desautels, cing cent St-Francois Xavier, en feuilles.. 
Desautels, sept cent St-Antoine, en feuilles.. 
Desautels, cent vingt Semaine Sainte, non reliés.. 
Desautels, quarante anecdotes francais et anglais.. 
Desautels, trois cent Ange Gardien.. 


150.00 
130.00 
63.00 
50.00 
115.00 
19.00 
23.00 
19.00 
33.00 
10.00 
97.00 
14.00 
12.00 
30.00 
8.00 
25.00 
14.00 
32.00 
18.10 
32.00 
18.00 
20.10 
22.10 
21.00 
22.00 
19. 5 
29.00 
4.00 
8.00 
7.10 
9.00 
15.00 
21.00 
10.00 
5.00 
3.12 
3.00 
3.10 
20.10 
15.00 
7.00 
9.00 
26.00 
3.10 
3.10 
9.00 
25.00 
3.10 


270 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


DMesautelaitroiscent alpha wetse MEME SN 3.10 
Desautels, deux cent règles de psaumes, sans reliures.. .. .« 9.00 
Desautels, quatre-vingts formulaires de priéres, sans reliures.. .. 31.00 
Desautels, trois cent psautiers, sans reliures.. .. .. .. .. «+ .. 4.10 
Jautard, une table de quatre pieds de noyer, avec un tiroir.. .. 9.10 
Desautels tunelpetitercaaudière a erection aie state) tec) ole) Nahe\ ielinl aw keveoin elie 6.00 
Évet un bureau tavecMtiroir- Ou 55 (od som CCE CT Joo 101.00 
Desautels, une imprimerie complète avec deux presses et ses 
USTEN SUSPENSE RARES trots LOTIR ARE AISNE TER 1700.00 
Huet, un poéle de fer, palmier avec tuyau, aucune mode.. .. 60.00 
Jautard un Coffre TemvVOyA Se RME Me MSNM EE LT COCO Cet 30.00 
IUT CUTE DE LIE ID ULES EAU RTE PR NN ER PRE EEE 14.00 
Jautard Sept) CAISSES bouquets deMeurS PC RARE ENEC NE ENNSE 7.10 
Desautels, un poële de fer avec tuyaux de l'ancienne mode.. .. 51.00 
Fleury; tune petite table. mener NEO ate! feds EM RDENE ER TARN Ue iB) 
Jautard, UME rVOllSrei ie dak Ale ERREUR TE A MER 18.00 
Desautels une, cabane: GiECuUGeuil sc iuee Wolo l EME NERO 16.00 
Puce) Un: petit wpOeles i) sie Meee) eto teeter rn ee RUS Beg MAPS 64.00 
JaAUtard, une MOTOS... a M Mes nes are fey ene CE NACRE 37.00 
Jautard fauitachaises MDATIéeS NET EN MR ea btexesluecel ceieimn erst kiero micas 85 
Bleury, Une 'ChaudiGre ys MM MEANS SIA ET MEMOIRE 9.10 
Dupre, :uneimarmité (de ter fe ME MON EMEA PR ET eee 4.12 
Dupre; ‘une Petite marmite: isle MIN RENE AMENER ETES 2 
Dupré deux, pocles* fuzer moyenne A LENS nETR Sul 
Jautard une petite teoquillecdesteren scivee) ce AR RE REP RE 3.00 
Desautels une vache Sous DOIMNOIT EM vere EN TRERE 48.10 
Jautard, tune petite Sénisse ea ie ee ec re ei el 20.00 
Euet; (une tontaine fer mblanc:- Use ies: RER ET TR CCR CIRE 10.00 
3668. 6 


Montant de la vente Cy 152.11.4. 
JOSEPH MARY DESAUTELS, 
L. GARNOT, 
FR. LE GUAY. 


Et n'ayant plus rien à vendre suivant le procès-verbal de saisie remis 
en mains de l'huissier qui a signé ces présents, nous nous sommes retiré 
et à aussi le dit requéreur signé avec notaire au jourd’hui, quatre heures 


et demi du jour sus-dit. 
A. FAUCHER, Notary. 


No. 62. 


Lease from J. B. Tabeau to F. Mesplet. 
Pardevant, etc. 14 April, 1788. 


Fut présent Sieur Jean Baptiste Tabaux, ancien marchand voyageur, 
demeurant en cette ville, rue Notre-Dame. 

Lequel a fait bail a loyer à prix d'argent pour le terme et espace d’une 
année entiére et révolue et promet durant le dit temps garantir et faire 
jouir à sieur Fleury Mesplet, marchand imprimeur, demeurant en cette 
dite ville et à ce présent et retenant—pour lui au dit titre pour l’espace 
d'une année une maison de pierre size au dit lieu, rue Notre-Dame, jardin 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 271 


et dépendances, le tout joignant d’un côté le sieur Vallée et d’autre le sieur 
Lardy. Le tout en bon état et exempt de réparation que le dit sieur pre- 
neur dit bien savoir le connaître pour avoir le tout vu et visité et dit en 
être content; pour du tout jouir par le dit sieur preneur pleinement et pai- 
siblement en toute propriété à l'exception des fruits, des arbres plantés dans 
le jardin que lesquels ont réservé par ces présentes le droit d'exiger dans 
la saison un quart de pommes à choix à prendre sur les arbres. 

Ce fut fait à la charge par le sieur preneur d’entretenir la dite maison 
et dépendances en bon et semblable état que le tout lui sera livré au pre- 
mier mai prochain pour fihir à pareil terme au bout de l’an aux charges 
de toutes réparations locatives, 4 la réserve des fruits des arbres qui 
sont dans le jardin, exception comme dit est d’un quart de pommes au 
choix du dit sieur preneur, en outre pour et moyennant le prix et somme 
de huit cent shelins ancien de la province, exigibles par quartier à l’éché- 
ance de chacun, sans pouvoir le dit sieur preneur céder son droit au pré- 
sent bail à personne quelconque sans l'agrément par écrit du dit sieur 
bailleur. 

Car ainsi, etc., et pour l'exécution des présentes, le dit sieur preneur a 
élu son domicile en la susdite maison louée, auquel lieu, etc., nonobstant, 
etc, promt., ete., obligt., etc., renonct, etc. 

Fait et passé à Montréal, en l'étude l’an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-huit, 
le quatorze avril avant-midi, et ont les parties signé avec Nores, lecture 


faite. 
(Signé) BAPTISTE TABAUX, 


FL. MESPLET, 
1 ALD) EROS Ge IN 
A. FOUCHER, Nore Royal. 


No. 63. 


Engagement of Alex Gunn as apprentice by Mesplet. 


Par devant les notaires de la ville de Montréal, dans la province de 


Québec y résidant soussignés, 

Fut présent Mr. William Gunn, maitre d’école demeurant en cette ville, 
rue St. Sacrement, lequel pour faire le profit et avantage d’Alexandre 
Gunn, son fils, âgé de quinze ans, qu’il certifie fidèle, l’a mis de ce jour en 
apprentissage pour le terme et espace de cinq années finieset accomplies 
en qualité de garcon imprimeur, à Mr. Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur, demeu- 
rant aussi en cette ville, rue Notre-Dame, à ce présent et retenant le dit 
Alexandre Gunn en la dite qualité, promettant le dit Mr. Mesplet en- 
seigner et montrer au dit apprenti sa dite profession, et tout ce dont 
il se mêle en icelle, loger coucher, chauffer et l’entretenir de hardes, 
nourrir et blanchir, et le traiter convenablement en santé et en maladie, 
promettant le dit sieur Mesnlet de permettre au dit Alexandre Gunn, son 
apprenti, toutes fois qu'il n’en aura pas besoin d'aller chez le dit sieur son 
père, pour y prendre des lecons d'écriture et d’arithmétique et de l’occuper 
lui-même dans les dites branches de son éducation, quand le tems lui 
permettra. A ce faire était présent le dit Alexandre Gunn qui a eu tout 
ce que dessus pour agréable, et a promis et promet servir et obéir fidèle- 
ment au dit sieur son maître, et exécuter fidèlement tout ce qu'il lui com- 


272 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


mandera de licite et honnête, faire son profit, éviter son dommage, l'en 
avertir s’il vient à sa connaissance et faire généralement tout ce qu’un bon 
et fidéle apprenti doit et est obligé de faire, sans pouvoir s’absenter ni 
quitter le dit apprentissage sous peine de rendre le temps qu’il aurait perdu 
par sa faute à l'expiration des présentes, auquel cas le dit sieur, son père, 
promet le chercher et ramener au dit sieur, son maitre pour parachever 
le temps qui pourrait rester pour compléter le présent brevet d'apprentissage 
promettant le dit sieur Mesplet donner au dit apprenti à l'expiration des 
présentes un habillement neuf complet. Car aussi et promettant, et obli- 
geant, et renoncant, etc. 

Fait et passé à Montréal en l'étude de notaire l’an mil sept cent quatre- 
vingt-neuf, le cina de décembre, après-midi, ont signé lecture faite, 


WM. GUNN, 
ALEX. GUNN, 

F. MESPLET, 

JOS. PAPINEAU, 
JEAN GUIL. DELISLE. 


No. 64. 
Marriage Contract between F. Mesplet and Marie Anne Tison. 
11th April, 1790. 


Par devant les notaires de la ville de Montréal, dans la province de 
Québec, y résidants soussignés, 

Furent présents Mr. Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur, demeurant en cette 
ville, en sa maison sise rue Notre-Dame d'une part; et demoiselle Marie 
Anne Tison majeure, usante de ses droits. D’autre part, lesquelles parties 
du consentement de leurs parents et amis ci-aprés nommés; savoir de la 
part du dit sieur Mesplet; de sieur Joseph Desautelles, sieur Francis Le 
Guay, ses amis, et de la part de la dite demoiselle Tison, du sieur Jean 
Baptiste Tison, son père, de De Magdelaine Le Guay, épouse du dit sieur 
Tison sa belle-mère, de Jean Baptiste Tison fils, son frère; Marie Anne 
Desloriers, épouse du dit sieur Tison, fils de sa belle-soeur; Madame 
Catherine Biron, épouse de sieur Francois Tison, aussi son frère; de dame 
Louise Viger, épouse du sieur Joseph Dessautelles, sa tante. 

Ont volontairement reconnu et confessé avoir fait et accordé entre elles 
les traités de mariage et conventions suivantes, savoir que le dit sieur Fleury 
Mesplet et la dite demoiselle Marie Anne Tison se sont promis et promet- 
tent par les présentes de se prendre l’un et l’autre pour mari et femme et 
légitimes époux par lois et nom de marriage et en faire solemniser le dit 
marriage en face de notre mére Ste. Eglise Catholique Apostolique et 
Romaine le plutôt que faire se pourra et qu'il sera avisé et délibéré entre 
leurs parents et amis. 

Seront les dits futurs époux uns et communs en tous biens, meubles 
et conquets immeubles, suivant la coutume de Paris, conformément à 
laquelle ils veulent et entendent que leur communauté et autres conven- 
tions matrimoniales, soient réglées, dérogeant et renoncant expressément à 
toutes autres coutumes, lois et usages contraires encore qu'ils transportas- 
sent leur domicile et fissent des acquisitions ailleurs. 

Ne seront néanmoins tenus des dettes de l’un de l’autre faites et créées 
avant la célébration du dit mariage, lesquelles seront payées et acquittées 


2 


[M‘LAcHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 273 


par celui ou celle qui les aura faites et créées et sur son bien sans que 
l'autre ni ses biens en soient aucunement tenus en quelque manière que 
ce soit. 

Déclarent les dites parties que leurs biens et droits sont comme suit; 
savoir: De la part de la dite demoiselle future épouse d'une somme de 
trois mille vingt-deux livres dix sols shellings ancien cours de cette pro- 
vince, laquelle somme lui est propre comme provenant de la succession de 
feue dame Marie Anne Hupé Picard, sa mère, laquelle somme est actuel- 
lement entre les mains du dit sieur Jean Batiste Tison, son père; qu'il 
promet lui bailler et payer dans le cours d’une année à compter du jour 
qu’elle lui en fera la demande, et dont il lui payera l'intérêt à raison de 
cinq par cent, jusqu'au jour de l'actuel et dernier payement, à compter de 
ce jour. Ceux du futur époux en une somme de quatre mille livres pareil 
cours comme provenant-de ses conquets. Lesquelles sommes sortiront 
nature de propre de chaque côté aux dits futurs époux et aux heures de 
leurs côtés et lignes. : 

Le dit futur époux a doué et doue la dite future épouse du douaire 
coutumier ou—de la somme de mille livres ou schellings ancien cours de 
la province de douaire préfix à prendre sur tous et chacun des biens, 
meubles et immeubles, présents, et à venir du dit futur époux, qu'il en a 
dès à présent chargé, affecté, obligé et hypothéqué à garantir et faire valoir 
le dit douaire; pour du dit douaire coutumier ou préfix tel qu’il sera choisi 
par la dite future épouse, en jouir par elle dès que douaire aura lieu sans 
qu'elle soit tenue de le demander en justice. 

Le survivant des dits futurs époux aura et prendra par préciput, hors 
part et sans confusion des biens de la dite communauté jusqu'à la somme 
de cinq cents livres ou schellings ancien cours de la province en meubles 
suivant la prise de l'inventaire qui en sera fait sans crue, ou la dite somme 
en deniers contents au choix du dit survivant et en outre leurs habits et 
hardes d’habillements à l’usage du dit survivant et leurs lits et chambres 
garnis tels qu'ils seront lors de la confection de leur inventaire. 

Arrivant la dissolution de la dite communauté sera libre à la dite 
iuture épouse et aux enfants qui naitront du dit mariage d'accepter icelle 
ou d'y renoncer et en cas de nomination à la dite communauté elle pourra 
reprendre franchement et quittement, tout ce qu’elle aura apporté lui sera 
avenu et échu par successions, donations, legs ou autrement avec ses 
douaire préciput, ses habits, linges et autres hardes @habillement à son — 
usage et son lit et chambre garni comme dessus sans étre tenue d’aucune 
dette ni hypothèque faites et créées pendant la dite communauté, quoi- 
qu'elle s'y fut obligée ou qu’elle y eut été condamnée, dont elle sera acquit- 
tée par le dit futur époux et sur ses biens d’icelui ou par ses héritiers, et 
pour laquelle reprise et indemnité elle aura son hypothèque dès ce jour sur 
tous les biens présents et à venir du dit futur époux de quelque nature 
qu'ils soient. 

En considération du dit futur marriage et pour l'affection et l'amitié 
que se portent les dits futurs époux l’un à l’autre ils se sont par les pré- 
sentes fait donation viagère égale et réciproque au survivant et eux ce 
acceptant tous et chacun ses biens meubles et immeubles tant propres qu’ac- 
quets et conquets qui appartiendront au premier mourant aux jour et heure 
de son décès à quelques sommes qu'il se puissent monter et de quelque 
nature qu'ils soient, en quelque lieu qu’ils se trouvent, sans en retenir ou 


274 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


excepter aucune chose, pour de tous les dits biens tant propres qu’acquets 
et conquets jouir par le survivant sa vie durante sans qu'il soit tenu de 
donner aucunes cautions sinon à sa juratoire. 

La dite donation mutuelle ainsi faite pourvu et a la charge qu’il n’y ait 
aucun enfant vivant ou à naître en légitime marriage auquel cas demeu- 
rera la présente donation nulle de plein droit; et en cas qu'il y eut des 
enfants et qu'ils vinssent à décéder avant l’âge de majorité ou d’étre pour- 
vus par marriage—les dits futurs époux veulent et entendent que la dite 
donation reprendra sa force et vigueur. 

Et pour faire insinuer les présentes au greffe des insinuations de cette 
province et partout ailleurs ou besoin sera les dits futurs époux ont fait 
et constitué leur procureur général et spécial le porteur des présentes; 
auquel ils ont donné et donnent tout pouvoir d’en requérir acte; car ainsi à 
été convenu et accordé entre les parties et pour l'exécution des présentes 
les dites parties ont élu leur domicile en leur demeure ci-dessus désignée 
auquel lieu, etc, nonobstant, etc, promettant, ete. Chacun en droit soit 
et renonçant, etc.—Fait et passé au dit Montréal en la maison du dit sieur 
Jean Baptiste Tison, père, lan mil sept cent quatre-vingt-six, le onze 
d'avril après-midi et ont signé lecture faite. 


(Signé) TISON, 
FLEURY MESPLET, 
MADELAINE LEGUAY, 
TISON, 
JOSEPH DESAUTELS, 
JEAN BAPTISTE TISON, fils, 
LOUIS VIGE, 
LEGUAY, 
MARIE-ANNE TISON, 
A. FOUCHER, Nore Royal, 
JEAN GUILLAUME DELISLE, N. P. 


No. 65. 


Obligation or bond from F. Mesplet to Charles Lusignan. 
2 
20 Décembre 1790. 

Par devant les notaires de la ville de Montréal, dans la province de 
Québec y résidant soussignés, 

Furent présents sieur Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur, demeurant en sa 
maison No. 44, size en cette ville, rue Notre-Dame et de Marie-Anne Tison, 
son épouse, qu'il autorise à l'effet des présentes. Lesquels ont reconnu et 
confessé devoir bien légitimement à Monsieur Charles Lusignan, négociant 
de cette ville y demeurant rue St. Francois, à ce présent et acceptant la 
somme de onze cent soixante-quatre livres sept sols, ou shellings, ancien 
cours de cette province, pour prêt de pareille somme que le dit sieur 
créancier leur a ci-devant fait en or et argent ayant cours en cette province, 
dont les dits sieur et dame débiteurs sont contents et satisfaits; promettant 
et s’obligeant solidairement l’un pour l’autre un d’eux seul pour le tout, sans 
divison, discussion ni fidijussion, renonçant au dit bénéfice, de rendre et 


[mM‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 275 


payer la dite somme de onze cent soixante-quatre livres, sept sols du dit 
cours, au dit sieur Charles Lusignan en sa demeure ou au porteur des 
présentes dans le cours d’une année à compter de la date des présentes 
avec les intérêts sur la dite somme à raison de six par cent, à peine de 
tous dépens, dommages et intéréts, auquel payement les dits débiteurs 
affectent, obligent et hypotéquent sous la dite solidité tous leurs biens, 
meubles et immeubles présents et 4 venir sans qu’une obligation déroge a 
l'autre. Et pour l’exécution des présentes et dépendances, les dits sieur et 
dame débiteurs ont élu leur domicile en leur demeure ci-dessus désignée, 
auquel lieu, &c., promettant, &c., renoncant, &c., nobstant, &c., obligeant 
solidairement comme dessus, fait et passé au dit Montréal, en l'étude, l'an 
mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dix, le vingt décembre aprés-midi et ont signé 


lecture faite. 
(Signé) FLEURY MESPLET, 


MARIE-ANNE TISON MESPLET, 
LUSIGNAN, 

A. FOUCHER, Nore Royal, 
JEAN GUILLAUME DELISLE. 


No. 66. 
Intervention of J. B. Tison in above bond. 


Et le huitiéme jour de janvier mil sept cent quatre-vingt-treize, avant 
midi, est comparu devant les notaires, à Montréal, soussigné sieur Jean 
Baptiste Joseph Tison, me. perruquier, demeurant en sa maison sise en 
cette ville de Montréal, rue St. Francois Xavier; lequel à volontairement 
reconnu et confessé avoir entre ses mains, appartenant à dame Marie-Anne 
Tison, épouse du sieur Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur de cette ville, tous deux 
à ce présente et de leur consentement, une certaine somme d’argent excédant 
la somme de onze cent soixante-quatre livres sept sols, shellings de vingt 
coppres, mentionés dans l'obligation ci-devant écrit et des autres parts 
comme provenant des droits échus à la dite dame Mesplet, dans la succes- 
sion de feue dame Marie-Anne Picard, sa mére, et pour plus grande sûreté 
de la dite somme de onze cent soixante-quatre livres sept sols susmen- 
tionnée; le dit sieur Jean Baptiste Tison s'être par les présentes volontaire- 
ment rendu pleige et caution envers le sieur Charles Lusignan, négociant 
de cette ville, créancier dénommé en la présente obligation à ce présenter 
et acceptant, et le dit sieur Tison s’est obligé solidairement sous les renon- 
ciations de droits accoutumés conjointement avec les dits sieurs et dame 
débiteurs et y affecte et oblige tous ses biens, meubles et immeubles pré- 
sents et à venir, sans qu’une obligation déroge à l’autre à la charge de 
par le dit sieur Lusignan ainsi qu’il s’y oblige par les dites présentes et 
durant deux années à compter de la date des présentes au dit sieur Jean 
Baptiste Tison pour payer la dite somme de onze cent soixante-quatre livres 
sept sols, et dont les dits sieur et dame Mesplet en décharge d’autant le 
dit sieur leur pére et beau pére. 

Dont acte requis et octroyé à condition toutefois que l'intérêt actuelle- 
ment dû sur la somme principale et celles qui pourront être dûes à l’avenir 
seront payées par les dits sieur et dame Mesplet au dit sieur Lusignan 


276 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


sans que le dit sieur Tison en soit recherché. Fait et passé à Montréal en 
l'étude de Jean Guillaume Delisle, l’un des notaires soussignés, les jour et 
an que dessus, et ont signé lecture faite, 


(Signé) TISON, 
FL. MESPLET, 
MARIE-ANNE TISON, 
LUSIGNAN, 
A. FOUCHER, Nore Royal, 
JEAN GUILLAUME DELISLE. 


No. 67. 


Discharge of above bond. 


Et le onzième jour de décembre mil sept cent quatre-vingt-quinze 
avant-midi, est comparu devant les notaires à Montréal, soussignés le sieur 
Charles Lusignan, négociant de cette ville, créancier dénommé aux actes 
obligatoires ci-devant écrits et des autres parts; lequel a reconnu et confessé 
par ces présentes avoir eu et recu de Mr. Jean Baptiste Joseph Girou aussi 
dénommé au cautionnement ci-contre écrite à ce présent. Le somme de 
onze cent soixante-quatre livres, sept sous ou shellings de vingt coppres, 
avec les intérêts sur la dite somme, calculé jusqu’à ce jourd’aui, dont il 
tient quitte et bien valablement déchargé le dit sieur Girou ainsi que tous 
autres du passé jusqu’à ce jourd’hui; à ce faire était présente dame Marie- 
Anne Tison, veuve de feu Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur, laquelle a reconnu 
par ces présentes tenu quitte et bien valablement déchargé le dit sieur 
Tison, son père, de la dite somme de onze cent soixante-quatre livres et 
sept sols, avec les intérêts. ‘Hn déduction de ses droits et prétentions dans 
la succession de feue dame Marie-Anne Bréard, sa mère, la dite somme 
provenant de ses propres à elle appartenante et expressément réservé par 
son contrat de marriage avec le dit feu sieur Mesplet, et qui était demeuré 
en mains du dit sieur Tison, son père. Dont acte requis et octroyé à 
Montréal, en l'étude des jour et au susdits et ont signé lecture faite. 


LUSIGNAN, 

VEUVE MESPLET, 

ee eSNG Ne Ess 

JEAN GUILLAUME DELISLE. 


No. 68. 


Lease from widow Ignace Chenier of a house to Mesplet. 


26 March, 1793. 

Par devant les notaires de la ville de Montréal dans la province du Bas 
Canada, soussignés, 

Fut présent sieur Ignace Souligny, capitaine de la milice, demeurant a 
Longue Pointe, curateur eleu en justice à dame Josephte Aubuchon, veuve 
de Sr. Ignace Chenier lequel a reconnu et confessé par les présentes avoir 
fait bail a loyer pour le temps et espace de cinq années consécutives à 


[mM‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 277 


commencer du premier jour du mois de mai prochain et promet faire jouir 
durant le temps au dit titre au sieur, Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur, demeurant 
en cette dite ville, 4 ce présent et acceptant preneur pour lui au dit titre 
de loyer, savoir: une maison sise et cette ville, rue Notre-Dame, avec la 
cour et batiments en dépendant, tenant par derriére au terrain de sieur 
Etienne Campion, d'un côté aux héritiers Hardy et d’autre côté au dit sieur 
Campion. La dite maison garnie de toutes ses portes pleines contrevents 
et chassis vitrés de laquelle le dit sieur preneur se contente disant la bien 
savoir et connaître pour l’avoir vue et visitée et en est satisfait promettant 
la rendre et remettre en même et semblable état qu’il l'aura reçue à l’expira- 
tion des présentes. 

Le présent bail aussi fait aux clauses et conditions susdites et en 
autre pour et moyennant la somme de six cent livres ou shillings de vingt 
coppres de loyer pour chaque année que le dit sieur preneur promet et 
s'oblige payer en quatre payments égaux à raison de cent cinquante livres 
par chaque dit payment et de trois mois en trois mois au dit sieur Souligny, 
curateur ou au porteur des présents et dont le premier quartier sera dû et 
échu le premier jour d'août prochain et aussi continuer de quartier à autre 
jusqu'à l'expiration des présentes à peine de toutes dépenses, dommages et 
intérêt, et en outre à la charge de par le dit preneur entretenir la dite mai- 
son et lieux en même état semblable qu’il la reçoit actuellement et d’y faire 
les réparations locatives sans pouvoir céder ni transporter son droit au 
présent bail en tout ou partie sans le consentement exprès du dit sieur 
bailleur, qui promet de sa part le tenir clos et couvert dans la dite maison 
et lieux en dépendant suivant la coutume. 

Sont convenues les dites parties que le présent bail n'existe qu’autant 
que la dite dame veuve Chenier demeurera sous sentence d'interdiction, aussi 
qu'elle se trouve actuellement ou autant de temps qu’elle sera vivante et 
dans les deux cas seulement le présent bail au bout de l’année que restera 
lors à expirer demeurera nul et révolu. Sont au dit sieur preneur à se 
soumettre à ce qui sera demandé à cet égard par les héritiers Chenier et 
Aubuchon ou à faire de nouveaux arrangements avec eux. 

Convienne aussi les parties de se prévenir mutuellement trois mois 
avant l'expiration des dites cinq années de bail si autant il dure afin qu’il 
puisse savoir s’il faudrait dans le temps d'autres arrangements et savoir 
réciproquement s’il prendrait un autre bail pour un plus long espace de 
temps. 

Et pour l'exécution des présentes et de leur dépendences les dites 
parties ont élu leur domicile en leurs demeures ordinaires, auxquels lieux, 
etc, promettant, etc. obligeant, etc, renonçant, etc. chacun en droit soi 
etc. renoncant, etc., fait et passé au dit Montréal en l'étude de Jean Guil- 
laume Delisle, l’un des notaires soussignés l’an mil sept cent quatre-vingt- 
treize, le 26 mars après-midi, et ont signé à l'exception du dit sieur Souligny 
qui ayant déclaré ne le savoir faire de ce enquis à fait sa marque ordinaire 
lecture faite. 


FL. MESPLET, 

IGNACE X SOULIGNY, 
JEAN GUILLAUME DELISLE, 
LOUIS THIBAUDEAU, N. P. 


278 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


No. 69. 
Chligation or bond from Mesplet to J. B. Durocher for £130.0.8—$632.83. 


26 July, 1793. 

Par devant les Notaires de la ville de Montréal, dans la province du 
Bas-Canada, y résidant soussignés, 

Furent présents sieur Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur en cette dite ville y 
demeurant, rue Notre-Dame, et de Marie-Anne Tison, son épouse qu’il 
autorise à l'effet des présentes; lesquels ont volontairement reconnu et 
confessé devoir bien légitimement à sieur Jean Baptiste Durocher, Ecuyer, 
négociant, demeurant en la maison sise en cette dite ville aussi, rue Notre 
Dame, à ce présent et acceptant la somme de cent-trente livres, et huit 
pence sterling pour autant en effets et marchandises, caractéres et autres 
effets d’imprimerie que le dit Pierre Durocher leur aurait fait venir d'Europe 
cette année et dont il est content et satisfait; promettant les dits sieur 
Mesplet et son épouse solidairement l’un pour l’autre un d’eux seul pour 
le tout sans division, discussion, ni fidéijussion renonçant au dit bénéfice, 
payer la dite somme de cent trente livres et huit pence sterling au dit sieur 
Jean Baptiste Durocher, Ecuyer, ou au porteur comme suit, savoir: cin- 
quante livres du dit cours le sixiéme jour d’octobre de la présente année 
et les quatre-vingts livres et huit pence restants pour parfaire la dite somme 
à la demande et réquisition du dit sieur Durocher avec l'intérêt légitime 
jusqu’au parfait payement; promettant le dit sieur créancier autant que 
faire se pourra ne point géner les dits sieur et dame débiteurs, et recevra 
telle partie du payement de la somme restante que les dits sieur et dame 
Mesplet lui offriront et les intéréts diminueront en conséquence. 

Et pour sûreté de laquelle somme de cent trente livres et huit pence 
sterling susdite, les dits sieur et dame Mesplet ont hypotnéqué et par les 
présentes tous leur biens, meubles et immeubles présents et à venir et 
particulièrement la dite dame Mesplet ses droits et prétentions dans la 
succession du feue dame Tison, sa mère, une obligation ne dérogeant à 
l'autre. Et pour l'exécution des présentes et de leurs dépendances les dits 
débiteurs ont élu leur domicile en leur demeure ordinaire, auxquels lieux, 
etc., obligeant, ete., renonçant, etc. auxquels 

Fait et passé au dit Montréal, en l'étude de L. J. Delisle, l’un des 
notaires soussignés, 

L'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-treize, le vingt-six de juillet après-midi, 


et ont signé lecture faite. 
(Signé) JTABMDUÜUROCEHER, 


MARIE ANNE TISON, 
MESPLET, 

PRE. GAUTHIER, Nre., 

JEAN GUILLAUME DELISLE. 


No. 70. 
Compromise and substitution of J. B. Tison in above bond. 
Et le onziéme jour de décembre mil sept cent quatre-vingt-quinze avant- 
midi, est comparu devant le notaire a Montréal soussigné, dame Marie-Anne 


Tison, veuve de feu Fleury Mesplet de son vivant imprimeur, en cette ville: 
laquelle a dit et déclaré que s’étant obligé solidairement avec le dit feu sieur 


{m‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 279 


son époux, pour le montant d’une certaine somme mentionnée en l'obligation 
de l'autre part, pourquoi les biens propres se trouveraient affectés envers 
Jean Baptiste Durocher, créancier aussi y dénommé, au présent et accep- 
tant. Et voulant autant qu'il est en son pouvoir satisfaire à cette obliga- 
tion, elle confesse et déclare par ces présentes, qu’il lui appartiendrait une 
somme de soixante-sept livres, un shelling et neuf pence sterling comme 
provenant de la succession de feue dame Marie-Anne Priard, sa mère, 
actuellement entre les mains de sieur Jean Baptiste Joseph Tison, son 
père, pourquoi elle substitue le dit sieur Durocher en son lieu et place, noms, 
droits, raison et action pour recevoir et percevoir du dit sieur son père, la 
dite somme sus-mentionnée, pour demeurer quitte à son égard seulement 
envers le dit sieur Durocher sans préjudice à ses droits et demandes 
contre la succession vacante du dit feu Mesplet, son époux, et dont le dit 
sieur Durocher s’est tenu pour content. 

A ce faire était présent le dit sieur Jean Baptiste Tison, père, qui a 
eu le présent transport pour agréable et se lest tenu pour bien et duement 
signifié; et le dit sieur Durocher ne voulant point inquiéter le dit sieur 
Tison pour le payement de la dite somme de soixante-sept livres un shelling 
et neuf pence sterling, a dit et déclaré par les présentes, qu’il accorde au 
dit sieur Tison un délai de deux années à compter de ce jourd’hui, pour 
le payement de la dite somme avec l'intérêt à raison de six par cent annuel- 
lement; payable en un seul ou plusieurs payements tant en capital qu’in- 
térêts à la volonté du dit sieur Fison, qui pour l'exécution des présentes, 
a élu son domicile en la demeure actuelle au Coteau St. Louis près cette 
dite ville, auquel lieu, etc. promettant, etc. obligeant, etc. renoncant, etc. 
Fait et passé au dit Montréal, en l'étude les jour et an susdits, et ont signé 


lecture faite. 
(Signé) VEUVE MESPLET, 


J. B. DUROCHER, 

TISON, 

P. LUKIN, N. P., 

JEAN GUIL. L. DELISLE, N. P. 


No. 71. 
Transfer to Pierre Huguet dit Latour of above bond. 


Et le vingtiéme jour de mars, mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dix-sept, 
avant-midi. Est comparu devant les notaires 4 Montréal, soussignés, Jean 
Baptiste Durocher, Ecuyer, dénommé en l’acte ci-devant écrit et des autres 
parts, créancier y mentioné; lequel a par ces présentes, transporté sans 
aucune autre garantie que de ses faits et promesses seulement A sieur 
Pierre Huguet dit Latour, demeurant en cette ville, à ce présent et accep- 
tant, la somme de soixante-sept livres, un shelling et neuf pence sterling 
à lui due par dame Marie-Anne Tison, veuve de Fleury Mesplet, à prendre 
sur les argents à elle appartenant entre les mains de sieur Jean Baptiste 
Joseph Tison, son père, et par lui payable dans le délai de deux années 
avec les intérêts stipulés ci-devant. Lesquels dits intérêts le dit sieur 
Durocher transporte également au dit sieur Huguet dit Latour; payable 
la dite somme en un ou plusieurs payements ainsi que décrit et dont le 
dit sieur Huguet s’est tenu pour content et satisfait. Et pour faire signi- 
fier les présentes au dit sieur Tison, les parties ont constitué leur procu- 


280 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


reur le porteur leur donnant tout pouvoir, reconnaissant le dit sieur Duro- 
cher, avoir recu payement et satisfaction du dit sieur Huguet, pour pareille 
somme de soixante-sept livres, un snelling et neuf pence avec les intéréts 
échus et à écheoir, dont quittance et ont signé à Montréal en l'étude les 


jour et an susdits. 
(Signé) J. B. DUROCHER, 


P. HUGUET LATOUR, 
ew KUNE Nee 
JEAN GUIL. DELISLE, .N P. 


No. 72. 
Discharge of above bond. 


Aujourd'hui est comparu devant les notaires à Montréal, soussignés 
sieur Pierre Huguet La Tour, demeurant en cette ville, mentionné en 
Yacte de transport du vingt mars mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dix-sept, 
porté à la suite de Vobligation ci-contre et des autres parts; lequel a reconnu 
et confessé avoir eu et recu de Mr. Jean Baptiste Joseph Tison, pére; aussi 
dénommé au dit acte, la somme de soixante-sept livres un shelling et 
neuf pence argent sterling de la Grande Bretagne, avec les intéréts sur la 
dite somme calculée jusqu’aujourd’hui au moyen de quoi le dit sieur Tison 
demeure quitte et bien valablement déchargé ainsi que tous autres. 

Dont acte requis et octroyé à Montréal, en l'étude le vingt-deux novem- 
bre, mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dix-sept avant-midi, et a signê avec nous 


notaires lecture faite. 
P. HUGUET LATOUR, 


Py URGING NE. 
JEAN GUIL. DELISLE. 


No. 73. 
Inventory of stock and furniture of the late Fleury Mesplet. 


17 to 20 February, 1794. 

L’an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-quatorze, le dix-septiéme jour de février 
avant-midi, à la requête de dame Marie-Anne Tison, veuve de sieur Fleury 
Mesplet, imprimeur, demeurant en cette ville, rue Notre-Dame, tant en 
son nom que comme commune en biens avec le dit défunt son époux, sauf 
à elle à accepter ou à renoncer à la dite communauté, ainsi qu’il avisera 
par conseil; à la conservation des biens et droits de qui il appartiendra, 
par les notaires soussignés pour la province du Bas-Canada, residant à 
Montréal, a été fait inventaire et description de tous les biens, meubles 
ustensils de ménage, habits, linges, hardes, titres et papiers enseignements 
et autres effets demeurés après le décès du dit sieur Fleury Mesplet et 
qui étaient communs entre lui et sa dite veuve au jour de son décès, trouvés 
en la maison ou la dite veuve est demeurante, en laquelle le dit Fleury 
Mesplet est décédé le vingt-quatrième jour de janvier dernier montrés et 
enseignés aux dits notaires par la dite Marie-Anne Tison, après serment par 
elle prêté aux dits notaires de montrer et enseigner tous les dits biens, 
sans en cacher ni détourner aucune chose, se promettant où ils se trouve- 
ront le contraire aux peines en tels cas introduits, qui lui ont été exprimés 


[m‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 


281 


par les dits notaires, aux biens, meubles, prisés et estimés dans leur pleine: 
et entière valeur par Messieurs Louis Hardy et Charles Lusignan, qui les 
ont prisés et estimés en leur âme et conscience en égard au temps présent, 


ainsi qu'il suit et ont signé lecture faite, 


(Signé) TISON MESPLET, 
LOUIS HARDY, 
LUSIGNAN, 

LS. CHABOILLEZ, 


JEAN GUIL. DELISLE, N. EP. 


Premièrement dans la cuisine: 


Un tournebroche.. 
Une cramayère.. .. 

Un fer de chenets.. 

Quatre marmites ensemble.. 

Une pince, une pelle à feu.. 

Trois poéles a frire ensemble. PE State. enya hale 
Un poids de quatorze livres et un om livres ensemble .. 
Une tourtiére de cuivre rouge.. 

Une tourtiére de fer.. 

Trois petits trépieds 

Deux grils ensemble. Bars 

Une broche pour le tournebroche.. .. .. 


Une cramayére, une barre de fer ee deux EN i tout à dix 
francs... 


Une casserole de cuivre.. 

Trois fers a flasquer.. NE RE RS ered aioe ER Dare 

Une ioquéte sur couvert, une terrine de fer blanc avec son 
couvert.. 

Une jarre. = Se 60 oo : 

Une soupière, un plat et un arrosoir ae a Dane 

Un moulin à poivre. Merle Me iallle 

Une passoire de cuivre et un y dutsa de cuivre. 

Un canard de cuivre. 

Une broche... | 

Quatre sceaux ferrés.. 38 BECOME ER RS E RE 

Un couteau à hacher et une sauce-panne, ensemble... 

Six plats ovals.. ; 

Une soupière.. Mes 

Trois chandeliers de cuivre. 56 

Un martinet et deux porte- Lo ae 

Un pilon de fer.. LR EN TS CREME 

Une fontaine de fer blanc et son bassin... 

Trois égohines.. - 

Une cuillère à pot et son oies 

Une petite laiterie .. = As 

Un pré de balance de fer pei. 

Un moulin à café.. . 


Hola le citer @ 8), 16 el) ds) we oe ee 


Sec. II., 1906. 19 


24.00 
1.10 
4.00 

18.00 
3.00 
9.00 
3.10 
6.00 
3.00 
2.00 
2.00 
3.00 


6.00 
6.00 
6.00 


3.00 
12.00 
4.00 
2.00 
6.00 
4.00 
1.10 
6.00 
4.00 
4.00 
4.10 
9.00 
4.00 
4.00 
12.00 
12.00 
2.00 
2.00 
4.00 
6.00 


282 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Deux, Hoites, de-fer DIANC NME OUEN ANS NAS INT IE ETC 
Un petit buffet avec sallet.. 

Une table et son tiroir... 

Une caisse.. 

Cinq cadres.. 

Un billot.. 


Dans la chambre: 


Neuf'chaises peinturéesens Deter icya) CCC EC ARC 

Six chaises tournées.. 

Huit chaises vertes.. 

Une armoire de noyer.. 

Une armoire de pin.. 

Une table de noyer.. 

Trois jalousies.. 

Un miroir doré.. 

Quatre cadres.. 

Quatre images... : 

Un coffre avec un tiroir. 

Une canne à poignée ae cuivre. pe ease kee PET à 

Un lit consistant en une ian ae eine: une paire de 
draps, sa couverte et la couchette avec le tour de lit 
complet... UMR Uee 

Six tasses à café avec le sucrier.. 

Une montre avec sa boite.. 


Dans un coffre se sont trouvées les hardes du sieur Mesplet: 


Une redingotte de drap.. .. .. .. Yor Katia) Mere Tous le le ue ae et UC VA 
Un habit vert et culotte de drap ess be jaune. 
Une veste verte de casimir brodé.. 

Un habit, une veste et culotte drap noir.. 

Une culotte drap noir. de LUN SNS h pote Dee 
Une veste de taffetas noir, une idee ne serge ue Nimes) 
Une veste satin broché. 

Une veste de soie rayée. 5 seed 

Une robe de caambre et sa veste CORTE 

Trois petits gilets de corvée, ensemble... 

6 paires de bas de serge ensemble... 

Un casque de marte avec sa boite.. 

Un manchon de loup.. tee 

Six couteaux à manche argentés.. cree 

Six couteaux et six fourchettes à manche vert.. 

Quatre couteaux et quatre fourchettes à manche blanc.. 
Onze cuillères d’étain avec la boite.. 

Cinq douz. et une assiette de gré . 

Trois) saladiers RENE R 

Tense HU ER Wed) maven) eve my ida RE tel SR 
Deux sauciers et quatre aaiueves avec un moutardier.. 
Cing petites bolles de. gré, ensemble.. 

Un pot au lait... 


4.00 
12.00 
3.00 
1.00 
3.00 
1.00 


8.00 
18.00 
48.00 
12.00 

8.00 

9.00 

9.00 
12.00 
12.00 

1.10 
12.00 

6.00 


mémoire 


3.00 
60.00 


24.00 
72.00 
9.00 
60.00 
9.00 
12.00 
15.00 
6.00 
4.10 
4.10 
12.00 
6.00 
6.00 
9.00 
6.00 
1.10 
3.00 
13.00 
3.00 
1.10 
2.00 
2.00 
.10 


[m‘LacnLaAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 283 


RIP TINGS SOLES ental ciel IIS RS sete ele! Neisil isle ne) sie bee | CY 

Deux petits plats longs.. .. 

Onze soucoupes et cing tasses.. .. 

MPOISEDOLS GE EEE AUCUN UN ster ie! SENS NS Selle 

Pmeabaret de Mohagony ne et ee, sic) we ee fee) Leler elle) sn ive) ve 
18 février 1794. 


Un tableau pour les graines de Lion à un volume .. 
Deux apôtres avec le palmier.. Sater ae 

Six cruches de 3 gallons de grés.. .. .. 

Six pôts de grés.. SAR 

Six grandes images estimées.. 

Dix do passion... .. 


cy 


BOUx COJDASSION 5 Sellsc oo @ 

Un chapeau... 

Deux bolles.. Breve 

Deux bonnets de coton.. dio foc 

Une robe de chambre Bregopion blanc.. 

Une robe de couverte.. 

Un fusil. af Patel oko" Selah, 2e : 

Un étui à razoir et la pierre à Hate pees pies - relie 

Cent cinquante-trois numéros de la Traduction de Burn’s jus- 
tice, à deux sols pièce, fait. EVER QE da hs aus ui 

Treize paquets dont les noms des LAVAL TE ANR sont écrits dessus 
et qui doivent leur souscription.. 

Onze chemises estimées ensemble... 

Douze calendriers... 


Dans la salle: 


Neuf verres à patte.. 
Sept gobelets.. 

Trois plus grands.. hoo ae 
Deux patites carafes de chopine.. 
Une théiére .. 

Deux pots.. i : 
Une boite de fer Dane. 
Seize fioles. He 
Trois ER ensemble. 1e Mo De 
Huit nappes de Malaie et Russie, lee 

Cinq draps, ensemble... 

Quatre serviettes 21.2. 1... 

Deux douz. de torchons.. .. 

ne bergeres. 0... 

ASTUSTNELIMOMELLE 220 orcs ore! so rio 

Un baromètre.. .. .. ab 

Deux cadres Louis XVI a in Reine. = a 
Deux tableaux du Roy et la Reine dived tetra, RM AS 
Cinq grands cadres vitrés à sept livres pièce, fait.. 

Six moyens cadres vitrés.. 


COOOL ‘uk Oe Degas Ti | ee ee 


2.00 
1.00 
2.00 
1.10 
3.00 


= Al 
3.00 
12.00 
12.00 
6.00 
9.00 
1.00 
6.00 
1.10 
1.10 
18.00 
12.00 
24.00 
3.00 


15.60 


mémoire 
66.00 
6.00 


2.00 
2.00 
1.10 
3.00 
1.10 
1.00 
1.10 
4.00 
9.00 

24.00 

12.00 
1.00 
6.00 
2.00 
9.00 

18.00 
1.10 

12.00 

35.00 

24.00 


284 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Trois petits en maroquin.. Seater kore 

Deux petits cadres différentes facons.. 

Six tasses et soucoupes.. 

Un miroir à cadre doré.. 

Louis XV à cheval.. 

Un dessus de porte peint.. 

Un pied détal.. 

Une table pliante.. 

Une pendule.. ; 58 

Un grand guéridon as “monncene 

Une table de Mohagony avec son tiroir.. 

Un bureau de Mohagony.. Ao oe 

Une petite table bleue avec son tiroir.. aleve tue 

Un grand carnet d’étain avec un sablier de bois.. 

Huit brochets, à chapeaux.. SNL ee Re ek 

Deux paires de rideaux avec quatre ne de 7S et ses 
anneaux. Me Dee Le mele cetemicieues eet Ga 

Un poéle de fer avec son ie et huit feuilles de tuyaux.. 

Un chien de marbre. TSG. Tie Ore WOES 

Un trébuchet à peser nereut avec ses Pont 

Deux arrosoirs de jardin.. 

Une chaise d’aisance.. 


Dans le boudoir: 


Quatre paquets de petites heures commencée en feuille, estimés. cy 
Deux paquets d'A B C français en feuille.. 

Une rape à tabac. 5 

Un paquet de arti s justice.. See 

Deux paquets de feuilles de Ste- Famille. 

Deux paquets en feuille de psautiers re Se rere, COT Che 
Une presse complète à papier.. 

Un calendrier avec son cadre.. 


Dans le magasin. 


Trois chapaux de castor à douze francs pièce, font.. .. .. .. .. cy 
Un paquet de calendriers perpétuels.. 

Un paquet de Ste-Semaine.. SEEN > Eve 

Dix livres reliés de gazettes, six francs chaque.. 

Un volume des annales de Sainte, relié à.. 

Deux Burn’s justice, demi reliure... 

Un almanach royal.. > rie 

Un dictionnaire français et latin.. 

Trois volumes de littérature. 


Quatre volumes Triomphe as la Peoetaenee) A CAE Bak. 
Amis AESNENLAMES Re on 
Emicodetoriitaires AMC ENNEMI NPA TR RENE 
Un St-Francois Xavier, relié... 05.0. 00 ce wie 


Sept St-Francois Xavier, demi reliure.. .. 


6.00 
14.00 
4.00 
30.00 
3.00 
3.00 
1.10 
24.00 
48.00 
96.00 
24.00 
96.00 
9.00 
3.00 
4.00 


30.00 
120.00 
3.00 
5.00 
6.00 
6.00 


24.00 
48.00 
1.00 
1.10 
6.00 
36.00 
18.00 
.15 


36.00 
12.00 
6.00 
60.00 
12.00 
6.00 
3.00 
6.00 
9.00 
12.00 
2.00 
3.00 
2.00 
.15 
3.10 


[M‘LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 


Dix livres de priéres en sauvage.. 

Huit nouvelles méthodes pour le latin.. Rahs 
Douze rules and regulations for field exercises, à.. 
Wie bans en miniaiure ys...) net Lt 3 
Soixante-cinq psautiers, reliés. NN SNA 
Deux douz. et sept lettres de Ca ei. le tout. 

Dix phédres latins. ORNE 

Trente-cinq onto te en Bebe take: Nh Brot toto her 
Trente-cinq anecdotes en brocnure.. 

Un plomb à papier.. Me held ales aie es le 

Six douz. Sts. Anges, à trente sols la douz., fiat 

Un paquet de sentences. 

Deux douz. et demi, nee des Enfants. 
Soixante-cing A BC. Tete ee AR à x 
Cent quarante-cing pastilles AE EE e tout Ss 
Trois cent douz. Easy Rules. ; : are Mate lee 
Vingt-trois constitutions neiges Droits ae patois aes 
Un livre de Priéres anglais.. 

Six invocations du Bon Sens.. 

Huit Jonathas et David.. Pi 

Quarante-six versifications francaises. . 

Un receuil de théologie.. SORA ST SIENS 
Vingt-cinq ouvrages de la Valinière Cathéchiyme, nes Ae 
Sept vraie Histoire Chantante de la Valiniére à.. 
Une Chronique des Rois de France.. 
Cinquante-quatre livres blancs. 

Trente-deux Constitution PRE 

Dix-nuit Cathéchisme de la Confirmation, te tout à. 

Un paquet de cantiques en feuille.. 

Un paquet de Discipline Militaire. 

Un paquet de Messe de la Ste- Famille. 

Un paquet A B C français... 

Un paquet de. sere se 

Un paquet de epee cos nea: 

Un paquet de lettres circulaires.. 

Trois paquets spelling books. Lis 

Un paquet de Guide de la vie nec 

Un paquet d'engagement... 

Deux paquets de Vandarac. se 

Deux gravures en cuivre, une A i Christ. . 

Un paquet de Dieu 

Six paquets Exemples.. 

Le Bill de Québec.. 

Vingt-six mains de papiers, 

Vingt paquets de papier a eae À 

Dix mains de papier commun.. 

Six mains de papier commun.. .. 

Dix-huit mains de papier commun.. 

Trente-six mains de papier bleu.. 

Un lot de mains de papier, le tout.. 

Douze mains de papier.. .. .. .. 


285 


6.00 
6.00 
9.00 
1.10 
33.00 
15.00 
3.00 
9.00 
9.00 
15 
9.00 
6.00 
12.00 
3.00 
36.00 
18.00 
12.00 
6.00 
1.10 
2.00 
15.00 
15 
12.00 
3.00 
1.10 
5.08 
12.00 
2.14 
6.00 
3.00 
3.00 
15.00 
3.00 
1.10 
3.00 
12.00 
6.00 
1.10 
6.00 
12.00 
6.00 
3.00 
1.05 
18.00 
18.00 
5.00 
6.00 
18.00 
30.00 
7.00 
10.00 


286 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Vingt-une mains de papier rouge.. 

Six demi-mains papier Royale.. 

Deux mains de papier commun. 3 
Quinze demi-mains de papier Ga Roel: 


Une rame de papier à lettre doré, contenant quarante Lee . 


Quatre cahiers à lettre uni. Ë 
Dix mains à peu près de papier arbre, an ae 
Neuf mains de papier plus petit a.. 

Une boite pleine d’oublies.. LENS 
Dix-huit boites remplies d’oublies.. .. 
Quatorze cent plumes Atécrire ae APN 
Quatre douz. et trois crayons. se 
Trois paquets de poudre à encre rouge.. 
Quatre paquets de poudre à encre noire... 
Quatre fioles encre rouge préparée... 

Onze paquets grandes cartes blanches... 
Treize régles rondes. . 
Quinze paquets Run uy est anes 

Neuf sabliers. é 

Cinq cornets a” papier. 

Six cornets de cire.. 

Cing cornets de cuivre.. 

Un cornet d’étain quarré.. 

Un cornet rond. NS Loc 

Trois livres de cire à cher noire. 

Sept livres de cire à cacheter rouge.. 
Vingt-trois batons différentes couleurs... 
Deux trébuchets de chagrin... 

Deux trébuchets de Mahogany.. 

Cinq petites tablettes avec leur crayon. 
Trois couteaux d’avoire à papier.. 

Deux porte-feuilles noirs.. AW ots 

Deux porte-feuilles Maroquin rouge.. 
Quatre vers à cornets. 

Deux grands vers a Cons. HAT DOME 
Six feuilles et deux morceaux ae anemia! 
Une boite avee un restant d’oublies.. 

Cinq timbres. E 
Une équerre He un ce HOSEES. ae cuivre. 


Tl s’est trouvé des livres appartenant à Edouard Guille. 
Gray, Ecuyer, qu'il avait donné à vendre au sieur Mesplet: 


Un Missel.. 

Six Rondots.. : 

Un Breviaire, 4 vols.. 
Dictionnaire de 2 vols.. .. .. 
Cinq Virgiles.. ete 

Une Semaine Sainte... .. .. 
Un Diurnat.. sits 
Trois manuels romains.. 


.. pour mémoire 


{m‘LacHtan] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 287 


ro nianuels romains ovOlssie .. <i) 0-0: 0... 1. CY meémoire 


Une seringue.. .. .. AU RONA EI MAN Ne © kt hee 15.00 
Deux paquets de er UE ANS MR AS EU NES MR Te SD ue “ise 3.00 
Un livre anglais... .. .. LEP Se RONA MA RES REC ER EM EEE .10 
Une petite boite A vandarar: D'OR aie atl cbr CRD de EAN SOI MONO RCI LI .10 


19 février 1794, 
REET COMORES elle ee ole Jel dee ee ele ee CY 1.10 


Dans le haut de la maison: 


L’imprimerie complète, ainsi qu’il est mentionné dans l'état 
remis par Edouard Guillaume Gray, Ecuyer, qui a prévenu 
qu’elle lui appartenait, l'ayant laissé à feu Mr. Mesplet pour 
s'en servir seulement et dont il sera seulement fait mémoire: 

mémoire 

Une presse à relieure avec ses ustensils complets, ensemble... cy 100.00 
Cinq paires de cases neuves, avec les couvertures neuves venus 
le printemps dernier d'Europe suivant la facture et en 
outre une paire de boites remplies de gros caractères, 


nriséesietrestimeées le) TOWE Be si En salles NT She ce 1400.00 
Un palmier poële avec huit feuilles de tuyaux.. .. .. .. .. .. 60.00 
wn poele ALfOUr. - .. .. Sean ats Se ASEAN | COM OOH Ine on eee 60.00 
Une gravure du Christ sur ois de a delete lee cle 3.00 
PREUVE CRE TEMES RES ASUS LENS 6.00 
CRE VOLS ets RSR EE TONER CREER iNalei pated ayetl haus’, \ Sie 12.00 
LEUR COEÉRLe el celle Poet EME RE D OR RE EC UT era 6.00 
D Lu ei en wa eee (ae 1.00 
nee DaAthere cuivre jaune. en MAR... 2 as ee lew (ele SEE 12 00 
PERTE TT OASIS M Te se lee ol se as jeta me 1.10 
Rem MOLLe ma ECDADEAUS MES MR NET ln Se Wee Sever (har lit .10 
mirmcoire Templl Ge papier imprimé: , 66 2. 4 30e eles) ay as 12.90 
Mmescaisse remplie de papier Imprimé.).. 2. 26) cei ll ee ana 5 09 
Hmercaisse remplie de papier imprimé... .:. 60 .. ce +. 4. 1.3 os 12.00 
RER ORERAONDOOUE ses NM MES Wis sie Lan) en lew! ee ut ese! 12.00 
ÉÉRSNEMILESRCOUVERECS SEM ne de (siek (e's. Sie) se aie) vale) mie wearer ee 6.00 
LOUE DROITE CET teh ied oe, sel sts EP EP PE 3.09 
DE REURE TEE Ce OMR RE PE REC IT 8.00 
DE MORE Ce TETE SE MP RE yale, tele (ore ee) lions 3.00 
PRES DE ILC SCOUVCLECS PALM LES AM NI ves). ete pes 6.00 
Enipcttitideplüumetct SON traversin.. 2. 26 26 ne fe ws oe ee 12.00 
PRÉPAS me bel aCOUCHEtLO. |. jas sis ac, s6 cis lee lee aye es 2.00 
Hastedendienontlle mila sPAllASSE).. 55, cic) feles wie cece sevice co wie 6.00 
UCC AMO MT UIL OITA rls fo are, de jets bys ve yale eke (ae) ee lee yas 12.00 
EECA EVOUITCCS EG OWIIV TES fai cisi clei Asie) aveil ics! 6.6) joue eco sie aies ole ele deve 3.00 
PIO ee CANSRC HMAC Os AICS 3 6 ay) ie os ia\e)! EE 6.00 
IDES (ERNE. Ge. SN ESS RER EE 6.00 
Deux caisses de ferrailles.. en eee three seize rte 6.00 
Une gravure en bois de ns tabon EM NRA ME LP RITES .10 
EN Ra Une lu ais las ates tule’ du lee vies 6.00 
PÉTER OLOUM OLS EP so ers lee de coyoh ES! MN een dus ee sie se) Se lee 6.00 


ire Tye GE TGs. Lee Se es ee oe 1.10 


288 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Wy Vieux KCOFETE a) ish ES Sen CSE SO Det les el EE TE EURE 1.00 
AIM AVICUR CONTE: 20 sa sire EN OA EE RS ceed Hares, Meret denen EURE 1.00 
Wn iboisvdecouchettes | cu gee pete ae ea eveiociinten yah. cseltibede) Imeeterte pei bersas 15 
Uneyvieilé 2 malle TRE MEN ER NP ET Pete ee EEE 1.10 
Quatre (ChASSIS OT REA ET RE ME EUR Cie RAC MS NE 9.00 
Deux /tarsettes A TES ENS CURE ME MENU, CR RS CES 0 1.10 
Un: piège A TASSE LANTA NS QE CR ARE Tice) site, EE 3.00 
Une presse): À TOWLE. Pee hein rere eS ime a to cola eee Weer dnr cue rR 12.00 
Deux icCOtesidevcazeneraill Gree. RCE EE NE ER OCR EEE 3.00 
Unvciél Ge Ets ae SN RENNAIS NS TM AT RE STE 1.10 
Une plaque de plomb ANSE sesame RE TES Um AE ee 3.00 
Une spairel de wpincCes te she aera RAS ANS Oe Mi Rte 1.10 


Dans le bas: 


Les tablettes, cloisons, et portes dépendants du magasin, 
ENSEMDIC A ANUS ERA NUE el ble The le MAL EURE Meee PURE SNS 12.00 


Dans la cave: 


Une chaudière de cuivre.. .. . les Lost 12.00 
Deux tinettes et une vieille Hautiere) ae fer Minne. Ay le lle ue 1.00 
ing: cuves: n°10 As re ae Mreisipalsm’etout shee Ve Mets Me ee tee tenets 6.00 
Une cuve de Cotes orme haies lee le lee ere MS oncle Mer ets Rite 4.00 
Une canevette et huit FES DR NES AN GE LE NE Se MAS PIS ci Go 9.00 
MIN SAONE LEE ia tgs MAR rene date ab haw MONTS Lee) Ve Re Ne 1.10 
UMLAETADANCOIELE, LUE TEA LR ER STE NE A ANS ee RETIRE roe 2.00 
Cinq douz. de bouteilles à quarante sols la douz., fait.. .. .. 10.00 
Deux quarts vendus ass lee ANR SN NE MR TU 2.00 


Dans la cour: 


TN eSsCADeAU RE ENT MAUR eee OT D A RE 1.00 
Une pioche, un rateau et un ed lé tout! Ed ee MT ake eas 4.10 
Une brouette.. .. .. Rien tele ob RAR Ne Aer ee MES ME UE 1.00 
Une meule ae sa manivelle! a io) DS STARR ote D OURS CON EE Rs Cea ee 3.00 
Wine: cage a ,DOULE. Mia cclodleers o neua sie OMR Eo eleh ces cue bie me ene eee 1.00 


Montant total des meublesi:) (-) 2. es ee ace cv204609105 


Dettes actives. 

Livre A 

Polio i Par Madame Cazeaus EEE EME ONCE CANCER CV 17.16 
ef 12 Par Mr FOIE Se insets route DEAR NI eeu eee 916.15 
LE 14) (Par Philippe Loubet NICE NE RENE RER 100.02 
a 20 Par Mr. Philippe ones Date Sucre ste date fe 3.00 
= 23 Par Me. Edw. Guille Gra a ree) a atest theta rakes eke fmémoire 
Fe Zon PAT Mid. AG Tay LA NTéSler ANNE SEM EEE mémoire 
380) (bar Mr a. “Broguerien is iain MER rene eee 122.06 
“104 Par l’Honorable de RE ANTÉ BIEL EE ee NOT mémoire 


INOS, 89) NEO Wan! Powell EN NS PEN ER ET ETS Ne CRC Va 64.00 
MY HA NE MEZAGr ec UMR PT ES AN NE Uae ol wie teh ele RTE 6.17 
ee 62) Mr. Mangan ae ce RE tae Busca eh" Basle Maem wet elt gelrepe NS 18.00 
di 6G4MCAaD CATCHIbAlIARMCDONELANEMErME EN cleiisss ain -a-nawere eens 36.00 


[m'LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 289 


Livre B 


No. 66 
gb 75 
Ps 80 
à 90 
OLIS 
sg 21 
ALT 
“ue 110 
130 


Livre C 


TRESS Le à. 0 01 ECONOMIE CSC SSSR 12.00 
Nir UGS à 10 MOTO OMIS CASE NS EEE 36.00 
ie (Garton 6, ORIG Ae iigio Cie NOR Ob S/o Ce oc mémoire 
Mis: WOE LENT 6 OT CRC ES RME ET MS) er 2.08 
VE PAUN GC LIMA WOCA ROMEO ROMA sole Nostell EE RENE 22.02 
Wop. Tid TESA, oo EI Ne oasis le OD OCm a ee oe Chea »1A lee 1.16 
Madame ie FC MR se ue rate ete Mann Sh tis Os Yenc 23.05 
ass Torre a Maye vais) s/s) eae psc EN ERRCRERC PREECE 20.00 
be, IR CO RENE EE RAS lotel ew. fie 9.00 


Petits comptes dont partie sont dus et le reste à 
TABI s Af eS Coa Saree POO WOE ON Eo mémoire 


Lettre D Jean Reid, Ecuyer, par son es eae 1. Stine se CYS), AT 06 
Livre E Mr. Thomas Forsyth, une année de master Ed 18.00 


Folio 


il 
2 
2 
3 
3 
4 
5 
5 
5 
6 
6 
ü 
7 
8 


NEÉMEATANCOISRPAREIerRe NS MMS NL NN ater eis stan CY; 16.00 
BAEONGEADIe MOCCONMEC|. NUS UE MR NCIS Ue. 72.00 
AT, MORE LUE LR EEE ER sa) nesta. ere! Serel-seye 18.00 
Colonel eee ent. HapPNneeene Soret ave le since et Mee rate li liaie Main hers 18.00 
RO TUE ER SEEN ER RSR M NE 26 18.00 
BHÉoOnorAble Jean EP TASeM sc ack os MN hele eo eso” 9.00 
BÉOnorables James Walker: eee TES ee ele) fave 18.00 
PPO CLCUEM VANES SENS NAS MER veo ater me Lee 18.00 
Docteur Jobert..) 2.) 3: HOM TRH eee CORO Eee Ne NENA 18.00 
L’Honorable iene McGill. dore ts lhuis Vars France eis, os 18.00 
L’Honorable Josepn Papineat. RA eR othe EE RE EE 18.00 
BOCEeUTNJONESÉ MR EME Ce Miele pelen “olen iis) Gaia. ones cele 18.00 
Miriam NiArre xP Oren criss lies) AR ee 171.00 
mémoire 

Jeanmescenm DD UTOCREr ECUVeEr. MR oe) cis ss sie lee cies) CY; 18.00 
mémoire 

Ni PHO Re ULI ER CS heise tele ieee lots Cole. SEC 171700 
mémoire 

MA PA Tex Anare ELON sl. srs Los Gree) we en Mesh ae, “ae CY 18.00 
RRORMAS MEE BAGO TER aL ee gi a na a Pate Re a 54.00 
dj. Isl, BR yg Sagas he) Gao OR EE TRE 90.00 
Mr. Jean delisle, pére.. .. . ù OR NE EE RC ENT PET 18.00 
ilies, IMIGVARS HEC © 1 GRU ee LU Mae Les tas ee NA ONE 21.17 
Mr. Maurice eat srl wich el eee Mckee = cite te iete Dfele 18.17 
VET An A NÉE ES MON REMERCIER ER EE ET APE 144.00 
mémoire 

RE CE EN ei ces ee es le ay ren lieues Vo oeuvre CY 48.00 
NPC HAEME NDrEETE. aise ice wer none der ee lot Ue 18.00 
eM LIM SCH ENORME ER EE RE 40.10 
RENE SR OR Lost eue ss die wie wel tele! Nels 66.00 
NT ET Mein hohe) dorcel nee ec goss jeta la te + 8.00 
bee Hoi CUIR, ÉCART RI ERP CURREEET 13.10 
iin. Dons Des es a ER EE NE an 17.02 
Use, PET ne ee RS RE NE EE TE se)! lee nie 13.10 
EEC MICS CARTIER Ne sn! ve nee ce sole aie) lale ele 18.00 


290 


Folio 18 


“6 


19 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Mr. Etienne Duignion.. 
Mr. Foucher, fils.. 

Mr. Mailloux, ptre.. 
Mr. Lukin, notaire... 
Mr. Gibb, tailleur.. 

J. G. Délinel, fils.. 


Mr. Hoyle.. 


Mr. Desriviéres Beaubien... .. .. .. 


Mr. Le Houlier.. Niet 

Me Detlotbiniénes ieee teeie 
Messrs. de Lottiniére et Symes.. 
Mr. Anctil, avocat.. 

Mr. Dillon.. ; 

Mr. Duchouquet.. à 

Mr. Trudeau, tailleur... 


Mr. Standfield.. 

Mr. Joseph Nolin.. 
MrMRASCONV- conde een or 
Jean Donagany, à régler.. 
Me. Russell, avocat.. sake 
Melle LaValterie, à régler.. 
Mr. La Promenade... . 

Duncan Fisher.. 


Mr. Joseph Perrault, charpentier.. 


Mr. Thomas Sullivan.. 
M. Barthelotte Dartigny.. 
‘L’Honorable Ant. Panet.. 
Madame Des Fonds.. 
Thomas Walker, Ecuyer.. 
Mr. Hébert.. 

Mr. Ferguson.. 

Mr. Racicot.. <- 

Mr. Dumaine.. 

Mr. L. Olivier... 

Mr. Filion.. 

Mr. Taschereau.. 

Mr. Alex Dumas.. 

Mr. Corbin.. ais 

Mr. J. B. Hervieux.. 

Mr. Dubaron.. PEN oat EE 
Mr. Jacques Roux, à régler.. 
Mr. Duchesneau.. 

Mr. Ferriére.. 

Mr. Ferriére.. 

Mr. Frank.. 

Mr. Labadie.. : 

Mr. Bonavy Panet.. 
Frederick Singer.. 


25.10 

4.10 

81.10 

18.00 

18.15 

ME 90.00 
mémoire à régler. 
cy 18.15 
18.15 

13.10 

© 40.10 
13.10 

13.10 

13.10 

18.00 

31.00 
mémoire 
3.00 

3.00 

2.05 
mémoire 
cy 14.05 
mémoire 
cy 13.10 
12415 

6.00 

2.05 

18.00 

18.00 

18.00 

14.00 

10.10 

16.10 

7.10 

19.10 

19.10 

10.10 

19.10 

18.00 

6.10 

15.00 

15.00 
mémoire 
19.10 

2.05 

16.10 

13.10 

38.05 

81.00 

81.00 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 291 


Folio 44 Monseigneur de Singer... .. .. .. 
ad 44 Mr. A. Gopellier.. 
s 44 Sr. A. Gosselin.. 
oe 45 Mr. McFarlane.. 
à 45 Mr. Liebert.. 
oe 46 Mr. Sketchley.. 
Livre F. Par Mr. Labadie.. 
Feuilles volantes: 
No. AA Par M. Durocher.. 


BB Par Mr. Lambert.. 
Ms CC Par Mr. John Robb.. 
DD Par Mr. Fisher. ae 
ss EE Mr. Brown, LEA à AA 
+ FF Par. Mr. Oldham. 
2 GG Par Mr. J. A. ae à HUE 
se HH Par M. Perrault. L'ORTOMRE 
ti II Par Mr. Delisle, pa aes a Eee 
* KK Par Mr. Anctil 
a LL Par Mr. Foretier.. 
ti MM Par Mr. Ducalvet. oe 
> NN Un bon de Bernier et Jones pour. es i a 
ne OO Un billet de Mr. Ignace Bourassa pour la somme de. 
Cinq bons de dix-sept shellings de Mr. Foretier 
faisant. Ge era Eto SEE Bee 
Par RE et Ue ation La a G. a. sere 
Jean Bte. Larchevesque.. NS US PET PES 
Par jugement paraphé Q. G. D. contre Jean Bte. 
Molière, et les intérêts à ajouter.. 


20 février 1794. 


Un paquet contenant environ quatre cent soixante- 

‘quinze piastres argent, papier des Etats-Unis, 
de nulle valeur, pour.. CS RTE 

“ PP Par Samuel David, compte à régler.. 

F QQ Par feu George Smyth.. 

“ RR Par Mr. M.. De 

à SS Par Mr. Liebert. 

~ Par Mr. Tr : 4 

s VV Par M. Nash, compte a beaten.) srs 

“UU Par Benjamin Barry, 3 mois de Gazette.. 

= AR ut 

YY Par Mr. Püaillipps.. 

nt ZZ Par Mr. Young Geolier.. 

as && Par Jean Bte Neveu.. 

&va Par M. Alex Serres. : : .. 

Porte-feuille AB. Sept aptes et billets dines par Pr DS 


Montant des dettes actives. 


162.00 
19.10 
19.10 
19.10 
19:10 

1.10 

133.08 


cy 3.14 
mémoire 
cy 8.18 
6.00 

54.00 
mémoire 
cy 4.08 
mémoire 
cy 82.12 
mémoire 
cy 49.08 
144.04 
648.00 

52.08 

133.00 


20.08 


21.08 


39.16 


mémoire 
mémoire 
cy 21.00 
8.00 

40.08 
32.08 
mémoire 
6.00 

14.12 
77.16 
122.00 
40.08 
14.08 
130.17 


6087.13 


292 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Dettes passives. 


Aux héritiers Chenier et Aubuchon pour deux quartiers de loyer 
de la maison, échus le premier de mai prochain à cin- 
quante livres) par) chaque trois mois fait... ci) iis) EU NC: 

Pour frais funéraires, de feu M. Mesplet.. | 

A Samuel, pour la cire.. Soc 

‘A Mr. Lardy, pour cing pains.. 

Au Docteur Bender.. 

A La Coste, perruquier.. SONO 

A Mr. Sheffler, suivant son compte.. 

A Mr. Jos. M. Perrault. Rs Mere te ere te |)ic 

A Edouard Guillaume Grey pour livres qu vil avait Rs à 
vendre au sieur Mesplet suivant son compte se montant 
à vingt-cinq livres quatre shellings et six pence sterling, 
sur quoi il y aura à déduire les livres qui restent in- 
vendus ainsi qu'il est porté au présent inventaire pour 
mémoire, compte à régler.. 

Au dit sieur Gray, l’ancienne imprimerie avec ses caractères, 
et autres ustensils en dépendant, appartenant le tout au 
dit sieur Gray, comme l'ayant acheté par encan public, 
ne l'ayant passé au sieur Mesplet que pour s’en servir.. 

A bon a Gibb, tailleur, suivant son compte affirmé... .. .. .. cy 

A John Fisher, marchand, suivant son compte.. 

A Mr. La Mare porlier, suivant son compte affirmé.. 

A François Trudeau, suivant son compte affirmé.. Met 

A M. Jacques Le Moine, de Québec, suivant sa lettre en date 
du dix février, courant la somme de. we 56 

A Mr. Berger, suivant obligation la somme ie sept mille fates 
cents livres, sans y comprendre les intéréts qui doivent 
y être ajoutés.. oN ate Sey à 

A M. Marassé, suivant son Gant la somme de. 

A Jean Bte. Durocher, Ecuyer, suivant son obligation. 5 

A Mr. Jonathan Abraham Gray, suivant son billet du 18 do 
1785, jusqu’au 18 janvier 1794, avec intérêts... 

A Mr. Emond, de Québec, pour balance de compte... 

A Philippe Loubet, suivant billet, la somme de .. 

A Mr. de Longueuil pour loyer.. Ho 

A Mr. Lusignan, suivant obligation la somme de.. 

A Madame Mesplet veuve, pour son deuil, la somme de.. 

A Charles Rascony.. : 

A J. G. Delisle, suivant son compte.. 

A J. G. Delisle pour traduction.. 

Montant des dettes passives commues.. ies 

Tl faut observer que par le contrat de mariage de feu sieur 
Mesplet et la dite De Marie-Anne Tison, sa veuve, il est fait 
mention qu'il appartiendrait à la dite veuve Mesplet qu'elle 
avait apporté à son dit mariage et qu'elle s’est réservé nature de 
propre la somme de trois mille vingt-deux livres dix sols ou 
sa-llings de vingt coppres, pour laquelle somme et au-dela elle 
avait consenti deux obligations, dont une à M. Charles Lusi- 


300.00 
53.00 
23.12 

3.00 
12.00 
12.00 
58.00 
32.05 


mémoire 


mémoire 
96.00 
196.11 
552.00 
90.00 


552.00 


7200.00 
1764.12 
3145.11 


1347.04 
158.14 
3428.00 
500.00 
1160.00 
193.10 
24.00 
337.15 
60.00 
21279.14 


enan et l'autre ja Jean BterDuUrocCher MECUVET ME CREER mémoire 


[M‘LACHLAN ] 


Titres et papiers. 


Contrat de mariage entre Mr. Fleury Mesplet et Dlle. Marie 
Anne Tison, en date du 11 avril 1790, aux clauses et con- 
ditions y contenues, No. et cotté.. Ce eens have 

Une liasse de papiers intitulé Comptes et Billets, inventoriés 
ÉCOLOS EME eee en er ANRT ley tae 

Une liasse de papiers intitulé Des Tautiles., etc., mauvaises 
dettes, inventorie, cotté. SMe. Ce antes 

Une liasse de papiers intitulé Papiers de Robinet 

Une liasse de papiers intitulé Dettes passives 

Une liasse de papiers intitulé Quittance.. “ta 

Une liasse de papiers intitulé Petits Livres et Bons 

Une liasse de papiers intitulé Lettres.. AS CPU DA NES GENE D EURE 

Un paquet couvert de papier bleu contenant l'argent papier 
des Etats-Unis. 45 dt 

Un porte-feuille marqué en anda A. B, 
tances et comptes dus.. BY heb. ete bi, Dot Gide ORME 

Un répertoire marqué depuis la lettre A jusqu’a celle Z.. 

Un livre de souscription à Bonne Justice, contenant huit pages 

Un livre de compte contenant vingt-quatre pages.. es 

Livre E Un livre de compte contenant quatre-vingt-quatorze 

pages.. SPA teeta erat ete Senet Jes See cha 
# D Un livre sur lequel il n’y a que trois pages d’entrées 
et qui ne contient que le compte de Mr. Reid. 
“#“ CC Un livre de compte, contenant dix pages écrites seu- 
lement le reste blanc.. 


contenant des quit- 


cinquante-quatre 


“A Un livre de compte, contenant 
pages et demie dont une page et demie à la fin 
et le reste blanc... re tes da ee Dessin 

“  B Un livre de compte, contenant cent quatre-vingt- 
treize colonnes... 5 oo od oo pe 2 

#“ EF Un petit livre contenant seulement quatre pages 
d'écrites.. 


FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 


293 


Dix 

Onze 
Douze 
Treize 
Quatorze 


Quinze 


Seize 


Dix-Sept 


Dix-Huit 


Dix-Neuf 


Ce fait après avoir vaqué depuis la dite heure jusqu’à cinq heures du 
soir et qu’il ne s’est plus rien trouvé à inventorier a été cessé, et tout le 
contenu au présent inventaire est demeuré en la garde et possession de 
la dite dame Marie-Anne Tison, veuve Mesplet, qui a promis le tout mon- 
trer et exhiber toutes fois et quand elle en sera requise promettant qu’au 
cas qu’elle découvrirait quelque chose qui aurait pu être omis au présent 
inventaire de le déclarer aux fins d’être ajouté à la suite des présentes. 


Et ont signé avec nous Nores à Montréal, 
cent quatre-vingt-quatorze, et ont signé, 
(Signé) TISON MESPLET, 
LUSIGNAN, 
LOUIS HARDY, 


LS. CHABOILLEZ, N. P., 


le vingt février mil sept 


JEAN GUILLE. DELISLE, N. P. 


294 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
No. 74. 


Renunciation of community of goods by Madam Mesplet with her late 
husband. 


Aujourd’hui est comparue par devant les notaires de la province du 
Bas-Canada, résidant à Montréal, soussignés, Dame Marie-Anne Tison, 
veuve de sieur Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur, décédé le vingt-huitième jour 
de janvier dernier, la dite comparante demeurant en sa maison sise en 
cette ville, rue Notre-Dame; laquelle a par les présentes renoncé à la 
communauté de biens aui a été entre elle et le dit défunt, son époux, pour 
lui être plus onéreuse que profitable, jurant et affirmant en son âme et 
conscience devant les dits notaires n’en avoir pris ni appréhendé aucun 
bien et ne s’y être immiscée en facon quelconque; sous toutes fine que la 
présente renonciation puisse nuire ni préjudicier aux droits, noms, raisons 
et actions de la dite comparante; s’en tenant aussi à son douaire, préciput, 
reprises et autres conventions à elle accordés par son contrat de mariage. 
Dont et de ce que dessus elle a requis acte aux dits notaires, pour lui 
servir et valoir ce que de raison; et pour faire inscrire et signifier les 
présentes à qui il appartiendra, la dite comparante a fait et constitué son 
procureur, le porteur des présentes, lui donnant pouvoir de ce faire. 

Fait et passé au dit Montréal en l'étude de Jean Guillaume Delisle, l’un 
des notaires soussignés, l’an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-quatorze, le vingt 
février après-midi; et à la dite comparante signé avec nous notaires, 


lecture faite, 
(Signé) MARIE-ANNE TISON, 


VEUVE MESPLET, 

J. P. GAUTHIER, Ecr., Ntre., 
LOUIS THIBAUDEAULT, 
JEAN GUILL. DELISLE. 


No. 75. 
Sale of stock and furniture of the estate of the late Fleury Mesplet. 


24 to 27 February, 1794. 


L’an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-quatorze, le vingt-quatriéme jour de 
février, à neuf heures du matin, à la requisition de sieur Louis Hardy, 
demeurant en sa maison sise en cette ville, rue Notre-Dame, curateur élu 
par l’assemblée des amis de feu Fleury Mesplet, de son vivant imprimeur 
a Montréal, à la succession vacante du dit sieur Mesplet homologué par les 
honorables juges de la cour des plaidoyers communs pour le district de 
Montréal, ainsi qu’il appert par le certificat de Me. Reid, greffier de la dite 
cour, en date de vendredi dernier vingt-uniéme jour du présent mois de 
février, il va être par les notaires à Montréal, soussignés procédé à la vente 
publique des mobiliers dépendants de la dite succession, compris en l’inven- 
taire qui en a été fait par les dits notaires, commencée le dix-septième jour 
du présent mois de février et continuée par ajournement ainsi qu’il appert 
au dit inventaire, trouvé en la maison du dit Fleury Mesplet, imprimeur, 
sise en cette ville, rue Notre-Dame. La dite vente préalablement annoncée 
hier à la porte de l'Eglise paroissiale de cette ville à l’issue du service divin 
par Jacob Kuhn et annoncé ce jourd’hui par le même au son de la cloche 


[m‘LacHTAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 295 


aux principales rues de la ville et faubourg de Montréal. Les dits meubles 
exposés en vente publique par le dit Jacob Kuhn, juré crieur, qui aprés 
avoir recu en chère et sur enchère, les a âdjugés aux plus offrant et dernier 
enchérisseur pour les sommes et aux personnes mentionnées aux marges 
de la présente vente, ainsi suit l'entrée, 


M. Tison, un tournebroche, une broche, un poids de quartorze 


et un poids de sept RARE EN An icles Ae D à REVORA LUC SCOTIA GE ner px 12.00 
Barth BUlion Une CrÉMAyÈre. 0. ir UMTS ele isis ere fale 5 15 
Pierre Papier, une paire de chenets.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.90 
PIES lOr ino AUDE mMNeNeTLGC ra erst clic) oe, sie oh erm. oie Weyer eyes) ley “es 3.00 
Jacques Aveline, une marmite... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3.15 
Berthiellonaunentrarmile.. :. 1eme. lee cele) ale!) eles clef oie 3.00 
N. Adhemar, une pelle et une pince.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5.10 
Jacques Aveline, une poéle à frire.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ee 3.15 
IN Dusienan, une) pocie A MÉrITE. 5) Me Me ee we em oe sw 3.15 
N. Lardy, une poële à frire.. .. .. 2 ++ ou ve se ++ ee oo oe 1.15 
Louis Hardy, une tourtiére de cuivre.. .. .. ., .. .. .. .. .. 12.05 
Pierre Beaujeu, une tourtière de feu.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.00 
NACHabpoilez Nore. trois) petits itrépieds.. .. 0... 2. .. <3) =. 2.15 
Li Battre denis e OMS ON ENTER ister ere nr oy Akay 
PEM T Ie INGLE Nesle Lee) leon lee ete cele ec) ist elles (she 1.00 
Md. Foucher, la jeune, une casserole de cuivre avec son cou- 

Gir SS QOL Dione Sere ERT MAUR RENDRA are SAS MER EPL NE 5.05 
Tison, père, trois fers à FAQ 5 TETE ES PE CL CU LE NITE 5.05 
Means Lea Levesque): UNE ICOGUCEEQ Ns Meunier ent. sun dis 18 
Lusignan, une soupiére de fer blanc.. .. .. Se ET à Nee aN 2.10 
Luc Berthelet, un plat et un arrosoir a fer oe eer a aN 2.00 
Peet Miee OU A NO OLY IC Webern LUE LAN yale, oe!) week Ves LUE CN Mave 7.05 
EEISConye UNC RIDASSOITE GE CUITE iii) ce) aie ci delet en ee kw ae 1.15 
Pt C eID OCLONUGCEGULVT CS WELL ean tee) bald Slee ese 4.00 
PINOT mun Canard, Ge CUITE MANN bole, fie lane Sle eet ods 4.15 
SEIS INO MULOCH Eee GUMINZe™ SOUS. eis calsled/inse) pars) os 51s le sites sue alent alte alls) 
nn OTM CUE" SCCAUXS LEVEES) s)iists) cil fi aie eis) sei LUS NL 2.15 
Hacones Aveline deux Sceaux ferrés el... 0 “ee we ais 4.00 
Billion, un couteau à hacher et une saucepanne.. .. .. .. .. .. 4.00 
DRAC KOSI DIA LS ON (ale: LME us ni NAS ees 3.15 
Francois Tison, trois chandeliers ds COUIVEE NAAN Syeda teh seat cole 7.15 
Rascony, un martinet et deux ARR eniaelnas bee tod? open 2.05 
rapin, une fontaine sans bassin et la monture.. .. .. .. .. .. 5.00 
MAP EVe amliths DMOMN Ge? LET 2.) ies) sje, Ut. lee) Ved lee! oleh dele ee 5.00 
RU EO DIN arta) Manuela aol love: Lise [se le dlieie sie). Veey celle 5.05 
Tison, père, deux Egohines.. .. . . Ee iia Peace 5.10 
Mde Foucher, la veuve, une ennitese a Lot de un écurie. AU 2.00 
I. Pelletier, une paire de balance de fer blanc.. .. .. .. .. .. 5.00 
JounPHenen deux wboites de, fer blanc. 1.4.4). aies sh 3.00 
Mere tObEdIEr I UmoulintAr CALE ALIEN uni Es QU 3.10 
inlay, deuxspoires: avec ude Ia feraille. 3) 2. eae un. ee ets 6.10 
Jean Chonapen, une boite avec de la feraille.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.12 
Luc Berthelet, un soufflet... .. .. . ‘ ha EEC TRIO ete PD 2.05 
John Zorn, une rape et ee de a FAR Vey TOUT. 146.0 1.04 


mon, deux tareettos, pane de. fers ic! sc elke del es ea owe 2.05 


296 : ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Lusignan, une barre de fer.. 

Hinlays ain Lusi, ‘tele 5 
Jos. Donegany, un lot de Caesane de hee blanc: 
Hardy, une canne de jonc.. sn tena 

John Gunlack, deux pôts de grés.. ‘ 
Jean Chouafrer, quatre petits pots de grès 

Luc Berthelet, deux cruches de grés.. 

John Gunlack, deux cruches de grés.. 
Thomas Thiefplin, deux cruches de grés.. 


W. Clarke, une théiére, six tasses et soucoupes et le sucrier, 


ensemble. 
G. Delisle, un EPG ON A METTRE 
Rascony, six tasses at. soucoupes à ae. - 
M. Idge, une chaudière de cuivre et son Fc a. 
Thomas Thiefplin, une chaudière de cuivre.. 
Mde Foucher, la jeune, trois jalousies, neuf livres.. 
Joseph Donegany, quatre petits cadres... 
Billion, deux petits cadres. AURA 
Ths. Thiefplin, quatre a ce mors Hobes 
Pierre Fuette, un Christ.. 
John Gray, trois Christ.. ae 
Bunarvy, une image et un cadre.. 
Bunarvy, cing images encadrées.. ae 
Jos. Donegany, un dessus de porte-peintre.. 
Billion, deux tableaux du Roy et de la Reine. 


Pierre Papin, deux tableaux sur platre du Roy et ae la Reine 


de France. SUR sce cot kooe au kc 
J. G. Delisle, un Soc arrosoir ats seca 
Veuve Mesplet, un grand arrosoir de jardin.. 
Billion, une gratte et un rateau.. 
Jean Delisle, une hache.. OMRON Cnn OC TE ott 
Lambert, une meule avec sa manivelle de fer.. 
Billion, un thermomètre. , ete hte dot 
Madame Foucher, la veuve, un ere que nerds: 
Godefroy Galow, un trébuchet à.. 
Belair, un mouchon de loup.. LIS ered bicks 
Donagany, un casque de marte avec sa boite.. 
Billion, un chapeau.. EK CARE ARR ALES 
Billion, un étui avec deux rasoirs et la pierre.. 
Lusignan, une robe de chambre... 
W. Edger, une robe de couverte.. 
Lusignan, une redingotte de drap.. 
Jean Chonsper, un habit de drap.. 
Lusignan, une culotte de drap.. 
Samuel Rousse, un habit noir.. 
Samuel Rousse, une culotte noire.. : 
Chs. Chapins, une culotte de serge noire.. 
Chausper, une veste drap noir. 
Chausper, une culotte drap noir. RO M SE DRE 
Nic. Clark, une veste casimir vert Pbrodel 0 
Pierre Lemieux, une veste de taffetas.. .. .. .. .. 


2.10 
18.00 
2.01 
5.00 
5.15 
4.10 
7.00 
4.05 
1.15 


5ellb 
2.00 
3.00 
15.00 
8.00 
9.10 
2.05 
115 
3.04 
6.00 
19.00 
1.19 
3.10 
1.16 
4.15 


2.09 
1.19 
2.12 
2.12 
3.00 
6.00 
2.10 
7.15 
9.00 
8.00 
24.05 
5.10 
3.15 
12.05 
8.00 
55.00 
36.00 
12.00 
15.10 
7.15 
8.15 
6.00 
2.00 
23.00 
3.10 


[m‘tacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 297 


Pierre Lemieux, une veste soie et cotton 

Luc Barthelet, une veste satin brodée.. 

Sam Street, une robe d’indienne avec la veste.. 
Pierre Lemieux, trois gilets de flanelle.. 

Bellair, sept paires de bas de soie.. 

Chs. Chapins, deux balles.. 

Pierre Lemieux, trois chemises.. 

Bellain, trois chemises. 

Gunn, trois chemises. is 

John Gunlach, deux iles 

Q. Donegany, deux LICE à 

W. Clark, deux bonnets de coton.. . 

Banet Mettan, deux nappes.. 

Chapins, deux nappes... 

Wm. Clarke, deux nappes.. 

I. M. Levesque, deux nappes... : 

Ch. Smallwood, une paire de draps.. 

A. Jobert, une paire de draps 

Ch. Smallwood, un drap.. 

Curot, fils, une table de pain.. 

I. Donegany, trois serviettes. 

kh Donegany, un vieux linge.. one 

Sam Clark, trois pôts de terre, PE die 

John Colcoph, douze assiettes de faïence, le tout.. 
Jm. Papin, une douzaine Dre. Pre.. afta A QUE 
Luc Berthelet, une douz. et demie Dre. Pre., le tout.. 
Papin, quinze assiettes do. le tout.. 

Lambert, deux bassins, ensemble... as 

Luc Berthelet, deux plats ronds, ensemble. 


John Gunlack, six bolles, ensembles Pa eas -cing seis” 


Luc Berthelet, deux petits plats, ensemble.. 

Jos. Flemau, un saladier et un boll, ensemble.. 
Flemau, un lot de tasses et soucoupes.. 

Luc Berthelet, deux sauciers, ensemble.. 

J. Flemau, six couteaux et fourchettes.. AE AT 
Gordon, six couteaux manches argentés, ensemble... 
Biron, une montre d’argent avec la boite.. 

Jh. Flemau, deux saladiers, ensemble... 

Fr. Frink, deux cadres, ensemble. 3 
Frink, quatre cadres à huit livres pièce, tit. 

J. G. Delisle, un cadre.. 

Luc Barthelet, un cadre.. 

Fleman, trois cadres. 6 

Gordon, un cadre avec le RAS. 

Delisle, dix images à. 4% 

J. G. Delisle, deux images, eue. 

Delisle, six images, ensemble... 

Flemau, treize calendriers, ensemble... 

Billon, six crochets à chapeau, ensemble... 
Brindamour, une grande image.. 


Sec. II., 1906. 20 


4.00 
7.00 
3.00 
4.10 
4.10 
1.15 
10.10 
4.05 
4.19 
4.15 
1.10 
2.01 
11.00 
10.00 
10.10 
10.00 
3.15 
4.00 
3.00 
15 
1.16 
10 
2.01 
2.15 
2.06 
5.00 
3.12 


. 4.00 


2.00 
2.05 
1.04 
a1Ch 
16 
1.00 
10.06 
4.15 
60.00 
2.09 
9.00 
32.00 
4.05 
4.00 
7.19 
2.00 
12.10 
4.00 
10.10 
2.05 
2.10 
15 


298 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Flemau, un miroir plus grand.. 

Tison, un miroir plus grand.. 

G. Ring, un guéridon.. ee Bh 

Delisle, une table de noyer noir.. : 

Delisle, une petite table de mohagany.. 

W. Nadford, une petite statue equestre.. 

Flemau, une pendule.. UE 

Bamer M. un piédestal de ia: PO ARE CL a or OR 

Baumer M., une paire de rideaux avec la fares le tout. 

Tous. Pelletier, un pdt de faïence. SAR 

J. Donegany, deux boites de fer ane nr 

Luc Berthelet, une théiére et un pdt au lait, Sera BE 

Jos. Donegany, une douz. fiolles à moutarde, le tout.. 

Jean Chasdin, quatre petits flacons, ensemble. 5 

Th. Donegany, un pot de terre et un flacon, uit Lui ae. 

J. M. Huppé, une caisse avec neuf flacons, le tout.. 

Pre. Fiset, une paire caraffes à eau.. .. .. Scioe 

J. Donegany, trois gobelets de cristal, ensemble.. 

Tison, pére, six gobelets de cristal, pour quarante.. 

Donegany, quatre vers à patte, ensemble.. 

L. Hardy, cinq vers à patte, ensemble.. 

Bellerive, un pdt et deux flacons, ensemble.. 

Pre. Fiset, trois caraffres, ensemble.. 

Luc Berthelet, une cage à oiseau.. 

Donegany, une cage à oiseau. ARE CODA Ln RMSE Gtr dE 

Tison, pére, une rame de papier imprimée en A. B. C. 

Fr. Sarro, une rame de papier. 

Tison, père, un lot d'A. B. C. Latin’ SAME HAE 

J. B. Choidrer Donegany, quatre ns de ue eee im- 
primés imparfait, le tout.. APE LS GE tab OEM 

Donegany, seize brochures de prières sauvage, le tout pour. 

Sarro, trois paquets de brochures intitulées La Dévotion aux 
Sts-Anges, le tout.. aah) Vets cate NE RS NE 

Mr. Saurrien, un paquet de psautiers, le tout pour.. 

Saumers, un paquet de psautiers pour. AU MIRE Te 

Saumers, deux cent soixante-dix-sept Dane la etes 
à la Ste-Famille, le tout. RAT ee A an Te ea LEE CLS ee 

Donagany, un lot de livres d'écoles shelats imprimés, le tout. 

L. Saulniers, soixante-cinq petits alphabets, le tout pour.. 

I. B. Castonguay, La Bastille Septentrionale, 145 exemplaires, 
le tout pour. NO MOIS MORON UG MOULES NGS 

Chs. Félix, règles pour convertir le cours d'argent et Acs pro- 
vinces d’Amérique, 308 exemplaires pour. Sie AE MERE 

Tison, père, Constitution Francaise, 23 ee le tout. 

D. David, un livre de prières (Anglais).. a 

Farkell, six Innoculation du Bon Sens, le tout pour.. 

F. Savantes, Dialogues Curieux, 21 ex, le tout pour.. i 

Chs. Adam, Tragédie de Jonathas, 12 exemplaires, le tout.. 

L. Lavoules, trente-six abrégés de la versification française, 
le tout pour. MS tl ey ea Net ea ce Le MURS Moke 

P. Pepin, un livre vas théologie pour chronologie, pour seize. 


12.05 
40.00 
96.00 
57.00 
13.05 
5.00 
85.10 
1.14 
20.00 
.13 
2.00 
-10 
.13 
2.02 
.08 
6.15 
3.10 
1.07 
2.09 
2.08 
2.01 
18 
7.15 
3.15 
2.00 
10.00 
11.05 
3.05 


.16 
.10 


2.10 
24.00 
31.00 


6.00 
16.00 
7.00 


4.00 


3.10 
2.00 
3.02 
1.00 
2.17 

15 


2.00 


[M'LACHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 299 


F. Sarault, histoires chantantes de Mr. Lavalinière.. AS 
Bte. Proulx, vingt-neuf constitutions francaises, le tout pour. 
F. Sarault, neuf séries ex. manuel, le tout pour.. CESR 

F. Savant, instruction pour la confirmation, le tout pour.. 
Ch. Smallwood, vingt-un livres blancs.. 


F. Sarault, un paquet de cantiques.. 
Jos. Farkell, discipline militaire pour. 
Dubois, messes de Ste-Famille pour. 


Guoin, un paquet de Tableau de Rues de Montréal. 
Beaujeu, un paquet de lettres circulaires.. 4 
Chafroy, engagement pour le pays d’en haut.. .. 


Delisle, pére, un paquet de Sandrac. 
Lusignan, deux gravures en Cuivre. 


Tison, pére, trente-sept paquets de jeux de Fr Fa Paul Al 
Jean Bouthillier, trois paquets d’exemples à.. 


Hardy, deux paquets d’exemples à. 


G. Reid Greffier, vingt paquets ge papiers AM écrire. 


Ths. Letams, Le Bill de Québec... 


Chs. Lusignan, vingt-cing mains papier a act 
Chs. Lusignan, 10 mains papier à écrire.. 


Fentayson, six mains papiers.. .. 


Mr. Delisle, pére, dix-huit mains papiers.. 
J. Bouthillier, douze mains papier bleu.. 
I. Boutheiller, douze mains papiers bleu.. 
I. Boutheiller, onze mains papier bleu.. 


J. G. Delisle, un lot de papier.. 


Gauthier, douze mains papiers à écrire.. 

Th. Walker, douze mains papier rouge.. 

J. B. Boutheillier, douze mains papiers rouge.. 
J. G. Delisle, six mains papiers rouge.. 

A. Desery, six demi mains papier royal.. 

F. Freingue, deux mains papiers royalle.. 

E. Lusignan, quinze demi mains papier royal.. me 
J. G. Delisle, une rame papier à lettres doré sur poe 
F. Treingue, cinq demi mains papier à lettre, uni.. 
Cas. Lusignan, dix mains papiers marbré.. 
Lusignan, huit mains papiers marbré (petit).. 


J. Reid, une boite d’oublies.. 


J. Boutheillier, trois boites d’oublies.. 


Crossby, trois boites d’oublies.. 

Alex. McLeod, trois boites d’oublies.. 
Tison, père, trois boites d’oublies.. 

I. G. Delisle, trois boites d’oublies.. 
Crossby, trois boites d’oublies.. 
James Finlay, trois boites d’oublies.. 
J. Reid, un cent plumes à écrire.. 


Tison, père, un cent plumes à écrire.. 


J. Reid, un cent plumes à écrire.. 
J. Reid, un cent plumes.. ; 

J. G. Delisle, un cent plumes... 

P. Fortier, un cent plumes... 
Isidore Lacroix, un cent plumes... 


1.12 
LA 
6.00 
7.12 
5.00 
5.19 
19 
1.02 
1.08 
.10 
3.00 
4.00 
5.10 
2.10 
al) 
1.00 
19.00 
05 
13.00 
6.00 
5.00 
19.00 
7.10 
8.00 
7.05 
3.06 
10.05 
12.00 
9.05 
4.07 
5.10 
2.11 
41.00 
15.00 
3.03 
9.00 
6.00 
6.00 
3.00 
3.18 
3.10 
3.10 
3.10 
3.09 
3.09 
5.10 
5.10 
3.10 
6.00 
5.10 
5.10 
4.10 


300 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


J. Reid, un cent plumes.. 

Delisle, pére, un cent plumes.. 

P. Fortier, une cent plumes.. 

J. Reid, un cent plumes... 

Tison, pére, un cent plumes.. 

A. et McLeod, un cent plumes.. 

Labissaniére, cing paquets plumes.. 

Garfriend Glasgow, dix crayons noirs.. 

Bellaire, douze crayons noirs.. .. 

Tison, pére, deux douz. crayons noirs.. 

Tison, fils, huit crayons.. 

P. Fortier, six crayons.. diye 

Tison, pére, trois paquets d’encre rouge.. 

J. Reid, quatre douz. d’encre noire.. givers 

P. Fortier, une fiolle d’encre rouge préparée.. 

P. Papin, une fiolle d’encre préparée.. 

Delisle, pére, une fiolle d’encre rouge.. 

Une fiolle d’encre rouge.. 

Wm. Edge, deux sabliers.. 

P. Papin, deux sabliers.. 

J. Fortier, deux sabliers. 

Frs Lanouette, fils, trois bites eos é 
E. Edwards, six paquets de pedo cartes eee. 
Lemoine, cinq paquets de grandes cartes blanches.. 
Th: Donegany, deux tréslestrondes 2. =. <2 oo ke 
J. Papineau, une règle ronde.. .. .. 

M. Delisle, pére, deux régles rondes.. 

David David, deux régles rondes.. 

John Bell, une régle ronde.. 

E. Fortier, deux règles rondes.. 

I. D. Inkell, une règle ronde.. 

P. Dubois, une règle ronde.. SN UNS 

E. Edward, cinq paquets cartes blanches... 

David David, six paquets cartes blanches... 

E. Edward, cinq paquets cartes blanenes.. she 
Tison, père, cinq cornets papiers cinquante bols.. 
Tison, père, six bonéts, cuir, six francs... 


Tison, père, cinq bonets cuir, quatre livres quinze sols.. 


J. Donegany, un carnet quarré, cinquante sols.. 
J. Papin, un carnet rond, trente sols.. ch sily te 
Tison, pére, une livre de cire noire, huit livres cing s 


Olsir. 


David David, une livre de cire noire, huit livres cinq sols.. 
I. Edward, une livre de cire noire sept livres dix sols.. 


Tison, pére, une livre cire rouge, six francs.. 
E. Edward, une livre cire rouge, six francs.. 
Delisle, pére, une livre cire rouge, six francs.. 
P. Fortier, une livre cire rouge, six francs.. 


E. Edward, une livre cire rouge, six francs.. 
Dr. Jobert, une livre cire rouge, six francs.. 


J. G. Delisle, une livre cire rouge, six francs.. - 
E. Edward, un paquet cire rouge, cent cinq sols.. .. 
Delisle, pére, un trébuchet, douze livres quinze sols.. 


4.10 
5.10 
5.10 
6.00 
6.00 
4.00 
5.05 
2.11 
4.05 
8.10 
3.00 
2.03 
2.08 
3.00 

15 

15 

15 

19 
1.00 
1.00 
1.00 
1.04 
3.00 
6.00 
2.07 
1.14 
1.04 
1.15 
1.16 
1.04 
ally 
1.03 
2.10 
4.15 
3.10 
2.10 
6.00 
4.15 
2.10 
1.10 
8.05 
8.05 
7.10 
6.00 
6.00 
6.00 
6.00 


6.00 
6.00 


6.00 
5.05 
12.15 


[M‘LacnLan] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 301 


Delisle, un trébuchet, dix livres dix sols.. .. .. «+ ++ .. .. 10.00 
PR TS, 0 HO OS NOMME MAMIE SORTE 14.10 
Lafantaisie, un trébuchet.. .. .. BUR OMG OO CUS G OM O LED 14.10 
Ls. Hardy, un trébuchet de petite Bien Hise doe VE Ob oo FC 2.00 
Delisle, père, une paire de petites tablettes.. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2.00 
Mezery. une pairedenpetite tablette. | os el et) sie een aie 2.00 
Sanomimet, Unempainenae petite tablettes... 5 6s.) ce erel (eet cs) oie 2.00 
BOIS ee UNE COMLCAIMNORLVOINE <1.) cc) ere) (3 4 fo nj eo fei sl ver efieie: teks) Myers 1.07 
MHONE TIM COULGAUMOGLVOURC Rae cic) sen se lateliae te Sa NL 1.07 
MÉSDICHSUTAICQUEeATAUVOITE PSN ASS cleo) leis: NES TR MEN oy, wie 1.13 
ion un norie-fetnliemnmoir. Melle ole set elle eee Me) ee 3.01 
SMA UNINOLEe- LelMN CM OELI Cr ceili I EE EN EU sale 3.01 
Mevenvan Une POLLe- fella TOU. 6) ia fee 66 MM NS NO iol ee 3.19 
Mupos sunipornte-tetillenrouse ne MM Scere fers sie) sie) Ne 6.01 
J. H. Donegany, une seringue .. .. D ACT Re Oe ae 3.00 
Fr. Sarro, trois paquets de Spelling Book, i on SOS SCT CNE 3.00 
Glaszow, un petit dictionnaire anglais... UM 0. 0e 1.10 
Haldimand, quatre vers à encre, ensemble.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .08 
Rasconi quatre vers a encre, ensemble... 5) 2.0 2. oe. os) ee oe il 
I. G. Delisle, six vers à encre, ble. SAS Mae LU eat Dtetel Viol e 7 
I. G. Delisle, un cornet d’étain avec trois vers, le oats Moy areris 4.10 
Son spére um paguet dA Bs GC: francais: MALO M EMI 3) ole 115 
foc Declisic, six feuilles) de parchemin." <2 3.) 2. a5) 26 ‘ 6.00 
feeeonin deux brochures et une; le tout. : 2. <0 sie. so sh cai lone 1.04 
J. A. Degray, une boite avec des oublies, le tout.. .. .. .. .. ala bry 
Hepehsie cing timbres, ensembles RD: ise ei vis oe es AG 2.00 
Powis, un équerre, un pied de Rey et un ee le re 4.00 
SEMI ven PaAQuel ey SaAgeltel MAILS, LA Rent a Lea ls 
D. Jobbent, une boite desandorac.. .. .. RÉSUMÉS EC M toi De 1.04 
David David, deux vol. Digtionmaine de Bowes. DRE NRC 5.15 
L. Hardy, un cornet Sanderac.. .. .. BMD D aCe eke icy OVO) Loo MCE 1.10 
David David, un chien de nieebie cnn ET ON Ie 1e PO SA Ty Ce 1.00 
David David, un lot de brochures.. .. .. SRE Roa we ol ick aleal(t) 
John Finlayson, un lot de plomb at lee Seite NLL AON 1.10 
SCO INeOCRGEe bTOCNUTES a6 co oe) cls, sie! os) sie ss ee diese le 1.10 
Lafantaisie, deux flacons Be ees. oe ee 5 Aas Huta OT a: boc 3.00 
De Gray, un lot de brochures... .. bd eS ele maa ton ee iRe le Me .15 
J. Lafontaine, un berceau.. .. . QE ARE EE NS LE 101.00 
Jobbert, une table en pied ae picks. qe peut Wie NOTA 8.19 
ISO UN DUTCH. 5 65 kk. ks SMH Meare ate) cole hy cel incite! seve! raie eu here 16.00 
Simon Clark, une grande are MES ao TAN OO UMA IE 5.00 
C. Wagner, une table avec un es LENCO A NP ART Me AU 3.00 
Pac iVemEITCmORAISON C AISANGE i) |e. Me. esas US ce 1.05 
POC MUIMCRUEILCMIAILCTICl Sy cr ye) SCN ee ele Sch RS wel lee ce ete lee 1.12 
Rascony, une table..:.. .. 56) (GO DOMES OSM Aon ecto otro 4.07 
Berthelet, une jarre ce 1ivraw! Nel hens AG Moon bOl6 ol 10.05 
Berthelet, un poële de fer avec 8 uties as tuyau et le Data 

Je TOUL AMEN: dt Dee tite ete lier a 96.00 
Wagner, huit chaises palates en chien i tout: notre AGO es Le EN 9.12 
Luc Berthelot, 6 chaises tournées, DA eae an DA ÉDMEE 24.00 


J. L. Lafantaisie, 8 chaises tournées, ensemble... 


302 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
M. Edward, sept cent quatre-vingt-sept livres ou environ de 
caractère neuf d'imprimerie avec les cases, le tout.. .. 1620.00 
Pre MPepin Mel pordid Um) SCielmde Macrae EUR Er NET 1.00 
Mrveaward'iun|poële Palmier NÉE ae oy) ecole NRC ERIEIURs 66.00 
Hortier tune poele A\'OUTnEAU vie pened ener PES MS NS CNET 73.10 
Pre Papin, un Coffre. 2. PRO LIN e Malaliiele  Vetelt late Le te IN a ee Ces .13 
Jos. Fortier, un bois He ba au STE MEN MN ERA RASE PRE AE D Lid LA 2.01 
PYVPep IMT COPE Sai weit NES RME ON TR A MT IE Le ENS le 1.04 
CWasner/l'une/|Ccoucheite ie Weel ENTRANTS NME 3.08 
Mison pére Quatre Vieux \CRASSIS VILLES ME MONS ENT Ne CE TER 5.00 
MMEdouardMunerpresse ANrOoUler EM NP EN eee eee Ne CiC 12.00 
PretPepin, une Valise Cher EEE EEE Ce 2.10 
. Luc Berthelet, une Ad RP alert tiehal elias) wah eV Ven Merele ue eee tien 2.01 
W. Edouard, une presse à DA RAR avec les outils nécessaires, le 
COUT veers a net lee er NN ae relie teas re NL ele ane tr tetanic 51.00 
Edward, une A DTESSeMANDADIET DOUTE EEE CE CN CCE 28.00 
TSO, pére MINK ArIMOUMe AR AUS ME RE RE UE lalceirans) 7 lecen Sete iste 20.00 
Tison/Wpére Wplancher ii MASSE ENT CNE PRET 16.00 
Chs. Wagner, deux paillasses, un lit cottonier.. .. .. .. .. .. 15.00 
MWEortier lin lotilbouteilles 2e er EUR ER EMEA TRE RER ae eens 9.00 
CHAVendelie Mtrois-QUAr ES VIN TeS TONNERRE PSE ANNEES 3.03 
CAVendelac un \saloir ee esis fate: eee etal esta atten asian AN ER TER AA A One 3.12 
J NCanada, UNACOErEL NL TERRE EUR DÉPENS NME MARNE ONE ER 4.10 
Weclarke, un loti/charbons ie se NON ER EIRE OUR 4.15 
Ey hurkell, un «tas futanlese LME ENTIER tee ETAT ARE 4.15 
CMVendelac un matelas tettun traversin: see se ek eel ce nee 10.15 
Roscaud une robpe (de bent RE eset tecele see een lei aerate eee 6.02 
Roscaud, sune) robbel derbeut'. eue MT asec AI ON CERN 14.10 
Watteman,. unlit Ide\plümes ss 02e CRE ENNEMIS 17.00 
W. Eare, Junior, deux oreillers et un traversin... .. .. .. .. .. 6.00 
Turkell (quatre couvertes ws 20 ste) Weick CRE eke nee she . 5.11 
Allard, une cage à DEN un marche-pieds, une elle pubilette: 1.16 
Ae Wittman: une table: ey asia cos UNE 0 PETER UE SNA 6.10 


Ce fait après avoir vaqué jusqu'à midi précis et qu'il ne s’est plus 
rien trouvé à vendre ayant exactement suivi l'inventaire a été copié et 


expédié, et ont signé, 
JACOB KUKN. 


No. 76. 


Power of attorney from C. Louis Hardy, curator of estate Fleury Mesplet 
to Michel Dubord. 


Par devant les notaires de la province de Québec, résidant à Montréal, 
soussignés, 

Fut présent Me. Louis Hardy, demeurant en sa maison sise en cette 
ville, rue Notre-Dame, curateur en justice à la succession vacante de feu 
Fleury Mesplet de son vivant imprimeur à Montréal, lequel a fait et 
constitué pour son procureur général et spécial, le sieur Michel Dubord, 
un des convives de sa Majesté en cette dite province, demeurant ordinaire- 
ment dans la ville de Québec auquel il donne pouvoir de pour lui et en 
son nompercevoir toutes les sommes de deniers qui peuvent être actuelle- 


a 


[m‘LtacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 8083 


ment dues a la dite succession vacante par les différents suscripteurs a la 
ci-devant Gazette de Montréal, le long du fleuve St. Laurent en descendant 
et dans la ditte ville de Québec; de recevoir les dites sommes en donner 
bonnes et suffisantes quittances en son nom, et a défaut de payment pour- 
suivre juridiquement les débiteurs de la dite succession Mesplet obtenir juge- 
ment et les faire mettre en exécution et sur le tout plaider, opposer, appeler, 
élire domicile substituer un ou plusieurs procureurs, les révoquer et en 
constituer d’autres et généralement faire par le dit procureur constitué 
tout ce qu'il avisera toujours pour le plus grand avantage de la dite suc- 
cession promettant le dit sieur constituant le ratifier toutes fois et quand 
il en sera requis obligeant, etc.; fait et passé au dit Montréal, en l'étude 
de Jean Guillaume Delisle, l’un des notaires sousignés, l’an mil sept cent 
quatre-vingt-quatorze, le dix-huitième jour de juin, après-midi et a le dit 
sieur constituant, signé avec nous notaires, lecture faite. 


LOUIS HARDY, 
LOUIS THIBAUDEAU, 
JEAN GUILLAUME DELISLE. 


G No. 77. 


Extrait du testament de Jean Baptiste Tison, du date de 27 novembre 
1794. ‘Donne et lègue à Marie-Anne Tison, sa fille, pareille somme de cent 
cinquante chelins de vingt coppres, payable deux ans après le décès du dit 
testateur. 


No. 78. 


Judgment in favour of J. Marie Desautels vs Charles Berger and Fleury 
Mesplette. 


Expédiez, Exn., 22 juillet 1785. 
Dette So 2 rails ic Onos) 2d — £510 58 ba == SL 580-10: 


Entre Joseph Marie Desautels comparant par Me. Walker, avocat deman- 
_ deur, d’une part, et Charles Berger et Fleury Mesplette, imprimeurs asso- 
ciés, comparants, savoir le dit Charles Berger par Me Meziére, avocat, et le 
dit Fleury Mesplette, en personne—Défendeurs, d’autre part. Aprés que 
Me. Walker pour le demandeur a conclu que sa déclaration tendant à 
fixer la condamnation contre les défendeurs au paiement de la somme de 
trois cent soixante et quatre livres deux chelins et trois deniers du cours 
actuel, due au demandeur pour argent prété et par compte, avec intéréts 
et dépens. Le dit Fleury Mesplette, un des défendeurs, a dit qu’il recon- 
nait la dette et confesse jugement tant pour lui que pour le dit Charles 
Berger, son associé. Me Mézière, avocat du dit Charles Berger a dit qu’il 
supplie la Cour lui permettre de fournir sa défense jeudi prochain aux fins 
de prouver qu’une exécution ne peut sortir contre lui attendu qu’il n’est 
point associé en cette dette avec le dit Fleury Mesplette.—Parties ouies, la 
Cour donne acte au demandeur de la confession du dit Mesplette et admet 
le dit Berger à prouver jeudi prochain qu’il n’est point l’associé de Fleury 
Mesplette dans le cas présent.—Le tout considéré. La Cour condamne les 
dits défendeurs 4 payer au dit demandeur la somme de trois cent soixante 
et quatre livres deux chelins et trois deniers, contenue en la déclaration du 
demandeur, aux intérêts de la dite somme à compter de ce jour jusqu’à 
actuel paiement, et aux dépens taxés à six livres trois chelins et deux 


304 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


deniers,—sauf cependant au dit Berger comparant par Me Meziére à faire 
voir à huitaine qu’exécution ne peut sortir contre lui n'étant point associé 
en cette affaire—Mandans, etc. 


No. 79. 


From la Gazette Littéraire pour la ville et district de Montréal, 2 juin 1779. 


TANT PIS TANT MIEUX. 


Le papier Périodique est sur le point d'être interrompu, tant pis. Plu- 
sieurs disent au contraire, qu'étant aplaudi généralement il sera continué, 
tant mieux. 

On emploie tout pour l’anéantir l’imprimeur et la presse, pour priver 
par ce moyen le public de s’éclairer et de s’instruire, tant pis. Les per- 
sonnes de bon sens disent à cela, le bon droit de l'imprimeur, l'utilité de la 
presse et l’équité d’un Gouvernement éclairé, empécheront l'effet, tant 
mieux. 

On se plaint qu'il règne trop de liberté dans les écrits, et que les auteurs 
ne ménagent persone, tant pis. Mais aussi dit-on que cette naiveté est 
absolument nécessaire et qu’il est A propos de chatier les moeurs en riant, 
tant mieux. 

Dans l’imprimerie on met les hommes à la presse, on les y écorche tous 
vifs, tant pis. Mais c’est pour les rendre meilleurs, tant mieux. ’ 

Le spectateur tranquille est hai, et tous les ouvrages dans lesquels il 
critique trop ouvertement lui font bien des enemis, tant pis. Mais tous les 
honnêtes gens que la bonne conduite met à couvert de ses coups l’esti- 
ment tout plein, tant mieux. 

La dernière Production de l’Ingénu a fait murmurer contre l’auteur et 
l'imprimeur, tant pis. Mais l’un et l’autre dédaignent tous ces propros 
sourds, et n’y font pas la moindre attention, tant mieux. 

On dit que le spectateur tranquille aurait dù ménager un peu plus 
Simon Sanguinet comme son confrère, et qu’il devait se taire, puisqu’il 
ne lui en revenait rien de plus, et on l’accuse même d’avoir agi par un 
esprit de vengeance, tant pis. Mes le spectateur, dit-on, avait raison de se 
venger d’un homme qui ne mérite pas même le moindre coup d'œil d’un 
honnête homme, et les observations du spectateur l'ont fait connaître, par 
conséquent mépriser, tant mieux. 

Il est prouvé qu’il a usurpé une succession, tant pis. Mais aussi il 
paraît clair qu’il restituera honteusement au centuple, tant mieux. 

Plusieurs approuvement pas que Pierre Ducalvet, Ecuyer, ait mis au 
jour tant de vérités qui n'étaient pas connues, et il est blâmé d’avoir tout 
dit, tant pis. Mais ses intérêts particuliers et le bien public l’ont obligé 
de le faire,. et toutes ses démarches ont procuré l'avantage qu'il en atten- 
dait, tant mieux. 

On n’a pas été dupe du Sincère Moderne, son adresse est ironique, et 
s’il était connu on pourrait le rembarrer, et je crois qu’il s’en repentirait, 
tant pis. Mais ne pourrait-il pas faire encore pis, et si cela arrivait que 
dirait-on, tant mieux. 

Tous les petits Saints se sont ligués contre le Papier Périodique, les 
auteurs et l’imprimeur, tant pis. Mais les grands Saints les couvrent du 


[m‘LAcHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 305 


leurs ailes; sub umbra alarum, eorum ambulant, tant mieux. 
Aussi, tout bien considéré on trouvera du tant pis et du tant mieux. 
Tant pis pour les uns et tant mieux pour les autres. 


No. 80. 


From Mémoires de Pierre de Salles Laterrière et ses traverses, édition 
intime, Québec 1873. Pages 117-119. 


“Quelques jours aprés que ce despote de gouverneur de Haldimand, 
malgré la majeure partie de son conseil et l'opinion du juge en chef 
Livius, homme vertueux et juste, et anglais dans toute la force du terme, 
eut pris. sur lui de porter atteinte au privilège du sujet, je vis arriver dans 
ma chambre comme prisonniers d'Etat aussi, un avocat appelé Jotard et un 
imprimeur appelé Fleury Mesplet inculpés le premier d'être rédacteur et 
le second imprimeur d’un papier connu sous le nom de Tant pis, tant mieux, 
du genre libellique, qui se permettait d'attaquer la sage politique du gou- 
vernement anglais et surtout de combattre le despotisme du Suisse Haldi- 
mand. 

L'éducation de ce Jotard était solide sans être accomplie. Il était sati- 
rique et sophistique comme un avocat, avec un. front d’airain que rien 
n'étonnait, ivrogne, faux et menteur comme le diable et grand épicurien; il 
haissait tout-ce qui était anglais, pour quelle raison? Je ne l’ai.jamais pu 
savoir. En outre il était plein de préjugés, jésuite surtout et fort mauvais 
ami. Mesplet différait de Jotard par l'éducation, son talent c’était d’être 
ouvrier imprimeur, il avait des connaissances pourtant; mais il s’en faisait 
accroire, et ne parlant que d’aprés son rédacteur d’ailleurs fourbe et menteur 
presque autant que celui-ci et d’un génie méchant; si son épouse qui était 
très respectable, ne l'avait a douci, il aurait été capable de bien des choses 
indignes d’un honnête homme. 

Une couple de mois après on amena encore dans ma chambre un écossais 
du nom de Charles Hay...... accusé disait-on de correspondance avec 
Yennemi..... 

Me voilà obligé de vivre avec trois étrangers buvant à la même tasse 
de prisonnier d'état. Je ne fus pas longtemps sans donner la préfé- 
rence à M. Hay à cause de sobriété et de l'égalité de son humeur ce qui 
causa de la jalousie aux deux autres; des disputes s’ensuivirent et à la fin 
des coups. J'étais jeune et. vigoureux; bien souvent Hay nous séparait 
ou le tourne-clefs et la garde était obligée de venir, j'avais affaire à Jotard 
et à Mesplet ensemble, l’un ne m’attaquait pas sans l’autre ou sans appeler 
l'autre à son secours; heureusement que je les rossais tous les deux à mon 
aise et je n'avais besoin que du témoignage de Hay qui connaissait leurs 
torts, ils ne m’insultaient d’ailleurs que quand ils étaient ivres c’est-à-dire 
presque tous les aprés-midis tirant sur le soir. Ce témoignage impartial 
me mettait à l’abri; ils avaient beau faire et écrire au gouverneur, j'avais 
toujours raison puisque je me battais à mon corps défendant. Que faire? 
Disait le gouverneur, le mettre en prison! il y est déjà qu’il y reste donc! 
Et c'était là toute la satisfaction qu’ils recevaient. 

Les épouses de Hay et de Mesplet avaient obtenu permission de venir 
voir leurs maris. 

Pierre de Salles Laterriére was imprisoned at Québec from the 20th of 


March 1779 to November 1782 for having favoured the invasion of the 
Bastonnais. 


306 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


LIST OF APPENDICES. 


A. Books printed by Mesplet of which ,one or more copies still exist 
arranged chronologically. 

B. Books printed by Mesplet extant or mentioned in contemporary 
writings, arranged according to subject. 


C. Documents from Canadian Archives—Haldimand Collection. 


1. Letter from C. Berger, Philadelphia, 29th March, 1775, to Fleury Mes- 
plet at Quebec. 

2. Anonymous letter with Latin nom de plume, Montreal, 24th February 
1778, believed to have been addressed to Mesplet warning him of impending 
danger. 

3. Memorial from Mesplet to Carleton asking permission to publish a 
newspaper, May 1778. 

4. Prospectus of proposed newspaper. 

5. Letter from adjutant general, Quebec, 25th June, 1778, to Brigadier 
General Powell, at Montreal ordering Mesplet to quit the province. 

6. Letter from Haldimand at Quebec, 29th June, to Powell at Montreal 
ordering that Jautard as well as Mesplet quit the province before the 15th 
of September. 

7. Memorial of citizens of Montreal asking Carleton to suspend order 
for expulsion of Mesplet from the province, August 1778. 

8. Notice by Edward Foy, secretary to Governor General, suspending 
the order for the banishment of Mesplet, Montreal, 24th August, 1778. 

9. Extract of a letter from Haldimand, Sorel, 28th Sept., 1778, to 
Cramahé, Lieut. Governor at Montreal, complaining of an item in “our 
Gazette.” 

10. Extract of a letter from Cramahé, Montreal, ist Oct., 1778, to 
Haldimand intimating that he had cautioned “our printer” regarding his 
“penchant to the popular cause.” 

11. Letter from Mesplet, Montreal, 4th January, 1779, complaining of 
the persecution to which he has been subjected and asking the person to 
whom the letter is addressed to help to influence the Governor General in 
his favour. 

12. Poetry offered by Pére Well for publication in the Gazette but 
refused. 

13. Letter from Haldimand, Quebec, 15 February, 1779, to Montgolfier, 
Superior of the Seminary at Montreal, intimating that Mesplet had been 
warned to: desist from attacking the church. 

14. Letter from Judge Rouville, Montreal, 27th May, 1779, to Haldimand 
complaining of Jautard’s attitude towards the Court and of his severe 
criticisms of it in the Gazette of the 26th May 1779, a copy of which he 
sends with the latter. The articles complained of are a letter “Aux Honnétes 
Citoyens,” by Valantin Jautard, avocat, describing his being expelled from 
Court. A:letter signed “Le Spectateur Tranquille”, (written by Jautard) 
complimenting Jautard on his dignified demeanour before the Court on his 
expulsion. A letter by Pierre Ducalvet, to the same purport, and another 
letter to Judges Rouville and Southouse criticizing their action in expelling 
Jautard. 


[m‘LacHLAN] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 807 


15. Letter from Haldimand, Quebec, ist June, 1779, to Judge Rouville 
acknowledging receipt of his letter and the Gazette and promising action 
in the matter. 

16. Warrant signed by Haldimand, Quebec, ist June, 1779, ordering 
Major Nairn to arrest Mesplet and Jautard. 

17. Letter from Haldimand, Quebec, ist June, 1779, to Major Nairn at 
Montreal explaining the warrant, 

18. Letter from Haldimand same date ordering Nairn .to send prisoners 
to Quebec by schooner Mercury. 

19. Order by Haldimand same date for Wm. Halero, commander of 
Provincial armed schooner to proceed to Montreal with his vessel and there 
await instructions. 

20. Letter from Nairn, Montreal 6th June, to Haldimand advising that 
Jautard and. Mesplet had been arrested and their press and type put under 
seizure. 

21. Extract of a dispatch from Haldimand, Quebec, 7th June, 1779, to 
Lord Germain, minister at London, advising that Mesplet and Jautard had 
been arrested for seditious conduct. 

22. Petition from Madam Mesplet, 15ta July, 1779, asking for the speedy 
trial of her husband. 

23. Petition from Mesplet, 26 Sept., 1780, to Haldimand asking to be set 
at liberty. 

24. Petition from Laterriére and Mesplet, Quebec, 30th April, 1781, to 
Haldimand asking to be permitted to exercise in prison yard. 

25. Extract of a letter from Colonel Daniel Claus, Indian interpreter 
and agent at Montreal, 27th.Sept., 1781, to Haldimand, advising that he 
had prepared and published a Mohawk primer. 

26. Memorial from Jautard and Mesplet, Quebec 7th Aug., 1782, to 
Haldimand asking for a speedy trial or to be released. 

27. Memorial from Madam Mesplet (not dated) to Haldimand asking 
for ‘ner husband’s release and offering two sureties for his good behaviour. 


D Documents from the manuscript division of Library of Congress. 


28. Extract from Journal of Congress, 28rd February, 1776: Resolution 
to pay Mesplet $44 for printing. 

29. Extract from Journal of Congress: Resolution, 26th February, 1776, 
to engage Mesplet as printer to go to Canada. 

30. Extract from Journal of Congress: Warrant same date to pay 
Mesplet $200 for moving to Canada. 

31. Extract from Journal of Congress: Resolution, 27th May, 1785, to 
pay Mesplet $426 on account of his expenses to Canada. 

32. Memorial of Mesplet, Montreal, 1st Aug., 1783, to Congress asking 
compensation for losses as printer to Congress. 

33. Narration by Mesplet of events during journey from Philadelphia to 
Montreal in 1776, presented to Congress, 1st Aug., 1783. 

34. Representations of Mesplet, dated at Montreal, 27th March, 1784, 
to Congress. 

35. Answers of Mesplet to questions by Committee of Congress (no 
date). 

36. Affidavit of Joseph Perinault, Philadelphia, March 31st, 1785 
testifying to the espionage to which Mesplet had been subject. 


308 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


37. Affidavit of Isaac Melchor, same date, testifying to Mesplet’s 
imprisonment at Quebec. 

38. Affidavit of P. G. Breton and James Valiant, same date, certifying 
to Mesplet’s setting off as printer for Congress at Montreal. 

39. Affidavit of John Germon, interpreter, to Mesplet, same date, con- 
firming .Hancock’s promise to pay Mesplet’s expenses to Montreal. 

40. Affidavit of Etienne Fournier, same date, certifying to the vexatious 
treatment of Mesplet at Montreal. 

41. Letter from Tho. Miffin, Philadelphia, 1st April, 1785, to the Hon. 
Mr. Hardy, of Virginia, at New York, introducing Mesplet. 

42. Detailed statement of Mesplet’s losses and expenses as printer at 
Montreal (not dated). 

43. Petition from Mesplet to Congress complaining that the $426 they 
voted him was altogether inadequate to cover his losses. 


E. Extracts from the registers of Notre Dame parish church, Montreal. 


44. Birth Josepte Tison, 4 February, 1766 (afterwards called Marie 
& 

45. Death of Marie Mirabeau,-1st wife of Mesplet, Ist Sept., 1789. 

46. Marriage of Fleury Mesplet and Marie Anne Tison, 13th April, 1790. 
47. Mesplet godfather to his brother-in-law Fleury Tison, 39th Oct., 1791. 
48. Mesplet godfather to Marie Therese Stringer, 30th Oct., 1791. 

49. Death of Fleury Mesplet, 24th.January, 1794. 

50. Deata of Marie Anne Tison, 2nd wife of Mesplet, 4th Sept., 1840. 


F. Documents from the Notarial Archives at Court house, Montreal, 
Pierre Méziéres, notary. 


51. Deed of compromise between C. Berger and Mesplet for settling 
old partnership by arbitrators, dated 38rd Nov. 1789. 

52. Extension of time for making award, 16th Nov., 1784. 

53. Award of arbitrators, 27th Nov., 1784. 

54. Deed of settlement with bond from Mesplet to Berger, 29th Dec., 
1784. 


55. Power of attorney from Berger to Louis Hardy et al, to collect 
amount due by Mesplet. 


François Leguay, père, notary. 


56. Bond from ,Mesplet to Joseph Marie Desautels, 30th Aug., 1784. 

57. Receipt in full for above bond, 22nd February, 1794. 

58. Draft of a deed of compromise between Mesplet and his creditors, 
9th July, 1785. 

59. Desautels declines to sign above deed of compromise (not dated). 

60. List of Mesplet’s liabilities. 

61. Bailiff’s sale with inventory of Mesplet’s effects, 21st Nov., 1785, 
and following days. 

A. Foucher, notary. 


62. Lease of a house by J. B. Tabau to Mesplet, 14th April, 1788. 
John Guillaume Delisle, notary. 


63. Engagement of Alex. Gunn as apprentice by Mesplet, 5th Dec., 1789. 
64. Marriage contract between Fleury Mesplet and Marie Anne Tison, 
11th April, 1790. 


[m‘LacHLan] FLEURY MESPLET, FIRST PRINTER AT MONTREAL 309 


65. Bond from Mesplet and wife to Charles Lusignan, 20th Dec., 1790. 

66. Intervention of J. B. Tison guaranteeing above bond, 8th Jany., 1793. 

67. Discharge of above bond, 11th Dec., 1795. 

68. Lease of a house by widow of Ignace Chenier to Mesplet, 26th 
March, 1793. 

69. Bond from Mesplet and wife to J. B. Durocher, 26th July, 1793. 

70. Compromise of and intervention by Tison in above bond, 11th 
Dec., 1795. 

71. Transfer of above bond by Durocher to Pierre Huguet-Latour, 
20th March, 1797. 

72. Discharge of above bond by Pierre Huguet-Latour, 22nd Nov. 1797. 

73. Inventory of Mesplet’s effects, 17-20 February, 1797. 

74. Renunciation by Madam Mesplet of. participation in estate of her 
late husband, 20th February, 1794. 

75. Sale of effects of Mesplet estate, 24-27 February, 1794. 

76. Power of attorney from IL. Hardy, curator of estate Mesplet to 
Michel Dubord, 18th June, 1794. 


G. Miscellaneous. 


77. Extract from the will of J. B. Tison showing legacy to Marie Anne 
Tison (widow Mesplet, 27 Nov., 1794). 

78. Judgment of Court of Common pleas against Mesplet in favour of 
Desautels for £370 5s 5d, 22nd July, 1785. 

79. Extract from La Gazette Littéraire of 2nd June, 1779, an article 
entitled Tant pis, tant mieux. The origin of the idea that there was a 
newspaper of that title. 

80. Extract from the mémoires of Laterriére giving a description of 
Mesplet. 


Secrion II., 1906. [311] Trans. R. S. C. 


IV.—The Downfall of the Huron Nation. 
By C. C. JAMES. 


(Annual popular lecture, delivered Ma y 23, 1906.) 


Eight miles from Quebec is a little village overlooking the valley 
of the St. Charles River. In the cabins clustered about the church 
dwell the Hurons (of Lorette, a remnant of an old Indian tribe. 

We come west nearly 750 miles to the Detroit river. In Sandwich 
we may see still standing the old Huron Mission House. Here and 
there along the river we find settlers who are very proud to trace their 
origin back to the aristocratic Wyandotts. A short distance above 
Amherstburg the electric railway takes you past the Wyandott burial 
ground where, conspicuous above the rest, rises the tall shaft marking 
the grave of Mondoron’ Joseph White, Chief of the Hurons or Wyan- 
dotts. On the Michigan side of the river is the City of Wyandott. 
tradition, place name, and local history all bear traces of the early and 
continued presence iof the Hurons or Wyandotts along both banks of 
the river. 

A little further south, in Ohio, we come to the Counties of Huron 
and Wyandot. We cross the Mississippi, and in Kansas we find another 
Wyandot County and a Wyandot City. ; 

Further south we reach the Indian Territory in the north east 
corner of which is the Wyandott Settlement or Reserve, where the Wy- 
andotts and their old enemies the Senecas live peaceably side by side. 

Quebec, the Detroit, and the Indian Territory are far removed 
from one another. We enquire as to the story of these three groups 
of Hurons and we learn that they all trace back to Lake Huron, to that 
section of the Province of Ontario which lies between lake Simcoe and 
the Georgian Bay. It is the story of the dispersion, the decimation, 
or the downfall of the Hurons, that I have been asked to tell you to- 
night. 

This story of the Hurons takes us back 260 years and more to the 
very earliest chapters in the history of the inhabitants of Ontario. 
Preceding it there is little that can be substantiated. When we would 
go further back we enter the field of tradition and of speculation. 

The story that I am briefly to recount is not a new tale, it is not 
a piece of original investigation—it is merely an attempt to present in 


*Inscription as follows:—Mondoron, chief of the Wyandotts or Hurons, 
Joseph White, Born January 19, 1808; Died February 18, 1885. 


312 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


popular form some of the main features of a story that is one of the 
most thrilling when studied in its details, a story that fills a unique 
place in the history of Canada, and one which we may revive even if we 
add nothing new or original. 

The history and downfall of the Hurons may be studied in three 
sources. x 

ist. The traditions of the Indians themselves. 

2nd. The letters of the Jesuit Fathers, the written records com- 
monly called The Jesuit Relations. 

3rd. Modern archeological researches and ethnological investig- 
ations. 

These three contributers to a common story are widely different 
in method, and when they verify one another we are bound to accept 
the conclusions as facts of history. The dispersion of the Hurons by 
the Iroquois in 1649 is the first authentic chapter in the history of 
Ontario, and yet the main features of that story are as well established 
as any historical event in Canadian history. Indian traditions, the 
witness of the Jesuit Fathers, and the researches of archeologists 
during the past fifty years are gradually being brought into harmony 
in the working out of the details of this history. 

When Jacques Cartier sailed into the St. Lawrence in 1535 he 
found Indians of the Huron-Iroquois stock at Quebec and Montreal} 
or as the settlements were then called Stadacona and Hochelaga, and 
even an adventurous band of Huron fishermen as far east as Gaspé. 
When Champlain came eighty years later, he found that the valley of 
the St. Lawrence was occupied by Algonquins, and that the Hurons 
and the Iroquois had moved westward. We may go to the Indian 
traditions for an explanation. Peter Dooyentate Clarke, a Wyandott of 
the Detroit River, has left us a book of Wjyandott traditions and Mr. 
Wm. E. Connelly of Kansas has for twenty years studied the language, 
the myths and legends of the Wyandotts of the Indian Territory. 

According to Connelly the traditional home of tribal origin was in 
Northern Quebec, or in the region between James Bay and Labrador, 
where the Wyandotts were near neighbours to the Eskimo. They grad- 
ually moved southward to the St. Lawrence, where Cartier found them. 
On the south bank were the Senecas or Iroquois, another branch of a 
parent stock.  Hiochelaga was a Seneca village. From choice or 
necessity the Wyandotts migrated westward along the south shore of 
Lake Ontario. They crossed the Niagara and, moving eastward, made 
a settlement on a bay which they called “ Toronto.” This word Toronto 
in the Wyandott language means “the land of plenty.” Probably 
through pressure from the Iroquois, who had followed and settled in New 


THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 313 


[JAMES] 


YPhog one s1B}U() ; av mK D 
Prog Cc A a LES 
hy 7ev u » oe 
ee ee si % Sa 


2 “ c SE 2 Fe 
WP rasa A RY 


=; er > no & ck Bg 
yuvings a* wah SIE 


dn a see LA; | wh 
See No 


DRE ; aN 
ae CE ae ie L 
aa Y Ô 4 a \p ee 5 N L “ 
CE SAR HEE eee % 5 
J « 9 CE RK We ASS % ° le > 
Ÿ AU) a oe #5 AK à 
ANS LEA Yor ARE AI, 


D 


— “No 


Sec. II., 1906. 21. 


314 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


York State, they had to move on and they brought up on the shores of 
Georgian Bay, next door neighbours to a branch of their family that had 
preceded them, the Hurons who lived between Lake Simcoe and Mat- 
chedash Bay. 

Horatio Hale in his introduction to “ The Iroquois Book of Rites ” 
(pp. 10, 11) quotes from Clarke’s traditions, which, in the main, agree 
with Connelly’s record. He also traces the original seat of the Huron- 
Iroquois to the Lower St. Lawrence. Hale puts it briefly thus: “ As 
their numbers increased, dissensions arose. The hive swarmed, and 
band after band moved off to the west and south.” This “swarming 
of the hive” has ever since been a favourite expression with writers and 
students of the Huron-Inoquois race. 

Now let us briefly locate the principal swarms. First of all, there 
were the Hurons on Georgian Bay between Matchedash Bay and Not- 
tawasaga Bay, occupying part of the present County of Simcoe. West 
of them were the Tobacco Nation, the Tionnontates or Petuns. South 
of them, in the district from Niagara to the Detroit, were the Neuters 
or Neutral Nation. On the South Shore of Lake Erie were the Eries 
or Cat Nation. Southeast of them on the Susquehannah were the An- 
dastes or Conestogas. Along the South Shore of Lake Ontario in 
Central New York were the Five Nations of the Iroquois. If we add 
the Tuscaroras or sixth Iroquois Nation we have the principal nations 
that had originated in Quebec and, that. before Champlain’s time, had 
moved west and taken up the districts that we have referred to. Hthno- 
logists tell us that their languages were very similar; the traditions of 
these nations all point to long intercourse and close relationship in 
origin; archeologists have determined a similarity of life; the Jesuit 
Fathers also refer again and again to their kinship. 

The Hurons were so called by the French because they wore part 
of their hair standing straight up like the bristles on a wild boar. Their 
own name was Ouendat or Wyandott. 

The Tobacco Nation was so called because they were growers of 
that article. Their Indian name was Tionnontates, their French name 
Petun. 

The Neutrals were so called because, in the terrible wars between 
the Iroquois and the Hurons, they maintained neutrality. The Indian 
name of the Neutrals was Attiwendaronk, which, according to the 
_ Relation of 1641, meant in the Huron language “people of a speech 
a little different.” 

The Eries were also called the Cats because of the prevalence of 
racoons in their country. 


THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 315 


[sAMES] 


‘OCOT AO AVI SNOSNVS 


= z : = — 
VIN Fp ee —— SE NT : ; Æ = 
| 999 £ jo Ry N no Ÿ = 2a = 
SL ai > 7 :" GIG: NATITE wo 
NOSNYVS K À PDT SC an = 
"Yo4A00guan 20 NE poeta’ PRE = 
{: LOND f ak À — 
FIÇN. N S LY ES | o 
ee ach Nk a V7 > —— ¥ yclssoys © 
207977 a — DS PNOAOC a = Ay prod 
Maa SLT A 2 ‘Suouoxsoutr À ; D \ opr TAS 
= rp, À = iN E à 
| FRE A té Mf suouios saoul À WOO OEP OWA TTT 
= : SA Ga À S 4Ÿ B j : > 
H zuop ies L) pen lo i ie) Z S\Vv Ve Le Gory Wel. aneiuougy = à 6 F À VA 27726 ] sobuz Is4-a; 
{ = = 4 = gy AE SR th fi cio Ru 6 ug TNO Yo a9 NT = WOUSIBCHNO 
G4... av danoy ot = HAS o RÉ ce) 
tena LIT EEE LStomboyo JL = + à a D, y, PSIG ay = 
3 Uopuo AE on NY eo Gy 2 . = = 
2 Se T a, ° D Fo = = N 


= Mog 5. IAH 11 Ÿ 4 bg os 

3 ent se 

= 2 Sronb inbnogeng & aI $ = 
Nestes PAU D cursfryn . 

onto RAT bed») 2st weqao > 


NO 


NO * OLHVI 


= 


10 () 
A + 
APA uanodanbioe 

I, vo AT LLC A 


> (= RagengdeMm 


À 
XS 
Ss 
fe | 
yy 


\\ 
= 
y), 


A 0 LOT fir Ca 2 = nopneseg 


À * unu LR RADEnES) 
à 
EN Q) GENOMES) 
sien 1 . =, 
> - Mmoouv/nourIIT 7 : + sonno., EE 
dofo (ge HH puoyoy 27 i —} tan 
EP ed” re O N ELLE; LU PAESV/ = NII A 
À Q -HEUDUT — ; 


TE 
a 


& 4, + “uou 
= wah deans G Z 


S = 


dns 
nn 


oa 


: 
£ 
TI 


2202 x77 O 073 À 


pd 5704 X$7 | 
A) Lara 


OA 
- ONT Sra, 


~ 


. 


316 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The question might now be asked as to why the Hurons had located 
on the shores of Georgian Bay. Perhaps we can suggest an answer. 
If it be correct that they were gradually pushed out or driven across 
the Niagara and Lake Ontario by the Iroquois, we can readily under- 
stand that they would seek refuge in a locality where they could most 
effectively defend themselves, and would probably limit their retreat 
only by their necessities of living, The Hurons were a sedentary not 
a migratory tribe; they were growers of crops rather than hunters. 
They stopped when they came to the borders of the non-arable Muskoka 
and they took up territory that was in part protected by water. 

A study of the traditions of the Huron-Iroquois people does not 
give us any information as to their intercourse with the Eskimo. We 
learn that in the far off days they crossed a great river and we know 
that about the beginning of the sixteenth century they came away from 
the valley of the St. Lawrence. But this great river that they crossed 
may have been the Ohio or the Mississippi. 

The question now becomes a subject for investigation by archæolo- 
gists and ethnologists. 

I have had the opportunity of reading a most interesting and well 
worked out paper by Dr. David Boyle, Archæologist to the Ontario 
Government, on the origin of the Iroquois and kindred nations. It will 
appear in the forth coming report on Ontario Archæology.! Mr. Boyle 
argues for a southern origin of these people beyond the Ohio, if nog 
beyond the Mississippi, instead of beyond the St. Lawrence in Quebec. 
He brings them from the south until they come into neighbourhood with 
the Micmacs of New Brunswick, thus accounting for the traditions of 
that people recorded by Dr. Rand. Thence they came up the St. 
Lawrence. After many years swarm after swarm moved off to occupy 
the territories in which they were found at the time of Champlain. The 
fact that the Hurons and Petuns were skilled in the cultivation of corn, 
tobacce, beans, sunflowers and hemp is better explained by a southern 
origin than by tracing them away to the Labrador home of the Eskimo. 
I cannot too strongly urge you to read and study this paper when it 
appears in print. 

We come now to the Huron Nation as it was in the early part of 
the 17th Century, when the French first visited them. Their old village 
sites can be traced through York County up into Simcoe, becoming more 
and more numerous as they were crowded by the limitations of the land. 
Only in the north are relics of French manufacture to be found, hence 
we conclude that the northern towns were the more recently occupied. 


+See Annual Archeological Report 1905 (Toronto 1906) pp. 146-158, 


[JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 317 


The Hurons proper occupied the five townships lying between 
Matchedash Bay, Nottawasaga Bay and Lakes Simcoe and Couchiching. 
The eastern entrance by land was across The Narrows” between the 
two lakes, where the town of Orillia now stands. 

They were a settled nation living in fixed towns. The villages on 
the frontier next to their enemies were strongly fortified by walls of 
palisades similar to those erected by the Iroquois. The sites of these 
towns would naturally be selected with a view to protection. Wood and 
water supply would also have to be considered. The records of the French 
give us a population varying from 15,000 to 45,000. These variations in 
number can readily be accounted for but taking the number at 30,000 
we see that the district carried a heavy population, as Indian popula- 
tion was usually distributed. The towns occupied at that time were all 
crowded into the townships of Tiny, Flos, Medonte and the southern 
part of Orillia, with one here and there in Oro and the northern part of 
Orillia. 

The latest census population of these townships was 26,371. If to 
this we add the three towns Orillia, (4,907), Midland, (3,174), and 
Penetanguishene, (2,422), we get a total population of 36,874. It may 
assist us to form some idea of the population of the Huron Nation, 
when we say that, in the days before the war of extermination began, 
the Indian population of the district about equalled that of the present 
day even including the three towns mentioned. The next point that 
suggests itself is that with such a heavy population, game could not 
have been very plentiful. If they wished to hunt they must go north 
into the Algonquin Park, or south into the Neutral Country. 

But the Hurons were rather farmers, fishermen and traders. 
They did not maintain themselves by hunting—they were on a 
higher level than the Algonquins, the white Indians of the 
northern forest. They lived in towns and they raised crops. Corn, 
beans, pumpkins, sunflowers and hemp were their principal crops. The 
corn, which was their main article of food, was doubtless similar to. that 
which may still be found in the reserve on the Grand River,—small 
ears of hard flinty corn with bluish kernels. It was grown in the same 
hills year after year until the soil became exhausted. Traces of old corn 
fields of the Indians can still be seen in the woods along Lake Erie and 
in Nottawasaga Township. The sunflowers were grown mainly for oil 
with which they janointed or smeared their bodies and hair and for 
sacrificial purposes. Oil for food was got from fish. The hemp was 
grown for fishing nets and for the many uses of cord. 

When the supply of wood gave out or the soil became exhausted, 
the town was moved to a new site. This accounts for the very large 
number of old village sites in Simcoe County and, taken in connection 


318 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


with the crowded population, explains why that district is the richest 
archeological field in Canada, and is one of the richest in all America, 
north of the Mexican boundary. 

The Hurons also were fishermen,—the deeply indented inlets of 
Georgian Bay and the lakes Simcoe and Couchiching affording a plen- 
tiful supply of fish. At “The Narrows” near Orillia might still be 
seen a few years ago some of the stakes of the old fish weir of the 
Hurons. It was from these fish stakes or hurdles that the old French 
name Lac La Clie was given to Lake Simcoe. 

The Hurons also were traders for themselves and for the neighbour- 
ing tribes. They raised the crops that we have mentioned and engaged 
in barter. From the Neutrals they got furs, from their brethren of the 
Tobacco Nation they got tobacco, and from the Algonquins they obtained 
the skins of the beaver, bear, deer and moose. Having a surplus they 
started in their birch bark canoes for Three Rivers and Quebec to 
dispose of their packs to the French traders. The ever alert Iroquois 
guarded the front route by lake and river, hence they were compelled to 
take the route up the French River, across Lake Nipissing and 
down the Ottawa. The Iroquois traded with the Dutch by way of the 
Mohawk and the Hudson. Once start a conflict between these two 
Indian nations and then bring in two European nations competing for 
the trade in peltries, and you have good and sufficient ground for the 
continuance of the fight to the bitter end. Even in this commercial 
struggle the Neutral Indians remained neutral and we wonder why. 
Was it) because they feared) to take out their loads of furs past the 
Iroquois frontier, or was it because the Hurons were skilful in the use 
of the birch bark canoe? Probably both. The fact is, however, that 
the Hurons were the fur traders for a large area and through their 
annual trips to Quebec maintained a direct connection between their 
home on Georgian Bay and the headquarters of the French at Quebec. 
There is much in this to explain the story that follows. A people living 
in fixed fortified towns, producing crops and engaging in trade must 
impress one as being of a superior type, even if that type is savage. 

What of the house or home life of the Hurons? ‘The migratory 
hunters of the plains and the Algonquins of the great pine and spruce 
forests of the north lived in wigwams of skins and bark, but the fixed 
Huron-Iroquois Nations lived in what may be described as houses or 
cabins. Their construction was somewhat as follows: Two parallel 
rows of tall saplings were planted in the ground, bent together at the 
top until there was left an open space of a foot or so in width along the 
ridge, and then lashed together so as to form a sort of arbor or booth 
about thirty feet in width at the bottom and about twenty feet in height. 
Other poles were tied securely to these upright poles and then the sides 


[JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 319 


were sheathed in bark overlapping to shed the rain and snow. Another 
row of horizontal poles kept these huge bark shingles in place. Along 
either side of the interior were scaffolds or bunks about four feet from 
the ground which, when covered with furs, furnished the sleeping com- 
partments. The space beneath was the store-house for fuel and cooking 
utensils. There was a compartment at the end of the house used as a 
storeroom for corn, fish, sunflowers and other articles of food. Along 
the upper poles were hung their bows and arrows, clothing, skins and 
clusters of ear corn. Down the middle were the fires, each one 
furnishing heat for two families. The smoke escaped by the long 
narrow opening left at the top of the house. These houses varied in 
length, in some cases being 200 feet in length. The long houses were 
not necessarily straight but followed the configuration of the land upon 
which they were constructed. Picture to yourself such a house, an 
abnormal sleeping car with ten fires built down the aisle and crowded 
with twenty Indian families. You will at once understand that such a 
house might be a bedlam, reeking with smoke, where privacy was un- 
known and where the customs of even early civilization could scarce find 
room for development. The effect of a spirit infected brawler, a half- 
crazed medicine man or the victim of an infectious disease may be more 
readily imagined than described. 

Perhaps the pen of a ready writer or the tongue of one gifted with 
rare imagination might weave a story of romance about the fires of one 
of these Huron long houses, but a careful reading of the descriptions of 
the Jesuit Fathers, eye-witnesses of their degraded life, compels us to 
say that the romance existed mainly in the imagination of the writer. 

I give you one passing picture from the pen of Parkman: 

“ He who entered on a winter night beheld a strange spectacle: the 
vista of fires lighting the smoky concave; the bronzed groups encircling 
each,—cooking, eating, gambling or amusing themselves with idle 
badinage; shrivelled squaws, hideous with three score years of hardship ; 
grisly old warriors, scarred with Iroquois warclubs; young aspirants, 
whose honours were yet to be won; damsels gay with ochre and wam- 
pum; restless children pellmell with restless dogs. Now a tongue of 
resinous flame painted each with feature in vivid light; now the fitful 
gleam expired, and the group vanished from sight, as their nation has 
vanished from history.” 

(Introduction to “ The Jesuits in North America.” p 14.) 

Before we tell how the Iroquois flung themselves like a bomb into 
the midst of this people and scattered the survivors in so many direc- 
tions, we must introduce into the story the element that adds so much 
human interest to the tale. 


320 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Erect fifty to one hundred of these houses in an irregular group 
and you will have a Huron town; set up twenty of these towns in an 
area of about twenty-five miles square; fortify with palisades those on 


the east and south-and you have the Huron Nation which Brebeuf 


estimated in 1635 to be composed of 30,000 souls. 

The Jesuit Fathers came to Quebec to christianize the savages and 
they selected the Hurons as the special field of their mission. The 
question at once arises as to why they chose this people so far removed 
from Quebec. They were the traders who came down every year from 
the great upper country with their canoes packed with furs; they were 
a sedentary nation; Champlain had formed a sort of alliance with them 
against their enemies of the south; the Recollet Fathers had been back 
and forth from 1615 to 1628; and Lalemant in his Relation of 1639 
states that the Huron Country was “ one of the principal fortresses and 
like a donjon keep of the devils.” If the evil one could be over-thrown 
among the terrible Hurons the way would be opened up for the conver- 
sion of the Tionnontates or Tobacco Nation, the Neutrals, the Eries, the 
Andastes and possibly even the Six Nations. The very dangers of the 
Huron Nation appealed with special attractiveness to the devoted 
Jesuits, who gladly went in by the one door open to them to the great 
Huron-Iroquois nations even if that door led to martyrdom. The 
history of humanity has given us many pictures of the sacrifice of man 
for his fellowmen, but apart from the great sacrifice of the Saviour of 
mankind and the sufferings of the martyrs of the early church, it is 
doubtful whether there is any other picture quite so thrilling and so full 
of human suffering as the self-sacrificing of the Jesuit missionaries for 
the salvation of the Huron Nation. 

I need not enter into the details of the visit of Champlain to the 
Huron Nation. You are doubtless familiar with the main facts,—how 
on a tour of exploration he went up the Ottawa in the summer of 1615, 
erossed by Lake Nipissing and the French River to Georgian Bay and 
arrived at the Huron Country. He found the people living in eighteen 
villages divided among four tribes. A great gathering of the Indians 
assembled at the village of Cahiagué and it was decided to send a band 
to attack the Iroquois, Champlain decided to accompany them. They 
left Cahiagué, a village of about two hundred cabins, situated at or near 
Orillia, on the 1st of September and paddled their flotilla of canoes 
down the Trent to Lake Ontario. The Andastes, their southern allies 
were to have assisted. After five weeks’ journey they had crossed Lake 
Ontario and had come into the enemies’ country. Their allies had 
failed to come to their help, the Hurons were repulsed, and on the 18th 
of October were retreating across the eastern end of Lake Ontario. 
Champlain was compelled to spend the winter with the Hurons. Along 


{JAMEs] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 321 


with the Recollet Father Le Caron he visited the Tobacco Nation on the 
southern shore of Georgian Bay, and in May started on his return 
journey to Quebec. The effect of Champlain’s visit was to con- 
firm the Iroquois in the belief that the French were the allies of their 
enemies, Champlain did not go down into the Neutral Country, and we 
can thus readily understand why his map is so faulty in its delineation 
of Lake Erie. 

The mission of the Recollet Fathers gave place to that of the Jesuits, 
and it is with the latter that our story of the Hurons is most intimately 
concerned. We ought, however, in passing, to mention that it is to one 
of the Recollet missionaries, Gabriel Sagard, that we owe the first 
history of the Hurons and a Dictionary of the Huron language published 
in France in 1682. The new edition published in 1865 is the one 
available for students. Although Brebeuf and de Noué had spent some 
time among the Hurons between 1626 and 1629 the beginning of the 
Jesuit Mission properly so called, may be set down for the year 1634. It 
lasted until 1649. In these fifteen years twenty-five Jesuit missionaries 
carried on their work in Huronia, and five of this devoted band suffered 
martyrdom in the Huron country. 

Time does not permit to tell the story of their missionary work in 
detail—to be fully comprehended one must read the letters and records 
preserved for us in the Jesuit Relations now available in all large 
Canadian libraries in that magnificent production put out some years ago 
in 73 volumes by the Burrows Brothers of Cleveland. Or it may be that 
you still remember the story told by Parkman, based on the Relations, 
in his volume “The Jesuits in North America.” We must be brief in our 
statement. The Jesuits after much perseverance and privation, reached 
Huronia and took up their abode at Ihonatiria, which they named St. 
Joseph. Gradually they sought out village after village endeavouring 
to persuade the savages to embrace the faith of Christianity and to 
permit their children to be baptised. With a view to permanency they 
erected in 1639 a head-quarters of their own, choosing a spot on the 
River Wye, a little east of Penetanguishene. Here they enclosed a small 
plot of ground with a stone wall and wooden barricade. Within they 
erected their chapel, mission house and hospital, and without the walls a 
hostel. From this place as a centre, which they called St. Mary, they 
sent out their missionaries not only to all villages of the Hurons, but 
also to the Tobacco Nation, and even down into the country of the 
Neutrals. They kept up their communication with the Church at 
Quebec by means of the trading parties that went down every summer 
by way of the French River and the Ottawa. The sufferings of this 
devoted band of missionaries can scarcely be realized. They were 


322 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


reviled and persecuted, their lives were threatened, they had to submit 
to all manners of degradation, but they remained faithful at their posts, 
appearing even to welcome persecution and privation that they might 
advance the cause of Christianity. 

The old rivalry between the Iroquois and the Hurons became more 
intense and soon there reached this country the reports of forays and 
depredations of the Iroquois on the St. Lawrence. As we read now the 
account of the Iroquois expeditions it would seem that a great plan of 
campaign had been laid down, as though by some Master General. The 
Iroquois had determined to annihilate all their old enemies and rivals, 
It was not the impulse of a sudden attack but an extensive campaign 
that appears Napoleonic in its extent. The Iroquois were now raiding 
in one direction, a few weeks later in another; one hand was supporting 
another; even the old Ottawa was unsafe. But the Hurons planned 
nothing in return. They were oblivious of their danger,—they were 
improvident. The Jesuit Fathers had advised them to strengthen their 
villages and improve their methods of defence, but the Hurons were not 
so far seeing as the Iroquois. Moreover, the Dutch traders had 
furnished the Iroquois with guns and powder and thus given them a 
most decided advantage. The Iroquois gradually extended their opera- 
tions and about 1647 a band came in by way of “The Narrows” between 
Lakes Simeoe and Couchiching, and captured the nearest Huron village 
Contarea, killing many and taking the remainder back as prisoners to 
incorporate them in their own nation. Years after Jesuit missionaries 
found them in the Iroquois country and were delighted to find that they - 
had not forgotten all their teachings. Again the Iroquois came back in 
1648 and took the second village, Teanaustaye or St. Joseph II. In this 
fight the first Jesuit missionary was killed, Father Daniel. 

The work of the Iroquois was thorough: the village was completely 
destroyed by fire, the inhabitants cut down and 700 who could not escape 
were taken back as prisoners to be tortured or to be incorporated in their 
own nation. 1649 saw the Inoquois once more return, but earlier, before 
the snows of winter had all disappeared. They pushed further up into 
the peninsula. St. Ignace fell before them, and then, but two miles 
further on, St. Louis. The smoke of burning St. Louis could be seen 
from the Jesuit Mission of St. Mary on the Wye, but little did the 
missionaries there think as they saw the smoke arising that even then 
their own brethren Brebeuf and Lalemant had been captured and taken 
back to St. Ignace to suffer most cruel tortures. The story of the death 
of these two missionaries is one of the most terrible tales in the history 
of the human race. After the retreat of the Iroquois, the brethren from 
the mission found the mamgled and charred bodies of the two martyrs, 


[ JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 323 


THE SITE OF St. IGNACE (ON THE HILL) WHERE, ACCORDING TO REV. A. E. JONES 
S.J., BREBŒUF AND LALEMANT WERE TORTURED TO DEATH. 


ei 
«te 
à _- * sae 
» 

J 

} 
” 
- 
= LA 


[JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION, £25 


the heroic Brebœuf founder of the Huron Mission, and his frail but 
resolute companion Lalemant. They laid their bodies in the little burial 
plot at St. Mary on the Wye until their return to Quebec when they 
carried with them the treasured remains of their martyred brethren. 
Ragueneau, Bressani, and other French priests and their assistants 
prepared for an attack upon the head mission, but it did not come. The 
Iroquois were retreating homeward laden with spoils, but the Hurons who 
were left were in a panic. Town after town was abandoned or destroyed. 
Some fled westward to the rocky gorges in the Blue Mountains or to the 
Tobacco Nation; but most of them were crowding towards the northwest 
promontary of the Huron country. Beyond this lay the island of 
Ahoendoe, St. Joseph, and further on Ekaentoton or Manitoulin. Whither 
should they go? The Jesuits prepared to renew their mission on Mani- 
toulin, but the Hurons were bound to settle upon the nearer island. 
The end of a long conference was that the Jesuits decided to stay with 
the Hurons. St. Mary on the Wye was given to the flames and a new 
St. Mary erected upon St. Joseph, the island/now known as Christian 
Island. 

The late snows of March had been reddened by the blood of Brebeuf 
and Lalemant; the early snows of December the same year were to be 
reddened by the blood of two others of the Jesuit Fathers. Late in the 
year the Iroquois returned, this time to wreak havoc among the villages 
of the Tobacco or Petun Nation. Among this people there were twa 
missions served by four priests. St. Mathias, a village on the Pretty 
River, located near Ekarenniondi or the Standing Rock, and St. John, a 
few miles southwest of it, were captured. Fatner Garnier was killed on 
the 7th of December and his remains lie buried in a grave still undis- 
covered somewhere to the southwest of Collingwood. On the following 
day Father Chabanel was killed at the mouth of the Nottawasaga River. 
Then began the dispersion of the Petuns, Tionnontates or Tobacco 
Nation, relatives of and practically forming part of the Huron Nation. 
Some may have escaped southward to the Detroit, but most of them 
followed the Hurons northward towards Manitoulin and the Straits of 
Mackinac. , 

Having dispersed the Hurons and their neighbours the Tobacco 
Nation, the Iroquois next destroyed the Neutrals, and then turning their 
attention to the Eries on the south side of the lake, blotted out that 
people and thus made themselves master of the whole country formerly 
divided among the different members of the great Huron-Iroquois 
family. When the Huron Mission was started in 1634 there were 
Hurons, Petuns, Neutrals, Eries, Andastes and Iroquois; in less than a 
quarter of a century only the Iroquois were left. In this short time one 


326 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


of the great tragedies of the human race had been wrought and people 


after people had well nigh been wiped off the face of the earth. 


But so-called extermination is never quite complete—there are 
usually some remnants. The tracing of the remnants of the Hurons 


and the Petuns is the next chapter in our story. Following the notes 
of Father Martin, who edited the Canadian edition of Bressani’s history* 


of the Jesuits in New France, we can divide the remnants into five 
groups. 


1. A considerable number of the Hurons became incorporated in 


the Iroquois Nation. Many were taken prisoners and adopted into the 
confederacy ; others, strange to say, appear to have gone by choice. They 
maintained their identity for many years. 

5) 
out later on when the Iroquois so completely destroyed that nation. 

3. In the year following the great dispersion the Jesuit priests, 
accompanied by a band of Hurons, set out from Christian Island, 
taking the old trade route. After running the gauntlet of Iroquois 
guerilla bands, they finally reached Quebec. The Hurons were settled 
upon the Island of Orleans? Thither the relentless Iroquois followed 
them and made life so uncertain that, after eight years of ceaseless 


attucks, they sought shelter for a time right in the heart of the city” 


adjacent to the fort. Afterwards they were removed to Beauport, again 
to old Lorette, and in 1679 finally located at new Lorette, Huron Lorette, 
as it is called, where their descendants live to this day, making 
moccassins and snowshoes, embroidering fancy deerskin articles and also 
acting as guides to the hunters and tourists. Their houses or cabins 
cluster about the old church, erected in 1731, in imitation of the Casa 
Sancta of Lorette in Italy. 

This little band of 300, at Lorette, is much visited by tourists to old 
Quebec. Many writers in mistake refer to it as the sole remnant of the 
old Hurons. As it is so well known and is kept so much in public view, 
we need make no further reference to it than to repeat the words of 
Father Martin, written in 1852: 

“There (at Lorette) is found in our day all that remains of this 
Nation once so celebrated. After having lost its country, its language, 
its customs and a part of its nationality, it is disappearing little by little 


2See appendix to Bressani’s Missions des Jesuites dans la Nouvelle 
France. (Montreal, 1852) pp. 309-318. 

: Students interested in following up the history of the dispersed 
Hurons should read the story of Dollars Defence of the Long Sault. See 
Parkman's The old Regime in Canada, chapter VI and Burrows Jesuit Relations 
vol. XLV p. 241 chapter IV of Relation of 1659-60 “Of the Condition of the 


Huron Nation and of its latest defeat by the Iroquois Nation.” 
‘ 


2. Another band sought refuge among the Eries only to be wiped ke 


s 
Al 


t, 


re 
À 


¥ 


[JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 327] 


EKARENNIONDI, ‘ THE STANDING ROCK.” 


(Photo. taken in 1906 by members of the Huron Institute of Collingwood, Ont. 


Le : À LUE F 4 = 
= 7 = “o- 7 = ofa = re 2 
re Vie z 
fe a É e - 
\ 20 P : Re 2 
e = = L = 
<> a = 
; as rt 
. 
= - - + 
2 a = "> 
. . - 
er 
' 
i = 2 = 
‘ 
2 


JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 329 


day after day. It resembles a tree that has never taken firm root in 
the soil to which it has been transplanted. Deprived of its life-giving 
sap, its withered leaves drop off one by one without which it cannot hope 
for a new spring time to renew the freshness of its youth. There will 
soon remain no other trace of this powerful Nation than a name justly 
renowned in our annals.” 

4, Another band crossed from Christian Island to Manitoulin, 
but the Iroquois were on their trail, and after a sojourn of a few years, 
they loaded their canoes and headed for the mouth of the French River 
—they were off for Quebec to join their brethren who had _ preceded) 
them. 

5. The last section of the fugitives sought a home at Michili- 
mackimac Island, whence, on pressure from the Iroquois, they fled to 
the forests of the west. After much wandering they returned and 
settled on the shores of Lake Superior. Here a new home was 
established at St. Esprit alongside a, band of the Ottawas. Another 
enemy came to worry them, an enemy from the west this time, the Sioux. 
Father Marquette now comes upon the scene and enters into their 
history. The home upon Lake Superior is broken up; the Ottawas go 
down to Manitoulin and Father Marquette and the Hurons form a new 
settlement and mission opposite the Island of Mackinac in 1670, to 
which the cherished name of St. Ignace is given. It may be interesting 
to note that it was probably some of these Huron Indians who accom- 
panied Marquette in his discovery of the Mississippi.’ 

The story of this band, however, is not yet told. St. Ignace still 
remains a mission upon the Straits of Mackinac, but the wanderings of 
the Hurons were not yet done. Towards the end of the 17th century a 
considerable portion of the Hurons of this mission moved southward 
towards the Detroit River and formed three settlements, one on the east 


8 My attention has been called by Mr. Benjamin Sulte to the suggestion 
that these refugee Hurons had in their western wanderings found the 
Mississippi and told Marquette of the great river of the west. The following 
extract is from the Relation of 1659-1660. It is taken from p. 235, vol XLV 
of the Burrows edition. | 

“During the winter season our two Frenchmen (Radisson and Groseilliers) 
made divers excursions to the surrounding tribes. Among other things, they 
said, six days’ journey beyond the lake (Superior) toward the southwest, a 
tribe composed of the remnants of the Hurons of the Tobacco Nation, who 
have been compelled by the Iroquois to forsake their native land, and bury 
themselves so deep in the forests that they cannot be found by their enemies. 
These poor people—fleeing and pushing their way over mountains and rocks, 
through these vast unknown forests—fortunately encountered a beautiful 
river, large, wide, deep and worthy of comparison, they say, with our great 
river, St. Lawrence. On its banks they found a great nation of the Alimimec 
which gave them a very kind reception. This Nation comprises sixty 
villages—which confirms us in the knowledge that we already possessed, con- 
cerning many thousands of people who fill all these western regions.” 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


330 


= _ cs wi 


nonbour em avd 
amyep 72 © mb yyy ne UOyvN no 


wug oy wd iyUY 72092 WYUVD 29 


mowuos quid bd II or gps 


usbivawey 
eT 2004 


rar 


a 
# apna SONEN- 


<_ 
nian ep SNL SAV 


Bs mo sansisnjd 
sanpued, NOTING 
wre 1 & 


CENT: PAC 0 


LR 6 yd 
f 93 > ça 
RON An a 
NS 
ST # £. [RE SAR 
So SU cononey à =i 


UL), EE n 
sag SAVY 


now © ov 
sad 


Sonor ur 


NUUODLUI 


7 
2. Age PP © 


verras, pop 20 (PEL hs 
sqmiay sep 1 2/4 


Ag 
A 


‘PPLI AO AVW S,NITICG 


NOW OKT 
an) à cod pour RY J) 


MOP raining aie 


WOUBINIUD OSI UOJUB | 


<a 
are L mony 


/ 
foc 


<< 


CAB NVOTHOT WS CHE Y 
‘2 Pres sr) be SAUVN AY 


8 aye esr) 


\ 


D 27 


P à 


66 of. Ci 
earn L CBC 2p was 20 Mum) san 
SaTIAZHIT 


bol amy m7 22 
sydvabosehy 7 mannbuy NITTAG-N 4 
MOASTIVYY 2p ‘AU Np -eumor 2] ane ja 
amie EJ ap mevuinoe 19 Se 718 sop 
ysodaq np sytz9snuvyy say ans CEDCE re 


VAVNVI Nd SDVISAG 
ALUV 


(C1003 hE 


saa no 


Paar imei. RAT 


[JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION $31 


bank of the River, another on the west bank, and the third on the south 
shore of Lake Erie in Ohio near Sandusky. These were the Hurons or 
Wyandotts of Western Ontario, of Michigan, and of Ohio, descendants 
of the old Hurons and Petuns of the Georgian Bay. What became of 
these Western Wyandotts? In 1842 the Wyandotts of Ohio ceded their 
lands, which were situated in Wyandott County, a few miles south of 
Sandusky, to the United States, and in the following year purchased 


ep ee + =» = 


on, Cost Cra 
eve deomovy, US. 


Qa 
PACE 

pees ~— 149 

Quekeus . 00 
Shaurmxe 297 
once 70 


Pe Criaz Mt &o 
Der 1213 
C (lei o 2205 


Gruno #0, 674 
Ckectaws 177€! ee 


6 { , ot, 15" 
Casa 139,760 


from the Delawares a tract of land in the Indian Territory at the forks 
of the Missouri and Kansas Rivers. W. E. Connelly says of this 
migration : 

“They brought with them from Ohio a well-organized Methodist 
Church, a Freemason’s Lodge, a civil Government, and a code of 
written laws which provided for an elective council of chiefs, the 
punishment of crime, and the maintenance of social and public order.” 


332 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


In 1855 their tribal relations were dissolved and the lands were 
allotted in severalty. A part of the tribe, however, was dissatisfied with 
this arrangement and moved south, purchasing from the Cowskin 
Senecas a small tract in the northeastern corner of the Indian Territory, 
where they resumed tribal relationships and where they now live, having 
as neighbours a small band of Ottawas on the north and a remnant of 
their old enemies, the Senecas, on the south. 

We have now left for consideration the last remnant of the Hurons 
or Wyandotts on the Canadian side of the Detroit River. Just one hun- 
dred years after the terrible Iroquois had swept the country of the 
Hurons, Petuns and Neutrals, there was to be found on the east bank 
of the Detroit a prosperous band of Hurons, descendants of the original 
Hurons who had come around the lake by way of Mackinac and possibly 
containing also remnants of the Petuns and of the Neutrals. There 
were also on the same side of the River Indians of other tribes, Ottawas, 
Chippewas and Pottawatamies; but the Hurons appear to have been of 
chief importance, with the Ottawas, their old neighbours and associates, 
next, in order of importance. In 1728 the Catholic Church of Detroit 
established its first mission among the Hurons across the river, a plain 
log building wag erected two miles below Detroit on the opposite side of 
the river, and in it services were begun. This was the Huron Church 
about which there gradually grew up a little settlement, later a village. 
This village is to-day the town of Sandwich, and the visitor to that 
oldest town in southwestern Ontario can still see in a fair state of 
preservation the old wooden Huron Mission, erected between the years 
1747-1750, the oldest building now standing in the Province of Ontario. 

At the close of the war of American Independence, the chiefs of 
the Hurons and Ottawas desired to express appreciation of their leaders 
inj the late war amd so, in 1784, they gave a tract of land seven miles 
square at the mouth of the Detroit River (the present Township of 
Malden, Essex County) to Alexander McKee, Wm. Caldwell, Charles 
McCormack, Robin Eurphlect, Anthony St. Martin, Mathew Elliott, 
Henry Bird, Thomas McKeen and Simon Girty. This grant was not 
fully recognized by the British Governor, but it proved that the Hurons 
claimed the east bank of the river and fought on the British side during 
the war. Later, in 1790, the land from the Detroit River east to Catfish 
Creek was ceded to the Crown by the Indians and the Hurons were 
among the contracting parties. But in this cession there was reserved 
a tract of about thirty-six square miles on the Detroit River north of 
Amherstburg, and also a small tract at the Huron Church opposite 
Detroit. The former was known as the Huron Reserve, and upon it was 
the Wyandotte Burial Ground that has been in use for the burial of 


[JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 333 


Huron Indians down to the present time, In 1833 this reserve was 
surrendered in trust to the Dominion Government and it has been sold 
bit by bit for the benefit of the surviving members of the tribe. 

And what has become of these Hurons? They have been absorbed 
into the mixture of races living along the Detroit. A few, a very few, 
may be found whose blood is fairly pure. Here and there you will find 


De lroik 


+ 

th 

vi “oo 
Fc, 4 


lake Ernie 


ad. ot 
À ur dé 
er W Ootid 
AD hint Fit 20 796 


a family bearing an English or a French name but having the linea- 
ments of the Indian more or less distinctly portrayed and who refer with 
pride to their descent from the ancient Hurons or Wyandotts. Tribal 
- relations ceased in 1880 and 1881 when forty-one heads of families 
received enfranchisement. The last Indian chiefs of the band were 
Joseph White and Alexander Clarke. It is worth mentioning that Mr. 


Sec. II., 1906. 22. 


334 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Solomon White for some years a member of the Legislature of Ontario is 
a son of Chief Joseph White. In this connection it may be mentioned 
that Mr. William Walker, who was the first Governor of the Provisional 
Territory of Nebraska in 1853, was a Wyandott from the Detroit River. 

If time permitted we could make an extensive study of the work 
done by archeologists in identifying the sites of the old Huron villages. 
French Canadians interested in the history of the Jesuits have traversed 
the fields and wooded hills of Simcoe County with the Jesuit Relations 
in their hands locating here a village, there an ossuary. Archzologisbs 
of Ontario have with pick and shovel dug up hatchets and arrow heads, 
pipes, bowls, large shells from the Gulf of Mexico and the wampuny 
made therefrom, and, to-day, thanks to the labours of Dr. Taché, Father 
Martin, Mr. David Boyle of Toronto, Mr. A. F. Hunter of Barrie, Mr. 
J. H. Hammond of Orillia, and many others, we are able to reproduce 
the map of old Huronia with no little degree of accuracy. We must 
acknowledge our great indebtedness to the papers scattered through the 
Ontario Archeological Reports, and to the painstaking researches of 
Rev. Father Jones, Archivist of St. Mary’s College, Montreal, who has 
in his keeping many of the original records of the Jesuit Missionaries, 
and who has in preparation a work on the identification of the sites of 
villages and missions in old Huronia. 

My story, condensed and but imperfectly related, has been told. 
Two hundred and fifty years and more ago, a strong haughty nation was 
entrenched upon the shores of Georgian Bay. To-day one remnant lives 
far east, near neighbours to the French Canadians of old Quebec; 
another remnant lives a thousand miles away to the south, beyond the 
Mississippi and Missouri; and traces may be discovered along the banks 
of the Detroit River. Some of the descendants of their old enemies and 
destroyers have shared with them their lands in the Indian Territory, 
while others till the fields and raise their crops of corn along the Grand 
River and in the Bay of Quinte. 

The story that I have tried to tell you forms part of the greater 
history of the struggle of the people of Europe for the control of the 
trade of this Continent and the ownership of the land. It forms a part 
also of the story of the early efforts to convert the savages of this Con- 
tinent to Christianity. Apart from these two relationships it is a story 
that in itself is full of interest, a sbory that should appeal to our 
Canadian singers, a story that should be known to very one who calls 
himself Canadian. 


[JAMES] 
THE DO 
Ww 
NFALL OF THE HURO 
N NATI 
ON 
335 


Dor 


Len gs 


2 
, reap 
APF 
pert 
Fr" 
onto 
ote A 


e Cutline Map 
mg Touts, of Dupe 
Pen 


o 
/ Hucons oe Wesan 
ach 


iD om 
Te) ; 
ICE È 
[TA A7: 
| pe 4) 


x 


(re 
- 


a. L Le ta _ a) 
2 (SOR A ie 


wet (at Sa-Me « PSE 


oa 
Fr 

“ry 

as 


NATION 


D 


URS 


OF THE H 


NFALL 


THE DOW 


5) 


[sAME 


(OPUOLOT, ‘HET ‘EH ‘AA 1 Aq. ‘oqou) 


*IO8I NI HA M HE NO ANVIN ‘LS aos, AO BITTY AA HO SENV NAT 


a 4 1 
eee ee Te, Um NE uth sc ion 


THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 339 


[JAMES] 


(oyUOIOT, ‘SIA “HM “Ad 4q ‘oJ0qd) ‘IG8I NI GNVIS] NVLISIHHO NO AUVIN ‘LS LHOT AO STIVAL AO SINVNWAY 


" 


D + 


LUN § 


[JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 343 


APPENDIX 


ORIGIN OF NAME “ HURON.” 


“Champlain appelle les Hurons Ochastequins, et les confond avec les Iro- 
quois, qu'il a cru sans doute ne faire avec eux qu’une même nation, à cause 
de la conformité qu'il avait remarquée entre les langages des uns et des 
autres. Peut-être aussi les avait-il oul nommer Ochastequins par quelques 
autres Sauvages. Mais leur véritable nom est YENDATs. Celui de Hurons 
est de la facon des Francois, qui voyant ces Barbares avec des cheveux 
coupés, fort courts, et relevés d’une manière bizarre, et qui leur donnoient un 
air affreux, s’écriérent la première fois qu’ils les appercurent: Quelles Hures! 
et s'accoûtumerent à les appeller Hurons.” 

Histoire et Description Générale de la Nouvelle France, by Father de Charle- 
voix, 1744, Vol. I, p. 285. 


FORT STE. MARIE I. 


The following description of Fort Ste. Marie on the Wye by Father 
Martin is taken from the autobiography of Father Chaumonot, published in 
Paris in 1885. Father Martin’s examination of the ruins was made in 1859. 
“Nous trouvâmes sans peine les ruines du fort Sainte-Marie. Ses murailles, 
en bonne maçonnerie, s'élèvent encore à plus d’un mètre au-dessus du sol. 
Il a la forme d’un parallélogramme allongé, avec des bastions à ses angles. 
-Ialgré quelques singularités dans sa construction, dont il est difficile au- 
jourd’hui de donner les motifs, on reconnait sans peine dans ce travail des 
notions d’art militaire, appliqués avec soin. Les courtines de l’ouest et du 
nord sont entières, tandis qu'il ne reste aucune trace de celles de l’est et du 
sud. Il est à présumer qu’elles étaient formées par de solides palissades que 
le feu et le temps ont fait disparaître. De ces deux côtés, l’ennemi était 
moins à craindre. A l’est et au sud, on voit encore les traces d’un fossé assez 
profond, qui protégeait l'enceinte. Celui du sud se prolonge jusqu'à la rivière, 
et il est évident qu'il devait être capable d’en recevoir les eaux, et permettre 
aux canots sauvages d'y trouver un abri. Il s’élargit en trois endroits, pour 
former trois petits bassins réguliers très favorables pour aborder. Le long 
de ce large fossé, s'étend au sud un assez vaste terrain, protégé du côté de 
la campagne par une espèce de redan, dont on distingue très bien encore le 
parapet en terre et le fossé qui communique avec la rivière. C’est là que se 
dressaient les tentes des sauvages visiteurs, et les grandes cabanes, qui for- 
maient l'hôpital et l'hôtellerie. 

A côté du bastion du fort, au sud-ouest, il y a une construction carrée 
qui a un mur très épais. Elle devait sans doute servir de base à une tour 
élevée, d’où l’on pouvait avoir vue au loin, et surveiller facilement les ap- 
proches.” Autobiographie du R. P. Chaumonot de la Compagnie de Jésus et 
son complément, par le R. P. F. Martin, Paris, (H. Oudin), 1885, pp. 268-270. 


(Copy.) 
THE HURON RESERVE ON THE DETROIT RIVER. 
Ottawa, 1st May, 1906. 
My Dear Sir:— 


Referring to your letter, undated, asking for information relative to the 
Wyandotte Indians, I have to say that from the records it would appear that 
the Huron Reserve, in the Township of Anderdon, seven miles square and 


344 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


fronting on the Detroit River, formed part of the ancient possessions of the 
Wyandottes and was confirmed to them at the general partition of lands by 
the different tribes in the year 1791. In 1833 the reserve was surrendered in 
trust to the Government in order that a portion of it might be sold for their 
benefit. In 1836 two-thirds of the reserve was again ceded on the following 
conditions: — 

Block A, containing 7,550 acres, to be sold for the benefit of the Tribe; 
Block C, containing 7,070 acres, for the benefit of Indians generally; Block B, 
containing 7,770 acres, was retained for a reserve for the Wyandotte Band. 

The following surrenders were subsequently made of this reserve: — 

20th Sept., 1836. Part of Anderdon Township, Essex County. 

19th July, 1853. Part of W. Sandwich Township, Essex County. 

28th April, 1854. Part of Town of Sarnia and part of West Sandwich, 
Essex County (60% acres). 

27th Feb., 1863. Fighting Island, Detroit River. 

20th Aus, 1875 ots 6 18 19Mand ‘south 16 of 10) in Con: 16..7 ands; 
Anderdon Township, Essex County. 

21st Dec., 1877. ‘Southerly 2-3 of Lot 13, Con. 1, and south % of Lot 8, 
Con. 8, for Solomon White; south % of south % of Lot 7, Con. 3, for Mary 
L. White; Indian marsh, for Chief Joseph White; Anderdon Township, Essex 
County. 

7th May, 1879. Water lot in front of southerly 2-3 of Lot 13, Con. 1. 
Anderdon Township, Essex County, for Solomon White. 

7th May, 1879. South-east quarter of Lot 6, Con. 3, for Victoria Maguire; 
south-west 4% of Lot 9, Con. 4, for Christine Ramon; north-west 4% of Lot 8, 
Con. 2, for Catherine Bernard; south-west 4% of Lot 6, Con. 3, for Charlotte 
Marsh, Anderdon Township, Essex County. 

27th April, 1880. Water lot in front of Lot 18, Con. 1, Anderdon Town- 
ship, Essex County. 

25th April, 1882. Gore in rear of south % of Lot 19, Con. 1, Anderdon 
Township, Essex County. (6 27-100 acres.) For Lewis Warrow. 

16th Dec., 1886. North % of south % of Lot 7, Con. 3, Anderdon Township, 
Essex County. 

26th June, 1889. Gore in rear of Lot 17, Con. 1, Anderdon Township, 
Essex County. 

In the year 1876 application was made by the Band to be enfranchised 
under the terms of the Indian Act. The application was approved and the 
probationary term having been served the Indians were granted enfranchise- 
ment in the years 1880 and 1881, in all 41 heads of families received en- 
franchisement. 

The only remaining unenfranchised member of the Band is Mrs. Catherine 
Maiville, née Laforet. This woman who is now 85 years of age, was married 
to Peter Maiville, a white man, in 1846, whose death occurred in 1852. The 
last Indian Chiefs of the Wyandotte Band were Joseph White and Alexander 
Clarke. 

Yours truly, 
(Signed) FRANK PEDLEY, 


# Deputy Superintendent General of Indian Affairs. 


SOME WORKS OF REFERENCE ON THE HURONS AND THEIR 
DESTRUCTION BY THE IROQUOIS. 


Jesuit Relations (edition published by The Burrows Brothers Company, of 
Cleveland, Ohio). The letters and journals of the Jesuit Fathers are to be 
found in nearly every one of volumes VII to XLVI inclusive, covering the 
years 1634 to 1661. 

Sagard. Le Grand Voyage du Pays des Hurons, par Fr. Gabriel Sagard, 
Recollect de St. Francois. This was first published at Paris in 1632. In 1865 
a new edition was issued at Paris by Librairie Tross in two volumes. As the 
date indicates, this description was written just prior to the time of the 
Jesuit mission. 


[JAMES] THE DOWNFALL OF THE HURON NATION 345 


Bressani. Relation Abrégée de Quelques Missions des Péres de la Com- 
pagnie de Jésus dans la Nouvelle-France, par le R. P. F. J. Bressani, de la 
même Compagnie. Traduit de l'Italien et augmenté d’un avant-propos, de la 
biographie de l’auteur, et d’un grand nombre de notes et de gravures, par le 
R. P. F. Martin, de la même Compagnie. Montréal (John Lovell), 1852. The 
original was published in 1653. The appendices, by Father Martin, are very 
valuable in connection with the study of this question. 

Martin. ‘Two books by Rev. Felix Martin, S.J. (in addition to Bressani, 
referred to above) contain some information as to the Hurons. The first is 
his “Life of Father Isaac Jogues,’ which was translated into English by 
John Gilmary Shea and published in 1885. Appendix A contains notes on the 
geography of the Huron country, with description of the ruins of St. Mary 
on the Wye as Father Martin found them. The following work by the same 
author will be found more complete and the notes on the Jesuit Fort are 
accompanied by a sketch plan:—Autobiographie du R. P. Chaumonot, de la Com- 
pagnie de Jésus, et son Complément, par le R. P. F. Martin, de la même Compagnie. 
Paris, 1885. This latter work also contains a plan of Fort St. Mary on 
Christian Island (p. 272) and of the chapel at Jeune Lorette (p. 218). 

The Hurons of the Detroit. The Catholic Home Magazine for 1903 (Lon- 
don, Ont.), contained a paper by the late Miss Margaret Claire Kilroy, of 
Windsor, entitled ‘‘Sandwich, the origin of the Diocese of London.” It con- 
tains a sketch of the early mission to the Hurons in the Detroit and an illus- 
tration of the old mission House still standing at Sandwich. This article is 
quite exhaustive. 

Clarke—Origin and Traditional History of the Wyandotts, and sketches 
of other Indian Tribes of North America. True Traditional Stories of Te- 
cumseh and the League in the years 1811 and 1812, Toronto (Hunter, Rose & 
Co.), 1870. By Peter Dooyentate Clarke. 

Connelley. Volume III, second series (1899), of the publications of the 
.“ebraska State Historical Society is entitled: “The Provisional Government 
of Nebraska Territory and the Journals of William Walker, Provincial Gov- 
ernor of Nebraska Territory.’ It is edited by William A. Connelley, of 
Topeka, Kansas, and contains notes of the migration of the Wyandotts from 
Ohio to the Indian Territory, a map of the Wyandott Purchase and sketch 
of William Walker, the Wyandott, who was born in Michigan in 1799 or 1800 
and died at Kansas City, Mo., in 1874. 

Ontario Archeological Reports. Nineteen reports, prepared by Mr. David 
Boyle, have been issued by the Ontario Department of Education, Toronto. 
+ or the years 1886 to 1894 they were issued as reports of the Canadian Insti- 
tute. Subsequent to the year 1894, when the museum was transferred to the 
1 partment of Education, they have been issued directly by the Department. 
The following references may be of service to students of the Huron- 
Troquois feud. 

1889. Pages 4-15 refer to the Tobacco Nation, methods of burial, sites 
of ossuaries, map of Nottawasaga Township, etc. Pages 42-46, paper by Mr. 
A. F. Hunter, B.A., on “ French Relics from Village Sites of the Huron.” 

1890-91 (Fourth Annual Report of the Canadian Institute). This contains 
on pages 18 and 19 some notes on Ste. Marie on the Wye and its decadence, 
with an appeal for its preservation. 

1892-3. (The Sixth Annual Report of the Canadian Institute, misprinted 
“fifth’”’ on title page.) 

Pages 22-34 contain an interesting sketch of the Neutrals and their 
relation to the Hurons, by Mr. James H. Coyne, B.A., under title of “The 
Southwold Earthwork and the Country of the Neutrals.” 

1895. The report for this year, the 8th of the series, appeared under the 
title: “Notes on Primitive Man in Ontario.” The articles on “Aborigenes of 
Ontario,” “ Social Condition,’ ‘“ Food,’ ‘ Religion,” ‘ Burial Customs,” etc. 
contain many interesting notes on the Hurons. 

1897-8. (11th Report.) ‘The Jesuit Stone,” p. 32, is an interesting note 
of 1641. “Christian Island,’ pp. 35-42, contains the plan of the old Jesuit 
Fort (from Ducreux), also notes on the condition of the ruins in 1897. San- 
son’s map of 1656 is reproduced. It indicates the location of the Hurons, 
Petuns, Neutrals, Eries and Andastes before the wars of extermination. 


346 {ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


1899. (13th.) ‘“ Notes on sites of Huron Villages in the Township of Tay 
(Simcoe County), by A. F. Hunter, M.A. This was. the second of a series, 
the first on village sites in the Township of Tiny, having been printed by the 
Department of Education, as a separate brochure in the previous year. On 
pages 59 and 60 are plans of Ste. Mary on the Wye in 1852 and 1876. This 
volume for 1899 also contains, pp. 92-123, an interesting article on The Wyan- 
dotts, by Mr. Wm. E. Connelley, under the following chapters: “Migration 
legends,” ‘Clan System,” ‘‘Government,” etc. This article is followed by a 
translation into English of Mr. Benjamin Sulte’s history of “ The War of the 
Iroquois,” pp. 124-151. 

1900. ‘‘The Flint Workers: A Forgotten People,’ by Rev. Dean Harris, 
is a sketch of the Neutrals and contains much of interest in relationship to 
the Hurons. 

1901. ‘Notes on Huron Villages in the Township of Medonte, Simcoe 
County,” by A. F. Hunter, M.A. 

1902. “ Notes on sites of Huron Villages in the Township of Oro, Simcoe 
County,” by A. F. Hunter, M.A. This volume also contains the paper by Rev. 
A. E. Jones, S.J., on “The Identification of St. Ignace II and Ekarenniondi,” 
pp. 92-136. This paper illustrates the method of work adopted by the 
archivist of St. Mary’s College, Montreal. 

1903. ‘Indian Villages Sites in North and South Orillia,” by A. F. Hunter, 
M.A. “The Standing Rock,” by F. Birch. 

1904 “Cahiagué,’ by J. Hugh Hammond. This is followed by some 
notes on Huron village sites in Orillia Township. 

1905. “The Iroquois,’ by David Boyle, pp. 146-158. This is the very 
valuable paper referred to in the address as discussing the question of the 
legendary migrations of the Huron-Iroquois peoples. 


peed, SOCIETY OF CANADA 


TRANSACTIONS 


SECTION III: 


MATHEMATICAL, PHYSICAL anp CHEMICAL SCIENCES 


PAPERS FOR 1906 


Are 
ii ul Lo Ne iy 
a AE ‘ 


7 me 
Ns 


Section Iil., 1906. [3] Trans. R. S. C. 


I.—A bacus of the Altitude and Azimuth of the Pole Star. 
By E. Device, LL.D. 


(Read May 23rd, 1906.) 


The boundaries of sections in the land surveys of the Dominion 
being north and south or east and west lines, it is essential that surveyors 
who subdivide townships should ascertain frequently the direction 
of the astronomical meridian, so that they may know the exact bearings 
of the lines which they are running. ‘The method prescribed for this 
determination is the observation of the Pole Star in day light. The Star 
is readily seen an hour after sunrise or before sunset with the telescope 
of 112 in. aperture supplied to the Dominion Land Surveyors, provided 
it is adjusted to bring the Star approximately in the centre of the field. 
The direction in azimuth is given from the survey lines or by means of 
the magnetic needle, after which the telescope is set to the altitude of 
the Pole Star. Sidereal time is given by a common watch, regulated to 
gain 3 m. 56 s. per day; its error is ascertained from time to time by 
meridian transits of tlie sun or stars. To facilitate matters, astronomical 
field tables are supplied to surveyors. Among other data the tables give 
the bearing of the Pole Star for every ten minutes and for townships 
0, 20, 40, 60 and 80: the bearing at any other time and for any other 
township is obtained by interpolation. The distance of the Star above or 
below the pole is also given for calculating the altitude. Although the 
interpolation for the bearing and the calculation of the altitude are very 
simple, some surveyors prefer to have no calculation whatever: this con- 
dition is fulfilled by the abacus. 


Graphic Representation of Equations. 


Before explaining the theory of this abacus, it is necessary to recail 
a few of the principles of the graphic representation of equations. An 
exhaustive investigation of the subject has been made by d’Ocagne: ! 


what is needed for our purpose may be briefly summed up as follows: 
If, in the equation of a curve: 


(1) f, (2, y, &) =0 
successive increments are given to the parameter «,, to each of these 


increments corresponds a different curve: the equation thus defines a 
system of curves (a,). 


* Traité de Nomographie by Maurice d’Ocagne, Paris—Gauthier—Villars. 


4 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


In the same way, the equations: 


(2) f, (Z, y; @) = 0 
(3) fs (@, y, @%) = 0 
define the systems of curves (a@,) and (a,). When three of these curves 


taken respectively in each of the systems intersect in one point, the cor- 
responding values of the variables à, @,, a, satisfy the equation : 


ACT a, a) = 2 
resulting from the elimination of x and y between the equations (1), 


(2) and (3). The value of any one of the variables can thus be ob- 
tained by means of the other two. For instance, if we wish in Fig. 1 to 


inne} Ie 


find the value of a, corresponding to a, = 2 and a, = 4, we follow to 
their intersection the curves marked “2” in the system (a@,) and “4” in 
the system («,) : the curve of the system (a,) passing through this point 
being marked “5”, this number is the required value of a. 

This kind of abacus is the one most frequently met with, although 
by no means the best. Usually one of the variables, a,, is taken as 
xz and another, a,, as y; a, is thus represented by a series of parallels 
to the y axis, a, by a series of parallels to the x axis and a, by a series 
of curves. The use of this abacus requires simultaneous interpolation by 
estimation between three pairs of lines, an operation not susceptible of 
much precision. The accuracy may to some extent be increased by 
drawing more lines, but a limit is soon reached beyond which the num- 
ber of lines becomes confusing. 


[DEVILLE] ABACUS OF THE POLE STAR 5 


To shorten writing, let f,, ¢n, d», be written instead of f, (an), 
dn (An), ln (an), and let us consider the particular case when equations 
(1), (2), (3), assume the form : 


chtryat ¥,=0 
(4) et, + y bi += 0 
zf+ty ¢ + hs = 0 
Each of these equations defining a system of straight lines, their re- 
sultant after the elimination of x and y: 


fi, À Ÿ 
(5) f2 Pa Y2|= 0 
fs D ws 


is represented by three systems of straight lines. Thus an abacus con- 
sisting of straight lines only can be constructed whenever the equation 
to be represented can be put in the form of equation (5). 

By the application of the principle of duality, this figure can be 
transformed into a correlated one such that to straight lines shall cor- 
respond points. Each of the equations (4) which, in the first figure, 


Die PA 


defines a system of straight lines tangent to their envelope, defines, in 
the second figure, points distributed upon a curve, their bearer, as in 
Fig. 2. Equation (5) which in the first figure means that three straight 
lines are copunctal, means in the correlated figure that three points are 
costraight. Instead of following as in Fig. 1 the lines (a,) and 
(@,) to their intersection and finding the line of the system (a;) 
which passes through this point, the mode of employment of the new 
kind of abacus (Fig. 2) consists in joining by a straight line the points 
(a,) and (a,) and reading the graduation at the intersection of the 
bearer of (a,). The abacus has gained in simplicity, consisting only 
of three lines, and the interpolation by estimation instead of being simul- 
taneous between three pairs of lines is now made three times in succes- 
sion between two divisions of a graduation, a process susceptible of con- 
siderable precision. 


6 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


A convenient way of effecting the transformation is to employ 
parallel instead of cartesian co-ordinates. The parallel co-ordinates u 
and v of a straight line are the distances AM, BUN, (Fig. 3) of its inter- 


a 


Fic 3. 
sections by two parallel lines from the origins A and B selected on these 
parallels. In this system, an equation of the first degree: 


(Gp) au + bv + c = 0 
defines a point of which the cartesian co-ordinates may be found as 
follows: Taking O, centre of AB, us origin, OB as axis of x, a parallel 


through O to AM and BW as axis of y and designating by 6 the distance 
OB, we have: ! 


b—a 
(8) =o b+a 
— C 
(9) Le i +a 
1 Equation (7) gives for u = 0 : 
pea 


and for v=o: 


— C 
b 
the point defined by equation (7) is P, intersec- 

vo tion of A Dand B C, (Fig. 4). 


Taking A C= and BD— 


Eig. 4. 


Similar triangles give the following proportions: | 


BA OS 
ANB CV SBD 
and es 


[DEVILLE] ABACUS OF THE POLE STAR Z 
Abacus of the Azimuth of the Pole Star. 


The azimuth of a star in terms of the latitude, hour anglejand polar 

distance, is given by the formula: 

PA Le LE P sec Lsint 
1 — tan P tan L cos t 
in which: 

z = Azimuth of the star 

P = Polar distance of the star 

t = Hour angle of the star 

L = Latitude. 

The azimuth and polar distance of the Pole Star are so small that if 
the above expression be developed in terms of the powers of z and P, the 
terms containing powers above the second can, in the case of subdivision 
surveys, be neglected. Expressing z and P in minutes of arc, we obtain: 


2 
200s b= P sin t + tan Lsin 2¢ sin V 


The surveys of Dominion Lands extend from the 49th parallel of 
latitude to about township 84, in latitude 56°20’, an interval of 7°20’. 


Substituting the values of the different lines, the equations become: 


OMG ia oe 
Pie Gate 

ae 
CREER MEN: 
DO EE 

a 

hence: 

fei = > ge 

— € 
LL EE ON CE 


Adding up and dividing by 2 J, we have: 
i (2 + a 
PUR 
— € 


b + a 


or VE 


Subtracting the second equation from the first one gives : 


b — 
DE 2 0.4 ( =} 


Replacing y by its value and dividing by 2: 


es (555) 


8 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


A mean value of the latitude may therefore be adopted for the last term 
of the above expression, which is always small.! Denoting by JZ, this 
mean value, the equation may be written : 


Ping 2° tan L, sin 2 t sin 1’ 


3 — cos L = O 
now put: 
Bs u 
(10) Paint tant asin 2 ¢ sin l— j 
1 
cc — cos L = ; 
and the equation becomes : i 
12 aie v=o 
(12) s+ 


The value of u is calculated by (10) for hour angle intervals of 10 
minutes and laid out on the axis of u, A u, (Fig. 5), but the sidereal time 
instead of the hour angle is marked opposite the divisions of the gradua- 
tion. Thistime is equal to the sum of the hour angle and right ascen- 
sion of the Star. The modulus /, is the length of one minute of arc on 


B 


t scale 


BIG. 5: 


Au; it 1s selected arbitrarily so as to give suitable proportions to the 
figure. 

In the same way, the values of v or — cos L are laid out below B on 
the axis of v, Bu, v being negative. The modulus /, is the length of 
cos 0° ; like the modulus J,, it is selected so as to give suitable propor- 


1 Designating by LZ, and LZ, the extreme values of L, the value of Z, which 
causes the least maximum error in the azimuth is given by the expression : 


an L STE tan £ cos L 
tan EE IL, cos Z, + tan L, c 1 
cos LA + cos Lo 


In the present case L, = 53°17’. The error is a maximum for townships 0 


and 84 and for hour angles of 8 or 9 hours: it is then equal to 0.22. 


[DEVILLE] ABACUS OF THE POLE STAR 9 


tions to the figure. The number of the township corresponding to the 
latitude is marked on the divisions of the graduation. 

The cartesian co-ordinates of the points defined by (12) are given by 
(8) and (9): 


(13) ph pa A rl 


UE 


y being equal to zero, the line AB is the bearer of the z scale. 
The values of x might be calculated from (13) and laid out from the centre 
of AB, but the graduation can be constructed in a more simple manner. 
In the first place, we observe that for z = 0, r = — 0; so the zero 
of the graduation is at A. Forz = o, x = 0; so the figurative point 
is at B. Now the scale defined by (13) is a linear scale ; therefore it is 
the image of a regular scale and as its figurative point is at B on the line 
Bb, it is obtained by laying out a regular scale on a parallel to Bv and 
projecting iton AB from a projection apex on Bv. This is done as 
follows : 


Ere. 6: 


Join township 84, (Fig. 6) on the v scale, to 7426™ (¢ = 6) 
of the uw scale. The intersection C with AB is the end of the use- 
ye 
cos 56°20” 
say 1295. With a suitable scale, measure from A on Au a length AD 
of 129.5. Select on Bv a proper projection apex G; join AG and GC. 
Through D draw a parallel D M to AG and through the point M where 
it intersects GC produced, draw MN parallel to Av. The scale used for 
measuring AD if laid on MN with its zeroat J, has its point 129’.5 at 

M ; therefore its projection from G on AC gives the required z scale. 


ful part of the z scale. The value of z in this case 1s let us 


10 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


For values of t between 12% and 24", the graduations of both ¢ and z 
would fall beyond A and increase the size of the figure: this is avoided 
by changing the sign of u in (10). We have then two graduations for 
sidereal time on Au, and two graduations for bearing on AB; the second 
graduations are printed in red to distinguish them. Plate I shows a 
specimen of the abacus. 


Abacus of the Altitude of the Pole Star. 


The altitude, A, of a star in terms of the latitude, hour angle and 
polar distance is given by the formula : 
sin À = sin Z cos P + cos L sin P cost 
Let : 


k= £4 
then : 


sin Z cos x + cos J sin x = sin L cos P + cos L sin P cos t 


P and x are very small. Developing this expression in terms of the 
powers of P and x, and discarding the terms which contain powers 


above the second, we find : 
2 


z= Picost—' >= tan sin? t 
As before, we adopt a mean value, Z,, for tan L.’ Allowing 0'.75 
for refraction, we may write : 
H = h-- 1075 


Expressing H, L, and P in minutes, we have: 


9 


Filey een = Land stein te 0 


Putting: 

(14) ? = JE 

(15) : = P cos t — à tan J, sin? ¢ sin 1’ 
the equation becomes : 

(16) EURE ee SEs 


l | ly 
The scale of u, (14), is a regular scale of modulus /,, properly 


selected, for one minute of latitude. It is laid out on Aw, but instead of 
measuring multiples of /,, and numbering them in minutes of latitude, 


1 The mean value causing the least maximum error in the altitude is the 
mean of the extreme values of tan L; it corresponds to [, = 52°59’. The maxi- 


mum error for ¢ = 64 or 18h and for township 0 or 84 is 07.175. 


[DEVILLE] ABACUS OF THE POLE STAR 11 


we measure multiples of nl, n being the number of minutes of latitude 
in a township, and mark the township number opposite the divisions of 
the graduation. The scale of v, given by (15), is also a regular scale 
laid out on Sv with an appropriate modulus /,; instead of the hour 
angle, the sidereal time is marked upposite the divisions of the gradua- 
tion, 

The cartesian co-ordinates of the points of the H scale, defined by 
(16), are given by (8) and (9): 


Hic. 7. 


x being a constant, the bearer of the H scale is a parallel CD 
(Fig. 7) to the axes, drawn at a distance x from the centre of AB. The 


1 ; ; 
+ ——, commencing at 0”.75 


Hf scale is a regular scale of modulus ; 


Al 
below the line AB. 

The abacus has been made in two parts place! one over the other. 
The sidereal time scale is identical in both. |The divisions of the altitude 
and township scales have been so arranged that they coincide, but they 
bear different numbers. The numbers of the second part are printed in 
red, 

Plate II shows a specimen of the abacus. 


dit 
Mt 
( 


À 


[Devizze.] 


a 
g 2 
TE 
i |i 
TIME 
ge 
@ 
2 
STAR 


=| 
ee 3 


E.DEVILLE,LL.D. 


Surveyor General 


DIAGRAM 


oF THE 


BEARING OF THE POLE STAR 


November and December 1905 
September and October 1906 
July and August 1907 


PLATE I. 


Trans. R. S. C. Secrion III. 


TOWNSHIP 


[Devrie.] Trans. R. S.C. Secrion III. 


ee 
J a3 
= + 
53° | 
+ : 
æ 
56° 
30. 
ei 52 
+70 Tw 
+ g + 
< 
a > 
al 55° a 
alt a alt 3 
RE à É 
ap É à 51° 
eee kon ET FR 2 
20 À 5 Eis à 
76 & Em DIAGRAM 2 
+60 | : oF THE à 
54 D 
E £ ALTITUDE 
i= ov THE 
À 50° 
ne POLE STAR 
——0 
= November and December 1905 
al of September and October 1906 
aii 53° July and August 1907 
10— AAS 
ai ei 
+50 4 
ab a 
ol : 
at at 1 b 
TL 52° 11 
ia a0 
Sh PY-CHE 1 12" 


PLave II. 


Section III., 1906. [18] Trans. R. £&. C, 


IIl.—A Subjective Phenomenon of Vision. 


By W. Rupert TURNBULL, M.E., RoTHESAY, N.B. 


(Presented by Dr. G. U. Hay.) 


1. I wish to describe in this paper a rather remarkable phenomenon 
of vision which, as far as I can learn has never before been made public 
(see Historical Review at the end of paper). 

2. The investigation has extended somewhat over a year. The 
experiments at first were of a desultory character and it is only within 
the latter part of the year that the subject in hand could receive due 
attention. 

It is with some hesitation that this paper is now presented for it is in 
many ways crude and unfinished, but the importance of the phenomenon 
seems so great that the publication of even incomplete results seems 
desirable. More especially as I am about entering on a most thorough 
investigation (see supplement, written June, 1904) and hope not only to 
profit by the criticisms of the work done and undone, but hope also that 
this article may be the means of communicating with other persons who 
have observed the same or a similar phenomenon. 


i. 


The Phenomenon as first, and as now observed. 


3. When a lad of 10 or 12 years, I saw, after retiring at night—the 
room being dark—an image projected in space, which seemed to oscillate, 
first in one oblique plane (1), making perhaps an angle of 30° with the 
vertical, and then, after a confusing break in the oscillations, vibrating in 


Fig. fi 


the opposite oblique plane (2) (see fig. 1. a). After oscillating in the 
second oblique plane for perhaps a few seconds the image lost what defin- 
iteness of contour it had and apparently broke up into bright points re- 
sembling myriads of stars. These points seemed to stream before the 


14 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


eyes and despite all efforts to retain them in the visual field, they invari- 
ably disappeared in course of a second or two leaving only the “proper 
light” of the retina behind. 

4. The image which! oscillated could hardly be called distinct and yet 
it seemed to consist of yellowish or whitish lines grouped together, in the 
centre of the image, in the manner of the lines in b fig. 1, the border of 
the image was extremely indistinct and blended insensibly into the dark 
background. On account of the rapidity of the oscillations it was not 
easy to count the number of hexagons making up the more distinct or 
central portion of the image or to estimate the angle which the image 
subtended in the visual field. It is interesting here to note the similar- 
ity between this image and illustrations of the crystalline lens cells.i 


6. For perhaps 15 years the phenomenon just described appeared 
occasionally, after retiring, but no attempt was made to studyit. Some 
thing over a year ago (now April, 1904—9 years ago), however, after 
repeated efforts to retain the image in the visual field, the writer suc- 
ceeded, by practice, in observing what is, apparently, a modification of 
the original image. 

7. The more recently observed image seems to be nothing more than 
a group of indistinct light points—a kind of nebulous image—which 
oscillates as did the first and has an indistinct circular or elliptical 
border blending insensibly into the background. 


8. This image when seen in darkness seems to be something more 
than the “ proper light” of the retina. With most people the “ proper 
light” consists of light points or “light-dust” in a confusing 
state of motion, but in the writer’s eyes the motion of the nebu- 
lous image can be followed — perhaps only on account of the introduc- 
tory lessons given by the image as first observed. Every instant or two 
some points instead of oscillating regularly seem to start from the image, 
bat the nebulous image, as a whole, keeps on oscillating regularly so that 
the vibrations may be counted. 

9. Ever since seeing this image the former image has been seen 
occasionally. 

10. The plane of oscillation of the image * seems to be more or 
less vertical, but it does not remain constant and there seems to be a shif- 
ting of the plane to 30 or 40 degrees on either side of the vertical. 


1Quain. “Elements of Anatomy,” 1895, Vol. III, Part III, p. 64, Fig. 75B. 
This book is heartily recommended to the physicist, interested in this article, 
who wishes to find a complete and exceedingly good anatomical description of 
the eye. 


2 By “the image ” will hereafter be always meant the nebulous image, which 
is the usual one at present observed. 


’ 


[TURNBULL | A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 15 


11. The image is now, so to speak, “on call”; that is, the writer 
can at any time of the day or night see this hazy image; and the oscill- 
ations, so far as he has observed, never cease. 

12. Only, however, when certain conditions are complied with is 
the image seen when light is entering the eyes; for instance the image 
may be usually seen when the eyes are “fixed” upon some non-luminous 
and non-lustrous body, or upon the blue sky, etc.—1.e., when reflected 
light is entering the eyes. It is usually not seen when a luminous 
or lustrous body is fixed, although in this case suggestions of bright 
points are sometimes seen. 

13. With opened eyes the image always appears at the point of 
direct vision and seems to oscillate upon the focussed object. Unless the 
writer locks for the image it usually remains unnoticed, but it sometimes 
appears unbidden when dark or shadowed objects are seen. 


14. In complete darkness the image seems to be projected in the 
centre of the visual field or, rather, what would be the fixation point. 


15. The oscillations can generally be counted and with more or 
less accuracy according as the image is more or less distinct. It must 
be borne in mind that the more carefully and continuously such phen- 
omena as this are studied, the more one is able to see distinctly and 
recall subjective images once seen, and it is only by long practice that 
the best results are obtained. 


Apparatus and Methods of Observation. 


16. In order to obtain the periodicity of the oscillations, a stop 
watch, reading to tenths of a second, was at first employed and a chrono- 
graph reading to hundredths of a second was used in the latter part of 
the experiments. 


17. It was found that the ticking of the watch or any other sound 
having a distinct tempo was very distracting, when counting the oscilla- 
tions, so the watch was set up in a room other than that in which the ob- 
servations were made. 

18. The watch was operated by an electro-magnetic gravity drop 
and the readings were taken by an assistant. ‘The electro-magnet was 
operated by a key, at the observer’s right hand, which broke a battery cir- 
cuit, when pressed, allowing an iron rod pivoted at one end to fall on a 
lever operating the spring stop of the watch. The rod was at once 
replaced by the assistant, the current having been broken but an instant. 
The sources of error of this instrument were the inertia of the watch’s 
balance wheel and the variable residual magnetism of the electro- 


16 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


magnet. The probable error of a single reading was found to be about 
+ 0-06 secs., due to the above mentioned sources of error combined. 

19. The chronograph employed in the latest experiments although 
of rude construction, had a smaller probable error than the stop watch 
(viz:—-+ 0.026 secs. for a single reading) and had the great advantage 
over the stop watch of enabling observations to be made continuvusly, 
without the necessity of waiting for an assistant to make each reading. 
The chronograph consisted of a drum driven by a falling weight and kept 
at nearly constant speed by clockwork over this drum (which was covered 
with sand-paper) a long ribbon of paper (registering telegraph paper) 
was made to pass by the rotation of the drum. In order to keep the 
paper taut and to bring about the required friction between drum and 
paper, the ribbon was made to pass between the felt covered jaws of a 
spring clamp and a suitable weight was attached to the end of the 
paper and descended, beside the driving weight, a distance of some 9 
cr 10 metres. The cord of the driving weight passed but once over 
the drum and was held taut and prevented from shipping by a small 
counter weight and the sand-paper; by this arrangement errors due to 
inequalities of the diameter of the drum were avoided. A pencil 
mounted above the paper where it was in contact with the drum and 
operated by an electro-magnet and key (placed at the observer’s hand) 
completed the apparatus. 

20. Besides the probable error, as given above, this chronograph was 
subject to another error, due, probably, to variable friction of the clock- 
work. The speed would very gradually increase or decrease and since 
the amount was not calculable, as many readings were taken at a time as 
possible and, where preliminary runs were not taken, and runs were be- 
gun in the middle of a series, tha results for all colours had to be dis- 
carded in that series. 


21. The accidental errors, both with the stop watch and chrono- 
graph, have been eliminated as far as possible, by large numbers of read- 
ings. 

22. The apparatus employed to ascertain the effect of simple and 
raixed coloured lights was a modification of Lambert’s apparatus for mix- 
ing pigment colours! Instead of pigments coloured glass plates were 
used and placed over two square holes (cut in either end of a box). An 
“ Auer” gaslight was placed in the middle of the box inside and reflec- 
tors of white magnesium oxide (coating upon glass) placed inside the box 


1 Encyc. Britt., 9th Ed., Vol. VIII, p. 823. 


[TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 17 


and at the ends of it reflected the light from the burner through the 
holes. A piece of plate glass was mounted vertically a little above the 
middle of the box outside. <A certain amount of light, from each hole 
was thus permitted to enter the eye in the same direction, a part of the 
light from one hole being transmitted through the glass plate and a part 
of the light from the other hole being reflected’by it. The intensity of 
the light passing through the respective holes was varied by turning the 
reflectors about a horizontal axis, the angles through which they were 
turned being read on graduated arcs placed at each end of the box outside. 


RESULTS OF OBSERVATIONS. 


The retinal size of image and the amplitude of oscillations. 


23. Although the border of the image is not sharply defined, still, 
fairly accurate measurements of the retinal size of the image and rather 
unsatisfactory estimations of the amplitude of vibration, have been ob- 
tained. 

24. Pieces of white paper were used, upon which circles of 5, 10, 
15, 20 and 25 mm., respectively, were drawn with black ink. Placing 
these pieces of paper in succession before my eyes I retreated or ad- 
vanced, with eyes fixed upon the centre of the circle, until the image 
appeared to completely fill the circle; then the distance from the eyes 
to the paper was measured—these experiments were carried on in a 
brightly lighted room with the observer’s back turned towards the light. 

25. A calculation of the retinal size of the image (from these data) 


— = sae when f is the distance of 
the eyes from the background; F the distance of the second nodal point 
of the crystalline lens from the retina (this is, as an average, 15 mm.), 
d the diameter of the image upon the background, and D the corres- 
ponding diameter upon the retina. An average of the observations 
taken (5 sets of 5 readings each) gave as the value for D, the retinal 
diameter of the image .0-183 mm., when light is entering the eyes. 

26. The diameter, as given by Kôlliker, of the Fovea centralis of 
the retina is from 0-18 mm. to -225 mm. As the image is invariably 
seen at the point of direct vision, and as the above value (-183 mm.) 
falls within the measurements of Kôülliker, the image undoubtedly is 
seen only by the rods and cones of the Fovea centralis (this when light 
enters the eyes). 

27. That more of the image is seen when no light enters the eyes 
is shown by the following experiment: 


Sec. III., 1906. 2 


is simple, from the proportion : — 


18 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


28. Upon three plates of sooted glass circles of 20,40 and 60 mm., 
respectively, were traced. These were placed vertically, in succession, 
on a sliding carriage, between a fishtail burner and the eyes, both 
burner and glass being perpendicular to the line of sight. The centre 
of the circular disc was “ fixed” with the eyes for, perhaps, a quarter 
of a minute or more, then the eyes were closed and all light excluded 
and a negative after-image was seen. By trial, that position of the 
carriage was then found by which the vibrating image completely filled 
the circular disc of the negative after-image, without, however, extend- 
ing beyond the limits of the dise. 

29. The results of these observations gave, as the retinal diameter 
of the image when no light enters the eye, about 0-47 mm. According 
to Külliker the horizontal diameter of the yellow spot (Macula lutea) 
is 3:24 mm., and the vertical diameter of the same 0:81 mm. These 
measurements show that the image ‘is seen well within the boundaries 
of the yellow spot and, even in darkness, does not extend far beyond 
the limits of the Fovea. 

30. In both of the foregoing experiments an attempt was made 
to estimate the amplitude of the vibrations, this is, however, an exceed- 
ingly difficult thing to do. In the first experiments two faint pencil 
marks were drawn on the paper on either side of the centre to aid in 
estimation, but in the second experiments no such expedient could be 
adopted. The average results of these estimations are not to be relied 
upon as being anything but crude; at the same time they are probably 
not far from the truth. 

31. I find that the amplitude when light is entering the eye is about 
one-tenth of the diameter of the image (i.e., about 0-018 mm.) ; and 
that the amplitude when light is not entering the eye (1.e., in the after- 
image) is, perhaps, one-twentieth of the diameter of the image (or, 
about 0-023 mm.). 

32. What either the diameter of the image or its amplitude may 
be in absolute darkness and with no after-image, it is hard to say, but 
I do not think that the image becomes any larger than in the after- 
image, or that the amplitude alters appreciably. 

33. Attempts to measure the amplitude by means of a background 
vibrating with a simple harmonic motion, proved quite fruitless, although 
the method has not yet been, abandoned and may yet be productive of 
accurate results regarding both the amplitude and the nature of the 
vibrations. 


* I say, “perhaps,” because this value may be very inaccurate; the amplitude, 
in the case of the after-image, especially, being difficult to estimate. 


[TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 19 


The image does not, I think, follow a simple harmonic motion, 
and herein probably lies the failure with the above apparatus. 


The Periodicity of the Vibrations and the Conditions Affecting it. 


34. For the most part the experiments have been confined to the 
periodicity and the conditions affecting it. So far as the experiments 
have now gone the periodicity is probably affected :—by the wave length 
of homogeneous light impinging on the Fovea; and by mixed light fall- 
ing on the Fovea; and more certainly, by the intensity of the light; 
the act of “fixing ” the background; and by the condition and relative 
fatigue of the eyes and body (see Supplement, June, 1904). 

35. These factors and their relative importance may be studied 
from the curves presented with this paper, and from the tabulated 
results first given. The method of taking observations was as follows :— 
(1) with the stop-watch, as a rule, the key, breaking the circuit was 
pressed at the beginning and end of 10 counted oscillations (by one 
oscillation throughout is meant a complete to and fro motion) a pause 
was then made allowing the assistant to read the watch and replace 
the drop; another 10 oscillations were then counted, another pause 
made, and so on. (2) With the chronograph, the key was first pressed 
when the eyes were “ fixed,” à second time when beginning to count, 
a third time at the end of 5 oscillations, a fourth time at the end of 
10, a fifth at the end of 15, and so on, no pauses being made during 
the run. 

36. Although little can be learned from the desultory experiments, 
made between January 5th and July 15th, 1895, the general results 
of these were as follows :—Periodicity, apparently,! unaffected by count- 
ing with one eye open and one shut, no matter which eye was open; 
also unaffected by bodily exercise, but affected undoubtedly (made some- 
what greater) by continued use of eyes. 

37. The next observations (made from July 15th to September 
Ist, 1895) are, perhaps, a little more valuable, although poor methods 
were used and not sufficient rest was taken between the readings to 


*I say “apparently,” because ot enough readings were taken to establish 
a result. 


20 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


permit of the latter readings being uninfluenced by those going before. 
The results are tabulated below :— 


No.of | No. of Ave, 1 
Remarks. obs. in Sets Period. Colour Further Remarks, 
Sets. 1 Secs. ; 

Before opening 642 wh Room moderately dark, 
eyes in the morn- 2 14 652 ra obs. taken just after 
ing. : awakening. 

Looking through 504 R This is a poor method for 
coloured glasses .512 G getting the periodities 
at an object in 4 7 591 TB corresponding to dif- 
light shadow. rolls none ferent colours, for, as 

J will be noticed from the 

‘results, the readings 

.490 IB being taken in quick 

A 4 5 530 G succession after one an- 

D 564 R other, make all but the 
.546 none first one, too slow. 


38. It will be noticed in the above experiments with coloured 
glasses that the periodicity for G is slower when G follows I B than 
when it follows R; and that when IB comes last, the periodicity for 
it is only a trifle, whereas when R comes last it is considerably smaller 
than the periodicity for R. Thus it is seen that exposure to one kind 
of light, and “ fixing” the eyes, makes the oscillations not only slower 
for that light but for other light also, to which the eyes are exposed 
immediately afterwards (although there are relative changes after 
exposure). 

39. An attempt was made at this time with Noérremberg’s appa- 
ratus to ascertain the effect of polarised light upon the periodicity or 
plane of the oscillations; but the lustre of the reflecting mirror made 
it impossible to see the image. 

40. Several sets of readings with coloured glasses were taken at 
this time with lights of two intensities (approximately reproducible), 
but, as a black object was always “ fixed” in order to make the image 
more distinct, all the results exhibit periodicities for very low intens- 
ities; in each case, however, where the question of fatigue does not 
enter, the periodicities for I B were somewhat smaller than the period- 
icities for R, although with very low intensities the differences in 
periodicity are not so marked as with moderate intensities. 

41. A summary of these results is given in the following table; 
(1) represents a light of very low intensity, the flame used was about 


1In the figures and text the following contractions are used: R, red; O, 
orange; Y, yellow; GY, greenish yellow; G, green; GB, greenish blue; CB, 
cyanic blue; IB, indigo blue; W, white: B’l’k, black; and “none ” means 
that no glass was held before the eyes. 


[TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF: VISION 21 


one candle power and, after reflection from the “black” object and 
absorption in the glass plates, hardly any light could have reached the 
Fovea; (2) represents the intensity of the light from an ordinary fish- 
tail burner after reflection and absorption as before: 


No. of 


: Colour Ave. 
Remarks. Beanies pe and Period- | Further Remarks. 
x ets. ‘Intensity| icity. | 
Set. | | 
| i | 
.482 | A : 
2 6 R; 510 | The intensity (1) repre- 
| sents the periodicity 
2 6 FR: 498 (almost) for the sensation of 
= 528 | black in the case of all of 
Coloured 6 G .502 | the colours used (as ex- 
glasses used ; cs | 1 .528 plained in the text above) ; 
short rest after | 599 and therefore no conclus- 
every 2 read- | 2 Gr) Gs ‘sag | ions regarding the change 
ings. | | ——— | in periodicity brought about 
| 2 6 | IB, ue by change in intensity can 
| | Slee be drawn. 
NE ONE AE 
2 6 1B; 476 
FRATO 
2 2 
6 1B: .488 Do.—More accurate re- 
9 6 G 480 | sults with 3 different inten- 
do. readings F 1 .528 sities follows in the latter 
taken at an- 498 | part of the experimental 
other time. 2 6 Gy ‘526 | work. 
2 Ge) md 26 
.504 
do. 2 . Ga 54 | : 
© 6 | ? 
2 6 IB, tee 
2 6 IB, ur 
: 6 | TB | “igs 
2 6 IB, oe 
do. i ae do. 
2 6 G 524 
2 6 R, EE 
2 6 | R | 360 


22 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


42. , Other sets, taken at this time, clearly indicate that when the 
eyes are simply exposed to coloured light (readings being taken at the 
beginning and end of one minute exposures) the periodicity does not 
increase nearly so rapidly as when an object is “ fixed” through the 
coloured glasses and observations are taken in quick succession. In 
such dase, as before, where the readings were uninfluenced by readings 
with other glasses, the oscillations were quicker for I B than they were 
for R. 

43. The numerical data for the sets just referred to are as 
follows :— 


| | 
: No. of | Ave. b=beginning. 
Remarks. ie Sets. | Colour. | Periodicity. e=ena. 


Coloured glasses 2 7 
before eyes for one | 180 
minute, readings at 2 7 (& | "506 
the beginning and VERRE 
end of the min. 2 7 IB .469 b 


do. 2 4 G . 500 b 


537 The 4 readings 
R : taken in about 40 
°565 seconds. 


Coloured glasses .502 
before eyes, read- 4 4 G .532 do. 
ings taken in rapid -555 
succession. .575 


~] 

Q 
ot 
bo 
— 
Qu 

© 


do. 4 


44. In all of the foregoing experiments no idea can be gained of 
the periodicity corresponding to G, for undoubtedly the “ fixing” of 
the eyes for other colours makes the oscillations slower (when the plates 
are used in quick succession) for the observations that follow, and in 


2 


> rit 


[TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 23 


no case did G commence a set,— however, in the experiments, the re- 
sults of which follow, considerable rests were always taken between 
exposure of eyes to differently coloured light, so that all colours were 
treated alike. 

45. It may be further mentioned here that the periodicity for all 
colours is usually a trifle greater at the end than at the beginning 
of the day; but in all cases the difference is exceedingly small, and 
the oscillations are, under like conditions, remarkable for their con- 
stancy. 

46. To ascertain the periodicities obtaining during the “ contest 
of colours” * an I B glass and an R glass was held before the eyes with 
a perpendicular partition between them touching the nose. An object 
in the distance was “ fixed ” and as the field alternated from R to I B, 
and from 'I B to R, the oscillations were counted for one colour alone, 
as it confused the assistant to record both changes and periodicities. 
For example, during one set each time the field became red 5 oscil- 
lations were counted, and in the next set each time the field became 
indigo 5 oscillations were counted; the glasses for successive sets were 
changed about for the two eyes; the data are given in the following 
table :— 


€ 


No. of 
Remarks. readings| No. of Ave. Average of ave. 
each alt. Sets. | Periodicity. Period. 


I B light in lt. eyeand R “530 
light in rt. eye. 6 a .505 531 


Counted for R sensation. 530 


| .470 
do. | 


Counted for I B sensation. .505 493 


I B light in right eye and R 515 
light in It. eye. 522 


Counted for Rsensation. "585 


do. .460 


.470 = 
Counted for I B sensation. 6 4 : 485 


*See Helmholtz “ Physiologische Optik,” ete. 


24 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


47. From foregoing results average of all periodicities for R sen- 
sation equal -526, and for I B sensation equal -489. It will be noted in 
the above table that the oscillations for both sensations are quicker when 
IB light is in the right eye and R light in the left eye, than when 
the glasses are reversed for the two eyes, but whether there is a real 
difference in periodicity for the two eyes, or whether this difference is 
purely accidental is a matter not yet decided, although the writer 
hopes in the near future to settle the question. 

48. Some experiments made about this time to determine the 
influence on the periodicity of the heart-beat and body temperature, 
met with negative results. 

49. The results of some experiments to ascertain the relative 
periodicities for colours and their complementary after-images are given 
in the following table — the coloured plate (used with the Lambert 
apparatus par. 22 ) was “ fixed ” for a short time and then two readings 
were taken, after these the eyes were closed, light excluded with the 
hand, and two readings more were taken. 


No. of 
Remarks. readings| No. of 
in 1 Set Sets. | Average Periodicity. 
R (glass) { ae 
À f 4 6 (563 
G B (after image) if | 622 
G B (glass) ' 1 : fous 
5) ~—KO 
R (after image) | f ae 
Y (glass) { { +60 
4 5 f 546 
I B (after image) { | 576 
I B (glass { | { ie 
L f 4 5 { .538 
Y (after image) 1 1.564 


50. It will be noted from the foregoing table that the oscillations 
for the G B and I B after-images become at first a little quicker than 
the second readings for the R and Y glasses, respectively, but for the 
R and Y after-images the oscillations are a little slower than those 
given by the second readings for the C B and I B glasses, respectively. 

51. The rather slow and relatively irregular periodicities read in 
the case of the “fixed” coloured plates was probably caused by the 


[TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 25 


plates having been “fixed” for a varying time before readings were 
made; for instance, with the Y plate it was difficult to obtain a good 
after-image without long “ fixation,” whereas the after-image for the 
R plate continued for a considerable time, after a comparatively short 
fixation of the plate— hence the periodicity, in this experiment, is 
slower for Y than for R. 

52. The results of the experiments which follow (made from Feb- 
ruary to April, 1896) are best seen from the curves, Plates I-V.  Sev- 
eral new colours besides the ones at first used were employed in these 
experiments. Of course, with all the glasses used the light was far 
from homogeneous, and the light transmitted by the O, Y and CB 
plates, especially, was decidedly mixed; however, the periodicity corres- 
ponding to a certain sensation was what was sought and it may be that 
the results with these glasses is not very misleading, but without doubt 
homogeneous light of known wave-length would have been much more 
desirable. 

53. In the following sets the Lambert apparatus placed in a 
darkened room was used.. The transmitted light alone was used for 
simple colours, the reflected light being shut off by a black screen placed 
over the hole nearest the observer. 

54. Rests, usually of 5 or 10 minutes, were taken between succes- 
sive sets. The chronograph (paragraphs 19 and 20) was used in all 
the experiments that follow in place of the stop-watch (except where 
otherwise stated). 

55. The abscissae (on all plates except V) represent seconds from 
the time of “fixing” the coloured plates (or other “ backgrounds ”) 
and the ordinates represent periodicities obtained by pressing the key 
at the end of every 5 oscillations (and dividing the times thus recorded 
on the paper strip by 5) from the time of beginning the counting. 
Since the periodicities could not be obtained simultaneously, but had 
to be deduced from 5 oscillations, the values for periodicities had to be 
placed half way between the times of starting and finishing the counting. 
The curves were placed on different sections of the same plate to avoid 
confusion of overlapping parts. | 

56. Plate I represents the curves obtained in this manner in 
single sets of readings, whereas Plates II-IV (inclusive) exhibit curves 
platted from average results (the nûmber of sets making up the average 
being usually ten). 

57. The upper curve (1) or Plate I represents the periodicities 
for a run taken in the middle of the night (3.50 a.m., April, ’96), 
after awakening and before opening the eyes, in a darkened room. It 
will be noted that in this case the curve is smoother and the oscilla- 


26 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


tions slower than in any of the other cases. Curve (2) was obtained 
after spending 16 minutes in darkness, in the middle of the day — it 
does not show so great a periodicity and it is not so smooth as curve (1). 
The three curves for coloured light are not as smooth as either curve (1) 
or curve (2), but they all denote more rapid oscillations. The curves 
were obtained by “ fixing!’ respectively, the red, green and indigo 
glasses in the daytime and taking observations as already described. 
The initial periodicity for indigo is the smallest, then comes green, and 
then red. The curves for I B and G overlap considerably during the 
remainder of the runs, although the average periodicities of platted 
points is in the same order as above (viz.: I. B. 566; G. 586; R. 652). 
These curves are not exactly comparable with one another as they were 
made on different days. From these three lower curves no conclusions 
regarding relative periodicity can well be drawn, and they are here 
presented merely to show the nature of curves taken in this way. 

58. These curves show that for all sensations (besides the gradual 
slowing down of the oscillations) there are somewhat irregular periods 
of increasing and decreasing periodicity. Undoubtedly, some of these 
changes, especially those where a single point deviates considerably from 
a smooth curve, arise from accidental errors in counting, or in press- 
ing the key. Since these accidental errors cannot surely be detected 
the curves were drawn through all points. 

59. In several sets, taken for the purpose, with assistant and stop- 
watch, these changes in periodicity were found to be synchronous with 
the apparent darkening and brightening up of the object or coloured 
glass that was “fixed”: an increase in periodicity corresponding to a 
darkening and a diminution of periodicity corresponding to a brighten- 
ing up of the “background.” The phenomenon of the alternate dark- 
ening and brightening of an object, “fixed” for some time, is well 
known.1 

60. The curves, Plates IT, III and IV, were obtained in a sim- 
ilar manner to those of Plate I; however, these curves represent the 
averaga of 10 sets each, more colours were used, and only three or four 
readings taken in each set in order to obtain the initial periodicities 
for different coloured light and, besides, in the first series (Plate IT: 
and Figs. 1 and 2, Plate III) changes were made in the intensity as 
well as in the colour of the light. ° 

61. Plate IT shows the curves for red, green and blue sensations 
with three different intensities, viz.: Fig. 1, the intensity of the light 


1 See Helmholtz ‘“ Physiologische Optik,’ 2nd Ed., p. 511. With absolutely 
steady ‘“ fixation ” the intensity probably gradually (apparently) decreases; but 
since it is impossible to absolutely “ fix ” the eyes for many seconds, the bright- 
ening up may correspond to slight changes of fixation point. 


[TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 27 


reflected from pigments placed in a darkened room and illuminated by 
an “Auer ” burner; Fig. 2, the intensity of the light transmitted through 
the coloured glasses placed in the Lambert apparatus as in Fig. 3, the 
intensity of the light from the bright sky (sunshiny days) after trans- 
mission through the same coloured glasses. Plate III, Figs. 1 and 2, 
show eurves for additional glasses (and for the white reflector without 
any glass) used with the Lambert apparatus as in Fig. 2, Plate IT. 

62. It will be noted that in all these curves the more refrangible 
rays have the smaller, and the less refrangible, the larger initial period- 
icities ; whereas white has a periodicity lying part way between that for 
G and that for Y. 

It will be also noted that with increasing intensity (within the 
small limits of these experiments) the periodicity decreases. In all 
of these curves there is the usual (initial) rapid slowing down of oscil- 
lations observable. 

63. Readings in the different sets were, as much as possible, mixed, 
in order to make all of these curves comparable with one another. 

64. Fig. 3, Plate III, represents the curves for red and indigo 
and a mixture of the two (obtained with the Lambert colour mixer). 
These curves are not comparable with the others of Plates III and IV 
(as they were obtained a long time afterwards and the chronograph 
had changed somewhat), but they are comparable with one another as 
the sets were thoroughly intermixed. 

65. It will be noted that the curve for the mixture lies between 
the curves for the simple colours, but (initially) somewhat nearer the 
blue—this may be accounted for by the fact that the intensity of a 
mixture equals the sum of the intensities of the simple lights making 
up the mixture. The shade of this mixture was what is usually called 
magenta, i.e., the red predominated a little. 

66. The curves, Plate IV, form an independent series of results 
obtained with different coloured glasses and the Lambert apparatus. 
They are, in general nature the same as curves Fig. 2, Plate I, and 
Figs. 1 and 2, Plate III, and they were made, as nearly as possible, 
under the same conditions. The only additional curve in the latter 
series is N, Fig. 2, Plate IV, which represents the periodicities obtaining 
when a dark object is “fixed” (the eyes having just emerged from 
moderate daylight). The idea in obtaining this curve was to find the 
initial “normal” periodicity, i.e., the periodicity of the oscillations 
which continually obtains during moderate daylight (it is probable that 
black does not affect the periodicity initially, but allows the oscillations 
to become gradually slower). It will be noted that the periodicity 
for “normal” (-453) is near that for white (-447). 

\ 


28 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


67. The relative (initial) periodicities for different colours are 
‘best seen from the curves platted on Plate V, in which assumed wave- 
fiengths (obtained by averaging the data of several authors for colour 
and corresponding wave-lengths) are the abscissae, and initial period- 
icities of the respective colours, are ordinates. Curve (1) represents 
the periodicities obtained from Fig. 2, Plate II, and Figs. 1 and 2, 
Plate III, and curve (2) the periodicities obtained from the curves on 
Plate IV. 

68. These two curves are very similar in form and would almost 
coincide if all the ordinates of one were increased, or all those of the 
other were decreased, by a certain constant amount. This non- 
coincidence is probably due either to variations of the chronograph or 
to physiological changes, or both combined. (One week elapsed from 
the end of the first series to the beginning of the second). 

69. It should be mentioned here that if the reader wishes to 
compare results obtained with stop-watch and chronograph, respectively, 
he should bear in mind that the initial periodicities in the former case 
are usually larger than in the latter, because, with the stop-watch 10 
oscillations were counted, with the chronograph only 5, and as the 
periodicity rapidly increases during the act of “ fixing,” this will suffi- 
ciently account for any apparent discrepancies — it must also be remem- 
bered that physiological changes, also, slightly affect the periodicity. 

70. The chief results of the foregoing experiments (pertaining 
to periodicity) may be briefly summarized as follows :— 

Periodicity changes almost certainly with intensity of impinging 
light, the act of “ fixing ” and the physiological condition of the eyes — 
and probably with the colour of simple and mixed impinging light (after 
the manner of curves, Plate V, and curves, Fig. 3, Plate III). The 
periodicity is large in darkness, much smaller in light, and larger in 
red light than in blue light. The periodicity changes with shade of 
coloured light (produced by change of sensation, intensity of light 
remaining constant). Periodicity unaffected by heart-beat (within 
limits of 50 to 130). 

71. It will have been noted in the curves on Plates I-IV that. 
the counting of the more refrangible rays commenced sooner than the 
counting of the less refrangible rays; this was due to the fact that the 
oscillations are more distinct with the I B and G B glasses than with 
the Y and R glasses, and can therefore be seen more quickly. To see 
what influence this had upon the results a series was taken with R, G, 
and IB, in which the counting was begun at practically the same 
time (3-1 sees.) after “fixation,” in each case, however, although the 
initial periodicities were somewhat closer together than before, the usual 
order was preserved (viz.: I B -484; G -492; R -502). 


ta 


[TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 29 


Supplement to paper on A Subjective Phenomenon of Vision. 
By W. Rupert TURNBULL, M.E. 


June 22nd, 1904. 


The more thorough investigation alluded to in the first part of this 
paper was carried out at Cornell University, New York State, from 
October, 1896, to December, 1896. With a very accurate chronograph 
and methods of obtaining pure spectral colours the experiments described 
in the foregoing paper were very much extended; but the same general 
results were obtained and the work as a whole may be summarized so 
is to include both series of experiments. 

A further series of experiments carried out in May and June, 1904, 
shows that the oscillations are quicker when a near object is “ fixed ” 
than when a distant object is “ fixed,” the periodicities in the two cases 
being -544 seconds and -595 seconds, respectively. 

A summary of the chief phases of the phenomenon in all experi- 
ments, from January, 1895, to June, 1904, is as follows: 

1. The writer, as a boy, perhaps fifteen years before these experi- 
ments were begun, saw in the dark a subjective phenomenon of vision, 
consisting of hexagonal figures (see Fig. 1), composed of more or less 
distinct “light dust.” These figures oscillated as a whole and then 
streamed from the field of vision. 

2. From time to time in the following years these figures were 
occasionally seen, and in 1895 it occurred to the writer that it would 
be interesting to study these figures and their oscillations. 

3. The more they were studied the more easily they could be 
recalled, until now, with certain conditions of background, they may be 
seen at any time, with eyes either open or shut, and the vibrations 
may be counted—with open eyes the image appears projected on the 
focussed object. 

4. The form of the hexagonal figures as first seen and as often 

seen in the dark at present remind one very strongly of the illustrations 
of the magnified crystalline lens cells. 
5. The retinal size of the image when light enters the eyes is 
about -183 mm, whereas the size of the Fovea centralis (the point of 
accurate vision) is from -18.mm. to :225 mm., therefore the image is 
seen only at the point of accurate vision. 

6. When light does not enter the eyes the retinal size of the 
image is about -47 mm. 

7. The amplitude of the vibrations is about one-tenth the size of 
the image. 


30 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


8. The rapidity of the oscillations is affected by four things, 
viz.:—The colour of the light entering the eyes; the intensity of the 
light; the distance of the focussed object viewed; and the effort of 
maintaining a focus so as to count the oscillations. 

9. The blue end of the spectrum gives quicker oscillations than 
the red end. 

A more intense light (within moderate limits) gives quicker oscil- 
lations than a lesser light. 

A near object focussed gives quicker oscillations than a distant 
object. 

And the effort of continuous “ fixing” gives varying oscillations, 
now faster, now slower, with a gradual slowing after long continual 
effort. 

In order to have numerical comparisons the same series alone can 
be used and average figures would be about as follows, in times for a 
single oscillation (to and fro) :— 


IB ire ae eg oe ee ie Ae ee ee about -48 secs. 
RÉdMIBHE 2200 iG te ae ee rae etre ee ay ee 
Near idarlc object: sty pie he ANSE 
Distantidark object eee et OD Oe eas 


Eyes exposed to darkness for long time... -700 “ 


10. Regarding the explanation of this curious phenomenon it is 
difficult to be sure, but the one that the writer leans to and considers 
the most plausible is this :— 

The several layers of the crystalline lens of the eye are in con- 
tinuous motions of an oscillatory character, in most persons’ eyes this 
motion is so confused that the well known phenomenon called “ light 
dust ” is the only thing observed, but in the writer’s eyes, probably on 
account of a little extra phosphorescence of the crystalline layers, or on 
account of the unusual keenness of vision the oscillations, by long prac- 
tice have become so distinct that they may be counted. 

With this assumption, that the motions of the crystalline layers 
(one or more) are visible to the writer, the variations in the periodicities 
are accounted for as follows :— 

The oscillations for blue light are quicker than those for red 
because the eyes of young people are more sensitive to blue light and 
less to red than older people (Langley’s Researches, Trans. Amer. Journ. 
Sci., November, 1888), and. consequently the reflex action of the ciliary 
muscle acts more strongly in the case of blue light. 

Then the oscillations for a near focus are quicker because the lens 
is more convex than for a distant object under the control again of the 


2 


{TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 31 


ciliary muscle. And again, in darkness the eye is focussed on infinity 
and is consequently most flattened, and here again we have the ciliary 
muscle most relaxed and the oscillations the slowest of all. The con- 
vexity or flattening of the lens, as the case may be, allowing the crystal- 
line cells to move more or less rapidly, respectively. 


Rothesay, N.B., Canada 
June, 1904. 


Historical Review. 


125. Although a somewhat careful search has been made through 
the available literature, no mention of the phenomenon described in 
this paper has yet been found. At the same time there are certain 
phenomena which seem to be rather closely allied to this one, and which 
I propose here to review. 

126. John Purkinje (Beitrage zur Kenutniss des Schens in sub- 
jectiver. Hinsicht Prag. 1819) is probably the first to describe, with 
any thoroughness, the appearance of “jumping (or springing) light- 
points when looking at a bright surface.” Purkinje in distinguishing 
this phenomenon from the well known “ mouches volantes,” says, in 
Section VII :—“TIf I gaze fixedly upon a large, almost blinding surface 
(e.g., upon the evenly-clouded heavens, or close in a candle-flame) there 
springs up bright points in a few seconds, repeatedly, in the middle of 
the visual field. These points, without altering their position, quickly 
disappear again, and leave black points remaining which also quickly 
go. If, while the light points are springing up I turn the eyes toward 
a very dark place, or close them, the phenomenon continues as before, 
only with lessened light, and it seems as if the points were ignited 
during the first gaze and then gradually died out. 

127. This phenomenon (as appears from the above and from sub- 
‘sequent remarks by Purkinje) is undoubtedly different from that seen 
by the writer; at the same time the phenomena may be allied, as Pur- 
kinje’s image appeared only after some seconds of “ fixation,” and in 
the middle of the visual field. However, W. Zehender in describing 
this (Purkinje’s) phenomenon recently,! as it appears to him, states 
that the bright-points are immediately visible (and without preliminary 
“fixing” of a “blinding surface.”). He further states that “the 
phenomenon remains the same by opened and by closed eyes, except 
that in the latter case it is much less lively. ” 


*“ Klinische Monatsblätter f. Augenheilkunde.’” Marz. 1895. The series 
of five articles, of which this is the first, contain an excellent review of sub- 
jective visual phenomena. (The other articles appear in the April, September, 
‘October and November Nos. [1895] of the above magazine.) 


32 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


128. The writer can see the phenomenon described by him, under 
certain conditions, and, as shown in the curves, Plate I, the oscillations 
are quicker in light than in darkness. There, therefore, seems to be 
some connection between these phenomena, although there are cer- 
tainly decided points of difference, especially with regard to motion. 
Not having seen the phenomenon described by Purkinje, I can make no 
distinct comparison. 

. 129. Such, however, is not the case with the following phenomena, 
_ described by Helmholtz,! for the writer has observed this distinctly (as 
nearly every one can) and can note no resemblance between it and the 
phenomenon described by him. The paragraph in Helmholtz referred 
to runs as follows :—%* Bright moving points appear in the visual field 
if one intently ‘fixes’ a large, regularly illuminated surface (e.g., the 
heavens, or snow fields) especially during vigorous walking or other 
exercise. The points spring from different parts of the visual field, 
and continue to move quite quickly in very different paths which are, 
on the whole, not quite straight. There appears also upon the path 
which one point has taken, new points following the same path, etc.” 

130. Neither must the phenomenon described in this paper “ as 
first seen ” be confounded with the phenomenon described by A. Kônig,? 
for the writer has observed the Kôünig-phenomenon several times, and 
can note no resemblance. The hexagons, described by Konig as being 
visible upon awaking and before opening the eyes in a half-darkened 
room, are very much larger than those described (par. 4) and, more- 
over they are stationary and fill the whale field of vision. 

131. Other phenomena which are probably allied to, but can bear 
no very close comparison with the one in question may be mentioned as 
follows :— 

Vierordt’s phenomenon of tortuous and entwined “ streamings,” 
which are visible with intermittent light, and also after the blood has 
been driven to the head through stooping (perhaps similar to the stream- 
ing off of the bright points in the phenomenon as first observed (par. 
8 et seq.). Again, Steinbuch and Purkinje * have observed, with slight 
pressure on the eye, rows of flowing spherules. Purkinje observed also, 
to right and left of a whitish circle, two vertical light lines in which 
the spherules moved, on the right, downwards; on the left, upwards. 

132. Among phenomena which are probably more closely related 
may be mentioned the following :— 

Helmholtz noticed occasionally a flickering, as from small moving 
bodies when looking at a wall covered with rough lime and illuminated 


1“ Phys. Optik,” § 25, 2nd Edition. 

2 Wine bisher noch nicht bekaunte subjective Gesichts erscheinung. ” Graefes 
Archiv., Vol. 30 (3), page 329. 

8“ Beobachtungen u. Versuche zur Physiologie de Sinne.” Berlin, 1823-25. 


“ 


[TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 838 


by a small window placed very obliquely (an arrangement by which 
the image seen by the writer is very distinct.) 

133. Purkinje,! besides the phenomena already mentioned above, 
describes another one in which he saw a different light after rapid out- 
door walking in bright sunshine, and after entering suddenly a dark 
room. This diffused light he compares to that given off by burning 
spirits-of-wine, or to the light in darkness of a coating of phosphorus, 
and he further says that close examination revealed that this glittering 
mist consisted of innumerable extremely small, irregular light-points, 
which move in different lines among one another and, gathering now 
in one place and now in another, form indeterminate surfaces. 

134. I, myself, have seen a similar phenomenon when gazing in 
a snow field, but can note no resemblance between it and the phenom- 
enon described in the foregoing paper. However, Purkinje goes on to 
say that under certain conditions (one eye open gazing at a bright 
surface, and one eye shut) he can again see the points, and they appear 
more lively with opened than with closed eyes, which points to a sim- 
ilarity in the two phenomena. 

135. Zehender (citation, par. 127) seems to have observed the 
phenomena of the “bright jumping points,” more easily and more 
accurately than any other person known to the writer. He sees them 
by night and by day, with closed and with open eyes. He, however, 
mentions no regular oscillatory movement in connection with these 
points and, although the phenomena observed by him and by the writer 
seem to be very similar they cannot be considered identical unless 
Zehender did not practise enough to count the oscillations. 

136. At the same time Zehender ? mentions another phenomenon 
which, in all the literature accessible to the writer, seems to be the 
one most closely allied with the one observed by him, although here 
again are many differences. The passage runs as follows (after men- 
tion of a glittering light noticed as one symptom of a certain disease, 
and also by certain persons in health) :—“ From my own experience 
I may mention that I can observe with myself a glittering more or less: 
lively. Especially is this phenomenon observable by early morning; 
soon after awaking, and it is seen by me very often, I might almost: 
say daily. In the first place, I see, with closed eyes and after day- 
light obtains, an almost black visual field, in which, corresponding to 
the direction of sight, there is a bright, pale violet spot with very inde- 
terminate toothed limits. This spot undergoes a continuous restless 


1“ Beobachtungen u. Versuche,” I 63. A book exceedingly rich in phen- 
omena of this nature. 
2 (Citation, par. 127.) 


Sec. III., 1906. 3 


34 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


change of form. In the whole visual field one notices besides—as is 
known—a certain restless motion. Afterwards single points appear, 
which are quite bright and move spontaneously and which now follow, 
no longer a “jumping ” or “ flying,” but somewhat more a to and fro 
motion. The points combine, here and there with one another forming 
streaks or lines, these increase rapidly and soon form, in place of the 
pale violet fixation-region, a lustrous spot, which continually increases. 
The immediate surroundings of this spot gradually darken to pure 
black ; finally the lustrous spot becomes lost in the black surroundings.” 

137. It will be noticed from the above that Zehender describes 
the spot as being seen near the “ fixation-region,” and says, that in a 
certain phase of the phenomenon, the light points have “somewhat a 
more to and fro motion ”— in other respects the phenomenon and that 
observed by the writer are very dissimilar, especially with regard to 
the violet spot with toothed limits, and the phase in which the spot 
increases in size. 

138. In Zehender’s last article (Nov. No., citation, par. 127), 
we find again some’ points of similarity and some of dissimilarity 
between the phenomenon described by him as being due to the pigment 
granules illuminated from behind and the phenomenon seen by the 
writer; for instance, he says:— According to my own experiments, [ 
may assert, that the pigment granules are only visible by night, or in 
twilight, whereas the circulation of blood is only visible with sufficient 
brightness (resp. with blinding illumination) and may repeatedly 
assert, that all pigment motion (perhaps only during a short time) 
can entirely or nearly cease.” 

139. The image that the writer sees is remarkably constant in 
its motion, and so far as he has ever observed it has never ceased to 
keep up this regular motion. Moreover, although the image is, perhaps, 
not quite as distinct in light as in darkness, it is still visible in the 
‘writer’s eyes whenever sought, under the proper conditions of back- 
ground and illumination. Zehender believes the granules to be too 
thickly piled together and to move with too rapid a motion in daylight 
to be visible. (The average periodicities observed by the writer are :— 
for the middle of the night about -685 secs, and for the middle of 
the day about -450 secs.) 

140. Zehender believes the most “ favourable relations ” for seeing 
the pigment granules obtain where there is a coincidence of psychical 
awakening and the hours of night or early dawn, in which the eye and 
its pigment apparatus have not yet awakened to a complete activity.” 

141. Zehender’s article is too long to be completely reviewed in 
this place, suffice to say that here and there passages occur which would 


[TURNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 35 


lead one to suppose that the phenomena described by him and the 
writer are closely allied, whereas other passages would lead one to 
think that if both see the pigment granuies, they act in the different 
eyes in a very different manner. Probably the most concise description 
of the phases he sees, that correspond at all nearly to the phases seen 
by the writer is given in the following paragraph :— 

“One sees exceedingly fine, more or less bright lighting points 
which are also in continual motion. Some of these finest lighten up 
exceedingly bright, others, on the contrary, lighten up weaker, and 
in part only with the same pale blue colour as the above mentioned 
spot. Some of these points are indeed quite dark and hardly dis- 
tinguishable. The motion of these points is not, as in the case with 
the circulation, a forward locomotion; it is much more a toothlike to 
and fro trembling in short, straight lines ; an emergence and disappear- 
ance; occasionally also a short stand-still. 

142. The image seen by the writer is so small, and of such a 
regular nebulous form and constant motion, that in many respects it 
seems incomparable with the phenomenon as above described. The 
pale blue colour of some single points lighting up “ exceedingly bright,” 
weaker points and dark ones, disappearances and standstills, accord but 
poorly with the phenomenon as observed by the writer, and yet in the 
to and fro motion there is a similarity that points to both phenomena 
being due to the same cause. Perhaps the writer sees the central 
part, of Zehender’s phenomenon, and only the central part, but sees 
it more clearly than Zehender, for, instead of a “ to and fro trembling,” 
the motion has a distinct oscillatory character in my eyes—there is 
occasionally a very pale blue background to the image seen by me, 
which may correspond to Zehender’s points, which lighten up with a 
pale blue colour. 

143. A review of the subjective phenomena of vision, in which 
the circulation of blood in the capillary vessels of one’s own eye is 
thought to be seen, would here be out of place, as in these phenomena 
rows of spherules are seen moving, to be sure, but always over the 
same paths and in the same direction. 

144. The quoting of further references of a similar nature to 
those above is unnecessary. Suffice to say, that in all the literature to 
which the writer has had access, no mention has been made of either 
a hexagonal or a nebular image having a regular oscillatory motion; 
consequently, no mention of the constancy (under certain conditions) 
of this motion nor mention of the conditions affecting this motion, nor of 
the changes it undergoes, and not even any attempt to count the oscil- 
ietions of bright points “having a certain to and fro motion,” which 


36 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


have been noted by a few writers in describing phenomena, otherwise 
quite dissimilar to the phenomenon observed by the writer. 

145. In concluding this paper, I wish to thank most heartily those 
who have assisted me— more especially — my wife, and Prof. R. W. 
Quick, for helping me many times with the stop-watch experiments, 
Dr. McIntosh, for his careful examination of my eyes! and Prof. E. L. 
Nicois, for kindly reading and criticizing the manuscript. 


Rothesay, N.B., Canada. 


? My eyes were found to be, in every way, normal, and in respect of colour- 
fields and acuteness of vision, somewhat above the average. 


[ruRNBULL] A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION Trans. R. S. C., Sec. III., 1906. 


| 1 
Secs i 
‘80 


75 


‘70 


a 
uo 


a 
© 
Periodicities 


a 
a] 


PLATE | 


50 x Curve in middle of night (1) 
. ¥ after 16 mins.in darkness (2) 
© i for Red. glass R 
xX on » Green , . (dottedline) G 
® ” , Indigo JB 
45 
/ 
/ 
G+ 
40 
1B. sy fh 
: 3 ; | : 1 : , Seconds from time of. fixing . : ‘ : : ‘ : : : : 
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 


[rurnBvLt] 


À 
uO 
Periodicities 


“40 


‘60 


u 
Oo 


Ga 
o 
Periodicities 


45 


A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION 


PLATE IIx rea 


/ © Indigo 


R 


Fig. 2 


Seconds from time of fixing” 
10 15 20 25 


III 


Seconds from time of fixing” 
10 15 20 25 


Fig. 3 


20 


Fig. 3 


20 


Trans. R. S. C., Sec. IIL., 1906. 


25 


en 


[TURNBULL] 


A SUBJECTIVE PHENOMENON OF VISION. 


Trans. R. S. C., Sec. IIL., 1906 


R Red x O Orange, x F Y Yellow x 
G Green : ñ N Normal. . 1 W White - © 
Secs. 1B Indigu © Fi 8. 2 GB Greenish Blue © 18. 3 
60 : 60 60 
Ww 
‘55 55 55 © : ve 
0 
v (0) 
2 
i) 
500 50 50 
fo} 
a 
v 
o 
+ 45 45 45 0) 
40 40 - ¥4 40 
: Seconds from time. of fixing” : 
10 15 20 5 10 15 20 5 10 15 20 
Secs ‘ 
50 PLATE. V 
Assumed values of A for glasses 
R 684 
O 612 pees 
48 Ne 67, 
Gi Set 
GB 497 
IB 445 
m] 
46 % 
ù 4 a 
5 a VAG Values of Periodicities 
44 ia Gee AN R O Y G GB IB 
GES 
a < a + Curve |. -456 -462 -448 -438 -426 -430 
RES X Curve 2. 478 482-458 -448 -440 -438 
1B, “GB 
42 
: Wave lengths of light : 
49 400 (ie 500 600 700 


cp 


Section III., 1906. [37] Trans. R.S. C. 


I11.—On the Conservation of Nitrogen in Manure. 
By THoMAs MACFARLANE. 


Read May 23, 1906. 


On two former occasions * | addressed this section on the loss of sub- 
stances useful as plant food, and more especially of nitrogen, during the 
handling and storing of manure. I pointed out that the estimate 
usually made of the value of the fertilizing substances, obtainable from 
dwellers in cities, of $2.00 per year and person was altogether too high; 
that enormous losses took place in the collecting and handling of the 
manure, Owing principally to the escape of nitrogen in one form or 
another. It was demonstrated also that this loss took place in spite 
of the application of substances or acid mixtures ordinarily supposed 
to be capable of retaining ammonia. ‘These experiments of mine which 
were begun with the view of deodorising human refuse by means of moss 
litter, although perfectly successful in that direction and shewing how 
rapidly the water in the resulting moss manure could be eliminated, ali 
ended as failures so far as the retention of the nitrogen was concerned. 
Nevertheless I decided to continue the experiments in order if possible 
to produce a dry and concentrated moss manure without sacrificing any 
of its most valuable fertilizing constituent, nitrogen. In these trials 
the material experimented upon was exclusively urine, because of the 
large amount of nitrogen which its solids contain, and because of the 
difficulty heretofore experienced in retaining it in natural manures of 
of every description. 

I. In order to ascertain whether the recovery of all the nitrogen 
was possible, by the use of acid and artificial heat, a trial was made in 
which I made use of the cylindrical wire basket mentioned in my paper 
of June 1904. Its height was 8 and diameter 6 inches with 3-8 inch 
meshes, but it was modified by introducing in the centre a small wire 
cylinder, 6 inches high and two in diameter, through which it became 
possible to pass a current of heated air and so facilitate evaporation. 
The moss used in the experiment occupied the space surrounding the 
internal cylinder which formed a circle 6 inches deep and two inches 
thick with an outside circumference of about 18 inches. The moss used 
was a mixture of that from the bog near Caledonia Springs, and thai 
from the Welland marsh. It was saturated with urine to which had 
been added an admixture of oil of vitriol sufficient to fix the whole of 
the nitrogen if it happened to be converted into ammonia. The drying 
was effected by means of the products of combustion from! a small gas 


*Transactions of the Royal Societyof Canada, Vol. VIII., p. 87; Vol. X. 
p. 61 


38 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


flame which were carried up and through the small internal cylinder. 
As the drying progressed more of the liquid mixture was added to and 
absorbed by the moss. Occasionally the contents of the moss space were 
taken out mixed and then replaced and the trial continued. It lasted 
about three weeks during which time 7364 grammes of urine were used. 
The following shews the materials used with their nitrogen contents :— 


Grammes Nitrogen 


262 grammes Caledonia Moss with 3.02 per cent N. .. .. 1.91 
150 grammes Welland Moss with 1.56 per cent N. .. .. .. 2.34 
1364 grammes Urine with 0.82 per cent N............. 60:38 
7o0 grammes, Oih of Vatriol, diluted: een 
Oba. er SN ie Modesty ope tin 9 ele te Rand cane ROG 


Towards the end of the experiment there was considerable blacken- 
ing of the moss, and some lumps were found at the bottom of the wire 
basket. ‘The product was thoroughly well mixed, sampled and analysed 
for its fertilizing constitutents with the following result :— 


Per cent. 
INT ETOS eM. ss ely: DEN AE Sr rat RU er Ge 
Total Phosphoric acs bats "eat JAN Se. oye Stee uel ES 
Potash, KO EE er ages ke: BREEAM Re nen RE AC ED) 
Moisture We ah ee Les Ue ais be SPER Ae er 
Te) GUST aan are ER Mn ER A EE RE RE AO) 


It weighed in all 1015 grammes and contained 71.76 grammes 
nitrogen; thus shewing a complete retention of that element. 

II. In order to ascertain how much nitrogen the acid added in the 
foregoing experiment was capable of retaining by this method of treat- 
ment the product of experiment I was further treated in an earthware 
basin with fresh urine but without additional acid. The basin was very 
gently heated so that the temperature of its contents seldom exceeded 
80°C. ‘I'he urine was added gradually 6271 grammes being used 
which contained on the average of five determinations 0.82 per cent 
nitrogen. ‘The product was dried as well as possible, and, like the others 
described in this paper, was analysed by Miss S. E. Wright, this time in 
duplicate, yielding the following results :— 


1 2 
Nitfrosen kaye 3 on toes 8.76 per cent. 
Total Hu aa P, 0, Seite ky LO 1.92 per cent. 
Potash KO EPS A TRE EE PATATE 1.68 per cent. 
Moistare me NN EN REG 4.72 per cent. 


ASD: vou we LE. RE ET LOIS PE Ss > percent 


CONSERVATION OF NITROGEN IN MANURE 39 


[MACFARLANE] 


® 


Tal « 4 

RTE D PEER a 

ÉÈ lisses Ep Si 

sr et Seeks ' 

I er eee eo 
NS ‘ 


VLILZELZLILLZLLLLLLLL 


| 


| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


Ri ASST 


G 
By 


À 


mt 
Leo mame @ ce — h! 


40 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


‘he product weighed 1209 grammes and at 8.79 per cent of nitro- 
gen contained 106.27 grammes of that element. The 250 grammes of 
vitriol used were capable of retaining only 71 grammes of nitrogen as 
ammonia. ‘lhe total nitrogen in 13635 grammes urine used amounted 
to 111.8 grammes; consequently some of it must have been retained in 
the condition of urea or of its sulphate. 

From these experiments it is plain that a complete recovery of the 
nitrogen in urea is quite possible if a certain quantity of acid is usel 
and the water is expelled gradually by artificial heat. The following 
experiment performed in an ordinary porcelain capsule furnishes addi- 
tional proof of this :— 

III. 50 grammes of Welland Moss were moistened with a mixture 
of 50 grammes oil of vitriol and 132 water. The addition of the 
dilute acid left the moss comparatively dry, nor, on the further addition 
of 160 grammes urine, was there any unabsorbed liquid on the bottom 
of the capsule. The whole was then kept at a waterbath heat of 70°C 
and urine added little by little, until its quantity amounted to 1082 
grammes. The drying was continued until the product was fit for 
sampling when it weighed 178 grammes, and analysed as follows :— 


IFotal mitrosent ete EN cide hierar 5.49 per cent. 
Nitrogen as free and pane ammonia .. .. 11H percent. 
otal phosphoric acid 40.4 sees ss tele ne 3.84 per cent. 
POtAS aie ie Pies TE de he Re = Wks SP te a 8.50 per cent. 
AB las nie sey Een pe eit acl, is. Paes PSN ee omen acelin 
Moisture (ise RO aint INR oa emperscentts 


The materials used in this experiment were :— 


Grammes Nitrogen 
50 grammes Oil of Vitriol.. Wath 
50 grammes of Welland Moss with 1. 56 per a N. 0.78 


1082 grammes Urine with 0.83 per cent N.. .. .. .. 8.98 
DOtialll pose, lee NA ley cern vee etal mie PRES nce) tie elvan es 9.76 


‘The product weighing 178 grammes contained 5.49 per cent nitro- 
gen or 9.77 grammes which accounted for the nitrogen used. Only 20.9 
per cent of the latter was present as free and combined ammonia from 
which it appears that the acid combines with some of the urea and pre- 
vents its decomposition. 

Having ascertained that the use of sulphuric acid and artificial heat 
were completely effective in retaining the nitrogen of urine, it became 


[MACFARLANE] CONSERVATION OF NITROGEN IN MANURE 41 


necessary to make trials towards the same end but allowing the water 
to evaporate spontaneously. Half a dozen of these were made with such 
indifferent results as to render their description a most ungrateful task. 
Still the duty of recording has to be performed, in order that others may 
be saved from making abortive experiments. ‘The following are selected 
as suflicient for the purpose. 

IV. Inaround graniteware dish 200 grammes Welland Moss were 
treated with successive portions of a mixture of urine and sulphuric acid. 
from the 23rd April till the 5th Sept., 1904. Hach addition of urine 
with its proportion of acid was only made after the one preceding it had 
evaporated and left the moss in a comparatively dry condition. The 
materials used consistea of :— 


Grammes Nitrogen 
200 grammes Moss litter with 1.56 per cent N .. 3.12 
2493 grammes Urine with 0.82 per cent N. .. .. 28.64 
106 grammes Oil of Vitriol .. ... 


OS AR AN Den Men La 31.76 


The product weighed 505 grammes and contained 3.91 per cent 
nitrogen or 21.31 grammes, shewing a defficiency of 10.45 grammes 
or 23.9 per cent. A second sampling was done and the nitrogen again 
determined including that of any nitric acid that might have been 
formed. In this case the total nitrogen in the product amounted to 
21.87 grammes shewing about the same deficiency. his loss took place 
even with the use of a fully sufticient quantity of sulphuric acid to fix 
the ammonia corresponding to the original nitrogen. 

In the preceding experiment the spontaneous evaporation was 
allowed to proceed so far as to leave the moss comparatively dry previous 
to each new addition of liquid. ‘The following trials V & VI were per- 
formed in such a manner as to keep the moss always saturated with 
liquid. The following is a statement of the nitrogen used and re- 
covered :— 


Materials Used (V) 
Grammes Nitrogen 
344 grammes Moss with 1.56 per cent N........ 5.36 
6500 grammes Urine with 0.82 per cent N... .. .. 53.30 
115 grammes Oil of vitriol 


RAR EN CAN RE Lies 2.018866 


42 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Product 

1510 grammes of 2.94 per cent N. as organic nitrogen 

and AmMMONIA CAE MANN PNR RE EU CANON 38.01 
11088 84/99)" MET Cents MEN ARC ee RTE 20.15 
Moaterialiused asvaboves(Vjio Mewes ese 58.66 
1310 grammes product at 3. 01 3 per = teen N. lat AE 

thatiom NitricEACIdAIREEMEM MERE EME RER 39.43 
ose BONIS MOE CON AE ES Sap, toa ey Seay ae 19.23 


Materials Used (VI) 


200 grammes Moss with 1.56 per cent N. .. .. .. 3.12 

3500 grammes Urine with 0.82 per cent N. .. .. .. 28.70 

Vota e Re SR ale pels kk EL SEE D 
Product 


590 grammes at 3.64 per cent organic and ammonia- 
Cal MiCrogen, BY RELEASES 


0888220 per COnLE Pr ee eee cree eee 10.34 


Materials used as above (VI) . Ge 31.8? 
590 grammes product at 3.86 infeludiny tliat of Nie 1- 

brie AC CORRE AN RS VE ORAN RE henge 22.77 
HOSS Re TE percent 1k ee sole ota ois oie! versione Wcleb eae er 9.05 


These latter experiments furnish sufficient proof that in the spon- 
taneous evaporation of urine and the decomposition of its urea all the 
nitrogen is not eliminated in the form of ammonia otherwise it would 
have been retained by the large amount of acid used. Very likely the 
acid would be more effective if applied during the ordinary fermenta- 
tion of urine and in the presence of sufficient water. But the object of 
these experiments is to ascertain how the nitrogen of urine is to be se- 
cured under the ordinary system of treating manure with excessive ex- 
posure to the atmosphere. It has to be confessed that the problem is 


[MACFARLANE] CONSERVATION OF NITROGEN IN MANURE 43 


yet unsolved, but nevertheless the experiments will be continued in the 
hope of ultimately attaining success. 

So far as regards the trials which have been made to effect the con- 
version of ordinary excreta into an inoffensive product, which was the 
chief object in beginning this investigation I am glad to be able to state 
that they continue to give the most satisfactory results. The most 
recent arrangement which has come into practice for this purpose is 
given in the drawing which accompanies this paper. 


Section III., 1906. [48] Trans. Re S.C. 


IV.—On the Metaliic Currency of the British Empire. 


By THoMas MACFARLANE. 
(Read May 23rd, 1906.) 


The erection of a new branch of the Royal Mint in Ottawa is an 
event which suggests enquiry regarding the coins which are to be 
manufactured there, the relations they should bear to the coinage of 
other parts of the Empire and whether there is any possibility of intro- 
ducing some degree of uniformity among the various systems of metallic 
currency now in use in His Majesty’s dominions. 

In Canada there circulate at present no gold coins peculiar to the 
country. These have yet to be designed and manufactured, and this 
was understood to be one of the objects of the Ottawa Mint. The gold 
of the Klondike was to be used there instead of finding its way to the 
United States. Similarly, it was supposed that the silver ores of British 
Columbia and Ontario would ultimately come to be treated inside of the 
Dominion, and the resulting metal coined at Ottawa. More recently the 
question has been raised as to whether some of the subsidiary coins 
should not be made of pure nickel instead of silver or copper, and 
whether Canada should not in this respect follow the example already 
given by France, Switzerland, Italy, Austria and Hungary. 

The Swiss Confederation was the first country in the world to in- 
troduce pure nickel coinage. Their first issue of 20 centime pieces 
(4 cents), bears the date of 1883. In 1890, Austria-Hungary followed 
the example of Switzerland and put in circulation four pure nickel coins. 
Italy was the next country to adopt nickel for coinage by a bill passed 
on the 13th February, 1902, authorizing the Royal Mint to coin a 25 
centesimi (5 cents) pure nickel piece, and the coins were struck off in 
1905. For France a bill was passed in 1903 authorizing the issue of ten 
millions pure nickel 25 centime (5 cents) pieces which have since gone 
into circulation. 

Moreover, it was announced in Paris in April, 1905, that 56 mil- 
lions francs worth of copper coin would be retired from circulation at 
the end of the same year and replaced with nickel as the result of the 
declaration by eminent medical experts that copper money is an active 
agent for the spread of many diseases. It has also been stated that the 
Government of India is now considering the advisability of using nickel 
as a coinage metal. 

There are, however, special reasons why Canada should have a pure 
mickel coinage. The province of Ontrio is the largest producer in the 


46 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


world of this metal and to bring the crude product into the pure state 
necessary for coinage would require additional industrial establishments. 
Among the advantages of pure nickel for coinage may be mentioned its 
greater resistance to wear, so that the imprint lasts much longer than 
with silver and copper alloy coins. Besides, they are attracted by a 
magnet, so that it is impossible to counterfeit them successfully with any 
cheap white alloy. Pure nickel coins also maintain their bright attrac- 
tive colour and appearance, and show none of the objectionable tarnish- 
ing which is observable on alloy coins containing much copper. Lastly, 
more powerful presses are required to make nickel coins than for those 
of nickel alloy, which makes secrecy in counterfeiting the former prac- 
tically impossible. 

Another application of nickel in coinage is as a substitute for the 
small quantity of copper, with which the more precious metals are al- 
loyed, in the coins of high value. Pure gold and silver are too soft to 
stand the tear and wear of circulation and for that reason are usually 
combined with a small proportion of a harder and less valuable metal. 
Copper is the baser metal thus employed, but it is excelled in hardness 
by nickel and no doubt the latter, if alloyed with the gold and silver 
would be much more effective in preventing their loss by abrasion. 

The consideration that the use of pure nickel as a coinage metal 
would encourage the mining for and production of that metal in Canada 
has its application also in the case of silver. If more of it were used for 
coinage its present absurdly low price would improve. Indeed, silver 
has been very ungenerously treated in the past. Its abolition as 
a standard, side by side with gold, was no doubt perfectly reasonable, but 
its treatment in other respects is not easily justified. It has been com- 
pelled to pay not only for its own coinage but for that of gold as well. 
Moreover the disproportion between the nominal and the real value of 
silver coin has been allowed to increase to such an extent as to offer a 
great temptation to the counterfeiter. The profit made in using it for 
metallic currency has been so great that some of the self-governing 
colonies have made efforts to obtain a share of the advantage. Canada 
has succeeded in so doing, but the profit on the Australian coinage still 
accrues to Great Britain. All the silver coins of Canada are manufac- 
tured at the Royal Mint in London, but the agents of the Dominion 
purchase the metal for these in the open market at the prevailing low 
price, and transmit it to the Mint whose authorities only charge three 
per cent on the face value of the resulting coins for manufacturing them. 
At the same time it has to be confessed that although a profit of more 
than one hundred per cent is made in these operations, Canada makes 
no provision for purchasing abraded coin at its nominal value and with- 


ra 


[MACFARLANE] METALLIC CURRENCY OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE 4.7 


drawing it from circulation. ‘The duty thus neglected is carefully per- 
formed both by the United Kingdom and Australia, but in Canada there 
are frequently to be seen in circulation coins on which the figures of the 
year and value are illegible. A ten cent piece of this description was 
found to weigh only 2.013 grammes. The standard weight of this 
denomination is 2.324 grammes, so that the piece referred to had lost 
13.38 per cent of its weight by abrasion. 25 cent pieces may frequently 
be found in our currency with the year and value figures worn off. One 
of these I found to weigh 5.394 grammes instead of 5.809, which is equal 
to a loss in the standard silver of 7.14 per cent. The “ Mint remedy ” 
or allowance for variation from the standard on such silver coins in the 
Kingdom is only 0.85 per cent; in India it is 2 per cent, and therefore 
the tendering of such worn silver coins as are now in circulation in 
Canada must be entirely illegal. 

With regard to the ratio between the value of silver and gold, when 
used for coinage, which has been adopted for Canada, it is the same as 
for England and the self-governing colonies, but it may be here pointed 
out that two such ratios are in actual existence within British Territory, 
one for India and another for the rest of the Empire. It is tolerably well 
known that the India rupee, and the English florin contain very nearly 
the same weight of fine silver, although the former is only worth one 
shilling and four pence, while the latter has a face value of two shillings 
sterling. To be precise, the rupee contains 165 grains of pure silver or 
weighs, with the added baser metal, 180 grains, the fineness being 916.66 
per 1000. The florin weighs 174.55 grains of standard silver of the 
fineness of 925 to the 1000 and consequently contains 161.46 grains of 
pure silver, or 3.54 grains less than the rupee. Evidently, the value of 
the silver in the rupee to that of gold must be at least 50 per cent more 
than in the case of the florin. English silver is coined at the rate of 
66 shillings to the old pound-weight Troy or 66 pence per ounce of 
standard silver, while the market value of the latter at the present time 
is only about two shillings and sixpence. Since standard gold is worth 
£3.17.101% or 934.5 peñce per ounce it follows that the value ratio of 
silver to gold in English coins is as 14.16 is to 1. This has been the 
ratio in use for over 90 years, no change having taken place, in spite 
of the tremendous fall in price of silver during the last thirty-five years. 

Fifteen Indian rupees have a legal value of one sovereign, and 
consequently the latter is equal to (180 grains X 15) 2700 grains of 
standard silver, and that price is equal to a ratio of gold to silver of 1 to 
21.9. This ratio was legally established in India in 1893 and differs 
greatly from that in use elsewhere in the British Empire. 


48 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The present seems a very convenient time for endeavouring to put 
an end to the anomaly of having two ratios eo-existent in the British 
Empire, and from a Canadian point of view there is much to be said in 
favour of adopting the Indian ratio in the new Mint. This change 
would tend to lappreciate the value of silver, and bring the intrinsic 
value of the coins considerably closer to their face value. In the United 
Kingdom and its Colonies the difference between the real and nominal 
value of the coins is too great. For instance a 50 cent piece in Canada 
contains silver to the value of about 23 cents. The inducements to 
counterfeiters are very tempting and the difficulty of detecting counterfeit 
coins made of the same fineness as standard silver is very great. Indeed 
there can be no certainty that all the silver coin now in circulation is 
genuine. On this point Mr. Probyn (Proceedings of the Royal Colonial 
Institute; Vol. XXI, p. 123) says:—“ It is however possible to fix the 
“nominal gold rate of silver too high. Thus an inducement to the 
“ fabrication of illicit coins of precisely the same intrinsic value is held 
“out; coins which it must be very difficult to distinguish from lawful 
“coins, and this state of things has been brought about in England 
“owing to the fall of the gold price of silver. We have lately seen 
“reports in the press of the manufacture of illicit good silver coins, in 
“one instance it being stated that, to avoid detection, the manu- 
“facture was being carried on on the high seas; and in other countries 
“as well, where the profit is not so great though the opportunity of 
“ getting the coins into circulation is better, we hear of the same thing. 
“ It appears therefore probable that, if the gold price of silver remains 
“as at present, the law will have to be amended, in view to the nominal 
“ gold rate of silver in our currency silver being lowered, and the silver 
“coins being made more valuable.” From this quotation it is evident 
that if there are no “ illicit good ” silver coins circulating in Canada, the 
people are indebted, not to the wisdom of their rulers, but to the vigi- 
lance of their detective organizations. Such vigilance does not appear 
to exist or to be effective in the United States, where there are said to 
be large quantities of the pure counterfeits in circulation. It is of 
course quite possible that a great deal of the American silver circulating 
in Canada may be of the same ilPicit description. It has to be con- 
sidered that Mr. Probyn’s paper was written in 1890 when the price of 
standard silver was about 45 pence. The danger referred to is of course 
much greater now that the price is about two shillings and sixpence. 

The branch Mints in Australia manufacture only gold sovereigns 
for use there and largely for export to other parts of the world. The 
silver currency is all coined in London, and the Commonwealth authori- 
ties pay for it at the face value, but the obligation to purchase and 


l 2 


[MACFARLANE] METALLIC CURRENCY OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE 49 


remint abraded coin rests upon the Royal Mint. The Australian Mints 
acting as agents of the Imperial government receive worn silver coin 
from the banks at its nominal value. The worn coin is melted by the 
Australian Mints and shipped to London in ingots, the Imperial govern- 
ment paying all expenses for delivery at the Royal Mint, London, and 
also bearing the loss on recoinage. This arrangement does not seem to 
have been entirely satisfactory to the Commonwealth, and its government 
made an effort to obtain some of the profit of coining which they sup- 
posed to be very large. In June, 1901, the House of Representatives 
appointed a select committee “to enquire into and report upon the 
“ desirableness and expediency of the Commonwealth coining gold, silver 
“and copper coins, and adopting a decimal system of coinage.” The 
Committee reported in April, 1902, and among other opinions, expressed 
the following :—“ Since 1873 the seigniorage on the silver coinage has 
“steadily increased till it now amounts to over 130 per cent on the cost 
“of the silver. Upon silver bullion costing £733.013 purchased by the 
“ Royal Mint in 1900, the profit in coining was £974.519 or 133 per cent. 
“On the bronze coin operations for the same year a profit of £119.042 
“is shown. In the opinion of the Committee no reason exists why the 
. “Commonwealth should not receive this seigniorage on the amount of 
“the token coinage it requires, accepting the corresponding liability of 
“restoring the worn coin of its currency from time to time. To secure 
“this a special token coinage not current outside the limits of the Com- 
“monwealth is preferable, and the opportunity should be availed of to 
“make that coinage a decimal one.” The report was adopted in June, 
1903, by the House of Representatives on the following motion :—Thai 
in the opinion of the House, the necessary legislation should be intro- 
duced to give effect to the recommendations contained in the report of a 
Select Committee on Commonwealth coinage and currency. 

Previous to any further steps in the direction of legislation or exe- 
cutive action, the Report was submitted to various authorities, chambers 
of commerce, public bodies, and employers unions in the Commonwealth 
for an expression of their opinions. There were over seventy of these 
consulted, most of whom sent replies. About one half were in favour of 
delay or no change for the present, and the other half were for imme- 
diately decimalising the currency. It does not appear that since Decem- 
ber, 1904, any further action has been taken to obtain a new arrangement 
with the authorities of the Royal Mint regarding silver coinage for 
Australia. Of course many of the reasons above given for adopting pure 
nickel as a metal for the subsidiary coins of Canada apply also to the 
smailer coins used in Australia, England and other parts of the Empire. 


Sec. III., 1906. 4 


50 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The adoption of such can, however, scarcely be advocated without at the 
same time discussing the possibility of inventing an Imperial Coinage. 

The system of decimal coinage recommended by the Australian 
Committee was the adoption of the sovereign as the standard of value, 
and the division of the florin into 100 parts to be called cents. If 
carried into actual practice it would simply add another to the many dis- 
cordant systems of metallic currency now existing within the Empire, 
and result in making uniformity in Imperial Coinage quite unattainable. 
It did not form any part of the instructions to the Committee to con- 
sider the possibility of establishing such uniformity, but they paid some 
attention to the prospects of currency reform in Great Britain, and to 
the probable direction of that reform. Many of the witnesses and 
authorities consulted by the Committee tempered their advocacy of 
the decimal system by a recommendation to-await the action of Great 
Britain. The committee, however, ascertained that the Lords Com- 
missioners of the Treasury are of opinion that “the difficulties con- 
“nected with any change of our coinage system are so great that there 
“is no likelihood that the question will engage the attention of His 
“ Majesty’s Government in a practical way.” 

The difficulties just referred to, regarding the coinage of the 
United Kingdom, will of course also be met with in any attempt to invent 
a metallic currency for the Empire. It is quite possible, however, that 
they have been exaggerated, and many of them appear to have their origin 
in a predetermination in every event to retain the British sovereign. 
That coin was also the object of the Australian committee’s solicitude 
when it declared that “from the reports of similar inquiries in Great 
“ Britain as well as from the evidence of competent witnesses it would 
“seem that the retention of the sovereign as the standard of value is 
“the only basis upon which a decimal coinage proposal would find favour 
“in that country.” Possibly, however, the abandonment of the poor 
man’s penny might be just as unpopular as the abolition of the rich 
man’s sovereign, and adopting the penny and half-penny system de- 
cimally would compel the alteration of the sovereign. Much informa- 
tion on this subject is contained in the Australian report already quoted 
from.’ Two additional essays concerning Imperial coinage also deserve 
study; the one by Mr. Probyn already mentioned, and the other entitled 
“ An Imperial Coinage”? by Filelis (Arch. McGoun, K.C., Montreal.) 

Mr. Probyn shews very clearly that “ there is a great diversity, not 
“merely of system but of details in the same system, throughout the 


1 Report on Coinage: D4.— F. 8797. Robt.S. S. Brain, Government Printer, 
Melbourne; also, No. 62 F, 13542 and No. 60 F, 13135. 
2The Commonwealth 1901, p. 202. 


{MACFARLANE] METALLIC CURRENCY OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE 51 


“ Empire,” and mentions the suggestion “that our new double florin 
“should be treated as a dollar, and that it might become the dollar of the 
“ Empire.” He does not, however, elaborate any new plan of introduc- 
ing uniformity. On the other hand, Filelis adopts the following pro- 
positions and works them out in detail :— 

1. The unit for an Imperial Coinage must be the pound sterling. 

2. An Imperial Coinage must be sub-divided-on the decimal 
system. | 

This is essentially the same plan as recommended by the Australian 
Committee. In Filelis system ‘the chief coin of account, would be the 
one which would pass current for the tenth part of a pound. Such a 
coin the United Kingdom already possesses in the two shilling piece or 
florin, and its retention is proposed. “The next ‘coin of account’ 
“would be about two and a half pence, or very nearly the same as our 
“five cent piece, and it might be called a groat, as the four-penny groat 
“has passed out of use. The smallest coin of account would be the 
“ 1000th of a pound, and would approximate very closely in value to the 
“present English farthing, the name and place of which it might very 
“appropriately take.” 

This system excludes dollars and cents, substituting in fact, florins 
and farthings for them, and no effort is made to harmonise it with the 
currency of Canada or of the United States. The problem is, however, 
one that cannot be solved by inventing asystem of coinage theoretically 
perfect. The question is rather how uniformity can be introduced, a 
decimal system estabished, and the present coins utilised, with the fewest 
possible changes, and in the easiest possible manner. It seems possible 
to maintain that this can best be done by adopting as the unit the double 
florin mentioned by Mr. Probyn, or the Canadian dollar, which is the 
same as that of the United States. In gold the United States dollar 
has a legal weight of 25.8 grains (Fineness 900), which corresponds 
closely to the 25.68 grains (Fineness 916.66) of the Newfoundland gold 
dollar. In fine gold these coins contain respectively 23.22 and 23.54 
grains, so that, as Mr. Probyn says, “ It will be seen that the Newfound- 
“ Jand dollar is worth a trifle more than the Canadian dollar.” There 
are other parts of the Empire where a dollar of nearly the same value 
as the Canadian dollar is in use, and therefore some ground for inquiring 
as to whether this coin would not be the best unit for an Imperial coin- 
age, and most easily introduced as such. 

The chief and almost the only alteration necessary for establishing 
uniformity and utilizing by far the greatest number of the coins now 
current within the Empire is to add a little more gold to the sovereign, 
making it nearly equivalent to the old English guinea, and equal to $5.00 


52 ROYAL SOCIETY OF UANADA 


in Canadian curreney and to the $5.00 gold piece of the United States. 
The latter contains 116.1 grains fine gold, and the sovereign only 113. 
This difference of 3.1 grains when added would raise the value of the 
sovereign so as to make 20/ equal to $5.00 and the dollar equal to 
4/. This sovereign or rather guinea would not, however, answer well as 
a coin of account in a decimal system and it would be necessary to use a 
two guinea denomination for this purpose, inventing a coin say a double 
guinea, an “ Empress” or an “ Edward” to represent it. The old 
guinea having gone entirely out of use, it would seem possible to utilise 
the term for a coin equivalent to $5.00. In this way the name 
sovereign or pound would continue to be used for expressing its present 
value, so long as necessary and until such time as it might be abandoned 
without inconvenience. 

There is no doubt that there exists almost everywhere a great bulk 
of opinion in favour of the retention of the sovereign. This is owing to 
its being known all over the world as containing an invariable weight of 
pure gold. The banks prefer it as something they can rely upon—an 
absolute standard. Sometimes bars consisting of perfectly pure gold are 
used for effecting exchanges between England and the United States, but 
sovereigns are frequently preferred to gold bars because they require no 
further melting and assay, are accepted at a fixed price, and constitute 
the most convenient form in which to export gold. Very large quanti- 
ties are shipped from Sydney to San Francisco, and there are taken ta 
the mint immediately on arrival to be remelted and recoined as required 
by law. Mr. Von Arnheim, Deputy Master of the Sydney Branch of the 
Royal Mint, states that “in one year we lost nearly 7,000,000 good sove- 
“reigns in that way; we lost the labour of melting them.” Quite 
frequently large parcels of new sovereigns arriving in London have been 
sold to bullionists at a premium to be remelted and reshipped to the 
continent in the form of bars. In fact, the Royal Mint undertakes to 
perform gratis the inspection and assaying of the gold required not only 
in the Empire, but for all the rest of the world. All this shews that the 
sovereign is simply valued as containing a certain amount of gold, and 
that if new coins were issued by the Royal Mint of the same fineness in 
pure gold as the sovereign, they would be valued according to their in- 
creased weight and rapidly acquire as good a reputation. If the new 
guinea pieces were coined as above proposed the various British coins 
would have the following number of half-pence or cents :— 


GOLD PIECES No. of 

cents. 

Two Guinea piece = One “Empress” or “Edward” — 1000. 
GUINEA ALES AS cle UE AE PAR ER poh: Dich was ele 500. 


FHalfiatGuinea ile es en RE AR SRE ER 250. 


{MACFARLANE] METALLIC CURRENCY OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE 53 


SILVER. No. of 

cents. 

OO ae tres vela ine fay escent le PORN laieuine lel tore 125. 
Moublestonmaior dollar —#t4/#00 LR OR CEE ne 100. 
ie Cr = OS te 62.5 
Opin Hal Dollar-— 12/0010 Me vejes (eis 50): 
DEC RE LME e's) les helene Jen dels 52 
SOUNTeS=-MQUALIERIAOIAT COMM cc sees joel ee ole 25, 
SNDEN COR een elec oescele estate 1225 
EEO ite CPM =e don cies bere, red sheet Jon ue altie Lait Vois 8.0 
DDC CRE ee ne Les cist fe elles hae. /evai ayes dave! os si listes ote 6. 


COPPER PIECES. 


Penny — One Anna — One sixteenth Rupee. 2.0 
Half Penny, copper or cent.. .. .. . 1.0 
Farthing = One pice (Indian).. .. 0.5 
MURS CET Gite eee ste. 0 Pe) Wy Sue) ie Mire le Née Neve 0.33 
Gentime..u:. 50/12. 0.20 
Pie (Indian)... .. 0.16 
ETES LR TER NE 0.10 
Mauritius quarter Gent). .).2 =.) ss - -. «- 0.08 


It will be seen that in this list of British coins there are none to 
represent 10 cents and 5 cents, and if the latter were made as suggested, 
of pure malleable metallic nickel, the list of essentially Imperial coins 
would stand as follows :— 


GOLD PIECES. Value in 

cents. 

Double Guinea, “Empress” or “Edward”.. .. .. 1000. 
SUMED ONE we POUR) AM al) oe Vision tees) eh ees dois, vate lele wes 500. 
BENIN CG UELTU CLR 10 MOT CLS RE DRE MST PIRE EE lata: Sete” ie! Mare 250. 
Doro DoubIerorints. EL EU RL TE 100. 


SILVER PIECES. 


IAM hel.5 5, lo8t46br val BoM CO ct TORE eects Steed LIfe DAT ARR NE PER AS 50. 
LESTE e + SH 00 ! 8 EU ON OCOD EN METRE RP aL RER 32. 
CO EEE RE ee dec ee (stan (asatsalop Ghie Vi GREAT das inl ole 25. 
Dimeromtivespence pieces. thon ais) US. oie 10. 


NICKEL PIECES. 


Nickel ormtwopence halfipenny.: "212. Hit, (ee els 5. 
PE GIITEVAROTIPAUINIE Re it cleric.” osduatllieme lies se le 2. 
Cent; Half penny, Or COPDET. 26 26 ee ws we ae ee ALA 


BRONZE PIECES. 
Farininesonmpice tndian) 242. eke ey eel sis) [ow sis, well. os 0.5 
Accounts in England and the Colonies of Australia and South 


Africa could be put on a decimal basis by regarding the double guinea 
as the unit instead of the pound, and it would be an easy matter to re 


54 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


member that one “ Empress ” equals two guineas. In Canada the unit of 
account would be as heretofore the dollar, and it would be easy to remem- 
ber that one double guinea or Emperor ‘equals $10.00. Instead, there- 
fore, of the principles advocated by Filelis, the following seem to be 
preferable :— 


1. The units for a common Coinage should be, as preferred in different 
parts of the Empire, either the ‘“ Empress” equal to 40/ Sterling, or 
the Dollar equal to 4/. 


2. Both of these units should be sub-divided on the decimal system. 


From this relation it is evident that if the new Branch Mint io 
Ottawa were at once to begin coining five, two and one cent pieces, in pure 
metallic nickel, these would ultimately find their right and useful place 
in an Imperial Coinage on the system above described ‘as probably the 
most practicable. In any case the subject deserves close and immediate 
investigation, and that should take place before the coining presses of 
the new Mint are ordered, or the Government of the Australian Common- 
wealth adopts any decided action. Much of the expert evidence before 
the Australian Parliamentary Committee goes to shew that the 
simultaneous coining, in a mint of ordinary capacity, of more than one 
metal, carries with it great difficulties. In all probability it will be 
found most convenient and profitable to devote the Ottawa Mint to the 
manufacture of subsidiary pure nickel coins for the whole Empire. 

It will be evident that the introduction of the new coinage metal and 
the adoption of a uniform Imperial Currency is a matter of great 
urgency. The Commonwealth authorities are ripe for immediate action, 
and could possibly be shewn the advantages of adopting the Canadian 
plan. These could also be explained to other governments of the outer 
Empire and more espcially that of India which is now considering the 
advisability of adopting modifications in its system of coinage. 

When Sir William Mackinnon, Bart., was written to regarding the 
decimalisation of the Australian Coinage he replied disapproving of that 
step and added “ whatever is done I think the coin of India should be 
“assimilated to that of Great Britain. The Indian rupee contains 
“ exactly, or as near as possible, exactly, the same quantity of silver that 
“our florin does. A basis is therefore established for uniformity and an 
“ arrangement of this sort might be helpful to the Government of India 
“in re-organizing their financial system which they are bound to do 
“before long.” On referring to the list of essentially Imperial coins 
given above it will be found to include the rupee, anna and pice, so that 
the system proposed in this essay indicates certain steps towards the 
assimilation desired. According to Mr. Probyn the anna “is only a 
“nominal division there being no corresponding coin.” It would be 


[MACFARLANE] METALLIC CURRENCY OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE 55 


most fitting to inaugurate the new departure by striking a new coin of 
this value in pure nickel, and by coining the fractions of the rupee below 
ten cents in value also of this metal. The copper token coins now in 
circulation in India representing one thirty second, one sixty fourth, a 
one hundred and twenty-eighth, and a one hundred and ninety-second 
of a rupee, and called respectively double pice, pice, half pice and pie, 
with the exception of the iast named, also fit decimally into the system 
now advocated. ‘The value of the pie would. probably have to be 
increased so as to make it equal to one-tenth of an anna, in which case 
the half-pie would become the smallest coin in the British Empire and 
equal to the mill in the list of essentially Imperial coins above given. 
These changes would cause the Indian coins to represent the values in 
Imperial cents given in the following list :— 

SILVER PIECES. 


cents. 
PEPTIC Chey eioy ntm eau wlio al eel ere) West danse de vei) 8 ee des fare 32. 
EVANS RU Dee a ete shes cat paver Teel Gren caves lrels Mae oreueter nee, cas 16. 
NICKEL PIECES. 
Quarter rupee.. .. 8. 
One eighth rupee.. . 4. 
ART SE aree rae. cle 2% 
Double-pice.. .. .. 4° 
BRONZE PIECES. 
BICE sch stew ee Mas 0.5 
Half-pice.. .... 0.25 
IPI Cie bee 5: 0.2 
EÉalf=pie..:. à: 0.1 


In view of the possibility that action may at any moment be taken 
by the Governments of Australia and India and changes made in their 
respective currencies it is urged that the Dominion Government should 
consider the advisability of making such representations to them as 
would cause them to take into consideration the proposals contained in 
this memorandum. It is also suggested that the authorities of the Royai 
Mint be consulted and requested to prepare a set of models of the coins 
of the new system, so that this could be laid before His Majesty as well 
as the representatives of the Governments above mentioned. It would 
also be advisable to place a set of these coins on exhibition in the Imperial 
Institute, London, so that the public might become acquainted with them 
and form their opinions as to the advantage of adopting them in a system 
of Imperial metallic currency. 


OTTAWA, 23rd February, 1906. 


Sxcrion IIL., 1906. Size] Trans. R.S. C. 


V.—On the Analysis of Wheaten Flour. 
BY 


THoMAS MACFARLANE. 


Read May 25, 1906. 


In a former paper presented to this section “ On the determination 
of the Constituents of Gluten,” * a method of examining wheaten flours 
was described which seemed to promise analytical results likely to bear 
some definite relations to the phenomena observable in bread making. 
It is well known that the same standard brands of flour vary from year 
to year in regard to their excellence for yielding good bread, and it is 
usually supposed that these variations are owing to differing climatic 
conditions at the time of harvesting the wheats from which the flours 
were produced. It was therefore thought possible that by applying the 
method above mentioned to the examination of well known standard 
grades of flour from year to year variations in their composition might 
be detected which might be found to correspond with variations in their 
excellence for purposes of bread making. -Accordingly the two largest 
flour milling companies in the Dominion were applied to for reliable 
samples of their best products from the crops of the past three seasons. 
These were supplied with the greatest willingness, the different grades 
heing as follows:— From the Lake of the Woods Milling Co., “ Five 
Roses,” “ Patent” and “ Medora”; from the Ogilvie Flour Mills Co., 
“ Royal Household” and “ Glenora.” 

The results of examining these five grades of flour from the crops 
of 1903 and 1904 were given in my paper of last year, and since then the 
same grades from the crop of 1905 have been subjected to exactly the 
same processes of analysis as the former samples. Consequently the 
the results of the examination of the same grades for three consecutive 
seasons are now available for comparison. Besides the samples of 
“ Royal Household” and “ Glenora” obtained direct from the Ogilvie 
Flour Mills Co., the same qualities were purchased from Mr. A. Mar- 
tin, a dealer in the city of Uttawa, Jan. 1, 1906, and examined in the 
same manner. All the results have been given in Table I which here 
follows :— 


1 See Transactions, 1905 ; Section III, p. 17. 


a at =. 
— 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


58 


OI.II |Z0.8F (96.98 |19.S2 ISI.1 |69.6 |0€.% |F9-G |96.T |GZ.OI |86.b |19.b |€1-T |SG.Z |8d-L |€G.PT |89.SI [80-6 |" 9 "°°" ‘289r[dn cr » 
Z9.II |00-8F |F6.9£ [66.92 IGT.L |8G.6 (08.3 (|F£.G (|92.T |I9.01 |S6.% |249.b |60-T |1I6.9 1SG.Z |OL.FT |ZE.GT |[G6.6 |” Fr ee “UPB, “V 
+ WO1T) 9—GO6T » 
68.£I [II.2P |IF-Se |ST-SZ |SO.T (89.6 |29.% |61-T (196.1 |GZ.OI |F0.G |6h-F |6T-T |89.G 199.2 |P£.£I |[89.GT |8c.8 Pe ee eo BOL Cn ” 
00.PI l02.2P (56.98 |ZO-22 |OI-T (|PS.6 |28.%- [9I.T |1G-1 |82Z-O1 |00-G |FS.b |Pa.I |02.S (28.4 |6G.ET |68.GI [98.8 | DER AOE=GOGT » 
e2 SL |02.8r lor.0P [29.26 (Ga.I (91.6 (98.17 [II.I [|0ÿ.0+16G.0I (91.G [00-6 [8I.T |IT.G 180.2 |€1.cL (68.6 8.8 À" """ 97891[dn(f » 
1Z.¥L |1S.pr co. Ir [8.86 [Pa.I [FI.6 120.2 |£6.0 |89.0+|I8.01 160.9 |SO.— (ZI.T 186.5 |II.Z 160.87 (82.6 |29.8 |": seis G=p UGS 
OS.IT |18.88 [87.98 166.26 |FS-1 |S6.01 |TE-T |SE.% PS.O+I61.SI [02.9 (SG. |PZ.T |09-9 |10-.8 (|19.ÿI |[S9.II |OF.9 PS 0e LON CT 
£G.GI |2F.8€ |GG-9€ 9. £6 |IG- 1 |26-01 88. TPS. T6" 0 |PS. GT |S229 1287125. 1 |90-9 |80-.8 |79-PL |S9-TT jOh-9 | DOC 00 “B10U91r) 
OF.FL |2£.6P |F0.98 |60.£2 (96.0 08.8 IZS8.I |26.0 (182.3 192.6 |9F-F |PE.b 196.0 193.S 188.9 |6G.IT |FO.GI |S£.0T :27891TAn(T 
00.PI |Z8. 6% |66.P£ |2G.0Z (86.0 |£9.8 |Z9.T (60.1 Ï|12.& 186.6 |£6.7 108.7 |G96.0 166. 100.9 |6E.TT |68.GT |GI.OT CEA ‘JS NOP “UN ‘WV 
| WOIT) 9-GO6T » » 
O8-FI 192.67 |62.7£ |£9.0Z [86.0 158.8 LL'T |\G8-0 |8G.G |96.6 |6F-F |9€.F IOI.T |SI.S 193.9 |PF.IL |[£9.GI [00.8 |‘ ‘ezeordn » » 
OF-PL |G£.8r [26-78 |9G.GL |I6.0 199.8 |49 T |16.0 GS. |Sh.6 |2ÿ.7 |81-% |08-0 |60.S |FI.9 |£S.IT |ZG-II [80.8 À °° 9-GO6T ” ” 
9.2L |28-6P |88-cr |L0.98 [80.T 199.8 |99°0 |Z9.T |IT-O |¥6.6 |FE.F |IS.r (|6C.I I86.S |06-% |88-OT |SO.OI IoI.8 |‘ ‘‘"‘euormdnq ” » 
FO.SI |08.6P |0S-I1F |ZZ.£8 [90.1 [49.8 |18'O |2F.I [88.0 |68.6 128.7 (|9c.r. |2G.I |GL.G |81-S 106.07 |ZG.OI |9T.8 |" G—FO6T ” ” 
Z0.ST |£0.£r [60.98 [PS.IS |86-0 |92.6 |IE'T |O4-0 |GO.T |96.01 99.S 108.7 |6I-T (06.% VASE LATTES) Z6 TITLE 002 RSS ‘238911dn(f » » 
£S.PI |[12.8r |0G.P£ [82.08 [86.0 129.6 (SO 'T |£6.0 |PI.T |£8.-OI |FS.¢ |€T-F [9I.T (|90.S |9G.9 |G9.TII |Z6.TT [89.9 | P-£06T ‘ployesnoy [eAoy 
| 
‘0, SIT MOLT erApsO WOLT 
ce.cr |e6.c¢ lor.6e 96.2 (86.0 (1.6 |28.z [69-0 |ST.Z |1Z.OT |08.5 |P8-b |20.1 |£9.9 |2¢.9 lor.ar [98.ar (29.24 |" LL CUT: 5 
gg. Gt (92.89 |e2.8€ |IF.82 (86.0 (92.6 |Po.a 69.0 |Ir.Z [61.01 (ZE. |88.h |ÿ6.0 [9-9 [16.9 |gp.ct |09.7 09.2 | 9-GO6T 5 
6.21 [S£. IG 160-68 |ZO.92 |20-T [88.8 [28-1 |89-L |8S.T 188.6 |GF.b (197.7 |0G.I |F0-9 |ÿ0.9 (|7c.GI |IF.IT 196.2 °° "e78211dn(f ” 
29.21 (2e. 10 |9%-6& |T9.92 |20-1 |€2Z-8 IGS.r [GZ.T |OG.T |16-6 (|Sa.r |8%-h ISI.I 188.9 |OT-9 |88.GT |TP.IT (00.8 | oo G—FO6T » 
PI.SI |61.8P |[60.L£ (96.92 |80.T 8.6 (198.G |€9 T |GF.T |c8.OI |88.7 |FS-b |Or.I 120.9 |¥G-4 |T€.€T |Pa.Gr (88.24 | : * ‘e789r1dn(f 
SI.2I |Co.Sr |6&.S£ |Pr.£2 [60.1 166.8 |SP.G |06-T |Z8.T |28.01 [29.7 |G6.p |8E.L |Gc-9 (GI.Z |PE.ETL |P&.GT OP AI eee ere p-£O6T “e1OpaN 
86.81 |Sc.SP |Z9.88 |32.G8 |FI-T |ZI.6 |S0.& |ZO.I |99.0 |OL-OL |c0.G /|SI-% 26-0128 9.120: 2. |6¢.c0 92:07 96.6 | 7 ~-ayeordndg ” 
og. ST lbp. bP [ZI.6£ [£0.88 IST.T 122.6 |06.1 (188.1 |68.0 (PI.OI |GI.¢ |GI.P |48-0 |G8.9 |GO.2 |OF.ZT |EG-OT (83.6 | 0 9-SO6L ” 
0-81 |2Z-2¢ |PL-&F |€¢.z8 |SI.— (98.8 |Z1.% |29-1 |P9.0 (68.6 |66.€ |28.b |ST.T 68-9 |91.9 (|SO.GT |£T-OT \88.8 | | ‘: ‘eyuoridn » 
o8.£Tr lzo.ze (reg 22.28 |ZI-T (8-8 (50.2 |Iÿ.I |€9-0 (09-6 126.8 II. |OL-T |28.S |10.9 |88.IT |8T.OI (88.8 À G—FO6T ” 
19-GI €%-9F 89-GF PE-c6 20.1 18Z.6 |08-% |89-I |19-0+|99-01 (66.7 |60-% |S£.I |26-9 166.2 |92.€T |G0-0T P0.8 |. °° eyeordn¢ | ” 
GO.ZI 129. SP |66-1F \£0.26 |€8.1 |Gc-6 |9%-% |€6-L |6h.O+|FS.0T 80. |22-% |68.1 |ST-9 162.4 |FF-ET |GO-O1 100.8 | 0 F-£061 Fue}! 
9€.8T |c8.2r |ZT.98 [09.02 |€6-0 (06.2 |66.1 {Z1-OT/81.T |28.6 |21.6 |82 8 |Gp.I |I9-€ jIT-9 64.6 |SP- OT HOY )3(G): “|e *‘ "epuorqdnct ” 
LL.ST |66.2F |S2.GE |9F.PL |T6.0 (196.2 |F0-.6 SG OS TT OIPI- CS ie 00 TOO ISTO 7660 011 026 En 9-GO6T ” 
28.11 |8&.8P |0€-2E |60.22 [90.1 |Fr.2 |28-0 (196.1 (186.0 29.8 |P8.€ |09.€ |€Z.T |9G.G 199.7 |38.0I CO OM Ge Sime eee : een » 
T9-TT |98-8F |G2.2S |0G.22 |ZO.T |Sh-2 [86.0 |88-L (196.0 169.8 |18.€ |p9.€ |FS.T |GG.S |62.r Le. O1 G9.6 |69.8 “o-F06T ” 
go.s |e¢.¢p |ez.ze |00.12 |at-1 |6r.2 (28.0 |8r.8 |F8.T 02.8 [80.6 |TP-2 |1Z-E |68.9 |06.% [62.11 j¥9.OT 0.6 |‘: "emondna, } 
15.01 |28-SF |Ca.P£ |99.FL |SO.T [28.2 |T2-0 (|8r.G |6h-T (160.6 198.7 |19-€ |8T.T (160.9 126.7 |90-.TT |PS.OF 100.6 LEE P-LOGL ‘Sesoy SAIT 
T AC) a v es ie 0 v Si x) ac) T ae vw a TD 2e) 
IGS Wao | ee eons age | Oe Qe [He | ss 9 iS go S 9 gS 29 9 ; 
cry E + B. BO se 2 et ee e 3 25 | ER v a" = Sy | Q © X 5 = spo ee DUR wol 
dea ee | oP | Se oto | se | em | ee ees | ES EN ARE a oer CE POSE UOTE A 
SUSE Sy NE fog Masri sparc ET allen ail SS ies ed = ee a. SRE ze, 
2 Ce | ET © op aise | ae || Hey ES |2 Wyo Q Q g a = st § 
ok 32 8.0 Shy LES on ne BE oo 26 a =D = is) A al © 
MB |) ss | om | ax “| ee |8o | Be | Ba) ag 3 Be De CT NE ee “MOI U9U94 M 
Season) QE LES NE Re) NES ae 5. 5 ole : 8. 
ps rs | 2) ee | eo) ee |°& PO ee | ee | 8 eam 2 & jo 
Q pme ES th © ©. oO 4 © to @ e I 
So 5 Ot One EL = ; = WA, o sojdureg Jo uondrose 
BE ÉNÉN MES ea "ser a B. ee 2 
oe “B |B | 25 & yl) 9 5 
LI 91 SI v1 €1 TI 6 L II Or g 9 S L4 € z I o 


‘I A'IAVL 


[MACFARLANE] ON THE ANALYSIS OF WHEATEN FLOUR 59 


The numbers placed at the head of the various columns in this 
table are the same as used in my paper last year, but for the sake 
of |convenience, the manner in which the figures were obtained is now 
explained as briefly as possible :— 

0.—In this column the percentage of moisture which the flours 
contain is given in duplicate, the determinations having been made by 
distributing the flours in chrysotile fibre and drying over night (18 
hours) at 70°c. 

1.—The percentages of total proteids in this column were ascer- 
tained by determining the nitrogen in the undried flour by the Kjeldahl 
method and multiplying the percentage of nitrogen by the factor 5-7 in 
accordance with the results of the investigations of Osborne & Voorhees. 

2.—In determining the dry gluten the old method of making a 
dough ball and washing out the starch with an indefinite quantity of 
water was abandoned. Ten grammes of flour were made up with just 
sufficient distilled water in the usual way, and after waiting 30 minutes, 
the dough ball was treated with 250 cubic centimetres of distilled water. 
The latter was placed in a separating funnel and delivered drop by drop 
on the dough while it was being kneaded. The wash water and starch 
were received in a sieve made of No. 12 bolting cloth, and any particles 
of gluten caught in it were recombined with the wet gluten ball under 
treatment. The above mentioned quantity of water, used as described, 
was found to be quite sufficient for the elimination of the starch in 10 
grammes of flour. The starch passed through the sieve and was col- 
lected with the wash water in a basin placed underneath. The gluten 
was deprived of as much water as possible, dried at 98°c for 28 hours 
and weighed. This determination was done in duplicate like that of the 
ethers still to be described. 

3.—Ten grammes of the flour were treated in the manner just 
described up to the point of obtaining the wet gluten. Then the latter, 
without being dried, was securely enclosed in a small piece of fine 
muslin which had been previously dried and weighed. The whole was 
then subjected to treatment with 250ce of 70 per cent alcohol, contained 
in a separating funnel, and delivered drop by drop upon the wet gluten 
contained in the muslin which was being carefully kneaded at the same 
time. This operation has to be performed very gently and without 
causing any particles of the gluten to be expressed. After drying, the 
weight of the resulting content of the muslin gives the quantity of the 
crude glutenin contained in the flour. The drying and weighing is done 
in the muslin, the weight of the latter being deducted. 

4.—The percentage of crude glutenin (3) subtracted from that of 
the dry gluten (2) gives the percentage of loss which the gluten had 


60 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


sustained jn the treatment with alcohol, which loss is designated as 
“ Crude Gliadin.” 

5.—The water used in the production of the gluten, together with 
the suspended starch from 20 grammes of flour were well mixed, made 
up to 500ccm and allowed to stand until the starch had subsided. 
250ccm of the supernatant liquid were then filtered off and used for the 
determination of the water soluble proteids. It may here be stated, 
with respect to the starch deposit, and its possible contents in minute 
particles of gluten, that its treatment by the Kjeldahl method was 
found to be exceedingly tedious, so that the determination of its nitro- 
gen had to be abandoned. 

6 and 7.—The alcoholic solution obtained as described under 3 was 
evaporated to small bulk and its nitrogen determined. This multiplied 
by 5-7 gave pure gliadin (6) the percentage of which was always less 
than the “crude gliadin” obtained, as above described, by difference. 
It is thus evident that 70 per cent alcohol dissolves out of the gluten, 
other substances besides gliadin. Their amount was ascertained by de- 
ducting the percentage of “ pure gliadin” from that of “ crude gliadin,” 
and has been provistonally termed “ dextrinoids” (7) 

8 and 9.—In a similar manner the cake of dried crude glutenin 
was Kjeldalised and the amount of pure glutenin calculated from the 
nitrogen. In making this determination the glutenin was not removed 
from the muslin, and the latter underwent digestion in the Kjeldhl pro- 
cess. ‘lhe very small quantity of nitrogen contained in the muslin was 
neglected. The pure glutenin (8) deducted from the crude glutenin 
(3) gave a percentage which | have designated as “ non-proteids in 
Crude Glutenin” (9). 

10.—In this column is given the sum of the proteids determined 
in the various products yielded by the flour, in order to compare it with 
the total proteids found in the sample by direct determination of the 
nitrogen (1). 

11.—This column shews the differences between 10 and 1, namely, 
the loss or gain which the total proteids of the flour sustained by the 
analytical treatment. Sometimes there is an overplus and the nitrogen 
has been fully accounted for, but in the majority of cases there is a de- 
ficiency varying from 0-11 to 2-71 in the percentage of total proteids. 
Since the nitrogen was determined in all the products, except the 
separated starch, it would seem reasonable to suppose that it contains the 
missing proteids. In this case they are probably in the form of the 
particles of glutenin, which, on account of deficiency in adhesiveness, the 
gluten was unable to retain. 


[MACFARLANE] ON THE ANALYSIS OF WHEATEN FLOUR 6t 


The following columns do not embrace any additional determina- 
tions but simply contain calculated figures given for purposes of com- 
parison. 

12.—Sum of the pure proteids, gliadin (6) and glutenin (8) con- 
tained in the gluten. 

13.—Ratio of total proteids in flour to dry gluten. 

14.— Percentage of gluten porteids (pure gliadin + pure glutenin) 
cbtained from the total proteids of the flour. 

15.—Percentage of pure gliadin obtained from the total proteids 
of the flour. 

16.—Percentage of pure gliadin in the gluten proteids. 

17.—Percentage of nitrogen in the crude gliadin or the extract by 
alcohol. It varies from 8-65 to 18-77 per cent the latter figure being 
higher than that required by the factor 5-7 which is 17-5. 

As has already been remarked, Table I contains all the analytical 
results obtained by the methods above described in making analyses of 
the 5 standard gradés of flour from three consecutive seasons. Dupli- 
cate tests were made in the case of 13 samples and quadruplicates in 21 
samples, so that there are 34 analyses in all, the work of which was per- 
formed under my direction by Miss 8. E. Wright, assistant analyst in 
the Inland Revenue Laboratory. It is impossible at present to 
make complete use of all these figures, and they are thus placed 
on record in order that they may be available for future reference. 
They are too voluminous for purposes of comparison, and I have there- 
fore selected from among them certain series of figures and placed the:n 
in Table IL so as to furnish such a conspectus, as will enable parallels 
to be drawn between the properties of the flours and the general char- 
acters of the crops which yielded their wheats. 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


62 


90.€9 | 8€.8¢ | 8Z.€9 | 80-99 | 04.89 | 0S.G9 || 46.19 | FL.09 | I2.F9 || 88.09 | 9F.9G | 10.8 || 42.49 | 83-29 | S2.c9 
¥6.9€ | 9.1? | 6.9€ || G6-PE | OS. Ip | 0S.PE || EL.8E | 98.68 | 6Z.SE || SI.6E | FS.EF | 66.1F || €4.98 | ZL4.LE | Ga.pe 
66-01 e1.6 | 99.11 | 46.11 | 22-01 | 26.11 || 09.20 | Ty.11 | va.&r | €9-0r | 1.07 g0.O1 69-01 99.6 “FS. 01 | 
19.1 | 89.0+| 69.0+| 2¢.z | 82.0 | #I.1 Ty-G | OS.T | 28.1 6€.0 | £9.0 6.0+ 80.T |96.0 | 6F.T 
T€.OL | FG.GT FS.01 
Fa.l Dr. TES 08-0 | ZG.T | 9I.TI | 6.0 | SI.T | SE.I 48.0 |GI.I 63-1 COST SCT i) tio lt 
00.¢ | 60.9 | g4.9 Lv.v | LE.y | ¥9.G | LE.0 | 96.0 | 19.7 GT.G | 26.8 | €0.¢ PI.Y | 18-8 | 96-F 
PS.P | SO. | Gc.Pr 81.5 | 9%.b | eL.b | 88.7 Sp. | G£.r GI-¥ | IV.F | GG.r G8.€ | P9.€ | 19.8 
“9OL-T 66.0 | $8.1 16-0 | 4-1 | €6.0 || €9.0 | GZ. | 06.T 8G-T |IP.I | €6-1 GZ.O+] 88.T | 8F.% 
OL-G | 86.7 | 90.9 60-S |&2:S | 90-G | IS.S |€c.9 | 23.9 GG Gun | C8" | ST.9 1G.£ | G&.G | 60.9 
G8.G | GO.G | S&.T L9.T 18-0 |GO.T || 8.6 | G8. | SF.% 06.T | F0-G | 96-6 ¥0.G | 86-0 | TL.0 
68.4 |II.Z | 80.8 VE. 9 NS TG | OT ON 51639) OT OCT 2 SO.Z | 10.9 | 66.4 81.9 | 64.6 | 46.F 
OT.T | 72.1 | IG.I 16.0 | 90-1 | 86.0 | 86.0 | 40.1 | 60.T SLT eee gees | CUT 16-0 | ZO.T | GO.T 
GG-€T | 60.61 | FI.PI | 2.1L | 06-01 | GO.IT | Sr.GI | £E.GI | FE.ST || OF.ST | 8.1L | FF-ET.] $2.6 | TE.OT | 90.TT 
68.GI | €4.6 | 9.11 | 46.11 | ZG.OT | 26.11 || 09.01 | IF. 11 | FG.GI || €G-OT | €T.OT | $0.01 | 69.01 | $9.6 | F9.0T 
Es = | — 
9-SO6T | S-FO6T | F-EO6T || 9-COËT | S-FOGT | F-EO6T || 9-CO6T | S-FOGT | P-EO6T || 9-CO6T | S-FOGT | F-EO6T | 9-CO6T | S-FOGT | F-E06T 
*BIOU9TE) *ployasnopy [840 *BIOpOU ‘juo}ed4 *S2SOI SAIT 


“OD STII, HNAOTH AIATIOQ) NOUX 


‘OD ONITTIN SGOOM AHL AO HHVT NOUX 


‘(eousieytp Aq) moy jo sprajoid 
18909 Worf ULUaINTy eIng JU29 4194 


‘: (GT) og jo sptoyoid 
1830} WOIF ULpBIT_F) MMA. JU89 134 


tttt+te::SpleJOIT [BIO], 


1) 
Penn £q) corre ut Dee 


“"(G) 1998M Surpesusz ur Sprojolg 
(8) utuoynr) eng 
ceteseeteee(0) urpeipy emg 
(2) UIPeITD epnzp YIM sprouryxeq 
“(F) UIPBITD pri) 


(6) UlueynTy 8pni ut sprejzord-u0 Ny 


“**(g) UrmeNTH epnip 


Ory OOO LE EC . a pee ee (GT) YOR 
I way AIG 0} sprezo1g JO oney 


CR ee ed (7) u9n1") Ai 
°°" (D Sprezorg 18301 


**::*UOSBOS 


“+ pueig 


‘UNOTH NALVHH AA AO SHTIANVS ŒHVANVILS DNININVXG AO SLTIASAY GaALOATAgS— TI 


[MACFARLANE] ON THE ANALYSIS OF WHEATEN FLOUR 63 


The wheat crop of 1903 in the North-west was recognised as a 
remarkably good one, and as capable of being taken as a standard by 
which to judge the products of subsequent seasons. ‘The flours from 
that crop which are described in this paper as belonging to the season 
1903-4, gave great satisfaction to the bakers, who were able to produce 
from them breads of excellent quality with the greatest ease. When the 
flours of the next crop came on the market (1904-5) they were found 
to be troublesome to work, and to require delicate handling in order 
to the production of good bread. During doughmaking and fermenta- 
tion they behaved well, the sponge being light and rising readily. But 
this favorable shewing did not continue when the loaves were introduced 
into the oven. The expansion ceased and it even seemed as if a col- 
lapse and a lessening of the porosity took place. With regard to the 
flours from the crop of 1905, the disadvantages of the previous seasons 
flours were, not observed to anything like the same extent and they earned 
the character of being much better, and of resembling to a greater 
extent the flours of 1903-4, although they did not come up to the latter 
in excellence. 

Now, if we examine the lines of figures in Table II, we find that the 
one which most closely corresponds to the variations in the crop char- 
acters just mentioned, is that which gives the percentage of pure gliadin 
from the total proteids of the flour. It will be observed that, in the 
case of every one of the different brands, that percentage is highest in 
the flours from the crop of 1904, the year in which they shewed the 
greatest defects for baking purposes, and also that the same percentage 
is lowest for the products of the pattern year of 1903. With regard to 
the flours of last year they generally occupy an intermediate position 
betwixt those of the two other seasons, although some of them shew the 
same proportion of the gliadin to other proteids as the flours of 1903. 
It is ordinarily accepted that gliadin or the alcohol soluble proteids of 
gluten are those to which its elasticity or adhesiveness are due, and a 
high percentage of these is usually supposed to indicate a flour of 
superior quality. According to the figures recorded in Table II, it 
appears, however, that the higher percentage of gliadin in the flours of 
1904 was one of the causes of their defective character. 

The average percentage of gliadin in the fluor proteids of 1903 
according to the above determinations is 36-45. If all the other pro- 
teids in the flour are regarded as glutenin then the proportion of gliadin 
to glutenin is as 36-45 to 63-55. But this assumption cannot be correct 
seeing that the water soluble proteids have not the properties of glutenin. 
If the water soluble proteids are deducted from the total proteids, and 
the proportion is calculated in the remainder of gliadin to glutenin, the 


64 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


average proportion in the flours of 1903 is 41-07 to 58-93. Even thi- 
is altogether different from what has heretofore been supposed to be the 
most advantageous proportion for breadmaking purposes. Some 
modern flour chemists regard the most advantageous ratio as 65 gliadin 
to 35 glutenin and Prof. Snyder places it at 60 to 40. These propor- 
tions are just the reverse of those which we are inclined to regard az 
correct, but they are based upon determinations of the gliadin by ex- 
tracting the flour direct with alcohol, without any previous removal of 
the water soluble proteids, and no doubt therefore including the latter. 
The results of the analyses of the flours of 1903 seem therefore to justify 
the conclusion that the most advantageous proportion of gliadin to 
glutenin for baking purposes is about 40 to 60, it being understood that 
the proteids removed with the starch in the production of the gluten are 
to be regarded as glutenin. When the gliadin is present in greater 
quantity its super-abundant elasticity and stickiness are of no advantage. 
and the ‘cell walls of the bread are deficient in strength. 

There are other figures in Table II worthy of consideration, and 
foremost among these may be mentioned the extremely variable quan- 
tities of proteids, in all probability glutenin, which accompany the 
starch when it is being separated in the kneading process. This quan- 
tity varies from 0- to 2-52 per cent on the original flour, and it may 
possibly yet afford useful indications as regards the physical character 
of the gluten from which it is separated. 


Section III., 1906. [65 ] Trans. R. S.C. 


VI—Anchor-Ice formation from the standpoint of the Radiation 
Theory, together with some early memoirs on Ground-Ice. 


By Howarp T. Baryess, D.Sc., 


Associate Professor of Physics, McGill University. 


(Read May 23, 1906.) 


The form of ice which has attracted the most attention of all 
the forms to be met with in Nature is that known in this country 
as Anchor Ice. As its name implies it is ice which is found attached 
or anchored to the bottom of a river or stream. It seems to have 
been observed in nearly all countries where river ice is formed and 
goes by the name of ground-ice, bottom-ice, ground-gru, a name given 
it by the inhabitants of Aberdeenshire, and lappered-ice by the common 
people of the South of Scotland, who apply the epithet to the natural 
ecagulation of milk. In France it goes by the name of glace-du-fond, 
and in Germany as Grund-eis. The French-Canadian name for it is 
moutonne ice, from its resemblance to the white backs of sheep at rest. 

The phenomenon of ice forming on the bottom of rivers has been 
known for a very long time, and although the majority of the early 
philosophers of France denied its existence, it was perfectly well known 
to every peasant. 

In 1788 M. Beaun wrote several papers to establish the existence 
of ground-ice from his personal observations. He reports that the 
fishermen on the Elbe used to find the baskets which they let down 
into the river for the purpose of catching eels, were often, when brought 
up to the surface, incrusted with ice. Anchors used for mooring their 
boats when lost during the summer, frequently appeared in the follow- 
ing winter, being raised by the mass of ice which had formed about 
them. Their signal buoys sometimes became displaced from the raising 
of the large stones by the ground-ice and caused great inconvenience. 

M. Desmarest, a member of the French Academy of Sciences, was 
among the first of the scientists to make observations on the formation 
of ground ice. He reports having observed flakes of ice, formed at the 
base of running streams, increase in thickness five or six inches in 
a single night. 

In “ Picturesque Views of the River Thames,” published in 1792, 
Ireland speaks of the ground-ice of that river, remarking, “ The water- 
men frequently meet the ice meers, or cakes of ice, in their rise, and 


Sec. I£I., 1906. 5 


66 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


sometimes in the underside enclosing stones and gravel brought up by 
them ad imo.” 

In February of 1827, M. Hugi, President of the Society of Natural 
History at Soleure, reports that while standing on the bridge over the 
Aar, when the river was clear of ice, he observed large ice tables con- 
tinually rising from the bottom, in a vertical direction and with such 
huoyancy as to rise considerably above the surface, when they imme- 
diately sank into a horizontal position and floated down stream. 

This is in almost perfect accord with what takes place in our 
northern rivers during the daytime under a bright sun or during mild 
rainy weather. 

In 1835 the great philosopher, M. Arago, published an interesting 
paper on the subject in the Annuaire du Bureau des Longitudes. He 
mentions the following rivers where ground-ice was met with and the 
date of such observation. In the Thames, by Hales, in 1730; in the 
river Déonie, France, in 1780; in the Elbe, by Beaun, in 1788: in 
the Teine, Herefordshire, in 1816; in the Rhine at Strasburg, in 
1829; and in the Seine, in 1830. 

In the Edinburgh Philosophical Journal for 1834 there is an inter- 
esting paper on “ Observations on Ground Ice,” by the Rev. Mr. Hisdale, 
who attempts to explain the phenomenon on an original theory of his 
own. He states that the ice commences on the bottom and extends 
upwards to the surface, and is produced only in the most rapid and 
most rugged streams. 

The Rev. Dr. Farquharson published two important papers on 
Ground-gru in the Philosophical Transactions of 1835 and 1841. His 
cbservations were made of the ice in the rivers Don and Leochal, in 
Aberdeenshire. The conclusions he arrived at are that ground-gru 
is formed by radiation, and he endeavoured to substantiate his reason- 
ing upon the principle of the formation of dew. 

The first. use of the term anchor-ice which I have been able to find 
is in the Encyclopedia Americana, published by Carey and Lea of 
Philadelphia in 1831. Under the article on ice we find the author, 
after referring to ground-ice, states, that “a kind called anchor-ice 
appears to be formed at the bottom or at least under the surface of 
rapid rivers, perhaps owing to the comparatively slow motion of the 
water at the bottom of a stream.” 

The term anchor-ice, applied to ice anchored at the bottom, 
seems thus to have originated in America. Much confusion exists in 
regard to the relation of this ice to frazil-ice, brought about partly 
by a confusion of terms, and partly from the fact that immense quan- 
tities of frazil-ice become attached to the bottom by freezing to the 


(parnes] [ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 67 


layers of ice already formed there. The term anchor-ice we shall 
use to designate all ice found attached to the bottom irrespective of 
its nature of formation. Thus, frazil becomes anchor-ice when it 
attaches itself to the bottom. The birth of frazil is in the water 
itself by surface cooling through wind or rapid agitation. Anchor-ice 
may form in situ on the bed of a river, and may grow by attaching 
to itself frazil crystals brought down by currents or by the slower pro- 
cess of radiation. 

In the report of the Montreal Flood Commission we have the 
terminology clearly defined and we cannot too strongly emphasize 
the importance of adhering to this distinction for clearness of expres- 
sion. ‘Thus, referring to the important report published by the Com- 
mission as early as 1888, we find the following :—* Frazil, as, distin- 
guished from Anchor-ice, is formed over the unfrozen surface above 
and below Lachine Rapids (St. Lawrence River, at Montreal) between 
Prescott and tide water, and wherever there is sufficient current or 
wind agitation to prevent the formation of bordage ice.” 

We find that as early as 1810 writers of that time drew a distine- 
tion between three kinds of river ice, if we may judge from an early 
edition of the Encyclopedia Britannica published at that date. Under 
the article on Ice, we find the following: “Ice forms generally on 
the surface of the water; but this, too, like the crystallization, may 
he varied by an alteration in the circumstances. In Germany, par- 
ticularly the northern parts of the country, it has been observed that 
there are three kinds of ice. 1. That which forms on the surface. 
2. Another kind formed in the middle of the water, resembling nuclei 
or small hail. 3. Ground-ice, which is produced at the bottom, espe- 
cially where there is any fibrous substance to which it may adhere. 
This is full of cells like a wasp’s nest, but less regular; and performs 
many strange effects in bringing up very heavy bodies from the bottom, 
by means of its inferiority in specific gravity to the water in which 
it is formed. The ice which forms in the middle of the water rises 
to the top, and there unites into large masses; but the formation both 
of this and the ground-ice takes place only in violent and sudden colds, 
where the water is shallow and the surface is disturbed in such a man- 
ner that the congelation cannot take place. The ground-ice is very 
destructive to dykes and other aquatic works. In the more temperate 
European climates these kinds of ice are not met with.” 

These three kinds of ice are what we term sheet, frazil and anchor- 


1 


ice. 


1A full discussion of the formation of the three kinds of ice will be 
found in my “Ice Formation, with special reference to Anchor-Ice and 
Frazil,’ Wiley & Sons, New York, 1906. 


68 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The worst effects which are met with in engineering works are 
from frazil crystals formed during extreme weather when anchor-ice 
is growing rapidly by the freezing down of the crystals and not, as 
is sometimes supposed, when moderate weather occurs and these huge 
Jumps become loose and rise to the surface. Thus, it is often thought 
that it is useless distinguishing frazil from anchor ice unless it were 
possible to tell them apart at the foot of a stretch of open water 
where they accumulate at the edge of the barrier ice. They are cer- 
tainly both ice; but the conditions under which anchor ice will form 
are not the same as for frazil and vice versa. Methods of construction 
te obviate the one will not meet the exigencies of the other. So long 
as the ice problem lasts we shall find circumstances conducive to the 
formation of either one or the other or both. We should, therefore, 
keep clearly in our mind how each is likely to be formed in order 
to be prepared to distinguish the conditions most likely to favour the 
growth of either. In a shallow, smooth flowing river, we are more 
likely to have anchor-ice formed in excess, whereas in a deep and 
turbulent stream we are likely to have more frazil. It is hardly likely, 
however, that there will be a great difference in the amount of frazil 
formed; it will probably be that more or less anchor-ice will appear 
in proportion. In a river 40 or 50 feet deep anchor-ice is almost 
unknown, although large quantities of frazil are met with. 

Everything seems to point to radiation as the prime cause of 
anchor-ice, and it is a great question whether it would form at all, 
or except in exposed or exceedingly shallow rapids unless the first 
coating of ice was placed over the rocks by the radiation of heat. 

Consider the circumstances: the water flowing over the rocks at 
the bottom of a river is always very close to the freezing point. The 
deviations from the freezing point, as I have shown elsewhere 
in these Transactions (1896, 1897), are seldom as great as 1/100° 
Fahr. The bottom is continually being warmed to a small amount 
by the conduction of heat from the earth. It is therefore dif- 
ficult to see how ice can form on it by heat loss directly to 
the water. The utmost frost that can be present is only 1-100 of a 
degree, which would form but a minute layer. Unlike open ground 
subjected to extremely cold air, the bed of a river cannot become frozen 
to any extent unless in very shallow streams. 

The radiation of heat from the bed of a river must go on all the 
time to the colder air above and to the much colder space. During 
the daytime, under a clear sky, we have the sun’s heat radiated down 
through the water and offsetting the cooling effect produced by the 
space radiation, and on a cloudy day, we have the heat rays reflected 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 69 


beck again. On a clear night in winter, with little or no motion in 
the air, the circumstances are entirely conducive to excessive radiation. 
We know from what knowledge we have of the radiation from hot 
bodies that only a small proportion of the heat can penetrate a layer 
of water. Hence the heat of the sun is mostly absorbed in the first 
few feet of water. Only a small proportion of the rays ever reach 
the bottom. On the other hand, the radiation from the bottom is 
guite different and consists of long rays which we have every reason 
to believe penetrate the water much more easily. Jt might at first 
sight appear that there was a much larger amount of heat radiated 
into the river by the sun, whose temperature is so high, than is radiated 
out of the river into space. This is apparently quite true, and but 
for the absorption by the water of the greater part of the sun’s heat, 
and the consequent lessening of the heat which actually reaches the 
bottom, it is a question whether anchor-ice would ever form. Very 
little is known in regard to cold body radiation, and it is not impossible 
that little or no heat is absorbed by the water, if radiated from the 
bottom into space at the absolute zero. 

The influence of the sun is everywhere observed in the formation 
of both frazil and anchor-ice. In the former by warming the water 
and preventing it from becoming undercooled, and in the latter by 
loosening the masses of anchor-ice and causing them to rise. Frazil 
is never observed to have a bad effect under a strong sun. 

That portion of the heat from the sun, the long waves, that can 
penetrate the water, is effective in melting off the hold which the anchor- 
ice has on the bed of a river. A common sight in the early morning, 
after a cold, clear night, when the sun rises, is the appearance of 
masses of anchor-ice. These rise and float down with the current in 
great quantity. Boatmen are very careful when crossing a river never 
to go when these masses are rising, from the danger of being sur- 
rounded and caught in a mass of anchor-ice and carried down by the 
stream helpless into the rapids. 

If we sum up the various facts of common observation in 
connection with anchor-ice, we see that everything points to radiation 
as the prime cause. Thus we find that a bridge or cover prevents 
the ice forming underneath. Such a cover would act as a check to 
radiation and reflect the heat waves back again to the bottom. Anchor- 
ice rarely forms under a layer of surface ice. It forms on dark rocks 
more readily than light ones, which is in accord with what we know 
in regard to the more copious radiation of heat from dark surfaces. 
Anchor-ice never forms under a cloudy sky either by day or night, 
no matter how severe the weather, but it forms very rapidly under a 


70 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


clear sky at night. Anchor-ice is readily melted off under a bright 
sun. It seems highly probable then that radiation of heat supplies 
the necessary cooling to the bottom of a river to establish the first layers 
of ice, after which the growth or building up of the ice is aided by 
the entangling and freezing of frazil crystals always present in the 
water. 

The growth of anchor-ice is exceedingly beautiful, taking place 
in arborescent forms, resembling bushy weeds. So hard does it be- 
come and thick that it is often very difficult to thrust a sounding rod 
through it. It is very granular in structure, as is shown by an exam- 
ination of the masses which rise to the surface. Through clear water 
the ice looks weed-like, with long tentacles rising up out of the 
mass. It often has immense power in lifting rocks and boulders, 
and many of these are carried far down stream attached to irregular 
masses of ice. The spongy character of adhering frazil crystals and 
anchor-ice causes them to accumulate slime and infusorial growths from 
the water. A very characteristic colour of these masses is brown. 
When melted in a vessel the slime settles to the bottom, when it is 
seen to be of a very fine structure. 


APPENDIX. 
Some Earty MEMOIRS ON GROUND-ICE. 


During my search through the literature on natural ice formation 
it was my good fortune recently to discover four important and inter- 
esting papers written many years ago, at a time when scientists 
apparently first turned their attention to the formation of ice on 
the bottom of a river. I consider these papers are of such im- 
portance on account of the mass of observations they contain that 
1 reproduce them here in full by the kind permission of the 
Publication Committee of the Royal Society. The value of these 
papers will be at once apparent to anyone reading them, and the fact 
that they have remained practically unnoticed for upwards of seventy- 
five years renders them all the more interesting. I have never seen 
them referred to by modern writers on the subject of river-ice formation, 
and it was only by the merest chance that it was my good fortune to 
discover them. The volumes in which they appear, i.e., the Edinburgh 
New Philosophical Journal, and the early Transactions of the Royal 
Society of London, are now difficult to obtain, and in placing them on 
record here, I feel confident that our knowledge of the causes under- 
Iving the formation of anchor-ice will be vastly increased. 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 71 


ON THE GROUND-ICE OR THE PIECES OF FLOATING ICE OBSERVED IN 
RIVERS DURING WINTER. 


By M. ARAGo. 
From Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, Vol. 15, p. 123 (1833). 


The severe winter of 1829-30 has attracted the attention of natural 
philosophers to the phenomena of congelation in running waters. They 
have examined how, and in what manner, immense quantities of ice 
are formed which some rivers carry down to the sea, and which, on 
being piled up against the arches of a bridge, often cause fatal acci- 
dents. I confess that, in a theoretical point of view, the question 
does not yet seem, in my opinion, to be exhausted. Is it not a strong 
reason, then, for my presenting as complete an analysis as possible 
of the observations to which it has given rise? For want of a definite 
solution of so curious a problem, I shall at least have placed before 
the eyes of meteorologists a complete tabular view of all the data with 
which it is indispensable that the explanation shall agree. 

Every one knows that in a lake, a pond, in every sheet of stagnant 
water, congelation proceeds from the exterior to the interior. It is 
the upper part of the surface of the water which is primarily affected. 
The thickness of the ice afterwards increases in proceeding from above 
downwards. 

Is this the case with running waters? Natural philosophers are 
of this opinion. On the other hand, millers, fishermen, and watermen, 
maintain that the masses of ice with which rivers are crowded in the 
winter season, proceed from the bottom. They pretend that they have 
seen them rise, and have often borne them up with their hooks. They 
say, in order to strengthen their opinion, that the inferior surfaces 
of large flakes of ice are impregnated with mud; that it is encrusted 
with gravel; that, in short, it bears the most unequivocal marks of 
the ground on which it rested; that, in Germany, the sailors have a 
peculiar and characteristic term to designate floating ice which they 
call grundeis, i.e., ground-ice. Such arguments make little impression 
on prejudiced minds. It would require nothing less than the evidence 
of many experienced philosophers to cause a belief in the reality of a 
phenomenon which seems directly opposed to the laws of the propaga- 
tion of heat. But it is so. This evidence is not awanting; and if 
the phenomenon of ice in the bottom of water has only appeared 
recently as an established fact in treatises on physics and meteorology, 
the reason is, because their authors generally copy from each other, 


72 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


because everyone neglects what his predecessor neglected, and because 
academical collections, in which many treasures remain concealed, are 
very seldom consulted. 

In 1730, at an atmospherical temperature of —9° centigr. (15°.8 
Fahr.), Hales saw at Teddington, the surface of the Thames, near 
the banks, covered with a layer of ice one-third of an inch in thickness. 
There was also at the same time a second layer below, of greater 
thickness, which followed the depth of the river, as it adhered to the 
bottom. This sheet was united to the upper one even on the water- 
side; but it was gradually separated in proportion, as, in proceeding 
into the river, the 'depth of water increased. It was not so solid as 
the first, and was mixed with sand, and even stones, which the flakes 
sometimes carry with them in their movement upwards. 

This observation is defective, inasmuch as it was made too near 
the bank. Those who do not know how imperfectly every kind of 
soil transmits heat, might suppose that the cold was communicated 
from the dry ground of the bank to that which formed the bed of the 
river by means of conductibility. It is unnecessary to discuss this 
difficult point, as it has no connexion with many of the cases which 
are about to occupy our attention. 

It is really surprising that those writers who have lately con- 
sidered the subject of floating ice in a historical point of view, have 
not alluded to some observations which were made in France a good 
many years ago. ; 

At the close of December, 1780, the temperature was very suddenly 
decreased in the southern parts of France by a very strong northerly 
wind. The thermometer sunk to 8° or 7° centigr. below zero. 
Desmarest, member of the Academie des Sciences, who, at that time, 
happened to be at Annonay, saw the bed of the Dèome covered with 
spongy ice. The frost commenced at first on the margin of the river, 
where there was a depth of water to the extent of two or three feet. 
The cold continuing, the ice soon shewed itself in the deepest parts. 

In places where the water flowed over the bare rocks, Desmarest 
saw no vestige of ice. On the contrary, it was rapidly formed in 
great abundance, especially where there was any quantity of gravel; 
in some parts it was two feet thick. 

According to Desmarest, “it was from the lower part which 
touched the bottom, that the flakes of ice successively increased 
The ice already formed was continually raised up by the expansive 
force of that which was in the act of formation . . . . In watch- 
ing its motion, I have seen,” said he, “that certain flakes of the ice 
were raised up five or six inches in a single night. Some of them 


[BARNES] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 73 


were, in consequence of the daily and tolerably equal under-additions, 
believed to form, in this manner, islands of ice, which appeared above 
the running water.” 

No one has hitherto corroborated this mode of increase of ice under 
water. It is to be regretted that Desmarest did not explain the 
nature of the observation which induced him to come to such a singular 
result. Had he, for example, deposited on the flakes of the ice at 
the bottom objects which always remained visible, while, in rising, 
all the twenty-four hours, the flakes actually approached the surface 
of the water, it certainly would have been worth while giving an 
explanation. 

When, in consequence of a cloudy sky, the atmospherical tem- 
perature experiences little variation throughout the day and night, 
the ice at the bottom of the water, according to Desmarest, uniformly 
increases every twenty-four hours. On the contrary, when the sun 
shews itself, the ice does not increase during the day. The different 
layers which are produced during the night after an interval of five 
or six hours of repose, form distinct beds, which are easily disunited. 
The current then detaches each layer of ice from the lower one, to 
which it adheres but feebly, and the river begins to carry it along. 

M. Beaun, a bailiff at Weld Wilhelmsbourg, on the Elbe, pub- 
lished many dissertations in 1788, in which the existence of ice on 
the bottom of a river is established, either by his own observations or 
the unanimous declarations of fishermen, procured after a most anxious 
investigation. 

The fishermen asserted that, during the cold days in autumn, long 
before the appearance of ice on the surface of the river, the nets 
which were at the bottom of the water were covered with such a 
quantity of grundeis that they drew them up with great difficulty ; 
that the baskets which were used for catching eels also often on being 
brought to the surface were encrusted with ice; that anchors which 
had been lost during the summer again appeared in the following 
winter, being raised up by the ascending force of the ice at the bottom 
which had covered them; that this ice raised up the large stones to 
which the buoys were attached by chains, and occasioned the greatest 
inconvenience by displacing these useful signals, etc., etc. 

These various observations were confirmed by Beaun on his own 
authority. He says that he discovered, by means of experiment, that 
hemp, wool, hair, the boiled hair of horses, moss in particular and 
the bark of trees, are bodies, which, on being placed at the bottom of 
water, are very speedily covered with ice. He declares that various 
metals do not possess this property in the same degree. According ta 
him, tin occupies the first rank,— iron the last. 


74 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Mr. Knight, the celebrated botanist, has related an observation in 
the 106th volume of the Philosophical Transactions, which is the more 
valuable, as it seems in some respects to afford a clue to the secret of 
the formation of ice on the hottom of rivers. 

“Tn a morning which succeeded an intensely cold night, the stones 
in the rocky bed of the river appeared to be covered with frozen mat- 
ter, which reflected a kind of silvery whiteness, and which, upon 
examination, I found to consist of numerous frozen spicula crossing 
each other in every direction, as in snow, but not having anywhere, 
except very near the shore, assumed the state of firm compact ice. The 
river was not at this time frozen over in any part; but the temper- 
ature of the water was obviously at the freezing point, for small pieces 
of ice had everywhere formed upon it in its more stagnant parts near 
the shores; and upon a mill-pond, just abcve the shailow streams (in 
the bottom of which I had observed the ice), I noticed millions of 
little frozen spicula floating upon the water. At the end of this mill- 
pond the water fell over a low weir and entered a narrow channel, 
where its course was obstructed by points of rock and large stones. By 
these, numerous eddies and gyrations were occasioned, which apparently 
drew the floating spicula under water; and I found the frozen matter 
to accumulate much more abundantly upon such parts of the stones 
as stood opposed to the current, where that was not very rapid below 
the little falls or very rapid parts of the river. I have reason to 
believe that it would have accumulated in very large quantities if the 
weather had continued sufficiently cold; for I had been informed on 
good evidence, that, some years before, the whole bed of the river 
in the part above mentioned had been covered over with a thick coat 
of ice. 

“On some large stones near the shore, of which parts were out 
of the water, and upon pieces of native rock, under similar circum- 
stances, the ice beneath the water had acquired a firmer texture, but 
appeared from its whiteness to have been first formed of congregated 
spicula, and to have subsequently frozen into a firm mass, owing to 
the lower extremity of the stone or rock. Ice of this kind extended 
in a few places eighteen inches from the shore, and lay three or four 
inches below the level of the surface of the water, and did not dis- 
solve so rapidly as that which was deposited upon stones more distant 
from the shores.” 

In the 11th of February, 1816, the engineers of bridges and roads 
residing at Strasburg, saw above the bridge of Kehl that many parts 
of the channel of the Rhine were covered with ice. About ten o’clock 
a.m. this ice became loose, rose to the surface, and floated. 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 75 


The thermometer in the open air stood at —12° centigr. 
The water in the river at every depth was at zero cent. The ice at 
the bottom was only formed in places, however, where there were stones 
and angular stuff. It was spongy, and\ formed of icy spicula. 

The overseers of the bridge stated that it never appeared on the 
surface until after 10 or 11 o’clock in the morning. 

The canal of Saint-Alban conveys the waters of the Birse through 
the town of Bale. It is very limpid and flows with great rapidity. 
During the winter of 1823, Professor Merian carefully examined the 
bed of the canal, which, in general, is covered with pebbles, and saw 
that wherever the bottom exhibited any projection, there was a small 
piece of ice, which might have been supposed, at a distance, to be a 
reuniting of tufts of cotton. This ice became disengaged from the 
bottom from time to time, and floated on the surface. It had all 
the appearance of the grund-eis of the German watermen. 

M. Hugi, president of the Société d’Histoire Naturelle de Soleure, 
is the philosopher who, in my opinion, has seen the phenomenon of the 
formation of ice at the bottom of water displayed on the greatest scale. 
His first observations were made in 1827. 

From the 2nd to the 3rd February of that year, the river Aar, 
at Soleure, was breaking up the ice; on the 15th it was completely 
open. It flowed slowly on the 16th, and the water was perfectly pure. 
On this day, in consequence of a westerly wind, a multitude of large 
icy tables were continually rising from the bottom about 60 or 70 
feet below the bridge, and over a surface of upwards of 450 square 
feet. I ought to add, as this circumstance confirms what Hales was 
told by the fishermen of the Thames, that the great proportion of the 
flakes of ice mounted vertically, till 5 or 6 decimetres above the sur- 
face of the water, and after remaining a few minutes in this position, 
they sunk down, and floated horizontally. 

After a certain time, the flakes of ice became more scarce; but 
they had increased to such an extent, that many, though almost vertically 
raised ahove the water, still rested in the bed of the river on one of 
their sides, and in which position they remained stationary for a long 
time. The phenomenon lasted for about a couple of hours. 

Below the bridge, the Aar flows with rapidity over an inclined 
channel of 20 to 30 degrees, and in many places is quite stony. Be- 
yond the place where the flakes of ice arose, the water, already more 
tranquil, always exhibited a sort of eddy. 

The temperature of the air was —5°.7 centig.; near the water 
—4°.9; close to the surface of the river, +2°.1. The water near the 
arches, where there was no ice, was at +3°.0; at the bottom, where 
ice ascended, 0°.0. 


76 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


There is one circumstance which lessens the importance of these 
observations as to the temperature; it is not established that the ice 
at the bottom of the river on the 16th February was formed on that 
day, and these ices might again cover the bed of the river for many 
days afterwards. 

The second series of the observations of M. Hugi were made in 
the month of February, 1829. 

On the 11th of this month, the Aar near Soleure was quite free 
from ice. For many days the temperature of the atmosphere was 
from +4° to +6° centigr. During the night of the 11th-12th, it 
suddenly fell to —14° centigr. In the 12th at sunrise, the river 
began to exhibit numerous floating pieces of ice. We must by no 
means omit to add, that the water, either near the banks, or in the 
shady places where it was perfectly calm, as yet bore no trace of con- 
gelation on its surface. It, therefore could not be said that the float- 
ing masses were detached from the banks. It would have been as 
unfounded to have supposed that they had proceeded from any large 
sheet of ice situated farther up the river, as at Altrey, a league and 
2 half ahove Soleure, the river hardly exhibited any ice. Besides, 
flakes of ice commenced soon to rise up above the bridge, in the place 
where they had been seen in 1827. Towards mid-day, islands of ice 
were seen forming in the centre of the river. On the 13th February 
these were 23 in number. The largest was upwards of 200 feet in 
diameter. They were surrounded with open water, resisted a current 
which almost ran at a rate of 200 feet in a minute, and extended 
over a space of one-eighth of a league. M. Hugi visited them in a 
small boat. He landed, examined them in every direction, and dis- 
covered that there was a layer of compact ice on their surface of 5 
or 10 centimetres in thickness, resting on a mass having the shape of 
a cone reversed, of a vertical height of 3 or 4 metres, and fixed to 
the bottom of the bed’ of the river. These cones consisted of half- 
melted ice, gelatinous, and very like the spawn of a frog. It was softer 
at the bottom than at the top, and was easily pierced in all directions 
with poles. Exposed to the open air, the substance of the cones 
became quickly granulated like the ice that is formed at the bottom of 
rivers. 

When these observations were being made, the temperature of the 
air, at 9 metres above the Aar, was, —11°.2 centigr.; at 1™.3, —9°.4. 
That of the water, at 5 centimetres deep, 0°.0; at 1™.8, + 1°.0; at 
0™.5 from the bottom, +1°.5; at the bottom, +2°.4; at 1™. in the 
ground, +8°.0. 

These determinations of the temperature of the water were obtained 
in a part of the river which had no ice at the bottom. 


[BARNES] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION Tt 


M. Fargeau, a distinguished professor of natural philosophy in 
Strasbourgh, has made some observations on the Rhine, which have been 
communicated to the Academy. Notwithstanding what we have read, 
they are very deserving of notice. 

On the 25th of January, 1829, at 7 o’clock a.m., the temperature 
of the air, near the bridge at Kehl, was at 13°.71 centigr. At the 
same moment, in that part of the Rhine which, owing to the situation 
of its sand-banks, formed, on the French side, a sort of lake without cur- 
rents, the water of which was at zero, but at the depth of 2/2 [?] metre 
it was +4°.4 This place had only a few plates of ice near the banks. 

Beyond the banks of sand, in a little creek where the shallow 
water was contiguous to a very rapid current, all the pebbles seemed 
covered with a sort of transparent mass of from 3 to 4 centimetres in 
thickness, and which, on examination, was found to consist of icy 
spicula crossing each other in every directÿon. In this creek the ther- 
mometer stood at zero cent. both at the surface and at the bottom of 
the water. It was the same even in the most rapid part of the cur- 
rent. There was also seen, either in the channel of the Rhine, or on 
some pieces of wood on the side opposite to the current, at a depth 
of 2 metres, large masses of spongy ice, into which the pole of a water- 
man entered with ease. This ice, on being borne to the surface of 
the water, was found closely to resemble the innumerable flakes which 
were at that time floating on the surface. M. Fargeau states, that 
he saw ice on many occasions with his own eyes, in the greater Rhine, 
separate from the bottom, and rise to the surface. 

M. Fargeau has added an important observation to his own 
remarks, which was communicated to him, and from whence the result 
is derived, that the nature of the bed of the river has the same influ- 
ence on the phenomena of congelation in small and in large currents 
of water. In the Vosges, a superintendent of forges, informed him, 
that, to prevent the formation of ice at the bottom of the rivulet which 
supplied his establishment, he was obliged once a year to remove the 
stones and other foreign bodies with which the channel became acci- 
centally covered. 

In the beginning of February, 1830, M. Duhamel, on breaking the 
ice which covered the surface of the Seine, a short way below the 
bridge at Grenelle, about 10 feet from the banks, found a layer of 
continuous ice 4 centimetres thick. He even procured many frag- 
ments. At this spot the water was upwards of one yard deep. Att 
every depth the thermometer stood at zero centigr. The current was 
tolerably rapid. 

The expériment of M. Duhamel had this defect, like that of Hales 
formerly mentioned, of having been made too close to the bank. I 


78 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


could not, however, omit quoting it, as I am not aware of any observ- 
ation to be found elsewhere by a man of science respecting the con- 
gelation at the bottom of the Seine. 

It has been mentioned already, that natural philosophers did not 
believe in the formation of floating ice at the bottom of water; they 
ought, therefore, not to expect that any thing very important will 
be found in the sketch I am about to present of the theoretical specu- 
lations to which this theory has given rise. 

Sailors for the most part believe that the flakes of ice are formed 
at night on the bottom of rivers, by the action of the moon, and that 
it is the sun which attracts them to the surface on the following day. 
Popular prejudices are generally grounded on some imperfect observ- 
ation. By recollecting what we said concerning the red moon we shall 
easily discover how the strange notion of which I have spoken arose. 

The theory of the sailors was not succeeded by an explication in 
any degree better. It was said that heat arises from the rapid move- 
ment of the parts of bodies. The running water flows less rapidly 
at the bottom than at the top, the maximum of temperature is, of 
course, found at the surface; it is at the bottom, where there is the 
least agitation, that the congelation ought to begin. To complete this 
theory, the ascension of the flakes of ice was attributed to the elas- 
ticity which the air dissolved in the water resumes when it disengages 
itself during the process of congelation, and to the formation, in the 
midst of the icy mass, of bubbles of considerable size. 

In 1742, when this strange theory saw the light (Observations sur 
les Ecrits modernes, t. xxxi.), the thermometer was in the hand of 
every person, and, of course, it could have been easily ascertained that, 
during a hard frost, river water is in general colder at the surface 
than at the bottom. But, as Montaigne says, even in the facts which 
are laid before them, men willingly amuse themselves in seeking for 
reasons rather than truth; they abandon things and fly to causes. 

To reconcile the theoretical objection which Nollet has made to 
the popular opinion respecting ice at the bottom of water, with the 
observations which incontestibly establish that the greater part of the 
flakes which have been broken up have been immersed for a longer or 
shorter period, and that their inferior surface rests on a muddy bottom, 
it has been thought that the origin will be found in the small streams 
which run into large rivers. There, it is said, the water being shallow, 
the ice should soon find itself in contact with the ground or mud 
with which the bed is covered. As: to the flakes. of ice which rise 
beneath the water, which sailors bring up with their hooks from a 
depth of some ‘eet, their existence is explained by remarking that, 
after a sharp frost followed by the commencement of a thaw, there 


[BARNES] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 79 


is sometimes a great increase, to which a new frost succeeds, so that 
there is in the river, but especially near the banks, two layers of ice 
superimposed at a distance; the one at the height of the first level of 
the water, the other at the height which this level has attained on the 
rise of the water. This theory, which refers to a peculiar case, does 
not explain, in any point of view, the observations just made, and in 
which natural philosophers have actually seen ice formed on the surface 
of pebbles placed at the bottom of the water in the beds of certain 
Tivers. 

We now come to Mr. McKeever, who, confining himself closely to 
the most subtle principles of the theory of heat, has not, on this account, 
been more fortunate than his predecessors. 

- According to this author, the rocks, stones, and gravel which gen- 
erally cover the bottom of rivers, have powers of radiation superior to 
those of mud, perhaps on account of their peculiar nature, but chiefly 
because they have rough surfaces. Thus rocks, in large or small masses, 
will become much cooler in consequence of radiation: when the atmos- 
pherical temperature is very low, they will, of course, freeze the water 
which touches them. 

It is unnecessary to examine here, whether heat radiates through 
a.thick layer of water, as Mr. McKeever supposes, as the most simple 
observation is sufficient to overthrow it. 

Where is the person who has not observed, that the strong radiation 
which the Irish philosopher admits, would be more plainly manifested, 
or as completely, in still water than in running water; but no one 
has seen a piece of still water frozen at the bottom? 

Let us throw aside all these absurd explanations, and, for want 
of better, analyze perspicuously the physical condition of the question. 

If liquids of different densities are thrown into a vessel, the heavy 
will sink to the bottom, the light keep at the top. 

This principle of hydrostatics is general. It applies as well to 
liquids possessing different chemical properties, as to portion of one and 
the same liquid whose densities are dissimilar, in consequence of inequal- 
ities in the temperature. 

Liquids, like all other bodies, solid or gaseous, increase in density 
as their temperature diminishes. 

Water alone, in a certain small extent of the thermometric scale, 
presents a singular exception to this rule. Suppose water is taken at 
10° centigr. and gradually cooled, at 9° we shall find it denser 
than at 10°, at 8° more than 9°, at 7° more than 8°, and so on 
till 4° ; at this point condensation [?] will cease. In going from 4° to 
2°, for example, there is a manifest diminution of density. This dim- 


80 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


inution will go on till the temperature falls from 3 to 2, from 2 to 1, — 
and from 1 to zero. To conclude, water has a maximum of density, 
which does not coincide with its term of congelation. At 4° above 
zero is the maximum of density. 

There is nothing so simple as to point out in what manner the 
congelation of stagnant water takes place. 

Let us suppose, as is always the case, that at the moment when 
the wind blowing from the north produces ice, the water throughout 
te be at +10°. The cooling of the liquid, by coming in contact with 
the glacial air, will be affected from the exterior to the interior. The 
surface which, hypothetically speaking, was at 10° will soon be at 9°; 
but at 9° the water will possess more density that at 10°; then, in 
censequence of the principle of hydrostatics formerly mentioned, it 
will sink to the bottom of the mass, and be replaced by a layer not 
yet cooled, whose temperature is 10°. That, in its turn, will be 
affected like the first layer, and so on of the rest. In a greater or 
less time the whole mass will then be at +9°. 

Water at +9° will become cool in the same way as at 10° by 
consecutive layers. Each in its turn, on coming to the surface, will 
lose one degree of temperature. The same phenomenon will reappear, 
with similar circumstances, at 8°, 7°, 6°, and 5°; but, on sinking 
to 4°, every thing will be changed. 

At +4° (39°.2 Fahr.) water will actually reach its maximum 
of density. Should the action of the atmosphere take away a degree 
of heat from the superficial layer, or descend to 3°, the layer will be 
less dense than the portion of fluid which it covers; it will never sink 
into it. An additional diminution in the heat will not cause it to 
sink more, as water at +2° is lighter than at +3°, etc. 

It is quite obvious, however, that the layer in question, by remain- 
ing always on the surface, incessantly exposed to the cooling influence 
of the atmosphere, will at length lose the first 4° of its heat. It will 
end by falling to zero, and freezing. 

The superficial sheet of ice, however singular the phenomenon may 
be, is then found resting on a liquid mass, whose temperature, at least 
at the bottom, is 4° above zero. 

The congelation of stagnant water could not evidently take place 
in any other manner. I repeat, that no person has ever seen the 
formation of ice beginning at the bottom of a lake or pond. 

Let us briefly examine the modifications which the motion of the 
liquid should produce. 

The effect of this motion, when it is rather rapid, when it forms 
eddies, and flows over a rocky or unequal channel, is perpetually to 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 81 


mix all the layers. The hydrostatic order on which we have insisted 
so much is overthrown. The water, then, which is lightest does not 
always float on the surface. ‘The currents are precipitated into the 
general mass, which is thereby cooled, and whose temperature soon 
becomes equal throughout. 

To repeat, im a deep mass of stagnant water, the temperature of 
the bottom can never descend below + 4° cent. When this mass is in 
a state of agitation, the surface, the middle, and the bottom, may be 
found at zero simultaneously. 

We have only now to examine, why, when this uniformity of tem- 
perature exists, and when the entire liquid mass is at zero, that con- 
gelation commences at the bottom, and not at the surface. 

But where is the person who does not know, that to produce a 
speedy formation of crystals in a saline solution, it is merely necessary 
to introduce a pointed body, or an unequal surface into it; that it is 
around the asperities of such a body that crystals originate and are 
promptly increased? Be it so, every one may be assured that this is 
the case with crystals of ice; that if the mud in which the congelation 
eccurs presents a rent or projection, or solution of continuity of any 
kind, it will become as so many centres, around which the filaments of 
frozen water will prefer to arrange themselves. 

But is not what we have said exactly the history of the freezing 
of rivers? This cannot be doubted, if we recollect, that it never takes 
place in the channel, unless where there are rocks, stones, pebbles, 
pieces of wood, herbs, ete. 

There is another circumstance which seems to have a certain share 
in this phenomenon, viz., the motion of the water. At the surface 
this motion is very rapid and irregular; it ought, of course, to put a 
stop to the symmetrical grouping of needles; to that polar arrangement 
without which crystals, whatever be their nature, can neither acquire 
regularity of form, nor solidity; it should, of course, frequently break 
the crystalline groups, even in their rudimentary state. 

This motion, which is the principal obstacle to crystallization, 
if it exists at the bottom as well as the surface of the water, is at least 
greatly diminished at the former. It may be supposed, therefore, 
that its action will merely oppose the formation of regular or com- 
pact ice, but will not eventually prevent a multitude of little filaments 
becoming irregularly blended, and thus produce that kind of spongy 
ice through which M. Hugi so easily drove the oars of his boat. 

Having proceeded thus far, the reader may ask why I did not 
present what preceded, as a complete explanation of the formation of 


Sec. IIT., 1906. 6 


82 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


the grund-eis of Germany, of the glaces de fond of our sailors. This 
is my answer: 

We have no observations which prove that this kind of ice is seen, 
until the temperature of the whole of the water is at zero. It is 
not certain that the little icy particles floating on the water, mentioned 
by Mr. Knight, and which may have acquired, by coming into contact 
with the air, at least on their upper surface, a temperature considerably 
below zero, do not play an important part in this phenomenon, which 
T have entirely overlooked; that, viz., of cooling the stones covering 
the bed of the river, when dragged thither by currents. Is it not 
possible that these floating filaments were the principal elements of 
the spongy ice which was afterwards to be formed? 

Our theory does not explain in what manner this ice, once formed, 
only increases in a downward direction. If the remark of Desmarest 
be correct, there is something wanting to complete it. 

During the congelation of the bottom of the Aar, at the place 
where the ice is formed, M. Hugi immersed pitchers filled with hot 
and cold water. The first, he says, on being brought up, was covered 
with a layer of ice of one inch thick, the other had no marks of con- 
gelation. Bullets covered with cloth, warm as well as cold, afforded 
similar results. 

These remarkable experiments cannot be kept out of view. They 
ought to be repeated in a variety of ways: we should be sure whether 
these two bodies, on being immersed, do not differ but in temperature; 
that their surfaces are equally polished; and if, after all the minute 
precautions with which an able philosopher is sure to avail himself, 
it be found that the body, originaily hot at the moment of immersion, 
is covered, as we are assured by M. Hugi, with more ice than the cold 
one, it will, perhaps, be necessary to attribute this singular phenomenon 
to the internal movement of the liquid; to currents which, being caused 
at first by the presence of a hot body, still continued after it became 
cold; to currents which incessantly continued to throw over this cold 
body filaments frozen on the surface. 

Before coming to the conclusion, that the question which we have 
been discussing is completely solved, it would be necessary to subject 
the texture of the ices at the bottom to additional experiments; we 
must ascertain accurately whether the vesicular cavities, which tra- 
verse it in every direction, contain any air,—or if they are completely 
empty,—for this circumstance is very necessary, in order to enlighten 
us as to the place where they originate. 

I am expatiating, however, beyond my plan. I at first merely 
wished to examine, whether the floating ice was produced at the bottom 


[BARNES] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 83 


or the surface of a river. This question can no longer be doubted. 
The theory is far from being so far advanced. I have pointed out 
the chasms which it still exhibits. If the recital of these cases can in 
any way contribute towards their being speedily filled up, I shall be 
amply recompensed for my trouble. 


OBSERVATIONS ON GROUND-ICE. 
By the Rev. Mr. EISDALE. 


(Read before the Philosophical Society at Perth, on the 28th December, 
1831, and published in the Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, 
Mol An 164 (18345) 


On the 28th of December, 1831, I read a paper at the meeting 
of this Society, directing the attention of the members to a particular 
kind of ice, which seems to be formed in direct opposition to the ordin- 
ary laws of congelation. The ice to which I allude commences at the 
bottom of the water, and extends upwards to the surface, and it is 
produced only in the most rapid and most rugged streams. This 
is exactly the reverse of the usual process of congelation, which takes 
place in stagnant water, commencing at the sides of the river or pond, 
and gradually extending over the surface; when it thickens downwards 
towards the bottom, and if the frost is sufficiently intense, converts 
the whole water into a solid mass of ice. The phenomenon did not 
seem to have attracted any attention in this quarter; and the facts 
which I stated, and the speculations which I advanced, seemed to 
- excite some surprise: the ice in question, however, is perfectly familiar 
to every person in the country, though I never had seen any attempt 
to account for its formation, and had long puzzled myself in vain to 
form any plausible theory on the subject. I was not ashamed to 
confess this at the time, and I expressly declared that the theory which 
I proposed was intended to elicit, rather than impart, information, and 
especially to direct attention to the alleged facts which had been com- 
municated to me, and on which I founded my explanation of the process. 

This kind of ice is well known in all northern climates, from its 
annoying effects in obstructing all works which are carried on by the 
impelling power of water. When ice collects on the surface of mill- 
leads it is easily managed; it needs only to be broken and floated 
down the stream; but when the ice of which I am speaking forms, 
the case is perfectly hopeless; the leads are gorged up from the very 
bottom, and it is in vain to attempt to remove the obstruction. This 
kind of ice is called in Germany grund eis; in France it is known 


84 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


by the name of glace de fond; and in the south of Scotland it is called 
lappered ice, an epithet which the common people apply to the natural 
congelation of milk. I am happy, however, that the phenomenon has 
now attracted the attention of some eminent philosophers, particularly 
of the celebrated Arago in France, who has been at great pains in 
collecting a variety jof facts, and has proposed a theory for the explan- 
ation of the appearance, which I shall shew to be utterly inadequate 
for the purpose; and which, with the modesty that characterizes genuine 
philosophy, he admits does not thoroughly satisfy himself. 

I beg leave to call the attention of the meeting, for a moment, 
to the phenomenon itself. Every inhabitant of Perth who has wit- 
nessed the setting in of a severe frost, must have observed that before 
the true ice, as I may call it, has made much progress in advancing 
from the sides to the centre of the river, nearly the whole body of 
the stream above the bridge is occupied by large irregular masses of 
floating ice of very considerable thickness, far beyond any thing that 
could be effected by the natural operation of the frost in surface freez- 
es. I believe it has seldom occurred to any observer to inquire how 
these masses of amorphous ice were formed; they all come down the 
river from a great distance; and being stopped, at last, by the flow 
of the tide, and. closely compacted together, they are agglutinated by 
the frost, and present great obstacles to navigation. Now these masses 
are precisely the ice in question; they are formed in the most rugged 
currents, adhering to the projecting rocks and rough inequalities at 
the bottom, and increasing upwards, till their bulk and smaller specific 
gravity as compared with water, enable the stream to tear them from 
their fastenings, and hurry them down the river. 

T shall mention a few of the facts which M. Arago has collected 
on this subject, and it is curious enough to observe from this statement 
that, what is perfectly well known to every peasant, is still called in 
question by the majority of the natural philosophers of France; they 
deny the existence of ground-ice. 

M. Beaun, in 1788, wrote several dissertations chiefly to establish 
the existence of ground-ice, from observations made by himself and 
by the fishermen on the Elbe. He informs us, that the latter declared 
that the baskets which they let down into the river, for the purpose 
of catching eels, were often when brought to the surface, incrusted 
with ice; that the anchors used for mooring their boats when lost 
during the summer, again appeared in the following winter, being 


1G 


raised by the ascending force of the ice at the bottom, with which 


they had been covered to such an extent as to render them buoyant; 
and that this ground-ice often raised up the large stones to which the 


Le 
re 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 85 


buoys were fastened by chains, and caused the greatest inconvenience 
hy displacing these useful signals. 

Desmarest, a member of the French Academy of Sciences, was 
among the first who made observations on the formation of ground- 
ice: but he advances no theory on the subject. He says he had seen 
fiakes of ice formed at the bottom of running streams, increasing to 
the thickness of five or six inches in a single night. A more extra- 
ordinary fact than this was communicated to myself about two years 
ago, when my first paper was announced in the newspapers. A miller, 
in the western part of the country, wrote me a letter containing a 
theory of his own, ascribing the phenomenon to the prevalence of par- 
ticular winds; in confirmation of which he mentioned, that during a 
severe frost, when his mill-lead was entirely free of any kind of ice, 
he had occasion one day to lop some branches from a tree which over- 
hung the lead; one of them fell into the water and was left there, 
as he did not apprehend any consequences from such a trifling occur- 
rence. Next day, however, to his astonishment, the water was turned 
entirely out of the lead, and had overflowed a large portion of an 
adjoining meadow. On proceeding to ascertain the cause, he found 
that a solid barrier of ice had been formed across the lead where the 
branch had fallen in, so as completely to prevent any water from pass- 
ing, whilst the rest of the lead was free from ice. He ascribes this 
to the prevalence of a very sharp northeast wind which had blown 
during the night. There can be no doubt that this is converting into 
a cause, what is merely an accidental concomitant, as I shall shew 
hereafter. 

On the 16th February, 1827, M. Hugi, president of the Society 
of Natural History at Soleure, while standing on the bridge of the 
Aar, and when the river was perfectly clear of ice, observed in these 
circumstances, large icy tables continually rising from the bottom of 
the river, in a vertical direction, and with such buoyancy, as to rise 
considerably above the surface, when they immediately sunk into a 
horizontal position, and floated down the stream. <A great many facts 
of the same kind may be found in M. Arago’s paper, which is given 
in the Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal for July last; which is 
the first paper on the subject of ground-ice that I have ever seen. 

Let us now attend for a little to the cause of these singular phen- 
omena, and I will be bold to say that no adequate cause has yet been 
assigned for them; unless the hints which I formerly threw out on 
the subject as queries, rather than as ascertained facts, shall be considered 
sufficient for the purpose. M. Arago gives his theory as to the cause at 
great length. It is simply this, that the different strata of water, in a 


86 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


running and shallow stream, being all mixed together by the agitation 
caused by the inequalities of the bottom, are all cooled down during 
an intense frost to the freezing point, and that the stones there form 
proper points of attachment to facilitate the formation of icy crystals. 
This is, in fact, the same answer that was given to my theory, in 
some of the newspapers, two years ago; but it is altogether inadequate, 
for this plain reason, that, according to it, the phenomena of ground- 
ice ought to appear in every hard frost, when the water reaches the 
requisite temperature. But so far is this from being the case, that 
in the hardest frosts which we have ever seen, not a particle of ground- 
ice was found in the river. Take, for instance, the very severe frost 
of 1813-14, when the Tay was frozen over for many weeks, yet no 
ground-ice was to be seen. Some gentlemen present may remember 
to have skated down the stream and through below the arches of the 
bridge, whilst the ice everywhere was as clear as crystal, and the bed 
of the stream entirely free from the white spongy ground-ice. 

Some now present will probably recollect that the theory which 
T proposed, as a solution of these phenomena, was founded on inform- 
ation which I had received from country people and others, whose 
operations depended on water-wheels, and whose interests forced them 
to attend to appearances, which might pass unheeded by others. The 
sum of their information was, that the ground-ice was never formed 
but after a heavy rione, or hoar-frost. If this is the fact, the explan- 
ation is obvious. The hoar-frost, which is congealed moisture, preci- 
pitated from the atmosphere, and falling into the river when the water 
is cooled down to the freezing-point, cannot be dissolved. It retains 
in the water the very shape in which it descends from the air. When 
these small crystals fall on a deep unfrozen pool, the water being 
above the freezing-point, the particles melt and are incorporated with 
the water; but in the shallow and agitated stream, almost the whole 
water is brought in succession, into contact with the intense frost, and 
may thus be cooled down to the freezing-point to the very bottom of 
the stream, before even a pellicle of ice is formed on the stagnant pool. 
All the particles of hoar-frost, then, or frozen vapour which fall on 
such a stream will remain unmelted; and being tossed in all directions 
by the agitations of the current, will be brought into contact with the 
rocks, or other substances projecting from the bottom, to which they 
will readily adhere, and form a nucleus for that strange accumulation 
calledy ground-ice, which is found nowhere but in streams. 

I would not have brought forward this theory a second time, 
bad I not met with some facts collected by M. Arago, which afford 
the strongest confirmation of the theory which I had advanced, though 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 87 


he himself scarcely seems to have had a glimpse of their importance. 
He mentions an observation by Desmarest, that in a cloudy sky the 
eround-ice accumulates uniformly, but is interrupted when the sun 
shines. Now, what he calls a cloudy sky I conceive to be an atmos- 
phere loaded with hoar-frost, and rendered hazy by its condensation ; 
for I do not think it possible that a genwine cloud can exist in the 
atmosphere during a keen frost. Here, then, this observer furnishes 
a fact in perfect accordance with the information on which I proceeded, 
viz., that the ground-ice is formed only during a hazy state of the 
atmosphere, in other words, during a hoar-frost; whilst he tells us 
that the process was interrupted when the sky was clear. 

But M. Arago quotes a passage from a paper of Mr. Knight, the 
celebrated botanist, in the 106th vol. of the Phil. Trans., which brings 
the matter nearer, if not altogether, to a demonstration, though Mr. 
Knight himself proposes no theory. The passage is as follows:—“ In 
a morning which succeeded an intensely cold night, the stones in the 
rocky bed of the river appeared to be covered with frozen matter, which 
reflected a thread of silvery whiteness, and which, upon examination, 
1 found to consist of numerous frozen spicula crossing each other in 
every direction, as in snow, but not having anywhere, except near the 
shore, assumed the state of firm compact ice. The river was not at 
this time frozen over in any part, but the temperature of the water 
was obviously at the freezing-point, for small pieces of ice had every- 
where formed upon it in its more stagnant parts near the shore; and 
upon a mill-pond, just above the shallow streams, in the bottom of 
which I had noticed millions of little frozen spicula floating upon the 
water. At the end of this mill-pond, the water fell over a low weir, 
and entered a narrow channel, where its course was obstructed by points 
of rock and large stones. By these, numerous eddies and gyrations 
were occasioned, which apparently drew the floating spicula under water; 
and I found the frozen matter to accumulate much more abundantly 
upon such parts of the stones as stood most opposed to the current 
(where that was not very rapid), below the little falls, or very rapid 
parts of the river.” 

These are by far the most important observations that have been 
made on the subject of ground-ice. M. Arago is so much struck by 
them, that, after having concluded his own theory, he says, “It is not 
certain that the little particles, mentioned by Mr. Knight, do not play 
an important part in this phenomenon, which I have entirely over- 
looked.” I verily believe they do; only one element is wanting in 
the catalogue of Mr. Knight’s observations to decide my opinion, and 
that is, the state of the atmosphere during the preceding night. I 


88 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


am persuaded that it had been loaded with hoar-frost, and its precipita- 
tion into the river formed the floating spicula which he observed; they 
could have no other origin; and their being brought into contact with 
the stones by the gyrations of the stream, is exactly what I had given 
two years ago as the theory of the formation of ground-ice, by the 
congelation and precipitation of the moisture of the atmosphere. 

It is always delightful to explore the mysteries of nature, and 
the Author of our being has provided in such researches unbounded 
exercise for the highest powers of our understanding and reason. Even 
brute matter gives us some idea of the immensity of its Creator; for 
notwithstanding the immense strides that have been made in inves- 
tigating the properties of matter, we may be said to be at this moment 
only on the threshold of science, and future generations, if the mind 
goes on to improve, will look back on our most profound researches 
merely as forming the rude elements of that more perfect knowledge 
which they will have reached. Perhaps much remains to be known 
even with regard to the common phenomena to which I have this day 
directed the attention of this meeting; and, although I think we have 
nearly reached the solution of our problem in the process of freezing, 
yet that you may not think the mysteries of congelation exhausted, I 
conclude with mentioning a fact, which the illustrious Frenchman, 
whom I have so often quoted, leaves without even attempting an explan- 
ation. “ During the congelation of the bottom of the Aar, M. Hugi 
immersed pitchers filled with hot and cold water; the first, on being 
brought up, was covered with a layer of ice one inch thick; the other 
had no marks of congelation. Bullets covered with cloth, warm as 
well as cold, afforded similar results.” 


On THE IcE FORMED, UNDER PECULIAR CIRCUMSTANCES AT THE 
Bottom or RUNNING WATER. 


By the Rev. JAMES FARQUHARSON, of Alford, F.R.S. 
From Philosophical Transactions, Vol. 125, p. 829 (1835). 


Ice formed at the bottom of rivers and streams, frequently in 
great quantities, is a phenomenon quite common in this climate. I 
made for several years past a number of incidental and desultory 
observations upon it, and became convinced that the principal explan- 
ation of its occurrence is the radiation of heat from the solid opake 
materials of the bottom; but as I conceived this to be also the gen- 
erally admitted one, I took no note of the observations, with the view 
of vindicating the theory of the radiation. It appears, however, from 


- 


| BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 89 


a paper of M. Arago upon the subject, translated and published in the 
Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, vol. xv, p. 123, from the Annu- 
aire for the year 1833, that he entirely rejects the theory of the radia- 
tion of heat through a thick layer of water. In the same paper, 
although he does not, in conclusion, pretend to give a complete explan- 
ation of the phenomenon, he brings forward, as explanations in part, 
three circumstances, which, although accurately stated by him, appear 
to be not exclusively appropriate to ice formed at the bottom, and 
cannot therefore aid us in solving the main question which we have 
te discuss here, which I apprehend to be, Why is ice formed sometimes 
on the surface of running water, and sometimes at the bottom? 

On reading M. Arago’s paper, J became desirous of offering some 
remarks in answer to it, as without some one doing this, on proper 
data, a misapprehension concerning the cause of a natural phenomenon, 
so much at variance with our most frequent experience of the formation 
of ice only on the surface of all waters, as to have often greatly excited 
the attention and even called forth the astonishment of scientific men, 
would continue to be propagated under the authority of a distinguished 
name. Having, however, no record of my former observations to enable 
me to refer accurately to the time, place, and other circumstances of 
them, I delayed till a renewed occurrence of ice on the bottoms of 
our streams should enable me to repeat them. 

Such an occurrence, on a great scale, took place in the beginning 
of this month of January (1835); and I now have the honour of pre- 
senting to the notice of the Royal Society a brief account of the 
observations I have been enabled to make, and of the conclusions to 
which they appear to direct us. 

Previously to entering on this detail and discussion, it seems 
proper to describe the appearance and quality of the ice formed at 
the bottoms of streams. A misapprehension regarding these may have 
been one cause of the incredulity of its existence, entertained by some 
persons who have never witnessed it, and which M. Arago, in the paper 
referred to, has deemed it necessary to remove, by bringing forward the 
testimony of many distinguished men to its reality. 

The ice formed at the bottom does not resemble the solid glass- 
like plates which are formed on the surface. It has nearlv the aspect 
of the aggregated masses of snow as they are seen floating in rivers 
during a heavy snow shower; but, on taking it out of the water, it 
is found to be of a much firmer consistence than these, although never 
approaching to the firmness and solidity of surface ice. It is a cav- 
ernous mass of various-sized, but all small, pieces or crystals of ice, 
adhering together in an apparently irregular manner by their sides, 


90 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


or angles, or points, promisczously. Both the firmness of the adhesion 
and the dimensions of the interstices (the latter filled with water, and 
their volume easily estimated by the quantity of it which is discharged 
when the ice is lifted out of the stream), are, however, greatly modified 
by the intensity and continuance of the previous cold. When the 
ice begins first to form on the bottoms of the streams, it presents a 
rudely symmetrical appearance, which, for illustration, may be com- 
pared to little hearts of cauliflowers, fixed on the bottom, having a 
similar uniform circular outline and protuberance in the centre, with 
coral-like projections. These pieces have a shining silvery aspect; 
they are dispersed, at first irregularly, in small numbers, but increase 
both in size and numbers, till the whole bottom is covered, and, if 
the frost continues severe, grow in height, but in a very irregular man- 
rer, so as to obliterate the earlier somewhat symmetrical shapes, till 
the streams are raised high above their former levels, and frequently 
made to overflow their banks. 

And here I take the opportunity to notice the incorrectness of an 
observation of Desmarest, quoted by M. Arago, and which, as M. Arago 
cbserves, no one has corroborated, that it was from the lower parts, 
which touched the bottom, that the flakes of ice successively increased.” 
On the contrary, the forms of the surface of the earlier masses are 
continually obscured, in succession, by new ice added to the top. 

This congealed mass being thus very different in appearance and 
consistence from the sheets or plates generally known by the name of 
ice, it were no doubt well that, like the Germans who, M. Arago informs 
us, name it grundeis, we too designated it by another name, to prevent 
confusion or misapprehension when we refer to it. The inhabitants 
of this part of the country will furnish us with a better one than 
even that of the Germans. In a district where it occurs almost every 
winter, and often repeatedly during the season, and where many of 
the rivers are crossed by means of fords, its existence influences too 
much their economical arrangements not to excite their particular 
attention, especially as many horses refuse to enter any stream even 
slightly impeded by it, being greatly alarmed by the pieces which break 
and float up from the bottom by the action of their feet. A body 
with which all are so well acquainted is known by an appropriate name. 
They call it ground-gru; gru being the term by which they designate 
snow saturated with, or swimming in water. I shall venture to use 
their term for the ice formed at the bottom. 

It will be better here also to state, generally, the conditions of 
temperature and phases of the weather under which the ground-gru 
is formed. I have seen it occur only when the temperature of the 


2 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 91 


whole mass of water was reduced to, or nearly to 32° Fahr., and when 
the temperature of the air was several degrees below that point. I 
have observed it in invariable condition, that it was preceded by a 
continuance, for some time, of a clear, or very nearly clear, state of 
the sky. 

This is at variance with another observation of Desmarest, quoted 
hy M. Arago, that “when, in consequence of a cloudy sky, the atmos- 
pherical temperature experiences little variation throughout the day 
and night, the ice at the bottam of the water uniformly increases 
every twenty-four hours; on the contrary, when the sun shows itself, 
the ice does not increase during the day.” It is the fact, that while 
it is forming under the continuance of a cloudless sky, its increase 
is impeded during the day. It may be possible, amidst the infinite 
variety of measures of cold that may exist at the time, that the increase 
of the gru may go on for a little time after the sun has been obscured 
by a thin cloud; but I have always seen, that when a densely clouded 
state of the sky supervened, and continued for the space of even only 
twenty-four hours, the gru became detached from the bottom, and floated 
down the stream. Should the temperature of the air continue low, 
with the clouded sky, or get lower, the ground-gru is not renewed, 
but the river is speedily frozen over at the surface. It is, in fact, a 
_matter of frequent occurrence, in frosty winters, that our rivers, filled, 
and so impeded, by ground-gru, as to be raised above their banks} 
are found returned into their natural channels, and there frozen over 
at the surface, but flowing over a clear bottom, in a space of time so 
short as to appear very wonderful to those who have not investigated 
the cause. The process is named, by the country people, the flitting 
of the ice. In opposition to the observation of Desmarest, and in 
confirmation of those which I have made, on this point, I may refer 
to the Rev. Mr. Eisdale, who, not satisfied with the explanations of 
M. Arago, has published one of his own, in the Hdinburgh New Phil- 
osophical Journal, vol. xvii, p. 167. His explanation appears equally 
_ unsatisfactory, as will be shown afterwards; but the part of his state- 
ment we have to do with here is his notice of this observation of 
Desmarest. The formation of the ground-gru, under a cloudy sky, 
is so much at variance with the information which Mr. Eisdale had 
received, that he resolves Desmarest’s “cloudy sky ” into “an atmos- 
phere loaded with hoar frost, and rendered hazy by its condensation.” 
The state of the air, in respect of being windy or calm, deserves also 
to be noticed. The ground-gru occurs most frequently during calm, 
with a deposition of hoar frost upon the ground at the time; and 


1 Page 172. 


92 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


this was the condition of matters during the observations now to be 


+ detailed. But it also occurs during a frosty wind, when there is no 


hoar frost, which is formed only in a calm state of the atmosphere. 
The formation of the gru during wind, and consequently without any 
deposition of hoar frost on the ground, is especially to be noticed 
in reference to Mr. Eisdale’s explanation, as wiil be afterwards seen. 
It occurred to M. Hugi, as quoted by M. Arago, in the Aar, on the 
16th February, 1827, with a west wind, after the river had been com- 
pletely open on the 15th; and one.of Mr. Eisdale’s correspondents 
ascribed its occurrence in one particular instance, which he related to 
him, to the prevalence of a very sharp northeast wind, which had blown 
during the night of its formation. | 

The following observations were made in the rivers Don and 
Leochal. The former having an easterly course, is about 120 feet 
broad, and a foot or two deep at the shallows and fords. The latter, 
one of the small tributaries of the former, having a northerly course, 
is about 20 feet broad, and a foot deep at the shallows. Both rivers 
possess a like character of very clear water, and alternating rapids and 
pools. The rapids in the Don are reaches, where the water falls two 
or three, or more, feet, from a higher to a lower level, within a distance 
of fifty or a hundred, or sometimes two or three hundred yards. They 
are generally impeded with many large stones, some of them projecting 
above the water. The depth varies greatly, but seldom exceeds two 
or three feet. The pools between the rapids are on an average much 
Jonger reaches, in which there is little fall, and a greatly diminished 
velocity of the stream, which often, in them, flows so equably as to 
give rise to no ripple on the surface. They too have in them large 
stones, but fewer in number. The depth in them too varies greatly, 
from two or three to four or five feet. ~ The rapids and pools in the 
Leochal are of a similar kind, but both much less deep in this smaller 
stream. The bed of this river has, however, on the whole, a steeper 
descent, and owing to this there is more broken water and spray in 
the rapids. The character of alternating rapids and pools, in both 
streams, is owing to the varying hardness of the granitic and micaceous- 
schistose rocks in which their beds are formed. Where the rocks are 
hard, there is a rapid; where more friable, a pool. Jn the parts of 
the rivers observed, the original rocks themselves do not anywhere form 
the immediate bed of the stream. That, to the depth of two or three, 
or more, feet, is composed of the debris of these rocks, broken up 
and sometimes much waterworn, and reduced to the size of a very large 
gravel, by the action of the stream, but not so small as to deserve to 
be named sand. No part of the bottom is muddy. 


à CR ai 
i, vd 
TA 
ay + 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 93 


On the night between the 31st of December, 1834, and the Ist of 
January, 1835, after the mean temperature of the air had continued 
for three days at 47° Fahr., and when there had been little frost in 
the season before, there cummenced a hard frost, with a calm and 
perfectly cloudless sky, which continued with little abatement till the 
5th of January, at 10 am. In the night between the 3rd and 4th, 
the temperature of the air was 23° Fahr.; and on the 4th, the bottoms 
of the rapids in the Leochal were seen coated in some places with sil- 
very cauliflower shaped clusters of ground-gru. I neglected at this 
time to examine the temperature of the water. 

Between the 4th and 5th the temperature was down to 19° Fahr. ; 
end on the 5th I examined the Don and the Leochal along half a 
mile of each, beginning the examination at half-past eight o’clock a.m. 
The examination began at the bridge of Alford, built of granite over 
the Don, in the middle of one of the rapids. At this rapid, the whole 
bottom, with the exceptions to be immediately stated, was covered with 
silvery gru, appearing from two or three to five or six inches deep. 
My attention was particularly directed to the exceptions, as throwing 
a clear hght on the question of the radiation of heat from the bottom. ° 
Round each of the piers, and in front of the abutments of the bridge, 
there was a space quite clear of all frozen matter, excepting at a side 
of one pier under an arch, where a piece of very still water, caused 
by an obstruction at the bottom, was covered by clear sheet ice. On 
the south side of the river, two embanking walls, one up and the other 
down the stream, each twelve yards long, are built in a line with 
the water courses of the abutment. Close to the bridge these walls are 
eight feet high from the bottom of the stream, but as they recede from 
the bridge the masonry slopes gradually to a lower level, till the ex- 
tremities are little above the level of the-water. The bottoms in front 
of these walls are clear of ground-gru, as well as that in front of the 
abutments; but the breadth of the clear space in front of the walls 
narrowed gradually towards their extremities, in proportion as the 
masonry became lower, till at the extremity of the downward wall 
especially, which ends at a sloping gravelly bank, the gru came to 
the edge of the water. The space of the bottom clear of gru was 
about five or six feet broad at the high parts of the walls next the 
bridge; and the water runs on the place at the medium depth and 
velocity of the rapid. There was another clear space in the bottom of 
this rapid. About twenty-five yards above the bridge there is, in the 
middle of the stream, a piece of still water, caused by an elevated bed 
of gravel, just below it, over which the stream is very shallow. The 
still water, for an extent of two or three square poles, was covered with 


94 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


sheet ice, and that again covered by a very thin, but white, opake 
deposition of hoar frost. From under this ice the water, flowing 
rapidly over the gravel bed below, had no ground-gru for a space of 
eight or ten yards downwards. 

Above this rapid, a pool of moderate stillness, about three or four 
feet deep, extends a hundred and fifty yards in length. Over the 
bottom of this there were scattered, in an irregular manner, many 
cauliflower-shaped clusters of silvery gru, most of them very small, and 
none that were observed covering more of the bottom than a square 
foot or two at one place. In the deepest and stillest part of the pool 
there were several tufts of water starwort, with sooty-coloured decaying 
leaves, forming the darkest-coloured objects seen at the bottom. These 
were all densely tangled with fringes of silvery gru. At the head of 
the pool, where the velocity acquired by the water in the rapid imme- 
diately above it was not yet greatly diminished, an appearance of a 
different kind presented itself. There are here several large stones 
in the bed of the stream, but none of them projecting above the water. 
On the faces of those opposed to the stream there were seen quantities 
of gru of a different aspect from that further down. It was not 
arranged in the same cauliflower shapes, but in angular masses, like 
wreaths of snow blown by the wind. It wanted, too, the silvery glance 
of the other, and had more the appearance of a pale ash-coloured mud. 
On reaching it with the end of a pole, its consistency was found to 
be less firm; in fact, it was only a heap of detached uncemented spiculæ 
pressed against the stones, and retained there mechanically by the action 
of the water, in a certain modified state of its velocity. The source 
of these heaps of uncemented spiculæ will soon be noticed. This 
pool, as indeed was the case with all the pools in the river, had at 
its edges and in its little bays narrow pieces of surface-ice, extending 
a foot or two from the banks. 

The rapid immediately above this, not unlike that at the bridge, 
was covered at the bottom with silvery gru, with one exception. The 
river was low at the time from long-continued deficiency of rain, and 
the water had deserted the south side of the channel, leaving many little 
pools among the stones, communicating more or less freely by irregular 
little currents with the main stream. The pools were covered over 
with sheet-ice, and that with a thin opake deposit of hoar frost-like 
snow. In the little currents returning from under this ice there was 
no frozen matter. 

At the head of this rapid there is a pool much deeper and stiller 
than that above the bridge-rapid already described. The depth is five 
feet, and the stillness such that, at many points of it, there is no 


[BARNES] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 98 


ripple or wave on the surface. None of the silvery cauliflower-like 
ice was seen on the bottom here; but near the head of it, in a modified 
state of the current pouring in from the rapid above it, there were, 
on the faces of several large stones opposed to the stream, collections 
of uncemented icy spiculæ. 

The source of these collections was very readily observed in a great 
rapid immediately above this. In that rapid the water has a much 
quicker descent than in the others referred to. It is about a hundred 
yards long, and cumbered with many large stones, pver which, at 
many points, through its whole length, the water breaks with a great 
deal of spray. Here an immense quantity of gru occupied the bottom, 
impeding much the course of the stream. At the time of observation 
many pieces of this gru were seen edging up, and in some instances 
breaking quite away from the bottom, apparently by the increasing 
pressure of the water, as it became dammed back by the increase of the 
gru itself. This at least was the appearance, although there may 
have been another cause for the disengagement of it from the bottom. 
and that is, the impeding, by the imperfectly translucent gru, of that 
radiation of heat from the bottem which, I trust in conclusion to 
demonstrate, is the immediate chief agent in the whole phenomenon. 

It is now to be observed, that a number of pieces of loose gru, 
the origin of which was so clearly ascertained at this last rapid, were 
floating down in all parts of the river. In passing through the rapids, 
they were broken into fragments, and, where the fall was violent, 
shivered into minute pieces. The larger pieces that remained after 
passing through the rapids floated at the surface, immediately as thev 
got into the uniformly flowing currents at the heads of the pools; but 
the minuter ones, mixed with the water to all depths by the plunging 
whirls in the rapids, not being so speedily disentangled from their 
cohesion with the water, by the action of gravity, floated for a greater 
distance immersed in the water, and were intercepted by, and mechanic- 
ally retained against, the faces of the stones by the action of the 
stream at the heads of the pools. Further down, and in stiller water, 
where no such intercepted heaps were seen, their buoyancy had, no doubt, 
by degrees, overcome the cohesion and raised them to the surface; and 
in fact, in the still water, many minute icy fragments were floating 
in the surface. 

Mr. Knight, the celebrated botanist, quoted by M. Arago, has 
obviously, in part, but not completely, distinguished between the 
“frozen matter which reflected a silvery kind of whiteness,” which 
covered the stones in the rocky bed of the river, and “ floating spicule 
under water,” which he found to “ accumulate much more abundantly 


2 


96 ROYAL SOCIETY ŸF CANADA 


upon such parts of the stones as stood opposed to the current, where 
that was not very rapid, below the httle falls or very rapid parts of 
thetriver 

In the smaller stream of the Leochal, the quantity of ground-gru 
was comparatively much more abundant, occupying the bottoms both 
of the pools and rapids in close masses, and in the latter, at many 
parts, forming such an impediment as to urge the water over its 
usual banks. But there were two remarkable exceptions. One of the 
pools flows close to the foot of a steep bank about fifteen feet high, 
and in the side next the bank there was little ground-gru. In a rapid, 
which at a turn of the river has an easterly course, there was a very 
dense fringe of Phalaris arundinacea standing, with its dense foliage 
of withered leaves, in the south edge of the water. Its height was 
four feet, and it extended fourteen feet in length along the stream. 
At the foot of it the bottom of the rapid was clear of ground-gru to 
the breadth of three feet. 

The temperature of the air and water, at the time of these observ- 
ations, was particularly ascertained. That of the air at sunrise, about 
an hour before thé observations commenced, had been 23° Fahr.; but 
it was rising rapidly during their progress, and was at 36° Fahr. 
before their conclusion. The temperature of the water in the Don 
varied from 32° to 33° Fahr.; but the variation could not be distinctly 
traced as depending on the depth or velocity, as there was a temporary 
variation in the same place, both in the pools and rapids. At one of 
the small streams, returning from under the sheet-ice on the little 
pools at the edge of one of the rapids, the temperature was nearly 
steady at 33° Fahr. In the Leochal the temperature was nearly 
steady everywhere at 32° Fahr. 

By 10 o’clock a.m. on the same day, a cloud obscured the whole 
sky, and at 2 o’clock p.m. the temperature of the air was 40° Fahr. 
At this time much gru rose from the bottom and floated down the 
streams of both rivers. The relaxation of the frost, however, was of 
very brief continuance. Before sunset the temperature of the air was 
again down to 31° Fahr., with a perfectly calm air and clear sky; 
and the clear sky continued till the evening of the 7th of January, the 
thermometer during the two intermediate nights being at 23°, and 
during the intermediate day at 26°. 

The same parts of the Don and Leochal were again examined at 
10 o’clock a.m. on the 7th. In the Don the ground-gru now covered 
all the bottoms of the pools as well as of the rapids. It was of less 
depth in the deep still pool below the great rapid; but everywhere 
else it formed a great impediment to the stream, raising it so much 


[ BARNEs ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 97 


above its former level that it covered deeply the pieces of sheet-ice 
formed at the edge of the 5th. New pieces of similar ice were now 
forming at the same places on the more elevated surface. The Leochal 
was still more impeded by the gru than the Don. 

But, what is worthy of particular notice, the clear spaces of the 
bottom, at the piers, abutments, and embanking-walls of the bridge 
on the Don, and at the Phalaris grass in the Leochal, still continued 
so, but were now considerably narrowed in their lateral dimensions, the 
ground-gru having encroached upon them on the sides next the steams. 
The temperature of the air was 24° Fahr.; of the water, everywhere 
nearly steady at 32°. 

Several circumstances occurred on some subsequent days which 
deserve to be noticed, as throwing light, by the contrast which they 
exhibit, on the phenomenon now under consideration. On the 8th of 
January there occurred a thaw, when the thermometer suddenly rose 
tc 47° Fahr. The rivers were speedily cleared of ice and ground-gru, 
which last rose from the bottom and floated away with the steam. 
The atmosphere at the time was considerably clouded, with a brisk 
S.W. wind. On the 9th of January the temperature of the air fell 
to 36° Fahr.; and on the morning of 10th of January, with a tem- 
perature of the air at 29° Fahri, there was a fall of snow, of about 
an inch deep, which ceased by 8 o’clock am. ‘The snow that fell 
into the rivers was observed to be entangled, and stuck fast, in irre- 
gular crushed masses, in many parts of the rapids; and there were 
collections formed of loose spicule of a muddy aspect, at the sides of 
the stones opposed to the streams in the heads of the pools, where 
the velocity of the currents was intermediate between that of the 
rapids and that of the stiller parts of the pools; but there was no 
appearance on any part of the bottom resembling the symmetrical 
cauliflower-shaped ground-gru. On the evening of the 10th the tem- 
perature of the air fell to 23°, and continued at from 23° to 21° till 
the morning of the 12th, with a densely clouded state of the sky. 
During this time extensive sheets of surface-ice were formed on the 
pools of the Don, and many of the pools of the Leochal were quite 
frozen over, but the ground-gru was nowhere renewed; on the contrary, 
the masses of snow entangled in the rapids on the 10th disappeared 
to a great extent, obviously floating away in the stream. In this 
state of the river and weather, the collections of uncemented spiculæ, 
on the faces of the stones opposed to the streams in the heads of the 
pools, appeared in their places the same as before, neither ASS 
nor diminishing in size. 


Sec, III., 1906. 7 


98 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


M. Arago, in his paper, refers to three circumstances, as partly, 
at least, explanatory of the formation of ground-gru in running water. 

1st. The inversion, by the: motion of the current, of the hydros- 
tatic order, by which the water at the surface, cooled by the cold air, 
and which at all points of the temperature of water under 39° Fahr. 
would, in still water, continue to float on the surface, is mixed with 
the warmer water below, and thus the whole body of water to the bottom 
is cooled alike by a mechanical action of the stream: 

2nd. The aptitude to the formation of crystals of ice on the stones 
and asperities of the bottom, in the water wholly cooled to 32°, sim- 
ilar to the readiness with which crystals form on pointed and rough 
bodies in a saturated saline solution: 

3rd. The existence of a less impediment to the formation of crys- 
tals in the slower motion of the water at the bottom, than in the 
more rapid one near, or at the surface. 

There is no denying the justness of these three positions, and yet 
the slightest reflection teaches us that neither singly nor combined do 
they aid us in answering the main question before us, “ Why is ice 
formed sometimes at the surface of running water, and sometimes at 
the bottom?” All the circumstances, or conditions, referred to by 
M. Arago, are present when ice, as most frequently takes place, is in 
the course of being formed only on the surface, as well as when the 
formation is going on at the bottom. Were we to admit them as an 
enswer to our question, then running water ought always to freeze 
first at the bottom. But a most extensive experience teaches us that 
this is not the case. The illustrations of M. Arago, indeed, just and 
true in themselves, are not to be overlooked when we would investigate 
and explain the formation of ice either at the bottom or at the sur- 
face. They will serve to enlighten us greatly in both these events, 
but they have no exclusive relevancy to either, and we must therefore 
look out for another solution of the problem. 

M. Arago, in his conclusion, does not present these three circum- 
stances as a complete explanation; but he says, the reader may ask 
why he has not done so, and he answers to this, “that we have no 
observations which prove that this kind of ice is seen, until the tem- 
perature of the whole of the water is at zero” (centigr.); and that 
it is not certain that the little icy particles, seen by Mr. Knight, float- 
ing on a milldam, at the time ground-ice was forming in the stream, 
and which may have acquired in contact with the air a temperature 
below zero (centigr.), do not play an important part in the phenomenon 
which he has overlooked. 


[BARNES] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 9 


© 


In regard to the former of these points, I cannot say what M. 
Arago would have deduced from it, had it been established in one 
way or the other. The observations made on the Don on the 5th of 
January show that the temperature of the whole water was not quite 
down to 32° Fahr. when the ground-gru was forming in large quantity. 
In regard to the latter, the little icy particles seen by Mr. Knight, 
the same condition belongs to them that belongs to the circumstances 
professedly adduced by M. Arago, as explanations; that is, they occur 
as well when the ice is forming on the surface only as when it is form- 
ing on the bottom. They account well, however, for the collections 
of frozen matter seen by him at the sides of the stones opposed to the 
stream, in parts where its velocity had a certain modification. 

And here I may advert to the explanation offered by the Rev. 
Mr. Eisdale, in his paper already referred to. From the information 
he received, he was led to believe the ground-gru does not occur but 
when there is a hoar frost on the ground; and he explains the ground- 
gru to be particles, or crystals as he afterwards names them, of hoar 
frost precipitated into the water, retaining there the shapes in which 
they descended, brought into contact with the rocks by the agitation 
ef the water, and forming nuclei for the accumulation of ground-gru. 
Could it be proved that such crystals are precipitated into the water, 
they would serve no more for explanation than the icy particles of 
Mr. Knight. We have learnt, indeed, from travellers in high northern 
regions, that, in certain states of cold and moisture of the air, such 
crystals, as Mr. Eisdale assumes, are there seen and felt floating in 
it; but nothing of that kind was observed in January last; and when 
Mr. Eisdale, from the existence of spiculæ of hoar frost on the ground, 
would infer the like may be formed in the air to fall into the water, 
he neglects to take into the account, that the spicule of hoar frost 
bave not fallen from above, but that their symmetrical arrangement, 
round on all sides of the bodies on which they are found, and their 
slow increase, prove they have been deposited on their places by a 
gradual deposition of invisible watery vapour, owing to the substances 
to which they are attached being cooled below the temperature of the 
surrounding air, by the radiation made known to us by the experiments 
of Dr. Wells. Besides this we have to remark, that the ground-gru 
sometimes takes place, agreeably to the information of one of Mr. 
Fisdale’s own correspondents, in a windy state of the atmosphere, at 
which time no hoar frost is seen. 

The interesting experiments of Dr. Wells just referred to enable 
us to give, after all, a very satisfactory explanation of the ground- 
gru; and Mr. McKeever, quoted by M. Arago, had gone far to illus- 


100 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


trate it by means of them, although he had overlooked some conditions 
necessary to be taken into account for a complete explanation. M. 
Arago, however, entirely rejects the explanation of Mr. McKeever, and 
it is fair to set down the terms in which he does so. | 

After having shown that the ground-gru cannot be explained by 
the action of the moon,’ according to the sailors, nor by the friction 
of running water producing more heat at the surface than at the 
bottom, nor by referring its source to the smaller tributaries of the 
streams, nor to different layers of ice formed at the several surfaces, 
when the water in the river, from whatever cause, is in a state of 
varying fullness, all of which have been assigned as causes of the 
ground-gru, M. Arago proceeds: 

“We come now to Mr. McKeever, who, confining himself closely 
to the most subtle principles of the theory of heat, has not on this 
account been more fortunate than his predecessors. According to this 
author, ‘the rocks, stones and gravel, which generally cover the bot- 
toms of rivers, have powers of radiation superior to those of mud, 
perhaps on account of their peculiar nature, but chiefly because they 
have rough surfaces. Thus rocks in large or small masses will become 
much cooler in consequence of radiation; when the atmospherical tem- 
perature is very low, they of course freeze the water which touches 
them. It is unnecessary to examine here whether heat radiates through 
a thick layer of water, as Mr. McKeever supposes, as the most simple 
observation is sufficient to overthrow it. Where is the person who has 
not observed that the strong radiation, which the Irish philosopher 
admits, would be more plainly manifested, or as completely, in still 
water than in running water? But no one has seen a piece of still 
water frozen at the bottom.” * 

But there is nothing more easy of experimental proof than that 
heat radiates through water. JI do not mean, however. to vindicate 
the reasoning of Mr. McKeever respecting the more powerful radiation 
of it from stones and from mud. His reasoning respecting the matter 
is, on his own part, conjectural, to explain the readier formation of 
gru on a stony or gravelly bottom; but the gru also forms on a muddy 
bottom, a fact which M. Arago notices, when he brings the attachment 
of mud to the under side of the floating flakes as a proof that they 
have been formed at the bottom. Mr. McKeever was driven to his 


1This explanation of the sailors is a confirmation of what I have stated, 
that the gru never appears but under a clear sky. The constant observ- 
ation of the sailors has associated, in their minds, the shining of the moon 
with the ground-gru; but the moon never shines, to excite great attention, 
but in a clear sky. 

? Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, vol. xv, pp. 132, 133. 


- 


(Barnes ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 101 


conjecture from having overlooked the more complete and sudden in- 
version of the hydrostatic order that takes place over stones than over 
mud; which last is deposited only in places where the water has a 
stiller and more equable motion. In such places the ground-gru is 
later in forming, and therefore is more rarely seen; and it is doubtful 
whether Mr. McKeever had a proper opportunity for noticing it in 
them. 

But to return to the main point which we have here to main- 
tain in opposition to the reasoning of M. Arago, the radiation of heat 
through a body of water. When we construct an achromatic object- 
glass for a telescope, it does not the less remain a burning-lens when 
we have included in it a transparent fluid, and no experiment has 
proved that were the fluid water the case would be altered. We are 
aware of the danger that has been incurred setting fire to an apart- 
ment by an ornamental glass globe filled with water, and placed in 
the sun at a window. But as I cannot particularly refer to circum- 
stances of time and place of the cases now mentioned, I made an 
experiment on the subject with such apparatus as I could find readily 
at hand, having no access to better in a remote country place! In a° 
room, of which the temperature was 50° Fahr., a semiglobular tumbler 
filled with water, containing about a pint and a half, was placed inside 
a window, in the rays of the low but clear winter sun. The bulb 
of a thermometer, which had been previously placed in a similar situ- 
ation till it rose and remained steady at 61°, was shifted into the 
brightest part of the fan-shaped focus of rays, into which the light 
was refracted through the tumbler. In this position it was raised in 
four minutes to 72°. ‘It was again shifted into the unconcentrated 
Tays passing through the window, when it fell, but more slowly than 
it had risen; and the experiment was repeatedly renewed with similar 
results, leaving no doubt that the heat, like the light, radiated through, 
and was refracted by the water. If the fact is so in regard to the 
radiation of heat through a mass of water four or five inches thick, 
where ought we to set the limits of thickness of the mass through 
which it cannot pass? Obviously, only where the thickness is so great, 
that the aggregation of the fluid, and of its minute impurities, prevents 
the transmission of light, as in the deeps of the sea, but not within 
the ordinary depths of our clear streams. 

Of the effect of radiation in cooling down the surface of the 
ground, and substances placed upon it, during ‘a clear sky, we cannot 


1It may seem absurd to have had recourse to experiment in a case s9 
plain; but the procedure seemed, at the same time, indispensable, to meet 
Teasonings promulgated with the authority of such a distinguished name. 


102 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


give a more lucid account than that of M. Arago, in his paper “ On 
the supposed Influence of the Moon on Vegetation.” ‘No one had 
supposed,” says he, “before Dr. Wells, that terrestrial substances, ex- 
cepting in the case of a very rapid evaporation, may acquire during 
the night a different temperature from that of the surrounding air. 
This important fact is now well ascertained. On placing little masses 
ot cotton down, etc., in the open air, it is frequently observed that 
they acquire a temperature 6°, 7°, or even 8° centigr. below that of 
the surrounding atmosphere . . . . These differences of temper- 
ature between solid bodies and the atmosphere only rise to 6°, 7°, or 
8° of the centesimal scale, when the sky is perfectly clear. If the sky 
is clouded they become insensible.” This lucid statement, however, 
requires one modification; for the greater cooling of the solid sub- 
stances, under a clear sky, takes place not only during the night, but 
also during the day, in places not directly exposed to the sun’s rays. 

This radiation, as it passes freely through the transparent atmos- 
phere, may, as we learn from the above experiment, pass also through 
the transparent water, to cool down the solid substances at the bottom 
below the temperature of the surrounding flud. That fluid is per- 
meable to radiating heat as well as the atmosphere. The application 
of the thermometer, in the hands of Dr. Wells, instructed us regarding 
the cooling of the surface of the ground; but the water of a river, 
placed under the very same condition of a clear sky, fluid above and 
freezing below, is a great natural thermometer, teaching us that a 
corresponding cooling is going on on the surface of the solid opake 
substances of the bottom. In fact, if we may so speak, the phenomenon 
of the ground-gru is the result of an experiment in the water, entirely 
similar to that of Dr. Wells on the land, performed by nature on a 
large scale, and presented to us for our interpretation and instruction. 
And when we look back to the observations made in the month of 
January, we find the results of the modifications of this great natural 
experiment corresponding with those of similar modifications of the 
experiment on the dry land. 

The cooling of the surface of the ground by radiation, discovered 
by Dr. Wells, takes place only under a clear sky. It is therefore 
greatly modified on parts of the ground screened from a part of the 
sky by opake objects, as walls, trees, hedges. In illustration of the 
extent to which a screening or shading body, near at hand, modifies 
the radiation, I shall detail some observations I made on the 7th of 
January last, incidentally in the first instance, but then extended, in 
reference to the observations on the ground-gru, which I was making 
at the time. Having occasion that day to dig into recently hoed 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 103 


ground, in the middle of a garden, remote from shade, the soil was 
observed to be frozen to the depth of four inches, by the clear frost, 
which had continued from the 1st of January, with the trifling inter- 
mission above mentioned. On digging into similar ground at the 
north base of a wall six feet high, the soil was found, close at the 
foot of the wall, frozen to the depth of only half an inch; at a foot 
distance from it, about an inch; at two feet, little more; and it was 
only at the distance of ten or twelve feet that it was frozen hard to 
the depth of three inches. A similar modification of the effect of 
radiation was observed in the shade of trees. Under the Scotch fir 
the soil, slightly covered with decaying herbage, was not at all frozen; 
although in similar ground, similarly covered, but remote from shade, 
it was hard frozen to the depth of two or three inches. 

Now the ground-gru in the rivers was modified in a way strictly 
similar by the effect of shade. The bridge of Alford, over the Don, 
is happily situated for illustrating this, being on one of the rapids, 
where the ground-gru is earliest and most abundantly formed. While 
the other rapids, and the unshaded parts of this one, were quite occu- 
pied by gru on both the 5th and 7th of January, spaces in the shade 
of the masonry at this bridge were quite clear of it. It cannot be 
admitted as an explanation of this fact, that heat may have been there 
laterally transmitted to the water by contact with the piers and walls; 
for if this took place, why then did the clear spaces on the bottom 
narrow gradually towards the low extremities of the embanking walls? 
Besides, the transmission of heat laterally had not hindered the forma- 
tion of surface-ice, in contact with a pier, on a piece of still water 
under one of the arches. The modification of the radiation by shade 
was also exhibited in the absence of all gru on the bottom, along the 
foot of the dense tuft of Phalaris grass in the Leochal, where there 
could be no more transmission of heat laterally, than at the general 
line of the grassy banks of this stream. 

The water, too, returning warmer from under the surface-ice, on 
the little pools at the edge of one of the rapids, is another instance 
of the modification of the radiation by shade. The thin white opake 
covering of hoar frost on the ice prevented radiation, at least in a 
great measure, and the heat of the bed of the river, in tthe course of 
continual transmission upwards, from strata not yet cooled to much 
depth by the frost, finding no outlet by the radiation, was expended 
in heating the water by contact. 

There was another phenomenon observed on the 5th of January, 
(although no longer seen on the 7th, being then concealed by the 
immense formation of gru), which can be readily explained by the 


104 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


admission of the radiation of heat through the water, and therefore 
goes to support the justness of the theory. The tufts of water star- 
wort, in the deepest and stillest parts of one of the pools, were the 
darkest-coloured objects seen at the bottom, and they were fringed in 
every part with spicule of gru, at a time while it yet occupied little 
of the bottom of this pool. The experiments of Boyle, Franklin, 
Rumford, Leslie (although he denies the conclusion himself), Davy, 
and Stark appear too uniform in their results to leave any doubt 
remaining, that dark-coloured bodies both absorb and radiate heat more 
freely than those which are light-coloured. It is in consistency, then, 
with an ascertained law of the radiation of heat, that the very dark- 
coloured tufts of the water starwort should have been the first bodies 
in the pool cooled to a very low temperature, and, of course, first covered 
with gru. 

In arguing the whole question, let us not forget to assign a 
proper value to the illustrations of M. Arago. The first of them 
suggests a ready and satisfactory answer to one of the objections 
which he brings against the theory of radiation, which is, that the 
effect of it should be as readily manifested in still as in running water, 
and yet no one has seen a piece of still water frozen at the bottom.t 

In still water, that hydrostatic order, which M. Arago has so well 
illustrated as belonging to water when reduced to a temperature under 
39° Fahr., has free play to establish itself, and is not inverted by the 
mechanical action of the stream. When the temperature of a body 
of water is under 39°, then the coldest portions of it are the lightest 
and naturally rise and float on the surface. When in a still pond 
the water nearest the bottom has been cooled below the general tem- 
perature by contact with the solid materials cooled by radiation, it is 
displaced by the heavier warmer water above. Hence ice forms first 
on the surface by the meeting there of both the cold of radiation and 
that acquired by contact with the incumbent cold atmosphere. 


1 There is an exception to the universality of this position, which, 
although rare, I have sometimes witnessed; and as the phenomenon is in 
accordance with the theory of the radiation of the heat from the bottom, it 
deserves notice. In little ponds of a foot or two deep, dug to obtain the 
materials for building or agricultural purposes, of which there are many 
examples in this neighbourhood, after they have been covered, owing t9 
hard and long-continued frost, by a thick sheet of ice, that is sometimes 
nearly melted off, and the remaining fragments driven to the lee side by 
a strong westerly gale of high temperature. Such a gale in this climate, 
frequently, towards its conclusion, shifts to N.W., when the temperature 
of the air falls again below the freezing-point of water, with a generally 
clear sky. In such peculiar circumstances the little ponds are suddenly 
filled with gru, commencing at, and shooting up from the bottom. The 
whole water is here at 32° Fahr. when the gru begins forming, and the 
hydrostatic order is deranged by the wind. 


[BARNES ] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 103 


M. Arago’s illustrations also furnish us with a satisfactory explan- 
ation of the curious facts, that the ground-gru makes its first appearance 
in the more rapid and agitated parts of the stream, and begins to 
show itseif on the bottoms of the stiller parts, and to accumulate there 
in quantity, only after a longer continuance of the clear, frosty 
weather. In the rapids the hydrostatic order is overturned, and the 
colder, which is also the lighter, water not only mixed with the warmer 
below, but, at the whirls of the greatest rapids, brought suddenly, 
without much mixing, into direct contact with the bottom, cooled still 
lower than itself by radiation. If the water is at the temperature of 
32° Fahr. it can give out no heat to the colder bottom without part 
of it being converted into ice, the spiculæ and crystals of which find 
a solid body for their attachment at the very point where the heat is 
given out.! 

But while in this manner we can explain some of the incidents, 
may it not be held, as above demonstrated, that the chief cause of the 
ground-gru is the radiation of heat from the bottoms of the rivers? 
Every branch of the phenomenon is of easy explanation when we admit 
the radiation; and among the rest a circumstance to which I have 
yet made no reference, and that is, the disappearance at the bottom of 
the water of the immense quantity of heat, 140° of Fahr., which con- 
stitutes the caloric of fluidity disengaged, when water at 32° Fahr. 
is converted into ice at the same temperature. 

The answer to our original question then is, That ice is formed 
sometimes on the surface of running water, and sometimes at the bot- 
tom, because frost sometimes takes place with a clouded sky, which is 
incompatible with radiation of heat from the bottom of the stream, 
and sometimes with a clear sky, when that radiation takes place through 
the water, in the same manner as the experiments of Dr. Wells prove 
it goes on, under a like sky, through the atmosphere. The bottom 
is by this cooled down below the freezing point of water, before the 
water itself: ice is formed on it, and its detachment by transmitted 
heat from below prevented as long as the radiation continues. 


1 We may observe also, that there is a local source of greater cold of 
the water in the rapids, in its being brought into more active and extensive 
contact with the air by a sharp ripple and spray. 


106 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ON GROUND-GRU, OR ICE FORMED, UNDER PECULIAR CIRCUMSTANCES, 
AT THE BOTTOM OF RUNNING WATER. 


By JAMES Farquaarson, LL.D., F.RB.S., 
Minister of the Parish of Alford. 


From Philosophical Transactions, Vol. 131, p. 37 (1841.) 


In a paper of mine on Ground-gru, or ice formed at the bottom 
of running water, which was honoured with a place in the Philosophical 
Transactions,! I had inferred, from a great many conditions attending 
remarkable occurrence of the phenomenon in the rivers Don and Leo- 
chal, in the beginning of January, 1835, as well as from its occurring 
only when the air is at the time quite clear, that it is caused, when 
the water has gone down in temperature to the freezing point, by the 
bottom of the water being cooled to a still lower temperature, in the 
same manner as the surface of the dry land, under a clear sky, is 
cooled down below the temperature of the air, as first demonstrated 
by the experiments of Dr. Wells. 

As the accuracy of the conclusion at which I arrived respecting 
the question has been controverted, I respectfully request the Royal 
Society to permit me to present to them brief notices of some recent 
occurrences of ground-gru, in the same rivers to which I formerly 
referred, the conditions of which seem to me strongly to confirm the 
accuracy of the views I presented regarding the cause of the phenom- 
enon; and also to answer some of the objections which have been 
brought against it. 

Cold weather commenced on the 20th December, 1840 (on which 
night the thermometer went down to 31°), and continued with frost 
every night, yet never below 26°, and with frost also through most 
of the day, till the 31st of the same month. By the 26th December, 
surface ice in considerable quantity was formed on the edges of the 
small river Leochal, and the temperature of the water was down to the 
freezing point. Down to the evening of the 28th the weather was 
cloudy, and there was no appearance in the river of anything resembling 
ground-gru; but on that night the sky suddenly became clear, and 
before the morning of the 29th, the bottoms of all the rapids of the 
little river were thickly coated by the ground-gru. The gru disap- 
peared as speedily as it had formed, when, on the 29th, a close cloud, 
depositing slight showers of snow, again covered the whole sky, and 
continued till the temperature of the day and night rose above freezing. 


1 Part II, for 1835, p. 329. 


[BARNES ] ‘ ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 107 


In comparison with this, I would refer to a series of frosty days 
from the 1st to the 11th of February, 1841, with a temperature the 
same as from the 22nd to 31st December, 1840, never descending below 
26°. The water of the river descended to the freezing temperature, 
and surface ice was formed in large quantity on the edges of both the 
Leochal and the Don. A dense cloud covered the sky during the 
eleven days and nights, and no ground-gru appeared in the rivers. 

A remarkable occurrence of ground-gru took place in both the 

rivers from the evening of the 7th to the morning of the 9th January, 
1841, with a completely clear sky during the time. The thermometer 
was at 2° below zero on the night of the 7th, at 9° at midday on 
the 8th, and at 7° below zero on the night of the 8th. I examined 
particularly the state of the Don, during this extreme and clear frost, 
before it abated on the morning of the 9th. The bottom of the river 
was everywhere coated by an immense quantity of ground-gru, excepting 
where it was partially shaded by bridges, or lofty banks close to the 
stream. In the partially shaded places the bottom was clear of gru. 
Thus, this remarkable formation of ground-gru took place under exactly 
such circumstances as those in which hoar frost or dew takes place 
on the dry land, when the surface of the earth becomes colder than 
the air (which we explain by a radiation of heat from the surface 
of the earth into the clear sky, or by impulses of cold from the sky 
to the earth), with only this difference, that there was an additional 
transparent fluid over the bottom of the river, namely, the water; and 
thus also a shade prevented the formation of ground-gru in the river, 
as it does that of hoar frost or dew on the land. 
: In noticing the objections to the explanation I have given of the 
cause of ground-gru, I shall confine myself to those brought forward 
by a writer in the Penny Cyclopedia, under the name of Ground 
Gru, which I have seen only very lately, although I believe they have 
been published for some years. He says, the explanations of the 
formation of ground-gru, given by Dr. Farquharson and Mr. Eisdale, 
are least of all satisfactory, and adds, “The former gentleman says 
it is the result of radiation, and endeavours to substantiate his reason- 
ing upon the principles of the formation of dew, seeming to forget 
entirely, that Dr. Wells maintains expressly. that wind and shade are 
alike obstacles to radiation; and that consequently a body of moving 
water so deep as to be impervious to light, and particularly when cov- 
ered, as in the case of the Neva, with a sheet of ice three feet thick, 
and as much more snow, must present an insurmountable obstacle to 
the radiation of heat from the bottom of the river.” 


108 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Now, in the first place, with respect to shade: I was so far from 
forgetting that it is an obstacle to radiation, that, on the contrary, 
in my observations in 1835, J had shown by very many instances, that 
shade had prevented the formation of ground-gru, just as it prevented 
dew. Wherever shade intervened to prevent radiation from the bot- 
toms of the rivers Don and Leochal, there no ground ice was formed; 
while the unshaded parts of the bottoms were coated with it. My 
explanation thus mainly rested upon the fact that shade prevents radia- 
tion. In the next place, with respect to wind; the writer in the 
Cyclopedia himself forgets the difference of the statical conditions of 
air and water in connexion with temperature. Air becomes heavier 
by diminution of temperature. Water under 39° Fahr. becomes lighter 
by diminution of temperature. During wind, on the land, the cold 
air at the surface of the earth is continually mixed with, or displaced 
by, the warmer air above; and by this process both the earth and air 
in contact with it are prevented from being reduced to a very low 
temperature by radiation. But in a body of moving water, whose 
temperature is under 39°, the eddies of the current throw down the 
coldest parts, which in still water would remain at the surface, to 
come into contast with the bottom. This last circumstance is the 
explanation of M. Arago, and it well accounts for the formation of 
ground-gru taking place first in the most rapid parts of the streams; 
although neither by itself, nor when taken in conjunction with the 
other two circumstances to which he refers, namely, aptitude to forma- 
tion of crystals on asperities at the bottom, and less impediment to 
the formation of crystals in a slower motion, will it account for the 
formation of ground gru, as all these circumstances are present when 
the water forms only surface ice. The formation of ground-gru 
requires for its explanation an additional element, namely, the radia- 
tion, into the clear sky, of heat from the bottom of the river; and 
the formation never occurs but under a clear sky. 

As to the ground-gru, observed by Colonel Jackson in the Neva 
under three feet of ice and three feet of snow, that can form no valid 
objection to the explanation I have given, unless it were ascertained 
that the gru was formed after the surface ice and the fall of the snow, 
and not before them. All rivers issuing from lakes, like the Neva, 
have very clear waters to admit of radiation through them, although 
as deep as it is; and all rivers are very clear during frost, owing to 
the freezing up of the little land rills that would convey earthy par- 
ticles into them. Ground-gru formed in the Neva would be much 
more permanent than in our rivers. The mean temperature of Alford 


[BARNES] ANCHOR-ICE FORMATION 109 


is 45° Fahr., and that of the earth, of course, the same; and on the 
remission of its cause, the ground-gru is here speedily detached from 
the bottom, by the transmission of heat from below. Not so in the 
Neva. There, according to Kupffer, the mean temperature is only 
38°.75; and under the action of a frost so severe as to form three 
feet depth of ice, although the condition of the clear sky might not 
continue, previously formed gru would, at that mean temperature, be 
of great permanence. This applies also to the Siberian rivers. 


ae 


om 


Section III, 1906. DT Trans. R. S&S C. 


VII.—The Foundations of Geometry — Presidential Address to 
Section III. 


By Proressor ALFRED BAKER, M.A. 
(Read May 22nd, 1906). 


It is satisfactory to know that the advances that are being made 
in the purely intellectual domain of mathematics are, in a sense, com- 
parable with the remarkable achievements of the physicist and of the 
chemist, though necessarily appealing to a more limited circle, and less 
encouraged by the stimulating influence of popular applause. In 
mathematics activity shows itself in two directions—the boundaries 
of the science are being enlarged, and its foundations are being subjected 
to the most searching examination. In analysis the examination of 
the number concept has produced many remarkable results; in geometry 
the search-light of a penetrating logic has revealed the base of the 
subject with remarkable clearness. It is of this latter field of enquiry— 
the foundations of geometry —I wish to speak. 

In Euclid each proposition rests on preceding propositions, and the 
reasoning is unassailable. But when we go down to the lowest stones 
of the structure — to the axioms — we find ourselves in serious diff: 
culties. Every intelligent schoolboy has had his trouble with the 
eleventh axiom, respecting parallel lines, and it has puzzled many a 
philosopher. It has been claimed that Euclid reckoned it amongst 
his postulates; and certainly, if its self-evidence had never been asserted, 
and if the assumption implied in it had been asked as a concession, 
the nature of the foundation of the science of geometry would have 
been much more clearly revealed, and much useless labour would have 
been saved. Everyone is more or less acquainted with the struggles 
to prove this axiom. Perhaps nothing reveals the subtlety of the 
subject better than the well-known story told of the great Lagrange. 
Observing that the formule of spherical trigonometry did not depend 
on the eleventh axiom, Lagrange thought to develop a proof of the 
axiom based on this fact. He prepared his paper and actually began 
to read it before the Academy. Suddenly stopping, he said, “ I] faut 
que j’y songe encore,” put the paper in his pocket, and never after- 
wards referred to the matter, at least in public. 

The search for the unattainable was closed by the labours of Gauss, 
Bolyai, Lobachevski and Riemann, the pioneers undoubtedly being 


112 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Lobachevski and Bolyai. ‘lhese mathematicians showed the existence 
of perfectly consistent systems of geometry in which the eleventh axiom 
did not hold. It followed, therefore, that this axiom could not be 
à consequence of the other Euclidean axioms, and that, accordingly, all 
efforts to prove it must necessarily be fruitless. | This axiom is thus 
shown to be a fact of observation, and geometry becomes a branch of 
natural science. In our space, the Euclidean space, parabolic space 
as it has been called, only one straight line in a plane can be drawn 
through a given point parallel to a given straight line; in the space 
of Lobachevski, hyperbolic space, an infinite number of such lines can 
be drawn; and in the space of Riemann, elliptic space, no such lines 
can be drawn,— there are no parallels, no lines that do not meet. 

There is a letter written in 1799 by Gauss to the elder Bolyai 
from which it appears that Gauss was at that time occupied with the 
foundations of geometry. 

Lobachevski views were first published in a lecture given before 
the Faculty of Mathematics and Physics of the University of Kasan, 
February 26th, 1826. 

Gauss in a letter to Bessel (January 27th, 1829) states that the 
foundations of geometry cannot be established a priort, and there appears 
reason to believe his researches were along the line of those of Loba- 
chevski and Bolyai. These researches, however, were never published. 

Wolfyang Bolyai in 1832-3 published a two volume work on 
mathematics, and at the end of the first volume occurred an appendix, 
a memoir written by Johann Bolyai in 1823, in which the theory of 
parallels was developed along the same lines as Lobachevski followed. 

Riemann’s “ Uber die Hypothesen welche der Geometrie zu Grunde 
liegen ” was published in 1854. 

In a letter to his father, written November 3rd, 1823, the younger 
Bolyai claims that “from nothing he had created another wholly new 
world,” and so in a sense he had. 

The remarkable discoveries of Lobachevski and Bolyai passed 
practically unnoticed until the attention of the mathematical world 
was directed to them by Riemann and Baltzer, about 1866: This then 
may be considered the date at which the vision of mathematicians was 
cleared in respect to the foundations of geometry so far as the so-called 
parallel axiom is concerned. 

But all difficulties respecting the foundations of geometry were 
by no means thus disposed of. The discovery of the space of Loba- 
chevski made men doubtful of final principles. ‘They found themselves 
existing between two kinds of space entirely different from their own,— 


‘ À 


[BAKER] THE FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY 113 


that of Lobachevski, and that of Riemann. ‘hen the question of 
four-dimensioned space broadened men’s visions. Riemann, Helmholtz 
and Lie conceived space as a manifold of numbers. The pseudosphere 
of Beltrami, mathematically possible, physically inconceivable, helped 
along distrust in our geometry of experience. It is scarcely necessary 
io say that in Euclid’s system of geometry there is a continual covert 
reference to the physical universe of experience; especially is this so 
in the constant use of diagrams. The result of this mental unrest 
was that it was strongly felt the whole question of the foundations of 
geometry was in the melting pot, and that something very different 
from Euclid’s system of axioms had to be devised to constitute an 
unassailable and perfectly logical set of first principles or assumptions 
from which to make a beginning. 

The importance of establishing the science of geometry with logical 
accuracy, on a purely rational basis, suppressing completely the role 
played by experience, will readily be conceived. Philosophically, of 
course, it is essential in our search for that ideal perfection with which 
alone we are content. We must remember also that geometry, the 
science of the external relations of things, is at the base of dynamics, 
optics, and other physical sciences, and in laying its foundations securely 
we are laying theirs. We are also, as in effect I have already said, 
raaking a searching and critical examination of those intuitions which 
lie at the very foundations of our intellectual life, namely, those relating 
to space. 


In connection with the unveiling of the Gauss-Weber monument 
at Gottingen a memorial volume was published, part of which consisted 
of Professor Hilbert’s “ Grundlagen der Geometrie,” or “ Foundations 
of Geometry.” It is dated 1899. His ideas have been developed by 
Professor George Bruce Halsted of Kenyon College, Gambier, Ohio, 
who calls his work “ Rational Geometry, a Text-Book for the Science 
of Space.”1 It is of this system of geometry that I propose to speak. 
If Hilbert has shown great subtlety of analysis in discussing the neces- 
sary and sufficient assumptions that may be made the basis of geometry, 
Halsted has shown consummate ability in the development of those 
assumptions, and I feel bound to divide my admiration between the two 
geometers. 


1Rational Geometry, a Text-book for the Science of Space, based on Hit 


bert’s Foundations, by George Bruce Halsted, New York, John Wiley & Sons, 
1904. 


Sec. IIT., 1906. 8 


114 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Before I enter with any detail into an explanation of this rational 
geometry, that you may understand at once how much more funda- 
mental it is than the system of Enclid, and how much more rigourously 
it seeks to exclude our experimental knowledge of the physical world, 
let me mention some of the assumptions and deductions of the system :— 


Assumption.—‘‘If A, B, C are points on a 
straight line, and B lies between A and C, 
then B lies also between C and A.” 

Assumption.—“ A, B, C are three points 
not co-straight. If a line, a, cuts the sect 
B € AC, then it also cuts the sect A Bor the 

sect C B.” 


Theorem.— Every straight line a which lies in a plane separates 
the plane into two regions such that every point A of one region 
with every point B of the other region determines a sect A B within 
which lies a point of the straight line a; and any two points A, A’ of the 
same region determine a sect A A’ which contains no point of a.” 


A 


Theorem— No straight line can lie wholly within a triangle.” 


Now, with a view to placing my hearers in the position of isolation 
necessary for an appreciation of the assumptions at the base of Hilbert’s 
geometry, with the purpose of suggesting to them the degree of abstrac- 
tion with which the subject must be approached, let me briefly outline 
a purely abstract geometry :— 

A point may be defined to be that which is determined by two 
numbers, æ and y. (I am not in the least sugesting the Cartesian 
method with its co-ordinate axes). We may suppose a straight line 
to be defined as that which is determined by two ratios, wu: v: w, still 
without the suggestion of physical representation. Further, we may 
say that such a point (x, y) is said to lie on such a line w:v: w when 
the equation uz + vy + w — 0 is satisfied. But with such a basis, 
when three points (2, 9), (2, Yo), (3, Ys) lie on such a line, how 
can we say that one point lies ‘between’ the other two? Clearly 
some convention must be adopted, possibly with respect to the mag- 
nitudes of the numbers, the z’s or the y’s, without which there is no 
such thing necessarily as ‘betweenness*. And with such a basis how 
can we speak of the ‘sides’ of such a line? Clearly some convention 
must be adopted, possibly that all points which make uz + vy + w 
positive shall be said to lie on one side of the line, and all points that 
ruake it negative shall be said to lie on the other side. I do not say 


[BAKER] THE FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY 115 


that Hilbert’s geometry is as abstract as the preceding suggests, but I 
do say that it must be clearly borne in mind that all our knowledge of 
the elements in Hilbert’s geometry must be derived from the assump- 
tion we make regarding them, and not in any way from our physical 
experience of points, lines, etc. 

Again, since Hilbert proposes to create by his assumptions (not 
axioms, which here I feel to be an unsuitable word) a geometrical 
universe, it seems reasonable to anticipate that his assumptions will be 
more numerous than the axioms of Euclid who, in formulating these 
axioms but incompletely analyzed a universe already in existence. 

Still further,—Our knowledge of the external universe is a know- 
ledge of relations. The universe defines itself to us by means of 
relations. We might anticipate then that Hilbert in presenting to 
us the universe he brings into existence, and in seeking to make us 
conceive it, would not begin by attempting to define such elements as 
the point, line and plane, but would confine himself to making assump- 
tions respecting their relations. 

With this preface I proceed to state Hilbert’s assumptions, giving 
also, by way of illustration, as such illustration seems necessary for a 
proper understanding and appreciation of the assumptions, certain of 
Halsted’s deductions. 

Hilbert begins by saying, let us consider three distinct systems of 
things, calling them respectively, points, straight lines, and planes. 
We think of these as having certain relations, and the complete and 
exact description of these relations are the consequences of the assump- 
tions of geometry. He then makes these assumptions, dividing them 
into five groups: I. Assumptions of connection or association; 
II. Assumptions of order or betweenness; III. Assumptions of con- 
gruence; IV. Assumption of parallels; V. Assumption of continuity, 
or Archimedes’ axiom. 

I. The assumptions of association are :— 

(1). Two points determine a straight line. 

(2). Any two points on a straight line determine it. 

(3). On every straight line there are at least two points. 

(4). Three points determine a plane. 

(5). Any three points (not co-straight) on a plane determine it. 

(6). On every plane there are least three points (not co-straight). 

(7). If two planes have one point in common they have another. 

(8). If two points on a straight line lie on a plane, then every 
point on the straight line lies on the plane. 


116 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The meaning of (1) is that two'points 
determine a straight line completely, 
and determine only one straight line. 
Yet (2) is necessary. For while A, B 
A 3 might uniquely determine A B C D, 
still C D might uniquely determine CD EF. The same consideration 
shows the need of both (4) and (6). 

The assumption “any two points on a straight line determine it ” 
is the co-relative in this system of geometry of the familiar axiom 
Two straight lines cannot enclose a space.” Yet it is evidently more 
elementary than the latter; it makes no such assumption as is implied 
in the word “ enclose.” 

The conception of a line as having an infinite number of points 
on it, and the conception of a plane as having an infinite number of 
lines and points on it, are not implied in the preceding assumptions. 
They will appear later as deductions from the assumptions respecting 
‘ betweenness.” 

Consideration will show that it is not necessary to physically con- 
ceive the elements point, line and plane, difficult though it may be to 
avoid doing so. Hilbert has not discussed this matter in the published 
reproduction of his lectures, whatever he may have done in the lectures 
themselves. I conjecture that he felt it proper that each student 
should impart to the subject the degree of abstraction he felt possible 
by reason of his mental make-up. It is to be borne in mind, how- 
ever, that the object of this geometry is to get away from the evidence * 
of our senses by reason of the doubt which the mind casts on the reli- 
ability of such evidence. Strictly speaking, the subject is a purely 
logical one, though, I think, throughout its study we are expected to 
note the complete correspondence between the conclusions we reach and 
the facts of the physical universe. 

We have no difficulty in making deductions from the preceding 
assumptions :— 

Theorem 1.— Two straight lines cannot have two points in com- 
mon. For since the two points determine a straight line uniquely 
[(1), (2)], there can be only one straight line through these two 
points. 

Theorem 2.— Two planes have no point in common, or they have 
a straight line in common. For if they have one point in common 
they have a second point in common, [(7]; and, therefore, each con- 
tains the straight line which is determined by these two points [ (8), 


(2) ]. 


[BAKER] THE FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY 117 


Theorem 3—Two planes cannot have two straight lines in com- 
mon. For if they have, on each line there are two points [(3)]; and 
three points determine a plane [(5]. Therefore, there is but one 
plane. 

Theorem 4.— A straight line and a point not on it determine a 
plane. For on the line are two points [(3)]; and these with the 
given point determine a plane [(5)] on which every point on the line 
lies [(8) ]. 

Theorem 5.—If a plane contains a straight line and a point in 
another straight line, but not such other straight line, then no plane 
can contain both lines. For a plane containing both lines would con- 
tain the first line and the point on the second, and, therefore, would 
be identical with the first plane (Thm. 4), which by hypothesis does 
not contain the second line. 


Il. The assumptions of betweenness are :— 

(1). If A, B, C be points on a straight line, and B lies between 
A and C, then it also lies between C and A. 

(2). If A and C be points on a straight line, then there is at 
least one point B on the line between A and C, and also one point 
D on the line such that C les between A and D. 

(3). Of three points on a straight line one and only one lies 
between the other two. 

(4). Pasch’s assumption— Let A, B, C be three points not co- 
straight, and a a straight line in the plane ABC but going through 

none of the points A, B,C. Then if a goes 
A through a point within the sect A B, it must 
. also go through a point within the sect A C, 
or a point within the sect B C. 
The first three assumptions are intended to 
ta fix the fact that points exist on a straight 
line in a certain order. 


B 


It is important to observe that no such idea has been introduced 
as that the points on a line are continuous; or that we cannot get 
from one ‘side’ of a line to the other. without ‘passing through’ 
or ‘cutting’ the line. If we are to reach such a fact evidently it 
must come to us from assumption (4). Indeed, it will be noted that, 
compared with assumptions (1), (2) and (3), there is a startling com- 
plexity in assumption (4); and we receive it in much the same way 
as we recollect receiving the eleventh axiom of Euclid. One feels that 
the founder of this geometry must have introduced it with reluctance, 
and only after a struggle to find a substitute; and yet one feels that 


118 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


it is an assumption from which important results must follow. The 
existence of such a foundation stone as (4) may seem to be one of 
the reasons for preferring ‘assumption’ to ‘axiom,’ since in point of 
elementariness (1), (2) and (3) seem to be in a class different from | 
(4). The real reason, however, for preferring “‘ assumption” is that 
“axiomatic ” and “ self-evident” have come to be regarded as synony- 
mous, and in the latter word, in such a connection, there seems to be 
a reference to our experiential knowledge. The demand, also, that 
the ‘axioms’ of Euclid be conceded is certainly an appeal to our 
experiential knowledge. Thus it is that the word ‘axiom’ does not 
suggest the ground on which these foundation stones are introduced 
into this system of geometry, or their relation to the system. The 
word “assumption” on the other hand, is not suggestive of self- 
evidentness or of any appeal to previous knowledge. It is important 
to keep this point clearly in mind, otherwise the whole spirit of this 
system of geometry may be lost sight of. 

From the preceding assumptions we see that there is an unlimited 
number of points on a straight line, of straight lines in a plane, and 
of planes in space. 

For from (2%) we see there is an unlimited number of points on 
a straight line. | 

Also A, B, C being [I, (6) | three points on a plane, not co- 
straight, then A, B determine one straight 
line and A, C another. On each of these 
lines there is an unlimited number of 
points, and every different combination of a 
point on one with a point on another de- 
termines a different straight line. For the 
line determined by B’’, C’’ could not be the 
line determined by B’, OC’. If it were, then 
each would be both of the lines A Band AC 
[I. (2)], and the points A, B, C would be co- 
straight, which is contrary to hypothesis. 

Similarly A, B, C, D being four non-co- 
planar points we reach an unlimited number of 
planes in space. A 


Theorem 6.—A, B, C are three non-co-straight 
points. Then a straight line cannot have 
points within all three sects B C, C A, AB D 
For let D, E, F be points of such a straight line. Of the three points 
D, E, F, one of them, say E, must be between the other two [II. (3) ]. 


[BAKER] THE FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY 119 


Then [II. (4)] A C, through E, must have a point in common with 
D Bor FB. That is, AC meets B C or B A in two points, which is 
impossible [Thm. 1}. . 
A And now we reach a theorem from which we 
F first realize that a line has ‘‘sides,” and that it 
divides a plane in the way in which in Euclid, 
without hesitation,we assume, it divides the plane, 
Theorem 7.—Kyery straight line a in a plane 
divides the plane into two regions such that all 
1 points P, P’,... of one region determine sects 
that have no points in common with a; and all points Q, Q’,... of the 
other region determine sects that have no point in common with a; but 
every one of the points P, P’, . . . of one region determines with 
every one of the points Q, Q’,...of the other region a sect that hasa 
point in common with a. 
Let A be a point not in a; and let 
P, P’... be points such that the sects 
A P, A P’,... have no point in com- 
mon with a; also let Q, Q’,... be 
points such that AQ, A Q’,... have 
points in common with a. ‘Then if 
a had a point in common with P P’, 


B : D 


it would have a point in common 
with A Por A P’ [II., (4)], which by 
hypothesis it has not. Hence P P’ 
has no point in common with a. Again, since A Q, A Q’ have points in 
common with a, therefore, Q Q’ has no point in common with a [Thm. 6]. 
Also since A Q has a point in common with a, and A P no point in com- 
mon with a; therefore, P Q has a point in common with a [II., (4)]. 

It is here assumed that A being taken not in a, there are points 
giving sects with points in common with a, and others not having 


, such common points. This can readily be proved: 


? For BC [I, (3)] being points on a, 
there exists a point P in B A 
such that A lies between P and B 
[II, (2)]; and, therefore, A P has no 
point in common with a. Again, 
between B, C there exists on a a 
point D[II, (2)]; and on the straight 
| line determined by A, D there exists 
a point Q such that D lies between A and Q [IT, (2)]. Hence A Q hasa 
point in common with a. 


120 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Every triangle divides the plane into two regions. There is the 
region which lies on the A side of a, the B side of b, and the C side 
of c, which we may speak 
of as the region within the 
triangle; and there is the 
rest of the plane constituting 
the other region. Evidently 
in passing from one of these 
regions to the other we pass 
from one side to the other 
of at least one of the straight 
lines a, b,c; and therefore 
our sect-train has a point 
in common with one of 
the sects A B, B C or C A 
[Thm. 7]. 

Theorem 8.—There are straight lines wholly without a triangle 
and in its plane; and no straight line is wholly within a triangle. 


For the straight line determined 
by the points D and E cannot again 
meet aor b. Nor can it meet A B 
for then [II, (4)] it would meet A C 
or BO, i.e., would again meet à or a. 

Again,any straight line(/)through 
L, a point within the triangle, has 
also a point on the side. For another 
line through L, and also through M, 
has a point on another side, say N 
on BC [II, (4)]. Hence /, through a point on MN, a side of the triangle 
M N C, must also have a point in common with either C M or C N, i.e., 
with A C or BC [1X, (4)]. Hence, too, cutting AC or B C, it must 
[II, (4)] cut another side also. 


III. The assumptions of congruence. 

We might, in a measure, describe conditions here by saying that 
the fundamental principle is uniqueness,—the principle of there-is-only- 
one-such. 

(1). If A, B be points on a straight line a, and A’ a point on straight 
line a’. Then on a’, on one of the two rays from <A’, we can find only 
one point B’, such that the sect A’ B’ is congruent to sect AB. Written 
AB=A'B. 


{BAKER] THE FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY 121 


Every sect is congruent to itself. The sect AB is congruent to 
the sect B A. 

The assumption means that a given sect can be taken on a given 
straight line, and on a given side of a given point, in one and only 
one way. 

(2). Sects that are congruent to the same sect are congruent to 
one another. 

(3). If AB, BC be two sects on the same straight line and 
without common points except B, and likewise A’ B’, B’ C’ two sects 
on the same straight line and without common points except B’, if 
fA Band BC = B'C’, then is AC = A’C’. 

(4). There is in a plane, and on the same side of B’ C’, only 
one ray B’ A’ such that the angle A’ B’ C’ is congruent to the angle 
meee. Written <— A’ B’'C’=< ABC. 

Every angle is congruent to itself. Also < ABC=<CBA. 

This assumption means that in a given plane every angle can be laid 
off towards a given side, against a given ray, in one and only one way. 

(5). Angles that are congruent to the same angle are congruent to 
one another. 

(6). If A, B, C be three points, and A’ B’ C’ three other points, and if 

AB=A’'B’,AC=A’C,and<BAC=<B'A'C, 
then <a Ci A’ BC, and — ACB=<— A’ C' RB’. 


Here again, in (6), we are startled by the assumption which, I 
think, no one would speak of as a self-evident truth, just as we were 
startled by Pasch’s assumption, and in the long ago by Euclid’s eleventh 
axiom. It is no more apparent that < A BC=< A’ B’C’, than that 
BC=B’C’. However, we are justified in assuming what is necessary, 
but not in assuming more than is necessary ; and with the assumption of 
(6) we shall see that we are able to prove BC = B’ C’. 

Theorem 9.—In two triangles A B C, A’ B’ CO, if AB —A’ B’ 
A C = A'C’ and < BAC=< B’A’C,, then is BC = B’C’. 

A W Hor pby A (GERS LE 

=< A’'B’C’, Take then 

B’ C” congruent to B C. 

Then in triangles A BC, 

A’B’C” we have A B= A’B’, 

Be = B.C fA B.C 

< A B'C”. Therefore by 

(BAC ere BAS CT. 

c B’ ce” C° But by hypothesis << BAC 

=< B’ A’C’. Hence [III (5)] < B’ A’C’=< B’A’C”, which by III, 
(4), is impossible. Hence BC = B’C’. 


122 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Theorem 10.— Two triangles are congruent if a side in each and 
the adjacent angles are congruent. 
Let BC] BC, SA BC 


A A 

=) AlsB Chis ANC B= 
> ACB: A 

If A Bbenot = A’ B’, take 
BAY = BA) Then am: oi] 
the triangles A BC, A’’ B’C’ 
are congruent, and therefore 
< ACB] < ACB? Bat 

C BY Cc’ 


<ACB=<AC'B’. There- 2 

fore [III., (5)] < B’C’ A” =< B’C’A’, which is contrary to IIL, (4). 

Hence A B= A’ B’, and therefore [Thm. 9] the triangles are congruent. 
After shewing that if 


: (4 < AOB=< A'0'B 
B B and <BOC=<=5B' 0 Clas 
then < AOC=< A'0O'C'; 
and also that the angles 
at the base of an isosceles 
© A 0° A 


triangle are congruent, 
we are able to shew that if the three sides of one triangle are respectively 
congruent to the three sides of another, the triangles are congruent : 


ee Op =—0 BA 


A 4! 
and B’ A’ = BA. 
Then triangles A BC, 
A” B’ C’ are congruent. 
Therefore < B’ A’ A” = 
< BA Aland <= C'APAN 
=r CA" AY “Wherefore: \; Bi aa: Bs 
<8 Ae G0 — BA Cir 
< BAO; and the triangles 
A BO, A’ B’C’ are con- 
gruent [Thm. 9]. 
From the above we see 
My” 


that if A’, B’, C’ be three 
non-co-straight points, a point A’’ exists such that A” B’ = A’B’ and 
AN CN=ANO! 

We may also reach the general proposition that if ABC..., 
A' B'C’... be congruent figures, and P any point whatever, then there 
exists a point P’, such that the figures A BC...P, A’ B'C’':..P’ are 


[BAKER] THE FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY 123 


congruent; also if ABC... P contains four non-co-planar points, then 
the construction of P’ is possible in only one way. 

With this general proposition before us we see that the facts of 
ecngruence are resolvable into “assumptions of congruence” as ele- 
ments. Or we may express the same idea by saying that the question 
of the possible existence of two distinct congruent associations of points 
is shown to be resolvable into the elementary “ assumptions of con- 
gruence ” given above. In consequence, Professor Halsted says that 
we thus “ found the idea of motion upon the congruence assumptions ” ; 
and Sommer of Gottingen, in his review of Hilbert’s “ Grundlagen der 
Geometrie,” (Bulletin, Am. Math. Soc., Vol. vi, p. 289), speaks of 
the definition of motion as based on the assumptions of congruence. 
It is, however, of importance to note that the words of Hilbert are, 
“All the facts concerning space which have reference to congruence, 
that is to say, to displacements in space, are exclusively the consequences 
of the six assumptions of congruences.” Hilbert, therefore, here says 
in effect that congruence is displacement. When, as above, we state 
the congruence idea with reference to a system of points, we are stating 
it with reference to any rigid body. We, however, are conveying the 
idea of all its force, though in the simpler form, in the very first of 
the assumptions of congruence, that respecting two sects. I think we 
may admit that there is a sense, in the purely rational geometry of 
Hilbert, in which the idea of congruence precedes the idea of motion. 
for, indeed, Hilbert has so arranged it. We admit that there is a 
sect congruent to AB in all positions. We conclude, therefore, that 
space is such as to admit of the transference of AB to any position, 
i.e., we reach the idea of motion. If, however, we are dealing with 
a geometry into which experience in the least enters, the existence 
elsewhere of a sect congruent to AB seems to me to depend on the 
idea that A B may be transferred anywhere; 1.e., the idea of motion 
precedes the idea of congruence. The matter is of interest since, 
en the ground that the idea of congruence precedes the idea of motion, 
Professor Halsted protests against the use of superposition in proving 
theorems in congruence, as we do, for example, in proving the con- 
gruence of triangles in our ordinary elementary geometry. He says 
“to prove the congruence assumptions and theorems with the help of 
the motion idea, is false and fallacious, since the intuition of ‘gid 
motion involves, contains and uses the congruence idea.” 


PARALLELS. 


The definition of parallels is that they are coplanar straight lines 
with no common point. 


124 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


It is then possible to show that through a given point (A) without 
a given straight line (BC), there is always one straight line parallel 
to the given one (BC). 

For let < DA Bbe=< ADO, 
and suppose that A B meets C B. 
Let DC be = AB. Then the 
triangles B A D, C D A are con- 
gruent, and the angles similarly 
marked are equal. Hence the angles at A are ‘adjacent angles,’ and 
we should have the straight line B A C meeting B C in two points. 


IV. Assumption of parallels. 

It is then assumed that,— 

Through a given point there is not more than one parallel to a 
given straight line. 

The geometry is thus made Euclidean. 


V. Assumption of continuity. 

Finally there is the assumption of continuity, frequently spoken 
of as the axiom of Archimedes :— 

If A, be any point on a straight line between any given points 
A and B; and the points A,, A, .... be taken on the line such that 
A, lies between A and A,, A, between A, and A,, etc.; and such that 
the sects A A,, A, A,, .... are all congruent; then in the series of 
points A,, Aj, ... . there is always a point A, such that B lies between 
A and Ay. 

This makes possible the introduction into geometry of the idea 
of continuity, and is the expression of the idea of continuity in terms 
of a sect calculus. It claims that the magnitudes with which we deal 
in geometry are continuous. 

The statement of this principle by Archimedes constitutes his fifth 
assumption and is as follows: “Further, of unequal lines, unequal 
surfaces, and unequal solids, the greater exceeds the less by such a 
magnitude as, when added to itself, can be made to exceed any assigned 
magnitude among those which are comparable with one another.” 
It will be remembered that Euclid in his definitions (Def. 4, Bk. V) ; 
says, “ Magnitudes are said to have a ratio to one another when the 
less can be multiplied so as to exceed the greater.” Proposition 1 of 
Book X, Euclid, which constitutes Lemma 1 of Book XII, is as fol- 
lows: “If from the greater of two unequal magnitudes there be taken . 
more than its half, and from the remainder more than its half, and 
so on; there shall at length remain a magnitude less than the least 


[BAKER] THE FOUNDATIONS OF GEOMETRY 125 


of the proposed magnitudes.” In the demonstration of this Lemma, 
Euclid says, “ For C (the less of the magnitudes) may be multiplied 
so as at length to become greater than A B (the greater of the mag- 
nitudes),” which is a statement of this principle of continuity, and 
which Euclid evidently bases on Definition 4, Book V. Euclid uses 
this Lemma in the demonstration of Prop. 2, Book XII, “ Circles are 
to one another as the squares on their diameters,” and Archimedes 
frequently assumes it. Indeed, it constitutes the foundation of the 
Method of Exhaustions from which descended our Infinitesimal Calculus. 
I have thought this historical reference worth making that the place 
this assumption of Archimedes occupies in science may be the more 
manifest. 

Such then are the assumptions which Hilbert makes the foundations 
of geometry. It will be observed that they all refer to geometrical 
magnitude, whereas, of the axioms of Euclid only three are really 
geometrical,— the eighth (magnitudes which coincide are equal). the 
eleventh, and the twelfth (two straight lnes cannot enclose a finite 
space), the tenth (all right angles are equal to one another) being 
capable of proof. . 

It is, of course, essential that these assumptions should be (1) con- 
sistent with one another, and (2) independent of one another. First 
with respect to the question of consistency: “As geometry is built 
up by the indefinitely repeated application of the axioms, the possi- 
bility is not excluded that a contradiction might appear only after an 
unlimited repetition of such application” (Sommer, Bulletin, Am. 
Math. Soc., Vol. VI, p. 291). To settle the question Hilbert trans- 
lates his groups of assumptions into the domain of numbers, the number 
concept being presumably entirely abstract, and, therefore, independent 
of experience. Any inconsistency would then appear in the arith- 
metical form of the assumptions, and the search may be a possible 
performance. Next, with respect to the independence of the assump- 
tions of one another: The examination is here made by leaving out 
each assumption in turn, and showing that without it a perfectly inde- 
pendent and consistent system of geometry can be constructed in which 
the omitted assumption does not hold. The method, of course, is 
suggested by the way in which non-Euclidean geometry has been 
built up. 

Professor Halsted’s presentation of Hilbert’s system of geometry, 
a presentation which, having regard to the newness of the ideas, must 
be spoken of as consummately able, has been undertaken with a view 
to popularizing this rational geometry. I conjecture that most edu- 
cators will think it impossible for school purposes. Let me, however. 


126 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


recall a mathematical story: “About 1570 Sir Henry Savile, warden 
of Merton College, endeavoured to create an interest in mathematical 
studies by giving a course of lectures on Greek geometry . . . On 
concluding the course he used the following language: ‘By the grace | 
of God, gentlemen hearers, I have performed my promise; I have 
redeemed my pledge. I have explained, according to my ability, the 
definitions, postulates, axioms, and the first eight propositions of the 
elements of Euclid. Here, sinking under the weight of years, I lay 
down my art and my instruments’” (Cajori, p. 281). If in 1570 
the work named was the possible performance of university students, 
while to-day schoolboys accomplish the six books of Euclid, or their 
equivalent, surely a time may come when schoolboys will find no diffi- 
culty with the abstractions of Hilbert’s geometry, and the truth of 
Professor Halsted’s claim may be felt, that “ Geometry at last made 
rigorous is also thereby made more simple.” 


Section III., 1906. [127 ] Trans. R. S. C. 


VIIL.—Temperature Records of Nocturnal Radiation. 
By Howarp T. Barnes, D.Sc. 
Associate Professor of Physics, McGill University, Montreal. 
(Read May 28rd, 1906). 


The problem of the nocturnal cooling of the atmosphere and the 
earth is one of such importance in meteorology that it has attracted 
the attention of many investigators. 

On clear nights the surface of the earth is cooled by emission 
cf heat into space. The temperature of the lower layers of air 
fall, and being heavier remain on the ground. It has been shown by 
Tyndall and others that pure dry air is almost completely diathermanous 
to heat waves, and hence, during a clear, cold night in winter, very 
little, if any, radiation takes place from the air to the sky. 

We know also that the character of the radiation from the earth 
into space must be different to the forms of radiation usually 
studied, such as that from a heated body to the face of a ther- 
mophile. The radiation from a low temperature source, such as a sur- 
face at 100°, is composed of a greater proportion of long heat rays than 
the radiation from a high temperature source, such as an incandescent 
mantle, or arc light. Little or nothing is known of the character of 
the radiation from a cold surface, such as the earth in winter, to the 
absolute cold of space. The inadequacy of applying the results obtained 
ii a study of the radiation from hot bodies to the problems of nocturnal 
radiation is at once apparent. 

So difficult is the treatment of the problem that very little has 
at present been done. 

Dr. 8. Tetsu Tamura has shown this very well in a paper on the 
Mathematical Theory of the Nocturnal Cooling of the Atmosphere! 
in which he gives a careful historical survey of the various experimental 
results that have been obtained. 


HISTORICAL. 


In 1783, Patrick Wilson ? of Glasgow, suspended a mercury ther- 
mometer, at a height of about four feet above the surface of the snow 
in an open field, under a clear sky and calm atmosphere, at night. A 
second thermometer was placed on the snow surface. He observed on 
one occasion a difference of six degrees Fahrenheit between the two 
thermometers. The one on the snow read —21-7° Fahr., and the one 


*Monthly Weather Review 33 p. 138 (1905). 
?Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin. I p. 153, 1783. 


128 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


suspended in the air read —15-0° Fahr. The difference diminished 
rapidly when clouds appeared on the horizon, and vanished when the 
sky was completely covered. Wilson also was the first to show that 
the radiation of bodies towards the sky is practically the same at all 

temperatures of the air. 

In 1794, Six showed that the radiation from the grass on a 
meadow during calm and clear nights was sufficient to cool a ther- 
inometer below one suspended five or six feet above it. In one case 
he reports a difference of 7-5° Fahr. 

About the beginning of 1800, Dr. Wells made a careful study of 
the earth’s radiation at night. He placed thermometers in contact 
with the ground and leaves: of plants as well as enveloping the bulbs 
in wool or cotton. These thermometers placed at a small distance 
from the earth’s surface gave a fall of 4:5° Fahr., and even 7-8° Fahr. 
below a similar thermometer uncovered and suspended at a height of 
four feet. 

Differences of 8° and 9° Fahr. were obtained by Pouillet, in 1844, 
who repeated Wells’ experiments. 

In 1847 the experiments of Melloni were performed. On account 
of his classical researches in the domain of radiant heat he was well fitted 
to investigate the problem of terrestrial radiation. 

He came to the conclusion that the cooling of a black thermometer 
is owing to radiation, and that the radiation from a metallic ther- 
mometer was too small to be observed. 

Nearly all of our knowledge of the radiation of heat has been 
chtained from researches with high temperature sources where the pro- 
portion of short waves and visible rays is very much larger than from 
low temperature sources. 

The diathermancy of many substances for rays from incandescent 
bodies was studied by Meiloni and his table is familiar to everyone. 
The same investigator extended his study to the radiation from a 
copper ball heated to 400° Cent., and to that from the face of a Leslie 
cube containing boiling water. 

It was found that many substances, which allowed a considerable 
proportion of the high temperature radiation, including the light rays 
to penetrate, were opaque to the rays of a low temperature source. 

In general we find that the higher the temperature the more of 
the short waves are produced and the less of the long waves. <A study 
ef the very long heat waves is a matter of great interest on account 
cf the relation which these waves have to electrical waves. 

A good deal of attention has been devoted of late to separating 
out the long waves from a source of radiation and determining the 
properties of these waves. 


ra 


[Barnes] TEMPERATURE RECORD OF NOCTURNAL RADIATION 129 


It was found that by successive reflection of the heat waves on 
quartz or sylvine surfaces that very long waves could be isolated and 
studied. 

A very good statement of the limits of our present knowledge in 
regard to the long heat waves has been given by Professor E. F. Nichols, 
of the University of Columbia, in a paper entitled, The Unobtained 
Wave Lengths between the Longest Thermal and the Shortest Electric 
Waves yet Measured, which was presented at the International Electrical 
Congress at St. Louis in 1904. In considering the present boundaries 
he points out the great advance which has been made in the measure- 
ment of the long waves by successive reflection from crystalline surfaces, 
such as quartz. After five reflections on sylvine surfaces, waves of 
61 x in length have been isolated and measured. In character these 
long waves resemble electric waves more closely than they do light 
waves. All metallic surfaces reflect them about equally and almost 
entirely. The relations between reflecting power and electric con- 
ductivity and between refractive index and dielectric constant hold 
more rigidly than in light waves. It has been possible to demonstrate 
with conducting areas of suitable dimensions the same laws of resonance 
for heat waves which were known previously only for electric waves. 

Professor Nichols further questions how much farther the method 
of isolation by multiple reflection which has yielded so much can be 
carried. Substances are known which should have regions of absorption 
and metallic reflection beyond 60 yu; but the difficulty of experimenting 
is very great. Rubens has calculated that from a black body at 2000° C. 
the intensity of the radiation of waves of the length of 1:5 x is 800,000 
times greater than for waves of 60 yw. If the total energy between 
wave lengths 50 4 and 60 y be taken as unity, the total energy between 
60 yw and 100 w will be 0:7, and between 100 x and 1000 yw only 
about 0:2. 

It will be seen then how small a proportion of the very long waves 
exist compared to the shorter waves. Turning to the electric spectrum, 
Professor Nichols points out that, beginning with the 60 cm. waves of 
Hertz, Righi, Lebedew and Lampa have successively reduced them. 
Lampa, using an apparatus differing in no essential respect from the 
infra-red grating spectrometer, was able to obtain and make measure- 
ment with waves only 4 mm. long. 

Summing up the complete ether spectrum, Professor Nichols 
shows, beginning with Schumann’s and Lyman’s short ultra-violet waves 
of the order of 0-14 , that we have about two octaves in the ultra-violet, 
one in the visible, and six in the infra-red spectrum, making nine in 
all. The shortest electric waves yet produced begin about six octaves 

Sec. III., 1906. 9. 


130 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


lower in the scale. I show in Fig. 1 a diagram of the ether spectrum, 
as we now know it, which illustrates very well the relation of the 
known ether waves. 

TERRESTRIAL RADIATION. 


It is probable that the radiation from the earth’s surface consists 
of a large proportion of the long heat waves. 

On a clear, cold night in an arctic winter the character of the 
radiation into space at the absolute zero of temperature (—273° C.) 
must be of much interest. 

The problem is of importance in considering the formation of ice 
in our lakes and rivers, but on account of the difficulty of applying 
any of the known laws of heat radiation to it, the matter is exceedingly 
difficult to treat at all completely. 

Thus, it was shown by Melloni and Tyndall that water and ice 
are both opaque to the radiation from a low temperature source, such 


THERMAL D ELECTRICAL 


ures w 

w = 
< = Le] 
ec o = 
my |e 
=) = > 


Olu 0-4 Oe ave 3mm 100 mm 


Fie. 1. SPECTRUM OF ETHER WAVES, THE DARK PORTION SHOWING THE 
UNEXPLORED REGION. 


as a copper ball heated to 400° C. or to 100° C. At the same time, 
we know that ice formation goes on in a river through quite large 
masses of water and ice, when clear and free from surface snow. 
Anchor-ice forms at the bottom of a river, under circumstances 
which leave no doubt that radiation has given rise to its production. 
The absorption of the heat waves by water has been traced by Rubens 
and Aschkinass in 1898, to waves as long as 60 mw. It is likely then 
that the radiation which is responsible for the production of anchor- 
ice must be beyond 60 , and well into the unexplored region. Drude? 
has shown that water is opaque to electrical waves of 9 centimetres, 
but transmits waves of 60 cm. in length. A region of transparency 
must be then between waves ‘060 mm. and 90 mm., to be followed 
by another at 600 mm. The radiation from the earth consists probably 
of a large proportion of the waves in the unexplored region between the 
longest thermal and shortest electri@al waves yet measured. 


EXPERIMENTAL. 


As a continuation of my studies of anchor-ice formation it was 
decided to determine, if possible, the amount of penetration of the 


1Drude, Wied. Ann. 65, 499 (1898). 


[Barnes] TEMPERATURE RECORD OF NOCTURNAL RADIATION 131 


earth’s radiation through water and clear ice. To do this two exactly 
similar platinum thermometers were constructed from flat mica plates 
10 x 4 em. in size. The wire, 50 ohms resistance, was wound on 
and soldered to copper leads threaded in the mica. Each thermometer 
was placed in a box, blackened on the inside, and provided with a 
hinged cover. The thermometers were connected differentially to a 
Callendar electric recorder which was kindly lent me by Dr. Porter, 
Director of the Mining Department at McGill University. 

Fig. 2 shows the thermometers in their respective boxes. 

The boxes were placed side by side on the roof of the porch over 
the entrance to the Physics Building, and wires were taken to the 
laboratory across the front of the building and in at the window, where 
they were attached to the recorder. The recorder itself was placed 


Fie. 2. RADIATION THERMOMETERS, 


on a firm shelf, and was very conveniently located for examining the 
character of the records produced. When both of the covers of the 
boxes containing the thermometers, which we shall designate P and C, 
were closed down the thermometers indicated equal temperatures and 
were subject only to atmospheric disturbances. If either P or C were 
opened to the sky at night, the exposed thermometer at once became 
cooled by its own radiation below the closed thermometer situated 
alongside of it. 

To obtain the screening of any material it was merely necessary 
to place it over the exposed thermometer, when the trace on the 
recorder indicated the effect. A box with a glass bottom was made in 
which water or a saturated solution of salf, when the air temperature 
was below the freezing point, could be placed. 

Glass covers were made for the boxes which could be slipped in 
place under the hinged wooden covers. 


132 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Before constructing these special thermometers some experiments 
were tried with the differential thermometers which are in use at the 
McGill College Observatory, to obtain the temperature at the top of 
Mount Royal. These have already been described by Professor C. 
H. McLeod and myself. The mountain thermometer was brought 
down to the observatory grounds and connected alongside of the low 
level thermometer cage. Equality, or zero traces were carefully made 


Wo urrnal Faada1or7 
LULL? Leby 06. 


D ARR 
A RE D 
Bi ae PE 


SEE 


72 a8 9 772 AA 42 75! “Fy 


PCR 271 27 “3 “o 


Fic. 3. RADIATION TRACE, MINIMUM AIR TEMPERATURE 0° FAHR. SHOWING 
EFFECT OF CLOUDS. 

with the thermometers screned, and as nearly as possible at equal 
temperatures. One of the thermometers was then removed from the 
sereen, and placed just over the cage, and exposed to the sky. The 
recorder at once showed that the thermometer was cooled, and the 
trace was continued on several occasions all night. It was a matter 
of considerable interest to observe the magnitude of the cooling, and 
to note the effect of a cloudy, or partially cloudy sky. 


Natturral Magio/1or. 
LIL Faby 06. 
Æ 
D 7 Le 
D 


zs 2 s 6 > ] 9 7/0 224 42 15 7/4 4ST 46 “7 7/0 7/9 20 al 


Fie. 4 RADIATION TRACE, MINIMUM AIR TEMPERATURE 3° FAHR. SHOWING 
CLOUD EFFECTs. 


Fig. 3 shows one of these traces on a partly cloudy night. The 
maximum cooling was 6° F. at 12.45 a.m. 

Fig. 4 is another trace showing similar effects. The thermometer 
was taken out of the cage and exposed at about 5-15, where the depar- 


1Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 10, 71 (1904). 


[Barnes] TEMPERATURE RECORD OF NOCTURNAL RADIATION 133 


ture of the trace from the line of equal temperatures is shown. The 
return of the trace to the zero line and over to the warm side shows 
when the sun’s rays came on to the instrument. 

Before commencing the traces on the flat thermometers at the 
Physics Building, a number of zero traces were obtained which shows 
the small inequalities of air currents on the flat thermometers. Fig. 5 
illustrates this very well. Figs. 6 and 7 show characteristic traces 
with glass covers over the boxes. The wooden cover was open over 


Noclyrnal Hodiafiorr 
€ 227 March 06. 


Fic. 5. ZERO TRACE. 


thermometer P, and the trace travelled to the left. The maximum 
cooling effect was 2° Cent. Figs. 8 and 9 show direct radiation 
traces with the glass plates removed, the maximum cooling is seen to 
be slightly less than 4° Cent., 7:2° Fahr. The next three Figs., 10, 
11 and 12, are similar traces, illustrating the different conditions of 
clearness of the sky. In every case the time of opening the wooden 
cover is clearly shown and was generally between 5 and 6 o’clock in 
the afternoon, when the sun was shadowed by the building. Usually 
the cover was closed again in the early morning to avoid the effect of 
the sun’s rays. In Fig. 11 the sun had affected the readings before 
the cover was closed. 


Nocturnal Feadotion. 
2728 Lely 26, 


Fic. 6. RADIATION THROUGH GLASS PLATE, 1 MM. THICK, AIR TEMPERATURE 
0° FAHR. SKY VERY CLEAR. 


Fig. 13 illustrates the screening effect of glass and a saturated 
solution of salt. The glass covers were placed over the thermometers 
and the wooden cover of P opened at 7.45 p.m. The departure of 
the trace from the zero line previous to this was caused by some adjust- 
ments at the recorder, and does not indicate a displacement of the 
zero. At the time indicated on the diagram by the line B, a wooden 
box, provided with a glass bottom of similar thickness to the glass 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


34 


‘dHV I 06 HHALVAIANAT HIV WANININ ‘HVATI) AUDA LHOIN ‘LOHHI( AMS OL NOILVIGVY ‘8 ‘DI 
hors of Ov Or 2 97 F7 Æ/ £7 ev 22 oO 6 > Z o 


02 FAN FHF 
WOLYOYOD LY” [PUM TON 


‘UVATIO AUFTA AMS ‘HUVI 608 TUALVUTIWAY, UY ‘MOIH], ‘WH [ ‘SSVI HONOUHY, NOILVIGVY ‘L'OLA 


DO FLV TE 


LOMO PS,  JOUIT/ION 


[BARNES] TEMPERATURE RECORD OF NOCTURNAL RADIATION 135 


q 


TC 
“1 OO. 
feAer 


723, Le 


Z 


Nocurnral Favor ion 


Ÿ 
S 
& 
à. 
| 
SN 
À 
Ÿ 


PARTLY CLOUDY. MINIMUM AIR TEMPERATURE 16° FAHR. 


Fig. 10. RADIATION TO SKY DIRECT. VERY CLEAR. MINIMUM AIR TEMPERATURE 43° FAHR. 


Fie. 9. RADIATION TO SKY DIRECT. 


a a + 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


136 


‘UHV, Sh GUOLVUAdMINAY YY ‘HNINUHOJN SGUVMOT, LSVOUAACQ ‘ LSulq LV UVAT) LHOIN ‘LOHHI(T AMS OL NOILVIGVY 


90 (HL (HOF 
DOOYOO fOUS)JIOYY 


‘UHV J off TUOLVUAMNAL UY NONININ ‘NMOHS SŒNOTO dO LOHAAH ‘LOHUI( AHS OL NOILVIAVY ‘II ‘OL 


DO, 7787 FT 


27/00 jens foo 


“OT OI 


[parnes] TEMPERATURE RECORD OF NOCTURNAL RADIATION 137 


cover, was placed over the thermometer P, and at the same time the 
glass cover was slipped out. At the line c, the salt solution was poured 
into the trough and covered the glass bottom to a depth of about 1 cm. 
The solution had been prepared in the afternoon and allowed to stand 
in a flask outside several hours in order that its temperature should 
be equal to that of the thermometer. At d the glass cover was put 
over the trough, so that at this point the radiation was penetrating 
two sheets of glass and about one centimetre of salt solution. At e the 
trough was removed and the glass cover slipped back into place leaving 
the conditions the same as at first. It was impossible, of course, to 
obtain a trace through the water alone without first passing it through 
some transparent rigid substance. Hence, this test of penetration is 
only on such rays as succeed in passing unabsorbed through glass. We 
can say from this test that water would not absorb more than this, 
but at the same time it might absorb less. The effect of the radiation 
through the water was enough to cool the thermometer nearly a degree 


Neclurnal § fRadbafwon 
a Marc 06. 26. 


D Ne ne 


4 ra 4 9 72 


Fig. 13. RADIATION THROUGH SALT SOLUTION. MINIMUM AIR TEMPERATURE 
° FAHR. 


and a half. Unfortunately, I did not obtain the maximum cooling 
with the thermometer exposed directly to the sky, to give a comparative 
test for the maximum radiation at that time. The general direction 
of the trace is to show the radiation slightly falling off after 8.30 
o'clock quite independent of the presence of the various screens. 

I endeavoured to obtain some clear substance which would cut off 
less of the radiation than glass. Mica is known to be fairly trans- 
parent to the shorter heat rays, but from the character of the trace 
shown in Fig. 14 it is evidently fairly opaque to the earth’s radiation. 
In Fig. 14, at 3.30 p.m., the cover of C was opened and the 
maximum radiation at that time determined with no screen over the 
thermometer. The trace is, of course, in this case over to the right. 
As soon as the trace was observed to be steady, a thin mus- 
covite mica plate was placed over the thermometer. The screening 
effect was sufficient to bring the trace back to zero almost at once, 
where it continued until about 5.30, when a small deviation to the 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


138 


"AHVY of AUNOLVHAAMA], AIY WANININ ‘HOI HVAT) SHHONI Z HONOHHI], NOILVIAVY ‘CI ‘OLA 


1€ Or or Ors LS or Fr 2 Ev ee 


DO TLV THIF 
LOL LOL) fOU7/IGY 


“HAVA ofZ AUALVHHANA], uly WOWINIW ‘086 LV ŒHAONAU ALVIQ ‘6 aNVF NHAMIAG ALV'Id VOIN HONOXHI NOILVIGVY ‘FI ‘OL 


90, (“OY PL JE 


UO//0 Ve fOL A7 207 


[BarNEs] TEMPERATURE RECORD OF NOCTURNAL RADIATION 139 


right took: place and lasted until 9.30, when the plate was removed 
entirely. The trace for the remainder of the night was for the direct 
radiation to the sky. I can only account for the radiation through 
the mica plate after 5.30 as (due to a clearer sky or to a diminution 
of absorption of diffused sunlight as the evening approached. The 
mica plate was of a light yellow colour. 

In Fig. 15 is shown the radiation through two inches of a clear 
ice block, which was cut from a large block of clear river ice. At 
8.30 the wooden cover of thermometer P was opened and the maximum 
cooling obtained. Between 9 and 10 some ice blocks were tried of 
different thicknesses and clearness, with varying results. At 9.45 the 
two inch block was put in place and left over the thermometer for the 


Svecturrial faoiafion 
LYL9 March OC. 


Fie. 16. RADIATION THROUGH 4 INCHES CLEAR ICE, COMPARED WITH RADIATION 
DIRECT. AIR TEMPERATURE 28° FAHR. 


remainder of the night. It will be seen that the radiation reaches 
very nearly the maximum attained for the early part of the night. 

In Fig. 16 is shown the effect of placing a block of clear ice four 
inches thick over the thermometer C, in this case at 7.15 o’clock. The 
trace from 4.35 to this time being for direct radiation. The ice block 
cuts the radiation down to about one-half of its previous value, since 
it was diminishing gradually from 6 to 7 o’clock. 

Owing to the stress of other duties the traces had to be discon- 
tinued, but it is hoped that further work may be carried out next 
winter, both on the transparency of various substances for the earth’s 
radiation during some extremely cold, clear weather, and in relation to 
the cloudiness of the sky. It seems likely that the traces might prove 
of service in meteorological work in the latter connection. 


Section III., 1906. [ 141 ] Trans, R, $, C, 


IX.—Further Notes on the Difference in Temperature between McGul 
College Grounds and Mount Royal, Montreal. 


By Pror. C. H. McLEoD and Dr. H. T. BARNES. 
PART I.—PRESENTED May, 1905. 


Since the presentation of our preliminary report to the Royal 
Society of Canada last year on the differential temperature records 
between the summit of Mount Royal and the McGill College Observa- 
tory* another set of records has been obtained during the winter 
months, which help to confirm our conclusions in regard to the value of 
these records as a means of foretelling temperature conditions. Unfor- 
tunately we cannot at the present time make our second communication 
as complete as we shoula like, owing to a serious fault which developed 
in our long distance cable shortly after the end of May, 1904. This re- 
sulted:from the giving out of the insulation in the cable as the warm 
weather set in, the degree of insulation being so impaired as to make 
temperature records impossible. 

After a long search involving considerable delay, the fault was 
located in a cut which had been made about a year previously by some 
malicious person. ‘The repairs to the cable at this point had not been 
sufficiently carefully made by those in charge of the work, and water had 
percolated through a portion of the junction of the lead sleeve placed 
over the splice. During the cold weather any water which had entered 
produced no appreciable error, but with the advent of the warm weather, 
and the spring rains matters grew steadily worse. 

Owing to the stress of other duties which prevented adequate time 
being devoted to the work it was late in the autumn of 1904 before the 
cable was sufficiently repaired to make further readings possible. The 
repairs consisted in opening the cable at the splice, drying it out and 
adding a new lead sleeve. 

Tests of insulation then followed which showed that the separate 
wires were in fair condition but not perfect, amounting to two or three 
megohms for the worst cases. As the cold weather was approaching, 
when any fault of insulation would be reduced to a minimum, it was 
decided to go on with the work and defer until spring any further 
repairs to the line. 

The determination of the absolute temperature of the mountain top 
compared with that of the observatory depends on so many factors that 


1Elevations above sea level respectively 754 and 180 ft. 


142 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


it was thought desirable to devote a considerable amount of time to a 
determination of the zero of the instrument under varying conditions of 
weather. For this purpose it Was necessary to operate the recorder with- 
out the thermometer bulbs in their respective places. ‘The long leads 
running to the top of the mountain, a distance of over 4100 feet wer? 
therefore connected together as well as the compensating leads at the top 
of the tower. At the observatory the thermometer bulbs were joined in 
series with these wires, where they were connected to the re- 
corder, and were placed side by side in a vessel of water in order to keep 
them at equal temperatures. It was not found necessary to immerse the 
thermometers in ice to obtain the zero since the zero was merely the point 
of equal temperature at the bulbs. On account of the care taken to 
adjust the two thermometers to equality at the outset no appreciable 
shift in zero took place when the point of equal temperature was shifted 
along the temperature scale. 

A test of this kind ranging over a long period is of the greatest im- 
portance in determining how adequate the compensating leads are in cor- 
recting for changes in temperature in the main leads. We had pre- 
viously noticed when determining the zero in this way that small varia- 
tions took place, resulting in a slightly zigzag line in place of the perfect- 
ly straight line, which is obtained when the recorder is connected to ratio 
coils of equal resistance. In the main it is possible to distinguish these 
small irregularities from the waves produced in the trace by small 
changes in temperature. 

In the present zero tests we noticed decided fluctuations which ap- 
peared both with the thermometer bulbs connected, and when we re- 
moved them entirely from the circuit. These irregularities were as 
before of the order of one degree on either side of a central line which 
we took as the zero. Sometimes the pen would remain to the 
right of the line for hours tracing its characteristic line, and at, other 
times we obtained the trace about the same amount to the left of the 
zero. In many cases we observed that the fluctations were more rapid 
and of greater extent, and the pen moved back and forth in half hourly, 
or hourly periods. 

In general we found that during the night we obtained the steadiest 
zero traces, and in particular when there was no wind. During a day 
with bright sunshine and high wind the trace was most unsteady. The 
approach of sunrise was in nearly every case accompanied by a slow 
displacement of the pen to the right of the zero. The variations noticed 
with a high wind would be accounted for by strains set up in the cable 
which would act in an irregular manner on the various wires, and the 


[M‘LEOD & BARNES] ON THE DIFFERENCE IN TEMPERATURE 143 


slow travelling of the pen to the right from the warming of the upper 
surface of the cable by the sun. 

It is impossible to determine which of the wires was located nearer 
to the top of the cable, but it is possible that either the main leads or the 
compensating leads run for a greater length near the upper part of the 
cable, which certainly detracts from the full value of the apparatus 
for temperature work. 

‘he present cable has 11 wires, 6 of which are used for the anemo- 
graph connection and four for the temperature records. It is very 
mutch to be desired that a separate lead covered cable having only four 
strands be procured for the temperature work. The insulation should be 
rubber and braid and the wires should be twisted in such a way as to 
bring all equally to the upper and lower portions of the cable. Since 
owing to lack of funds such a cable is quite out of the question at the 
present time we decided to go on with the work, utilizing the existing 
cable. Moreover the differences which we had previously measured were 
so large that an uncertainty in the leads of even a degree Fah. was of 
secondary importance. 

We were specially interested in the daily variations so we decided to 
pay less attention to the absolute readings for the present. The mag- 
nitude of the difference between the temperature on the mountain and 
observatory was of less importance than the relative differences from 
hour to hour. At the same time special watch had to be kept on a pos- 
sible shift of zero. 

After devoting about two months to obtaining a series of zero traces, 
the thermometers were put in place and on Jan. 9, 1905, the record of 
differences was resumed. 

Since the resistance of the leads is about 40 ohms and that of the 
thermometers is only 10, special care had to be taken to watch the per- 
mancy of the former. 


The Absolute Value of the Temperature Differences. 


We found that the differences were not so large as we had recorded 
in our previous winter’s work. No difference was observed at any time 
during the winter greater than 7 degrees Fah., while in our previous 
winter’s work we had obtained differences amounting to 20 or 25 degrees 
as will be seen by referring to the charts published in our previous paper. 

This can hardly be explained at the present time without a much 
greater study of the influence of climatic conditions, which it is hoped 
that further records may throw light upon. In general it may be said that 
the past winter was not so severe in the North, just above Montreal, to 


144 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


judge by the records of the inhabitants of that district, as the winter of 
1903-4. For instance, on one occasion when we recorded our greatest 
difference, colder on the mountain, the mercury was reported to have 
frozen in a thermometer as near as Ste. Rose, (20 miles), while during 
the winter just passed no such condition existed although the tempera- 
ture at the observatory as shown by the monthly averages was about the 
same for the two winters. 

Below we give the monthly average differences for February, March 
and: April and for comparison we reproduce those for the corresponding 
months of the year previous: 


Monta. 1904-5 1903-4 
Me DEWATY |: LR ile eis ieee ee Nee ema eee ME Cet —2.7 —8.1 
Marea EN M CRE EURE LIRE nt EI —2.0 —5.9 
April. rm Entente eee eaecece —3.1 —6.8 


Relative Temperature Differences. 


In general we find that the position of the trace, whether rising or 
falling, is of the greatest importance in determining the character of the 
temperature conditions at the lower station for the following 10 or +12 
hours. In neariy all cases of a sudden change of temperature we find 
that the high level instrument is affected several hours ahead. This is 
shown by the slow travelling of the pen across the sheet. A continued 
trace of positive differences (higher at the upper station) means weather 
conditions growing steadily milder at the low level. The following 
conditions have been observed to hold fairly accurately. 

1. Steady positive difference shows weather conditions growing 
milder. 

2. Increasing positive difference, or decreasing negative, indicates 
a change to milder weather. 

3. Decreasing positive difference means steady temperature con- 
ditions possibly growing colder. 

4. Increasing negative difference indicates temperature conditions 
growing colder at the lower level. 

5. Steady negative difference indicates steady and continued tem- 
perature conditions at the low level. 

All these represent changes at the low level following from 5 to 24 
hours after the difference is observed to change. A few examples taken 
from our last year’s records at random will serve as an illustration: On 
February 9th, a warm wave was indicated 9 hours before it reached the ob- 


[M‘LEoD & BARNES] ON THE DIFFERENCE IN TEMPERATURE j145 


servatory. On February 21st, a cold wave was indicated 5 hours, 
in advance as shown by an increasing negative difference. On February 
25rd x warm wave was observed to be approaching 12 hours before any 
change occurred at the lower station. On February 28th, a rapidly ad- 
yancing warm wave swept across the high level thermometer 5 hours 
ahead of any change on the observatory thermometer. 

The extent and’ duration of these differences would appear to 
indicate that estimates can be made for much longer periods ahead. 

On two occasions when a heavy fall of snow occurred the precipi- 
tation and consequent heat development in the upper atmosphere was 
noticed on the upper thermometer causing a decided trace far over to 
the positive side of the zero. 

It is evident that much further study must be made in which direc- 
tion and velocity of the wind must be considered together with other 
climatic conditions. 

Enough has been learned however, to make it of interest to carry on 
the work in the hope that useful material may be gathered which will 
aid local meteorological temperature forecasting. 


PART [1:—(presented May, 1906.) 


Since the preparation df the previous note which was too late for 
publication in the Transactions of last year, we have obtained another 
set of records during the winter just past (1905-06). 

We anticipated further trouble in our long distance cable with the 
advent of the warm weather during the spring of 1905. None 
developed, however, until the middle of June, when the insulation became 
insufficient for maintaining accurate records. On account of the absence 
during the summer of one of the authors, who has devoted special 
attention to the cable testing, no attempt was made to rectify the fault 
until the autumn, when the repairs having been completed, and tests 
made, the insulation was again found almost perfect, and the apparatus 
started. | 

Zero traces were obtained with both thermometers in the circuit at 
the observatory, in a similar manner to the tests described in Part I of 
this paper. 

The records obtained show an average monthly difference of tem- 
perature in degrees Fahrenheit at the two stations as follows :— 


December, 1905............ —3.0 (Lower Station warmer) 
dannany, | 1906.25.02. .2.\.. —2.2 
G6) Le eee —1.6 es 
March UT SORES Oe —2.5 LC 
April DS Se den ere —3.7 a 


Sec, III., 1906. 10 


146 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Traces for the latter half of December, showing the differential 
records and the temperature at both stations, are presented in further 
illustration of the applicability of the former to weather prognostication. 
The temperature traces have not been corrected for index error, but the 
two curves show the proper difference between the upper and lower 
stations. 

At noon on December 17th the temperature on the mountain be- 
came warmer than at the lower station, and so continued for ten hours, 
the temperature at the lower point falling slightly after 7 a.m. on the 
sth, when the change to warmer weather began and extended through 
more than 20 degrees. 

Before 10 o'clock a.m. on the 18th, while the temperature at the 
lower station was still increasing the differential record rapidly returned 
to zero, and then showed a negative difference which continued to 
increase at first rapidly and afterwards slowly for about 16 hours. 
he change to lower temperature at the Observatory took place 
at about 1.30 a.m. on the 19th, and continued through 15 degrees. 
The interval here noted between the change to a minus differ- 
ence and the commencement of cold weather at the lower 
station amounted to 16 hours. A difference of upwards 
of five degrees was maintained between the stations for about 
twelve hours, indicating steady cold at the lower station, after which the 
difference decreased slightly until midnight of the 19th. Shortly after- 
wards the approach of a warm wave was noted by a return to zero and 
the lower station showed the expected change some ten hours later (10 
a.m. of the 20th). In this case the differential record only just reached 
the zero, and after four hours fell away from it. As was to be expected, 
the temperature change at the lower station was of correspondingly 
small dimensions. 

Following this the record remained at or slightly below the 
normal difference for the month, and no considerable change occurred in 
the air temperature until the 22nd at 8 a.m. when, the approaching 
change was heralded by the differential thermometer at 3 a.m., or only 5 
hours in advance. Again the plus indications were of slight duration, 
and the warm period similarly brief. The following two days gave a 
period of steady temperature with a gradual approach to colder weather 
on the evening of the 24th, and no considerable fluctuation in difference 
from minus 5 degrees until midnight on the 24th, when for a few hours 
the record showed a plus sign reaching +3 degrees, and the air tempera- 
ture rose to 30 degrees at noon the following day, the 25th. Similar 
cases of advanced warning may be observed in the following days. The 
very extensive deviation to the plus side continuing from 3 p.m. on the 


2 


[M‘LEOD & BARNES] ON THE DIFFERENCE IN TEMPERATURE 147 


27th to 6 a.m. on the 29th was followed by the long period of warm 
weather covering the greater part of the 28th, the 29th, 30th and 31st, 
and although a normal minus deviation was recorded as early as 10 a.m. 
on the 29th, colder weather did not set in until midnight of the 30th. 
These results presented in tabulated form to show the interval of warning 
of an approaching change in temperature are as follows :— 


Character | Time at which expected Interval 


Time at which change was 
of change occurred at | of 
noted on Diff. Record. Indication. Lower Station. Warning. 
1905. 1905. 

December 17 12 noon....... Warmer | December 18 7a.m......... _ 19 hours 
fs STONE... Colder 19-30 am... | 16002 
s 19 12 midnight... Warmer “ 20102 m- yee Ne US re 
ar 22 |A: IN. ---- Warmer F D A 7 RL NC 
Me 24 12 midnight... Warmer a 25 12 noon...... | 12 


In the curves following will be seen the differential traces as ob- 
tained on the records from the temperature recorder. ‘The zero line, 
or line of equal temperature is indicated by a thicker mark. Over the 
zero line the differences are positive, indicating warmer on the mountain, 
while the reverse is the case below the line. 

In the thermograph records following the differential traces, the 
mountain temperature is shown on the trace through the small circles, 
the other trace giving the temperature at the lower station. 


(Note added Oct 2, 1906.) 


Tests of the insulation of the cable, made as the warm weather 
advanced in June, showed the lines to be almost perfect, and in conse- 
quence a ‘series of excellent traces has been obtained during the summer 
months. These will be analysed and presented in a future paper. 


Hours 


148 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


December (7th, 1903 


OF Ws I ren 
KR 

| dort] off apperence [of Forperortre | | [| | | | | | | Tt tT 12 

Pls cee Md ells ea le Ha LP ds) 

A Le Pade Zeid 

À BARON 

RME 

HE 

ale Sees ees 

im bs 

Sea Se SSS 


Peter 1e 


December 18t, 1905 


December (9th, 1905 


Ae ttt tL | td 7 
DERNIERE RES ewAoes 
ECAL ACER ZT = | RON Ent 
Conte Eu a ffl BEE EeSc cca 
sl atest Re ee Due à mi 
de pan 
DRASS pr pt 

PRs NN à 
Hide 

CRT nl 


ä 


149 


[M’LEOD & BARNES] ON THE DIFFERENCE IN TEMPERATURE 


"9 Tia 77 ore 6 2 ç - r 7 75 54 # 7 2 z 2 c e Ci D? 


fateh FEEL 
= Benes 
[ies Rae 20 ee esl 
SSSR SER en en | 
ne ae a a RETIRE ess | 
em nn en 


EE UAMOT UNV ene LV SOHOOAH AYOLVuad WAT, 


150 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


December 20th, 1905 


ab | | | + — : © 
Le of difference, of Témpérature | 

J ae un Alig! & dollede à roupds : 

Ey —; 2 

i RER 

A ee TA REENE Re ee ESS 
cs a i RS AR LE RER E MEURT 

CERN SASL. 
eee En É nn 
RARE ae eee es) pain 

Pree RL AP A a A a A EL 


December lst, 1305. 


December 2e2n4,1305 


PRR MERE. 
i EE] — ao 
4 ae nds | | ED 2 


\ rene Pe aa UE 
SOM Pe ce ebm L 
Re 


ON THE DIFFERENCE IN TEMPERATURE 151 


[M'LEOD & BARNES] 


(=e es Gee : ; 


e 


7 COW 


77 e7 2 ’ c 


a 


7 (277 


‘SNOILVIS HAMO'T ANV UAHdd[] LY SAHOOUH HHALVHHANAL 


152 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
mae ber 23rd, 1905 
a = pt See sae 
ord| of dlffertnce| of fe ratue tH 
ICTRZX Ére Summmae ge: 
| ie el ea 
é aa 
Boece +. 
i gs pall 
HPSEP Pa 
RUE Se 
ae 
wae incl A OR Ree 


December 24h. 1905 


/ 
ak fe ollege bugd 


December 25,1905 


ol peal aa 

Fécord : etence oa Ez: re 

4 sel pr Foydl 4 Jeg round } | À 
ae ee HUE 

pe El EN A ER Fes 


a M iis ee ee ee 


Mae Bat ( 
Hours 1 LR a ENE} Q az 2s ii us ie 17 18 2b 2 2 


183 


ON THE DIFFERENCE IN TEMPERATURE 


[M'LEOD & BARNES] 


7 
CNE SaaS 


_——S 
e 


SS SS ee =a 


Z 3 


“SNOILVIG UAMO'T GNV UHdd[] LV SAHOOUYH AMALVUTAINAY, 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


154 


RÉPARER ET 
ee SERS 
Hesse 
à 
BEERS ES 

BESS 
SHRSeaRes 
SRB seeks 
ee 


December 27,1905 


T 
5 


+ 
| 
—— + —— —— —— 


ene od 


yal € Co lege 


December 28,1905 


a 


| 


Ame 
ETAT ee 
Pew NM, 


S 
De 
SIs {71 
‘ 
as 


fempera 
ge 


155 


[M’LEOD « BARNES] ON THE DIFFERENCE IN TEMPERATURE 


29. 
2? 


Tin 


: 77 or 


‘SNOILVIS HBMOT ANV HHdd/f] LV sauoory 4HNALVHHANAT, 


7 


OF 


156 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


December 23H ,190$ 


eae RENE 
ACI PTT On | eee 
Wo AE ea 


December 30, /90S. 


| Racord of duéférene lof |Teppetorde | | | | {| | | [ [tt 17 
peep [topo | repel |e 22 2 EE cc Te OR ae 
Bae RERRRRERE Ss 
HRP REE ERS EES Es . 
See te eee ee 


oe PP PA PR PP PO FF A A A A 


December 3! st, 1905 


aR ee eee eee ee ee 
| Reord of ffetene of Trpbeohre| | | | | | | | | ttt | | 
| bareepe | ttetot, [esp ee Poa | epee i101] ea ae 
BERR RRR eee Ree ew 
ERREURS MEMENEUEE 


RAA INR SOI 
BEM 


157 


[M LEOD & BARNES] ON THE DIFFERENCE IN TEMPERATURE 


‘SNOILVLG UAMO'T GNV HHdd{] LV SOUOOMY HHNLVHHANA], 


Secrion III., 1906. [159 ] Trans. R. &, C. 


X.—Effect of an Electric Current on the Modulus of Elasticity. 
By R. W. Boyze, MSc. 


Demonstrator of Physics, McGill University. 


(Communicated by Dr. H. T. BARNEs). 
Read May 23rd, 1906. 


For a long time there has been an idea that the passage of 
electricity in a strained wire had some effect on its longitudinal elas- 
ticity, enough at least, to alter its modulus. 

Werthein, in 1844, considered that he had shown that the longi- 
tudinal elasticity of metals was temporarily diminished by the passage 
of an electric current, independently of the alteration which would 
result from the elevation of temperature produced by the current. 
(Werthein, Ann. de Chimie, 1844, tom XII.) 

Tomlinson, in his work on “Influence of Stress and Strain on 
the Action of Physical Forces” (Phil. Trans., Vol. 174, 1883), says 
that in Werthein’s work on the coefficient of elasticity there must have 
been errors due to his method of proceeding when determining the 
elasticity by static extension. He (Werthein) put on a weight, took 
a reading with the measuring microscope, and, after removing the 
weight, took a second reading; from the difference in these two  read- 
ings he determined the value for the modulus. 

Tomlinson says that if after considerable extension had taken 
place Werthein had, repeated his trials with each of the previous weights, 
he would have obtained appreciably different values, and the general 
result would have been to give him a greater mean value for the 
modulus. 

Every experimenter on stress and strain by tension must notice 
this fact. It is very rarely that any material so tested immediately 
returns to exactly its original dimensions, even though the stress may 
be considerably below the elastic limit; but usually the difference is 
small. This, perhaps, can be accounted for by the want of uniformity 
of the material, the heat developed by the straining, and the hysteresis 
effect, i.e., the lagging of the relation of stress to strain, an effect 
analogous to magnetic hysteresis though proportionately not so large. 

The work of Werthein probably was the cause of the suspicion 
that the passage of an electric current in a wire altered its modulus 
cf elasticity. 

Sylvanus Thompson in his “ Electricity and Magnetism,” 1902 
edition, under the heading of “ Physical Effects of an Electric Current ” 


160 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


refers to the question as follows:—“ During the passage of a current 
through metallic wires their cohesion is temporarily lessened, and there 
also appears to be a decrease in their coefficient of elasticity. It was 
thought by Edlund that a definite elongation could be observed in 
strained wires when a current was passed through them; but it has 
not yet been satisfactorily shown that this elongation is independent 
of the elongation due to the heating of the wire owing to the resistance 
it opposes to the current.” 

Acting from the suggestion of this last clause the present work 
was undertaken. One would hardly expect that a tensile strain could 
produce the effect mentioned, and the results obtained in this work 
go to show that at least for the materials here tested no such effect 
is produced. No other conclusion can be taken from the observations 
obtained. 

The present work was done on: 

(1) Pure metals,— Copper, aluminium, steel, which are the metals 
most used in electrical work; and (2) Alloys — German silver, man- 
ganin, constantin, rheotin, which are used for resistance purposes in 
electrical laboratories. 


Arrangement of Apparatus and Method of Experiment. 


A rigid suspension for the test wire was made in this manner: 
An iron plate, 6” x 1 and 2” thick was tightly screwed to a heavy 
oak beam. Through this plate protruded two studs with ends threaded. 
Another iron plate, of dimensions same as the first, fitted exactly over 
it, and the two plates were tightly secured to one another by means 
of bolts on the studs. By squeezing the wire between the plates the 
suspension is made very rigid. 

The wire hanging from the plates was about ten feet long, and 
carried at the bottom a scale-pan for holding the weights which made 
up the load on the wire. 

A heavy copper wire was soldered to the suspension plates, and a 
light flexible copper wire to the junction of the test wire and the scale- 
pan. These wires conuucted the current to and away from the test wire. 

A thread of brittle wax on the wire, drawn out to a point when 
soft, served as a very good pointer to indicate the extensions, which 
were measured by a cathetometer giving readings to one-thousandth of 
a millimetre. By keeping the cross-hairs of the cathetometer telescope 
focussed on the wax pointer very small extensions could be observed on 
the cathetometer scale. 

The first work done was to take the stress-strain curve of a wire, 
of the same material and of the same dimensions, as the test wire. 


{poyLr] ELECTRIC CURRENT ON THE MODULUS OF ELASTICITY 161 


This determined the elastic limit and showed the safe load to apply 
without permanently straining the material. 

The test wire was now hung from the suspension plates, and was 
kept stretched, below the elastic limit, for two or three days in order 
to make it free from kinks. After this the weights were removed, 
and the wire was given at least an equal period of rest before taking 
observations. 


ly 
es 
1 

= 

tk 

STORAGE BATTERY à 

UL = 
ADUUSTABLE POINTER. 
RESISTANCE. bs 

CATHE TOMETER 
Fie. 1. 


The source of current through the wire was a battery of storage 
cells giving a very steady current, which could be adjusted to any value 
by a rheostat in the circuit. The accompanying diagram (Fig. I.) 
shows the whole arrangement. The stress-strain curve, up to the 
maximum safe load, determined from the preliminary test, was taken 
at first for no current in the wire. After turning on the cur- 


Sec. III., 1906. 11 


162 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


rent, the wire was allowed to undergo the full extension 
caused by the heat generated by the current, and these exten- 
sions were measured and plotted; then the stress-strain curve was 
taken as in the case of no current in the wire. The current was 
varied up to such a value that the heat generated by it was sufficient 
to melt the wax pointer on the wire. ‘This would be at a temperature 
not higher than 50° C., so that no annealing effect on the wire could 
have been possible. The maximum current experimented with repre- 
scuted a high current density. Any heat generated by the stretching 
of the material could not have been sufficient to cause appreciable 
extension. The temperature of the room at the place of test was very 
constant, never varying more than a degree during the test, and usually 
varying by only a few tenths of a degree. 

By Hooke’s law, if P is the total load on the wire of length Z and 
cross-sectional area A, and / is the extension caused by P; then, up to 
the elastic limit, 


where E is the modulus of elasticity. 


ie l 
H ee 
te LE 
OL PIN EIRE, 


p being the stress and ¢ the strain. Hence E is proportional to the 
slope of the stress-strain curve, and any change in the slope signifies 
a change in E. y 

In all cases the curves obtained show that, taking account of the 
extensions caused by the heat of the current, the stress-strain lines are 
parallel to the stress-strain line when there is no current in the wire; 
and when the extension caused by heat is deducted from the total 
extension the stress-strain lines are identical. 


Constantin. 


This is one of the later resistance alloys. Its composition varies, 
sometimes being given as 60 Cu, 40 Ni, and sometimes 58 Cu, 41 Ni, 
1 Zn. It is a tough, fairly soft, and not very stiff material with 
elastic limit high, but not very strong beyond that. 

The preliminary test for the stress-strain curve (Fig. 2), shows 
the elastic limit of the specimen to be at a load of 4,650 gms., cor- 


GMS. LOAD; x $275, LES PER SQ. INCH; x -37/3, KG. PER SQ.CM. 


[poyLE] ELECTRIC CURRENT ON THE MODULUS OF ELASTICITY 163 


responding to a stress of 24,420 lbs. per sq. inch, or 1,718 kgm. per 
sq. em., and a strain of .001245. This gives a modulus of elasticity 
of 22.37 x 10° inch-lb. units, or 1.575 x 105 cm.—kgm. units. 


The specimen tested was 265.3 cm. long, and .0221” (—.0562 cm.) 
diameter. It can be seen that below the elastic limit this material 


8000 


7000 


RUE 
= 
_ 


6000 


5000 


4000 


300C 


te 
rires 


2000 {4 


3 
Ô 
0 


[e) 
is’) 
Gi 
4 
a 
Lo 


CMS. EXTENSION; x -377, PER CENT STRETCH, 


Gene 


is very elastic and strong. Of course the same material with larger 
cross-section would not be as strong in proportion, as we know that 
pulling out and drawing through dies has a hardening and strengthen- 
ing effect, and produces a hard and tough skin which is much stronger 


CURRENT IN AMPERES. 


164 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


than the softer material inside. The result is that the smaller we 
draw out a wire the stronger it becomes in proportion to larger wires 
of the same material. 

With constantin, as soon as the load passes the elastic limit, the 
material shows a slow pulling out, so that no definite extension can be 
said to correspond to any applied weight. As the load increases this 


oO 


os 


o OO OS -06 -08 0 2 dA. 
CMS. EXTENSION. 


Fia. 3. 


effect becomes more rapid, until it becomes quite easy to pull the wire 
cut by just pressing downward on the scale pan with the hand. 

The extensions given for the weights on data sheet A are the 
total extensions when the wire has pulled out as far as it will go, without 
waiting over long periods for the stretching to cease. 

(The toughness and strength of this material below the elastic 
limit, with its property of a very low resistance-temperature coefficient, 


{soyteE] ELECTRIC CURRENT ON THE MODULUS OF ELASTICITY 165 


ST 
PS 


5900 


4500 


4000 


S500 


3000 


LOAO. 


2500 


GNIS. 


2000 


1500 


‘900 


ChdS. EXTENSION 


Fig, 4, 


166 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


make it very suitable for a resistance wire; but its undesirable feature 
of producing large thermo-electric effects makes it less desirable than 
some other alloys for use as a standard resistence.) 

Stress-strain curves were taken for different-values of current up 
tv a load of 4,515 gms., which the preliminary test showed to be quite 
safe in not producing a permanent strain in the material. Data sheet 
B shows the results. 


5000 


CMS. EXTENSION. 


Fic. 5. 


Fig. 3 shows the extensions caused by the heat of the current. 
Fig. 4 shows the stress-strain lines for different currents, taking 
account of extension caused by heat; it can be seen that they are all 
parallel to the no current line. 

Fig. 5 is a sample of the agreement between the stress-strain line 
for no current in the wire, and the line for the case of a current in 
the wire, when the extension due to the heat of the current is deducted 

In this way it is proved that the stress-strain line is the same 
when a current is in the wire as when there is no current. Hence, 
there can be no change in the modulus. 


[BoyLE] ELECTRIC CURRENT ON THE MODULUS OF ELASTICITY 167 
DATA SHEET A. 


Constantin. 
Original Length, 265.3 cms. 
Diameter, .0221 inches. 
Loads in Gms. Cms. Extension. 

515 0 

1015 0263 

2015 -0977 

3132 .1852 
14298 .2947 
5398 .5215 

5693 .6278 

6193 1.1511 

6493 2.0832 

6993 3.7572 

7293 5.0109 

7593 5.9362 

7993 7.5618 


1 At loads greater than this, there was a slow pulling out of the material, so that 
no definite extension could be said to correspond to any given weight. 


DATA SHEET B. 


Constantin. 


Cms. Extension. for Current, in Wire of 


eon po re 2p i 27, 16% SA uot ET 
amps/[ }” | amps/{ }” | amps/{ j” | amps/ | 

515 0 .0147 .0273 | .0720 .1258 
1015 .0359 .0548 .0648 .1062 .1681 
1515 .0740 .0938 * 1043 1485 | .2053 
2015 1121 .1290 1395 1810 .2457 
2515 .1471 .1634 .1765 .2230 .2808 
3015 .1870 .2031 .2109 .2555 .3131 
3515 2216 2411 .2396 2999 3500 
4015 2590 2780 2871 3342 3813 
4515 2983 3172 .3268 3727 4327 


.2983 .3025 .2995 .3007 . .3068 Total exten- 
sions. 


168 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Data and curves, corresponding to those shown for constantin, 
were also obtained for mangamin, rheotin, German silver, copper, and 
aluminium; but as the result is the same in every case they are not 
shown here. In order to give an idea of the nature of the materials — 
tested the following descriptions are given: 


Manganin. 


This is the familiar alloy so much used for resistance standards 
on account of its low temperature coefficient and other good physical 
qualities. It is usually considered to be the best and most reliable 
of alloys for standard purposes. Its composition, perhaps, is variable, 
but it is likely to be something about Cu. 84 Ni. 12, Zn. 3-5. 

The test-specimen was :0235” (= -0597 cm.) diameter; its modu- 
lus was 21-60 x 10° ins-ib. units, or 1-518 x 105 em.-kgm. units. 

After the elastic limit is passed the material exhibits the same 
property in slowly pulling out as constantin does. 


Rheotin. 


One of the latest resistance alloys. It is a material much harder 
and stiffer than constantin and manganin, and is very much stronger. 
It breaks under a load not much greater than the elastic limit load, 
and there is only a very little pulling out when the elastic limit is 
passed. 

The specimen was of :0226” diameter, elastic limit corresponding 
to a stress of 104,500 Ibs. per sq. inch (— 17,350 kgm. per sq. em.), 
and a strain of -00607. The modulus of elasticity was 17:20 x 10° 
inch-lbs. units or 1-209 x 10® em.-kgm. units. 


German Silver. 


The specimen, -023” diameter, was of the ordinary German silver 
wire that is so much used for resistance purposes; composition was — 
approximately Cu. 60, Mn. 26, Ni. 14. The stress-strain curve showed 
it to be not as strong as rheotin, though much stronger than constantin 
and manganin. * 

As in the case of rheotin there is not much pulling out just after 
the elastic limit is passed, but this effect increases as the load is in- 
creased. In most physical properties the material seems to come between 
rheotin and constantin. 

The elastic limit corresponded to a stress of 46,050 Ibs. per sq. 
inch (— 3,328 kgm. per sq. em.), with a corresponding strain of 


[porte] ELECTRIC CURRENT ON THE MODULUS OF ELASTICITY 169 


-00257. This gives the value of the modulus as 17:92 x 10° inch-lb. 
units, or 1-260 x 10° cm.-kgm. units. 


Copper. 


This was a specimen, -0319” diameter, of the soft, annealed, fairly 
pure copper wire made by the Montreal Wire and Cable Company for 
electrical work. 

It does not stand much tensile stress, the elastic limit corresponding 
to a stress of 8,975 lbs. per sq.inch (—695 kgm. per sq. cm.), with 
a strain of ‘000579. This gives the modulus the value 15-49 x 10° 
em.-kgm. units. 

When the loading gets beyond the elastic limit there is the slow 
pulling out of the wire shown in the other materials, so that no definite 
extension can be said to apply to any weight. 


Aluminium. 


Specimen was of -0319” diameter. Elastic limit corresponded to 
a stress of 12,420 lbs. per sq. in., or 874 kgm. per sq. cm. 

The calculation for the modulus gave a value 15-49 x 10® inch-lb. 
units, or 1-090 x 10° cm.-kgm. units. 

There is not much pulling out below the load corresponding to 
the elastic limit, though, after that, it is quite appreciable. The material 
breaks when the load becomes a little greater than the elastic limit 
load. 

Steel. 


This specimen was one of the strongest of pianoforte steel, dia- 
meter, 0191”. The stress for the elastic limit wes as high as 246,000 
Ibs. per sq. inch, or 17,320 kgm. per sq. cm. The value of the modulus 
was 28-96 x 10° inch-lb. units, or 2-037 x 105 cm.kgm. units. 


Conclusion. 


M. C. Noyes, in her work on the influence of temperature and of 
an electric current on Young’s modulus, finds that for steel, although 
temperature causes a decrease in the value of the modulus, yet, when 
a current passes through the wire, the modulus is the same as when 
there is no current.1 In the following year she finds that an electric 
current in a copper wire has no effect on the modulus.? 

From the data and curves obtained here, the only conclusion to 
take is that the passage of a current in a wire does not alter its 


* Noyes—Physical Review, Vol. 2, page 277, 1895. 
* Noyes—Physical Review, Vol. 3, page 432, 1896. 


170 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


modulus of electricity; at least, this is true for the materials here 
tested. 

This work only concerned currents, the actions of which were of 
short duration. Perhaps, after a curreat has been passing through a 
wire for a long period, of months or years for instance, there may 
be an effect on the modulus; but such changes are liable to occur, 
and do occur, if the material is left alone without any current in it. 
Jt would be difficult to distinguish and measure the effect by the 
current from the same effect by other courses. | 

For currents of short duration, the probability is that in all 
materials the same results would be obtained as were obtained here, 
viz., that the current has no effect whatever in altering the modulus 
of elasticity. 

The values of the modulus found for the materials tested are given 
in the following table:— 


Material. E in inch-lb. units. E in cm. kgm. units. 
Constantini-feea-ee nese! see ee 22.37 x 10 1.575 x 108 
Manganiniesns) ae aa wee ace 21.60 x 106 1.518 x 10° 
RNC OLIN acy since anteaters 17:20 x 105 1.209 x 106 
German silverse-oeeecms eatenniceee 17.92 x 108 1.260 x 108 
Copperiee: a eee ae eo actnon scene 15.49 x 106 1.090 x 105 
AUTEURS EEE Ce 15.49 x 106 1.090 x 106 
DIBOL one Et ete Lee eae 28.96 x 106 2.037 x 105 


I desire to thank Dr. Barnes for his advice and help in carrying out 
these experiments. 


Srcrion III., 1906. ier fa ag) Trans. R. S. C. 


XI.— Lhe Effect of l'ensile Stress on Electrical Resistance. 


By R. W. Boyze, M.Sc., Demonstrator of Physics McGill University. 
(Communicated by Dr. H. T. BARNES, and read May 23rd, 1906.) 


‘The object of this investigation was to find out if a tensile stress in 
a wire produced changes in its electrical resistance, beyond what we know 
to follow from its changes of dimensions, which can be calculated for. 

Work of this nature has been done before, but not for resistance 
alloys such as constantin, manganin, and rheotin, which are now used 
for electrical work. 

William ‘lhompson (Lord Kelvin) in 1856 stated that “ he had very 
nearly established, for the case of iron, at least, that the augumented 
resistance due to tension, either temporary or permanent, is very little 
more than can be accounted for by the change of form.” 

l'he whole problem is, of course, one of change of Specific Resis- 
tance. 

it was conclusively established by Lord Kelvin and others that the 
specific resistance always increases with the decrease of density, so that 
if the density decreases we may expect an increase of specific resistance 
and hence a greater change of resistance than we can calculate for from 
change of length and diameter. 

‘Tomlinson, working on this subject under “ Influence of Stress and 
Strain on the action of Physical Forces” (Phil. Trans., Vol. 174, 1883), 
found that permanent extension by longitudinal traction produces a 
slight alteration of density. Jn his experiments this change was a de- 
crease of density which never reached as much as .5 per cent although 
some of his wires were strained to breaking. 

Previous to this Werthein had obtained similar results (Ann. de 
Chemie, 1884, tom XVI); and Gray and Henderson working on this 
subject under Lord Kelvin in 1887, found a change in density amounting 
in the case of copper to fully .5 per cent. 

The present work was on the resistance alloys, Constantin, Man- 
ganin, Kheotin, and on the pure metals, Copper, Aluminium. No work 
of this kind, so far as we know, has been done on the first three, but was 
done for the last two by ''omlinson and by Gray and Henderson. 

In this work the method of measuring the resistance was by the fall 
of potential method, the potential drop being measured on a 100,000— 
ohm Thompson-Varley slide. 


Arrangement and Description of Apparatus. 


A rigid suspension for the test wire was made by squeezing 1t 
between two iron plates, each 6” x 1” and 2” thick. One of these plates 


172 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


was tightly screwed to a heavy oak beam, and through it protruded two 
studs with threaded ends; the other plate fitted exactly over this one, 
the two being secured together by means of bolts on the studs. The wire 
hanging from the plates was about ten feet long, and carried at the bot- 
tom a scale-pan for holding the weights which loaded the wire. 

The current was led to the wire by a heavy copper lead firmly 
soldered to the suspension plates, and led away by a light 
flexible copper wire soldered to the juncture of the test wire and the pan. 
in series with the wire, so that the same current passed through if, was a 
standard resistance. Light potential leads were neatly soldered to the 
test wire ak points a measured distance apart; these led to mercury cups. 
from which they could be connected to the galvanometer and potentio- 
meter. Potential wires from the terminals of the standard resistance, 
and also from a standard cadmium cell, led to other mercury cups to be 
connected at will with the galvanometer and potentiometer. (‘The pur- 
pose of the standard cell was to test the steadiness of the current.) 

The source of current was a battery of four storage cells, of 200 
ampere-hour capacity each, which could be connected for 2, 4, 6 or 8 
volts as required. ‘I'he current from this battery is remarkably steady. 
and by means of a very low resistance rheostat in the circuit the current 
was made to vary less than a few parts in 10,000. The current was 
never large enough to appreciably raise the temperature of the wire. 

‘he standard resistance was one which has been used in various in- 
vestigations carried out by Dr. Barnes. A description of it is given in 
his paper “ On the capacity for Heat of Water between the Freezing and 
Boiling Points.” (Phil. Trans, Series A, Vol. 199, 1902). ‘The stan- 
dard consists of two coils of resistances 


À 1.00175 — . 000250 (t — 20°C.) | and 


{ 1.00043 — . 000246 (t — 20°0.) \ ohms. 


These can be placed in parallel or in series. 

‘he coils were kept at a constant temperature by keeping them im- 
mersed in a paraftin oil bath, which had in it a coil of metal tube through 
which a steady tlow of cold water passed, the oil being constantly stirred 
by means of a small fañ-screw revolved by a small water-motor. The 
supply of cold water was taken from a constant water head, arranged py 
running the water from a.tap into a vessel with outflow and over- 
flow tubes. 

A thermometer in the oil bath gave the variations in the tempera- 
ture of the coils. ‘I'he ''hompson-Varley slide that was used is the one 
used in the Macdonald Physics Laboratory for accurate potential work; 


[BOYLE] TENSILE STRESS ON ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE 173 


it was described by Professor Callendar in Phil Trans, A, 1902, p. 63. 
The potentiometer consists of two sets of coils, which are the potentio- 
meter slide and the vernier slide. ‘lhe former has one hundred and one 
1000-ohm coils in series, and the latter one hundred 20-ohm coils in 
series. ‘I‘he terminals of the vernier slide are permanently fixed to the 
poles of a two-pole pointer on the potentiometer slide; by means of this 
arrangement the whole of the vernier coils is shunted with any two con- 
secutive coils of the poteuriometer slide, thereby throwing in parallel 
two resistances of 2000 ohms each, making an equivalent resistance of 


i]t 


STORAGE BATTERY. 


ORY CELLS. 


STANDARD 
RESISTANCE. 


TEST WIRE. 


GALVANOM. 


423 a 97 98 99 100 
19 9.0 09 OO) VERNIER SLIDE. 
VA hossbshr ver 


OOOO OG 
ADUSTABLE 
LOW RESISTANCE ND 


se AR 


© POTENTIOMETER SLIDE. 
ae 


STANDARD 
CELL. 


oneal, 


1000 ohms. ‘I'hus the resistance of the whole potentiometer is 100,009 
ohms. ‘lhe balance point is effected on the vernier slide by means of 
a pointer connected with the galvonometer. ‘I'he galvonometer used was 
a Kelvin 100,000-ohm reflecting instrument. 

The standard cell, used in connetion with the potentiometer to test 
the steadiness of the current, was a cadmium inverted cell with an E.M.F. 
change of .0058 per cent. per degree of temperature. 

The errors of the various coils of the potentiometer are less than 
1 part in 10,000; determinations of the errors have agreed in all cases 
for the 101 coils to a tenth of this amount. 


174 ROYAL:SOCIETY OF CANADA 


I'he potentiometer current was supplied by Columbia dry cells, 
either one or two as required. The current from this source is very con- 
stant, as the balance for the standard cell showed. 

Four significant tigures were obtained from the potentiometer read- 
ings, and the fifth from interpolation on the galvonometer. 

In Fig. 1 the diagram of connections is shown. 


Method of Expervment. 


In all cases the wires were stretched below the elastic limit for a day 
or two in order to remove any possible kinks, and were then rested for 
at least an equal period. 

‘he current used was as small as possible to give the necessary drop 
on the potentiometer; the heating effect was small, as a thermometer 
constantly touching the wire, showed. ‘lhis thermometer indicated the 
changes of temperature of the wire, and corrections were afterward made 
for them. Weights were placed in the scale pan and the wire was allowed 
to extend. No readings were taken until everything in connection with 
current and temperature was constant. 

‘he temperature of the room, where the wire was suspended, was 
very constant as the thermometer readings show. 

If À, is the standard resistance, E, the drop across it ; À, the resist- 


ance of the test wire between potential terminals, and # the drop 


across it :— 
E, io 
Then: Current, y=) 
Rk 
3 Ww 
or E 
Ry = E h, 


If P,, is the reading of the potentiometer for the drop across the 
wire, and Ps the reading for the drop across the standard then :— 


E rie Vis 
19 Ie 
or 
Pp 
w 
R, = P Rk, 


In this way the resistance of the wire, after the various extensions, was 
measured. 

The values shown for specific resistance, in the tables given here, are 
calculated on the assumption that the volume of the wire remains con- 


[BOYLE] TENSILE STRESS ON ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE 175 


stant, no matter what the stretching may be. If / is the original length, 
and A the original cross-sectional area, 


volume = 1 A 
Then any cross-sectional area for a stretch of S will be 
bot NA 
( + 8) 


This is about as reasonable an assumption to make as any. In stretch- 
ing the wire a number of things may happen which we cannot calculate 
for. For instance; little cracks, too small to be seen, may develop in the 
skin of the wire; one part of the wire may stretch out more than another 
owing to lack of uniformity in hardness or toughness. 

1t would be impossible to measure the changes in diameter by cali- 
pers; consequently, it is necessary to get a value for the cross-sectional 
area by making some assumption. 

‘The weight per unit length of the wire could have been taken at the 
beginning, and the cross-section, after any extension, calculated from it. 
But calculations on this assumption would not include errors due to such 
causes as mentioned above, though it would have an advantage in avoid- 
ing errors due to any possible change of density caused by the strain, 
which errors are not included in the other assumption. 

Assuming that, the volume was a constant, and calculating the 
diameter after the total stretching, and comparing this valule with the 
diameter measured by the calipers after all the stretching has taken 
place, we find the following close agreement :— 


A, 


ae A eres CE 85 
aS 33 SES S55 SS5 
=a 22 LE fas Hea 
MATERIAL. S Re © .& HS.s Es 
ua n ase SA 5A 
Cms. Cms. Inches. Inches Inches. 
D en 266.4 | 300.4 | .02210 .02023 .02058 
Manganin................. 261.6 290.6 .01710 .01623 .01623 
LI AN SENTIERS 263.8 266.5 .02262 .02252 .02251 
tag 261.4 298.9 .03191 .02994 .02984 
Aluminium................. 264.2 265.1 .03188 .03184 .031 
DE | A. B. C. 


Columns A and B were obtained by taking many readings of the 


diameter, along the whole length of the wire, on micrometer calipers, and 
averaging ; while the figures in C were calculated on the above assump- 


tion. It can be seen that, except in the case of constantin, they agree 


176 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


very well with the measured diameter, and even in that case the differ- 
ence is only a little over one per cent. 

The curves shown in this part of the work are increase per cent. 
resistance on increase per cent stretch. Above the elastic limit, on 
account of the slow pulling out of the material, it cannot be said that the 
stretch is proportioned to the load; consequently, the increase of resis- 
tance is not plotted on a load base in these curves. 

Below the elastic limit the extensions are proportional to the loads, 
so that this part of the curve would not be altered in either method of 
plotting. 

Assuming that the specific resistance p does not change as stretch- 
ing goes on, and that the volume of the wire remains constant,—then if 
Ris the resistance, / the length, and A the cross-sectional area before 
stretching we have 
pl 
M 
For any extension S of the wire, 


p 
R = 7 @+8) 


1 


But by ewe: 
Ae eel ee 
pues 
p 
R= eases) 
= ¢+8 
PT Re een ey 
me iE 


Increase of Resistance = À, — R 


athe S? 
= (2 84:5) 


Increase of Resistance iu a (2 S+ =) 

Increase of length vs S 
p S 1 pit S R S 

=—-@+5=—-—@+5+=-@4+> 5; 
A l LA l l tl 
Increase of Resistance 
; Original Resistance 
or 8 — 2 + = 


Increase of length 


Original length 


[BOYLE] TENSILE STRESS ON ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE 177 


Jo put this in words,— if the increase per cent resistance is plotted on 
increase per cent stretch, the curve is very nearly a straight line with 


slope equal to 2. The value of — will not be appreciable below the elastic 
l 


limit, nor will it be comparable with 2 for quite an amount of stretching 


beyond it. The greatest value obtained for — was about .125. 
l 


| POS/T/ON OF . 


Le) 
g |IELASTIC LIMIT | a 
| Cons TANTIN 


o 4 2 3 + ry 6 7 2 
INCREASE PER CENT STRETCH 


Fie 2. 

On the above assumption, then, the curve of increase per cent resis- 
tance on increase per cent stretch should be a line with initial slope 2, 
curving slightly to a greater slope for greater values of stretching. 

An examination of the curves will show that this is just what was 
obtained, the irregularities being usually at the first part of the curve, 


Sec while 99h. 12 


178 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


where the increase of resistance is so small as to be hardly measurable, 
and accuracy cannot be depended on. ‘This result is an evidence that the 
assumption on which the results are based is not far astray. 


Constantin. 


A piece of wire of the same material as described in my paper on 
“The Effect of an Electric Current on the Modulus of Elasticity was 
used. Results are given on data sheet P. Fig. 2 shows the increase per 
cent resistance on per cent stretch, up to a few points beyond the elastic 
limit the position of which is marked on the curve. This curve is a 
straight line with slope equal to 2. 


INCREASE PER CENT RESISTANCE 


INCREASE PER CENT STRETCH 
Fie 3. 


Fig. 3 corresponds to the full extension undergone by the wire. 
‘his curve bends in the direction opposite to that which we should ex- 
pect, owing to the low value for specific resistance which the calculations 
for the last four points show. (See data, Sheet P.) It must be noted 
that the extensions corresponding to these points were obtained simply 
by pressing downward on the scale pan with the hand, the material being 
so plastic as to allow this to be done with ease. Probably a large part of 
this extension took place just at the suspension, for it was noticed that 
in all cases, whenever the wire broke, this was where the breaking took 


[BOYLE] TENSILE STRESS ON ELECTRICAL RESISTAN CE 179 


place. ‘lhis would explain the low values for the specific resistance. Lt 
is hardly probable that the specific resistance does decrease at this stage 
of stretching. 

In order to be sure of the temperature coefficient of this specimen 
of constantin a special determination was made. ‘The result showed that 
the coefficient varied greatly at different temperatures, but at the tem- 
perature of the test wire in his work it was practically negligible, being 
not more than .00001. with minus sign. 


DATA SHEET P. 
Constantin. 


Standard resistance used = 2.00218 — .000496 (t — 20°C.) 


Temperature Coefficient of test wire = —.00001. 
Toad, Percent: R. of Wire Increase Increase Specific 
corrected of percent. of 

Gms. Stretch. | +o 22.22°C | R.of Wire. | R. of Wire. | B- of Wire. 
lee eme aa eee ove gysia alll. one ni el ets .0000 
.515 0 | 5.46417 0 0 5138 
1015 .00984 5.46561 .00144 .02634 | 5138 
2015 .03664 5.46782 .00365 .04850 5137 
3132 .16966 5.47148 -00731 .1337 5138 
4298 .1108 5.47672 .01255 .2297 5138 
5393 .1957 5.48568 .02151 .3935 5138 
5693 .2355 5.48934 -02517 .4605 5137 
6193 .4320 5.51041 .04624 .8460 5137 
6493 .7825 5.55188 .08771 1.605 | 5140 
6993 1.408 5.62507 . 1609 2.942 | 5143 
7293 1.813 5.67861 .2144 3.924 | 5144 
7993 2.838 5 78867 .3245 5.940 5147 
ad to 10.420 6.35729 .8931 16.32 4903 

“7 | 13.080 6.69108 1.2269 22.44 4923 - 

Wets. À GLP le FENTE RPC ER EEE BARRES PRE PARUS enna 
515 (| 12.78 6.65796 1.1938 21.84 4923 
515 1 12.78 6.65493 1.1908 21.80 4921 


* Extension caused by pulling out wire with the hand. Values given pro- 
bably do not represent the correct Specific Resistance for these extensions. 


180 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Manganin. 


his piece of mauganin must have had more than the usual per- 
centage of copper in its composition, for it was very soft. and hada 
much lower specific resistance than is usually given for this material 


Pau: 


WCHEASe pan CENT Ghberes 


INCREASE PER CENT RESISTANCE 


Fie 4. 


Fig. 4 shows the relation of increase per cent resistance to increase 
per cent stretch, for stretchings just beyond the elastic limit. 


[BOYLE] TENSILE STRESS ON ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE 181 


Fig. 5 shows the same relation for the total stretch. 


INCREASE PER CENT RESISTANCE 


INCREASE PER CENT STRETCH 


Fie 5. 
Lhe following table gives the result of a few of the calculations for 


specific resistance. 


Load Per cent. Increase 


Gms. Stretch. LC Specific i 

515 0 0 .00003882 

2515 .1194 .1019 3877 

4265 2816 .3259 3873 

5265 2.212 4.277 3875 

5865 4.910 10.10 3882 

6365 8.210 17.03 3881 

Joie ET IRELAND ie eM aie ER en Te een UE Genes use 
515 11.120 24.70 3921 
Kheotin. 


This specimen was a piece of the same material as was described in 
the previous paper mentioned above. The resistance-temperature coefti- 


182 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


cient was not known, and a special determination of 1t was necessary. 
It was found that the increase of resistance caused by elevation of tem- 
perature was very steady, varying directly as the tempreature with co- 
efficient + .000246 per 1° C. 


2.0 


+8 1 


6 |POS/TION |OF 


WUT 
: LU TRUE 


INCREASE PER CENT RESISTANCE 
~ 
LA Q 
aS 


RCE ee Dee CENT aren 


Fic 6. 


The load was varied from 515 gms. to 25,722 gms., when the wire 
broke. ‘lhe corresponding stretch per cent. varied from 0 to 1.007, and 
the specific resistance from .00004928 to .00004925. Fig. 6 shows the 
result. 


[BOYLE] TENSILE STRESS ON ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE 183 
Copper. 


This specimen of copper must have been of only moderate purity, 
for the value obtained for its specific resistance was higher than that 
given for very pure copper. Figs. 7 and 8 show the result obtained :— 


Load Per cent. sncrense | Specific 
Gms. Stretch. R Re Resistance. 
1515 0 0 000001744 
2515 .01807 .05985 1744 
4707 .4610 .9590 1744 
5457 1.343 2.914 1747 
6457 2.718 5.865 1747 
7409 4.385 9.140 1747 
8409 6.553 13.82 1747 
9409 9.625 20.25 1745 
DER TT EOLA | PNET omer rere otha RS rene devas 
dd 14.38 31.60 1748 
3.2 


28 


24 


42 


INCREASE PER CENT RESISTANCE. 


° 2 4 -6 8 Te) 42 a 
INCREASE PER CENT STRETCH. 


Fi@a 7. 


184 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Aluminum. 


‘he specimen was a length of ordinary aluminum wire such as 13 
used for commercial purposes. 


~ ~ 
Le] D 


INCALASE PER CENT STRETCH. 


INCREASE PER CENT RESISTANCE. 


Fra 8. 


As thie potential leads could not be soldered to the wire, they had 
to be secured by winding them around the wire and covering the joint 
by a globule of (hard brittle wax. 


[B0YLE] TENSILE STRESS ON ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE 183 


The following, with Fig. 9 and 10, are the results :— 


Load Per cent. Increase Specific 
Gms. Stretch. | À soi frs em Resistance. 
515 0.0000 | 0.0000 00002927 
1515 04747 AB 202A 
2515 07743 -00947 2923 
3515 1083 0405 2922 
4515 1425 1083 2922 
5515 .1840 | 1580 2921 
6515 242) | .2574 292) 
7526 YR 2467 2919 
16 


414 peeps OF 4 
"LASTI ey 
| 
| 
| 
12 PA 
40 a 


INCREASE PER CENT ST RETON 
è 8 
a 
> 
Ÿ 


-02 Po) | ley 


o 
INCACASE PER CENT RALISTANCE 


Fic 9. 


186 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Conclusion. 

As can be seen from the curves, in all materials tested, except 
Aluminium, the ratio of increase per cent resistance to increase per 
cent stretch is equal to 2+. Manganin and Aluminium in the first. 
parts of the curves show discrepancies, but this is probably due to the 
unavoidable errors in measuring such minute changes of resistance. 


+0 


aR 
ae 
| Sian 


INCREASE PER CENT RESISTANCE. 


o 04 08 12 16 20 24 1635 -32 
INCREASE PER CENT STRETCH 
Fie 10. 


In the case of Manganin, when these irregularities are omitted, the 
above ratio has the value 2, but for Aluminium it is a little less. But in 
the case of the latter the wire broke when there was a stretch of only 
S cms. in 264; in consequence, the changes of length and of resistance 
were so small that no general result can be deduced from them. 


[BOYLE] TENSILE STRESS ON ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE 187 


‘Nhe last four points of the Aluminium curve showed that the slope 
was increasing, and, probably, if greater extensions could be obtained, the 
results would agree with those obtained for the other materials. 

These irregularities, in the Manganin and the Aluminium curves: 
were too small to make any appreciable change in the calculations for 
specific resistance. 

he values obtained in all cases for the specific resistance, working 
on the assumption that the wire has constant volume, are remarkably 
constant. 

As in all work done heretofore on this subject, the conclusion is that 
a longitudinal tensile stress produces practically no change in the specific 
resistance of the material. At least, it produces no immediate change; 
whether, after a prolonged action of the stress, there would be a change 
or not, is perhaps open to question. The changes in specific resistance 
for copper and aluminium, in this work are smaller than those obtained 
by Tomlinson and by Gray and Henderson in their work. ‘Tomlinson 
says that the specific resistance of Aluminium is actually decreased by 
a stress in the line of flow of the current. This also shows here in the 
results for Aluminium, but the change is only in the fourth significant 
figure, and that perhaps is too fine a distinction to depend on. 

As a general conclusion, this work points to the fact that for alloys 
and metals, while they are under a tensile stress, the increase per 
cent resistance is about twice the increase per cent stretch, and that the 
specific resistance of the material is practically unchanged. 

lt is interesting to finish this paper with a contrast between the 
small effect of a tensile stress (or, for that matter, of any mechanical 
treatment) on the electrical properties of a metal or alloy, and the great 
effect of even a trace of impurity. 

This is well shown by the following table, taken from Vol. 2, p. 299. 
Mathematical anid Physical Papers, Kelvin. 


Percentage Percentage Relative 


Qualitative Analysis. Cu. Impurity. | Conductivity 
Mute, Wi, As. O.................... 98.76 128 i ae CE 
0 eee 99.20 0.80 | 71.3 
Cu, Fe, Ni, (doubtful), O............ 99.53 | 0.47 | 84.7 
tu, Fe, Ni, (doubtful), O.. ........ 99.57 0.43 | 86.4 
ME Fo ori foes ca as ss doe 99.90 0.10 | 102.0 


It can be seen, that the purity of the material to be used for a 
conductor is of the first importance, while the mechanical treatment of 
it is of minor consideration as regards its purely electrical properties. 

I desire to thank Dr. Barnes for his advice in this work. 


Sxcrion III., 1906 [189] Trans. R. 8S. C. 


XII—A Method of Determining the Specific Heat of a Gas at Constant 
Pressure. 


By H. F. Dawes, M.A., University of Toronto. 
(Communicated by Prof. J. C. McLennan, and read May 23, 1906.) 


The classical determination of this constant for several gases was 
made by Regnault.! His method consisted in passing a stream of heated 
_ gas through an ordinary water calorimeter and determining the quantity 
of heat given up by observing the rise in temperature of the water. Tha 
quantity of gas used in any experiment was determined from observations 
on the pressure, and the temperature of the gas together with the volume 
of the reservoir in which it was stored. The gas was heated by passing 
it through a long spiral tube of copper immersed in a bath of 
boiling oil. From the heating bath it passed directly into the calori- 
meter traversing it in a spiral copper tube. It was assumed that the air 
entered the calorimeter at the temperature of the oil bath, and left it at 
the temperature of the water. 

Besides the heat given up by the gas a certain amount was com- 
municated to the calorimeter by conduction and by radiation both from 
the bath and from other bodies in the room. In order to determine the 
amount of heat derived from these sources observations were made on 
the temperature of the calorimeter for a certain time before the gas was 
allowed to pass through and again after the flow was stopped. 


Defects. 


In attempting to repeat this experiment with apparatus precisely 
similar to that used by Regnault it was found that the arrangement had 
several disadvantages. In the first place the calorimeter used was not 
very delicate, i.e., it required a comparatively large quantity of heat to 
make a sufficiently great difference between the initial and final tempera- 
tures of the calorimeter. 

Since both the specific heat and the density of a gas are very small, 
it is necessary to use a large quantity of gas and to make the initial tem- 
‘perature very high in order to have the required quantity of heat avail- 
able. To obtain a sufficiently high temperature, boiling oil was used in 
the heating bath and this made the experiment very disagreeable and 
difficult to work with. 


! Regnault. Memoires de l’Academie des Sciences de l'Institut Imperial 
de France. Tome XXVI. pp. 1-112. 


190 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Again, with Regnault’s apparatus, the arrangement for measuring 
the initial temperature of the gas was somewhat defective. On account 
of the very rapid fall of temperature along the tube through which the 
gas passed from the oil bath to the calorimeter it was scarcely permiss- 
able to assume that it entered the calorimeter at the temperature of the 
oil bath. 

II1.—Vhe Bunsen Ice Calorimeter. 


A modified form of the calorimeter used by Regnault for the deter- 
mination of the specific heat of gases is also used to find the specific heat 
of liquids or solids. Another form of calorimeter which has been used 


for liquids and solids but not for gases is the Bunsen Ice Calorimeter. 


The construction of this type of calorimeter is shewn diagrammatically 
in Fig. 1. A glass test tube B is sealed into the upper end of a larger 
cylindrical glass vessel A. The lower end of A is joined to a U tube AQ 
which carries a cup C at its upper end. A hollow stopper furnishel 
with a three way tap D prolonged into a graduated capillary tube E us 
fitted into this end. By means of this tap communication can be made 
from the cup D, which the stopper carries, either to C or to E or from © 
to E. 

In setting up the instrument for use the upper part of A was filled 
with pure distilled water free from air, and lower part of A, the tube C 
and part of the capillary with pure boiled mercury. By means of the 
tap D the end of the mercury thread could be moved to any selected pos- 
ition. 

A part of the water in A was frozen and formed into a cap of ice 
around the immersed part of B as indicated in the diagram. In mak- 
ing all measurements, A, B, and the lower part of C were kept surround- 
ed by ice in order to maintain the apparatus at zero temperature. 

The measurement of heat by this calorimeter depends on the fact 


that water changes its volume on solidifying. If a quantity of heat is 


communicated through B to the water in A a certain quantity of ice will 
be melted. This will cause a diminution in the volume of the contents 
of A, and a consequent receding of the mercury thread in E. From the 
known values of the latent heat and the specific gravity of ice, the 
amount of heat communicated may be determined for any change of 
volume produced. 

An investigation with this type of calorimeter shewed that its deli- 
cacy was such that an addition of one calorie made a change of about 
1 1-3 millimeter divisions in the position of the end of the capillary 
thread. With the apparatus used by Regnault, on the other hand, an 
addition of about 600 calories was required to make a difference of one 


[DawEs] SPECIFIC HEAT OF A GAS AT CONSTANT PRESSURE 191 


degree in the thermometer reading. Besides its greater sensi- 
tiveness the Bunsen calorimeter possesses the advantage of not requiring 
any correction for radiation errors since no heat is communicated by this 
means on account of the surrounding ice jacket. 


III—NEw Merxon. 


A.—A pparatus. 


In the experiment described below a method was devised by which 
this calorimeter could be used with special advantage in determining the 
specific heat of a gas, and at the same time some of the defects of the 
Regnault arrangement avoided. Fig. 2 is a diagram of the arrangement 
of the apparatus as finally adopted after considerable development. Thea 
gas was stored under pressure in a reservoir A and kept at zero tempera- 
ture by means of ice in the vessel surrounding it. The flow of gas was 
regulated by a valve B, and its pressure was indicated by a water mano- 
meter C. A phosphoric pentoxide drying tube D was inserted in its 
path to absorb any moisture coming from the manometer. The gas was 
heated as it passed through a tube in a water bath E and was kept at a 
temperature of 100° as far as the mouth of the calorimeter by means 
of a steam jacket. It passed through the test tube of the calorimeter F 
in a copper tube of special construction shewn on a larger scale in Fig. 3 
The gas entered this tube through the inlet d and issued from it by the 
outlets @ and b, each of which could be closed by a valve. The lower 
part of the tubing was coiled, as shewn in the figure, and immersed in 
water to the height e. With the valve b open and a closed the gas passed 
directly out without going through the bent portion of the tube. The 
difference of temperature between the points c, d, was measured by 
means of a copper-iron thermocouple, the wires of which passed out 
through air-tight caps at a and b, and thence to a galvanometer. 


B.—CALIBRATION. 
(1) The Thermocouple. 


The thermocouple was calibrated before the wires were sealed into 
the tubes, one junction being kept in melting ice and the other placed ia 
a water bath along with a standard thermometer. The deflections of the 
galvanometer were observed for a series of different temperatures, and 
the results are shown in Fig. 4. 


(2) The Gauge. 


The relation between the quantity of gas which passed out of the 
reservoir and the corresponding fall of pressure was found in the follow- 


192 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ing way. The volume of the reservoir was 7 litres, so that it contained 
7 m grams of gas at standard temperature and pressure, m being the 
mass of one litre. Hence by Boyle’s Law, for every millimetre fall of 
pressure 7m/760 grams of gas must have escaped. The calibration of 


the gauge was checked by means of a mercury manometer, and its read- 


ings reduced to millimeters of mercury. In an experiment with atmos- 
pheric air for which m—1.293 the quantity of air which issued from the 
reservoir was calculated for a series of different pressure falls and the 
results of this calculation are exhibited in Fig. 5. In this figure the 
ordinates represent the quantities of air which escaped when the pressure 
fell to zero from we values indicated by the corresponding abscisse. 


(3) The Calorimeter. 


The bore of the capillary tube of the calorimeter was calibrated by 
filling it with mercury and then running it out a little at a time and 
weighing the parts run out. From this the mass of mercury occupying 
each division was found for different parts of the tube. 

The number of calories required to cause a displacement of one 
gram was found as follows :— 


Data :— 


1 gram of water gives out 80.025 calories on freezing. 
1 gram of water occupies 1.00013 c.c at 0°C. 

1 gram of ice occupies 1.090 x 1.00013 c.c at 0°C 

1 gram of mercury occupies .073553 c.e at 0°C. 
Solution :— 


80.025 calories used in melting ice cause a change in volume of 


1.00013 | 1.090 - 1} c.c. and therefore cause a displacement of. 


1.00013 À 1.090 - 1 | x 1 grams of mercury. 
. 073553 
Hence a displacement of one gram of mercury means the using of 
.073553 x 80.025 calories = 65.4 calories. 
1.00013 (1.090 — 1) 


From this value the number of calories causing a displacement of 
one division at different parts of the scale was found. The results of 
this calibration are illustrated by Fig 6, which shows at any point the 
number of calories corresponding to a displacement of the mercury from 
zero of the scale to that point. 


[DAWES] SPECIFIC HEAT OF A GAS AT CONSTANT PRESSURE 2193 


A preliminary experiment showed that the fall of pressure of the 
gas in passing through the calorimeter was less than one fifth the pres- 
sure indicated by the manometer C. 


C. Method of Experiment. 


In making a determination the following procedure was adopted. 
When the water in E had been raised to the boiling point the valve 4 
was opened, and the gas allowed to pass through the apparatus. 
Readings were taken on the calorimeter scale, and on the gauge 
and on the thermocouple scale respectively once a minute. B 
was adjusted as required to keep the gas flowing uniformly. 
he water manometer C was maintained at a difference of level of eight 
millimeters, so that the fall in pressure of the gas as it passed through 
the calorimeter was less than 8/5 millimeters of water. The galvano- 
meter in a few minutes assumed a constant deflection, showing that the 
temperature of the d junction had become steady. From the calorimeter 
readings the average number of divisions per minute was determined by 
finding, first, the average number per twenty minutes from a number 
of sets of readings, and then taking one twentieth of that number. The 
rate of fall of pressure was found in a similar manner from the read- 
ings of the gauge. 

After the gas had been flowing for a sufficient time, the valve 4 
was opened and a closed, so that the gas passed out without going through 
the coil. The rate of flow was adjusted so that the thermocouple d 
was kept at a temperature used in the previous observations. Readings 
of the calorimeter and of the thermocouple scales were taken once a 
minute as before, and the average number of divisions per minute on the 
calorimeter scale was found in the way explained above. 

From these readings the following deductions were made :— 

(1) The temperature in degrees centigrade corresponding to the 
thermocouple deflection was found from the curve of Fig. 4. 

(2) The number of grams of gas per minute was found from the 
rate of fall of the pressure by means of curve 5. 

(3) By the aid of curve 6 the number of calories communicated per 
minute to the calorimeter was deduced from the number of divisions 
moved over per minute by the mercury thread. 


D. Theory. 


It will be seen that with the exception of the air which passed 
through the coil (e) during the first set of observations the sources of 


Sec. III., 1906. 13. 


194 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


heat in the two cases were exactly the same. Hence if “x” calories per 
minute were communicated in the first case, and (“x”) per minute in the 
second, the gas must have given up (x-x,) calories per minute. If 
therefore the rate of flow was “y” grams per minute, and the fall of 
temperature “ t°C 7 the value of the specific heat as given by this set of 
readings Was X-— X, 
yt 


* 


E. Measurement of Specific Heat for Dry Air. 


A set of temperature, pressure, and calorimetric readings for dry 
air is given in Table I, and curves illustrating them are shewn in Fig. 7. 


TABLE I. 
Calorimeter Thermocouple 

Time. Gauge. | Time. Scale: deals 

0. OS OM ere eee ARE RU EE ld eee |: aah es CSS 

.30 22.7 | 1 CT So do 5 € 0 0 

1.30 22.1 2 560.3 65.5 

2.30 21.6 | 3 566.4 65 

3.30 21.3 | 4 572.9 64.5 

4.30 20.9 5 579 64.5 

5.30 20.6 | 6 585.1 64. 

6.30 20.1 a 591.8 64.5 

7.30 19.9 8 598 64.5 

8.30 19.55 9 604.1 64.5 

9.30 19.2 10 610.3 64.5 
10.30 18.9 11 617. 64.5 
11.30 18.6 12 623 64.5 
12.30 18.5 13 629.9 64.5 
13.30 18.2 14 636 64.5 
14.30 18. 15 642.4 64.5 
15.30 17.5 16 649 64.5 
16.30 Lil 17 655.2 64.5 
17.30 16.7 18 661.8 64.5 
18.30 16.4 19 668.5 64.5 


19.30 16.2 20 675.0 64.5 


eh rt 


[DAWEs] SPECIFIC HEAT OF A GAS AT CONSTANT PRESSURE 195 


TABLE I—(Continued.) 


| | Calorimeter Thermocouple 
Time. Gauge Time. | Seale: <cale: 
a — RME. 41) 

20.30 15.8 1 | | 681.6 | 64.5 
21.30 15.1 Boy | 688.2 | 64.5 

2.30 15. 2 | 694.9 64.5 
23.30 | 14.6 24 | 701.3 64.5 
24.30 14.2 25 | 708. 64.5 
25.30 14 2% | 715 64.5 
26.30 | 13.6 ey 2a 721.3 64.5 
27.30 | 13.3 28 728 64.5 
98.30. | 12.95 29 734.9 64.5 
29.30 NASA ET 30 741 5 64.5 
30.30 12. 31 748.5 64.5 
31.30 11.6 32 755 64.5 
32.30 11.4 2 762 64.5 
33.30 | 11 34 769 64.5 
34.30 10.7 35 715.4 64.5 
35.30 re ie 6 782 64.5 
36.30 | 10 8500 ||. 37 789.1 64.5 


‘The first of these curves (A) shews that after the first few minutes 
the temperature became steady and remained so during the experiment. 
The scond and third (B and C), shew respectively that the air flowed 
through the calorimeter uniformly, and that the heat was communicated 
to it at a uniform rate. | 

The determination of the value of the specific heat at constant 
pressure for air from this set of readings is summed up in the following: 


Denoting the rate of motion of the calorimeter thread when the air 
was flowing through the coil by A, and when it was issuing from the 
outlet b by B, the results obtained were as follows :— 


Average value of A — 6.612 divisions per minute. 

Temperature fall between terminals of thermocouple = 21.9° 

Average value of B = 4.982 divisions per minute. 

Temperature fall = 21.8° 

Reduced value of B corresponding to temperature fall of 21.9° = 5.0071 


divisions per minute. 


196 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


I.—Calorimeter scale divisions due to the heat from the air = (6.612 - 5.0071) 
= 1.6049. From Fig. 7 and its corresponding readings the number 
of calories per minute due to the heat imparted by the air — 1.20327. 


II.— Average fall of pressure = .3399 {gauge divisions per minute, = 17.09 mm. 
mercury per minute and consequently the average rate of flow = 


.20355 grams per minute. 
Combining I and II the value .2697 was obtained for the specific heat at 


constant pressure. 


F. Discussion. 


In the published account of the experiments in which he determined 
this constant. Regnault gives the results of eight-four determinations. 
These vary from .22 to .24 the average value being .2375. The result 
found from the observations given above, while somewhat higher than 
those found by Regnault is still sufficiently near to his values to demon- 


strate the usefulness of the method. 


G. Alterations Suggested. 


One or two changes in the arrangement have suggested themselves, 
but owing to lack of time, have not as yet been tried. In the first place 
the Junction of the two tubes at d might be made quite near to the upper 
end of the test tube of the calorimeter, and the thermojunction moved 
up to correspond. ‘l'his would not alter “x” as used in the above dis- 
cussion, but would make a much greater value of “t” and a correspond- 
ingly smaller value of “x,” since the heat given up by the air between the 
present position of d and that suggested is at present included in “x,.” 
Again, an ebonite connection in the tube d would lessen the conduction 
from the steam jacket, ebonite being a poor conductor of heat. This 
would lessen the values of “x” and “x,” by equal amounts. Both these 
changes would lessen the percentage error in the final result. 


H. Advantages of the Method. 


Some advantages of this method over that used by Regnault may 
be enumerated. 

(1) By this method the calorimetry is more perfect than in the 
experiments of Hegnault, since the calorimeter (a) is very much more 
sensitive and (b) it requires no correction for radiation on account of 
belonging to the constant temperature type. 

(2) Heat communicated by all sources other than the gas itself, for 
example, by conduction from the steam jacket down the tube, d, and 
from the air of the room down a and J, is accounted for by a single 
direct observation. 


[DAWES] SPECIFIC HEAT OF A GAS AT CONSTANT PRESSURE 197 


(3) Again, in this method the measurement of the initial tem- 
perature of the gas is exact, since all heat given up by it after it passes 
the thermocouple is accounted for in the calorimeter readings. 

(4) It is necessary to heat the gas only to a comparatively low 
temperature in order to have as favourable a determination as that of 
Regnault with the very high temperatures he used. Hence the disad- 
vantages and limitations of using boiling oil as a heating bath are 
avoided. ‘lhe method may be readily applied to gases which are de- 
composed at high temperatures. 

(5) The determination of the specific heat of a gas is reduced to 
the measurement of rates, so that the initial and final adjustments of 
conditions have not to be considered or allowed for. 

(6) ‘lhe method may be readily adapted to the measurement of 
the specific heat of liquids so that it gives promise of becoming generally 
useful. 

l'he writer would in conclusion express his sincere thanks to Prof. 
J. C. McLennan for his kindly interest in this investigation, and his 
helpful suggestions during its progress. 


Physical Laboratory, University of Toronto. 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


198 


2228. 


LT 


URS 


Fig. 1 


UI ’™ dK] ia 


\ ND 


AN 


NS 
à 
\ 


[DAWES] SPECIFIC HEAT OF A GAS AT CONSTANT PRESSURE 199 


Fig.2 


se R 


= | 


<n 


J WON 
CICLE LYS LIT PRE YNECEPTE CR 


EE CT * . 
—- - é 


8 


nu 
© 
: 
À 
iS 
3 
2 

8 

oO 
n 


Calibration of Thermocouple 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


i ae HE 
an HEUER 


To Galvanometer 


200 


Fig. 8 
fe 
Le 


[pAWES] SPECIFIC HEAT OF A GAS AT CONSTANT PRESSURE 201 


‘is 
à HE HRRIRRRE HIDE ÉD HR) Hd 
5 a : oe 
8 Ht HE ÉREE AT En 
RS 20 


8 


10 
4 EA 
a FA Cp nu FT ua ae HE 
a -} pa a a ce i Ha 
a a 7 : 
ET 
jai 
EH 
F1 
Z jan LLLI FA LILI LL 
0 5 © 5 20 25 39 35 40 
OMIVERSITY PRESS TORORTS Scale Reading 
No. ! 
Fig 5 
Calibration of Gauge 
ee 
y 407 FERRER 
§ roy jseegee 
S 700 
à 
È 600 
x 
& 


LLLULET 


No. | 


ORIVERGITE Paces, 


300 


101 


Q 100 200 300 400 600 00 600 900 1000 
Scale Reading 
Fig.6 


Calibration of Calorimeter 


202 


8 A Thermocouple 


40 


30 


10 


à & Gauge 


20 


45 


/0 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


~ 
KT 
+ 
Y 
& 
= 
a 
8 
LS) 
O 
800; 
7H 
| 
740 - 
T ct 1 0 
sogn0 Benen ceee ue I 
BE BE tt TE 
; H + 
710 me 1m 
“ a Boe ass 
++ + a 
mca =} ; ao 
680 Bsn cusbs poses sata Gupes fossa neeeane“af tuaet geeeaeenas sgusaCesegssza! Flas] 
: age Soue ese ES FÉES Ett TT 
BUDUS sunee DEUUE HE Anen ry uo + Er 
TE HAE ne TE pi 
+ Sonn +4 { 
650 Fee 4 
= + if iI 
EEE sus: EE +t fC : gi A 
T | t } 4 
620 — - 
EE DE i EEE ae 
TITI t T ae ay a 
HE ÉRRRRE ee 
590 —— — se 
t 1 JE LEE 
+ CO BE 
TEE EE rt 
H + TT FE + a! 
560 a 
ee 
+ ct 
age +r 5 
530 H+ 
(4) 10 20 30 40 
OMIVERSITY POLES, TORONTO 71 me 


B 


Fig. 7 
A Readings of Thermocouple 
æ » Gauge 
” “ Calorimeter 


G 


Secrion III., 1906. [ 208 ] Trans. R. S. C. 


XIII.—Deficient Humidity of the Atmosphere. 
By T. A. Starxey, M.B., D.P.H., FRS, Professor of Hygiene 
AND 


H. T. Barnes, D.Sc., F.R.S.C., Associate Professor of Physics, McGill 
University, Montreal. 


Read May 23rd, 1906. 


The importance of the influence of a dry atmosphere on the hu-, 
man organism has been in a great measure overlooked. The question 
is one of great moment in Canada, especially in those parts where, during 
the colder months, the heating of the houses necessitates the heating of 
the indoor atinosphere, thereby causing a tremendous drying of the air, 
or in other words, a lowering of the Relative Humidity. 

This excessive dryness is common knowledge, and most householders 
are fully acquainted with the ravages it creates amongst their house- 
hold effects, particularly woodwork, ivory pieces, etc. How many at- 
tempts on the part of the householders has one witnessed, tio increase 
the moisture necessary in the air—hanging cans containing water on the 
heating coils—placing bowls of water in each room, etc., etc. But all 
these attempts were made with a view simply to preserving the furniture, 
ornaments, ete. and never to benefit the health of the inmates. 

The results of these homely makeshifts were always disappointing, 
because the amount of water which could be evaporated under such con- 
ditions as above described, did not sensibly affect the humidity condi- 
tions—as will be shown later, several gallons per day in an ordinary 
sized house are required to even bring the relative humidity to 50 per 
cent. 

The action of a dry atmosphere on the human organism is a direct 
one. It affects primarily the mucous membranes lining the respiratory 
tract—chiefly that of the nose, the throat and the bronchial tubes. It 
is a purely mechanical irritant, resulting in a condition of congestion of 
the mucous membranes before mentioned. If this irritation be con- 
tinued for any length of time the swollen mucous membranes with diffi- 
culty regain their normal state, and in this connection it may be 
pointed out that different individuals will suffer to different degrees, 
according to their personal factor or idiosyncrasy—there are some 
people whose mucous membranes are “ weak” and will quickly react to 
this irritation; finally, what is more important in these cases, the mucous 
membranes do not recover their normal tone, or only with very great diffi- 
culty after a long time. 


204 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


We have thus all the conditions favourable for a chronic catarrh, and 
this chronic condition being established we get all the typical symptoms 
of naso-pharyngeal catarrh, spreading often to the Eustachian tubes 
communicating with the middle ear. When this chronic congestion of 


the naso-pharynx continues for an extended period in young children, « 


we often have the starting point of adenoid growths, a troublesome 
affection and one which is very widespread throughout communities. 
Continuing downward along the respiratory tract, the conditions result- 
ing from the irritation, due to an excessively dry atmosphere, must be 


noted with reference to the bronchial tubes, and the small air passages — 


in the lungs. Here again a congestion is the primary result. and the 
effects produced must be considered from a double point of view: 

First: On the normal healthy lungs and bronchi. 

Second: On diseased lungs and bronchi. 

To take the second series first will perhaps serve us better. When 
considering the effect of an irritation due to dry air on a mucous mem- 
brane already irritated or congested by some disease, e.g., Tuberculosis, 
Bronchitis, Pneumonia, etc.,no one can deny for a moment the deleterious 
results that necessarily follow from such an added irritation. This 
point being conceded, some real benefit can be extended to people 
suffering from these diseases, by removing or replacing a very dry at- 
mosphere with one containing an optimum of moisture. 

As a matter of fact most people have witnessed the use of a 
bronchitis kettle for patients suffermg from acute bronchitis—this 
homely but efficient device supplying a quantity of water vapour to the 
atmosphere which is to be breathed by the patient; the immediate relief 
in these cases is most striking. 

Reverting to the first series, viz. the effects produced by a dry at- 
mosphere on healthy lungs and bronchi, no such absolute or incontro- 
vertible proofs can be brought forward as in the second series, but some 
strong points may be brought out by analogy. 

It is now-a-days quite an accepted fact that where you have the 
mucous membranes lining the lungs and bronchi in a congested or irri- 
tated state, the conditions are then favourable for the “ grafting on” of 
some disease, e.g., most marked of all, Tuberculosis. 

If other mechanical irritations besides that produced by dry air can 
be the starting point or predispositions of some disease, why not that 
produced by dry air? 

This argument is brought forward only as a strong probability, but 
it must gain in strength when the results. to be narrated below, of the 
action of air which is too dry on the healthy membranes lining the nose 
and throat, are carefully considered and weighed. 


| 
| 
| 


[STARKEY & BARNES] DEFICIENT HUMIDITY OF THE ATMOSPHERE 208 


CASES IN POINT: 


(I) A. B., arrived in Canada late in the year, and during the winter 
suffered greatly from congestion of the nose and throat, and to a less 
extent of the bronchial passages. 

The air of the rooms which he occupied was suspected, but chemical 
analysis showed its composition to be fairly good. The CO,—.07 per- 
cent; the air in the rooms where he spent most of the day showed 
CO.—.08 to .09 per cent, but the symptoms of congestion never developed 
there, consequently vitiation by excess of CO, could not account for the 
trouble. 

On testing the relative humidity it was found to be very low, on an 
average 40 to 50 per cent. 

The symptoms of congestion always disappeared rapidly when the 
individual went outdoors. Keeping the windows open regularly pre- 
vented the congestion. 

(2) Other cases of a like nature were found: 

“Stuffiness of the nose and throat” was an expression commonly 
applied. “A feeling of tension between the eyes ” (evidently congestion 
of the frontal sinus), also “irritation spreading through to the ears,” 
were descriptions given by not a few. 

In several of these instances air in their houses was examined: The 
CO, was never found to be much, if at all, above the normal .06 per cent 
—the other chemical constituents normal—but in all cases the Relative 
Humidity was low, never exceeding 50 per cent.,—generally about 40 
per cent.—lowest record, 35.8 per cent. 

(3) The case of a family in which there were five children, three 
boys and two girls, ranging from three to ten years. They had returned 
to town after a stay in the country during the summer. ‘lhe boys 
quickly began to lose tone as the winter came on. They all exhibited 
congestion of the nose and throat of a chronic nature. The two little 
girls continued well. It was found that the girls slept in a room where 
the windows were kept open night and day, but not so the boys. 

Chemical examination in the different rooms showed no material 
increase of the CO,, or the presence of other deleterious constituents. 
The relative humidity was about 40 percent. In the boys’ room a mini- 
mum of 38 per cent was obtained. In the girls’ room the relative 
humidity averaged 50 to 55 per cent. 

Fresh air was admitted by open windows to the boys’ rooms and 
they showed signs of improvement immediately and are now quite well. 

Dr. Birkett, of Montreal, a specialist on the nose and throat fully 
bears out the arguments brought forward above, for in his extensive 


206 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


practice he has noted many cases of a like nature to the ones just detailed. 
He also has tried increasing the moisture in the atmosphere with exceed- 
ingly good results. 

Having established the fact of the deleterious action of an atmos- 
phere containing too little moisture upon the human organism, your 
attention is invited to the appended tables wherein are shown a series of 
average observations. 

In speaking of the moisture, or more correctly the amount of mois- 
ture, contained in the atmosphere, it ought to be noted that too dry air 
is unpleasant to breathe, saturated air when warm is unbearable, e.g. 
80°F.—the most comfortable is when the air contains about 70-75 per 
cent of moisture necessary to saturate it. 


Oct. | Nov. | Dec. | JAN. | FEB. | Mar. 


Average-rel. humidity................ 87.8 | 86.7 | 79.2 | 78.1 | 79.2 | 8073 
Average temp. (indoor)............... 64° 64° 65° 66° 66° 65° 
Average rel. humidity (indoor) —win- 
dows closed..8 cen tuer 58 55 46 41 42 45 
Average rel. humidity (indoor) —win- 
COWSLOPEI: NÉ a ane ep eee eae 66 61 58 57 57 58 
N O CO, 
Average composition outside air in percentage........ 19 20.96 .04 
Average composition indoor air per cent............. 79 20.94 .06 


in these tables will be noted first the constancy of the indoor tem- 
perature — this is as it should be in a private house, such as the one 
in which all these observations were made. The outdoor temperature is 
mot recorded, but during the months of January, February and part of 
March, it is often 0°F. or well below, on the average. 

Knowing then that if we warm a given quantity of air completely 
saturated with moisture at the initial temperature it no longer remains 
saturated, we can readily see what an enormous difference in the relative 
humidity is entailed by heating the outside air registering 0°F., or below, 
to a temperature of 64°F. 

The effects of allowing some of the unheated outside air to enter 
the house, are plainly visible when comparing the series of relative 


[STARKEY & BARNES] DEFICIENT HUMIDITY OF THE ATMOSPHERE 207 


humidity indoors with the windows closed and open respectively. 

During the months of October and November the marked deviation 
of the records is not so noticeable as in January, February and Maren. 
This is owing to the fact that during October and November the fur- 
maces are not as yet in full swing, and consequently a great deal of 
unaltered outside air gains admission to the house. 

In these tables the relative humidity has always been calculated by 
means of the wet and dry bulb hygrometer, which we now proceed to 
show yields results very much too high for low relative humidities. 


WET AND DRY BULB HYGROMETER. 


The instrument most generally in use for the determination of rela- 
tive humidity is the wet and dry bulb hygrometer, or psychrometer. 
This type has the advantage of giving continuous readings, and its use 
seems to have been first proposed by Sir John Leslie. 

It is of great importance to have an instrument for meteorological 
work which gives at any time, without manipulation a reading of the 
humidity. There are two forms in which this instrument is met with; 
the usual one consists of two stationary thermometers, one of which gives 
the air temperature and the other the temperature of a piece of absor- 
bent material from which water is continually evaporating. The second 
form is the instrument provided with a handle so as to rotate the two 
thermometers rapidly and cause the maximum evaporation from the 
moistened wick over the wet bulb. 

So many complex circumstances have effect on the indications of 
the instrument that it seems impossible to deduce any satisfactory the- 
oretical formula for it. The well-known formulas of Apjohn and of 
August are not reliable over an extended range. 

The elaborate tables compiled by Glaisher, which are universally 
used, were constructed from a large number of simultaneous readings 
with the wet and dry bulb and the Daniell’s hygrometer. It is stated 
that these were made at the Greenwich Observatory and in India and at 
Toronto. 

During the progress of our work a grave doubt was raised in our 
minds as to the reliability of the instrument for air of very low moisture 
content. Thus the comparison which we give of the humidity in an average 
house in winter with the direct determination by the absorption method, 
was far from satisfactory. This was shown also on two or three occa- 
sions in the Macdonald Physics Building by comparing the dew point 
obtained on the Regnault hygrometer with the dew point deduced from 
a wet and dry bulb hygrometer. 


208 ROYAL SOCIETY UF CANADA 


On arriving in the laboratory on February 3rd, after a clear, cold 
night, a small cheap indicating hygnometer of the spiral type, was ob- 
served to be reading nearly zero humidity. This instrument had been 
carefully calibrated over its entire scale some time previous and had been 
then set correctly. It may be stated that this instrument was selected 
from a lot of half a dozen sent to us on trial, all of which were found 
entirely wrong, not only in reading but what was worse in range. The 
reading may always be corrected easily, but the range is a much more 
serious matter to adjust without injury to the delicate spiral. 

It was decided to check this low reading by means of a reliable in- 
strument. The Regnault hygrometer was accordingly used and a 
telescope provided for observing the appearance and disappearance of the 
film of moisture on the silver bulb containing the ether. The dew point 
was found to lie between 10.5° F. and 11.0° F., and was clearly defined 
between these limits. The maximum and minimum air temperature 
was given for that date as + 11.5°F., and —13.8°F. The relative 
humidity calculated from the dew point was only 9 per cent, and showed 
that the dryness of the air was very great indeed, and that the spiral 
hygrometer was nearly correct. 

The four following days were cold and clear, as shown by the follow- 


ing temperatures in Fahrenheit degrees: 


February 4th, Maximum 33.1, Minimum 11.9 
4 5th, 30.3, «8.5 
$ 6th, << —2.9, “«  —17.5 
a 7th, “« +5.1 “ —10.5 


Everything was conducing to excessive dryness as was shown on the 
morning of the 7th in the laboratory when a comparison was made of the 
various hygrometers we possessed. 

The Regnault hygrometer gave a dew point of 3.75°F. (limits of 
appearance and disappearance of mist—hoar frost—3.5° and 4°F.), 
which is above the mean air temperature. This shows that the air was 
dryer than the materials in the laboratory, some moisture being im- 
parted to the air on account of this. 

The relative humidity calculated from this observation is 6.25 per 
cent. The spiral hygrometer showed 5 per cent humidity, but the in- 
dications of the wet and dry bulb hygrometer of the stationary type were 
interesting. The dry bulb registered 69°F., and the wet bulb 57°F., 
showing a difference of 12°F., or 6.4°C. This gives a relative humidity 
of 45 per cent; this was at the same time as the other hygrometers gave 
5 and 6.25 per cent respectively. 


[STARKEY & BARNES] DEFICIENT HUMIDITY OF THE ATMOSPHERE 209 


An effort was made to inerease evaporation from the wet bulb in 
order to increase the observed difference. The wick was lengthened and 
more air circulated about the bulb. The readings were then observed to 
be 68°F. and 52°F., showing a difference of 16°F. or 8.88°C.; no greater 
difference could be obtained. 

This gives a relative humidity of 26 per cent., which was a little 
nearer the truth. The dbserved difference between the two thermometers 
should have been weil over 20°F. to have given the correct result. 

It is possible that a revolving hygrometer would have given better 
results, and one was procured, but not in time for a test on this date. 
Later in the season when the humidity was from 10 to 15 per cent one 
of these instruments was tried but with little success. Possibly the form 
we procured was not sufficiently accurate. 

It is evident from our comparisons that the wet and dry bulb in- 
strument is not suitable for the measurement of relative humidity beyond 
a fairly large percentage, probably on account of the conduction of heat 
down the stem of the thermometer offsetting the cooling due to evapora- 
tion. 

How far the instrument is suitable for outdoor readings, when the 
air is very cold, we are not yet in a position to state, but we are inclined 
to think it does not give very satisfactory results. For small differences 
showing high relative humidity it is satisfactory, and.it is from such 
readings that Glaisher’s tables were doubtless compiled. 

We include a test here to show that satisfactory results may be 
obtained under these conditions. ‘lhe date of test was May 18th, 1906 in 
the Physics Laboratory. The Regnault hygrometer gave a dew point of 
18.85°C. with the air temperature 21.7°C., which gives a relative hu- 
midity of 82 per cent. Simultaneous readings with the wet and dry bulb 
gave: 


for the dry bulb, mat oC. 
DLL SENTE 19.6°C. 
Difference, rap al Os 


This gives a relative humidity of 82 per cent, and a dew point of 
18.8°C., which is identical with the Regnault instrument. 

We think then that for high relative humidities the wet and dry 
bulb hygrometer yields correct values, with moderately high tempera- 
tures, but that for low humidities the instrument is entirely misleading. 

In view of these discrepancies further tests were carried out in the 
Hygiene Department, which tests consisted in comparisons between the 


Sec. II1., 1906. 14 


210 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


results of the wet and dry bulb hygrometers and the exact chemical 
estimations of the water vapour in the atmosphere at the same time: 


RELATIVE HUMIDITIES: 


Simultaneous Observations by the Two. Methods. 


No. Wet AND Dry BULB CHEMICAL ANALYSIS 
À ADR ATARI SE CNRS EL AU ACER rata taney ne 78 per cent. 40/5 percent: 
PAN ce eb PR Pre en os 2 te) Ee 71 71 ; 

DAME EEE Ebr bone arta ea nl 53.47 : 34.7 * 
ON eras eens AE) SAN A AA oon! 35 = 
LUE senate Bema re LA ete eae 52.2 ; 36.57 © 
Gi We Meta LUN EIRE AMAR 52.2 à 36.5 v 
es We chest DAS RAS A AE A 54 $ 36 ss 
oa OP SONT TES SE RE ie, ENT: 53 à 28.5 Ë 
WS NE SC ET ch UNS ES PE ULB 38.8 30.5 7 
LORRAINE Mie kare arn 39 "4 29 + 


The first six observations were taken on different days at very irre- 
gular intervals extending over six weeks. ‘lhe wet and dry bulb 
thermometers were suspended in the middle of the laboratory where only a 
slight current of air obtained. The disparity in the results here are 
extremely striking and from the few figures obtained one cannot deduce 
any corrections applicable to the wet and dry bulb instruments. Where 
the humidity is about 70 to 80 per cent the results apparently are not 
very far from the accurate condition of the humidity, but with a fairly 
still atmosphere and a low percentage of moisture the results of the wet 
and dry bulb instrument varied tremendously, being out on an average 
20 per cent. 

The last four observations, namely, Nos. 7, 8, 9, and 10, are inter- 
esting being all taken on the same day, 7 and 8 taken in the morning at 
a two-hour interval, the wet and dry bulb instrument being placed under 
still conditions as above mentioned. Here again the discrepancy is 
about 20 per cent as before. In Nos. 9 and 10 observations were taken 
in a very marked draught of air, the instruments being placed in the 
draughts from three large open windows and one would not be far short 
of the mark by saying that the conditions were almost identical with 


[STARKEY & BARNES] DEFICIENT HUMIDITY OF THE ATMOSPHERE 211 


those in the open. The evaporation from the wet bulb had thus free 
play and would be practically at its maximum. 

‘he relative humidities under these conditions correspond fairly 
closely with those obtained by exact chemical analysis. It is of course 
as one would expect that where full play is given to the evaporation the 
records ought to be nearer the truth than when the wet and dry bulb 
instruments are placed in a still atmosphere and the rate of evaporation 
is interfered with to a large extent. But one can easily see from the 
last two observations that no figures of correction are possible because 
the rate of evaporation depending so exactly upon the movement of the 
air, any interference with the latter would necessarily throw the results 
a great way out from the truth. 

We bring forward these tests in connection with our discussion of 
deficient humidity because the wet and dry bulb hygrometer is almost 
the only instrument used for testing the relative humidity by house- 
holders. Many observers have found the dryness excessive by using this 
instrument, but it will be seen that the actual state of affairs is proba- 
bly much worse than has been imagined. ; 

Methods have been devised for supplying moisture to the air of 
houses and buildings, but a few figures to show the amount of moisture 
required to bring the air up to a normal healthy humidity will be found 
to be somewhat discouraging. Thus in an ordinary sized dwelling house 
when due allowance is made for the amount of air required for each per- 
son per day something like 33 gallons of water must be evaporated daily 
to keep the air at a relative humidity of 75 per cent. Other difficulties 
arise when this is accomplished. Rapid condensation takes place on the 
windows when the air temperature outside is very low. Experience has 
shown that this commences at a humidity of about 40 per cent. We are 
inclined to think that much could be accomplished by maintaining the 
humidity even at this latter figure, and that the question should be 
earnestly considered in order to improve the general health of the large 
proportion of people who spend the greater part of their life in artificially 
heated buildings. 


fi i il [ i il A! 
si HA don NAW Thy 
4 i} AL [ | 
Am } 
. Wy h ; 1 ’ 
, x : ' 
f 
\ ll 
f i 
| À 
| 
é 
' 
5 
GC . 
‘ 
i 
/ 
‘ 
> 1 
! 
ti 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


RÉ ANS ACTIONS 


SECTION IV 


GEOLOGICAL AND BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES 


PAPERS FOR 1906 


Secrion IV., 1906. [8] Trans. R. S. C. 


I— The Gypsum Deposits of New Brunswick. 


By L. W. Barzey, LL.D. 
(Read May 22nd, 1906.) 


A very large increase in the production of gypsum has occurred 
during the last few years, as indicited by the fact that while in the 
year 1890 the total quantity produced in the United States was 182,995 
short tons, with a value, as crude gypsum, of $19,148, and, as manu- 
factured, of $574,523, in 1903 the total quantity was 73,912 short tons, 
with a value, for crude plaster, of $87,608, and, for the manufactured 
product, of $3,792,943, an increase largely due to the much wider range 
of its applications. Similarly, from New Brunswick alone the ship- 
ment to the United States, which in 1890 amounted to 25,672 tons, 
had, in 1897, risen to 59,334 tons, and, in 1905, to 125,402 tons. 

Coincident with this increase in the employment of gypsum much 
more attention has been paid to the conditions of its occurrence, and 
to the numerous questions, of scientific interest, which a study of 
such occurrence suggests. As the New Brunswick deposits present 
many features of interest, and in some instances exceptional oppor- 
tunities for investigation, it has been thought by the writer that a 
summary of the facts which have come under his observation would 
not be without value. 

The gypsum deposits of New Brunswick, like those of Nova Scotia, 
are, without exception, confined to the Lower Carboniferous system, in 
this respect resembling those of Virginia. They are also confined to 
the summit of that formation, being in many instances immediately 
followed by the basal beds of the Millstone grit. Finally, they show 
in most instances little evidence of disturbance, being either in very 
low undulations or quite horizontal. Regarded with reference to the 
present sea level the most important beds are within two hundred feet 
of the latter, but some extensive deposits are found at elevations equal 
to at least twice that amount. In northern New Brunswick the most 
important deposits are those of the Tobique valley, in Victoria county. 
As exposed in and near the village of Plaster Rock, to which a branch 
of the Canadian Pacific Railway has been extended for the more ready 
removal and marketing of the material, the gypsum forms vertical 
bluffs about 130 feet high, consisting of numerous alternating bands 
of gray, greenish and reddish colours and granular texture, traversed 
here and there by seams -f white fibrous gypsum or satin spar. Owing 
to the want of exposures the horizontal extension of the deposit is not 


4 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


known, but is believed to include several square miles. The gypsum 
rests on limestones which, as far as known, are destitute of animal 
fossils and remarkable for their open, stalactitic and coralloidal char- 
acter, as though the result of chemical deposition. Calcified trunks of 
trees of large size and very perfect preservation are sometimes met 
with. | 

Considering the elevation of these beds (about 300 feet), together 
with their horizontal attitude, the conclusion is suggested that at the 
time of the deposition of the gypsums all portions of northern New 
Brunswick having a less elevation than the amount stated must have 
been in a state of submergence. 

In central New Brunswick the red marly and sandy beds of the 
Lower Carboniferous system are to some extent gypsiferous, but no 
deposits of any extent occur, this formation being mostly covered and 
concealed by the gray rocks of the coal formation. 

In southern New Brunswick the localities are more numerous, being 
found in many parts of King’s, Albert and Westmorland counties. In 
King’s they occur in the vicinity of Sussex and in the parish of Ham- 
mond; in Albert about Hillsboro, Hopewell, Demoiselle creek, and 
Riverside; and in Westmorland on the north branch of the Petitcodiac 
river and at Cape Meranguin. Of these by far the most important 
are those of Hillsboro, to which special attention may now be directed. 

The Hillsborough plaster-beds, as now exposed, lie along the western 
and southern sides of a somewhat funnel-like depression, opening east- 
wardly towards the Petitcodiac river, where is situated the village 
above named, together with the plaster mills and shipping wharves. 
The height of the gypsum beds above the sea level varies from 30 
or less to 285 feet, while the height of the western side of the basin, 
along the base of which are the principal quarries, is about 400 feet. 
The depression itself presents considerable diversity of surface, its east- 
ern portion being occupied by marsh lands but little above tide-level, — 
while the remainder shows as a whole a gradual rise, broken, however 
by numerous ridges and valleys, the result mainly of stream erosion, 
but in part also consequent upon differential movements. Within the 
area actually underlaid by gypsum the irregularity becomes extreme, 
the occurrence of steep bluffs of gypsum (Plate I), of circular steep- 
walled depressions once occupied by the latter and often several rods 
in diameter, or of tracts honeycombed with sink holes, being the most 
noticeable features. These are sometimes so crowdedly grouped and 
so narrowly separated that passage across the areas occupied by them is 
both difficult and dangerous (see Plate 4, Fig. I). In addition to the 
surface drainage an underground drainage is known to exist, and cAves 


[BAILEY ] GYPSUM DEPOSITS OF NEW BRUNSWICK 5 


of considerable dimensions (Plate II), some of them occupied at their 
mouths by never melting snow, occur. Some noticeable hills of till 
are found, but the district is remarkably free from the presence of large 
erratics. The soil, as a rule, is very fertile, supporting a varied and 
luxuriant forest growth. 

As bearing upon their probable origin and history the situation and 
topography of the plaster beds of Hillsborough are not without signi- 
ficance. These are indicated in the accompanying sketch map, wherein 
it will be seen that they are found not far from the eastern end of 
an elevated tract of very ancient rocks extending eastward from near 
the city of St John and parallel to the Bay of Fundy. It is probable 
that during the Lower Carboniferous period this ridge was wholly sub- 
merged, as conglomerates and limestones of the formation named con- 
stitute the summit of Shepody Mountain, now about 1,000 feet above 
sea-level. 

The geological succession in the immediate vicinity of Hillsborough 
is, in ascending order, as follows :— 

(1) Reddish brown and chocolate, sometimes gray, calcareous 
conglomerates and sandstones, with clayey and marly beds, the con- 
glomerates containing pebbles of granite, syenite, slate and other 
metamorphic rocks, the whole well stratified and indicative of rapid 
deposition under the influence of strong currents in shallow waters. 
In places these rocks show the presence of albertite in small veins or 
scattered particles. They have an exposed thickness of 60 or 70 feet, 
which, however, is but a small part of their total thickness as seen 
elsewhere. 

(2) Gray bituminous limestone, thin bedded or flaggy, also holding 
small veins of albertite. The limestones are essentially non-fossiliferous, 
though upon some surfaces are to be seen small cylinders apparently 
of organic origin, of which the true nature cannot readily be made 
out. The nature of the beds indicates their deposition or precipitation 
in quiet waters too shallow or too impure to favour the development 
of organic life. The thickness of the limestones is about 30 feet. 

(3) Gypsum and anhydrite. These deposits follow immediately 
upon the limestones, as observed at many points. They are also fre- 
quently well stratified with an aggregate thickness of about 200 feet 
(see Plate IIT). They are in places quite compact, in others much shat- 
tered, and are usually extensively divided by vertical joint-planes, made 
more evident at the surface by the development, through solution, of 
sharp pinnacles or castellated forms, or, on faces of excavations, by 
steeply inclined or vertical clefts, widened by water and subsequently 


6 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


filled with deposits of red clay (see Plate III, Fig 3). The varying 
character and origin of these deposits are discussed below. 

(4) Red conglomerates, with greenish and reddish marls. The 
thickness of these beds is not definitely known, but is probably not 
over 100 feet. 

(5) Gray sandstones, with numerous white quartz pebbles. These 
are the characteristic rocks of the Millstone-grit formation — marking 
a transition to the brackish and fresh-water deposits of the Coal period. 
They are found only on the border of the basin and on the summits 
of the higher hills. 

In addition to the above there are heavy beds of red clay, usually 
resting directly upon the gypsum, with a thickness varying from a 
few yards to thirty feet or more (Plate V). This clay is very fine 
and very tenacious. Its colour, due to disseminated anhydrous per- 
oxide of iron, as well as its character, indicate a very thorough oxid- 
ation of the materials composing it, with the absence of vegetable 
matter. Similar clays fill the vertical or oblique fissures, sometimes 
eight or ten feet wide and twenty or more feet deep, dividing the 
rock faces of gypsum or filling irregular cavities in the latter. Occa- 
sionally they are disposed as more or less horizontal layers between 
successive deposits of gypsum, but these intermediate bands are more 
commonly of a gritty nature. Their relation to the coloration of the 
gypsum is very obvious. 

Confining our attention to the plaster beds we find them to 
consist, in very variable proportions, of gypsum and anhydrite, their 
irregular association and the fact that the latter is practically valueless 
determining the most important problems in the economical working 
of the quarries. For many years it was supposed that the workable 
gypsum beds, especially at the Steves quarry, were underlaid by deposits 
which were mainly anhydrite or hard plaster, but this has been recently 
disproved, and it would seem that no definite rule can be ascertained 
governing the mode of occurrence of the two rocks as regards either 
horizontal or vertical distribution. In places they are mingled to form 
a complex network, while in others masses of pure gypsum on the one 
hand, or of anhydrite on the other, may be found with a thickness, in 
either case, of thirty feet or more. 

The gypsum itself presents much variety of colour and texture. 
As to the latter much of the rock is either amorphous or crypto- 
crystalline; less frequently it is granular or saccharoidal; and still less 
frequently takes the form of selenite. Crystals of the latter mineral 
are sometimes found irregularly distributed in massive alabaster, but 
are usually in groups and not infrequently arranged along lines of 


[BAILEY ] GYPSUM DEPOSITS OF NEW BRUNSWICK ia? | 


bedding or lamination. They seldom exceed an inch in diameter. No 
fibrous gypsum or satin spar occurs in the massive plaster rock, but 
veins of this character, usually less than an inch in width, are found 
in the associated red sandy and clayey beds, and are evidently of later 
crigin. In colour the rock varies from snowy whiteness to shades of 
gray, blue and salmon red, being sometimes mottled, selenite crystals 
when they occur being usually darker than the rock in which they 
are imbedded. The red colour is most pronounced in the vicinity of 
cracks or layers containing red clay, though sometimes diffused through 
considerable masses. 

Chemical analysis of the first grades of the gypsum rock show it 
to contain 99.88 per cent of hydrated sulphate of lime, with only traces 
of iron, silica and magnesia, but in inferior grades there may be found 
carbonate as well as sulphate of lime, with both silica and iron, though 
in inconsiderable amounts. | 

An important feature in any discussion of the gypsum deposits 
of Albert county is that of their arrangement, to which must be added 
the evidences which they afford of deformation. In many parts of the 
quarries the indications of stratification or of lamination are very 
marked, as illustrated in the accompanying plate (see Plate III), and 
are sometimes made more evident by bands of small selenite crystals 
arranged on either side of a bedding plane, or, in some instances, with 
this plane bisecting individual crystals. The planes of lamination are 
at times very regular, at others wavy or corrugated, and, though in 
general not as a whole far from horizontal, occasionally exhibiting 
inclination of 30° or more. The corrugations referred to and local 
crumplings may in part be due to pressure resulting from hydration, 
or from removal of support through the effects of solution, but the study 
of the district as a whole, and especially of the relations of the gypsum 
beds to the underlying limestones, show that both of these rocks have 
been subjected to deformation, determining a general synclinal structure, 
‘the broad and open basin thus produced being partly divided into 
smaller basins by low anticlinal domes. From the study of these 
relations (see section) we are also led to the inference that the 
original thickness of the plaster beds must have been at least 300 feet, 
as also that over considerable areas this had been removed by denudation 
prior to the commencement of quarrying operations. The effects of 
the solvent action of waters are everywhere to be seen in the broken, 
castellated or turreted aspect of the gypsum bluffs, in the abundance 
of pot-holes, often, as already noted, crowdedly grouped, and in the 
evidences of underground drainage. In addition to evidences of 
plication the rocks show also the effects of lateral pressure in the pro- 


8 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


duction of joints as well, as seen in Plate III, these joint planes deter- 
mining the forms assumed in weathering as well as the vertical red clay 
partings by which the beds of plaster are often divided. 

To the features above referred to must be added the fact that 
at a number of points in and about the quarries, the plaster rock 
exhibits a markedly concretionary structure, the concretions varying in 
size from a few inches up to two feet or more, and looking, on the face 
of exposed bluffs, like the ends of barrels piled one upon another. 
(See Plate IV, Fig 2). 

We may now pass on to consider the possible origin of the gypsum 
deposits (including in this connection both true gypsum and anhy- 
drite) in relation to theoretical views as to the conditions of such 
origin, and as indicated by the facts already cited. 

(1) Derivation from limestone through action of free sulphuric 
acid. This mode of formation, in its application to Acadia, was 
strongly advocated by the late Sir William Dawson. It supposes sul- 
phuric acid to have been formed either as an indirect product of volcanic 
action, through oxidation of sulphur and sulphurous vapours, or else 
through the similar oxidation of hydrogen sulphide or metallic sulphides, 
and, reaching the sea in streams, to have discharged carbonic acid from 
limestones pre-existing there, with formation of calcic sulphate either 
as gypsum or anhydrite. 

In favour of this view we have the fact that the gypsums of Albert 
county are directly and invariably underlaid by limestones, while a con- 
siderable percentage of calcic carbonate is to be found in deposits of 
otherwise pure gypsum. Volcanic activity is also known to have been 
a marked feature of the Lower Carboniferous age in Acadia, while gyp- 
sum deposits, undoubtedly thus formed, have been observed in various 
parts of the world. On the other hand, so far as Albert county, New 
Brunswick, is concerned, no rocks of volcanic origin are found in the 
vicinity of the plaster beds; pyrites and other sulphides are not notice- 
ably abundant in the rocks of the district; no sulphur springs are found; 
and the existence of acid springs at the time of the formation of the 
gypsum is an assumption wholly without direct evidence in its support. 
The view, though applicable in some instances and upon a small scale, 
has been generally abandoned in relation to the larger deposits of gyp- 
sum, rock as being less in accordance with observation and experiment 
than other views more recently advanced. 

(2) A second supposition is that the plaster deposits owe their 
origin to the mutual reaction of nalural sulphates, such as those of iron, 
copper and magnesia, with carbonate of lime; but there is nothing 
in connection with the Hillsborough deposits to give it support, and 


[BAILEY ] GYPSUM DEPOSITS OF NEW BRUNSWICK 9 


the view is open to the same objections as in the case of the theory 
first referred to. 

Both of the above views fail to take any account of the coexistence 
and intimate association of gypsum and anhydrite. 

(3) Derivation by precipitation from salé water in shallow basins. 
This is the view now generally taken as regards the original deposits 
of which the plaster beds are the present representatives, and finds 
strong support in the observations made in connection with the residues 
of such inland seas as the Great Salt Lake of Utah, and the more ancient 
and more extensive basins known as Lakes Bonneville and Lahontan. 
It is not, however, believed that the deposits in question, as now found, 
are necessarily in the same condition as when first deposited. For, as 
has been stated, they consist in part of gypsum and in part of anhydrite, 
and questions naturally arise as to the relations of these two. Were 
they deposited coincidently or has the one been derived from the other? 
In the latter case, which was the antecedent rock? and what conditions 
have determined either their separate precipitation or the conversion of 
the one into the other? 

As favouring the general view that the Acadian deposits of gypsum 
were produced by precipitation from sea-water, a number of facts may 
be noticed. 

First, the Lower Carboniferous rocks, of which the gypsiferous 
strata form the upper member, show throughout the district abundant 
evidences of marine origin, the most conspicuous being their prominently 
red colour, due to the absence of vegetable matter, the occurrence of 
salines, the paucity of vegetable remains and the frequent occurrence 
of limestones carrying corals, crinoids and brachiopods. The distribu- 
tion of these rocks, together with their relations to the present sea. 
level, also indicate that, as regards portions at least of the era, the 
Provinces of New Brunswick and Nova Scotia were largely if not wholly 
submerged, deposits of this age in the former province being found 
upon the summit of Shepody Mountain (900 feet high, and but little 
removed from the plaster quarries at Hillsboro), at Henry Lake on 
the summit ridge of the Quaco Hills (800? feet), and on the Tobique 
river, the beds in each case being but little removed from horizontality. 
Upon the other hand, the character of the beds, containing but little 
limestone, but abounding in coarse clastic deposits such as sandstones 
and pebble beds, indicates that with general subsidence, to a depth pro- 
bably of several thousands of feet, the waters remained shallow 
and subject to frequent changes both as to distribution and as to depth. 
Shifting sand bars or sea walls would from time to time enclose basins 
or lagoons, wherein, as a consequence of isolation, together with ex- 


10 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


posure to the effects of a warm and arid climate, evaporation might 
at intervals go so far as to lead to the deposition of the contained 
salts. The waters of these lagoons, when highly concentrated or unduly 
heated, would not be favourable to the presence of organic life, and 
the absence of fossils in the limestones beneath the gypsums may be 
due to this cause, as may also the vast numbers of fossil fishes found 
in the shales of the old Albert mines only a few miles distant from 
Hillsboro, and whose sudden destruction may have been due to some 
such cause. Under such conditions the salts of lime, as being the 
least soluble, would, as in the artificial evaporation of brines, be the 
first to separate, and, as in such artificial evaporation of water containing 
calcic sulphate this invariably separates as hydrated sulphate or gypsum, 
we may suppose that the same was the case with the formation of 
rock-plaster, the primary condition of the latter being therefore that of 
true gypsum. This view is that taken by Prof. W. O. Crosby, of the 
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, who has further expressed his 
belief that, the rock having been first deposited as gypsum, the burial 
of this beneath a sufficient mass of superincumbent strata would deter- 
mine the conditions of low temperature thermo-metamorphism, dehy- 
drating the gypsum as in the production of plaster of Paris, and giving 
origin to anhydrite. Finally, as is well known, the latter mineral, 
being, hke other anhydrides, an unstable compound, tends to be recon- 
verted, through atmospheric agencies, to the condition of gypsum, a 
slow process which is still in operation. Thus, according to this view, 
gypsum, as we now have it, is a hydrated anhydrite, the latter being 
derived from previously existing and original deposits of gypsum. 

In this connection it may be observed that Van Hise, in his great 
monograph on Metamorphism (page 357), says: “The main source 
of anhydrite is by the alteration of gypsum,” and again, that “ the 
chief alteration of anhydrite is to gypsum, with an increase of volume 
of 60 per cent,” citing as an example the anhydrite deposit of Bex, 
Switzerland, where the transformation from anhydrite to gypsum has 
taken place completely to a depth of from 18 to 30 metres, the materials 
below this depth being anhydrite. 

On the other hand, there are those who maintain that both gypsum 
and anhydrite may be deposited from the same solution, the production 
of the one or the other depending upon the conditions prevailing at 
the time, these conditions including temperature, depth of water, degree 
of concentration, and especially the presence of other salts. Thus, 
Adams observes, “Anhydrite may be formed from gypsum solutions at 
various temperatures when the solutions contain other salts in sufficient 
quantities.. For example, it has been found that in the presence of a 


[BAILEY] GYPSUM DEPOSITS OF NEW BRUNSWICK 11 


saturated solution of common salt this change (from gypsum to anhy- 
drite) takes place at 30° C., which is a temperature reached on a sum- 
mer day. This fact satisfactorily accounts for the formation of anhy- 
drite in nature from concentrated sea water or lake brines.” Van’t 
Hoff, also, in his work on the German salt deposits, has made it very 
probable that the presence of saline matter has a marked influence upon 
the form in which the lime sulphate is deposited. Geikie, in his 
Text-Book of Geology, page 115, in alluding to various possible 
methods of the formation of gypsum, says, “It may be produced as a 
chemical precipitate from solution in water, as when sea water is eva- 
porated; also through the hydration of anhydrite”; adding that “ it 
is in the first of these ways that the thick beds of gypsum associated 
with rock salt in many geological formations have been formed.” 

We may now briefly consider the facts presented by the gypsum 
deposits of New Brunswick in the light of the theories above noted. 

It has already been shown that the geographical and physical con- 
ditions prevailing in this part of America at the time of the Lower 
Carboniferous formation were favourable for the production of evaporat- 
ing basins or lagoons, similar to those which are believed to have char- 
acterized portions of the State of New York during the Salina period; 
and from the occasional occurrence of corals in the limestones, and of 
Tree Ferns (megaphyta) in certain beds of the overlying Millstone 
grit, we may infer that the temperature conditions were equally favour- 
able. Supposing, however, the whole of the original deposition to have 
been in the form of gypsum and that this was dehydrated as the result 
of deep burial and consequent thermo-metamorphism, we have to en- 
quire as to the possible thickness of overlying sediments necessary to 
determine this result. These would necessarily consist largely of the 
rocks of the coal-formation. Now these, so far as the beds of the Mill- 
stone grit and the Middle Carboniferous era are concerned, are well 
known to have, over the greater part of New Brunswick a very insigni- 
ficant thickness as compared with the same rocks in Nova Scotia, reach- 
ing a maximum, and that only in one locality, of a little over 1,000 
feet. The thickness of the upper or Permo-Carboniferous, as found in 
Westmorland county, has also been estimated (by Ells) as about 1,000 
feet, and this is not found in any part of Albert county. It may once 
have been there, as also later beds of Mesozoic or even Cenozoic origin, 
and have been removed by erosion; but making all reasonable allowance 
for this, it seems improbable that more than 3,000 feet of sediments 
ever lay above the gypsum deposits, and it is a question whether this 
would have led to any appreciable rise of temperature in the beds thus 
buried. On the other hand, it is known that the temperature at which 


12 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


the alteration under consideration may take piace is comparatively low; 
it is lowered by pressure, and possibly in the lengthy processes of nature 
no change may be needed at all, as is known to be the case for ferric, 
aluminic, silicic and other hydrates. 

As to the reconversion of anhydrite into gypsum, by surface action, 
the quarries at Hillsborough, in common with those of Windsor, Nova 
Scotia, show a general tendency towards the occurrence of anhydrite 
rather than gypsum with increase of depth, and Prof. Crosby has 
informed me that at the locality last named every stage of the transition 
may be traced. The only direct indications, however, of such a change, 
as seen by the writer in the Hillsborough quarries, are to be found 
in the concretions alluded to in the description of the varying aspects 
of the plaster rocks, and of which the interior is invariably anhydrite 
while the exterior is soft plaster or gypsum. Otherwise the two min- 
erals are in this locality mingled in such a way as to defy anticipation, 
though even this may be favourable rather than the reverse to the view 
that the one has been derived from the other. The matter is one of 
great practical importance, as the recognition of any principle govern- 
ing the occurrence of the hard and useless anhydrite as compared with 
the merchantable gypsum would mean a very large saving in the cost 
of production. 

The occurrence of albertite veins completely enclosed in pure 
white and massive alabaster is an interesting feature of the deposits 
at Hillsborough, and has been the subject of discussion by the writer 
in Vol VII (second series) of the Transactions of this Society. As 
the same mineral penetrates the overlying beds of the Millstone grit, 
it could hardly have been contemporary with the enclosing gypsum, and 
its presence in the latter, wholly disconnected with any outside source 
of similar material, is not easy to understand. 

Another noticeable feature of the Hillsborough deposits is that of 
the comparative paucity of selenite crystals. These are, indeed, numer- 
ous in some parts of the quarries, but they are quite local in their 
distribution and of small dimensions, the greater part of the rock being 
‘a cryptocrystalline or amorphous alabaster. Where most abundant they 
also exhibit a decided tendency towards aggregation along lines of bed- 
ding or lamination, which would seem to indicate either that they 
represent surfaces of original deposit, affording ample room for coarse 
crystallization, or that they have been subsequently formed through the 
agency of solutions traversing the rock along the lines referred to. 
The selenite crystals are also usualiy much darker than the enclosing 
alabaster, being sometimes almost black, a result probably due to dis- 
seminated carbon. Groups of selenite crystals have been found cemented 


[BAILEY] } GYPSUM DEPOSITS OF NEW BRUNSWICK 13 


by albertite. That the production of selenite crystals has continued 
since the time of the deposition of the massive rock is indicated by the 
fact that red sandstones, later in origin than the gypsum proper, are 
traversed by numerous narrow veins of satin spar. 

Comparing other deposits of the province with those of Hillsborough, 
it may be noted that those of the Tobique valley, in Victoria county, 
are remarkable as being not only much less pure, but also as being 
distinctly crystalline throughout, with traversing veins of fibrous gyp- 
sum or satin spar, probably of later origin. At this point also the 
limestones, instead of being flaggy and destitute of fossils, as at Hills- 
borough, are coarsely tufaceous and stalagmitic, as though of crenitic 
crigin, at the same time enclosing somewhat numerous fragments and 
trunks of calcified trees. In the former feature they suggest com- 
parison with the tufaceous deposits found around the shores of the 
Great Salt Lake, in Utah, and which have been regarded as due to the 
action of saline water upon brooks charged with calcic carbonate, leading 
to the rapid and complete precipitation of the latter. 

Near Sussex, in King’s county, groups of selenite crystals, with 
the crystals filled with grains of sand, are found at the bottom of springs, 
and appear to be still in process of formation. Here also the gypsum 
is accompanied by brine springs, which are wanting at Hillsborough. 

On the Petitcodiac river, a few miles from Salisbury, in West- 
morland county, a considerable mass of gypsum is wholly in the con- 
dition of selenite crystals, mostly of small size, or granular, but 
traversed by veins in which large plates of the crystalline variety are 
associated in a most intricate fashion. 

Upon the peninsula terminating in Cape Meranguin, in Westmor- 
land county, about fifteen miles from Hillsborough, but separated by 
the waters of the Petitcodiac river and Shepody Bay, the shore shows 
an interesting section.in which beds of finely granular gray and white 
gypsum, more or les spotted with selenite crystals, contain masses of 
anhydrite in the form of irregular wedge-like or lenticular layers, 
besides bands of brownish red rubbly sandstone, enclosing masses of 
gypsum, the whole resting upon limestones containing fossil shells. 
The selenite crystals are of a deep red colour. 

At Demoiselle Creek, about six miles from Hillsborough, plaster 
beds which may be continuous or nearly so with those of the latter 
locality, though now separated at the surface by a high ridge of con- 
glomerate and gray sandstone (Millstone grit), contain a stratum, from 
eight to ten feet thick, in which the rock is a coarse breccia, filled 
with angular fragments of gypsum of all sizes, and which indicate that 
the conditions of quiescence under which the ordinary plaster rocks 


14 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


were accumulated, were occasionally interrupted by more sudden 
changes, involving disruption of the beds and more rapid sedimentation. 

At Martin’s Head, upon the coast of St. John county, thirty miles 
southwest of Hillsborough, gypsum beds of limited extent and less pure 
than those of the latter locality, but still merchantable, occur, and are 
remarkable as forming the basal rocks of a synclinal basin, enclosed 
between parallel bands of old Pre-Cambrian schists, and overlaid 
directly by brown shales, gray calcareous sandstones holding nodules 
of gypsum, and yellowish gray very ochreous sandstones, all dipping 
at an angle of 45°. The marly beds have veins of fibrous gypsum, 
and in places completely enclose, within greatly contorted lamin, irre- 
gular masses of gypsum from two to four feet thick. 

From the distribution of the gypsiferous strata around the Bay of 
Fundy trough, at Martins Head, Riverside, Demoiselle Creek, Hills- 
borough, Cape Demoiselle, Windsor, etc., it would follow that the con- 
ditions originating such deposits, as discussed above, must have been 
very general in this district near the close of the Lower Carboniferous 
era. It is also quite possible that these conditions were not quite 
the same at all points and that among the beds described several of 
the modes of deposition or origination discussed above may find illus- 


tration. 


A RS ee a mg 


pe den ar 


ben éd on 1 Ÿ = 


*U02109#1}D47S PUN SJUIOL 1MIUUIR Bu_noys 


‘TN ‘HONOHOASITIH—AHHVAT WOASdAY) NI MATA 


Cr ea] MOIMSNOYA MAN JO SLISOdHA WOSHAD AHL [awirva 


“= 


Lt 


La] 


CR 


on 


‘2Y0) UDIWDALIJQNS OF BOUDAQUA DUINOUYS 


“A'N ‘Ma@GUD) ALITASIONHG—sSidtoATd NASdAN) 


Cir 91d | MOIMSNOUA MAN AO SLISOdAG WASdAD AHL [aay] 


‘saunjd quiol pun uornurun] Bunoys 


‘Œ'N ‘HONOHOHSTIIH—-AUHVAT WASdAH 


[Aa VA] 


Pitt o8141 MOIMSNAUS MAN AO SLISOdHA KASdAN AHL 


[ BAILEY | THE GYPSUM DEPOSITS OF NEW BRUNSWICK [Plate IV.] 


+ 


Fie. 1. Por HOLE NEAR GYPSUM Fig 2. CONCRETIONS OF ANHYDRITE 
QUARRY. AND GYPSUM. 


Fre 3 VERTICAL AND ENLARGED JOINTS IN GYPSUM, NOW 
FILLED WITH RED CLAY. 


VIEWS IN AND NEAR THE PLASTER QUARRIES, HILLSBOROUGH, N.B. 


7 
Mm) | 
\ . ic 


‘finja pat fo Purddno pun shurysom PUNOLLIPUNR 07 IDUDAJUI Buinoys 


‘G'N ‘HONOUONSTIIH—AHAVOD WASdAy 


['A 99814] MOIMSNOUA MAN AO SLISOdHA KAS4AD AHL [Aativa] 


‘Millstone Grit. 


Exposed Areas of Gypsum. 


Exposed Arvus of Limestone, 


Albert shales. (Devonian?) 


Pre Gunbrian. 


Various Lower Carboniferous Rocks 
Conglomerates. shales &e 


LEE 


Numbers on Line of Section are elevations above sea level. 


GEOLOGICAL MAP OF GYPSUM BEARING AREAS, 
ALBERT Co. N.B. 


Scale: One Inch to a Mile. 


Whitehead Quarry 


Geological Section- from Petitcodiac River to Whitehead Quarry, Hillsborough, Albert Co. NB. 
Scale: 1000 feet to one Inch, horizontal and vertical. 


Note: The stratum indrcated tn blue is limestone. The beds above are Gypsum, below red conglomerates. 


Secrion IV., 1906. À ETS] Trans. R. S. C. 


IL.— Sleeping Sickness. 


By Str JAMES Grant, K.C.M.G. 


(Read May 22nd, 1906.) 


At present in England, the subject of Tropical medicine, is attract- 
ing widespread attention, and undoubtedly experimental medicine is 
responsible for the greatest advances which have come to light, within 
the past few years. The discoveries of Novy and McNeal, are of much 
importance, the first in fact to obtain pure cultures of protozoa, main- 
taining trypanosomas of different species, alive. The recent discovery 
during the past year, of protozoal parasites in the blood of differen: 
animals, in addition to many new species of trypanosoma, is of much 
interest, and more particularly owing to the close affinity of these dis- 
coveries, with Sleeping Sickness. So far as known, the first to observe 
“Sleeping Sickness,” was Winterbottom, who wrote a brief paper in 
1803, giving an account of the native Africans in the neighbourhood of 
Sierra Leone. The next reports of importance were those of Dumon- 
tier and Santelli in 1868, but by far the most important and accurate 
account, is by Corre, who studied the disease, in the natives of Senegam- 
bia. In 1891 MacKenzie recorded a case of “ Sleeping Sickness” in the 
London Hospital, and in 1900 Manson, made a special record of two cases 
in Charing Cross Hospital, sent from “ The Congo,” by Dr. Grattan 
Guinness: Dr. Mott, the able neurologist of Charing Cross, worked out 
garefully, the pathological history, and defined the lesion as one of the 
nature of “ meningo-encephalitis.” Until within a limited period the 
geographical distribution of “Sleeping Sickness,” was limited to West 
Africa. For some years, it has also been known in The Congo, as well 
as in several of the West Coast areas. In 1900 Cook discovered “ Sleep- 
ing Sickness ” in Uganda, since which date the disease has spread widely 
towards the north shore of Victoria Nyanza Lake. 

From the various reports of local observers, the epidemic area of 
“ Sleeping Sickness,” is confined to parts of Equatorial Africa. On the 
Upper and Lower Congo, the disease has been noted in epidemic form, 
large numbers of the population falling victims to its influence. 

As to the cause of this disease, many hypotheses have been pro- 
pounded in explanation, such as an intoxication of food, animal parasites 
and bacteria. Since November 1902, Castellani frequently observed 
“ trypanosoma ” in “Sleeping Sickness,” in fact he discovered try- 
panosoma in the cerebro spinal fluid of 20 out of 34 patients. Accord- 


16 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ing to Dr. Mott, the cerebro spinal fluid in “ Sleeping Sickness,” always 
contains trypanosomes, and likewise the juice of the lymphatic glands, 
by puncture during life. Also states (proceedings Royal Society 1905) 
“The evidence of the existence of trypanosomes in the blood of ani- 
mals dying of trypanosoma disease, may vary very considerably.” 

Thus far there is a degree of doubt, as to the exact pathological 
condition, in “Sleeping Sickness” which only time and further re- 
searches can decide. 

The disease first broke out in the Province of Basoga, where it is 
supposed to have been introduced by Emin Pasha’s Sudanese and their 
wives and followers, settled in Basoga. This disease had been epidemic 
in The Congo country, hence the supposition that a certain number 
were suffering from “ Sleeping Sickness” ‘in its incipient condition. In 
this section of country, the disease assumed such a severe form, that in 
a short time, it reduced the population of Uganda to a minimum. The 
chief part of the nervous system influenced by it is the brain, the func- 
tions of which become gradually disturbed so much so, that the mental 
attitude of the patient is soon noticed by the relatives. No desire to 
work, but rather to rest, owing to headache and pains, more or less in 
the chest. This disease is quite frequent in the Foola country and more 
so in the interior, than on the sea coast, and strange to say, children are 
seldom affected by it. Those giving evidence of the disease exhibit a 
somewhat ravenous appetite, eating much more than when in usual 
health and gradually growing fat; this, however, lasts but a short time, 
as'the appetite declines, and the loss of flesh becomes quite evident. 
Squinting and convulsions frequently occur before death. The presence 
of glandular tumours in the neck, are not uncommon in the incipient 
‘stage of development, and slave dealers avoid the purchase on that 
account, fearing the development of “Sleeping Sickness.” The dis- 
position to sleep is so strong that the desire for food is not marked. 
The whip, setons, or even blisters, fail frequently to arouse the patient 
from the lethargic condition, which is generally fatal in a few months. 
There is usually a dull, heavy, stupid look, and a characteristic slowness 
in answering questions, and a well defined shuffling gait. The tempera- 
ture is remarkable, in the evenings rising to 101° F. and becoming sub- 
normal in the morning. During the intervals of examination, the 
drowsy lethargic condition steals on, and when he sits down the head 
nods, the eyes close, and thus he continues, and until again aroused and 
questioned. As to the final issue, much depends on whether the disease 
will develop an acute or chronic form. ‘Tremors of the tongue and arms 
are not uncommon, the general reflexes become lessened in intensity, and 
drowiness gradually lapses into coma, and the patient passes away in 


[GRANT] SLEEPING SICKNESS 17 


a state of complete insensibility. In chronic cases, the symptoms are 
slower in development, but usually eventuate in a like fatal issue. 

Sometimes preliminary symptoms of an exceedingly slight char- 
acter, might be in progress for years, and in fact so feebly defined as to 
be almost sublatent until very gradually the symptoms deepened in in- 
tensity, when the gait, speech and food supply, entirely changed from 
the normal condition, gradually followed by profound coma and death. 
It is now generally accepted, that this disease is caused by the 
entrance into the blood of a minute protozoal parasite; the 
“Trypanosoma Gambiense,” first described by Dr. Dutton, who while 
searching out this disease, lost his hfe on the West Coast of Africa. In 
South Africa there is a disease known among cattle and other domestic 
animals, caused by the “Trypanosoma Brucei,” and conveyed by and 
communicated from sick to healthy animals, by a “biting fly,” the 
Glossina Moritans. ‘I'he idea followed that “ Sleeping Sickness” might 
be produced in a like manner from a “Biting Fly.” “ Large collections 
of these biting flies were made with the remarkable result that the dis- 
tribution of ‘Sleeping Sickness’ and of a biting fly, the Glossina pal- 
palis, corresponded exactly with each other.” Col. David Bruce, 
R.A.M.C., F.R.S., addressed the meeting of the British Association, on 
this subject during the recent meeting in South Africa, and brought to 
light many interesting facts, in this line of research which cannot fail 
to be of great service. 

Sleeping Sickness is not contagious, and, in fact, is only considered 
infectious, in a limited sense. The disease is generally believed to be 
fatal, but in a few cases recoveries are vouched for. 


Dr. Todd, of McGill University, recently returned from West 
Africa, having extended his observations over 2,000 miles of “ The Free 
State,” from the mouth of the Congo. He favours the idea that nearly 
all general glandular enlargements, without evident cause, such as 
syphilis or tuberculosis, are cases of trypanosomiasis. The palpation 
of these enlarged glands in the posterior triangle of the neck, is consi- 
dered sutticient evidence of the disease. The juice of enlarged glands 
removed by the hypodermic needle, is unfailing as to the production of 
trypanosomes, even when not found in the blood. Dr. Todd considers 
the sleepiness rather as a terminal sign, and not necessarily an unfailing 
symptom of the disease. 

Information has just been received (British Medical Journal, May 
5th, 1906) that one of the commissioners sent out to Uganda in 1904, 
by the Royal Society of England, to investigate Sleeping Sickness, 

Sec. IV., 1906. 2. 


18 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


has been infected with the parasites believed to produce the disease. 
Two officers of the Royal Army Medical Corps, Lieut.'Gray and Lieut. 
Forbes Tulloch, were the commission. Last March an official telegram 
was received in London, that trypanosomes had been found in the blood 
of Lieut. Forbes Tulloch, and there is wide spread sympathy expressed 
for this young and zealous officer, suffering in the cause of science, and 
the members of the Royal Society of Canada, join heartily in the hope 
that he may make a safe recovery. Since the discovery of trypanosomes, 
the parasite has been recognized in seven persons of ‘English birth. Of 
these, three have died, and four are still hving. From most recent 
date, a proportion of recoveries is to be looked for, in the Trypanosome 
diseases of man, and that the terminal and fatal condition “ Sleeping 
Sickness,” 1s not inevitable, and although a necessary factor in the pro- 
duction of the disease, not always followed by its development, and 
much work has still to be done, before a positive opinion is arrived at, as 
to either the prognosis or treatment of this disease. 


“ Sleeping Sickness” has been considered by some experts a form 
of Beri-Beri. Such, however, is not generally accepted. Beri-Beri is 
in fact a peripheral neuritis, and developed rapidly. The knee reflex 
is absent in both, and hyperæsthesia of the muscular system, is'a striking 
characteristic. In “sleeping Sickness” these symptoms are wanting; 
the tremor, pyrexia and lethargy are marked features. 

Professor Robert Koch recently investigated “ Sleeping Sickness,” 
for some months in South Africa, and favours the opinion, that this 
disease has been known on the west coast of Africa, since the beginning 
of the last century. Sir Claude de Crespigny, visited the hospital at 
Eutebbe, German East Africa, and considered that the disease is con- 
veyed by the Tse-tse fly, only about two per cent disseminating the 
fatal germ. It is doubtful whether the disease emanates directly from 
the fly, or the latter conveys it from dead fish, and is spread like yellow 
fever, by mosquitoes. In large sections of Africa, the horse is not seen 
and cannot survive, owing to these insects, and the donkey at one time 
supposed to be immune, frequently succumbs, a victim to a like influ- 


ence. Dr. Kock inclines to the opinion, that “ Sleeping Sickness” is a 


form of cerebro-spinal meningitis. 

The present interchange of commerce with the numerous tribes in 
South Africa, from Britain, and nearly all Europe, makes this disease 
an. important problem, not alone, as to the economic future of South 
Africa, but also as to the outlook in the direction of public health. 


[GRANT] SLEEPING SICKNESS 19 
References. 


The Trypanosoma Brucei, the organism found in Nagana or “ Tse- 
tse Fly Disease,” by J. B. Bradford, b.R.S. and H. C. Plumer, F.RS. 

Quar.; Journal; Micr. Science, Vol. 45, April, 1905. British 
Medical Journal, Sept. 9th, 1905. Lecture by Col. David Bruce, B.A,. 
M.C.C., F.R.S, “Sleeping Sickness.” 

Adult Forms and Development Forms of Trypanosoma, found in 
“ Sleeping Sickness” by Aldo Castellani, M.D., Royal Society Reports, 
Nov. 1903. 

, Montreal Medical Journal, April, 1906. 

Observations on “The Brains of Men and Animals Infected with 
various forms of Trypanosomas,” by F. W. Mott, M.D., F.R.S. 

Royal Society London Proceedings, March 16th, 1905. 

British Medical Journal, May 5th, 1906. 


FEAT yu ay veh 
by re 


Paes CNE RES UNE EE U D 
MAÉ ELA MOTTE 
RARE À \ D \ # 

| L. eh lu dl 142 


SECTION IV., 1906. [21] Trans. R. §. C. 


III An Early Anadidymus of the Chick. 


~ 


By Proressor RaMsay WRIGHT, 
Biological Department, University of Toronto. 


Read May 23rd, 1906. 


The embryo which is described in the following pages was prepared 
and sectioned in June, 1995, for class purposes but its abnormality 
did not attract attention until it was brought into the laboratory. I 
am, therefore, unable to figure the surface view, and so far have not 
had leisure to model out its most interesting features. 

The series contains 200 sections of 15 microns in thickness, cor- 
responding to a length of 3 mm. in the hardened condition. The egg 
bad been in the incubator for 24 hours, but, 10 somites having been 
observed, it was marked as practically equivalent in age to Duval’s 
embryo of 29 hours (No. 1, Fig. 89 and Pl. XVI). 

It was noted that the incubator was running at a temperature 
somewhat higher than the normal, which may account not only for its 
more rapid development, but also for its abnormality, as may be 
inferred from Dareste (No. 2, page 121). 

Hertwig (No. 3:—Vol. I, p. 993) and others have remarked on the 
rarity of cases of _Anadidymus in Sauropsida in comparison with the 
Ichthyopsida. This case is of particular interest, because, unlike Hoff- 
mann’s (No. 4, page 40) there appears to be no indication of a double 
primitive streak, and, therefore, it is to be placed in the same category 
with Dareste’s embryo (No. 2, Plate 16, Figs. 5 and 6), and possibly 
that of Mitrophanow (whose paper I have not been able to consult) 
cited by Kaestner (No. 5, page 88). The occurrence of such a case 
does not, in my opinion, invalidate the argument of Kaestner that 
all such cases are primitively double (No. 6, page 141), because it 
depends entirely upon the degree, locality and method of the inter- 
ference of the two components, whether an organ shall appear double 
or single. My figure of section 131 (Fig. 13) would not be suspected 
to come from an embryo otherwise than normal, while the inspection 
of section 126 (Fig. 12) at once shows that each half of it in reality 
belongs to a different embryo. From this point, the interference 
caudad has been more complete than cephalad, so that in the backward 
growth of the primitive streak region (cf. Hertwig, No. 2, pp. 895 
and 896) the embryo appears to be single. 


22 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Attention must be called to the contrast in the method of inter- 
ference in the head-region of my embryo and that in Kaestner’s (No. 6, 
Taf. VII) where the ventral surfaces have interfered more than the 
dorsal, the result being a single heart and a double brain, instead of 
a double heart and a single brain (cf. my figure 9). The plane of 
interference becomes caudad more and more truly sagittal, so that the 
chord, at first widely divergent (Fig. 10), eventually fuse, (Fig. 13). 

I now proceed to the description of the various systems of organs. 


Nervous SYSTEM. 


As a starting-point, I select section 12 (Fig. 5) through the region 
of the optic vesicles. It is easy to understand how the condition here 
pictured is arrived at if we proceed from the normal state as seen in 
Duval’s Figs. 253 and 254. The two embryos have been inclined with 
their dorsal surfaces towards each other, and have interfered in such 
away that the right and left lips of the neural groove of the one, have 
fused with the right and left lips of that of the other. In this way, 
no room is left for the complete development of the “ median” optic 
vesicles which, consequently, are very minute (ov’). The points of 
fusion are still noticeable and it is obvious that that of the left and 
right lips of the right and left components respectively (which now form 
the floor of the composite neural canal), is less complete, in such a way 
that some mesoderm cells have intruded into the neural canal at this 
point. The double character of the neural canal is brought strongly 
out by the two infundibula which diverge laterally towards the two 
blind foregut ends (ph.) beneath which the slightly’ thickened patches 
of ectoderm already indicate the hypophyses. 

It is less easy to interpret the preceding sections (Figs. 1 to 4), 
but if two components such as are represented in Duval’s Fig. 252 
have interfered in such a way as materially to reduce in size the con- 
tiguous halves, then it becomes apparent that the convex floor of the 
composite neural canal in figure 4 is formed of the left and right 
brain-halves of the right and left components which have fused in 
the region of their dorsal neural sutures, while their ventral sutures 
are still widely separated. Still further forward (Fig. 3) these brain- 
halves are fused so that the most anterior end of the neural canal 
(Figs 1 and 2) is formed of the lateral brain-halves only of the two 
components. It is noticeable that the separation of the brain from the 
ectoderm has apparently taken place sooner than is normal (No. 3, 
Vol. 2, page 252). 

In the diencephalic region (Fig. 6) the brain is much compressed 
from side to side, but it soon widens out into the mid-brain (Fig. 7). 


[wricHT] AN EARLY ANADIDYMUS OF THE CHICK 23 


Jn the trigeminal region of the hind-brain the neural canal is open for 
some thirteer sections, but before the auditory region is reached it is 
again closed as far as section 84, near which point (Fig. 11) there 
1s again a failure to close for a few sections; thereafter, however, the 
canal is closed as far as section 126, Fig. 12, behind which point the 
groove is, at first narrowly, and then widely, open. 

In section 160 (Fig. 16) the fusion of the ventral wall of the 
neural groove and the notochord begins and is continued in the follow- 
ing sections (Figs. 17-20), the complete fusion of the ectoderm, chorda, 
mesoderm and entoderm being attained at the 175th section (Fig. 20). 
Beyond this point we can hardly speak of a neural groove; the 181st 
section (Fig. 21), indeed, shows an unsymmetrical fissure which is not 
uncommon in the primitive groove of normal embryos, and by section 
190 all traces of the primitive streak have disappeared and the germinal 
area presents a normal appearance (Fig. 23). The comparison of my 
Figures 15-22 with those of Hertwig (1 c., Figs. 536-545, page 891) 
shows that there is little difference except in the less amount of closure 
of the neural canal, and without an inspection of sections further 
forward, it would be impossible to detect any symptom of “ duplicitas.” 


NotTecHorp. 


The conduct of the two notochords has already been sufficiently 
referred to in the hinder region; it only remains to call attention 
to their gradual increase in size from their first appearance in section 
9 (immediately behind figure 5) till their fusion in section 131, also 
to their gradual convergence to this point. 


MEeESODERM. 


As already remarked there are ten somites, and this is the case 
with the “median” series of fused somites which lie exactly in the 
same plane as the lateral ones: Of the “median” series, the seven 
posterior are better demarcated than those further forward, and are 
sometimes notched on their ventral surface. The rudiments of the 
Wolffian body may be seen in the region represented in Figs. 12 and 13. 


VASCULAR SYSTEM. 


A convenient starting-point for the description of the vascular 
system is the region depicted in Fig. 10 (section 67), where the vitei- 
line veins are perfectly normal, and the only thing that arrests atten- 
tion is the “median” descending aorta. Fig. 9 shows that the vitel- 
line veins have not become fused into a single heart as in a normal 


24 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


embryo. Their endothelial tubes remain independent throughout, but 
he splanchnic mesoderm * does not at first dip in very far dorsad so 
as to furnish an independent wall for each heart. Further forward, 
however, it does so (Fig. 8), and eventually the two bulbs of the 
heart are widely separated and enclose between them a portion of the 
common cœlome (Fig. 7). But the two heart-tubes as seen in Fig. 9 
do not contract gradually into the condition seen in Fig. 8; on the 
contrary, there is a marked constriction at the opening of each heart 
into its bulbus, beyond which a ventricular cul-de-sac extends cephalad 
for a few sections on each side. 

The picture presented by Fig. 6 is best calculated to show the 
anterior duplicity of the vascular system, because when each bulbus 
approaches the stomatodæum it divides into two ventral aorte. Of 
these the lateral aortz alone form arches up the sides of the pharynx, 
for the median ones first anastomose below the pharynx, then subdivide 
into four small vessels which bend round its anterior surface, and 
finally open into the large vascular space represented in Fig. 5, situ- 
eted between its anterior diverticula. Tracing this space backwards 
dorsad of the composite pharynx, we first find four vessels similar to 
those referred to above, which soon, however, fuse into the “ median ” 
dorsal aorta. This retains its size until we reach the segmented region 
of the embryo, in which it tends to be obliterated opposite the somites 
and to expand again intersomitically. The “ lateral” dorsal aortæ con- 
cuct themselves as in a normal embryo, and the same may be said of 
{he veins as far as they are developed. 


EntToprruic TRACY. 


Proceeding cephalad from Fig. 11 in which the median ridge 
formed of the median row of somites alone distinguishes this from 
the entoderm of a normal embryo we find nothing remarkable until 
about midway between Figs. 8 and 9, there the lateral pouches of the 
pharynx reach a little nearer the ectoderm in the region of the first 
cill-clefts, but a few sections further forward (Figs. 6 and 5) the two 
stamatodæa at once arrest attention, as do the two anterior diverticula 
ccrresponding to the pouches of Seesel of normal embryos. 


I venture to enter a mild protest against Professor Kaestner’s note (No. 
6, p. 128) on the usage of the words somatopleure and spanchnopleure. 
Surely, if it is desirable to have mononyms for ‘somatic mesoblast,” and 
“splanchnic mesoblast,” it would be easy enough to form them instead otf 
using terms which were invented and are constantly used to designate 
something else. If the language of anatomists knows only one meaning for 
mAevpa’ that of zoologists is not so restricted. A Pleuronectid does not swim on its 
“pleura!” 


[WRIGHT] AN EARLY ANADIDYMUS OF THE CHICK ; 25 


In conclusion, in spite of the apparent posterior simplicity of this 
embryo I am of the opinion that it can best be explained by assuming 
a double gastrulation at points very close to each other on the surface 
of the embryonic area. 


LITERATURE CLrEp. 


I have thought it unnecessary to cite all the papers consulted. 
Hertwig (No. 3) and Kaestner (No. 6) give a full list of papers to 
some of which, unfortunately, I have not had access. 

No. 1. Duval—Atlas d'Embryologie. 


No. 2. Dareste—-Production des Monstruosités. 

No. 3. Hertwig—Handbuch der Entwickelungslehre. 
No. 4 Hoffmann—Arch. mikr. Anat. XLI. 

No. 5. Kaestner, Arch. Anat. Phys., ’98. 

No. 6. Kaestner, Arch. Anat. Phys., 702. 


26 ; ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 
EXPLANATIONS OF THE FIGURES ON PLATE. 


The sections were projected and carefully outlined on the drawing paper 
by means of the Zeiss Epidiascope and 20 mm. micro-planar, at such dis- 
tances as to give an enlargement of 102 for figures 1 to 9, and 116 for figures 
10 to 28. 

Subsequently, the drawings, which were made by Mr. J. R. G. Murray, 
student in biology, University of Toronto, were reduced rather more than 
one-third, so that the magnification is respectively 63 and 72. 


Figs. 1-4,— Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 8, of the series, through the fore- 
brain. 

Fig. 5,— No. 12, through the anterior blind ends—ph.— of the 
pharynx. Ov. and ov’ the right and left optic vesicles of the right 
component. 

Fig. 6,— No. 19, through the stomatodæa of both components 
and the diencephalic region; round the composite pharynx are grouped 
eight arteries; two ventral, and two dorsal aorte on each side. 

Fig. 7—No. 33, through the mesencephalon. Ventrad of the 
pharynx are the two aortic bulbs; dorsad, the median dorsal aortæ have 
united into a single vessel; re, ectodermic recess under the head. 

Figs. 8, 9, and 10.---Nos. 47, 55, and 67, respectively, through the 
fifth, seventh and eighth, and ninth nerves. 

Fig. 11,— No. 80, through the second intersomite. The median 
dorsal aortæ have given place to a mass of mesoderm. | 

Fig. 12,— No. 126, behind the last somite. The chordæ are gain- 
ing in size, and the mesodermic mass diminishing. The rudiment of 
the Wolffian body is seen in this and in Fig. 13. 

Fig. 13,— No. 131, the chordæ have fused. 

Figs. 14 and 15,— Nos. 150 and 154, the chorda and the wall of 
the neural groove gain in size. 

Fig. 16,— No. 169, the beginning of the fusion between the floor 
of the neural groove and chorda. 

Figs. 17, 18, 19 and 20,— Nos. 164, 168, 171 and 175, respectively, 
show the progressive fusion of the neural wall, chorda, mesoderm and 
entoderm. 

Figs. 21 and 22,— Nos. 181 and 186, are through the hinder end 
of the primitive streak. The former shows traces of an oblique fissure. 

Fig. 23,— No. 196, shows the nature of the mesoderm behind the 
primitive streak. : 


[wricHT] AN EARLY ANADIDYMUS OF THE CHICK Trans. R. 8 C., Sec. IV., 1906. 


FAR 


is 
Se 
Os 
x 
U 


SECTION IV., 1906. RS ; Trans. R. S.C. 


IV.— Bibliography of Canadian Zoology for 1905. 


(Exclusive of Entomology, but inclusive of papers on foreign zoological subjects 


by Canadian writers.) 
By J. F. WHITEAVES. 


(Read May 22nd, 1906.) 


MAMMALIA. 
BEATTIE, L. 
A Foreign Mammal at Guelph. 
(According to Dr. C. Hart Merriam, apparently a specimen of the 
Russian Putorius eversmanni, or Eversmann’s Ferret.) 
Ontario Natural Science Bulletin, Guelph, No. 1, p. 42. 


DAVIDSON, A. A. 


Putorius noveboracensis in Wellington County. 
Idem, p. 42. 


HUARD, L’ABBE V.—A. 
Le Gibbar (Orca orca, L.) 
(A short popular article on the Killer Whale, in which the author 
states that he has often seen specimens of this species disporting 
themselves in Tadoussac Bay.) 
Le Naturaliste Canadien, Octobre 1905, vol. xxxii, no. 10, pp. 110 
and 111. 


SAUNDERS, W. E. 
Cooper’s Lemming Mouse. 
(Records the capture of specimens of this species and of the pine 
mouse, in the region about London, Ont.) 
Ont. Nat. Sci. Bulletin, Guelph, No. 1, pp. 24 and 25. 


WHITEAVES, J. F. 
The Banded Pocket-mouse (Perognathus fasciatus). 
(Records the capture of a specimen of this species at Aweme, Mani- 


toba, by Mr. Norman Criddle.) 
Ottawa Naturalist, June, 1905, vol. xix, no. 3, p. 69. 


BIRDS. 
ATKINSON, GEORGE E. 


A Review—History of the Passenger Pigeon of Manitoba. 
Historical and Scientific Society Manitoba, Winnipeg, February, 


1905, Transactions No. 68, pp. 1-8. 


AUBUSSON, MAGAUD D’. 
Le Plectrophane des Neiges (Plectrophanes nivalis, Meyer and Wolff). 
Le Naturaliste Canadien, Août 1905, vol. xxxii, no. 8, pp. 85-88. 


28 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


BAXTER, DR. J. MC. G. 
Avian Mistakes. 
(Records incidentally the circumstance that a specimen of the Tur- 
key Vulture was shot at Loggieville, near Chatham, N.B., in 1899 
or 1900; and that a specimen of the Black Vulture was shot at Es- 
cuminac, at the mouth of the Miramichi, in 1903.) 
Proceedings of the Miramichi Natural History Association, No. iv, 


pp. 9-11. 


BEATTIE, F. NoRMAN. 


The Woodcock’s Notes. 
Ont. Nat. Sci. Bulletin, Guelph, no. I, pp. 40 and 41. 


BISHOP, LOUIS B. 
The Gray Sea Eagle (Haliaætus albicilla) in British Columbia. 


(Records the fact that a bird, which proves to be a young male of 
this species in its first winter’s plumage, was shot on the coast of 
Vancouver Island in March, 1898.) 

The Auk, January, 1905, New Series, vol. xxii, no. I, p. 81. 


BOUTELLIER, JAMES. 
Bird Migration. Observations made at Sable Island, Nova Scotia. 
Ottawa Naturalist, September, 1905, vol. xix, no. 6, pp. 119 and 120. 


BROOKS, ALLAN. 

Clay-coloured Sparrow in the Cariboo District, British Columbia. 
The Auk, January, 1905, New Series, vol. xxii, no. I, p. 88. 

Notes on the Nesting of the Varied Thrush. 
(Records the finding of five nests, with eggs, of birds of this species, 
in southern British Columbia, at the base of Cheam Peak, on the 
Lower Fraser, in April and May of 1903.) 
Idem, April, 1905, New Series, vol. xxii, no. 2, p. 214. 


CLARKE, DR (Ca Kk: 
Ring-billed Gulls (Larus Delawarensis) on Lake Ontario. 
Ottawa Naturalist, July, 1905, vol. xix, no. 4, p. 88. 
A Flicker Tragedy. ’ 
Ont. Nat. Sci. Bulletin, Guelph, No. 1, pp. 39 and 40. 


DEAN, RUTHVEN. 
A Brood of Albino Spoonbill Ducks (Spatula clypeata.) 
(Photographs of three birds of this brood, which were shot “ near 
the Saskatchewan River, at a point near Edmonton, ” by Mr. Alex- 
ander Calder, in June, 1904, are reproduced in the Ottawa Naturalist 
for December, 1905.) 
The Auk, October, 1905, New Series, vol. xxii, no. 4, p. 408. 


EIFRIG, REV. C. W. J. 
Nesting of the Nighthawk in Ottawa. 
Ottawa Naturalist, May, 1905, vol. xix, no. 2, pp. 56-58. 
Ornithological results of the Canadian Neptune expedition to Hudson 
Bay and northward. 1903-1904. 
The Auk, July, 1905, New Series, vol. xxii, no. 3, pp. 233-241. 


ra 


[WHITEAVES] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN ZOOLOGY 29 


The Golden Eagle (Aquila chrysactos) near Ottawa. 
(Records the fact that a “bird of the year, of this species,” was 
caught in a “ trap set for otter or muskrats, near High Falls, Wright 
Co., Quebec, ” in 1905.) 
Idem, p. 310. 

A One-legged Crow (Corvus brachyrhynchos). 
Ibid., p. 312. 

An Unusual Abundance of the Canada Jay (Perisoreus Canadensis) in 
and near Ottawa, Ont. 
Ibid., p. 318. 

A Curious Anomaly in the White-throated Sparrow (Zonotrichia albi- 
collis). 
(The anomaly consists of the unusual length of one of the tail 
feathers.) 
Ibid., p. 313. 

The Migrant Shrike (Lanius ludovicianus migrans) at Ottawa, Ont. 
Ibid., p. 314. 


FLEMING, JAMES H. 
An Unusual Migration of Ducks in Ontario. 
The Auk, April, 1905, New Series, vol. xxii, no. 2, p. 206. 
An Unusual Migration of the Canada Jay. 
Ont. Nat. Sci. Bulletin, Guelph, no. 1, pp. 11 and 12. 


HOBSON, W. D. 


A Black-crowned Night Heron in Ontario in Winter. 
Idem, p. 38. 


ELUGH, A. B. 

Bird notes from Central Ontario. 

Ottawa Naturalist, July, 1905, vol. xix, no. 4, p. 87. 
Ontario Ornithological Notes. 

Idem, September, 1905, vol. xix, no. 6, pp. 121-123. 
The Pine Siskin breeding at Guelph, Ontario. 

The Auk, October, 1905, New Series, vol. xxii, no. 4, p. 415. 
The Birds of Wellington County, Ontario. 

Ont. Nat, Sci. Bulletin, Guelph, no. 1, pp. 1-10. 
The Purple Finch a Songster. 

Idem, p. 39. 
The Call of the American Bittern. 

Ibid., p. 41. 


MAUREL, LOUIS. 


De l'Utilité des Oiseaux. 
Le Naturaliste Canadien, Mai 1905, vol. xxxii, no. 5, pp. 55 and 55 


MOORE, W. H. 


The Red-breasted Nuthatch(Sitta Canadensis). 
Ottawa Naturalist, October, 1905, vol. xix, no. 6, pp. 139-141. 


30 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


NASH, C. W. 

Check List of tho Vertebrates of Ontario, and Catalogue of Specimens 
in the Biological Section of the Provincial Museum. Birds. 
Department of Education, Toronto, pp. 1-82. 

The Robin and the Fruit Grower. 
Canadian Horticulturist, July, 1905, pp. 249-251. 

Papers on “The Nesting Season,” the “ Night Hawk and Whip-poor- 
Will,’ and on “The Chimney Swift” in the Farming World, To- 
ronto, for June, July and August, 1905.” 


TAVERNER, P. A. 
The Origin of the Kirtland’s Warbler. 
Ont. Nat. Sci. Bulletin, Guelph, no. 1, pp. 13-17. 


YOUNG, A. F. 
Bird Notes from Penetanguishene, Ontario. 
Idem, pp. 38 and 39. 


YOUNG, REV. C. J. 
The Thrushes of Eastern Ontario. 
Ibidem, pp. 17-20. 


FISHES. 
Cox, DR. PHILIP. 
Extension of the list of New Brunswick Fishes. 
Proceedings of the Miramichi Natural History Asscciation, no. iv, 


pp. 41-44. 


PRINCE, PROFESSOR E. E. 
I. Canadian Sturgeon and Caviare Industries. 
II. Methods of Coarse Fish Extermination. 
Thirty-seventh Report of the Department of Marine and Fisheries, 
1905. Special Appended Reports, pp. liii-]xxxii. 


INVERTEBRATA. 
BAKER, F. C. 
New species of Lymnea. 

(In this paper a variety of L. stagnalis, from Michipicoten Bay, on 
the north shore of Lake Superior, is described as var. higleyi, “ in 
honor of Professor William K. Higley, Secretary of the Chicago 
Academy of Sciences. ”) 

The Nautilus, April, 1905, vol. xviii, no. 12, pp. 141 and 142. 


DALL, W. H. 
Alaska. Volume xiii. Land and Fresh Water Mollusks. 
(This important memoir includes a “ summary of our present know- 
ledge of the mollusks ” of North America north of latitude 49° north, 
“deduced in part from the literature, and in larger part from ma- 
terial actually examined.” It includes and practically almost super- 
sedes the previous and scattered literature relating to the land and 


. 


[WHITEAVES] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN ZOOLOGY 31 


fresh water mollusca of the Dominion, and is quite indispensable to 
the student thereof. Of the eight new species figured in the two 
Plates, five are found in Canada.) 

Harriman Alaska Expedition. New York, Doubleday, Page and Co., 
1905, pp. 1-153, with text-figures 1-118, and Plates I and II. 


HENDERSON, Dr. E. H. (McGill University, Montreal.) 


Some Observations on the Development of an Asterid with Large Yolky 
Eggs, from the Franklin Islands. 
Annals and Magazine of Natural History, London, England, Seventh 
Series, vol. xvi, pp. 387-391, and Plates xii and xiii, 


HuaARD, L’ABBÉ V.—A. 


Le Dragonneau, ou Gordius aquaticus, L. 
Le Naturaliste Canadien, Novembre 1905, vol. xxxii, no. ii, pp. 
119-122. 


JENSEN, A. S. 
On the Mollusca of East Greenland. 1. Lamellibranchiata. 
(Incidentally mentions the fact that the little tellinid from the 
Gulf of St. Lawrence which has been called Macoma inflata, ‘is not 
the Tellina inflata of Chemnitz, and that the former should be called 
T'ellina (Macoma) Loveni, Iap. Steenstrup (1882). 
Meddelser om Grünland, Copenhagen, vol. xxix, pp. 289-362, 


LAMBE, L. M. 
A New Marine Sponge (Æsperella Bellabellensis) from the Pacific Coast 
of Canada. | 
Ottawa Naturalist, April, 1905, vol. xix, no. I, pp. 14 and 15, pl. I. 


MACBRIDE, PROFESSOR E. W. 


The Canadian Oyster. 
Canadian Record of Science, July, 1904, vol. ix, nos. 3 and 4, pp. 
145-156. Issued April 20, 1905. 
Development of Ophiothrix fragilis. 
Idem, for October, 1904, vol. ix, no. 5, p. 316. 
Issued May 15, 1905. 


ODELL, W. 


Notes on Fresh-water Rhizopods. 
Ottawa Naturalist, April, 1905, vol. xix, no. 1, pp. 16-20. 


PRINCE, PROFESSOR E. E. 


The Hair-eel (Gordius aquaticus, L.). 
Idem, October, 1905, vol. xix, no. 7, pp. 131-138. 


STAFFORD, Dr. J. 


On the larva and spat of the Canadian oyster. 
American Naturalist, January, 1905, vol. xxxix, no. 457, pp. 41-44. 
Trematodes from Canadian Vertebrates. 
Zoologischen Anzeiger (Leipsig) April xi, 1905, bd. xxviii, pp. 681- 
694. 


32 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


STERKI, DR. V. 


New varieties of North American Pisidia. 


(Two specimens of one of these varieties, viz. Pisidium fallax, var. 
errans, were collected at Ozhiski Lake, Keewatin, by W. McInnes 


in 1904.) 
The Nautilus, November, 1905, vol. xix, no. 7, pp. 80-84. 


WHITEAVES, J. F. 


“Notes on some fresh-water shells from the Yukon Territory’; and 
“List of a few species of land and fresh-water shells from the im- 
mediate vicinity of James Bay, Hudson Bay.” 

The Nautilus, May, 1905, vol. xix, no. 1, pp. 1-4; and Ottawa 
Naturalist, June, 1905, vol. xix, no. 3, pp. 63-66. 

List of land and fresh-water shells from the District of Keewatin, collected 
by W. McInnes in 1904. 

Geological Survey of Canada, Summary Report for 1904, Ottawa, 
1905, pp. 160-164. Separates issued in June, 1905. 

Description of a New Species of Goniobasis from British Columbia. 
The Nautilus, October, 1905, vol. xix, no. 6, pp. 61 and 62, pl. 2, 
figs. 11 and 12. 

Some new localities for Canadian land and fresh-water shells. 

Ottawa Naturalist, December, 1905, vol. xix, no. 9, pp. 169-171. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 
HALKETT, ANDREW. 

Preliminary Report upon the animal life observed during the Hudson 
Bay Expedition of 1903-04. 
Thirty-Seventh Annual Report of the Department of Marine and 
Fisheries for 1904, Ottawa, 1905, pp. xlvii-xlix. 

A Naturalist in the Frozen North. 
Ottawa Naturalist, July, August and September, 1905; vol. xix, no. 
4, pp. 79-86; no. 5, pp. 104-109; and no. 6, pp. 115-117. 


Huarp, L’ABBÉ V.—A. 
Traité Elémentaire de Zoologie et d'Hygiène. 
Le Naturaliste Canadien, vol. xxxii, Supplement, pp. 221-260, with 
title page and preface. 


OTTAWA FIELD NATURALISTS CLUB. 


Report of the Zoological Branch, 1904. 
Ottawa Naturalist, June, 1905, vol. xix, no. 3, pp. 70-72. 


WHITEAVES, J. F. 
Bibliography of Canadian Zoology for 1904. 
(Exclusive of Entomology, but inclusive of papers on foreign ï00- 
logical subjects by Canadian writers.) 
Transactions of the Royal Society of Canada for 1905, Second Series, 
vol. xi, section iv, pp. 65-69. Separates issued October, 1905. 


SECTION IV., 1906. [ 88] Trans. R. S. C. 


V.—Bibhography of Canadian Botany for 1905. 


By A. H. MacKay, LL.D. 


(Read May 22nd, 1906.) 
ARTHUR, J. C. 
“Cultures of Uredineæ in 1904.” (Refers to “the only American 
Collections of æcidia on Larix, that have come to my attention” from 
Mt. Temple and Laggan in Alberta, Canada, on Larix Lyallii Parl.) 
Jour. Mycol., XI, 76, pp. 50-67, Mar., 1905, Columbus, Ohio, U. S. A. 


ATWOOD, A. E. 


“ Field Work at the Ottawa Normal School Summer Course for Teach- 
ers.” (July 4th to 21st—largely Botanical). The Ottawa Naturalist, 
XIX, 5, pp. 111-114, Aug. 1905, Ottawa. 


BAXTER, J. McG. 


“Fresh Water Life.” Proc. Miramichi Nat. Hist. Ass’n., IV, 12-18 
(Desmids, diatoms, etc. in Water, Chatham, New Brunswick). Chat- 
ham, N. B., 1905. 


BEDFORD, A. S. 


“Experimental Farm for Manitoba at Brandon.” Experimental Farms 
Report, 1904, pp. 371-409, King’s Printer, Ottawa, 1905. 


BELL, H. G. 


“Concerning Wheat-Grading.” O.A.C. Review, XVII, 346-350, March, 
1905, Guelph. O. 


BERRY, E. W. 


“Proceedings of the Club.” (Torrey Botanical Club, 30 Nov. 1904— 
References to Nova Scotia Plants by C. B. Robinson). Torreya V, 1, 
pp. 14-16, Jan. 1905, New York. 


BLAIR, W. S. 


“Report of the Horticulturist at Napan, ” Experimental Farms Report, 
1904, pp. 353-870. King's Printer, Ottawa, 1905. 


BRAINERD, E. W. 


“Notes on New England Violets.” (References to Canadian habitats, 
II and III). Rhodora, VII, 73, pp. 1-8. Jan; VII, 84, pp. 245-248, 
Nov; 1905, Boston. 


BRITTON, N. L. 
“Manual of the Flora of the Northern States and Canada.” Edition 2 
i-xxiv, 1-1112, New York, 1905. 

BROCK, R. W. 


“Forest Fires in British Columbia.” Can. For. Ass’n. 6th Ann. Rep., 
pp. 18-21, 9th Mar., 1905, Ottawa. 


Sec. IV., 1906. 3 


34 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


BURKE, Al) EH: 


“The General Awakening as to Forestry.” Can. For. Jour. 1, 3, pp. 
113-115, July, 1905. 


CAMPBELL, R. H. 


“The Canadian Forestry Association.” (Canadian Forestry Condi- 
tions) Can. Forestry Jour. 1, pp. 1-9, Jan., 1905. Ottawa. 


CAMPBELL, R. H. 


“Sixth Annual Meeting of the Canadian Forestry Association.” (A 
summary sketch). Can. For. Jour. I,,pp. 51-61, Apr., 1905, Ottawa. 


CAMPBELL, R. H. 


“American Forest Congress.” Can. For. Jour. I, 2, pp. 75-82. ‘ Grow- 
ing demand for Forest Tree Seeds, ” pp. 83-60. “ Notes” (Nova Scotia 
Fire Service, Over-clearing in Ont., P. E. I., Dom. Forest Reserves, etc.) 
pp. 61-92, Apr., 1905, Ottawa. 


CAMPBELL, R. H. 


“ Forest Fires in B. C. 1904.” Can. For. Jour., I, 3, pp. 100-104. 
“The Gaspesian Forest Reserve, ” pp. 109-112. 

“The Nipigon Timber Reserve, ” pp. 116-119. 

“The Poplars, ” pp. 120-123. 

‘“ Notes ete.,”’ pp. 124-141. July, 1905, Ottawa. 


. CAMPBELL, R. H. 


‘ Canadian Forestry Convention.” Can. For. Jour. I, pp. 143-146. 
“Montreal Forest Congress,” pp. 147-154. 

“The Balsam Poplar,” pp. 176-177. 

“Forestry in Ontario,” pp. 178-181. 

“Reclaiming Sand Dunes,” pp. 182-184. 

“Notes ete.,’’ pp. 154-197. 

Oct., 1905, Ottawa. 


CAMPBELL, R. 
“Some Conspicuous British Columbia Summer Plants.” Can. Rec. 
Sci. IX, pp. 176-189, 20 Apr., 1905, Montreal. 

“CANADA FIRST” 
“ Forest Fires in Northern Ontario,’’ Can. For. Jour., 1, 4, pp. 185, 186 
Oct., 1905. Ottawa. 

CANADIAN FORESTRY ASSOCIATION. 
“Report of the Board of Directors for Year 1904-5.” Can. For. Ass’n. 
6th Annual Report. pp. 6-10, 9 Mar., 1905, Ottawa. 

CANADIAN FORESTRY ASSOCIATION. 


“Sixth Annual Report, 1905.” (Containing the papers, discussions, 
resolutions, accounts, etc. of the Sixth Annual Meeting,) 9 and 10 
March, 1905. pp. 1-124, Ottawa. 


CANADIAN SEED GROWERS’ ASSOCIATION. 


‘Minutes of First Annual Meeting at Ottawa, 15, 16, June, 1904, with 
Constitution etc., pp. 1-28, 1904, Ottawa. - 


[MacKay] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN BOTANY 35 


CANADIAN SEED GROWERS’ ASSOCIATION. 
“Report of Second Annual Meeting, Ottawa, 27-29 June, 1905.” (Part 
1. Minutes, Reports of Directors, Secretary, Provincial Superintendent 
and discussion pp. 1-24. Part 2; Constitution, By-laws and Regulations 
pp. 23-34 Part 3 Addresses and papers presented, pp. 35-108). Pu». 
1-108, 4 plates, 1905, Ottawa. 


CHAPAIS, J. C. 
“La Tache ou Rouille du Fraisier. ” (Strawberry leaf rust—Sphe- 
rella Fragariæ, Sacardo). Le Nat. Can., xxxii, 4, pp. 37-40, April 1905, 
Quebec. 


CLARE, G. H. 
“Evidence before Parliamentary Committee, 1905” (By the Seed 
Com., on Selection of Seed Grains,—Crop Growing), pp. 1-102, pl\ 2, 
1905, Ottawa. 


CLARK, G. S. 
“ Modern Seed Testing.” O.A.C. Review, xvii, 7, pp. 385-389, April, 
1905, Guelph, Ontario. 


CLARK, G. H. 
‘“ Scope of Work for the Canadian Seed Growers’ Association.” (By 
the Seed Commissioner), 2nd Ann. Rep. Can. Seed Growers’ Ass’n pp. 
44-47, 1905, Ottawa. 


CLARK, G. H. 
“Summary of illustrated Lectures on Seed Grain.”’ (Conditions of the 
Seed trade, weeds and weed impurities in commercial grains, given at 
farmers’ meetings in the provinces of Manitoba, Saskatchewan and Al- 
berta). Pp. 1-16, Dept. of Agr., Ottawa. 


CLARK, G. H. 
“The seed Control Act, 1905, with Instructions, etc.” Bull. S. 1, Dept. 
Agr. pp. 1-10, July 1905, Ottawa. 


CLARK, J. F. 
“The Forest as a National Resource.” Can. For. Ass’n, 6th Ann. Rep. 
pp. 100-110, plates 1-14, 10 Mar., 1905. Ottawa. 


CLARK, J. F. 
“The Grazing of the Woodlot.” O.A.C. Review, xviii, pp., 95-99, f. 1-5, 
Dec., 1905, Guelph, O. 


COLGATE, E. J. 
“The Orchidacee of Wellington Co., O.” (A list of 22 species). Ont. 
Nat. Sci. Bull. I, p. 32, Apr. 1905. 


COLLINS, F. S. 
“Phycological Notes of the Late Isaac Holden.” (References to col- 
lections in Newfoundland (pp. 242, 243) as well as in Connecticut 
Rhodora vii, 81, pp. 168-172; and VII, 83, pp. 222-243; Sept. Nov. 
1905, Boston. 


36 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Cox;)/P: G 
“Nature’s Method of Re-seeding the White and Red Pine.” (The eco- 
logy of burnt forests). The Ottawa Naturalist, XIX, 3, pp. 67, 68, 
June, 1905, Ottawa 


Cox, PHILIP 
“ Life of Moses Henry Perley, Writer and Scientist. ” 
Proc. Miramichi Nat. Hist. Ass’n, IV, 33-40. (References to botani- 
cal work and writings in New Brunswck, 1804-1862) Chatham, N. B., 
1905. 


CRAIG, R. D. 
“Care of Street Trees,” Can. For. Jour., I. 2, pp. 70-74, Apr., 1905, 
Ottawa. 


DEARNESS, J. 
“The Orchidaceæ of Middlesex Co. QO.” (Thirty-three species. Ont. 
Nat. Sci. Bull. 1, pp. 33, 34, Apr., 1905. 


DICKSON, JAMES. 
‘“ À Glimpse at Ontario’s Forest Reservations.” Rod and Gun in Can- 
ada, Vol. VII, pp. 33-40, June, 1905. 


DICKSON, J. M. 
‘“ Biological Notes.” (Seven plants new to the locality, Hamilton, 
Ontario), Jour & Proc. Hamilton Sci. Ass’n, XXI, p. 101. 1905, Hamil- 


ton O. 


DOYLE, D. J. 
“Nature Study at the Macdonald Institute,’ Guelph, Ontario. (Refer- 
ences to elementary Botanical work). The Ottawa Naturalist, xviii, 
10, pp. 193-196, Jan., 1905. Ottawa. 


DRUMMOND, A. T. 
“How plant Life is distributed in Canada and Why.” Trans. Cana- 
dian Institute, No. 16, pp. 23-89, Sept., 1905. Toronto. 


FERNALD, M. L. 
“ Anaphalis margaritacea, Var, occidentalis in Eastern America.” Rho- 


dora, vii, 80, p. 156. Aug. 1905, Boston. 


FERNALD, M. L. 
“A new Antennaria from Eastern Quebec.” (A neodioica Greene, Var 
Gaspensis s.) 
The Ottawa Naturalist, xix, 8, pp. 156-157, Nov., 1905, Ottawa. 


FERNALD, M. L. 
“An Alpine Adiantum.” (A. pedatum Li, var. aleuticum Ruprecht, on 
Mt. Albert, Quebec). Rhodora, vii, 83, pp. 190-192, Nov., 1905, Boston. 


FERNALD, M. L. 
“A new Arabis from Rimouski County, Quebec.” (Arabis Collinsii). 
Rhodora, vii, 74, pp. 31, 32, Feb. 1905, Boston. 


[MacKay] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN BOTANY 37 


FERNALD, M. L. 


“A new Goldenrod from the Gaspé Peninsula” (Solidago chrysolepis. 
sp. n.). The Ottawa Naturalist xix, 9, pp. 167, 168, Dec., 1905, Ottawa 


FERNALD, M. L. 
“An anomalous Alpine Willow.” (Salix chlorolepis, on Mt. Albert. 
Quebec). Rhodora, vii, 82, pp. 185, 186, Oct., 1905, Boston. 

FERNALD, M. L. 
“A Northern Cynoglossum.” (C. boreale, sp. n. found in Quebec, New 
Brunswick, Ontario, British Columbia; and in U. S. A.). Rhodora, -vii., 
84, pp. 249, 250, Dec., 1905, Boston. 

FERNALD, M. L. 


“An Undescribed Northern Comandra.” (Comandra Richardsiana). 
Rhodora. vii, 75, pp. 47-49, Mar., 1905, Boston. 


FERNALD, M. L. É 
“A Pale Form of Avena striata.” (Forma albicans, on mossy table 
lands, Quebec). Rhodora, vii, 83, p. 244, Nov., 1905, Boston. 

FERNALD, M. L. 


“A Peculiar Variety of Drosera rotundifolia.” Rhodora, vii, 73, pp. 
8, 9, January, 1905, Boston. 


FERNALD, M. L. 


“ Draba borealis in Eastern America.” (Near Cap Enragé, Quebec, 
etc.) Rhodora, vii, 84, p. 267, Dec., 1905, Boston. 


FERNALD, M. L., AND KNOWLTON, C. H. 


“ Draba incana and its Allies in Northeastern America ” (With one plate 
containing 15 figures). Rhodora, vii, 76, pp. 60-67, Apr. 1905, Boston. 


FERNALD, M. L. 
* Ledum palustre, Var. dilatatum, on Mt. Kata.hdin.” Rhodora, vii, 73 
pp. 12, 13, Jan. 1905, Boston. 


FERNALD, M. L. 


“North America Species of Hriophorum.” (Ten species and seven Var- 
ieties). Rhodora vii, 77, pp. 81-92; and vii, 79, pp. 129-136, May, July, 
1905, Boston. 


FERNALD, M. L. 


“Some Lithological Variations of Ribes.” (R. oryacanthoides and R. 
Cynobasti appear to be modified in calcareous regions. Two new Var. 
suggested — calcicola and glabratum). MRhodora, vii, 80, pp. 153-156, 
Aug. 1905, Boston. 


FERNALD, M. L. 
“ Spergula sativa in Connecticut.” (Reference to Canada) Rhodora, 
vii, 80, pp. 151, 12, Aug., 1905, Boston. 

FERNALD, M. L. 


“ Symphoricarpus vacemosus and its Varieties in Eastern America.” 
Rhodora, vii, 81, pp. 164-167, Sept., 1905, Boston. 


38 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


FERNALD, M. L. 


“The Genus Arnica in N. E. America.” (Seven species and one variety). 
Rhodora, v., 80, pp. 146-150 Aug., 1905, Boston. 


FILES, T. W. 
“Forest Insects.” Can. For. Ass’n, 6th Ann. Rep., pp. 35-42, 10 Mar., 
1905, Ottawa. 


FINNIE, J. T. 


“ Forest Protection and its Bearings upon Fish and Game preservation. ” 
Rod and Gun in Canada, vi, 10, pp. 539-543, Mar., 1905. 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 


“Report of the Entomologist and Botanist.” Central Experimental 
Farm Report, 1904, pp. 205-256. King’s Printer, Ottawa, 1905. 


FLETCHER, J. 


“Botanical Notes.” (The fruit of Æpigæa repens, etc.) The Ottawa 
Naturalist, xix, 5, p. 110, Aug., 1905, Ottawa. 


FLETCHER, J. 


“An Address. ” 
(Cooperation in Improving seed for Crops’). 2nd Ann. Rep. 
Can. Seed Growers’ Ass’n, pp. 103-106, 1905, Ottawa. 


FLETCHER, J. 


‘Botanical Note” (on Ærythronium albidum). The Ottawa Natur- 
alist xix, 3 p. 68, June, 1905, Ottawa. 


FLETCHER, J. 
“Insects Injurious to Grain and Fodder Crops, Root Crops and Vege- 
tables. ” Bull. 52, Cent. Exper. Farm, Canada, pp. 48, pl. 8, fig. 50, June, 
1905, Ottawa. 


FOWLER, JAMES 
“How Plants Use Animals.” Proc. Miramichi Nat. Hist. Ass’n, IV, 
19-32. (Compilation from Nat. Hist. of the World, Mainly). Chat- 
ham, New Brunswick, 1905. 


GANONG, W. F. 


“Notes on the Natural History and Physiography of New Brunswick, 
81-88 Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc., of New Brunswick V, 299-343. (Botanical 
notes and references, with 8 maps and photogravure of Vegetable or 
Burr-Balls from Little Kedron Lake). Saint John, N.B. 1905. 


GANONG, W. F. 
“On Balls of Vegetable Matter from Sandy Shores.” (Sketch of ob- 
servations published in reference to them). MRhodora, vii, 75, pp. 41-47, 
Mar., 1905, Boston. 


GANONG, W. F. 
“On Vegetable, or Burr-Balls from Little Kedron.” Bull. Nat. Hist. 
Soe. New Brunswick, (No. xxiii), V, pp. 304-806, 1905, Saint John, N.B. 


[MacKay] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN BOTANY 39 


GATES, R. R. 
A Marine Biological Station.” (Sketch of work done at Wood’s Holl, 
U.S.A., with special reference to Algæ). The Argosy, xxxi, pp. 161-170, 
Feb., 1905. Mt. Allison University, Sackville, N.B. 


GATES, R. R. l 
“Variation versus Mutation.” (Popular Newspaper Article of about 
1300 words), “ The Outlook.” 15th Sept., 1905, Middleton, Ann. Co., N.S. 


GREENE, E. L. 


“Proposed New Genus, Anotites.” (Five Canadian species described). 
Leaflets of Botanical Observations, I, pp. 97-105, Oct., 1905. 


GREENE, E. L. 
‘ Extension of Osmaronia” (British Columbia species discussed and a 
new variety from the Chilliwack Valley). Pittonia, V. pp. 309-312. 
Oct., 1905. Washington, D.C., U.S.A. 


GREENE, E. L. 
“New British Columbia Rosacew’”’ (New species in Malus and Fra- 
garia) Ottawa Naturalist, xviii, pp. 215, 216, Mar., 1906, Ottawa. 


GREENE, E. L. 
“ Suggestions Regarding Sanguinaria. ” (The Canadian form and more 
Southern ones are compared). Pittonia V., pp. 306-308, June, 1905. 
Washington, D.C., U.S.A. 


GREENMAN, J. M. 
“New Variety of Senecio in Quebec. (‘Senecio Balsamite, Muhl., 
Var. firmifolius, Greenman”). Rhodora VII, 83, p. 244, Nov., 1905. 
Boston. 


GRISDALE, J. H. 
‘Report of the Agriculturist. ”” Central Experimental Farm Report, 
1904. pp. 43-103 (Food values of Agricultural species of plants). King’s 
Printer, Ottawa, 1905. 


GRISDALE, J. H. 
“Some Common Principles which underlie Improvement in Animals and 
Plants.” 2nd Ann. Rep. Can. Seed Growers’ Ass’n, pp. 92-96, 1905, 
Ottawa. 


GwILLIM, J. C. 
“Forestry in Relation to Mining.” Can. For. Jour., I. 2, pp. 62-64, 
Apr., 1905, Ottawa. 


HALL) W. J. 
‘A New Hunting and Fishing Reserve in Canada.” Rod and Gun In 
Canada, VII, i, pp. 21-22, June, 1905. 


HARRISON, F. C. AND BARLOW, B. 
“ A New Chromogenic Slime-Producing Organism.” (An extensive ser- 
ies of demonstrations described). Trans. Roy Soc. Can., 2nd Ser., XI, 
Sec. 4, pp. 97-125, 1905, Ottawa. 


40 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


HARRISON, F. C. 


“The Viscous Fermentation of Milk and Beer.” (Demonstrations by 
extensive series of cultures of the different bacterial organisms, with a 
sketch of the history and bibliography of the subject). Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can. 2nd Ser. XI, Sec. 4, pp. 71-96, 1905, Ottawa. 


HAY, (CU: 


‘ Additions to the plants of New Brunswick. ” 

Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. of N.B., V, 358-365. (References to botanical 
Excursions, lists of 53 additional Fungi—233 previously reported—and 
65 other plants, and observations of plants, 1904). Saint John, N. B., 
1905. 


EAN NE 
“A Glance at Forest Conditions in New Brunswick” Can. For. Jour. 
I, pp. 23, 27, Jan., 1905, Ottawa. 

ELA. Ge UE 
“Our Native Trees ” (Popular introductory articles for Teachers). I, 
Educational Review, XVIII, 10, pp. 241, 242, Mar., 1905, St. John, N.B. 
II pp. 276-277, Apr: III, pp. 301, 302, May. 

laUiog (GA 10 
“Our Native Trees—The Poplars and Willows.” (Popular sketches 
for schools). Ed. Rev. XIX, 5, pp. 100, 101, Oct., 1905, Saint John. 

EASY Gay Wis 
“Our Native Trees—The Birches.”’ (Popular Article for school Tea- 
chers. (Ed. Rev. XIX, 6, pp. 124-125, Nov., 1905, Saint John. 

EPA Gra 


“Our Native Trees—The Evergreens. (Popular Sketches for Schools) 
Ed. Rev. XIX, 7, pp. 157, 158, Dec., 1905, Saint John. 


HERRIOT, W. 
“Some New or little known Canadian Plants.” Ont. Nat. Sci. Bull. 
I, pp. 26-30, Apr., 1905, Guelph, Ontario. 

HOLM, T. 


“New Species of Plants.” (A protest against the description of new 
species by botanists who have not the specially extensive qualifications 
desirable). Ont. Nat. Sci. Bull. I, pp. 34-36, Apr., 1905, Guelph. 


Hou), T. 


‘“ Studies in the Cyperaceæ. XXII.” (The Cyperacee of the Chilliwack 
Valley, British Columbia—including a description of Scirpus Macouni 
sp. nov.) Am. Jour. Sci. IV, 18, pp. 301-307, f. 1-3, Oct., 1905. 


Hou, T. 


“ Studies in the Cyperaceæ, XXIV.” (New or little known Carices 
from North west America—7 new species). Am. Jour. Sci. IV, 20, pp. 
301-307, f. 1-18. Oct., 1905. 


[MacKay] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN BOTANY 41 


HOWE, M. A. 


‘New Chlorophyceæ, New Rhodophyceæ, and Miscellaneous Notes.” 
Contains a reference to Canadian species, such as Fucus spiralis) Bull. 
Torr. Bot. Club, XXXII, pp. 563-586, Nov., 1905, New York. 


HUARD, V. A. 


“ Généralités sur les Bactéries.” (The characters of different kinds 
of bacteria). Le Naturaliste Canadien, XXXII, 8 and 9, pp. 87-90 
and 95-97, Aug. and Sept., 1905, Quebec. 


ELOBIY, Eo OC. 


“Trailing Arbutus.” (A popular sketch). Ed. Rev., XVIII, p. 279, 
Apr. 1905, Saint John, N.B. 


RACAL S ae)! 
“The Graminee of the Vicinity of Guelph, Ontario.” Ont. Nat. Sci. 
Bull. I, pp. 37, 38, Apr., 1905, Guelph. 

JOLY DE LOTBINIERE, E. G. 
“Opening Address, Sixth Convention, Canadian Forestry Association. ” 
Can. For. Ass’n 6th Ann. Rep. pp. 10-17, 9 Mar., 1905, Ottawa. 

KEELE, J. 
“ Forests of the Yukon Territory.” Can. For. Jour., I, 2, pp. 65-69 
Apr., 1905, Ottawa. ; 

KLINCK, L. S. 
“Corn Breeding in the Corn Belt.” O.A.C. Review, XVIII, pp. 61-68, 
f. 1-7, Nov. 1905, Guelph, ©. 

KILINCK, L. S. 
‘Corn Breeding in the Corn Belt.” (With a discussion). 2nd Ann. 
Rep. Can. Seed Growers’ Association, pp. 56-61, 1905, Ottawa. 

KLUGH, A. B. 
“ Nephrodium Boottü or N. spinulosum X cristatum.”’ Fern Bull. 
XIII, p. 86, Sept., 1905. 

KLUGH, A. B. 


‘ Some of the Rarer Ontario plants from Wellington County. ” 
Ottawa Naturalist, XVIII, 217-219. (43 species). Ottawa, 14 Mar., 
1905. 


KLUGH, A. B. 


- “The Local Distribution of Plants.’? Am. Bot. VII, pp. 115, 116, Feb. 
1905. 


KLUGH, A. B. 
‘ Horsetails and COlubmosses of Wellington Co. O.” Am. Bot., 
VIII, pp. 4-6, Feb., 1905. 

KLUGH, A. B. 


“The Genus Aster at Puslinch Lake,” (Ten Asters around this lake 
in Wellington Co., O.) Ont. Nat. Sci. Bull. I, pp. 30, 31, Apr., 1905, 
Guelph. 


42 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


LANGELIER, J. C. 


‘Forest Wealth of the Province of Quebec.” Can. For. Ass’n. 6th 
Ann. Rep., pp. 62-86, 10 Mar., 1905, Ottawa. 


WAVELET WE.) G. 


“On Translocation of Characters in plants.” (References to pecul- 
iarities in Canadian plants). Rhodora, VII, 73, pp. 13-19, Jan. and vii, 
74, pp. 22-31, Feb. 1905, Boston. 


LE NATURALISTE CANADIEN. 


“Te Thé de Fraisier.’’ (A note on Tea made from one of the Cana- 
dian Strawberries, Fragaria vesca). Le Nat. Can. XXXII, I, pp. 11, 
Jan. 1905, Quebec. 


LITTLE, W. 
“ Forest Fires and making Square Timber in the Woods.” Can. For. 
Ass’n, 6th Ann. Rep., pp. 87-92, 10 Mar., 1905, Ottawa. 
LOCHHEAD, W. 
“Insect and Fungous Enemies of Cereal Crops and their Treatment.” 
2nd Ann. Rep. Can. Seed Growers’ Ass’n., pp. 53-55, 1905, Ottawa. 
LOCHHEAD, W. 


“Nature Observations at Home.” (What is to be seen near the Mac- 
donald College, Ste. Anne de Bellevue, Quebec). Ottawa Naturalist. 
XIX, 9, pp. 179-185, Dec., 1905, Ottawa. 

LOCHHEAD, W. 
“Outlines of Nature Studies ” (Bull. 142, Macdonald Institute, Ontario 
Agricultural College—containing many elementary botanical courses of 
lessons outlined). pp. 48, May, 1905, Toronto. 

LOGGIE, T. G. 


“The New Brunswick Forests; Can. For. Ass’n., 6th Ann. Rep. pp. 
44-47, 10 Mar. 1905, Ottawa. 


LONGLEY, J. W. 
“ Forestry in Nova Scotia.” Can. For. Ass’n. 6th Ann. Rep., pp. 6i- 
62, 10 Mar., 1905, Ottawa. 

MACKAY, A. H. 
‘* Bibliography of Canadian Botany for 1904” (132 titles). Trans. Roy. 
Soc. Can., Ser. 2nd, XI, Sec. 4, 148-152, 1905, Ottawa. 

MACKAY, A. H. 


‘“ Comments on the Phenological Observations conducted in the Public 
Schools of Nova Scotia, during the year ended 30th June, 1904, by the 
educational staff of Phenologists.” Journal of Education, Nova Scotia, 
1905, April, Sr. 3rd, Vol. V, No. 1, pp. 72-85, Halifax. 
MACKAY, A. H. 

“ List of Teachers and numbers of Observations made in Schools re- 
porting Phenological Observations for the school year ended July, 1905. 
Journal of Education, Nova Scotia, 1905, Oct., 3rd Sr., Vol. V, No. 2, 
pp. 154-163. Halifax. 


2 


|MacKay] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN BOTANY 43 


MACKAY, A. H. 


“Nature Study in the Schools of Nova Scotia—A Historical Sketch. ” 
Ottawa Naturalist, XVIII, 209-212. (References to botanical work). 
Ottawa, Feb., 1905. 


MacKay, ANGUS. 


‘ Experimental Farm for the North West Territories, at Indian Head.” 
Experimental Farms Report, 1904, pp. 411-452, King’s Printer, Ottawa, 
1905. 


MACKENZIE, J. J. 
“ Ultramicroscopic Organisms.” (Discussion of Evidence in favour nf 
bacterial or protozoan causes of certain diseases, and the limits of visi- 


bility and sizes of such organisms). Trans. Can. Inst., No. 16 (Vol. 
VIII, pt. 1), pp. 53-62, 1905, Toronto. 


MCNEIL, A. 


“The Apple Industry of Ontario.” O.A.C. Review XVII, pp. 456-460 
May, 1905, Guelph, O. 


MACOUN, JOHN. 


“Two Rare Fungi.” (Cyclomyces Greeni, Berk., and Pleurotus sub- 
areolatus. Peck., near Lynnville and Simcoe, respectively, Ontario). 
Ott. Nat. XIX, 9, p. 176, Dec., 1905, Ottawa. 


MACOUN, W. T. 


“How to Mount Plants.” Rod and Gun in Canada, VI, 7, pp. 422-424, 
Jan., 1905. 


MACOUN, W. T. 


“Report of the Horticulturist.’’ Central Experimental Farm Report, 
1904, pp. 105-141, King’s Printer, Ottawa, 1905. 


MACOUN, W. T. 


“Why our Field and Roadside Weeds are Introduced Species.” (Twenty- 
four species mentioned). Ottawa Naturalist, XIX, 6, pp. 124, 125, Sept., 
1905, Ottawa. 


MAUREL, LOUIS. 


‘ Les Arbres, ” (A popular article on trees). Le Nat. Can. XXXII, 12, 
pp. 135-137, Dec., 1905, Quebec. 


MIRAMICHI NATURAL HISTORY ASSOCIATION. 
“4 Preliminary Catalogue of Plants in the Herbarium of the Miramichi 
Nat. Hist. Ass’n.” 
Proy. Mir. Nat. Hist. Ass’n., IV, 45-55. (473 species). Chatham, N.B. 
1905. 


MURRAY, JAMES. 


“The Production and use of Seed Grain.” Bull. S. 2. Dept. Agric. pp. 
1-16, Nov., 1905, Ottawa. 


44 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


MuRRILL, W. A. 


‘“ A Key to the Agariceæ of Temperate North America.” Torreya, V, 
12, pp. 213, 214, Dec., 1905, New York. 


MURRILL, W. A. 


“4 Key to the Brown Sessile Polyporaceæ of temperate North America.” 
Torreya, V, 11, pp. 194, 195, Nov., 1905, New York. 


MURRILL, W. A. 
A Key to the Stipitate Polyporaceæ of temperate North America. 
I and Il.” Torreya V, 2, pp. 28-30, Feb; and V, 3, pp. 43, 44, Mar. 
1905, New York. 

MURRILL, W. A. 
“The Polyporacee of North America—X. Agaricus, Lenzites, Cerrena, 
and Favolus.” Bull. Torr. Bot. Club., XXXII, 2, pp. 83-103, Feb., 1905, 
New York. 

MURRILL, W. A. 
“The Polyporaceæ of North America—XI” (A synopsis of the brown 
pileate species). Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, XXXII, 7, pp. 353-371, July 2, 
1905, New York. 

MuRRILL, W. A. 


“The Polyporacee of North America—XII” (A synopsis of the white 
and bright-coloured pileate species). Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, XXXII 9. 
pp. 469-493, Sept., 1905, New York. 


MURRILL, W. A. 


“The Polyporacee of North America—XIII.”’ (The described species 
of Bjerkendera, Trametes, and Coriolus. Bull. Torr Bot. Club, XXXII, 
12, pp. 633-656, Dec., 1905, New York. 


NEWMAN, L. H. 
“Treatment of Cereal Seeds for Smut.” Seed Branch, Dept. Agr., pp. 
4, 1905, Ottawa. 
ONTARIO AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE. 
“Outlines of Nature Studies.’ Biological Department O.A.C. pp. 
20, Guelph, Ontario. 
OTTAWA FIELD-NATURALIST CLUB. 


“Report of Botanical Branch.” (Summarizing discussions of meetings 
on individuality of Plants, Origin of species by mutation, Conifers, etce., 
etc.). The Ottawa Naturalist XVIII, II, pp. 202-208, Feb., 1905, Otta- 
wa. Also XIX, 6, pp. 125, 126, Sept., 1905. 


PECK; (Co EH: 
“New Species of Fungi.” Bull, Torrey Bot. Club, NC 62) TT 
81. (Canadian species, Geopyxis nebulosoides). New York, Feb. 1905. 
PENHALLOW, D. P. 


“A Blazing Beach.” (Vegetable decomposition underneath sand, etc.) 
Science, XXII, 572, 1905, p. 794. 


. 


[ MacKay] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN BOTANY 45 


PENHALLOW, D. P. 
A Review of the ‘Status of the Mesozoic Floras of the United States” 
by Lester F. Ward. (Containing references to the Triassic, Jurassic, 


Cretaceous, etc., Floras of Western Canada, etc.). Science XXII! 
(593), pp. 737-741, 11 May, 1906, New York. 


PENHALLOW, D. P. 


“A Systematic Study of the Salicacew.” Amer. Nat., XXXIX, 1905, 
pp. 509-535 and 797-838, (ill.). 


PENHALLOW, D. P. 


“Observations upon some Noteworthy Leaf-variations, and their Bearing 
upon Paleontological Evidence.” Can. Rec. Sci. IX, pp. 279-305. f. 
1-11, 15 May, 1905, Montreal. 


PENHALLOW, D. P. 


“The Anatomical Changes in the Structure of the Vascular Cylinder in- 
cident to the Hybridization of Catalpa.” Amer. Nat., XXXIX, 1905, 
pp. 113-136, (ill.). 


PENHALLOW, D. P. 


“The Mycelium of Dry Rot.” (Merulius lachrymans extending from 
its nutrient support on woodwork about 3 yards along brickwork and 
into moist anthracite coal in one of the McGill University buildings). 
Can. Rec. Soc. IX, 6, p. 318, 15 May, 1905, Montreal. 


FENHALLOW, D. P. 
“The Tussock Moth.” (Feeding on Foliage of Trees). Can. Municip. 
Journ. 1, April, 1905, p. 92, (ill.). 


PUTMAN, J. H. 


‘Ottawa Summer School for Teachers.” (References to botanical 
work). Ottawa Naturalist XIX, 6, pp. 127-129, Sept., 1905, Ottawa. 


ROBERTSON, JAS. W. 


“Evidence of the Commissioner of Agriculture and Dairying, Canada, 
before Parliamentary Com. 1903.” (On Improvement of Seeds and Seed- 
Grains). pp. 1-29, 1904, Ottawa. 


ROBERTSON, JAS. W. 
“ President’s Address, Canadian Seed Growers’ Association, 2nd Ann. 
Rep. Cony. 1905.” (27th June, Ottawa) Can. Seed Grow. Ass’n. 
Rep., 2nd Ann. Cony., pp. 18-21, 1905, Ottawa. 


ROBERTSON, R. 
‘“ Experimental Farm for the Maritime Provinces.” Experimental 
Farms Rep., 1904, pp. 313-351. (Botanical information of Value). 
King’s Printer, Ottawa, 1905. 


ROBINSON, B. L. 


‘A Well Marked species of Sparganium.” (Sparganium fluctuans ) 
Rhodora VII, 75, p. 60, Mar. 1905, Boston. 


46 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ROBINSON, B. L. 


“A new Ranunculus from Northeastern America.” (R&R. Alleni in Gaspé 
Co., Quebec). Rhodora, vii, 88, pp. 219-222, Nov., 1905, Boston. 


ROBINSON, B. L. 
“Two Varieties of Sisymbrium officinale in America.” Rhodora, vii, 
78, pp. 101-108, June, 1905, Boston. 


IvOSS Aa ED: 


“The Forest Resources of the Labrador Peninsula.” Can. For. Jour. 
I, pp. 28-37, Jan., 1905, Ottawa. 


Ross, NORMAN M. 
“Tree Planting in the West.” Can. For. Jour. I, 4, pp. 155-158, Oct., 
1905, Ottawa. 


SARGENT, C. S. 
“Manual of the Trees of North America (exclusive of Mexico).” i-xxiii, 
1-826, map with figures 1-642. Boston, Mar., 1905. 


SARGENT, C. S. 
ne Recently Recognized species of Cratægus in Eastern Canada and New 
England,—VI.”” (Descriptions of new species) Rhodora, vii, 81, pp. 
162-164; and vii, 82, pp. 174-185; and vii, 83, 192-219; Sept, Oct., and 
Nov., 1905, Boston. 


SAUNDERS, CHAS. E. 
“Report of the Experimentalist.”” Central Experimental Farm Report, 
1904. pp. 257-281. (Experiments on Botanical material). King's 
Printer, Ottawa, 1905. 


SAUNDERS, WM. 
“Field Crops at the Experimental Farms, and the Distribution of Seeds 
so obtained.” 2nd Ann. Rep. Can. Seed Growers’ Ass’n., pp. 35-42, 
1905. Ottawa. 


SAUNDERS, WM. 
“Increased Production of Farm Crops from Early Sowing.’ (Results 
of experiments with various crops at the different Dominion Experi- 
mental Farms). Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. 2nd Ser. XI, Sec. 4, pp. 53, 54, 
1905, Ottawa. 


SAUNDERS, WM. 
“Report of Director of Experimental Farms, for 1904.” pp. 1-41 (Sum- 
mary of Experiments on fruits, grains, etc.). King’s Printer, Ottawa, 
1905. 


SAUNDERS, W. AND SAUNDERS, C. E. À 
“Results obtained in 1905 from Trial Plots of Grain, Fodder, Corn, Field 
Roots and Potatoes.” (By the Director and the Cerealist of The Cen- 
tral Experimental Farm, Ottawa). Bull. 53, Dept. Agr., pp. 1-48, Nov., 
1905. Ottawa. 


[MacKay] 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN BOTANY 47 
SEARS, F. €. 


“What Varieties of Apples shall we Plant?” 


Proc. 9th Ann. Meeting 
Nova Scotia Farmer’s Association, pp. 58-67. Truro, 15 Feb. 1905. 
SHARP, THOMAS A. 


“ Experimental Farm for British Columbia at Agassiz.’”’ Experimental 
Farms Report, 1904, pp. 453-485, King’s Printer, Ottawa, 1905. 
SHAW, C. H. 
“ Botanizing 


in British Columbia. ” 
May 1905. 


Plant World, viii, pp. 105-107, 
SHAW, PERCY J. 


“School Gardens. ”’ 


(A sketch of some in Nova Scotia, with photo- 
gravure of one at Old Barns). Educational Review, xviii, pp. 281, 282, 
Apr., 1905, Saint John. N. B. 


SHUTT, F. T., AND CHARLTON, H. W. 


‘On the Food Value of Certain Mushrooms. ” 
Coprinus comatus and C. 
XS 


es 


(Chemical analyses of 
atramentarius). The Ottawa Naturalist, 
pp. 43-47, May, 1905, Ottawa. 
SHUTT, FRANK T. 


“Report of the Chemist.” Central Experimental Farm Report, 1904, 


pp. 143-203. (Chemical Constitution etc., of Vegetable species). King’s 
Printer, Ottawa, 1905, Ottawa. 
SHUTT, FRANK T. 


“The Action of Certain Smut Preventives on the Vitality of Wheat.” 
2nd Ann. Rep. Can. Seed Growers’ Ass’n., pp. 47-53, 1905, Ottawa. 
SMITH, ARTHUR HARVEY. 


‘ Canadian Forestry Convention.” Rod and Gun in Canada, VII, 7, 
pp. 757, Dec., 1905. 


SMITH, ARTHUR HARVEY. 


‘“ Exploring to Hudson’s Bay.” 


Rod and Gun in Canada, vii, 5, 499-502, 
Oct., 1905. 


SMITH, ARTHUR HARVEY. 


“Ontario’s Forest Reserve.” Rod and Gun in Canada, VII, 4, p. 411, 
Sept., 1905. 


SNYDER, HARRY. 
“What can the Farmer do to improve the Yield and the Quality of 
Grain.” 2nd Ann. Rep. Can. Seed Growers’ Ass’n., pp. 77-78, 1905. 
Ottawa. 


STEWART, E. 


“ Canada as a Field for Intelligent Forestry” 


Can. For. Jour. I, pp. 
10-14, Jan., 1905, Ottawa. 


48 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA | 


THE O. A. C. REVIEW. 


‘‘ Windbreaks as a Protection.” O.A.C. Review, XVII, 7, 399-401, Apr. 
1905, Guelph, Ontario. 


TURNER, J. B. 


“The Probable Course of Evolution in Plants.” Jour. and Proc. Ham- 
ilton Sci. Ass'n. XXI, pp. 87-93, 1905, Hamilton, Ontario. 


UNDERWOOD, LUCIEN M. 
“ Botrychium sidlifokium Presl.” (British Columbia, species). Tor- 
reya V, 6, pp. 106, 107, June, 1905, New York. 

UNWIN, A. H. 


“The Art of Forestry.’ Can. For. Jour. I, 3, pp. 97-100, July, 1905, 
Ottawa. 


VAN HORNE, MARY. 
“Some Mushrooms Found in Canada.” (A popular sketch of a number 
of striking species). Can. Rec. Sci. IX, pp. 157-175, 20 Apr. 1905, 
Montreal. 

WEBBER, H. J. 
‘“ Pedigree or Grade Breeding.” (A plant-breeding physiologist on plant 
breeding). 2nd Ann. Rep. Can. Seed Growers’ Ass’n., pp. 61-77, 1905. 
Ottawa. 

WEBBER, lak de 
“Phe Science of Plant Breeding.” 2nd Ann. Rep. Can. Seed Growers’ 
Ass’n., pp. 79-92, 1905, Ottawa. 

WHEELER, A. O. 
“Notes on the Fauna and Flora of the Selkirks.’”’ Rod and Gun in 
Canada, VII, 2, pp. 193-198, July, 1905. 

WHITE, J. 
“The Orchidaceæ of Peel Co., O.” (Seventeen species). Ont. Nat. 
Sci. Bull. I, pp. 31, 32, Apr., 1905. 

WILLING, T. N. 


“Hints for the Grain Grower,’ Bull. No. 16, Department of Agricul- 
ture of North West Territories of Canada, 64 pp. 61%4 by 10 in. (Spec- 
ial attention to noxious weeds of which there are about 40 figures). Re- 
gina, 15 May, 1905. 


ZAVITZ, E. J. 


“ Protecting the Forests.” O.A.C. Review, XVIII, pp. 1, 2, Oct., 1905, 
Guelph, O. 


SECTION IV., 1906. [49] TRANS: Ry. Sas 


VI.— South African Iron Formations. 


By A. P. CoLEMan. 
(Read May 23rd, 1906.) 


While in South Africa with the British Association last summer 
two interesting localities vere visited where silica interbanded with iron 
ore is well displayed, and having come directly from the Keewatin Iron 
Formation north of Lake Superior, I could not help being deeply im- 
pressed with the resemblance of these formations in such widely 
separated localities. 

Our Canadian iron ranges in northern Ontario are always asso- 
ciated with the banded rocks just mentioned, red jasper with darker 
bands of hematite or magnetite, or white or gray granular silica alter- 
rating with darker bands containing magnetite; which are found as 
ridges in the Keewatin of Ontario, as well as in the United 
States to the west and south of Lake Superior. Since many of the 
great ore bodies of that famous iron region have been formed by the 
secondary concentration of hematite or limonite from lean rocks of the 
kind described, it is of interest to compare the iron formations of the 
two regions. 

South African geologists themselves have pointed out the resem- 
blance, so that no originality can be claimed by the present writer in 
calling attention to it; but a direct comparison of some of the South 
African rocks and their ‘geological associations with the similar rocks 
of the Lake Superior region may be of value from the scientific side, 
and may give hints as to the probability of workable bodies of iron ore 
eccurring in various colonies in South Africa. 

The first examples observed of banded silica resembling the iron 
formation were found as boulders and pebbles in the Dwyka conglom- 
erate near Matjesfontein in the Karoo (Cape Colony); somewhat as 
the Canadian iron formation is found as pebbles in the basal Huronian 
conglomerate. Their original home could not be determined with cer- 
tainty, however. 

The next locality was on Hospital Hill, a well-known suburb of 
Johannesburg in the Transvaal. Here beautifully banded specimens 
may be found, sometimes straight and even, but often as much folded 
. and contorted as in our own Keewatin rocks. The banding is of white, 
brownish and reddish silica, distinctly granular, but very fine grained, 
with somewhat crystalline hematite and a little magnetite. 


Sec. IV., 1906. 4. 


50 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The associated rocks are red Hospital Hill slate and gray sand- 
stone or soft quartzite. The sheets of banded silica generally seem 
to be interbedded with the other rocks as if belonging to the succession, 
but sometimes they are locally crumpled, though the rocks above and 
below seem undisturbed. The adjoining rocks are much less consoli- 
dated and metamorphosed than those enclosing our Keewatin 
iron ranges; but banded silica belonging to the Animikie (upper 
Huronian) in America occurs with somewhat similar slate and soft 
quartzite. 

The banded siliceous rock of Hospital Hill has been called “ calico 
rock,” and is briefly described by Hatch and Corstorphine in papers 
on the geology of the Rand Prof. Hatch puts the Hospital Hill 
slate near the top of the Witwatersrand system, which overlies uncon- 
formably the Swaziland beds, looked on as Archean. According to 
this succession the banded rocks are later than the Keewatin, but per- 
haps not later than the Animikie. 

Banded silica with iron ore occurs also in Natal, associated with the 
Barberton series of slates or schists, placed by the Natal geologists in 
the Archean. My only specimen, from N’Gotsche mountain, is partly 
cherty and partly quartzitic in look, the bands being gray or brownish 
black. Unfortunately I had no opportunity to see a typical outcrop, 
since our field work lay chiefly on the Dwyka. 

The banded iron formation is widely found in Rhodesia and I had 
an opportunity to study a fine outcrop on a kopje near Salisbury, where 
the rock stands up as a sharp ridge overlooking the town and plain. 
No jasper occurs, but sandy looking or quartzitic silica is interbanded 
with iron ore, the whole often greatly crushed and folded. The ma- 
terial is exactly like the iron range rock of the Michipicoten region in 
Ontario; but the many loose blocks scattered over the hill give a very 
different general impression from the smoothly glaciated surface of such 
ridges in Canada. The blocky character is no doubt due to splitting 
by sudden changes of temperature between night and day in the dry 
climate of the region. The enclosing rocks were hidden under debris, 
but the nearest kopje is of granite, and the region, so far as seen by our 
party, may be Archean. 

A specimen of bright red banded jasper given me from northern 
Rhodesia is closely like the so-called “ jaspilite” of the Vermilion range 
in Minnesota, but I have no information as to its geological sur- 
roundings. 


1Trans. Geol. Soc. S. Af., Vol. VII, Part II, 1904, p. 100; also ibid, Part 
III, pp. 147 and 8. 


[COLEMAN ] SOUTH AFRICAN IRON FORMATIONS 51 


Mr. F. P. Mennell, of Bulowayo, describes the Banded Ironstone 
series of southern Rhodesia as of Eparchæan age, and says of it “the 
characteristic feature of these beds is the peculiar banded flinty rock, 
which appears under the microscope to be in all probability an altered 
fine-grained mechanical sediment, silicified and highly charged with 
ferruginous material, arranged in parallel bands. They alternate with 
sheared conglomeratic and arenaceous beds, slates (phyllites) and 
gneissic bands, which may result either from the crushing of acid in- 
trusions or of tuffs. These beds are usually almost vertical to all appear- 
ance, but this may be due to folding at right angles to their real direc- 
tion, or to repetition over and over again by faulting; in any case it is 
possible to travel over them for many miles in a direction at right angles 
te the apparent strike.”1 He correlates them with the Griqua Town 
series of Cape Colony and the Hospital Hill series of Johannesburg. 

Except for the immense width of the banded ironstones his descrip- 
tion might apply very well to many outcrops of the iron formation in 
Canada, but his statement that the silica is altered from a fine grained 
mechanical sediment seems doubtful in the light of American investi- 
gations, which favour chemical sedimentation or deposit from solutions 
obtained from basic eruptives. A thin section of a specimen from 
Salisbury shows the silica as completely interlocking anhedra with no 
hint of water rolled grains. In appearance it is exactly like a thin sec- 
tion of similar iron range rock from near the Helen mine, Ontario. 

Banded ironstones are widely found in northern Cape Colony, 
especially in the Prieska region, as described by Mr. A. W. Rogers of 
the provincial survey. They occur mainly in the Griqua Town series 
consisting “of peculiarly heavy green slaty rocks with quartzites and 
jaspers containing large quantities of magnetite. Much of the rock 
1s banded, the thin layers having slightly different colours of which deep 
red, bright red, brown and black are the most usual. The black layers 
are almost entirely composed of minute crystals and grains of magnetite 
with a little quartz between the grains, every intermediate stage between 
almost pure magnetite and pure quartzite can be found.” “The jaspers 
are very fine grained rocks which break with a smooth conchoidal frac- 
ture. They are made up of extremely minute crystalline particles of 
cuartz, and are coloured by oxides of iron of various degrees of 
hydration.”2 This account might be applied without change to our 
American Iron Formation. 

Mr. Rogers has been good enough to send an interesting set of 
specimens of these jaspery rocks, and also of the crocidolites found 


1Geol. of Southern Rhodesia, Rh. Mus., Special Rep., No. 2. 
2 Geology of Cape Colony, pp. 73-4. 


52 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


more or less associated with them, and of a remarkable glacial deposit 
overlying them. The red jasper is closely like our own, and brown 
banded specimens are like some phases of the Helen Iron Formation, 
but a black finely laminated specimen is of a different type from any 
Canadian example. A piece of brown jasper is indistinguishable from 
specimens obtained at the Helen mine. 

The splendid brown: or dark green crocidolite, with its beautiful 
silky lustre, associated with the lower part of the rocks containing 
banded iron ore is not at all matched in appearance by the dark green 
hornblende, griinerite, associated with magnetite in our own iron ranges. 
The composition of the asbestos and of the griinerite is, however, quite 
similar, each consisting largely of silica and ferrous exide. The croci- 
dolite (according to Dana) contains, however, much ferric oxide and 
a little soda also. 

Rogers mentions odlitic rocks associated with the banded iron bear- 
ing series, suggesting the odlitic jaspers of our Animikie, though 
very different in appearance. Oôülitic jasper has never been re- 
ported from the more ancient Keewatin Iron Formation of America, 
but only from the Upper Huronian iron bearing rocks. In some places 
the Griqua Town beds containing the banded silica and iron ore are much 
folded, and they often rise as isolated patches above the general surface 
of granite and gneiss, apparently much as our own iron ranges do in 
parts of northern Ontario. In other places, however, they overlie 
conformably limestones and other rocks of the Campbell Rand group, 
and lie nearly flat. In Ontario the Iron Formation has been found 
associated with crystalline limestone only in one place, Goudreau lake, 
north of Lake Superior; and is usually more nearly vertical than hori- 
zontal in attitude. 

In his latest publication! Rogers describes curious breccias of large 
and small fragments of banded jaspery rocks and cherts with a matrix 
of hematite or silica or a mixture of the two. “In places the rock 
appears to be made of little else than hematite, and when broken open 
faint outlines of angular fragments of banded rock, now converted into 
hematite, can be seen embedded in a matrix of hematite.” This descrip- 
tion would apply very well to some of our ore deposits, as at Helen 
mine, where a breccia of the Iron Formation has been transformed into 
lean ore. 

The age of these South African iron bearing rocks, so similar to 
our American Iron Formation in structure, chemical composition and 
relationship to adjoining rocks, is not very certainly determined. There 


1 Campbell Rand and Griqua Town Series in Hay, Trans. Geol. Soc. of 
South Africa. 


2 


[cOLEMAN] SOUTH AFRICAN IRON FORMATIONS 58 


seems good evidence in writings of the South African geologists that 
rocks of the kind belong to more than one age, but that all are relatively 
ancient. 

Unfortunately fossils have never been found in South Africa in 
rocks beneath the Devonian, so that lower rocks can be classified as to 
age only by stratigraphical or lithological methods. 

The ‘Griqua Town series of northern Cape Colony and the Campbell 
Rand series, into which it passes downwards, are followed by two 
or three lower series of rocks, separated from one another by uncon- 
formites; while above the Griqua Town series the Pre-Cape rocks and 
the Table Mountain series intervene before the Bokkeveld series is 
reached, from which Devonian fossils are known. 

As the Keewatin rocks, containing our most important iron forma- 
tion, are the oldest known rocks of their region and have nothing be- 
neath except the Laurentian eruptives which have burst through them, 
it appears that our Helen Iron Formation, for instance, must be more 
ancient than any of the South African iron bearing rocks. However, 
banded silica with iron ore occurs also in higher formations in America, 
especially the Animikie, or Upper Huronian of the latest classification, 
with no less than three important breaks between it and the Keewatin; 
so that the Animikie may be of somewhat the same age as the South 
African iron bearing formations. Since banded silica with iron ore 
occurs at more than one horizon in South Africa, some outcrops of these 
rocks, as in the Barberton series of Natal or the occurrence near Salis- 
bury in Rhodesia, may be much lower down in the geological scale than 
those of the Prieska region, and may represent our Keewatin Iron 
Formation, or the Lower Huronian, which comes next in order above it. 

Whether the South African and the North American rocks contain- 
ing interbanded silica and iron ore are of the same age or not, 
they clearly indicate similar conditions of deposit in very 
ancient times and in very different parts of the globe. Why these curi- 
ous and important types of rock, consisting essentially of silica and iron, 
should have formed only in ancient seas (Pre-Silurian at least), and not 
in later times, remains mysterious; and for the present it may be suffi- 
cient to call attention to the fact that our own Pre-Cambrian formations 
of banded <ilica and iron ore which have attracted so much attention 
and speculation, are by no means unique, but are repeated on an even 
larger scale in the southern hemisphere. 

It is rather singular that iron-silica rocks of a banded character 
have not been reported from Europe and other regions, when they are 
found occupying hundreds of square miles among the more ancient rocks 
of North America and South Africa. One can hardly imagine that con- 


524 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ditions causing the alternate precipitation of silica and iron should have 
been very widespread in two continents, and absent in all other regions; 
and it may be that they have simply been over-looked in other parts of 
the world. ; 

The mode of formation of the banded iron-silica rocks is by no 
means finally settled. Some American geologists think them derivations 
from an original siliceous siderite, rearranged by heat, circulating water, 
and certain reagents; but in a great many of the outcrops in Ontario, 
and, I believe, in all of the outcrops described in South Africa, siderite is 
absent. It is possible, of course, that in these cases the siderite has been 
completely rearranged, but it seems more probable that the stratified 
looking iron ore and silica were originally deposited on a sea bottom, 
though perhaps not in their present form. The character of that sea 
must have been very different from any known at present, and one is 
tempted to speculate as to solvents and precipitants which could 
act over hundreds of miles of sea bottom, piling up beds of crystalline 
silica and magnetite or hematite still hundreds of feet thick after all 
the erosion they have undergone. This, however, would lead too far. 

South Africa is fairly well provided with coal, and a time may come 
when iron will be produced in the different colonies. Judging from 
American iron mining regions large and rich ore deposits of secondary 
origin may be looked for wherever the lean iron bearing rocks have been 
enclosed in basins permitting a slow concentration. That such deposits 
of economic importance will be found in South Africa seems very 
probable. 


Sxcrion IV., 1906 [55] Trans. R. S. C. 


VIL—PBibliography of Canadian Entomology for the Year 1905. 


Contributed by Rev. C. J. 8. Betmune, D.C.L. 


(Read by title, May 23rd, 1906.) 


ALDRICH, J. M. 


A Catalogue of North American Diptera, or Two-winged Flies. (A very 
complete and admirable work, with full references to Canadian species 
and publications.) Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, xlvi, No. 1444, 
pp. 680—Washington, 1905. 


ASHMEAD, WILLIAM H. 


A skeleton of a new arrangement of the Families, Sub-families, Tribes 
and Genera of the Ants, or the Superfamily Formicoidea. (An epitome 
of the classification of the Ants which the author is about to publish in 
a large volume.) Canadian Entomologist, xxxvii, 381-384. 


BAKER, CARL F. 


The Classification of the American Siphonaptera (or Fleas). (This 
forms a useful supplement to the Revision of the Order published in 
1904, and includes a number of Canadian species). roc. U.S. National 
Museum, Washington, xxix, 121-170 (No. 1417), 1905. 


BANKS, NATHAN. 


A Treatise on the Acarina or Mites. (This excellent work treats of the 
Mites of the world and gives descriptions and figures of all the families 
into which the Order is divided. Synoptic tables are furnished of all the 
genera found in America, a large number of which are to be met with 
in Canada). Proc. U.S. National Museum, Washington, xxviii, 1-114. 
201 figures (No. 1382), 1904. 


BANKS, NATHAN. 


Description of new Mites (Includes a new species, Disparipes Americanus, 
from a Bee, Halictus Venablesii, taken at Vernon, B.C.) Proc. Ent. Soc. 
Washington, vii, 133-142, October, 1905. 


BETHUNE, C. J. S. 


BUENO, 


BUENO, 


Editorial Notes, Reviews, ete. Canadian Hntomologist, xxxvii, 1905. 
35th Annual Report, Entomological Society of Ontario, 1904. 


J. R. DE LA TORRE. 


Notes on Hydrometra Martini, Kirk. (—lineata, Say.) (An account of 
the life history of this water-bug in continuation of the description given 
by Mr. J. O. Martin in the Can. Ent. for March 1900, vol. xxxii, 70-76). 
Can. Ent., xxxvii, 12-15, two figures (Jan. 1905) ; page 264 (July). 


J. Re DE vA TORRE: 


The Tonal Apparatus of Ranatra quadridentata, Stal. Can. Ent., xxxvii, 
85-87, seven figures (March, 1905). 


56 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


BUENO, J. R. DE LA TORRE. 


Notes on Collecting, Preserving and Rearing Aquatic Hemiptera. Can. 
Ent., xxxvii, 181-142 (April, 1905). 


BUENO, J. R. DE LA TORRE. 


The three Ranatras of the north-eastern United States. (Describes a 
new species R. Kirkaldyi. These water-bugs are probably all to be found 
in Canada). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 187-188 (May, 1905). 


Bueno, J. R. DE LA TORRE. 


The genus Notonecta in America north of Mexico. (A monograph of this 
genus of water-bugs, with analytical tables and full descriptions of the 
species, bibliography, etc.). Journal N.Y. Ent. Soc., xiii, 143-167, one 
plate, 1905. 


CASEY, THOS. L. 


A new Carabus and Cychrus with miscellaneous notes on Coleoptera. 
(The “ notes ” include a synoptic table of the species of Vanonus). Can. 
Ent. xxxvii, 160-164 (May, 1905). 


CHAGNON, G. 


Canadian Cerambycide. (A list of 44 species of longicorn beetles taken 
in the Province of Quebec during 1904, and notes on a few other species). 
Entomological News, Philadelphia, xvi, 35, 36, February, 1905. 


CHAGNON, G. 


Longicornes de la Province de Québec. (A list of 102 species of the 
family Cerambycids taken in Quebec, with dates of capture, locality, and 
other notes). Le Naturaliste Canadien, xxxii, 25-29; 41-45, Mars et 
Avril, 1905. 


CHAGNON, G. 


Criocephalus obsoletus, Rand., and Asemum mestum, Hald. (Points out 
that Abbé Provancher was in error in describing a common Quebec long- 
icorn beetle under the former name; it should be the latter). Can. Ent., 
xxxvii, 232 (June, 1905). 


CHITTENDEN, F. H. 


On the species of Sphenophorus related to pertinaæ, Oliv., with descrip- 
tions of other forms. (Gives a synoptic table of the species, including 
several found in Canada). Proc. Ent. Soc., Washington, vii, 50-64 (Jan., 
1905). 


COCKERELL, T. D. A. 


Tables for the separation of some Bees of the genera Coeliorys and Col- 
letes. (Very useful for the determination of the species of Bees belong- 
ing to these genera, many of which are taken in Canada). Psyche, xil, 
85-90, 1905. 


COCKERELL ID YA" 


The North American Bees of the family Anthophoridæ. (Contains syn- 
optic tables of the species belonging to the different genera of this family 
and a check-list of all the species and their geographical distribution, 


r 


[BETHUNE] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN ENTOMOLOGY 57 


with copious explanatory notes. Canadian species are included). Trans. 
American Entomological Society, Philadelphia, xxxii, 63-116, January, 
1905. 


CŒOCKLE. d= WwW: 
Note on collecting Hibernating specimens. (A remarkable number found 
under bark of trees near Kaslo, B.C.). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 263-264 
(July, 1905). 


COCKLE, J. W. 
Spinning methods of Telea polyphemus. 35th Annual Report Ent. Soc. 
Ont., 1904, pp. 86-87. 


COOK, JOHN H. 
On the specific validity of Incisalia (Thecla) Henrici. (Distinguishes 
between this species and J. irus, and mentions that some males of the 
former are without the characteristic stigma). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 216- 
218 (June, 1905). 


COQUILLETT, D. W. 
New Nematocerous Diptera from North America. (Describes a number 


of new species including twelve from British Columbia). Journal N.Y. 
Ent. Soc., xiii, 56-69, 1905. 
DIETZ, WILLIAM G. 

Revision of the genera and species of the Tineid Sub-families, Amy- 
driinæ and Tineinæ inhabiting North America. (Contains synoptic tables 
of general and species, with descriptions of a large number of species, 
many of them new, and plates illustrative of the neuration. Many of 
the forms described are taken in Canada). Trans. American Entomologi- 
cal Society, Philadelphia, xxxi, 1-96. six plates, 1905. 


CURRIE, ROLLA P. 
Dragon-flies from the Kootenay District of British Columbia. (A list 
of about twenty species, with dates and localities). Proc. Ent. Soe. 
Washington, vii, 16-20 (Jan., 1905). 


DIONNE, C.—E. 
Le Papillon du Cotonnier. (An account of the appearance in the city 
of Quebee on the 5th of October, 1905, of an immense number of the 
Cotton Moth, Alabama argillacea, Hubn., a migrant from the Southern 
States). Le Py pao Canadien, xxxii, 113-114, Novembre, 1905. 


Dop, F. H. WOLLEY. 
Preliminary List of the Macro-Lepidoptera of Alberta, N. W. T. (An 
annotated list of the Noctuids, begun in the preceding volume, pp. 345- 
355). Can. Ent. xxxvii, 17-28 (Jan.) ; 49-60 (Feb.) ; 145-156 (April) ; 
173-184 (May) ; 221-230 (June) ; 241-252 (July, 1905). 


DyArR, HARRISON G. 
New North American Lepidoptera and Synonymical Notes. (Describes 
a new Geometrid. Tephloclystia harlequinaria, from Victoria, B.C., and 
refers to several other Canadian species.) Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington, 
vii, 29-39, January, 1905. 


58 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


DyaR, HARRISON G. 


DYAR, 


DYAR, 


DYAR, 


DYAR, 


Life Histories of North American Geometridæ.— lviii. (Description of 
egg and larva of Mesoleuca vasaliata, Guenée, from Kaslo, B.C. Food- 
plant Thimbleberry, Rubus nutkanus.) Psyche, xii, 25, 1905. 


HARRISON G. 


Life Histories of North American Geometridæ.— lix. (Description of 
egg and larva of Huchlena astylusaria, Walker, from Kaslo, B.C.). 
Psyche, xii, 48, 1905. 


HARRISON G. 


Life Histories of North American Geometridæ.—Ix and Ixi. (Descrip- 
tions of egg and larva of Melanolophia C'anadaria, Guenée, food-plant 
needles of spruce; and of Petrophora convallaria, Guenée, food-plants 
Polygonum, Epilobium and other low plants; both from Kaslo, B.C.). 
Psyche, xii, 58-60, 1905. 


HARRISON G. 

Life Histories of North American Geometride.—lxiii. (Description of 
the egg and larva of Sciagraphia neptata, Guenée, food-plant the Bal- 
sam Poplar, Populus balsamea. From Kaslo, B. C.) Psyche, xii, 115- 
116, 1905. 


HARRISON G. 


A Review of the Hesperide of the United States (and Canada). (A 
valuable paper giving synoptic tables of the genera and species of this 
family of Butterflies according to the latest system of nomenclature). 
Journal N.Y. Ent. Soc., xiii, 111-142, 1905. 


ENGEL, HENRY. 


Collecting moths in the autumn and winter. (An interesting account 
of successful collecting by means of ‘‘sugaring,’’ with a list of the 
species taken). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 102-111, (March, 1905). 


EVANS, JOHN D. 


Insects collected at light during the season of 1904. (The results of a 
season’s collecting with a trap-lantern; about 100 species of Lepidoptera 
and 60 of Coleoptera are recorded). 385th Annual Report, Ent. Soc., Ont., 
1904, pp. 82-86. 


FALL, H. C. 


Revision of the Ptinide of Boreal America. (Contains synoptic tables 
of genera and species and full descriptions. A number of the species 
are to be found in Canada and are included in this paper.) Trans. 
American Entomological Society, Philadelphia, xxxi, 97-296, one plate, 
1905. 


MALTA Ge 


On the Affinities of the genus Tachycellus (Coleoptera), with descriptions 
of new species from the Western United States. (Includes several Can- 
adian species). Journal N.Y. Ent. Soc. xiii, 169-178, 1905. 


r 


[BETHUNE] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN ENTOMOLOGY 59 


FERNALD, C. H. 


A new species of Proteoteras. (Describes a Tortricid moth, P. Moffati- 
ana taken at London, Ont.). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 16 (Jan., 1905). 


FERNALD, C. H. 


North American Tortricidæ. (Describes three new species: Æucosma Per- 
gandeana taken at Toronto, Archips strianus at London and Quebec, 
and Cydia imbridana at Winnipeg). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 399-400 (Dec., 
1905). 


FISHER, GEORGE E. 


The Pear-tree Psylla and how to deal with it. (The first of a series 
of articles by different writers on Practical and Popular Entomology). 
Can. Ent. xxxvii, 1-2, two figures, (January, 1905). Reprinted in the 
35th Annual Report Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 108-9. 


FISHER, GEORGE E. 


Notes on Insects of the year in the Hamilton District. (Refers espec- 
ially to remedial measures for the San Jose Scale). 35th Annual Re- 
port, Ent. Soc. Ontario, 1904, pp. 7-9. 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 


Report of the Entomologist and Botanist. (Treats of the Insects affect- 
ing Cereals, Field Crops, Roots and Vegetables, Fruit Crops and Forest 
and Shade Trees, and gives the most approved methods of dealing with 
them. A mine of information on economic Entomology). Experimental 
Farms Report for the year 1904. Ottawa, 1905, pp. 205-256 and 
index. Ten figures. 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 


The Division of Insects and Plants. Evidence before the Select Standing 
Committee on Agriculture and Colonization. (Replies to a number of 
questions on a great variety of insects and weeds, and description of 
remedies. An appendix gives a ‘Calendar Guide for Spraying” and 
the formulas for Insecticides and Fungicides). House of Commons, 
Ottawa, March 38rd, 1905, pp. 29-55. 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 
Insects injurious to Grain and Fodder Crops, Root Crops and Vegetables. 
Part I, Remedial Measures; Part II, Injurious Insects, (About fifty of 
the worst insects attacking these crops are described and figured). Bul- 
letin No. 52, Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa; 48 pages, 50 figures, 
June, 1905. a 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 
How do Insects pass the winter? (The third of the series of articles on 
Practical and Popular Entomology). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 79-84. ° (March, 
1905). 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 
Canadian Three-colour Process Illustrations. (A beautiful coloured 
plate, made in Toronto, of some handsome butterflies and moths, and de- 
scriptions of the species depicted.) Can. Ent., xxxvii, 157-159 (May, 
1905). 


60 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 


The Buffalo Carpet Beetle, Anthrenus scrophularie, L. (The ninth of 
the series of articles on Practical and Popular Entomology). Can. Ent., 
Xxxvii, 333-384, figures (Sept., 1905). 


FLETCHER, JAMES. , 
Insects injurious to Ontario Crops in 1904. (Treats of the attacks by 
insects upon Cereal crops, Fodder plants, Roots and Vegetables, Fruits 
and House-plants and relates how best to deal with them). 35th Annual 
Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 49-56, two figures. 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 
Entomological Record, 1904 (The fourth annual publication of this most 
useful record of the new and rare captures made by collectors all over 
the Dominion; in the Lepidoptera, Coleoptera and Diptera ivug lists are 
given, and valuable notes are contributed by the Rev. G. W. Taylor on 
the Geometridæ and Mr. W. D. Kearfott on the Micro-lepidoptera). 35th 
Annual Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 56-78. 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 
What the little Bee is doing. (A popular account of the fertilization of 
blossoms by Bees). 36th Annual Report, Fruit Growers’ Association of 
Ontario, 1904, pp. 90-96. 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 
The Clouded Sulphur Butterfly, Colias philodice, Godt. (A popular art- 
icle for the assistance of Nature Study teachers). Ottawa Naturalist, 
xix, 59-62 three figures (May, 1905.) 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 


The White-Marked Tussock Moth. (Damage to Shade-trees and remedies 
prescribed). Montreal Weekly Star, April 26, 1905. 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 
Getting rid of Bed-bugs. (Describes the method of Fumigating with 
Cyanide of Potassium). The Nor’west Farmer, September 20, 1905. 


FLETCHER, JAMES. 
Farmers’ Friends and Foes. (A series of sixty-one articles containing 
replies to enquiries respecting noxious and beneficial insects.) Montreal 
Weekly Star, January to December, 1905. 
Among these articles are the following: 
The Pea Weevil, February 8; April 5. 
Insects on Rose-bushes, Feb. 8; June 14; Sept. 20. 
Meal Worms, March 1; August, 23. 
The Onion Maggot, April 19 and 26; May 31. 
The Hemlock Gelechia, May 10. 
The Carrot Maggot, May 31. 
Fumigation for killing Bed-bugs, July 5; Sept 27. 
Grape-vine leaf-hoppers, July 5. 
Bee Carpenters, August 9. 


[BETHUNB] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN ENTOMOLOGY 61 


The Buffalo Carpet Beetle, August 23. 

To destroy Fleas, September 6. 

The Walking-Stick Insect, September 27. 

Root Maggots, October 18. 

Squash Bugs and Cabbage Flea-beetles, August 23. 


FLFTCHER, JAMES AND GIBSON, ARTHUR. 


The larva of Hupithecia interruptofasciata Pack. (Found feeding on 
Juniper at Hull, Que.). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 262-263 (July, 1905). 


FYLES, THOMAS W. 


Presidential Address to the Quebec Branch of the Entomological Society 
of Ontario. 35th Annual Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 16-18. 


FYLES, THOMAS W. 


Insects affecting the Oak. 35th Annual Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, 
pp. 91-94, three figures. 


FYLES, THOMAS W. 
On the Food-plants of certain Hymenoptera, Paper No. 2. (Continua- 
tion of a paper in the preceding Annual Report. Treats of Gall-inhab- 
iting Hymenoptera). 35th. Annual Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 
94-96, one figure. 


GIBSON, ARTHUR. 
Note on Simaethis Fabriciana. (Description of the larva of this Ypo- 
nomeutid moth, a European species found at Ottawa on Nettle). Can. 
Ent., xxxvii, 88 (March, 1905). 


GIBSON, ARTHUR. 


Granary Insects. (The seventh of a series of articles on Practical and 
Popular Entomology). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 233-235 (July, 1905). 


GIBSON, ARTHUR. 
Notes on the earlier stages of some Canadian Tiger Moths of the genus 
Apantesis. (Gives the life-histories of A. virgo, parthenice, rectilinea 
ornata, Nevadensis var. incorrupta, and superba). Can. Ent., xxxvii 


337-347 (Oct., 1905). 


GIBSON, ARTHUR. 
Further notes on Basswood, or Linden, Insects. (Continuation of a 
list in the preceding Annual Report; 102 species in all are referred to). 
35th Annual Report Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 78-80, one figure. 


GIBSON, ARTHUR. 


Notes on the Columbine Borer, Papaipema purpurifascia, G. and R. 
(Description of the larva and pupa). 35th Annual Report, Ent. Soc. 
Ont., 1904, pp. 81-82. 


GIBSON, ARTHUR. 
Halisidota Tussock Moths. (A popular account of the life-histories of 
three species, H. tessellaris, maculata and caryæ, with original figures). 
Ottawa Naturalist, xix, 48-51 (May, 1905). 


® 
62 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


GIBSON, ARTHUR. 


Sthenopis (Hepialus) thule, Strecker, at Ottawa. (A new locality for 
this rare moth). Ottawa Naturalist, xix, 117-118 (Sept., 1905). 


GIBSON, ARTHUR. 


Woolly-Bear Caterpillars. (A Nature Study of three species, [sia Isa- 
bella, Hstigmene acrea and Diacrisia virginica, with figures). Ottawa 
Naturalist, xix, 159-162 (Nov., 1905). 


GRANT, C. E. 


Notes on Insects of the year in the Midland District. 35th Annual 
Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 4-5. 


HAMPSON, SIR GEORGE F. 


Catalogue of the Lepidoptera Phalænæ in the British Museum. Vol. 
V. Noctuide. (This is a continuation of the author’s Monograph of 
the Moths of the world, and gives the classification and descriptions of 
the sub-families Hadeninæ. A large number of Canadian species are in- 
cluded). Pages xvi and 634, 172 figures in the text and coloured plates 
78 to 95. London, 1905. 


HARRIS, J. ARTHUR. 


The influence of the Apidæ upon the Geographical Distribution of cer- 
tain Floral Types. (The object of the paper is to direct the attention 
of Entomologists to a phase of ecology and biogeography which is of in- 
terest to both botanists and zoologists, and requires the co-operation of 
both groups of workers). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 353-357; 373-380; 393-398. 
(Oct., Nov., Dec., 1905). 


HEATH, E. FIRMSTONE. 
Notes on the Lepidoptera of the year 1904. (An account of captures 
in Southern Manitoba). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 191-193 (May, 1905). 
HUARD, V.—A. 
Les Hymenoptéres de Provancher. (An account of the revision by Mr. 
E. S. G. Titus of the Andrenidæ in the Provancher collection of Hymenop- 


tera in the Museum of Public Instruction at Quebec. A list is given 


of the changes in Nomenclature). Le Naturaliste Canadien, xxxii, 129- 
133, Décembre, 1905. 


KEARFOTT, W. D. 


New Tortricids. (Describes three new Canadian forms: Tortrix semi- 
purpurana, Eulia pinatubana and Phalonia Winniana), Can. Ent., xxxvii, 
9-11, (Jan., 1905). 


KEARFOTT, W. D. = 


A new Gelechid from Ontario. (Describes Aristotelia Youngella collected 
by Mr. C. H. Young at Hurdman’s Bridge). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 15-16 
(Jan., 1905). 


KEARFOTT, W. D. 


Assiniboia Micro-Lepidoptera collected by Mr. T. N. Willing. (This 
very full list contains descriptions of eight new forms). Can. Ent., 
xxxvii, 41-48 (Feb.) ; 89-93 (March); 119-125 (April, 1905). 


[BETHUNE] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN ENTOMOLOGY 63 


KEARFOTT, W. D. 
Manitoba Micro-Lepidoptera. (A very full list, with dates and lo- 
calities). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 205-209 (June) ; 253-256 (July) ; 293-296 
(August, 1905). 

KEEN, J. H. 
Beetles from Northern British Columbia. (A list of about 50 rare species 
taken on the Queen Charlotte Islands and on the coast of the mainland 
between the mouths of the Naas and Skeena Rivers. The determinations 
were made by Dr. James Fletcher and Prof. H. F. Wickham). Can. 
Ent., xxxvii, 297-298, (August, 1905). 

KIRKALDY, G. W. 
Catalogue of the Genera of the Hemipterous family Aphidæ, with their 
typical species, together with a list of the species described as new from 
1885 to 1905. (The first instalment of this very valuable Catalogue 
which was completed in the volume for 1906). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 414-420, 
(Dec., 1905). 


LOCHHEAD, WILLIAM. 

The struggle with the Codling Moth. (An account of the most approved 
methods of dealing with this very destructive insect). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 
197-200 (June, 1905). 

LOCHHEAD, WILLIAM. an 
Injurious Insects of the season in Ontario. (Treats of insects affecting 
the Orchard and Garden, the Household, and also some Bot-flies of the 
smaller Mammals). 385th Annual Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 
27-33, two figures. 


LOCHHEAD, WILLIAM. 
Recent Experiments against the San Jose Scale. (Describes experiments 
with the lime-sulphur wash). 385th Annual Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, 
pp. 33-35. 


LOCHHEAD, WILLIAM. 
Recent progress in Entomology. (Annual Address of the President of 
the Entomological Society of Ontario). 385th Annual Report, Ent. Soc. 
Ont., 1904, pp. 35-42, one figure. 


LOCHHEAD, WILLIAM. 
An Elementary Study of Insects (for beginners in Entomology). 35th 
Annual Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 96-108 (43 figures). 


LYMAN, HENRY H. 
Further notes on Types and other specimens in the British Museum. 
(Chiefly deals with species of Gortyna—Hydræcia). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 
29-32 (Jan., 1905). 


LYMAN, HENRY H. 
New Gortynas. (Describes G. thalictri, the Lieadow Rue Borer, and its 
variety perobsoleta, and G. eupatorii, the Trumpet-weed Borer, with 
a plate of the moths and the method of attack by the former species). 
Can. Ent., xxxvii, 305-312, plate (Sept., 1905). 


64 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


OSBURN, RAYMOND C. 


The Odonata of British Columbia. (A list of 42 species of Dragon- 
flies, with localities, dates of capture and other notes.) Entomological 
News, Philadelphia, xvi, 184-196, June, 1905. 


PEARSALL, RICHARD F. 


The genus Venusia and its included species. (Describes a new genus 
Nomenia and a new species Huchoeca salienta of Geometrid moths). 
Can. Ent., xxxvii, 125-128 (April, 1905). 


PEARSALL, RICHARD F. 


Whom shall we follow? (A further discussion of the genus Venusia, 
in reply to the Rev. G. W. Taylor). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 331-332. 


ROBERTSON, CHARLES 
Synopsis of Euceridæ, Euphoride and Anthophoride. (This forms one 
of a series of useful papers on Bees, most of which have been published 
in the Canadian Entomologist). Trans. American Entomological So- 
ciety, Philadelphia, xxxi, 365-372, 1905. 


SAUNDERS, HENRY S. 


Entomology in Schools. (Givesa plate of a case of insects representative 
of the different Orders, with brief descriptions, presented to a Toronto 
œ Public School by the writer). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 33-34, (Feb., 1905). 


SMITH, JOHN B. 


New species of Noctuids for 1905. No. 2. (Includes Huzoa vestitura 
from St. John, N.B. and Æ. taura from Regina). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 
201-204 (June, 1905). 


SMITH, JOHN B. 


New species of Noctuide for 1905, No. 3. (Includes seven new species 
from British Columbia, Alberta and Manitoba). Journal N.Y. Ent. 
Soc., xiii, 188-211, 1905. 


STEVENSON, CHARLES. 


The Blattidæ of Montreal. (A list of seven species of Cockroaches 
found in Montreal, including the recent importation of Panchlora viridis, 
a green species). Entomological News, Philadelphia, xvi, 98, April, 1905. 


STEVENSON, CHARLES. 


Notes on the (Entomological) Season of 1904 in Western Quebec. 35th 
Annual Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 90-91. 


TAYLOR, GEO. W. 


Note on some Geometridæ in the Hulst collection, recently examined by 
Dr. Dyar. Can. Ent., xxxvii, 61-62 (Feb., 1905). 


TAYLOR, GEO. W. 
The genus Venusia and its included species. (A reply to Mr. R. F. 
Pearsall’s article in the April number). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 239-240 
(July, 1905). 2 


[BETHUNE] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN ENTOMOLOGY 65 


TAYLOR, GEO. W. 


What is Hucheca comptaria Walker? (Continuation of a discussion with 
Mr. R. F. Pearsall of the nomenclature and position of certain Geometrid 
moths). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 411-413 (Dec., 1905). 


ERITUS; ny SG: i 


Some notes on the Provancher Megachilidæ.* (Results of an examin- 
ation of the specimens of this family in the Museum at Quebec upon 
which the Abbé Provancher based his determinations). Proc. Ent. Soc. 
Washington, vii, 149-166 (Oct. and Dec., 1905). 


VIERECK, HENRY L. 


Synopsis of Bees of Oregon, Washington, British Columbia and Van- 
couver.—iv. (Includes contributions by T. D. A. Cockerell. Several] 
new species of B.C. bees are described). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 277-287 
(August) ; 313-321 (September, 1905). 


WALKER, E. M. 


Notes on the Locustide of Ontario. (Continuation of an annotated list 
begun in tjhe preceding volume, pp. 325-330 and 337-341) one new species, 
Ceuthophilus pallidipes, is described). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 34-38 (Feb.) ; 
113-119, two plates, (April, 1905). 


WICKHAM, H. F. 


Insect distribution in the Great Basin considered in the light of its 
Geologic History. (Abstract of a lecture before the Entomological So- 
ciety of Ontario at its annual meeting in London, Oct. 26th, 1904, 
The region referred to includes parts of Utah, Nevada, California, Oregon, 
Idaho and Wyoming; the characteristic insects discussed are chiefly 
species of Cicindela and a map is given in order to skow their distribu-- 
tion). 385th Annual Report, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 42-46. 


WILLIAMS, J. B. 


Notes on Insects of the year in the Toronto District. (Refers especially 
to the Tussock Moth and Walking Stick Insects). 385th Annual Report, 
Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 5-7, one figure. 

WILLIAMS, J. B. 
Insect Names and Insect Lists. (Suggests a new and simplified system 
of naming varieties and sub-species). 385th Annual Report, Ent. Soc. 
Ont., 1904, pp. 87-90. 

WILLING, T. N. 


Insects and Weeds in the North-West Territories. 85th Annual Report. 
Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 25-27. 


WINN, ALBERT F. 


Pieris brassicæ. (Records the discovery of the larva of this European: 
butterfly for the first time in Canada). Can. Ent., xxxvii, 61 (Feb... 
1905). 


WOUNG, C. EX. 
Notes on Insects of the year in the Ottawa District. 35th Annual Re- 
port, Ent. Soc. Ont., 1904, pp. 3-4. 


Seen Ve, 1906. +d. 


Cor ine wi : 


AAA 


SOc MeN FY? xe, 
a ey eves os side’ a | 
f ie TAPE Mays ey oe 

a ; Ù % i= ae bie Won ie 


an 


Ae NE VER mt 


el ln i 

Rx + ’ CE FIX TA nt aL, cr / 
r bY Thy | t HUE iC fees a ‘ LR teas : ng 
7 ? ; Ne 4 
: 4 u 
ah Poe fees : Prd hel hy | Hk AV ÿ 
i ou +e wad { Vas) ae vn 114 ‘he van ei 

(8, i ayy we iy À Maa Ane 
ain i ar | mn ue Le ‘ae aaah 
+L l ‘ À , 7 cS sd weet 
a ch Pia AN EE a 1 ia? te LA Da " ALP, © ee ta he z 

{ rt - Wars r Pre, AS ep | or ey wai 1 Pa c A + 
! - CP ET ES LR hia iS CAF TL EL Part rey 
is Ve hel N HUM OR AL AU teal dl À FO AT kt ALU 
7 x LA 2 4 ; 73 y is i ù - a np" 
, ane We? AIM j ; \ OA US es Ly LU A 


RS RE 
tal tn MCE oh : ORE Dee, if x 


e el LaLa Dut i L FN ; wil ay Vig is wo 
a 29 qu, MEET Mil SANTE 


MER | | , ; 
ay ly re 


Eu, carn a ee ae a 
| ‘ = ‘ ona et | > 


HAN] ue 
UT i } ; as | 7 


Nh TA re | | | i | te «4 Le if i NP 

je fi | | k | TM OS 41 LUF eu 

a ou Af ' * i ù | Ê 

LAN METRE NE DATENT LA PUR res 

oe vi. af ae À AU : 
Cn Ve at 

l : = = {a ahi ite. 

4 7 a iS ite aps? Ni 308 a, 

ri È ~ 4 eae int it à Mig Ah Ets 

= 4 7 


Pulse À à 4 : ny RE ce oi oan 


= Tor J À = mb 2 ‘i i me | 
Ê PE * 14 ; t ; Ve ee: tr CAR ae A ‘ous si Ka 
eae x iO lan LAA iF > hohe bh no A wir À | 


qe Ÿ PAU Berean ate i 


‘ en 7 hes eee , 
ae: a Vs \ - ante VS | nn | 


D | ee ath Ba) he 


0 i on 
i I - SA IN 
| ; A ae A: may 


- : Al F ] 5 \ 
a ly hr A) 44 L'ART EN 
a oa PAROI ann Ole Shas Bias 


a 


ea hi PAU 


Ta i | L 
? 4 Nae | 
| | FL SM 
| ’ } | 
(A [ v 
ES { 
* d 
i 
Al 41 
A $ nc z 
A S au 
À QE 
Lx 8 j 
14 
re 


Secrion IV., 1906. Rez] Trans. R. S.C. 


VIII.—Features of the Continental Shelf off Nova Scotia. 
By, El. 5.) Poour: 
(Read May 23, 1906.) 


Off the southern shore of this Province much relating to the sea- 
bottom has been revealed by the investigations of the hydrographer, 
and the operations of the cable laying companies. 

The information thus obtained together with that collected by 
fishermen in the pursuit of their calling presents features that suggest 
a consideration may well be given its structure closer than has yet been 
bestowed on it. 

The present paper proposes to deal with the strip of submarine 
ground that lies shoreward of the 80 fm. line running approximately 
parallel to the coast at an average distance of about 100 miles off the 
land. Close to this line the edge is met of the marine terrace or plat- 
form that projects seaward from under the east coast of the greater part 
of the North American continent. The rapid drop into deep water 
along the edge of this terrace or continental shelf is indicated on the 
accompanying map by the contour lines which the soundings given on 
Admiralty charts enable one to lay down. The edge thus defined ap- 
pears as a fairly straight line with but few deflections indenting for 
short distances towards the land that is in addition to the two ravines 
of magnitude that sever the region and reach back to the coast. 

But had the soundings on which the position of this line has been 
determined been taken much closer together than they have been, 
especially along the margin, there is a probability they would indicate 
some such decided features as steep escarpments and possibly some 
precipitous walls along the side of the platform with short ravines 
other than those recognised serrating the edge and also exposing the re- 
mains of fjords as yet but imperfectly silted up with later sediments. 
In one respect our coast differs from the portion of the shelf south of 
Cape Cod where its slope to the abyss is more gradual and where there 
is off Hatteras a second terrace distinguished as the Blake plateau. 

In our section outside the 80 fm. line the soundings rapidly drop 
into deep water, and a plunge to depths of 1000 fms. or more is made 
within a further distance of 2 to 10 miles. 

It is particularly desired to note that along the Atlantic front of 
the platform for the whole region lying off between Cape Sable and 
Scaterie but two deep channels or fjords break the wall and extend 


68 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


inwards towards the coast; one, Sambro channel, is immediately south 
of Halifax, and the other passing to the east of Sable Island is called 
by fishermen, the Gully. The special interest that is attached to these 
Cepressions will be referred to at length later on. 

To the continental shelf to the south of us its extent and the 
prominent features of the foreshore many writers have made reference. 
Some parts have been closely examined, and special soundings have 
supplemented the earlier work of the British Admiralty and the Naviga- 
tion Bureau of the United States. The results of the investigations 
have been published,! but of our own shores I have not been able to 
find more than passing reference, and that little merely made to round 
up generalizations suggested by the more southern investigations and 
the European disquisitions on the general subject. Among those who 
have lately written may be mentioned Dr. Chalmers of the Canadian 
Geological Survey, Professor J. W. Spencer at one time of King’s Col- 
lege, Windsor, Dr. H. Y. Hind, Professor Hull, of Fngland, and Mr. 
W. Upham of the United States Survey. ‘Their articles cover all that 
has been published relating to the ground under review that have come 
under the eye of the author, and they have left much to be still con- 
sidered. In connection with the subject and the bearing which the 
glacial evidences have to the special features of this region much of in- 
terest to the student will be found in that comprehensive work— The 
Ice Age in North America” by Dr. G. W. Wright. 

Viewed from a provincial and more contracted standpoint, the 
details of our immediate neighbourhood may be dwelt on and of the 
phenomena exhibited explanations may be offered in the light of in- 
vestigations made and conclusions reached by others. This may be done 
with more confidence now that deductions drawn from widespread 
observations enable application to be made to examples from our own 
locality in illustration of the stupendous changes that have taken place 
within comparatively recent geological ages, to movements of vast 
magnitude and to results effected in periods of time appearing to us 
individually to be of great length but which are in comparison with the 
eons that preceded them as the playtime of an ephemeron of yesterday. 

Some incidental references to submarine geology appear in the 
Transactions of the Nova Scotia Institute of Science, but they are not 
of a general character. A paper by Mr. 8. D. McDonald in 1886 * is 
replete with information on Sable Island; its history and geology. In 
it he speaks of the existence of that island as due to the strong ocean 


1 A, Leudenkohl—Notes on the submarine channel of the Hudson River, 
Am. Jour Se. June, us 
2 Vol. VI "DD. 266; 278. 


[POOLE] FEATURES OF CONTINENTAL SHELF OFF NOVA SCOTIA 69 


currents which swirl round its beaches, of the diminution it has suf- 
fered, also of its changed positicn and to the influence the winds have 
had in building it up in dunes above the level of the sea. Mr. McDonald 
accepts the view of Dr. D. Honeyman that the present shore of Nova 
Scotia is on the line of the continent’s great terminal moraine, and he 
imputes the origin of the great Banks to the deposition of the Champlain 
sands washed out of the glacial drift by the recessional floods. 

The subject of this paper is uecessarily connected with that of 
the glaciation of the country at large, a matter that has been in part 
discussed by several local writers, by Sir J. W. Dawson, Dr. Bailey, 
Mr. Prest, Dr. Honeyman, and in still earlier times by Mr. T. Belt, a 
recognized authority of his day some forty years ago. All these writers, 
however, stop short at the shore with but casual reference to what may 
lie beyond. They are not unanimously of opinion with that of observers 
south of the international boundary and they leave many glacial ques- 
tious still cpen for general discussion, such as whether the ice cap 
covered the whole country, whether it effected much or little erosion of 
the surface; whether it merely removed the loose and disintegrated 
material, rubbing down to a rounded outline the rocky angularities, or 
planed away a great thickness of solid strata; whether the period of 
action was comparatively short or long drawn out, of late date or oc- 
curred in a remote past; whether the ice sheet was thick or thin, sub- 
ject or indifferent to the inequalities of the surface over which it flowed. 

With these questions in their relation to the evidence to be obtained 
from the land surface it is not proposed to deal. It will not be possible, 
however, to avoid indirect, reference to a few of them in the considera- 
tion of some features of the submarine structure which this paper intro- 
duces. 

Marine charts of the coast give, for the guidance of the sailor mak- 
ing a landfall, isobathic lines at depths of 30 and 60 fms., but these 
lines alone fail to delineate features of the terrace and the foreshore to 
which it is desired to call attention. By taking the numerous sound- 
ings given on the charts other isobaths of greater and !ess depths may 
be laid down, and although by the infrequency of the observations such 
are necessarily only approximately correct they are assumed, in the 
absence of more complete data, to be sulficiently near to have value in 
the present consideration. 

The soundings on the charts thus used and the isobaths drawn they 
give to part of the region the appearance of a land surface depicted by 
contour lines an undulating surface with hills and hollows, ready formed 
for the flow of rills and rivers to the lowet ground and there to join 
extensions of the present established water courses coming down from 


70 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


what then would appear in relation to them as a high plateau. Much 
of the structure so defined suggests the features of lands carved by sub- 
ærial erosive agents and by them reduced to a peneplain. The charac- 
ter of the terrace is perhaps best pronounced if a depth of about 500 
feet be selected as a one time shore line, and the sea be supposed drawn 
off to that depth or what would have the same effect, that the side 
of the continent had risen out of the water to that elevation above the 
sea level of to-day. 

With a reconstructed shore at the depth named the physical features 
that would then exist appear more suggestive than perhaps at any other 
depth, although it is far short of the limit of elevation to which much 
evidence points as recently existing especially on the adjoining coast of 
Newfoundland. 

Among the more marked features brought out by this assumed 
elevation of 500 feet is:—a large inland sea or lake with an outlet 
‘to the south. Then there are prominent extensions of existing pro- 
montories and headlines, islands large and small, plateaux crowned by 
knolls and bearing small lakes, a broad valley with a channel drained 
at that depth, broad estuaries to the main drainage system and, perhaps, 
some rocky peaks, river channels with sloping banks and islets, or with 
sides precipitous in places. Besides these, and even perhaps of more 
interest than all other features many deep isolated depressions often 
close to knolls of elevation above the average of the neighbourhood. Im- 
portance is attached to the seeming presence of these depressions and 
one of the main conclusions submitted in this paper is based largely on 
them. LNG | | 

To ships approaching Halifax from the southward the soundings 
supply but an imperfect guide to position, there is no gradual shelving 
of the sea bottom as the shore is approached, but great irregularity may 
be indicated by the lead. This condition though a source of anxiety 
to the navigator is one of much interest to the investigator of the 
structure of the country in prehistoric times. It is evident that the 
unevenness of the surface cannot be accounted for by ocean currents 
in one place piling up banks and in another digging out the holes and 
large depressions that exist, neither icould the inequalities be explained 
by the action of icebergs, grounding, melting and depositing immense 
loads of earth and rocks, which by the way are rarely indeed borne by 
icebergs; nor is it possible to suppose that ocean currents could have 
formed channels which are brought into prominence on the re- 
construction map; channels which in places widen out into broad 
valleys with gently sloping sides and elsewhere are narrowed with steep 
if not precipitous walls. Some other agents than these must be sought 


[PooLE] FEATURES OF CONTINENTAL SHELF OFF NOVA SCOTIA Zt 


to satisfactorily explain the features of the now submerged lands which 
in many respects bear strong resemblances to upland surfaces which 
have been moulded by the action of the forces of the atmosphere, frost 
and heat, wind and oxidation, rain and rivers. 

It is therefore assumed that such indeed were the agents that deter- 
mined the submarine surface, only that after submergence and after th2 
forces of the glacial period had been spent the features became some- 
what modified by the mantle of sediment which denudation would cast 
into the sea and quiet waters would deposit. 

Among the now submerged features of the region that may readily 
be jrecognized on the accompanying map are; a prolongation of Cape 
Canseau for 40 miles beyond its present terminus with deep water for half 
the distance on both sides ;—Sambro with its ledges and islets protruding 
further southward; Not only was Scatterie island a promontory but 
it embraced Scattarie bank which lies 40 miles seaward of the present 
island. Sambro bank which is south of Halifax has steep sides and deep 
water about it. On the map it appears as an island and is probably 
of rock, a granitic mass, an under-sea extension of the rocks of Sambro 
thrust up between the slates of Halifax and St. Margaret’s Bay. Possi- 
bly also some of the small islands that range in line aross the Gully are 
rocky peaks, while those in the estuary of the streams that combined in 
Chedabucto Bay to flow eastward, parallel to the Cape Breton coast are 
panks with no rocky nucleus. 

It. may well be asked do these features really ete more than ar 
accidental or fanciful resemblance to these which a sometime land sur- 
face would present under like circumstances; and are there any good 
reasons for assuming an elevation of serious moment has actually oc- 
curred in times comparatively recent? If the areas shown to be still 
depressed below the 80 fm. line are considered they will be noticed to 
have as it were channels proceeding from them) to deeper water such as a 
land locked sea or great lake would require to carry off the surplus 
waters. ‘Then, too, the seeming steep sides to the channels and the steep 
banks to the large island in the lake immediately south of Halifax can 
be explained only by assuming them, due to erosion by subærial agents, 
and for such agents to do their work it is essential that the area be weil 
elevated above drainage level, not merely the 500 feet assumed for the 
drafting of this map, but to a much greater extent. 

Another prominent feature which has long been recognized and ac- 
cepted as proof of a previous elevation of this region is the broad and 
profound depression occupying the bed of the estuary of the St. Law- 
rence river, which sweeping south of Anticosti and north of Bird Islands 


72 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


passes through the Cabot Straits between Cape Ray in Newfoundland 
and St. Paul’s Island off Cape North of Nova Scotia. Continuing 
cnward far out to sea for other 200 miles it divides the banks off the 
Cape Breton shores from those off the south coast of Newfoundland and 
until it reaches the deep water of the Atlantic. 

How far up the St. Lawrence the depression extended is not known 
for the upper reaches are silted up with Pleistocene deposits but it evi- 
dently at one time drained the gorge of the Saguenay which soundings 
even now show to be 800 feet below the surface of the river. The mag- 
nitude of the stream must have been immense. In Cabot straits it 
has a width of 60 miles and a depth where narrowest of 1600 feet, and 
en issuing from between the Capes it expanded and against the New- 
foundland shore cast up as by an eddy a bank or lisan of many miles 
in length. 

In the embayment formed by the sharp turn which the edge of the 
continental shelf here takes between Cape Breton and Newfoundland the 
deeper bed of the valley contracted its width, and had at its exit into 
the abyss on the sides and directly in front shoals and bars which are 
fairly comparable with the lateral bars and the delta features of a 
flowing stream at its confluence with the sea. Can it be doubted that 
a depression so strongly defined and possessed of such suggestive features 
was once, as it has long been thought to have been, the bed of a 
great river that flowed along this course to the ocean and at a time 
when this part of the continent stood sufficiently elevated to enable the 
pebbles and silt of a flowing stream to erode the rocks in its bed. To 
effect this it may be taken as proven that the general level of the 
country must have then been not merely the 500 feet higher, as the map 
assumes, but probably was not less than 2000 feet or even 2500 feet 
greater than it is at present. Jt may even be questioned whether this 
latter elevation is sufficient to account for some of the conditions ex- 
hibited by the ancient river. When a stream enters the sea its current 
spreads out, its force is lost and it ceases to be erosive, its sediments in 
suspension are deposited about its embouchure in flats and bars and as 
a delta. Fluviatile action is conclusive proof that the surface display- 
ing it was at the time of activity above sea level. Where the 80 fm. line 
adopted on the map turns from the sea front into the river soundings 
show the ancient river bed at a depth of 2010 feet, but also seaward, of 
the deposits about this neighbourhood, a greater bank lying at a still 
greater depth, even at 1500 fm. for a distance of 40 miles:in the direc- 
tion of an embayment still more profound. However, soundings in 
much of this region: have been comparatively few and so far apart that 


[pooLE] FEATURES OF CONTINENTAL SHELF OFF NOVA SCOTIA 73 


no satisfactory conclusions can be drawn of the presence or otherwise of 
a further eastward extension of the ancient river in times even more 
remote. 

In a paper of mine read before this Society in May, 1903, a position 
was assumed for a tributary now submerged to this great river which 
must have drained the greater part of Eastern Canada in some preglacial 
age and when the region had greater altitudes than it has to-day. The 
tributary in question was located parallel to and but a few miles off the 
west coast of Cape Breton and its position was determined by laying 
down on Admiralty charts the isobaths indicated by the recorded sound- 
ings. The isobathic lines have also been extended further up the Gulf 
beyond Prince Edward and the Magadalen Islands to the shores of New 
Brunswick and they have shown other important tributaries flowing from 
the south had descended to the grand canyon of the Gulf of St. Lawrence 
into which opened a broad fjord parallel to the Gaspé peninsula. This 
had two branches represented now by the Bays Chaleur and Miramichi 
receiving then as now the main streams of Northern New Brunswick. 

Besides the tributaries joining the preglacial river within the con- 
fines of the Gulf, others also flowing north and eastward fell into it 
south of Cabot straits. The drainage of the southern slopes of Cape 
Breton highlands formed a fjord similar in character to the one men- 
tioned lying off the Gaspé peninsula. It had St. Ann’s Bay at its head 
and was the outlet of streams finding passage northward by the Great 
Bras d’Or and Sydney harbour. Then there is the arm of the sea known 
as Mira river which is the head of another fjord but its mouth is obscure 
being partly silted up by the glacial deposits disturbed by the coastal 
currents which run so strongly by the projecting headlands of Scaterie 
and its neighbourhood. Still another stream of greater magnitude 
skirted the southern coast of Cape Breton and added its waters to the 
flood of the ancient St. Lawrence before it made its final plunge over 
the edge of the continent into the ocean’s abyss. This stream came out 
of Chedabucto Bay then a profound fjord, as indicated) by the deep 
soundings of 124 fms., and probably made its channel in Carboniferous 
strata, remnants of which are still left in Isle Madame, and along the 
shore and then followed eastward the present, coast of the island, to join 
the great river near the Scatterie bank. 

This fjord had two forks of which the smaller had its head in 
Roman Valley 10 miles above the town of Guysboro following the con- 
tact of two geological formations. 

The northern or main fork is no longer fed, by a stream of fresh 
water but now is occupied by the salt water strait of Canseau connecting 
the marine waters of the Gulf with those of the ocean. 


74 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The origin of the Strait of Canseau has been a subject of some 
speculation as a product of erosioh in the comparatively recent Pleis- 
tocene period, but I ask consideration of a supposition that would make 
the origin of the strait a river channel in much earlier times when a 
course was found between the old rocks of Cape Porcupine and the 
Craignish hills of Cape Breton. Personally I am with those who hold 
that the erosion of the surface by the movements of an ice cap and its 
glaciers has been by some writers greatly exaggerated, and that in parts 
of Nova Scotia it was insignificant and insufficient even to rub off all 
the inequalities left by the preceding denudation effected by the agents 
of the air. 

To account for the origin of the strait of Canseau by river action it 
is submitted that the deposits of the Permian and Triassic periods, rem- 
nants of which still occupy the Gulf, were subjected to the denuding 
influences of the atmosphere on. their emergence from the sea during the 
Cretaceous period: That then the drainage from the northern slopes 
of the highlands along the range of the Cobequid hills and their exten- 
sion to Cape George gathered near their base and forming a stream 
parallel to the general course of thd hills found exit along faulting by 
the strait of Canseau to the sea. The deposits in Chedabucto Bay 
opposite the mouth of the strait take the form of a delta with water 
deeper on the sides than in the middle of the bay. The drainage of the 
hills flowed down their slopes until it met the new and less coherent 
beds and in them was made the lateral and combined stream. The pre- 
sent Northumberland straits were then part of the river system of this 
Cretaceous drainage. As time rolled on, and the newer rocks yielded 
more readily than the old to the action of the streams, the beds of the 
Tivers in them deepened. The flow off the western slopes of the Cape 
Breton hills formed at first an independent river finding outlet to the 
eastward and eating deeper and deeper into the softer rocks, its forks 
and branches eroded backwards and at length cut through the barrier 
that divided it from some lower branch of the current flowing from the 
west round Cape George to the strait of Canseau. When this was once 
effected the deeper and swifter stream flowing by Cape Breton lost no 
time in making a way in addition for the waters of the stream thus cut 
off and which hitherto had gone south about to the ocean. Such a re- 
sult of river action is no fanciful supposition but it is a recognized and 
accepted explanation by geographers for the presence of dry and unused 
channels of many existing streams. 

l'his result achieved when subsidence in due course again lowered 
the region to sea level the remnant of the newer rocks lying north and 


[PooLE] FEATURES OF CONTINENTAL SHELF OFF NOVA SCOTIA 75 


west of what had been Cretaceous rivers formed the island we have 
named Prince Edward and at the same time converted the valley, which 
first had been occupied by a fresh water stream, into a salt water strait. 
This at least is the explanation now offered to account for the 
phenomena presented by the region under review. 

Mention has been made of two marked depressions breaking down 
the southern edge of the terrace; the Gully at the eastern end of Sable 
island, and Sambro valley the channel immediately south of Halifax. 
‘These localities seemed to be of such special interest that further in- 
formation was sought for on board the cable-ship ‘ Minia’ where a care- 
ful record is kept of depths, etc., at which repair and grapnel work is 
done. ‘To Captain De Carteret and Mr. J. Adams, first officer who 
placed their local charts at my service I am greatly indebted. Special 
enquiry was made for soundings crossing the Gully’s mouth, Long. 59° 
in Lat. 43° 55° to 44° 8’ and there happily a record of grapnel work 
gave a depth of 847 fms. with so rapid a drop within a cable’s length 
that as the ship drifted the grapnel could not be kept on the 
bottom. The drift was across the line of a narrow channel 
which the chart soundings had failed to disclose. The theory 
which I had presented to the officers of the cable ship had sus- 
pected the presence of an unrecorded deep channel and the record 
they had taken was fortunately able to confirm its existence. Could 
better proof of the value of the theory be obtained? Accident, however, 
did not lay so fortunate a course for the mouth of Sambro channel and 
desirable evidence of the conditions there is still lacking. Both valleys 
open to the south into bold water from which the deep water in the 
channels some ten miles up appears to be cut off and partially blocked 
by bars. The soundings along the Gully suggest, at spots steep slopes, 
islands, a winding channel and deeps contiguous to high points which 
remind one of cirques on the edges of plateaux. 

The valley of the Gully connects with the deep water off Country 
Harbour and although an extension into that and adjoining fjords is 
now obscured by deposits and by the action on them of waves and cur- 
rents towards the landwash. 

The 8.8. ‘Minia’ met with a condition off the Bay of Fundy some- 
what similar to that at the mouth of the Gully, finding a submerged 
ravine over which a suspended cable was injured, presumably by chafing 
on the rocks as it was swayed by the tides. 

Turning now to Sambro bank and its cireumjacent valley the con- 
tours show that the bank is narrowest east and west and where its sides 
are steepest, and that it seems to be a continuation of the granite ridge 


76 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


which lies west of Halifax Harbour and extends southward in Sambro 
ledges. Its crest comes within 47 fms. of the surface while about it is 
water exceeding 100 fms. in depth except to the north where it is 
separated from Sambro ledges merely by a narrow channel. 

On its east side close to its base there is a depth of 153 fms. and 
the isobathic lines parallel its length with here and there a crest break- 
ing an absolute uniformity. 

Soundings exceeding 140 fms. extend for 40 miles giving direction 
of deepest water towards the north-east, with remains of lateral 
branches ; while in the other direction towards the open ocean the bottom 
r'ses to 90 fms. and unless there be a narrow deep channel which as yet 
has not been recorded, the course of the ancient drainage is so dammed 
up that an elevation of 600 feet would make a large lake with Sambro 
bank as an island in the middle. The ‘Owl’ and other two small 
hanks would make peaks above the surface of the lake. The structure 
of this valley suggests that the rocks here are slate and quartzite with 
foldings such as the operations of the gold miner have shown to be so 
regular on the land and made familiar to everyone. West of Sambro 
bank there is also water exceeding 130 fms. in depth, but the soundings 
indicate no such structure as that to the east of the bank and about 
Sable Island. Doubtless this condition of the seabottom may be ac- 
counted for by the strong flow of the currents of both water and ice 
under the influence of the great tide of the Bay of Fundy obscuring 
the older features. 

That the Sambro valley was one of river erosion although its outlet 
is now closed, there can be, I think, but little doubt. The recent eleva- 
tion and subærial erosion of lands both east and west must have affected 
this region also, and explanation must elsewhere be sought to account for 
the mass of deposits that have closed the sometime outlet seaward of 
Sambro bank. The charts note several of the shallow soundings on 
the shelf as ‘rocky,’ these all lie within 40 miles of the coast, and 
many of the deeper depressions are marked as having a mud bottom. 
The inference from the exposure of the rocky peaks is that they were 
passed over by the deposit flowing from the land. The presence of 
mud in the deeper parts that there was there no indiscriminate dumping 
of moraine matter from ice, but the slow accumulation of fine sediment 
in quiet waters. 

ft is plain, however, that the preglacial features of the region can 
be surmised only in part, as they have been more or less covered over 
and disguised by later sediments. The bulk of these sediments appears 
to have accumulated towards the front of the plateau having here and 
there deep depressions between them and the shore. Ranging with the 


[POOLE] FEATURES OF CONTINENTAL SHELF OFF NOVA SCOTIA AT: 


deeps already referred to eastward of Sambro there are others of 159 
fms. off Canso and off Gabarus. These soundings suggest that the plain 
of marine denudation that dressed off the continental shelf was at a 
depth exceeding that of 80 fms. below the foreshore of to-day and that 
it was formed before the great elevation that permitted the extensive 
river channelling we have been considering. 

There are yet other features to be considered similar to some that 
are more pronounced on the shores of Newfoundland where the land is 
higher, the waters of the bays and fjords deeper, and the situation gener- 
ally more like that of Labrador, and these will better illustrate char- 
acteristics to which it is desired to direct attention than their less 
prominent counterparts of Nova Scotia. Mjuch of the coast of New- 
foundland is deeply indented by fjords with narrow channels between 
steep walls and with bold water giving soundings deeper inside than in 
the open sea outside. Not only this, but what at first sight seems very 
remarkable soundings even sometimes deeper at the very head of the 
fjords than further out. Of the origin of these deep indentations there 
can be no doubt it is due to the same causes that produced the fjords of 
Norway and Greenland, to the erosion by sediment in moving water and 
ice, to streams descending from the high table lands at a time when the 
whole country stood far above the present level and when it was elevated 
sufficiently to allow the rivers to cut their beds 2590 Teet at least below 
the sea level of to-day. ‘Then followed a period when glaciers occupied 
the river valleys and ravines and stretched seaward beyond the present 
coast line. To recognize these features it is only necessary to study the 
charts of the coast, take almost any ravine and it will supply an illus- 
tration: Conception Bay shows soundings down to 143 fms.; La Poile to 
150 fms.; Harbor Breton to 169 fms.; Belle Bay out of Fortune Bay 
to 299 fms.; and Hermitage Bay to no less than 390 fms., or 2340 feet 
of water, while outside the headlands in the open sea the usual depth of 
water does not exceed 100 fms. The conclusion is inevitable that the 
fjords were first carved to the greater depths and afterwards had their 
outer channel choked by deposits. It will further be noted that where 
bold water approaches close to the cliffs it is always on the west side of 
the bays, the side from which glaciers would descend from the ice sheet 
on the high plateaux. To account for the deepest water occurring at 
the head of some ravines it is surmised that they were occupied by the 
glacial ice when the moraine matter was carried forward and deposited 
in the channels further out and there shallowed the waters. Then when 
later the ice age passed away and the glaciers meltel the parts they oc- 
cupied were free of drift and are now represented by deep ‘holes and de- 
pressions occupied by water. In the same way were made what are 


78 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


known as kettle holes in the moraines, the site of stranded blocks of ice 
among the terminal deposits. 

It is also surmised that the ice sheet was general not only over the 
whole island but that it extended, across the straits from Labrador 
moving eastward to the open sea and carried with it immense quanti- 
ties of detrital matter which were deposited over the area we know as 
the Banks, the great fishing ground of Newfoundland. At the period of 
elevation the continent, no doubt, extended to the eastward and included 
the area about the Virgin rocks and the Eastern shoals, the extreme 
gathering ground for the glacial drift carried and pushed eastward by 
the Banks, the great fishing ground of Newfoundland. 

Reverting again to our own shores fjords are nearly as much in 
evidence as they are in Newfoundland though they have not the same 
depths of water. A few exceptional depths are, however, reported. 
Close to Canseau Harbour in Chedabucto Bay there is a deep giving 124 
fms.; inside the Little Bras @Or another showing 114 fms., and the 
centre of Bedford Basin has a sounding of 220 feet. A depression which 
was occupied by ice while the glacier was in motion that brought to the 
Atlantic drift from the north Mountain of King’s County. A glacier 
that formed the ground moraines of McNab’s and George’s Islands in the 
main harbour of Halifax and which deposited drift against an ice front 
that extended down into the water at Purcell’s Cove. 

Here is an excellent local illustration on a small scale of that re- 
markable feature, prominent in some Newfoundland fjords where the 
water is shallower outside than at the head. At Purcell’s Cove the drift 
was so piled up against the ice front as to form a small and secure 
harbour and leave an island when the ice disappeared. It has made of 
that locality a charming resort for people from the city in which to 
spend a summer holiday. 

These references to the ice age all point to the important part 
played by glacial phenomena in shaping the configuration of the sub- 
merged platform. Prior to which epoch the harbours, estuaries and bays 
of the south shore had taken shape and influenced direction to the sea- 
ward flow of all the drift to the east of Shelburne where the more power- 
ful stream of ice in the Bay of Fundy drew with it much of the ice 
along its shores and so deflected the general course of the flow from east 
of south to westward of the meridian. The striæ grooves and kames 
of the western part of the province point to this conclusion. The 
courses of the preglacial river channels below the foreshore though 
generally obliterated by littoral deposits are here and there exposed. 

Mr. Prest notes the exposure of a narrow and deep channel of tor- 
tuous course walled by Cambrian slates that extended from the mouth of 


[Poozx], FEATURES OF CONTINENTAL SHELF OFF NOVA SCOTIA 79 


Musquodoboit river through the harbour of that name, and its flats 
to the sea, and he refers to the La Have, East and Sutherland’s rivers 
as also showing their ancient but now submerged extensions under the 
sea. (Vol. VIII., Pt. 2, p. 146.) 

Dr. Ambrose, Vol. I., Pt. 4, p. 33 of the Nova Scotia Instit. of Se. 
Series, describes the trough in St. Margaret’s Bay which fishermen call 
the ‘hospital,’ a mud covered ravine about 50 yards wide, 20 yards 
deeper than the rocky walls which run parallel to the shore off Peggy’s 
Cove and opens into a similar channel running up the bay. He also 
speaks of the Inner and Big Gulches both bottomed. with black mud the 
former a mile long and 60 fms. wide, the latter three miles long and 
100 fms wide. These like the submerged channels mentioned by Mr. 
Prest were probably occupied by ice when the glacial drift was carried 
over them further out to sea. 

Dr. D. Honeyman refers shortly to the view of Sir J. W. Dawson 
and of himself on the position of the terminal moraine of the Ice Age 
and to the formations to which belong the various boulders and pebbles 
brought up by the lines of fishermen on the banks in waters 60 to 80 
fms. deep. 

In Vol. VII., p. 211, he contends also that glacial transportation 
did not extend beyond Thum Cap at the entrance of Halifax Harbour. 

Mr. W. Upham in his paper on The Fishing Banks, 1893, p. 47, 
includes those off Nova Scotia but he does not deal with details respect- 
ing them. He speaks of rock specimens obtained on the banks and 
seems to have accepted the views of Professor Verril, whom he quotes, as 
being of opinion “ on examination of the specimens brought up from the 
banks by the lines of fishermen that they have been detached from a very 
extensive submerged Tertiary formation at least several hundreds of 
miles in length, extending along the outer banks from Newfoundland to 
Cape Cod, and perhaps constituting a large part of the solid foundation 
ef these remarkable submarine elevations.” He further expresses belief 
that the fossils in some of the specimens are probably Pliocene, the age, 
according to Mr. Upham, “ of the strata which beneath a thin envelope 
of glacial drift form these submarine banks.” On the other hand Dr. 
Honeyman points ta boulders of limestone got in 65 fms. off the Nova 
Scotian coast as suggestive of a base of Carboniferous age to the banks. 
All, however, are agreed, as taught years go by Professor Agassiz, that 
the fishing banks are at least superficially covered by a continuation of 
the deposits forming the terminal moraine to the ice sheet of New Eng- 
land and Canada. Whether the superficial deposit is only a thin en- 
velope, and the detached fossiliferous rock fragments of a local deposit 
ofa previous age and not of detritus brought in glacial times or more 


80 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


recently on ice floes, may be questioned. In Greenland fossiliferous beds 
of Tertiary age have undergone extensive disintegration and are to-day 
within the active range of glaciers and shore ice that carry detritus 
southward to be dropped on the melting of the ice. To accept a con- 
clusion which regards Tertiary fossils obtained on the Fishing banks as 
derived from local beds of that age necessitates the absence of terminal 
moraine material which, however thin, would prevent the fishing lines 
‘ from reaching and bringing specimens to the surface, 

Assumptions have already been quoted that the shore deposits are 
the remains of the terminal moraine of the glacial flows in the Pleis- 
tocene period, but consideration makes it doubtful if the deposits so ex- 
posed are of that character, in extent they do not compare with those 
to the west of the Bay of Fundy and are no more extensive than some 
of the drumline mounds occurring inland; for instance some in Pictou 
county were proved to be over 80 feet in thickness, and by the Miramichi 
river the explorations for the Chatham water-works showed gullies lead- 
ing into that stream to be filled with boulder clay to the depth of 100 
feet below the present water level. 

The proposition is submitted that instead of the ice front stopping 
at the shore it was pushed forward on the terrace in range with Sambro 
bank and deposited much of its load seaward: and even to the edge of the 
shelf and in proof of this attention is directed to the deep holes of cir- 
cumscribed area that the soundings disclose and which remind one 
strongly of the kettle holes of moraines. Then, again from the sands 
of Sable Island the seas sort out on the beaches the fine grains of black 
cres of iron and red garnets identical with similar deposits on the shore 
of Lake Ontario that are contained in the glacial drift from off the 
Azoïc rocks to the northward. The Sable Island deposit it is contended 
had a simlar origin and necessarily from the nearest source the moun- 
tains of Labrador. 

It is inconceivable that ocean currents could have carved out a sea 
bottom of the complexity of contour here developed. In shallow waters 
the ebb and flow of tides may show a tendency to make channels, but 
the usual effect is to level down and round over mounds and inequalities 
of deposition. Then as to icebergs of large dimensions being the vehicle, 
none are known to come near to Sable Island to be stranded and to fur- 
row out depressions even if they could reasonably be regarded as the 
possible graving tools of the sea bottom. 

In a consideration of this kind we are hampered by inability to see 
the deposits in place, to dig into and find the composition and thickness 
of the various deposits and to separate those that are superficial and to 
which accretions are now making from the older sediments resting on a 


[Poors] FEATURES OF CONTINENTAL SHELF OFF NOVA SCOTIA 81 


rocky base. All we do know by the soundings and dredgings is of the 
material resting on the sea bottom whether it be of mud, sand, gravel, 
boulders, clay or rock. What we would like to know in addition is 
whether the samples obtained are strictly superficial or from a sub- 
stratum not now subject to accretions. Much therefore is still conjec- 
tural respecting submarine conditions and reliance has chiefly to be 
placed on seeming analogy to land structure. 

In the case of the Banquereau, Sable Island and other fishing banks 
lying off Nova Scotia, we have to ask ourselves, can they possibly be the 
product only of material dropped by ice floes and bergs borne south by 
currents from northern regions? If the answer be in the affirmative 
would it not be reasonable to expect an average uniformity in the re- 
eulting layers with a tendency to parallel the course of the flow? But 
the conditions really found are great irregularity in the depth, direction 
and quality of the deposits and no indication of deposition by currents 
‘below the effect of wave action. It is hence assumed that whatever ad- 
ditions have been made to the banks by ice carriage they have had no 
important bearing on the configuration of the sea-bottom. Moreover 
the evidence of those who frequent these latitudes is that the set of the 
Labrador current is not over these banks, and further, that bergs rarely 
are seen bearing earth and stones, and again, that much of the melting 
of the bergs in the open sea occurs off the banks. 


Bibliography in Part. 
In the Transactions of the Nova Scotia Institute of Science. 


Dr. Honeyman — Vol. VI., Pt. 2, p. 74. Bedford Basin, 1885. 
Vol. VII. Pt. 1, p. 205. 
W. H. Prest — Vol. VIIL., pp. 143, 430. 
Vol. IX., p. 158. 
Dr. A. H. MacKay—Vol. VIII, p. 76. 
Patterson G. Trans. R. S. Can. 1894— XII—7, 1-50. 
Strait of Canseau, Acadian Geology p. 390. 
Bras d’Or Lakes, Geol. Sur. Rep. 1874—5—p. 265. 
J. W. Spencer, Bult., Geo. Soc. Am. Vol. 1, 1890 pp. 65—70—Lauren- 
tian R. p. 315. 
J. W. Dawson—Notes on Post Pliocene of Can. 1872—p. 41. The 
Can. Ice Age 1893 pp. 71, 74, 269. 
Dana on Hudson R. Jour. Se. II1, Vol. XL. p. 4251890 Decr. 
Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. Lon. XXXIX, 1878, pp. 566. 


Sec. IV., 1906. 6 


82 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Belt Vol. 1, pt. 3, p. 70—pt. 4, p. 91, N.S. Instit. Se. 
Ice dams and ice terraces p. 105. 
Ice Age Geol. Sur. Vol. IV. E 1888-9. 

Physical Hydrography of the Gulf of Maine—Rep. U.S. Const. and 
Geodetic Survey 1878—p. 175, etc.—Ibid, Appendix No. 
II, 1885, p. 483. 

Abraham Gesner—Elevation and depression of the Earth in North 
America 2, J. G. S. 1861, XVII p. 331-383. 

Ramsay, 2. J.G. 8. 1878 XXXIV. pp. 505-541 Gibraltar. 


APPENDIX. 


In the description which followed upon the reading of this paper 
Dr. L. W. Bailey called attention to the facts which both in New 
Brunswick and Nova Scotia indicate the former higher elevation of the 
Acadian region in pre-Glacial and Glacial times. ; 

As regards New Brunswick this is indicated not only by the exten- 
sion of the channels of the St. John and other rivers debouching into 
the Bay of Fundy, as indicated by soundings and the arrangement of 
isobaric lines upon the north side of depression, but also by the fact 
that the present river St. John, as indicated by the depth of the 
Pleistocene clays at Fredericton, eighty miles from the mouth, is flow- 
ing at a level at least 200 feet above its former rock bottom, and again 
by the fact, recently pointed out by Prof. Ganong, that the streams 
which drain the eastern sea-board of New Brunswick at one time ex- 
tended across Northumberland Straits and were coincident with the 
more marked valleys now indenting the coast of Prince Edward Island, 
these being tributary to the main channel of the St. Lawrence then 
traversing the entire length of the latter. 

In Nova Scotia like conditions are indicated by the fiord-like 
irregularities of the present southern or Atlantic shore and of its sub- 
merged platform, as indicated by Prof. Poole, but also by the evidences 
of unusual glaciation there exhibited, as shown by the character and 
extent of the moraines, eskers and kames met with, and especially the 
size and depth of glacial troughs, which, in some instances, traverse 
the hard quartzites of the Cambrian system with a depth of not Jess 
than twenty feet! Photographs of the latter were exhibited to the 
members of the section. 


ul 


PAL Wri 0 1) AE AU DESIRE 
u (a ee 


ii 
eae 
Siu Aree LE Bi 


gat TAR 


Srcrion IV., 1906. [88] Trans. R. 8. C. 


IX.— The Distribution of Lactic Acid Bacteria in Curd and Cheese 
of the Cheddar Type, with Nine Illustrations from 
Photomicrographs. 


By F. C. Harrison, l'he Macdonald College, Ste. Anne de Bellevue, P.Q. 


(Communicated by Dr. James Fletcher, and read May 28rd, 1906.) 


Mme. Troili-Petersson and Gorini in 1903 and 1904 published 
papers on the distribution of bacteria in Güter and Grana cheese, and 
employed and advocated histological methods of preparation and section 
cutting for this purpose. Recently Rodella again called attention to 
the value of these direct microscopical preparations, and his paper on 
account of the omission of Mme. T. Petersson’s name in the historical 
resumé of the subject has already called forth replies regarding priority 
of publication. Hence it seemed opportune to publish the results of 
some work along the same lines as the above mentioned investigations, 
but with Cheddar cheese of the Canadian type instead of the varieties 
already investigated. 

Gorini in a footnote to his paper, referring to a previous investi- 
gation published by Connell and myself stated that we suspected the 
uneven distribution of bacteria in Cheddar cheese, without however, 
giving any demonstration of it. This is correct so far as a direct ex- 
amination of sections from cheese is concerned but we give in the paper 
referred to several very good examples of the results of numerous quan- 
titative analyses of Cheddar cheese which showed conclusively that the 
bacteria were unevenly distributed not only in normal cheese but abnor- 
mal cheese affected with the well known gascous fermentation and we 
concluded the paragraph as follows: “‘'These examinations, which are 
typical of many others which we have made show there is not an even 
distribution of bacteria throughout the substance of a cheese, and it 
would therefore, seem necessary to modify somewhat our methods of 
analysis” a conclusion to which Gorini also arrives at in his paper 
“ Cette distribution irréguliére des bacteries augmente les causes d’erreur 
dans l’analyse bactériologique quantitative du fromage.” 

These results have been confirmed by the histological investigation 
of several cheese made according to the well-known Cheddar method. 

Methods of Imbedding.—Several methods were tried, of these, para- 
ifin with oil of bergamot as a clearer gave the best results; good results 
were also obtained by using chloroform as a clearer. Celloidin gave in- 
ferior results, although the pieces of curd or cheese were passed through 
2, 4,'6, 8, 10 and 12 per cent solutions of celloidin. 


84 : ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Section Cutting.—Sections were cut with a good microtome, trans- 
ferred to warm water and then floated on to cover glasses. These pre- 
parations were placed in a thermostat at 37°C. until all water had eva- 
porated. 

Staining, etc.—The paraffin was dissolved in xylol; the sections were 
then passed through graded alcohols and stained by various methods. 
The method which gave the best results was the ordinary method of 
Gram, counter staining with eosin. This gave beautiful preparations, 
the lactic acid bacteria, yeasts and torule being well demonstrated, and 
I should like to call attention to this method as a means of differentiat- 
ing certain classes of micro-organisms in cheese. Bacteria of the colon 
type decolorise by this method, but may be stained by using Bismarck 
brown as a contrast stain. Such preparations’ whilst useful for study 
purposes were of no use for photographical use as the cheese or curd sub- 
stance accepted the brown stain too deeply. By following Gram’s 
method but using amyl alcohol for decolorising and dehydrating all 
bacteria were stained. Leucocytes in the cheese are often very numerous 
and as usual were beautifully stained by Gram’s method. 

‘I'he sections were always cleared in oil of cloves, and mounted in 
Canada balsam. 

Samples of the curd at various stages of manufacture were taken, as 
well as of cheese taken from the presses, and small pieces were placed in 
95% alcohol, imbedded in paraffin, sectioned and stained according to 
the methods already given. In order to intelligently follow the results 
of this work, a few explanatory notes are necessary as to the method of 
manufacture of Cheddar cheese. ‘The milk is heated to 86°F (30°C) 
and when the desired acidity in the milk is obtained, which is usually 
done by adding 0.5% of a culture of a lactic acid bacilius, enough ren- 
uei is added to coagulate the milk, fit to cut, in 15 to 20 minutes. This 
point is referred to as “cutting time’ The curd immediately it is cut 
i: stirred by means of agitators for 10 to 15 minutes and then the vat is 
carefully heated to the cooking temperature of about 98° to 99°F (37° 
ta 68° C) in one and one half hours from the time of adding the rennet. 
This point is referred to as “ When cooking temperature was reached.” 
As soon as the acidity of the -whey reaches 0.17 to 0.2 the whey is either 
run off or else the curd is dipped out and removed to a special rack. 
This point is termed “ At dipping.” The curd is then stirred, piled 
about 8 inches high and allowed to mat together. When it is well 
matted together the piece is cut into strips six to eight inches wide and 
turned upside down, and in about 15 minutes time it is again turned and 
piled two deep. This turning and piling is continued every fifteen min- 
utes until the curd is ready to mill, which the cheese maker judges by 


[HARRISON] DISTRIBUTION OF BACTERIA IN CANADIAN CHEESE 85 


its flaky consistency and the development of .7 to .85 per cent of acid in 
the whey which drains from the curd. ‘The curd is then put through a 
mili which cuts it into small pieces. This point is referred to as “Mill- 
ing time.” The cut pieces of curd are then stirred frequently to prevent 
them matting together, and when the curd has mellowed and the drip- 
pings of whey shew from 1.0 to 1.2 per cent of acid, salt is added at the 
rate 114 to 24% lbs. to the 1000 lbs. of milk. This is referred to as 
“ Salting time.” The temperature of the curd from dipping to milking 
is about 94°F (34°C). After milling, the curd is allowed to cool 
gradually to about 85° F (30°C) and it 1s put into the presses at a tem- 
perature of 82° to 84°F (28°-29°C). The cheese is turned once and 
kept in the hoops overnight, afterwards it is removed to the curing room. 


Microscopical Examination of Curd and Cheese at Different Periods. 


1. At Cutting.— Sections shewed the cheese to have a granular 
structure with numerous clear spaces. The lactic acid bacilli occurred 
singly, in pairs or in small groups of 5 to 10 cells, they were not numer- 
ous, twenty to thirty fields (using the 1-12th oil immersion lens) were 
often searched before any organisms were seen. See Fig. I. 

2. When Cooking Temperature was Reached.—There was no notic- 
able difference in the open or closeness of texture of the curd. The 
bacteria were about the same in number ds at cutting time, but now and 
then larger groups were present. See Fig. 2. 

3. At Dipping.—The texture of the curd was slightly coarser, and 
there was a noticeable increase in the number of bacteria, nearly every 
field of the 1-12th o1l immersion lens shewed bacilli, many in short chains 
or clusters, and here and there small clumps or colonies containing from 
20 to 100 cells. See Fig. 3. 

4. At Milling.—The texture of the curd has undergone considerable 
change, instead of the granular texture it has now become quite flaky, 
giving the appearance of layers or lamin closely pressed together. (See 
Fig. 4.) When this stage is reached cheese makers term the curd 
“meaty” and it can be torn into long flaky strips. It was almost im- 
possible to find a single field in which there were not large numbers of 
bacteria. The increase in numbers since dipping time was very marked. 
The bacilli occurred in small chains and in small and large clumps or 
eclonies. See Fig. 5. 

5. At Salting—The texture of the curd was not so markedly 
flaky. 
The bacteria increased in numbers, larger clumps were seen,—some 
very large ones near the open spaces in the cheese. See Fig. 7. A 


86 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


micro-photograph of lower magnification shews the enormous number of 
bacteria present and clumps, or aggregations of bacteria of various sizes. 

8. Cheese two days old.—Little change has occurred in either the 
texture or numbers of bacteria present, since the salting stage. Fig. 8 
shews a large mass of bacteria around an open space in the cheese and 
Fig. 9 of lower magnification gives a good idea of the distribution of the 
bacteria in the cheese. 

The starter or pure culture used in the manufacture of this cheese, 
was a lactic acid bacillus which grew in small chains, and it could be 
quite readily recognized in microscopical preparations of either butter or 
cheese, made from cream or milk in which it had been introduced, as 
the lactic acid bacteria naturally present did not form these characteristio 
chains. It was always easy in this particular dairy to distinguish the 
dairy products in which it had been used from those made from natural 
ripening. 


Conclusions :— 


1. The paraffin imbedding method, as already outlined gives ex- 
cellent results in the preparation of curd or cheese for microscopical 
examination. 

2. Gram’s method of staining, with eosin as a contrast stain 
brings out the lactic acid bacteria, yeasts, and torulæ or all organisms 
which are known to accept this stain and hence this method of coloration 
has some diagnostic value. 

3. Organisms in curd or cheese which do not accept Gram’s stain 
may be demonstrated by the use of Bismarck brown. 

4. Practically all bacteria are stained if amyl alcohol is used for 
decolorising or dehydrating. 

5. The lactic acid bacteria increase very rapidly in numbers from 
the time the rennet is added to the milk until the time of salting. 

6. The increase in numbers of these bacteria from the time of 
salting until the cheese is a day or two old is not very pronounced. 
Comparison, however, is difficult on account of the huge numbers 
present. 

7. The lactic acid bacteria have a tendency to form clumps or 
colonies of various sizes. Over a thousand cells have been counted in a 
single clump or colony. 

8. ‘Ihe results confirm the quantitative analysis of curd and cheese 
by the plate method, and the amount of acid developed in the whey 
during the progress of making is an indication of the extraordinary mul-_ 
tiplication of the lactic acid bacteria present in the curd. 


[HARRISON] DISTRIBUTION OF BACTERIA IN CANADIAN CHEESE 87 


References :— 


Troili-Petersson G., Centralblatt für Bakt. 2 Abte. XI, No. 6-7, 
1903. 

Gorini C., Revue Générale du Lait. 3, No. 13. p. 289. 1904. 

Rodella A., Centralblatt für Bakt. 2. Abte XV. p. 143. 

Harrison, F. C., and Connell W. T. Revue Générale du Lait. 3, No. 
4, p. 83, 1903. 


Z lustrations — 


The photo-micrographs were taken with a Zeiss apparatus, 2 m.m. 
oil immersion objective and compensating oculars. All sections stained 
by Gram’s method, with eosin as a counter stain. 


1. Section of curd obtained at cutting time. x 1200. 

2. Section of curd obtained when cooking temperature was 
reached. x 1500. 

3. Section of curd obtained at dipping time. x 1500. 

4. Section of curd obtained at milling time. Observe the flaky 
character of the curd substance. x 1500. 

5. Section of curd obtained at milling time, colony or clump 
formation. x 1500. 

6. Section of curd obtained at salting time. x 1500. 

7. Section of curd obtained at salting time, observe the large num- 
bers of organisms and the formation of colonies. x 500. 

8. Section of cheese two days old. A characteristic colony. x 
1500. 


9. Section of cheese two days old, observe distribution and colony 
formation. x 500. 


Fa é. - 
#1 [HARRISON] DISTRIBUTION OF BACTERIA IN CANADIAN CHEESE 89 
É | 
1. AT CUTTING TIME. x 1200. 
2. WHEN CooKING TEMPERATURE WAS REACHED. x 1500. 
Sec. IV., 1906. 6a. 


Le 


[HARRISON] DISTRIBUTION OF BACTERIA IN CANADIAN CHEESE 


3: AT DIPPING TIME. x 1500. 


4. AT MILLING TIME. x 1500. NOTE FLAKY NATURE OF CHEESE, 


91 


[HARRISON] DISTRIBUTION OF BACTERIA IN CANADIAN CHEESE 


~ 


5. AT MizLING TIME. x 1500. 


6. AT SALTING TIME. x 1500. 


98 


[HARRISON] DISTRIBUTION OF BACTERIA IN CANADIAN CHEESE 


f- PAT SALTING CRIME x 500! 


8. CHEESE 2 Days OLp. A CHARACTERISTIC COLONY. x 1500. 


95 


HARRISON] DISTRIBUTION OF BACTERIA IN CANADIAN CHEESE 97 


9. CHEESE 2 DAYS OLD. x 500. 


Sec Vi 100607: 


SECTION IV., 1906. [ 99 ] Trans. R. S. C. 


X.—A Review of the Flora of the Little River Group. 
By G. F. MATTHEW, LL.D., D.Sc. 
(Read May 22nd, 1906.) 


The writer proposes to give in a series of articles to be read before 
this Society the result of a review of the plant remains of the Little 
River Group, a series of strata in southern New Brunswick that have 
been referred to the Devonian Age. The examination will include 
a revision of the types of this flora that were returned to the cabinet 
of the Natural History Society of New Brunswick by Sir J. William 
Dawson, types collected by the late Professor C. F. Hartt, in 1862-4, 
and by the author at that time and since, as well as new material 
collected by Messrs. W. J. Wilson, G. Stead, Wm. McIntosh and A. 
G. Leavitt. This new material it is hoped will give additional know- 
ledge of this ancient flora. 

The need of a re-examination of these plants is forced upon us, 
not, only by the changes in nomenciature that have been accepted since 
Sir William wrote his classic essays on this subject, but also by the 
fact that eminent palæobotanists have questioned the reference to these 
plants to the Devonian Age, and have asserted that they were Car- 
boniferous. 

The writer does not propose to take up at present the stratigraphical 
evidence upon which is based the reference of the terrane which holds 
these plants to the Devonian age, but only to study the plants them- 
selves, and as far as possible note the beds from which they have come; 
the determination of their extract geological age may be left to a later 
occasion. 

It was in connection with the labelling and arranging of the types 
of this collection returned by Sir William to the Natural History 
Society of New Brunswick, that this revision was found to be neces- 
sary. In the arrangement made when Sir William undertook the 
study of these plants, one set of the types is preserved in the Museum 
of McGill University, and the other in the cabinet of the Natural 
History Society of New Brunswick; duplicate types of some of the 
species are also in the author’s cabinet. 

Since Sir William’s work was performed on these plants new 
species have been found in these beds, including some novel types of 
the Calamaria and the Ferns. These will be described and figured in 


Sec. IV., 1906. 7a. 


100 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


this series of articles, and the writer hopes may prove of interest to 
palæobotanists. 

The terrane in which these plant remains are found is believed 
to cover a considerable interval of geological time, and not to be con- 
fined to the Middle Devonian as many have been led to believe from 
Sir William’s determination of the flora; it should not be overlooked 
that the plant remains determined by Sir J. William Dawson were 
collected from about 140 feet of measures of a terrane thousands of 
feet in thickness; and, while species of plants like Calamites Suckovit 
occur through a thickness of 400 feet or more, there are others that 
are confined to special portions of the plant beds; and it is these species 
which give character to the flora. 


HARTT'S SECTION. 


It is somewhat unfortunate for our present purpose of studying 
the vertical distribution. of the species of plants in the terrane of the 
Little River Group, that Sir William Dawson has not indicated the 
special beds at the Fern Ledges, etc., from which came the species that 
he has described. This may have been because Professor Hartt 
had not marked the specimens which he collected in such a way that 
this could be done. 

It has thus happened that while the bulk of the flora can be placed 
in relation to the beds from which the specimens came, a number of 
species, not described nor named at the time that Professor Hartt made 
up his list, can only tentatively be assigned to certain beds. 

The following table will show the range of the Equisetales in the 
beds of the sections at Bay Shore, as far as it is at present known. 
It is partly compiled from Professor Hartt’s notes in the: Acadian 
Geology, pp. 516 to 523, and partly from the observations of other 
collectors who have been to these localities in later years. The three 
subfloras which appear to be present are indicated. A higher sub- 
flora appears to exist in the Upper Cordaite shales (Murphy’s Point, 
etc.), but its plants are poorly preserved and Equisetales are rarer there. 


[MATTHEW ] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 101 


Distribution of the Equisetales in the Plant Beds at Lancaster (or 
Bay) Shore, St. John, including Hartt’s Section: 


Dadoxylon 


Scans Lower Cordaite Shale 
Rane D ony ; || Third 
First sub-flora Second sub-flora| br Ho 


1 
Hart 203°) 4 DT PGNN7ANS IE 


19822131) 14 | | 
Calamites cannæformis, Schloth......|... ines lita SE a Ce sili: NE DATI 
Cc. ——— Suckovii, Brong’t. ........|... Free EEE ES AE Seat x lee tee 
C. ——— geniculosus, n.sp........... 5.2) Ga EC ae SE RSA rs) als 
C. ——— Cistii, Brong’t, mut........ Mee ta ln IC BA Naess halle 
Asterocalamites scorbiculoides, n.sp.|...)...) x |...) x ||x |x |x ee A ea lise 


Ramicalamus dumosus,n-gen. &sp:l.-.|xl.°217.1" 2 JL. Tee) 


Lepidocalamus scutiger, Dn. sp...... lola nelle: be Fail ER | areal ines Pel APN ns 


Weterophyllites longifolius, Sternb:..| x... x || x 0 lex ee 


A. fasciculatus, (D. Sp... se cliool se] joel lecoe-6||\oe clas ERIC 0 ER OIIE 4 A 2 S à 
A. ——— (?) fissus, n. sp .. .......... Bors beta | fs LR agama eset ei eee ett le aA! 
EN lentus, Dawson... ne I SR AR PAS Pete 
A. ——— parvulus, Dawson.......... Sem AIRE RAR ra te 
A. —— ——— var ................|...l... eI ANS A A AA a PA 
Annularia longifolia Brong’t, mut | ow 

Baie Maths. do. CN) }. x ee || |: 
A. ——— latifolia, Dawson...........)... fete re} Ex A EX CARRE Fel RoE & 
A. — — latifolia-minor, n. var..... |e ee x I 
A. ——— acicularis, Dawson.........|... Le Sodlecel Xe all Beale: Beslan sels 
Polystachia acicularis, n. sp.......... MRC ER CEE eae eee weal eae ellos 
PnAUIArA TECHTVA; NSP... 25-6: .-.2-|.>- fet oe Dee | x | eh | À 
A. ——— (?) ligata, n. sp .............|... An A | x EE EE so Lee 
Sphenophyllum antiquum, Dn.......l... Beard eel EX PGA| ET EU ert ee Ie 


WILSON’S SECTION. 


Hoping to obtain more exact information as to the location in the 
section at Fern Ledges of the species described by Sir William Dawson, 
I wrote to Mr. W. J. Wilson who, several years later, had collected at 
this locality, for information on this point, and he very kindly responded 
with notes anda section made from memory. This section is so strongly 
confirmatory of that of Hartt, that I give it with the notes on the 
species collected, and Mr. Wilson’s notation of the beds by lettering. 


102 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Mr. Wilson’s notes are as follows (see the ground plan herewith 
of his section) ; 


Sections, b & 
WIWilson 774 


CF Hartt at- the : 
Fern Ledges uy 
Lancaster NB 3 
Scale-sh feet 6 1 Inch à ‘ | 
—=ms € © 8 | 
J AN 
~~ # — x 
SE 2 Ÿ 7 R 
d v _6 ss 
oF) ne 
~a Ne 
7 wo _& à 
V à 
: “ à 
~ EN 
LS) 
-v à vi 
ks x 1 
4 is : 
27714 27708 Bows / 
au a ‘ wa” WH wig Yasir tent 


i WU My 
\ 


NUL y DNA \ 

a. Plant Bed a short distance east of Demill’s summer-house and 
high up on the,bank. A rather coarse sandy shale containing an 
abundance of Asterophyllites (now Annularia). This rock does not 
split evenly. It contains beautiful whorls of Annularia, and this 
is the only plant remains I remember finding in it, but there may 
have been others, as I did not keep a record of the plants from each 
bed: [This is Hartts bed No. tiger we | 

b. Not far below highwater and east of the summer-house a bed 
containing plants similar to those in Hartt’s bed No 1. This bed is 
often covered with gravel, which is moved abort in large volume by 
the tide, especially in storms. [N.B.—There is a fault east of Hartt’s 
section, on the eastern side of which fault the measures have been 
moved southward, so that the bed b may be of the same group with 
Hartt’s bed No. 1, and so belong to the Lower sub-fauna. G. F. M.] 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 103 


c. This is probably Hartt’s No. 2, and is one of the most prolific 
beds in the series. Where I jworked it the shale is of a dark colour 
and very fissile and rather soft. It is, or rather, was, worn down to 
the level of the beach, but I was able to follow it for twenty or thirty 
feet east and west. Sphenopteris marginala is very abundant, also 
Neuropteris polymorpha. Besides these which were so common, I 
found nearly all the plants mentioned in Harti’s list. I remember 
some excellently preserved specimens of Psilophyton glabrum and 
Cordaites Robbu. 

Then follow some small beds which showed occasionally after heavy 
storms, by which some new spot was laid bare, from which I collected 
several species, as Neuropleris polymorpha, Cordaites Robbti, the two 
Calamites, Sphenopteris marginata, Pinnularia dispalans, Psilophyton 
elegans, P. glabrum, Cardiocarpon cornutum, and Sporangites acumin- 
ata, and other fruits. 

d. About half way down the beach, between high and low water 
mark I found a greenish shale which contained a beautiful frond of 
Pecopteris. We thought the fern new at the time, but Dr. White 
says it has been described; I have forgotten the name of the 
species but it is a Pecopteris. The bed is only two or three inches 
thick. It is the only place where I found this fern. Megalopteris 
Dawsoni is, I think, between c and d, and not far from d. 

e. A few feet above the last bed (d), that is down the beach, and 
nearer low water, there is a somewhat hard layer containing very large 
specimens of Cordaites Robbii in great abundance. This bed also 
contains Neuropteris polymorpha, Calamites, sp. and Alethopteris 
discrepans. 

f. Near low-water mark there are some beds worn to near the 
beach level, rather hard and not very fissile, which break somewhat 
irregularly, and show slicken-sided surfaces, that contain very good 
specimens of Alethopteris, usually a single large leaf. 

Of this section Mr. Wilson writes me that he has had to depend on 
his memory, as he made no exact record of the species from each bed 
when collecting. 

On comparing the two sections, Hartt’s and Wilson’s, there seems 
no certainty that Mr. Wilson collected from the upper sub-fauna, except 
the specimens he may have taken from the bed f; and except the Ale- 
thopteris from that bed, the species he cites from his upper beds are 
such as have a wide range and are not necessarily of the upper sub- 
fauna. 


104 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The bed marked g on the plan is inserted in Mr. Wilson’s section, 
but he does not name any fossils from it; it probably contains plants 
of the middle sub-fauna. 


EQUISETALES. 


In this article the author has taken up only the plants allied to 
the modern horsetails. They present a variety of forms most of 
which, like those of the Coal Measures are giants compared with their 
modern representatives. The fossils are not all hollow reeds like the 
Calamites, but some had solid stems, that were able to resist decay 
and compression for a considerable time and hence are found penetrat- 
ing several layers of sediment. 


The leaves of these plants are found in great abundance in some 
layers, sometimes they occur detached, but in other cases are attached 
to small branches on which they grew. Occasionally these branches 
and the leaves are found attached to the main stem, showing the over- 
ground parts of whole plants. The roots also in some cases are found 
attached; some of these come under the generic name Pinnularia, and 
others present a surface somewhat like the stem of Lepidodendron. 
These roots will be taken up in the next article. 

The Equisetales of the Little River terrane while they contain 
many plants of Carboniferous aspect, have others of a peculiar type, 
and their more striking differences, those that seem most primitive, 
may be stated as follows :— 


1. Plants with solid stems and whorls 
of leaves between the nodes.... 


camer n. gen. 
Lepidocalamus, n. gen. 
2. Plants with solid stems, whorls of | em 
À 
hie 


leaves only at the nodes....... Asterophyllites. 


Sphenophyllum. 


Asterocalamites. 
Calamites. a 


3. Plants (as preserved) with hollow, 
channelled stems, leaves in whorls 


The several genera show the following distinctions among them- 
selves in respect of the whorls of leaves and the stem :— 

Ramicalamus, n. gen.— whorls of leaves clustered near the nodes, 
leaves persistant. 


Lepidocalamus, n. gen.—whorls spread along the stem, those 
between the nodes deciduous or caducous. 


[MaTTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 105 


Annularia—whorls at the nodes, usually flattened to the plane of 
ihe stem, possessing an annulus. 

Asterophyllites—whorls spreading or ascending, annulus absent. 
Sec. 1, the leaves evenly spread around the axis. Sec. 2, leaves in tufts 
around the axis. 

Sphenophyllum—leaves few, with spaces between at the node (like 
the above Sec. 2 of Asterophyllites). 

Calamites—stem (as preserved) fistulous, and having ribs alternat- 
ing at the nodes. 

Asterocalamites—Stem (as preserved) fistulous and having opposite 
ribs at the nodes. 


The following species of these genera, are described in this article :— 

Ramicalamus dumosus, n. sp. 

Lepidocalamus scutiger, Dn. sp. 

Annularia longifolia Brongt. mut. Leavitti, n. mut. A. latifolia 
Dn. and var. minor n. var. A. acicularis, Dn., A. recurva, n. sp. A. (?) 
hgata. 

Polystachia acicularis, n. sp. 

Asterophyllites longifolius, Brngt., A. faciculatus, n. sp; A. (?) 
fissus, n. sp., A. lentus, Dn., A. parvulus, Dn. 

Sphenophyllum antiquum, Dn. 

Calamites connæformis, Schloth., C. Suckovii, Brongt., C. Cistii 
Brongt, mut., C. geniculosus n. sp. 

Asterocalamites scorbiculoides, n. sp. 


DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES. e 
CALAMITES Suckovii. 
CALAMITES CANNÆFORMIS, Schloth. 


Schloth. Petrefactenkunde. p. 398, pl. XX, fig. 1. 

Brongt. Hist. d. Végét. Foss, p. 131. pl. XXI. 

Dawson, Fossil plants Dev. & U. Sil. Can. p. 26, pl. IV, figs. 47, 48. 
Lesq’x, Coal Flora of Penn., p. 24, pl. I, fig. 1. 


In the material referred by Sir William Dawson to this species 
I find many examples that agree better with Calamites Suckovit. With 
his homotype figured in Fossil Plants of the Devonian and Upper Silu- 
rian of Canada) may be included such of the wide-ribbed stems as do 
not show the plano-convex ribs of C. Suchovu. 


106 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The following is the diagnosis of this species given by Lesquereux :— 

Stems large; articulations variable in distance; furrows broad ob- 
tuse, sometimes marked in the middle by a sharp thin line; ribs convex 
wedge-form and alternately joined at the articulations; scars of leaves 
distinct, obsolete or absent. 

Lesquereux says that “the species is much like C. Suckovi and 
separated from it by rather indefinite characters. The ribs are larger, 
more distinctly convex, wedge-form and alternately connivent at the 
articulations; the furrows broader, more obtusely carinate. The ribs 
are generally broader, more flattened toward the obconical base of the 
stems, sometimes bearing distinct, round tubercles.” 

Of this species R. Kidston says:—‘‘A very unsatisfactorily defined 
species, and in many cases it is extremely difficult to decide whether 
certain specimens should be referred to Calamites Suckovi or C. can- 
neformis.” 

The following are measurements of the examples from the Little 
River group that come nearest to C. canneformis: 


posais Length | Width | Length |No.ofribs 
Honzon mm | mm REA invlem: 
F.L.* — Dawson’s homotype as figured.. 135 65+ 7-35 24-3 
‘© | Bed 2Stem with broad rounded ribs.. 100 80 6-35 4 
ce », — “e 66 «6 «6 ce + f] 70 4 4 
| 


*“F.[L.”—Fern Ledges at ‘ Bay Shore,” Lancaster, St. John county, N.B. 


Tie width of the ribs in the second and third examples is that 
found in C. Suckovii, and it is possible that the first only should be 
referred to C. canneformis. 


CaLAMITES SucKovit, Brongt., Plate I, Fig. 4. 


Brong’t, Hist. Végét., p. 124, pl. XIV, fig. 6. &c. 
Lesq’x, Coal Flora of Penn., p. 20, pl. I, figs. 3, 4. 
D. White, Flora Low. Coal Meas. of Missouri, p. 146. 


Many stems of Calamites of the Little River Group agree more 
nearly with this species than with C. canneformis. 

Of this species (including C. canneformis) Sir William says, “I 
cannot find any characters separating it from specimens found in the 
Carboniferous. It was a true Calamites, and several of my specimens 


\ 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 107 


show the scars of the branches [leaves?] at the top of the ribs. I 
have also specimens showing the base of the stem, terminating in an 
oblique point exactly as in the Carboniferous species and showing that 
these plants grew in groups or stools in the manner of ordinary Cala- 
mites of the Coal Measures.” 

The following is the diagnosis of this species:—Stems generally 
broader than the space between the articulations (internodes) ; ribs 
half-round or plano-convex, obtuse at the articulations, furrows narrow, 
obtusely carinate; tubercles or impressions of the bases of the leaves 
more or less distinctly oval. 

Of this species Lesquereux says, “The stems average seven to 
twelve centimetres in thickness, when not flattened. The epidermis 
is very thin, smooth, and the bark also thin, the ribs distinct, the arti- 
culations somewhat variable, close toward the base. When decorticated, 
the under surface, distinctly ribbed, is narrowly striate lengthwise, more 
obscurely so on the outside surface. 

“This most common species of our coal is generally represented 
in flattened fragments in the shale overlaying the coal, but always in 
cylindrical sections of stems in the sandstones. 

“The tubercles are mostly oval, but also sometimes round, half- 
globular, smooth, placed at the top of the ribs, rarely at their base.” 

Having found numerous examples of this species among the 
material from the strata of the Little River group, and knowing its 
very wide range, geologically, extending as it does to the summit of 
the Paleozoic formations, it appeared desirable to give the species a 
closer study than that given to other species of the genus found in the 
Devonian rocks, especially in comparing it with Coal Measure types, 
more especially to see how far the length of the joints and the width 
of the ribs could be depended on for diagnosis. 

Five examples from the Joggin’s Mine in Nova Scotia, one upright 
and round, from the sandstones, and one flattened, from the shales 
presented the following characters: In the one from the sandstone 
the base is unusually obtuse and the top is absent, having decayed away, 
or been broken off at a height of fourteen inches from the base. In 
this height there are thirteen joints, all with well defined cicatrices of 
leaf bases, (or roots) showing there was a whorl of such appendages at 
each node. For one-quarter of the length from the base the joints 
increase rapidly in length, but for the remainder of the stem do not 
change more than a few millimetres in length from joint to joint. The 
section of the stem is oval owing to lateral compression, and the width 
of the ribs corresponds to this being a fifth narrower on the more con- 
vex quarter. The width of the ribs is that which we find in many 


108 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


examples of the stems of this species, being three to a centimetre near 
the base, and four to a centimetre on the rest of the stem. The fol- 
lowing figures show the relation of the width of rib to the position 
on the stem. 


Length of internodes in mm...... 4 5 8 10 16 26 30 36 40) 40 41 41° 45 
Number of ribs tol centimetre.... 3h 3h 34 34 3h m4 # 4 4h 44 5 5 5 


The long diameter of the stem is 50 mm. 

A flattened example of the same width as the above from this mine 
has a much stronger curve from the base where it is more acutely pointed 
than the preceding example. 


Length of internodes in mm..... 3 7 10 14 20 23 28 32 26 40 50 50 


Number of ribs tolcentimetre.... 10 64 5 4 4 4 84 44 44 44 56 5% 


The basal joints in the stem are more elongated than in the 
former, which perhaps may account for the more numerous ribs there. 
In the upper part of both stems the elongation of the joint is accom- 
panied by a slight narrowing of the ribs. 

Sculpture.—The surface of the epidermis in this species is very 
finely striated longitudinally; these striæ nearly abut against the lower 
side of the leaf scars, which are large and oval, or round, and are placed 
at the upper ends of the ribs; but the striæ draw together and unite 
above the leaf scar, becoming more prominent; on the surface of each 
rib there are about thirty of these fine striæ. 

The stem is also marked with fine longitudinal striæ beneath the 
bark, but less distinctly than on the surface of the latter. In this it 
differs from Asterocalamites and Calamodendron in which the striation 
and ribbing are strongest on the inside of the ligneous cylinder. 

The following are dimensions of examples of C. Suckovii from the 
Little River group :— ; 


o Leugth 
Honor Length | Breadth | of inter- | Number 
Rocalit in mm. | in mm. nodes Les 
ÿ in mm. i 
HE Homotypes in Nat. Hist. 
Lower Soc. coll’n, under the 150 135 50 3-4 
Cordaite name of C. canne- 
MOTS A ETES 65 55 re 3-3} 
Murphy’s Pt., \ |Highest sub-flora of Little 
Up. Cordait) River STOUp eee eee ee } 170 50+ 70 4 
F, L., Lower) Second sub-flora of At) 45 3h 
Cordaïte .../i|) Univer eroupeen a) CRE poe pies 
Dadoxylon First b-fl ft Littl 
Sandstone, Ri SBT 0 : a 70 50+ Marae 34 
Duck Cove lver group eile te yolleuelnl siete stale 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 109 


The length of the nodes in these specimens indicate that they came 
from the main part of the stem, but it will be seen that Coal Measure 
examples with a similar length of node had ribs considerably narrower. 
Whether this was accompanied by other differences of foliage, ete., we 
do not know, but so far as the relief of the ribs is concerned, and the 
arrangement of the ribs and furrows, the plan of structure of these 
stems, so widely different in age, is similar. 


CALAMITES GENICULOSUS, n sp. Plate II, Fig 5, and Plate VIII, Fig. 1. 


A species with short internodes and thin epidermis, and showing 
put weak vascular support. A stem 52 mm. wide has internodes 32 
mm. apart; the decorticated stem shows six or seven ribs in the space 
of a centimetre; these ribs apparently are alternate; the diaphragms 
are weak, and the scars of the leaf bases inconspicuous. 


Leaves long, narrow, rigid, erect, dichotomous at intervals; they 
are from one to one and a half mm. wide and 70 mm, or more in length, 
branching at an acute angle; the outer leafing branches are more divided 
than those next the main stem. 


A portion of a young stem shows more frequent nodes than that 
above described, and is probably from near the root. The nodes are 
§ to 12 mm. apart, and have alternate ribs of which about seven fall in 
the space of a centimetre. A dichotomizing branch from this young 
stem is 70 mm. long and has five nodes in that distance. The branch 
is erect and grew at an acute angle from the stem, the leaves extend- 
ing mostly on the side away from the main stem; they are erect, are 
about 1 mm. wide and 30 mm. long; the nodes whence they spring or 
bifurcate are 2 mm. wide; the dichotomy is sub-regular, several leaves 
forking at an equal distance from the branch. 

Sculpture. The stem is smooth when not decorticated, but when 
deprived of the bark is seen to be minutely striated lengthwise on the 
ribs. 

In a comparison of this species with Calamites approximatus impor- 
tant differences appear; the nodes are closer and the vascular bundles 
weaker; also the bark is quite thin and the ribs are much narrower. 
The dichotomous leaves recall those of Asterocalamites scorbiculatus, 
but the leaves of that species as shown by Stur’s figure! are flexuous, 
whereas these are stiff and erect. 

Horizon and Locality, Lower Cordaite shale, Fern Ledges, Lancaster. 
Special bed not noted. 


1 Zittel’s Paleontology, Vol. III (Plants) p. 171, fig. 133. 


> 


bd LIBR: RYYS 


/ 


| am 


110 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The following is a tabulated showing of the dimensions of this 
species :— 


Horizon | Inter- | Number 
an Length rad nodes lof ribs to 
Locality ip Tare. |), RO | im mm | lcentim 
Lower Cor-|Author’s cabinet, Pl. II., fig. 5 145 55 32 6-7 
daite shale 
at the fe ela Vile ol 50 16+ 8-12 6-7 
Fern Ledges, Collection of the Natural 
Lancaster..| History Society........... 35 30 î 5 


CALAMITES Cisti1, Brong. mut. Plate III, Figs. 1 and 2. 


Brongt, Hist. d. Végét. Foss. p. 129, pl. XX. 


ra 


Lesq’x, Coal Flora of Penn. p. 27, pl. I, fig. 6. 
D. White, Flora Low. Coal Meas. Missouri. p. 149. 


The following are the character of the species Calamites Cistu, 
Brongt. as given by Leo Lesquereux :— 

Articulations about equally distant, except toward the base; ribs 
narrow, half round, with obtuse striate furrows; tubercles generally 
absent or small, round, indistinct. 

He adds, “the species is easily recognized by its regular narrow 
ribs, either convex or half round, the length of the internodes greater 
than in C. Suckovii, and the general absence of leaf tubercles. The 
stems are generally of small size, at least never as large as the distance 
between the articulations.” 

Among the common species of Calamites in the Little River strata 
is one which Sir William Dawson has not separated from Asterocalamites 
scorbiculoides (Calamites transitionis of Sir William’s essays), but which 
on account of the alternate ribs and their narrowness is evidently dis- 
tinct from that species. It has the following characters :— 

Stems with long joints and close narrow ribs, and generally obscure 
leaf scars. The internodes are usuaily twice as long as the width of 
the stem. The stem ts smooth when not marked by the impression of 
the vascular bundles within; elsewhere it rises in rounded ribs resem- 
bling those of Asterocalamites scorbiculoides in form and striation, but 
the ribs are much narrower than in that species and are marked by 
about two wregular longitudinal striations. 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 111 


The following table gives the dimensions of several examples of 
this mutation :— 


= Length 

: Length | Width A Number 
SpA sol en of stem COR of nodes 
m. | in mm. mere in 1 cm. 

FernLedges, Bed7|C. Cistii, mut........... 120 45 85 10-11 

sf re ARE “GF TAO OL site 130 30 70 12 

ss “© N.H.S.|Coll’n,as‘‘C.transitionis”| . 90 35 bee 10 

‘6 oe os “ec “ee 70 37 a fay 9 

pe \|(C. Cistii, mut, short ~ 
Duck Cove...... | ES BINT ae. LE) 140 65 47 10 
Dadoxylon Sand | us mut, JPA) 1100 11 37 10 


For comparison with this ancient mutation of C. Cistii, one may 
present the characters of typical examples of this species from the 
coal measures of Joggins, N.S., also having long internodes and narrow 
ribs. They have the following characters:—The epidermis is thin and 
in this flattened stem the ribs show quite distinctly, though less 
markedly than in decorticated examples. The ribs are alternate, the 
furrows shallow, and the leaf scars inconspicuous; these scars are 
small, oval and placed on the sides of the ribs or between the ribs, 
and thus are likely to be overlooked; thus a scar frequently comes 
opposite the rib of the next node. A flattened stem 53 mm. wide 
has the following proportions in its parts :—— 


Rensbhlofünternodes si TM eet ele he oii =) ors e's = 70 74 74 7 
9 


INUmMber of ribssto di centimetres: se 60 oes. | 6 eeiele + 94 9 


The epidermis in this species is thin and is more obscurely and 
more irregularly striate than in C. Suckovii, and its surface is less 
brilliant; there are about twelve of these minute striæ to a rib, and 
where they approach the leaf-scars their course does not change much, 
nor do they show the strong wrinkles, concentric to the leaf scar, seen 
on the surface of the stems of C. Suckovit. C. Cistii is striated on 
the surface of the mould, but less distinctly than on the outer surface 
of the bark. 

A flattened stem from the same bed of shale (over the Main seam 
al Joggins mine Coal Measures) has the following dimensions :— 


Length of internodes in mm................ . 33 32 30 30 30 
9 8 


Number of ribs tol centimetre..... .......... 10 9 8 


112 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANAD@ 


The position of the leaf scars, and their form, as well as the 
alternation of the ribs in the mutation of C. Cistü from the Little River 
group agrees with these typical forms from the Coal Measures of the 
Joggins, and the epidermis is similarly striate, although the proportion 
in the length of the internodes and the width of the stem are those of 
C. Suckovit. 

Though we should give in this way a wide range of variation to 
the characters of C. Cistii there still remains in the Devonian mutation 
a marked difference in the width of the ribs as will be seen by com- 
paring the dimensions of the Coal Measure with the Devonian forms, 
the ribs of the latter being narrower. 


ASTEROCALAMITES, Schimper. 


I use the above generic name for the plants of the Little River 
group which Sir William Dawson has described under the name Cala- 
mites transitionis, Goepp. 

Mr. Robert Kidston has traced the synonymy of this type through 
Archæocalamites, Stur, and Bornia, as used by Lesquereux. He has 
adopted Asterocalamites given by Schimper in 1862. The specific 
name of the European species was given by Schlotheim in 1822-23. 


ASTEROCALAMITES SCORBICULOIDES, n. sp. Plate I, Fig. 1. 


The distinction between this species and A. scorbiculatus is chiefly 
in the leaves. Lesquereux’s description of Bornia radiata (A. scorbi- 
culoides?) is as follows :— 

Stem cylindrical, articulate and furrowed as in Calamites ; articu- 
lations scarcely contracted; ribs cut square or obtuse at the articulations; 
continuous, not alternating, thinly striate; cortical cylinder thick; leaves 
verticillate, free, linear lanceolate. 

Lesquereux has numerous specimens from the sub-conglomerate of 
Alabama (Carboniferous) five to eight centimeters in diameter; “ the 
ribs seem very variable in width--one to three millimetres.” He says, 
“the articulations are generally very narrow, cutting across the ribs, 
which are thus continuous, parallel and without deviation. In some 
rare cases the articulations are slightly contracted.” 

Schimper’s description of the European species Archæocalamites 
radiatus, Brgt.1 is as follows:— Stem erect arising from an arched base, 
rooting, having a width of 2 to 10 cm., more or less elongated in the 
joints, having the grooves continuous across the articulations, mould 


1Zittel’s Paleontology vol. III (Plants) p. 171. 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 113 


finely striated, branches not numerous; leaves long, several times bifur- 
cated, with slender segments, almost filiform, arched; fructification in 
spikes, groups (?) of fertile verticiles alternating with foliar verticiles ; 
sporangiphores enlarged to a shield (?) on which are inserted 4 (?) 
sporanges; structure of the stem unknown.” 

“ What is known of Archæocalamites does not enable us to fix its 
systematic position. So far there is only one species of the genus.” 

Stem.— There is nothing in Lesquereux’s diagnosis (of Bornia 
radiata) that will separate the Canadian forms from his species, but 
we find no such variability in the width of the ribs as he described; 
this will appear from the following table showing the dimensions of 
stems collected from the Little River terrane :— 


Horizon and | Length | Width | ae aes 
Locality aime) Animes hen oe ey ot ee 
| in mm. |lcentim. 
Figured by Dawson 
Fern Ledges..... | Fossil Plant Dev. & 150 65 105 ? a 
Heke hy SUR mettre ct rer 
Fern Ledges..... \N at. His. Society Coll’n... 130 | 25 100 7 
“Bed 2 Author’s cabinet, Pl. 1,). | | 
eBay Tek eR dy | i ae as eee COPRES 8 
4 + MO lAUGHONSICADINECL..-- 1... | 110 | 37 ? 64 
ee Bed 77 Li" CO! Ne ES 180" 057 atu) 60 6 
a ye ‘“ Author’s cabinet, perhaps | 
CAOISGI RME. 1100 34 70 9 
ra “Bed 2 Author'scabinet,perhaps 
| C. Cistii, alternate nn) 80 | eles f bi 
| | 
| 


There is here very little variation in the width of the ribs in the 
first five examples though the width of the stem and the length of the 
internodes vary considerably. But none of these show the base of the 
stem, where, perhaps, the ribs were wider, nor the ultimate shoots where 
the ribs may have been narrower. 

As will be seen the internodes in this species were long, varying 
from a half longer to four times longer than the width of the stem, 


114 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


and the nodes sometimes obscurely marked in the flattened stems, and 
difficult to distinguish because the ribs run continuously from node to 
node. 

Sculpture.— Typical examples of this species have about 6 or 7 
ribs in the space of one centimetre; but there are examples with wider 
ribs, and others narrower; in these, however, the ribs may be alternate, 
the wider examples may be poorly preserved stems of C. Suckovü, and 
the narrower of C. Cistu. 

The outer surface of the skin may be smooth in uncompressed speci- 
mens, but all that we have are flattened and carry minute longitudinal 
striations; this is more clearly seen on the interior of the bark where 
the vascular bundles of the skeleton of support are impressed; there 
are about fifteen or twenty of these minute striæ on each rib, and the 
‘number of the striæ and the elevation above the surface is irregular. 

The leaves of these plants from the Little River terrane resemble 
those of Asterophyllites longissimus described further on. These long, 
straight and rigid leaves are quite different’ from the bifurcating, flex- 
uous leaves described hy Stur and Schimper as characteristic of the 
European species Archwocalamites radiatus (== Asterocalamites scor- 
biculatus) hence it has been thought better to distinguish these old 
stems as A. scorbiculoides. Since Lesquereux has found that similar 
straight leaves belong to the form from Pennsylvania which he has 
referred to Bornia radiata it seems possible that this may be the species 
A. scorbiculoides, but of a later age. The fossil from Little River 
beds which resembles the branch which Lesquereux has referred doubt- 
fully to Bornia radiata’ has a much slenderer stem than Asterophyllites 
longissimus, which, as I have mentioned above, appears to be the leafing 
portion of a species like A. scorbiculoides. As I have not found this 
object in actual connection with A. scorbiculoides, however, I do not 
feel justified in uniting it with that species. 

The irregular ribbing of Asterocalamites and the straight-across 
furrow, as well as a tendency to be contracted at the nodes, would seem 
to show a relationship to Calamodendron. 


RAMICALAMUS n. gen. 


This form is one of those comprehensive types like Arthrostigma ? 
found in the early Paleozoic floras that combine the characters of several 
of the later genera. 


1 Coal Flora, Penn., Vol. III., pl. XCIIL., fig. 2. 
2Fossil plants of the Devonian and U. Silurian of Canada, p. 41. 


[MATTHEW ] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 115 


It was a branching plant of rapid growth that flourished in wet 
sand, and has been found chiefly in the lower part of the Little River 
group (Dadoxylon sandstone), but also at the top of the Cordaite shales. 

Stem freely branching, often in a distichous manner, solid near 
the base (fistulous in the upper branches?) irregularly and intermit- 
tently ribbed lengthwise ; branches jointed at intervals and bearing at 
the joints one or several whorls of long tapering rigid leaves, usually 
two or three times as long as the internodes. 

There is a sheath or annulus at the base of one row of the leaves. 
Fructification unknown. k 

This form differs from Asterophyllites in the presence of several 
whorls of leaves at a node and in having an annulus. From Annu- 
laria it differs in not having the whorls of leaves flattened to the plane 
of the stem and in the enlarged and solid nodes. From Calamites 
in the absence of a regular ribbing on the stem and in having a solid 
axis. From Arthrostigma in the regular and more distant nodes and 
the absence of leaves from the internodes. The plant shows an analogy 
to Equisetum in the possession of a sheath or annulus to the upper 
whorl (when there is more than one whorl) this upper whorl may be 
compared to the sheath in Equisetum. 


RAMICALAMUS DUMOSUS n. sp. Plate VIII, Figs. 2, 3, 4 and 5. 


STEM.— The main stem is an inch or more in width and branches 
freely in the lower part; it there throws off strong branches at a wide 
angle — branches which sometimes are as large as the main stem. The 
opposite branches occur at nodes which are enlarged and more woody 
than the internodes. These bear long, rigid leaves of varying density 
and size; the stouter ones are sometimes two or three times as long 
as the internodes; there are sometimes two or three whorls of leaves 
at an internode, and in such case the upper whorl has an annulus or 
membrane connecting the leaves about as wide as the diameter of the 
stem; this membrane is continued up on the sides of the leaves so 
that they are winged for about an inch from the base. 

LEAVES.— The principal leaves are from 3 to 5 mm. wide at the 
base, 10 to 20 cm. long and taper graduaily to a point. The mature 
leaf was thick and round, or channelled on the upper side; this leaf 
when flattened had two or three irregularly raised intermittent longi- 
tudinal ridges, which are wanting in the broader flattened part of the 
leaf near the base; a mid-rib is seldom seen, though some thin, flat 
leaves on the lower whorls of an internode may have a shining vascular 


Sec 1100608 


116 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


line along the middle. When there are several whoris of leaves at an 
internode the outer (lower) leaves are narrow (1 to 14 mm. wide) 
and thin, and leave but a faint impression on the stone; these leaves are 
about 9 cm. long and are somewhat concave on the upper side. 

ANNULUS.— A distinct annulus or sheath is found at the upper 
whorl of leaves of a node; the leaves pass through this membrane (1.¢., 
are outlined against its thinner substance). The annulus is about 
three times the width of the stem at the upper branches of the plant, 
and no annulus has been observed on the lower whorls of an internode 
where more than one whorl! is present. 

Root ?.—An elongated undulating band of a root or rhizome occurs 
in the sandstone beds where Ramicalamus is found which pushed ats 
growth through the sand where this plant was imbedded; it is, perhaps, 
the root or rhizome of this species; apparently only one side was pre- 
served, the other may have been more perishable. It has obscure, low, 
ianceolate areoles on ils surface that resemble the bolsters of a badly 
preserved Lepidodendron. These rhizomes has a length of fifteen centi- 
metres or more, and a width of one and a half centimetres. 


Examples of what appear to be the upper branches of this plant 
resemble Asterophyllites rigidus Gein., but the leaves are more elon- . 
gate; in this part of the plant the leaves are less spreading than in 
the lower whorls, and they are more rigid; the longest leaf (though 
the full length. is not shown) is 7 em. long, and is heavily channelled 
for a part of its length; the flattened stem is 3-4 mm. wide; it js 
striate lengthwise with about nine grooves; the nodes are about 35 
mm. apart, and there is a whorl of about 12 leaves at each node, spread- 
ing upward at an acute angle. 


Horizon and Locality—This species was collected from the Dadoxy- 
lon sandstone at Duck Cove, Lancaster, N.B., about two hundred feet 
below the summit of the Dadoxylon sandstone by Mr. Wm. McIntosh. 
The specimens described above as probably the upper branches of this 
species were collected from Bed No. 1 of Hartt’s section at the Fern. 
Ledges by Mr. Geoffrey Stead. Both are, therefore, from the Dadoxy- — 
lon sandstone. The species occurs also in the higher beds of the 
Upper Cordaite shales, in sandstone layers, at Murphy’s Point, on the 
east side of St. John Harbour. 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 117 
LEPIDOCALAMUS, n. gen. 


In his Acadian Geology Sir Wm. Dawson figured and described 
a peculiar plant from the Devonian rocks at St. John which he referred 
doubtfully to the genus Calamites and which, in his later work on 
the Fossil Plants of the Devonian and Upper Silurian formations of 
Canada, he included in the species described under Asterophyllites. 
Doubtless he saw the radical differences between this plant and the true 
Calamites in the structure of the stem and the nature of the leaves. 
But the objections to classing it with Asterophyllites of Brongniart are 
almost equally strong as those which separate it from Calamites, while 
from Annularia of the same author (into which many of the species 
of Asterophyllites described by Sir William will fall) there are equally 
notable departures. It appears to the author that these objections are 
best satisfied by the use of a separate generic name as above. 

Stems solid, but not of dense substance. Simple, round, reed-like 
with enlarged and denser nodes at intervals. Several weak bundles of 
vascular tissue, irregularly disposed. 

The leaves are in whorls and are of two kinds, one (which may be 
bracts) oval and bluntly pointed; the other broad ovate, convex and 
attached to the enlarged nodes; these are supposed to be of the nature 
of fruit scales or pods; the narrower oval leaves are often wanting on 
old parts of the stems and may have been deciduous, the former are 
more persistent. The root was elongated, succulent. 

This genus differs from Asterophyllites, Brongt. in having no leafy 
branches and in having a prominent enlargement of the node. From 
Annularia, Brgt. it differs in its short curved leaves and in having no 
strong middle nerve to the leaf. From Calamocladus, Schemp. it differs 
in the absence of branches to the main stem, also the leaves of the 
verticles are few, and not straight nor linear. It may be compared 
with Paleostachya, Weiss, if it be regarded as an extended spike having 
several leafing whorls alternating with one fruiting whorl. 


LEPIDOCALAMUS SCcUTIGER, Dawson. Plate IV, Figs. 1 to 9. 


Dawson, Asterophyllites (?) scutigera, Dn. Acad. Geol. p. 539, Fig. 187 C. 
Dawson, Asterophyllites scutigera. Foss. plants, Dev. & U. Sil. Can. p. 29, 
Die 62058, 99! 


_ Dawson’s original description of the species is as follows :— Stem 
simple elongated, attaining a diameter of ha'f an inch, obscurely stri- 
ated; bearing on the nodes whorls of round or oval scales, or flattened 
nutlets, which at the end of the stem are crowded into a sort of spike, 
while on other parts of the stem the nodes are sometimes an inch apart. 


118 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


“This is a plant of uncertain nature which I place only conjectur- 
ally in this genus [ Asterophyllites]. The stems which are very long 
may have been horizontal or immersed, and the apparent scales may 
either have constituted a kind of sheath as in A. coronata, Unger, or 
may have been seeds or nutlets, flattened like the rest of the plant. 
Near some of the specimens are fragments of linear leaves which may 
have belonged to this plant, though I have not found them attached. 
When flattened obliquely the stems appear as rows of circular marks, 
which represent the harder tissues of the nodes, and have a very singular 
appearance. 

“This plant, though found with the preceding [Annularia lati- 
folia Dn.], does not occur in the layers which contain other plants, 
and this may, perhaps, mark a difference of habitat.” 

In his Fossil Plants of the Devonian and Upper Silurian formations 
of Canada, Sir William adds that the plant may have been a sheathed 
species like Unger’s A. coronala, deprived of its leaves, or a semi-aquatic 
stem, bearing scales instead of branches at the nodes. He further 
remarks that the singular species of Pinnularia, P. nodosa, is found 
in the same beds and may have been connected with this plant. He also 
figures a shoot with whorls of leaves, as occurring with this species. 

Stem.—There is much to support Sir William’s view that this 
plant was semi-aquatic. JI have not found examples like that figured 
in the Acadian Geology with six strong ribs to the stem; this would 
imply a cylinder of strong vascular fibres surrounding the soft interior 
of the stem as in Calamites, but the skeleton of support seems very 
weak and made little impression on the mould of the fossil even when 
flattened. A stout support of this kind would not be necessary in a 
submerged stem. 

Nodes.—It is, perhaps, the weakness of the vascular bundles of the 
internodes and the comparative density of the nodal structures that 
make the latter stand out prominently, and be preserved in the sand- 
stone layers, when the structures of the internodes have perished. Often 
a series of greyish circular or oval marks on the surface of the sand- 
stone layer is all that remains to mark the former presence of stems 
of this species. 

Internodes.— There is much variation in the length of these accord- 
ing to the part of the plant preserved; this varies from half of the 
width of the node near the hase of the stem to three times the width 
in the example figured by Sir William Dawson. | 

Young shoots.— The author cited has figured two examples of the 
young shoots of this species, one in Acadian Geology, the other in his 
work on the Fossil Plants of the Devonian, etc., of Canada; in both 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 119 


the leaves are longer and looser than those of the young shoots which 
have come under my observation. The leaves are in whorls of about 
six in the young shoots. 

Terminal spike.—- A structure which Sir William did not have, 
but which apparently belongs to this species; it is an oval cone or spike 
covered with closely applied short bracts, convex, outward; this may 
be compared to the conical spike on the apex of the stem of Annularia 
latifolia Dn. as figured in Acadian Geology, page 538. 

Habitat.—This plant, with its leaves, has been found in Bed No. 2 
of Hartt’s section in addition to Bed No. 1; the defoliated stem figured 
by him is evidently from the intermediate sandstones, where such 
specimens are not infrequent; it seems probable that the mascerated 
stems are drifted portions of the plant; the leaf-bearing fragments are 
from the Shale Bed No. 2. 

Horizon and Locality.-— Sir William appears to have known this 
plant from Hartt’s Bed No. 1; it, however, is not confined to that bed, 
and, indeed, is more common in the beds above; it is not infrequent 
in the sandstones that come between this bed and Bed No. 2; it thus 
forms one of the connecting links between the first and second sub- 
floras of the Little River group. 


VARIETY. 


While a soft, succulent stem is the usual condition of examples of 
these nodose stems, occasional more slender stems are to be met with 
in the sandy shale of Bed No. 1, which have a good support of vascular 
tissue. The nodes in these appear to be of two kinds, one of which 
seems to bear narrow rigid leaves, but the other is surrounded by a 
ring of nodules or capsules; from the way in which they are crushed 
in in the shale they would seem to have had a soft centre, or to have 
been hollow. There are about six or eight of these capsules or spo- 
rangia in the ring around the node. The barren node has a ring of 
pointed bracts, not much longer than the sporangia of the fertile nodes. 
The stem is considerably enlarged at the fertile nodes, and, except for 
the enlarged nodes might be mistaken for the stems of the Annularias 
among which it is embedded. 

This plant differs from the genus Asterophyllites in the presence 
of short bracts or capsules in place of lông leaves. 

Horizon and Locality.— From Bed No. 1 of Hartt’s section, scarce. 


120 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ASTEROPHYLLITES Brongniart. 


In this genus the writer has retained such species described by 
Sir Wm. Dawson: as do not fall under Lepidocalamus or Annularia. By 
some authors a number of these would be included in Calamocladus, 
a genus established by Schimper to include branches of Calamites; 
the others would fall under Asterophyllum of Schimper. He distin- 
guishes this genus from the former by its having three as the funda- 
mental number of leaves in a whorl, as in Sphenophyllum, by the 
absence of a diaphragmatic ring, and by the vascular hardening of the 
nodes. These distinctions are difficult to apply in the case of the 
plant remains from the Little River group owing to their broken con- 
dition and defective preservation, and it has not been attempted here; 
Asterophyllites has been retained for both groups of species. 


ASTEROPHYLLITES LONGIFOLIUS, Sternb. Plate I, Fig. 3. 
Sternb. Brukmannia longifolia, Versuch, vol. 1, p. xxix, fac. 4 pl. Iviii, 
ieee aly 
Daws. Asterophyllites longifolia, Acad. Geol, p. 539. 
Lesq’x. Asterophyllites longifolius, Coal Flora of Penn. p. 36. 


Branches generally small, with distinct articulations, distinctly stri- 
ate; leaves numerous, very long, open, linear, flat, flexuous. 

Lesquereux says that the leaves of this species vary from three to 
ten centimetres in length, averaging seven or eight. ‘They are very 
narrow, scarcely one millimetre broad, flat, rather flexuous than rigid, 
median nerve distinct. 

There may be some question as to the reference of the examples 
from the Little River group to this species, Sir William, although he 
mentions the species in his Acadian Geology, omits it from the final 
summing up of the Devonian flora’; perhaps he had found reason to 
place it elsewhere [as leaves of Calamites transitionis ?] ¢ 

The leaves of the plant which we have referred to A. longifolius, 
Brongt., are numerous at the whorls, and, as they are somewhat flexuous, 
they cross each other on the layers of shale, but I have found no certain 
proof that they are dichotomous. The branch which Lesquereux figures 
in the Coal Flora of Pennsylvania ? expresses the simplicity of the leaf, 
and a similar absence of dichotomy holds for examples from the strata 
of the Little River group. 


1 Fossil Plants of the Devonian and U. Silurian, p. 85. 
2S Vols Cee ae Clee nome. 


[MATTHEW ] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 121 


Horizon and Locality.— Veaves of this species are common at sev- 
eral horizons in the plant beds; often (as when much flexed and 
crossed) they are not distinguishable from those on A.? fissus n. sp., 
and A. fasciculatus n. sp. 


ASTEROPHYLLITES FASCICULATUS n. sp. Plate I, Fig. 2. 


Stem striate, 6 mm. or less in diameter, internodes 30 mm. long, 
nodes obscure. Leaves in fascicles at the nodes, 5 or more in a fascicle, 
long linear sub-rigid, width less than 1 mm., length 50 mm., or more. 

This species is not separable by its leaves from A. longifolia, but 
when found in connection with the stem the different mode of 
insertion at once distinguishes them; also the nodes are different, the 
nodes in this species being very inconspicuous. 

Locality and Horizon. From the shale of Bed 7 or 8 of Hartt’s 
section at Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. 


ASTEROPHYLLITES (?) Fissus n. sp. Plate VI, Figs. 4, 5 (and 6?). 


This species has long slender sub-rigid leaves like the preceding 
species (A. longifolia), but the method of branching distinguishes it. 

Stem irregularly striate lengthwise, and the nodes at long intervals 
(60 mm. in a stem 6 mm. wide). 

The leaves are from a half to one mm. wide; they are 3 (some- 
limes 2) cleft, divisions near the stem or distant from it. The com- 
pound leaves throw off branches on each side of pseudonodes; at these 
points the leaf branches in a ternate manner, but without a true node, 
as the vascular bundles extend directly from the rachis of the leaf into 
its subdivisions. 

The rachis is flat and broader than the sub-divisions, the ultimate 
branches being long and slender, with a diameter of one to one and a half 
millimetres; they are % to 8 centimetres long, are rather thick and 
have a channel or nerve on the upper side. 

The nervation and branching thus approaches that of the frond in 
ferns, but the branches are not alternate, unless some cases of dicho- 
tomy may represent the alternate method of division. 

What appears to be a terminal shoot or fruiting spike of this 
species, is occasionally found; this has close nodes and strap-like nerved 
leaves, which grew in whorls, with six or seven leaves to a whorl. The 
nodes are about 7 mm. apart, the leaves are about 2 mm. wide and 
354 mm. long; they are distinctly 2 to 3 nerved, and have numerous 
longitudinal striæ on the intervening ridges of the leaf. The ultimate 


122 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


ends of the leaves or bracts of this spike are not certainly known, but 
no appearance of branching was observed. 

A portion of a whorl of what may be a young stem of this species 
shows three forked leaves, narrow and approximating at their base, they 
are otherwise like the elongated leaves of this species. 

The depressed nodes in some examples of this species cause them 
to resemble branches of Annularia, but I could see no annulus or ring 
at the base of the leaves. 

Horizon and Locality.—This species occurs in a shale which has 
the texture of that of Beds 7 and 8 of Hartt’s section. 


ASTEROPHYLLITES LENTUS, Dn. Plate V, Figs. 5, 6, 7. 


1868 Asterophyllites laxa, Acad. Geol., p. 539. 
1871 Asterophyllites lenta, Fossil plants of Dev. etc., p. 29, pl 5, fig 60. 


Dawson's diagnosis is as follows :— 

Stem slender, feebie, delicately striate. Leaves long, linear, one 
nerved, in whorls of about ten. 

“This species is founded on a few specimens in Professor Hartt’s 
collections. It is quite distinct in form and habit from any of the 
others.” * 

The type specimens of this species do not show more than seven or 
eight leaves in a whorl, and they are mostly erect and ascending; they 
possess a faint mid-rib, and when preserved in their full length the 
point is acuminate. 

Professor Hartt reported A. longifolia (which to him included this 
species from Bed No. 2 and doubtfully from Bed No. 1. The texture 
of the shale in which A. lenta is preserved is that of Bed 2. 

The absence of an annulus and the obscurity of the mid-rib would 
seem to indicate that this species should be retained in Asterophyllites. 

Horizon and Locality.— From Bed 2, Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. 


ASTEROPHYLLITES PARVULUS, Dn. Plate VI, Figs. 1, 2. 


Dawson, Asterophyllites parvula, Acad. Geol, p. 539, Fig. 188A. 
Dawson, Asterophyllites parvula, Foss. Plants, Dev. U. Sil. Can., p. 27. 


Dawson’s description of this species is as follows:— 
Branches slender, leaves 5 to 6 in a whorl, subulate curving up- 
wards half a line to a line long (1-24 mm.). Internodes equal to the 


2 This is the species which Sir William in his Acadian Geology described 
as A. lara. In the specimens returned to the Natural History Society by him 
it is included under A. longifolia, but the type of A. laxa@ is easily recognized 
among these by the figure given in Fossil Plants of the Devonian and U. Silu- 
rian of Canada, Plate V. fig. 60. 


Ee ee 


Neen ee SE — Eee 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 123 


length of the leaves or less, stems ribbed, with scars of verticillate 
branches at the nodes. 

The attitude of the leaves, the close joints and the stoutness of 
the rachis in the smaller branches of this plant, would lead one to 
suspect it might be a Palæostachya, but though carefully looked for, 
no sporangia were found in the axils. The branching of these little 
stems is frequent and there seem to be only 4 to 6 leaves on them at 
a node. In the larger branches there are eight leaves in a whorl and 
these are longer and the nodes further apart than in the more numerous 
small whorls; these leaves and whorls are each about 4 mm. long. 

Horizon and Locality.—From the horizon of Bed 1. Barrack Point. 
St. John. 

This species was originally collected by the author from a black 
carbonaceous shale at the south end of the city of St. John at the top 
of the Dadoxylon sandstone, and would be at about the horizon of 
Hartts Plant Bed No. 1 at Fern Ledges. Sir William stated that he 
found it in material from Carleton (probably from Hartts Bed No. 2, 
where the author also collected a closely allied, but not the typical 
form). 

Mr. Geoffrey Stead collected from this bed good examples of this 
allied form, which may be described as follows :— 


var. Plate VI, Fig. 3- 


Stem slender branched, about 4 mm. across; internodes 4-5 mm. 
long, leaves 4 mm. long, linear lanceolate, subulate, radiating from 
the node at a wide angle, having a faint mid-rib. Branches slender 
with nodes 2 mm. apart; leaflets linear, subulate, curved, ascending 
2 mm. long; becoming shorter and the nodes closer towards the tips of 
the branches. Fructification unknown. 

Collected in 1889 by Mr. G. Stead. 

Horizon and Locality Bed 2, Fern Ledges Lancaster, N.B. 

This species is retained in Asterophyllites because there is no annu- 
lus, and because of the rigid, ascending leaves. 


ANNULARIA, Brongn. 


Most of the plants described or referred to under this genus were 
originally described by Sir William Dawson under the genus Asterophyl- 
lites. 

These plants have a Jocatized distribution in the strata of the 
Little River group. Although the stems, leaves and roots of Annulana 
were found abundantly hy Professor Hartt in his bed No. 1, they have 


124 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


not until recently been gathered from below this level; and their occur- 
rence above that bed is capricious; they are found sparingly in beds 
Nos. 2 and 3, but according to Hartt are wanting from beds 4, 5 
end 6 (except one doubtful occurrence) ; however several species are 
found in Beds 7 and 8. On the eastern side of St. John Harbor 
though quite a number of Ferns, Calamites and Cordaites are found, 
Annularia (and Asterophyllites), are again conspicuously absent. 


ANNULARIA LONGIFOLIA, Brongn. 


mutation LEAVITTI, Matt. 


Bull: Nat. Hist. Soc., N-B. Vol, V. p. 396. Pl. LX. 


Stem about 3 mm. wide. Length between internodes 30-37 mm., 
about 24 leaves in a whorl; length of leaves 30-50 mm.; width 3-6 mm. 
There is a strong mid-rib and a slender, pointed tip. 

This form is an early mutation of Brongniart’s Annularia longi- 
folia and a very vigorous one, as may be seen by comparing it with 
Feistmantel’s figure.! The leaves are of about the same length, but 
in some cases are twice as wide. It is also similar to A. longifolia 
Brong. as figured by Lesquereux; his quotation of the specific char- 
acters are as follows :— 

Stem narrowly striate; leaves in whorls of eighteen to twenty- 
four, lanceolate, spatulate, more or less abruptly acuminate; median nerve 
broad, distinct; fructification in long cylindrical spikes. 

This apples to examples from the Coal Measures.  Lesquereux 
further explains that the leaves on the primary stem vary from one 
and a half to five centimetres in length and from two to three milli- 
metres in breadth. They are generally larger above the middle, gradu- 
ally narrowing downward to the point of attachment, and more rapidly 
to the point. The mid-rib is broad and deeply impressed, and the 
border of the lamina flexed or convex. Sometimes, especially upon the 
shales, the leaves are flattened by decomposition and compression. 

Our specimens from the Dadoxylon sandstone agree in most par- 
ticulars with the above description of the Carboniferous form by 
Lesquereux. The number of leaves in a whorl of the Devonian muta- 
tion is fully as great as in the Carboniferous form, for if the apparently 
missing leaves of the lower whorl in the specimen figure be allowed 
fer, there would, perhaps, be thirty leaves in a whorl. The mid-rib 
is depressed and the blade of the leaf on each side is convex. 


' Zittel’s Paleontology, Vol. III (Plants) p. 162. 


[MATTHEW ] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 125 


The great variability in the length of the leaves in a whorl of this 
species and other differences, seem to me to show its distinctness from 
A. stellata, although Mr. D. White in his description of the size of 
the leaves of A. stellata evidently merges it with that species, and in- 
cludes it in the synonymy of the latter." 


In the example of this species figured in this paper the long 
diameter of the whorl] is not at right angles to the stem and five or 
more leaves of the several whorls are wanting, being concealed in the 
stone. 


Horizon and Locality.— In the Dadoxylon sandstone, Duck Cove, 
Lancaster, N.B. 
Collected by Mr. A. \G. Leavitt. 


ANNULARIA LATIFOLIA, Dawson sp. Plate VII, Fig. 2. 


Dawson, Asterophyllites latifolia, Acad. Geol. p. 538, fig. 187, A, B, D. 


This is one of the more common species in the lower beds of 
Hartt’s section, and has been well described and illustrated by Sir 
William Dawson. 


There appear to be two forms which are found at different hori- 
zons. The type of the species is the form found in Beds 2 and 3, 
and which is figured in Acadian Geology, p. 538, fig 187, A, B, and D; 
in this two of the lateral leaves of the whorl are narrower than the 
other leaves. Sir William’s characterization of the species is as fol- 
lows :— 

Stem somewhat slender, with enlarged nodes. Leaves oblong- 
lanceolate, about thirteen in a whorl, one-nerved, longer than the inter- 
nodes. Length of leaves varying from one-fourth of an inch near the 
ends of the branches, to an inch or more. The species differs from 
A. igalioides, L. and H., in the number and form of the leaves, and 
from A. fertilis, Sternb., in the acuteness of the points of the leaves. 

In the work first above cited Sir William figured as the apex of 
the stem of this species, or the fruit (Fig. 187, B.) a compact cone- 
like body (with two whorls of leaves below it) of crowded leaves or 
bracts. In the material in my hands I find no transtition from this 
to the young barren shoot, and so favour Sir William’s second suggestion 
in reference to this object that it is a fruiting terminal; but if so, it 
is undeveloped, as the fruit in Annularia, so far as I have seen it is 
an elongated spike, resembling that of Calamites. 


1 Fossil flora of the Lower Coal Measures of Missouri p. 162 &c. 


126 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Horizon and Localily.— This form of Annularia, as described in 
the above diagnosis and in the figures cited, is found abundantly in 
Beds 2 and 3 of Hartt’s section, and very rarely in Bed.1. 

The author of this species calls attention to its resemblance to A. 
galioides, L. & H., and A. fertilis, Sternb. On reference to Mr. Robert 
Kidston’s Catalogue of Palæozoic Plants of the British Museum, it 
will be seen that he considers A. galioides as probably a small 
branchlet of A. foliosa, and this latter to be a synonym of A. 
radiata, Brongt. A. fertilis he considers synonymous with A. 
stellata, Schloth. Kidston also places under A. stellata the smaller 
example of Lesquereux, A. Jongifolia, Brongt., of the Coal 
Flora of Pennsylvania (Plate II, fig. 2), which has a general 
resemblance to Dawson’s A. latifolia, but has fewer leaves in the whorls, 
and these narrower, but he retains for Dawson’s species the latter’s 
name—latifolia. A. stellata then may be looked upon as the Carboni- 
ferous representative of Dawson’s A. latifolia. 


variety MINOR n. var. 


Dawson, Asterophyllites latifolia Foss. Plants, Dev. and U. Sil. Can. p. 28, 
pl. V. figs. 50 to 53. 


The examples of A. latifolia Dn., figured by Dawson in his Fossil 
Plants of the Devonian and U. Silurian formations of Canada are of 
this variety. It is known by its smaller size and more obtuse leaves; 
also in the terminal shoots the little leaves are spread wide, whereas 
in the typical form they retain the upward vernation later, and the 
young leaves have an ascending position, or even cling to the stem 
where they are near the tip of the shoot or branch. 

The number of leaves in a whorl is the same as in the type— 
usually twelve, though fourteen are found, and they become reduced 
in size as well as in numbers in advancing to the extremities of the 
branches. . 

I did not find the branches of this variety present the densely 
leaved point or cone figured by Sir William, but my examples of the 
terminal barren shoots are sparsely leaved, with somewhat distant inter- 
nodes. The cone-like tips depicted by that author may be undeveloped 
fertile cones or spikes (see Figs. 55 and 56—Plants of Devonian and 
U. Silurian of Canada). 

Horizon and Locality.— The home of this variety is Bed 1 of 
Hartt’s section, Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B., where it is quite common. 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 127 


ANNULARIA ACICULARIS, Dawson sp. Plate V, Figs. 1, 2, 3. 


Dawson, Asterophyllites acicularis, Acad. Geol. p. 537, figs. 194, H.H?. 
Dawson, Asterophyllites acicularis, Foss. Plants Dev. U. Sil. Can. p. 28, pl. 
V. figs. 54 to 57. 


The following is Sir William Dawson’s description of this species. 

Stem slender, striate, thickened at the nodes, leafy. Leaves one- 
nerved linear, slightly arcuate, ten to fifteen in a whorl, longer than 
the internodes. Length of leaves one-half (12 mm.) to three-fourths 
of an inch (19 mm.). 

“This plant is abundant in some layers of shale in the Little River 
group. It resembles A. foliosa, L. & H.,* but the leaves are longer, 
less curved, and more numerous in a whorl. Some of the specimens 
show that the stem was leafy as well as the branches, and I have a 
specimen, apparently the termination of the main stem, showing the 
whorls diminishing in size toward the apex.” 

In his later work on the Devonian and U. Silurian Plants of 
Canada Sir William has added the following ‘remarks: “In some of 
Mr. Hartts specimens this and the last species [A. latifolia-minor] 
are associated in such a manner on the same slabs as to suggest the 
suspicion that they may have been portions of one species. I have 
failed, however, to trace any connection or intermediate gradations; 
and on the other hand there are organs of fructification associated with 
the present species, which are quite distinct from those of the last. 
They are small oblong strobiles, with narrow leaves or scales, and some- 
times in groups of two or three together. The specimens recently 
obtained show that the species was similar in its habit of growth to 
the last [A. latifohia-minor|, and it grew apparently in the same 
places.” 

“This species in general form resembles A. equisetiformis, Brong., 
and in its fructification A. rigidus, Sternb., as figured by Geinitz. The 
species is closely allied to A. radiata, Brong., differing principally in 
the form and number of the leaves. It has a stiff or rigid stem, with 
e stout vascular axis, and though the leaves sometimes seem united at 
the base, they fell off separately, and in some beds, great numbers occur 
detached.” 

The leaf is rather thick in this species and the mid-rib only faintly 
marked. As many as sixteen leaves have been observed in a whorl. 

Horizon and Locality.— Very plentiful in Hartt’s Bed No. 1, and 
also occurring in Bed No. 2 at Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. 

In the same beds with A. acicularis occur occasional examples of 
a Palæostachya of small size, with rigid linear bracts, which we sup- 


1A synonym of A. radiata Brong. fide R. Kidston. 


128 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


PALÆOSTACHYA ACICULARIS, n. Sp. 


pose may belong to this species, but they have not been found attached 
tc its stem or branches. 

The rachis is about 14 mm. wide, and the nodes about 3 mn. apart; 
each node bears several rigid ascending lincar bracts abut 5 mm. 
long; in the axils of these bracts there is a short ascending stalk that 
bears a double spore case (or a single spiral case attached by its back 
ta the stalk). Eleven nodes of the spike are known. 

Horizon and Locality—From Bed No. 2 of Hartt’s section at 
Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B., scarce. 


ANNULARIA RECURVA, n. sp. Plate IL, Figs. 1 and 2. 


Only the smaller branches known. These are 2 mm. wide, striated, 
nodes distant (25mm. apart). Leaves in fascicles from each side of 
the stem, thick, revolute; about five groups of leaves at a node, and 
about five leaves, or less, in each group, one nerved, 2 mm. wide at 
the base and about 20 mm. long. Younger examples with leaves less 
recurved, have nodes at shorter intervals; the leaves are much fewer 
en the young shoots, about six on small terminal twigs, where they are 
3 mm. long. 

The leaves in this species are thick as in A. acicularis, but are 
shorter in proportion to the internodes, and are strongly recurved. 

Horizon and Locality— From-Bed 2 of Hartts section at Fern 
Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. 


ANNULARIA (?) LIGATA, n. sp. Plate II, Fig. 4. 


Only a few examples of this species are known. 

Stem 4 mm. wide, striate, weak, internodes rather close. Leaves 
few (4 to 5) at a node, broad, 4 mm. wide, and 25 mm. (or more) 
long, and terminating in a mucronate point; they are short lanceolate- 
linear, 5 nerved and rather abruptly pointed at the end, the nerves 
converge to the point. 

The leaves of this plant spread from a weak internode like those 
of Annularia, but the numerous veins distinguish it from others of this 
genus. It is separated from Sphenophyllum by the absence of dicho- 
tomy from the veins. It may be compared to such species as Annu- 
iaria recurva, and Asterophyllites faciculatus, in which the leaves are 
arranged in tufts or groups around the node; in this, however, it is 
the nerves that are arranged in groups. This form may be the type 
of a new genus, but the material is too defective for diagnosis. 

Horizon and Locality.— From Bed 2, Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. 
Not rare. 


[MATTHEW ] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 129 


SPHENOPHYLLUM, Brongt. 


SPHENOPHYLLUM ANTIQUUM, Dawson. Plate III, Fig. 3. 


Dawson, Sphenophyllum antiquum, Acad. Geol. p. 540, fig. 188 B. 

Dawson, Sphenophyllum antiquam Voss. Plani:, Dev. and U. Sil. Can. p. 
92; pl. VI, fig. 61, 62. 

Dawson’s description is as follows :— 

“Leaflets cuneate, one-eighth of an inch wide at the apex and 
less than one-fourth of an inch long. Nerves three, bifurcating equally 
near the base, the divisions terminating at the apices in six, obtuse 
acuminate teeth. About eight leaves in a whorl. 

“This plant was described from a few detached leaflets from the 
graphitic shale of St. John, which preserve their form and venation in 
the most wonderful perfection, though they were completely changed 
into films of shining graphite. I have since obtained from Mr. Hartt 
a specimen found in Carleton which, though the individual leaflets are 
more indistinct, show their general arrangement in whorls of eight 
or nine on a slender stem. It is a beautifully symmetrical little plant, 
quite distinct from any species of the Coal Measures.” 

I have found no better material representing this rare species than 
that which passed through Sir William’s hands and so cannot add to 
his description. 

In my examples the sinuses are not so sharply cut as in that 
figured by the author of the species, and the mucros are less acute. 

This species may be compared to 8. erosum, L. & H., as regards 
the venation, but the points at extremity of the leaf are shorter than 
in that species. 

Horizon and Locality.-— Collected by the author from the highest 
shale bed of the Dadoxylon sandstone at Barrack Point, St. John. 
Rare. 


GENERAL REMARKS. 


The division of this flora into three groups of stratigraphical value 
is based on a general survey of the species found to be present in the 
several parts of the terrane. Whether these distinctions are due to 
the actual extinction of species, or are only of ecological importance 
remains to be determined. But Hartt’s section shows that there was 
a scarcity of Equisetales in the upper part of the second subflora, and 
the same is true of the flora which occurs in the Upper Cordaite shales 
of the eastern side of St. John Harbor. 

It is also to be noted that some peculiar types of the Equisetales 
as Ramicalamus, and Lepidocalamus are specially characteristic of the 


130 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


first subfauna; but the former is also found in the Upper Cordaite 
shale east of St. John Harbor. And here again the ecological question 
comes up, for it is evident that these two forms were lovers of the 
borders of shallow ponds occurring in hollows of the river-sands which 
constituted the bulk of the Dadoxylon sandstone; they, no doubt, 
existed elsewhere, under suitable conditions both earlier and later than 
their growth on the border of these sand-enclosed pools. 

The varieties and mutations of other species noted in the above 


descriptions are, no doubt, also due to an environment specially suitable - 


to the production of the differences noted. As instances of luxurious 
growth under favourable conditions one might refer to Annularia lati- 


folia, as compared with its earlier form A. longifolia-minor, and the 


luxuriant whorls of Annularia longifolia—Leavitti as compared with 
the ordinary later growths of this species as preserved in the Coal 
Measures. 

It is an unexpected discovery to find such common species of the 


Coal Measures as Calamites Cistit and Calamites Suckovii flourish- 


ing in full perfection at this early time in Geologic History. It shows 
how much we have yet to learn respecting the first appearance and 


distribution of the denizens of the land and the estuaries, both animal . 


and vegetable, for if we have the identical plants of the Carboniferous 


time in these plant-beds, why may we not have as well the land-snails, the 


insects, the myriapods and the amphibians of Carboniferous type. 


[MaTTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 131 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 


Fig. 
Fig. 
Fig. 


Fig. 
Fig. 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


GAIA ie 


ig. 1. Asterocalamites scorbiculoides, n. sp. 1a Part of the stem, partly de- 


cortiated, showing two joints and part of two others, Natural size, 
From Bed 2 Fern Ledges, Lancaster N.B. 1.6. A leaf, after Dawson. 
See p. 102. 

Asterophyllites fasciculatus, n. sp. Part of the stem with two groups 
of leaves, Natural size. From Bed 7. Fern Ledges, Lancaster N.B. 
See p. 111. 


to 


. 3. Asterophyllites longifolius, Sternb. Part of stem showing three nodes 


and the leaves. Natural size. From Bed 3. Dadoxylon Sandstone 
Duck cove, Lancaster, N.B., See p. 110. 


. 4. Calamites Suckovii, Brongt. Part of stem showing a node and the scars 


of the leaf bases. Natural size. From Bed 2. Fern Ledges, Lan- 
caster, N.B. See p. 97. 


PEATE LL 


1. Annularia recurva, n. sp. Part of stem showing three nodes, and the 
leaves. Natural size. From Bed 2. Fern Ledges. See p. 118. 


. 2. and 3. The same, young shoots, showing the shorter and less numerous 


leaves. Natural size. From Bed 2, Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B.) 


. 4. Annularia (?) ligata, n. sp. Part of stem with three whorls of leaves. 


Natural size. From Bed 7? Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 118. 


ig. 5. Calamites geniculosus n.sp. Part of stem, mostly decorticated, showing 


leaves extending from three nodes. Natural size. From Bed? Fern 
Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 99. 


Pere Li: 


1. Calamites Cistii. Brongt. mut., n. mut. Part of lower part of the stem 
showing three nodes. Natural size. From Bed 3, Dadoxylon Sandstone, 
Duck cove, Lancaster N.B. See p. 100. 

The same. Higher part of the stem showing two nodes; ribs closer than 
in this figure. Natural size. From Bed 7. Fern Ledges, Lancaster 
N.B. See p. 100. 

3. Sphenophyllum antiquum, Dn. A single leaflet shewing the venation, &c. 

Mag. 5. From Bed (equivalent to Bed 1 of Hartt’s section) at top of 
Dadoxylon Sandstone at Barrack Point, St. John, N.B. See p. 119. 


bo 


PLATE IV. 


Lepidocalamus seutiger, Dn. Mature stem defoliated. 

2. Same. A younger stem partly defoliated. 

3. Same. Base of two young stems showing increasing space between the 
nodes. 

4. A young shoot with leaves, showing several fertile nodes. 

5. A stem showing one fertile and three abortive nodes. 


— 


Figs. 6 and 7. Young shoot, after Sir W. J. Dawson. 


Fig. 


8. Conical spike (apex of stem?)—All Natural size; No. 1 and 2 from the 
Sandstones between Beds 1 and 2 Hartt’s section, Nos. 6 and 7 from 
the plant bed No. 1: Nos. 3,4,5 and 8 from Plant Bed No. 2. See p. 
107. 
Sec. IV., 1906. 9 


132 


Fig. 9. 


Fig. 


bah 


bo 


co 


Qt 


1 


bo 


oo bo 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Variety—Stem showing two nodes, one with fruiting scales the other 
with barren bracts, Natural size. From Plant Bed No. 1. Fern 
Ledges. Lancaster, N.B. See p. 109. 


PLATE V. 


Annularia acicularis, Dn. sp. Part of stem and two whorls of leaves 

The same. A branch with leaves of the first and second rank from the 
node. 

The same. A branch with leaves of the second rank, diminishing toward 
the tip of the branch. All of the Natural size and from Bed 1. at 
Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 117. 

Palæostachya acicularis, n. sp. Part of the spike. Natural size. From Bed 
2. Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 118. 

Asterophyllites lentus, Dn. Part of stem with three whorls. Natural size. 

The same. A leaf enlarged, the wider end is the base. Mag. % Both 
after Dawson. 

The same. The type in Natural History Society collection. Shows three 
whorls of leaves. Natural size. From Bed 2. Fern Ledges, Lancaster, 
N.B. See p. 112. 


PLATE VI. 


Asterophyllites parvulus, Dn. Part of stem with branch showing leaves 
of the second and third ranks. Natural size. 
The same. Part of stem showing two whorls of leaves of the first rank, 


2 


Mag. ?. Both from highest shale bed in Dadoxylon Sandstone, Bar- 
rack Point, St. John. See p. 112. 

The same. A variety of slender growth, showing leaves of three ranks 
on branches of different sizes. Natural size. Frem Bed 2. Fern Led- 
ges, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 113 

Asterophyllites (?) fissus, n. sp. Part of stem showing pseudonodes and 
leaves from two pseudonodes. 

The same. Part of a young stem with two groups of leaves at a node. 
Natural size. 

The same? Fruiting cone or terminal shoot. All of the natural size. 
From Bed 7? Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 111. 


PLATE VII. 


Annularia longifolia, Brongn. mut. Leavitti. Part of stem showing four 
whorls. Natural size. From Bed (3) 200 feet down in Dadoxylon 

sandstone, Duck Cove, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 114. 

Annularia latifolia, Dn. sp. Three whorls showing leaves of different sizes. 

The same. Young shoot showing attitude of the leaves, and reduction 
in size toward the tip. Both Natural size. From Bed 2. Fern Ledges, 
Lancaster, N.B. See p. 115. | 

Annularia latifolia—minor, n. var. Part of stem showing three whorls of 
leaves. Natural size. 

The same. Terminal branch showing the attitude of the leaves, reduced 


in numbers and size toward the tip. Mag, ?. Both from Bed 1. Fern 
Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 116. 


[MATTHEW ] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 133 


Fig. 


I. 


bo 


on 


PLATE VIII. 


Calamites geniculosus, n.sp. Part of stem near the base, showing a 
branch at a node with subordinate branches each forking dichotomously. 
Natural size. From Bed? Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 99. 

Ramicalamus dumosus, gen. et sp. noy. Stem with several branches. Re- 
duced 144—No. 2 the main stem. No. 2b the branches. 

The same. Part of a stem showing a node having several whorls of 
leaves; these leaves of different ranks and sizes. Natural size. 

The same. A node seen from above, having several whorls of leaves, 
and an annulus at the upper whorl. Natural size. All from bed No. 
1. more than 200 below the summit of the Dadoxylon sandstone at 

._ Duck Cove, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 105. 

The same? An upper branch supposed of this species,showing two single 
whorls of leaves with traces of an annulus Natural size. From Bed 1, 
Fern Ledges, Lancaster, N.B. See p. 106. 


[MATTHEW ] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 137 


112 LE bes EE rat yh À 
RS ELA 
UT By nai a 


——— tee 


SS SS Sn 


= 
= 


PLATE II. 


À 


pu 


al 10170 
LA 
‘ Ni 
. 
= = 
i 
s 
‘ 
. +. * 
. 
: E 
( a) 
. 
5 
LA 
- Ci 
= 
‘ 
10% 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 141 


oy 
Cw 
LA TC 
/ 
| 
/ 3 6) 
J 2 
arf 


PLATE IV. 


Fe 


n° 


A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 143 


[MATTHEW] 


IP GATE) Vi 


[MATTHEW | 


A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 


PLATE VI. 


145 


[MATTHEW] 


A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 147 


PLATE VII. [Sec. IV., 1906. 


10. 


« if } j 
- ; 5 ’ 
re a tie: 4 
7 LE 
L 1 
LA i> > 
f ÿ A 
va art est 
7 
à + . 
fl 
3 
a tis 
Vi 
. 
r YJ dt 
/ 
À 
y 1 Ay ! 
i 
=. { ; 
4 ! 
5 
: 
j 
. 
, 
1 
Ÿ 
A : 
2 
gs ‘ 
x 
: ‘ 
. = L 
< 
7 \ 
5 
2 À 


ty 


[MATTHEW] A REVIEW OF THE LITTLE RIVER GROUP 149 


PLATE VIII. 


1 


if 
y L 
LA 


Section [YV.,, 1906. [ 151] Trans. R. S.C. 


XI.—On Amyzon brevipinne, Cope, from the Amyzon beds of the 
Southern Interior of British Columbia. 


By LAWRENCE M. LAMBE, F.G.S., F.R.S.C. 


Vertebrate Palæontologist to the Geological Survey of Canada. 


(Read May 23rd, 1906.) 


In examining, recently, some fossil fishes, from Horsefly river, 
B.C., presented to the Geological Survey by J. B. Hobson, Esq., C.E., 
of Vancouver, in 1895, the writer recognized a specimen of Amyzon 
brevipinne, Cope that throws additional light on the structure of this 
small species. The other specimens found by Mr. Hobson in associa- 
tion with this second known specimen of A. brevipinne belong to 
Cope’s species C. commune, the characteristic fish of the Amyzon beds 
of Colorado. 

The type of A. brevipinne, is from the North fork of the Simil- 
kameen river and was obtained, in 1888, by Dr. George M. Dawson, 
who submitted it to Professor E. D. Cope for determination. The 
original description appeared in 1894 in the Proceedings of the Aca- 
demy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, vol. xlv, p. 401, without 
illustrations, and the fossil is referred to by Dr. Dawson in his “ Report 
on the area of the Kamloops map-sheet, British Columbia,” 1895 
(Geological Survey of Canada, annual report, new series, vol. vii, p. 
76 LD, 1896). From the beds in which the type of A. brevipinne 
was discovered Dr. Dawson also ohtained in 1888 a scale that is appar- 
ently referable to A. commune, Cope, and of which no mention has 
hitherto been made. 

Other fossils from the North fork of the Similkameen obtained 
by Dr. Dawson are plants and insects which have been described by 
Sir J. William Dawson? and Dr. 8. H. Scudder? respectively. Thes2 
remains are from the shales in which the type of A. brevipinne was 
found. 

On the evidence of the plants and insects the age of the Simil- 
kameen beds is not definitely determined; the general conclusion points 
to the age as late Eocene or early Miocene. 


1Communicated by permission of the Director of the Geological Survey 
of Canada. 

Trans. Royal Society of Canada, vol. viii, section iv, 1891, p. 75. 

8 Geological Survey of Canada, Contr. to Can. Palæont, vol. ii, part }, 
Canadian fossil insects, 1895. 


152 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA ° 


Cope, in his description of A. brevipinne, and on the evidence 
of this vertebrate, assigns the age of the Amyzon beds of Colorado 
and Nevada to the Similkameen beds. 

Dr. George Dawson in his report (p. 76 B) concludes that the 
Similkameen beds “are probably of Oligocene (later Hocene) age”; 
this on the evidence of (1) the plants which Sir J. William Dawson 
regarded as referable to the Oligocene or Lower Miocene, and of (2) the 
insects (all of which, except one, were new species) and of (3) the fish 
Amyzon brevipinne on which Cope based his correlation. 

The discovery of a second specimen of A. brevipinne, this time 
in association with a well known species of Amyzon, viz., A. commune, 
Cope, a species distinctive of the Amyzon beds, is of importance, as 
it points to the probable equivalency of both the Similkameen and 
Horsefly beds of British Columbia with the Amyzon beds as developed 
in Colorado and Nevada. 

Unfortunately, the age of the Amyzon beds in the typical localities 
has not been definitely settled. Cope, in 1884, in his “ Tertiary Verte- 
brata,” p. 742, expressed himself as doubtful whether they belong to 
the Eocene or Miocene series. Later, in 1891, William B. Clark! 
placed them as low down in the geological scale as the middle of the 
Eocene. 

In 1894 Professor Cope pointed out that with the discovery of 
A. brevipinne the Amyzon beds were extended beyond the then known 
limits of South Park, Colorado and Osino, Elko county, Nevada. We 
can now add the fourth and much more northern locality of Horsefly 
river, B.C., which enters the west end of Quesnel lake from the south. 

The original description of A. brevipinne is as follows :—“ Form, 
medium; depth of body equal length of ‘head. Fin radii; D. 22-3; 
A. 8; V. probably 11, an interruption in the order of the rays making 
the location of these rays uncertain. Seventeen vertebre may be 
counted anterior to the caudal region, of which 10 are anterior to the 
anterior base of the dorsal fin. Space for two additional vertebra 
exists at an interruption of the dorsal series, so that the total number 
cf precaudal vertebre is probably nineteen, as the dorsal fin is unin- 
terrupted. Distal caudal vertebræ and fin absent. Pectoral, ventral 
and anal fins well separated from each other. Length anterior to 
caudal vertebrae, 57 mm.; length of base of dorsal fin, 23.5 mm.; depth 
at anterior base of dorsal fin, 25 mm. The species differs from those 
already described in the smaller number of dorsal fin-rays, and of 
dorsal vertebrae. The specimen on which it is based is of smaller size 


* U. S. Geol. Surv., Correlation papers, Eocene, by William Bullock Clark, 
1891. 


{LAMBE] ON AMYZON BREVIPINNE 153 


than those of most of the other species, but some of the fragments of the 
collection indicate larger individuals.” 

In the type specimen the caudal fin is missing, a few rays only 
of the anal are partially seen and the pectoral is poorly preserved. The 
Horsefly river specimen is of about the same size as the type and is much 
more perfect, giving details of the structure of all the fins, the vertebral 
column and the scales. 

The Horsefly specimen may be described as follows:—Body fusi- 
form, four times as long as high, with the greatest depth at the anterior 
end of the dorsal fin. The head, including the opercular apparatus, is 
equal to one-fourth of the entire length, thus equalling the maximum 
depth. The anterior end of the dorsal fin is above a point midway 
between the front end of the head and the posterior end of the vertebral 
column. A line drawn vertically from the beginning of the dorsal 
fin passes midway between the distal end of the pectoral fins (when 
adpressed) and the proximal end of the ventrals. The pectoral fins 
are well preserved and are nearly as long as the ventral fins which 
equal in length the front rays of the anal. The rays of the dorsal 
fin are robust and long in front and rapidly decrease in size back- 
ward, being very short and slender at the posterior end. The front 
rays equal in length about two-thirds of the base of the fin whose 
outline behind is slightly concave. The caudal fin has equal lobes 
and is forked. The anal fin has rays that decrease in size rapidly 
backward, its base being equal to about one-half the length of the 
anterior rays; when adpressed this fin does not reach the caudal. There 
is a space between the posterior end of the base of the anal fin and 
the caudal greater than the length of the base of the anal by one- 
third. The ventral and pectoral fins are short-based and of nearly 
equal size, the former when extended backward falling short of the 
anterior end of the anal fin by a short distance, the posterior ends of 
the latter being equally in advance of the ventrals. There are about 
thirty-four vertebre, of which about eighteen belong to the caudal 
region. Ribs, stout and very long. Neural and hemal spines long. 
Numerous slender intermuscular bones, directed well backward, are 
preserved anteriorly above, and in the caudal region both above and 
below, the vertebral column. Cycloid scales cover the trunk. They are 
small, three occupying a space of about 3 mm. in a row measured 
obliquely upward and backward. Their exposed surfaces show fine 
concentric lines and (?) extremely minute, close set horizontal lines. 
The fin rays are branched and jointed. The interspinous bones (prox- 
imal pterygiophores) supporting the dorsal and anal fins are well 
developed, those of the anterior part of the dorsal fin reaching far 


154 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


down between the neural spines. The dorsal fin has twenty-four rays, 
the anal twelve, each with an equal number of supports. There are 
about twelve rays to the ventral fins and fourteen to the pectorals. 
In advance of the ventral fin is a conspicuous, long, rather narrow 
bone, the basipterygium. The bones supporting the pectorals cannot 
be made out, nor are the bones of the head satisfactorily seen. Both 
fins of the pectoral and pelvic pairs are preserved in the specimen. 
The caudal fin is supported by eight hæmal and three neural arches, 
Of the former the posterior seven (hypural bones) are broadened in 
a vertical plane. A few rays appear to be attached directly to the 
posterior end of the urostyle on its lower side above the last hypural 
bene. The rays of the caudal are jointed throughout their length 
and branched distally. The lateral line appears to be represented 
above the vertebral column anteriorly by a double longitudinal series 
of faint, short, horizontal raised lines. 


MEASUREMENTS. 


Of specimen of Amyzon brevipinne from Horsefly river. 


MM 
Total length (312 inches).. eer idl eve) cas) ohn 
Length of head, including operat ne PS 
Depth at anterior end of dorsal fin.. 24 2: 2. ..:..'.. ) ee 
Depth‘ at base of caudal fim... LI 4.) 22 as 6 
Length of anterior ray of dorsal fin. .:) 5.) ..'). ». .. [a 
Length of base of dorsal fin.. .. .. .. : . LOS 
Distance of posterior end of base of dora fn on oo 048 
Length of anterior ray of anal fin.. ..... .. .. .. .. 1) 
Length of base of anal fin .. .. .. . mre RE 
Distance of posterior end of base of anal i foun Gael à AT © 
hensth of ventral fin .. 2.703 +." RIRE 
Distance of base of vertral fin frome antonio and of anal aaa es aes 
Length ‘ot pectoral: fim 3b.) she!) 
Distance of base of pectoral fin from tines of eaten ane 10800 
Length of vertebral column. : 24°... 52002 EEE OR 


The specimens from the southern interior of British Columbia in 
the Museum of the Geological Survey, pertaining to the genus Amyzon 
are :— 


NORTH FORK, SIMILKAMEEN RIVER: obtained by Dr. G. M. Dawson 
in 1888. 


Amyzon brevipinne, Cope, type specimen. 


er 


: [LAMBE] ON AMYZON BREVIPINNE 185 


Amyzon commune, Cope: scale agreeing in size and ornamentation 
with scales of largest specimen of this species from Horsefly 
river. 


Near TRANQUILLE, KAMLOOPS LAKE: obtained by Dr. G. M. Dawson 
in 1890. 
Amyzon commune?, Cope: three fragments showing portions of 
the skeleton. 


HORSEFLY RIVER: obtained by J. B. Hobson, Esq., in 1895. 

Amyzon brevipinne, Cope: a specimen more perfect than the type 
and described and figured in this paper. 

Amyzon commune, Cope: three specimens; the largest with the 
scales well preserved, showing all the fins, but with the head 
missing (figured in this paper); a second with the pectoral 
and dorsal fins and the supports of the ventral and anal fins 
preserved, but without the caudal fin and the anterior part 
of the head; the third lacking the head, but with the pectoral, 
ventral, anal and dorsal fins, and the base of the caudal fin, 
preserved. The second and third specimens show the scales 
and have the ribs, fin supports, intermuscular bones, etc., well 
defined. 


The finding of remains of A. commune in association with those 
of A. brevipinne in the Similkameen beds is a confirmation of the 
correctness of Cope’s correlation of the Similkameen beds with the 
Amyzon beds of Colorado and Nevada, and the discovery of a fish fauna 
common to the Similkameen and Horsefly beds points to the probable 
synchronism of the fish-bearing beds of these two localities. 
The rocks near Tranquille, from which the other Amyzon remains were 
obtained, should also, with little doubt, be referred to the age of the 
Amyzon beds. 


156 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


PLATE I. 


Figure 1.—Amyzon brevipinne; specimen from Horsefly river, B.C., 
natural size. 


Figure ?.—Tihe same specimen reproduced from a photograph; twice 
the natural size. 


Figure 3.—Amyzon commune; largest specimen from Horsefly river, 
reproduced from a photograph; natural size. The depth 
of the trunk, owing to compression, is exaggerated in the 
fossil 


[LAMBE] TERTIARY FISHES FROM BRITISH COLUMBIA. PLAT 


ai 
Ch 
, 
oer 
1 
) 
5 
at 
[nl 
| 
ae 
i; 
_ 
% 
} 
i 


F LL 


Section IV., 1906. Lis7Z ] Trans. R. S. C. 


XII. The Nodule Organism of the Leguminosae —Its Isolation, 
Cultivation, Identification and Commercial Application. 


By F. C. Harrison, Bacteriological Laboratories, The Macdonald Col- 
lege, Ste. Anne de Bellevue, Que., 


and B. BarLow, Bacteriologicai Department, Ontario Agricultural 
College, Guelph, Ont. 


(Read May 23rd, 1906.) 


We shall endeavour to present in as brief a form as possible, the 
results of some two years’ study on the nodule organism of the Legum- 
inosae. This work was primarily undertaken from the economic stand- 
point, but a number of interesting scientific data were obtained, and 
are incorporated in this paper. ‘The more practical aspects of the 
subjects have already been published as a bulletin by the Ontario 
Department of Agriculture, under the title of “ Co-operative Experi- 
ments with Nodule-forming Bacteria” (Toronto, March, 1906). 

The various subject headings of this paper are as follows :— 

1. Occurrence of nodules. 

2. Papilionaceae, from which Ps. radicicola has been isolated. 

3. Media for the culture of Ps. radicicola and for the growing of 

legumes. 

4. Isolation of Ps. radicicola. 

5. Colony formation. 

6. Growth of Ps. radicicola on various media. 

7. Morphology. 

8. Staining reactions. 

9. Viability. 
10. Cultures of Leguminosae in flasks containing ash-maltose-agar. 
11. Preparation and distribution of nitro-cultures. 
12. Co-operative experiments. 


1. Occurrence of Nodules— We have examined upwards of thirty 
foreign economic species of Leguminosae of the sub-order Papilionace, 
exclusive of some twenty-four species and varieties of the genus Vicia, 
also a number of native species. Nodules were formed on the roots 
of all these with the exception of two species,— Cicer arietinum and 
Galega officinalis. The peculiar spongy white roots of Galega were 
examined by crushing and staining, but no bacteria were found, and 
there is, of course, the probability that the appropriate variety of Ps. 
radicicola was not present in the soil. 


158 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


No nodules were found on the roots of Gimnocladus, Gleditschia 
or Cercis canadensis belonging to the sub-order Caesalpineae, but mycor- 
hiza were present in all cases. 

2. The following is a list of Papilionaceae from which Ps. radicicola 
has been isolated :— 

Trifolieae— Medicago sativa, Melilotus alba, Trifolium incarna- 
tum, T. pratense, T. repens. 

Hedysareae — Desmodium Pn aR D. canescens, D. nudi- 
florum. 

Vicieae— Vicia villosa, Lathyrus sativus, Pisum sativum. 

Phaseoleae— Glycina hispida, Apios tuberosa, Phaseolus vulgaris. 

3. Media— Media are required for the bacteria and for the 
leguminous plants. It is desirable that these be common media, that 
is, serving at once for the growth of the leguminous host and the bac- 
terial parasite. These media should be nitrogen free or nitrogen poor 
so as to introduce and compel the fixation of atmospheric nitrogen. 
In other words, they should be such as best to introduce the specific 
functional activity. It is well also in preparing media that the mater- 
ials be few and easily available, and the processes be simple and rapid. 
The media used in these experiments meet these requirements and offer 
additional advantages. 

Green plants and bacteria contain and require for their growth 
certain elements, and most of these elements are present in due propor- 
tion in the ashes of burned plants. For example, wood ashes contain 
phosphates, sulphides and chlorides of potash, soda, lime, magnesium 
and iron. Wood ashes contain no nitrogen. Water and air may be 
had free from combined nitrogen and they furnish the rest of the 
essential elements — oxygen, hydrogen and free nitrogen. Green plants 
get their energy for growth from the sunshine and the nitrogen fixing 
bacteria get their energy for growth indirectly from sunshine, when 
they are living within their host. When living independent of their 
host, a source of energy growth must be supplied the Bacteria. Sugar 
affords such a force of energy and is free from nitrogen. Some of 
these relations are indicated in the table below. 


Essentials for Growth. 


Green plant alone. Bacteria alone. In association. 
Wood ashes. Wood ashes. Wood ashes. 
Water. Water. Water. 

Air. Air. Air. 
Combined N. Sugar. Sunshine. 


Sunshine. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 159 


Our medium record shows (see tabulated summary of media) that 
during the past two years we have made up some twenty-five lots of 
ash-maltose-agar, varying in amount from a few hundred cubic centi- 
metres to 8,000 c.c. in a single lot. The larger lots were used for 
preparing nitro-cultures for distribution. We have also made seven 
lots of ash agar with sucrose or with sucrose or maltose and acid potas- 
sium phosphate. 

Some twenty lots of liquid media have been prepared as follows :— 
Ash maltose water, 15 lots; ash sucrose water, 2 lots; ash water with 
sucrose or maltose and acid potassium phosphate, 4 to 2 parts per 100, 
5 lots. 

Pseudomonas radicicola from ten different species of Leguminosae 
have been inoculated and grown in most of these media, and notes 
have been kept of the cultures. Most of the cultures were isolated 
in the spring and summer of 1904 and have been kept in stock since 
that date. 

Sugar-ash-water for Ps. radicicola.— By referring to the tables of 
media, it will be seen that the materials and proportions have been 
varied. Maltose was found to be more favourable than dextrose or 
sucrose. Ashes from maple wood, from mixed beech and maple wood, 
from elm and from tamarack were found equally favourable. The 
ashes were obtained fresh and passed through a fine sieve — and some- 
times reburned to consume remaining particles of carbon— and were 
then stored in glass jars until used. The distilled water was con- 
densed on tin and stored in glass. Water from artesian wells was also 
used and was found equally favourable. 

Methods of preparation.— The bacteria were found to grow as well, 
or better, in a filtrate from ashes as when the whole of the insoluble 
residue was retained and so a filtrate was generally used. For 1,000 
parts of cold water take 2.5 to 25 parts by weight of wood ashes, shake 
together and filter at once or after half an hour; or heat together 
to boiling, boil a minute and filter. The filtrate should be almost 
colourless and more alkaline as the amount of ash and as the time 
before filtration is increased. To 1,000 parts of the filtrate add 5 to 
20 parts of maltose, sucrose or dextrose, maltose being best; heat in 
flowing steam and boil a moment over the flame or heat in the auto- 
clave for 20 minutes or more at 10 pounds steam pressure. The 
medium will vary from faintly alkaline to phenolphthlein to alkaline 
—6°, according to the amount of ash used. The colour will vary 
from a yellowish tint to a deep amber, being darker as more ash is 
used and as the amount of heating is increased. If desired, acid 
potassium phosphate, 2 to 5 parts per 1,000, may be added at any 


160 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


stage of the preparation, but best, perhaps, after adding the sugar. 
The addition of this chemical makes the medium lighter in colour and 
strongly acid to litmus and to phenolphthalein. 

A living culture of Ps. radicicoia will usually grow well in one 
or all of the following three liquid media, the preparation of which 
can be varied as before indicated. Such media can be sterilized in 
flasks and stored indefinitely. 

To 1,000 c.c. of distilled water add 15 grams of wood ashes, heat 
in flowing steam, boil a minute and filter. 

To 400 c.c. of the filtrate add 4 grams maltose. 

To 200 c.c. of the filtrate add 100 c.c. distilled water and 3 grams 
maltose. 

Heat these three solutions half an hour in flowing steam and boil 
a moment over the flame, or else heat for 10 minutes at 10 pounds 
steam pressure in the autoclave. Filter clear, tube each lot separately, 
and sterilize in flowing steam or in autoclave at 10 pounds steam pres- 
sure for 10 to 20 minutes. 

Sugar-ash-agar for Ps. radicicola.— The materials and methods of 
preparation are, in general, the same as for the liquid media except 
that agar is used in addition. The sugar may vary from 4 to 20 parts 
per 1,000, the ash from 0 to 50 parts per 1,000, the agar from 1.5 
to 15 parts per 1,000, and the acid potassium phosphate may be omitted 
or used, from 5 to 10 parts per 1,000. It is best to filter the ashes 
from the water before adding the remaining ingredients and to dissolve 
the agar in the ash water before adding the maltose. If acid phos- 
phate is added at all it should be only when 10 parts or more of ashes 
per 1,000 are used, and then after adding the maltose. In making up 
a series of agar media the several parts can be prepared separately in 
such proportions that, on mixing determined volumes and adding vari- 
able quantities of water, media will result having the desired composi- 
tions. 

The three media of the following compositions were found favour- 
able:—Water, 100 parts; maltose, 1 part; agar, 1 part; and the soluble 
portion of ashes, 1 part, 1.5 parts and 2.5 parts respectively, prepared 
as below. 

Solution “ A ”—Water 100 parts, maltose 2 parts, agar 2 parts, 

heat together until dissolved. 

Solution “ B”—Water 100 parts, ashes 5 parts, boil and filter. 


Solution “ A.” Solution “ B.” Water. 
100 40 60 
100 60 40 


100 100 210 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 161 


Heat each lot in steam and boil over the flame or heat in the 
autoclave at 10 pounds steam pressure, filter, tube and sterilize in steam, 
cr in autoclave at 10 pounds steam pressure for 20 minutes to 5 hours. 
The media improve with age. Agar media filter slowly through filter 
paper, and we prefer to filter through absorbent cotton by means of a 
vacuum pump. 

Agar media for Leguminosae.— Water-culture fluids were not tried, 
but other workers have stated that nodules are not formed beneath the 
surface of liquids. Crushed quartz with water-culture fluids did not 
fully meet all requirements. Gelatin media were found favourable for 
growth, but as gelatin itself is highly nitrogenous, it was unsuitable for 
experiments in nitrogen fixation. We then tried agar and found it 
suitable in almost every respect. 

Ash-maltose-agar sufficient for 12 flask cultures of Leguminosae 
may be conveniently prepared as follows :— To 4,500 c.c. of distilled or 
tap water and 18 grams of wood ashes, heat in steam, boil one minute 
and filter through absorbent cotton by means of a vacuum pump or 
through filter paper. To 4,000 c.c. of the clear filtrate add 40 grams 
of agar and 16 grams of maltose, heat in steam until dissolved, boil 
a minute and filter as above. To each of 12 Erlenmeyer flasks of 
1,500 c.c. capacity add 250 grams of the filtered medium, plug with 
cotton and sterilize in flowing steam one-half to one hour on each of 
three successive days, or better, in the autoclave at 10 pounds pressure 
for one-half to one hour. After sterilization, tie a piece of parchment 
paper, wet with mercuric chloride solution 1-1000, over the mouth of 
the flask, attach a card to receive data and weigh each flask. It will 
be seen that each flask contains approximately 250 grams of water, 
2.5 grams of agar, 1 gram of maltose and the soluble part of 1 gram 
of ashes. As soon as the flasks are sterilized some sterile litmus solu- 
tion may be added to some of them by means of a slender pipette 
thrust between the glass and the cotton. The medium remaining after 
preparing the 12 flasks may be tubed and used as a medium for Ps. 
radicicola to furnish cultures for inoculating the flasks and for isolating 
the cultures from the nodules which develop. Such tubes are useful 
also in germinating the leguminous seeds. 

The ash-maltose-agar in Erlenmeyer flasks has many advantages 
over quartz and water-culture fluids. It is true that the quartz medium 
may be made nitrogen free, but the seed itself is highly nitrogenous 
and the ash-maltose-agar is a nitrogen-poor medium, the 1 per cent 
agar containing very little combined nitrogen. The agar medium con- 
tains only 1 per cent of inert material, 2.e., agar; but the crushed 
quartz, if saturated, contains about 60 per cent by volume of inert 


162 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


material, i.e., quartz. The agar medium is transparent, so that the 
roots are at all times visible and growth and nodule formation may be 
observed from the start. The quartz is opaque and the roots cannot 
be seen except where they press again the sides and bottom of the 
flask. The agar medium is a firm jelly with a glossy surface and 
the growth of Ps. radicicola can be measured or observed on the surface 
or as it accompanies the roots. Contaminations are easily detected, 
because of the formation of visible colonies. The quartz medium is 
a mixture that may be regarded as a liquid medium, yet the growth 
of Ps. radicicola or any possible contamination cannot be directly 
observed nor detected. Both afford good support for root and stem; 
both are favourable for the growth of Leguminosae and for the form- 
ation of nodules. In the quartz medium, root hairs form in those 
portions which are not saturated, and in the agar medium root hairs 
form on roots which creep over the surface of the agar but are but 
little developed on roots which penetrate the agar. 

Growing the plant within a glass flask affords several advantages 
and offers few technical difficulties. It makes possible the most rigid 
pure culture methods; it requires no attention beyond the initial pre- 
paration; that is, the medium does not require to be restored nor 
renewed, even during a period of growth of eight months. 

In these flask cultures the Plant is nourished as follows :— Sun- 
shine, the energy for growth, comes through glass walls of the flask; 
the essential ash elements are supplied in the form of a filtrate from wood 
ashes, the oxygen, carbon dioxide and free nitrogen, pass in and out 
through the cotton plug in the mouth of the flask; water is abundantly 
supplied from the agar jelly, which consists of about 98.5 per cent 
water. The plant, being within the flask, the water of evaporation 
and transpiration is nearly all condensed on the glass and returned to 
be used over and over again. In other experiments where the stems 
and leaves were freely exposed to the outer air, the water of transpir- 
ation was lost and, consequently, the medium was soon exhausted. 
Before entering the host plant, the culture of Ps. radicicola is nourished 
in like manner, but gets its energy of growth from the oxidation of 
the malt sugar supplied in the medium. 


163 


NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] 


| Ps eee Sah ale a er de med 

| 01 DANS PT ET Pep ace ate en 

a ate | an : û 1 Gh a5° Be aliases Seto cre: De 

; cz | i ï HE . z PU ENET RE ne AN dr UE rie 

aan et | et oT 2 i ar | coer a. ri ER VE rosy 

Se = RENE sen mn ee ay unipet 

OOL 438M der 

o8I + | + + | nG°—| o6— | 909N | NON oG— ||b69+ lo66+ SOLE LG sis UE PE ES ‘ula187,d4 OL 

Ce Are |e ar ats | CS 6S = ARON, RE NN of— |/o8Et |o86t | “ATV Lt TS FE i= A ate ok oe SnUgUT OL 

a dr ete AE al ; 5 Paice ein ON ON RE Se Og SEH 

5 : ; EE : a an EU eee oe -ggor9ng 

1 [co | z aie ns ans ; , NE PE nae SOU 

2 |] nn FETE nee, = 1 AE i pores es ar 

ie ie 96 | T 97 | PE gr OF bP ; SE 0g GP GP cP €& GE EE || Sea Sea es ae tag ee cea Ee “YU MIPoN 
LNAO Utd | HVOV ANON UVOV 


OOT 1978 MA 


0G U Te & SY49018) 


‘pipayy Jo hapwmwungy pajy)nqgv,7, 


164 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Distilled Water 100. 


Maltose. 1 per cent. 


| 
AGAR NONE | AGAR 1 PER CENT. 


Stock R Reaction Ash Ash Reaction Stock R 
52 US 0 0 130 53 
| 
54 ie DU UD 5 22/90 55 
| 
56 —9,5° D Sih 20 ne 57 
58 22130 1.5 1.5 pe 59 
60 Me 2.0 2.0 9 61 
| 
| 
62 — 6° 2,5 | 2.5 — 2° 63 
68 Faintly Alk. 0.5 | 3 — 8° 64 
73 mL DE | 4 13° 65 
79 DR 0.5 5 Site 66 


Agar 1.5 per cent. 


1 _5° 69 
1.5 _7e 70 
0.5 Lure 71 tap W. 


1.0 Alk. 72 tap W. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 165 


ASH I, MALTOSE 1, Acar I. ASH—MALTOSE— WATER 
Water Reaction | Stock Water Ash | Maltose | Reaction | Stock 
[Sl mere Huet | mA 

DO RAD MISES RS LOUE 87 100 diet. || 40:52) 0005 (1085? R 90 
Re | 

OO OA UN PR 07 0100 dist. | ‘0.5 0.5 —0.2° R 91 

100dist. | —2° | R98 100 tap 1 1 te R 92 

bodies AU. ||) 100 100 tap 1 1 Pau R 93 

100 dist. | R 100 100 dist. 1 1 Neut. R 95 
| ae ae | 

100 tap Neut. R 101 100 tap 1 1 ae R 96 

100 tap que R 102 | 


4. Isolation of Ps. radicicola.—- The plant is dug and the roots 
washed under the tap, a nodule is removed with forceps, washed under 
the tap and immersed in about 20 ce.c. of the following solution :— 


Efydrochloric acid, C..P:spser. 1.20..... 2.0" 6.6. 
Mercuniclehlomde crystals" >. 4.0.4 4. 1 gram. 
Winer distilled on shapi ais. hr Luce. 500 -e.c:; or 1,000 ce: 


The nodule sinks or floats, according to the species of plant from 
which it is obtained. In case it floats it must be held beneath the 
surface by means of a glass rod. It may remain immersed for 2 to 
3 minutes, but not for more than five minutes if it is small. Large 
nodules like those from the Soy bean may remain in the solution for 
half an hour. 

The nodule is then taken in flamed and cooled forceps and placed 
between folds of filter paper moistened with the same solution, which 
removes the excess of the solution. The nodule is then held with 
flamed and cooled forceps and a gash is cut in its side with a hot, 
chisel-edge knife-needle. This needle is made by sealing a short, stiff, 
iridium-platinum needle in a glass rod and hammering and filing the 
end to a chisel edge. The needle is again flamed and, when cool is 
thrust into the gash in the side of the nodule end and, by forcing it 
in, the nodule is broken open. The needle is flamed, cooled and thrust 
into the nodule in the middle of the broken surface. It is gently 


Sec. IV., 1906. 11 


166 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


rotated and a sensible quantity of the crushed bacteroidal tissue adheres 
to its point. The needle is then touched into a drop of sterile water 
in a sterile Petri dish until the water is turbid. The needle is thrust 
again into the nodule and touched into a small drop of water on a clean 
cover glass. In this way three cover glasses are prepared and spread, 
to be stained later. Each of several sterilized Petri dishes receives 
first a drop of sterile water and then the drop is inoculated with a 
loopful, or more, of the turbid suspension from the first Petri dish. 
The agar media, previously melted and near the temperature of solidifi- 
cation, are poured into the several Petri dishes in such a manner that 
the suspension and the medium are mixed throughout and yet some- 
what unequally. Then the colonies which develop may be crowded in 
parts of the plate but will be well isolated in other parts. If desired, 
suitable gelatin media may be poured into some of the plates. These 
are interesting for study, but cultures for propagation and inoculation 
are taken from the nitrogen-poor agar plates only. When the media 
have solidified, the plates are marked and incubated at 20° C. 

The films on the cover glasses are now fixed lightly in the flame 
and stained (see Staining reactions). 

5. Colony Formation.— The colonies of the Ps. radicicola in ash- 
sugar-agar media vary with the plant from which the cultures are made 
and with the composition of the media, yet they are characteristic. 
Colonies may appear in some plates in three or four days at 20° C., 
but the plates made from the same nodules at the same time, but in 
different media. 

The deep colonies are circular, elliptical, or triangular with rounded 
corners. Elliptical colonies often present two opposite lateral-rounded 
outgrowths. The outline is sharply defined, but deep colonies some- 
times appear as irregular patches. The colonies are granular, white 
by reflected light, and brownish by transmitted light. Deep colonies 
do not grow so large as surface colonies, but deep colonies may grow 
1.5 mm. to 2 mm. long and half as wide. Submerged colonies may 
rise to the surface and then they take on the form and appearance of 
surface colonies, except that they show at the centre the form of the 
colony from which they arose. 

The surface colonies are raised, round, wet, entire, shining and 
white. They appear like drops of melted paraffin, at first gleaming 
and transparent, then translucent, then gradually. more turbid and 
opaque. At first they are watery, then more mucilaginous, and then 
may become so highly viscid as to draw out in long threads when 
touched with the needle. When the surface colonies become viscid the 
deep colonies do also. After surface colonies appear they grow steadily 


r 


—_ = 


[HARUSON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 167 


for a long time, especially if well separated. Surface colonies may 
attain a diameter of 1 mm. to 2 mm. in five days, and 3 mm. to 4 
mm. in fifteen days. After some weeks the period of active growth 
ceases, the colonies retain their general shape, but sink and become 
thin and flat on account of evaporation of the water from the mucilage 
in which the cells lie. Under the microscope, the surface colonies 
appear more finely granular than the deep colonies. 

We have failed to detect the presence of any organism except Ps. 
radicicola in leguminous nodules. Plate cultures from a nodule in 
special media and in ordinary gelatin and agar media of the laboratory, 
develop pure culture of Ps. radicicota or else remain sterile. It is 
true that other colonies, mostly moulds, occasionally appear, but they 
cre almost always surface colonies, although they are never numerous, 
and are not of the same kinds in plates from the same nodule. Fur- 
ther, we have frequently made streak cultures direct from the interior 
of nodules on inclined gelatin and agar media, and such cultures are 
negative or else develop pure cultures of Ps. radicicola, according to the 
medium. 

Isolation of colonies.— The needle is touched into a colony, then 
thrust into agar medium in a Freudenreich flask. Hanging drop and 
stain preparations are then made from the same colony. 

6. Growth of Ps. radicicola on ash-maitose-agar.— The medium 
may be allowed to solidify while the tubes or Freudenreich flasks are 
standing upright and later are inoculated by thrusting the needle into 
the middle of the agar. In two or three days at 25° C., there is 
raised, circular, transparent, wet-shining growth spreading on the sur- 
face from the point of inoculation, and a filiform growth along the 
needle puncture. This filiform growth increases and many fine fila- 
ments may radiate from it horizontally in the agar. These filaments 
are shorter toward the bottom. 

The surface growth increases, but maintains its sharp circular 
outline, and in four to twelve days spreads over the whole surface of 
the agar as a white, partly transparent, thick, mucilaginous or slimy 
laver, with a wet-shining surface. The growth usually draws out in 
a fine thread when touched with a needle. In favourable media the 
growth is copious and in seven days may increase to a depth of 6 mm. 
over a surface of 10 mm. in diameter. After some months, this layer 
is thinner and denser according to the evaporation from its surface, 
but in Freudenreich flasks, or in tubes sealed with sealing wax, there 
is little change. Cultures on ash-maltose-agar in Freudenreich flasks 
remain alive for more than a year at room temperature (see viability). 


168 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


On streak cultures, on inclined ash-maltose-agar, in two or three 
days there is a moist, shining, transparent growth along the line of 
inoculation. As this growth increases, it is transparent at the edges, 
becoming gradually translucent, then white and opaque towards the 
middle. It is at first watery, then mucilaginous, and it flows down 
the inclined surface of the agar by its own weight, and accumulates 
as a white, slimy growth at the bottom. It spreads laterally and 
forms a broad band or may cover the whole surface of the agar. At 
room temperature growth is a little slower, but otherwise as at 25° C. 

Growth in ash-mallose-water media.—In January, 1905, a, series 
of liquid media were inoculated with pure cultures isolated from nodules 
of red clover, alfalfa, vetch, bean and soy bean. The inoculated media 
were kept at 25° C. and observed daily, and the following conclusions 
were drawn: Some growth takes place in distilled water with 1 per 
cent of maltose, but such a medium is not favourable. The liquid 
becomes turbid, sediment forms which is not ropy but which diffuses 
on shaking, and a thin, wide ring of growth forms on the glass down- 
wards from the surface. Media made in the manner already described, 
with distilled water, 100 parts; maltose, 1 part; and ashes, $, 1 and 13 
parts respectively, and varying from neutral to alkaline —3°, are 
parts respectively, and varying from neutral to alkaline —3°, are fav- 
ourable. Growth begins usually in three or four days and increases 
visibly for fifteen days. The liquid becomes turbid and the turbidity 
continues and increases to a thick white layer. On shaking with a 
circular motion, this growth rises in the liquid and twists or coils on 
itself. It is not easily diffused by shaking, and again settles down 
when left standing. There may be strings of slimy growth suspended 
on the body of the liquid. A ring of growth appears on the glass in 
usually nine or ten days just beneath the surface of the liquid and 
gradually increases to a thick, slimy ring which may break in pieces 
and fall to the bottom and again form at the surface. A partial film 
may form. 

Media made with distilled water, 100 parts; maltose, 1 part; and 
ashes, 2 parts and 24 parts, respectively, are less favourable. The body 
of the liquid remains clear and a slimy white growth takes place at 
the bottom in fifteen days or more. 

in larger flask cultures, a ring forms and an especially copious 
growth spreads over the surface. From the lower side of this mucila- 
ginous film many delicate slimy filaments hang down some of which 
reach and unite with the copious slimy sediment. 

7. Morphology of Ps. radicicola. The cells from colonies are min- 
ute or small rods, single or in twos, often swollen at one end or near the 


- 


{HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 169 


middle, often bent, more rarely branched. They are swiftly and actively 
motile, darting, whirling and tumbling. In young colonies nearly all 
the cells are motile, in older colonies fewer, and as long as the colony 
continues to grow some motile cells may usually be seen. The cell con- 
tents are not uniform, but denser protoplasm appears in plates and bands, 
as in the branched cells direct from the nodule. This can be observed 
in the living cells, but is best seen on staining. In this manner, several 
surface colonies and as many deep colonies from each plate are isolated 
and studied and the growth from each colony will be like that from 
the others on the same media. Colonies developed in plate cultures 
from pure cultures kept in stock as readily as from the nodules and 
they are the same in appearance. 

The morphology of the bacteria taken directly from the nodules 
varies with the species of legume, the conditions of infection and growth, 
the age and size of the nodule, and the portion of the nodule examined. 
These bacterial cells are so characteristic, so varied and so beautiful in 
form as to be pleasing objects of study. In plants of the tribes Phaseo- 
lee (see photographs 6, 17, 23) Hedysareæ and the Genisteæ, the bac- 
teria are mostly small rods with comparatively few branching and irregu- 
lar cells. In plants of the tribes Trifoliæ (see photographs 1, 2, 3, 4, 
5, 8, 9, 10, 13, 15, 16) and Vicieæ (see photographs 12, 13, 14, 18, 20, 
21, 22), branching in irregular forms prevail. The simple rods general- 
ly but not always prevail in young nodules and in small nodules, where- 
as branched and irregular forms are more often observed in older and 
larger nodules. The proximal part of the nodule, the part first formed, 
may contain simple rods mainly, and the distal part, where growth is 
taking place rapidly, may contain simple rods and many branched and 
twice branched forms. Where general infection of the leguminous crop 
occurs, the bacteria may be mostly rods or mostly branched forms the 
same as in nodules (see flask cultures and photograph 22). 

Hanging drop preparations from pure cultures on agar and liquid 
media have been observed at different stages of growth. From agar 
cultures the cells are short or longer rods, mostly single but some are 
joined end to end in twos with rounded ends, often larger at one end, 
often bent or curved or swollen at the middle. Internally, the proto- 
plasm is seen to be of unequal density and shows bands or plates of dens- 
er protoplasm with more transparent portions between. The cells are 
swiftly and actively motile, darting, whirling and tumbling; they are 
especially active from young cultures and when the hanging drop is first 
made. In preparations from older cultures, fewer motile cells are seen, 
but some may be seen in motion as long as the culture shows any in- 
crease in growth. 


170 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The heavy ring of growth at the surface and also the film consists 
of small rods bound by the mucilage which they excrete. When a piece 
of growth is teased in water and examined, some swiftly motile cells are 
seen and some rotate slowly or rapidly without liberating themselve: 
from the entangled slime. (See photograph 34). 

The turbid liquid from the body of the culture shows some swiftly 
motile cells and others not in motion, also cells of irregular form, elong- 
ated, bent or curved with one end swollen or forking. Twice and thrice 
branched cells occur (see photographs 26 and 53). Extravagant forms 
with the branches swollen or elongated are not infrequent (see photo- 
graphs 29 and 34). 

The shmy sediment consists of cells entangled in a mesh of slime 
threads. Small rods occur but branched and irregular forms usually 
prevail. 

8. Staining Reactions. Flagella Stain. Take a loop of the muci- 
laginous or viscid growth from an agar culture two days to several 
months old and spread it on a clean slide, lashing it out in slender ton- 
gues, let the film dry in air without killing or fixing, flood the film a 
moment with a saturated alcoholic solution of gentian violet, wash unde 
the tap, dry between folds of filter paper and examine with the oil im- 
mersion lens. The mucilage in which the cells lie will be found deeply 
and evenly stained and the bacteria scarcely stained at all, so that the 
preparation presents the appearance of a photographic negative. The 
unequal density of the protoplasm of the cells is clearly seen, as indeed 
it is in the living cells when examined in a hanging drop. (see photo- 
graphs 27 and 31). 

The single polar flagellum is clearly demonstrated by this stain since 
it, like the protoplasm of the cells, refuses the stain, and so it appears as 
a clear or uncoloured streak in the surrounding, deeply stained, mucilage. 
The flagella are best seen at the margins of the film and in thin places. 
{See photographs 27 and 31). In parts of the film where the culture 
is thickly spread, the mucilage is intensely stained and the flagella being 
slender and enveloped deeply in the mucilage, are not distinguished. 
In these parts, however, the cells are beautifully contrasted with the dark 
background and their internal structure is clearly shown. Saturated al- 
coholic solution of methyl blue, night blue or fuchsin may be used in 
place of saturated alcoholic gentian violet. A film prepared and stained 
as above, then flooded an instant with Lugol’s solution, is still more in- 
tensely and darkly stained. 

Young agar cultures stain well with carbolic fuchsin. The muci- 
lage is not deeply stained, but the cells take the stain well and show the 
irregular density of their protoplasm by its banded appearance. If th 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 171 


film is killed and fixed before staining, the mucilage shrinks away from 
the cells, leaving a narrow clear space, giving an appearance as if the 
cells were capsulated. 

A Stain to demonstrate the nature of the Mucilage. Spread a loop- 
ful of a mucilaginous culture from agar or from a liquid culture on a 
slide, dry in the air, flood an instant with water, and immediately flood 
with some stain as gentian violet or fuchsin. The mucilage of the air- 
dried film takes up water and when the stain is added the mucilage con- 
tracts and assumes certain patterns or figures composed of bands and 
strands of fine and coarser, intricately interlaced filaments. These are 
sometimes arranged in wreaths like smoke in form and sometimes in 
quite regular hexagonal figures, (see photographs). The bacterial cells 
are assembled along the slime threads and correspond in numbers to 
the thickness of the slime thread on which they lie. They take the stain, 
(see photographs 28 and 30). 

Kiskalts Amyl-Gram Stain. This is the same as Gram’s stain 
except that amyl alcohol is used as a decolorising agent instead of ethyl 
alcohol. Ps. radicicola is quickly decolored by Gram’s method, but stains 
deep violet by Kiskalt’s stain. This stain is applicable to all cultures 
of Ps. radicicola and is useful in making preparations for photography 
from liquid media and especially from the nodules, since the amyl alcohol 
clears up the background, brings the bacteria into prominence, and ex- 
hibits their internal structure. (See photographs 15, 16, 26, 32, 33, 34). 

9. Viability of Pseudomonas radicicola. Some observations on the 
viability of Ps. radicicola on agar and in liquid media are collected in 
the following table. The cultures were grown a short time at 20°C or 
25°C and were then kept at the temperature of the laboratory. ‘These 
same cultures were all successfully transferred to various other media 
more than once in the interval record in the table, and gave a prompt 
and characteristic growth in favourable media. The transfers recorded 
in the table were to ash-maltose-agar in all cases and also to ash maltose 
water in some cases. The growth, morphology and staining reactions 
were carefully observed and were characteristic of Ps. radicicola as else- 
where described. The same is true of colonies which developed in plate 
cultures in ash-maltose-agar made from certain of these cultures, after 
a lapse of nearly a year and eight months in one case. The limit of via- 
bility of these culture is not yet known, but this organism will probably 
live more than two years on favourable agar and in favourable liquid 
media. The longest time here recorded is two years all but five days. 

The growth was abundant and mucilaginous, the cells were actively 
motile in hanging drops; stained with alcoholic gentian violet they 
showed single polar flagella. Occasionally branched forms were seen 
from agar cultures and were frequent in liquid media. 


172 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Viability of Pseudomonas Radicicola in Cultures at Room Temnerature. 


ISOLATED FROM 


CULTIVATED IN WATER 100% WITH 


ALIVE AFTER 


| 


| 
Ash ¥% | Maltose% | KH, PO. % Agar 7,| Years | Mos.| Days 
| 
White Clover........ |R 35 | 1 2 Cah dhe 1 ah | tp 2 
(Trifolium repens). R361 1 05 15) AUDE PERMIS 
RediClover 2 270 *R72 | 1 1 0 Tes 0 11 8 
(Trifolium pratense) R 36 | 1 1 0.5 1 1 CO tes 
#28) PAT il 0 1.5 1 0 29 
ALAIN ER AE R 34 | 1 0 0 1 1 10 27 
(Medicago sativa)... R34 1 Ors 0 1 Hear i Me 
R 54 | 0.5 i 0 0 1 1 17 
R54 | 0.5 1 0 0 1 Tl 19 
Wetchmeees eee: R4 | 1 2 0 ee 1 Cia Mee 
(Vicia villosa).,....*R44; 1 | 2 0 saan te 7 | 25 
R54| 0.5 | 1 0 OE cine 3 | 20 
— | ue 
Hlatipen:.::... 1.2 |R35 | 1 2 0 1 1 9 15 
(Lathyrus sativus).| R35 | 1 2 0 1 | 1 7 26 
Pease te oo eee RG 2 0.5 iL | 2 0 1 
(Pisum sativum)... | R36 | 1 2 0 5 1 1 9 5 
R45 | 1 2 0.2 0 0 9 18 
R60] 2 1 0 0 0 9 19 
Bean fesse dace een R35] 1 2 0 1 1 7 10 
(Phaseolus vulgaris) *R35 1 2 0 1 Il 4 20 
| Janets) |p a 2 0 1 i 1 3 26 
| 
R46 | 1 1 0 1 0 10 | 22 
MiICkEDref ONE EC TE RIS5 |p val 2 0 1 1 8 29 
(Desmodium nudi- | 
HOT) Pee eee IRON at 2 0.2 0 1 Pz | 28 
Mildibean tree |R35 | 1 1 0 1 1 | 4 32 
(Apios tuberosa).... R36) 1 | 2 0.5 1 1 Ai EU eo 


* Plate cultures were made from this culture, and cultures made from the plate 
were distributed as nitro-cultures in 1906. 


** Sucrose 27: 


{HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 173 


10. Cultures of Leguminose in flasks containing Ash-maltose-agar. 
Various means were tried in order to kill the bacteria and moulds on le- 
guminous seed without killing the seeds. The agents employed alone and 
in combination with dry heat, moist heat, sulphuric acid, and calcium 
hydrate, formalin, and mercuric chloride—but only in a few instances 
were living seeds obtained free from living bacteria, never when the seeds 
were first inoculated with spores of bacteria. The seeds either refused 
to germinate after treatment or else after germination they proved to be 
still infected with bacteria. We then gave up trying to kill bacteria 
when these were already present and found a way to get seeds free from 
bacteria. 

The pods were picked from the plants and such were selected as were 
sound, well-filled and mature, but not yet dry. The pods were washed 
and immersed in mercuric chloride solution, 1: 1000, for an hour or more, 
then placed between folds of sterile cotton. A pod was held in for- 
ceps and passed through the flame on all sides and the ends were well 
burnt. With flamed forceps the pod was opened and the seeds placed 
between folds of sterile cotton. After a few days the seeds were dry 
and they were then taken in flamed forceps and put in test-tubes which 
had been plugged with cotton and sterilized. The tubes of seeds were 
then kept at room temperature until used. 

Seeds were thus obtained in the summer of 1905 and 1906 from 
pea, vetch, bean and soy bean. These seeds were examined for bacteria 
by plating some of them in ordinary gelatin or agar media and in ash- 
maltose-agar and by dropping some into tubes of sterile bouillon. The 
seeds so treated imbibed moisture and in some instances germinated. 
Some of these cultures were kept for weeks, yet remained sterile and free 
from bacteria and fungi. Plate cultures showed occasional colonies, 
mostly moulds from the air, but occasionally the seeds contained living 
bacteria. This occurred more often with seeds which were discoloured or 
infested with weevils, or which came from broken or diseased pods. 

Germination of the Seeds.» From one to three seeds were dropped 
into about 3 c.c. of boiling sterile water in a test tube. The tubes were 
immediately cooled and incubated at 37°C and then at 25°C until the 
seeds germinated. After the first 24 hours, the tubes were so inclined 
that the seeds were only partially in the water. Most of the pea and 
vetch seeds germinated in three days, but the beans did not germinate 
so well. The water in the tubes remained clear and bright and free 
from bacteria, except in an occasional tube in which the liquid became 
very turbid and contained bacteria, sometimes small and slender rods 
and at other times large, motile bacilli in chains. The seed germinated 
well in a tube of ash-maltose-agar prepared as for the growth of Legu- 


174 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


minose (see media). After three days the seeds were kept in the diffuse 
daylight of the room, and after five days or more the seeds which had 
germinated and which were found free from bacteria were planted in 
the flasks of ash-maltose-agar, prepared as elsewhere described, the plug 
was removed from the test-tube, the mouth of the test-tube was flamed, 
and the liquid, if any, was poured away. The plug was then removed 
an instant from the mouth of the flask containing the ash-maltose-agar 
and the germinating seed was shaken from the test-tube into the flask, 
and the plug was re-inserted into the mouth of the flask. The parch- 
ment paper was tied in place over the cotton plug and the flask weighed 
and set aside in diffuse daylight in the laboratory. A number of flask 
cultures were prepared in this way on the same day and were kept some 
days before any were inoculated in order to observe possible contamina- 
tions. Some of the flasks were then inoculated with a pure culture of 
Ps. radicicola and some were kept uninoculated as controls. The flasks 
were usually kept in a greenhouse. At intervals the flasks were weighed 
to determine the loss of water by evaporation. The growth of the 
plant, both root and stem, was observed and measured through the glass 
and through the transparent medium. The presence or absence of con- 
taminating fungi and bacteria was noted. The growth of Ps. radicicola 
in the inoculated flasks, the first indication of its invasion of the living 
roots, the form and growth of nodules and the results on the root system 
were studied and recorded daily or at convenient intervals. 

One series of flasks was kept under observation for eight months 
and three other series for shorter periods. A final examination of the 
flasks was then made, as follows :— 

The medium was examined for micro-organisms by staining and 
by plate-cultures in ordinary agar and gelatin and in ash-maltose-agar. 
A nodule, if any were present, was taken from the roots with sterile 
forceps and plate cultures in ash-maltose-agar were made from it in 
the manner already described (see isolation of Ps. radicicola from no- 
dules). Stains were also made from this nodule and from others. 
The roots were examined by staining, and when a general invasion was 
observed, cultures were also made from the interiors of the roots so 
invaded. Control cultures in the flasks not inoculated were treated in 
@ corresponding manner, stains and plate cultures being made from the 
medium and from the roots. The plant was then drawn out entire 
from the flask and the roots and stems were measured and sometimes 
weighed. In some cases nitrogen determinations were made from the 
medium and from the plants. The nodules were counted and weighed. 

The loss of water by evaporation was found not to vary much in 
flasks of the same series. The average loss of seven flasks grown dur- 


= 
a 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 175 


ing 146 days, each containing 250 grams of medium, was + gram per 
day, at which rate the medium would be exhausted in 1,000 days. 
These flasks were simply plugged with cotton and the cultures were 
grown in a living room heated by steam. The loss was less from a 
series having parchment paper tied over the mouths of the flasks. In 
this case, the medium would have been exhausted in a little less than 
three years. The plants grew vigorously in the agar, especially at first; 
later, uninoculated plants gradually withered or even died as if from 
nitrogen starvation. The inoculated plants easily thrived as long as 
they were kept. 

Contaminating bacteria and moulds sometimes appeared in the 
flasks a few days after the seeds were planted in them; these were 
without effect on the plant and were never observed to cause or inter- 
fere with nodule formation. 

In all inoculated flasks nodules appeared usually in about a month. 
They were sometimes few and large, sometimes many and small; in 
one case as many as 70 developed on the roots of one plant. The 
nodules continued to increase measurably in size as long as the cultures 
were observed and were about the same form as seen on plants in the 
field, but occasionally larger. In the absence of root hairs, infection 
began as a small transparent spot in the root. Nodule formation and 
general infection of the root appeared to check extensive root form- 
ation. In all inoculated flasks growth of Ps. radicicola was copious 
and characteristic, spreading as a thin layer over the agar and pene- 
trating the agar along the roots so that each root was surrounded even 
to its growing tip with a cylinder of growth. 

On final examination, Ps. radicicola was found by stains and by 
plate cultures in the medium of the inoculated flasks and no other 
organisms were present, or in some cases moulds and other bacteria 
were found. 

A general infection of the roots generally accompanied nodule 
formation. 

The stains from the nodules showed that simple rods sometimes 
prevail and sometimes branched and irregular forms. 

Nodules were never formed and root infection was never observed 
in uninoculated controls. 

The presence of Ps. radicicola was never detected by staining nor 
by cultures in uninoculated controls, where bacteria and fungi were 
absent or sometimes present in the medium, but never in the living 
roots. 

The species on which nodules have formed in flask cultures on ash- 
maltose-agar are Phaseolus vulgaris, Vicia villosa, Pisum sativum and 
Glycine hispida. 


176 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Cross inoculations have not been observed. Pea and vetch growing 
in the same flask, which was inoculated with vetch culture, formed 
abundant nodules, and root infection occurred in the vetch, but the pea 
showed no infection whatever. Ps. radicicola was isolated from the 
nodules on this vetch and plates from the peas were negative. The 
like was true of bean and pea growing in the same flask and inoculated 
with pea culture. Nodules formed on the pea only. 

The notes regarding the growths of legumes in all our flasks are 
not given, but a few samples will suffice to give the necessary inform- 
ation regarding the inoculations, growth of plants and methods of isola- 
tion; and we wish to point out the value of this method to any one 
engaged in biological problems associated not only with legume bacteria, 
but also with the bacterial and fungus diseases of plants. All condi- 
tions are better under control and seem to us to offer advantages over 
the methods devised by Marshall Ward in his study of certain rusts. 

Flask Cultures.—Seeds of Vicia villosa were taken from the pods 
under sterile conditions, July 2nd, 1904, and were distributed in tubes 
containing sterile water, December 29th, 1904. By January 1, 1905, 
eight seeds had germinated and all were free from bacteria. The water 
in the tubes was clear and stains from it were negative. 

One seed was planted January 1, 1905, in each of seven 1,000 c.c. 
Erlenmeyer flasks containing each 200 c.c. of ash-maltose-agar, R51. 
The cotton plug was removed, the seed was dropped into the flask by 
means of flamed forceps and the radicle was pressed into the agar by 
means of a flamed and cooled glass rod. The plug was replaced in 
the mouth of the flask. The flasks were then kept in the window of 
a living room and on sunny days were protected by a piece of cheese 
cloth. 

The culture used to inoculate flasks [, III and V was isolated from 
a nodule of Vicia villosa on July 6, 1904, in ash-maltose-agar R34, 
and a colony was transferred to R44, July 11, 1904. A single needle- 
ful of the growth on R44 was used to inoculate all three flasks January 
7, 1905. In two days there was growth of the culture in the inocu- 
lated flasks. This growth increased rapidly and in eight days there 
was a copious, wet-shining, mucilaginous layer covering nearly the 
whole surface of the agar. This growth now began to accompany’ the 
growing roots, and from this time on every ramification of the roots 
was surrounded by a thin cylinder of bacterial growth. This growth 
penetrated the solid agar a little distance in advance of the growing 
root tips (see photographs 35, 36 and 37). 

Flasks II, IV, VI and VII were not inoculated and no bacterial 
nodules appeared on the roots of these plants. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 177 


Flask I. On February 7, 1905, there were 10 nodules on the 
roots of plant 1. The largest was 2 mm. long. On April 22, there 
were 10 nodules, 8 large and 2 small, the largest was 2 x 8 mm. 

Flask I1I.—On February 7, 1905, there were four nodules on the 
roots of plant 3. The largest was 3 mm. long. On March 11 there 
were eight nodules, three large and five small, the largest 14 x 5 mm. 
On April 22 there were eight nodules, the largest 2x 4 mm. On May 
31 there were eight nodules, the roots were otherwise smooth. 

Flask V. On February 7, there were two nodules; March 11, five 
nodules; April 22, six large and four small nodules; September 25, 
six large and seven small nodules, also a general infection of the roots. 
The largest nodule was 26 mm. long. Nine of the roots were coiled 
at the tips. October 19th, the largest nodule was 30 mm. long and 
2 mm. forked at the apex. A part of the nodule was green, having 
taken on chlorophyll. The largest nodule was examined by staining 
and only rods and no branching forms were found. Seven other no- 
dules from this plant were examined. ‘The bacteria were mostly rods, 
branched forms occurred but were infrequent. A stain from the agar 
showed numerous rods like Ps. radicicola. 

Contaminations in Flask V.— No bacterial contaminations were 
observed, but one mould colony developed by January 7th and gradually 
spread over most of the surface of the agar. No cultures were made 
from this flask. 

Flask I, Nodule II, Plate Cultures May 31, 1905.— The nodule 
was immersed in mercuric chloride solution 1:1000 for one and one- 
half minutes and plate cultures were made from it in the usual manner. 
Typical colonies of Ps. radicicola developed, which became viscid, draw- 
ing out in slender threads when touched with the needle. The cells 
were like Ps. radicicola. A culture in ash-maltose-water from this 
nodule gave a characteristic growth and branched forms were numerous. 

Plate cultures were made from the agar in Flask 1, May 31, 1905, 
in ash-maltose-agar R78 and R77. Numerous colonies like Ps. radi- 
cicola developed in twelve days, also numerous red colonies of a small 
bacillus. 

Flask II, not inoculated.— No nodules formed on the roots as long 
as the plant was observed. The roots became nodose or knotted by 
March 11th and continued so. 

Plate cultures were made June 1, 1905, from flask II. These 
developed numerous colonies of a yellow diplococcus, but no colonies 
resembling Ps. radicicola. Plate cultures in ash-maltose-agar R78 from 
one of the nodose roots gave numerous colonies of a yellow diplococcus 
but no other bacteria. 


178 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The swellings in the roots of this and other plants of this series 
were not bacterial nodules, and bacteria were not found in their cells 
as long as the plants remained alive. The outer tissues of the nodose 
parts of the roots were ruptured, especially the longitudinal walls of 
the cells which separated, exposing the inner tissue as columnar chains 
of cells The bacteria which contaminated the cultures had to some 
extent lodged in these open spaces of the ruptured tissue, but their 
position here appeared to be only accidental. (See photographs 38 
and 39). 

Flask IV, not inoculated.—The plant began to decline after March 
11th as if from nitrogen starvation, and by May 31st there was only 
a little life remaining. No bacterial colonies formed, but the roots 
became very nodose because of the internal swelling and rupture of 
the tissues. The flask was examined October 19th. There was a small 
bacillus present in great numbers and invading the decaying tissues 
of the root and stem. The bacilli were mostly joined end to end in 
pairs and did not resemble Ps. radicicola. 

Flask VI, not inoculated.— No bacterial nodules appeared on the 
roots as long as the flask was observed until October 19th. The roots 
became nodose because of a swelling and rupture of the tissues. There 
were some living shoots up to September 25th. On October 19th the 
roots only appeared to be alive. On examination of the roots Ps. radi- 
cicola was not to be found. 

Flask X, containing two pea seeds was inoculated September 12th, 
1905, with a culture obtained from a nodule on Pisum sativum, which 
had been grown on artificial media one year and 199 days. 

On December 12th, 1905, there was no bacteria visible in the 
medium, which was blue with the litmus, except just beneath the seed, 
there the medium had become acid. One of the plants had formed 
no roots and it afterwards died without forming any roots. The other 
plant had a stem 5 cm. long and a root 1 em. long on December 12th. 

The plant which lived had eight nodules February 11th, 1906, 
and 35 nodules on March 23rd. By May 7tn there were 80 nodules. 
(See photograph 40, Flask 2, taken February 20th, which illustrates 
this flask culture). 

On March 23rd, the only evident contamination was one mould 
colony. On that date the roots were vigorous, forming a closely tangled 
mass between the glass and the agar. The nodules were all small and 
almost round. The total weight on April 23rd was 430 grams, that 
is, there was a loss of 20 grams in 121 days, or less than .2 gram per 
day. At that rate the 250 grams of medium in the flask would have 
been exhausted in 1,250 days, or three years, five months. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 179 


The final examination of this plant was made on May ‘th, 1906. 
There were two mould colonies present in the flask, and an abundant 
growth of Ps. radicicola over the surface of the agar, this film was 
mucilaginous, drawing out in slimy threads when touched with the 
needle. A stain made with saturated alcoholic gentian violet showed 
that the cells were of characteristic appearance. No bacterial con- 
tamination was detected by staining, but spores and mycelium of the 
mould were seen. 

The medium was still alkaline except near the roots, where the 
colour was largely reduced. The roots showed both general invasion 
and nodule formation, the nodules appearing above and below the swol- 
len and infected parts of the roots. All the main roots were swollen 
and contained Ps. radicicola in great numbers. A selected nodule 
showed numerous short and long rods, some swollen and clavate with 
banded protoplasm, and others with branching forms. Cultures were 
from the agar, from a nodule and from an infected root. The plate 
containing medium R82 inoculated from the surface growth in the 
flask developed only numerous and typical colonies of Ps. radicicola. 
Stained preparations from these mucilaginous colonies showed the usual 
single polar flagellum. 

Cultures from a nodule handled in a manner already described, 
in medium R102 produced numerous typical colonies of Ps. radicicola 
between the fourth and tenth days. The colonies were mucilaginous 
and drew out in slimy thread and the cells were uniflagellate. In 
plates containing medium R82 numerous colonies developed in two days, 
and sub-cultures in other media showed in all respects the character- 
istic growth of Ps. radicicola. 

The same process was carried out in detail with material from 
an infected root, and cultures and stain confirmed the presence of Ps. 
radicicola in this root. 

This method of flask culture, inoculation and isolation was carried 
out in detail with all our flasks, thus working out thoroughly the four 
cardinal requirements as set forth by Koch in his postulates. 

Flask IX —A control was planted September 12th, 1905, with one 
germinating pea seed. The plant grew until May 7th, 1906, when 
an examination was made. The medium was acid in the vicinity of 
the roots. The growth was moderate. The flask had not been inocu- 
lated and no nodules formed on the roots. There was no evidence at 
any time of any contamination in the flask. On May 7th, 1906, stains 
were made from agar in the flask, but these were negative. A piece 
of the living root was crushed on a slide and stained but no bacteria 
were seen. 


180 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


On the same date plate cultures were made in ash-maltose-agar 
R102 and R82 from the agar in the flask and from the living roots, 
but these all remained negative after twenty-four days. 

Flask VIII.—Was planted on December 12th, 1905, with one germ- 
inating pea and one germinating vetch seed. The flask contained 250 
grams of medium R83. The loss by evaporation during the 159 days 
of growth was 22 grams, or .138 gram per day. 

Inoculation.— The flask was then inoculated with a pure culture 
cf Ps. radicicola obtained from a vetch nodule on July 6th, 1905, and 
had been grown on medium R44 since July 12, 1905, a period of five 
months. In twenty-four hours at room temperature there was good 
growth of the organism on the agar and in the water of condensation. 

Growth.— Both plants grew well, the vetch more vigorously than 
the pea. On January 17th, 1906, there were six nodules on the vetch 
and none on the pea. On March 23rd the largest nodule on the vetch 
was 6 mm. long and clove-shaped. As the roots of both vetch and pea 
penetrated the agar, the culture accompanied them and could be ob- 
served as a cylinder of growth around the roots. On May 10th the 
final examination was made. The vetch was thrifty and green, with 
two main stems, one 0.18 m. and the otner 0.10 m. long, also other 
branches, so that the total length of stem was about 0.5 m. Photo- 
graph 40, Flask No. 3, was taken February 10th, 1906, at which date 
there were ten nodules on the vetch and none on the pea. 

From the medium Ps. radicicola was isolated in pure culture, sub- 
culture and staining methods furnished proof of the identity. 

From the vetch three nodules were taken, the largest was 9 mm. 
long, forking at a distance of 6 mm. from the proximal end into two 
nearly equal branches, each about 2 mm. thick. The whole nodule 
was deep green with chlorophyll except at the growing ends, which were 
white. A section from the distal end showed a loose cortical layer 
and a central mass of bacteroidal tissue, brownish in colour, and mainly 
composed of bacteria. There were few simple rods, but many numerous 
and beautifully branched and twice branched cells. Cultures obtained 
from this nodule gave pure cultures of Ps. radicicola, confirmed by sub- 
cultures and staining reactions (polar flagellum). Direct examination 
of the other nodules and cultures therefrom gave identical results. Gen- 
eral infection of the roots had also taken place, pure cultures of Ps. 
radicicola were obtained from them. 

There were no nodules present on the pea. Four plates made from 
the interior of the pea root were all negative. The following media, 
R82, R87 and R103 were used and plates kept fourteen days. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 181 


Flask VII, containing 250 grams of medium R82, was planted Nov- 
ember 29th, 1905, with the germinating pea seeds. It was not inocu- 
lated, no bacteria were present and no nodules developed. 

One mould colony developed by December 12th, 1905. This colony 
increased in size, and by May 4th, 1906, it covered, perhaps, one-fourth 
of the surface of the agar with a thin, zoned growth. 

One of the peas formed no roots and died later, the other grew 
well, especially the roots. The energy of the plant seemed largely spent 
in root formation. The roots were long and slender and smooth with- 
out evident root hairs. The stem grew well, but after several months 
began to decline, so that, though growth continued, (the Jeaves and 
stems remained green), it did not increase in size. This excessive root 
formation and this decline in the growth of green parts were attributed 
to nitrogen starvation. These phenomena were reversed in the case of 
the inoculated plants, 1.¢c., the growth of stem and leaves was progressive 
without decline and was in excess of the growth of root. 

Stains were made May 7th, 1906, from the surface of the agar and 
from the water of condensation in the bottom of the flask. Spores of 
a mould were numerous, but there were no bacteria. The stem of the 
plant that died had been invaded by the mould. Its juice was not 
turbid and on staining its tissue the mycelium of the fungus was found 
Eut no bacteria. The roots of the living plant were washed, crushed 
on a slide and stained, and no bacteria nor fungi were found in them. 

Plate cultures in gelatin and ash-maltose-agar were made May ‘th, 
1906, from the agar in the flask and from the crushed roots of the 
living plant. Numerous colonies of a mould like Penicillium glaucum 
developed in all the plates, but no bacterial colonies. The plates were _ 
observed for twenty-four days. Photograph 40, No. 1, taken February 
20th, 1906, illustrates this flask culture. 

11. Preparation and Distribution of Nitro-cultures.—Preparation 
should be made in advance of the season. The medium can be made 
up early in the spring. It is a great convenience to have attached to 
the steam heating system a large sized autoclave, or a retort such as is 
used in canneries. A large sterilizer supplied with flowing steam is 
almost a necessity. Large enamel pails can be used for making up 
media, and a vacuum pump attached to the water pump is necessary 
for rapid filtration. If the bottles are new, it is sufficient to rinse 
them in cold water before filling. With a little experience one man 
can! easily prepare the medium, fill and sterilize a gross and a half of 
bottles in a day. 

Preparation of ash-maltose-agar for commercial cultures.— Add 10 
parts by weight of wood ashes to 100 parts of cold tap water and stir 

Sec. IV., 1906. 12 


182 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


well, or add the ashes to the water when it is boiling hot and boil 
for a minute; filter within an hour through absorbent cotton by means 
of a vacuum pump. To fill 100 parts of the filtrate add 1 part of 
agar and 1 part of maltose, heat in steam, boil a minute over the flame 
and heat again in steam to dissolve the agar. Filter the hot solution 
through absorbent cotton by means of a vacuum pump. In filtering 
it is well to use a small plug of cotton thrust tight into the neck of 
the funnel, and to renew the plug each time after a litre or so has 
been filtered. When the medium is all filtered its reaction may be 
tested, using phenolphthalein as an indicator. The ash water may have 
been alkaline —9° to —12°, but the agar medium will be neutral 
or only faintly alkaline, not more than —1°. Siphon off the filtered 
medium into two-ounce French square, narrow-mouthed bottles of flint 
glass. Each bottle should receive about 35 c.c., which will nearly half 
fill it. Thrust a plug of cotton in the mouth of each bottle and 
sterilize in the autoclave at 10 pounds steam pressure for one-half to 
one hour, or in flowing steam for one hour on each of three successive 
days. Remove the bottles from the autoclave, incline them and allow 
the medium to solidify so as to present a large surface for inoculation. 
The medium will not usually be found favourable for growth when 


first made, but will be fit for use after two or three weeks and will 


improve with age. 

Inoculation and Growth of Nitro-cullures in Bottles— A mother 
culture for each species of legume is isolated the previous year or early 
the same spring, and from this several tubes or bottles of ash-maltose- 
agar are inoculated to be used from time to time for inoculating the 
bottles intended for distribution. These last may be inoculated by 
means of a sterile pipette containing the culture mixed with sterilized 
water, or it may be done by transferring a bit of the surface of the 
agar in the bottle by means of a platinum spatula. In two or four 
days at 25° C., the growth accumulates at the point of inoculation and 
gravitates down the inclined surface of the agar as a raised, transparent, 
wet-shining band which increases in width. The wedge of agar may 
now be shaken over so that the inoculated surface comes against the 
giass. By shaking back and forth a few times, all five faces become 
inoculated and in four to twelve days on favourable media there is a 
copious, wet-shining, mucilaginous or slimy growth over the whole sur- 
face of the agar and the culture may be used, or it may be kept for 
a month if desired, and there will be further increase in growth. Just 
before mailing a culture, the cotton plug is replaced by a cork which 
is well flamed before inserting. The printed label is attached, the bottle 


in : 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 183 


is wrapped in a sheet of directions for using and packed with cotton 
in a wooden mailing case. 


The materials required for 1,000 packages of nitro-culture are as 
follows :— 


Agar, OES A a gen $ 4 00 
Maltose, 3,500 grams .. .. ete ee ET arya CAL MON) 
ÉD MOULE NCIS Abies... 4000 00," 20000 
Printed labels and directions, 1,000 .. .. .. .. .. 3 00 
Mailing cases, at 4 cts. each, 1,000 .. .. .. .. .. 40 00 
Postage stamps at 7 cts. per case, 1,000.. .. .. .. 70 00 

$147 00 


$147.00 for 1,000 bottles, or about 14% cts. apiece, as each bottle 
contains enough culture for 60 pounds of seed, the actual cost per acre 
will be less than 4 cts. Making ailowance for labour, steam, etce., 
these cultures should not cost more than 25 cents per acre, as compared 
with $2.00 per acre charged by some commercial firms. 


This method of preparing and using nitro-cultures offers several 
advantages. Each culture is, or may easily be, a pure culture and 
a living culture, for the growth in the agar is easily seen and is 
highly characteristic, so that failure to grow, or possible contaminations, 
are easily detected. There are at least two staining reactions, both 
easy of application, and so far as known, peculiar to Pseudominas radi- 
cwola (see staining methods). The burden and responsibility of pre- 
paring the media and growing the cultures is placed, not on the shoul- 
ders of the farmer, but rests with the bacteriologist, where it belongs. 
A competent worker can by these means isolate a pure culture of the 
nodule bacteria from a leguminous plant, grow it, prove that it is 
appropriate and efficient and distribute it alive and in pure culture at 
reasonable cost, and an intelligent farmer can apply the culture to his 
seed and observe whether or not the nodules form and whether or not 
the crop is benefited. 

12. A number of cultures prepared in this manner were distributed 
throughout Canada in the spring of 1905. The results of this distri- 
bution were published in March, 1906, by the Ontario Department of 
Agriculture as Bulletin 148 —“ Co-operative Experiment with Nodule- 
forming Bacteria,’ and a short summary of these results are here 
given. 


184 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


The samples were sent all over Canada, from Prince Edward Island 
to British Columbia, the number of cultures being as follows :— 


ONÉATIO Gon ene ARENA 76 ASSIMTD OLA) |. sakes see 13 
Nova SeObiae EURE 66 Aliperiaice twee ane aaa 12 
New Brunswick ...... ial British Columbia ..... 15 
Pen Mslandera see 1 United ‘States ty, sae... 2 
Cape Breton riens 1 

Omebeo ei EN er 10 Total ere 246 
Manitoba NE EE et ee PIE 


At the end of the season a circular letter was sent to all who 
bad received cultures, asking what success each experimenter had had. 
These reports may be summarized thus :— 


all She Le) eo (eh 0 
3 So | as PE 
On ce D 8 — £92 
- © = nl _ 
Crop S 3 BERS pas a= 
Z À SES = > 
| =n Sgn > Ÿ ON Ne 
| e 5 o 0. > SoS eg 
UPS ee hele Vas PRESSE 
| se 4» & to Se) 5 ZÈS 
Bucerne of alfaltas ere 59 43 1 15 
Red Clovierns: 2. LANCER eee 47 31 1 15 
IPOS Ee RE Loe Ne DA STE PE | 12 ÿ 1 4 
SCANS ccc is Aes See Re we RO csi 9 5 | de 
‘ | 
PASI sa al aoe ty eR RO | 2 1 1 
White Clover sie steaks Ie alu 1 1 
MERCREDI NA Tee 3 2 1 
Soy CAN RUE Ce D PA NS RAI Eee 1 il | 
134 91 3 | 40 


In order to give an idea of these reports, a number of extracts 
are given from them which show the benefit some experimenters have 
obtained from the use of nitro-cultures. 

Taylor Village, N.B.—T put three acres with the treated seed 
and three acres without the nitro-culture on a piece of heavy land, 
and in examining the plants from time to time I found that nodules 
were quite plentiful on the plants from the treated seed, and none on 
the plants from the untreated seed, and I also found the growth and 
thriftiness quite marked in favour of the plants from the nitro-treated 
seed. (Red Clover). | : 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 185 


Rwer John, N.S.— The plants from the treated seed were thicker 
and thriftier than those without the nitro-cultures, which were thin 
and spindly. The roots on the treated spot being loaded with nodules 
and very fibrous, while on the untreated there is far less root growth. 
(Red Clover). 

Colwood, B.C.— The part treated with nitro-cultures looks green 
and more vigorous than the untreated. Nodules are numerous on the 
treated portion. (Red Clover). 

Colina, B.C.— The clover plants were a lot better on the treated 
land. (Red Clover). 

Emerson, Man.— On some plants treated the nodules were quite 
numerous. ‘Those having nodules were very vigorous, but the others 
have made but small growth. (Red Clover). 

Neepawa, Man.—The vigour of plants from seed treated with nitro- 
culture was very good. The untreated seed produced pale and short 
plants. (Red Clover). 

Edmonton, Alta— Numerous nodules on plants from treated seed 
and very healthy stand. With the untreated seed the plants were 
sickly with a few healthy stalks. (Red Clover). 

Deep Rock, N.S—Soon after seeding 1 commenced examining 
plants on the treated patch and found nodules present, which increased 
in size and number each week as the season advanced. There was a 
marked difference between the plants from untreated and treated seed 
in favour of the latter. (Red Clover). 

Berwick, N.S.— The plants from treated seed were quite vigorous, 
those from untreated only half as high. (Red> Clover). 

Cypress River, Man.—Plants from treated seed very strong with 
numerous nodules, without nitro-culture much smaller and weaker. 
(Red Clover). 

Naweig, N.B.—Very vigorous and numerous nodules from the 
treated seed; not nearly so vigorous without nitro-culture. (Beans). 

Mount Salem, Ont— The nodules on the beans not treated were 
small, about the size of pin heads, and pods on plants were short. On 
the plants treated the nodules were as large as small peas, growing 
tight against one another. The pods on the plants were longer and 
the plants withstood dry weather better than those not treated, being 
green and flourishing when the others were dried up. The beans when 
ripe were bright and even in the pods. . I exhibited half a bushel of 
these at the East Elgin Fair and secured first prize on them. (Beans). 

Lions Head, Ont.—The alfalfa seed sown by me this spring, and 
treated with nitro-culture obtained from you, has grown without a 
check. That without the culture came up in patches, but did no 


Sec. IV., 1906. 13 


186 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


more. As the alfalfa has failed here before, I attribute my success 
to the culture. 

Round Hill, N.S.— From treated seed the growth of plants was 
25 inches, from seed untreated the growth about one inch. (Alfalfa). 

Mount Stewart, P.E.I.—Plants from treated seed were dark green 
and quite vigorous. From untreated seed the plants were yellow and 
unthrifty. (Alfalfa). 

Colquitz, B.C.— 1 am not a believer in nitro-culture, or, at least, 
was very skeptical as to the treatment being of any value whatever. 
I have been unable, however, to shut my eyes to the fact as shown 
by my own land. The land had been well sub-soiled in preparation 
to a depth of from 16 to 18 inches, and the portion upon which the 
nitro-culture was not used was treated in every way as well as the 
other. The plants from the treated seed were very strong and sown 
with nurse crop are now about eight inches high. From untreated 
seed the plants are weak in appearance and only about three inghes 
high. (Alfalfa). 

Cloverdale, B.C.—Piants from treated seed are healthy in colour 
and 18 inches high, from untreated seed four to six inches high and 
yellow. I may say, in conclusion, that the quarter acre of untreated 
seed was planted on better land, which had been under cultivation in 
root crops for two years, and had been slightly manured with barn 
vard manure and lime previously. The treated seed was planted on 
absolutely new forest land which is almost void of humus and available 
nitrogen. This speaks well for the cultures. (Alfalfa). 

Charlottetown, P.E.I1.—The boundary between the two plots is dis- 
tinctly marked, that growing from the inoculated seed is a richer green 
and of stronger growth. (Alfalfa). 

St. Catharines, Ont.—The culture was used on Alfalfa sown in 
April on fall wheat about fifteen pounds per acre. The stand at 
present is considered good, a difference being evident in favour of the 
nitro-culture treated seed. (Alfalfa). 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 187 


fa 


7 res 


1. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Trifolium repens (Dutch clover), showing 
cuneate and clavate forms. 


(À 
Ÿ, 


€ 


2. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Melilotus alba. 
Sec. 1V., 1906. 14 


Ps + 


NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 189 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] 


3. Ps. radicicola, from nodules of seedlings of Medicago sativa. 


Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Medicago sativa 


4. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 191 


% 


D 


— 


5. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Medicago sativa. The plant was grown in 
garden soil in a test-tube. 


\ ‘al 
g = Ph tht 
= à ow 
é ” i oh 
am ww “> i ’ # 
Æ o om y ¢ [2 
oa ve om, # \ en, "ap 
Lr as 7” . } \ 
+ vo Os 
a ha coe toe À 
ail ~ La 4 al « 
a ™~ ™. ve", N 4 
{ \ ft + LA _ t 
Lf pi À Y te à L 2 À { e 
- . * 
& her 2 Le nu" » a wer, 
a } 4 nus 4 
ie " » Woe | ¢ w ail 
os an un ‘ * L 
~ x PT ™ | ™ 
aah à ‘“ es nd 
Lal = ? 
a w“ we oe . 
of ~ + Ÿ > , ee." * 
+ J wt 8 * 
= AP des ç inact Pad 
“ —— Om = 
. Pat oe Lu Lt * 
" } 
7 De +o [es 7 
Arr " 


6. Ps. radicicola, from a culture on Medium R49. Age of culture 27 days. 


[HARRISON « BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 193 


> 

\ à 
ex 
6 , 


7. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Medicago sativa showing rods and branched 
forms. 


oh 


à 
D = tb, 
Rte) 3 


Bs SN 


# # 
tés 
8. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Trifolium pratense. Note irregular staining 
of protoplasni. 


{HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 


195 


9. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Trifolium repens. Large, irregular and 


branched cells, with banded protoplasm. 


10. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Trifolium repens. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 197 


Pi 


11. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Lathyrus sativus. Showing rodlike cells 


and no branched forms. 


eee 


ge 


> 


À ln crs 


12. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Pisum sativum. 
ively few bacterial cells, and these branched with banded protoplasm. 


Preparation shows relat- 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 199 


13. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Vicia villosa. The cells are short and broad, 
clavate and mallet shaped. Banded protoplasm. 


14. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule (II) of Lathyrus sativus, showing branched 
forms. 


| « 
= ¥ (2 
7 : " 
i) 
‘ 
- * ba 


They 


i i . 
5 ‘ ‘ 
- . 
» 
¥ Eu = 
EE 
u > 
at a 
= 5 
= U > 7 
ne 
EPA 
ae 
. © = 
= “ “ 
> i 
= = 
- ~ 
- 
Es ra 
à. = 
n > 
- 7 
| 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE) 201 


mn J, 7 
D s, | | 


Le 


15. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Trifolinm revens. Amyl Gram Stain. 


16. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Trifolium repens. Amyl Gram stain. 
Branched forms. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 203 


TN? gi, 


17. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Phaseolus vulgaris. Small rod-shaped cells. 


ty 


F >) 


18. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Vicia villosa. Plant grown in flask I. Jan. 


1, 1905, to May 31, 1905. 
Sec. IV., 1906 15 


mo LA 


[AARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 205 


19. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Vicia villosa. Plant grown in quartz, asiaes 


and water in a flask. 


,* 


P ge 


so 


C2 
<8 


: 


20. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Vicia villosa. 


{HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 207 


21. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Vicia villosa. Plant grown in ash-maltose- 
agar in a flask. Jan. 1, 1905, to May 10, 1905. From this nodule a: 


pure culture was isolated. 


Plant grown in flask I, 


22. Ps. radicicola, from invaded root of Vicia villosa. 
Jan. 1, 1905, to May 31, 1905. The tap root was generally infected. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 


209 


23. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Glycine hispida. Medium Green Soy. 


Sst 


v 


LE J 


CA 
[and 


24. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Medicago sativa. 


a 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 211 


Pd ¢ 2? o% ‘ 
= 
a + e we « 
| 
ms ee + e + sé 
4 me. 
2”. . bd ee 
| * 
e + 
(2 : ‘ we 
“i e- 
;® LL of 


25. Ps. radicicola, from a nodule of Vicia villosa. Plant grown in ash-maltose- 
agar in a flask. Jan. 1, 1905 to May 31, 1905. 


26. Ps. radicicola, from a liquid culture (R93) obtained from Vicia villosa. 
From the slimy sediment; shows branched forms. Amyl Gram stain. 
The corresponding agar stain showed flagella but no branched forms. 


a L 2 
‘1 
A £ 
« à 
x 
= 0 D 
= 14 
3 € = 
> > 
[ . ia à ~ 
= a 
= À _ 
à ; 
1 es 
: 
2 ; ‘ 
4 x 
+ « 
; sg 
LA 
! 
A 
= \ 3 à 
+ 
~ ‘ 
\ 
à 
- 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 213 


27. Ps. radicicola from Lathyrus sativus. Culture on R81. Age 17 days at 
25°C. Stained with saturated alcoholic gentjan violet. The mucilage 


of the culture takes the stain, the cells and their flagella do not. 


28. Ps. radicicola, from Phaseolus vulgaris. Grown on ash-maltose-agar for 60 
days at room temperature. Stained with Kiitscher’s gentian violet. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 215 


28' Ps. radicicola, same preparation as 28, but stained to show the slime 
threads Kiitscher’s gentian violet. 


ET. 

ee | +» 

EY Aras 
~ 


29. Ps. radicicola from Trifolium pratense. From sediment of an ash-maltose- 
water culture. Age 16 days at 25°C. Much branched cell, such cells 
are frequent in the sediment. 


à 
- 
à 
L 
Le 
{ - 
e 
= Fy 
: 
De A 
| 
# 
Fes 
nt 
| : 
29 
‘ 
‘ 
3 
+ 
! 
| 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE Zaz 


Isolated from a nodule July 6, 1904, by 


30. Ps. radicicola, from Vicia villosa. 
plating in medium R384. One colony transferred to medium R44 on July 


11, 1904, and from this culture it was plated in medium R81, March 8, 
1906, that is, after a lapse of 597 days at room temperature. Stained 
preparation was made from one of the colonies which developed after 


nine days growth. Kütscher’s gentian violet stain for the slime threads. 


307 Ps. radicicola from Vicia villosa. From another part of the same prepara- 


tion as 30. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 219 


31. Ps. radicicola, showing flagella from Vicia villosa. From a culture on ash- 
maltose-agar grown at 25°C for 16 days. Stained with saturated al- 
coholie gentian violet. 


32. Ps. radicicola, from Lathyrus sativus, from ash-maltose-water, 17 days at 
25°C. Amyl Gitam Stain. Unbranched cells. 


Sec. IV., 1906. 16 


NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 2248 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] 


nt 
33. Ps. radicicola, from Vicia villosa. From ash-maltose-water, 24 days at room 
temperature. Preparation shows branched forms from slimy sediment. 

Amyl Gram stain. 


34. Ps. radicicola, from Lathyrus sativus. From ash-maltose-water, 17 days at 
room temperature. The preparation was made from the ring of growth 
The cells are mostly short rods as on agar, occasional 


at the surface. 
much branched cells appear. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 223 


35. Vicia villosa. Plant I grown in ash-maltose-agar. The germinated seed 
free from bacteria was planted Jan. 1, 1905. The surface of the agar 
was inoculated Jan. 7, with a pure culture of Ps. radicicola from Vicia 
villosa. Growth vigorous for 4 months. Photo. April 27, 1905. 


or = = 7 } = an | 
ae | ne j A 


guy 
#1 
” Ay 
= 
aa 
7 = 
7 . ‘ 
2 
4 
Zz ‘ 
. 
7 = 
- 
= F a 
es 
ee 3 
/ ‘ 
7 
é . 
= 
. 
= 2 
7 2 be 
| - CA 
à - 
> 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 225 


36. Photo of bottom of flask of plant I, Vicia villosa, showing club shaped nod- 
ules on the roots, (enlarged). 


37. Photo of bottom of flask of plant I, Vicia villosa, showing moderate growth 
of roots, which are smooth except for the nodules. Largest nodules 8 x 
2 m.m after 4 months’ growth. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 227 


38. Vicia villosa, plant 2. View showing the growth of roots. Not inoculated 
and no nodules formed. The roots did not grow smoothly like those of 
the inoculated plants, but became very nodose. As the growth of the 
stem and leaf gradually declined, the root formation became excessive. 


Photo after + months’ growth. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 229 


39. Vicia villosa, plant 2. Showing growth of stem and leaf, same plant as fig. 
38. Photo after four months’ growth. 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 231 


40. Three flask cultures taken 10. II. 06. 1 Flask VII containing two pea seeds 
planted Nov. 29th, 1905. It was not inoculated. No bacteria were pre- 
sent and no nodules developed. 

2. Flask X containing two pea seeds inoculated 12. IX. 05. The plant 


which lived had eight nodules, at the time the photograph was taken. 
May 7th it had SO. 


3. Flask VIII planted on 12.12.05 with one germinating pea and one 


germinating vetch seed. Inoculated with Ps. radicicola obtained from 
vetch. 10 nodules developed on the vetch, none on the pea. 


ae te (ee Eu 
3 À : à 7 e 13 "1 
< + 
LA 
: 
: 
z 
. 
; 
; 
2. 
; 
5 
È 
‘ à 
\ 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 253 


41. Soy Bean. Two plants grown in the open, the one on the right inoculated at 
the time of seeding with a culture of Ps. radicicola obtained from Soy, 
the one on the left untreated. 


/ ! ca Pe f | 

7 f | ms 
_ ¢ t i 
7 a + Z 
> ‘ ? = ‘ 
, i 
Dh , ’ : 
Ss 0 > ‘ . 
a . et | . 

: . A 

2 i i ï S ld 

, F * i 
7 “« ; 
; , \ 
re 
f ? 

1 @ 


235 


NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 


[HARRISON & BARLOW | 


Û 
> 


Those on the right from inoculated plants, those on the left 


Soy Bean roots. 


42, 


treated ones. 


Irom un 


- 


17 


Sec. IV., 1906 


[HARRISON & BARLOW] NODULE ORGANISM OF THE LEGUMINOSAE 237 


43. Photograph of colonies of Ps. radicicola obtained from Lathyrus sativus. 
This culture was made from a laboratory stock culture 1 year and 237 
days old. The medium used was R87. Age of colonies § days. 


Section IV., 1906. [239 ] Trans. R. S. C. 


XIII.— A Birch Rope; An Account of a Remarkable Tumour Growing 
upon the white Birch. 


By D. P. PENHALLOW, D. Sc., MacDonald Professor of Botany, McGill 
University. : 


(Read May 22nd, 1906.) 


While in attendance at the Forestry Convention held at Ottawa 
during the last winter, my attention was directed to a remarkable growth 
upon a white birch (Betula populifolia), which had been found in the 
New Brunswick woods and was subsequently deposited in the Museum 
of the Crown Lands Department. In response to an expression of 
opinion that the growth was of a nature which justified careful examina- 
tion, I shortly afterward received from Mr. T. G. Loggie of the Crown 
Lands Department, a short portion of the growth which a very casual 
examination showed to be of an extraordinary character. The informa- 
tion accompanying the specimen was of the most meagre character, and 
it did not afford any clue as to the causes which might have issued in 
such an unusual development. The original, verbal information stated 
that the growth was at least twenty feet in length, and that it hung free, 
being attached at the upper end only. Upon communicating with Mr. 
Loggie with respect to further details, he forwarded the reply to Mr. H. 
M. Balkam of Plaster Rock, N.B., by whom the specimen was found, 
which contained only a repetition of what I had heard before. It 
therefore became evident that any further light which might be gained 
as to the cause of the growth, must be derived entirely from a micro- 
scopical examination of the specimen itself. ‘This examination was 
therefore undertaken without any expectation of gaining a complete 
solution of the question, but of obtaining such information as would 
materially assist in explaining any similar growth should such be found 
at a future time; but the likelihood of a recurrence of any such growth 
in this latitude is exceedingly remote, as it seems to have resulted from 
a peculiar combination of circumstances which may not again appear. 

Although the original specimen as found, is described as having been 
some twenty feet in length, the sample which reached me was only 
about 36 cm long; but this was quite sufficient to establish all the essen- 
tial features of external appearance, as well as of internal structure. In 
its external aspects the growth may be described as follows :— 

The surface is characterized by the presence of a white but very thin 
tissue which imparts the general aspect of birch bark. This layer is the 


Sec. IV., 1906. 18 


240 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


result of bleaching as developed in the outermost cork layers, the cells 
of which have also become devoid of contents, the whole as in the outer 
layers of normal birch bark. It is to be observed, however, that the 
bleached layers are not developed with uniformity over the entire surface | 
and this, in conjunction with an irregular exfoliation, produces a 
blotched appearance due to the exposure of the underlying and brown 
layers. Further examination also shows no evidence whatever, of lenti- 
cels, nor are there any indications of nodal regions. It is thus to be 
noted that, while the general aspect of the structure is such as to indi- 
cate with certainty, its relation to the white birch, it differs from the 
latter in the important respect that there are no lenticels. ‘The form 
of the growth is peculiar and points to some determining influence. The 
entire structure is of essentially uniform width and thickness throughout 
—that is, there is a variation in such dimensions of not more than about 
one millimetre. The cross-section shows a narrow ellipse, the dimen- 
sions of which are 1.0-1.1 em. X 0.30-0.40 em., from which it is also 
to be observed that there is very little bulk, and that the growth was 
of an exceedingly slender character. A transverse section discloses the 
fact that the structure is not homogeneous, but that it is built up of a 
series of concentric layers disposed about a central, slit-like cavity. A 
magnifying power of ten diameters is quite sufficient to show that there 
are from 38 to 41 such layers, that they are composed of cork tissue and 
that they are separated from one another by a layer of absciss tissue 
which ruptures in drying, or which is completely ruptured by the action 
of the knife in sectioning; so that whether we look at the end of the 
specimen, or at the section removed therefrom, the layers are quite 
separate and distinct from each other (Fig. 1.) 

Further, microscopical examination shows that the various cork 
layers have been disposed about a central region of parenchyma in which 
they obviously had their origin, and it is desirable that these regions 
should be studied in detail. The parenchymatous layer occupying the 
central area (fig. 2, pr.) readily splits at maturity as the result of ex- 
treme desiccation, so that it is never found entire, but its two halves lie 
on opposite, sides of a central cavity and form layers of very unequal 
thickness as may be seen in the photograph. Structurally, it consists of 
rounded and very thick-walled parenchyma cells, between which there are 
also developed numerous and often very large intercellular spaces which 
probably represent a structural accommodation to internal aeration. 
The size and frequency of these spaces can be understood when it is re- 
called that in the absence of lenticels, respiration must have been carried 
on under exceptionally difficult conditions after the cork commenced to 
form, and towards the end of the growth it may even have become in- 


[PENHALLOW] | A BIRCH ROPE . 241 


tramolecular. Not infrequently the cells show a transverse elongation, 
indicating a branching habit of growth which is generally observed with 
greater clearness in the longitudinal section. 

In the longitudinal section the parenchyma is seen to consist of 
usually much elongated cells which often become distinctly cylindrical 
and several times longer than broad (fig. 3, prt and fig. 4, pr.), but it 
is also equally clear that these cells constantly diminish in length toward 
the outer face until they gradually pass into cork (fig. 4, c). The walls 
are very irregularly thickened, and usually in such a manner that the 


Bre: 45 xZo0: 


relation of such thickening to mechanical support is quite obvious. The 
walls are also very generally provided with rather large and frequent 
pits which are nevertheless often so localized that a given section may 
not show them, but they appear in part, in figure 4, pt., as also in trans- 
verse section (fig. 5) where they impart a sieve-plate aspect to the ter- 
minal walls. Perhaps the most remarkable feature of the parenchyma 
tissue, is the presence of somewhat definitely organized medullary rays 
which, though localized, nevertheless show a very well defined relation 
to the other parts. In the transverse section (fig. 6, r.c.) they are seen 


242 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


to be composed of radially elongated cells disposed in two or more series, 
but outwardly becoming abruptly shortened and passing into cork 
toward the outer face (fig. 6. 0.f.) The tissue immediately abutting 
upon the rays is that of the general parenchyma structure, and the draw- | 
ing (fig 6) gives one more example of the very irregular development it 

presents, as well as the extent and character of the intercellular spaces. 

In the longitudinal section, the rays are generally several cells high (fig. 

3, mr.), and in all cases they are found to extend from the central cavity 

through the entire thickness of the parenchyma layer to the cork, with 

which their structure becomes blended. 

On the outer face of the parenchyma tissue, there is a well defined 
layer of cork, the two being united into one structure throughout, with 
no evidence at any point, of an absciss layer. Nor is there any well de- 
fined evidence of a phellogen layer which evidently disappeared com- 
pletely at the moment of full maturity. From this description it is 
obvious that the innermost layer of structure is composite, and that it 
consists on its inner face of the residue of parenchyma tissue of which 


\ GE 
2S 


SS 


Fr ox 250)! 


the entire growth must have been composed in the first instance, while 
upon its outer face it consists of cork, the latter constituting approxi- 
mately about one-third of the entire layer and representing the last pro- 
duct in the activity of the growing parts. 
The cork presents, in the main, the features usually characteristic 
of such a tissue, deviating in detail with respect to (1) the somewhat 
unusual thickness of the cell walls, and (2) the presence of very abun- 
dant cell contents which persist throughout the entire structure (figs. 2 
and 7) and do not disappear until the outermost layers have been 
brought under the influence of weathering and the bleaching process is 
developed. An inspection of the various layers of cork shows that each 
is composed of about six to eight cells with very great constancy. ‘The 
various layers are separated by an absciss layer of one or rarely of two 
cells, the walls of which are very thin and easily ruptured, the cell itself 
being about twice the radial diameter of the adjacent and unmodified 
cork cells. The process of desiccation incident to full maturity, appears 


[PENHALLOW ] A BIRCH ROPE 243 


to be sufficient to rupture this layer, so that upon sectioning, or even 
upon inspection of the original specimen, the layers appear quite dis- 
tinct and separate from one another. A comparison of the layers 
throughout the entire transverse section shows considerable variation in 
thickness of such a nature that there is a more or less graduated diminu- 
tion from within outwardly. Thus the outermost perfect layer of cork 
has a thickness of 17.8 u, while the innermost layer has a thickness of 
53.4 mM, giving a ratio of 1 : 3. From this it is evident that the 
various layers must have been subjected to compression in growth, and 
an attempt was therefore made to obtain a confirmation or denial of 
this result from another point of view. Accordingly measurements were 
taken of the radial diameter of the cork cells in the inner and outer 
regions of growth, as well as on the inner and outer faces of the indi- 
vidual layer in the two situations, with the following results :— 


Innermost laver of cork united to parenchyma. 


L'OTAN dk) Nee APN hid see ee NE INDE 8.70 bu 

2 LECT AR HEC ea, Un eT ney ena” oes aia Um Maan OO) 977 
Second or first completed layer of cork. 

PERE TAC CY PTE AT ES TE PR Sense fee Ua, 8.70 y 

Wureriace: . 11.1 5.26 u 


One of the outermost layers of cork, immediately be- 
neath the bleached layers. 
LRO CON MEL TN Re En ne 3.01 fu 
DR CO A PQ ae We ae a 3.51 pu 


These results taken collectively, show most conclusively, that the 
layers of cork have been developed under considerable tension resulting 
from the resistance of the outermost and first formed layers. But the 
second set of measurements also shows very convincingly, what might 
have been anticipated on theoretical grounds, that while there is an 
augmenting tension toward the outermost layers, the same rule applies 
to the individual layer in such way that the outermost cells are always 
of inferior radial diameter. The general result is expressed in the meas- 
urements which show that the cells of the outermost layers are to those 
of the innermost layers, where the conditions were most favourable to 
free development, in the ratio of 1: 2.48, a fact which is also apparent 
from an inspection of figures 2 and 7. 

Some interesting structural variations have been noted, and these 
may be briefly considered. ‘Typically, the central region of parenchyma 
is surrounded, terminally as well as laterally, by well developed cork in 
successive layers. ‘I'he parenchyma itself is somewhat more dense at 
the extremities where it does not readily admit of fracture at maturity 


244 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


so that the internal space which is ultimately developed does not reach, 
quite to the ends, but stops some distance short (fig. 1). This typical 
structure, however, does not seem to apply throughout, since a series of 
sections discloses local variations of a more or less marked character. | 
Thus in figure 8 it will be seen that an area of parenchyma of circular 
form, has been cut ‘off from the principal mass of structure and has 
formed cork all about it. Such nodal areas are sometimes duplicated by 
smaller ones (fig. 9), but whether there are one or two, the same de- 
velopment occurs at opposite ends of the same section. Another varia- 
tion also appears locally, in the development of radiating zones of more 
dense structure (fig. 8). Whenever such zones appear, they lie between 
the nodal areas of parenchyma and the principal mass of tissue, and 


thence extending outwardly, they curve upward toward the narrower end 
of the section, at the same time broadening out in a fan-shaped manner. 
Upon a careful analysis of this region, it is found to be composed of a very 
compact and modified cork tissue which forms a perfectly continuous 
structure without absciss layers. The first suggestion arising from this 
observation is, that such regions are designed to furnish a necessary de- 
gree of cohesion between the various layers of cork which would other- 
wise become separated at an early period of development, whereby the 
integrity of the structure as a whole would be seriously jeopardized. 
Such indeed may be the case, but it does not serve to explain the origin 
of such localized variations in structure. Upon a closer scrutiny of the 
various parts, it will be observed that the following facts may be 
noted :— 

1. The fan-shaped tissue has its greatest expansion in the outer 
layers of cork. 


[PENHALLOW ] A BIRCH ROPE 245 


2. It does not extend to the outermost layers of cork which were 
the first in development, but it terminates several layers below the 
general surface of the structure (fig. 8.) 

3. Where nodal areas of parenchyma tissue are developed, the 
outermost one is always the smaller or smallest as the case may be (fig. 
9), the size increasing in centripetal order. 

4. In the growth of the structure, the development of the cork 
has progressed centripetally and in such a way that the tension between 
the outer and inner regions steadily augments. 

From the facts thus recited, it would be reasonable to conclude that 
the development of the fan-shaped areas of dense and modified cork, as 
well as the development of the nodal areas, is a direct response to condi- 
tions of tension attendant upon the formation of the inelastic cork mem- 
branes. 


Conclusions. 


Upon the basis of the foregoing facts, we are now in a position to 
consider an explanation of the peculiar growth under examination, so 
far as an explanation may be possible; but unfortunately we are not in 
possession of some of the most essential facts with respect to the special 
features which characterized the specimen in situ. In the absence of 
such facts, it is impossibie to draw important inferences from its struc- 
ture; and although we may not be able to ascertain the determining cause 
of such a peculiar development, we can determine certain aspects of its 
formation with accuracy, and from the conclusions so obtained, draw in- 
ferences which may prove of value as suggestions with reference to the 
possible solution of allied phenomena. 

The question as to ‘how and under what conditions the growth ori- 
ginated, is perhaps beyond the possibilities of successful solution at pre- 
sent, but in our efforts to reach an answer, it may be well to first of all 
examine into the bearing of the internal structure. As already 
pointed out, there is a complete absence of anything which can be inter- 
preted as an evidence of intermittent, longitudinal growth, since there 
is an entire absence of nodes or of rings or scars which would mark suc- 
cessive periods of development, such as would be found in the leaf scars 
and nodes upon young branches of the same tree. From this circum- 
stance we are led to infer that the entire growth in length must have 
been accomplished within the limits of one season. This conclusion is 
greatly strengthened by certain other observed facts. The structure as 
a whole is very slender, according in this respect with very rapid de- 
velopment. Furthermore, the absence of lenticels or other respiratory 


246 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


and transpiratory organs, indicates that the development could not have 
been greatly prolonged, and that not only was the entire length com- 
pleted within a short time, but that the formation of the cork tissue 
must likewise have been completed within a correspondingly brief in- : 
terval. If we seek elsewhere, examples confirmatory of such develop- 
ment, it is very difficult indeed to find them in this latitude. It is true 
that in tropical latitudes numerous examples of rhizophores and aerial 
roots may be found, and these offer general parallels in development. 
But such erial organs require for their growth, a humid atmosphere of 
relatively high temperature, and this rarely obtains—certainly not for 
any prolonged period—in a northern latitude such as that of New 
Brunswick; and even if, under exceptional circumstances such a com- 
bination were to occur in a moist woodland, it would still be difficult to 
consider it sufficient in itself, to induce the development of such a struc- 
ture without the primary assistance of some special stimulus such as 
would arise through the presence of a definite lesion of some sort. For 
we are now dealing with an abnormal growth, and not with a normal 
development of lateral organs such as would be presented by aerial roots 
and rhizophores. And here we are faced with a mechanical difficulty ot 
some importance. The bark of the white birch is enclosed in a definite 
periderm of considerable thickness composed of a large number of super- 
imposed layers of cork. It would require considerable force to rupture 
such an investing membrane, and we should rather expect, as occurs 
usually in such cases, for the hypertrophy to respond to the pressure and 
give rise to a tumour of more or less spherical form, situated beneath the 
outer bark. But in this case the very remarkable form of the outgrowth 
itself may assist us to a correct interpretation of the facts. The “ rope ”— 
so-called because of its attenuated form, but without implying any torsion 
of its structure—has been found to present the form of a narrow ellipse 
in transverse section. This can have but one meaning with respect to 
the position which the rope occupied on the tree. It would be mani- 
festly impossible for it to grow with its major axis in a vertical plane, 
for even if it emerged from the bark in that position, the effect of its 
own weight would soon develop a torsion which would speedily bring the 
major axis into a horizontal position, and this, we may as- 
sume, Was its real position from the very outset of its de- 
velopment. Now itis to be observed that while the thickness of 
the rope may very readily have been the result of subsequent expansion, 
the breadth and more particularly the form, are in direct conformity 
with the length and the general shape of a lenticel which always occupies 
a horizontal position in the white birch. Such a lenticel would form a 
very natural point of emergence as a region of least resistance for a hy- 


[PENHALLOW ] A BIRCH ROPE 247 


pertrophy originating immediately beneath it, and it seems to offer the 
most acceptable explanation of some of the most important features of 
the growth. 

It is evident, however, that after emergence, the tumour must have 
continued its development in the form of parenchyma tissue until the 
completion of its length, and that this development must have been con- 
tinous within a short period as already shown. ‘That there was a certain 
definite, though limited necessity for resistance to transverse strains such 
as would be developed by wind pressure, is evident from the presence 
of mechanical tissue in the form of the cylindrical, branching and thick- 
walled parenchyma cells; but that the necessity for such mechanical ele- 
ments was not great, is also implied by its limited extent and by the com- 
plete absence of fibrous tissue. 

The development of so attenuated an organ of such great length, 
necessitated some special provision for the transport of nutrient ma- 
terials, as well as for the aeration of parts. This latter we have seen to 
have been provided for through the large and numerous intercellular 
spaces of the parenchyma tissue, and it is possible even, that the central 
cavity may have developed before complete maturity with special refer- 
ence to this particular purpose. The longitudinal circulation of the nu- 
trient fluids was provided for in the first instance, by the parenchyma 
cells themselves, but this provision no doubt proved inadequate after a 
time and it was therefore supplemented by the mechanical cells which 
also served as conductive cells, as indicated by their strongly developed 
and numerous pits. Lateral circulation was provided for in the same 
way and through the same elements, but more largely by the develop- 
ment of elementary medullary rays which served to connect the central 
region with the outer regions where the formation of cork was particu- 
larly active; and it is quite probable that these structures also served to 
some extent for lateral aeration. 

We have yet to gain an explanation of the way in which the growth 
in length was accomplished. It may have been brought about in one of 
three ways, or by a combination of two or more of them. 

1. The development may have been wholly basal and confined to 
the tissues lying within the area of the living bark of the parent tree. 
In that case the growth would have been pushed forward, and the in- 
crease of length would have depended entirely upon the formation of 
new tissue at the base. Had such a method of development obtained, 
the tumour weuld probably have shown more or less marked irregularity 
of surface indicative of want of absolutely continuous development, but 
nothing of the kind appears. Moreover, such basal development would 
have resulted in the cork being disposed in transverse layers, inasmuch 

Sec. IV., 1906. 19 


; ‘ 
248 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


as the older parts would have matured as rapidly as formed; but on the 
contrary we find the cork layers to be developed longitudinally, and all 
the evidence points to a simultaneous activity throughout the entire 
length. We must therefore dismiss the theory of basal growth as being 
inconsistent with, and, indeed, opposed to the facts. 

2. The second alternative is terminal growth. If the elongation 
were to depend entirely upon activity of the cells at the apex, then it 
would still be possible for all the more inferior parts to continue active 
until the close of the season, but two very substantial facts seem to be 
opposed to this view. In the first place, unless the rate of growth were 
far greater than we have any reason to suppose was the case, and indeed 
far greater than would be probable under the climatic conditions of the 
locality, the length attained would not have been completed within the 
limits of one season as there is good reason to suppose must have been 
the case. In the second place, under the influence of such terminal 
growth, the basal portions would have matured much in advance of the 
terminal parts, even while the latter were continuing to elongate. There 
is no direct evidence in the specimen to prove that such may have been 
the case, but on the contrary the strictly parenchymatous character of the 
basic structure seems to point to an opposite conclusion. 

3. We are thus brought to our third alternative, according to which 
we may suppose that as the tumour emerged from the bark, it was com- 
posed wholly of very active parenchyma tissue which continued to in- 
crease in volume as such a tissue would naturally do when reacting to a 
traumatic stimulus. Under such circumstances, each cell would parti- 
cipate in the process of division, and thus through division and enlarg- 
ment of the individual cells, the tumour would not only increase rapidly 
in volume, but at such a rate as would render its completion within a 
comparatively short time, a definite possibility. This would seem to my 
mind, the most satisfactory explanation which the observed facts will 
warrant. On this basis it becomes possible to account for the develop- 
ment of the cork which obviously proceeded centripetally, and nearly 
if not quite simultaneously throughout the entire length of the tumour. 

The only other consideration that needs to be dealt with, is the 
structural alteration of the cork layers due to compression. It has been 
shown that each layer of cork was influenced by compression in such a 
way that the outer cells are always radially narrower than the inner- 
most, an alteration also exhibited between the outermost and the inner- 
most layers in such way that the cells of the latter are two and one-half 
times broader than the former. Otherwise this observation is supported 
by the fact that the innermost layers of cork are approximately three 
times thicker than the outer layers. But it is also probable that this 


[PENHALLOW] A BIRCH ROPE 249 


compression is expressed in the formation of the nodal areas of paren- 
chyma, as well as in the local consolidation of the cork tissue accom- 
panied by an obliteration of the absciss layers. Upon reviewing all the 
circumstances connected with this very remarkable tumour, we are 
brought to the following final conclusions: 

1. The outgrowth had its origin in a lesion of the living bark, the 
precise nature and origin of which cannot be ascertained. 

2. <A definite hypertrophy developed as a traumatic reaction, but 
instead of becoming localized and forming wood or sclerotic tissue, 1t 
continued its development as active parenchyma and forced its way 
through the overlying and external tissue of the periderm. 

3. The form of the outgrowth suggests that it emerged through 
a lenticel as a region of minimum resistance. 

4. The probable relation of the outgrowth to a lenticel, suggests 
that it may have had its origin in the spongy parenchyma which forms 
the aeriferous tissue of the lenticel. 

5. The outgrowth may be regarded as a special form of tumour, 
the particular character of which was determined by the nature of the 
surrounding parts, and particularly by the possibilities of ready exit 
through a lenticel. 

6. The tumour developed by simultaneous division and enlarge- 
ment of the component cells, throughout its entire length, and it was 
completed within the limits of one season of growth. 

7. The formation of cork proceeded more or less simultaneously 
over the entire surface until final exhaustion of the parenchyma. 

8. The primary cause of the tumour should be sought in a lesion 
of the living bark, combined with conditions of high temperature and 
high atmospheric humidity. 


250 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 


Figure 1.—Transverse section showing the general structure of the 
“rope,” and the development of the central cavity. x. 9.5. 


Figure 2.—Transverse section showing at pr. the parenchyma bordering 
upon the central cavity; c. the last formed and imper- 
fect cork layer; ab, the absciss layer which has been 
ruptured. «x 4170} 


Figure 3.—Longitudinal section showing at pr, the parenchyma cells 
of the innermost layer, which have assumed an elongated 
form and become mechanical cells; pr. the thick-walled 
cells of the same region; c, the last formed and imper- 
fectly developed layer of cork; ab, the absciss layer; 
mr, the medullary ray. x 170. 


Figure 4.—Longitudinal section showing at pr, the elongated paren- 
chyma cells of the innermost structure bordering upon 
the central cavity, with pitted cells at pt, and on the 
left (c), the last development of cork tissue. x 250. 


Figure 5.—Transverse section showing the pitted terminal walls of 
the parenchyma cells as in Fig. 4, pt. x 250. 


Figure 6.—Transverse section from the region of the innermost paren- 
chyma, with the outer face (of), the inner face (if), the 
parenchyma tissue with thick walls and intercellular 
spaces (pr), and a rudimentary medullary ray (rc). 
x 200. 


Figure 7.—Transverse section showing the series of cork layers with 
absciss layers, and the variations in volume of the cork 
cells. x 170. 


‘Figure 8.—Transverse section showing nodal regions of structure at 
the end of the central cavity, together with a radially 
developed region of modified cork devoid of absciss layers. 
KoA. 


Figure 9.—Transverse section showing a nodal region at the precise 
extremity of the central cavity. x 34. 


251 


A BIRCH ROPE 


[PENHALLOW | 


x 170. 


2. 


FrG 


20 


Sec. IV, 1906. 


283 


A BIRCH ROPE 


[PENHALLOW] 


xe ZO! 


KG zo: 


SN 
‘ai 

MAN 
“yy 


Ai 


wh 


>) 


>< 0! 


Gaels 


[PENHALLOW] A BIRCH ROPE 255 


Fira 9, x 34 


Sec. IV., 1906. 21 


| \ FOr 
G : 1 : 
‘ Mi 
\ ; 
> 
NE 
: UT , 
N 
re 

; - L 

: 

7 
a 
ee 
' 
v 
a 
i 
LI 

\ 


Section IV., 1906. [ 287] Traxs. R. S. C. 


XIV.— Some of the Unsolved Problems of Immunity. 


By Arrert G. Nicxozrs, M.A., M.D., C.M., 


Assistant Professor of Pathology, McGill University; Assistant Physician, 
Montreal General Hospital; Pathologist to the Western Hospital, 
Montreal. 


\ 


Presented by Pror. Wescey Mizzs, M.D. 
(Read May 23rd, 1906.) 


Immunity is that property of living protoplasm which makes it 
insusceptible to the action of agents that are ordinarily deleterious to 
other organisms of a similar kind. From the point of view of the 
therapeutist it may be defined as “cure in operation from the begin- 
ning.” Immunity, which is tne special peculiarity of the organism 
from the earliest period of its existence, is termed natural, innate, or 
hereditary immunity. Immunity the result of causes influencing the 
erganism during its lifetime is called acquired immunity. Strictly 
speaking, the word “immunity” denotes complete protection against 
external noxæ, but it is not customary to confine its application within 
such narrow limits. Complete or absolute immunity is rarely met with, 
but we have between this extreme and marked susceptibility all possible 
grades of relative immunity. 

The phenomena of immunity are manifested in connection with 
a great variety of substances. These are in most cases chemical in 
nature and may be derived from the vegetable, mineral, and animal 
kingdoms. 

A consideration of the subject of natural immunity gives rise to 
many interesting and suggestive lines of thought. It has long been 
recognized that certain organisms are more susceptible to the action 
of deleterious agencies than are others. These differences are evidenced 
with regard to species, races, families, individuals, and life-periods. As 
a general thing, we find that the cold-blooded species of animals are 
insusceptible in a considerable degree to the action of micro-organisms 
that produce disease in warm-blooded animals, and vice-versa. Note- 
worthy variations in this particular are also found in the case of the 
warm-blooded animals themselves. Human beings, for example, suffer 
from typhoid fever and syphilis, diseases that, so far as we know, never 
occur in the lower animals in the ordinary course of nature. Conversely, 
many of the infective organisms that attack the lower animals never 

Sec. JV., 1906. 22 


258 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


invade the human system. Again, the bacillus of anthrax is virulent 
for guinea-pigs and mice, but has no effect upon white rats. Ordinary 
sheep are also very susceptible to anthrax, but the Algerian breed are 


much more resistent. The field-mouse is susceptible to glanders, while | 


the white mouse is immune. The microbe of rabbit septicaemia is 
excessively poisonous for-rabbits but does not affect rats, guinea-pigs, 
or dogs. With regard to human beings different races exhibit similar 
notable differences. Whites, for example, are more susceptible to mala- 
ria and yellow fever than are negroes. 

Family peculiarities have an important bearing on the etiology 
of infective disease, as hardly needs to be mentioned. That certain 
families are particularly liable to tuberculosis, and that when they have 
contracted it the affection goes badly with them, is a matter of common 
knowledge. 

We may, moreover, narrow the matter down still farther, namely, to 
the individual. Personal idiosyncrasy is an element that always has to 
be taken into account by physicians. Some individuals are abnormally 
sensitive to the action of drugs, such as quinin, antipyrin, mercury, 
arsenic, salicylic acid, morphin, iodoform, and the venom of poison-ivy. 

Age is also to be considered. It is a matter of common observ- 
ation that children are much more susceptible to certain infective dis- 


ease, such as measles, scarlatina, whooping-cough, chicken-pox, than 


are adults. On the other hand, children are believed to tolerate large 
doses of arsenic, belladonna, quinin, digitalis, potassium iodide, and 
inercury. Diseases like tuberculosis, typhoid fever, and osteomyelitis, 
are much more common in youth and early adult life than they are in 
those advanced in years. 

When we come to seek the explanation of the occurrence of natural 
immunity we are confronted with many and great difficulties. The 
problem is most complex as most vital processes usually are. It would 
be idle, therefore, to expect a simple solution or even a single solution. 
The subject, too, is bound up inextricably with that most abstruse 
question — heredity. 

By way of clearing the ground for a proper understanding of the 
matters we have to discuss, it is necessary to refer briefly to the means 
of protection which the animal organism naturally possesses. The 
ectodermic covering of the body is differentiated into two portions, 
the skin or epidermis and the mucous membranes. These constitute 
the first line of defence. Before systemic effects can be produced it 
is necessary for the offending agents to pass through the protecting 
envelope. This is ordinarily effected through the medium of an abra- 
sion or other solution of continuity. When once an entrance has 


-[ NICHOLLS] UNSOLVED PROBLEMS OF IMMUNITY 259 


been gained, the duties of protection devolve upon the blood and certain 
of the tissue cells and juices. The cells chiefly concerned in the com- 
bat against the aggressive agents are the polymorphonuclear leucocytes 
and hyaline cells of the blood, the lining endothelial cells of blood- 
vessels, lymph-spaces, and serous sacs, and to a less extent those of 
connective tissue. There is evidence, too, for thinking that the blood 
plasma contains substances that are inimical to the growth of infective 
micro-organisms. There is another factor, also, to be considered, 
namely, the lymphatic channels and the lymph-nodes. The lymphatic 
channels in the large majority of cases determine the line of invasion 
of the offending substances, and the nodes interpose a barrier in the 
shape of a filter, not merely a mechanical filter, but more than this, 
a vital filter, the cells of which have, to some extent, the power of 
fixing the deleterious agents and neutralizing their effects. From one 
,point of view this is a decided gain, but from another, is harmful in 
that the presence of an extensive and intercommunicating lymph sys- 
tem renders the systemic dissemination of the offending substances more 
easy. 

The bodily temperature appears also to be of moment. Many 
pathogenic germs can flourish only within a comparatively narrow tem- 
perature range. Outside of these limits their growth is inhibited or 
stopped altogether. This probably explains in part why it is that 
micro-organisms that are injurious to man are innocuous to the lower 
animals. Jn the coldblooded animals we have not only a low temper- 
ature, but in some cases a varying temperature, a condition of things 
that is highly inimical to many germs. In certain of the higher 
vertebrates the temperature is two or three degrees higher than it is 
in man. It would seem probable, also, though upon this point we 
have little or no information, that the plasma of human blood differs 
considerably from that of the lower animals in the matter of the con- 
tained salts and their relative proportions, and we have experimental 
evidence to show that a comparatively slight alteration in the percentage 
of the chemical substances contained in nutrient media is sufficient to 
materially inhibit the growth of bacteria. We may find in this an 
explanation of the variations in the susceptibility of various species of 
animals. | 

To give an adequate explanation of the variation in susceptibility 
in different races of the same species is extremely difficult. We know 
that many primitive races, living remote from civilization, such as 
the Eskimo, Icelanders, and North American Indians, are extremely 
susceptible to the ravages of infectious diseases like tuberculosis, small- 
pox and syphilis. The comparative immunity of other peoples is 


260 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


probably due to the fact that for ages they have been attacked by these 
diseases and their tissues have in time become acclimatized, as it were, 
to the deleterious influences which are brought to bear upon them. In 


what this increasing resisting power essentially consists we are not in 


a position to say, but it is clearly inherited. The susceptibility of 
certain families to diseases like tuberculosis is probably also a heredit- 
ary peculiarity, the tendency being as it were, focussed in such per- 
sons as a result of certain accidents of marriage. No satisfactory 
explanation of personal idiosyncrasies has ever been offered. 

We pass on now, however, to a more fruitful field for enquiry, 
namely, acquired immunity. It is a well known fact that individuals 
can acquire a toleration of poisonous substances by the ingestion of 
these substances in gradually increasing doses over prolonged periods 
of time. The chronic alcoholic, the morphinomaniac, and the arsenic- 
eaters of Styria are cases in point. Similarly, one attack of an infec- 
tious disease will in many cases confer a more or less lasting immun- 
ity. Small-pox, scarlatina, typhoid fever, and syphilis, rarely attack 
the same individual more than once, though exceptions to this rule 
undoubtedly occur. The degree of immunity in such cases varies 
greatly with the disease and the individual. The immunity after syph- 
ilis and small-pox is almost absolute, after other infectious diseases 
is less marked. Immunity of this kind, active immunity as it is called, 
can also be produced artificially. 

Perhaps the earliest example of this of which we have authentic 
information is the inoculation for small-pox practised in the East and 
referred to by Lady Mary Wortley Montague in her letters written in 
the earlier part of the eighteenth century (1718). The method con- 
sisted in the inoculation under the skin of healthy individuals of ma- 
terial taken from the pocks. In this way a mild form of the disease 
was in many cases induced which protected against subsequent attacks. 
The procedure does not seem to have been at all certain in its results, 
however, and it was not until somewhat later, when Jenner introduced 
the practice of vaccination with the lymph taken from cases of cow- 
pox, that reliable results were attained. It is now believed that vac- 
cinia or cow-pox is small-pox in an attenuated form, and that by giving 
a person an attack so mild as to be in most cases devoid of more than 
trifling inconvenience we protect against a much more serious type of 
the malady. In this case we are probably dealing with an animal 
parasite, but the same principle applies to certain vegetable parasites, 
namely, bacteria. It has heen found possible to produce immunity 
by the inoculation of living bacteria whose virulence has been attenuated 
in various ways, as Pasteur did with chicken-cholera and anthrax in 


r 


[NICHOLLS] UNSOLVED PROBLEMS OF IMMUNITY 261 


sheep, or by the products of their growth, the bacteria having been + 
filtered off or destroyed by heat, as in Haffkine’s method of immuniz- 
ation against plague, and Wright's antithyphoid inoculations. Such 
methods, however, are in general more efficacious in preventing, infec- 
tious disease than in curing it when once it has become established. 
A notable exception to this rule is met with in the case of diphtheria, 
in which disease we have in an antitoxic serum a powerful therapeutic 
agent. This, however, is prepared in another way. An animal, in 
this case a horse, is rendered immune by one or other of the methods 
mentioned, and when highly refractory is bled. The serum is separated 
from the biood and a certain amount of this when injected into a 
second individual suffering from diphtheria will often suffice to bring 
about cure, or, again, protect against the disease in those exposed to 
unfection. This form of immunity has been termed by Ehrlich passive 
immunity. It is temporary in character and is brought about by the 
action of anti-bodies, elaborated in one individual, which neutralize 
the effects of bacteria which have gained an entrance into a second. 
With regard to the method by which the economy protects itself 
against the onslaughts of the infecting micro-organisms many different 
opinions have been expressed.  Klebs and Pasteur held that during 
the first attack of any given disease the germ used up all the available 
pabulum and that its existence came to an end, as it were by starv- 
ation. Until this food-stuff was recreated the person was immune. 
Chauveau was of the opinion that, the toxic emanations from the bac- 
teria kept on accumulating in the system until they reached such a 
degree of concentration that farther existence of the germ became impos- 
sible. It was, in other words, poisoned by its own excreta. Grawitz 
explained the production of immunity on the theory that infection is 
a combat between the germs and the cells of the body. If the cells 
are victorious in the conflict they acquire increased powers of resistance 
to the germ in question and subsequently are able to destroy it as 
soon as it gains an entrance into the tissues. These various ideas 
need only be mentioned, for they are not seriously entertained by path- 
ologists at the present day. Two chief opposing schools of thought 
only may be said to be in existence now. Metschnikoff, the apostle 
of the doctrine of phagocytosis, would attribute the cure of infective 
disease and the production of immunity to the activities of special 
cells — phagocytes — especially certain leucocytes of the blood, the 
splenic corpuscles, the lining cells of blood- and lymph-channels and 
of serous sacs. The phenomena of phagocytosis are directly dependent 
upon the attraction (positive chemotaxis) existing between these cells 
and the bacteria and bacterial products. By their amceboid powers 


262 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


LU 
the phagocytes take up into their substance bacteria, much as they would 
ordinary food-stuffs, digesting them, assimilating portions of their 
material, and rejecting others. In the opinion of this eminent investi- 


gator and his pupils, phagocytosis is the all important factor in the. 


struggle of the body against infective disease. Opposed to this view 
is that of the “ Humoralists.” The work of Traube, Von Fodor, 
Pfeiffer, and Nuttall, to mention only a few, goes to show that certain 
protective substances are contained in the serum and plasma of the 
blood, which have the power of destroying defective micro-organisms. 
From this point:of view, the struggle against infection may be regarded 
as a sort of scavenging process, the phagocytes taking up and digesting 
micro-organisms that have been destroyed by other means. Flugge 
has graphically illustrated this conception by comparing the phagocytes 
to the trenches made ready behind the fighting line to receive the con- 
quered dead. 

It might at first sight be thought that these views are incompatible, 
but a little reflection will show that this is by no means so. It is 
conceivable that the bacterial substances in the plasma or serum are 
derived from certain cells, and that, therefore, the cells are the impor- 
tant factor after all. More searching enquiry would seem to bear this 
out. Long ago, Hankin proved that the leucocytes of immune animals 
contain bactericidal substances, and the more recent researches of Buch- 
ner, Vaughan, Denys and Havel, and Ribbert, go to prove that the 
bactericidal power of blood serum is due to substances derived from 
the leucocytes. As the matter now stands it may be said that prac- 
tically all pathologists admit the great importance of phagocytosis in 
the reaction of ‘the organism against infective disease. Metschnikoff 
on his part has been constrained to modify the original position ‘and 
now accepts the view that there is an extracellular as well as an intra- 
cellular activity brought into play. The points in debate at the present 
lime appear to be the relative importance of the intra- and extra-cellular 
activity as well as certain questions in regard to the details of the 
process by which immunity is brought about. 

The process of immunity has been aptly compared to a conflict, 


the micro-organisms damaging the tissues by means of the toxic pro- 


ducts of their metabolism, the invaded organism in its turn endeavour- 
ing to protect itself against the microbe by the elaboration of a certain 
defensive mechanism. When we consider the vital processes of the 
invader and the invaded we can readily understand ‘that the phenomena 
of infection and the reaction against infection must be highly compli- 
eated. From all we know of metabolism in general we may infer with 
considerable probability that the mechanism of defence consists in the 


[NICHOLLS | UNSOLVED PROBLEMS OF IMMUNITY 263 


production of protective substances which, entering the blood stream, 
are carried to the remotest parts of the body. These substances can 
be demonstrated in the blood and are undoubtedly the result of some 
vital process on the part of the infected organism, though where they 
are formed has not as yet been determined with certainty. Farther, 
it seems to be generally agreed that Ehrlich’s view is correct. namely, 
that before bacterial intoxication can occur, the toxin in question must 
enter into a chemical combination with some cellular element of the 
body. It is important to note in this connection that these chemical . 
affinities vary considerably, certain toxins having a special predilection 
for attacking certain cells, while others escape. Thus, the tetanus 
toxin and that of rabies have a marked tendency to attack the central 
nervous system; the diphtheria toxin has an attraction for the peri- 
pheral nerves; the toxin of scarlatina is prone to damage the secreting 
cells of the kidney, and so:on. 

To emphasize this peculiarity that the toxin has of turning to a 
particular class of cell, Wright has coined the term “ tropine ” to desig- 
nate bodies of this kind. Adopting this terminology, we may call the 
protective substances elaborated to combat the deleterious agents “ anti- 
tropines.” Several kinds of antitropines have been discovered, some 
capable of neutralizing the effects of bacterial tropines, others the 
tropines of certain highly organized plants, still others, those of anima! 
origin, such as snake-venom. After twenty years of research we are 
only now beginning to apprehend the importance of these antitropines 
and the marvellous complexity of the protective forces of the body. 
Several kinds of bacterial antitropines have already been demonstrated, 
such as antitoxins, agglutinins, precipitins, lysins, and opsonins, and 
there may be others. Moreover, these differ both quantitatively and 
qualitatively in special cares. 

The work of Wright and Douglas, published during the past two 
or three years, has thrown a flood of light upon the abstruse subject 
of immunity production. These observers have shown conclusively 
that the blood-fluids play a most important role in connection with 
phagocytosis. By investigating the action of the serum and the leuco- 
cytes separately and in conjunction upon bacteria, they have demon- 
strated that substances exist in the serum which. in some way later, 
the microbes in such a way as to render them an easy prey for the 
leucocytes. These substances they call “ opsonins,” from the word 
“opsono,” “I cater for,” “provide victuals for.”  Divesting their 
method of sundry technical details, it may be summed up as follows: 
Certain volumes of serum, bacterial emulsion, and leucocytes, pre- 
viously washed in a half per cent solution of sodium citrate in normal 


264 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


salt solution are mixed together, placed in the incubator for fifteen 
minutes at 37° Cent. A film is made from this on a glass slide, 
stained by a modified Romanoffsky method, and the number of bacteria 
ingested by the leucocytes is determined. The bacteria contained within 
twenty cells are counted and an average struck per cell. The authors 
find that the leucocytes have no power to engulph bacteria unless the 
latter have previously been sensitized by contact with blood serum. 
Conversely, serum loses its sensitizing power if it be heated to 60° to 
65° for fifteen minutes. Clearly, then, the serum contains some sub- 
stance of fundamental importance in determining the fact of phagocy- 
tosis. These opsonins, as they are called, are thermolabile, and, accord- 
ing to Wright and Douglas, act by effecting some change in the bacteria 
and not by directly stimulating the activities of the leucocytes. These 
observations have been amply confirmed by later observers, notably, 
Bulloch and Atkin, Hektoen and Ruediger, and Dean. In the case of 
the sera of animals immunized against certain infections, it has farther 
been shown that opsonins are present in the blood in increased amounts, 
and, moreover, as a result of the inoculation of bacterial toxins the 
opsonic content of the blood can be increased. Some doubt still exists 
as to the nature of these opsonins of Wright and Douglas. Dean, for 
instance, holds that opsonins are thermostable and, therefore, are to be 
identified with the specific “immune body,” “ fixateur,” or “ substance 
sensibilisatrice,” previously described by other observers, as Denys, 
Metschnikoff, Savtschenko, and Levaditi. The question arises whether 
the opsonins of normal blood serum are identical with those of immune 
sera. Dean’s work would tend to confirm the idea that they are. 
That normal sera contain an immune substance has, of course, been 
known for some time. The normal antitoxin (e.g.. of diphtheria) 
and antiferments need only be mentioned. The observations of Pfeiffer, 
Bordet, Moxter, Ehrlich, and Morgenroth, have firmly established the 
fact that the bacteriolytic and hæmolytie actions of normal sera are 
due to the presence in the sera of an immune body plus a complement. 
With regard to opsonins, it is-still undetermined whether free comple- 
ment may take part in the preparation of the microbes, but Dean’s 
work goes to show that this at all events is not a necessary factor in 
the case. 

It would be interesting to know, as tending to elucidate the ques- 
tion where the opsonins originate, if there be any relationship between 
the increased number of leucocytes so often found in the blood in 
most infectious diseases and the amount of opsonin in the blood. Our 
knowledge at present is not sufficient to give a decided answer to this 
important question. The experiments of Bulloch and Ledingham with 


2 


[ NICHOLLS] UNSOLVED PROBLEMS OF IMMUNITY 265 


regard to this point have failed to show any constant relationship 
between the two factors. With certain drugs, such as sodium cinna- 
mylicum and tallianine, which produce marked leucocytosis, no increase 
in opsonin could be made out. With the nuclein of yeast, however, 
they observed a notable increase in the opsonic content, often unasso- 
ciated with any increase in the leucocytes. Huggard and Morland, ‘on 
the other hand, found that the internal administration of yeast led to 
an increased output of opsonins:as well as a marked leucocytosis. This 
is an interesting scientific explanation of the efficacy of a certain empir- 
ical line of treatment of infection in vogue in certain countries, notably, 
France, namely, the treatment of furunculosis with brewer’s yeast. 

The doctrine of “opsonins” gives us a working basis on which 
to explain some at least of the phenomena of infection. When bac- 
teria gain an entrance into the economy some of them are immediately 
sensitized by the plasma and are thereupon engulphed by the phago- 
cytes. The amount of the immune substance available is, however. small 
and the supply soon exhausted. Consequently, if more micro-organisms 
be present than it is able to deal with, they will multiply and be 
either indifferent to the phagocytes or exercise a repelling influence 
upon them (negative chemotaxis), there being no free immune bodies 
present. 

The activity of the opsonins is, however, but one phase of the 
reaction against infection. As before mentioned, there are several 
other substances in blood serum which exert defensive powers. In 
the case of cholera and typhoid fever, Pfeiffer showed that the specific 
germs of these diseases when subjected to the action of immune serum 
were first agglutinated rendered motionless (Pfeiffer’s phenomenon) 
and eventually dissolved (bacteriolysis). Such immune sera, therefore, 
contain two substances, agglutinins, which clump the bacteria, and 
lysins, which dissolve them. It used to be thought that the phenomenon 
of agglutination was a necessary part of bacteriolysis, but this is not 
the case. A serum that is both agglutinative and bacteriolytic may 
be deprived of the latter property without detriment to the former. 
Lysins are, therefore, different from agglutinins. It is rather-singular, 
perhaps, that lysins cannot be always demonstrated to be present in 
eases of infectious disease. This, however, simply indicates the great 
complexity of Nature’s processes and proves that the same end may 
be achieved in a variety of ways. In this sphere, also, apparently, 
more than one road leads to Rome. Similarly, antitoxins, which are 
so potent a factor in the case of certain infections, as, for example, 
diphtheria, cannot always be detected. Why these marked differences 
in different cases we are at a loss to know. It would seem as if there 


266 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


were a variety of protective mechanisms potentially present, any one 
or more of which may on occasion be called into play. That these 
mechanisms are not altogether specific is shown by the fact that to some 
extent they can be manifested by normal tissues and body fluids and 
seem to be a fundamental property of cell-protoplasm. While it is 
true that certain of them can be increased in potency by the injection 
of bacterial toxins and then probably become specific, yet these pro- 
tective substances can he elaborated in other ways. The curative action 
of the ferment of yeast or saccharomyces in cases of infection with a 
germ of a different class, the staphylococcus, is a case in point. Some 
other interesting facts may also be referred to in this connection. More 
than forty years ago a distinguished member and former president of 
this Royal Society, Sir James Grant, M.D., made a striking series of 
observations on the action of the lymph of cow-pox (vaccine) in the 
case of certain skin diseases (London Medical Times and Gazette, 
March 14th, 1863). Affections, such as psoriasis palmoris, tinea 
nummularis, psoriasis lapræformis, and even syphilis, which had resisted 
for years the ordinary measures, yielded in a comparatively short time 
to the action of vaccination of the Jennerian type. We are not sure, 
of course, of the-etiological factors at work in the diseases mentioned, 
but, if not microhic, they are at least due to blood dyscrasiæ and the 
products of the metabolism of the organism of cow-pox, whatever it 
may be, affected some alteration in the system which resulted in cure. 
Again, occasional instances are met with where the toxin of one germ 
is antagonistic to the growth of another. At least, this can be shown 
in vitro. The products of growth of certain bacteria, such as the 
B. Prodigiosus and the micrococcus of erysipelas, have been found to 
be detrimental to cell growth and metabolism, -as witness the beneficial 
effect that Coley’s method of treatment has in some cases of malignant 
disease. Facts such as these still want explanation, but farther study 
along these lines may eventually result in the discovery of laws which 
will be valuable in the therapeutics of infectious disease. All, how- 
ever, goes to show that the laws governing immunity are of the widest 
scope, and that the process is probably in the main to be explained on 
chemical principles, though the vital properties of the cells and tissues 
are by no means to be neglected. 


x 5 


Section 1V., 1906. f 267] Trans. R. S. C 


XV.— Notes on the Mineral Fuel Supply of Canada.* 


R. W. Evis, LL.D. 


(Read May 23, 1906.) 


In a country of such enormous proportions as the Dominion of 
Canada, extending from east to west across the thousands of miles 
between the Atlantic and Pacific oceans, and northwards into the ice- 
laden waters of the Arctic, with its months of severely cold but bracing 
climate, the question of an adequate fuel supply, as a source of heat, 
light and power, must always be of paramount importance. To some 
extent the requisite of power is now being provided by the utilization of 
the numerous waterfalls with which Canada is so well supplied, whereby 
practically an unlimited amount of energy can be produced and distri- 
buted by electric cables to long distances. This electric power will be- 
fore many years be utilized on our present great railway systems with 
their thousands of miles of transcontinental trunk-lines and their radiat- 
ing’ net-work of branches, as well as for the motive power of many of the 
large manufacturing centres; but it is scarcely probable that our ordinary 
fuel supplies will be entirely superseded in all kinds of transport or gen- 
eral industry, while the grand problem of fuel for household purposes 
alone presents an interesting feature which must be of much general 
interest. 

Some thirty or forty years ago it was the generally accepted opinion 
that in the matter of coal supply Canada was to a large extent deficient. 
The areas in Nova Scotia, more especially those in Pictou county and on 
the Island of Cape Breton, had long been known, and had been worked 
to some extent for more than a century. In New Brunswick also coal 
had been mined from the small seams of the interior for many years, 
though the annual output never exceeded a few thousand tons; but west 
of that province it was supposed that coal, as a source of fuel supply, 
was almost entirely lacking. The great deposits of British Columbia 
were scarcely known, with the exception of the coal basin of Vancouver 
Island; and our knowledge of the fertile plains of the Saskatchewan dis- 
trict, with their enormous deposits of lignite, was practically confined to 
the information contained in the reports of the Palliser and Hind expe- 
ditions which nearly fifty years ago traversed a comparatively small por- 
tion of the plains country. With the further exception of a few who, 
in the interests of science, and often in the face of great difficulties as 


1Published by permission of the Director of the Geological Survey. 


268 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


regards transport, or of danger from Indians with whom no treaties had 
then been made, endeavoured to ascertain in some small way the economic 
resources of our western heritage, very little enterprise had been shewn 
in this direction. With the advent of Confederation and the acquisition 
of the great area lying east of the Rocky mountains a new state of things 
was inaugurated, and parties of exploration were sent east and west and 
to the farthest north. With the growth of knowledge arising from the 
detailed examination of every portion of the Dominion, carried on 
largely by the officers of the Geological Survey and by the Topographical 
Branch of the Interior Department, we have now ascertained this fact, 
that in every province of the Dominion, from Nova Scotia on the east 
to the most northern confines of British Columbia on the west, including 
the islands of the Pacific adjacent to the mainland, and extending into 
the wilds of the Yukon district, coal or mineral fuel in some form and in 
workable quantity is to be had whenever its exploitation for commercial 
purposes is required. Even in the Arctic islands and on the adjacent 
coast of Greenland large deposits of coal are now known to occur; and 
although no commercial value can at present be attached to the northern 
deposits on Canadian territory, it may well be supposed that, in the rapid 
development of our great country, the time may come when even these 
stores of fuel will be found available for economic purposes. 

It is readily seen therefore that the views once so generally held as 
to the meagreness of the mineral fuel supply of Canada can no longer 
be entertained; and while it is not the object of this paper to enter into 
an abstruse discussion of the origin and mode of occurrence of the 
several sources of our mineral fuels, a sketch of the character, the loca- 
tion and possible value of some of the more important deposits may con- 
tain some points of general interest as regards the country’s progress. 

In discussing the question of mineral fuels a number of substances 
other than coal proper must be considered. The coals themselves include 
several varieties such as anthracite which is found along the eastern 
flank of the Rocky Mountains and to some extent on one of the Queen 
Charlotte group of islands in the northern Pacific ocean; the true or 
bituminous coals with their resulting coke, and the lignitic coals and 
lignites which are not capable of being coked, and which vary from 
brown to black and in quality from a fuel nearly equal to many of the 
true coals to others not far removed from peat. In addition to these, 
the minerals anthraxolite, oil-shale, albertite, and petroleum and natural 
gas must all be regarded as forms of fuel. They are often found in 
large quantities and at many widely separated points; while immense 
stores of peat, which in the manufactured or compressed state is now be- 
coming an important factor as fuel in some parts of the Dominion is 


2 


[ELLs] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 269 


without doubt destined in a few years to become a still more important 
national asset as a source of heat, light and power. 

More especially will this be the case in those provinces in which the 
deposits of peat are large and of good quality and the distances from the 
coal centres great. ‘These conditions apply to considerable portions of 
Ontario and Quebec to which the coal-fields of Nova Scotia should na- 
turally furnish the fuel supply; as also to eastern Manitoba which is 
naturally dependent on the coals from the eastern slopes of 
the Rocky mountains or on the lignites of the great plains. 
As regards those provinces which contain an available fuel 
supply in coal the need of utilizing the peat deposits 
is probably at present not so great as to warrant the outlay of 
capital necessary for the erection of costly plants required for the manu- 
facture of compressed peat fuel. In the following pages the distri- 
bution of the several varieties of fossil or mineral fuel, above referred to, 
will be indicated. 

If we consider the geological horizons of the several coal deposits 
found in Canada ft will be seen that these embrace a wide range, extend- 
ing from the Devonian upward into the Tertiary. Of the other fuels, 
some of them range downward in the geological scale to our lowest rocks, 
anthraxolite, which is a form of carbon, being found in those of Huronian 
and Cambrian age. The geological horizons of the workable coals are how- 
ever rather more limited, although even here the early ideas that the 
economic deposits of coal belonged especially to the Carboniferous time 
have been long since set aside, by the fact that much of the highest grade 
coals of the west or Pacific division, which compare most favourably with 
bituminous coals of the Atlantic slope, belong to comparatively recent 
rocks and extend through the Cretaceous to the middle Tertiary. These 
western coals present several varieties in the same field, the difference 
being due apparently to various degrees of alteration of the original de- 
posit of carbonaceous matter. 

Anthraxolite is more closely related to the rock oils or petroleums 
than to the true coals. It is found at a number of points in Canada 
and at widely separated horizons ; and while not as yet materially increas- 
ing our fuel supply, is of interest both to the mineralogist and geo- 
logist. In its mode of occurrence it differs entirely from coal, in that it 
is always found in the form of veins which traverse strata of different 
ages instead of occurring as bedded deposits. From its presence in 
rocks of the Laurentian and Huronian systems as well as in the Cam- 
brian and Silurian formations, it would, on the hypothesis that all bi- 
tuminous substances are of organic origin, indicate that life, in some 
form, existed in the remotest periods of the earth’s history. So also the 


270 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


carbonaceous mineral graphite, which is found abundant in certain por- 
tion of the crystalline limestones and gneisses of the Laurentian, has 
been for many years regarded by some as also of organic origin. If this 
theory of organic origin for all carbonaceous and bituminous matter in 
the earth’s crust is the true one the presence of anthraxolite in granite 
and other kindred rock; of graphite in) diorite dikes; and of petroleum 
and its-hardened form tar, in great masses of basaltic diabase without 
visible sign of sedimentary rocks in the vicinity requires careful 
consideration. 

In point of age it is probable that anthraxolite takes precedence as 
the oldest form of mineral fuel. Thus, in Labrador it has been found in 
veins some inches in width, traversing the lower Cambrian rocks; in 
Quebec along the St. Lawrence, near Point Levis and on the Island of 
Orleans it occurs in pockety masses in slates and sandstone of upper 
Cambrian age; in Ontario it is found in large quantities in certain black 
slates of Cambrian or upper Huronian age at Chelmsford west of Sud- 
bury, where on its first discovery it was regarded as an impure anthra- 
cite ; in granite as veins of very pure quality near the Rideau canal north 
of Kingston; and in limestone of Black River age near Kingston city 
in association with veins of baryte. 

In so far as yet proven the fuel value of this mineral has failed to 
be of much economic importance. Shortly after its discovery near Que- 
bec attempts were made to mine it, and several cart-loads were extracted, 
the impression at that time being that a new coal-basin had been found. 
The mineral gave fairly good results as a fuel, but the quantity obtain- 
able was insufficient to form a supply of permanent value. The occur- 
rences in the Labrador peninsula are of course too remote to-be of any 
use, while the small exterit of the veins makes them practically valueless. 
At Chelmsford the thickness of the deposit is considerable, but its low 
powers of combustion and high percentage of ash cause its fuel value to 
be greatly reduced, and although attempts to mine the deposit were made 
shortly after its discovery the exploitation has long since been given up. 
As elsewhere the mineral at this place occurs in vein form. 

Closely allied to anthraxolite in composition are petroleum and 
asphalt, as also to some extent the peculiar form albertite which was at 
one time largely mined in New Brunswick, the latter, however, being a 
mineral of exceptional purity as regards ash. As a class these minerals 
are quite distinct from the several varieties of coal proper, varying in a 
marked degree in the relative proportions of carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen 
and oxygen. They are also materially different as to origin, the coals 
being apparently formed in ancient peat swamps, entirely from vegetable 
tissues, while the minerals of the petroleum group are usually regarded as 


. 


[ELLs] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 271 


derived, in part at least, from animal remains and in part from sea- 
weeds, since in the Trenton time, in the rocks of which formation 
petroleum often occurs, land vegetation is not known to have existed. 

In some areas where oil wells occur the oil has come to the surface 
and become thickened, forming what are known as gum-beds. This ma- 
terial was found in large masses in the Petrolea oil-field prior to the dis- 
covery of the oil itself in quantity. Masses of this thick and spongy oil 
have also been picked up in the vicinity of the oil-springs in eastern New 
Brunswick and in Gaspé, Que., but in the case of the albertite of the 
Albert mines in the former province this thickening of the natural oils 
must have recurred through some cause other than exposure, since this 
mineral filled a fissure in bituminous shales to a depth of 1500 feet 
with a length of over half a mile. The cause of the presence of this 
great mass of albertite has never been quite satisfactorily explained. 

While for many years petroleum has generally been regarded as de- 
rived from organisms either vegetable or animal this hypothesis is by no 
means universally accepted. Some authorities contend that its presence 
_ is due rather to chemical changes in the rocks of the earth’s interior as 
a result of the action of percolating waters on metallic carbides, and that 
the occurrence of petroleum even in fossiliferous sediments does not of 
necessity imply that these organisms were the original source of the min- 
eral in question. ‘This, however, is not the place to discuss the merits of 
the controversy. 

In the matter of hard coal or anthracite the people of eastern 
Canada are to a large extent dependent upon the immense deposits of 
this variety which occur in the eastern portion of the United States, or 
upon the output of the Welsh collieries; but in all other varieties it will 
be found that Canada has an unlimited supply, much of which is readily 
accessible. Even of the anthracite variety it has been well established 
that the deposits found along the eastern slopes of the Rocky moun- 
tains as at Banff, are of excellent quality and of great extent. 

Although the island of Newfoundland, politically, is not yet a part 
of the Dominion of Canada, from the scientific standpoint it may here be 
considered. The existence of coal-fields in the south-western portion of 
that province has been known for many years, but the deposits have 
never been opened up so as to furnish a supply of fuel either for {local 
consumption or for export. The coal formation in this area may possi- 
bly represent the extension éastward of the Sydney coal-basin which may 
underlie the broad strait between the island of Cape Breton and the 
south-west extremity of Newfoundland. Along the line of railway 
‘which connects the south-west angle of the island with the city of St. 
John’s other deposits of coal have been mined near the height of land in 


22 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


the interior and used to some extent on this railway. The actual extent 
and value of these coal-basins have never been definitely ascertained. It 
is possib'e that these coal-bearing rocks may belong to the lower portion 


of the Middle Carboniferous formation and underlie the portion which : 


1 Nova Scotia carries the thick seams of the productive measures. This 
can only be ascertained by a carefully conducted series of explorations 
of the entire coal-basin. 

In the underlying Devonian rocks which outcrop on the west coast 
of this island at Port au Port and further north at Parsons pond, at 
which places they rest upon Cambrian or Cambro-Silurian sediments, 
indications of petroleum are found, and borings have been carried on at 
both places for a number of years. So far, however, these attempts have 
not been sucecssful in finding the oil in paying quantities, owing pro- 
bably to the greatly disturbed mature of the containing rocks. The 
rocks in which the borings have been made are much faulted and in this 
respect do not fulfil the conditions supposed to be favourable to the 
occurrence of petroleum in quantity. 

Beginning with the Atlantic provinces proper, it may be remarked 
that in Nova Scotia the coals are for the most part confined to the Car- 
boniferous formations, and that the largest workable seams belong to the 
middle portion or what is usually styled the productive coal-measures. 
This formation is found in several portions of the province, notably at 
Sydney on the eastern coast of Cape Breton and in Richmond and In- 
verness on the west side of the island; at Pictou in the eastern part of 
Nova Scotia proper; and at Springhill and the Joggins which are in 
the north-west part of the province in Cumberland county. While 
several other deposits of coal are known to exist elsewhere they are, so 
far as can be ascertained, of but small economic value, 

Seams of considerable size are however found in the underlying por- 
tion of the Middle Carboniferous, otherwise known as the Millstone-grit 
formation, and occasionally the mineral occurs in the Upper Carbon- 
iferous or as it is sometimes styled, the Permian, where coals of no 
great thickness have been recognized in that part of the counties of 
Colchester and Pictou which border on Northumberland strait. These 
small seams cannot, however, in the present state of the industry, be 
worked at a profit. 

All the coals at present worked in the province are of the bitumin- 
ous variety. Associated with these in the mines of Pictou county are 
occasional seams of a rich oil-shale known as Stellarite, which contains 
a very large percentage of bituminous matter which can be obtained in 
the form of oil by a process of distillation, resembling in this respect 
certain oil-bearing beds which are found as interstratified members of 


i 


[ELLS] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 273 


the Albert shale series in New Brunswick. “This shale is highly combus- 
tible and when ignited gives a strong flame with a great amount of heat. 
At present it is not utilized either for the production of oil or as a source 
of light, heat or power. 

Although the coal formation has a wide distribution in the northern 
half of the province of Nova Scotia the southern, portion is occupied by 
rocks of much older horizons, comprising great areas of granite with 
slates and quartzite, in which the gold fields are located. In this part 
of the province no trace of coals is found. 

In the island of Cape Breton, the Sydney coal-field is the most im- 
portant of those which occur in Nova Scotia. It extends along the 
eastern shore from Mira Bay on the south-east to Cape Dauphin at the 
entrance to Bras D’Or Lake. The land area of this basin is given by Mr. 
Hugh Fletcher as about 200 square miles, being thirty-two miles in 
length by six in breadth. ‘The aggregate thickness of coal in the several 
workable seams varies from 1314 feet in the Dauphin area in the 
northern margin of the basin to 441% feet on Sydney harbour, the seams 
ranging from three to nine feet in thickness. The dip is generally at a 
low angle seaward, so that a large area of submarine workings is avail- 
able where mining is now being prosecuted on a large scale. The coals 
are all of the bituminous variety. 

On the west side of the island in Inverness and Richmond counties 
large and important coal basins are located, the seams being thick and of 
good quality. Owing to increased facilities for shipment both by rail 
and water, these new areas have recently come into prominence and have 
become large producers and shippers. 

On the mainland the thick seams of the Pictou basin have been 
producers of coal for more than eighty years. The area of productive 
measures is scarcely more than thirty square miles, but in this are com- 
prised some of the largest seams in eastern America, the main seam in 
the Stellarton area having a thickness of forty feet with several others in 
the vicinity, of very large size. The Pictou basin is apparently more 
affected by faults than that of Sydney. 

In the Cumberland basin, as seen at Springhill mines, there are a 
number of seams many of which are over ten feet thick. These have 
been worked for more than thirty years while several others of workable 
size have been developed to some extent. ‘The sales have in- 
creased from 10,000 tons in 1873 to nearly 500,000 tons annually. In 
the western part of this basin along the shore of Cobequid bay is the old 
colliery known as the Joggins mines. Here the seams are comparatively 
thin, the principal one worked shewing about five feet of coal, while the 
lower seam is somewhat less. These seams extend along the northern 

Sec. IV., 1906. 23 


274 ROYAL SOCIETY 'OF CANADA 


margin of the Springhill basin, and along the outcrops are a number 
of small collieries which have been in operation for some years with vary- 
ing results. These two seams of the Joggins section have not as yet 
been correlated with the workable seams of the Springhill area. | 

In addition to these areas the carefully detailed work of Mr. 
Fletcher in the last few years has revealed the existence of a possibly im- 
portant coal-basin south-west of Springhill along the north flank of the 
Cobequid mountain range. The rocks of this area were formerly sup- 
posed to belong to the Millstone-grit formation, but a careful study of 
the district, both along the shore and inland, has led to the conclusion 
that they belong to the Upper Carboniferous series and overlie the pro- 
ductive measures in this direction. Acting on this theory the overlying 
series has recently been bored to a depth of over 2,000 feet and a coal- 
seam of large size has been struck. It is quite possible therefore, in the 
event of further borings confirming the first discovery, that a new and 
valuable coal-field may be opened in this area. 

Among other small and comparatively unimportant coal-seams are 
those which occur in formations other than the productive coal measures, 
such as the small seams which outcrop on the south side of the Cobequid 
mountains at Debert and at several points in the vicinity. These occur 
in rocks of apparently Lower Carboniferous age which are much broken 
up, and the seams east of Truro at Kemptown are probably of the same 
age. Of a still lower horizon are the small seams found along the rail- 
way east of Riversdale which are assigned to the Devonian, and several 
outcrops along the north side of the Bay of Fundy which may be of the 
same horizon. These small and for the most part, isolated basins give 
but small promise of successful development. 

Boring for oil has been carried on in several parts of the province 
for many years. In the island of Cape Breton a number of holes have 
been put down in rocks of Devonian age, which are much tilted and 
otherwise disturbed; and though traces of oil have been found at several 
points no occurrences of economic value have yet been recorded. Quite 
recently borings made on the south side of Minas basin reached a depth 
of about 2,000 feet without finding an underlying coal or oil basin. 

The province of Prince Edward Island does not shew the presence 
of coal seams at any point on the surface. ‘The rocks over the whole 
island belong to the Upper Carboniferous or Permian formations and 
coal seams if existing at all must be sought for at considerable depths by 
boring at well chosen points. The only source of mineral fuel in that 
province is in the several peat bogs of excellent quality, but no attempt 
has ever been made to utilize these, and in view of the cheap transit 
from the Pictou and Inverness coal fields across Northumberland strait 


[exis] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUELSUPPLY OF CANADA 275 


it is probable that this province will continue to obtain its supply of 
coal from the Nova Scotia mines unless the contemplated borings should 
disclose the presence of underlying seams at a workable depth. 

Passing to the province of New Brunswick it may be said that Car- 
boniferous rocks have a very wide distribution and comprise an area of 
more than 10,000 square miles. They form a triangular area with the 
base along the eastern part of the province extending from Bathurst on 
the north to the Nova Scotia boundary line on the south, while the apex 
of the triangle is near the south-west part of the province. At many 
points throughout this area thin coal seams outcrop, and near the upper 
end of Grand Lake, where the coal appears to have the greatest thickness, 
it has been mined for nearly a century. The thickness of the main 
seam at this place rarely exceeds twenty inches but in places two seams 
unite, forming a thickness of two and a half feet. The annual output 
now amounts to about 40,000 tons. 

The mining is done;in a comparatively inexpensive manner without 
the expenditure of much capital in the erection of costly mining or hoist- 
ing plants; and while, there does not appear to be any possibility of in- 
definitely extending the output, as in the case of the Nova Scotia mines, 
a fair amount of fuel can be raised for local consumption, and the out- 
put meets with a ready sale. Boring operations have been carried on 
throughout the coal basin for over sixty years, but have so far failed to 
find any underlying seams of greater thickness than the one so long 
worked. These coals are regarded as belonging to the Millstone-grit 
formation rather than to the productive coal-measures. 

At various points in, the province outside the limits of the principal 
coal basin small seams of coal are found, some of which belong to a dif- 
ferent horizon; Of these, several outcrops in the south-eastern part near 
Northumberland strait, belong to the Upper Carboniferous formation but 
are of no practical value. At Dunsinane: near the Intercolonial Railway, 
north of Sussex, seams, similar in character to those near Grand Lake, 
have been found near the surface, but though borings have been made 
at this place to over 1000 feet no deep seams have been discovered. They 
are probably of the same horizon as those of Grand Lake. In Albert 
and Westmorland counties and on the south side of Chaleur bay small 
and unimportant seams also occur but have never been mined, owing to 
their comparative insignificance. 

An interesting occurrence of coal in the northern part of the pro- 
vince is seen in Devonian rocks on the south side of the Restigouche 
ahout two miles west of the town of Dalhousie. Here a sheet of igneous 
rock (diabase) has been injected along the bedding plane of the shale, 


276 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


and overlies a seam of coal a foot in thickness, which has been altered to 
some extent along the contact. It has, however, no economic value. 

In the southern part of the province, at Lepreau basin, a seam of 
graphitic anthracite occurs in Devonian shales. The enclosing shales : 
are nearly vertical, and a large sum of money was spent some years ago 
in mining this deposit. The amount of impurity in the coal was so large 
as to render it practically useless as a fuel. Here it would appear that 
coal and shale originally bituminous, have passed into the state of gra- — 
phitized carbon through heat induced by pressure. The thickness of 
the so-called bed was in places about four feet, and it was opened by 
shafts to a depth of more than 100 feet. All work on this area has long 
since been abandoned. 

Among other sources of fuel supply in this province must be men- 
tioned the Albert shales and the associated mineral Albertite. Rich 
beds of oil shale which by some have been styled Cannelite also 
occur as interstratified beds in the mass of the shale. The Albert shale 
formation has a thickness of over 1000 feet, the strata are usually highly 
inclined and there are numerous faults and occasional overturns. The 
Albertite, or Albert coal, as it was often called, occurred in the mass 
of this shale near the axis of an anticline, as the filling of a true fissure 
haying a width varying from a few inches at the ends to about seventeen 
feet in the centre, decreasing in depth to the bottom of the deposit about 
1500 feet from the surface. ‘This vein shewed several faults, the min- 
eral being thrown from side to side. It was mined to a depth of over 
1200 feet, below which level the vein assumed a brecciated structure 
composed of fragments of shale cemented by the Albertite. For some 
years these shales were regarded as a part of the lower Carboniferous 
formations, but from their stratigraphical position as unconformably 
beneath the formation wherever they occur, they are now regarded as 
a part of the Devonian system. 

The shales themselves are highly bituminous throughout. They 
contain interstratified beds of black and sometimes grey oil-shale in mas- 
sive bands ranging in thickness from three to nearly twenty feet. These 
bands are exceptionally rich in oil, yielding by distillation from thirty to 
eighty gallons per ton. ‘They burn in the grate with a bright flame, and 
some of the bands are so inflammable as to kindle readily with a lighted 
match. They can be mined like coal, and should form a valuable fuel. 
Though the amount of ash is large, varying from 45 to 60 per cent, 
the shales burn with great heat till the bituminous matter is consumed, 
and the resulting ash is claimed to possess valuable properties as a fer- 
tilizer. As a source of supply for oil by distillation these oil bands are 


[ELLs] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 277 


superior to those of the extensively mined deposits of Scotland, both in 
the ease with which the crude material can be extracted and in the per- 
centage of oil contained in the shale itself. Attempts were made more than 
forty years ago to distil this oil from the shale bands, and a crude plant 
was erected and operated for several years with a fair amount of success, 
until the cheaper native oils of western Canada and of the United States 
so lowered the price that its manufacture by distillation became un- 
profitable 

The vein of Albertite was worked for twenty or more years, the 
amount of mineral extracted being more than 200,000 tons, which com- 
manded in the market over $20.00 per ton in the closing years of the in- 
dustry. The gradual exhaustion of the main vein, both at the extrem- 
ities and in depth, led to the cessation of work, but another vein has since 
been found which is a branch of the one worked and may prove valuable 
when opened up. 

In connection with the Albert shales a large amount of capital has 
recently been expended in the attempt to develop a profitable oil field by 
boring. The first borings in this area were put down near the village 
of Memramcook about forty years ago, and yielded a small amount of 
petroleum, but the area never became a producer. Subsequent attempts 
were made by different parties in the area along the Petitcodiac river 
near Dover and at other points, and from sixty to seventy holes were put 
down, some of which reached a depth of more than 3,000 feet. In 
several of these holes a small quantity of oil was found, but so far the 
results have not been such as to warrant the erection of costly refining 
plants. 

The shales in which these borings have been made are usually highly 
inclined and are affected by faults, so that while small quantities of 
petroleum come to the surface in the form of springs, possibly along lines 
of fracture, or may be found in certain bore holes by seepage, it has been 
fairly well shewn that these rocks do not readily yield oil except by dis- 
tillation. The fact that in the workings of the Albert mine but slight 
traces of oil were found under what might reasonably be regarded as 
favourable conditions supports this view, since one would naturally infer 
that under such conditions as prevailed in this mine, with such large 
bodies of rich oil shale as were traversed in the workings, some good 
shewings of petroleum would be encountered. 

Comparing the beds of Cannelite or rich oil-shale with true cannel 
coals it may be remarked that with the exception of the large amount of 
ash in the former there are strong points of resemblance. When burned 
in a grate or other suitable appliances the oil-bands furnish a fine fuel, 
though as already remarked the percentage of ash is high. There seems 


278 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


to be no apparent reason why these beds should not some day be exten- 
sively used for domestic or manufacturing purposes, apart from their 
utilization in the distillation of the contained petroleum. The asso- 
ciated Albertite is apparently a highly altered or inspissated petroleum, | 
* the analysis shewing the merest trace of ash in composition. 

The province of Quebec has always been regarded as en- 
tirely lacking in mineral fuel, and as regards coal this is 
practically true from the economic standpoint. Mineral coal 
does, however, occur in a small seam from two to four inches 
thick in the Devonian shales of the south side of Gaspé 
basin; and in connection with the same geological formation are a num- 
ber of oil springs some of which are on or near the shore and others at a 
distance of some miles inland ‘The containing rocks in this area are as 
a rule, highly inclined and shew the presence of faults, near which 
several of the largest oil-springs are situated. Boring operations have 
been carried on at intervals in the vicinity of Gaspé basin for more than 
forty years, and have led to a vain expenditure, within the last sixteen 
years, of over one million dollars. Although a number of holes were 
sunk to depths ranging from 1,000 to 3,000 feet, several of which were 
in the immediate vicinity of the oil springs, no petroleum with the ex- 
ception of small shewings was found. In all some 60 holes were bored 
in an area about thirty miles in length by ten in breadth. The same 
broken character of strata prevails throughout, and the shales and sand- 
stone, while differing in character from those of New Brunswick, are 
closely related in geological time. Bands of rich oil-shale also occur in 
these rocks but not, so far as known, in quantity sufficient to incur the 
expense of development. 

The Carboniferous rocks in this province are limited to a small strip 
of Lower Carboniferous age situated along the north side of Chaleur 
bay and quite beneath the productive coal measures of Nova Scotia, or 
the Millstone-grit areas of New Brunswick. The Devonian shales oppo- 
site Dalhousie near the estuary of the Restigouche river abound in the 
remains of fossil fishes, but no trace of petroleum has ever been seen in 
this area; while on the shores of Gaspé basin petroleum is found filling 
a cellular structure in a dike of diabase some 150 feet in width, which 
traverses the Devonian slates and ‘sandstone of that district. , 

The veins of anthraxolite found in the Cambrian rocks of Labrador 
and near Quebec city have already been referred to as interesting from 
the scientific rather than from the economic standpoint. The recent 
development of the peat industry in this province as well as in Ontario 
bids fair to furnish for certain purposes a fuel which will to some extent 
supply the absence of beds of true coal. 


[ELLS] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 279 


The development of these peat bogs was begun about forty years ago 
in the country between St. Johns and Farnham near Ste. Brigide, and 
also near Bulstrode, Arthabaska county. Large deposits of excellent peat 
oceur along the railway at both these places and were at one time ex- 
ploited quite extensively in the matter of peat fuel. Being uncom- 
pressed it was not found to be suitable for railway work owing to the 
large amount of space required  Recently: however, this objection has 
been to a large extent overcome, and the peat, after extraction of the 
contained moisture down to within 12 to 15 per cent, is compressed into 
small cylindrical blocks having almost the hardness and consistency of 
coal. Peat bogs are extensively developed in many portions of the 
province, and when the process of peat manufacture is perfected, the 
new kind of fuel will doubtless to a considerable extent obviate the 
necessity of importing the soft or bituminous coals from the United 
States or Nova Scotia. The manufacture of this compressed peat fuel 
has reached the stage when the demand exceeds the present supply 
on the market and it readily sells at a good profit on the cost of 
manufacture. 

The question of the utilization of the great deposits of peat applies 
to the province of Ontario and in large areas in Manitoba as well as to 
Quebec, since in all these provinces this material occurs over large areas, 
much of which is convenient of access while coal deposits are practically 
lacking. 

Turning to the province of Ontario, true coals are nowhere found, 
but deposits of anthraxolite and lignite occur, the latter in the area 
south of James Bay where large supplies have quite recently been dis- 
covered and may some day be utilized. 

This lignite of the Moose river basin is peculiar, in that it is found 
in Post Tertiary deposits of sand, gravel and boulder clay instead of in a 
solid rock formation as in the case of the lignites of the west It is 
therefore the newest lignite formation known in Canada with the ex- 
ception of certain small deposits that occur in clays on the north end of 
Graham Island, one of the Queen Charlotte group on the Pacific coast. 

In spite of the newness of the deposits along the Moose river the 
seams, though in places somewhat irregular in deposition, are of consid- 
erable thickness. The lignite when dry burns readily and the deposit 
promises to yield, under certain conditions and for certain purposes, a 
fairly satisfactory fuel. It is of a brownish black colour and burns 
quite freely in an open fire. It cannot, however, compare in quality with 
the better or older grade of lignite of the Tertiary period, which is so 
abundant throughout the great plains of the west. 


280 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


In addition to the lignite and peat deposits which have not as yet 
appreciably affected the importation of outside fuels, the deposits of 
petroleum which were first discovered in Ontario about 1860, and later 
the finding of natural gas in immense quantity, have added largely to the | 
resources of the province as regards light and fuel. ‘lhe first attempts 
at boring in the peninsula between lakes Huron and Erie resulted in the 
outflow of such large quantities of oil that millions of barrels were re- 
ported as lost through lack of appliances for saving it. This discovery, 
together with that of similar deposits in certain parts of the United 
States, soon closed down the small distilling plants which were manufac- 
turing oils from the bituminous shales of the Utica formation found in 
the Lake Huron district, as well as from the Albert shales of New Bruns- 
wick. 

The original field from which the Ontario petroleum was first ob- 
tained is still a producer of mineral oil, though as might naturally be 
expected the supply in recent years has materially decreased. 

The discovery of natural gas about fifteen years ago in the place 
where petroleum was first known, and later in the Niagara peninsula, has 
largely affected the coal consumption in some districts. In addition to 
supplying the local requirements immense quantities have been piped 
across to the cities of Buffalo and Detroit on the American side of the 
great lakes. Exploration for both gas and oil is constantly going on 
and reported discoveries of fresh fields are occasionally announced. It is 
safe to say that as yet nothing has equalled in importance the great wells 
of the Petrolea district at the time of their first discovery. 

With the exception of the peat and lignite deposits, already de- 
scribed, that portion of Ontario north of Lake Superior is, so far as 
known, lacking in mineral fuel, the rocks of this part of 
the province belonging for the most part to the oldest crys- 
talines which extend into the province of Manitoba where they 
form the eastern shore of Lake Winnipeg and continue thence 
south-east across the Lake of the Woods into northern Min- 
nesota. The finding of occasional veins of anthraxolite in these old 
rocks, a feature already referred to for the eastern provinces, sometimes 
gives rise to reports of the discovery of deposits of anthracite coal in 
this area, but so far as known the geological conditions of this part of 
the Dominion are adverse to any such conclusion 

Hitherto, in the investigation of this subject the highest or newest 
rocks of eastern Canada are of 'l'riassic age. ‘hese are found in Nova 
Scotia and New Brunswick. In the geological scale these rocks are next 
in order above the Upper Carboniferous or Permian. But in the western 
half of the Canadian section, beginning with the great plain of Manitoba, 


[ELLs] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 281 


and extending across to the shores of the Pacific ocean, many of the 
rocks over large areas are of a more recent time, comprising Cretaceous 
and Tertiary sediments. In these the greater part of the coals of the 
western division are located. These comparatively recent formations 
constitute, therefore, an important factor in the geological problem, as 
well as in the distribution of the fuel supply of the Dominion. 

In Manitoba and throughout the great plains eust of the Rocky 
mountains, and extending northward down the valley of the Mackenzie 
river to the Arctic ocean, the rocks are largely of Cretaceous age. The 
district is underlaid in many places by large beds of lignite, the outcrops 
of which are seen as far east as Turtle mountain in the province first- 
named. Along the upper waters of the South Saskatchewan as also 
along the North Saskatchewan as far down as the settlement of Victoria 
these lignites are seen, sometimes in beds of great thickness and extent, 
so that the supply of this fuel must be simply enormous. 

Passing still further west into the foot-hills of the mountain, as at 
Banff and as far south as the Crowsnest pass, the lignites change their 
character and pass into lignitic coals, bituminous coals and anthracites. 
The sections at these places shew a wonderful series of coal beds, which in 
the Crowsnest field aggregate at least 200 feet in thickness, many of 
the seams being of workable dimensions and of superior quality. Farther 
west the rocks of the mountain chain belong to an older series than those 
which contain the coals; but after passing this old series which comprises 
in part highly altered sediments and crystallines of various kinds: the 
next division westward from the vicinity of Sicamous, although for the 
most part igneous in character, contains isolated areas or basins gener- 
ally of Tertiary rocks which carry coal in beds often of large extent and 
thickness. These are found at widely separated points, such as the 
upper part of the Peace river, the valley of the North Thompson, the 
vicinity of Kamloops, the Nicola valley, and the Tulameen and Simil- 
kameen district, all with the exception of the two first situated to the 
south of the Canadian Pacific railway, while to the north are the areas 
along the Marble cafion at Hat creek, a few miles north-west of Ashcroft 
and the Bulkley valley deposits farther north, situated to the south of 
the Skeena river. The greater part of these coals are of the coking 
variety, while the lignites are of excellent quality. 

On the Pacific coast itself there are great deposits on Vancouver 
island of Cretaceous age which have been mined for nearly half a cen- 
tury, and which at the present time are the only producing areas on the 
Pacific slope in Canada; while further north, on Graham island, which is 
the most northerly of the Queen Charlotte group, several varieties of coal 
are found, including anthracite, high-grade bituminous and lignite. With 


282 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


the exception of attempts to work the anthracite on the south coast of 
the island, which, however, have not been productive of economic results 
beyond the sinking of a few shallow pits in prospecting work in connec- 
tion with the development of the great seams of bituminous coals of the 
interior, but little work has been attempted. This field promises to be 
of great value in the not distant future. 

The occurrence of these several varieties of aoal in rocks of prac- 
tically the same geological horizon is interesting, since it is probable that 
at one time all these newer coals existed in the form of lignite. Thus 
it has been pointed out by Dr. G. M. Dawson that as we approach the 
foot-hills from the plains, and thence continue westward into the moun- 
tain range at Crowsnest and at Banff, the percentage of water in the 
lignite gradually diminishes and the coal gradually passes through 
lignitic coals into the bituminous variety and thence to semi—and to 
true—anthracite, the change being more marked in all cases as the con- 
taining rock formation is more and more uplifted and pressed together 
or approaches the vertical. It would appear therefore that the altera- 
tion‘of the coals is to a large extent due to heat induced by pressure dur- 
ing the epoch of mountain making, and when the uplift of the Rocky 
mountains was being effected. For some miles east of the range itself 
there is a series of folded and titled beds in which the lignitic character 
of the contained coal has practically disappeared. 

The change in the character of the coals may also, to some extent, 
be due to the relative position of the several seams seen in the section, 
since the higher grade coals may represent beds from the older or lower 
portion of the Cretaceous formation. ‘lhe lignite of the North Sas- 
katchewan belongs to the Laramie or upper part of that system of rocks, 
but here the strata are comparatively undisturbed. The difference in 
the character of the coals does not however depend entirely upon the 
geological horizon, since in the interior basins of British Columbia, many 
of the Tertiary coals are highly bituminous instead of lignitic, while on 
Queen Charlotte island, the Cretaceous coals range from high grade bitu- 
minous to broken and shattered anthracite, largely through the alteration 
induced by rock movements, but also probably to some extent by later 
intrusions of igneous rocks in the immediate vicinity. 

The thickness of the coal-bearing strata along the eastern side of the 
Rocky mountains aggregates several thousands of feet. The sections 
exposed in the vicinity of the Crowsnest and near Banff along the val- 
ley of the Bow river, shew the presence of numerous coal seams some of 
which are of great thickness. In a section published by Mr. J. Me- 
Evoy, (see Rept. Geol. Sur. 1900) the total thickness of the coal-bearing 
formation exposed along the Elk river amounts to 4,736 feet, and the 


ra 


[ ELLS] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 283 


coal seams exposed have a total thickness of 216 feet. Of this thickness 
of coal it is remarked that 198 feet occur in a thickness of 1,847 feet of 
strata, and of this coal, making allowances for shale partings and im- 
purities, it is estimated that 100 feet are available for mining. ‘The 
thickest beds in the section are 36, 46 and 46 feet respectively. 

Another section measured along the south fork of Michel creek gave 
55 feet of coal, and on Morrissey creek 68 feet, all in beds of workable 
size. In sections measured by Mr. Leach near the divide between Elk 
and Fording rivers there were found 3,386 feet of coal strata containing 
8912 feet of coal, the greater part of which was in beds of workable size, 
the largest bed having a thickness of 351% feet. In a section measured 
by Mr. T. Denis near Michel creek, in a thickness of 921 feet of strata 
there were 691% feet of coal the thickest seam being 25 feet with a thin 
shale parting. It is evident therefore that the quantity of coal in the 
Crowsnest basin is inexhaustible, the amount estimated by Mr. McEvoy 
for an area of 230 square miles, owned by the Crow’s Nest Co. alone 
being no less than 22,595,200,000 tons. 

In the Banff district which is traversed by the main line of the 
Canadian Pacific railway, several coal crops occur along the Bow river, 
some of which have been worked for a number of years at the mines of 
Canmore and Anthracite. In this area about fifteen seams have been re- 
cognized though none are of such huge dimensions as those in the Crows- 
nest Pass. The geological formation is to all intents the same, belong- 
ing to the Cretaceous. Ni detailed sections of these Bow river coals 
have yet been published, but sufticient is known to warrant the statement 
that the area is a very important one. Beds of semi-anthracite have been 
opened up having thicknesses of 12 to 15 feet. The coal differs from 
the bituminous variety of the Crowsnest on the one hand, and from 
the lignites on the other, in having undergone a greater degree of meta- 
morphism. The anthracitic and bituminous varieties are found in this 
field, the difference being due to the amount of alteration to which the 
original lignite was subjected. ‘hese two great coal-basins will be able 
to supply the greater part of the territory between the mountains and the 
city of Winnipeg, where a higher grade of fuel than the lignite of the 
plains is required. These coals extend northward to the upper waters 
of the North Saskatchewan and Peace rivers. 

Between the Crowsnest and Banff the coal formation extends along 
the east flank of the mountains, and large deposits of coal are already 
known to exist which have not yet been opened up; while north- 
ward in the direction of the upper waters of the Peace river large coal 
seams have also been reported. In the present unopened state of the 
country in this direction these seams are as yet practically valueless, but 


284 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


will in the near future without doubt be thoroughly exploited. In none 
of the rock sections of these coal-bearing strata has any trace of coal so 
far been found in sediments of Carboniferous age. 

The coal areas of Vancouver island have for many years furnished 
the great bulk of the coal supply for the Pacific coast 
not only in British Columbia but as far south at least as 
San Francisco, where it competes with the inferior coals of 
the states of Washington and California. The Vancouver coals 
are apparently all located on the east side of the island, and though coal- 
measure rocks and small indications of coal occur at a number of places 
towards the northern extremity, the mining centres are still confined to 
three localities, viz., Comox, Nanaimo and Ladysmith, the original col- 
lieries at Wellington having recently been abandoned after being worked 
for nearly half a century. The coal-bearing rocks of the district are all of 
Cretaceous age, and the coal itself is generally a high grade bituminous 
variety, the seams varying in thickness from two to eight feet. A pecu- 
larity of these seams is the frequent change in size, owing to local thick- 
ening or thinning out, generally due to small faults, rolls or slips, so that 
a seam which may be worked for a time with a minimum thickness of 
three to four feet may rapidly increase to fifteen or even twenty feet. 

Though small seams of coal or sometimes lignite have been reported 
from several of the local basins to the north no precise details can be 
given, other than that the containing rocks are of Cretaceous age. 

On the mainland of British Columbia coals of several kinds are also 
found at widely separated localities. Most of the deposits as already in- 
dicated occur in isolated basins or valleys, the associated sandstones and 
shales in most cases resting upon volcanic or igneous rocks which re- 
semble closely those seen along the west side of Vancouver island. ‘lhe 
greater portion of these inland coals are bituminous rather than lignitic, 
though the latter is also found both as lignite and as lignitic coal. 

Along the lower Fraser, and between this and Burrard inlet a basin 
of Cretaceous or Tertiary rocks occurs. This may indicate the eastward 
extension of the Vancouver coal-series. Good exposures of the sand- 
stones are seen on the shores near Vancouver city and in the city itself. 
Coal indications are seen at different places on or near the line of the 
Canadian Pacific railway for more than thirty miles east, but no seams 
of workable size have yet been discovered. Very little boring has yet 
been attempted to prove the actual value of this basin, and it is therefore 
impossible to say definitely whether workable deposits do or do not occur. 
In a report by Dr. Dawson, 1877-78, he states that “bunches of good 
bituminous coal are known to occur not far from Chilliwack village, as 
also similar occurrences in the Cultus range of hills which skirt the 
Sumas valley.” 


[ELLS] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 285 


Brief allusion has already been made to the presence of coal basins 
south of the Canadian Pacific railway where several basins of Tertiary 
sandstones and shale containing large deposits of excellent coal occur. 
Among these may be mentioned the seams which outcrop at several 
points in the valley of the Nicola river and lake, an area lying about fifty 
miles south of Kamloops. ‘This district is now being opened up by a 
line of railway south ‘from the Canadian Pacific at Spences Bridge to 
the Similkameen valley. The Nicola coals have usually been referred 
to as lignites, but the analyses of specimens from the outcrops on the 
Coal gully, the Coldwater and from Quilchena shew them, at all these 
places, to be bituminous coals of good grade, yielding an excellent coke. 
In these basins a number of seams outcrop, of which on the Coal gully 
there are at least four that range in thickness from five to eighteen 
feet; on the lower Coldwater the seam exposed and partly opened has a 
thickness of over seven feet; and on the Quilchena south of Nicola lake, 
where several, seams outcrop, ranging from two to fifteen feet in thickness. 
These coal basins are of considerable extent and must contain a large 
amount of very excellent fuel, of great value in view of the recent rail- 
way extension and the development of the copper and other mines of 
the district. From this area a large part of the fuel supply of British 
Columbia will doubtless be obtained. 

To the south of this basin are the areas found along the Tulameen 
and Similkameen rivers about fifty miles distant, but directly on the 
lines of railway now being constructed through that part of the province. 
The analyses of the coals from the former place shew them in part to be 
high-grade coking coals and not lignite as once supposed, but at present 
the extent of this basin has not been definitely ascertained. At the 
junction of this stream with the Similkameen several seams have been 
located, ranging from one to over eighteen feet in thickness, but these are 
rather of the nature of a high grade lignite or lignitic coal than a bitu- 
minous coal. ‘I'he deposits in this place are however important and will 
be extensively utilized as soon as reached by the new line of railway. 
It is also quite possible that*in the development of these seams the char- 
acter of the fuel will change for the better, a feature which has been 
found in other fields in British Columbia, such change being due to the 
greater amount of metamorphism which the original lignite has under- 
gone. 

These deposits are all south of the present line of the Canadian 
Pacific railway, and will doubtless be important factors in the develop- 
ment of the various mineral industries and smelters, since they repre- 
sent the greater part of the good coking coals of south-western British 
Columbia. They occur in sandstones and conglomerate with interstrati- 


286 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


fied shales which overlie the great mass of igenous rocks in the vicinity, 
and part of these at least are not capped by volcanie overflows as was at 
one time supposed to be the structure. The coal formations in this 
area are of Tertiary age while the underlying igneous rocks are probably 
Triassic. È 

South of Sicamous junction, and much further east than the areas 
just described, is a deposit of coal recently discovered near Enderby on 
the branch railway leading to Okanagan lake. ‘lhe extent of this de- 
posit has not yet been definitely ascertained, but the quality of the coal 
as judged from the samples appears to be excellent and preparations are 
now being made to prove its actual value. Should the quality prove 
good the area will be important from its accessibility to the main line of 
railway. 

About three miles south of Kamloops several thin seams of bitu- 
minous coal are seen in the bank of a small creek, associated with shales 
and apparently overlaid by volcanic rocks. In so far as developed these 
seams are too small to be of much economic importance. 'They probably 
represent the southern edge of a basin which extends across Kamloops 
lake and along the lower part of the North ‘Thompson but which has 
never been tested by boring. About forty-five miles north, on this 
stream a basin of similar rocks occurs in which are several seams of good 
coal of the coking variety, but the distance from shipment and the pre- 
sent observed thinness of the coals has hitherto prevented development. 

Among the largest of the lignitic coal deposits, which, as well as the 
lignites proper, can be distinguished, among other things, by their lack 
of coking properties, that on Hat creek near the Marble cañon, about 


fifteen miles north-west of Ashcroft on the main line of the Canadian - 


Pacific railway may be mentioned. Here, in a section measured by Dr. 
Dawson, (1877-78) a bed of high-class fuel, which from the small per- 
centage of water obtained on analysis may almost be classed as a true 
coal, is found, the thickness of the bed exposed in the creek section being 
68 feet, though the lower part could not be seen. ‘I'his coal is also of 
Tertiary age. 

Further north in the Peace River district a number of coal out- 
crops were observed by the early explorers. Some of these coats were 
found to be hgnitic but others were true coals of excellent quality. Other 
deposits have since been discovered so that in the district about the head 
waters of the Peace river good coals will undoubtedly be readily available 
when the opportunity offers for their successful development. 

Both lignite and true coals are found in northern British Columbia 
both south of the Skeena river and northward at intervals into the ter- 
ritory of the Yukon. Of these probably the most important yet ex- 


= nis Oy 
RS 


[ELLs] NOTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 287 


amined occurs on the Telkwa river in what is known as the Bulkley val- 
ley, about 100 miles south of Hazelton on the Skeena, where at least five 
seams of coal ranging in thickness from 21% to nearly 20 feet, of excel- 
lent quality have been fiound within a convenient distance of the proposed 
line of the Grand Trunk Pacific railway. Like the area south of the 
Canadian Pacific the formation in this basin is also Tertiary, the coal- 
bearing rocks being apparently underlaid by igneous rocks. ‘These coals 
are in part high-grade bituminous and in part a semi-anthracite. The 
full details of the seams have not yet been announced, but if they should 
continue as reported across the basin of sedimentary rocks the quantity of 
coal in this area must be enormous. 

In the Yukon district coals of good quality have been found at sev- 
eral places. Among other localities the Klondike river shews Tertiary 
coal-bearing rocks for a distance of about sixty miles. The fuel is of 
the lignite variety and outcrops on Rock and Coal creeks, and on Cliff, 
Twelve and Fifteen mile creeks the area underlaid by the coal being 
estimated at about 200 square miles. ‘lhe quality of this fuel is reported 
as fairly good. ‘There are several seams exposed and two outcrops on 
Cliff creek with thicknesses of nine and three feet respectively, have 
been opened up to some extent. 

Lignite also is found on the Lewes river above Rink rapids and a 
deposit of anthracite coal has recently been discovered near the line of the 
White Pass railway near Dugdale station, not far from the Whitehorse 
copper district. This may possibly prove on development to be of econo- 
mic value. 

Coal was first reported by Mr. William Ogilvie as occurring on the 
Pelly river in the Yukon district some years ago, the mineral being of 
good quality and in seams from five to seven feet thick. The difficulty 
of exploration and the expense of transportation render the development 
of these deposits somewhat uncertain, at least for some years. 

One of the largest coal-fields on the Pacific coast is found on 
Graham island, the largest of the Queen Charlotte group. Attention was 
directed to this area nearly fifty years ago through the finding of a bed 
of anthracite on the southern end near the head of Skidegate harbour. 
Attempts were made at intervals for nearly thirty years to mine this coal 
for shipment, but owing to the fact that it was greatly crushed and in 
places reduced to powder on removal as a result of dike intrusions and 
rock movements, all efforts to find a productive mine were unsuccessful 
and the property has long since been abandoned. A similar anthracite 
occurring under like conditions is found about seven miles inland and 
has been slightly opened up but not worked. 


288 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Along the north shore of Skidegate harbour, extending westward 
for some ten miles from Skidegate village there is an almost unbroken 
series of Cretaceous rocks comprising shales, sandstone and conglomerate. 
These are cut by diorites at several points. ‘lhe stratified members of 
the series extend northward across the island and at several points carry 
large deposits of coal which outcrop principally at two points inland, one 
about eight miles from the shore, the other at fifteen miles. The strata 
show the presence of several anticlines and near the contact with the ig- 
neous rocks are somewhat altered. 

The two coal outcrops have been opened to some extent. The more 
southerly one is known as Robertson Camp, the northerly as Wilson’s. 
At the former place the coal is seen in two seams of workable size with a 
shale parting of eight to ten feet, and at the Wilson camp one large seam 
with a thickness of about eighteen feet with a shale parting of one foot 
only, near the lower part. ‘I'he extension of these seams has never been 
ascertained by boring owing doubtless to dilliculty of access in a densely 
wooded country which at present is merely by trail. ‘That there is a 
very large quantity ot excellent coal in this part of the island is evident. 
The general dip of the coals at both camps is to the north-east at a mo- 
derate angle, or away from the hilly country which forms the western 
half of the island, where the formation is volcanic. It is therefore pno- 
bable that the seams exposed extend eastward in the direction of the dips 
and should be traceable along the strike north-east and south-west. 


In addition to the bituminous coals, which are of high grade, there 
are in the northern and eastern portions of the island large areas of Ter- 
tiary rocks in which moderately large seams of lignite are known to oc- 
cur. ‘These, however, will scarcely be utilized in view of the presence of 
such large supphes of bituminous coals which are easier of access and 
have greater facilities for shipment. ‘lhe extent of these lignite beds in 
the northern part of the island could easily be ascertained by boring east 
of Masset. 

Along the lower part of the Mackenzie river there is a large de- 
velopment of coal-bearing rocks in which seams of lignite occur and these 
also outcrop on several of the islands off the mouth of that river. No 
attempt has yet been made to ascertain the extent or value of these 
deposits. 

The observations in the preceding pages have shewn clearly that in 
the western half of the Dominion the supplies of mineral fuel are prac- 
tically inexhevstible. The analyses of these coals shew that their quality 
is greatly superior to those now mined in the Pacific states of the Ameri- 
can union. 


[eus]  NÔTES ON THE MINERAL FUEL SUPPLY OF CANADA 289 


From a comparison of the coal-fields of the Atlantic areas with 
those of the Pacific slope and even as far east as the great plains, it will 
be readily seen that their geological horizons are quite distinct. ‘Thus it 
has been pointed out that all the western coals are of comparatively re- 
cent date, while those of the east belong to the Carboniferous formation 
and in places closely approach even the Devonian. This discrepancy in 
horizons continues southward throughout the United States into Mexico, 
large deposits of coal, both of the bituminous and lignite varieties, oc- 
curring in the area between the Mississippi and the Rocky mountains in 
rocks of Cretaceous age, though in several of the states west of the Mis- 
sissippi coals also occur in rocks of'the Carboniferous formations. In 
eastern Asia, in China and in Japan, immense deposits of excellent 
bituminous coal are also found in the Cretaceous and Tertiary forma- 
tions, in the latter of which also large quantities of petroleum occur. 


In eastern Canada, on the other hand the petroleum is principally 
found in rocks of Devonian age, though the original source of this oil, 
by those who advocate its organic origin, may be in some lower series; 
while in the case of natural gas the largest occurrences are apparently 
from Silurian rocks or possibly from even a lower horizon. In the west, 
however, wherever oil or gas occurs it is found, like coal, in association 
with the more recent formations, and throughout the country of the 
plains where boring for oil or gas is now being carried on and where the 
latter has been found in large quantity as at Medicine Hat, and further 
north along the lower Athabaska river, such borings have,all been con- 
fined to the Cretaceous. The outflow of natural gas from the borings 
made along the Athabaska in the Tar sand formation is something enor- 
mous, the force of the discharge being such that the drill rods could not 
be sunk beyond) a certain, depth, though but little petroleum was encount- 
ered. Natural gas in the country east of the Rocky mountains will 
eventually become an important factor in the fuel supply of the west. It 
has been found in large quantity as at Medicine Hat, Calgary, Edmon- 
ton, and further north along the lower Athabaska river such borings 
have all been confined to the Cretaceous. 

Although borings for oil have been carried on for several years 
along the eastern flank of the mountains as in the Pincher Creek district 
the strata have been too much tilted and faulted to serve as reservoirs 
and the operations have so far not been crowned with success. The fact 
that the oil-fields of Florence in Colorado are situated in rocks of the 
same age as those which occur along the east side of the mountains in 
what is known as the Pierre shale formation, lends strength to the sug- 
gestion that at some time and jn certain localities, similar oil-fields will 


Sec. IV., 1906. 24 


290 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA e 


be discovered in this direction on Canadian territory. So far no oil de- 
posits have been found on the Canadian coast of the Pacific or in any 


of the interior coal-basins, though but a limited amount of boring has. 


ever been attempted in these rocks till within the last two years. 


CS 


Ssction IV., 1906. [291] Trans. R.S. C. 


/ 


XVI.—A Short Chapter in Comparative Physiology and Psychology. 
By Proressor T. WESLEY MILLs. 
(Read May 28rd, 1906.) 


1.—Observations on the Habits and General Psychic Behaviours of 
certain Birds in Confinement. 


2.—Phystological Experiments; Psychological Experiments, etc. 
By Westey Mitts, M.A., M.D., 
Professor of Physiology in McGill University. 


During the past three years I have been able to keep under 
observation for a considerable period, three sea-gulls, a hawk and a 
crow, and it is upon observations and experiments on them that the 
present paper is founded. For the hawk and the sea-gulls I am 
indebted to medical students of McGill University. The crow was 
secured for me by one of the physiological staff, Dr. A. A. Robertson. 
The gulls were of the black-headed variety, and the hawk was a com- 
mon hen-hawk. 


Hasits.— THE SEA-GULLS. 


These came into my possession on October 8th, 1904. They were 
at once put into a fairly large apartment enclosed by wire netting in 
which I also kept pigeons. In this enclosure there was always a large 
dish of water. The gulls could not be induced to eat for three days, 
but on the fourth they accepted a little fish and meat. The food was 
always put in the water. After the lapse of ten days they would come 
towards the dish as soon as food was put into it and they soon con- 
sumed in all about one pound of meat or fish daily. Bread and grains 
were only taken in case of extreme hunger, and then in small quantities. 
They were fond of fish and meat, but were specially partial to mice, 
which they swallowed whole. They bathed very freely in the water 
supplied to them. From the first they attempted to bite when handled, 
and could do so most effectively. 


THE Hawk. 


This bird was brought to me on September 10th, 1903. He was 
at once placed in a large cage made of very strong wire in which 
he was kept in the Laboratory till his death, on February 4th, 1904. He 


292 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


was always restless and did not seem to get appreciably tamer.. The 
manner in which he dashed himself against his cage was recognized as 
fraught with danger, and I was not surprised to find on post mortem 
examination evidences of an inflammation of the membranes of the 
brain. There was also found a blood clot of considerable size in the bulb. 
and a smaller one between the cerebrum and cerebellum, so that it was 
likely his death was caused by pressure on the vital centres of the bulb. 

The bird would not eat bread or grain under any circumstances, 
but was fond of raw meat, fish, and above all rats and mice, which he 
preferred alive but did not refuse when dead. The manner in which 
he dealt with rats and mice was something which, when once witnessed, 
could never be forgotten. Though not a large or heavy bird he could 
at once master and speedily kill the largest rat. When a rat or mouse 
was put into his cage, he at once seized it with both claws and liter- 
ally squeezed the life out of it, perhaps driving his beak into it at the 
very moment he seized it, but in any case he very soon proceeded to 
tear the creature to pieces and devour it, often eating the head first. 
Till I saw what happened I had no idea that a bird of this size could 
exhibit such power to destroy life rapidly. His action in these cases 
was of amazing rapidity. Mice he often ate whole. On one occasion 
he was given four half-grown rats one after the other. This was a 
severe test, but he was equal to the occasion, and in a few seconds they 
were all hors de combat, and a little later dead. 


The intestinal tract of this bird had extraordinary ejective powers, 
fæces being spurted two or three feet away. Hair balls were occasionally 
passed per rectum. All the facts tended to illustrate the striking 
rapidity of action and the strength of his neuro-muscular mechanism, 
whether the muscle involved was striped or unstriped. 


THE Crow. 


This bird came into my possession on December Ist, 1905. Though 
he was not an old bird, as it seemed to me, and had been in confine- 
ment for some time, he was unexpectedly wild. and restless, and has 
remained so or with comparatively little change in spite of the fact 
that two operations had been recently performed on his cerebrum. What 
surprised me most was the above and certain resemblances he showed 
to the hawk." ~ 


1T have learned since the writing of this paper was begun that this bird 
was caught when still young in the spring of 1905, that he was allowed the 
freedom of the house, was accustomed to hide things and appeared to recog- 
nize his mistress who fed him but took no special notice of other people. 


[ MILLS ] COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY 293 


While he would eat almost anything usually offered animals as 
food, he preferred flesh, and still more fish, but above all mice, which 
he swallowed whole when not very large. I have no doubt he would 
deal with live mice as did the hawk, but I have not been able to 
test him as to this thus far. He held down with his claws and tore 
mice and rats to pieces much in the same way as the hawk, but without 
that bird’s great power and rapidity of action. Like the sea-gulls 
he would bite severely, if given the opportunity, on attempting to handle 
him. He has been throughout kept in a cage like that used for the 
hawk. 

EXPERIMENTAL. 


Having made experiments on pigeons, extending over some years, 
especially with reference to the question of cerebral localization and the 
results of removal of portions of the brain, I was anxious to extend 
these experiments to other birds, more particularly those like the hawk 
of extraordinary power of feet and beak. I regret that I did not carry 
out experiments on this bird, but I found him so interesting to study 
psychologically that I was diverted from the physiological, which I 
hoped might receive attention later. On the gulls and the crow, how- 
ever, I can report some results. 

1. On April 3rd, 1905, one of the gulls was with some difficulty 
put under ether. The anesthetic effect was with difficulty brought 
about and maintained. The action of the drug on the heart was pro- 
nounced, the sounds being rendered so distinct they could be heard 
some feet away, reminding one of a steam launch in the distance. Under 
no strength of current could movements be produced by stimulation of 
any part of the cortex that could be reached, in spite of free exposure 
of a large surface. In other words, the result was wholly negative 
so far as cortical cerebral localization is concerned. Then a large por- 
tion, weighing 15 grammes, was sliced away. There was not much 
hemorrhage and the wounds healed rapidly. On the day following 
the operation examination showed that the bird was palpably blind on 
the side opposite to that of operation. He was a little shaky on his 
feet, but seemed as fearless as before and showed his usual inclination 
to bite, but he took no notice of mice as he did prior to operation. The 
bird did not eat of his own accord, but was fed with raw meat and 
water was poured into the gullet through a funnel. The meat was 
regurgitated. 

On April 6th, bread and milk was fed artificially and well retained. 
It is observed that to compensate for his blind eye he turns the head 
about much more than is usual. 


294 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


On April 13th feeding with grain was not successful, the food 
being regurgitated. In order to make sure of having the brain in 
good condition for microscopic examination the bird was killed on 
May 3rd. 

2. The second gull was lost as an attempt was made to put him 
under the influence of chloroform, ether having proved unsatisfactory 
in the other case. 

3. The third gull was tested on April 23rd, 1905, the anesthetic 
being the A.C.E. mixture. A considerable surface of the cerebrum 
being exposed, on stimulating an area situated well forwards and near 
the middle line, the following were the results :— 


(1) Opening of the lids of the eve of the opposite side. 
(11) Drawing down the nictitating membrane. 
(111) Dilatation of the pupil. 


The bird a few days after ate spontaneously and seemed in no 
respect the worse of the operation. But things did not go on well 
and death ensued on May 2nd. An examination revealed the presence 
of pus and a blood clot. 


THE Crow. 


The bird was readily put under the influence of ether and was 
kept at the right degree of anesthesia without any difficulty. A sur- 
face on the right side of the cerebrum as large as a ten cent piece 
was laid bare. Stimulation with various strengths of current, includ- 
ing such as could not be borne on the hand, produced no movements 
of the head, wings, legs, or, indeed, any results other than eye move- 
ments such as have been almost invariably readily obtained by me in 
various birds, viz.: Movements of the lids, nictitating membrane and 
iris; best marked and most constant on the side opposite to that of 
stimulation, though not invariably confined to that side. 

The portion of the cortex indicated above with enough of the white 
matter beneath to expose the corpus striatum was removed. The part 
cut away weighed six grains. The results, on stimulation with a 
current that could be distinctly felt on the moistened finger and that 
could not be borne on the lip, were in marked contrast to the negative 
ones obtained from the cortex. There was distinct extension of the 
toes of the opposite limb and movements of the head to the opposite 
side. These effects were decided, readily obtained and easily repro- 
duced. The bird recovered from the anesthetic quickly and in a few 
moments was able to sit on his perch. 


[MILs] COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY 295 


On the following-day no change of a physiological character was 
manifest, but both the laboratory attendant and myself were of opinion 
that the bird seemed wilder and snatched with greater eagerness at 
any food presented to him. 

Attempts to determine his visual condition were not successful as 
the bird was not sufficiently quiet to permit of accurate tests being 
made, but, so far as could be observed, his vision was unaltered, How- 
ever, it would be safer to draw no conclusion in this instance. The 
bird fed from the first as usual and continued well. 

On March 21st a second operation was performed. This was 
substantially the same as the other and with similar negative results 
as to stimulation. The region exposed, over an area as large as in 
the other case, was removed, when stimulation of the underlying parts 
gave the same results as in the first experiment, viz.: movements of 
the toes and head. The portion cut away weighed seven grains. In 
this instance-also there was very speedy recovery from the ether. The 
bird at once jumped upon his perch, and as he behaved as usual when 
I moved my hand towards him, there seemed no reason to believe that 
there was any serious change in his visual powers. Up to March 24th 
he seemed more excitable, but in a few days again became natural in 
this respect. The only marked changes of any kind in the bird from 
the time of operation to the date of writing, May 18th, may be thus 
briefly stated :— 

1. Periods of greater excitement following each operation. 

2. Decrease in weight; the bird weighed 335 grammes at oper- 
ation, and on May 16th, only 254 grammes. 

3. Decrease in strength. This last was evident this morning 
(May 18th), when an opportunity presented itself to judge of his 
behaviour on a live mouse being presented to him. The mouse, when 
dangled over the cage, at once attracted his attention and an immediate 
attempt was made to seize it. When the creature was put before him 
it was at once seized and shaken, as a terrier might a rat. The bird 
evidently appreciated the fact that the creature was alive, for at no 
time did he allow it to escape from him. He soon proceeded to attempt 
to tear it to pieces, holding it between the feet on the perch — but 
throughout his loss of strength was evident. The loss of weight and 
vigour was not due to lack of food, for he has always fed abundantly, 
but it is in harmony with a large experience of mine in keeping pigeons 
after removal of portions of the cerebrum. ‘There was at no time 
any clear evidence that this crow was, except in these particulars, 
physiologically in any way disturbed, while he was psychically the same 
bird as far as my observations carried me, and as the experiments 


296 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


described later, indicated, he had, to say the least, powers of psychic 


discrimination of no mean order. 


OBSERVATIONS AND EXPERIMENTS ON THE SEA-GULLS. 


It should be noted that these birds always remained on the floor 
of what was practically a big cage, about 6x6x7 feet. One of the birds 
was considerably larger than the other two, and of him they seemed to 
be afraid, and with reason, for he was anything but amiable in his 
behaviour. At the time the experiments to be described were begun 
the birds had evidently learned to associate food and the large water 
dish or trough very thoroughly, for as soon as it was placed in the 
enclosure (cage or pen) they approached, but the larger dominant bird 
nearly always did so first, and the others seemed to have learned to 
expect. this. 

Experiments based on the approach of other persons than the man 
that usually fed the birds were negative, 1.c., there was no evidence of 
recognition. 

The trough being removed and emptied was replaced when the 
birds at once came and looked into it. The trough was then removed 
and in its place was put an empty metallic water pail of the usual 
size. The birds approached cautiously and seemed somewhat afraid 
of it, pecked at it and tried to upset it. After a few moments they 
looked over the top of the pail. This was then replaced by a smaller 
pail into which they could see with ease, but with no results appre- 
ciably different. Food was then put into this vessel, which was filled 
about two-thirds full of water; on the surface floated bread, while on 
the bottom was meat completely covered with bread. Again ‘the birds 
approached, the large one being as usual in the lead. He pecked at 
the pail, tried to upset it, then looking into it he suddenly seized a 
piece of the meat and bolted it, at once withdrawing to some distance. 
The others, after some little time, came forward, but did not seem 
inclined to investigate. The pail was now removed, the trough placed 
in its usual position when the birds at once greedily devoured the meat 
it contained. 

Five days later the following experiment was made: A dark 
coloured enamelled dish was partly filled with water and in it were 
placed bread and meat, the latter being in the centre and covered with 
paper of a light yellow colour, the bread filling in all the rest of the 
space. The leader approached cautiously (or timidly?) and then 
stepped backward, at the same time keeping his fellows away. He 
seemed to be looking for something he did not find. Presently he took 


{mILLs] COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY 297 


some of the bread, pecked at the dish and then looked into the trough 
from which the birds were usually fed. The paper was then removed 
by us when at once two of the gulls bolted the meat. 

Next day the experiment was repeated. : At once one of the 
smaller birds snatched the paper away and attempted to devour it. 
The larger bird seemed more cautious, he stepped forward pecked at 
the pan and at once stepped back. This experiment was repeated on two 
occasions afterwards, on both of which the smallest bird seized the 
paper and made persistent attempts to tear it up and to swallow it. 

A piece of meat was wrapped in white paper, when this same bird 
attempted to swallow the paper, apparently not being aware that the 
meat was in it till it fell out when it was at once bolted, but just 
after the paper also. 

Next, meat was placed in red flannel and placed in water sur- 
rounded by bread in the usual way. At once the smallest bird that 
had been so ready to act before, seized the flannel, and running off 
screaming tried to swallow it. These efforts were persistent. 

Two days later the birds did not seem very eager for food though 
intentionally kept without it the day before. Pieces of meat were 
wrapped in paper of various colours,— pink, yellow, blue, and also in 
one case in black cloth. These were put in a dish containing water 
and with bread floating in it as usual. They pulled out the pink 
package first, then the yellow, next the black cloth, and finally the 
blue paper. Though they pecked vigorously at the paper they did not 
seem to be aware of the presence of the meat. and no attempt was 
made to secure it when it dropped from the paper on the floor. It 
was picked up, then dropped again suddenly, the paper apparently 
receiving more attention than the meat. 

Meat was then placed in the feeding trough, but was not taken 
up, the birds seeming to be more inclined to enjoy bathing in the 
water than eating. One of the birds was not in good physical con- 
dition, so it was decided to discontinue these experiments, in all of 
which I had been sympathetically assisted by Mr. G. E. Lannin, an 
undergraduate in Medicine of McGill University. 


CONCLUSIONS: 


1. It is difficult to believe that smell was well developed in these 
gulls, but vision, including colour vision, was good. 

2. Coloured papers seemed to exert some peculiar and attractive 
influence over them. This fact makes it difficult to draw safe con- 
clusions in regard to the question of a colour-food association or reflex. 


298 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


3. There was a firmly established trough-food association of some 
kind. 
4. Individual differences were strongly marked. 


5. This as a whole obscured and complicated the problem of 


relative individual mental superiority. 

6. Gulls in confinement have not proved themselves of a high 
order of intelligence. As compared with the crow they were absolute 
“ duffers.” 


EXPERIMENTS TO TEST THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE CROW UNDER CERTAIN 
CONDITIONS. 


These were begun on April 28th, i.e., about five weeks after the 
last operation on the cerebrum, none having been made previously. 

It was proposed to note the bird’s reaction to a colour-food stimu- 
lus, as, perhaps, the test may be designated. For this purpose the 
following simple-mechanism was arranged: On a piece of thin board 
five and a half inches square were fastened immovably and parallel to 
each other, two inches apart, two cardboard boxes (in which packets 
of litmus paper had been kept). Hach measured 24 x 24 x + inch; 
one was blue and the other red. At first an attempt was made to 
apply the tests in the morning before the bird had been fed, but he 
was so utterly wild that everything was thrown about and discriminating 
observation impossible; but by allowing him to feed moderately better 
results were obtained. Food was put now in one box, now in another, 
so that the bird might learn if he would the box-food combination. 
The apparatus was laid in his cage in front of his perch so that he 
could readily see and equally readily pick up the food placed in one 
or other box. On-two successive days the food was placed in the red 
box and left uncovered. After this the food was always covered by 
paper of the same colour as the box itself, and this filled rather closely, 
so that it was not possible to see under it from the sides. 

The results were ‘as follows: For three days the bird not being 
previously fed on the same morning, it was found absolutely impossible 
to make observations of any special value, though they were attempted, 
but on the fourth and later days when there had been previous feeding, 
the following notes were taken:—“‘ May 4th: Food placed in the red 
box, each being covered with paper of its own colour and so placed 
that the red was on the left side of the observer when facing the cage. 
The crow took the blue paper off with his beak, but pecked just after 
at the red paper. He soon pecked again at the red paper and 
attempted to look underneath it. In this case his interference had 


ca 


[MILLS] COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY 299 


so altered the position of the uncovering paper that he could see the con- 


tents of the box (meat), which he at once seized and ate. 


1! 


May 5th: Accidental exposure of the contents of the box; experi- 
ment not successful. 

May 7th: The red box was placed on the left. As soon as the 
apparatus was placed in the cage, he lifted the red paper up somewhat, 
peered underneath in a most suggestive and amusing way, and lifted 
out the food very gingerly. 

May 8th: The red box was placed to the right. Though he 
looked plainly to this box first, he took the blue paper off the blue 
box and began to tear it up. A few minutes later he knocked the 
red paper off accidentally, saw the meat and ate it. 

. May 9th: The red box placed to the left. His attention was 
plainly drawn to the red box and held there. Soon he lifted up the 
paper and seized the meat in the box. 

May 10th: Red box placed to the right. His attention was, as 
on the day before, distinctly drawn to the red box and on this occasion 
he walked from the left over the blue box and lifted the paper from 
the red box and at once ate the meat from it. 

May 11th: The same experiment as on the day previous and with 
similar results. 

May 14th: Red box placed to the left. He again walked over 
the blue box, pecked at the red paper covering the other and secured 
the meat in it. 

May 15th: The experiment of May 14th repeated and with the 
same result. 

Owing to accident a couple of later experiments were inconclusive, 
and to my great regret the bird died on May 19th. 

Post Mortem examination showed no special lesion as cause for death, 
and as his strength had been obviously failing, while his activity remained 
as great as ever, I am convinced death was due solely to exhaustion. 
So far, however, as this particular point was concerned, the experiments 
were sufficient to make the case clear. 

It was plain to both the laboratory attendant, who looked after 
the crow from the first, and to myself, that, from May 9th, at latest, 
i.e., after five trials, some sort of firm mental association has been 
formed largely through the colour sense as the chief initiating stimu- 
lus. One could not but feel convinced of the great distance intervening 
psychically between such a bird as a gull and a crow. 

I was also impressed as a result of these observations as carried 
out on the three birds, whose life history in the laboratory has been 
given in outline, of the danger of drawing conclusions from even an 


300 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


extended series of experiments if these are to be of the nature of wide 
generalizations. 


The above observations are presented simply for what they may 
be worth to each reader. I know of none of a similar character on 


birds of these species. They are in no respect ideal but may prove 


at least suggestive. 
It was difficult for me even within the narrow range of observ- 


ation afforded by the few experiments made on the crow not to realize | 
how greatly different a so-called association may be in one species of | 


bird, even one individual, as compared with another. 
An “association” in the case of a gull and a crow, are, I am 
convinced very different things. They have elements in common, but 


what is not common may be the greater part. The crow seemed to 


show real intelligence; he had learned a good deal by a few experi- 


énces, and “association” in the narrower sense does not wholly cover this. 


One sees who looks without prejudice much that cannot be put |into 
words, but which nevertheless impresses, and must influence his judg- 
ment, and it is for this reason that I have always laid so much stress 
on that general knowledge of animals that must modify all conclusions 
derived from experiments which in the nature of the case can give 
but a very limited amount of real knowledge of the psychic processes 
of any animal. 


Let us have all the experiments possible — let us gather facts — 


let the facts be much more numerous than the theories, and let us be 
very cautious in drawing conclusions, especially such as seem to be 
radically destructive in tendency. 

I am as thoroughly convinced as ever that the simple explanations 
some offer are not justified for the higher mammals or even the higher 
vertebrates. 


Sxrcrion IV., 1906. [ 301] Trans. R. S. C. 


XVII.— Bibliography of Canadian Geology and Palæontology for the 
| Year 1905. 


By H. M. Amt, of the Geological Survey of Canada. 


Apams, A. D.—‘ Recession of Niagara Falls.” Sci. Amer., September 2, 1905, 
Dp. 178. 


Apams, F. D.—* The Artesian and other Deep Wells on ithe Island of Mont- 
real.” Geol. Surv. of Canada, Part 0, Ann. Rep. Vol. XIV, (illus- 
tratéd by maps, sections, etc.), pp. 74, (issued August 1st, 1905), 
Ottawa, 1905. (1). 


ADAMS, F. D.—“‘ The Artesian and other Deep Wells on the Island of Mont- 
real.” Journ. Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905, pp. 
76-97 (Discussion, jpp. 97-101), Montreal. 


ADAMS, F. D.—Review of A. W. Nolan’s and J. D. Dixon’s paper: ‘ Geology 
of St. Helen’s Island.” Can. Ree. Se., Vol. 9, pp. 53-66, 1905. 


ADAMS, F. D. (and special committee).—‘‘ Pre-Cambrian Nomenclature.” Re- 
port Ontario Bureau of Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 269-277. 
Printed by order pf the Legislative Assembly, Toronto, 1905. 


Ami, H. M.—‘ Description of a species of Bythotrephis from the dark-gray 
calcareous and indurated slates collected by Mr. J. B. Tyrrell from a 
locality jalong the Unihani river, seven miles north of Dalton’s Post, 
Yukon District, Canada.” Summary Report of the Geological Survey 
of Canada for the calendar year 1904, p. 388. Printed by order of 
Parliament; issued August 9th, 1905; Ottawa, Canada. 


AMI, H. M.—*‘ Preliminary List of the Fossils collected by Prof. L. W. Bailey, 
from various localities in the Province of New Brunswick during 1904.” 
(Appendix) Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 
289-292. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued 
August’ 9th, 1905). 


Ami, H. M.—‘ Notes on a collection of organic remains collected by Mr. H. 
Fletcher from the ferruginous and friable shales of Messenger Brook, 
Torbrook, near County-line, between Kings and Annapolis, south of 
Kingston, in Kings County, Nova Scotia.’ Sum. Rep. Geol. Survey 
Dept. of Canada, for 1904, pp. 385-387. Printed by order of Parlia- 
ment; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August 9th, 1905). 


AMI, H. M. and PENHALLOW, D. P.—‘‘ Determinations of fossil plants from 
various localities in British Columbia and the North-West Territories, 
by Prof. D. P. Penhallow, of McGill University, Montreal, with notes 
on the Geological horizons indicated.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. 
of Canada for 1904, pp. 389-392. (Appendix IV). Printed by order 
of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 9th 1905). 


1 The numbers in brackets at the end of titles correspond to the numbers 
in the “ Abstracts” following this Bibliography. 


302 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA ‘| 


AMI, H.M.—“ Memorial or Sketch of the Life of the late Dr. A. R. C. Selwyn, — 


C.M.G., LL.D., F.F.R.S. ete.” with portrait. Trans. of the Royal Soc: 
of Canada; Second Series, 1904-1905, Section IV, Vol. X, pp. 173-205, 
1904 (issued 1905); Ottawa, Canada. 


AMI, H. M.—‘ The late Dr. A. R. C. Selwyn, C.M.G.; His work in Canada.” 
Can. Min. Rev, Vol. XXIV, No. 7, pp. 175-176, July, 1905; Montreal, 
Quebec. 


AMI, H. M.—‘ Bibliography of Canadian Geology for the Year 1904.” Trans, 
Royal Society of Canada, Second Series, 1905-1906, Vol. XI, Sect. IV, 
pp. 127-142; Ottawa, Canada. 


AMI, H. M.—‘ On the Geology of Carp and environs.” Ottawa Naturalist; 
Vol. XIX, No. 4, pp. 92-93; July, 1905; Ottawa, Canada. 


(Ami, H. M.)—*‘‘ The Geological Survey of Canada, Economic work in 1904.” 
(A Review of the Sum. Report ofi the Geological Survey of Canada). 
Can. Min. Rey., Vol. XXV, No. 3, pp. 79-83;. October, 1905; Montreal, 


Quebec. ; 

(AMI, H. M.) —* General Excursion to Chelsea.” Ottawa Naturalist, Vol. XIX. 
No. 4, pp. 88-91; July, 1905; Ottawa, Canada. (Geological Notes 
included). 


“The Geological Society of America.” Ottawa Naturalist, Vol. XIX, 
No. 9, pp. 171-173; December, 1905; Ottawa, Canada. 


ANON. 


ANoN.—‘“‘ The Limestones of Ontario.” (An illustrated review of Prof. W. G. 
Miller’s report for the Ontario Bureau of Mines) with Geological Maps. 
Can. Min. Review, Vol. XXIV, No. 5, pp. 102-105; May, 1905; Mont- 
real, Quebec. 


ANON.—‘A Nova Scotia Colliery”? (Chignecto Colliery), illustrated. Can. 
Min. Review, Vol. XXV, No. 3, pp. 87-90; October, 1905; Montreal, 
Quebec. 


‘‘ Similkameen District.” The Mining Record, Vol. XII, No. 12, p. 480, 
December, 1905; Victoria, British Columbia. 


ANON. 


Anon (Editorial) —‘‘ The Canadian Mining Institute.’ Eng. and Mining 
Journ., Vol. LXXIX, No. 10, p. 476; March 9th, 1905; New York, 
U.S.A. 


ANon.—‘ The Geological Survey of Canada; Economic work in 1904” (A 
review of the Sum. Rep. of the Geological Survey of Canada by H. M. 
Ami). Can. Min. Review, Vol. XXV, No. 3, pp. 79-88; October, 1905; 
Montreal, Quebec. 


ASHWORTH, JAMES.—‘‘ Notes on the Crows Nest Coal-Field, British Columbia.” 
(Read before the Manchester Geological and Mining Society, February, 
1905). Can. Min. Review, Vol. XXV, No. 5, pp. 165-167; December, 
1905; Montreal, Quebec. 


[AMI] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 303 


ATKIN, AUSTIN J. R.—‘‘ The occurrence of Scheelite near Barkerville (British 
Columbia.)”” The Geological Mag., No. 489, pp. 116-117, London, Eng., 
March, 1905. 


BAILEY, FRANK,—‘‘ Copper Deposits of the Aspen Grove Camp.” Similkameen, 
British Columbia, Min. Rep. Feb. 23, 1905. 


Battey, L. W.—‘‘ The volcanic rocks of New Brunswick.” Trans. Roy. Soc. 
Can., 2 series, Vol. 10, sect. 4, pp. 123-188, 1905. (2) 


BAILEY, L. W.—“ Fossil Occurrences and certain economic Minerals in New 
: Brunswick.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. of Canada for 1904; Ottawa, 
Canada, pp. 279-289. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. 

(Issued August, 9th 1905). 


Bartow, A. E.—‘‘ On Corundum in Ontario and on Surveys near Lake Tema- 
gami.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. of Canada, for 1904, pp. 190-194. 
Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 
9th 1905). 


Bartow, A. H.—‘‘A landslide on the Lievre River” (illustrated). Ottawa 
Naturalist, Vol. XVIII, No. 10, January, 1905 (issued January 19th, 
1905), pp. 181-191, plates II, III, and IV; Ottawa, Canada. 


Bartow, A. E.—Review of “The Nickel and Copper deposits of the Sudbury 

Mining District, Ontario, Canada.” (Issued by the Geol. Surv. Canada, 
in its Ann. Rep., Vol. XIV, Part 4. Amer. Jour. Sc., 4th Series, 
Vol. XIX, No. 112, pp. 331-332, April, 1905; New Haven, Conn., 
WES (6) 


BATEMAN, G. C.—"* Notes on Graphite, Its Occurrence, Uses and Production.” 
Journ. Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905, pp. 343-347. 
(Discussion pp. 347-348), Montreal, Quebec. 


BELL, J. M.—* Iron Ranges of Michipicoten West” (illustrated). Rep. Bureau 
of Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, pt. II, pp. 278-355. Printed by order of the 
Legislative Assembly ; Toronto, 1905. (4) 


BELL, ROBERT.— (Report of the Acting-Director) Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. 
of Canada, for 1904, pp. I—XXXVIII, and pp. 383-384. Printed by 
order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


BELL. ROBERT (and special committee), 1905.—‘‘ Pre-Cambrian Nomenclature.” 
Rep. Bureau of Mines, 1905, Vol. IV, pt. 1, pp. 269-277. Printed by 
order of the Legislative Assembly; Toronto, 1905. 


Borestrom, L. H.—‘‘ The Shelburne Meteorite.” Trans. Roy. Astronomicai 
Society of Canada, 1904, pp. 69-94. (See Geol. Centr. Bd.-8, 1 Mai, 
1906, No. 1). 


Borrwoop, B. B.—‘ The Relative Proportion of Radium and Uranium in Radio- 
active Minerals.” Amer. Journ. Sc., 4th Series, Vol. XX, No. 115, 
pp. 55-56, July, 1905; New Haven, Conn., U.S.A. 


304 ‘ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


BREWER, W. M.—*“ Bornite Ores of British Columbia and the Yukon Territory.” 
Journ, Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905, pp. 172-180 
(Discussion, pp, 180-182), Montreal. 


BREWER, WM. M.—‘ Bornite Ores of British Columbia and the Yukon Terri- : 


tory.” Can. Min. Rev., Vol. XXIV, No. 4, pp. 76-79, April, 1905; 
Montreal, Que, 


Brock, R. W.—“ The Lardeau Mining District.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. 
for 1904, pp. 80-105. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Can- 
ada. (Issued ‘August, 1905). 


Brown, R. H.—‘“Submarine Coal Mining.” Journ. Min. Soc. Nova Scotia, Vol. 
IX, pp. 43-47; (discussion: pp. 48-53) ; 1905, Halifax, N. 8. 


Bucuan, J. S.—‘‘ The Pleistocene of Montreal and the Ottawa Valley from 
a railway carriage.” Can. Rec. Sci., Vol. 9, pp. 190 to 195, Montreal 
1905. (5) 


Burwasu, E. M.— The Geology of Michipicoten Island” (illustrated).  Uni- 
versity of Toronto Studies, Geol. Ser., No. 3, 48 pp., one section, 6 
figures and two maps. The University Library, 1905; Toronto, Canada. 


Cairns, D. D.—‘ Prospecting in Western Canada.” Journ. Can. Min. Inst. 
1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905, pp. 302-315 (discussion, pp. 315-316) ; 
Montreal, Que. 


CAMSELL, CHARLES.—(Geology of the) ‘‘ Country around the Headquarters of 
the Severn River,” with map. Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. for 1904, pp. 
148-152. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued 
August, 1905). 


CANAVAN, H. W. EgBs.—“Atlin District” (illustrated). The Mining Record, 
Vol. XII,: No. 12, pp. 465-468; December, 1905; Victoria, British 
Columbia. 


CARTER, W. E. H.—‘‘ Mines of Western Ontario” (illustrated). Rep. Bureau 
of Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, Pt. 1, pp. 48-75. Printed by the order of 
the Legislative Assembly; Toronto, 1905. 


CARTIER, W. E. H.—‘‘ Report on Accident of Shakespeare Gold Mines.” Report 
of the Bureau of Mines, 1905, Vol. 14, No. 1, pp. 26-29. Toronto, 
Ontario. : 


CATHERINET, JULES.—‘ Copper Mountain, British Columbia.” Eng. and Min. 
Journ., Vol. 79, pp. 125-127, 5 figures, 1905; New York City. Reviewed 
by G. A. Young, in Geologisches Centralblatt, October, 1905. (6) 


CHALMERS, R.—'‘ Surface Geology of Eastern Quebec.” . Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. 


Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 250-263. Printed by order of Parlia- 


ment; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). (7) 


CHALMERS, R.—‘‘ The Glaciation of Mount Orford, P.Q.” Ottawa Naturalist, 
Vol. XIX, No. 2, pp. 52-55; May, 1905; Ottawa, Canada. 


- 


[ami] BIBLIOG APHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 305 


CLARKE, JOHN M.—“'The Menace to Niagara” (illustrated). The Popular 
Science Monthly, pp. 489-504, April, 1905; New York City. 


CLARKE, J. M.—“ Is Niagara Doomed?” The Technical World Vol. IIT, No. 5, 
July, 1905, p. 636; Chicago, Ill. 


Core, L. HEBER.—" Mine Surveying as carried on at Centre Star Mine,” Ross- 
land, B.C. Journ. Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905 
pp. 317-339, (Discussion, p. 335) ; Montreal. 


COoLEMAN, A. P.—"* Sudbury Nickel-bearing Eruptive.” (Abstract) Bull. Geol. 
Soc. Amer., Vol. 15, p. 551; Rochester, 1905. 


Connor, M. F.—‘“"Assays of Ores referred to in Mr. Ingall’s Report.” Sum. 
Re». Geol. Surv. Dept. of Can. for 1904, Appendix I, p. 385, Ottawa 
1905. . 


CorRKILL, H. G.—‘‘ Mines of Eastern Ontario” (illustrated). Rep. Bureau of 
Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, Pt. 1, pp. 76-88. Printed by order of the 
Legislative Assembly ; Toronto, 1905. (8) 


CoRKILL, E. G.—‘‘ Petroleum and Natural Gas.” Rep. Bureau of Mines, 1905, 
Vol. XIV. pt. 1, pp. 89-117. Printed by order of the Legislative As- 
sembly; Toronto, 1905. 


CostE, EUGENE.—(Presidential Address). Journ. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, 
October, 1905, pp. 13-18; Montreal. 


Daty, REGINALD A.—‘‘ Machine-made drawings for the illustration of scientific 


pavers.” American Journal of Science, Vol. 19, 1905, pp. 227-229; Re- 
. . . x € An 6 = 
printed in Science, Vol. 22, 1905, p. 91. New Haven, Conn. 


Dary, R. A.—"The Secondary Origin of certain Granites.” American Journal of 
Science, Vol. 20. pp. 185-216. 1905. New Haven, Conn. 


Dary, R. A.—‘‘ The classification of Igneous Intrusive Bodies.” Journ. of Geo- 
logy, Vol. 13, 1905, pp. 485-508. Chicago. F 


Daty, R. A.—‘“‘Geology of the International Boundary (49th parallel)”  Sum- 
mary Report, Geol. Survey Dept. Canada for 1904. pp. 91-100; Ottawa, 
1905. 


Dary. REGINALD A.—‘‘ The accordance of summit levels among Alpine Moun- 
tains; the fact and its significance.” Journ. of Geology, Vol. 13, pp. 
105-125. 1905; Chicago. 


Denis, THEO (and E. D. INGALL).—‘ Geology of the Country around Bruce 
Mines ” (illustrated with map). Sum. Rep. Geol. Sury. Dept. of Can- 
ada for 1904, pp. 179-190. Printed by order of Parliament: Ottawa, 
Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


DEWOLFE. LORAN A.—‘ The Structure and succession of North Sydney Mines, 
Cape Breton” Nov. Scot. Inst. Sc., Vol. xi, pt 2, (1903-1904)—p. 289. 
Halifax, N.S., 1905. 


Sec. IV., 1906. 25 


306 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Dickson, C. W.—‘ The Distribution of the Platinum Metals in other sources 
than Placers.”” Journ. Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905, 
pp. 192-210 (discussion, pp. 210-214) ; Montreal. 


DILLON- Mitus,8.—‘ Occurrence of Hematite North of Little Current, Georgian | 
Bay” (illustrated). Can. Min. Review, Vol. XXV, No. 4, pp. 119-122; 
renee, 1905; Montreal, Que. 


DizLon-Miccs, S.— Temiskaming.” Eng. and Mining Journ., Vol. 79, pp. 996- 
997, one map, two figs, 1905. (Reviewed) by G. A. Young in Geolo- 
gisches Centralblatt, p. 132, October, 1905. (9) 


Dow1ine, D. B.—‘‘ The Stratigraphy of the Cascade Coal Basin.” Journ. 
Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. III, October, 1905, pp. 221-288, (Discus- 
sion, pp. 283-234) ; Montreal. (10) 


Dow.iine, D. B.—“ The Sitratigraphy of the Cascade Coal Basin” (copiously 
illustrated). Can. Min. Review, Vol. XXIV, No. 5, pp. 105-111, May, 
1905; Montreal, Que. 


DowzixG, D. B.—‘* The Cascade and Costigan Coal Basins and their continu- 
ation northward,’ with maps, ete. Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. for 
1904, pp. 105-121. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. 
(Issued August, 1905). 


DRESSER, J. A.—"‘The Copper-Bearing rocks of the Sherbrooke District, P (rov- 
ince of) Q (uebec).” Sum. Rep. Geol. Sury. Dept. of Canada for 
1904, pp. 263-269. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. 


DRESSER, JOHN A.—* A note on varieties of Serpentine in South-Eastern Quebec.” 
Journ. Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905, pp. 267-269, 
(Discussion, pp. 269-271) : Montreal. 


Dresser, J. A.—* A Study. in the metamorphic rocks of the St. Francis Valley, 
Quebec.” Amer. Journal Sci., Vol. 21, No. 121, p. 67-76, 4 figs: 
1906. (11) 


DRESSER, JOHN A.—‘‘ The Bed-Rock of the Gilbert River Gold Fields, Quebec.” 
Can. Min. Review, Vol. XXIV, No. 4, p. 71, April, 1905; Montreal. 
Que. 

DRESSER, JoHN A.—‘‘ The Bed-Rock of the Gilbert River Gold-Fields.” Journ. 
Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905, pp. 259-262 (Discus- 
sion, pp. 262-266); Montreal, Que, 


DRESSER, J. A.‘ Correspondence’ (Glaciation of Mount Orford). The Ottawa 
Naturalist, Vol. XIX, No. 3, pp. 73-74, June, 1905; Ottawa, Canada. 


Dumais, Ps H.—* Quelques Apercus sur la géologie du Saguenay.” Le Na- 
turaliste Canadien, Vol. XXXII, (XII de la 2e série), No. 3, pp. 31-33; 
Mars 1905; also No. 5, pp. 51-54, Mai, 1905; Quebec. 


DUNLOP, ORRIN E.—‘“‘Is Niagara Doomed? ” “The Technical World,” Vol. 
III, No. 5, pp. 557-568, (illustrated). (See p. 636, by J. M. Clarke 
July, 1905). 


[ami] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 307 


D. (W. M.).—‘‘ Tides in the Bay of Fundy” (illustrated). National Geogr. 
Magazine, Vol. XVI, No. 2. pp. 71-76, February, 1905; Washington, 
LDC: 


Ets, R. W.—‘‘ Some interesting problems in New Brunswick Geology.” Read 
_May. 25th, 1905). Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 2nd series, Vol. XI, Sec- 
tion IV, pp. 21-35; Ottawa, Canada. (12) 


Ets, R. W.—‘‘ Geology of Charlotte County, New Brunswick.” Sum. Rep. 
Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 271-279. Printed by order 
of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


Ets, R. W.—‘‘ (On the Geology of the) Nicola Coal Basin, B(ritish) C(olum- 
bia), with maps. Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. for the year 1904, 
pp. 42-74. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued 
August, 1905). 


Emerson, B. K.—‘‘ Notes on some rocks and minerals from North Greenland 
and Frobisher Bay.” Amer. Geol., Vol. XXXV, No. 2, pp. 94-104; 
February, 1905; Minneapolis, U.S.A. 


EMMExSs. N. W.—‘ The Camborne Mining District of British Columbia.” Min- 
ing Magazine, Volume XI, No. 2, pp. 130-158, Feb. 1905. 


Evans, H. F.—‘‘A Reconnaissance into Highland Valley, British Columbia.” 
Min. World, Vol. 22. pp. 526-527, and p. 546, 1905. (13) 


, 


Evans, H. F.—“ Interior Plateau of British Columbia.” Mining World, Vol. 
23, p. 552-553; p. 519, 1905. (13a) 


Evans, H. F.—* Miolybdenite in British Columbia.” Mining World, Vol. 23, 
p. 443-444, 1905. (14) 


Evans. H. F.—"* Chrysoberyl from Canada.” Amer. Journ. Sc. 4th Ser. Vol. 
19, pp. 316-818, New Haven, April, 1905. 


FARIBAULT, E. RopoLpHe.—‘ Gold Fields of Nova Scotia.” Sum. Rep. Geol. 
Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 319-332. Printed by order of 
Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


? 


FEHLINGER.—Review of “The Iroquois gBeach in Ontario” Ann. Rep. Bureau 
of Mines of Ontario, 1904, Part 1, pp. 225-244, with maps; Toronto, 
1904, by Prof. A. P. Coleman), Geol. Centralblatt, January, 1905, 
pp. 40-41; Leipzig, Germany. 

FisHer SypNey.—‘ Canada, its History, Productions and Natural Resources ” 


(copiously illustrated). Dept of Agriculture, The Universal and Inter- 
national Exhibition, Liege, 1905, 221 pp.; Ottawa, Canada. 


FLETCHER, JAMES.—“ Reclaiming Sand Dune.” Canadian Forestry Journal, 
Vol. I, No. 4, October, 1905, pp. 182-184; Ottawa, Canada. 


FLETCHER, HuGx.—(Geology of) “The Counties of Cumberland, Hants, Kings 
and Annapolis, Nova Scotia” (with coloured Geol. map). Sum. Rep. 
Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 293-318. Printed by order 
of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. 


308 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


FULTON, T. T.—‘ The Faults of Battery Points.” Nov. Scot. Inst. Se., Vol. xi. 
pt. 2, (1903-1904), p. 260. Halifax, N.S., 1905. 


GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT.—" Summary Report of the Geol. Surv. Dept. 
for the Calendar Year 1904 (published by order of Parliament) 
XXXVIII pp., and 392 pp. (illustrated with maps, diagrams, etc.) ; 
Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


Gipson, THos. W.—‘ Report of the Bureau of Mines, 1905 (for Ontario), 
Statistical Review.” Rep. Bur, of Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, pt. 1, 
pp. 1-36. Printed by order of the Legislative Assembly ; Toronto, 1905. 


GILLESPIE, P.—‘* Cement Industry of Ontario” (illustrated). Rep. Bur. of 
Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 118-183. Printed by order of the 
Legislative Assembly; Toronto, 1905. 


GILPIN, Epwin.—‘ The Mira Grant, Cape Breton County, N.S.” Proc. and 


Trans. N.S. Inst. Se. Vol. XI, Part 1, Session 1902-1903, pp. 89-94; 
Halifax, N.S. 


GILPIN. EnpwiN.—‘ Sections and Analyses of Nova Scotia Coals.” Proc. and 
Trans. N. S. Inst. Se., Halifax, Nova Scotia, pp. 8-17, Session 1902-1903 : 
Halifax, N.S. (15) 


GLEAZER, Percy.—‘ Ymir District in 1904.” Brit. Col. Min. Record, Jan. 1905. 
illustrated, 


Goopwin, W. L.—‘ Summer Mining Classes.” Rep. Bur. of Mines 1905 (for 
Ontario),Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 31-42. Printed by order of the Legis- 
lative Assembly; Toronto, 1905. 


GRANT, C. C.—‘“Notes, General and Geological.” Journ. and Proc. of the 
Hamilton Scientific Association, Session 1904-1905, No. XXI, pp. 
74-77: Hamilton, Ontario. 


GRANT, C. C.—‘ Notes on the late collection Season.” Journ. and Proc. of 
the Hamilton Scientific Association, Session 1904-1905, No. XXI, pp. 
68-74; Hamilton, Ont. 


Grant, C. C.—“ Notes on a few deep sea dredgings, ete., from the East.” Journ. 
and Proc. of the Hamilton Scientific Association, Session 1904-1905, 
No, XXI, pp. 77-80; Hamilton, Ont. 


GRANT. C. C.—“Additional Notes ” (Paleontological) (illustrated). Journ. and 
Proc. of the Hamilton Scientific Association, Session 1904-1905, No. 
XXI, pp. 80-86; Hamilton, Ont. 


GUIGNARD, J. A.—Review of “Monographie de l'île d’Anticosti, par Joseph 
Schmitt. docteur ès sciences et en médecine, 8vo., 372 pp. 27 planches 
et 4 cartes, Paris, 1904). Le Naturaliste Canadien, Vol. 32, No. 1, 
pp. 1-5, Janvier 1905. 


Gurzcer, CEpxAs.—“" The Study of Locality” (illustrated). The Popular Sci- 
enca Monthly, pp. 728-735, December, 1905; Toronto, Canada. 


- 


[amr] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 309 


GwILLIM, Pror. J. G.—‘‘ Notes on the Life History of Coal Basin.” Journ. 
Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905, pp. 235-240, (Discus- 
sion, pp. 240-248), Montreal. 


HAANEL, HuGENE.—* Rapport de la commission nommée pour étudier les divers 
Procédés Electro-Thermiques pour la Réduction des Minerais de fer et 
la Fabrication de l’acier employés en Europe, 236 pp.; Ottawa, Canada. 


HAGGEN, E. A.—‘‘ Mining in the Revelstoke District.” The Mining Record, 
Vol. XII, No. 1, pp. 12-18, January, 1905; Victoria, B.C. 


HARDMAN, JOHN E.—‘ Quebec’s New Mineral Region” (illustrated). Can. 
Min. Rev., Vol. XXV, Nos. 1 and 2. pp. 9-12, 43-47; August and 
September, 1905; Montreal, Que. 


ÆlARDMAN, JOHN E.—“‘A New Mineral Area in Ontario.” Part 1 (illustrated). 
Can. Min. Review, Vol. aA41V, No. 5, pp. 95-98; May, 1905, Part 2 
(illustrated) do., No. 7, pp. 157-158; July, 1905; Montreal, Que. 


HARRINGTON, B. J.—‘‘* On an interesting variety of Fetid Calcite and the Cause 
of its Odour.’”’ Amer. Journ. Se., 4th sr., Vol. XIX, No. 113, pp. 345- 
348, May, 1905; New Haven, Conn., U.S.A. 


Haycock, Pror. ERNEST.—“* Geology of Part of the County of Ottawa.” Sum. 
Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 232-239. Printed by 
order of Parliament. (Issued August, 1905) ; Ottawa, Canada. 


HENRETTA, C. M.—‘* Bankhead Coal Mines.” Journ. Can. Min. Inst., 1905. 
Vol. VIII, October, 1905, pp. 215-220; Montreal, Que. 


Hie, F.—“‘ A Correction in the Classification of our Gold Formation.” Journ. 
Can. Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October 1, 1905, pp. 183-191; Montreal. 


Hixon, Hiram W.—“‘ Geology of the Sudberry District.” Eng. and Min. Journ. 
Dec. 29th, 1904. 


HOFFMANN, G. C.—‘‘ Chemistry and Mineralogy.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. 
of Canada for 1904, pp. 337-349. Printed by order of Parliament ; 
Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


HOFFMANN, G. C.—“ Sonesite, A Native Iron-Nickel Alloy, occurring in the 
auriferous gravels of the Fraser, Province of British Columbia.” Amer. 
Journ. Se., V, April, 1905, p. 319; New Haven. 


HotcuxKiss, W. O.—‘ Cobalt Mining District, Ontario.” Mining World, Vol. 
23, p. 634-636, 1 map, ill.; 1905. (16) 


HowLex, JAMES P.—‘‘ Report on Exploration and boring operations in the 
Central Carboniferous basin near Grand Lake, 1904.” Geol. Surv. of 
Newfoundland, pp. 33-47; Saint John’s, Newfoundland, 1905. 


Hunter, A. F.—‘ Raised Shoreline along the Blue Mountain Escarpment.” Sum. 
Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 243-228. Printed by 
order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


310 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


INGALL, E. D.—‘‘ Mines Section” (Geological Survey of Canada). Sum. Rep, 
Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 372-383. Printed by order 
of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


INGALL, E. D. (and T. DENNIS).—‘ Geology of the Country around Bruce Mines ” 
(illustrated with diagrams). Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada, 
Year 1904, pp. 179-190. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Can- 
ada. (Issued August, 1905). 


INGALL, E. D. (and J. McLrtsH).—‘*‘ Summary of the Mineral Production of 
Canada for 1904.” Geol. Surv. of Canada, Section of Mines, 15 pp.; 
Qttawa. (Issued February 28th, 1905). 


INGALL, E. D. (and J. McLetsH).—“‘Annual Report for 1903.” Section of 
Mines, Geol. Surv. Can., Part S., Ann. Rep., Vol. XVI, 15 pp. (whole 
No 894), diagram, ete.; Ottawa, 1905. (Issued August 29th, 1905). 


- Jones, T. Rupert.—Notes on a Paleozoic Cypridina from Canada.” (Paper 
extracted from the Geological Magazine, Decade V, Vol. I, No. 483, 
September, 1904). Journ. and Proc. of the Hamilton Scientific Associa- 
tion, Session 1904-1905, No. XXI, pp. 113-114; Hamilton, Ont. 


JOHNSTON, J. F. E.—‘‘ Geology of part of the county of Ottawa.” Sum. Rep. 
Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 239-250. Printed by order 
of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


JOHNSTON, R. A. A.—‘‘ The Copper Claims of Aspen Grove and Aberdeen 
Camp, B(ritish) C(olumbia).” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. for 1904, 
pp. 24-80. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued 
August, 1905). 


JOHNSTON, ROBERT A. A.—‘‘ On the Meteorite which fell near the Village of 
Shetburne, Township of Melanchthon, in August, 1904.” Sum. Rep. 
Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 332-334. Printed by order 
of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905) ? 


KEELE, JOSEPH.—‘‘ The Duncan Creek Mining District ” (Stewart River, Yukon 
Territory), with map. Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. for 1904, pp. 18-42. 
Printéd by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 
1905). = 

Kemp, J. F.—‘‘ New Sources of the Supply of Iron Ores” (Abstract) (Read 
before the New York Academy of Science). Amer. Geol., Vol. XXXV, 
No. 8, p. 193; Minneapolis, U.S.A. 


KNIGHT, C. W.—*‘Analcite-Trachyte Tuffs and Breccias from South-West Alberta, 
Canada” (illustrated). Can. Rec. Sc, Vol. IX, No. 5, pp. 265-278. 
(Issued August, 1905). (Analyses of rocks by Dr. C. W. Dickson), 
(marked “ Oct., 1904”). 


Kunz, GEORGE F.—‘ The Production of Precious Stones in 1904” (Extract 
from Mineral Resources of the United States Calendar Year 1904). 
U.S. Geological Survey, 120 pp; Washington, D.C. 1905., 


ra 


[ami] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 311 


LAMBE, L. M.—‘ On the squamoso-parietal crest of the horned deinosaurs Cen- 
trosaurus apertus and Monoclonius Canadensis from the Cretaceous 
of Alberta.” Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 2nd ser., Vol. X, Sect. IV, pp. 
pp. 3-12, Pls I and II, (issued February, 1905, marked 1904) ; Ottawa 
Canada. 


LAMBE, L. M.—* Vertabrate Paleontology.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Sury. Dept. of 
Canada for 1904, pp. 362-371. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, 
Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


Lang, A. C. (and special committee).—‘‘ Pre-Cambrian Nomenclature.” Rep. 
Bur. of Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 269-277. Printed by order 
of the Legislative Assembly; Toronto. 1905. 


Lane, W. K.—‘‘ The Chemical Industries of the Dominion” (illustrated). In- 
dustrial Canada, Vol. V, Nos. 8 and 9, March and April, 1905 (pp. 551, 
555) ; Toronto, Canada, 1905. 


LeiTH, C. K. (and special committee).—‘* Pre-Cambrian Nomenclature.” Rep. 
Bur. of Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 269-277. Printed by order 
of the Legislative Assembly; Toronto, 1905. 


LEROY, O. E. (and F. D. ApAms).—‘ The Artesian and other deep wells on 
the Island of Montreal.” Geol. Surv. Dept. Can., Part 0, Ann. Rep. 
Vol. XIV, 74 pp. (illustrated by maps and sections). Issued August 
1st, 1905; Ottawa, Canada (marked 1904). (No. 863). 


Lipsey, W. L.—‘‘ Government Aid to deep Gold Mining in Nova Scotia.” Journ. 
Min. Soc. Nova Scotia. Trans. 1904-1905. pp. 54-60. (Discussion: pp. 
60-71), Halifax, Nova Scotia, 1905. 


Lipsey, W. L.—‘ The Cost of Plant, Shaft sinking and level driving in the 
deepest levels yet reached in the Gold Mines of Nova Scotia.” Journ. 
Min. Soc. Nova Scotia, Trans. 1904-1905, Vol IX. pp. 9496; (Discus- 
sion : pp. 96-97), Halifax, Nova Scotia, 1905. 


Low, A. P.—‘‘ The. Government Expedition to Hudson Bay and Northward, in 
the S.S. ‘ Neptune,’ 1903-04.” Geology and Natural History, Sum. 
Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. for 1904, pp. 122-143. Printed by order of 
Parliament ; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). (17) 


Marsters, V. F.—‘ Petrography of the Amphibolite, serpentine, and associated 
Asbestos deposits of Belvidere Mountain, Vermont (includes ‘* Develop- 
ment of Canadian Industry and Geology of Canadian ore ”). Bull, 
Geol. Soc. America, Vol. 16, pp. 419-446, pls. 71-81, October, 1905. 


MAson, FRANCIS H.—Notes on Hydraulic Lime and Cement. Nov. Scot. Inst. 
Sc., Vol. xi, pt. 2, (1903-1904), p. 179, Halifax, N.S. 1905. 


MATHEwS, Joun.—' Comox Collieries, Cumberland, Vancouver Island” (illus- 
trated). The Mining Record, Vol. XII, No. 12, pp. 493-494, 1905; 
Victoria, B.C. 


312 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


MATTHEW, G. F.—* The Cambrian Dictoyonema fauna of the slate belt of Eastern 
New York.” Can. Ree. Sc., Vol. IX, p. 196, 1905; Montreal, Que. 


MATTHEW, G. F.—‘ New species and a new genus of Batrachian footprints of 
the Carboniferous System in Eastern Canada” (illustrated). Trans. 
Roy. Soc. Can., Vol. X, Seet. IV, Art. IV, pp. 77-121, 1904. (Ree’d 
February 20th, 1905). 


MATTHEW, G.F.—‘‘ Notes on Cambrian Faunas: No. 5, “ Oboloid Shells of the 
: Cambrian System in Canada and their relationship ’’; No. 6, ‘ Develop- 
ment in size of the Inarticulate Brachiopods of the Basal Cambrian” ; 

No. 7, “Did the Upper Etcheminian fauna invade Eastern Canada 

from the Southern?” ; No. 8, ‘‘ Cambrian Brachiopoda and Mollusca 

of Mount Stephen, B.C., with a description of a new species of Metop- 

toma.” Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, 2nd series, 1902-1903, Sect. IV, 

Vol. VIII, pp. 93-112, 1902; Ottawa, Canada (not previously recorded). 


McConnett, R. G.—The Kluane Mining District (South-western portion of the 
Yukon District) with map. Sum. Rep. Geol. Sury. Dept. for 1904, 


pp. 1-18. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued 
August, 1905). 


MCCONNELL, R. G.—‘‘ Report on the Klondike Gold Fields” (illustrated by 
maps, photos and diagrams). Geological Survey of Canada, Annual 
Report, Vol. XIV, pt. B, 71 pp. (No. 884); Ottawa, Canada. 


MCINNES, WM.—(Geology of the) “ Upper part of the Winisk and Attawapiskat 
rivers.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. for 1994, pp, 153-160. Printed by 
order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). (18) 


McINtosu, KENNETH C. G.—‘‘ The Question of Subsidence at Louisbourg, Cape 
Breton ” Noy. Scot. Inst. Se., Vol. XI, pt. 2, (1903-1904) p. 264. Halifax, 
N. S. 1905. 


McLeisx, J. (and E. D. INGALL.).—‘ Ann. Rep. for 1903 Section of Mines.” 
Geol. Surv. of Canada, Part S, Ann. Rep., Vol. XVI, 156 pp; Ottawa 
(No. 894). (Issued August 29th, 1905). 


McLeisu, J. (and E. D. INGALL).—‘ Summary of the Mineral Production of 
Canada for 1904.” Geol. Surv. of Canada, Section of Mines, 15 pp; 
Ottawa, Canada. (Issued February 28th, 1905). 


MCMILLAN, JAMES G.—‘‘ Explorations in Abitibi.” Rep. Bur. of Mines, 1905, 
Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 184-212. Printed by order of the Legislative 
Assembly ; Toronto, 1905. (19) 


Merrity, F. J. H.—‘‘ Lead Deposits of Bedford, Ontario.” Eng. and Mining 
Journal, Vol. 80, p. 1161; New York City, 1905. (20) 


MERRILL, G. P.—‘‘ On the Origin of Veins in Asbestiform serpentine.” Bull. 
Geol. Soc. Amer., Vol. 16, pp. 131-136, pls. 33-34, March, 1905; Roches- 
ter, U.S.A. 


[amr] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 313 


Minter, Witter G.— The Cobalt-Nickel Arsenides and Silver Deposits of 
Temiskaming ” (illustrated by maps, photos and diagrams). Rep. Bur. 
of Mines, 1905, Part II, 66 pp. Printed by order of the Legislative 
Assembly, 1905; Toronto, 1905. (22) 


Miter, W. G.—‘ Boston Township Iron Range.” Rep. Bur. of Mines, 1905, ~ 
Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 261-268. Printed by the order of the Legislative 
Assembly; 'Toronto, 1905. (23) 


Miter, WILLET G.—(and special committee ).—‘‘ Pre-Cambrian Nomenclature.” 
Rep. Bur. of Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 269-277. Printed by 
the order of the Legislative Assembly; Toronto, 1905. 


Mitrer, W. G.—‘‘ Nepheline Syenite in Western Ontario.” Am. Geol., Vol. 32, 
_ pp. 182-185; Minneapolis, 1905. (21) 


Miter, W. G.—‘‘ The Limestones of Ontario.” Rep. Bur. of Mines, part II, 
1904, 143 pp. plates, 1905; Toronto, Canada. 


NEILL, A. T.—"* Annual Report of the Geological Section” (for the year ending 
May 11th, 1905). Journ. and Proc. of the Hamilton Scientific Asso- 
ciation, Session 1904-1905, No. XXI, pp. 99-100; Hamilton, Ont. 


OBALSKI, J.—‘‘A New Mining District in Quebec.” Eng. and Mining Journ., 
Vol. UXXIX, No. 11, p. 513, March 16th, 1905; New York, U.S.A. 


OBALSKI, J.—‘ Mining Operations in the Province of (Quebec for the Year 
1904” (illustrated by maps and photos). Department of Land, Mines, 
and Fisheries, 48 pp. Quebec, 1905. 


OSGoopE, WILFRED M.—* Scaphoceros Tyrrellii, an Extinct ruminant from the 
Klondike gravels.” Smithsonian Miscel. Collection, Quart. Issue, Vol. 
EIT, pt. 2, Vol. XVIII, Pub. No. 1585 pp. 173-185. Two plates, Pls. 
REXEX VIT ‘and XGCXOXEV LL. 


O'SULLIVAN, OWEN.—" Survey of the South and West Coast of James Bay,” 
with map. Sum. Rep. Geol. Sury. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 173- 
179. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued 
August, 1905). (25) 


OUTRAM, JAMES.—‘‘In the Heart of the Canadian Rockies,’ with map and 
illustration, 466 pp. The MacMillan Company, London and New York 
City. 


Parks, W. A.—" Paper Read by W. A. Parks.” Journ. and Proc. of the 
Hamilton Scientific Association, Session 1904-1905, No. XXI, p. 67 
(11% p); Hamilton, Ont. 


Parks, W. A.—* Paleontology in the University of Toronto.” Univ. of Toronto 
Monthly, 1905. 


Parks, W. A.—‘ The Geology of a District from Lake Timiskaming Northward ” 
(with map and plate). Sum. Rep. Geol. Sury. Dept. of Canada for 
year 1904, pp. 198-225. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Can- 
ada. (Issued August, 1905). 


314 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


Parks, W. A.— The Need of a Provincial Musuem in Ontraio.” Journ. Can. 
Min. Inst., 1905, Vol. VIII, October, 1905, pp. 68-73 (Discussion ,pp. 
73-75) ; Montreal. 


PENHALLOW, D. P.—‘‘ Notes on Tertiary Plants.” Trans. Roy. Soc. Can, 
Vol. X, Section 4, pp. 57-76 (1904), (issued February, 1905). (received 
February 14th, 1905). 


PENHALLOW, D. P.—*‘‘ The origin of Amber” (Note). Can. Rec. of Science, 
Vol. IX, No. 5, pp. 817-318, October (1904), issued August, 1905, Mont- 
real, Quebec. 


PENHALLOW, D. P.—* Observations upon some noteworthy leaf variations, and 
their bearing upon paleontological Evidence ” (illustrated). Can. Rec. 
Vol. IX, No. 5, pp. 279-805. (Marked “1904,” but issued August, 
1905). Rec’d 31st August, 1905; Ottawa, Canada. 


PENHALLOW, D. P.—‘ The Anatomical Changes in the Structure of the Vascular 
Cylinder Incident to the Hybridization of Catalpa” (illustrated). The 
American Naturalist, Vol. XANIX, No. 459, pp. 118-186; Boston, Mass. 


PENHALLOW, D. P.—‘‘A Systematic Study of the Salicaceae” (illustrated). 
American Naturalist, Vol. XXXIX, No. 464, pp. 509-535, August, 1905; 
Ditto, No. 467, pp. 797-838, November, 1905; Boston, Mass, U.S.A. 


PENHALLOW, D. P.—‘‘Status of the Mesozoic Floras of the United States, by 
L. F. Ward” (a Review). Science, XXIII, May 11th, pp. 7387-741, 
new series, No. 593; 1906. 


PENHALLOW, D. P.—(and H. M. Amt).—‘Determinaitions of fossil plants 
from various localities in British Columbia and the North-West Terri- 
tories, by Prof. D. P. Penhallow. of McGill University, Montreal, with 
notes on the Geological horizons indicated.” Sum. Rep. Geological Sur- 
vey Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 389-392 (Appendix IV.). Printed 
by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August 9th, 1905). 


Piers, HArry.—‘‘ Report on Provincial Museum of Nova Scotia and Science 
Library for 1904.” From Rep. Department of Mines, 8 pp; Halifax, 
N.S. 


POoLE, Henry S.—‘ Subsidence of the Atlantic Coast of Nova Scotia ” (intro- 
ductory to a paper by Mr. McKintosh), Nova Scotian Inst. Sc. Vol. 
XI, pt. 2, p. 262. Halifax, N.S. 1905. 


POOLE, HENRY S.—‘* The Sunken Land of Bus” (lat. 35 west, long. 53 north), 


Nov. Scot. Inst. Sc. Vol. XI, pt. 2, (1903-1904), p. 193. Hailfax, 
N.S. 1905. 


POOLE, HENRY S.—‘ On the Age of the Conglomerate Capping the Cambrian Rocks 
of Nova Scotia.” Nova Scot Inst. Sc., Vol. XI, pt. 2, p. 236. Halifax, 
N.S., 1905. 


PooLE, HENRY S.—‘Is there Gold under Prince Edward Island?” Proc. and 
Trans. N. S. Inst. Se, Vol. XI, Part 1, Session 1902-1903, 18 plates, 
pp. 1-7; Halifax, N.S. (26) 


[AMI] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 315 


RAYMOND, Percy E.—‘ The Fauna of the Chazy Limestone” (diagram). Amer- 
ican Journ. Sc., Vol. XX, Art. XXXVIII, pp. 353-382, November, 1905; 
New Haven, Conn., U.S.A. 


RAYMOND, Percy E.—‘‘ The Trilobites of the Chazy Limestone.” Annals of 
the Carnegie Museum, Vol. III, No. 2, 1905; Pittsburg, Penn. 


RAYMOND, ROSSITIER W.—‘‘ The Principle Governing initial title to Mineral 
Land.” Can. Min. Rev., Vol XXV, No. 5, pp. 144-146; December, 
1905; Montreal, Que. 


\ 


Rep, Harry FIELDING.—** The Variations of Glaciers, IX.” Journ. of Geology, 
Vol. 13, p. 313-318, 1905, Canada. The Victoria and Illecillewaet are 
receding while the Wenchumna and Asulkan are advancing, though ithe 
Asulkan is becoming narrower. 


Rein, Harry FIELDING.—"* The Variations of Glaciers,’ IX. Journ. of Geol., 
Vol. 13, pp. 318-318, 1905; Canada. 


Reip, H. FIELDING (et EH. Muret).—‘‘ Les variations périodiques des glaciers.” 
X. Rapport 1904. Arch des Sc. Phys. et Nat. de Genève; t. 20, 
pp. 62-74; 169-190, Genève, Suisse, 1904. (Observateurs : Mlle Ogilvie et 
MM. G. et W. Vaux). The glaciers have all a tendency to decrease. 
The Asulkan and Wenchumna glaciers are the only ones advancing. 


RUEDEMANN, R.—‘‘ Review of Frank Springer’s Cleiocrinus ” in Vol. 25 of 
Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., No. 2, pp. 93-114, 1 pl., 1905 Geol. Centr,, 
October, 1905, p. 168; Berlin, Germany. 


SENECAL, C. O.—‘‘ Mapping and Engraving” (Geological Survey of Canada). 
Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 349-354. Printed 
by order of Parliament; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


SHERZER, WILLIAM H.—*‘ Glacial studies in the Canadian Rockies and Selkirks.” 
Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, Vol. 17, p. 453-496, illustr. ; 
Washington, D. C. 1905. (27) 


SHUTT, F. T.—Report of the Chemist; Central Experimental Farm of Agricul: 
ture (Analyses of soils, etc.). Ann. Rep. Central Mxperimental Farm 
for the year 1904, pp. I-IV. and 1438-203; Ottawa, Canada, 1905. 


SMITH. GEORGE O. (and Davin WHITE).—‘‘ The Geology of the Perry Basin in 
Eastern Maine.” Jnited States Geological Survey, Prof. Paper, No. 35, 
777 pp.. 6 plates, 1905; Washington, D.C. 


SMITH, W. N.—*‘ Loon Lake Iron-Bearing District.” Report Bureau of Mines, 
1905, Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 254-260. Printed by order of the Legislative 
Assembly ; Toronto, 1905. (28) 


SMirx, W. N.—‘ Animikie or Loon Lake. Iron-Bearing District.” Mining World, 
Vol. 22, pp. 206-208, 1: map; 1904. 


SPENCER. J. W.—‘‘ On the Physiographic Improbability of Land at the North 
Pole’ Amer. Journ. Sc., 4th Sr., Vol. XIX, pp. 333-341, May, 1905; 
New Haven, Conn, U.S.A. 


316 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


SPENCER, J. W.—‘ Bibliography of Submarine Valleys off North America.” 
Amer. Journ. Sc, 4th Sr., Vol. XIX, No. 113, pp. 341-344, May, 1905 ; 
New Haven, Conn., U.S.A. 


SPENCER, J. W.—‘‘ Dr. Nansen’s Bathymetrical features of the North Polar Sea, 
with a discussion of the Continental Shelf and the previous Oscilla- 
tions of the shore-line.”’” Amer. Geol., Vol. 35, pp. 221-236, April (1905) ; 
Minneapolis, U.S.A. 


SPRINGER, FRANK.—‘“ Cleiorinus.” Harvard Coll. Mus. Comp. Zool. Mem., Vol. 
25, No. 2, pp. 93-114, 1 pl., 1905 (on Billings’ genus and species, 
from Ottawa District, Canada.) (28) 


Stuart, G. W.—‘ An Incident in Systematic prospecting connected with the 
Discovery of the Rose Lead ” Montague N.S. Appendix. Journ. Min. Soc. 
Nova Scotia. Trans. for 1904-1905; Vol. IX. pp. 172-174; Halifax, N.S. 
1905. 


TAYLOR, J. C.—* Notes on Diamond Drilling; Journ. Min. Soc. -Nova Scotia, 
Trans. 1904-1905, pp. 72-80; (Discussion pp. 81-95). Halifax, Nova 
Scotia, 1905. 


Tupper, C. A.—‘‘ Gold Dredging in Alaska” (illustrated). Mining Magazine, 
Vol. XI, No. 5, pp. 494-496; Chicago, San Francisco, London, New 
York City, U.S.A., 1905. 


TURNBULL, J. M.—‘‘ Bankhead Coalfield, Alberta, Canada.” Col. Guardian. Jan. 
27th 1905. 


TurNER, J. B.—‘ The Probable Course of Evolution in plants.” Journ. and 
Proc. of the Hamilton Scientific Association, Session 1904-1905, No. 
XXI, pp. 87-98; Hamilton, Ont. 


U(PHAM), W.—‘‘ Review of recent Geological literature.” Notice of ‘“ Notes 
on the apical end of the siphuncle in some Canadian Endoceratidæ, 
etc.’ by J. F. Whiteaves. 


VAN HISE, CHARLES R. (and special committee), 1905.—‘‘ Pre-Cambrian Nomen- 
clature.” Rep. Bureau of Mines, 1905, Vol. XIV, pt. 1, pp. 269-277. 
Printed by order of the Legislative Assembly; Toronto, 1905. 


WALCOTT, C. D.—‘‘* Cambrian brachiopoda, with descriptions of New Genera 
and species.” Proc). U. 'S. "Nat, Mus:, Vols 28; pp. 227-33% “1905: 
Washington, D.C. \ 


WEEKS, FRED. BOUGHTON.—"* Bibliography and Index of North American Geo- 
logy, Paleontology, Petrology, and Mineralogy for the year 1904.” 
United States Geological Survey Bulletin, No. 271, Series G, Miscel- 
laneous, 29, 218 pp.; 1905. Washington, D. C. 


WELLS, J. WALTER.—“ Preliminary Report on the Limestones and the Lime 
Industry of Manitoba” (illustrated). Mines Branch, Dept. of the 
Interior, 68 pp., 8 plates; Ottawa, 1905. (Issued July. 1905). (29) 


2 


[ami] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 317 


WELLS, J. WALTER.—“ Preliminary Report on the raw materials, manufacture 
and uses of Hydraulic Cements in Manitoba” (illustrated). Mines 
Branch Dept. Interior, Ottawa, 1905; 70 pp., 1 pl. (Issued July, 
1905). 


WELLS, J. WALTER.—“ Preliminary Report on the Industrial Value of the Clays 
and Shales of Manitoba” (illustrated). Mines Branch Dept. of the 
Interior; Ottawa, 1905; 41 pp. and 9 plates. (Issued July, 1905). (30) 


Waiter, Davin (and GEORGE O. SMITH). “The Geology of the Perry Basin in 
South Eastern Maine.” United States Geological Survey, Prof. Paper, 
No. 35, 711 pp., 6 plates, 1905; Washington, D.C. 


WHITE, JAMES.—" Altitudes in the Dominion of Canada.” Geological Survey of 
Canada; Ottawa. 


WHITEAVES, J. F.—** Paleontology and Zoology.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. of 
Canada for 1904, pp. 355-362. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa, 
Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


WHITEAVES, J. F.—* Notes on the Apical End of the Siphuncle in some Can- 

adian Endocearatidæ, with description of two supposed new species 
of Nanno.” Amer. Geol., Vol. 35, No. 1, January, 1905, pp. 23-30, 
pls. II and III, 1905; Minneapolis. 


WHITEAVES, J. F.—Correspondence. “On the Apical End of the Siphuncle in 
some Canadian Endocearatidæ( etc.” (a correction). Amer. Geol., Vol. 
NNXV, No. 4 p: 324, May, 1905; Minneapolis, U.S.A. 


NVILLIMOTT, €. W.—* Minerals of the Ottawa Valley.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. 
Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 229-232. Printed by order of Parlia- 
ment; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). 


WILSON, ALFRED W. G.—‘“‘A Forty Mile Section of Pleistocene Deposits North 
of Lake Ontario.” Transactions Can. Inst., Toronto. Read March 7th, 
1904 (published 1905) ; Vol. 8. Pt. 1, No. 16, pr, 11-21, (illustrated), 
Toronto. (31) 


WILSON, ALFRED W. G.—‘‘ Physiography of the Archaen Areas of Canada.” 
Proceedings 8th International Geographic Congress, held in the United 
States, pp. 116-135, 3 plates, 2 maps; 1904. 


Wuitson, W. J.—‘“ The Little Current and Drowning Rivers, branches of the 
Albany, east of Lake Nipigon.” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. for 1904, 
pp. 164-1738. Printed by order of Parliament; Ottawa. (Issued August, 
1905). 


Woopman, J. E.—*‘ Distributions of Bedded leads in relation to Mining Policy.” 
Proc. and Trans. Nova Scotia Institute Se, Vol. XI, pt. 2, pp. 163- 
178, March, 1905; Halifax, N.S. 


Woopman, J. E.—"* Earthquake of March 21st, 1904, in Nova Scotia.” Proc. 
and Trans. Nova Scotian Institute Se., Vol. 11, pp. 227, March, 1905; 
Halifax, N.S. 


318 ROYALSOCIETY OF CANADA 


WoopMANn, S. D.—‘‘ Geology of the Moose River Gold District, Halifax County, 
Nova Scotia.” Proc. and-Trans. N. S: Insti Se, Vol Xd, Parte 
Session 1902-1903, pp. 18-28; Halifax, Nova Scotia. (Illustrated). (32) 


Youne, G. A.—"* On (Geological) Surveys between Rabbit and Temagami Lake.” 
Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. Dept. of Canada for 1904, pp. 195-198. Printed 
by order of Parliament ; Ottawa, Canada. (Issued August, 1905). (33) 


Youne, G. A.—Numerous Reviews of Canadian Geological Papers, Geologisches 
Centralblatt, 1905; Leipzig, Germany. 


Abstracts of Writings on Canadian Geology for 1905. 


As requested by Section IV, at the last meeting of the Royal 
Society of Canada, it was agreed and subsequently endorsed by the 
whole Society, that abstracts or reviews of papers issued in 1905 and 
subsequent years be added to the bibliographical reference. With a view 
of carrying out the object of the Society, and at the same time utilising 
excellent material at hand, the writer has excerpted from the Geolo- 
gisches Centralblatt, Berlin, Germany, edited by Dr. K. Keilhack, the 


abstracts and digests made by Dr. G. A. Young, of the Geological 


Survey of Canada and one review by Dr. R. Ruedemann on 


“Clewcrmus.” The numbers affixed to the abstracts correspond with 


numbers placed at the end of the references in Bibliography. 


(1) Apams, F. D.—The report is accompanied by a geological map and a brief 


description of the region. The wells are situated in flat-lying palæozoic. 


strata, largely calciferous. The underground waters follow irregular 
channels resulting from the solvent action of the waters acting along 
joints, bedding planes and cracks in the limestone beds. 


(2) Battery, L. W.—A review of the known occurrences, within the province, of 
rocks of voleanie origin. The great periods of volcanic activity were 
the Huronian, Silurian, Lower Carboniferous and Trias. The “ typical 
volcanic rocks of the Pre-Cambrian (Huronian) system are diorites 
and diabase; those of the Silurian, felsitic and porphyritie rhyolites; 
those of the Lower Carboniferous, dolerite, and those of the Trias, 
basalt.” 


(3) BARLOW, ALFRED HRNEST.—‘ Report on the Origin, Geological Relations and 


Composition of the Nickel and Copper Deposits of the Sudbury Mining 
District, Ontario, Canada.” ° Illustrated, 5 maps, pp. 232, part H, 
Annual Report, Vol XIV, Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, 1905, 
(Issued end of December, 1904). 


The district is an uneven, rocky plain underlain by rocks mostly 
of Huronian age. The relative ages of all of the rock bodies are not 


eo 


[ami] 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 319 


known, but they are tentatively grouped in four divisions which, begin- 
ning with the lowest, are, Upper Huronian, Laurentian, Upper Huron- 
jan (?), and post-Huronian. 

At the base of the lower division of the Upper Huronian occurs 
a series of diorite, porphyrite, hornblende and chlorite schists. The 
less altered, more massive varieties appear to have been gabbros and 
may often be traced passing into the perfectly schistose types. The 
rocks of this series are known as the “greenstone schists,” and are 
believed to have been basic eruptives which were greatly faulted, folded 
and metamorphosed before the post-Huronian intrusions took place. 
Involved in the greenstone schists are certain masses which present 
some of the characteristics of effusive bodies. 

Large areas of greywake or feldspathic sandstone and quartzite with 
local developments of conglomerate are present and are sometimes 
intimately associated with the greenstone schists. The greywackes have 
been formed mainly of volcanie ashes, they gradually pass upwards 
into the quartzites which are undoubtedly of sedimentary origin. A 
rock, that in the field and under the microscope closely resembles a 
granite, occurs over considerable areas. The field relations show that 
this “regenerated granite” is a highly metamorphosed greywacke or 
feldspathic sandstone. The relative position of the conglomerate is 
not definitely known, but it is not improbable that the succession in 
the lower division of the Upper Huronian may be as follows: First, the 
greenstone schists overlain by the regenerated granite and above the 
latter quartzite, then an unconformity, and secondly, the conglomerates 
followed by beds of greywacke passing up into quartzite. 

With the lower division of the Upper Huronian are classed certain 
masses of gabbro or norite or their altered forms (diorite), which are 
intrusive into all of the foregoing rocks. These gabbros present certain 
characteristic features which distinguished them from the post-Huronian 
intrusives. 

The preceding Huronian rocks, with the possible exception of the 
last mentioned gabbro type, are intruded by masses of foliated and banded 
granitic and dioritic rocks. These are classed as Laurentian. 

Younger than all of the foregoing divisions is a formation, com- 
posed of voleanic breccias and agglomerates overlain by bituminous 
shales that gradually pass upwards into comparatively coarse greywacke 
or feldspathic sandstone. These rocks, probably of Upper Huronian 
age, appear to form a synclinal trough underlain by younger norites. 

The post-Huronian eruptives include granites, the nickel-bearing 
eruptive and dykes of olivine diabase, the latter the youngest of all. 
The granites are mineralogically much alike and occur in batholites. 
These masses have been formed by intrusions closely following on@ 
another and closely followed by the intrusion of norite containing the 
nickel ore. As a result, in some places the granite mass cooled suffi- 
ciently to allow the norite to cool against it while, in other places, 
the acid magma was still so fluid that the contact between it and the 
norite is marked by a rock of intermediate characters. 

The nickel-bearing eruptive varies from a norite at its borders to 
a handed biotite granite towards the centre of the mass. The char- 


320 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


acter of the differentiation is shown by a series of chemical analyses. 
In the norite, hypersthene and enstatite usually predominate largely 
over the diallage and the rock contains notable quantities of quartzite 
sometimes in granophyric intergrowths with the basic plagioclase feld- 
spar. Pyrrhotite, chalcopyrite and pyrite are always present in the 
rock as original constituents and sometimes, in perfectly fresh specimens, 
are so abundant that the rock might be classed as a pyrrhotite norite. 

The norite forms one large and several smaller masses, the latter 
probably connected with the main mass at no very considerable depth. 
The ore occurs at the margin of the norite intrusion in large, irre- 
gular, oval-shaped masses. It consists mainly of pyrrhotite with smaller 
amounts of chalcopyrite, etc. The nickel is present in the mineral 
pentlandite which is distributed mainly through the pyrrhotite. All 
the minerals found in the ores are described and their chemical com- 
position discussed. The ores of igneous origin, the result of differen- 
tiation, though secondary action has played a considerable role in 
some instances, 

The report includes a review of the previous examinations and 
descriptions of the district and a history of mining development in the 
region; discusses the origin and genesis of nickel ores throughout the 
world; the metallurgical processes and the mode of refining the nickel 
are described and the uses of nickel detailed. 


(4) BELL, J. M.—The rocks of the district are mapped as Keewatin with the asso- 


ciated iron formation separately coloured, Lower Huronian, post- 
Huronian granites, etc., and Keweenawan eruptives. The Keewatin 
schists form several extensive areas within which lie long, broken bands 
of the iron formation. The Lower Huronian and Keweenawan erup- 
tives form a number of, relatively, much smaller areas lying almost 
entirely, within or on the borders of the Keewatin areas. The post- 
Huronian granites and syenites occupy by far the greater part of the 
district. The Keewatin schists are unconformably overlain by the 
Lower Huronian, the post-Huronian granites, etc., are younger than 
and have intrusive contacts with both of the preceding formations while 
the basic Keweenawan eruptives are the youngest rocks of the district. 
The Keewatin and Lower Huronian are folded and in one area the 
Keewatin occurs in a closely folded synclinorium. 

The Keewatin is a complex of schistose rocks originally gabbro, 
quartzite porphyry, felsite, tuff, etc., with isolated occurrences of phyl- 
lite and arkose. These rocks are, in places, further altered to sericite 
and chlorite schists, and sometimes to biotite and amphibole schists. 
The iron formation of the Keewatin consists of cherts, jaspers and iron 
ores interbanded with and grading into one another, quartzites and 
phyllites also occur within this division. The Lower Huronian con- 
sists chiefly of a closely folded and mashed conglomerate. The post- 
Huronian acid intrusions include granite and syenite with quartzite 
porphyry facies. Certain areas of banded gneisses within the granites 
are thought to be much metamorphosed Keewatin quartzite porphyry. 
The Keeweenawan eruptives consist of diabase and gabbro in the form 
of dykes, sheets amd bosses. 


ae es - 


[amr] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 321 


(5) BucxaAN, J. S.—“* The purpose of the paper is to give an illustration of what 
may be seen and observed on even so commonplace an occasion as a 
railway journey from one place to another.” 


(6) CATHERINIET, JULES.—‘‘ Copper Mountain, British Columbia.” Eng. and 
Mining Journal, Vol. 69, pp. 125-127, 5 figs.; 1905. 

Copper Mountain is chiefly a mass of gabbro. The upper por- 
tion contains veinlets and veins of bornite and also a pegmatite. The 
appearance of the veins of bornite and pegmatite suggest a common 
origin for both. In other places the bornite, accompanied by some 
chalcopyrite, occurs in irregular masses scattered through a coarse peg- 
matite vein. The bornite is an original constituent of the dykes while 
the chalcopyrite is secondary to the bornite. The pegmatite also carried 
native gold and sperrylite. 


(7) CHALMERS, ROBERT.—A summary description of the season’s work and con- 
taining a number of notes on the glacial geology of the region. 


(8) CorKint, E. G.—The article contains abstracts of the chief theories of the 
origin’of oil and gas. Measured sections are given of the palæozoic 
strata, from the Cambrian to Devonian, of the oil fields of Western 
Ontario together with a partial record of boring operations. 


(9) DizLoN-Miczs, S.—‘ Temiskaming.” Eng.and Mining Journal, Vol. 79, pp. 
996-997, 1 map, 2 figs., 1905. 

Ores of cobalt, nickel and silver, with native silver, occur in 
lower Huronian rocks varying from slates to conglomerates. These 
rocks are often sheared parallel to two planes and have been intruded 
by diabase and gabbro, The ore deposits have formed along some of 
the shearing planes and are possibly due to fumarole action accom- 
panying the gabbro intrusion. 


(10) Downine, D. B.—‘‘ The Stratigraphy of the Cascade Coal Basin.’ ’ Can. 
Min. Rev., Vol. 24, pp. 105-111, 6 figs.; 1905. 
The coal-bearing strata of the basin belong to the lower Creta- 
ceous and owe their exposure to the uplift of the Rocky Mountains. 
The greater part of the basin is bounded by a fault which follows, 
in a general manner, the crest of the anticline, but northward, the 
break gradually passes into a fold. 


(11) Dresser, J. A.—The article is a description of a six mile section across 
the Sutton Mountain anticline. The rocks of the section at one time 
classed with the Quebec Group were later, with the exception of a 
band of Trenton limestones, mapped as pre-Cambrian. The section in- 
includes black limestones, black mica schists, gray mica schists micaeous 
dolomite and quartzite now shown to be all of sedimentary origin, to 
have been deposited and to pass into one another in the order named. 
Ait one locality the micaceous dolomite holds Lower Silurian fossils. 
At one end of the section are exposures of a basic volcanic, at the 
other end of serpentine. These igneous rocks are older than the kedi- 
mentary series. The sediments, again placed in the Quebec group, 


Sec. IV., 1906. 26 


322 ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


occupy a trough between ridges of two earlier igneous rocks and the 
latter, alone of the rocks of the district, may possibly be of pre- 
Cambrian Age. 


(12) .ELLS, R. W.—The article outlines the results of various geological investiga- 
tions at a number of localities within the province. 


(13) Evans, H. F.—‘‘A reconnaissance into Highland Valley, British Columbia.” 
Mining World, Vol. 22, pp. 526-527, and p. 546; 1905. 
The area known as the interior plateau of British Columbia was, 
during early Tertiary, denuded to base level, has since passed through 
a succession of elevations and depressions, has been at times an area 
of deposition and a theatre of voleanic eruptions. 


(18a) Evans, H. F.—‘‘ In the Eocene Tertiary the interior plateau was reduced 
by prolonged denudation to the conditions of an approximately uniform 
plane. Since then, the area has been deformed by earth movements, 
strata have been deposited and volcanic flows have taken place. 


(14) Evans, H. F.—The two articles contain a summary description of the occur- 
rence of molybdenum in a system of quartz veins cutting a granite. 


(15) GizriN, B. J.—The article contains a number of hitherto unpublished, 
sections and analyses of coals of the province. 


(16) HorcuxKiss, W. O.—The geological formation of the district, in ascending 
order, are, Keewatin, Laurentian, Lower Huronian, Middle Huronian, 
large masses of diabase probably of Keweenawan age, and Niagara 
limestone. The Keewatin greenstone schists are intruded by the Lau- 
rentian granite and both are overlain by the Lower Huronian which 
is composed of conglomerates and shales, usually lying in a nearly 
horizontal position. The ores occur in narrow, vertical fissures in the 
Lower Huronian near the contact with the Keewatin and usually also 
near the diabase. The principal gangue mineral is calcite with acces- 
sory quartite. The most valuable mineral is native silver, the most 
abundant, smaltite chloanthite while of the many accessory minerals. 
those mined for values are chiefly niccolite cobalite. The Keewatin 
schists are well mineralized with arsenical iron and copper pyrite. 
The deposits are possibly due to meteoric waters which, warmed by 
the presence of the slowly cooling masses of diabase, derived the ores, 
to a large extent, form the Keewatin scists. The cobalt ores and 
calcite were first deposited and, after a second period of fracturing, 
the silver was deposited, the cobalt ores acting as a precipitating agent 
for the silver. 


(17) Low, A. P.—A summary of the results of the expedition, including notes 
on the geology of the regions visited. 


(18) McINNEs, WM.—A summary description of the season’s work. The region 
visited is one of low relief and owes its most striking features to 
deposits of glacial origin. The underlying rocks are all Archean, mainly 
biotite gneisses with areas of Keewatin schists. 


[amr] BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 323 


(19) MCMILLAN, JAMES.—“* The area is a plain, in all probability once the bed of 
a glacial dammed lake.” Rock exposures are uncommon. ‘The greater 
part of the area has been mapped as Huronian, the most common rocks 
being variously altered basic eruptives! The regions also includes an 
area of Laurentian and gneisses. 


(20) Merritt, F. J. H.—A brief notice of the occurrence of narrow calcite 
veins cutting Grenville limestone and carrying galene. 


(21) Mirter, Witter G.—‘ Nepheline syenite in Western Ontario.” Am. Geol. 
Vol. 32, pp. 182-185; 1905. 

This article records a probable new occurrence of nepheline syenite 
in Ontario. The locality is supposed to be near Sturgeon lake, about 
one hundred and fifty miles northwest of Port Arthur. Boulders have 
been found and similar rock is supposed to be in a situ near at hand. 
Hastings County, Kippewa lake, and the Rainy River district have 
hitherto been the only known localities of the occurrence of this rock. 

_ The amphibole of the rock has an extinction, C: C, of 20°, which 
distinguishes it from arfvedsonite. 


(22) Minter, W. G.—The report is accompanied by a map showing the areal 
geology of the district surrounding Cobalt. The oldest rocks are Kee- 
watin greenstones and schists, these have been intruded by a granite 
which is classed as Laurentian. Both the Keewatin and Laurentian 
are unconformably overlain by the Lower Huronian and the latter is 
separated by an unconformity from the Middle Huronian. The Lower 
Huronian rocks are conglomerates, greywacke-slates and quartzites. The 
middle Huronian consists of conglomerates and quartzites. Large areas 
of diabase are present in the district which are of post-Middle Huronian 
age and probably occur both as widespread sills and as boss-like bodies. 

. Toxards the north of the district the above rocks are overlain by beds 
of Silurian limestone. 

The veins of ore are mainly confined to an area 5-6 miles long 
by 2-3 miles broad. The veins are very narrow and with but few 
exceptions are confined to the Lower Huronian, but have also been 
found cutting the Keewatin and the post-Middle Huronian diabase. 
The veins usually consist chiefly of smaltite, niccolite, calcite and native 
silver deposited in the order named. These minerals are accompanied 
by native bismuth argentite chloathite, dyscrasite, etc. The mineral 
group as a whole is characterized by the subordinate part which sulphur 
plays in comparison with arsenic. The report contains descriptions 
amd in a; number of cases analyses of the minerals. The fissures are 
thought to have been formed as a result of the contraction following 
the cooling of the diabase and the vein material to have been deposited 
by heated waters which marked the last phase of the volcanic activity 
accompanying the intrusion of the diabase. 


(23) Miter, W. G.—The iron formation consists of jaspilyte and occurs as a 
narrow band within Keewatin schists, the latter are cut by Laurentian 
granite amd syenite. A few small outerops of Lower Huronian con- 
glomerates are present. 


324 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


(24) NoLAN, A. W. and Dixon, J. D.—Geology of St. Helen’s Island, Can. Rec. 


Sci., Vol. 9, p. 53-66, 1903. 

This paper is a discussion of some of the results of a detailed 
geological Survey of St. Helen’s Island, Montreal, which was made 
a part of the Honour Course in Geology at McGill University in 
1901-1902. It principally describes the late Devonian breccia of the 
island which is a result of the intrusion of the ancient voleano now 
represented by the stock of Mount Royal. The breccia has a dolomitic 
matrix, probably due to composition of a nepheline-bearing ash, and 
contains fragments of earlier rocks. While it rests on Utica (Cambro- 
Silurian) shale, some of the included rocks are Oriskany (lower Devon- 
ian) in age. This is interpreted to show that the greater part of the 
Devonian formation had been removed by denudation at the time of 
the irruption of Mount Royal; a conclusion that is corroborated by 
the general absence of this formation from western Quebec. 


(25) O’SULLIVAN, OWEN.—A summary description of the season’s work. Only 


two rock exposures were found on the west coast of James Bay, they 
were of fossiliferous Devonian limestone. Evidence is given to show 
that the coast is slowly rising. 


(26) PooLr, H. S.—The basal rocks of the Magdalen islands are of Carbonifer- 


ous limestone age, it is believed that, as shown by soundings, they oncg 
extended in a fold parallel to the present coast of Cape Breton and 
near to Prince Edward Island. A second anticline, the Wallace anti- 
cline, commences in carboniferous strata in Nova Scotia and is believed, 
as shown by soundings, to extend further to the east, underneath the 
water and parallel with the above submerged ridge. “Within the 
shelter of these ridges possibly were the condition alone favourable for 
the accumulation of coal in seams of workable thickness. Prince Ed- 
ward Island and the major part of the Gulf (of St. Lawrence) lie 
outside the fold.” 


(27) SHERZER, W. H.—The report is a summary of the most important observa- 


tions made during the season of 1904, by the Smithsonian expedition, 
upon five glaciers lying within fifty miles of one another. It contains 
descriptions of the structures, rates of movements and various phenomena 
connected with these glaciers. A parasitic glacier, on a tributary of 
the Victoria glacier, moves across the tributary and delivers its ground 
moraine to the medial moraine of the main stream. The Wenkchemma 
glacier is of the piedmont type and is composed of eight to ten ice 
streams. Observations show that the ice granules of the glaciers tend 
toi lie with their principal optic axes vertical. Three types of dust 
bands are described. The first type is the original dust bands of 
Forbes and their formation is explained. The second type is named 
dust zones and is caused by the relatively larger proportion of foreign 
material in one of two outcropping ice strata. The third type is named 
dirt strips, it is entirely superficial and is due to the collection of dirt 
in the vesicular ice separating laminæ on a surface subject to melting. 
A double series of block moraines, comparatively free from finer material, 
occurs in connection with four of the five glaciers examined, its absence 
from the fifth is probably due to the form of the surrounding moun- 


ca 


[AMI] 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF CANADIAN GEOLOGY 325 


tains. It is argued that, since normal conditions could mot form this 
type of moraine, therefore they must have been caused by a double 
seismic disturbance of the entire region. The time of the occurrence 
of the probable earthquake is assigned to the thirteenth century. 


(28) SPRINGER, FRANK.—* Cleiocrinus.” Harvard Coll., Mus. Comp. Zool. Mem., 


Vol. 25, No. 2, pp. 93-114, 1 pl., 1905. 


The genus Cleiocrinus has been a puzzle since it was established 
by Billings to receive certain very peculiar Crinoids from the Trenton 
group of Canada. Its principal peculiarity consists in the composition 
of the lowest visible ring of ten plates. Wachsmuth and Springer have 
twice discussed the genus in the Revision of the Palæocrinoidea and, from 
its resemblance to Ichthyocrinus, asumed the presence of five concealed 
basals and three infrabasals. 

An investigation of the specimens in the Museum of the Survey 
at Ottawa has, after preparation of the base of one of Billings’s types, 
disclosed a most extraordinary and anomalous structure. 

Instead of two concealed rings, there is only one, consisting of 
five large, thick quadrangular plates, resting on the column and sloping 
from within upward to a thin upper face. These are radially situate 
and followed by the first and second primibrachs, not alternating with 
them, but in direct succession. The ten plates of the lowest ring 
observed before do not enter into the interior of the calyx wall proper, 
but are suspended on the outside of it, to which they are firmly grown. 
The author holds now that the so-called interradials of the outer ring 
are the basals,”’ which by some strange freak of nature have mor- 
phologically — not accidently — become displaced from their proper posi- 
tion in the calyx wall, being pushed in between the radials, and both 
having slipped down over the infrabasals. Or “or,” it is added, ‘ sup- 
posing a reverse process to have taken place, we may consider, that 
the disturbance came from below, the base being thrust upward into 
the calyx.” 

In regard to the systematic relations of Cleiocrinus it is staited 
that the general habitus of the genus is that of Ichthyocrinus, and that 
its articulate structure and flexible calyx point strongly toward the 
Flexibilia, while, on the other hand, the presence of pinnules and of 
five infrabasals instead of three, differentiate it absolutely from the 
known Flexibilia Impinnata to which all paleozoic forms of the group 
hitherto known belong. It is, therefore, suggested that Cleiocrinus like 
Rateocrinus, it is an intermediate group between the Flexibilia and 
Camerata, closely approximating the Flexibilia. Definitions of the 
genus and its two species close the interesting account. 


(28) SMITH, W. N.—The formations present include the Lower Huronian, 


Upper Huronian (Animikie), and Keweenawan. West of the district 
the Lower Huronian unconformably overlies the Keewatin schists. The 
Lower Huronian is composed largely of schistose greywacke intruded 
by masses of greenstone, both of these, in turn, are intruded by bodies 
of granite. This granite is older than the Animikie which, as com- 
pared with the Lower Huronian is almost flat-lying and rests uncon- 
formably on the latter formation. The Animikie consists of slate 


326 


ROYAL SOCIETY OF CANADA 


with two iron horizons. The Upper iron horizon is largely a cherty 
iron carbonate, the lower band is distinguished by the presence of 
granules. The Keeweenawan lies unconformably on both the Animikie 
and the Lower Huronian. The formation consists of conglomerates, 
sandstones and marls. The Animikie and Keweenawan are intruded 
by sills of diabase (R. Ruedemann). 


(29) WELLS, J. WALTER.—The occurrences of limestones within the province 


and a large number of analyses of these rocks are given. 


(30) WELLS, J. WALTER.—!The report contains an account of the distribution 


and character of the clays and shales and a number of chemical analyses 
of them. 


(31) Witson, A. W. G.—The section occurs along the north shore of the lake, 


the last eight miles are mapped and described in detail. Wherever 
the deposits are seen resting on bed-rock, the lowest portion consists 
of a clay till carrying boulders and pebbles. In places the lower till 
is overlain by stratified sands and these, in turn are sometimes followed 
by a sheet of till, in part stratified. The upper sheet sometimes rests 
unconformably on the lower. In the portion of the section described 
in detail, the lower sheet of till, except at one end of the section, is 
succeeded by the stratified sands, the whole capped by the upper till 
sheet. Within the sands, between the upper and lower till sheets, 
occurs a non-continuous till sheet, dividing the deposits into two sets, 
belonging to two interglacial epochs. After the deposition of the sands 
of the second interglacial epoch, there followed a period of unequal 
erosion during which the continuity of the middle till sheet was destroyed 
and, in places, the erosion was) deep enough to allow the last till sheet 
to be deposited immediately on the lowest. The greatest measured 
thickness of the deposit is about 130 feet. 


(32) WooDMAN, J. E.—The author contrasts the bedded gold-bearing quartz 


veins of the eastern portion of the gold-bearing series of Nova Scotia 
with the saddles of Bendigo. In the former case the veins occur in 
zones which are situated within domes, usually those having a high 
angle of pitch, and these domes are irregularly distributed along a 
series of east and west anticlines. The domes occur in discontinuous 
slate horizons lying in a quartzite formation, The zones of veins are 
confined to the slate measures and, therefore, have a limited lateral 
extent, the veins are continuous in certain cases to considerable depths 
depending on the amount of erosion the dome has suffered. 


(33) Youne, G. A—A summary report on the season’s work. The district 


contains large areas of Keewatin schists penetrated by granite, tha 
latter cut by a body of syenite. The schists and granite are overlain 
by a conglomerate and slates of Huronian age and these are capped 
by sills of diabase. 


F. 
‘ 
i 


HO! Libra - Serials 


il (i 


WH | i 


ji 


Er01 


. , : . cs 
x 
' > un em 
« x N 2 ° 
; 4 . , 
, + 
, . \ 
2 > à _ 
\ + > 2 ‘ 
Me “ 
. “ “